^ rJ GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT Epictetus, Diss. i. 17, 12. maius quiddam atqiie divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis litterarum figuris comprehendi queat. Hermann, Opuscc. iii. 253. TA PHMATA A Em AeAaAHKA YMIN HNEYMA EITIN KAI ZOH EITIN GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT BEING (Brimtn'0 UJilkc's (tlauis NoDt ^C0taincntt TRANSLATED REVISED AND ENLARGED BY JOSEPH HENRY THAYER, D.D. BCSSET PROFESSOR OP NEW TESTAMENT CRITICISM ANT) INTEBPRETATIOX IS THE DIVINITY SCHOOL OF HAETAKD UN'ITEBSITT NEW YORK HARPER & BROTHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE 1887 Copyright, 1SS6, By Harper and Brothers, New York. All rights reserved. n 1 1 J PREFACE. TOWARDS the close of the year 1862, the " Arnoldische Buchhandlung " in Leij^zig published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared, upon the basis of the " Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica " of C. G. Wilke (second edition, 2 vols. 1851), hj Professor C. L. Wilibald Grimm of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen's Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of Passow's Dictionary edited by Host and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a word's significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg ; and since its completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the New Testament extant. An arrangement was early made wdth Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheea Sacra for October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun ; but it was protracted by engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity — as it seemed — of preparing the authorized translation of Lunemann's edition of Winer's New Testament Grammar, which was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann. Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm's work was called for. To the typographical accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared in its completed form in 1879. "Admirable", "unequalled", "invaluable", are some of the epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of the book by competent critics in Germany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor Schiirer's review of it in the Theologische Literaturzeitung for January 5, 1878 : " The use of Professor Grimm's book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work 2061164 VI PREFACE. of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament, and consequently for the study of Theology in general." Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such changes in his work as might in my judgment the better adapt it to the needs of English- speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all (juarters, in a strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing a new book prepared on my predecessor's as a basis, and — alike in justice to him and for the satisfaction of students — to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm's work. (See [ ] in the list of "Explanations and Abbreviations " given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw- backs the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect- ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation. Some of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here be repeated in substance as follows : to verify all references (biblical, classical, and — so far as practicable — modern) ; to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words ; to give the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of interest to the general student ; to render complete the enumeration of (representative) verbal forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others) ; to append to every verb a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament ; to supply the New Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk ; to note more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions ; to introduce brief discussions of New Testament synonyms ; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the " Authorized Version " but also of the Revised New Testament ; to multiply cross references ; references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical (Kiihner, Kriiger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.) ; also to the best English and American Commentaries (Lightfoot, EUicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The Speaker's Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare, etc.) ; and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopaedias (Smith, Alexander's Kitto, McCUntoek and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul. Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place : One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may PREFACE. vn entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant printed texts to the exclusion of its riyals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of the text of the ' Eeceptus ', together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf. In his second edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm's second edition undergone thorough revision (see, for example, " Griesbach " in the list of " Explanations and Abbrevia- tions '■), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted. Again : the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions holding in classic usage (as they are laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of comparison by which the direction and degree of a word's change in meaning can be measured. When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and instructive. On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand, although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Pick, or even more frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon. The nature and use of the 2^ew Testament writings require that the lexicographer shoiild not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. A student often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it bears in a given context or discussion : — or, to state the same truth from another point of view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the objections to opposing interpretations. Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter into his labors. Any one who consults such articles as alwv, auii'ios, /Jao-tXeia to? 6eov etc., SiWatos and its cognates, 86^a, iX-iris, i^rj, Oavaro^, Oeo's, Kocr/xos, Kx'pios, —icrns, Trvev/xa, crdp$, o-0(^ia, trw^w and its cognates, vlo's tou avOpi^rrov, vJos tov dcov, Xpia-ro^, and the like, will find, it is believed, all the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been Ym PREFACE. added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded as supplementing or correcting those of Professor Grimm. Convenience often prescribes that the archaeological or historical facts requisite to the understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for fuUer information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor ; yet with the constant exercise of self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original. In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist wiU often find it serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten. Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen — now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi- nal ; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same topic ; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access ; now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether. It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The expert can easily train his eye to run over them ; and yet even for him they may have their use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but also as continual^ recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest. Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorsldp, or biblical theology — which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found elsewhere. Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen, by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must be made to George B. Je%vett, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eatox now of Middlebury College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-verified all the biblical and classical PllEFACE. IX references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering valuable aid in correcting many of the proofs ; the latter has gathered the passages omitted from words marked with a tiual asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation, and in many other jjarticulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the lamented Dr. Abbot been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, in accordance with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf's Editio Octava Critica Major. To Dr. Caspar Eene Gregory of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena just named in advance of their publication ; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press, Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott's Lexicon. No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every remaining blemish — iva 6 Xoyoj Tov Kvptov TpixXI '^'^' So^a^iyrai. J. H. THAYEE. Cambeidge, Massachusetts. LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS QUOTED OR REFEE.EED TO IN THE LEXICON. N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been mode of the lists in the Lexicons of LiddeU and Scott and of Sophocles, also of Freund'S Triennivim Philologicum (1874) vols. i. and ii., of Smith's Dictionary of Greek and Koman Biography, of Smith and Wace's Dictionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann's Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of reference. An asterisk (*) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk (t) death. B.C Achilles Tatius Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilate, of Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Barna- bas, etc., at the earliest from . . . Aelias Aeschixes 345 Aeschtlus *525, t456 Aesop 1 570 Aetics Agatharchides 111.' Alcaeus Mytilexaeds 610 Alciphrox Alcman 610 Alexaxder Aphrodisiensis . . . Alexis 350 Ajiibrose, Bp. of Milan Ammiaxus Marcellixcs .... Ammoxius, the grammarian .... AXACREOX - 530 AXAXAXDKIDES 350 AXAXIMAXDER 580 AXDOCIDES 405 AXTIPIIAXES 3S0 AxTiPHOX 412 AxTOxixrs, M. Aueelius .... Apollodorcs of Athens 140 Apolloxius DrscoLns Apolloxics Rhodius 200 Appiax AppuLEins Aqcila (translator of the O. T.) . . Aratus 270 Archilochus 700 Archi.medes, the mathematician . . 250 Archttas c. 400 A.D. 500? 2d cent, on c. 180 c. 500 200 .' 200 374 t c. 400 .390 I ISO 140 150 160 ■ 2i cent- (nnder Hadriao.) • But the current Fables are not his: on the History of Greek Fable, see Rutherford, Babrius, Introd. ch. ii. = Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genuine. B.C. Aretaeus Aristaexetus Aristeas 1 270 Aristides, p. Aelius Aristophaxes *444, t3S0 Aristopiiaxes, the grammarian . . . 200 Aristotle *384, t322 Akriax (pupil and friend of Epictetus) Artemidorus Daldiaxcs (oneiro- critica) Athaxasius Athexael'S, the grammarian . . . Atiiexagoras of Athens Augustixe, Bp. of Hippo Ausoxius, Decimvs Magxds . . . Babrius (see Rutherford, Babrins, Intr. ch. i.) (some say 50?) Barxabas, Epistle written .... Banich, Apocrvplial Book of ... , Basilica, the - Basil the Great, Bp. of Cajsarea Basil of Seleueia Bel and the Draijon 2d cent. ? Bion 200 Caesar, Gaius Julius . . tMarch 15, 44 Callimachus 260 Canons and Constitutions, Apostolic . . Capitolixus. Julius (one of the "Hist. August, scriptores sex ") .... Cebes 399 Cedrexus A.D. 80? 450? 160 *c. 100 160 t373 228 177 ? t430 te. 390 c. 225 c. 100 ? C. 75 ? C.900 t379 450 c. 310 1050 * But his letter is spurious; see Hody, De Bibl. text. orig. 1. i.; A. Kurz, Arist. ep. etc. (Bern 1872). - The Law-book of the Bvz.antine Empire, founded upon the work of -Justinian and consisting of si.xty books. It was begun under the emperor Basil of Macedonia (t8S6), completed under his son Jjeo. and revised in f4o under Constantine Porphyrogenitus ; (ed. Heimbach, 6 vols. 18.33-70). Ancient Authors. XII Ancient Authors. B.C. Celsus, a. Coknelius, the medical writer Chaues 320 Chariton CiiKvsippus of Tyana (in Athenaeus) CuRYSosTOM, Dio, the orator, see Mo Chrys. CuRYsosTO.M, John, 13p. of Constan- tiuojilo Cicero . ' tDec. 7, 43 Clemess Albxajjdkinus Clemens Romanos, Epistle writteu . Cleomedes CounMELLA CONSTANTINUS POKPHTROGENITUS, emperor from Constitutiojies aposfolicae Cbatincs t423 Critias 411 Ctesias 401 CUKTIDS Cyprian Cyril of Alexandria Cyril of Jerusalem Democritus 430 Demcsthenes *385, 1322 Uexippus, the historian DiDYMDS of Alexandria Uio Cassius DiO CuRYSOSTOM Diocles 470 DiODORCS Siculus 40 Diogenes Laertius Diognetus, Epistle to DioxYsius Pseudo-Areopagita . . DioxYSius of Halicarnassus .... 30 DiONYSins Periegetes Dioscorides Diphilus 300 Ecclesiasticus (Wisdom of Jesns the Son of Sirach; Grk. trans.) . . . e. 132? Ennics tl69 Enoch, Book of 2d cent, on Ephrem Stros Epicharmus 480 Epictetus Epicurus *342, t270 Epimenides 600 Epiphanius, Bp. of Salamis .... Eratosthenes t c. 196 Esdras, First Book of [YxUgate Third) 1st cent. ? Esdras, Second Book o/"( Vulgate Fourth) Esther, Additions to 2d cent. ? Eti/mologicum Magnum EUEOLUS 350 Euclid 300 EupOLis 429 Euripides •480^t406 EusEBius, Bp. of Ccesareai .... EusTATHius of Constantinople, gram- marian 20 450? 1 t407 200 93-97 100? 50 911-959 3d and 4tb coot. 50 t257 t444 t3S6 0.270 c. 395 200 100 c. 200 2d or 3d cent- 500? 300? 100? c. 375 100 t403 1st cent ? 1000? t c. .340 1160 ' Called PampUili (as friend of the martyr Pampliilus). B.C. A.D. EuTHYMius ZiGABENDS Or Zigadenus (Zygadenus) 1100 Florus, Julius c. 125 Galen «isi, tc. I« Gellius, Aulus (author of Noctes Atticae) 150 Genesius 950 Geoponica (20 hks. on agriculture com- piled by Cassianus Bassus) .... c. 925 Germanus of Constantinople, the younger c. 1230 Goroias of Leontini 430 Gregory of Nazianzus t390 Gregory- of Nyssa t395 Harpocration (lexicon to the Ten Attic Orators) 350 ? Hecataeus 510 Hegesippus (quoted in Eusebius) . . c. 175 Heliodorus, Bp. of Tricea in Thessaly 390 ? Heraclides Ponticus (but the AUeg. Homer, are spurious) 390 IIeraclitus 500 Hermas 140? Hermippus 432 IIermogenes 170 Hero Alexandrinus 250 Herodian, the grammarian .... 160 Herodian, the historian t240 Herodotus •484, t408 Hesiod 850? Hesychius of Alexandria, the lexicog- r.apher 600? Hierocles 450 HiERONYMUs, see Jerome. Hi.merius 360 Hippocrates 430 Hippolttus 225 HippoNAX 540 Hirtius (the continnator of Caesar's Commentaries) t43 Homer 900? Horapollo, grammarian 400 ? Horace t8 Hyperides t322 Ignatius c. 110 Irenaeus, Bp. of Lyons 178 Isaeus 370 IsiDORUs Hispalensis, Bp. of Seville t636 IsocRATES *436, t338 Jambliciius 300 Jeremiah, Ep. of (6th ch. of Baruch) 1st cent. ! Jerome (Sophronius (?) Eusebius Hie- ronymus) t420 .Joannes Damascenus 730 .lOAXNES MOSCHUS t620 JOSEPHUS "5 Judith 175-100 Julian, Roman emperor from . . . 361-363 Justinian, Roman emperor from . . 527-565 Justin, the historian 150? .Justin Martyr 150 Juvenal 100 Ancient Authors. XIII Ancient Authors. B.C. Lactaxtius Lampridius, the historian Leo ' Philosophus ', emperor .... LiBANius, the rhetorician LiTT *59 LOXGIXDS LOXGCS LrcAx, the epic poet LuciAX of Samosata, the satirist . . LcciLics, the Roman satirist . . . tl03 LccRETics, the Koman poet .... t55 Lycophrox c. 270 Lyccrgus of Athens, the orator . . t329 Lyxceus 300 Lysias, the Athenian orator, opened his school 410 Lysippcs 434 Macaeics Maccabees, First Book of ... . 105-63 ? Maccabees, Second Booh of c. 75 ? Maccabees, Third Book of Maccabees, Fourth Book of . . . .1st. cent? Machon 280 Macroeius Malalas, JOHy, the annalist . . . Manasses, Prayer of 1st cent. 1 Maxetho, the Egyptian priest . . . 300 Marciox JIaximus Ttkius 150 Mela, Pompoxius, the Roman geog- rapher Meleager, the founder of the epi- gram, anthologies 60 Melito, Bp. of Sardis Mexaxder, the poet 325 Mexaxder, the Bvzantine iiistorian . MiMXEKMUs, the poet c. 600 Moeris, the "Atticist" and lexicog- rapher MOSCHION MoscHUS 200 Musoxius KuFus Nemesius Nepos *90, t24 XlCAXDER 160? NicEPHORns, patriarch of Constanti- nople IsicEPHOECs Brtexxics, the histo- rian Nicephobus Gregoras, Byzantine his- torian Nicetas Acomixatus (alsoChoniates), Byzantine historian Nicodemus, Gospel of see Acts of Pilate NicoLAUs Damascexts 14 NicOM.icHcs Gerasexus NiLcs, the pupil and friend of .John Chrjsostom Xoxxcs of Panopolis in Upper Egypt, the poet NcMEXius of Apameia, the philoso- pher (as quoted by Origen) .... A.D. 310 310 886 350 tl7 250 400 ? t65 160 ; c. 350 c. 40? 420 600? 140 45 c. 175 583 2d cent. 110? 66 400? t828 tll37 1 13.59 120O 50 420 500? C. 150 B.C. A.D. NuMEXius (as quoted by Athen.) . . c. 350 Ocellus Lucaxus 400? OEccjiExirs, Bp. of Tricca .... 950? Olympiodokls, the Xeo-PIatonic phi- losopher 525 Oppiax of Anazarbus in CUicia (auth. of the aAi€uTiK(i) 180? Uppiax of Apameia in S\Tia (auth. of the KuvTj-yeTiKo) 210? Okigex t c. 254 Oeosics Paclus 415 Orphica, the ? Ovid flT PaL.AEPII-ATUS ? Papias, Bp. of Hierapolis, first half of 2d cent. Pausaxias 160 Pete0s Alexaxdrixus t3Il Phalaris, spurious epistles of . . . ? Phatorixcs, Varinus^ Philemox, CoMicns 330 Philo 39 Puilodemus 50 Philostratus 237 Phocylides 540 Psecdo-Phocylides (in tlie Sibi/t. Orac, q. T.) 1st cent. ? Photius (Patriarch of Constantinople) 850 PuRYXiCHtrs, the grammarian . . . 180 Phtlarchus 210 PixDAR . . *521 (4 yrs. after Aeschylus), t441 Plato, Comicus, contemporary of Ari- stophanes 427 Plato, the phOosopher '427, t347 Plactus tl84 Plixy the elder, the naturalist . . . t79 Plixy the younger, the nephew and adopted son of the preceding ... tll3 Plotixus, the philosopher .... 1270 Plutarch tl20 Pollux, author of tlie om/iaffTtKov . . ISO PoLYAEXU.S, author of tlie arpaTriyri- ftara 16.3 POLYEIUS tl22 POLYCARP tl55,Feb.23 Porphyry, pupil of Plotinus .... 270 POSIDIPPUS 280 PosiDoxius, philosopher (teacher of Cicero and Pompey) 78 Proclus, philosopher 450 Propertius '48, tl6 Protevangelivm Jacohi 2d cent. Psalter of Solomon 63-48? PsELLCs the younger, philosopher . . 1050 Ptolemy, the geographer 160 Pythagoras 531 QuixTiLiAX, rhetorician, teacher of Pliny the younger t95 QUINTUS SSITRXAEUS 380? 1 The Latin name of the Italian Guarino Favorino, who died A. D. 1537, and was the author of a Greek Lexicon compiled mainly from Smdas, Hesycbius. Harpocration, Eustathius, and Phryni- chus, 1st ed. Kome, 1523, and often elsewhere since. AnciENT Authors. XIV Ancient Authors. B.C. Sallust *86, t35 Sappho 610 Seneca, L. Axnaeus, the philosopher (son of the rhetorician) .S'<'/)(u(i/7(n(, (Jreek translation of O.T. c. 2S0-150 Sextl's Empiricus, physician and 'sceptic' Sibi/lline Oracles, of various dates, rang- ing perhaps from 170 SiLius Italicus, poet SiMONiDES of Amorgos, " lambo- gi-aphus" 693 SiMOMDES of Ceos (author of the epi- taph on the Spartans that fell at Thermopylae) 525 SiMPLicius, the commentator on Aris- totle and Epictetus Sinicb^ see Ecclesiasficus. SocR-iTES ' Scholasticus ', of Constan- tinople, historian Socrates (in Stobaeus) Sol IS us, sumamed Polyhistor . . . Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter etc. Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom etc. SoLox, the lawgiver and poet .... 594 Suni/ of the Three Children .... 2d cent. ? Sophocles '496, t406 SopHRONics of Damascus SOTADES ? SozoMEN, historian Statius, the Roman poet Stobaecs, i. e. John of Stobi in Mace- donia (compiler of Anthol.) . . . Sthauo, the geographer *66 Stratox, epigrammatist Strattis, comic poet 407 Sdetonius, the historian, frien tI60 1100? 200? 410 tc. 117 c. IGO 2d cent. ? B.O. A.D. Tertdllian t220? Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs . . c. 125? TllEAOES ? Thejiistius 355 Theocritus 280 Theodoret 420 Theodorus Metocuita 1300 Theodotiox (translator of O. T. into Greek) before 160 Theognis 540 TiiEOPHiLUS, Bp. of Antioch .... 180 Theophrastus, pupil and successor of Aristotle 322 THEOPHrLACT, Abp. of Bulgaria . . 1078 Theophylact Simocatta .... 610 Thomas Magister, lexicographer and grammarian 1310 TnccTDiDES 423 TlBULLUS tl8 Timaecs, the historian of Sicily . . 260 TiMAECs the Sophist, author of Lexicon to Plato 250 ' ■ TiMAEUs of Locri, Pythagorean phi- losopher 375 ? TiMox, the " SiUographus " or satirist . c. 279 TiMOCLES 350 Tobll o. 200 ? Trtpiiiodorus, a versifier .... 400 ? Tzetzes, Byzantine grammarian and poet 1150 Valerius Maximus 30 Varro, " vir Romanorum eruditissi- mus" (Quintil.) t26 Vegetius, on the art of war .... 420? Vergil tl9 ViTRuvics, the only Roman writer on architecture 30 Vopiscus, historian (cf. Capitolinus) . c.310 Wisdom of Solomon c. 100 ? Xexophaxes, founder of the Eleatic philosophy 540 Xexophox (Anabasis) 401 Xexophox of Ephesus, romancer . . 400 ? Zexo of Citium 290 Zexodotus, first librarian at Alexan- dria 280 ZoxARAS, the chronicler 1118 ZosiMUS, Roman historian .... 420 LIST OF BOOKS EEFEERED TO [MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR'S XA3IE OR BY SO^^IE EXTRE:kIE ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE. Albert! = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725. Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and Brandis ; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 1831-1870. Of the Rhetoric, Sandys's edition of Cope (-3 vols., Cambridge, 1877) has been nsed. Baumlein = W. Bdumkin, Untersuchvmgen iiber griechi- schen Partilceln. Stuttgart, 1861. B.n. = Dr. William Smith's Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols. London, 1860-64. The American.edition (4 vols., N. Y. 1868-1870), reused and edited by Professors Hackett and Abbot, has been the edition used, and is oceasioually referred to by the abbreviation " Am. ed." BB. DD. = Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the work just named, and the third edition of Kitto's Cyclo- psedia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex- ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870. Bnhdy. ^ G. Bemhardi/, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der Griechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1829. B. = Alexander Buttmann, Grammar of the Sew Testament Greek. (Authorized Translation with numerous Addi- tions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.) Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page of the translation, with the corresponding page of the German original added in a parenthesis. Bum. Ausf. Spr. or Sprchl. = PhiUpp Buttmann, Ausfuhr- liche Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., 1st vol. 1830, 2d vol. 1839.) Bum. Gram. = Philipp Buttmann's Griechische Gram- matik. The edition used (though not the latest) is the twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berhn, 1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by Harper & Brothers, 1 8.5 1 . When the p a g e is given, the translation is referred to. Bttm. Lexil. = Philipp Buttmann's Lexilogus u. s. w. (1st vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one volume by John Murray, London, 1836. "Bible Educator" = a collection (with the preceding name) of miscellaneous papers on biblical topics by various writers under the editorship of Rev. Professor E. H. Plumptre, and published in 4 vols, (without date) by CasseU, Petter, and Galpin. Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A Practical Introduction to Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised : Oxford, 1881. Cremer = Hermann Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches W6rt«r- buch der Neutestamentlichen Gracitat. ' Third greatly enlarged and improved Edition ' : Gotha, 1883. t)f the 'Fourth enlarged and improved Edition' nine parts (comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to baud, and are occasionally referred to. A translation of the second German edition was published in 1878 by the Messrs. Clark. Curtius = Georg Curtius, Grundziige der Griechischen Ety- mologic. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst Windisch: Leipzig, 1879. ' Diet, of Antiq. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui- ties. Edited by Dr. WiUiam Smith. Second edition : Boston and London, 1869, also 1873. Diet, of Biog. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols. Boston and London, 1849. Diet, of Chris. Antiq. = A Dictionary of Christian Antiqui- ties, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible. Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel Cheethara. 2 vols. 1875-1880. Diet, of Chris. Biog. = A Dictionary of Christian Biogra- phy, Literature, Sects and Doctrines ; etc. Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace : vol. i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii. 1882; (not yet complete). Diet, of Geogr. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geogra- phy. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 2 vols. 1854-1857. Edersheim ^ Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereotyped. London and Xew York, 1884. Eisner = J. Eisner, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis libros etc. 2 vols., Traj. ad Rhcn. 1720, 1728. Etym. Magn. =the Et^Tnologicum Magnum (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford's edition ( 1 vol. folio, Oxford, 1848) has been used. Fick = Aufjust Fick, Vergleichendes Wiirterbuch der In- dogerraanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Got- tingen, 1874-1876. List of Books. XVI List of Books. Graecus ■Venetu3 = the Greek version of the Pentateuch, Prov., Ruth, Canticles, Eccl., Lara., Dan., according to a unique MS. in the Library of St. Jlark's, Venice ; edited by 0. V. Gebhardt. Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592. Green = Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on tlie Grammar of the New Testament etc. etc. A new Edition. Lon- don, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1862. Also, bv the same author, " Critical Notes on the New Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Gram- mar of the New Testament Dialect." London, Samuel Bagster and Sous, 1867. Goodwin = ir. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston and Cambridge, 1871. Gottliug = Carl Goeltling, AUgemeine Lehre vom Accent der griechi.schen Sprache. Jena, 1835. Hamburger=y. Ilamhurrier, Real-Eucyclop'adie f Ur Bibel und Talmud. Strelitz. First Part 1870; Second Part 1883. Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Herm. Herzog = Real-Encyklopiidie fur Protestantische Theologie und Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols, with index, 1854-1868. Herzog 2 or ed. 2 = a second edition of the above (edited by Herzog t, Plitt t, and Hauck), begun in 1877 and not yet complete. Hesych. = Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena, 1858-1868). Jelf = W. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language. Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Sub- sequent editions have been issued, but without, it is believed, material alteration ) Kautzsch = E. Kaut:sch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama- ischen. Leipzig, 1884. Keim = Theodor Keim, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara u. s. w. 3 vols. Zurich, 1867-1872. Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae Linguae Particulis, ed. R. Klotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol. ii. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842. Krebs, Observv. = J. T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test, e Flavio Josepho Lips. 1755. Kriiger = K. W. Krikier, Griechische Sprachlehre f Ur Schu- len. Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq. Kypke, Observi-. = G. D. Ki/pke, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graecis et antiquitatibus. 2 vols. AVratisl. 1755. L. and S. = Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon etc. Seventh edition, 1883. Lob. ad Phrvn., see Phrvn ed. Lob. Loesner = C. F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test, e Philone Alexandrino. Lips. 1777. Lghtft. = Dr. John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the 17th century. Bp. Lghtft. = j. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Bishop of Durham : the 8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala- tiaus is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his com- mentary on Philippians, the 7th edition of his commen- tary on Colossians and Philemon. Lipsius =^K. H. A. Lipsius, Grammatische L^ntersuchungen iiber die Biblische Gracitat (edited by Prof. R. A. Lip- sins, the anther's son). Leipzig, 1863. Matthiae = Auijnst ifaithiii, Ausfiihrlich Griechische Gram- matik. Third edition, 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835. McC. and S. = McClintock and Strong's Cyclopa>dia of Biblical, Theological, and lAolesiastical Literature. 10 vols. 1867-1881 ; with Supplement, of which 1 vol. (1885) has appeared. New York : Harper and Brothers. Meisterlians = AT. Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften. Berlin, 1885. Mullach = F. W. A. Mutlach, Grammatik der Griechischen Vulgarsprache u. s. w. Berlin, 1856. Munthe = C. F. Munthe, Observationes philolog. in sacros Nov. Test, libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et Lips. 1755.) Palairet = E. Palairet, Observationes philol.-crit. in sacros Novi Foederis libros etc. Lugd. Bat. 1752. Pape = W Pape, Griechisch-Dcutsches Handworterhuch. Second edition. 2 vols. Brunswick, 1866. A continuation of the preceding work is the " Worterliuch der (iriechi- schen Eigenuamen." Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben- seler.' 1863-1870. Passow = Franz Passow's Handwiirterbnch der Griechischen Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz. 1841-1857. Phryn. ed. Lob. = Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo- rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig, 1820. (Cf. Rutherford.) Poll. ^Pollux (.see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio, 1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf, 5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.) Pss. of Sol. = Psalter of Solomon ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc. Raphel = G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam ... ex Xen., Polyb., Arrian., et Herodoto collectae. 2 vols. Lugd. Bat. 1747. Eiddell, Platonic Idioms = A Digest of Idioms given as an Appendix to " The Apology of Plato" as edited by the Rev. James RiddeU. M. A. ; Oxford, 1867. Riehm (or Riehm, HWB.) ^ Handwtirterbuch des Biblischen Altertums u. s. w. edited by Professor Edward C. A. Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884. Rutherford, New Phryn. = The New Phryuichus, being a revised text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phryni- chus, etc., by W. Gunion Rutherford. London, 1881. Schaff-Herzog ^ A Religious Encyclopajdia etc. by Philip Schaft and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and Wagnalls, New York. Schenkel (or Schenlcel, BL.) =Bibel-Lexikon u. s. w. edited by Professor Daniel Schenkel. 5 vols. Leipz. 1869-1875. Schmidt =X//. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechi- schen Sprache. 3 vols. Leipz. 1876, 1878, 1879. Schottgen = Christiaui Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal- mudicae etc. 2 vols. Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742. Schurer = i?mi7 Schiirer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1874. The " Second Part " of a new and revised edition has already appeared under the title of Geschichte des Jiidischen Volkes im Zeitalter Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for tlie portion of the original work which it covers) tlie references have been made, although for convenience the title of the first edition has been retained. An English translation is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark). Scrivener. F. H. A. : — A Plain Introduction to the Criticism of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge and London, 1883. List of Books. XVII List of Books. Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis etc. Cambridge and London, 1864. A Full Collation of the Codex Sinaiticus with the Eeceived Text of the Xew Testament etc. Second Edition, Reused. Cambridge and London, 1867. Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament etc. Cambridge and London, 1875. Sept. ^ the translation of the Old Testament into Greek known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the sixth edition of Tischendorf's text (edited by Nestle) is referred to ; 2 vols, (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The double Terse-notation occasionally given iu the Apocry- phal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha and select Pseudepigrapha by O. F. Fritzsche ; Leipzig, 1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine, Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked respectively by an appended Comp., AM., \'at., Alex. For the first two the testimony of tlie edition of Lam- bert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on. The abbreviations Aq., SiTnm., Theod. or Theodot., appended to a reference to the 0. T. denote respectively the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc. " Lag." designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde, of which the first half appeared at Giittingen in 188.3. Soph. = E. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine Periods (from B.C. 146 to a.d. 1100.) Bos- ton: Little, Brown & Co. 1870. The forerunner (once or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title " A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming vol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American Academy." Cambridge, 1860. Stejih. Tlies. ^the " Thesaurus Graecae Linguae" of Henry Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vois. Paris, 1831-1865. OccasionaUy the London (Valpy's) edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred to. Suid. = Su'idas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford's edition (2 vols, folio, Oxford, 1834) lias been followed. 'Teacliing' = The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles (Ai- Saxv Tuv SiiSfKa aTroffToAaiy.) The edition of Harnack (in Gebhardt and Harnack's Texte imd Untersnchungen tL s. w. Second vol., Pts. i. and ii., Leipzig 1884) has been followed, together with his division of the chapters into verses. Thiersch = Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik u. s. w. Third edition. Leipzig, 1826. Trench ^= Abp. R. C. Trench's Synonyms of the New Testa- ment. Ninth edition, improved. London, 1880. Vanicek = -4/ms Vanicek, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo- gisches Worterbuch. 2 vols. Leipz. 1877. By the same author is " Fremdwiirter im Griechischen uud Lateiuischen." Leipzig, 1878. Veitch = William Veilch, Greek Verbs irregular and de- fective, etc. New Edition. Oxford, 1879. Vig. ed. Herm. ^= Vigeri de praecipuis Graecae dictionis Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition. Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by Rev. John Seager was published at London in 1828. Vulg. = the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate. Professor Tischendorf's edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been followed. Wetst. or Wetstein = J. J. Wetstein's No'iTim Testamen- tum Graecum etc. 2 vols, folio. Amsterdam, 1751, 1752. W. = G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testa- ment etc. Revised aud Authorized Translation of the seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine- mann ; Andover, 1883. Unless otherwise indicated, it is refen-ed to by pages, tlie corresponding page of the orig- inal being added iu a parenthesis. Wlien Dr. Moulton's translation of the sixth German edition is referred to, that fact is stated. Win. RWB.= G. B. Winer, Biblisches Real worterbuch u. s. w. Third edition. 2 vols., Leipzig and New York, 1849. Win . L»e verl). Comp. etc. ^ 0'. B. 1T7««-, De verborum cum praepositionibus compositomni in Novo Testamento usu. Five academic programs ; Leipzig, 1843. Other titles, it is believed, are so fully given as to be easUy verifiable. EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS. As respects PcNCTnATiON — it should be noticed, that since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a form of the Present Tense which is in use, aud one which is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet. This is done by putting a semi-colon after a Present which actually occurs, and a colon after a Present which is a mere alphabetic locum tenens. Further : a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not) indicates that said voucher or reference applies to o t h e r passages, definitions, etc., besides the one which it imme- diately follows. The same principle governs the insertion or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as "absol.", "pass.", etc. A hyphen has been placed between the component parts of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in actual use ; otherwise the hyphen is omitted. [ ] Brackets have been used to mark additions by the Amer- ican editor. To avoid, however, a comple.xity which might prove to the reader confusing, they have been occasionally dispensed with when the editorial additions serve only to complete a statement already made in part by Professor Grimm (as, in enumerating the forms of verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs com- pounded with aliv which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ; Ijut in no instance have they been intentionally omitted where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor Grimm an opinion for which he is uot responsible. * An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the instances of the word's occurrence in the New Testament are noticed in the article. Of the 5394 words composing the vocabulary of the New Testament 5300 are marked with an asterisk. To this extent, therefore, the present work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon. A superior * or •■ or " etc. appended to a verse-numeral designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given word or constmction in that verse. The same letters ap- pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first, second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. etc. after a pnge-numcral designates the subdivision of the page. The various forms of the Greek Text referred to ar& represented by the following abbreviations : R or Rec. = what is commonly known as the Textus Kecep- tus. Dr. P. H. A. Scrivener's last edition (Cambridge aud London 1877) has been taken as the standard. i To designate a particular form of this " Protean text " an abbreviation has been appended in superior type ; as, •'• for Elzevir, " for Stepheu, '" for Beza, ■"■"» for Erasmus. G or Grsb. = the Greek te.xt of Griesbach as given in hi» manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Owing to a dis- regard of the signs by which Griesbach indicated his judgment respecting the various degrees of probability belonging to different readings, he is cited uot infre- quentl}-, even in critical works, as supporting readings which he expressly questioned, but was- not quite ready to expel from the text. L or Lchm. = Lachmann's Greek text as given in his larger edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 1831 ) is re- ferred to, the abbreviation " min." or " ster." is added to his initial. T or Tdf. = the text of Tischendorf's "Editio Octava Critica Major " (Leipzig, 1869-1872). Tr or Treg. = " The Greek New Testament " etc. by S. P. Tregelles (Londou, 1857-1879). WH = " The New Testament in the Original Greek. The Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott D.D. and Fen- ton John Anthony Hort D.U. Cambridge and London, Macmillan and Co. 1881." KC = " Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vaticani " as edited by Professors Kuenen and Cobet (Leyden, 1860). The textual variations noticed are of course mainly those which affect the individual word or construction under dis- cussion. AVhere an extended passage or entire section is textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20 ; Jn. v. 3 fin.-4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be known, or at least it is not stated uuder every word contained in the passage. As respects the xcmberixg of the verses — the edition of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been ' Eespecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, which was followed by Professor Grimm , see Carl Bertheau in the Theolo- gische Literaturzeitung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106. EXPLAXATIOXS AXD XIX Abbreviatioxs. followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of TregeUes, Westcott and Hort, etc.). Variations from this standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu- meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek. In quotations from the English Bible — A. V. ^ tlie current or so-called " Autliorized Version " ; K. V. ^the Revised Xew Testament of 1S81. But when a rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con- trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by R. V. is found in the Revision only. A. S. = Anglo-Saxon. Abp. "= Archbishop. absoL = absolutely. ace. or accus. = accusative. ace. to = according to. ad 1. or ad loc. = at or on the passage. al. = others or elsewhere. al. al. ^ others otherwise. Aid. ^ the Aldine text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books). Alex, ^the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books). ^P- ^^ (quoted) in App. = Appendix, appos. = apposition. Aq. = Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books), art. = article, augm. = augment, auth. or author. = author or authorities. B. or Bttm. see List of Books. B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books. betw. = between. Bibl. = Biblical. Bp. ^Bishop. br. = brackets or enclose in brackets. e. before a date = about. Cantabr. = Cambridge. cf. ^compare. ch. ^= chapter. cl. ^clause. cod., codd. = manuscript, mannscripts. Com., Comm. = commentary , commentaries. comp. = compound, compounded, etc. compar. = comparative. Comp. or Compl. =the Complutensian text of the Septua gint (see Sept. in List of Books), contr. = contracted, contract. dim. or dimin. = diminutive, dir. disc. ^direct tliscourse. e. g. = for example, esp. = especially. ex., exx. ^example, examples. exc.= except. excrpt. = an excerpt or extract. fin. or ad fin. ^ at or near the end. G or Grsb. = Griesbach's Greek text (see above). Graec. Ven. = Graecus Venetus (see List of Books). i. e. = that is. ib. or ibid. = in the same place. iudir. disc. = indirect discourse. init. or ad init.^at or near the beginning. iu I. or in loc. = in or on the passage. i. q. = the same as, or equivalent to. KC^Kuenen and Cobet's edition of the Vatican text (se& above). L or Lchm. =Lachinaim's Greek text (see above). L. and S. = LiddeU and Scott (see List of Books). 1. or lib. = book. I.e., 11. cc. =passage cited, passages cited. Lag.^Lagarde's edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books), mrg.^the marginal reading (of a critical edition of th& Greek Testament). 0pp. = Works, opp. to = opposed to. paral.^tlie parallel accounts (in the Synoptic Gospels). Pt. or pt. = part, q. v. = which see. R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above), r.^root. rel. or relat. ^ relative, sc. = namely, to wit. Skr. ^Sanskrit, sq., sqq. = following. Steph. = Steplianus's Thesaurus (see List of Books). Stud. u. Krit. ^the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Ger- man Theological Quarterly, s. V. ^ under the word. Symm. = Symmachus, translator of the Old Testament into Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books). T or Tdf. = Tischendorf's Greek text (see above). Theod. or Theodot. = Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of Books). Tr or Treg. = Tregelles's Greek text (see above). u. i.^as below, u. s. =as above. V. = see. var. = variant or variants (various readings). Vat. = the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. iu the List of Books). Vulg. ^the Vulgate (see List of Books), w.^with (especially before abbreviated names of cases), writ. ^ writer, ^\T'iters, writings. WH^ Westcott and Hort"s Greek text (see above). Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselves. NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. A, a, a\.(f>a A, a, aXo, ro, the first letter of the Greek alphabet, ■opening the series which the letter to closes. Hence the expression cyw elfxi to A [L T Tr WII aXfpa~\ kgI to Q [^Q L WH], Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec, wliich is explained by the appended words }} dpx^ koi to tcXos, s-xi. 6, and by the further addition d Trpwros- Kai 6 caxaTos, x.xii. 13. On the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 1 7 ; Is. xli. 4 ; xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p.' 73]. A, when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is 1. privative {(neprjTiKov), hke the Lat. in-, the Eng. un-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is prefixed, as a^aprjs ; or signifying what is contrary to it, as (iTi/iof, aTi/ioa) ; before vowels generally ok-, as duainos. 2. copulative (adpoia-TiKm), akin to the particle afia [cf. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellow- ship, as in dde\(p6s, qkoXov^ot. Hence it is 3. in- tensive (eViTariKd»'), strengthening the force of terms, like the Lat. con in composition ; as aTfvi^oi fr. aTevijs [yet cf. AV. 100 (95)]. This u.se, however, is doubted or denied now by many [e. g. Loh. Path. Element, i. 34 sq.]. Cf. Kuhner i.' 741, § 339 Anm. 5 ; [Jelf § 342 d} ; Bum. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; {^DonnUhon, Gram. p. 334; New Crat. §§ 185, 213; L. and S. s. v.].* 'Aopiov, indecl. prop, name (6 'Aapav, -avos in Joseph.), [ 'ilX (fr. the unused Hebr. radical "^lI^, — Syr. ]j_fc(5j| libidinosus, lascivus, — \enU(jhtened, Fiirst; ace. to Die- trich wealthy, or fluent, like 131X], ace. to Philo, de ebriet. § 32, fr. 171 mountain and equiv. to opeiv6i), Aaron, the brother of Moses, the first high-priest of the Israel- ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order : Lk. i. 5 ; Acts vii. 40 ; Heb. v. 4 ; vii. 1 1 ; ix. 4.* 'APaSSuv, indecl., jl'lDX, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr. 15s to perish). Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place of destruc- tion i. q. Orcus, joined with 'jlXt^, Job xxvi. 6 ; Prov. XV. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the an- gel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death and author of havoc on earth, and is rendered in Greek by 'ATroXXv'wK Destroyer, Rev. ix. 11.* 1 ^A/3id0ap dpaprfs, -f'r, (Jiapos weight), without weirjhf, light; trop. not burdensome: djBapij vpiv (p.avrbv iTrjprjfra I have avoided biu-dening you with expense on my account, 2 Co. xi. 9 ; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)* ■Appd [WH -,3d], Hebr. 2^ father, in the Chald. em- phatic state, S3N i. e. 6 iraTrjp, a customary title of God in prayer. "WTienever it occurs in the N. T. (j\Ik. xiv. 36 ; Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation subjoined to it; tliis is apparently to be explained by the fact that the Chaldee N25>!, tlirough frequent use in prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added the appellative from their own tongue.* "Ape\ [WH "A/3, (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop. name (in Joseph, [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] ".\^t\os, -ov), San (breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam (Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from his short life and sudden death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxix. G) : Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 51 ; Heb. xi. 4 ; xii. 24.* "Apia, indecl. prop, name (Joseph, antt. 7, 10, 3; 8, 10, 1 6'Aji'ias [W. § 6, 1 m.], -a), n',3S and ?n;nx (my father is Jehovah), Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. D. s. v.], 1. a king of Judah, son of Rehoboam : Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv. 31; XV. 1). 2. a priest, the head of a .sacerdotal family, from whom, when David divided the priests into twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia, the eighth in order, took its name : Lk. i. 5.* 'APtaSap, indecl. prop, name (though in Jose])h. antt. C, 14, C 'Xjiu'idapo^, -av). "^ri'^X (fatlicr of abundance), Ahiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest: Mk. ii. 26, — where he is by mistake confounded with Aliimelech his f.ather (1 S. xxi. 1 sqq.) ; [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1 Chr. xviii. 16 ; xxiv. 6, 31 ; also 2 S. xv. 24-29 ; 1 K. ii. 26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would seem that double names were esp. common in the case of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph, vit. §§ 1, 2) and that father and son often bore the same name (cf. Lk. i. 5, 59 ; Joseph. 1. c. and antt, 20, 9, 1). See Mc- Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].* ^A/3i\rjviJ a.ya66>P'', the pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of .'the deep' sea: Gen. i. 2; vii. 11 ; Deut. viii. 7; Sir. i. 3; xvi. 18, etc. ; of Orcufi (a very deep gulf or chasm in the lowest parts of the earth : Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 21 eV tSjv aiiva-- o-tov Tns yrji, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) raprapov a^vutra yatrpara, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 d^vtraoiv di/e^iyviacrra KKlpara, ibid. 59, 3 6 fVi/SXtTriui' (v rais a^vtraois, of God ; [Act. Thom. 32 o rfiv nfiv(T ; (fr. the unused EPrO — equiv. to fphu>, ipya^opai — and dyaBov) ; to be ayadoepyos, bcnejl- cent (towanls the poor, the needy) : 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. do good'\. Cf. dyadovpyeo). Found besides only in eccl. writ., but in the sense to do trell, act riijlitlij.' d'YaSo-iroLEu, -m ; 1 aor. inf. dya6oTToiripr)pa rfKeiov) a gift wliieh is truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 17; Sdpara dyadd, jNIt. vii. 11 ; evTo\fi dy. a commandment profitable to those who keep it, Ro. vii. 12, aec. to a Grk. scholium eqiuv. to fir TO avp(j>ipov eluriyovpevr), hence the question in vs. 13 : to ovv dyaObv epol ytynve Bdvaros ; dy. pepis the ' good part,' which insures salvation to him who chooses it,^ Lk. X. 42; epyov dy. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, etc.) the saving work of (rod, i. e. substantially, the Christian life, due to divine etnciency, Phil. i. 6 [cf. the Comm. ad loc.] ; f is dya66v for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28 (Sir. vdi. 13; TravraTOic fvae^iai fis dyaOd, . . . rois dpap- TioXols fls Koxd, Sir. xxxLx. 27 ; to KaKuv . . . yiyverai «V dyaOav. Thcognis 162) ; good for, suited to .«omething ; ■npbi olKo&opi}v, Eph. iv. 29 [cf. W. 363 (340)] (Xen. mem. 4, 6, 10). 3. of the feehng awakened by wliat is good, pleasant, agreeable, joi/ful, hajipg : jjpepaidy- 1 Pet. iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (.xxxiv.) l.'i; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 Mace. X. 55); eXm'j, 2 Th. ii. 16 (paKapia f\mf,Tit. ii. 13); avveiSrja-ts, a peaceful conscience, i. q. consciousness of rectitude. Acts xxiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. IS; reconciled to God, vs. 21. 4. excellent, distinguished: so Ti dyadov, Jn. i. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable : :^It. xii. 34 ; xix. 16 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; Acts xi. 24 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1 1, etc. ; TrovTjpol k. dya6oi, Mt. v. 45 ; xxii. 10 ; dyaO. Koi SiKaios, Lk. xxiii. 50 ; xapdla dyaOrj k. KaXr/, Lk. viii. 15 (see Ka\6s, b.) ; fulfilling the duty or service demanded, SoCXe dyadi k. mare, Mt. x.xv. 21, 23; upright, free from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the people, Jn. vii. 12: pre-eminently of God, as consum- mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19) ; dy. dtjaavpos in Mt. xii. 35; Lk. vi. 45 a'ya6ovp^/eu) cvyairao} denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure thoughts which are brought forth in speech ; jriVrts ay. the fideUty due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10 [WH rarg. om.] ; on aya6- epyov, ay. fpya, see tpyov. In a narrower sense, hentvulent, kind, generous : Mt. XX. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18: fivfla, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii. 20) ; beneficent (Xen. C'\t. 3, 3, 4; 310, Jer. xxxiii. 11 ; Ps. xxxiv. 9 ; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 " opiimus i. e. heneficentissimus"), Ko. v. 7, where the meaning is. Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death ; for if he even dares hazard Ids life for another, he does so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [GifEord in the Speaker's Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de- notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches : Lk. i. 53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4; Sap. vii. 11) ; to ayaBa trov comforts and delights which thy wealth procured for thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to koko, as in Sir. xi. 14) ; outward and inward good things. Gal. vi. 6, cf. Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king- dom: Ro. X. 15; TO fiiWovrady. Heb. ix. 11; x. 1. 2. what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Eo. xii. 2 ; epya^fo-dat ro ay. Ro. ii. 10 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; irpaa-a-eiv, Ro. ix. 11 ; f2 Co. V. 10]; Smxetp, 1 Th. v. 15; /xifjiei- trdai, 3 Jn. 11 ; KoXXaadai ra ay. Ro. xii. 9; ti fxe fparas ■7T(p\ Tov dyadoO, lit. xix. 1 7 G L T Tr WH, where the word expresses the general idea of right. Spec, what is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs: in the phrase StaKovos fir to ay. Ro. xiii. 4 ; of rendering ser- vice. Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21 ; to ay. cov the favor thou conferrest, Philem. 14. [" It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the Sept. that 31D good is predominantly [ '. ] rendered by Ka\6s. . . . The translator of Gen. uses ayaSos only in the neut., good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for the other translators. ... In the Greek O. T., where ol Sikoio: is the technical designation of the pious, ol ayado! or S aya86s does not occur Ln so general a sense. The avrip aya86s is peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3) ; cf. besides the soUtary instance in 1 Ivings ii. 32. Thus even in the usage of the O. T. we are reminded of Christ's words, Mk. x. 18, ovSels ayaffhs €i p.7i ets & Be6s. In the O. T. the term ' right- eous ' makes reference rather to a covenant and to one's rela- tion to a positive standard ; ayaBos would express the abso- lute idea of moral goodness " (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. n. bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On the comparison of i.ya96s see B. 27 (24).] d-yafloup-yeu, -€> ; Acts xiv. 1 7 L T Tr WH for R dyaSo- jToiM. The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WH. App. p. 145], see dyadofpyeai ; but cf. KOKOvpyos, Upovpyia-* a.yfa.ia, -a>, and -dopat. (but the act. is not used exc. in Lk. i. 47 [ijyaXXiaaa}, in Rev. xix. 7 IdydK- Xiiipev'] L T Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrg. (dyaXXtdre), cf. WH. App. p. 1C9]) ; 1 aor. ijydWiaa-d- prjv, and (with a mid. signif.) rjyaWmBTjv (Jn. v. 35; Rec. rjyaWidaSrjv) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr. dydWopai to rejoice, glory [yet of. B. 51 (45)]), often in Sept. (for h'i, ]"^i\ [J"i_, bib'), to exult, rejoice exceed- ingly: Mt. v. 12; Lk. X. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet. i. 8; iv. 13; ?j/ «w, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in which the joy originates [cf. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)] ; but Jn. V. 35 means, ' to rejoice wlule his light shone ' [i. e. in (the midst of) etc.]. ('nt twi, Lk. i. 47; foU. by Iva, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it had been promised him that he should see. This di«ne promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise ; cf. W. 339 (318) ; B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.* d--ya|ios, -OK, (yd^or), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32; used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said avavhpos.* «ryavaKTe'u, -S ; 1 aor. rfjavdicrrjaa: (as TrXEove/cTea) comes fr. TrXoei/eKrrjs. and this fr. nXeou and exio, so through a conjectural dyai/dxrijc fr. ayav and a^op^i to feel pain, grieve, [al. al.]) ; to be indignant, moved with indigna- tion: Mt.xxi. 15; xxvi. 8 ; Jlk. x. 14; xiv. 4; Trepinvos [cf. W. § 33 a.], Mt. XX. 24 ; Mk. x. 41 ; foU. by drt, Lk. .\iii. 14. (From Ildt. down.) * d-yavoK-nio-is. -eois. r], indignation : 2 Co. vii. 11. [(From Plat, on.)]' aYairdd), -oi ; [impf. rjydnwv] ; fut. dynTnjcra) ; 1 aor. ^yd- TTijo-a; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. rjyaTzfiKapev 1 Jn. iv. 10 WH txt.], ptcp. riyaTn)s (2 Tim. iv. 8) ; Pass., [pres. dya- Tiaipai] ; pf. ptcp. TjyaTnjpivot ; 1 fut. dya-!7rjdrj(Tofiai; (akin to ayapai [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see dyados. init.]) ; to lore, to be full of good-will and exhibit the same : Lk. vii. 4 7 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 sq. ; with ace. of the p e r s o n, ?o ^arp a pre- ference for, tcish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 43 sqq.; xix.l9; Lk.vii.5; Jn.xi.5; Ro.xiii.8; 2 Co. xi. 11; .xii. 15; Gal. v. 14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and elsewhere ; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris- tians towards one another; of the benevolence which God, in providing salvation for men, has exhibited bj" sending his Son to them and giving him up to death, Jn. iii. 16; Ro. viii. 37 ; 2 Th. ii. 16 ; 1 Jn. iv. 11, 19 ; [noteworthy is Jude 1 L T Tr WH rois tv 6ea -narpX riyoTTTipevois ; see cV, I. 4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 12] ; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human salvation, to undergo sufferings and death. Gal. ii. 20; Eph. V. 2 ; of the love with which God regards Christ, Jn. iii. 35; [v. 20 L mrg.]; x. 17; xv. 9; Eph. i. 6. When used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word a'^a-TTTf a'^aTTTjTOi involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe- dience, grateful recognition of benefits received: Mt. vi. 24 ; xxii. 37 ; Ko. viii. 28 ; 1 Co. ii. 9 ; viii. 3 ; Jas. i. 12; 1 Pet. i. 8; 1 .In. iv. 10, 20, and elsewliere. With an ace. of the thing ayaitdia denotes lij lake pleasure in the thinq, prize it above other things, he unwilling to abandon it or (Jo without it : biKaioavvr]v, Ileb. i. S) (i. e. steadfastly to cleave to) ; rr^v to^av, Jn. xii. 43 ; rrjv TrpoiToKadidpiav, Lk. xi. 43 ; to (tkotos and to (j>o)s, Jn. iii. 1 ; tiiv kuctjiov, 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; tov vvv aiava, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which last phra.scs signify to set the heart on earthly advan- tages and joys; t^w ^vxtjv alrSiv, Rev. xii. 11; fwiji', 1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it agreeable to himself) ; to welcome icith desire, long for : TTjv ein(f)dveiav airov, 2 Tim. iv. H (Sap. i. 1 ; vi. 13; Sir. iv. 12, etc.; so of a per.'son : riyan!]6rj, Sa]). iv. 10, cf. Grimm ad loc). Concerning the uniipie proof of love which Jesus gave the apostles by wasliiug their feet, it is said qyarrrjtrfv airovs, Jn. xiii. 1, ef. LUcke or Meyer ad loc. [but al. take riydir. here more comprehensively, see Weiss's Mey., Godet, Westcott, Keil]. The combi- nation ayarrqv ayanav Tiva occurs, when a relative inter- venes, in Jn. xvii. 2G ; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where to fiiffof o e'lxiurjcrev avTTjv is contrasted ; cf. Gen. xlix. 25 eiXoyrjo-i ire evXoyiav ; Ps. Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude- pig. Vet. Test. cd. Fabric, i. ]). 9GG ; Libri Apoer. etc., ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] 86^av fjv (86^aa-ei> airrjv) ; cf. W. § 32, 2; [B. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 64. On the difference betw. ayandco and (ptXtio, see 0tXe<». Cf. dydirri, 1 fin. 0.70.7111, -1)9, J), a purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt- tenbaeh, following lleiske's conjecture, long ago re- stored dyciTTrjtrwv in place of dynTrr;?, 2)f in Phit. sympos. quaestt. 7, G, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof, auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used dydirrjais- " The Sept. use ayaTTT) for n^nX, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; vii. 6 ; viii. 4, 6, 7; [" It is noticeable that the word first makes its appearance as a current term in the Song of Sol.; — certainly no undesigned evidence respects ing the idea wliich the Alex, translators had of the love in this Song" (^Zezschu-itz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63)] ; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. Ix. 1, 6; [2 S. xiii. 15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas. ; it occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Ileb. and Rev., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter, Jude " (^Brelschn. Lex. s. v.) ; [Philo, deus immut. § 14]. In signification it follows the verb dyandm; conse- quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene- volence: Jn. XV. 13; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the love of men to men ; esp. of that love of Christians towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by their reUgion, whether the love be viewed as in the soul or as expressed : Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8 ; xiv. 1 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Gal. v. 6 ; Philem. 5, 7 ; 1 Tim. i. 5 ; Heb. vi. 10 ; x. 24 ; Jn. xiii. 35 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 ; Rev. iL 4, 19, etc. Of the love of men towards God : fj dydnrj ToC Beoi (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; Jn. v. 42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (toO n-arpos) ; iii. 17; iv. 12; v. 3. Of the love of God towards men : Ro. v. 8 ; viii. 39 ; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14). Of the love of God towards Christ : Jn. xv. 10 ; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men : Jn. XV. 9 sq. ; 2 Co. v. 14 ; Ro. viii. 35 ; Ejih. iii. 19. In construction : dy- tXs nva, 2 Co. ii. 8 [?] ; Eph. L 15 [L WII om. Tr mrg. br. t^v dyaTnjv'l ; t^ f| v/jloiv iv tjiuv i. c. love going forth from your soul and taking up its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co. viii. 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.) ; B. 329 (283)]; iifff vpiau i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24 ; /ifff i]fia>v i. e. seen among us, 1 Jn. iv. 1 7. Plirases : «x"" dydnTjv (is nva, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col. i. 4 [L T Tr, but WII br.] ; 1 Pet. iv. 8 ; dydirTjv 6i8oVai to give a proof of love, 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; dyandv dydnrjv Tivd, Jn. xvii. 2G ; Eph. ii. 4 (v. in dyanno), sub fin.) ; dy. roi irveiiiiaTos i. e. enkindled by the Holy Sjiirit, Ro. xv. 30; 6 vior T^r dydm/f the Son who is the object of love, i. q. dyiiTnjTot, Col. i. 13 (W. 237 (222) ; [B. 162 (141)]) ; o 6(oi r^s dy. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; «oTror T^r dy. troublesome service, toil, tuidertaken from love, 1 Th. i. 3 ; dy. t^s d\ri6fias love which embraces the truth, 2 Th. ii. 10 ; 6 Bdis dyaTri^ icrrlv God is wholly love, his nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8, IG ; <^i'Xt;^a dydnrji a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual affec- tion, 1 Pet. V. 14 ; fiia Trjv dy- that love may have oppor- tunity of influencing thee ('in order to give scope to the power of love' De W., AVies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; i» dydiTTi lovingly, in an ailectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21 ; on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element], E]ih. iv. 15 (where iv dy. is to be connected not with d\T)6€vovTes but with av^ijawfxfv), vs. IG ; i^dydirqs inlli:- euced by love, Phil. i. 17 (IG) ; Kara dydnrjv iu a manner befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3; V. 8; Col. i. 4 sq. ; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words dydrnj, dyandv, cf. Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 646 sip ; on the idea and nature of Christian love see Kostlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. etc. p. 248 sqq., 332 sqq.; Rilckert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius, Paulin. Rcchtfertigimgt^l. p. 188 sqq.; [iicfts.';, Thdol. Chret. Uvr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Phir. dydnai, -S>v, agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu- tual love wliich used to be held by Christians before the celebration of the Lord's su]iper, and at which the poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par- took in common with the rest of food provided at the expense of the wealthy. Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13 L Tr txt. WH mrg.), cf. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq. ; Acts ii. 42, 46 ; XX. 7 ; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr, c. 3 ; Cypr. ad Quirin. 3, 3; Dreschcr, De vet. cbrist. Agapis. Giess. 1824 ; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D. s. v. Love-Feasts; Diet, of Clu-ist. Antiq. s. v. Agapae ; more fully in McC. and S. s. v. Agape]. d'yaTTTiTis, -r], -6v, {dyairdai), beloved, esteemed, dear, favorite ; (opp. to ixdpo?, Ro. xi. 28) : o vlos /lov (tov Geofi) 6 dyamjros, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii. 17 ''A'yap a/fYeXo<; There WH mrg. take 6 dy. absol., connecting it with what follows] ; xii. 18 ; xvii. 5 ; Mk. i. 11 ; ix. 7 ; Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35 (where L mrg. T Tr ^\'H 6 eKXeXeyfievos) ; 2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xx. 13; [cf. Ascensio Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq. ; viii. 18, 25, etc.]. dya- TTTirol eeoC [W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (1C5)] is applied to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by him to be worthy of eternal life : Ko. i. 7, cf. xi. 28 ; 1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (Lx.) 7; cvii. (cviii.) 7 ; cxxvi. (cxxvii.) 2, dyaTtrjTol aov and alrov, of pious Israelites). But Christians, bound together by mutual love, are dyaTrijToi also to one another (Philem. IG ; 1 Tim. vi. 2) ; hence they are dignified with this epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro. xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct (Ro. xii. 19 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; [Philem. 2 Rec] ; Heb. vi. 9 ; Jas. i. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; [1 Jn. ii. 7 G L T Tr WH], etc.). GeneraUy foU. by the gen. ; once by the dat. dyan. tjiilv, I Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2 ; B. 190 (1G5)]. dyan-qTos kv Kvpia beloved in the fel- lowsliip of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro. xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In class. Grk. fr. Horn. II. 6, 401 on ; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 41.] "A-yap [WH'Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], ,;, indecl., (in Joseph. 'Aydpa, -Tjr), "^^T (tlight), Haijar, a bond- maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael (Gen. xvi.) : Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. T om. Tr br.]. Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for- merly dwelt among them. Gal. i. 1 7) called the rocky Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to Ijn ( ■g\~^ i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred to em- ploys the name Hagar allegorically to denote the servile sense of fear with which the Mosaic economy imbued its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note"; Bp. Lghtft.'s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal. 1-c-]* dYyaptiw ; fut. dyyapeiau) ; 1 aor. r)yydpev(Ta ; to em- ploy a courier, despatch a mounted 7»essenf/er. A word of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sic\-on. 4], but adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. angariare). "Ayyapoi were public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by appointment of the king of Persia at fixed locaUties, with horses ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from one to another and so convey them the more speedily to their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson's note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. V. r\"ljs; [B. D. s. V. Angareuo; Vanit^ek, Fremd- worter s. v. ayyapor]. These couriers had authority to press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels, even men they met, [cf. Joseph, antt. 13, 2, 3]. Hence dyyapfvfiu Tivd denotes to compel one to go a journey, to bear a burden, or to perform any other service : Mt. v. 41 (oerrtj ae dyyapdfrei piXiov iv i. e. whoever shall compel thee to go one mile) ; xxvii. 32 (fiyydpevaav Iva apji i. e. they forced him to carrj), so Mk. xv. 21.* d-vyeiov, -oti, to, (i. q. to ayyor), n I'exscl, receptacle: Mt. xiii. 48 [R G L]; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.)* d'yyeXCo, -as, 17, (Syye\os), a message, announcement, thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where Rec. has eVayytXia) [cf. Is. xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From Horn, down.]* d-y-yeXXo) ; [1 aor. ijyyeCKa, Jn. iv. 51 T (for a7r;jy/. R G L Tr br.)] ; (i'-yyfXor) ; to ai^nounce : dyylKXovcra, Jn. XX. 1 8 L T Tr WH, for R G dTrayyiXk. [From Horn, down. CojIP. : dv-, dir-, bt-, e'f-, en-, 7rpo-€ir-, Kar-, tTpo-KOT-, Trap-ayye'XXco.] * 11776X05, -ov, 6. 1. a messenger, cnrog, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vii. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. ii. 25. [Fr. Horn, down.] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test, and of the Xew, one of that host of heavenl}' spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk. xvi. 22 ; xxii. 43 [L br. WII reject the pass.] ; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (Lk. i. 11, 26; ii. 9 sqq. ; Acts X. 3 ; xxvii. 23 ; Mt. i. 20 ; ii. 13 ; xxviii. 5 ; Jn. XX. 12 sq.) ; hence the frequent expressions oyyeXor (angel, messenger of God, '^xSo) and ciyyeKoi Kvpiov or ayy. Tov 6eov. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq. ; 1 Pet. iii. 22, cf. Eph. i. 21 ; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser- vants and attendants: Mt. xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv. 31 ; XXV. 31 ; 2 Th. i. 7, cf. Jude 14. Single angels have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv. 18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq. ; Jn. v. 4 [R L]. Respecting the ayycXor ttjs d^vcraov. Rev. Lx. 11, see 'A(3abSav, 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men- tioned in Mt. xviii. 10; Acts xii. 15. ' Tlie angels of the churches' in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 18 ; iii. 1, 7, 14 are not their presbyters or bishops, but heavenlj' spirits who exer- cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into the assemblies ; cf. De Wette, Diisterdieck. [ Alford,] on Rev. i. 20, and LUcke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii. p. 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 199 sq.]. Sia Tovi dyye'Xous that she mag shoir reverence for the angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. aiav€pa>dT] . . . eV Bo^rj seems to have been taken ; cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic. ad loc.]. In Jn. i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beau- tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge ayyo<; 6 ayio<; of his ^Messianic oflice, aud the signal proofs to appear in his history of a divine superintendence. Certain of the angels have proved faithless to the trust committed to them bv God, and have given themselves up to sin, Jude 6 ; 2 I'et. ii. 4 (Enoch c. vi. etc., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41 ; Kev. xii. 7, cf. 1 Co. vi. 3 [yet on this last passage cf. Meyer ; he and others maintain that 3yy. without an epithet or limitation never in the N. T. signilies other than good angels]. Hence ayyfXos 'Sarav is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See Saifiw»-; [Soph. Lex. s. v. ayyeXos ; and for the hterature on the whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the reff. there given add G. L. Hahn, Theol. des X. T., i. pp. 260-384; Dditzack in Eiehm s. v. Engel; Kiihel in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.]. O'V'Y"'' '^°^' ''°' (I'hir. ayyrj), i. q. dyycTof q. v. : Mt. xiii. 48 T Tr WII. (From Hom. down ; [of. Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 23].) ' aye, (projierly impv. of aytu), come '■ come noic .' used, as it often is in the classics (W. 516 (481)), even when more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.* d-yc'Xi], -rjs. ?;. (nya> to drive), a herd : Mt. viii. 30 sqq.; Mk. V. 11, 13 ; Lk. viii. 32 sq. (From Hom. down.) * ayeveoXdyilTOS, -ov, 6, (^yfvfoKoyio), of ichose descent there is no account (in the O. T.), [R. V. without gene- alog;f\ : Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 fifi yevfa\oyol>iitvos). Xo- where found in prof, auth." i-yev^Si "fof (-oCr), 6, t], (ycVor), opp. to fvyfvfis, of no family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu- tation ; often used by prof, writ., also in the secondary sense ignoble, cowardly, mean, base. In the X. T. only in 1 Co. i. 28, to dyev^ tov (cdcr/xou i. e. those who among men are held of no account; on the yse of a neut. adj. in ret. to ijcrsons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].* dyid^u; 1 aor. ^yiWa ; Pass., [pres. dyidfofiai] ; pf . ^yt- aa-fiai ; 1 aor. rjytdadrjv; a word for which the Greeks use Syi^etv, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to i^'np, tynpri) and eccl. writ. ; to male Syiov, render or declare sacred or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render or acknowledge to be venerable, to hallow : to ovofia tov 6eov, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxix. 23 ; Ezek. xx. 41 ; xxxviii. 23 ; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4) ; [Lk. xi. 2] ; tov 'KpiOTov, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (R G Oeov). Since the stamp of sacredness passes over from the hohness of God to whatever has any connection with God, dyidfetv de- notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to God, to consecrate and so render inviolable ; a. things (nav TTpttiToTOKovj Ta dpaeviKa, Dent. xv. 19; fjfiepav, Ex. XX. 8 ; o'lcoi', 2 Chr. vii. 16, etc.) : to» ;(pu(rdi', Mt. xxiii. 17; TO fiipo», vs. 19; o-KrCos, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons. So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn. xvii. 19; God is said nytdo-ai Christ, i. e. to have selected him for his service (cf. atfiopi^fiv, Gal. i. 15) by having committed to him the ofiice of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf. Jer. i. 5; Sir. xxxvi. 12 [e^ avrwv rjytatTe, Kat npos avrov TJyyurtv, of his selection of men for the priesthood] ; .\lv. 4 ; xlix. 7. Since only what is pure and without blemish can be devoted and olTored to God (Lev. x.\ii. 20; Deut. XV. 21; xvii. 1), dyid^w signifies 3. to purify, {ano tSiv aKaOapaiav is added in Lev. xvi. 19 ; 2 S. xi. 4) ; and a. to cleanse externally (npbt tjjv T^r crapKos KaBapoTjjra), to purify levitically: Heb. ix. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 5. b. to purify by expiation, free from the guilt of sin : 1 Co. vi. 1 1 ; Eph. v. 26 ; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29 ; .\iii. 12; ii. 11 (equiv. to 135, Ex. xxix. 33, 36) ; cf. Pfleiderer, Paulinisraus, p. 340 sqq., [Eng. trans, ii. 68 sq.]. c. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn. xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii. 32) ; 1 Th. V. 23 ; 1 Co. i. 2 (fV Xpiara 'irjcoi in the fellowship of Christ, the Holy One) ; Ro. xv. 16 (tV nveiifiaTi dyla imbued with the Holy Spirit, the divine source of holiness); Jude 1 (L T Tr WII rjyaTrrjpti/ots [q. V.]) ; Rev. xxii. 11. In general, Cliristians are called riyiaa-fitvoi [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who, freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been brought near to God by their faith and sanctity. Acts XX. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 ayid^eaBai is used in a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with- drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and brought under the saving influence of the Holy .Spirit dis- playing itself among Christians; cf. Neandcr ad loo.* a-yiao-fios, -oC, d. a word used only by bibl. and eccl. writ, (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. "Hal. 1, 21, dyia-pot is the more correct reading), signifying * 1. consecration, purification, to ayia^eiv. 2. the effect of consecration : sanctification of heart and hfe, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7 ; Eo. vi. 19, 22; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; iyiaanos nTo'/ioTor sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq. (It is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.] ; Ezek. xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11] ; Sir. vii. 31, etc.) [On its use in the N. T. cf. Ellic. on 1 Th. iv. 3; iii. 13.]* ^Yios, -a, -ov, (fr. to ayor religious awe, reverence ; afa>, a^oijxu, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents, [Curtius § 118]), rare in prof, auth.; very frequent in the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for U'lin; 1. properly reverend, worthy of veneration : to ovopa tov 6eov. Lk. i. 49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev. iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, etc.), i. q. ecSolos. Hence used a. of things which on account of some connection with God possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as places sacred to God which are not to be profaned, Acts vii. 33; tottoj ayios the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on which pass, see ^BfKvyiia, c); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29 ; ii. 18 ; to Syiov and Tfl uyia [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. is. 1, 24 (cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec, that part of the temple or tabernacle which is called ' the holy place' (L:'"1p3, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2 [here Rec'.' reads dyi'a] ; ayia aylav [W. 246 (231), cf. Ex. xxix. 37; xx.x. 10, etc.] the most iiallowed portion of the temple, ' the holy of hohes,' (Ex. xxvi. 33 [cf . Joseph. aryioi ar/vi^a. antt. 3, 6, 4]), Heb. ix. 3, in ref. to which the simple TO dyia is also used : Heb. ix. 8, 25 ; x. 19 ; xiii. 11 ; fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8, 12 ; x. 19 ; dyi'a TroXtr Jerusalem, on accoimt of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5 ; xxTii. 53; Rer. xi. 2; xxi. 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlviii. 2; Neh. xi. 1, 18 [Compl.], etc.) ; to opos to ayiov, because Christ's transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18 ; ^ {6(ov) ayla SiadrjKT] i. e. which is the more sacred be- cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72 ; to aywv, that worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35 ; the blessing of the gospel, ilt. vii. 6 ; dyicoTaT;/ jticttis, faith (q u a e creditur i.e. the object of faith) which came from God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude 20 ; in the same sense dyia ivroKr), 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; icX^tris ay'ia, because it is the invitation of God and claims us as his, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; ayiai ypacpal (to /3i(3Xi'a ra ayia. 1 Mace. xii. 9), which came from God and contain his words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God employs ; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5 ; angels, 1 Th. iii. 13 ; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec] ; Rev. xiv. 10 ; Jude 14 ; prophets, Acts iii. 21 ; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (oj) ayioi (toC) 5fo0 avSpamoi, 2 Pet. i. 21 [R G L Tr txt.] ; worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their pietv", Mt. xxvii. 52 ; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God, to be, as it were, exclusively Ttis ; foil, by a gen. or dat. : Tu Kvpla, Lk. ii. 23 ; tou Geoi) (i. q. e/cXficror tov 6eov) of Christ, ilk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34, and'acc. to the true reading in Jn. vi. 69, rf. x. 36 ; he is called also o ayios nais Toil 6eov, Acts iv. 30, and simply 6 ayios, 1 Jn. ii. 20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the title ol aytot, because God selected them from the other nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22 ; 2 Esdr. viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the Jf. T. transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se- lected cK ToC Kocrpov (.In. xvii. 14, 16), that under the influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered, through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom of God : 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xix. 6), cf. vs. 5 ; Acts ix. 13, 32, 41; xxvi. 10; Ro. i. 7; viii. 27; xii. 13; xvi. 15; 1 Co. vi. 1, 2 ; Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. i. 12 ; Heb. vi. 10; Jude 3 ; Rev. v. 8, etc. ; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints]. 3. of sacrifices and offerings ; prepared for God with solemn rile, pure, clean, (opp. to aKadapros) : 1 Co. vii. 14, (cf. Eph. V. 3) : connected with upapos, Eph. i. 4 ; V. 27 ; Col. i. 22 ; aTTapxn, Ro. xi. 16 ; Ovala, Ro. xii. 1. Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, upright, holy : 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2 ; xi. 44) ; 1 Co. v-ii. 34 ; SiKows K. Syios, of John the Baptist, Iilk. vi. 20 : Syios k. SUaios, of Christ, Acts iii. 14 ; distinctively of him. Rev. iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn. x^'ii. 11; ayiai dvairrpocpal. 2 Pet. iii. 11; vopos and fWoXij. i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii. 1 2 : (piXrjpa, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love, 1 Th. V. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 12 ; Ro. xvi. 16. On the phrase to ayiov nvfvpa and to Trvevpa to ayiov, see TTvevpa, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes, in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq. ; [^Baudissin, Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq. ; Dditzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq. ; esp.] Cremer, AVorterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans, of 2d ed. p. 34 sqq.; Oehler in Herzog xix. 618 sqq.; Zezschwitz, Pro- fangracitat u.s.w. p. 15 sqq. ; Trench § Ixxxviii. ; Camj>- bell. Dissertations, diss, vi., pt. iv.; Tittmann p. 22 sqq.]. a.-^\.6Tr\'i, -jfTos, Tj, sanctity, m a moral sense; holiness: 2 Co. i. 12 L T Tr WH ; Ileb. xii. 10. (Besides only in 2 Mace. xv. 2 ; [cf. W. 25, and on words of this termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) * dYUi)o-vvi) [on the a see reft', in iyaduxTvi/ri, init.], -ijr, fi, a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 (64)] ; 1. (God's incomparable) majesty, (joined to peyaXoTrpiireLa, Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 6, cf. cxliv. (c.\lv.) 5) : nv(vpa dytaa-virrjs a spirit to which belongs dyiaxrvi/r], not equiv. to irvcvpa ayiov, but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted with his aap^, Ro. i. 4 ; cf. Riickert ad loc, and Zeller in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf. Mey. ad loc. ; Gifford (in the Speaker's Com.). Most commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness^. 2. moral purity : 1 Th. iii. 13 ; 2 Co. vii. 1.* d-yKoXT), -lyy, ^, {dyKj), dyxas [fr. r. ak to bend, curve, cf. Lat. uncus, angulus, Eng. angle, etc. ; cf. Curtius § 1 ; Vanicek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm : Se^aaOai ds Toy dyKa\ai, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also said ayKas \a^€'tv, iv dyKoKaii ireptfjiipeiv, etc., see ivay- Ko^i^opai. [(From Aesehyl. and Hdt. down.)] * ciYKio-Tpov, -ov, TO, (fr. an unused dyKi^a to angle [see the preceding word]), a fish-hook : Mt. xvii. 27.* a-yKupa, -as, rj, [sec dyicdXij], an anchor — [ancient an- chors resembled modern in form : were of iron, provided with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities with- out flukes; see Diet, of Antiq. p. 791 ; Jas. Smith, Voy- age and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed. 1866 p. 202 sq.] : ptTTTciv to cast (Lat. Jacere), Acts xxvii, 29 ; (icreiveiv, vs. 30 ; TTfpiaipeiv, vs. 40. Figuratively, any stay or safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19; Eur. Hec. 78 (80); HeUod. vii. p. 352 (350).* aTvo^os, -on, o, ^, (yfdffTo) to dress or full cloth, cf. appa(pos), unmilled, unfulled, undressed : Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii.21. [Cf. iloeriss. V. oCTajiToz': Thom. IM.ag. p. 12, 14.]* dYV£(a [WH dyvia (see I, t)], -as, 17, {dyvfiat), purity, sinlessness of life : 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Xazirite, Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] * dyvi^u ; 1 aor. r/yvKra : pf. ptcp. act. i)yviKais : pass. fjyvurpevos; 1 aor. pass. ^yj'iVft)i'[W. 252(237)]; (dyvos); to purify ; 1. ceremonially : ipavrov, Jo. xi. 55 (to cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices) ; the pass, has a reflexive force, to take upon one's self a purijica- tion. Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (TTH, Num. vi. 3), and is used of Xazirites or those who had taken upon them- selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement and from shaving the head [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Nazarite]. 2. morally : tos KapSlas, Jas. iv. 8 ; Tar yjfvxds, 1 Pet. i. 22; iavTov, 1 Jn. iii. 3. (Soph., Eur., Plut., al.)* dr/viv dv6pa77av, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked) men. But dyopdfco does not mean redeem (t^ayopd^to), — as is commonly said. [COMP. : f'^-ayopdftj.] d'yopavos (rarely -ai'a), -aioi/, (dyopd), relating to the market-place; 1. frequenting the market-place, (either transacting business, as the KanrjXot, or) sauntering idly, (Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus, Germ. Pflastertretcr,- our loafer) : Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 c. dyopaiot kcu <|)aCXoi, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually transacted in the market-place : dyopaiot (sc. Ijpepai [W. 590 (549)] or o-woSot [Mey. et al.]) tlyovrai, judicial days or assemblies, [A. V. mrg. court-days]. Acts xix. 38 (tos dyopai'ous woifiCT^ai, Strabo 13, p. 932), but many think we ought to read a'yopaiot here, so G L cf. W. 53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc; Lipsius, Gram. Untcrsuch. p. 26;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5; Gdttling p. 297; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].» dypo, -Of, )j, [ny'^l i ■'■• a calrldng, hunting: Lk. v. 4. 2. the thing cauglU : ij aypa tcbv Ix^vav ' the catch or haul of fish' i. e. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.* d-ypd|i|jiaTos, -OK, [ypd/tfia], illiterate, without learning:- Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 ypdppara pi) pfpadrjKas).* dyp-ovXtu, -(o ; lo be an I'iypavXos {I'lypos, avXrj), i. e. to live in the fields, be under the open sky, even by night i Lk. ii. 8, (StVabo p. 301 a. ; Plut. Num. 4).' w^pevca 9 ay ay d7pEV(i> : 1 aor. fjypevira ; (nypa) ; tn catch (properly, wild animals, fishes) : fig., Mk. xii. 13 ij/a airov dypcva-acn. Xoya) in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re- mark elicited from him in conversation, of. Lk. xx. 20. (In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of love, captivate; of. jTayiScvo), Mt. xxii. 15; aayqviva, Lcian. Tim. 25.) * ctYpi-eXatos, -oi/, {ayptos and €\acos or iXaia, like dypcdp- TreXof) ; 1. of or belonginr/ to the oleaster, or ivild olive, ((TKVTciXrjv dypd'Kai.ov, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [cf. Lob. Para- hp. p. 376]); spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2. As subst. f) aypifXaios the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to KoKKieKmos [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 6]), also called by the Greeks Konvoi, Ro. xi. 24; cf. Fritzscheon Rom.vol. ii. 495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive , and Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377, ' the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster or Oil-tree '.]* a-ypios, -a, -01', {dypos), [fr. Horn, down]; 1. living or growing in the Jields or the woods, used of animals in a state of nature, and of plants which grow without culture : p.i\i ayptov wild honey, either that which is deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [cf. vs. 2G]), etc., or more cor- rectly that which distils from certain trees, and is gath- ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sio. 19, 94 fin. speaking of the Nabathncan Arabians says (piierai. irap' avTois p€\t TToXv To KaXovpei^ov dypiov. w ^ptovrai ttqtw fieff vSaros; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer s. v. dxpi's) : JMt. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6. 2. fierce, untamed : Kvpara ffaXda-cnji, Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).* 'AYpCmras, -a (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. CO (59) ; B. 20 (18)), 6, see 'HptiSi/r, (3 and) 4. ctypos, -ov, 6, [fr. dya ; prop, a drove or driving-place, then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager, Germ. Acker, Eng. acre; Fick, Ft. i. p. 8] ; a. a field, the country: Jit. vi. 28; xxiv. 18; Lk.xv. 15; [Mk. xi. 8 TTr WPI], etc. b. i. q. x'^p'^o", apiece of land, bit of tillage : Acts iv. 37 ; Mk. X. 29 ; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. c. oi dypoi the farms, country-seats, neighboring hamlets : Mk. v. 14 (opp. to jToXis) : vi. 36 ; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Horn, on.)] aypvTvvia, -a ; (dypimvos equiv. to diJTrvos) ; to be sleep- less, keep awake, watch, (i. q. yprjyopea [see below]) ; [fr. Theognis down] ; trop. to be circumspect, attentive, ready : Mk. xiii. 33 ; Lk. xxi. 36 ; us n, to be intent upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18 ; iwep twos, to exercise con- stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from shepherds), Ileb. xiii. 17. \fiY^. dypvwvelv, yprjyo- pei-v, vrjCpfiv: ^' dypvumv may be taken to express sim- ply . . . absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of it when due to nature, and thence a wakeful frame of mind as opposed to listlessness ; while yprjyopeiv (the offspring of iypr)yopa) represents a waking state as the effect of some arousing effort . . . i. e. a more stir- ring image than the former. The group of svnonyms is completed by urjcpav, which signifies a state untouched by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence, one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or bewilderment. Tlius it becomes a term for wariness (cf. vdcf)f Ka\ pijivaa dnuTTelv) against spiritual dangers and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, etc." Green, Crit. Notes on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]* d'ypuirvto, -as, 17, sleeplessness, watching : 2 Co. vi. 5 ; xi. 27. [From Ildt. down.]* aya; impf. ^ov; fut. a^w ; 2 aor. ^'yayov.inL dyayuv, (more rarely 1 aor. ^fa, in eVdyu 2 Pet. ii. 5) ; Pass., pres. dyopai; impf. r]y6pr)v\ 1 aor. rjx6i}v; 1 fut. dxdrj- o-o/xat; [fr. Horn, down]; to drive, lead. 1. propci-ly [A. V. ordinarily, to bring"] ; a. to lead by laying- hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti- nation : of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7 ; Lk. xix._ 35 ; Mk. xi. 7 (T Tr WH (pepova-iv) ; [Lk. xix. 30] ; rivd foil, by ds with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 c] ; x. 34 ; (Jlyayov k- flariyayov (Is. Lk. xxii. 54) ; Jn. xviii. 28 ; Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [R G] ; xxi. 34 ; xxii. 5, 24 Rec. ; xxiii. 10, 31 ; eni with ace, Acts xvii. 19; eiar, Lk. iv. 29; jrpds riva, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii. 40 ; Acts ix. 27 ; Jn. viii. 3 [Rec.]. b. to lead by accnm- panying to (into) any place: els, Acts xi. 26 (25) ; ewj, Acts xvii. 15 ; npos Tiva, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ix. 13; Acts xxiii. 18; foil, by dat. of pers. to whom, Acts xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B. 284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 ayeii/ avrois airw). C. to lead with one's self, attach to one's self as an attendant r Tivd, 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; 1 Th. iv. 14, (Joseph, antt. 10, 9. 6 d-nrjpev fls TrjU A'iyvTTTOv dymv Koi 'Upeplav). Some refer Acts xxi. IC to this head, resolving it dyovres Mi/da-ava nap' M ^evujOapfv, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as above. d. to conduct, bring: nvd, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn. vii. 45; [.\ix. 4, 13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 37; xx. 12; .xxv. 6, 23; n&lov, Mk. xi. 2 (where T Tr WH epfre) ; [Lk. xix. 30, see a. above] ; rud tivl or t/ tivi, Mt. xxi. 2 ; Acts xiii. 23 G L T Tr WH. e. to lead away, to a court of justice, magistrate, etc. : simply, Mk. xiii. 11 ; [Acts xxv. 17] ; iwi with ace, Mt. x. 18; Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH aTTayopivovs) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1] ; Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic)| ; [irpds with ace, Jn. xviii. 13 L TTr AVH]; to punishment : simply (2 Mace. vi. 29; vii. 18, etc.), Jn. xLx. 16 Grsb. (R koL dnfiyayov, which L T Tr W^H have expunged) ; with telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 32; [foil, hy Tva, Mk. xv. 20 Lchm.]; «Vi o-^ayjj!/. Acts viii. 32, (tVi Bavdrai, Xcn. mem. 4, 4, 3 ; an. 1, 6, 10). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, guide, direct: Jn. x. 16; us perdt'otap, Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead through, conduct, to something, become the author of good or of evil to some one : us So^av, Hcb. ii. 10, (fit [al. fTTi] Ku\oKdya6Lav, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14 ; us 8ov\fiav. Dem. p. 213, 28). c. to move, impel, of forces and influences affecting the mind : Lk. iv. 1 (where read fV T^ iprjpio [with L t.xt. T Tr WH]) ; nvevpari dfov dyeadai. Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; imSvpiais, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim- ply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2 — unless imr pelled by Satan's in/luence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20; Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) S().]. 3. to pass a day, keep or celebrate a feast, etc : Tplrriv fjpepav dyei sc. 6 'l3-paijX, Lk. xxiv. 21 [others (sec Meyer) supply avros uyayr] 10 aSeX(|)09 •or 6 'lijo-oCs; still others take nyci as impers., one passes, Vulf. lerlia dies csl ; see B. 134 (118)] ; ytvcaiav ayo/ii- vav, Mt. xiv. 6 R G ; cjyopaiot (q. V. 2), Acts xix. 38 ; often in the O. T. Apocr. (of. Wa/d, Clavis Apocr. s. v. uyai, 3). in Ildt. an. Syn. cf. Schmidt eh. 105.] ayotyi], -^s, fj, (fr. uya>, like iSaSt] fr. ?8a>); 1. prop- erlv, a leading. 2. fii^iiratively, a. trans, a conduct- ing, training, education, discijiline. b. intrans. the life led, tray or course of life (a use wliich arose from the fuller expression aywyi) toD ffinv, in Polyb. 4, 74, 1. 4 ; cf. Germ. Lehensfiihrung) : 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. V. cotuluct^, (Esth. ii. 20 ; 2 Mace. iv. IG ; ij e'" Xpiaro) aymyfj, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; ayvi; dyaryt'i, ibid. 48, 1). Often in prof. auth. in all these senses.* 6.ywv, -uivos, 6, (ayu); 1. a place of assemhhj (Horn. II. 7, 298; 18, 37G) ; spec, the place in which the Greeks assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian, the Olympian) ; hence 2. a contest, of athletes, run- ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase (used by the Greeks, see rpix'"' b.) Tpiy^^iv tov dyHiva, Ileb. xii. 1, th.at is to say ' Amid all hindrances let iis «xert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of perfection set before the followers of Christ ' ; any struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing in the way of faitli, holiness, and a desire to spread the gospel: iTh. ii. 2 ; Phil. i. 30 ; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 7. b. intense solicitude, nnxielg: irepi nvo!, Col. ii. 1 [ef. Eur. Ph. 1 350 ; Polyb. 4, 56, 4]. On the ethical use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf. Grimm on Sap. iv. 1 ; [Hoirson, Bletaphors of St. Paul, Essay iv. ; Conyh. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St. Paul, eh. XX.; Mc. and S. iii. 733" sq. ; BB.DD. s. v. Games].* oiYoivCa, -as, tj; 1. i. q. dytlf, which see. 2. It is often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 ?jv 6 ■^tXcTTTToy cV ep dyavla Koi Sefi). [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii. on Lk. 1. c.] * d-yti>vi^O)iai. ; im^f. Tjyavi^oprjV, pf. ^ymj/itr/jae; a depon. mid. verb [ef. W. 260 (244)] ; (ciyiiv) ; 1. to enter a contest; contend in the gymnastic games: 1 Co. ix. 25. 2. nniv. to contend tvith adveisaries, fight : foil, by iva jirj, 3ii. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, tvit/t difficulties and dangei-s antagonistic to the gospel: Col. i. 29 ; 1 Tim. iv. 10 (L T Tr txt. WH txt. ; for Ree. 6vfiBi(6pe6a) ; dyatvl^opni dyUva (often used by the Greeks also, esp. the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7. 4. to endearor rcith strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain something ; foil, by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24 ; virip twos iv Tois irpocrevxats, iva, Col. iv. 12. [CoMr. : dvT-, in-, Kar-, avv-ayiovi^opcu.l* 'ASd)!, indecl. ])rop. name (l)ut in Joseph. 'ASofios, -ov), nns (i. e. ace. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 ed. Mang., yffivos ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 ytjytvris ; ace. to Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 2 nvppos, with which Gesenius agrees, sec bis Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first man and the parent of the whole human race : Lk. iii. 38 ; Ro. v. 14; 1 Co. XV. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq. ; Jude 14. In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the former Adam ( [lufNin D"!K), the first man, the author of ' all our woe,' and the latter Adam (iiinsn D"iX), the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ is called 6 eo-xaros 'aSq^ (see eaxaTos, 1) and contrasted with 6 nputTOS uvdpionos ', Ro. v. 14 6 /jeXXeop sc. ASap, [2. nue of tlie ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WII mrg. (ct'A8pclv).y dSdTravos, -ov, (Sanavrf), icithout expense, reijiiiring no outlay : 1 Co. ix. 1 8 (Iva d^unavov Grja-o) to cvayyiTKiov 'that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous').* •A88C or 'ASSei T Tr WII [see 117/. Apj). p. 155, and s.v.€i,i], 6, the indecl. prop, name of one of the ances- tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.* d8eX<|)-fj, -Tjs, f), (see dSe\(f>6s), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sis- ter; 1. a. full, otrn sister (i.e. by birth) : Mt. xix. 29 ; Lk. X. 39 sq. ; Jn. xi. 1, 3, 5 ; xix. 25 ; Ro. xvi. 15, etc. ; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in IMt. xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see dSfX0of, 1. 2. one connected l/y the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; ix. 5 ; Philem. 2 L T Tr WII ; Jas. ii. 15 ; with a .subj. gen., a Christian woman especially dear to one, Ro. xvi. 1. d8£\(t>ol: Mt. V. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. x-viii. 15) ; vii. 23; xxii. ■5 ; xxviii. 15, 21 ; Ro. ix. 3 ; in address, Acts ii. 29 ; iii. 17 ; xxiii. 1 ; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix. 1 7 the word nx is used interchangeably with ^'"1 (but, as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of Israelites), so in the sayings of Christ, ^It. v. 22, 24 ; vii. 3 sqq., dfifX<^or is used for 6 nXrjatov to denote (as appears from Lk. x. 29 sqq.) any filtou_--man, — as having one and the same father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de- scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26) ; cf. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to another by the bond of affection ; so most frequently of ■Christians, constituting as it were but a single family : Mt. xxiii. 8 ; Jn. xxi. 23 ; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.] ; ix. 30; xi. 1 ; Gal. i. 2 ; 1 Co. v. 11 ; Phil. i. 14, etc. ; in courteous address, Eo. i. 13 ; vii. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; 1 Jn. fi. 7 Ecc, and often elsewhere ; yet in the phraseology of John it has reference to the new life unto which men are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father, even God : 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq. ; iii. 10, 14, etc., cf. v. 1. 5. an associate in employment or office : 1 Co. i. 1 ; 2Co.i.l;ii.l3(12); Eph.vi.21; Col.i.l. 6. brethren ■of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood ; see 1 above, b. all men : Mt. xxv. 40 [Lclun. br.] ; Heb. ii. 11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] c. apostles: Mt. xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are destined to be exalted to the same heavenly 8o|a (q. v. HI. 4 b.) which he enjoys : Ro. viii. 29. dS€X(j>6n^s, -TjTos, 7J, brotherhood ; the abstract for the concrete, a band of brothers i. e. of Christians, Chris- tian brethren : 1 Pet. ii. 17 ; v. 9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17, the connection of allied nations ; 4 Mace. ix. 23 ; x. 3, the connection of brothers; Die Chrys. ii. 137 [ed. Reiske] ; often in eccl. writ.) * a-8ii\os, -01/, (S^Xos), not manifest: Lk. xi. 44; indis- tinct, uncertain, obscure : (jxuvfi, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk. auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. S^Xor,fin.; Schmidt ch. 130.]* dSriXoTijs, -ijTOf, ^, uncertainly: 1 Tim. vi. 17 itkovTov «ISt/Xott/ti equiv. to wXoiItm dSijXm, cf. W. § 34, 3 a. [Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]'* olStiXus, adv., uncertainly:,! Co. ix. 26 ovrai rpi^^ai, iis ovK dSijXuf i. e. not uncertain whither; cf. Me v. ad loc. [(Thuc, al.)]* dSii|iov€'w, -a ; (fr. the unused d8i;/imj/, and this fr. a priv. and Srjiios; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at home, cf. Germ, uriheimisch, unhcinilich ; cf. Bttm. Le.xil. ii. 136 [Fishlake's trans, p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol. Proleg. p. 238, cf. p. 160) et al. connect it with aSripwv, M^crai ; see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 26]) ; to be troubled, distressed : Mt. xxvi. 37 ; Mk. xiv. 33 ; Phil. ii. 26. (Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 3 dSrjiiovrja-ai ras yj/vxdi, and often in prof, auth.) * "AiSijs, aSr)9, -ov, 6, (for the older 'AiStjs, which Hom. uses, and this fr. a priv. and IBeiv, not to be seen, [cf. Lob. Path. Element, ii. 6 sq.]) ; in the classics 1. a prop, name, Hades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions ; so in Hom. always. 2. an appellative, Orcus, the nether world, the nabn of the dead [cf. Tlieoer. idyll. 2, 159 scliol. t^v tov abov Kpovfi TTvKrjV tovt' etTTLV aiToBave'iTai]. In the Sept. the Hebr. SlKU' is almost always rendered by this word (once by Bavaros, 2 S. xxii. 6) ; it denotes, therefore, in bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x. 21) and dismal place (but cf. yievva and TrapaSeitrof) in the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8 ; Is. h ii. 9 ; Am. ix. 2, etc. ; see a/3u(r(rot), the common receptacle of disembodied spirits : Lk. xvi. 23 ; tit aSou sc. hofiov. Acts ii. 27, 31, ace. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W. 592 (550) [B. 171 (149)] ; (but L T Tr WH in vs. 27 and T WH in both verses read els a$i]v; so Sept. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10); TniXai adov, Mt. xvi. 18 (TrvKoipoi aSov, Job xxxviii. 17; see ttuXtj) ; (cXeir toO aSov, Rev. i. 18; Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L T Tr WH read dii^are for R G aSr, [cf. Acts ii. 24 Tr mrg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx. 13 sq. Metaph. cios aSou [koto- ffaivftv or] KaTafii^a^eoBai to [go or] be thrust down into the depth of misery and disgrace : INIt. xi. 23 [here L Tr WH Kara^alvdv'] ; Lk. X. 15"[here Tr mrg. WH txt. KaTaPaiveiv]. [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. v.'AiSijr in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades cf. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii. pp. 261-406 ; on the doctrinal significance of the word see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rev. pp. 364-377.]* d-8id-KpiTos, -01/, (StaKpiVii) to distinguish); 1. undis- tinguished and undislinguishable: vfj, Polyb. 15, 12, 9; \6yos, Lcian. Jup. Trag. 25 ; for in3. Gen. i. 2 Svmm. 2. icithout dubious7iess, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see 8iaKp!va>, Pass, and Mid. 3 [al. without variance, cf. Sta- Kpivto, 2]) : Tj avtadfv a'ooph. Lex. s.v. Useii from Hippocr. down.]).* dSidXttTTTos, -ov, (SioXetVm to intermit, leave off), uninter- milleil, unceasing : Ro. ix. 2 ; 2 Tim. i. 3. [Tim. Locr. 98 e.j* dSiaXetiTTus, adv., without intermission, incessantly, as- siduously : Ro. i. 9 ; 1 Th. i. 2 (3) ; ii. 1 3 ; v. 1 7. [Polyb., Diod., Strabo; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]* d-8io-4>9opia, -as, rj, (fr. d8i.a(j)6opos incorrupt, incor- ruptible ; and this from d8ia(^5fi'pm\ incorruptibility, soundness, integrity : of mind, iv rij SiBaaKoXia, Tit. ii. 7 (L T Tr WH d(ji6opiav). Xot found in the classics.* dSiKc'u), -&! ; [fut. d6i(ci)(Ta)] ; 1 aor. Tj&iKrjaTO (o TjbUrjiTe ' the wrong which he hath done '). b. rtva, to irroiii/ some one, act wirkedJ if towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13 (by fraud) ; 2 Co. vii. 2 ; pass. aSiiceio-^ai to be wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. ahiKoxJjiai to suffer one's self to be wronged, take wrong [W. § 38, 3 ; cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 87 sq.] : 1 Co. vi. 7; Tiva ovSiv [B. § 131, 10; W. 227 (213)], Acts XXV. 10; Gal. iv. 12; riva ti, Philem. 18; [ahiKoifKvoi iuv aiiKias (R. V. suffering wrong , 2 b. fin.], b. spec, unrighteousness by which others are deceived: Jn. vii. IS (opp. to d\rj6iis) : fiafiwvds rrjs dBiKias deceitful riches. Lk. xvi. 9 (cf. dTrdnj roij ttXoutov, Mt. xiii. 22 ; others think ' riches wrongly acquired ' ; [others, riches apt to be used unrighteously; cf. vs. 8 and Mey. ad loc.]) ; Kocriioi ttjs dSiKias, a phrase having ref- erence to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. Koofios, 8) ; treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (oixovo/iof r^r dSixias, [al. take it generally, 'acting unrighteously']). 3. a deed violat- ing law and justice, net of unrighteousness : irdaa dSiKia dfiapTia icrrl, 1 Jn. v. 17; fpydrai Trjs dSiKias, Lk. xiii. 27 ; al dSiiciui iniquities, misdeeds, Ileb. viii. 12 (fr. .Sept. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34 ; cf. Dan. iv. 20 (24)) ; iiiados dStKias reward obtained by wrong-doing, Acts i. IS; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; spec, the wrong of depriving another of what is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically called d&iKta).* aSiKos, -ov, (StKri), [fr. lies, down] ; descriptive of one who violates or has violated justice ; 1. un/'ust, (of God as judge) : Ro. iii. .5 ; Heb. vi. 10. 2. of one who breaks God's laws, unrighteous, sinful, (see dSiKia, 2) : [1 Co. vi. 9] ; opp. to SUaws. Mt. v. 45 ; Acts xxiv. 15 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; opp. to fi-o-ffSi/s. 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; in this sense ace. to Jewish speech the GentUes are called SSiKoi, 1 Co. vi. 1 (see d/iapT5, r/, {adfTfO), q. V. ; like vovdiTr)(Tii fr. vov9(Tf~tv), aliolition : Heb. vii. 18 ; ix. 26 ; (found occa- sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9 ; Diog. Laert. 3, 30, C6 : in the grammarians rejection ; more frequently in eccl. writ.).* 'A9rivat, -(oi/, ai, (on the plur. of. W. 176 (166)), Athens, the most celebrated city of Greece : Acts xvii. 15 sq. ; xviii. 1 ; 1 Th. iii. 1.* 'ABtivoIos, -aia, -alov, Athenian : Acts xvii. 21 sq.» aSXc'tu, -i ; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. affXrja-jjl ; {a0\os a contest) ; to enrjarje in a contest, contend in the public f/anics (Olynq)ian, Pythian, Isthmian), with the poniard, the gauntlet, the quoit, in wrestling, running, or any other way : 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; (often in classic auth. who also use the form aB\eva). [CoMP. : avv-affXea.^ * a8\T|o-is, -eas, ij, contest, combat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down) ; fig. aflXijo-tr -naBrfiiaTosv a struggle with sufferings, trials, Heb x. 32 ; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4 ; Clem. mart. 25].* ofipol^u : pf. pass. ptcp. Tj8poia-n(POS ; (fr. ddpoos i. q. 6p6os [a noisy crowd, noise], with a copulative [see A, a, 2]) ; lo collect together, assemble; pass, to be assembled, to convene : Lk. xxiv. 33 L T Tr WH. ([Soph.,] Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al. ; O. T. Apocr. ; sometimes in Sept. for ]'3p.) [CoMP. : tn--, (rui>-a6pol^, -(5 ; common among the Greeks fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down; to be aBvpos (dvp.6s spirit, courage), to be disheartened, diipirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21. (Sept. 1 S. i. 6 sq., etc.; Judith vii. 22; 1 Mace. iv. 27.)* oSuos [R G Tr], more correctly dd^os (LAVH and T [but not in liis Sept. There is want of agreement among both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars ; of. Steph. Thes. i. col. 875 c. ; Lob. Path. Element, i. 440 sq. (cf. ii. 377) ; see 1, i]), -ov, (6fi [i. c. Ba:'iTi, cf. Etym. Mag. p. 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat, down], unpunished, innocent : alpa ddaov, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt. SUaiov], (Deut. xxvii. 25 ; 1 S. xix. 5, etc. ; 1 Mace. i. 37 ; 2 Mace. i. 8) ; ana rtvos, after the Hebr. ]P 'pj ([Num. xxxii. 22 ; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41-; 2 S. iii. 28 ; W. 197 (185); B. 158 (138)]), 'innocent (and therefore far) from,' innocent of, Matt, xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur- der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; djr» T^f afjLaprlat, Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. v. 31]. The Greeks say dBaus rtvos [both in the sense of free from and Jinpunished for"].' atYcios [WU -ytof ; see theii- Ajip. p. 154, and I, j], -eia, -tiov. (atf, gen. -yds goat, male or female), of a goat, (cf. KafiTj^eius, twTTfios, ueioc, irpo^arfios, etc.) : Ileb. xi. 37. [From Horn, down.]* at7iaXo's, -ov, 6, the shore of the .s-ea, beach, [fr. Ilom. down] : jNIt. xiii. 2, 48 ; Jn. xxi. 4 ; Acts xxi. 5 : xxvii. 39, 40. (JIany derive the word from liympi and aXs, as though C()uiv. to oKTr], the place where the sea breaks ; others fr. aiyfs l)illovvs and aXs [Curtius § 140; Vanicek p. 83] ; others fr. atcau) and oXf [Schenkl, L. and S., s. v.], the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.)* AIyvittios, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian : Acta vii. 22, 24, 28 ; xxi. 38 ; Ileb. xi. 29.* Atvwirros, -ov, ij, [always without the art., B. 87 (76) ; W. § 18, 5 a.], the proper name of a well-known coun- try, Egypt : Mt. ii. 13 sq. ; Acts ii. 10 ; Heb. iii. 16, etc. ; more fully yri hlyvTiTOi. Acts vii. 3G [not L WH Tr txt.], 40 ; xiii."l7 ; Heb. viii. 9 ; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12 ; vi. 26, etc. ; 1 Mace. i. 19 ; Bar. i. 19 sq., etc.) ; fiyfj Aiyvwros, Acts vii. 11 ; Iv hlyirrrov sc. yfi, Heb. xi. 26 Lchm., but cf. Bleek ad loc. ; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)]. In Rev. xi. 8 Ai'y. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e. for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and his followers, and so to be likened to the Egyptians in their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeav- ors to crush lus peo[)le. dCSios, -ov, (for ddhios fr. nei), eternal, everlasting : (Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20: Jude 6. (Ilom. hymn. 29, 3; Hes. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (fu^ dthioi), § 31 ; de opif. mund. § 2, § 61 ; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3 ; de post. Cain. § 11 fin. Syx. see ala>vioi\.) ' a(Su$, (joot) -ovs, fi; fr. Hom. down; a sense of shame, modrsli/ : 1 Tim. ii. 9 : reverence, Heb. xii. 28 CKaTpdfiv 6(a pera alSovs Ka\ fi>Xa(3fi'aj. but L T Tr WH dXa^fias Km 3fouf). [Syn. atSwf. alo-xvvrj : Anunonius distin- "■uislies the words as ff)llows. ntSw? kol aiCT^diT? 8La(f)(pei., oTi rj p(v alhuii iariv cvrpoTrfj Trpot fKacrrov. oit aejiopivais ■fis evfi ■ alcrxivT) 8' ecj> oFr cKaaros c'lpaprwi/ al(7}(VV(Tat. uis pr) Senv Ti irpa^as. Koi aldflrai ptv Tis tov jraTipa ■ ala-xvve- Tai be OS pe6i(TKerai, etc., etc. ; accordingly ai8. is promi- nently objective in its reference, having regard to others; while ai to burn, and &<^ [S\/^] the face ; swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. "d\i) : Acts viii. 27, here alfia 15 atfwppoeo> the reference is to tipper Ethiopia, called Habesh or Abyssinia, a country of Africa adjoining Egjpt and including the island Meroe ; [see Dillmann in Schenkel i. 285 sqq. ; Alex.'s Kitto or Mc. and S. s. v. Ethiopia. Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515].* al(ia, -rof, to, blood, whether of men or of animals ; 1. a. simply and generally : Jn. xLx. 34 ; Rev. viii. 7 sq. ; xi. 6 ; xvi. 3 sq. 6 ' (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 20 sqq.) ; xix. 13 ; pvs, ^, {alvea), prniai-. Bvala.aiviaeai (n3T minn, Lev. vU. 13), Ilcb. xiii. 15 a thimk-offarhifj, [A. V. ' .sacrifice of i)raise '], presented to God for .some benefit received; see Bvirla.h. (aii/eo-it often occurs in Sept., but not in prof, auth.) *■ atve'u, -a ; (found in prof. auth. of every age [" only twice in good Attic prose " (where Irraiv. irapaiv. etc. take its plaee), Veitch], but esp. freq. in Sejjt. and tlie Apocr. of the O. T. ; from alvos); to praise, extol: tov Geoii, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 37; xxiv. 53 [WII om. Tr txt. br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sip; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of person, tm 6ea, to sin;/ praises in honor of God, Rev. xix. 5 l't Tr WII, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for h niin), 1 Clir. xvi. 3G ; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 etc. (for 4 SH'n) ; [W. § 31, If.; B. 17G (153). CoMP. iv-, wap- aiif'ti).].* allviY(ia, -Tof, to, (common fr. [Find. frag. 165 (190),] Aescliyl. down ; fr. ainVo-o^jui or amTTo/xai Tt to express something obscurely, [fr. alvos, q. v.]) ; 1. an obscure sai/ini/, an enitpna, Ilebr. Tn'Vi (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept. TtpoliXrjpa). 2. an obscure tliinr/: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where 61/ alfiypaTi. is not equiv. to alviyfianKois i. c. dpavpas ohsciire/ij, but denotes the object in the discerning of which we are engaged, as fiXiirfiv tv tivi, Mt. vi. 4 ; of. De Wette ad loc. ; the apostle has in mind Num. xii. .8 Sept. : «I/ flifi Koi oh 81 alviy/iarav. [Al. take e'v lo- cally, of the sphere in which we are looking ; al. refer the pass, to 1. and take iv instruracntally.] * olvos, -ov, 6, (often used by the Grk. poets) ; 1. « sayiiit/, proverb. 2. praise, laudator;/ discourse: Mt. -xxi. 10 (Ps. viii. 3) ; Lk. xviii. 43.* Atvwv, ij, (either a strengthened form of [;>• and equiv. to ]yy,, or a Chaldaic plur. i. (|. Jiy^'sjjrings; [al. al.]), Aenon, indecl. prop, name, either of a place, or of a fountain, not far from Salim : Jn. iii. 23, [thought to be Wady Far'ah, running from ^It. Ebal to the Jordan ; see Conder'm ''Pal. Explor. Fund" for July 1874,p.l91 sq.; Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq. ; esp. Stevens in Journ.of E.xeget. Soc, Dec. 1883, pp. 128-141. Cf. B.D. Am. cd.].* aip«triSi -fwj, v> ^' (f'"- u'V^w), (wt of takin//, cap- ture : Ttjs TToXfuf, the storming of a city ; in prof. auth. 2. (fr. ai'pfo/iai), choosing, choice, very often in prof, writ. : Sept. Lev. xxii. 18; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that v}hich is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action ; hence one's chosen opinion, tenet ; ace. to the context, an opinion varying from the true exposition of the Christian faith {heresy) : 2 Pet. ii. 1 (ef. De Wette ad loc), and in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. a boily of men separating themselves from others and following their own tenets [a sect or partij'] : as the Sad- ducees. Acts v. 17 ; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5; xxvi. 5; the Christians, Acts x.xiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. Laiirt. 1, 13, 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy). 5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and aims : Gal. v. 20 ; 1 Co. xi. 19. [Cf. IMoy. 11. cc. ; B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Sects; Burton, Bampt. Lcct. for 1829; ( '(inipbell, Diss, on tlie Gos])els, dis.s. ix. pt. iv.] • aipcTt^u : 1 aor. fiperiaa [Trcg. ijp., see I, t] ; (fr. uipt- ro£, s('C aipe'o)) ; to choose : Mt. xii. 1 8. (Often in Sejjt. in O. T. Ajjocr. and in eccl. writ. ; the mid. is found in Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Ildt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, ]). 304]. Cf. Stur:, De dial. Maced. etc. ]). 144.) ' alpcTiKos, -rj, -6v, [see ojpfw] ; 1. Jilted or able to take or choose a thing ; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis- matic, factious, a follower of false doctrine : Tit. iii. 10.* aip^u, -S> : [thought by some to be akin to iiypa, dypca, Xfip, VjIV^. r/rip, etc. ; cf. Jittm. Le.xil. i. l.'il — but .see Curtiiis § 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid. onl}- : fut. mpTj(rop.ai ; 2 aor. t iXo/iiji/, but G L T Tr WH (l\apr]u, 2 Th. ii. 13, cf. ['J'df. Prolcg. p. 123; WH. Ap)). p. 1G5;] W. § 13, 1 a.; B. 40(35), see impxapLai init. ; [pttqj. cXo/jej/or, Heb. xi. 25] ; to take for one's self, to choose, prefer : Phil. i. 22 ; 2 Th. ii. 13 ; fj5XXoi/ foil, by inf. with ^ (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Co.Mr. : av-, a(j)-, St-, i^, Ka6-, nipt-, Trpo-aipfa).] * ol'pw (contr. fr. poet, adpt») ; fiit.apw; 1 aor. ^pa, inf. ?ipai, impv. apov, \)L rjpKa (Col. ii. 14); Pass., [pres. ai'po/iai] ; pf. rjppai. (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ijp6i)v; (on the rejection of iota subscr. in these tenses see Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. dp6!i(TopaL; [fr. Iloni. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. Nl/J; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise from the (/round, take up : stones, Jn. viii. 59 ; .serpents, Mk. xvi. 18 ; a dead body. Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up- ivards, elevate, lift up : the hand, Rev. x. 5 ; the eyes, Jn. xi. 41 ; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, cry out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in i)rof. writ.); rrjv ij/vxrjv, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, afl'ect strongly (with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, etc.); in Jn. x. 24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and hope, cf. Liicke [or ilc)-cr] ad loc. c. to drain tip : a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 {dvaairav, Ilab. i. 15); a-Kd(f>r]i/, Acts xxvii. 17; anchors from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii. 13, where supply ras ayKvpas; cf. Kuinoel ad loc; [W. 594 (552) ; B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one's self and carry ichat has been raised, to bear : Tiv'a iirl xtipiov, Mt. iv. C ; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xc (xci.) 12) ; a sick man, Mk. ii. 3 ; fvyoi', INIt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27) ; a bed, Mt. i.x. 6; Mk. ii. 9, 11 sq. ; Lk. v. 24 sq. ; Jn. v. 8-12; rov oravpov, Mt. [x. 38 Lchni. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32; Lk. ix. 23 ; Mk. viii. 34 ; x. 21 [in R Lbr.] ; xv. 21 ; [XMov,] Rev. xviii. 21 ; to carry with one, [A. V. lake'] : Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix. 3 ; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed in class. Grk. by the mid. atptaBai. 3. to bear away what has been raised, carry off: a. to move from its place : Mt. xxi. 21 ; Mk. xi. 23, (("pdtjri be thou taken up, removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place) ; Mt. xxii. 13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; xx. 1. b. to take o//"or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31, 38 sq. ; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 ; to rend away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. c. to remove : 1 Co. v. 2 (cast out from the church, where dp6^ should be read for Rec. c'lap^s) ; tropically: faults, Eph. iv. 31; t-^v alcr6dvofiai 17 aiiaprtav, Jn. i. 29, [36 Lclim. in br.], to remove the guilt and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin be neither imputed nor punished (aip^iu afiap-njfia, 1 S. XV. 25 ; avopriiia, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 ras ajiapTias rjpav aipfiv is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin, while we enter into fellowship with Christ, who is free from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20 ; xv. 37; XX. 14; xxiv. 17 sq. ; IVIk. vi. 29,43; viii. 8, 19 sq. ; xiii. 15 sq. ; Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 31; Jn. xx. 2, 13, 15; Acts XX. 9. e. lo appropriate what is taken : Lk. xix. 21 sq. ; Mk. xv. 24. f. to take away from another what in his or what is committed to him, to take by force: Lk. vi. 3Cr; xi. 52 ; ti dm with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii. 12; xxi. 43; xxv. 28; Lk. viii. 12, 18; xix. 24, 26; [Mt. xxv. 29] ; Mk. iv. (15), 25 ; Jn. x. 18 ; xvi. 22 ; perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom anything is taken, Lk. vi. 29 ; xi. 22 ; Jn. xi. 48, unless one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. g. to take and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to take from amony the lii-ing, either by a natural death, Jn. xvii. 15 (« toO Koapiov take away from intercourse with the world), or by violence, Mt. xxiv. 39 ; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition of QTro Trjs yris, Acts xxii. 22 ; aiperai otto r^r yijs r/ (cafj avTov, of a bloody death inflicted upon one. Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). i. of things ; to take out of the way, de- stroy : xeip6ypa(pov. Col. ii. 14 ; cause to cease : Trjv Kplaiv. Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). [CoMP. : aiv-, c|-, eV-, ps7-, (jvi^. vnep-aipto-l * at(r6avo|iai. : 2 aor. rjoSoinju ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; depon. mid. to perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses ; 2. with the mind ; to understand : Lk. ix. 45.* alVfltio-iSi -fojs, TI, (ala-davopai), [fr. Eurip. down], per- ception, not only by the senses but also by the inteUect ; cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10, etc., i. q. DjJT): Pliil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the understanding of ethical matters, as is plain from what is added in vs. 10.* aUrBriTTipiov, -on, to, an organ of perception, external sense, [Hippoc] ; Plat. Ax. 366 a. ; Aristot. polit. 4, 3, 9, al. ; faculty of the m i n d for perceiving, understanding, judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 aio-^ijr. rijr Kapdlas, 4 Mace. ii. 22 [com. text] to (vbov ala-dtjTripta).* al<7Xp0Kep8tis, -c'y, (alcrxpo! and KepSos: cf. alorxponadfjs in Philo [de mere, meretr. § 4]), eager for base gain, Igreedy of filthy /«ere] : 1 Tim. iii. 3 Rec, 8 ; Tit. i. 7. (Hdt. 1, 187; Xen., Plat., al.; [cf. turpilucricupidus, Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 63].) • aiorxpoKcpSms, adv.,/;-oni eagerness for base gain.\for filthy hirre'\: 1 Pet. v. 2, cf. Tit. i. 11. Xot found elsewhere.* alc^poXoYta, -as, f], (f r. ataxpo\6yos, and tills fr. ala-xpos and \cyo>), foul speaking (Tertidl. turpiloquium), low and obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speakingl : Col. iii. 8. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ; Trench § xxxiv.]* 2 altrxpos, -a, -ov, (fr. alcxos baseness, disgrace), base, dis- honorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i. 11.* aUrxpoTTjs, -rjTOi, r), baseness, dishonor : Eph. v. 4 [A. y.fllhiness}. (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)* atcrxvvT], -ijs, ij, (ai(r;^os [cf. ala-xpos]) ; 1. subjec- tively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything, sense of shame: ficf aitrxivris suffused with shame, Lk. XIV. 9 ; TO KpvTtra t^e alcrxivris those things which shame conceals, opp. to (bavipami t^c aXrjBfias, 2 Co. iv. 2 (evil arts of which one ought to be ashamed). 2. olj- jectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb. xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19 (opp. to Bo^a). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: fj alaxvvr] Ttjs yvpvo-njTos (gen. of appos.) nakedness to be ashamed of, Rev. iii. 18, cf.'xvi. 15 ; plur. [cf. W. 176 (166)] at ala-xvvat basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13. [(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syx. see aiSas, iin.] * otcrxvvw : (aia-xos [cf. aldxpoi^) ; 1. to disfigure : irpoaioTTov, Ilom. H. 18. 24, and man_y others. 2. to dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxix. 15. 3. to suffuse with shame, make ashamed: Sh: xiii. 7. In the X. T. only liass., alaxvvopai; iut. ala-xwdrjo-opaf, 1 aor. ^axvvdrjv; lo be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed : 2 Co. X. 8; Phil. i. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 16; yoiij mVxwte/ici/ air avTov that we may not in shame shrink from him, 1 Jn. ii. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 ala-xwdfia-frai dirb TTpoa-anov [Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13; cf. B. § 147, 2]); foU. by inf. (on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 3. [Co.mpI : eV- (-/jat), Kar-aia'xvva.^* atTf'u, -m ; f ut. alrrjcrco ; 1 aor. fjTrjaa ; pf. ^TTjKa : Mid., pres. aiTovfuii : impf. TJrovptjv ; fut. ahjiaofiai ; 1 aor. TJnia-dprjv : [fr. Horn, down] ; to ask ; mid. to ask for one's self, request for one's self; absol. : Jas. i. 6 ; Mt. vii. 7 ; mid., Jas. iv. 3 ; Jn. xvi. 26 ; Mk. xv. 8 ; ahel- a-Bai T(, Jn. xv. 7 ; Mt. xiv. 7 ; Mk. vi. 24 ; x. 38 ; xi. 24 ; XV. 43 ; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. ; Lk. xxiii. 52 ; Acts xxv.. 3, 15, etc. ; atVeii' with ace. of the pers. to whom the request is made : Mt. v. 42 ; vi. 8 ; Lk. vi. 30 ; aiTeiuBai. with ace. of the pers. asked for — whether to be released, Mt. xxvii. 20 ; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mrg. napair. q. v.] : Lk. xxiii. 25 ; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii. 21 : aiVcii/ ri dm tivos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt. ; [Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH] ; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH ; (so ahe'iadai. in Plut. Galb. 20) [cf. B. 149 (130)] ; t\ napd Ttvoy, Acts iii. 2 ; Mt. xx. 20 R G T Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Jas. i. 5 ; 1 Jn. v. 15 R G ; foil, by the inf., Jn. iv. 9 ; mid.. Acts ix. 2 ; [alrf'tv ti iv t. ovoiian XpioroC. Jn. xiv. 13 ; xvi. 24 (see ovopa, 2 e.) ; ti iv r^ Trpoa-evxfi- Mt. xxi. 22] ; alre'tv rivd ti, Jit. vii. 9 ; Lk. xi. 1 1 ; jlk. vi. 22 ; Jn. [xiv. 14 T but L WH Tr mrg. br.] ; xvi. 23 ; inrip TWOS foU. by 'iva. Col. i. 9 [cf. B. 237 (204)] ; aiVfi- a-Oai with the ace. and inf.. Lk. xxiii. 23 ; Acts iii. 14 ; with inf. only. Acts vii. 46 {fiTijararo fvpeiv he asked that he himself might find ; others wrongly translate ^Trja-aTo desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea of demanding prominent : ahfiv ti, Lk. i. 63 ; 1 Co. i. 22 : Tivd n. Lk. xii. 48 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15. [The constructions of this word in the Greek Bible, the ai.TT]fjUl 18 Apost. Fathers, etc., are exhibited in detail by Prof. Ezra Abbot iu the No. Am. Rev. for Jan. 1872, p. 182 sq. Jle there show» also (in opposition to Trencli, § xl., and otliers) that it is not " the const:mt word for the seeking of tlie infe- ' rior from the superior," anil .so diffcrinj; from ipundw, wliich lias been assumed to imply ' a certain equality or familiarity between the parties ' ; that the distinction lietween tlie words does not turn upon the relative dignity of tlie person asking and the person asked ; but that aiVftu signifies to ask for somctliiug to be given not done, giving prominence to the thing asked for rather than the person, and hence is rarely used in exhortation. 'EpaTow, on the other hand, is to re- quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta- tion, etc. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer, 4te Aufl. s. v. The latter distinguishes a'lriui from similar words as follows : " alrea denotes the request of the will, iiriBvixfw that of the sensibilitie.s, Stofiai the asking of need, while ipuiTaa marks the form of the request, as does (CxfcBat also, wliicli in classic Greek is the proper expses- sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying iCself in prayer." 'Epurdw, aWecu and Seofiai are also compared briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Ju. xiv. 13, 16), who concludes of fpaTciai " it cannot serve to indicate directly any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent. The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing insejiarable from the act of direct interrogation " ; cf. further Schmidt eh. 7. Co.Mr. : air-, i^-, iv-, Trap(-ixai) , Trpoff-oiTe'ai.] aCn^pia, -ros, to, (aiT-c'ci>), [fr. Plato down], what is or has been asked for : Lk. xxiii. 24; plur. [A. V. i-equcsis'], PhU. iv. 6 [cf. Ellic. ad loc] ; things asked for, 1 Jn. v. 15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.] * alrCa, -as, t) ; 1. cause, reason : Acts x. 21 ; x.xii. 24 ; xxviii. 20 ; Kara nairav alriav for every cause, Mt. xi.x. 3 ; 8i ^1/ aiTiav for ichirh cause, wherefore, Lk. viii. 47 ; 2 Tim. i. 6, 12 ; Tit. i. 13 ; Heb. ii. 11 ; cf. Grimm on 2 IJIacc. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy of punisliment ; crime of which one is accused : Mt. xxvii. 37 ; Mk. xv. 26 ; Jn. xviii. 38 ; xix. 4, [G ; Acts xxiii. 28]; alrla Bavdrov [A. V. cause of death'] crime deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28 ; xxviii. 18. 3. charije of crime, accusation : Acts xx v. 18, 27. (All these signif. in prof. writ, also ; [but L. and S. now make signif. 3 the jirimary].) In Mt. xix. 10 the words €1 oiTQ)? ecrrli' rj aiTia tov avSpoinov ^era ttjs yvvaiKos find a pimple explanation in a Latinism (causa i. cp res : .si ita res se habet, etc.) if the case of the man with his wife is so.* alrCaiia, -ros, to, see alriMfia. [a[Tido(i,oi, -Sifxai : to accuse, brincj a charije ar/ainst ; rJTiaadiieda is a various reading in Eo. iii. 9 for the TrporjTmtrdfifda of the jirinted texts. (Prov. xix. 3 ; Sir. xxix. 5 ; freq. in prof, writ.) Syn. see KaTrjyopea.*'] otTios, -a, -on, that in which the cause of ani/thing resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. o oItws the author : a-Qyrqpias, Heb. v. 9 (the same phrase is freq. in prof. writ. ; cf. the opp. at. ttjs dn-mXemr in Bel and the Dragon vs. 41 ; rav KaKav, 2 Mace. xiii. 4 ; Lcian. Tim-. 36 ed. Lips. ; rav dyaSiiv, Isocr. ad Phil. 49 p. lOG a. ; cf. Block on Heb. vol. ii. 2. p. 94 sij.). 2. to ainov i. (j. ij aiTia; a. cause: Acts xLx. 40 [cf. B. 400 (342) n.]. b. crime, offence: Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22. (alVior culprit.) [See alrla, 3.]* a,Wliay.a, -Tot, to, (alridop.ai) ; in Acts .\.\v. 7 the read- ing of the best codd. adopted by G L T Tr Wll for Rec. ahlajia: accusation, charge of guilt. (A form not found in other writ. ; [yet Mey. notes alrloiais for alrlaais, Eustath. p. 1422, 21; seeB. 73; WII. App. p. 166].)* al()>v(SLOs, -ov, (alcjiVTjs, drL(r6ri/ captive : foil, by ds with ace. of jilace, Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33 ; Tob. i. 10). c. fig. to sub- jugate, bring under control: 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage see t/orjpia, 2) ; rtvd rivi, Ro. vii. 23 [yet T Tr N etc. in- sert eV before the dat.] ; to take captive one's mind, capti- vate : yvmiKapia, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec], (Judith xvi. 9 TO KaXXos avrrjs TJxpa\u>ria-( i/^Kp^^f aiToO). The word is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr., Heliod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); EUic. on 2 Tim. 1. c.].* olxii-aXwTos, -ov, (f r. aixM -I spear and dXuTor, verbal adj. fr. dXii/ai, proj). taken by the spear), [fr. Aeschyl. down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).* atiiv, -wi'os, 6, (as if aUv — poet, for del — av, so teaches Aristot. de caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279», 27 ; [so Proclus lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241 ; et al.] ; but more prob- able is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that aliiiv is so connected with arj/ii to breathe, blow, as to denote properly that ivhich causes life, vital force; cf. Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But aicii' (=: alFoiv) is now gen- erally connected with aUi, del, Skr. eras (aivas). Lit. aevum, Goth, aivs. Germ, ewig, Eng. ai/e, ever; cf. Curtius § 585; Pick, Pt. i. p. 27; Vanicek p. 79; Benfey, Wur- zellex. i. p. 7 sq. ; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400 ; Pott, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442 ; Ebcling, Lex. Horn. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. dd; Cremer, edd. 2, 3, 4 (al- though in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm) ; Pott and Pick, however, connect it with Skr. ayus rather than evas, although both these forms are derived from i to go (see Pott, Schleicher, Pick, VaniCek, u. s.).] Li aioov 19 Greek authors 1. age (Lat. aevum, which is alav with the Aeolic digamma), a human lifetime (in Horn., Hdt., Find., Tragic poets), life itself (Horn. U. 5, 685 lie Kai XinoLalav etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity of time, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38 a. ; Tim. Locr. p. 97 d. [quoted below]; Plut., al.). With this signifi- cation the Hebrew and Rabbinic idea of the word nVli' (of which in the Sept. alwv is the equiv.) combines in the bibl. and eccl. writ. Hence in the N. T. used 1. a. univ. : in the phi-ases eij rbv ala>i/a, oSli'S (Gen. vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58 ; xiv. 16 ; Heb. v. 6 ; vi. 20, etc. ; and strengthened els rov alava roi alamos, Heb. i. 8 [fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. § 36, 2] (Tob. vi. 18 ; Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 18, etc.) ; els aldpa, Jude 13; (Is fjfiepav alcivos unto the day which is eternity (gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [cf. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)] ; with a negation : never, Jn. iv. 14 [Lchm. in br.] ; viii. 51; X. 28; xi. 26; xiii. 8; 1 Co. viii. IS; or not for ever, not always, Jn. viii. 35 ; els tovs almvas unto the ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the individual ages whose sum is eternity) : [Lk. i. 33] ; Ro. i. 25 ; ix. 5 ; xi. 36 ; [xvi. 27 R G Tr AVH] ; 2 Co. xi. 31 ; Heb. xiii. 8 ; els irdvras r. alavas, Jude 25 ; els Toiir alapas rav alavwv (in which exj)ression the endless future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of wliich are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2 ; among the various phrases to express duration com- posed of this word with prep, or adjuncts, (which to the number of more than fifteen are to be foimd in the Sept., cf. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. T.]) : [Ro. xvi. 27 L T] ; Gal. i. 5 ; [Phil. iv. 20] ; 1 Tim. i. 17; [2 Tim. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 11]; Rev. i. 6, 18; iv. 9 sq. ; V. 13 ; vii. 12 ; x. 6 ; xi. 15 ; xv. 7 ; xix. 3 ; xx. 10; xxii. 5 ; fir alavas aiwvuiv. Rev. xiv. 11 ; 6 alav twv ala>vu>v the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) a^es, Eph. iii. 21 (cf. Mcy. [or Ellic] ad loc.) ; otto tmi/ ala>vv ixeWaiv the future age (also 6 010)1/ (Kelvos, Lk. XX. 35; 6 aiwp 6 ep)^6ij,evos, Lk.. xviii. 30; Mk. x. 30; 01 alaves oi enepj^opievoi, Eph. ii. 7), i. e. the age after the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the con- 'suraraate establishment of the divine kingdom and all its blessings : Mt. xii. 32 ; Eph. i. 21 ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the tilings of ' this age ' are mentioned in the N. T. with censure : 6 alaiv ovtos, by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and jnirsuits of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called viol Toif al. TovTOv in Lk. xvi. 8 ; xx. 34 ; /cara tov alava TOV Koa-fiov TOVTOV couformably to the age to which this (wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [cf. Trench § ILx. sub fin.] ; dyaTrdv tov vvv alava, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see dyandco) ; tip^nvres Toii al. tovtov, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see ap^tov) ; 6 debs Toi) al. tovtov the devil, who rules the thoughts and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; al jj.epip.vai tov alaivos the anxieties for the things of this age, ]\Ik. iv. 19; ttXoijo-ios ev Tv alavoav in Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr.,test. Levi 10, test. Benj. 11 (cf. Vorstman p. 133)] ; to reXi; Ta>i» alavaiv the ends (last part) of the ages before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 1 1 ; Svvafieis TOV piWovTos alaivos powers which present them- selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the Holy Sjjirit, Heb. vi.5 ; tov alwvos eKeivov Tv^elvto partake of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among the N. T. writers James does not use the word alwv. [On the word in its relation to k62. '■ (_)n a!^ '** 'li<^ general designation for time, wliicli can be divided up into portions, each of whicli is.in its turn a xi>^>">^ '< on the otlier liand, aiiiii, whicli in the concrete and simple language of Homer (Pindar and the Tragedians) denotes the aUottcd lifetime, even the life, of the individual (11. 4, 478 /iivufSdSios' Seal aiuv etc.), in Attic prose differs from XP""»^ by denot- ing time unlimite ■ ou yap ^f irph k6(T/x(ii &(TTp(i • Stoirep ouS' futavrhs oiiS^ wpav TrepioSoi, ais fierpfirai d yevfarhs xP^^os ouTOS. ei/cwi/ 5e' f(TTi Tw ayeyyaru XP^^ ^'^^ aiwya Trorayopivo/ifs ' us yap noT* ai5ioy TrapaSeiy/xa, rhy ISayiKhy Kutr^oy, iiSe o wpayhs iyeyyddrj, outws ws Trphs 7rapd5€iyfj.a, rbv alwya, oSe 6 xp^^os avv KotTficf 4Safi.iovpyri8ri — after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d. (where see Stallbaum's note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 34 robs Se /XCT €ua€0€ias K. StKaioavyrjs ^aiyras (6pw) €y re to7s Trapovfrt Xp^y i s afftpaXus Sidyoyras Kal Trepl rod (TvfxTrayTos aluvos rjSiovs TCLs i\Tci8as txoyras. T!ie adj. axpoyos independent of time, above and beyond all time, is synon. with aidyios ; where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter- nity begins: Xonnus, metaph. evang. Johan. i. 1, &xpoyos fiy, cLKixv^os, eV apfyfjTCj) \6yos apx^- Thoroughly Platonic in cast are the definitions of Gregory of Nazianzus (orat. x.xxviii. 8) aiwv yap otre xP^^os otjn xP^^ov ri ^4pos ■ ouSt yap fieTprjToy, dAA' oirep ijniy ii XP^^OS ijKiov lantat. g 27 ; e'ls rhy al. : de gigaiit. § 5 ; iy (to)) al.: de mut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction); quod deus immut. § C ; ^| 01'.: de sonm. i. §3; ^jr' ai. : de pluutat. § 12 (bis) ; de mundo § 7 ; irph 01. : de mut. nom. § 2 ; TTphs al. : de mut. nom. §11; (i) al. : de prof. § 18 ; de alleg. leg. iii. § 70 ; de cherub. § 22 ; de migr. Abr. § 22 ; de somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Joscpho § 5 ; de vita Jloys. ii. § 3 ; de decalogo § 14; de victiinis § 3; frag, in Maug. ii. 660 (Kichter vi. p. 219) ; de plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de mundo § 7. Joseph us: (4) iras alay: antt. 1, 18, 7 ; 3, 8, 10; c. Ap. 2, 11,3; 2, 22, 1 ; ftoKphs al. : antt. 2, 7, 3 ; itoKvs al : c. Ap. 2, 31, I; TOv, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 2 ; dayyiXiov a gospel whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. !fiV/i- out end, never to cease, everlastiitg : 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to irpoa-Kaipos) ; atavwv airrov, joined to thee forever as a sharer of the same eternal life, Pbilem. 15; /Sapor, So^ijs, 2 Co. iv. 17; ^aai\fia. 2 Pet. i. 1 1 ; S6^a. 2 1'im. ii. 10; 1 Pet. v. 10; (arj (see fu»;. 2 b.) : KXrjpovofiia, Ileb. ix. 15; XvTpaxTis, Heb. ix. 12; TrapuKXTjct?, 2 Th. ii. 16; (TKTjvaL abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (the habitations of the blessed iu heaven are referred to, cf. Jn. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernacula acterna, quae praeparavcram illis, 4 Esdr. (Frilzuche 5 Esdr.) ii. 11]; similarly Hades is called ulavios ron-or, Tob. iii. 6, cf. Eccl. -xii. 5) ; o-unjpta, Heb. v. 9 ; [so Mk. xvi. WH, in the (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']. Opposite ideas are : KoKaais. Mt. xxv. 46 ; cpi'/xa. Ileb. vi. 2 ; KpiaK, Mk. iii. 29 (Rec. [but L T WH Tr txt. afiapTrjiiaros ; in Acta Tliom. § 47. p. 227 Tdf., eaTaiaot tolto ei'v ticpeijiv 6papTiv io>v TrapanTiopaTuv, it has been plausibly conjectured we slmuld rea. portune) ; to lack ojijiortunity, (opp. to evKaipeoi ) : Phil. iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zonar. ; dxatpeii/, Diod. excerp. Vat. ed. iMai p. 30 [frag. 1. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)* aKaipii>s, (xaipos). adv., unseasonably, [A. V. out of season'], (opp. to evKaipas) : 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea- sonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4 ; [Aeschyl. Ag. 808] ; Plat, de rep. x. p. 606 b. ; Tun. 33 a. ; 86 c. ; Xen. Eph. 5, 7 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) * o-KaKos, -ov, (kokos) ; a. without guile or fraud, harmless; free from r/uill : Heb. vii. 26; [cf. Clement, frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lr/hlft. S. Clement of Rome etc. p. 219) : aKaKOS 6 Uarrip jrvevpu edct>K€i/ aKaKov~]. b. fearinij no evil from others, dislrustiiiij no one, [cf. Eng. rfuileless']: Ro. xvi. 18. ([Aeschyl.,] Plat., Dem., Polyb., al. ; Sept.) {Cf. Trench § Ivi. ; Tittmann i. p. 27 sq.] * aKavOo, -ijs, rj, {didj a point [but see in a), that cannot be con- demned, not to be censured : Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47, and several times in eccl. writ.) * d-KaTa-Kd\virToSi -ov, {KaTOKoKviTTai), not covered, un- veiled : 1 Co. xi. 5, 13. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2 ; [Sept., Philo].) * d-Kard-KpiTos, -or, (KaraKpiva), uncondemned; punished without being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Not found in prof, writ.) * d-KaTa-XuTos, -ov, {Karakva), indissoluble; not subject to destruction, [A. Y. endless]: fia^, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace. X. 11; Dion. Hal. 10, 31.)* QKaTdTTooTos. -Of, — fouud only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd. A and B, from which L 'WTI Tr mrg. have adopted it instead of the Rec. aKaTaTiaiurrovs, q. v. It may be derived fr. irareopai, pf . TreTraaiiai, to taste, eat ; whence aKaTOTTaoTos insatiable. In prof. writ. KaTonaaTos [which Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading] signifies besprinkled, soiled, from KaTa-naa(Tu> to besprin- kle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see B. 65 (57), [and ^VU. App. p. 170].* aKOTdirouo-Tos, -ov, {naTaTtavai), unable to slop, unceas- inq; passively, not quieted, that cannot be quieted; with gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. u. 14 [R G T Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, sc. which they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod., Joseph.. Plut.) * dKaTOo-TOo-ia, -as, rj, (aKaTacrraTos), instability, a state of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. i'u. 16 ; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1 ; [Prov. xxvi. 28 ; Tob. iv. 13]); plur. disturbances, di-wrders: of dissensions, 2 Co. xii. 20 ; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (cf. Mey. ad loc.) ; of the tumults or commotions of war, Lk. x.\i. 9. (Polyb., Dion. Hal.) * aicaTa(rTaTO<: 22 d-KaTO-o-raToS) -ov, (KaSianjiii), unstable, inconstant, restleiis : Jus. i. 8, and L T Tr WII in iii. 8 also, but less fitly ; [cf. Ilerniae Past. 1. ii. mand. 2, 3 Trovrjpdv irnevfui etmv J] KoraXaXta, Kai aK'aTd(jTaTov Sai^viof, firjdinoTf elprjvevov. dWa etf.]. ([lli])potr. ot al.] I'olyb. 7, S, 6, al. [.Sept. Is. liv. !!].)• orKaTcwrxeTOs, -oi-, (/caTe';(to to restrain, control), that cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8 K (i. (Job x.\.\i. 11; 3 Mace. vi. 1 7 ; Diod. 1 7, 38 oKar. fiaKpva, al.)* 'AKc\Sa)id, or 'AKe\8apax (Lehni.), [or 'AicfXS. WII (see their Intr. § 408)], or 'Axe^Safuix (T Tr), fr. Chald. ifZ'l Spn (field of blood), Akeliluma: Acts i. 19; see miia, 2a. [B. D. s. v.; esp. Kautzsclt, Gram. pp. 8, 173].* oKc'paios, -01', {Kepavwyii) \ a- unmixed, pure, as wine, metals. b. of the mind, without admixture of evil, free from tjuilc, inmicent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro. xvi. 19; Phil. ii. 15; (and frer|. in prof. iv-rit.). [Cf. Ellie. on Phil. 1. c. ; Trench § Ivi. ; Tittmann i. 27 sq.]» dxXivr|s, -f'f, (kXi'ku), not inclining, firm, unmoved: Heb. X. 23. (Freq. in ]»rof. writ.) * aK)id^u : 1 aor. rJKfiaaa : (ait/iij) ; '" flourish, come to maturity: Kev. xiv. 18. (Very freq. in prof, writ.)* oKfj:'^, -^s, J), (cf. aKT) [on the accent cf. Chandler §110; but the word is ' a mere figment of the grammarians,' Pape (yet cf. L. and S.) s. v.], alxfirj- Lat. acies, acuo) ; among the Greeks a. j)rop. a /toinl, to prick with (cf. [the classic] atxp-fi)- b. dxtremiti/, climax, acme, hif/hest de(jree. c. the present point of time. Hence acciis. [W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.) ; B. 153 (134)] a/cftiji' with adverbial force, i. v, the phrase ' avaar. vfKpav,' Acts xvii. 32 : TOV \oyov, ilk. T. 36 [R G L] (on tliis jjass. see napa- Koiia, 2) ; Mt. xix. 22 ; Jn. v. 24, etc. ; tovs Xoyoui, Acts ii. 22 ; v. 24 ; Mt. vii. 24 ; pfipara, 2 Co. xii. 4 ; Ti \('yovcnv, Mt. xxi. 16 ; pass., Mt. ii. 18 ; Rev. xviii. 22 sfj. ; Tt (K Tivns, 2 Co. xii. 6 [R G] ; foil, by on [B. 300 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2 ; Mk. xvi. 11 ; Jn. iv. 42 ; xiv. 28. b. to get by hearing, team (from the mouth of the teacher or narrator) : Acts xv. 17 ; Mt. x. 27 (o eis TO ovs «jKoufTe, what is taught you in secret) ; Ro. xv. 21 ; Eph. i. 13 ; Col. i. 6 ; Jn. xiv. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24 ; iii. 1 1 ; XpKTTov i. e. to become acquainted with Christ from apostolic teacliing, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. fiaOeiv rovXpicrToir, vs. 20 [B. 166 (144) note ; W. 199 (187) note]) ; pass., Lk. xii. 3 ; Heb. ii. 1 ; ti with gen. of pers. fr. whom one hears, Acts i. 4 ; ti napa Tivor, Jn. viii. 26, 40 ; xv. 15 ; Acts X. 22 ; xxviii. 22 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2, (Thuc. 6, 93 ; Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. Trapd} ; Plat. rep. vi. p. 506 d., al.; [B. 166 (145); W. 199 (188)]); [n-apa Tivos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)] ; ?« Ttxof, Jn. xii. 34 (ck toC vofiov, from attendance on its public reading) ; ano with gen. of pers., 1 Jn. i. 5 ; with jTfpi Tivos added. Acts ix. 13 ; foil, by on, Mt. v. 21, 27, 33, 38, 43. c. aKovco ti, a thing comes to one's ears, to Jinil out (hyhearsaif), learn, (hear [(»/')] mediately) : with ace. of thing, to epya, ilt. xi. 2 ; ocra tVoiet, Mk. iii. 8 [Treg. txt. Trotel] ; woXepovs, Lk. xxi. 9 ; Mt. xxiv. G ; Mk. xiii. 7 ; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been mentioned : Mt. ii. 8 ; xxii. 7 [R L] ; Mk. ii. 17 ; iii. 21 ; Gal. i. 13 ; Eph. i. 15 ; Col. i. 4 ; Philem. 5, etc. foil, by oTt, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk. vi. 55; x. 47; Jn. iv. 47; ix. 35; xi. 6; xii. 12; Gal. i. 23; TTfpi TiTOf, ifli. vii. 25 : t\ irepi tivos, Lk. ix. 9 ; xvi. 2 ; xxiii. 8 [R G L] : foil, by an ace. with ptcp. [B. 303 (260)] : Lk. iv. 23; Acts vii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11 ; 3 Jn. 4 ; foil, by ace. with inf. in two instances [cf. B. 1. c] : Jn. xii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass.: Acts xi. 22 (rjKova-dri 6 Xo'yof (Is Tu 2)Ta Trjs iKKXTjcrias was brought to the ears) ; 1 Co. V. 1 (uKoveTai TTopvtia ev vpiv) ; Mt. xxviii. 14 (fav oKovaBri tovto inl [L Tr WII mrg. itro] tov fjyepo- KOf) ; Mk. ii. 1 ; Jn. ix. 32 T]Kovcr6ri on. d. to gire car to teaching or teacher : Toi>t Xdyour, jMt. x. 14 ; to follow with attentive hearing, t6v Xoyov, Jn. viii. 43 ; to pripara Toi) 6(ov, 47. e. to comjirthend, understand, (like Lat. audio) : Mk. iv. 33; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lchm. mrg. avayiva- a-K(Te) yet cf. Mey. ad loc] ; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. oKoCeiv is not joined with the genitive of the obj. unless one hear the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144)] ; a. with gen. of a person; simply; a. to perceive any one's voice : ou i. e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14, [W. 199 (187) note-]. p. to give ear to one, listen, hearken, (Germ, ihm zuhoren, ihn anhOren ) : Mt. ii. 9 ; Mk. vii. 14 ; xii. 37 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; x. 16 ; xv. 1 ; xix. 48 ; xxi. 38 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass. TIVOS nepi Tivos) ; xxv. 22 ; Jn. vi. 60. 7. to yield to, hear and obey, hear to one, (Germ, aufeinen horen) : Mt. xvii. 5, (Mk. ix. 7 ; Lk. ix. 35) ; Jn. iii. 29 ; x. 8 ; Acts iii. 22 sq. ; iv. 19 ; vii. 37 [R G] ; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence S. its use by John in the sense to U.tten to, have regard to, of God answering the prayers of men : Jn. ix. 31 ; xi. 41 ; 1 Jn. V. 14 sq. (the Seirt. render ;'3ty by eltraKovai). £. with gen. of pers. and ptcp. [B. 301 (259)] : Mk. xiv. 58; Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. i. 37; vii. 32; Acts ii. 6, 11; Rev. xvi. 5 ; ^Kovaa tov Bvtnatrrqpiov \iyovTos, Rev. xvi. 7 G L T [Tr \VH cod. Sin.], a poetic personification ; cf. De Wette ad loc, W. § 30, 11. b. with gen. of a thing: rijs ^\acr(f)-r)p.las, INIk. xiv. 64 (Lchm. Trjv /3Xa- a<^r]p.iav, as in Mt. xxvi. 65 ; the ace. merely denotes the object ; tt/s fiXaiKp. is equiv. in sense to aiToO p\aa(j>r]povv- Tos, [cf. B. 166 (145)]) ; rav \6ya>v. Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii. 24 TOVS Xi-yovs) ; Jn. vii. 40 (L T Tr WH cod. Sin., but R GrTovXoyov, [cf. B. u. s.]) ; (Tvp.a>vias k. ^opSiv, Lk. xv. 25 ; ToO arevaypov. Acts vii. 34 ; Tr)s airoXoyias, Acts xxii. 1. The frequent phrase axoveiv ttjs (pav^s (i. q- >'DK? '71p3, Ex. xviii. 19) means o. to perceive the distinct icords of a voice : Jn. v. 25, 28 ; Acts ix. 7 ; xi. 7 ; xxii. 7 ; Heb. iii. 7, 15 ; iv. 7 ; Rev. xiv. 13 ; xxi. 3. p. to yield obedience to the voice : Jn. v. 25 (ol aKovuavTes sc. Trjs (paivijs) ; X. 16, 27 ; xviii. 37 ; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn. xii. 47 ; xviii. 37 ; Lk. vi. 47 ; Acts x.xii. 1, it is better to consider the pron. pov wliich precedes as a possess, gen. rather than, mth B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of the thing. The Johannean phrase aKovctv irapa tov 6€ov, or T( irapa 6fov, signifies a. to perceive in the soul the inward communication of God : Jn. vi. 45. b. to be taught by God's inward communication : Jn. viii. 26, 40, (so, too, the simple okov^iv in v. 30) ; to be taught by the devil, ace. to the reading of L T Tr AVH, fiKovaaTc TTapa TOV iraTpos, in Jn. viii. 38. For the rest cf. B. 165 (144) sqq. ; 301 (258) sqq. [CoMP. : 6i-, eiV-, i-n-, nap-, TTpO-. V7r-aKQV03.~\ oKpao-ta, -as, 17, (aKpaTTjs), want of self-control, inconti- nence, intemperance : Mt. .xxiii. 25 (Grsb. dSicia) ; 1 Co. vii. 5. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 524 sq. [(Aristot. on.)] * aKpaWjs, -is, gen. -«'os, -oCs, ((cpoTor), without self-con- trol, intemperate : 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof, vrrit. fr. Plato and Xen. down.) * oLKpaTos, -ov, (Kfpavmpt), unmixed, pure : Rev. xiv. 10 (of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ. and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).* dxpipeia, -elas, fj, (tiKpi^ijs), exactness, exactest care : Acts xxii. 3 (KaTa aKplffeiav toC vopov in accordance with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [cf. Isoc. areop. p. 147 e.]). [From Thuc. down.] * oKpiP^s, -es, gen. -oC'f, exact, careful. The neut. compar. is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv. 22 ; 17 anpi^fCTari] a'peais the siraitest sect i. e. the most precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and CLKpl^Oa» 24 aXd^affrpov in observing; even the more minute precepts of the law and of tradition, Acts xxvi. 5. [From Ildt. down.]* aKpiP, -w: 1 aor. r)Kpi^a(ra\ (uKptfirjs) ; 1. in prof. writ, lo know accuraleli/, to do exactly. 2. to investi- gate diligently: Mt. ii. 7, 16, {aKpi^as e^fra^eiv, vs. 8); Aristot. gen. anim. 5, 1 ; Philo, m. opif. § 25 pera ndarjs e^erda-fois aKpil3ovvT(s. [AI. to learn exactly, ascertain ; cf. Fritz, or jSIev. on Mt. u. s.] * oKpiPus, adv., exdctly, accurately, diligenth/ : Mt. ii. 8 ; Lk. i. 3 ; Acts .wiii. 25 ; 1 Th. v. 2 ; aKpi^ais nepmaTfiv to live carefully, circumspectly, deviating in no respect from the law of duty, E])li. v. 15. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.] * wpCsi -I'Sor, 7], [fr. Horn, down], a locust, particu- larly that species which especially infests oriental coun- tries, strijjping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of them almost every sprins; are carried by the wind from Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that coun- try migrate to regions farther north, until they perish by falUng into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites also (ace. to Lev. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them ; (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Heuschrecken ; Furrer in Sehen- kel iii. p. 78 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v. ; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 313 sqq.]) : Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6. A marvel- lous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Kev. ix. 3, 7, cf. 2, 5 sq. 8-12 ; see Diisterdieck ad loo.* dKpoaTr|pi.ov, -ov, to, (aKpodopai to be a hearer), place of assemblage for hearing, ainlilorium ; like this Lat. word in Roman Law, oKpoaT. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a place set apart for hearing ami deciding cases, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. (Several times in Pint, and other later writers.) * wcpoa-HiS) -ov, o, {oKpoaopai, [see the preceding word]), a hearer: tov vopov, Ko. ii. 13; toC Xoyou , Jas. i. 22 sq. 25. (Thuc, Isocr., Plat., Dem., Pint.) * oKpoPvo-TCa, -af, 17, (a word unknown to the Greeks, who used 17 uKponoadia and to nKponoadiov, fr. Ttoa-drj i. e. membrnm virile. Accordingly it is likely that tjjv madrjv of the Greeks was pronounced rriv jUcttjv hy the Alex- andrians, and aKpo^varla said instead of aKponaadia — i. e. TO aKpov TTJi TToadris; cf. the acute remarks of Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 136, together with the opinion which Winer prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te Aufl. s. V.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of n'71i' the prepuce, the skin covering the glans penis ; a. prop. : Acts xi. 3 ; Ro. ii. 25, 26 ' ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Gal. v. 6 ; vi. 15 ; Col. iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); ev oKpofivaTia &v having the foreskin ( Tertull. praeputiatu.t), uncir- cumcised i. e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10: cV Axp. .sc. wv, 1 Co. vii. 18; equiv. to the same is St' aKpo^varlas, Ro. iv. 11; fj iv Tji aKpo[i. ttiVtis tlie faith which one has while he is uncircumcised, Ro. iv. 1 1 sq. b. by meton. of the abstr. for the concr., having the foreskin is equiv. to a Gentile : Ro. ii. 26 • ; iii. 30 ; iv. 9 ; Eph. ii. 11 ; ^ c'k (jivtreais aKpofi. one uncircumcised by birth oraGentilo, opp. to a Jew who shows himself aGentile in character, Ro.ii. 27; eiayyi- Xtoi/ rfis cLKpo^. gospel to be preached to the Gentiles, Gal. ii. 7. c. in a trnnsferi-ed sense : ffiKpo^. Trjt aapKus (opp. to the ntpiTopij d\^(tponolr)Toi or regeneration, Col. ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted in the a-dp^ were not yet extinct. Col. ii. 13 (the expression is derived from the circumstance that the foreskin was the sign of impurity and aUenation from God, [cf. B. 1). s. V. Circumcision]).* aKpo-7cuviatos, -aia, -aiov, a woril wholly bibl. and QC(-[., [W. !)!! (Ill); 2;i(i (221)], {uKpos extreme, and yuivia corner, nu^a), placed at the extreme corner; \ldos cor- ner-stone ; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6 ; Eph. ii. 20 ; Sept. Is. xxviii. 16 for n33 px. For as the corner-stone holds together two walls, so Christ joins together as Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq. And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice, but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner carelessly ; so some are built up by the aid of Christ, while others stumbUng at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8 ; see ywvia. a.* oKpofltviov, -OH, TO, (fr. aKpoi extreme, and dli, gen.. 6iv6s, a heap ; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener- ally in plur. TO oKpodlvia the frst-fnnts, whether of crops or of sjmils (among the Greeks customarily selected from the topmost part of the hea|)s and offered to the gods, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35) ; in the Bible only once : Ileb. vii. 4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl, Ildt., Thuc., Plut., al.) * fiKpos, -a, -01', (oKiJ jioint [see aKprj']), [fr. Horn, down], hii/hesi, extreme ; to oKpov the topmost point, the extremity [cf. B. 94 (82)] : Lk. xvi. 24 ; Ileb. xi. 21 [see npoa- Kvviaj, a. fin.] ; axpa, uKpov yrfs, ovpavov, the farthest bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven : Mt. xxiv. 31 ; j\Ik. xiii. 27 ; cf. Deut. iv. 32 ; xxviii. 64 ; Is. xiii. 5 ; Jer. xii. 12.* 'AkuXos, -ov, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20 (18)], 6, Arjuila, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in jiropagating the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi. 3; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Tim. iv. 19; [see B. D.].* oKvpo'u, -o) ; 1 aor. r)KvpuicTa\ {uKvpos without author- ity, not binding, void ; fr. nvpos force, authority), to render void, deprive of force and authority, (opp. to Kvpoco to confirm, make valid) : ivTokrjv, Mt. xv. G [R G ; vopov, ibid. T WII mrg.] ; \6yov [ibid. L Tr WH txt.] ; Mk. vii. 13, (cf. ddeTf'm) ; Sta6rjKr]v, Gal. iii. 17. ([1 Esdr. vi. 31] ; Diod., Dion. Hal, Plut.)* axaXvTa?, adv., (KaXva), wilhoul hindrance : Acts xxviii. .'Jl. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.]* ixKutv, uKOvaa, ukov, (contr. fr. dsKOiv, a priv. and iKwv willing), not of one's own will, unwilling : 1 Co. ix. 17. (Very freq. among the Greeks.)* [o\a, TO, read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13 ; Mk. ix. 50 ; Lk. xiv. 34 ; see aXaj.] aJvcCpao-Tpov, -ov, to, (in the plur. in Theocr. 15, 114 ; Anth. V:t\. 9, 153; in other prof. writ. 6 and ^ aXd/3a- arpos; [the older and more correct spelling drops the p, cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v. 1385 d. ; L. and S. s. v. d\d- aXa^oveia 25 dXeKTopocfxavta jSaorpor]), a box mate of alabaster, in which unguents are preserved, (Plin. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] " ungiienta optime servantur in alabastris ") ; with the addition of }iipov (as in Lcian. dial. iner. 14, 2; [Hdt. 3, 20]) : Lk. vii. 37 ; Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mli. xiv. 3 (whcye L T ado])t rov oKdji., Tr WH [Mey.] rqv aK. ; Jit. and Lk. do not add the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they use the word, [cf. Tdf.'s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win. RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.* oXa^ovcCa, and dXafovm (which spelling, not uncommon in later Grk., T WH adopt [see I, t]), -as, ij, (fr. oKa^o- Vfiojiai i. e. to act the aKa^wv, q. v.) ; a. in prof. writ, [fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, hrar/r/art talk, some- times also empti/ dhplai/ in act, swagrjer. For illustration see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7; Aristot. eth. Xic. 4, 13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk. ; [also Trench § xxLs.]. b. an innolent and empty assurance, tohicli trusts in its own power and resources and shamefully desjjises and violates divine laws and human rights : 2 Mace. ix. 8 ; Sap. v. 8. o. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting'] : Jas. iv. 16 (wjiere the plur. has reference to the various occasions on which this presumption shows itself; [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. 77 (67)]); ToC ;3tou, display in one's style of living, [K. V. vainglory'], 1 Jn. ii. 16.* dXa^iiv, -ovos, 6, ij, («Xi/ wandering), [fr. Arstph. on], an empty pretender, a boaster : Ro. i. 30 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. [Trench § xxix. ; Tittmann i. p. 73 sq.] * dXoXaiw; [tr. Pind. down]; a. prop, to repeat fre- quenlly the cry aXaXd, as soldiers used to do on entering battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout : Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 2 ; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 2 ; and in prof. writ. c. to wail, lament : Mk. v. 38, (S'S'n Jer. iv. 8 ; xxxii. 20 (xxv. 34)) ; cf. dXoXufm, Lat. u^u/are. [Syn. see (cXai'u fin.] d. to ring loudly, to clang: 1 Co. -xiii. 1, [cf. iv icvf»/3dXotr aXaXiiyfioi, Ps. cl. 5].* d-\dXT|TOs, -ov, (XaXrjTos fr. XaX/ii>; [cf. W. 23]), not to be uttered, not to be expressed in words : inevayiioi mute sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief, Ro. viii. 26, [al. 'which (from their nature) cannot be uttered'; cf. Mey. ad loc. ; W. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5, 4 avvL(TTofia aXaXrjToiv i. c. of love-secrets.) * oi-XaXos, -ov, (\d\ot talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl. on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech : Mk. vii. 37; nvdfj-a, Mk. ix. 17, 25, because .the defects of demoniacs were thought to proceed from the nature and pecuharities of the demons by which they were pos- sessed. (Sept. Ps. xxxvii. (x.xxviii.) 14 ; xxx. (xxxi.) 19; dXtiXou Kai kokov TrvcvfiaTos 7rXi7p7)9, Plut. de orac. def. ol p. 438 b.)" oXas, -arcs, to, (a later form, found in Sept. and X. T. [Aristot. de mirab. ausc. §138; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3], cf. JJllm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220 ; dat. nXart Col. iv. 6), and dXf, (iXdf, d, (the classic form [fr. Ilom. down] ; Sir. x.xii. 15 (13) ; xliii. 19 ; Sap. x. 7 ; 1 Mace. x. 29, etc. ; Mk. ix. 49 dXi dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.], and in vs. 50 L T Tr WH SKa ace. [yet without the art.] with nom. to oXas), finally, nom. and ace. S\a Tdf. in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see his note)] (similar to yaXa, gen. yaXaros, a form noted by certain grammarians, see [117/. App. p. 158;] Kiihner i. 353 sq. ; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir. (xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt ; 1. Salt with wliich food is seasoned and sacrifices are sprinkled: Mk. ix. 49RG; cf. dXifoj. 2. a\as Trjs yrjs, those kinds of saline matter used to fertilize arable land, Mt. v. 13»; here salt as a condiment cannot be understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxLx. 23 ; Zeph. ii. 9 ; Judg. ix. 45) ; cf. Grohmann in Kiiuf- fer's Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is, ' It is your prei'ogative to impart to mankind (likened to arable land) the influences required for a life of devo- tion to God.' In the statement immediately following, iav &i ciXas (ctX., the comparison seems to be drawn from salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended; [but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout the pass., and take yfi to denote the mass of mankind, see s. V. 4 b. and cf. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In jNIk. ix. 50 ' and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue; [cf. Mey. on the former pass.]. 3. Salt is a symbol of lasting concord, jNIk. ix. 50 ", because it protects food from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. Ac- cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to ]5ar- take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz ; [BB.DB. s. v. Salt] ; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4. Wisdom and grace exliibited in speech : Col. iv. 6 [where see Bp. Lghtft.].* "AXao-o-a : Acts xxvii. 8 ; cf. Ana-aia. [dXetis, d, T WH uniformly for aXievs, sec Tdf.'s note on j\Ik. i. 1 G and N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1. ; esp. ed. 8, Proleg. p. 82 sq. ; WH. App. p. 151.] dX£^>(l> : impf. rj'XeKpov ; 1 aor. ifKeu^a ; \ aor. mid. impv. oKiL-^ai: [allied with XiVoj grease; cf. Curtius § 340; Vanicek p. 811 ; Peile p. 407; fr. Hom. down]; to anoint : nvd or ri, Mk. xvi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 3 ; nvd or t[ nvi [W. 227 (213)], as iXatcp, Lk. vii. 46 "; Mk. vi. 13; Jas. V. 14; /ivpw, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46"'; Mid.: Mt. vi. 1 7 (lit. ' anoint for thyself thy head,' unge tibi caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salbe ; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v. Anoint, etc. Stn. : " dXei'^fivis the mundane and profane, Xplft" the sacred and rehgious, word." Trench § xxxviii. COMP. ; ff-aXfi(^(u].* dXcKTopo()>uvia, -as, f], {a\eKT to grind), wheaten Jlour, meal: Jit. xiii. 33 ; Lk. .xiii. 21. Hesych. aKevpa Kvpias ra tov iTa 6e tS)V KpidSiv. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Jo- sei)h., a!.)' oXrieEia, -as, ij, (aXrjdrjs), [fr. Ilom. down], reriti/, truth. 1. objectively; 1. xiniw n-hat i.^ true in any matter under consideration (opp. to what "is feigned, fictitious, false) : Jas. iii. 14 ; oXi^^emi/ Xf'yed', tpfii/, Jn. viii. 4.5 sq. ; xvi. 7 ; Ro. ix. 1 ; 1 Co. xii. G ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; flnfv avTa Traaav njv aXrjBfiav, everytliing as it really was, Mk. v. 33, (so in classics) ; p.apTvpfiv rfj a\r)6eia to testify ac- cording to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33 ; in a broader sense, XaXfii/ dXij^emi/ to speak always according to truth, Eph. iv. 25 ; [dXij^eios prjpara anocjideyyopai. as opp. to the vagaries of madness. Acts xxvi. 25] ; aXi]6fia tyevero, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14. iv oKrideia in truth, truly, as the case is, according to fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the divine nature) ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; Col. i. 6 ; eV aXrjBeias a. truly, in truth, according to truth : Mk. xii. 32 ; Lk. iv. 25, (Job i.x. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i.§ 1). b. of a truth, in reality, in fact, certainly : Mk. xii. 14 ; Lk. XX. 21 ; [xxii. 59] ; Acts iv. 27 ; x. 34, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 23, 5 and 47, 3) ; [cf. W. § 51, 2 f. ; B. 336 (289)] ; KOT aKfjdeiaii in accordance with fact, i. e. (ace. to the ccmtext) justly, without partiality: Ro. ii. 2; fhe npo- oses through Christ, anil respect- ing the thities of , man, opposed alike to the superstitions of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and to the corrupt opinions and prccc]its of false teachers even among Christians: r) aXJideia tov evayy. the truth which is the gos])el or which the gospel presents. Gal. ii. 5, 14, [cf. W. § 34, 3 a.] ; and absol. fj dXiy^fta and dXiyfleia: Jn. i. 14, 17; viii. 32,40; [xvi. 13]; xvii. 19; 1 Jn. i. 8 ; ii. 4, 21 ; 2 Jn. 1-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Rec.) ; v. 7; 2 Co. iv. 2; xiii. 8; Eph. iv. 24; 2 Th. ii. 10, 12; 1 Tim. ii. 7 (tV jrio-rej nor dXiayrnia occurs in Grk. writ.* oXXd, an adversative particle, derived from aXXa, neut. of the adj. oXXor, which was originally pronounced aXXds (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things sc. than those just mentioned. It differs from 6e, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441 sq. (411)]. I. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con- cessions ; nevertheless, notwithstanding : ilt. xxiv. 6 ; Mk. xiii. 20 ; xiv. 28 ; Jn. xvi. 7, 20 ; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. V. 14 sq. ; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (dXX" d deos etc.), etc. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception : Lk. xxii. 53 ; Ro. iv. 2 ; 1 Co. viii. 7 ; X. 23. 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; IHk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nny rather, yea moreover : Jn. xvi. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; esp. with Kal added, Lk. xii. 7 ; xvi. 21 ; xxiv. 22. dXX' ov8i, but . . . not even (Germ, ja nicht einmal) : Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts xix. 2 ; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. oin-t] ; cf. Fritzsche on jMk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardinal matter, especially before imperatives: Mt. ix. 18; 'Mk. «XXa 28 aWofiat, ix. 22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7: Jn. viii. 2G; xvi. 4; Acts ix. 6 [not Rec] ; x. 20 ; xxvi. 1 6. 7. it is put ellipti- cally : dXX' tva, i. e. aWa tovto yiyoiKv. Iva, ^Ik. xiv. 49 ; Jn. xiii. 18; xv. 25; 1 Jn. ii. 19. 8. after a condi- tional or concessive protasis it signifies, at the begin- ning of the apodosis, i/ct [cf. W. 442 (411)]: after koi (i, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [R G] ; Mk. xiv. 29 R G L, (2 "Mace, viii. 15); after fi Kai, Jlk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH] ; 2 Co. iv. 16; V. 16; xi. 6; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26); after «', 1 Co. ix. 2; Ro. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after tav, 1 Co. iv. 15; after emep. 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. WH br. dXX'] ; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq. ; Kiihner ii. p. 827, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding fih: Mk. ix. 13 [T om. Tr br. fiiv']; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 17. 10. it is joined to other particles; aiKKa. ye [Grsb. aXXaye] (twice in the N. T.) : i/et al Icnsl, 1 Co. ix. 2 ; yel surely (aher freilich), Lk. xxiv. 21 [L T Tr WH add koi yen and etc.], cf. Bornemann ad loc. In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are not combined without the interposition of the most emphatic word between them ; cf. Bornemann 1. c. ; KUilz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 sq. 24 sq. ; Ant, Lex. Plat. i. ]). 101 ; [W. 444 (413)]. axX' ij (arising from the blenilijig of the two statements oificv «XXo 7 and oiSe'v «XXo, dXXii) sare only, except : 1 Co. iii. 5 (where dXX' ij omitted by G L T Tr WH is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sii-. xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after oKka itself, 2 Co. i. 13 [here Lehm. br. dXX' before rf\ ; cf. Klotz u. s. ii. 31 sqq. ; Kuhner ii. p. 824 sq. § 535, 6 ; W. 442 (412) ; [B. 374 (320)]. dXX' ov but not, yet not : Heb. iii. 16 (if punctu- ated naparUpavav : nXX' ov) for ' but why do I ask ? did not all,' etc.; cf. Bleek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. aXX" oixl 'i-'ill lie not rather ? Lk. xvii. 8. H. preceded b_v a negation : hut (Lat. sed. Germ. i:ondern) ; 1. ovk (^17) . . . dX\d: Mt. xix. 11 ; jSIk. v. 39; Jn. vii. 16; 1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [ouSeV] ; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tun. v. 23 [jj.TiK€Ti], etc. By a rhetorical construction ouk . . . aKXd sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much . . . fts : Mk. ix. 37 (ouk ifii de^^^rai, dWa tov diroarel- "KavTct pf) ; Mt. X. 20 ; Jn. xii. 44 ; Acts v. 4 ; 1 Co. xv. 10; 1 Th. iv. 8; by this form of speech the emphasis is laid on the second member; cf. Fritzsche on Jlk. p. 773 sqq. ; W. § 55, 8 b. ; [B. 356 (306)]. oi povov . . . aWa Kai not only . . . but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [dXX' Iva Kai, etc.] ; Ro. i. 32, and very often. 'When «cat is omitted (as in the Lat. non solum . . . sed}, the grada- tion is strengthened : Acts xLx. 26 [Lehm. adds Kai] ; 1 Jn. V. 6 ; dWa jroXXm ^aXXov, Phil. ii. 1 2 ; cf. Fritzsche 1. e. p. 786 sqq.; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)]. 2. The negation to wliich dWd pertains is suppressed, but can easily be supplied upon reflection [W. 442 (412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in each passage, before tiXXd supply ' you will say you did not go out into the wilderness for this purpose ') ; Acts xix. 2 (we have not received the Holy Spirit, but . . .) ; Gal. ii. 3 (they said not one word in ojiposition to me, but . . .) ; 2 Co. vii. 11 (where before dXKd, repeated six times by ana- phora, supply ov fidvox with the aecus. of the preceding word). It is used in answers to questions having the force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts XV. 11 ; 1 Co. X. 20. dWa iva [ur dXX' "iva, cf. W. 40; B. 10] elli])tipal after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297); 620 (576) ; Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 s(i.] : Jn. i. 8 (sup- Jily (iXXa ^X^fi', iva) ; ix. 3 (dXXa TuijbXor eyivtro [or tyct^ VTjOr^^.lva); iNIk. iv. 22 (dXXaTotoiToeycVfro, Zi/a). ["The best Mss. seem to elide the tinal a before nouns, but not before verbs " Scrivener, Plain Introduction, etc., p. 14; but see Dr. Gregory's full exhibition of the facts in Tdf. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it aijjjears that "elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a, almost always before v, often before e and >;, rarely before o and m, never before i; and it .shoidd be noticed that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words ev, Iva, on, ov, u>i, ])refer the form dXX' " ; see also WH. App. p. 146. Cf. W. § 5, la.; B. p. 10.] oXXdo-o-u : fut. dXXd^o) ; 1 aor. rfWa^a ; 2 f ut. pass. aKKayr](Topai ; (aXXor) ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; to change : to cause one thing to cease and another to take its place, Ta fdr/, Acts vi. 14 ; t^v (pavrjv to vary the voice, i. e. to speak in a different manner according to the different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now severely, now gently. Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad loc.]. to exchanye one thinr/ for another: t'i ev rtvi, Ro. i. 23 (3 Tan Ps. cv. (cvi.) 20 ; the Greeks say dX- Xdo-o-fii- Tt TWOS [cf. W. 206 (194), 388 (863) ; Vau'ghan on Rom. 1. c.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq. ; Ilcb. i. 1 2. [COMP. : OTT-, 81-, (COT-, dTTO-Kar-, per-, a-vv-aWdcrcra).] * dXXaxoSev, adv., from another place : Jn. x. 1 (i. q. aWodev [which the grammarians prefer, Thom. Mag. ed. Putschl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers, p. H]; cf. eKa(TTax6d(v, iravraxoBfv). [(Antiph., al.)]* dXXaxov, adv., i. q. ciKXoSt, elsewhere, in another place: Mk. i. 38 (T Tr txt. WII Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Borne- mann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph., Xen., al. ; see Thom. ]M. and 3Ioer. as in the preced. word.] * oXXij-yopfu, -Si : [prcs. pass. ptcp. oXXi/yopoi^^fi/or] ; i. e. aXXo piv dyopfva. aXXo 8« voiai, " aliud verbis, aliud sensu ostendo " (Quint, instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle- yorically or in a fyure : Gal. iv. 24. (Philo, Joseph., Pint., and gram. writ. ; [cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. c.].) * dXXT)Xoviia, [WII 'aXX., see their Intr. § 408], Hebr. T\'-^h^r\, praise ye the Lord, Hallelujah : Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq. 6! [Sept. Pss. passim ; Tob. xiii. 18 ; 3 Mace. vii. 13.] * dXXriXwv, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat. -oif, -ais, -01s; ace. -our, -as, -a, one another; reciprocally, viutually : 3Ht. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35 ; Acts xxviii. 25 ; Ro. i. 12; Jas; v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Ilom. down.] dXXoYCVT|s, -es, (aK\os and yc'rar), spruny from another race, a fireiyner, alien : Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen. xvii. 27 ; Ex. xii. 43, etc.], but nowhere in prof, writ.)* aXXo|iai; impf . ^XXd/jiji» ; !LQV.ii\dpr)vam\r)\6pr)v {Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to leap (Lat.' sa/io) : Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. ijXXfTo ; aX.X.09 29 aXuiTrri^ G L T Tr WH rjXaTo) ; to spring up, gush up, of water, Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. satire, Verg. eel. 5, 47 ; Suet. Octav. 82). [COMP. : e'|-, i^-aWoy.ai.'} * aWos, -ij, -o, [cf . Lat. alius. Germ, alles, Eng. else ; f r. Horn, down], another, other; a. absol. : Mt. x.wii. 42; XX. 3; ilk. vi. 15; Acts xLx. 32; xxi. 34 (aXXoi fiiv oXXo), and often. b. as an adj. : Mt. ii. 12; iv. 21 : Jn. xiv. 16 ; 1 Co. x. 29 («XXr; trvveihrjtm i. e. ^ o'UJ'. «XXou TiTOt). c. with the art. : o aXXor the other (of two), Mt. V. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)]; ot SKKoL all others, the remainder, the rest : Jn. xxi. 8 ; 1 Co. xiv. 29. [Stx. SxXos, ETEpos: fix. as compared with cV. denotes numerical in distinction from quaUtati\e difference ; &\. adds (' one tjesides '), er. distinjruislies (' one of two ') ; every er. is an Sx., but not every Sx. is a ?t. ; &\. generally ' denotes simplv distinction of individuals, 'drepos involves the sec- ondary idea of difference of k i n d ' ; e. g. 2 Co. xi. 4 ; Gal. i. 6, 7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass. ; Trench § xcv.] dWoTpio-eiruTKOiros (L T Tr WH dXXorptcTr.), -ov, 6, (dXXoT-piof and tVio-KOTTos), one who takes the supervision of affairs pertaining to others and in no icise to himself, [a meddler in other men's matters^ : 1 Pet. iv. 15 (the writer seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether public or private, civil or sacred — in order to make them conform to the Christian standard). [HUgenfeld (cf. Einl. ins N. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat. delator.'] The word is found again only in Dion. Areop. ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another's office), and [Germ, of Const, ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteler. Eccl. Graec. Mon. ii. 481 b. ; [cf. W. 25, 99 (94)].* dXXoTpiosi -a, -ov; 1. belonging to another (ot^tT^. to Ktos), not one's oicn : Heb. ix. 25 ; Ro. xiv. 4 ; xv. 20 ; 2 Co. X. 15 sq. ; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk. xvi. 12 (opp. to TO vfitTfpov). 2. foreign, strange: y^. Acts vii. 6 ; Heb. xi. 9 ; not of one's own family, alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq. ; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Horn. II. 6, 214 ; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).* dXXo^vXos, -ov, (aXXor, and (pvXov race), foreign, (in prof, autli. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down) ; when used in Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen- tile, [A. V. one of another nation] : Acts x. 28. (Philo, Joseph.)* oXXus, adv., («XXof), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise: 1 Tim. V. 25 (to «XXci)9 exon-n, which are of a different sort i. e. which are not (caXa epya, [al. which are not jrpo'StjXa]).' dXodo), -S> ; (connected with r) aXws or i) oKarj, the floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out) ; to thresh, (Ammon. to fiii ttj oXco ivaTfiv koX Tpi^nv tus araxwir): 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv. 4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.* a-Xo'Yos, -ox, (Xcjyor reason) ; 1. destitute of reason, brute: fia, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap. xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason, absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11, 1 ; Thuc. 6, 85; often in Plat., Isocr., al.).* d\67] [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -ijs, 17, (com- monly ^uXaXdi/, dydXXoxoi'), Plut., the aloe, aloes : Jn. xix. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in embalming the dead (as, ace. to Hdt., the Egyptians did), Hebr. D'SriN and niSpN [see IMiihlau and Volck s. TV.], Xum. xxiv. 6 ; Ps. xiv. 9 ; Prov. vii. 1 7 ; Cant, iv. 14. Arab. -l/Zufce; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloe [Low § 235 ; BB.DD].» ciXs, aXdf, 6, see SKas. aXvKOs, -ij, -di/, salt (i. q. aXfivpos) : Jas. iii. 12. ([Hippocr., Arstph.,] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e. ; Aristot., Theophr., al.) * oXditos, -ov, (XCirij), free from pain or grief: Phil. ii. 28. (Very often in (jrk. writ. fr. Soph, and Plat, down.)* oXuo-is, or as it is com. written SKvats [see 11'//. App. p. 144], -fas, fi, (fr. a priv. and Xiiai, because a chain is uKvTos i. e. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w. fiXe'a) to restrain, dXifu to collect, crowd; Curtius § 660; Yanicek p: 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound : Jlk. v. 3 ; Acts xxi. 33 ; xxviii. 20 ; Rev. xx. 1 ; iv dXtfo-fi in chains, a prisoner, E|)li. vi. 20 ; ovk (iraiaxivBr) Trjv dX. /mov he was not ashamed of my bonds i. c. did not desert me be- cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec, used of a manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by wluch the hands are bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Jlk. u. i. ; per contra esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8] : Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29]; Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hdt. down.)* d-XvcriTtX^S) -es, (XiiffiTfXijj. see \vaiTf\cii>), unprofit- able, (Xen. vectig. 4, 6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious: Heb. xiii. 17. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)* aXaw to be taken, [some would here take the word actively: to take']. (Fr. Find, and Ildt. down.) ' a)ia [Skr. sa, sama ; Eng. same ; Lat. simu!'; Germ. sammt, etc.; Curtius § 449; VaniOck p. 972. Fr. Horn, down] ; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together : Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; CoL iv. 3 ; 1 Tim. v. 13; Fhilem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. iii. 12. 2. prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat. : Mt. xiii. 29. Sfia irpwi early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk. writ, afia Tc5 ^Xi'w, afia Tjj i^jiipa). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and V. 10, where afia is foil, by ai/os, 1 Pet. v. 4. (Found besides only in Philostr. her. 19, p. 741 ; [and (conjecturally) in Botckh, Corp.Inscrr.l.'JS, 39, c. B. C. 340].) * a)idpavTO$, -ov, (fr. fiapaivu) ; cf. diiiavros, acjtavTos, etc.), not fading aivay, unfading, perennial ; Vulg. immarcesci- hilis ; (hence the name of the flower, [Diosc. 4, 5 7, al.] ; see dpapdvTivos) : 1 Pet. i. 4. Found elsewhere only in Sap. vi. 13; [fuij dpap. Sibyll. 8, 411; Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. ii. p. 11 24, no. 2942 c, 4; Lcian. Dom. c. 9].* dfiaprdvu; fut. apapTrjo-a (Mt. xviii. 81; Ro. vi. 15; in the latter pass. LTTrWII give apaprrjirapfv for R G apapTTjaopfv), in class. Grk. dpaprrjaopai ; 1 aor. (later) rjpdpTTjira, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (cf. AV. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ijpapTov; pf. ^p/prTjiea; (ace. to a conjecture of Btlm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv. and pcipa, pilpopm, pfpos, prop, to be without a share in, sc. the mark) ; proj). to miss the mark, (Horn. II. 8, 311, etc.; with gen. of the thing missed, Horn. II. 10, 372; 4, 491 ; ToC (TKowov, Plat. Ilipj). min. p. 375 a. ; t^j oSoO, Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor, to do or go wrong. [" Even the Sept., although the Ilebr. sen also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve ifiapT. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the Hebr. signifies to miss one's aim in the literal sense, they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in jiar- ticular e^apLaprdveiv, Judg. xx. 16." Zezschwilz, Profan- graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the N. T. to wander from the law of God, violate God's law, sin ; a. absol. : Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. v. 14; viii. 11; ix. 2 sq. ; I Jn. i. 10; ii. 1; iii. 6, 8 sq. ; v. 18; llo. ii. 12; iii. 23; v. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph. iv. 26; 1 Tim. v. 20; Tit. iii. 11; lleb. iii. 17; x. 26 (cKoucricos) ; [2 Pet. ii. 4] ; of the violation of civil laws, which Christians regard as also the transgression of divine law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. ApapTuifftu dpaprlav to commit (lit. sin") a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, {p(yd\t]v dpaprlav, Ex. xxxii. 30 sq. Ilebr. nNDH XUn ; aiVx/xW li^i. Soph. Phil. 1249; peydXa upapTrjpaTa dpaprdixiv, Plat. I'hacdo p. 1 13 e.) ; cf. dyawdw, sub fin. dpaprdveiv eisTiva [B. 1 73 (150) ; AV. 233 (219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LTAVlIora. Tr mrg.br. els ai), 21 ; Lk. xv. 18, 21 ; xvii. 3 Rec., 4 ; 1 Co. viii. 12 ; t\ tU Kalaapa, Acts xxv. 8 ; els to "Siov Gapa, 1 Co. vi. 18, (ejj avTovs re Ka'i els ilWovs, Plat. rej). 3, p. 396 a. ; els t6 6elov, Plat. Phaedr. p. 242 c.; «is 6eo(is, Xen. Ilell. 1, 7, 19, etc. ; [cf. u/i. KupiM ^fto. Bar. i. 13 ; ii. 5]) ; llebraisti- eally, evumiov ('^3^) twos [B. § 146, 1] in the presence of, hefore any one, the one wronged by the sinful act being, as it were, present and looking on : Lk. xv. 18, 21, (1 S. vii. 6 ; Tob. iii. 3, etc. ; [cf. evaim Kvplov, Bar. i. 1 7]). [For reff. see d/uapWa. CoMP. : irpo-apapTavu.li' dfidpTT^fia, -^os, TO, (fr. dpapTeoj i. <]. dpaprdifto, cf. dSl- KTjpa, d\l(Tyripa}, a sin, evil deed, ["Differunt ij I'lpaprla et TO apaprripa ut Latinorum peccat u s et peccatu m. Nam TO dpdprrjpa et peccatum proprie malum facinus indi- cant ; contra ff dpaprta et peccatus ^mmum peccalioncm, TO pcccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequenteni, valent." Fritzsche ; see dpaprla, tin. ; cf. also Trench § Ixvi.] : ]\Ik. iii. 28, and (LT Trtxt. AVil) 29; iv. 12 (where G T Tr txt. AVII om. L Tr mrg. br. to dpapT.) ; Ro. iii. 25 ; 1 Co. vi. 18; 2 Pet. i. 9 (R[LAV]l txt. Tr mrg.] dpapriwv). In prof. auth. fr. Soph, and Thue. down ; [of bodily de- fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; dp. pinjpoviKuv, Cic. ad Att. 13, 21 ; dp. ypa(piK6v, Polyb. 34, 3, 1 1 ; tjTav pev TrapaXoyoJS r] liXdjiri yfPrjTai, drixipa- orav Be pi] napaXdyas, ilvev Se KoKtas, dpdpTTjpa • Ijrav he elhuis pev prj 7Tpol:iov\evo'as 8e, dSiKi;/ja, Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 10 [). 1135'', 16 sip].* d|jiapT(a, -as, ij, (fr. 2 aor. dpapreiv, as oTroTvxla fr. aTvoTvxeiv), a failing to hit the mark (sec dpaprdva)). In Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thuc. down). 1st, an error of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. ira Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861) p. 57 n. 99]). 2d, a bad action, evil deed. In the N. T. always in an ethical sense, and 1. equiv. to to dpap- rdveiv a sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com- mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and acticm (cf. Cic. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; i0' dpapTiav elvai held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9 ; eiripe'veiv ttj dpaprla, llo. vi. 1 ; diTn6vr](TKeiv ttj dp. and (ijv e'v airfj, llo. vi. 2 ; Trjv dp. ytvaa-Keiv, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21 ; veKpos TJj dp. Ro. vi. I I ; irep't dpaprlas to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [cf. Mey.] ; aHipa rfjs dp. the body as the instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6 ; dndrt] T^f dp. the craft by which sin is accus- tomed to deceive, Hcb. iii. 13; uvSpanos rrjs dp. [dvopias TTrtxt. AA''II txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he seems unable to exist without it, the man utterly given up afiapria 31 afiefnTTOi; to sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. § 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense fj ifiapria (i. ij. to d^iaprdwtv) as a power exercising domin- ion over men {sin as n principle and power) is rlietorically represented as an imperial personage in the phrases fj a/i. pacriXfCei, Kvpidfi, (carfpydfci-at, Ro. v. 21; vi. 12, 14 ; vii. 1 7, 20 ; Sov\fveiv ttj ifi. Ilo. vi. C ; 8ov\os ttjs afi. Jn. viii. 34 [Wil br. G om. r^r d^.] ; Ro. vi. 1 7 ; i/d/ior 7^9 afi. the dictate of sin or an impulse proceeding from it, Ro. vii. 23 ; viii. 2 ; biivapis ttjs dp. 1 Co. xv. 56 ; (the prosopopoeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, ace. to the read- ing afiapria, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus apaprla in sense, but not in signification, is the source whence the several evil acts proceed ; but it never denotes vitiusity. 2. that which is done wronrj, committed or resultant sin, an offence, a violation of the divine law In thought or In act (i) apapria iariv 17 avopla, 1 Jn. iii. 4) ; a. generally: Jas. i. 15 ; Jn. viii. 40 (where apapr. must be taken to mean neither error, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt- ing tlie people, but sin viewed generally, as is well shown by Lucke ad loc. and UUmann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [cf. his Sundlosigkeit Jesu p. 66 sqq. (Eng. trans, of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)] ; the thought is, ' If any one convicts me of sin, then you may lawfully question the truth and divinity of my doctrine, for sin hinders the perception of truth ') ; X'^P'-^ apaprlas so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. 15 ; notdv apap- Ttav and tijv ap. Jn. viii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 22 ; 'ix^iv apuprlav to have sin as though it were one's odious private property, or to have done something needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, Jn. Lx. 41 ; XV. 22, 24 ; xix. 11 ; 1 Jn. i. 8, (so atpa fx^iv, of one who has committed murder, Eui'. Or. 514) ; very often in the plur. apapriai [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing, occurs but once : Mt. xii. 31] : 1 Th. ii. 16 ; [Jas. v. 16 L T Tr WII] : Rev. xviii. 4 sq., etc. ; irKrjBos apapriuiv, Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. S; noielv apaprias, Jas. v. 15; also in the expressions acfxan apapnwv, dt^ieVai rds ap., etc. (see a(l>lript, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself denote the r/uiU ov penalty of sins, but the sins are con- ceived of as removed so to speak from God's sight, regarded by him as not having been done, and there- fore are not punished, iv apapr. a-v lyemridris oXos thou wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born, i. e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. ix. 34 ; (V TQif ap. aiTo6vr]a-Kfiv to die loaded with evil deeds, therefore unreformed, Jn. viii. 24 ; en iv dpapriais (ivai still to have one's sins, sc. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17. b. so7ne particular evil deed: Tijv ap. tuvttiv, Acts vii. 60 ; nda-a apaprla, Mt. xii. 31 ; apapria npos davarov, 1 Jn. v. 16 (an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from the state of fm^ received from Christ into the state of ddvaros (cf. ddvaroi, 2) in which he was before he be- came united to Christ by faith ; cf . Liicke, DeWette, [esp. Westcott, ad 1.]). 3. collectively, the complex or aijijregate of sins committed either by a single person or by many : aipeiv ttjc dp. tov Koapov, Jn. i. 29 (see a1pa>, 3 c.) ; aiTodvrio-Kctv iv t;) dp. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ; jrep'i apaprias, sc. 6v(rlas [W. 5S3 (542) ; B. 393 (336)], expiatory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (ace. to the usage of the Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. nXDfl and riNDn, e. g. Lev. v. 11 ; vii. 27 (37) ; Ps. xxxLx. (xl.) 7) ; ;(&>pir apaprias having no fellowship with the sin which he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for the concrete, i. q. dpapraiXos : Ro. vii. 7 (6 vvpos apaprla, opp. to 6 vopos ayios, vs. 12) ; 2 Co. v. 21 (tov . . . dpaprlav iiTolrja-ev he treated lum, who knew not sin, as a sinner). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq. ; [see dpaprrjpa ; Trench § Ixvi.]. djidprvposi -ov, (paprvs), without witness or testimony, unattested : Acts xiv. 1 7. (Thuc, Dem., Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ildian.) * a)iapTa)\ds, -ov, (fr. the form dpdprw, as \os from (j)(l8opai), devoted to sin, a (masc. or fern.) sinner. In the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called d/iapTojXds who is a. not free from sin. In this sense all men are sinners ; as, Mt. Ix. 13 ; 'Slk. ii. 1 7 ; Lk. v. 8, 32 ; xiii. 2 ; xviii. 13 ; Ro. iii. 7 ; v. [8], 19 ; 1 Tim. i. 15 ; Heb. vii. 26. b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked ; o. univ. : 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Jude 15 ; Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. vi. 32- 84; vii. 37, 39; xv. 7, 10; Jn. L\. 16, 24 sq. 31 ; Gal. ii. 1 7 ; Heb. xii. 3 ; Jas. iv. 8 ; v. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 18 ; apaprla itself is called dpapr(o\6s. Ro. vii. 13. p. spec, of men stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g. the tax-gatherers : Lk. xv. 2 ; xviii. 1 3 ; xix. 7 ; hence the combination TeXivat Kal ApapraT^ol, Mt. ix. 10 sq. ; xi. 19 ; ^Ik. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen, called by the Jews sinners kot iioxrjv (1 Mace. i. 34 ; ii. 48, 62 ; Tob. xiii. 6) : Mt. xxvi. 45 [?] ; Mk. xiv. 41 ; Lk. xxiv. 7 ; Gah ii. 15. (The word is found often in Sept., as the equiv. of Xtptl and j:p1, and in the O. T. Apocr. ; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 9 p. 1109», 33 ; Plut. de audiend. poet. 7, p. 25 c.)* ofiaxos, -ov, (pdxri), in Grk. writ. [fr. Pind. down] commonly not to be withstood. Invincible ; more rarely abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 16; Hell. 4, 4, 9) ; in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious : 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 2.* o^Am, -S> : 1 aor. TJprjaa ; (fr. apa together ; hence to gather together, cf. Germ, sammeln ; [al. regard the init. a as euphonic and the word as aUied to Lat. meto, Eng. mow, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that of gathering In secondary; cf. Vanicek p. 673]) ; freq. in the Grk. poets, to reap, mow down : Tas x^P"-^' J'^^- ^- "*•* o(ie'6\)o-Tos, -uv, 17. amethyst, a precious stone of a violet and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19; ace. to Phavorinus so called Sid ro dnelpyeiv rrjs pi8r)s [so Plut. quaest. conviv. iii. 1, 3, G]) : Rev. xxi. 20. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]* d)iEXc'ti>, -u> ; fut. dp(Kr]iTa> ; 1 aor. rjptkrjiia ; (fr. dpfKifs, and this fr. a priv. and ^cXco to care for) ; very com. in prof. auth. ; to be careless of, to neglect : rivos, Heb. ii. 3 ; viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foil, by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 R G; without a case, djtieXijo-awer (not caring for what had just been said [A. V. they made light of itj). Jit. xxii. 5.* d-(U(i.irTOs, -ov. (pip(f)opai to blame), blameless, deserv- ing no censure (Tertull. Irreprehensibills'), free from fault or defect : Lk. i. 6 ; Phil. ii. 15 ; iii. 6 ; 1 Th. iii. 13 [WH afiefnrT(o<; 32 'AfiirXia^ mr". a/xffiTTTiut] ; Ileb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is hack- in"); in Sept. i. ([. or}, Job i. 1, 8 etc. Com. in (jrk. ■writ. [Cf. Trench § ciii.] * a-|U|iirTci>s, adv., blamelessly, so llial there is no cause for censure: J Th. ii. 10; [iii. 13 WII mrg.] ; v. 23. [Fr. Aesch\ 1. down. Cf. Trench § ciii.] " a}if'pi(tvos, -ov, (iiepiixm), free from anxiety, free from care: Mt. xxviii. U; 1 Co. vii. 3;i (free from earthly cares). (Sap. vi. IG ; vii. 23 ; Hdian. 2, 4, 3 ; 3, 7, 11 ; Anth. n, 3,59, :>; [in jiass. sense, Soph. Ajax 120G].)* a-)UTd6cT0Si -ov, (fKTaTidrjfii), not transjiosed, not to he transferred ; fixed, unallerahle: Ileh. vi. 18; to liiitTaBf- Tov a.s siibs.t., immutahility, Heb. vi. 17. (3 Mace. v. 1 ; Polyb., Diod., Phit.) * d-(i.£Ta-K£vilTOs, -01/, (iKTaKtvcai), not to he moved from its place, nninoL-eil; mtjl^iih. /irndy persistent, [A. V. vmnov- able} : 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a. ; Dion. Hal. 8, 74 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2, IG, ; 2, 32, 3 ; 2, 3,'), 4].) * d-jiCTaiieX-qTOS, -oz/. {fxfTap.i\o\iai, /zern/ieXft), not re- pented m, metaph. y(uV/(/'u7 : 6 dp.r]v. Rev. iii. 14 (where is added o pdprvs 6 jtio^tos k. dXT)div6s). 2. it came to be used as an adverb by which something is asserted or confirmed : a. at the beginning of a dis- course, surely, of a truth, truly; so freq. in the discourses of Christ in INlt. Ilk. and Lk. : dp.!)v \e-ya> ipiv 'I sol- emnly declare unto you,' e. g. Mt. v. 18; Mk. iii. 28; Ijk. iv. 24. The repetition of the word (d/i^i/ aprjv), em- ployed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52) ; iii. 3. b. at the close of a sentence ; so it is, so be it, may it be fulfilled (yivoiro, Sept. Num. v. 22 ; Deut. xxvii. 15, etc.): Ro. i. 25; ix.fl; Gal. i. 5 ; Eph. iii. 21; Phil. iv. 20 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7 ; Ileb. xiii. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 1 ; Rev. i. 6, and often ; cf. Jer. xi. 5 ; xxxv. (xxviii.) G ; 1 K. i. 30. It was a custom, which passed over from the svnagosrues into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had read or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to (iod, the others in attendance responded Amen, and thus made the substance of what was uttered their own : 1 Co. xiv. 16 (to apTjv, the well-known response Amen), cf. Num. v. 22 ; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq. ; Neh. v. 13 ; viii. 6. 2 Co. i. 20 al (TrayycXim . . . to vat, Kal ... to aprjv, i. e. had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Amen.] a^i\Tap, -opos, o, ij, (^pxjrrjp), without a mother, mother- less; in Grk. writ. 1. born without a mother, e. g. Minerva, Eur. Plioen. G6G sq., al. ; God himself, inasmuch as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft of a mother, Ildt. 4, 151, al. 3. born of a base or un- known mother, Eur. Ion 109 cf. 837. 4. unmotherly, unworthy of the name of mother : pijTtjp dprjTap, Sojih. El. 1154. Cf. Bleek on Ileb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqij. 5. in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ' whose mother is not recorded in the genealogy ' : of jAIelchizedek, Ileb. vii. 3 ; (of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. liaer. § 12 ; [cf. Bleek u. s.]) ; cf. the classic dvoXvpmds* d-ftCavToSj -ov, (ijiiaiva)), not d< filed, unsoihil; free from that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and de- based, or its force and vigor impaired : koitt) pure, free from adultery, Heb. xiii. 4; KKr)povonia (without defect), 1 Pet. i. 4 ; BprjtTKiia, Jas. i. 27 ; pure from sin, Heb. vii. 26. (Also in the (irk. writ.; in an ethical sen.se. Plat. legg. G, p. 777 e. ; Pint. Pericl. c. 39 /Sioj KaSupos koI dpiavTos- )*' 'A|uva5dp, o, 3"ir?3>' (servant of the prince, [al. my jieojile are noble ; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. A minadah^, the prop, name of one of the ancestors of Chi'ist (1 Chr. ii. 10 [A. V. Amminadab]): Mt. i. 4 ; Lk. iii. 33 [not AVH. See B. D. s. v.].* a|x|ios, -ov, T), sand ; ace. to a Ilebr. comparison up. Tijr 6a\d(ra-t]^ and up- napd to ^eiXos t^s 6a\. are used for an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Heb. xi. 12; Ilev. XX. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Ace. to the con- text sandy ground, Jit. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr. often, Plut., Sept. often.) * dfivds, -ov, 6, [fr. Soph, and Arstph. down], a lamh : Acts viii. 32; 1 Pet. i. 19 ; toO 6eoii, consecrated to God, Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Clirist is Ukened to a sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and patiently endured, to expiate sin. See dpviov* d|jLOiP^, -rjt, fj, (fr. dpcilia, as dXati^ij fr. dXfi'0£i>, crroifir] fr. o-Tfi'^to), a very com. word with the Greeks, ntjuiial, recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of the mid. dpdliopai to requite, I'Cturn like for Uke) : in a good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.* dfiircXoS) -ov, fj, [fr. Ilom. down]s o. vine: Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 1 2. In Jn. xv. 1, 4 sq. Christ calls liimself a vine, because, as the vine imparts to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses into his followers his own divine strength and life. I'ipTr. Trjs yrjs in Rev. xiv. 18 [Rec?' om. t^s dpir.'], 19, signifies the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off', thrown into the wine-press, and trodden there.* d)i.irEXovp'Yds, -ov, 6, 17, (fr. n/uTreXos and EPFn), a vine- dresser: Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al.; Sept. for D13.)* djiircXc&v, -MKos, o, a vineyard : Mt. xx. 1 sqq. ; xxi. 28, [33], 39 sqq. ; Mk. xii. 1 sqq. ; Lk. [xiii. 6] ; xx. 9 sqq. ; 1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept. ; Diod. 4, 6 ; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)» 'A(i.-ii-X£as [T 'ApTrKiaros, Tr AVH Ii mrg. 'A|i7rXiaT09 ; hence accent 'A/xttXios ; cf. Lob. Pathol. Prolog, p. 505 ; Chandler § 32], -ov, d, Amplias (a contraction from the Lat. -•] mpliatus, which form appears in some authorities, ^Afj,7r\iaT0<; 33 cf. W. 102 (9')), a certain Christian at Rome : Ro. xvi. 8. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 174 ; cf. The Athenmum for March 4, 1882, p. 289 sq.]* 'A|nrX£aTos (Tdf.) or more correctly 'A/in-Xiavos (L mrg. Tr WII) i. q. 'AfinXias, q. v. d|Ji,vv(>>: 1 aor. mid. fjiivvanrjv ; [allied w. Lat. munii), moenia, etc., Vanicek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] lo imrd off, keep off any thing from any one, ri rivi, ace. of the thing and dat. of pers. ; hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assist any one (Thuc. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Mid. aiivvofiai, with ace. .of pers., to keep off, tvard off, any one jrom one's self; to ■defend one's self against any one (so also 2 Mace. x. 17 ; Sap. xi. 3 ; Sept. Josh. x. 13) ; to take vengeance on any one (Xen. an. 2, 3, 23; Joseph, antt. 9, 1, 2) : Acts vii. 24, where in thought supply tov aSiKoin/ra [cf. B. 194 (1G8) note; W. 258 (242)].* afuf>id|u; [fr. dij.(pl, lit. to put around]; to put on, clothe : in Lk. xii. 28 L WII a/x<^idfei for Rec. aiKpUfwiri- (A later Grk. word ; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Ale.x.] ; Job 3udx. 14 ; [xxxi. 19] ; xl. 5 ; Ps. Ixxii. 6 Symm. ; several times in Themist. ; cf. Bttm. Ausf . Spr. ii. p. 1 1 2 ; [Veitch s. V. ; B. 49 (42 sq.) ; Steph. s. v. col. 201 c. quotes from Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 to fiiv dfi(j»f(a iari jcoivois. TO 6e d[i(pLd^o> AcoptKOj/, wCTTrfp to vnoirU^iti *cat VTTOTria^a)].) Cf. d^fpte^oi* d)i<|>t-pdi\X(o ; to throw around, i. q. Trept^dWai, of a gar- ment (Horn. Od. 14, 342) ; lo cast to and fro now to one .side now to the other : a net, Mk. i. 16 G L T Tr WH [ace. to T Tr WH used absol. ; cf. oi d/i0i/3oXfif, Is. xlx. 8]. (Hab. i. 1 7.)* d|i()>tp\T|(rTpov, -ov, TO, (d/i<^/^dXX(a), in Grk. writ, any- thing thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains, a garment ; spec, a net for fishing, [casting-net'] : Jlk. i. IG RGL; Mt. iv. 18. (Sept.; Hes. scut. 215 ; Ildt. 1, 141 ; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Stn. see b'lKTvov, and cf. Trench § Ixiv. ; B. D. s. v. net.] * d|i4)ittti), i. q. dfifpuviwiii, ; in Lk. xii. 28 dfiipie^ei T Tr. Cf. d/K^tdfo). d|x4»'-<'vvu|ii ; pf. pass. ^^0ieiii-oXis, -60)9, f), Amphipolis, the metropolis of Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia] ; so called, because the Strymon flowed around it [Thuc. 4, 102]; formerly called 'Evvea Sdol (Thuc. 1,100) : Acts xvii. 1 [see B.D.].* oft^oSov, -ov, TO, (d/i<^i'. 686s), prop, a road roimd any- thing, a street, [llesych. a/KfyoSa- al pvfiai. dyviai. Si'oSoi (al. 6i€'|o6ot Siopvyfiai, al. ij TrXarcia) ; Lex. in Bekk. An- «cdota i. p. 205, H 'AfiffjoBov rj uKnrep tK Terpayaivov Siayfypaiipevr/ 6809. For exx. see Sojih. Le.x. ; Wetst. on Mk. 1. c. ; cod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.'s note)] : Mk. xi. 4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and in Gtrk. writ.) * ofK^ciTcpoi, -ai, -a, [fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the one and the other : Mt. Lx. 1 7, etc. ; ra d/xi^rtpa. Acts xxiii. 8 ; £ph. ii. 14. 3 d-p.u|xi]Tos, -ov, (fLaptdoiiai), that cannot be censured, blameless : Phil. ii. 15 R G (cf . TfKva iia>p.r)Td, Deut. xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Hom. II. 12, 109; [Ilcsiod, Pind., al. ;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)* a|is. Cf. B. D.].* 'A(iios, 6, Amos, (]'10N strong), the indecl. prop, name of one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 25.* civ, a particle indicating that something can or could occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of certain fortuitous causes. In Lat. it has no equivalent ; nor do the Eng. haply, perchance. Germ, wohl (»'o?), £^«■0, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious exx. fr. Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [cf. B. 216 (186) sqq. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exliibited (by Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.]. It is joined I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen- tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 (fyi'i/aa/efi/ au, sciret, he icould knou^ ; Lk. xvii. 6 (e'Xe'yfTc av ye would say) ; Mt. xxiii. 30 (non essemus, we should not have been) ; Jn. V. 46 ; viii. 42 ; ix. 41 ; xv. 19 ; xviii. 3G ; 1 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 10 ; iii. 21 [but WH mrg. br.] ; Heb. iv. 8 ; viii. 4, 7. 2. with the indie. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the plpf. subj. like the fut. pf. subj., I would have done it), to express what would have been, if this or that either were (ei with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or had been (ei with the aor. or plpf. preceding) : Mt. xi. 21 and Lk. x. 13 (ai/ fierfvoi^a-av they icould have re- pented) ; Mt. xi. 23 ; xii. 7 (//« would not have con- demned) ; Bit. xxiv. 43 (lie would have watched), 22 and Mk. xiii. 20 {no one would have been saved, i. e. all even now would have to be regarded as those who had perished ; cf. W. 304 (286)) ; Jn. iv. 10 {thou wouldst have asked); xiv. 2 {eiTTov av I would have said so) ; 28 {ye would have rejoiced) ; Ro. ix. 29 {we should have become) ; 1 Co. ii. 8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes the condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered from what is said : Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 {I should have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf. : Jn. xi. 21 [R Tr mrg.] {ovk &v (TtSuiiKft [L T Trtxt. WH d-aieavev'] av 34 would not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. ou< ttv drrtSavf) ; Jn. xiv. 7 [not Ttlf.] {d with the plpf. proced- in") ; 1 Jn. ii. 19 (lliei/ icoutd have remaini;d with us). Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., osp. the later) "ip is omitted, in order to intimate that the thing wanted but little (impf.) or had wanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being done, which yet was not done because the condition was not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Dtlm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858, p. 489 sqq. ; [N. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)] ; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 33 ; W. § 42, 2 p. 30.5 (286)), e. g. Jn. viii. 39 (where the av is spurious); xv. 22, 24; xLx. 11; Acts xxvi. 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 {av before eSwKare has been correctly expunged by LTTrWlI). II. Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad- verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ, irgend, etwa). 1. foil, by a past tense of the I n d i c a t i v e, when some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of ; where, " when the thing itself which is said to have been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved in av belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoim or particle " {Klolz ad Dev. p. 145) [cf. W. § 42, 3 a.] ; Saoi av as many as : Mk. vi. 5G (otrot av rjirrovro [ijrjfavTo Tj txt. T Tr t.xt. Wri] avTov as many as touched him. [cf. B. 216 (187)]) ; Mk. xi. 24 (ocra &v vpocTfvxoiievoi alreiaBe [Grsb. oni. av']. but L txt. T Tr WII have rightly restored oo-a ■npos av in what way soever: 1 Th. ii. 7 ([cf. EUic. ad loc. ; B. 232 (200)] , L T Tr WII iiv). b. the Aorist, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf. ; 69 av: Mt. V. 21, 22 (flVi; whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ; 31 sq. [in vs. 32 L T Tr WH read Traf 6 ciTroXvav'] ; x. 1 1 ; xxvi. 48 (Tdf. idv) ; :Mk. iii. 29, 35 ; ix. 41, etc. os av until (usque dum) : Mt. ii. 13 ; x. 11 ; xxii. 44 ; Jlk. vi. 10; Lk. xxi. 32 ; 1 Co. iv. 5, etc. iji/ixa av, of fut. time, not until then, when ... or then at length, udien . . . : 2 Co. iii. IG (T WH txt. idv) [cf. Kuhner ii. 951 ; Jelf ii. 565]. uj av as soon as [B. 232 (200)] : 1 Co. xi. 84 ; Phil. ii. 23. d(j)' ov hi iytpBrj, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what- ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But idv (q. V.) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men- tioned, instead of av; and in many places the Mss. and edd. fluctuate between av and idv. (exx. of whioli haie already been adduced); [cf. 7V//'. Proleg. p. 9(i ; 117/. App. p. 173 " ppedominantly av is found after consi>- nants, and idv after vowels "]. Finally, to this head must be referred orav (i. (p ore «v) with the indie, and much oftener with the subj. (see orav), and oVur av. al- though this last came to be used as a final conjunction in the sense, that, if it he possUde : Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii. 20 (1 9) ; XV. 1 7 ; Ro. iii. 4 ; see onas, IL 1 b. [Cf. W. 309 (290 sq.); B. 234 (201).] III. Sv is joined to the Optat. [W. 303 (284); B. 217(188)]; when a certain condition is laid down, as in wishes, / irould that etc. : Acts xxvi. 29 (eii^aipT^v [Tdf. ev^dprjv] liv I could pray, sc. did it depend on me) ; indirect (luestions [W.l. c. ; B. 254 (219)] : Acts viii. 31 (vrwr av SvvaipT)v; i. e. on what condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oec. 11, 5); Acts xvii. 18 (ri &v diXoi . . . \ey(iv what would he say ? it being assumed that he wishes to utter some defi- nite notion or other) ; Acts ii. 12 RG; in dependent sentences and indirect questions in which the nar- r.ator introduces another's thought [W. § 42,4; B.l. c] : Lk. i. 62 ; vi. 11 ; ix. 46 : [xv. 26 L br. Tr WII ; cf. xviii. 36 Lbr. Trbr. AVIImrg.]; Acts v. 24; x. 17; .wii. 20 R G. IV. av is found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5 (fi piri Ti av [WH br. av], except perhaps, sc. yivoiro, [but cf. Bttm. as below]), as av, adverbially, tanquam (so already the Vulg.), as if: 2 Co. x. 9 (like wairtp dv in (Jrk. writ. ;"cf. Kiihncr ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4 ; Jelf § 430] ; B. 219 (189) ; [L. and S. s. v. D. HI.]). av, contr. from idv, if; foil, by the subjunc. : Jn. xx. 23 [Lchni. idv. Also by the (pres.) indie, in 1 Jn. v. 15 Lchm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further,, L T Tr WII have received av in Jn. xiii. 20 ; xvi. 23 ; [so WII Jn.xii. 32; cf. W. 291 (274) ; B. 72 (63)].* ttvi, prep., prop, upwards, up, (cf. the adv. av, -5} : 1 aor. dve^6r)t7a ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; to raise a cry, to cry out anj-thing, say it shout- ing : Lk. Lx. 38 (L T Tr WH e^6r,(je) ; Mk. xv. 8 (where read dva^ds, see dvafialva, a. sub fin.) ; with the addition of (jiicvTi peydXr/, INIt. xxvii. 46 [Tr WH Lmrg. e3o'i;(rf], (as Gen. xxvii. 38 ; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq. ; [and see /Sodco, fin.].* dva-PoXi), -Ijs, f/, (dra/SoAXo), q. v.), often in Grk. writ., a putting off, delay : noieicrdai. dra/SoXiji' to interpose (lit. make) delay. Acts xxv. 1 7, (as in Thuc. 2, 42 ; Dion. Hal. 11, 33; Plut. Camill. c. 35).* dvd-yaiov, -ov, to, (fr. dvd and yala i. e. ■j^), prop, any- thing above the ground j hence a room in the upper part of a house : Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 1 2, (in G L T Tr WH). Also written dvwyaiov (which Tdf. formerly adopted ; cf. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. dvaxeiav^), dvayeov (Rec), dvQiyewv; on this variety in writing cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 297 sq.; IRulherford, Kew Phryn. p. 358]; avajyiXKo) 36 dvaBeiKvvfMi Fritzsehe on Mk. p. Gil sq.; B. 13 (12); [WII. App. dv-a-yycXXw ; un\\i, avTiyyeWoif] [tut. ai/ayyfXo)] : 1 aor. awjyyfiXa; 2 aor. pass. riwjyye'Xiji', Ko. XV. 21 ; iPet. i. 12 (.several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31; W. 82 (78); [Veitoh s. V. dyyeWa]) ; to announce, malic known, [cf. ava, .S b.] : ri, Acts xix. 1>< ; foil, by oti, Jn. v. 15 [Lmrg. AVIItxtT frn-ei/]; o : 1 aor. dveyevvrjua ; pf. pass, avaycyev- VTjiuu; to produce again, beget again, beget aneiv; metaph. : nva, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God, 1 Pet. i. 3 ; passively ?k rtvos, ibid. i. 23. (In the same sense in eccl. writ. [cf. Sojth. Lex. s. v.]. Among prof, auth. used by Jose]ih. antt. 4, 2, 1 Tan/ ck toO crratridffii' avTois afayfvvwfiivcov [yet Bekker au y€i^Ofi£faiv~\ bnviov tohich (iriijiniiti'd.)* ava-'yivuo-Ku ; [impf. avtyivaxTKev Acts viii. 28] ; 2 aor. dveyvav, [inf. dvayvwvai Lk. iv. 16], ptep. dvayvovs'. Pass., [pres. auayiva(TKoiJ.ai] ; 1 aor. dv(yva>cr6r]v ; in prof. auth. 1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately, to acknowledge ; hence 2. to read, (in tliis signif. ["first in Find. O. 10 (11). 1"] fr. [Arstph.,] Thuc. down) : ti, Mt. xxii. 31 ; ^Ik. xii. 10 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; Jn. xix. 20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co. i. 13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lchm. mrg.] ; Rev. i. 3 ; v. 4 Rec. ; riva, one's book. Acts viii. 28, 30 ; eV with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5 ; xxi. 42 ; JNIk. xii. 26 ; with ellipsis of iv to vo/iw, Lk. x. 26 ; foil, by on [objective], Mt. xix. 4 ; [foil, by on recitative, Mt. xxi. 16]; n fjroiT/o-f, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes : Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Acts xv. 31; xxiii. 34; Eph. iii. 4 ; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2. to read to others, read aloud : 2 Co. iii. 15 ; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Mmiio-^s i. q. the books of Moses) ; [Lk. iv. 16 ; Acts xiii. 27] ; 1 Th. V. 27; Col. iv. 16.* dvaYKa^Qi ; [impf. tjvayKo^ov^ ; 1 aor. rjvayKaixa ; 1 aor. pass. T]vayKalur. iv dvayKUis, 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xii. 10.* dva--YVQ)pC^w : 1 aor. pass. dfcyi/copiCT^i/i/; lo recognize: Acts vii. 13 [Trtxt. Wlltxt. fyvcopiadij'} was recognized by his brethren, cf. Gen. xiv. 1. (Plat, politic, p. 258 a. dvayvo)pL^€ii> tovs (rvyyfvdi.)* dvd-YVuo-is, -fojs, rj, {avaywa>o-Ka>, q. v.) ; a. a knoic- ing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on] : Acts xiii. 15; 2 Co. iii. 14; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q. S'ipp.)* av-d^u : 2 aor. li^^yayoK. inf. dvayaydv, [ptcp. dvaya- ycov] ; Pass., [jires. dpdyofiat] ; 1 aor. [cf. sub fin.] dv!)- xBrjV, [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, lo lead or bring into a higher place ; foU. by ds with ace. of the place : Lk. ii. 22; iv. 5 [T Tr "WH om. Lbr. the cl.] ; xxii. 66 [T TrWII dniiyayov']; Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 («s T. (pr]jjLOv, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan), rivii in veKpav fr. the dead in the world below, to the upjier world, Ileb. xiii. 20 ; Ro. x. 7 ; riva tw \aa to bring one forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place), and set him before the people to be tried. Acts xii. 4 ; Svaiav ra eiSmXa to offer sacrifice to the idol, because the victim is lifted up on the altar. Acts vii. 41. Navi- gators are kot i^oxr)v said dvdyfaSm (pass, [or mid.]) when they launch out, set sail, ]nil lo sea, (so dvayayfi in Justin. Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 142 [and in the classics]) : Lk. viii. 22; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21; xx. 3, 13; xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21 ; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb. 1, 21, 4; 23, 3, etc.) [Comp. : eVarayu.] * dvo-8e£KW|j.i ; 1 aor. dviSa^a, [inipv. dmSei^ov; fr. Soph, down] ; lo lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all to behold (Germ, aufzeigcn) ; hence to .show accurately, clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 cf. 6) : Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast chosen). Hence dva&. nva to proclaim any one as elected to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general, etc., messenger) : Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 23, 25 ; x. 11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48, avdhei^t<; 37 avadefiarl^o) 3; 61, 3; Diod. i. 66; 13, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, etc.; Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.). Cf. Win. De rerb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 12 sq.* dvd-S€i$i.;, -eais, fj, (avaSeUvviJit, q. v.), a pointing out, public skoiring forth ; tu>v -j^povav. Sir. xliii. 6. a pro- claiminij, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected to ofKce (Plut. Mar. 8 virarav avaba^is [cf. Polyb. 15, 2G, 7]) : Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced [A. V. of his shewingj to the people as the forerunner of the Messiah ; this announcement he himself made at the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).* dva-Sexofiai : 1 aor. dveSe^aiirjn ; fr. Horn, down ; to take up, take upon one's self, undertake, assume; hence to receive, entertain any one hospitably : Acts xxviii. 7 ; to entertain in one's mind : ras eTrayyeXias, i. e. to em- brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 1 7." dva-5i8a)|ii ; 2 aor. ptcp. avaSuis; 1. to gire forth, send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants yielding fruit, etc. ; in prof. auth. 2. ace. to the sec- ond sense which ava has in composition [see dvd, 3 b.], to deliver up, hand over : emarokrjv. Acts xxiii. 33, (the same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and Plut.).* dva-^d(i), -0} : 1 aor. dce'f?)(ra ; a word found only in the N. T. and eccl. writ. ; to live again, recover life ; a. proj)., in Rec. of Ro. xiv.- 9 ; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop. one is said ava^rjv who has been vcKpos in a trop. sense ; a. to be restored to a correct life : of one who returns to a better moral state, Lk. xv. 24 [WH mrg. t^rjafv] ([A. V. is alive again'], cf. Mey. ad loc), 32 (T Tr WH cfijcre). /3. to revive, regain strength and vigor : Ro. vii. 9 ; sin is alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the fall of Adam ; yet it is destitute of power (v(Kpd earn) in innocent cliildrcu ignorant of the law ; but when they come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power in them also. Others less aptly explain dve^rjo-e here began to live, sprang into life, (Germ, lebte a uf).* dvo-^T]T€'u, -M ; [impf . avf^r)Tovv\ ; 1 aor. dpe^fiTrjo-a ; 'to run through with the eyes any scries or succession of men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make diligent search. Germ, daran hinsuchen, aufiuclien' (_Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 14) : rivd, Lk. ii. 44, (and 45 L txt. T Tr WII) ; Acts xi. 25. (See e.\x:. fr. Grk. writ. [fr. Plato on] in Win. 1. c.) * dva-5wvw|ii : to gird up ; mid. to gird up one's self or for one's self : dva^aaapivoi ras otr^ias, 1 Pet. i. 13, i. e. prepared, — a metaphor derived from the practice of the Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their move- ments were accustomed, when about to start on a jour- ney or engage in any work, to bind their long and flow- ing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them with a leathern girdle ; cf . jrcpifmi'ro/it. (Sept. Judg. xviii. 16 ; Prov. xxLx. 35 (xxxi. 17) ; Dio Clirvs. or. 72, 2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139 d., al.)* dva-^onn)p€<», -a> ; (to (orTTvpov i. e. a. the remains of a fire, embers; b. that by which the fire is kindled anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows) ; to kindle aneiv, rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of dva- cf. Ellic. on 2 Tim. as below] ; generally trop., to kindle up, in- flame, one's mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10, 16 of a horse roused to his utmost ; Hell. 5, 4, 46 ; An- tonin. 7, 2 (pavTaaUs; Plut. Pericl. 1, 4; Pomp. 41, 2; 49, 5 ; Plat. Charm, p. 156 d. ; etc.) : to x^p^o-im, 2 Tim. i. 6, i. e. TO TTvevpa, vs. 7. Intrans. to be enkindled, to gain strength : Gen. xlv. 27 ; 1 Mace. xiii. 7, and in prof, auth. ; di/aft<)jrvp7;(raTiB ^ ttiotis, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3 [see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc.].* dva-fldXXci) : 2 aor. dviBaXov ; (Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 7 ; Sap. iv. 4 ; very rare in Grk. writ, and only in the poets, cf. Bttin. Ausf.'Spr. ii. p. 195 ; [Veitch s. v. 6M^o> ; W. 87 (83); B. 59 (52)]); to shoot tip, sprout again, grow green again, flourish again, (Hom. II. 1, 236; Ael. v. h. 5, 4) ; trop. of those whose condition and affairs are becoming more prosperous: Phil. iv. 10 avedoKfre to v-aip Ipov ippovdv ye have revived so as to take thought for me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specifica- tion, W. 317 (298) ; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. Others, ace. to a trans, use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek. xvii. 24 ; Su-. i. 18, etc.), render ye have revived (alloiced to revive) your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an object-acc, W. 323 (303) ; B. 263 (226) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; against whom see Meyer ad loc* dvd-6E)ia, -TOE, TO, (i. q. to dvaT(d(ipevov) ; 1. prop. a thing set up or laid by in order to be kept ; spec, a votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put in some other conspicuous place: 2 Mace. ii. 13, (Plut. Pelop. c. 25); Lk. xxi. 5 in LT, for dvadrifiaai RGTr WH ; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the codd. : Moeris, dvddrjfia drrtKOis, difddepa ^WtjvlkCis. Cf. eiriBrjpa, eiriSepxi, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [cf. 445 ; Paral. 417; see also i)psn(,s-. Gram. Unters. p. 41]. 2. dvaSepa in the Sept. is generally the translation of the Heb. D1V\, a thing devoted to God without hope of being redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28, 29] ; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction, Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, etc. [AV. 32]; a thing abominable and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence in the X. T. dcd^efia denotes a. a curse : dvaBijxan dva- 6(p.aTliuv, Acts xxiii. 14 [W. 466 (434) ; B. 184 (159)]. b. (( man accursed, devoted to the direst woes (i. q. int- KarapaTos) : dvdOepa eoTO), Gal. i. 8 sq. ; 1 Co. xvi. 22 ; drndefia Xf'yeiv Ttvd to execrate one, 1 Co. xii. 3 (R G, but L T Tr WH have restored dvadep-a 'Ir/a-oiis, sc. eara) ; dmdefta eivai dno Toi XpKTTov, Ro. ix. 5 (pregnantly i. q. doomed and so separated /ram Christ). Cf. the full re- marks on this word in Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 247 sqq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq. ; [a trans, of the latter by Prof. Riddle in Schaff's Lange on Rom. p. 302 sqq. ; see also Trench § v. ; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. 1. c. ; Elli- cott ibid. ; Tholuck on Rom. 1. c. ; BB.DD. s. vv. Anath- ema, Excommunication].* ov",-fli\La.T'i'Cfii ; 1 aor. dveSepaTKra ; (dvddepa, q. v.) ; a purely bibl. aud eccl. word, to declare anathema or ac- cursed ; in the Sept. i. q. D""inri to devote to destruction, (Josh. vi. 21, etc. ; 1 Mace. v. 5) ; iavrov to declare one's apadeoipeo) 38 avaKei, :> ; 15. 181 (15:>j]) «uurui/ foil, bv inf., to bind one's self under a cur.'ie to do something;, Acts xxiii. 14. abfol., to asseverate with direful impreeations : ISlk. xiv. 71. [CoMl'. : (ear-ai/a^e/xan'fo).] • dva-6Eup€'(D, -a ; pro]). ' to survey a series of things from the lowe.st to the highest. Germ, daran hinaehen, lungs durchsclien', [lo look- along up or through^, ( Win. De verb, comp. Pt. iii. p. 3) ; hence to look a! aHentwebj, to ohsen-e accuratehj, consider well : tI. Acts xvii. 23 ; Ilcb. xiii. 7. (Diod. Sic. 12, 15 f| fTTiTToX^f /jfV 6eu>povixevos • ■ • avaBeat- povjievos Si (cat /ifT aKpi^ieins f^era^ofievos; 14,109; 2, 5; Lcian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Tlut. Aem. P. 1 [uncertain] ; Cat. min. 14 ; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)* dvd-6T||jia, -7-09, to, {avaTiBrjfii),. a gift consecrated and laid iijj in a limj)le, a viiliri: offering (see dvoBfiia, 1) : Lk. xxi. 5 [RGTrWH]. (.3 Mace. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2 ; Koa-nCtv ava6rjfi.atTi. occurs also in 2 IMacc. i.-;. IG; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. dvadrjuacri re kc KoajiriKajXiV TO Upa avTaiv, Hdt. 1, 183 to /xev lirj Upbv ovTw KfKoapijTdt • €(7Ti (5e Koi Tdia ava6r}paTa ttoXXo.)* dva(SEia ('i' Wll avmhia; see I, t), -as, rj, (nvaihr^s, and this fr. f) alSas a sense of shame)^; fr. Iloni. down; sliamclessness, impudence : Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. importunity]).* dv-aCpco-is, -fois, r], (fr. avmpia, 2, q. v.), a destroying, killing, murder, ' taking off ' : Acts viii. 1 ; xxii. 20 Rec. (Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4; 2 Mace. V.' 13. Xen. llcll. 6, 3, 5 ; Ildian. 2, 13, 1.)* dv-aif» w, -w ; fut. dwXo), 2 Th. ii. 8 (L T Tr WII txt. cf. Jud. vii. 13; Dion. Ilal. 11, 18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25; cf. W. 82 (7^); [B. 53 (47); Veitch s. v. aipt'a, " porh. late f\Si "]), for the usual amipt'ja-o> ; 2 aor. aveiXoc ; 2 aor. mid. di/fiXo/iiji' (but dveiXaro Acts vii. 21, dvciXav Acts x. 39, dveiXuTc Acts ii. 23, in G L T Tr WH, after the Alex, form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq. ; B. 39 (34) sq. [see aipea']) ; Pass., prcs. draipoC^ai; 1 aor. dvripe'Brjv ; 1. to take up, to lift up (from the ground) ; mid. to take up for myself as mine, to oivn, (an exposed infant) : Acts vii. 21 ; (so dvaipelaBm, Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7; [Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18, etc.]). 2. to take away, abolish ; a. ordinances, es- tablished customs, (to abrogate) : Heb. x. 9 : b. a man, to put out of the way, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, GG] Thuc. down) : Mt. ii. 16; Lk. xxii. 2 ; xxiii. 32 ; Acts ii. 23 ; v. 33, 36 ; vii. 28 ; ix. 23 sq. 29; x. 39; xii. 2; xiii. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27; X.N.V. 3; xxvi. 10 ; 2 Th. ii. 8 L T Tr WII txt. ; eai^roV, to kill one's self. Acts xvi. 27.* av-aCTios, -oi', (aiTi'a) guiltless, innocent: Mt. .xii. 5, 7. (Often in ( Irk. writ. ; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. 'PJ ; Sus. 62.)* dva-Ka6-i1^w : 1 aor. av(Ka6i.cra ; to raise one's self and sit upright; to sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mrg. WHmrg. tKaBiafv]; Acts i.x. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19; Plut. Alex. c. 14; and often in medical writ.; with tauToV, Plut. Philop. c. 20 ; mid. in same sense. Plat. Phaedoc.3 p. 60 b.)' dva-Kaiv(to> ; ((taivdf) ; to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ. auffrischen) : riva «is pLcrdvoiav so to renew that he shall rci>ent, Heb. vi. C. (Isocr. Arcop. 3 ; I'liilo, leg. ad Gaium J 1 1 ; Joscpli. antt. 9, 8, 2 ; Plut. Jlarcell. c. 6 ; Lcian. Philop. c. 12; SejJt. Ps. cii. (ciii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 30, etc. ; eccl. writ.) Cf. Win. Do verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10.* dva-Kaiv6, -co : [])res. ]iass. dvoKaivovfiai] ; a word ])ecuhar to the apostle Paul; proji. to cause to gi-ow up (dvd) neu; to make tiew; pass., new strength and vigor is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16 ; to be changed into a new kind of life, (ip])osed to the former corru])t state, Col. iii. 10. Cf. ir//i. Do verb. comp. Pi. iii. p. 10 [or Mcy. on Col. 1. e. ; Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi IG, 17 dvaxatvo- noii(i>. Cf. Kiistlin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]* dva-Kalvcixris, -ear, fj, a renewal, renovation, complete change for the better, (cf. dvaKaivoa) : toC vooi, object, gen., Ro. xii. 2; ■nvfip.aTos &yiov, eftected by the Holy Sjiirit, Tit. iii. 5. (Etym. Magn., Suid. ; [lierm. vis^ 3, 8, 9 ; other eccl. writ.] ; the simple Kaivaxrts is found only in Joseph, antt. 18, G, 10.) [Cf. Trench § xviii.] * dva-KaXinrTw : [Pass., pres. ptcp. civaKHXuTrTo/ifror; pf. \)\e\). uvaKeKaXvppivos]; to unveil, to uncoi'er (by drawing back the veil), (i. q. TXli, Job xii. 22 ; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 16) : KaXvppa . . . pr/ dvaKn^vTrropfvou the veil . . . not being lifted (lit. unveiled) [so A\'H punctuate, see W. 534 (497); but LTAlf. etc. take the ptcp. as a neut. ace. absol. referring to the clause that follows with oTt : it not being revealed that, etc.; (for draxaX. in this sense see Polyb. 4, 85, 6 ; Tob. .xii. 7, 11); see Meyer ad loc], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand- ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (dvaKu\v7TT(LV avyKtiXvppa. Deut. .x.xii. 30 Alex.) ; dvaKeKoXvppefa Trpoawnm with unveiled face, 2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded, but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ. (The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Ai-istot. de sens. 6, vol. i. p. 444", 25], Polyb., Pint.)* ttva-Kdni7Tca : int. dvaKapyfrco; 1 aor. dveKOfiij/a: to bend back, turn hack. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ; in Sept. i. q. IVd) inlrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk. X. 6 (where the meaning is, 'your salutation shall leturn to you, as if not spoken ') ; Acts xviii. 21 ; Heb. xi. 15.* dvd-Kci)Lai ; [impf. 3 ]iers. sing. dvtKeiTo] ; (lej)on. mid. to he laid up, laid : Mk. v. 40 R L br. [cf . Eng. to lay out]. In later Cirk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf. B.D. s. V. Meals] ; the earlier Greeks used Kiladat, Kora- KfiaSai, cf. Lob. ad Phrj-n. p. 216 s(]. ; Fritzsche [or Wetst.] on Mt. Lx. 10) : Mt. Lx. 10; xxii. 10 sq. ; xxvi. 7,20; Mk. [vi. 26TTrWH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk.vii. 37 (LTTrWH xa-d/ct iTni) ; xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec. avvavuKctp.) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat togilher, to {line: Jn. vi. 11. [Cf. di/an-iVTco, fin. Comp. : trvv-ava- Kf tjuat.] * dva-KC(|>aXai6ti>, -a> : [pres. pass. dtiaK.((\>a\movpai ; 1 aor. mid. inf. dvaKfrliakaiaxraaBai]; (fr. Kc<^aXaida>, (). v., and this fr. KftpaXaiov, q. v.) ; to sum up (again), to repeat sununarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the substance of a speech; Quintil. 6. 1 'rerum repetitio et congregatio, quae graece dvaKftftaXaloxris dicitur ', [fpyov avaK\iva> 39 avaKvai<; fir)TOf:i.Kr)i . . . di'aKe(f>a\muiiTa(T6at npus amfivrjaiv. Aristot. frag. 123, vol. v. p. 14;ii.i', 33]); su in Ito. ,\iii. 'J. In Eph. i. 10 God is said avoKfCJiaXaiuKraa-BaL ra ■ndina iv ra \pi(TTa>, to bring together again for himself (note the mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin) into one combined state of fellowship in Christ, the uni- versal bond, [cf. Mey. or Ellic. on Eph. 1. c.] ; (Protev. rjac. 1 3 f IS e'/if aveKe : 1. to roll up. 2. to roll back : dvaxc KvXiiTTm 6 \ldos, Mk. xvi. 4 T Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen. vi. p. 23 7 c. ; Lcian. de luctu 8 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.)* dva-ianrro) : 1 aor. dveKvijra ; to raise or lift one's self rip; a. one's body: Lk. xiii. 11 ; Jn. viii. 7, 10; (Xen. de re equ. 7, 10, al. ; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one's soul; to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28 ; (Xen. oec. 11, 5 ; Joseph, b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).* dva-\o|ipdviu ; 2 aor. dvf'\al3ov ; 1 aor. pass. ai/cXij^Siji/ (du€Xljpe^v LTTrWH; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54); Veitch (s. x.Xap^dvco) ; see Xo/i/3dj»a), and s. v. M, /x]) ; [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. to take up, raise : ets toi/ ovpavov, ilk. xvi. 19; Acts i. 11 ; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. 11) ; without care. Acts i. 2, 22 ; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385)], (Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to carrj- or use it) : Acts vii. 43 ; Eph. vi. 13, 16. to take to one's self: nvd, in order to conduct him. Acts xxiii. 31 ; or as a companion, 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; or in Acts xx. 13 sq. to take up sc. into the ship.* dvd-Xiiil/is (awJXi7/i\|ci9 L T Tr WH ; see M, p.), -cms, 17, (dvaXaplSdvoi), [fr. Hippocr. down], a taking up: Lk. is. 51 (sc. CIS Tov ovpavov of the ascension of Jesus into heaven; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18; Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. s. v. ; and Meyer on Lk. 1. c.]).* dv-aXuTKu : fr. the pres. dva\6o> [3 pers. sing. dvdKoi, 2 Th. ii. 8 ^'\^:l nirg.] come the fut. dvaXwam ; 1 aor. dvrjKma^a and dvdXaxra [see Veitch] ; 1 aor. pass. dvrjXar- 6rjv; (the simple verb is found only in the pass. oKla-Kopai. to he taken ; but a in aXl]V dvd\v; 1 aor. av(\vv avfKvev; add Ael. V. h. 4, 23 ; [aviXvafv 6 erndKoTTos HXdrov iv nvpia, Acta et mart. Matth. § 31]). to return, « tok ydfiav, Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] cf. Kuiuocl [and AVctstein] ad loc. ; (irimm on 2 Mace. viii. 2j.* dva)MipTt)TOs, -Of, (fr. av priv. and the form dfiapria), sinless, both one who lias not sinned, and one who cannot sin. In the former sense in .In. viii. 7; Deut. xxix. 19; 2 Mace. viii. 4 ; xii. 42 ; [Test. xii. Pair. test. Benj. § 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, cf. Ull- mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng. trans, p. 99 : Cremer s. v.].* dva-|Uvii> ; [fr. Horn, down] ; rivd, to wait for one (Germ, erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await one wliose coming is known or foreseen]), with the adiled notion of ])atience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [cf. EI- licott ad loc.]. Good Greek ; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Ft. iii. p. 15 sq.* [ttva-(ji£pos, i. e. avd ftepos, see dvd, 1.] [avd-p.€0"ov, i. e. dvd p^fTov, see dvd, 1.] Q>»a-(iilivT|u : [• in good auth. apparently confined to the [)rcs.' : 1 aor. dv(V7)-^a] ; to return to soberness (tK peBTjs, which is added by Grk. writ.) ; metaph. : 2 Tim. ii. 20 tK rfjs TOV 8iaffu\ov nayiSos [W. § 6(i, 2 d.] to be set free from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind ['one's sober senses']. (Philo, legg. alleg. ii. § 16 dva- vri66yyov as oi dfiadels^) in some Mss. in Lk. xiv. 13, 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH ; [see WH. App. p. 151]) for dvdiTrjpos, q. v. dva^liiru : 1 aor. dvenefx-^a ; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down] ; 1. to send up ; i. e. a. to a higher place ; b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Plut. Mariusc. 17; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 20, 5]) : Tivd Trpdf Tiva, Lk. xxui. 7, 15 ; Acts xxv. 21 ■ L T Tr WH. 2. to send back: nvd, Philem. 1 2 (1 1) ; Tivd nvi, Lk. xxiii. 11.* ttva-irn8du> : [1 aor. ptcp. dvairrjbrja-as^ ; (Hom. II. 11, 379 ; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.) ; to leap up, sprint/ up, start u}) : dvainjSrjaas, Mk. x. 50 L T Tr WH ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. (1 S. XX. 34 ; Prov. xviii. 4 [Aid. etc.] ; Tob. ii. 4 ; vi. 3 ; vii. 6.)* dvd-in]pos, -ov, (prop. TTrjpos fr. the lowest part to the highest — dvd ; hence Siiid. o Ka6' vTT€p^6\7]v 7rfiTT}pap.(vos, [cf. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs, maimed, crippiled; injured in, or bereft of, some member of the body : Lk. xiv. 13, 21 dvanr)povs, ^t^XoiIs, Tv\ovs. In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain Mss. the spelling dvaTtelpovs — manifestly false, as aris- ing from itacism. (Plat. Critop. 53 a. x'"^"'- ««' tv^\o\ Km aWoi dudnripoi : Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. ]i. 585', 29| ylvovTm i^ dvanfjpav dvdirtjpoi ; Lys. ap. Suid. pifa Koi 2>Ta dvdnjjpos ; 2 Mace. viii. 24 roit p.e\e(nv dvaTrrjpovs.)* dva-Tr£imi> : 2 aor. dveweaov, 3 pers. plur. dveiKoov !Mk. vi. 40 (TTrWH dvincrrav) \ Jn. .vi. 10 (LTTrWH dvfufaav), inf. dvavfaeiv, im])v. dvdntcre Lk. xiv. 10 (Rec. avdmaov fr. 1 aor. ai/cTretra, [(Grsb. dvuTTfuaL i. e. 1 aor. mid. impv.)]) ; Lk. xvil. 7 [R G dvdirccrai, cf. WH. App. p. 164 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 ; see 7riVr; 1 aor. dveiT\i]paiaa; [pres. pass. dvanKripovpaC] ; {dvd to, up to, e. g. to fill a vessel up to the brim ; up to the appointed measure or standard. Germ, a nfullen) ; [fr. Eurip. down] ; 1. to Jill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, G p. 223) ; hence trop. dfutprias, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is still wanting to complete the number of their sins ; on the meaning, cf. Gen. xv. IG ; Dan. viii. 23 ; ix. 24 ; Mt. xxiii. 32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). dvanXripovTai f/ npocpTjTeia the prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corre- sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. tov v6p.ov to fulfil i. e. observe the law perfectly, Gal. vi. 2, (Barn. ep. 21 dvan^. ndcrav cvTo\riv) ; tov tottov TtKoj to fill the place of any one, 1 Co. xiv. 16 (after the rabbin. Dipp sSp to hold the position of any one, [yet cf. Me}-, ad loc.]). 2. to supplt/ : TO voTipriixa, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 7 (they by their presence supplied your place in your ab- sence) ; cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. dXK' ei' ti i^iXmov, aov tpyov (sc. ea-Ttv') dvairXrjpw^rat. Cf. Win. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 1 1 sq. ; [Ellic. on Phil. 1. c, or Mey. on Gal. 1. c. Comp. : dvr-, Trpoa-avairXTjpoai]." dvai7o\6-yTiTos, -ov, icilhuut defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20; also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1. (Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46 ; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) • ova-irrio-cro) : 1 aor. awWu^a ; (dvd — cf. the Germ, ai// i. q. auseinander, see dva\va> — and 7n-u6i)v ; to li(/ht up, kindle : Lk. xii. 49 ; Acts xxviii. 2 [R G] ; Jas. iii. 5. [From Hdt. down.] * dv-op£8nr|Tos, -01/, (a priv. and dpid/iea), innumerable: Hob. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.]* dva-o-ctu) ; 1 aor. di/eo-ftira ; to shake up ; trop. to stir up, excite, rouse : tow oxXov, Mk. xv. 11; tov Xaov, Lk. xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91 ; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 8, 81.)* dva- ; Phil. iii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; with the addi- tion of iKKpav. Ko. i. 4 (a generic phrase : the rcsurrectioii- of-thc-iUad, ahhough it has come to pass as yet only in the case of Christ aloue; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2 a. fin.) ; (K veKpav, 1 Pet. i. 3. b. that of all in e n at the end of the present age. This is called simply avaaraarK or r, draorao-tf, Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Jli. xii. 18, 23; Lk. XX. 27, 33, 36 ; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; by meton. i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn. xi. 25 ; with the addition of rj ex vtKpwv, Lk. xx. 35 ; Acts iv. 2; or simply of Tav vcKpaiv [on the distinction which some (e. g. Van Ilengcl on Ro. i. 4 ; Van llengel and Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 1 1 ; Crcnier s. v.) would make betweeu these phrases, see W. 123 (117) ; B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii. 31 ; Acts xvii. 82; xxiii. 6 ; x.xiv. 15 [Rec], 21 ; xxvi. 23 ; 1 Co. XV. 12 sq. 21, 42 ; Ilcb. vi. 2. avaar. (o}7Js res- urrection to life (df. €11 fojijc, 2 Jlacc. vii. 14 [cf. Dan. xii. 2]), and av. -njs Kpls resurrection to judgment, Jn. v. 29, (on the genitives cf. AV. 188 (177)) ; the former is rj avdcT. Taip &iKma>v, Lk. xiv. 14 ; KpfiTTiOV avaaraaii, Ileb. xi. 35 (so called in comparison with a continuance of life on earth, wliich is spoken of as an dracrratns by ,1 kind of license; [cf. W. 460 (429)]). ij dvaar. f] npioTrj m Rev. XX. 5 sq. will be that of true Christians, and at the end of a tliousand years will be followed by a second resur- rection, tliat of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq. On the question whetlier and in what sense Paul also believed in two resurrections, separated from each other by a definite space of time, cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. fiir wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res- urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were restored to life before burial : Ileb. xi. 35.* dvoiTTaTiu, -"i- : hit. dva; \^1 aor. dvecrTpr\jfa; Pass., pres. di'a(rTpc0Ofiai] ; 2 aor. di'eiTrpdpouf, Horn. II. 23, 436). 2. tu turn back; intrans. [W. 251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. revertor, (as in (irk. writ.; in Sept. i. q. 311^) : Acts v. 22; xv. 16 (Iiere dvaaTpi-^ai km has not like the Ilebr. 2W the force of an adverb, again, but (iod in the IMcssiah's advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of as having previously aban. 581 [Kng. trans, iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. 5 : Ezck. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. like the Ilebr. TjSn to walk, of the manner of life and moral character, to conduct one's self, behave one's self, lire: 2 Co. i. 12 (ev Tw Kotr/xw) ; 1 Tim. iii. 15 (iv oixm 0(ov) ; Eph. ii. 3 (ivois among whom); 2 Pet. ii. 18 (iv irXdvri). simply to conduct or behave one's self ' walh ', (Germ, wandeln) : 1 Pet. i. 17 ; Ileb. x. 33 ; («caXur) xiii. 18. [Cf. its use e. g. in Xen. an. 2, 5, 14 ; Polyb. 1, 9, 7 ; 74, 13 ; 86, 5 etc., (see dvaiTTporj)^), fin.) ; Prov. xx. 7 Sept. ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; etc.]* dva-ii, -^r, fj, (fr. the pass. dvaaTp(u : 2 aor. pass. av£Tpd(pT]v ; pf. pass. ptcp. dva- Tfdpaiifiei/os ; 1 aor. mid. avedpe-iifdpTjv; to nurse up, nour- ish up, (Germ, aufncihren, auffutlern) ; prop, of young children and animals nourished to promote their growth (Xcn. mem. 4, 3, 10, etc. ; Sap. vii. 4) ; to brinr/ up : Lk. iv. 16 T WH mrg. ; Acts vii. 20 sq. ; with the predomi- nant idea of forming the mind. Acts xxii. 3, (4 Mace. X. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ill. ]>. 4.* ava-aiya» : 1 aor. dvi(pava, Doric for the more com. d«'0i)ra, (Acts xxi. 3 R T WH [with Erasm., Steph., Mill] ; cf. Passow p. 2199 ; [Vcitch, and L. and S., s. v. fpalvio; W. 89 (85); B. 41 (35)]; see em(j)aiva>) ; Pass., [pres. ava(f)a'Lvopai] ; 2 aor. averpavriv ; [fr. Horn, down] ; III hriiif/ to li(/ht, hold up to view, show; Pass, to appear, hi: made apparml: Lk. xix. 11. An unusual phrase is avw^avivTfS ttjv Kinrpov having sighted Cyprus, for dva(f)a- V(iaj]s Tjp'iv T^f Kinrpov, Acts xxi. 3 ; cf. B. 190 (104) ; W. §39, la. p. 260 (244); here R" T WH [see above] read ava(^dvavT(s Tr)v K. after we had rendered Cyprus visible (to us) ; [R. V. Iiad come in sight of Cypr^ls.'].* ma-^ipoi; fut. dvoicra (Lev. xiv. 20; Num. xiv. 33, etc.) ; 1 aor. dinjvfyKa ; 2 aor. dvfjvfyKov ; [see reff. s. v. ^epa>; impf. pass. (ivf^epd^Tji»; fr. Hom. down] ; 1. to carry or bring up, to lead up ; men to a higher place : Mt. xvii. 1 ; Mk. ix. 2 ; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf. om. WH reject the cl.]. duarpepciv rai apapriat tvl to ^vXov, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, sc. in order to expi- ate them by suffering death, [cf. W". 428 sq. (399)]). 2. to put upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept. for n7i'n of presentation as a priestly act, cf. Kurtz on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), dvtrlas, Bvaiav, etc., (Isa. Ivii. G, etc.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with eVi to Bva-iaa-TTjpwv adiled, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20 ; Lev. xiv. 20 ; [Bar. i. 10; 1 Mace. iv. 53]) ; [eaurw, Heb. vii. 27, T Tr mrg. WH mrg. Trpoo-f «yKar]. Cf. Kurtz u. s. 3. to lift up on one's self, to take upon one's self, i. e. to place on one's self anj-thing as a load to be upborne, lo sus- tain : Tof apapriat i. e. by meton. their jmnishrnent, Heb. ix. 28, (Is. liii. 12; T171/ Tropfeiav, Num. xiv. 33) ; cf. 117«. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.* dva-if>uvEiD, -a> : 1 aor. dvecfyavrjaa ; lo cry out with a loud voice, call aloud, exclaim : Lk. i. 42. (1 Chr. xv. 28 ; xvi. 4; [Aristot. de mund. 6, vol. i. p. 400% 18]; Polyb., often in Plut.)* avd-xiip£'«>i -(3 ; 1 aor. ai/ep^mpT/o-a ; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ; 1. to go back, return : Mt. ii. 1 2 sq. [al. refer this to next head]. 2. to withdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room : Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some other jilace, or shun sight : Mt. ii. 14, 22; iv. 12; xii. 15; xiv. 13; .XV. 21 ; xxvii. 5; Mk. iii. 7; Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf. (pevyeil; Acts xxiii. 19 (kot ISiav); xxvi. 31.* ovd-ilnjlis, -fws, ij, {dua\jfvxc>>, q. v.), a cooling, refresh- ing : Acts iii. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven ; Vulg. refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 1 5 ; Philo de Abr. § 29 ; Strabo 10, p. 459 ; and in eccl. writ.)* dva-i|ovo<; 44 ave^o) ovSpo-ftxivos, -ov, 6, a manslayer : 1 Tim. i. 9. (2 Mace, ix. 28 ; Hum., Plat., Dom., al.) [Cf. <^o«i'r.] * cu'-€''yk\t)toSi -ov, (a priv. anil eyKdXfm, ij. v.), that can- not be called to account, unrcprovable, unuccuaeil, blame- less : 1 Co. i. 8 ; Col. i. 2> ; 1 Tim. iii. 10 -, Tit. i. G .sq. (3 Maco. V. 31 ; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) [Cf. Ti-ench § eiii.] » ov-6k8i.t|y»itos, -ov, (a priv. and fKSiriycoiiai, q. v.), un- spcaL-ablc, imlescribablc: 2 Co. ix. 15 Saped, to describe and commemorate which words fail. (Only in eccl. writ. [Clem. Piiim. 1 Cor. 20, 5 ; 49, 4 ; Athenaj;., Theoph., al.].)* ov-tK-XaXriTos, -ov, (a priv. and «XaXem), unspeakable : 1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diosc. medicani. p. 93 ed. Kuhn] ; lleliod. «, 15 p. 252 (29G) ; and ill I'ccl. writ.)* QveKXenrros, -ov, (a priv. and fxXei'n-ti) to fail), nnf'ailinf/: Lk. xii. 33. ([Ilvperid. p. 58' ed. Teubner] ; Diod. 4, 84 ; 1, 30, cf. 3, 16 ; Plut. dc orac. defect, p. 438 d., and in eccl. writ.)* dv-'. G8 (.1)7); 15. 25 (22)], {dvixofiac to bear, endure); fr. lloni. down ; bearable, tolerable : dvcKTorfpov tarat the lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22, 24; Mk. vi. 11 RLbr. ; Lk. x. 12, 14. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)* av-), thai cannot be searchtd out : Ro. xi. 33. (8) mm. PruT. xxv. 3 ; Jer. xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)* avc$(-KaKos, -ok, (fr. the fut. of dvexopai, and kokoV, cf. classic (iXf^iKaxos, dpvr)aiKaKos), patient of ills and wrongs, forbearing : 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Lcian. jud. voc. 9 ; [Justin M. apol. 1, IG init. ; Pollux 5, 138].)* avc|i.xvCairros, -ov, (a priv. and c'^i;(fio'fcij to trace out), that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended, [A. V. unsearchable'] : Ro. xi. 33 ; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v. 9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24] ; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. ed. Tdf., Prolog. § xxix.] ; several times in eccl. writ.)* dv-«ir-a£o-xwvTos, -ov, (a priv. and (iraiaxvva), (Vulg. inconfusibilis), having no cause to be ashamed : 2 Tim. ii. 15. ([Joseph, antt. 18, 7, 1] ; imuscd in Grk. writ. [\X. 23G (221)].)* dv-«ir£-XT]irTos [L T Tr WII -XrjpnTos; see M, p], -ov, (a pri\-. and imXaplSdvai), prop, not apprehendeil, that cannot be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open to censure, irreproachable, [Tittmann i. p. 31 ; Trench § ciii.] : iTim. iii. 2; v. 7 ; vi. 14. (Freq. in Grk. writ, fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)* dv-epKOH*"- ■ 2 aor. dvrjKBov; [fr. Hom. down] ; to r/o up : Jn. vi. 3; to a higher place ; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 1 7 [LTrmrg. dn^Xdov], 18; (1 K. xiii. 12). [Comp. : €n-av€pxopai.~\ * oiv-to-is, -fas, fi. (dvlrjpi to let loose, slacken, anything tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a more tolerable condition in captivity : tx^'" "veatv to be held in less rigorous confinement [R. V. hare indulgence'], Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 10 ^vXa/c^ pev yap xal TTjpT](Tis TjV, pfTCL piVTOi avffTfwi Tr^s fis SintToi/). relief, rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7 ; from the troubles of poverty, 2 Co. viii. 13 ; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; vii. 5. (Sept. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. [Ildt. 5, 28] down.) [Syn. see dvaTravats, fin.] * dv- cf- WH. Ajip. p. 162; W. 72 (70) ; B. 35 (31)]) ; 2 aor. i)V(^x^ /iT/i/ Acts -xviii. 14 (LTTrWII avea-xoiil", reft", u. s.) ; to hold up, (e. g. Kfv. unless at be preferred [B. 161 (140); cf. W. 202 (190)]). foil, by ^iiicpoV rt with gen. of both pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (ace. to the reading /iov tiiKp6v Ti ii6s, -ov, 6, [for d-i/cTTT-tdf con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne- pos, Germ, nichte, Eng. nepheic, niece; Curtius § 342], a cousin: Col. iv. 10. (X^iun. xxxvi. 1 1 ; Tob. vii. 2.) [Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306 ; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. ; also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister's Son.] * avTiOov, -ov, TO, dill, anise [(?) ; cf. BB.DD. s. v. ; Tris- tram, Xat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 419 sq.] : Mt. xxiii. 23. (Arstph. nub. 982 ; [Aristot., al.] ; often in Theophr. hist, pi.)* dv-^K(i>; [impf. dv^K€v}; in Grk. writ, to have come up to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foil, generally by €iy Tt; hence in later writ, ai/^xei tl tivi something apper- tains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed by others (1 Mace. x. 42 ; xi. 35 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and then ethically TO avrjKov what is due, duty, [R. V. bejilting'], Philem. 8 ; to ovk avTjKovra unbecoming, discreditable, Eph. V. 4 (L T Tr WH & ovk aviJKfv, W. 486 (452) ; [B. 350 (301)]) ; impers. ms avriK€ as icas Jilting, sc. ever since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270 (2.54);' cf. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* dv-Tiiiepos, -ov (a priv. and rjfjiepas), nut tame, savage, fierce: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anacr. 1, 7] Aeschyl. down.)* dvi)p, avhpoi, 6, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this word in the Jf . T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ; for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and so to distinguish a man from a woman ; either a. as a ■male: Actsviii. 12; xvii. 12 ; iTim. ii. 12; or b. as a husband : Mt. i. 16 ; Mk. x. 2 ; Jn. iv. 16 sqq. ; Ro. vii. 2 sqq. ; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq. ; Gal. iv. 27 ; 1 Tim. iii. 2, 1 2 ; Tit. i. 6, etc. ; a betrothed or future husband : Mt. i. 19 ; Rev. xxi. 2, etc. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis- tinguish an adult man from a boy : Mt. xiv. 21 ; xv. 38 (where SvSpcs, yvvdlKcs and naiSia are discriminated) ; with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue : 1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to vTjnws) ; Eph. iv. 13 ; Jas. iii. 2, (in the last two pass. TcXtiot avrjp}. 3. univ. any male person, a man ; so where tie might have been used : Lk. viii. 41 ; ix. 38 ; Acts vi. 11 ; x. 5, etc. where amjp and tW are united: Lk. viii. 27; Acts v. 1 ; x. 1. or avTjp and of he icho, etc.: Ro. iv. 8; Jas. i. 12. where mention is made of something usually done by men, not by women : Lk. xxii. 63 ; Acts v. 36. where angels or other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms of men : Lk. ix. 30 ; xxiv. 4 ; Acts x. 30. where it is so connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force of a substantive : durip afiapTwXos a sinner, Lk. v. 8 ; XfTrpoi avdpes, Lk. xvii. 12 ; or is joined to appellatives : dvTjp (f)ov(vs, Acts iii. 14 ; av. 7rpo(pTiTr)s, Lk. xxiv. 19, (S-2J a-X, Judg. vi. 8 ; [cf. W. 30 ; § 59, 1 ; B. 82 (72) ; other reft", s. v. avdpanroi, 4 a. fin.]) ; or to gentile names: ai/dpes Nti'fvlrat, Mt. xii. 41 ; dvrjp 'louSaloff, Acts xxii. 3 ;> av. AWioij/, Acts viii. 27; SvS. Kinrpioi, Acts xi. 20; esp. in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5 d. ; B. 82 (72)], Acts i. 11 ; ii. 14 ; xiii. 16 ; xvii. 22, etc. ; even avSpfs dSeX<^oi, Acts i. 16 ; [ii. 29, 37 ; vii. 2] ; xiii. [15], 26, etc. 4. when persons of either sex are included, but named after the more imjjortant : Mt. xiv. 35 ; Acts iv. 4 ; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts 1. c.) to dispute even these examples ; but al. would refer several other instances (esp. Lk. .xi. 31 : Jas. i. 20) to the same head]. dv9-t''''.f'^^^'''9 or by confessing. 2. to agree mutually (in turn), to make a compact. 3. to acknowl- edge in the presence of (avri before, over against ; cf. €^opo\oyei(T6ai evavTi Kvplov, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.) : ras iiiaprias to confess sins, Joseph, antt. 8, 10, 3 [Bekk. reads dvopM- 'koyovpivovsl ; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). rtvi, to declare something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give thanks to him, Lk. ii. 38 : (for TTlin in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 13; 3 Mace. vi. 33; [Dan. iv. 31 (34) Sept.; Test. xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 1]).* dv6o9, -eof, TO. [fr. Horn, downj; a fower : Jas. i. 10 sq. : 1 Pet. i. 24.* dvepaKid [on accent cf. Etym. Magn. 801, 21 ; Chand- ler § 95], -as, T). a heap of burning coals : Jn. xviii. 18 ; xxi. 9. (Sir. xi. 32; 4 Mace. ix. 20; Horn. H. 9, 213, etc.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Coal.] * av6pa|, -oKos. 6, coal, (also, fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down, a live coal). avSp. ttv/jo's a coal of fire i. e. a burning or live coal ; Ro. xii. 20 av6p. irvpos crapeveiv in\ rrfv Ke(paXTjv avQpwTrdpea-KO^ 46 vdpCOTTO^ Tivos, a proverbial expression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signify- ing to call up, by the favors you confer on your enemy, the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head), that he may the more readily repent. The Arabians call things that cause very acute mental pain burnint/ codls of the licnri and Jire in the lircr; cf. Ge.ienius in Kosonmiillor's Bibl.-exeg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his Thesaurus i. 280 ; cf. also BB.DD. s. v. Coal]. ' avSpuir-dpeiTKos, -ov, {avBpunros ;uid upfaKos agreeable, pleasing, insinuating ; cf. fiupt trxot, fiutrdpecr/cos, avTo- pea-Kos in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 621) ; only in bibl. and eccl. writ. [W. 25] : stutli/lng to please men, courting the favor of men : Eph. vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22. (Ps. lii. (liii.) 6 ; "[Ps. Sal. iv. 8, 10].)' dvOpwirivos, -ivrj, -ivov, (^avOputiros), [fr. Hdt. down], human; applied to things belonging to men: X"P^^> Acts xvii. 25 LTTrWlI; ii(rts, Jas. iii. 7; or insti- tuted by men : KTiarts, [ij. v. 3], 1 Pet. ii. 13 ; adjusted to the strength of man : Treipacr/ios [R. V. a tcmptalion such as man can iear], 1 Co. x. 13 (cf. Neander [and Heinrici] ad loc. ; Pollux 3, 27, 131 o oiiK a» tis iirofuvacv, o oix av Tis (VcyKji . . . TO 8( fvavTiov, Kov(j>6v, fvcpopov, oiarov, dv- BputTTimv, dvcKTov). Opp. to divine things, with the im- plied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec. ; 13 (iTocpla, originating with man) ; iv. 3 (avdpwrrivri rjpepa the judicial day of men, i. e. human judgment), avdpay invov Xf'ym, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as is usual among men, who do not always suitably weigh the force of their words ; by this expression the ajjos- tle apologizes for the use of the phrase hovKadrjvai rij 8iKaio(rvv]]).' d*9puiroKT6vos, -ov, (Krdva to kill), a inanslayer, mur- derer: .In. viii. 44. contcxtually, to be deemed ecjual to a murderer, 1 .In. iii. 15. (Eur. Iph. T. (382) 389.) [Cf. Trench § Ixxxiii. and 00« ij?.] * dvSpuiros, -ov, o, [peril, fr. avrfp and &-<^, i. e. man's face ; C'urtius § 422; VaniC-ek p. 9. From Ilom. down] ; man. It is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature, without distinction of sex, a human being, whether mate or female : Jn. xvi. 21. And in this sense a. with the article, generically, so as to include all human individ- uals : Mt. iv. 4 (cV apra ^riaerai 6 av6pa>iTOs) ; Mt. xii. 35 (o CiyaBoi av6. every good person) ; !Mt. xv. 11, 18 ; Mk. ii. 27 ; vii. 15, 18, 20 ; Lk. iv. 4 ; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § 18, 8] ; vii. 51 ; Ro. vii. l,etc. b. so that a man is distinguished from beings of a different race or order ; a. from ani- mals, plants, etc. : Lk. v. 10 ; Mt. iv. 19 ; xii. 12 ; 2 Pet. ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15, 18; xi. 13, etc. p. from God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32; xi.x. 6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. ii. 15 [T WH om., LTrbr.] (opp. to angels) ; ,In. x. 33 ; Acts x. 26 ; xiv. 11; 1 Th. ii. 1 3 ; Gal. i. 10, 12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil.ii. 7,7 (8); iTim. ii. 5 ; Heb. viii. 2 ; xiii. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4, etc. c. with the added notion of weakness, by which man is led into mistake or prompted to sin : ovk rivdpomoi (R G (TapKiKoi) (ar( ; 1 Co. iii. 4 ; (Toia avOpanrav, 1 Co. ii. 5 ; av6pa>7ra)v enidvixiat, 1 Pet. iv. 2 ; Kara avdpamov TTfpmaTe'iTf ye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iii. 3 ; XoXcTk or Xfyfjv Kara uv6pamov, to speak according to human modes of thinking, 1 Co. ix. 8 ; Ro. iii. 5 ; Kara avdptonov Xeym, I speak as a man to whom analogies from human affairs present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an example drawn from ordinary human life. Gal. iii. 15; Kara av6p. 6r]piopaxf~i.v, as man is wont to fight, urged on by the desire of gain, honor and other earthly advantages, 1 Co. XV. 32 ; OVK ea-Ti Kara liv6p. is not accommodated to the opinions and desires of men. Gal. i. 1 1 ; [for exx. of Kara av6- in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom. u. s.] ; with the accessory notion of malignity: irpoa-exfre and Tuiv dvdpwTrav, Mt. x. 1 7 ; fir )^f'ipas dvdpoinraiv, Bit. xvii. 22; Lk. i.x. 44. d. with the adjunct notion of e o n t c m p t, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.) : Jn. v. 1 2 ; the address i> uvBpioirf, or Svdpumf, is one either of contempt and disdainful pity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. (iorg. p. 452 b. <7v S« . . . TIS ft & av9pa>ne}, or of gentle rebuke, Lk. xxii. 58, 60. The word serves to suggest commiseration : tfie [T Tr AVI I iSoi] 6 (IvBp. behold the man in ipiestion, mal- treated, defenceless, Jn. xLx. 5. e. with a reference to the twofold nature of man, d eo-to and 6 €^o> twdpamos, soul and body: Ro. vii. 22; EjUi. iii. 16; 2 Co. iv. 16, (Plat. rep. 9, 589 a. 6 fWos- avBpanros; Plotin. Enn. 5, 1, 10 d e'laai av6p- ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 61 sq; [Mey. on Ro. 1. e. ; Ellic. on Eph. 1. c.]) ; d Kpvnrus Ttjs xapSlas avdp. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofold moral condition of man, d ■naXaios (the corrupt) and d Kawoi (d i/e'of) nv6p. (the truly Christian man, conformed to the nature of God) : Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. ii. 15 ; iv. 22, 24 ; Col. iii. 9 sq. g. with a reference to the sex, (context- ually) a male : Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without the article, avdpamos, a. som£ one, a (certain) man, when who he is either is not known or is not inqiort- ant: i. ([. t\s, Mt. xvii. 14; xxi. 28; xxii. 11 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; xiv. 13 ; Lk. v. 18 ; xiii. 19, etc. with the addition of tis, Jit. xviii. 12 ; Lk. .x. 30 ; xiv. 2, 16 ; xv. 11 ; xvi. 1,19; Jn. V. 5. in address, where the speaker either cannot or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20 ; or where the writer addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii. I, 3. b. where what is said holds of every man, so that av6p. is equiv. to the Germ, indef. man, one : Ro. iii. 28 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 ; vii. 1 ; xi. 28 ; Gal. ii. 16. So also where opp. to domes- tics, Mt. X. 36 ; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10 ; to a father, Mt. X. 35 ; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 36 sq., — in which passages many, confounding sense and signifi- cation, incorrectly say that the word ap6p. signifies /Ji /Arr ii/ afamili/, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur. oi avdp. is sometimes (the) people. Germ, die Leule : IMt. V. 13, 16; vi. 5, 18; viii. 27; xvi. 13; Lk. xi. 44; Mk. viii. 24, 27 ; Jn. iv. 28 ; oiSfis avdpammv (nemo horai- num) no one, Mk. xi. 2 ; iTim. vi. 16. 4. It is joined a. to another substantive, — a quasi-predicate of office, or employment, or characteristic, — the idea of the pred- icate predominating [W. § 59, 1]: avdpaiTros fpnopos a merchant (-man), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH txt. om. ai/dp.'] ; oIko- Seo-TTorqs, Mt. xiii. 52 ; xx. 1 ; xxi. 33 ; ^aa-iXfis, Mt. xviii. 23; xxii. 2; ipayos, Mt. xi. 19. (So in Hebr. V0l avatnraTeuo) 47 "Avvat; D'^O t^'S a eunuch, Jer. xxxviii. 7 sq., jni) i^'X a priest, Lev. xxi. 9 ; also in Grk. writ. : av6. oSirris, Horn. II. 16, 263, al. ; cf. Mattliiae § 430, 6 ; [Kruger § 57, 1, 1] ; but in Attic this combination generally has a contemptuous force ; cf. Bnlidy. p. 48 ; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic. epp. ad di versos 12, 22, I), b. to a gentile noun; avd. Kvpr]vaios, ilt. xxvii. 32 ; 'louSaior, Acts xxi. 39 ; 'Pu- fiaios. Acts xvi. 37 ; xxii. 25, (ace. to the context, a Ro- man citizen). 5. 6 av6p., with the article, the partic- ular man under consideration, who he is being plain from the context: Mt. xii. 13 ; xxvi. 72 ; Mk. iii. 5 ; Lk. xxiii. G ; Jn. iv. 50. oStos o av6., Lk. xiv. 30 ; Jn. ix. 16, 24 [LTrmrg.WH]; xi. 47; 6 &v6. oItos, IMk. xiv. 71; Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 47; Jn. L\. 24 [RGTTrtxt.]; xviii. 17; Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26 ; xxvi. 31, 32. 6 uv6. (Kf'ims, Mt. xii. 45 ; x.xvi. 24 ; Mk. .xiv. 21. 6. Phrases : 6 avd. rfji afiapTias (or with T Tr txt.WII txt. t. dvopias), 2 Til. ii. 3, see dpapria, 1 p. 30 sq. civd. tou deov a man devoted to the service of God, God's minister : 1 Tim. vi. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 7, (of the evangelists, the associates of the apostles) ; 2 Pet. i. 21 (of prophets, like D'hSn U/'X often in the O. T. ; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For 6 uio? Tov dvdpoiiTQv and viol rutv dv6p., see under uMy. dv9-v)iraTtiiii) ; (avri for i. e. in lieu or stead of any one, and iiraTevo) to be viraros, to be supreme, to be consul) ; to be jirocomid: Acts xviii. 12 [RG; cf. B. 169 (147)]. (Plut. comp. Dem. c. Cic. c. 3 ; Ildian. 7, 5, 2.) * dvS-iiiroToS) -ov, 6, [see the preceding word],pfoconsu/: Acts xiii. 7, 8, 1 2 ; xviii. 1 2 L T Tr WH ; xLx. 38. The emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into senatorial and imperial. The former were presided over by proconsuls ; the latter were administered by legates of the emperor, sometimes called also proprae- tors. (Polyb.,Dion.H., Lcian., Plut., and often in Dio Cass.) [B. D. s. V. Proconsul ; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Prov- ince; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 289 sq.]* dv-Ciri|j.i, [ptcp. plur. dweVfs] ; 2 aor. subj. dva, ptcp. plur. di/cWcs ; 1 aor. pass. di/eSijy ; to send back; to relax; contextuall}-, to loosen : ti. Acts xvi. 26, (rois Setrpois, Plut. Alex. M. 73) ; xxvii. 40. trop. Tfju ineCkr^v, to rjivc up, omit, calm [?], Eph. vi. 9 ; (jrfv ix^pav, Thuc. 3, 10 ; TTfvopyrjV, Plut. Alex. M. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to let sink : Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. G).* dji-CXcMs, -0)1', gen. -a>, (lAfcos, Attic for iXaor), tcithout mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [RG]. Found nowhere else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. dveXcoi.* ovtirros, -ov, (f iVto) to wash), unwashed : Mt. xv. 20 ; Mk. vii. 2, and R L mrg. in 5. (Hom. D. 6, 266, etc.)* a.v-ia"n\\Li. : fut. draomjcro) ; 1 aor. dvioTqa-a ; 2 aor. dv- eoTT^v, impv. dvaaTijdi and (Acts xii. 7 ; Eph. v. 14 and L WH txt. in Acts ix. 11) dvia-ra (W. § 14, 1 h. ; [B. 47 (40)]); Mid., pres. dvla-rapai; fut. dvaoTrja-opm ; [fr. Hom. down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1 aor. and fut. act., to cause to rise, raise up, (D'pn) ; a. prop, of one lying down : Acts ix. 41. b. to raise up from death: Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34, (so in Grk. writ.). c. to raise up, cause to be born : imcppa offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [cf. W. 33 (32)] ; Tor Xpiarov, Acts ii. 30 Rec. to cause to ap- pear, briny forward, riva Tivi one for anyone's succor: irpopayi8a, U) unseal, Rev. v. 9 ; vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12 ; viii. 1 ; dv. Tu liiji\lnv, liijiXapiSiov, to imroU, Lk. iv. 1 7 L Tr WH ; Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx. 12. [CoMP. : di-avolya.'}* dv-oiKo-Sa)i.€w, -0) : fut. di/oiKoSo/z^o-o) ; to build again, ( Vulg. reaedijico) : Acts xv. 16. ( [Thuc. 1 , 89, 3] ; Diod. 11, 39; Pint. Them. 19; Cam. 31 ; Ildian. 8, 2, 12 [5 ed. Bekk.].)* avoi^is, -fojs, fj, (^dvoiya, q. v.), an opening: iv dvol^tt ToC (TTopaTos ijiov as often as I open my mouth to speak, E])h. vi. 19. (Thuc. 4, 68, 4; rav tti/XcSi», id. 4, 67, 3; ;(eiXa)i/, Plut. mor. [symp. 1. ix. (juaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)* dvo)i.Ca, -as, 17, (ilvofios) ; 1. ])rop. the condition of one wilhoul law, — either because ignorant of it, or because violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquity, wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28 ; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (TTrt.xt. WH txt. ; cf. d/iapTi'a, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7 ; Tit. ii. 14 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4. opp. to fi SiKawcrvvT), 2 Co. vi. 14 ; Ileb. i. 9 [not Tdf.], (Xen. nicra. 1, 2, 24 dvopla fioKKov fi SiKaioirvvrj xpapevoi) ; and to 17 SiKatocrvvrj and 6 iyiaapos, Ro. vi. 19 (rrj avopla els Tf)v dvopilav tii iniijiiiti/ — personified — in order to tcork inifjuilil) ; TToifii/ Ti]v dvopiiav to do iniquity, act wickedly, Alt. xiii. 41 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4 ; in the same sense, fpydCeaSai TTjv dv. Mt. vii. 23 ; plur. a'l dvopim manifestations of dis- regard for law, iniquities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. .xxxi. (.xxxii.) 1); Ileb. viii. 12 [RGL]; .x. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt. 1, 96] Thuc. down ; often in Sept.) [Syn. cf. Trench § Ixvi. ; Tittm. i. 48 ; Ellic. on Tit. ii. 14.]* a-vo|xos, -ov, (ra'/ios) ; 1. destitute of (the Mosaic) Iriir : used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges- tion of ' iniquity ' ; just as in Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where avopoi aTrepiTprjToi and nXXdrpioi are used together). 2. ilijiarling from the law, a violator of the law, lawless, wicked; (Vulg. i«iV/!/«s ; [also m/u.s/w.v]) : ]\lk. xv. 28 [R L Trbr.] ; Lk. xxii. 37 ; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.) ; opp. to o SUaios, 1 Tim. i. 9 ; o livopos (kot t'^oxrjv), he in whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abode, 2 Th. ii. 8 ; uv. epyov an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8 ; free from law, not suhject to law, [Vulg. sine legej : prj i>v avop.os BfoC [B. 169 (147)] (Rec. 6em), 1 Co. Lx. 21. (Very often in Se|>t.) [Syn. see dvopla, fin.] • di>6|j.us, adv., without the law (see two/ios, 1), without a knowleili/e of the law: dv. dpLaprdvuv to sin in ignorance of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; dnoWvodai to perish, but not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid, (dvofias (^v to live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. c. 10 uvop66 49 § 39 ; avnjias anoKKvaBai, to be slain contrary to law, as in wars, seditions, etc., ibid. c. 44 § 168. In Grk. writ. generally unjusth/, wtciredli/, as 2 Mace. viii. 17.)* dv-op66ci>, -w : fut. avopOdifTO) ; 1 aor. dvwpdtiitra ; 1 aor. pass. avapBtoBrjv (Lk. -xiii. 13 : without the aug. avopdoidrjv L T Tr ; cf. [ WH. App. p. 161] ; B. 34 (30) ; [W. 73] (70)) ; 1. to set tip, make erect: a crooked person, Lk. xiii. 1 3 (she was made straight, stood erect) ; drooping hands and relaxed knees (to raise them up by restoring their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear again, build aiteir: trKr/vrjv, Acts xv. 16 (Hdt. 1, 19 tov vtjov . . . tov ivcTvprjo-av \ 8,140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8, 12, etc. ; in various senses in Sept.).' dv-oo-ios, -ov, (a jjriv. and u ; {dvri and dvairKrjpua, q. v.) ; to fill up in turn : Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, ' what is wanting of the afflictions of Christ to be borne by me, that I supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ con- ferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions laid upon him'); [Mey., Ellic, etc., explain the word (with ^^'etst.) by 'ovtI {/(TTfprjpaTos succedit dvaTf\Tjpaip.a' ; but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc, who also quotes the pas- sages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio Cass. 44, 48 ; ApoUon. Dysc. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14, 1 [cf. Bttm. ad loc] ; 1 14, 8 ; 258, 3 ; 337, 4.)* dvT-airo-8i8o)|ii : fut. dvraTroSma-a ; 2 aor. inf. dpranoSov- vai; 1 fut. pass. afTa7ro6o5:jo-o/iai ; (dvri for somethinn- received, in return, dTroSlSafu to give back) : to repay, requite; a. in a good sense ; Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35; fixapiariav Tivl, 1 Th. iii. 9. b. in a bad sense, of penalty and vengeance; absol. : Ro. xii. 19; Heb. x. 30, (Dent, xxxii. 35) ; OXlylriv rivi, 2 Th. i. 6. (Very often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt.] Thuc. down.)* dvT-aird-Soiia, -to?, to, (see dvTanobihatp.i), the thing paid back, requital ; a. inagoodsen.se: Lk. xiv. 12. b. in a bad sense ; Ro. xi. 9. (In Sept. i. q. SlT3J, Judg. ix. 16 [Alex.], etc. ; the Greeks say avranohoats [cf. W. 25].)* QVT-airo-8oo-is, -eios, fj, recompense : Col. iii. 24. (In 4 Sept. i. q. hmi, Is. lix. 18, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down.)* dvT-airo-Kpivoii.ai ; 1 aor. pass. dvTaireKplOrjv [see dno- Kpiva, ii.] ; to contradict in reply, to answer by contradict- ing, reply against : tiw wpos tc, Lk. xiv. 6 ; (Sept. Judg. V. 29 [Alex.]; Job xvi. 8 ; xx.xii. 12; Aesop, fab. 172 ed. de Furia, [p. 353 ed. Coray]). Hence i. q. to alter- cate, dispute : with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. (In a mathe- matical sense, to correspond to each other or be parallel, in Nicomach. arithm. 1, 8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed. Hoche].) Cf. TI'Vn. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 17.* dvT-€iirov, a 2 aor. used instead of the verli avriKiyeiv, to speak against, gainsay ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] : Lk. xxi. 15; Acts iv. 14. Cf. «jroi/.* dvT-e'xu: Mid., [pres. dvTcp^o/^at] ; fut. dvdi^opai; to hold before or against, hold back, withstand, endure; in the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one's self directly opposite to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to him : nvoi, Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. xvi. 13 ; rSiv dcdevwv, to aid them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14 ; tov Xoyov, to hold to, hold it fast. Tit. i. 9. (Deut. xxxii. 41 ; Is. Ivi. 4, 6 ; Prov. iii. 18, etc., and often in Grk. writ.) Cf. Kiihner § 520 b. [2te Aufl. § 41 6, 2 ; cf. Jelf § 536] ; W. 202 (100) ; [B. 161 (140)].* dvTi [before i>v, dv6' ; elsewhere neglecting elision] a preposition foil, by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante and the Germ, prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which the N. T. writ, coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (341)) ; 1. prop, it seems to have signified over against, opposite to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412 ; [cf. Cur- tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc- cession, /bj-, instead of, inplacc «/"(something), a. univ. instead of : di/rl i^dvos o<^iv, Lk. xi. 1 1 ; dvri nepiiioKalov to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15 ; dvrX toC Xeyetv, .Jas. iv. 15, (dm TOV with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329 (309); B. 263 (226)]). b. of that /or wlrich any thing is given, received, endured ; Mt. v. 38 ; xvii. 27 (to release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to obtain the joy ; cf. Blcek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad loc); of tlie price of sale (or purchase): Heb. .xii. 16; Xurpoi/ ni-Ti TToXXmi', Mt. XX. 28 ; Mk. x. 45. Then 'c. of recompense : kokov dvri kokov diroSidouai, Ro. .xii. 1 7 ; 1 Th. V. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). dvff a>v equiv. to dvri roirav, on for that, because : Lk. i. 20 ; xix. 44 ; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx. in Wetst. on Luke i. 20] ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 710; [W. 364 (342), cf. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. I'lSN nnn, Deut. xxi. 14 ; 2 K. xxii. 17). d. of the cause : dv6' dv wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 ; dvri tovtov for this cause, Eph. v. 31. e. of succession to the place of another: ^Apx- ^ao-iXfuft dvri 'BpMov in place of Herod, Mt. ii. 22, (1 K. xi. 44 ; Hdt. 1, 108; Xen. an. 1, 1, 4). x^P'" ""■' X°P^' Tos grace in the place of grace, grace succeeding grace perpetually, i. e. the richest abundance of grace, Jn. i. 16, (Theogn. vs. 344 dvr dviav uvias [yet cf. the context vs. 342 (vss. 780 and 778 ed. Welcker) ; more appro- priate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de poster. Caini § 43, vol. ii. 39 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer- avTij3dW(o 50 'A VTlO)(€Ut dot. 1. vi. c. 13 § 622]). 3. As a prefix, it denotes a. opposite, oi'cr against : avrmipav. avTnrapep^faBai. b. the mutual efficiency of two : dvTijidWeii', dimKa\(w, ayriXoidopfiv- O. requital: avripiadia. avranoSldoifH. d. hostile opposition : a>Tt;(pio-Tos. e. ollieial substitution, in,'tle(iil of': avdmaros.' dvTi-paXXu ; to throw in turn, (prop. Thuc. 7, 25 ; Plut. Nic. 25) : Xo'youf npos aAX^Xout to exchange words with one another, Lk. .x.xiv. 17, [cf. 2 Mace. xi. 13].* d»Ti-Sio-T(9T||ii : [pres. mid. avriSiaTidfiiai^ ; in mid. to place one's self in opposition, to oppose : of heretics, 2 Tim. ii. 25, of. De Wetto [or Holtzm.] ad loc. ; (several times in eccl. writ. ; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand in turn : riva, Diod. exc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed. Dind. ; absol. to retaliate, Philo de spec. legg. § l."»; de concupisc. § 4]).*- ovtCSikos, -ox, (Si'ic;) ; as subst. 6 dvn'SiKor a. an op- ponent in a suit at Uuf. Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 58; xviii. 3, (Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an adversary, enemij, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41 ; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1 S. ii. 10; Is. xli. 11, etc.) : 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to regard the devil as hero called avrlbiKos because he ac- cuses men before God).* dvTC-9«cian. dial, inferor. 30, 3) ; absol., Ro. x. 21 [cf. Meyer] ; Tit. ii. 9. (Arhill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. «JiTiXf-yofiai / am dis- puted, assent or compliance is refused me, {W. § 39, 1): Lk. ii. 34 ; Acts xxviii. 22.* di/Tl-Xrulds [ L T Tr A\' II -Xrjpijfis ; see M, /x], -€<»r, 17, (dvri- Xapffdvofjiai.), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thuc. 1, 120), a laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection of a disputant, etc. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi. 20 [cf. vs. 1] ; 1 Esdr. viii. 27 ; Sir. xi. 12 ; Ii. 7 ; 2 Mace. XV. 7, etc.); plur., 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.* ovTiXoYta,-ar. ij, (dvrCXoyos, and this fr. avriXtya). [fr. Ildt. down] : 1. gainsaying, contradiction : Ileb. vii. 7; with tlio added notion of strife, Ileb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii. 16; Deut. xix. 17,etc.). 2. ojoyjo.'.-tV/oH in act, [this sense is disputed by some, e. g. Liin. on Ileb. as below, !Mey. on Ro. X. 21 (see dwtXe'ym); contra cf. Fritzsche on Ro. I.e.]: Ileb. -xii. 3; rebellion, .fude II, (Prov. xvii. 11).* dvTi-Xoi8op ; 1 aor. r/vrXijo-a ; pf. ^vrKrjKa ; (fr. 6 ovrXos, or TO nvrXov, bilge-water, [or rather, the place in the hold where it settles, Eustath. com. in Hom. 1728, 58 d ronos tvBa vhup a-vppiei, to tc ava6(v koI ck twv dpfiowii']) ; a. prop, to draw out a ship's bilge-water, to bale or pump dvTXrjfia 52 d^io<; out. b. univ. lo draw water: .In. ii. 8; iv. 15; vhap, Jn. ii. 9 ; iv. 7. (Gen. x.\iv. l.'i, '20 ; Ex. ii. 16, 19 ; Is. .xii. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Ililt. down.) * £vT\T))ia, -Tor, to ; a. jirop. iclmt h drawn, (Dioscor. 4, C4). b. tlie art a/ ilrawln;; water, (Pint. mor. [do solert. an. 21, 1] p. 974 e. [but tliis example belongs ratlier under c.]). c. a thinr/ to draw with [of. W. 93 (89)], bucket and rope let doicn into a well: Jn. iv. 11.* avTo4>6aX)ic'u, -«5 ; (avrd^^aXfioj looking in the eye) ; 1. jirop. /" /iiok a(/nin.it or siriiiijht at. 2. metaph. to hear up a(/ainst, withstand : ra aviixa, of a ship, [cf. our ' look the wind in tlie eye,' ' face ' ( H. V.) the wind] : Acts xxvii. 1."). (Sap. xii. 14; often in I'olyb. ; incocl. writ.)' ov«8pos, -ov, (a priv. and Zhap), without water : irrjyai, 2 Pet. ii. 1 7 ; ronoi, desert places, Mt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi. 24, (ij avvbpo! the desert. Is. xliii. 19 ; Ildt. 3, 4, etc. ; in Sept. often y^ (tuvSpos), [desert places were believed to be the haunts of demons; see Is. .xiii. 21 ; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.), and Gcson. or Alex, on the former pass.; cf. further. Bar. iv. 35 ; Tob. viii. 3 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 8 ; (Enoch x. 4) ; Ilev. xviii. 2 ; cf. d. Zeitschr. d. €\at, HY;/cf/e.<.s- flinids (Verg. georg. 3, 197 sq. arida nuhila), which promise rain but yield none, ,Iude I.'. (In Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down.)* dv-uiroKpiTos, -01', (a priv, and iinoKplvopai), unfeigned, undisguised : Ro. xii. 9 ; 2 Co. vi. G ; 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim. i. 5 ; i Pet. i. 22 ; Jas. iii. 1 7. (Sap. v. 19 ; xviii. 1«. Not found in prof, auth., except the adv. dvuitoKpiTas in Antoniu. 8, .').)* oyviroTaKTOs, -ov, (a priv. and vTTOTaiTaa)) ; 1. [pas- sively] notmmle subject, unsuhjccled : Ileb. ii. 8, [Artem. oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [activel}-] that cannot he subjected to control, disobedient, unruly, refractory : 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 6, 10, ([Epict. 2, 10, 1 ; 4, 1, IGl ; Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 1]; fiiij-yijo-ir dtnm. a narrative which the reader cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 3G, 4 ; 3, 38, 4 ; 5, 21, 4).* avd), adv., [fr. Horn, down] ; a. above, in a higher place, (op[). to KuTui) : Acts ii. 1 9 ; with the article, 6, i), ro tivui : Gal. iv. 2(; (17 avu> 'l(pmia-a\i]p the upper i. e. the heavenly .Terusalcm) ; I'liil. iii. 14 (ij liva itX^o-is the call- ing made in heaven, equiv. to enovpavioi, Ileb. iii. 1); the neut. ])hir. ra ava as subst., heavenly things. Col. iii. 1 sq. ; (K T(5v avu} from heaven, Jn. viii. 23. ems ava, Jn. ii. 7 (up to the brim), b. upwards, up, on high : Jn. xi. ■11 (aepti)) ; Heb. -xii. 15 (ai/ta 9iv, (aval), adv. ; a. from abore,jro>ii a higher place: ciTTo avoidev (W. § 50, 7 X. 1), Jit. xxvii. 51 [Tdf. om, djrd] ; Mk, xv. 38 ; ex rav livaidev from the upper part, from the top, Jn. xLx. 23. Often (also in (irk. writ.) used of things which come from heaven, or from God as dwelling in heaven : Jn. iii, 31 ; xix. 11 ; Jas. i. 17 ; iii. 15, 17, b. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then, /ro;n the begin- ning on, from the very first: Acts xxvi. 5. Hence c. anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a' use some- what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among them ; cf. his eomni. on Jn. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3, 7 av. yfvvr)dj)vai., where others exj)lain it from above, i. c. from heaven. But, ace. to this explanation, Nicodenuis ought to have wondered how it was jwssible for any one to be born _/)om heaven; but this he did not say; [cf. Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 63]. Of the repetition of phyi-- ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18 [i. p. 26 ed. Ueiff] (dvhpVj en tw f^ovri cyKvov yvvaiKa (TTjpaLveL 7rai8a avT^ yevvrjacadai opoiov Kara -navTa. ovTui yiip dvcodev avTui Sd^fte yfvvdijOai. ', cf. .Joseph, antt. 1, 18, ;> 6(v TToie'tcBat, where a little before stands TTpoTtpa <^iXia ; add, Martyr. Polyc. 1,1; [also Socrates in Slob. flor. exxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meincke (iii. 438 ed. (iaisf.) ; Ilarpocration, Lex. s. vv. dva5iKd(Taa6aL, avaSe- aBai, dvano&i^opeva. dvaavvra^is ; Canon, apost. 4G (al. 39, Coteler. patr. apost. opp, i. 444) ; Pseudo-Basil, de bapt. 1,2, 7 (iii. 1537) ; Origen in Joann, t, xx. c. 12 (opp. iv. 322 c. De la Itue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth Gospel, etc. (Boston 1880) p. 34 sq.]. irdXiv 6ev (on this couiliination of synonymous words cf. Kuhner § :>:M, 1 ; [Jelf § 777, 1]; Grimm on S.ap. xix. 5 (Ii)) : ( ial. iv. 9 (again, since ye were in bondage once before).* dvuTEpiKOS, -t], -ov, {dv(iiT€pos), Upper : ra dvcorepiKci ptpr). Acts xix. 1 (i. e. the ])art of Asia Minor more remote from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is used by [Ilijipocr. and] Galen.)" dvuTcpos. -ipa, -epov, (compar. fr, avai, cf, KaraTipot, see W, §11, 2 c; [B. 28 (24 .sq.)]), liighcr. The nent. dvaiTepov as didv., higher; a. of motion, (0 a /uV/Zier place, (up higher) : Lk. xiv. 10. b. of rest, in a higher place, above i. e. in the immediately preceding [lart of the passage ([noted, Ileb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 3, 1, 1 rpiTTj dvoirepov /3i/3Xu. (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)* ci.v-(o4>eXiis, -es, (a priv. and otpe'Kos) ; f r. Aeschyl. down ; unproftiihle, useless: Tit. iii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Ileb. vii. 18 (&ta TO avTTJs dv(i>(j)(\cs on account of its unprojila- blrncss).* d^tvT), -rjs, Tj, ([perh, fr,] aywpi, fut, n|ci), to break), an axe : Lk, iii. 9 ; Mt. iii. 10. (As old as Horn, and Ildt.)* o|ios, -a, -ov, (fr. aym, n|tt) ; therefore prop, drawing down the scale ; hence) a. weighing, having we irjht; with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as) another thing, of like value, worth as much: ^oor <"|ioi-, Horn. II. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 20G (194)], as n|. Sf'xa fivoiv, common in Attic writ. ; irav ripiov ovk a^tnv aiiTTis ((ro(f>iat) fori, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; ovk ca-Ti crraBpos trds «|(os- eyKparois yj/vx^i. Sir. xxvi. 15 ; oiiK a^ta Ttpbi t. ho^av are of no weight in comparison with the glory, i. e. are not to be put on an equality with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; cf. Fritzsehe ad loc. and AV. 405 (378); [B. 340 (292)]. b. befitting, congru- ous, corresponding, rtvoi, to a thing: rrjs pfravolas, Jit. iii. 8 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; Acts xxvi. 20 ; a^ia hv inpa^apfv, Lk. xxiii. 41. d^tov ian it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2 Th. i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8) ; p. it is worth the while, foil, by ToO with ace. and inf., 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; — (in both senses very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hdt. down, and often with fCTT-i omitted). c. of one who has merited any- thing, worthy, — both in a good reference and a bad; 53 airaWaaaa a. in a good sense; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x. 10 ; Lk. vii. 4 ; [x. 7] ; Acts xiii. 46 ; 1 Tim. i. 1.5 ; iv. 9 ; V. 18 ; vi. 1. foil, by the aor. inf. : Lk. xv. 19, 21 ; Acts xiii. 25 ; Rev. iv. 11; v. 2, 4, 0, 1 2 : foil, by ii/a : Jn. i. 27 (^va Xuo-o), a construction somewhat rare ; cf. Dem. pro cor. p. 279, 9 a^iovu, Iva ^orjBfja-ri [(dubious) ; .«ee s. v. iva, n. 2 init. and c.]) ; foil, by os with a finite verb (like Lat. (lignus, qui) : Lk. vii. 4 [B. 22D (198)]. It stands alone, but so that the context makes it plain of what one is said to be worthy : Mt. x. 1 1 (to lodge with) ; Mt. x. 13 (sc. TTji etpT)i'r)i) ; Mt. xxii. 8 (sc. of the favor of an invi- tation) ; Rev. iii. 4 (sc. to walk with me, clothed in wliite). with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one's fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it : Mt. X. 37 sq. ; Heb. xi. 38, (toC denv, Sap. iii. 5 ; Ignat. ad Eph. 2). p. in a bad sense; with a gen. of the thing: jrXrjyav, Lk. xii. 48 ; davdrov, Lk. xxiii. 15 ; Acts [xxiii. 29]; XXV. 11, [25]; x.xvi. 31 ; Ro. i. 32; absol. : Rev. xvi. 6 (sc. to drink blood).* d|id(i>, -a> ; impf. rj^iovv ; 1 aor. rj^iwtra ; Pass., pf. rj^lay fiat; I iut. a^iadrja-oijiai.; (a^ios); as in Grk. writ. a. to think meet, Jit, rii/lit : foil, by an inf., Acts xv. 38 ; xxviii. 22. b. to Ju'lye icorllii/, deem deservincj : rira with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7; two. twos, 2 Th. i. H ; pass, with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17 ; Heb. iii. 3 ; X. 29. [CoMl'. : )car-a|to : to ask hack, demand hack, exact something dtic (.Sir. XX. 15 (14) (jjjpepov fiafftet /cat avpiov diratTrifrei) : Lk. vi. 30; rrfv ^v\r]V aov unaiTovo'w [TrAA'Il aiTOvaw'] thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, is demanded back, Lk. xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 to r^s V"'X^^ aTrarnide'is Xpe'or). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* dir-aX-ye'o), -a : [pf. .ptcp. aTn/Ayi/Kms] ; to cease to feel pain or grief; a. to bear troubles tcitJi greater equa- nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thue. 2, 61 etc. b. to become callous, insensible to pain, apathetic : so those wh» have become insensible to truth and honor and shame are called drniXyrjxoTes [A. V. past feeling'] in Eph. iv. 19. (Polyb. 1, 35, 5 d7njXy»;Ki)iar -^vxds dispirited and useless for war, [cf. Polyb. 16, 12, 7].)* dir-aXXdo-o-u : 1 anr. dirriXKa^a ; Pass., [pres. diraXXdo-- aopai] ; pf. inf. d7r?;XX(i;^5at ; (dXXd(7(ro) to change ; djro, sc. twos) ; com. in Grk. writ. ; to remove, release ; pass. to he removed, to depart : dir alrav tcis voo-ous, Acts xi.x. 12 (Plat. Ery.x. 401 c. fi at foo-oi diraWayeirjirav e'x Tav o-MjuuTMi') ; in a transferred and es|i. in a legal sense, djro with gen. of pcrs., to be set free, the opponent being appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one: Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2, 9, 6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: Tivd, Heb. ii. 15; (in prof. auth. the gen. of the thing freed fr. is often added ; cf. Blcek on Heb. vol. ii. 1, p. 339 sq.).* airaWoTpioo) 54 aTrat oiMiXXoTpioa), -a : pf . pass. ptcp. aTnjWoTptaiievos ; to alienate, estrange; jjass. lo be rendered aXXorpios, lo be shut out from one's fellowship and inlimaoj: tiv6s, Eph. ii. 12; iv. 18; sc. roO 6(ov, Col. i. 21, (efjuiv. to 1", used of those who have estrangeil thenisolves fr. God, Ps. Ivii. (Iviii.) 4; Is. i. 4 [Aid. olc.]; Kzt'k. xiv. ."j, 7; [Test. xii. Patr. test. I5eiij. § 10] ; TdviraTpluiv Soyixdratv, 3 Mace, i. 3; aTraWoTpiovv riva roD KaXms (^(ovtos., Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14,2). (lu Grk. writ. fr. [llippocr.,] Plato down.)* diroXiSi -r), -6v, tender : of the branch of a tree, when full of sap, Mt. .N.xiv. 32 ; Mk. xiii. 28. [From Horn, down.]' dn^avrdci), -at : fut. airavrqaa (Mk. xiv. 13 ; but in bettor Grk. divavTiiaofiaL, cf. W. 83 (79) ; [B. 53 (4G)]); 1 aor. an!]VTr)f!a \ In '/(> lo meet ; in past tenses, to meet : nvl, Mt. xxviii. 1) [T Tr ^^•l I i77-] ; :\lk. v. 2 11 G ; xiv. ! 3 ; Lk. xvii. 12 [L \V11 om. Tr br. tlat. ; T WII mrg. read vir-J ; Jn. iv. 51 K G ; Acts xvi. 16 [11 G L]. In a mihtary sense of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 II G, as in I S. .xxii. 17 ; 2 S. i. 15; 1 Mace. xi. 15, G8 and often in Grk. writ.* dirdvTTio-is, -fa)f, r], {dnavrdai), a meeting ; els anavrrialv Tivos or Ttvi to meet one : Mt. -xxv. 1 R G ; vs. 6 ; Acts xxviii. 15 ; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26, 8 ; Diod. 18, 59 ; very often in Sept. etpiiv. to nS-UpV [cf. W. 30].) • dira{, adv., once, one time, [fr. Ilom. down] ; a. univ. : 2 Co. xi. 25 ; Heb. ix. 26 sq. ; 1 Pet. iii. 20 Rec. ; en ana^, Ileb. .xii. 2G sq. ; ana^Tovfviavrov, Heb. ix. 7, [Hdt. 2, 59, etc.]. b. like Lat. seiiiel, used of what is so done as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition, once for all : Ileb. vi. 4 ; x. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; Jude vss. 3, 5. c. KQi ana^ Koi Si's indicates a definite number [the double Kai emphasizing the repetition, both once and again i. e.] twice : 1 Th. ii. 18 ; Phil. iv. 16 ; on the other hand, awa^ Ka\ Bis uK^ans [o;i('e and again i. e.] several times, repealcdhj : Nch. xiii. 20 ; 1 Mace. iii. 30. Cf. Scholl cm 1 Th. ii. 18, p. 86 ; [Meyer on Phil. 1. e.].* d^irapd-ISaTos, -oi'. (napa^alvio), fr. the phrase ■napafial- veiv vopov to transgress i. e. to violate, signifying eitlier unviolated, or not to be violated, inviolable: Upaxruvri un- changeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor, Heb. vii. 24 ; cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. (A later word, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313 ; in Joseph., Plut., al.)* d-irapa-iTKeiao-ros, -ov, (wapaiT), unprepared : 2 Co. ix. 4. (Xon. Cyr. 2, 4, 15; an. 1, 1, 6 [var.]; 2,3, 21; Jo-sojih. antt. 4', 8, 41 ; Ildian. 3, 9, 19 [(U) ed. Bekk.] ; adv. a-irapaa-Kevda-Tois, [Aristot. rhet. Alex. 9 j). 1430* 3] ; Clem. horn. 32, 1."».)* dTr-apv€'o|iai, -oufiat : depon. verb; fut. airapvrifropai \ 1 aor. diTrjpvtjtTdprjv ; 1 fut. pass, dnapvrjdiia-opai with a pass. signif. (Lk. .xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [cf. B. 53 (46)]) ; to deny (a b nego") : Tivd, to allirm that one has no acquaint- ance or connection with him ; of Peter denying Christ : Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75 ; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72 ; [Lk. xxii. 61] ; Jn. xiii. 38 R G L mrg. : more fully dir. pr) ft&tmi 'irjcroiv, Lk. .xxii. 34 (L Tr WII om. prj, concerning which cf. Kuhner ii. p. 7G1 ; [,Telf § 749, 1 ; W. § 65, 2 /3. ; B. 355 (305)]). tavTov to forget one's self, lose sight of one's self and one's own interests : Mt. xvi. 24 ; Mk. viii. 34 ; Lk. ix. 23 R WII mrg.* dirdpri [so Tdf. in Jn., T and Tr in Rev.], or rather dir' apTi (cf. W. § 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275) ; Lipsius p. 127]; see apn), adv., from now, henceforth: Mt. xxiii. 39 ; xxvi. 29, G4 (in Lk. xxii. 69 dito rov vvv) : Jn. i. 51 (52) Rec. ; xiii. 19 ; xiv. 7 ; Rev. xiv. 1.! (where connect aff' «ipri with paKapioi). In the (!rk. of theO. T. it is not found (for the Sept. render nri^^n b}- airb rov viiv), and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. PI. 388 ; Plat. Com. 2o0. 10] in the earlier and more elegant (irk. writ. For the similar term which the classic writ, employ is to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. dirapri), and has a different sighif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. i. p. 296 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 20 sq.* dirapTio-)jL65, -oii, 6, ((tnapTi^ot to finish, complete), (7>/h- pleliini : Lk. xiv. 2s. Found besides only in Dion. Ilal. de comp. verb. c. 24 ; [Apollon. Dysc. de adv. p. 532, 7, al. ; cf. W. p. 24].- dir-apxyj, -^f, i], (fr. cmdp)(opai : a. to offer firstlings or iirst-i'ruits ; b. to take away the first-fruits ; ef. dn-d in dffofieKaTo'w), in Sept. generally equiv. to iTE'ST ; the first- fruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a natural state and those pre])ared for use by hand), which were offered to God ; cf. 11'/». R W B. s. v. I^rstliuge, [BB.DD. s. V. First-fruits] : ^ airap^i} sc. tov av as the first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep, 1 Co. XV. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is guaranteed ; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har- vest), b. of persons superior in excellence to others of the same class : so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ lieyond all others, (.'^chol. ad Eur. Or. 96 dizapxi] eXe- -^STo ov povov TO TvpCiTov Trj Ta^et, dWa Kai to rrpajTov tij TLpjj). c. oi f)^ovTes Trjv an. tov irvfvpaTos who have the first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (roC irv. is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23; cf. what Winer § 59, 8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see Weiss in ed. G] who take rov tit. as a partitive gen., so that ot ex- ''• <'"■■ '''"'' '""■ '''"'' distinguished from the great multitude who will receive the .Spirit subsequently. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.,] Ildt. down.) * oi-iras, -atra, -av. (fr. apa [or rather d (Skr. sa ; cf. a copulative), see Curtius § 598 ; Vanicek p. 972] and 7709 ; stronger than the simple Traj), [fr. Hom. down] ; to emit brightness, and this fr. aiyij brightness ; cf. anoaKiairpa. direlKaapa, diTfiKovurpa, d7Tr]\7)pa), reflected brightness : Christ is called in Heb. i. 3 aTravy. TTJt So^rjs toU 6eov, inasmuch as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God ; so that the same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically, which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii. 45 (xiv. 9) : d Beapaiv f'pe Bioipd tov nep^avTa pe. (Sap. vii. 26 ; PhUo, mund. opif. § 51 ; plant. Noe § 1 2 ; de con- cup. §11; and often in eccl. writ. ; see more fuUy in Grimm on Sap. 1. c., p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin- guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad loc. ; Snph. Lex. s. v. ; Cremer s. v.] * dir-EiSov, (dno and eiSoi', 2 aor. of obsol. el'Soj), serves as 2 aor. of d(j)opda>, (cf. derm, a bsehcn) ; 1. to look away from one thing and at another. 2. to look at from somewhere, either /rom a distance or from a certain present condition of things; to perceive : ojr av dTriSa (L T Tr WH d(j>LSa> [see dfpfiSov]) to n-tpl epi as soon as I shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A. V. how it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23. (In Sept., Jon. iv. .5, etc.)» dircfdeia [WH -6la, exc. in Heb. as below (see I, i.)'],-as, ij, {diTci6fis), disobedience, (Jerome, inobcdientia), obsti- nacy, and in the X. T. ])articularly obstinate opposition to the divine will : Ro. xi. 30, 32 ; Heb. iv. 6, 11 ; vio\ r. oTret- Beias, those w^ho are animated by this obstinacy (see vios, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii. 2; v. 6 ; Col. iii. 6 [R G L br.]. (Xcn. mem. 3, 5, 5 ; Plut., al.) * OTTtiOeo), -m ; impf . finelBovv ; 1 aor. T)7rcldrjo-a ; to be dirciSfis (q. V.) ; not to allow one's self to be persuaded ; not lo com- ply with ; a. to refuse or withhold belief (in Christ, in the gospel; opp. to mcrrfva) : ra via, Jn. iii. 36; tw Xdym, 1 Pet. ii. 8 ; iii. 1 ; absol. of those who reject the gospel, [R. y. to be disobedient ; cf. b.] : Acts xiv. 2 ; xvii. 5 [Rec] : xix. 9; Ro. xv. 31 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (T Tr WH dm(TTo\:(Tiv). b. to refuse belief and obedienc^: with dat. of thing or of pens., Ro. ii. 8 (rfj dXij^eia) ; xi. 30 sq. (™ Bea) ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; absol., Ro. x. 21 (Is. Lxv. 2) ; Heb. iii. 18 ; xi. 31 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to n")?, "ilD ; in Grk. writ, often fr. Acsehyl. Ag. 1049 down ; in Hom. et al. dn-tfieiM.) * dir(i.6T|s, -f's, gen. -oOr, (nfidopuL), impersunsible, uncom- pliant, contumacious, [A. V. disobedient']: ab.sol., Lk. i. 1 7 ; Tit. i. 16 ; iii. 3 ; nvl, 2 Tim. iii. 2 ; Ro. i. 30 ; Acts xxvi. 19. (Deut. xxi. 18; Num. xx. 10; Is. xxx. 9; Zech. vii. 12 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down ; [in Theogn. 1235 actively not persuasivel-) * dirciXeu, -S> : impf. rineiKovv : 1 aor. mid. rjTretKrjo-uprii' ; to threaten, menace : 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; in mid., ace. to later Grk. usage ([App. beU. civ. 3, 29] ; Pohaen. 7, 35, 2), actively [B. 54 (47)]: Acts iv. 17 (dndij, [LTTr WH om.] dneiXiicrBai. with dat. of pers. foil, by prj with inf., with sternest threats to forbid one to etc., W. § 54. 3 ; [B. 183 (159)]). (From Horn, down.) [Comp. : npoa- QTretXett).] * dweiX'^i, -^f, IJ, a threatening, threat : Acts iv. 17 R G (cf. dfff iXe'to), 29 : ix. 1 ; Eph. vi. 9. (From Hom. down.) * air-eipii ; (ci/ii to be) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to be aivay, be absent : 1 Co. v. 3 : 2 Co. x. 1,11; xiii. 2, 10 ; Col. ii. 5 ; Phil. i. 27 ; [in all cases e.xc. Col. 1. c. opp. to 7rdp«/ii].* dir-cifii. : impf. 3 pers. plur. dijTjfo-ai/ : (elpc to go) ; [fr. Horn, down]; to go away, depart: Acts xvii. 10.* d-7r-€iirov : {flirov, 2 aor. fr. obsol. ejrm) ; 1. lo speak out, set forth, declare, (Horn. II. 7, 416 dyyeXliju dizifnrtv, 9, 309 TOf pii6ov dnodneiv). 2. to forbid : 1 K. xi. 2, and in Attic writ. 3. to give up, renounce : withacc. of the thing. Job x. 3 (for 0X3), and often in Grk. writ, fr. Horn. down. In the same sense 1 aor. mid. aneindpriv, 2 Co. iv. 2 [see WII. App. p. 164], (cf. alaxvvi]. 1) ; so too in Hdt. 1, 59 ; 5, 56 ; 7, 14, [etc.], and the later writ, fr. Polyb. down." diretpacTTOS. -ov. (weipd^a), as well untempted as un- tcmplable : dirdpaa-Tos kokSiv that cannot be tempted by evil, not liable to temptation to sin, Jas. i. 13 ; cf. the full remarks on this pass, in W. § 30, 4 [cf. § 16, 3 a. ; B. 1 70 (148)]. (Joseph, b. j. 5, 9, 3 ; 7, 8, 1, and eccl. writ The Greeks said dTTclparot. fr. 7rctpdv- Xaiti'oii, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. "WH mrg.]. 2. in slglil of before : Mt. xxi. 2 R G ; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WII txt. KaTivavTi); Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2). 3. in opposition to, against : rmv SoyixaTiov Kai- (rapos. Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Ai)0cr. ; Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)* d-rrepavTOS: -ov, (irfpaiva to go througli, finisli : cf. dyud- pavTos), llial cannot he passed through, boundless, endless : yfvfaXoyim, ])rotracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job xxxvi. -.'6 : 3 Mace. ii. 9 ; in (Irk. writ. fr. I'iud. down.) * dirtpio-iTdoTus, adv., (n-fptoTrdw, q. v.), without distrac- tion, iril/iijul solicitude: I Co. vii. 35. (The adjective oeeius in Saj). xvi. II ; Sir. xli. 1 ; often in Polyb. [the adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4, 18, 6; 12, 28, 4 ; cf. W. 463 (431)] and Plut.) * d.^ep£.T(i,i]TOs, -01', {irepiTifivat), uncircumcised ; metaph. djrfpiTprjTOL t;i Kapbla (Jer. ix. 26 ; Ezek. xliv. 7) koi t- cio-i (Jer. vi.'lO) whose heart anv with indie, or subj. of other verbs in past time to go (away) and etc. : Mt. xiii. 28, 46 ; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25 ; -x.xvi. 36; xxvii. 5 ; Mk.vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v. 14. b. with specification of the place into which, or of the per- son to whom or from whom one departs: f is- with ace. of place, Mt. v. 30 LTTrWII; xiv. 15; xvi. 21; xxii. 5 ; Mk. vi. 36 ; ix. 43 ; Jn. iv. 8 ; Ro. xv. 28, etc. ; us 680U IQvuiv, Mt. -X. .5; etff ro irepav, Mt. viii. 18; !Mk. viii. 13; [St vp.S>v els MaKfd- 2 Co. i. 16 Lchm. txt.]; eVc with ace. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 RGT]; xxiv. 24; fVi with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to : eVi (the true reading for R G els) rffv epnopiav avTov, Jit. xxii. 5; eW, Mt. ii. 22; e^a, with gen., Acts iv. 15; jrpus riva, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec] ; Rev. x. 9 ; ano rivos, Lk. i. 38 ; viii. 37. Hcbraistically (cf. 'inS '^J}) anepx- onicray Ttvos to go awag in order to follow any one, go after him figuratively, i. e. to follow his par/;/, folloiv him as a leader: Mk. i. 20 ; Jn. xii. 19 ; in the same sense airepx- Tipos riva, Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9, 16 (29); used also of those who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog- raphers (following Suidas, ' dw(\dn ' "■^' '""'' eTtaveXBrj'') incorrectly ascribe to a-nepxeadai also the idea of return- ing, going hack, — misled by the fact that a going away is often at the same time a going hack. But where this is the case, it is made evident either by the connection, as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as els toi» o'koi' aljTov, Mt. ix. 7 ; Mk. vii. 30, (olWSf, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6) ; TTpos eavTov [Treg. irp. alrov] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G, but L Tr br. T WII reject the vs.] ; Jn. xx. 10 [here T Tr TTpos aiiTovs, WH n. air. (sec oiroO)] ; els ra oiria-oi, Jn. vi. 6(j (to return home) ; xviii. 6 (to draw back, re- ^e%s 57 treat). 2. trop. : of departing evils and sufferings, Mk. i. 42; Lk. v. 13 (17 \inpa anfjkdev an airoii) ; Rev. Lx. 12; xi. 14; of good things taken away from one, Rev. xviii. 14 [R G] ; of an evanescent state of tilings, Rev. xxi. 1 (Rec. -KaprjMe), 4; of a report going fortli or spread et'r, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. e'l^Xdei/J. av-ixio ; [impf. amlxpv Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WII txt. ; pres. mid. dn-«';^o/iat] ; 1. trans, a. to hold back; keep off, prevent, (Horn. H. 1, 97 [Zenod.] ; 6, 96; Plat. Crat. c. 23 p. 407 b.). b. to have wholly or in full, to have received (what one had a right to expect or de- mand; cf. ano8i.Soiim, aTToXafi^dfdv, [ Win. De verb. comp. etc. Ft. iv. p. 8 ; Gram. 275 (258; ; B. 203 (1 7G) ; ace. to Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) cmo denotes correspon- dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos- session to the desire, etc.]) : riud, Philem. 15 ; ixiaSov, Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; itapaKKi^aiv, Lk. vi. 24; Travra, Phil. iv. 18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.]). Hence c. aire'xft, impers., it is enough, suffi- cient: Jlk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is 'ye have slept now long enough ' ; so that Christ takes away the Iiermission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-) Anacr. in Odar. (15) 28, 33; Cyril Alex, on Hag. ii. 9 [but the true reading here seems to be dn-e';((a, see P. E. Pusey's ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intrans. to be awcqi, absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; am, Lk. vii. 6 ; xxi v. 13 ; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; xv. 8; :Mk. vii. 6, (Is.xxLx. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one's self off, abstain : diro nvos, from any thing. Acts xv. 20 [R G] ; 1 Th. iv. 3 ; v. 22, (Job i.l ; ii. 3 : Ezek. viii. 6) ; Ttvor, Acts XV. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11. (So in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)* airMTTeo), -m ; [impf. rjTviaTovvJ; 1 aor; rjnicrrria-a; (cini- oTof ) ; 1. to betray a trust, he unfaithful : 2 Tim. ii. 13 (opp. to n-toTor fieVet) ; Ro. iii. 3 ; [al. deny this sense in the N. T. ; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. 1. c. ; EUic. on 2 Tim. 1. c.]. 2. to hare nn belief, disbelieve : in the news of Christ's resurrection, Mk. xvi. 1 1 ; Lk. xxiv. 41 ; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11 ; in the tidings con- cerning Jesus the Messiah. Mk. xvi. 16 (opp. to m- <7Tf um), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 T Tr WH] ; Acts xxviii. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)* d-TTio-Tta, -as, rj, (fr. ukkttos), want of faith and trust; 1. unfaithfulness, failhlessnrss, (of persons betravino' a trust) : Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. ama-rea, 1]. 2. u-ani of faith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine power, J\lk. .xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19 ; in the divine mission of Jesus, Mt. -xiii. 58 ; Mk. vi. 6 ; by opposition to the gos- pel, 1 Tim. i. 13; with the added notion of obstinacy, Ro. xi. 20. 23; Heb. iii. 12. contextnally. weakness of faith: Mt. xvii. 20 (where L T Tr WH oXtyoTriCTTiav) ; Mk. ix. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)* a-irio-TOf, -OK, (TTioTor), [fr. Hom. down], without faith or trust ; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted, perfidious) : Lk. xii. 46 ; Rev. xxi. 8. 2. incredible, of things: Acts xxvi. 8 ; (Xen. Pliero 1, 9: symp. 4, 49 ; Cyr. 3, 1, 26 ; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c. ; Joseph, antt. 0, 10, 2, etc.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas disbeUeving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn. .XX. 27 ; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co. vi. 6 ; vii. 12-15 ; x. 27 ; xiv. 22 sqq. ; [1 Tim. v. 8] ; with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them- selves who reject the true faith. Tit. i. 15. without trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 1 7 ; Jlk. ix. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41.* dir\6Tr]s, -rjTos, fj, singleness, simplicity, sincei'ity, men- tal honesty; the virtue of one who is free from jjretence and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 3 ; Hell. 6, 1, 18, down) : h dn-Xor/jri (L T Tr AVH dyto- TTjTi) Kal fiKiKpiViia deov i. e. infused bv God through the Spirit [W. § 3G, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; eV dw\. t^e Kap&ias (33'7 11?% 1 Chr. xxLx. 17), Col. iii. 22; Ejjh. vi. 5, (Sap. i. 1) ; els Xpurrov, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e. single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wisdom in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3 ; «V dTrXoTTjTt in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii. 8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions, liberality, [Joseph, antt. 7, 13,4; but in opposition see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 62 sq.] : 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11, 13 (rfis Koivavias, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling s. V. 'Einfalt' in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.* ttirXoSs, -ri, -ovv, (contr. fr. -dor, -orj, -dov), [fr. Aeschyl. down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing conqili- cated or confused; without folds, [cf. Trench § hi.]) ; ichole ; of the eye, good, fulfilling its office, sound : 'Sit. vi. 22 ; Lk. xi. 34, — [al. contend that the moral sense of the word is the only sense lexically warranted ; cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Isach. § 3 oi (caTfXdXT/trd Tirar, etc. TTopevofievos iv d7rXorr/Tt d(j)6a\po)v, ibid. § 4 irdvra 6pa iv d-n\6T7)Ti, pi] iiri5€)(6fi€vus d0^nX/zotff novr)pUts dirii ttjs ■nXdvTjs Tuii Kocrpov; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. .\ii. 8].* duXws, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], simply, openly, frank- ly, sincerely : Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).* dird, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Cienitive, (l.at. a, ah, ahs. Germ, rou, ah, ireg, [cf. Eng. of offj), from, signifying now Sc])aration, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. |P is traceable, cf. W. 364 scj. (342), 369 (346) sqq. ; B. i321 (276) sqij. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Tdf. Proleg. p. 94 ; cf. W. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10 sq. : WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite aU the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed hy this preposition, dm, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a ]ilace. (of departing, fleeing, removing, e.rpelling, throinng. etc.. see aipo), diripxopai, diTOTivdo'G'(i>, d7TO\(j>peo3, d(pio^rjpt. (pevyo), etc.) : d7rf(rn"d- adri uTT avTuiv, l.k. xxii. 41 ; ;3dXf aTro aov. Mt. v. 29 sq. ; iKfiaKo) TO Ktjp(pos dm [L T Tr A\ H c'k] toO ufpdaXpov, ^It. vii. 4 ; d(f)' [L WH Tr txt. irap' (q. v. I. a.)] rjs eV^e/SXijKft Sai/idwa, Mk. xvi. 9; leadelXf OTTO 5pd«fli/, Lk. i. 52. 2. of the separation of a part from the whole; whereof a whole some part is taken : d;ro tov Ipariov, Mt. Lx. 16 ; 58 ■ani ii.(Kiu IffpariK^ sc. rives [H. V. ifhom certain of the cldldren of Is nut iliil jirire (cf. Tif, 2 c.); but al. refer this to II. 2 il. aa. fin. q. v.], Mt. xxvii. 9, (^f^rjXdov dno tu>v Upiav, sc. Tiw'r, 1 JIacc. vii. 33); after verbs of eathu/ and drintin;/ (usually joined in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [cf. B. 15y (139); AV. 198 (186) sq.]) : Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28 ; nlvfw dno, Lk. .\xii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. eV). 3. of any kind of sci>aration of one tiling from another by which the union or fellow ship of the two is destroyed; a. after verbs of acerli)i(j, Ino.teiiin//, HI» rail ni/, ransom- in f/y /fn'serrinf/ : see dyopufoj, dnaWdtraui, dnocrrpefjio), ^XevOepooyy Qfpanevuty Kadapt^iOy \ova>, \vrp6o}, Xuo), pvofiat. , Xvu>, napaKaXvirra. d. Concise constructions, [cf. esp. B. 322 (277)]: dmBepa dno Tou XpKTTovy Ro. i.K. 3 (see dvddepa sub fin.) ; \ovfLV ■dno Twi/ 7rX»;ya)i' to wash away the Ijlood from' the stripes, Acts .\vi. 33 : iifTavodv dno Tfjt KoKtas by repentance to turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; dnndinjo-KeLv dno TWOS by death to be freed from a thing. Col. ii. 20 ; ({tBeipfo-Bai dno t^s (SjtXotijtos to be corrupted and thus led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3; fla-oKov- a-Bfis dno r. fiXajSfiaf heard and accordingly delivered from his fear, Ileb. v. 7 (al. heard /or i. e. on account of /lis godly yi-a;- [cf. II. 2 b. below]). 4. of a state of separation, i. e. of distance; and a. of distance of Place, — of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii. 34; xxiv. 31, etc.; after paKpdv, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii. 34 ; .In. xxi. 8 ; after dn€)((iv, see dire;(u) 2 ; dno tivinBtv tas «cdrm, Mk. xv. 38 : dno p.aKp6d(v, Mt. xxvii. o.i, etc. [cf. B. 70 (G2) ; AV. § uo, 2]. Ace. to later (irk. iisage it is put before nouns indicating local distance : Jn. xi. 18 (^v iyyvs mf dno (TTa&lwv d(Kan(VT( about fifteen fur- longs oti") : Jn. xxi. 8 ; Rev. xiv. 20, (Diod. i. 51 indvo) T^r TToXetuf dno dexa axoiviov \lfivrjv wpv^c, [also 1, 97 ; 4, .56 ; 16,46; 17,112; is, 40; 19, 25, etc.; cf. Sop!,. Lex. s. V. 5] ; Joseph, b. j. 1,3, 5 tovto dcj)' f^aKocrlav aTaSiav fVTevBf'v (CTTiv, Phil. Aem. Paul. c. 18. .5 aarf roi/s npay- Tovs yeKpovs dnu dvolf ornStMi' KaTtinfaflfy ^'it. Oth. c. 11, 1 KQTeaTpaTonfhfvfjfv dno nevTTjKovra o'Ta^iwv, \it. Pliilop. C. 4, 3 Tji/ yap dypus avra dno OTaBioyv c'lKoai t^s noXfoJs) ; cf. AV. 557 (518) sq. ; [B. 153 (133)]. b. of dist.ance of Time, — of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat. inrle a): dno rfjs upas (xelvrfs, Mt. ix. 22; xvii. 18; Jn. xix. 27 ; an «. t^s 17/icpas, ]Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 53 ; \_dn6 npu>T7]s hpfpas.] Acts XX. 18 ; Pliil. i. 5 [L T Tr AVII t^j np. ^fi.] ; d(j>' Tjpfpav dpxaliov, Acts xv. 7 ; dn' iraiv, Lk. viii. 43 ; Ro. XV. 23 ; dn atavos and anb t. alwvwv, Lk. i. 70, etc. ; an dpxr/s, Mt. xix. 4, 8, etc. ; dnb i«iTa/3oX^f Koirpov, Mt. xiii. 35 [L T Tr AA'II om. (tocr/i.], etc. ; dnb Kriaews Kotrpov, Ro. i. 20; dnb ^pe(povs from a child, 2 Tim. jii. 1 5 ; dnb ttjs napdfvias, Lk. ii. 36 ; aKJ) tjs (sc. fjp(pac) since, Lk. vii. 45; Acts .\xiv. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; dcji rit rjpe'pas, Col. i. 6, 9 ; d(p' ov cquiv. to dnb tovtov ore [cf. B. 82 (71); 105 (92)]. Lk. xiii. 25: xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18, (Ildt. 2, 44 ; and in Attic) ; d^' of after rpia tTrj, Lk. xiii. 7 'l"Tr AVII; aTroroC vvv from l/ie j/rcseni, lieneefurlli, Lk. i. 4S; V. 10; xii. 52; .xxii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16; dnb Tore, Mt. iv. 17 ; xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 16 ; Lk. xvi. 16 ; dnb nipva-i since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; i.\. 2; dnb npat, Acts xxviii. 23 ; cf. A\". 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275)]; Loh. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. c. of distance of Order or Rank, — of the terminu.s from which in any succession of things or persons : dnb Sitrovs (sc. naiBos) KOI KnrwTfpoi, Alt. ii. 16, (rovs Afvtras dnb flKO(TafTovs Kai enduoi, Num. i. 20 ; 2 Esdr. iii. 8) ; dnb 'Atipoap fur Ant^ei'S. Alt. i. 1 7 ; t/3So/iOf uwo '.\8n/x, Jude 14 ; dnb pixpov fcos ptydXov, Acts viii. 1 ; Ileb. viii. 1 1 ; HpxtaOai. dno TWOS. Alt. XX. 8 ; i^k. xxiii. 5 ; xxiv. 27 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; Acts viii. 35; x. 37. II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place whence ; or of c a u s a 1 origin, the cause from which. 1. of the Place whence anything is, come.s, befidls, is taken; a. after verbs of coHi/z/iy ; see €p;(o;aai, tJku, etc. : OTTO [L Tr AA'II dn~\ dyopds sc. eXdomes, Al k. vii. 4 ; tiyytXos dn (tov) ovpnvov, Lk. xxii. 43 [Lbr. AVII reject thei)ass.]; Tov dn ovpavujv sc. XaXoi-ira. Ileb. xii. 25, etc.; of the country, province, town, village, from which any one has originated or proceeded [cf. AV. 364 (342); B. 324 (279)] : Alt. ii. 1 ; iv. 25 ; Jn. i. 44 (45) ; xi. 1 ; p,la dnb opovs 'Swd, Gal. iv. 24. Hence 6 or 01 dno twos a native of, a man of, some place: 6 dnbf^a^apid the Xazarene, Mt. xxi. 11:6 djro ' Apipadaias, Alk. xv. 43 ; Jn. xix. 38 [here (t L Tr AVH om. . 6] ; 01 dnb 'h'mnrjs, Acts x. 23 ; 01 dnb 'iraXiof the Italians, Ileb. xiii. 24 [cf. AV. § 66, 6]. A great number of exx. f i". prof. writ, are given by Wiescler, Untersuch. lib. d. Ilcbraerbr. 2te Iliilfte. ]). 14 sq. b. of the ])arty or society from which one has jirocecded, i. e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary of it: 01 dnb rijs fKK\t](rias, Acts .xii. 1 ; 01 dnb Trjs a'tpt- cremr Tav ^apiaaiaiv. Acts xv. 5, (as in Grk. writ. : of djro r^r Stoos, 01 dnb rrfs 'AxaSjipias, etc.). c. of the material from which a thing is made : dnb Tpt-x^" KapTjKov, .Alt. iii. 4 [AV. 370 (347) ; B. 324 (279)]. d. troj). of that from or hi/ which a thing is known : dnb tuv xapnoiv (niywaxTKew, Alt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lchm. ex t. k. etc.] (Lys. in Andoc. § 6 ; Aeschin. adv. Tim. p. 69 ed. Reiske) ; pavBcwew dnu twos to leain from the example of any one, Alt. xi. 29: xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; but in Gal. iii. 2 ; Col. i. 7 ; Ileb. v. 8, /xavd. dno twos means to learn from one's teaching or training [cf. B. 324 (279) c..; AV. 372 (348)]. e. after verbs of seeking, in- v TrXijym!', Rev. ix. IS. d<^' iavTov. d(f)' iuvraiv, dv epav- Tov, an expression esp. com. in John, of /lintstlf (mi/stlf etc.), from Iiis oicn di.ytositioii or juih/inent, as distin- guished from another's instruction, [cf. W. 3 72 (348)] : Lk. xii. 57 ; .xxi. 30 ; Jn. v. 19, 30 ; xi. 51 ; xiv. 10 ; xvi. 1 3 ; xviii. 34 [L Tr WH djro o-eaur.] ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; x. 7 [T Tr WII ftp' e. (see eVi A. I. 1 c'.)] ; of one's own will and motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another : Jn. vii. 1 7 sq. 28 ; viii. 42 ; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; 6// one's own power: Jn. xv. 4 ; bij one's power and on one's own judgmettt : Jn. viii. 28 ; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kijpke, Observ. i. p. 391. [Cf. elxh^ ex""'^" °4'' ("I- ^4' ^"^"^ eVi A. I. 1 f.) eavrav. Acts xxi. 23 WII txt.] after verbs oflearninr/, knoiciny, receirinf/, dno is used of him to whom we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf . W. 370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p.7 sq. ; B. 324 (279) ; Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23 ; per contra Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 12]: dxavftv, Acts ix. 13 ; 1 Jn. i. 5 ; ytvaxTKeiv, Mk. XV. 45 ; "Kap^iveiv, Mt. xvii. 25 sq. ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; iii. 22 L T Tr WII ; 'ix^w, 1 Jn. iv. 21 ; 2 Co. ii. 3, etc. ; napaKapPdvdv, 1 Co. xi. 23 ; Ssx^fSat, Acts xxviii. 21 ; respecting pavddvfiv see above, 11. 1 d. ; 'Karpeva t<5 6ea> OTTO Trpoyoviov after the manner of the \aTpeia received from my forefathers [cf. ^Y. 372 (349) ; B. 322 (277)], 2 Tim. i. 3. yiveral /loi, 1 Co. i. 30 ; iv. 5 ; ;^dpir djro 6eov or TOV 6eov, from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 3 ; Gal. i. 3, and often ; icai tovto drro Bfoij, Phil. i. 2S. dnoa-roXos dno etc., constituted an apostle by authority and commission, etc. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal. i. 1. after Trda-xeiv, Mt. xvi. 21 ; [akin to tliis, ace. to man}-, is Mt. xxvii. 9 ov eTipfjcravTo dno tUv vliiv 'itrpaijX, R. V. mrg. wjioni the>i priced on the part of Ike sons of Israel ; but see in I. 2 above], bb. When djrd is used after passives (which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222 sq.p ; [B. 325 (280) ; W. 371 (347 sq.)]), the connection between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser and more remote than that indicated by vno, and may often be expressed by on the jj'ni of (Germ, von Seiten), [A; Y. generally o/"] : dTto tov 6eoiJ dnoSeSetypivou ap- proved (by miracles) according to God's will and ai> pointment. Acts ii. 22 ; otto 6eov irfipd^opai the cause of my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 13; dne- OTfprjpems [T Tr ^A II d(j)v(TTep.j d(j) vpav by your fraud, Jas. v. 4 ; aTTohoKipd^eaQai, Lk. xvii. 25 ; \_ibi,xaLa6Tj ly ao(pia dno TtoK TCKvcov, Lk. vii. 35 ace. to some ; see SiKatoo), 2] ; Tonov riTotpacrpevov djro roC 6cov by the will and direction of ( jod. Rev. xii. G ; d;^Xou/xf coi aTro (Rec. ujrd, [see ox^eaj) TTvevjidTav dxaBapT. Lk. vi. 18 (whose annoyance by dis- eases [(?) cf. vs. 17] proceeded from unclean spirits [A. V. vexed (troubled) tvitli etc.]) ; dn-o t. a-apKos ia-TriKco- fiivov by toucliing the flesh, Jude 23 ; [add Lk. i. 26 T Tr WH dTTtdToKT) 6 ayytXos ditb (R G L xmo) tov 6eov\. As in jn-of. auth. so also in the N. T. the jMss. sometimes vary between djrd and xmo : e. g. in Mk. viii. 31 ; [Lk. viii. 43] ; Acts iv. 36 ; [x. 1 7, 33 ; xv. 4] ; Ro. xiii. 1 ; [xv. 24]; Rev ix. 18; see W. 370 (347) sq. ; B. 325 (280) sq. ; [cf. Vincent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. §41J. III. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in- dicating the manner or degree in wliich anything is done or occurs, are the following : dnb t. Kaphiwv ipHv from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. xviii. 35 ; dnb pepovs in part, 2 Co. i. 14 ; ii. 5 ; Ro. xi. 25 ; xv. 24 ; dnb pids sc. either (pa>vTis with one voice, or yvaprjs or i/'ux^s "''''' one co7isent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kvunoel ad loc. ; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.) ; yet see Lob. Par- alip. p. 363]). I'V. The extraordinary construction dnb 6 S>v (for Reo. OTTO TOV 6) Kol 6 r}v Ka\ Q epxdpefos* Rev. i. 4, finds its ex- planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used the words 6 i>i/ xrX. as an indeclinable noun, for the pm-pose of indicating the meaning of the proper name nin' ; cf. W. § 10, 2 fin. ; [B. 50 (43)]. V. In composition dn-d indicates separation, liberation, cessation, departure, as in drro/3dXXm, dnoKonro). dnoKv\i, dnepxopai ; iinishing and completion, as in dnapTi^w, dTTOTeXt'm ; refers to the pat- tern from which a copy is taken, as in dnoypdcjxiu, dqiopoi- ovu, etc. : or to him from whom the action proceeds, as in dnoSfiKvvpi, dnoToXpdoi, etc. diro-Paivu) : fut. dno^ljaojxai ; 2 aor. dnt'^rji) ; 1. to come down from : a shi]) (so even in Hom.), and, Lk. v. 2 [Tr mrg. br. an avTav] ; els ttjv yrjv, Jn. xxi. 9. 2. trop. to tnrn out, ' eventuate,' (so fr. Hdt. down) : djro^^ (7CTai vpiv (Is papTvptov if will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; e«s aoT-qplav, Pliil. i. 19. (Job xiii. 16 ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) * airo^aXKu) 60 oSt'Si (1)11 1 diro-^dXXu : 2 aor. airi^oKov ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to throw off, cast (iwoi/ : a garment, Mk. x. 50. trop. confidence, Heb. X. 3j.* diro-pXe'irw : [iiu])f. dirffiXfirov'} ; lo turn the eyes away from olht r l/iiiii/s uikI Jix them on some one thing ; to look at attentively : eh n (often in Gik. writ.) ; trop. to look with steadfast mental gaze : th t. ynoOairnhouiav, Ileb. xi. 2G [W. § G(i, -2 a.].* diro-pXnTos, -ov, thrown away, to be throicn away, re- jected, despised, abominated : as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4, (in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. equiv. to SOL) unclean ; liom. II. 2, 361 ; 3, (J5: Lcian., Plut.).» diro-Po\TJ. -Ijf. 17, (/ throwing away; 1. rejection, re- pudialitni. (d7Toj3dXX((T$ai to throw away from one's self, cast off, repudiate) : Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to TrpoVXr/^ii/^if avTuiv, objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. dnofidWai in the sense of lose) : Acts xxyii. 22 dn-o^oXi) ^xV' oiSifiia earai (^ vfiSiV no one of you shall lose his life [VV. §1)7, 1 e.]. (Plat., Plut., al.) * diro-7Cvo|iai : [2 aor. dTT(yev6iiT)v] ; 1. to he removed from, ill part. 2. to die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down); hence trop. diroy. Tivl to die to any thing: tqis dfiapTims dnoyevnfiemi i. e. become utterly alienated from our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. § 52, 4, 1 i\.; B. 178 (155)].* diro-Ypao) : ^lid., [prcs. inf. dnoypdeT], b.) ; mid. to have one's self registered, to enroll one's self [W.§ 38, 3] : Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5 ; pass. 01 ev oipavo'is dwoyeypappfvot those whose names are inscribed in the heavenly register, Heb. xii. 23 (the reference is to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the figure being drawn from civil communities on earth, ■whose citizens are enrolled in a register).* aTo-SeCKWiii ; 1 aor. amSfi^a ; pf. pass. ptcp. ajroSfSfiy- liivos; (freq. in (irk. writ. fr. Pind. Nem. 6, SO down); 1. prop, to point away from one's self, to point out, show forth; to expose to view, exhibit, (Hdt. 3, 122 and often) : 1 Co. iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare : rira, to shotv, prove what hind of a person any one is, Acts ii. 22 (where cod. D gives the gloss l8(8oictp~]aa-fi(vov) ; 2 Th. ii. 4 [Lchm. mrg. anoSeiyvvovTa^. to prove by arguments, demonstrate : Acts XXV. 7. Cf. Il'in. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.* dirii-SeiJis, -fwy, r), (diroSeiKirvpi, q. v.), [fr. lldt. down] ; a. a milking manifest, showing forth, b. a demonstration, proof: dirdSf i|is nveinaro! icni Swdpfos a proof by the Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and thus persuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (oontextually opposed to proof by rhetorical arts and philosophic argunienis, — the sense in which the (ireek philosophers use the word ; [see Jleinrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 sip]).* oiro-SeKaTevo), Lk. xviii. 12, for dnoSfKaTuio ([.v.; [cf. 117/. Aj.p. 1). 171]. diro-8€KaT6u, -m, inf. pres. aTroBfKaToiv, Heb. vii. 5 T Tr Wll (cf. Delitzsch ad loc. ; Ii. 44 (38) ; [Tdf.'s note ad loc. ; 117/. Intr. § 410]) ; (StKaroa q. v.) ; a bibl. and cccl. word ; Sept. for it^j;; to tithe i. e. 1. wdth ace. of the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing : ^It. xxiii. 2.'! ; Lk. xi. 42 ; xviii. 12 where T WH, after'eodd. X' 15 only, have adopted dnoSeKarfia). for which the simple SeKaTeiay is more common in (Irk. writ.; ((ien. xxviii. 22; Deut. xiv. 21 (22)). 2. Ttvd, III exact, receive, a tenth fro7n any one : Heb. vu. 5 ; (1 S. viii. 15, 1 7). [B. D. s. v. Tithe.] * d-iro-8£KTos [so L T Wn accent (and Rec. in 1 Tini. ii. .3) ; al. uwoSexToV, cf. Lob. ParaHp. p. 498 ; Gottling p. 313 sq. ; Chandler § 529 sq.], -ov, (see diroSexopat), a later word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable : 1 Tim. ii. 3 ; v. 4.* diro-Sexo|).ai; depon. mid. ; impf. (i7r€8f;(d;i?;K ; 1 aor. drrf- Sf^dpriv: 1 aor. pass. dTTfbix^V'^ <'ommon in (irk. writ., esp. the Attic, fr. Horn, down ; in the N. T. used only by Luke ; to accept what is offered from without (otto. cf. Lat. excipio), to accept from, receive: riva, simply, to give one access to one's self, Lk. ix. 11 L T Tr AVH ; Acts xxviii. 30 ; with emphasis [cf. Tob. vii. 17 and Fritzsche ad loc], to receive with joy, Lk. viii. 40; to receive to hospitality. Acts xxi. 17 L T Tr WH ; to grant one ac- cess to one's self in the capacity in which he wishes to be regarded, e.g. as the messenger of others. Acts xv. 4 (L T Tr AVH TrapeSt'pf^j/ffai/) ; as a Christian, Acts xviii. 27; metapli. ti, to receive into the ynind with assent : to ii/)- prove. Acts xxiv. 3; to believe, rbv^oyov. Acts ii. 41; (so in Grk. writ. esp. Plato; cf. A si. Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).* diro5i]|ie' ; 1 aor. oTrcdij/uijcra ; (dffdSij/xor, q. v.) ; to go away to foreign parts, go abroad : Mt. xxi. 33 ; xxv. 14 sq. ; 'Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. xv. 13 (ds x^P"") i ^^- ^- (1° ^'''k. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * dird-8ii|ios, -ov, (fr. dn-d and Stipos the people), away from one's pco|)lc, gone abroad: Alk. xiii. 34 [R. V. .vo- journirig in another country^. [From Pind. down.]* diro-8(Su(it, pres. i)tcp. neut. diroSiSovv (fr. the form -StSooi, Kev. xxii. 2, where T Tr WH mrg. -StSovs [see 117/. App. p. Ifi7]) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. direSiSovv (for the more com. dTTfSidoa-av, Acts iv. 33 ; cf. W. §14,1 c.) : fnt. dtro8d)(r. p. 167]) ; a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, and the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it ; prop, to put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ. aBiopt^o) 61 airodvriaKco abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq. who regards ano as denoting to give from some reserved store, or to give over something which might have been retained, or to lay off some burden o£ debt or duty ; cf. Copeon Aristot. rhet. 1, 1, 7]) ; 1. (o rft/aer, relinquisli what is one's own : to eruifia toO 'Iijo-oG, Mt. xxvii. 58 ; hence in mid. to give away /or one's own profit n'hat ix one's own, i. e. to sell [W. 253 (238)] : ti. Acts v. 8 ; Heb. xii. 16 ; Ttvd, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp. the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down ; in Sejjt. for 1^0, Gen. XXV. 33 etc. ; Bar. vi. [i. e. Ep. Jer.] 27 (28)). 2. to pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, Uke a burden, is thro^vn off. otto, by being paid) : a debt (Germ. abtragen), Jit. v. 26 ; xviii. 25-30, 34 ; Lk. vii. 42 ; x. 35 ; xii. 5'J ; wages, Mt. xx. 8 ; tribute and other dues to the government, Mt. xxii. 21 ; ilk. xii. 1 7 ; Lk. xx. 25 ; Ro. xiii. 7 ; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41 ; Heb. xii. 1 1 ; Rev. xxii. 2 ; opKovs things promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf. Num. XXX. 3, (eix"?" «^ '^ow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.) ; con- jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3 ; afwi^as grateful requitals, 1 Tim. v. 4 ; \6yov to render account : Mt. xii. 30 ; Lk. x^^i. 2 ; Acts xix. 40 : Ro. xiv. 1 2 L txt. Tr txt. ; Heb. xiii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; napripiov to give testimony (as something ofBcially due). Acts iv. 33. Hence 3. to give back, re- store : Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lchm. mrg.] ; ix. 42; xix. 8. 4. to requite, recomjiense, in a good or a bad sense : Mt. Ti. 4, 6, 18 ; xvi. 27 ; Ro. ii. G ; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14 ; Rev. xviii. 6 ; xxii. 12 ; kokov amX kokov, Ro. xii. 17:1 Th. v. 15 ; 1 Pet. iii. 0. [C'OJir. : diT-an-oSiSw/ii.] * diro-Si-opi^ii) ; (Siopifw, and this fr. opos a limit) ; by drawing boundaries to ilif/o'n,j)ort, sf parole irom anoth- er : Jude 19 (oi airoSiopi^ovTes iavrois those who b}' their wickedness separate themselves from the hving fellowship of Christians ; if iavr. be dropped, with Rec? G L T Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep- arations). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 1290% 25].)* diro.SoKi)ul.^) ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to die {aito, so as to be no more ; [cf . Lat. e morior ; Eng. die off or o u t, pass away^; Germ, a b sterben, v e r sterben) ; I. used properly 1. of the natural death of men: Mt. ix. 24 ; xxii. 24; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. iv.47 ; Ro. vii. 2, and very often ; dno6vr](TKoims avdpamoi subject to death, mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [B. 206(1 7S)]. 2. of the violent death — both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt. xxvi. 35 ; Acts xxi. 13 etc. ; 1 Pet iii. 18 L T Tr WH txt. ; iv 001/0) paxaipas, Heb. xi. 37; of the punishment of death, Heb. x. 28 ; often of the violent death which Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, etc. 3. Phrases : dnoBvijiTK. « rivoi to perish by means of some- thing, [cf. Eng. to die o/"]. Rev. viii. 11 ; cV tj apaprta, iv Tais dpaprlati, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed, Jn. viii. 21, 24 ; iv rto 'ASdp by connection with Adam, 1 Co. XV. 22 ; iv Kvpiio in fellowsliip with, and trusting in, the Lord, Rev. xiv. 13; aTroOvrjcTK. ti to die a certain death, Ro. vi. 10, (Bdvarov poKpov, Charit. \). 12 ed. D'Or- ville [1. i. e. 8 p. 1 7, 6 ed. Beck ; cf. W. 227 (213) ; B. 149 (130)]); Tj dpapriq, used of Christ, 'that he might not have to busy liimseLf more with the sin of men,' Ro. vi. 10 ; iavra to become one's own master, independent, by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [cf. Meyer] ; ra Kvplco to become subject to the Lord's will by dying, Ro. .xiv. 8 [cf. iley.] ; 8id Tiva i. e. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 1 1 ; on the phrases diro- dvrj(TK. TTfpi and vnep rtvos, see jrfpi I. c. 8. and (mcp I. 2 and 3. OratoricaU}-, altlioujrh the proper signification of the verb is retained, Kad' i/pipav diruOvqiTKa} I meet death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31, cf . 2 Co. vi. 9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12; of seeds, which while being resolved into their elements in the ground seem to perish by rotting, Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv. 36. H. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of eternal death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery, and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13; Jn. vi. 50; xi. 26. 2. of moral death, in various senses ; a. to be deprived of real life, i. e. esp. of the power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the s])iritual torpor of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ, the fountain of true hfe. Rev. iii. 2. b. with dat. of the thmg [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from all connection with it: tm vopa, Gal. ii. 19, which must also be supplied with dTroSavovr e s (for so we must read for Rec'!^ aTvodavovT o s) in Ro. vii. 6 [cf. W. 159 (150)] ; TJj apaprla. Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I. 3 above) ; dno twv oroixf «u»" tov Kocrpov so that your re- lation to etc. has passed away. Col. ii. 20, (diro twv izaBav, PorphjT. de abst. animal. 1, 41 [cf. B. 322 (277) : W. 370 (347)]) ; true Christians are said .«imply dnodavi'iv, as hav- ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them dTroKadierTTjfii 62 uTTOKapaBoKia away from God, Col. iii. 3 ; since they owe this habit of mind to the death of Clirist, they are said also anoBavdv criiv XpKTTw, Ko. vi. 8 ; Col. ii. 20. [COMP. : avv-ano- diii-o-Ka6-C (Mk. L\. 12 diroKadiara R G), and dnoKaeto-Twa, (Mk. i.\. 12 L T Tr [but WII dnoKancn-dvto, see theii- App. p. 168]; Acts i. G; cf. W. 78 (75); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. dn-oKaTatTTijcra) ; 2 aor. dneKaT((TTqv (witli double augni., [cf. E.\. iv. 7 ; Jcr. xxiii. 8], Mk. viii. 2.> T Tr WII) ; 1 aor. pass. dnoKaTfardBr^v or, ace. to the belter readinjr, with double augm. dneKart- (rrdSrjv, Mt. xii. 13 ; Mk. iii. 5 ; Lk. vi. 10 (Ignat. ad Smyru. U; cf.[II7/.App.p. 162]; AV. 72 (69 sq.) ; [6.35(31)]; Mullach p. 22) ; as in Grk. writ, lo rcflore to ila former stale ; 2 aor. act. to he in its former state : used of parts of the body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13 ; IMk. iii. 5 ; Lk. vi. 10 ; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25 ; of the restoration of dominion. Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3) ; of the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii. 11 ; Mk. ix. 12 ; of a man at a distance from his friends and to be restored to them, Ileb. xiii. 19." diro-KoXijirTw : fut. d7roKaXL'i//-o); 1 aor. dn-fKaXui/^a; [Pass., pres. dn8riiToij.ai ; ill (irk. writ. fr. [lldt. and] Plat, down ; in Sept. equiv. ton^j ; 1. prop, to uncocer, lay open what has been veiled or covered up ; to disclose, make bare : Ex. XX. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq. ; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; ra arrriBr], Plat. Prot. p. 352 a. ; rfjv K«i>a\r^v, Plut. Crass. 6. 2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose, what before was tinknotcn; a. pass, of any method whatever by which something before unknown becomes evident : Mt. x. 26 ; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass, of matters which come to light from things done: Lk. ii. 35 [some make the verb mid. here] ; Jn. xii. 38 (Is. liii. 1) ; Ro. i. 18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. c. dnoKoKiinTfiv ri Ttw is used of God revealing to men things unknown [Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28 ; Ps. xcvii. (xcviu.) 2 ; 1 S. ii. 27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation: — whether by deeds, Mt. .\i. 25; xvi. 17; Lk. x. 21 (by in- timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ; — or by tlie Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10 ; xiv. 30 ; Eph. iii. 5 ; Phil. iii. 15 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 ; tov vfoi» airoi iv ifioi. who, what, how great his Son is, in my soul. Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men: Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass, of things, previously non-existent, coming into being and to view : as, 17 Sd^a, Ro. viii. 18 (els ruids to be conferred on us) ; 1 Pet. v. 1 ; ft croiTTipla, 1 Pet. i. 5 ; ^ Triorir, Gal. iii. 23 ; the day of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass, of persons, previ- ously concealed, making their appearance in public : of Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30 ; of Anti- christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.* [On this word (and the foil.) cf. U^estcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. .34 sq.) ; Liicke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. .Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq.; esp. F. G. B. van Bell, Disput. theolof;. de vocabulis tpavepovv et dTroKoAuirTeii/ in N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1 849. (pav(p6a is thought to describe an ex- ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to aU, but single or isolated ; aTToKaXinrTu au internal disclosure, to the believer, and abiding. Tlie anoKj>|/i3, -€hcd from other methods of instruction ; hence, Kara nTroKu- \tiyj/iv yvix)^H^f(j6ai, Eph. iii. 3. trvev^a dnoKa\vy^£(as, a spirit received from God disclosing what and how great are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen. of the obj., ToC fivaT-qplov, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the subj., Kvpiuv, 'irjaov XpiOToO, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by ecstasies and visions, [so 7]) ; Gal. i. 12 ; Rev. i. 1 (rev- elation of future things relating to the consummation of the divine kingdom) ; kot dnoKa^vylnv, Gal. ii. 2 ; XaXdi/ (V dnoK. to speak on the ground of [al. in the form cjf] a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co. xiv. 6 ; equiv. to dKOK€Ka\vfjiiJ.fvop, in the jihrase dn-oxd- Xui/'iK fx^'"' ^ ^°' ^'^' -®" ^" equiv. to TO dnoKoKv- irreaBai as used of events by which things or states or persons hitherto withdrawn from view are made visible to all, manifestation, appearance, cf. diroKaXiiTTio, 2, d. and e. : (j}a>s eir dn-ofcdX. eSvSiv a light to appear to the Gentiles [al. render 'a light for a revelation (of divine truth) to the Gentiles,' and so refer the use to a. above], Lk. ii. 32 ; dirox. diKaioKpicrias 6(ov, Ro. ii. 5 ; tcoj' vliiv Tov 6foi, the event in which it will appear who and what the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at the last day, Ro. viii. 19; t^s 60^17? toS Xpurrov, of the glory clothed with which he will return from heaven, 1 Pet. iv. 13 ; of this return itself the phrase is used dffo- KaXvyjfis TOV Kvplov 'l. Xpiarov : 2 Th. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 7 ; 1 Pot. i. 7, 13. (Among Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once. Cat. maj. c. 20, of the denudation of the body, [also in Paul. Aemil. 14 d. vSdroji'; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 32 d. ApapTias : cf. Sir. xi. 27 ; xxii. 22 etc. See Trench § .xciv. and reff. s. v. dnoKaXyTrrai, fin.]) * diro-KopaSoKCa, -or. ViCf""- diroKapaSoKflv, and this fr. otto, Kapa the head, and SoKfiv in the Ion. dial, to watch ; hence KapadoKelv [Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6 ; Eur., al.] to watch with head erect or outstretched, to direct attention to anything, to wait for in suspense ; dTTOKapaSoKciv (Polyb.'ie, 2, 8; 18, 31, 4;'22, 19, 3; [Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p. 235 ed. Relske] ; Joseph, b. j. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 7 A(i. for SVlDiin), anxiously [?] to look forth from one's post. But the prefix dn-d refers also to time (like the Germ. ab in abwarlen, [cf. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies constancv in expecting ; hence the noun, found in Paul alone and but twice, denotes), a/uriot/.s[?] anf/ persistent expectation : Ro. viii. 19 ; Phil. i. 20. This word is very uTTOKaToWdcraa) 63 airoKpxnrrar fully discussed by C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 150 sqq. ; [ef. Ellic. and Lglitft. on Phil. 1. c.].' ttiro-KaT-aXXcurcru or -tto) ; 1 aor. airoKarrjWa^a ; 2 aor. pass. airoKarqK^ayTfTe (Col. i. 22 (21) L Tr uirg. WH mrg.); to reconcile completely {ano}, [al. to reconcile hack again, bring back to a former state of harmony ; Ellic. on Eph. ii. 16 ; Bp. Lghtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20 ; Tl7n. De verb, comp. etc. Ft. iv. p. 7 sq. ; yet see !Mey. on Eph. 1. c. ; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 278 ; (see diro V.)], (ef. KaraX- Xacro-u) : Col. i. 22 (21) [of. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; rwa Tivi, Eph. ii. 16; concisely, nama els avrov [better avrov with edd. ; of. B. p. Ill (97) and s. v. auToO], to draw to himself by reconciUation, or so to reconcile that they should be devoted to liimself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200) but ef. § 49, a. c. 8.]. (Found neither in prof. autb. nor in the Grk. O. T.) * diro-KaTd-oTOoris. -fuf, ^, {airoKa6icrTr)iu, q. v.), restora- tion : tCiv irdirruiv, the restoration not only of the true theocracy but also of that mpre perfect state of (even physical) things which existed before the fall. Acts iii. 21 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Often in Polyb., Diod., Pint., al.)» [diro-KaT-io-rdvcj, see an-0Ku5i'(rT?)/ii.] dir6-Kei(i.ai. ; lo be laid atriiij, laid htj, reserved, (djro as in aTrodijaavpi^h) [q. v.], dTTo6i]Krj) ; a. prop. : Lk. xLx. 20. b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one, aicaitiny him : Col. i. 5 (iXnis hoped-for blessedness) ; 2 Tim. iv. 8 (aX(^iii : 1 aor. dweK((j)d\t7i. Lex. s. V.]. Others incorrectly : Iwoidd that they would cut themselves off from the society of Christians, quit it altogether ; [cf. ^ley. and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* dir6-Kpi|ta, -ros, to, (dnoKpivo^i, q. v. in aTTOKpivio). an anstrer : 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, ' On asking myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril, I answered, " I must die." ' (Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 6 of an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in Polyb. excpt. Vat. 12, 26', 1],)* diroHcptvdi : [Pass., 1 aor. dTTfKpl6i}v ; 1 fut. drroKpiSija-o- fiat] ; i. to part, separate ; Pass, to be parted, separated,. (1 aor. dTTfKpiSrjv ira.i separated, Ilom. H. v. 12 ; Thuc. 2, 49 ; [4, 72] ; Theoph. de cans, plant. 6, 14, 10 ; [other e.xx. in Veitch s. v.]). ii. to give sentence against one, de- cide that he Aa,< lost ; hence Mid., [pres. dnoKpivo/iai ; 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. djreKpivaTo] ; {to give forth a decision from myself [W. 253 (238)]), to give answer, to reply; so from Thuc. down (and even in Hdt. 5, 49 [Gaisf.] ; 8, 101 [Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses vno Kpivo(iai). But the earher and more elegant Grk. writ, do not give this sense to the pass, tenses dT:fKpl6i\v. d-auKpiBijaopai. '•■ The example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b. [cf. Stallb. p. 388] is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex, p. 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dia- logue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is sometimes introduced by copyists." Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 108 ; [cf. Rutherford, New Phr^-n. p. 186 sq. ; Veitch s. V. ; W. 23 (22)]. But from Polyb. down aTroKptSjji/ai and djroKpivatrdat are used indiscriminately, and in the Bible the jiass. forms are by far the more common. In the N. T, the aor. middle dneKplvaTo is found only in Mt. xxvii. 12; Jlk. xiv. 61 ; Lk. iii. 16; xxiii. 9; Jn. v. 17, 19 ; xii. 23 [R G L Tr mrg.] ; Acts iii. 12 ; in the great m.ajority of places direKpldi) is used; cf. W. § 39, 2 ; [B. 51(44)]. 1. ?o jice on «H^H'fr to a question proposed, to answer ; a. simply : KaXws, Mk. xii. 28 ; youwpfwr, 34 ; opdSis. Lk. X. 28 ; jrpos ti, Mt. .x.xvii. 14. b. with ace. : Xo'-yoK, Mt. xxii. 46 ; oiScV, Mt. xxvii. 1 2 ; Mk, xiv, 61 ; v»', 4 sq. c. with dat. etc. : eVi «doTm, Col. iv. 6 ; together with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 1 1 ; vi. 7, 68, etc. ; the dat. omitted : Jn. vii. 46 ; viii. 1 9, 49, etc. npos Tiva, Acts XXV, 16, joined with ipdvat, or Xe'-ycti', or fiVfii/, in the form of a ptcp., as diroKpiOeU ei-ire or e^iy or Xe'yct : Mt. iv. 4 ; viii. 8 ; xv. 13 ; Lk. ix. 19 ; xiii. 2 ; Mk. X. 3, etc.; or direKpt&rj Xe'ywi/: Mt. xxv. 9, 37,44; Lk..iv. 4 [R G L] ; viii. 50 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Jn. i. 26 ;. .\. 33 [Rec] ; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says dTTeKpiet) KOL elite : Jn. i, 48 (49) ; ii, 19 ; iv, 13 ; vii. 16, 20 [R G], 52, etc. d. foil, by the mf. : Lk. xx. 7 ; foil, by the ace. with inf. : Acts xxv. 4 ; foil, bj' on : Acts xxv. 16. 2. In imitation of the Hebr. nj> {Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something- has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks refer [W. 19] : Mt. xi. 25 ; xii. 38 ; xv. 15 ; xvii. 4 ; xxii. 1 ; xxviii. 5 ; Mk. Lx. 5, [G T Tr WH] ; x. 24; xi. 14 ; xii. 35 ; Lk. xiv. 3 ; Jn. ii. 18 ; v. 1 7 ; Acts iii. 12 ; Rev. vii. 13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10; iii. 4, etc. ; 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Mace. xv. 14.) [Coiir. : dvT-airoKpivoiiai.l diro-Kpions. -ea>!. ij, (aTTOKpivoiiai, see aitoKpiimi), a reply- ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i, 22: xix. 9. (From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., and] Hdt. down.) * diro-KpviTTcii : 1 aor. dneKpyyl/a ; pf . pass. ptcp. dnoKeKpvp- p.ivos : a. to hide : n, Mt. xxv. 18 (L T Tr AVH eKpvfe). b. Pass, in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : ao(f)ia, 1 Co. ii. 7 ; pivirrfipwv, Col, i, 26 (opp. to (pavepovaSat) ; with the addition of ev ru 6ea. Eph. iii. 9 : ti dm Tl>»os■^ CLTTOKpVcflO^; 64 aTToWv/JLl Lk. X. 21 ; Mt. xi. 25 (L T Tr AVII (Kpv^as), in imitation of thellebr. p, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10; cxviii. (cxix.) 19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; cf. KpimTa. [B. 149 (130); 189 (163); "\V. 227 (213)]. (Tii Gik. writ. fr. lloin. down.) • dir6Kpv<)>os.-oi>, (anoKpinrra), liiddei), serrcled : Mk. iv. 22 ; l.k. viii. 1 7. slorcil up : Cul. ii. 3. (Dan. xi. 43 [Tlifod.] ; L-;. xlv. 3 ; 1 Macc. i. 23 ; Xon., Kur. ; [cf. l?p. Lg;litft. on the word. Col. 1. <;.].) ' diro-KTttvu, and Aeol. lerivvw (Mt. x. 28 LT Tr; ^!1: .xii. ■< G L r Tr ; Lk. xii. 4 L T Tr ; 2 Co. iii. 6 T Tr ; cf. Fritzsche on jSfk. p. 507 sq. ; \_T,lf. I'roleg;. \>. 76] ; W. 83<79); [B. (U (54)]), affoicrtVu (Grsb.in Mt. X. 28; Lk. xii. 4), aTOKTalva (Lchni. in 2 Co. iii. G; Rev. xiii. 10), aiTOKTevvvvTfs (Mk. xii. 5 WII) : fiit. imoKTevio; 1 aor. aniKTdva : Pass., jires. inf. ano, or anoKva, (hence 3 pars. sing. ])res. either an-oKvct [so AVII] or aTvoKvei. Jas. i. 15 ; cf. M'. 88 (84) ; B. 62 (54)) ; 1 aor. a-neKv-qiTa; {kvui, or kucu, to be preg- nant ; cf. eyituof) ; to briny forth from the womb, give birtli to: rtva, Jas. i. 15; to produce, ibid. IS. (4 jNIacc. XV. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Tlut., Lcian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4 ; Hdian. 1, .5, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 1, 4, 2 [I cd. Bekk.].)* diro-KuXtw: fiit. aTTOKuXifroi : 1 aor. dn€KvXi(Ta', pf. ]iass. [3 pers. sing. anoKfKv\ia-rai ^Ik. xvi. 4 R G L but T Tr WII dvuKfK.'], ptcp. dnoKCKvKicrfiivos ; to roll off or aioay : Mt. xxviii. 2 ; Mk. xvi. 3 ; Lk. x.xiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8, 10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3; Lcian. rhet. praec. 3.) But sec dvaKvKla.' diro-\a(ipdvci) ; fut. UTro'Kq'^Ofiai (Col. iii. 24 ; L T Tr WII a^roXlj;i^|'f o-Cf ; see 'Kafifidvin) ; 2 aor. dn(ka^ov ; 2 aor. mid. dTiekafloiiriv; fr. Ildt. down; 1. lo nciire (from another, diro [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5 ; Ellic. ibid, and Win. De verb. comp. etc. as below]) vhat ix due or pmrnised (cf. a7To5l8a>ixi, 2 ) : T. uio^tn-iaf tlu^ adoption promised to believers, Gal. iv. 5 ; to dya6d aov thy good things. " which thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed due to thee " ( Tl'i'n. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 1 3), Lk. xvi. 25. Hence 2. to take again or hack, to recover: Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WII \a^€'tv] ; xv. 27 ; and to receive by wayofrnlribiition: Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WII txt. Xd/Sn); xxiii. 41 ; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 8; Col. iii. 24. 3. to take from others, take apart or axide; Mid. Tivd, to take a person with one aside out of the view of others : with the addition of diro rov S^Xov kot ISiav in Mk. vii. 3.!, (Joseph, b. j. 2, 7, 2; and in the Act., 2 Macc. vi. 21 ; 'Yardv rpiSjv djroXa^wv, App. b. civ. 5, 40). 4. lo receive any one hos]iitably : 3 Jn. 8, where L T Tr WII have restored vTToXap^dvdv.' dirdXavo-is, -fas, f/, (fr. dnoXaviii to enjoy), enjoyment (Lat. fruclus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (f[j dno\avatv to enjoy); Ilcb. xi. 2.') ((i/iopriar aVoX. pleasure l)orn of sin). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thue. down.)" diro-Xctii-ci) : [im])f. direXftnov, AVII txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20; Til. i. 5] ; 2 aor. aTreXOTov; [fr. Ilom.down]; 1. to leave, leave behind : one in some place. Tit. i. 5 L T Tr WII ; 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Pass. diroXelnerai il remains, is reserved: Heb. iv. 9; x. 26 ; foil, by a<'c. and inf., Ileb. il-. (!. 2. lo deserl, forsake : a place, Jude 6.* diro-Xetxu) : [impf. dttiXfixov] ; lo lick off, lick up : Lk. xvi. 21 RG; cf. eViXei'xm- ([Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478]; Athon. vi. c. 13 ]>. 250 a.) * dir-6XXu|ii and dnoWvio ( [nrroXXilfi Jn. xii. 25 T TrA\TI], impv. dffoXXvf Ro. xiv. 15, [of. B. 45 (39) ; WH. App. p. 168 sq.]) ; fut. ditoXtaa and (1 Co. i. 19 dffoXo) fr. a pass, in the O. T., where often) djroXS (cf. W. 83 (SO) ; [B. 64 (56)]) ; 1 aor. diraiKetTa ; lo destroy ; Mid., pres. oTroX- Xu^at ; [im))f. 3 pers. pliir. d-niiKXvvTo 1 Co. x. 9 T Tr WII] ; fut. djToXovpai ; 2 aor. ditu>Xopr)v; (2 pf. act. l)tcp. djToXuXair) ; [fr. Ilom. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy i. e. to put out of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to, niiii : Mk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34 ; xvii. 27, 29 ; Jude 5 ; t^j» ijo(f>lav render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived, 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) ; to kill: Mt. ii. 13; xii. 14 ; Mk. ix. 22 ; xi. 18 ; Jn. x. 10, etc. ; contextually, to declare that one must be put to death : Mt. x.wii. 20; metaph. to devote or yire over to eternal misery : Mt. x. 28 ; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one's conduct lo cause another lo lose eternal salvation: Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. /o perish, to be lost, ruined, destroyed ; a. of persons ; a. ])roperly : Mt. viii. 25; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 3."!: Jn. xi. 50; 2 Pot. iii. 6; Jude 11, etc.; dniiXXvpai Xipa, Lk. xv. 17; «v fiaxalpa, Mt. xxvi. 52 ; KUTajiaXXopfvoi, dXX' ovk drtoXXv- liivoi., 2 Co. iv. 9. p. tropically, to incur the loss of true or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: .In. iii. 15 [R L br.], 16 ; x. 28 ; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in mind, that ace. to John's conception eternal life begins on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; xv. 18; 2 Pet. iii. 9. Hence oi (6p(voi tliey to ivhom it belongs to ))artake of salvation, and oi dwoXXiipevot those to whom it belongs to l)erish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con- trasted by Paul : 1 Co. i. 18 ; 2 Co. ii. 15 ; iv. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 10, (on "these pres. ptcps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206 (178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, to vanish away: Tj finpeircta, Jas. i. 11 ; the heavens, Heb. i. 11 (fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 27) ; to perish, — of things which on being thrown away are decomposed, as jut'Xos toC aaparos. Mt. v. 29 sq. ; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in some other way, as jSpmo-ts. Jn. vi. 27 ; xpvrlov. 1 Pet. i. 7 ; — or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve the use for which they were designed, as oi da-Kol : Mt. ^AttoXKvcov 65 airoKvai ix. 1 7 ; Mk. ii. 22 ; Lk. v. 37. 2. to destroy i. e. to lose ; a. prop. : Mt. x. 42 ; ilk. ix. 41 {rbv fiicrdov avrov) ; Lk. XV. 4, 8, 9 ; ix. 25 ; xvii. 33 ; Jn. xii. 25 ; 2 Jn. .s, etc. b. metapli. Christ is said to lose any one of liis followers (whom the Father has drawn to discipleship) if such a one becomes wicked and fails of salvation : Jn. vi. 39, cf. xviii. 9. Jlid. to he lost : 6p\^ ck r^r KetpaXrjs, Lk. xxi. 18 ; 6. awo r^f Kf(j)a\ijs, Acts xxvii. 34 (Rec. Trecreirai) ; Ta XafLTrpa a7ra>\fT0 ano crov, Rev. xviii. 14 (Rec. anrjXBe). Used of sheep, straying from the flock : prop. Lk. xv. 4 (to aTToXmXor, in ilt. xviii. 12 to 7T\avaifi.evou). Metaph. in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people of Israel to a flock (Jer. xx™. (1.) 6 ; Ezek. xx.xiv. 4, 16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left to themselves and thereby m danger of losing eternal sal- vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are called Ta irpojiaTa to ajroXaXoVa toS o'ikov 'itrpafjX : j\lt. x. G ; XV. 24, (Is. liii. (J ; 1 Ret. ii. 2o) ; and Christ, reclaim- ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and is said (titc'iv koI a-a^tiv to QTroXmXdy : Lk. xix. 10 ; Mt. xviii. 11 Rec. [CoMP. : (Acts xLx. 1) and -civ (1 Co. iv. 6 T Tr WII; Tit. iii. 13 T WH; cf. [Il'i/. App. p. 157]; Kiihner i. p. 315), o, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity, attached to the apostle Paul : Acts xviii. 24 ; .\Lx. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 12 ; iii. 4 sqq. 22 ; iv. 6 ; xvi. 12 ; Tit. iii. 13.* ttiroXo-yc'onot, -otpai; impf. aTre\oyovpr)v (Acts xxvi. 1); 1 aor. d-rreXoyrja-dpriv; 1 aor. pass. inf. drroXoyrjB^vai, in a reflex, sense (Lk. .xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. Xdyoy), prop, to speak so as to absolve (djro) one's self, talk one's self off of a charge etc. ; 1. to defend one's self, make one's defence : absoL, Lk.xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1 ; foil, by on, Acts XXV. 8 ; tI, to bring forward something in de- , fence of one's self, Lk. xii. 1 1 ; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so in Grk. writ, also) ; ra nfpi ifuivTov an. either T brinr/ for- ward what contributes to my defence [?], or I plead my own cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; mplwith gen. of the thing and im with gen. of pers., concerning a thing before one's tribunal. Acts xxvi. 2 ; with dat. of the person whom liy my defence I strive to convince that I am innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in one's eyes [A. V. unto], Acts xix. 33 ; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat. Prot. p. 359 a. ; often in Lcian., Plut. ; [cf.B. 172(149)]). 2. to defend a person or a thing (so not infreq. in prof, auth.): Ro. ii. 15 (where ace. to the context the 5 deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; ra nepl e'pov. Acts xxvi. 2 (but see under 1).* dTroXo-y£a,-as, 17, (see anoXoyiopai), verbal defence, speech in defence : Acts xxv. 16 ; 2 Co. vii. 11 ; Phil. i. 7, 17 (16); 2 Tim. iv. 1 6 ; with a dat. of the pers. who is to hear the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make good his cause : 1 Co. ix. 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ; in the same sense 17 ottoX. fj jrpo's to/o. Acts .xxii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).* dxo-Xovw : to wash off or away ; in the X. T. twice in 1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6, i. p. 585 ed. Mang.] : dn-eXoJo-ao-^f, 1 Co. vi. 11 ; ^dTmcrat icai aTToXoiia^ai ras ajxapTias aov. Acts xxii. 16. For the sin- ner is unclean, polluted as it were by the filth of his sins. AVhoever obtains remission of sins has liis sins put, so to speak, out of God's sight, — is cleansed from them in the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob- tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have gone down into the baptismal bath [lavacrum, cf. Tit. iii. 5 ; Eph. v. 26] are said aTToXovaacrBaL to have washed themselves, or tqs d/iapT. anoXoia^aadai to have washed away their sins, i. e. to have been cleansed from their sins.* oiro-XiiTpiiKris, -effls, fj, (fr. anoXvTpoai signif}Tng a. to redeem one by paying the price, cf. XvTpou : Plut. Pomp. 24 ; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8 ; Zeph. iii. 1 ; b. to let one go free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a.; Polyb. 22, 21, 8 ; [cf.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation procured by the payment of a ransom; 1. prop. : wdXtui; alxpaXo>TTi]v yvvatKa to dismiss from the house, to repudiate : Mt. i. 19 ; v. 31 sq. ; xix. 3, 7-9 ; Mk. x. 2, 4, 1 1 ; Lk. xvi. 18 ; [1 Esdr. ix. 36]; and iniprojierly a wife deserting her husband is said tov avSpa aTroXvew in Mk. x. 12 [cf. Diod. 12, 1«] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to historic accuracy [yet ef. Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 10], makes Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage, ace. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff. in Mey. ad 1.]) ; (cf. nSi?'. Jc. iii. 8 ; Deut. xxi. 14 ; xxii. 19, 29). 5. Mid. cmoXiofjiai, prop, to send one's self away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re- turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).* diro-|ido- : (fiaa-ira to touch with the hands, handle, work with the hands, knead), to wipe off'; Miavi5oj : [1 aor. pass. ptcp. dn-op(^awcr5eij] ; (fr. 6p(l>av6s bereft, and airo se. Ttvot), to bereave of a parent or parents, (so Aeschyl. choiiph. 247 (249)) ; hence metaph. dnoptpaviadevres drf>' ipiov bereft of your intercourse and society, 1 Th. ii. 1 7 [here Rec''}^ (by mistake) dTvo(pavi- diro-o-K€«dJ'i(XTapai), a falling away, defection, apostasy ; in the Bible sc. from the true religion : Acts xxi. 21 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; ([Josh. xxii. 22 ; 2 Chr. xxix. 19 ; xxxiii. 19] ; Jer. ii. 19 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl. ; 1 Mace. ii. 15). The earher Greeks say dnoa-Taaris ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 528 ; [W. 24].» diroo-Too-iov, -ov. to, very seldom in native Grk. writ., defection, of a freedmau from his patron, Dem. 35, 48 [940, 16] ; in the Bible 1. divorce, repudiation: Mt. xix. 7 ; Mk. x. 4 (^ijBXlov diroaTaaiov, equiv. to 13p T\r\"\3 book or bOl of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1,3; [Is. 1. 1 ; Jer. iii. 8]). 2. a bill of divorce : Mt. v. 31. Grotius ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc., give a copy of one.* diro-OTt-yd^u : 1 aor. airttTTiyatTa; (oTfydfoD, fr. ariyrf) ; to uncover, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, with his hearers, was in the inepaov q. v., and it was the roof of this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus are said to have ' dug out ' ; [cf. B. D. s. v. House, p. 1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303; 8, 3, 30, p. 542.)* diro-o-Tf XXm ; fut. aTrooTeXai ; I aor. diTef. ptcp. anecTTfpT)ji(vos \ tn defraud, rob, de- spoil : absol., Mk. x. li); 1 Co. vi. 8 ; nXXijXour to with- holil thcnisc'lvi's from one another, of tlio.se who mutually deny themselves eohabitatioli, 1 Co. vii. b. Mid. to alloir one's self to he defrauded [W. § 38, 3] : 1 Co. vi. 7 ; rivd rivos (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a thing; pass. anfv the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, God's chief messenger, who has brought the /cX^o-is «Vovpdvioy, as compared with Moses, whom tlie Jews confess, Ileb. iii. 1. 2. Specially applied to the twelve disciples whom Chi-ist selected, out of tlie multitude of his adherents, to be bis constant companions and the heralds to ])roclaim to men the kingdom of God : Mt. x. 1-4 ; Lk. vi. 13 ; Acts i. 26 ; Rev. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gospel and Epistles of John ; [" the word dwoo-roXos occurs 7!) times in the N. T., and of these 68 instances are in St. Luke and St. Paul." Bp. Lghtft.]. AVith these apostles Paul claimed eipiality, because through a heavenly inter- vention he had been appointed by the ascended Christ himself to preach the gospel among the Gentiles, and owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man's instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself, and moreover had evinced his apostolic qualifications by many signal proofs : Gal. i. 1, 1 1 sq. ; ii. 8 ; 1 Co. i. 1 7 ; ix. 1 sq. ; x v. ,8-1 ; 2 Co. iii. 2 sqq. ; xii. 1 2 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 11, cf. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul, apostles surpassed as well the various other orders of Christian teachers (cf. StSdo-xaXor, ciayytX lorijr, npo- (^ijTijr), as also the rest of those on whom the s[)ecial gifts (cf. xapitrpa) of the Holy Spirit hail lieen bestowed, by receiving a richer and more cojjious conferment of the Spirit : 1 Co. xii. 28 sq. ; Eph. iv. 11. Certain false teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves the name and authority of apostles of Christ : 2 Co. xi. 5, 13; Rev. ii. 2. 3. In a broader sense the name is transferred to other eminent Christian teachers ; as Barnabas, Acts xiv. 14, and j)crhaps also Timothy and Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), cf. too Ro. xvi. 7 (?). But in Lk. xi. 49 ; Eph. iii. 5 ; Rev. xviii. 20, ' apostles ' is to be taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 112-101; Ilar- nack on ''reaching' etc. U, 3 ; ef BB.DD. s. v.] diroTToiiaTC^ti) ; (rTTopari^w — not extant — from cTopa) ; prop, to speak uttA a-Toparos, (cf. dnoa-Trjdl^o)) ; 1. to recite from memory: Themist. or. 20 p. 238 ed. Hard.; to repeat to a pupil (anything) for him to commit to mem- ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 c, 277 a.; used of a Sibyl prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. to ply with quesliims, catechize, and so to entice tn [off-hand] answers : rivd, Lk. xi. 53.» diro-trrpfijxo : fxit. dnoaTpeyj/o}\ 1 aor. «TreVrpfi/ra : 2 aor. pass. dTTea-rpdfjirjv: [pres. mid. dnoirTp€(f>opai ; fr. Hom. down] ; 1. to turn away : Tii/a or t\ dtro Tirof, 2 Tim. iv. 4 (t^w dKofjv OTTO T^r dX?)5fias) ; to remore anything from any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. lix. 20) ; diTO(TTp(v TrovrjptSiv, Acts iii. 26, cf. 19, (ottA dpaprlas, Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.] ; to return from a place, Gen. xviii. 33 ; 1 Mace. xi. 54, etc. ; [see Kneucker on Bar. i. 13] ; Xcn. Hell. 3, 4, 12) ; cf. Jlcyer on Acts 1. c. ; [al. (with A. V.) take it a c t i v e 1 y here : in turning away every one of you, etc.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor. pass., to turn one's self aicay from, with ace. of the obj. (ef. [.lelf § .548 obs. I ; Krug.-§ 47, 23, 1] ; B. 192 (166)) ; tn reject, refuse : rivd, Mt. v. 42 ; Ileb. xii. 25 ; rrji/ dXrj- 6emv, Tit. i. 1 4 ; in the sense of deserting, rivd, 2 Tim. i. 1 5.* diro-o-Tu-yeu, -a ; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro. xii. 9; (Ildt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur., al.). The word is fidly discussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes the dno- as expressive of separation (cf. Lat. refor- midare), al. regard it as intensive; (sec d7rd,V.)].* diroo-waYw-yos, -ov, (avvaywyfj, q. v.), excluded from the sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, [A. V. put out of the synagogue']: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2. Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in doubt ; ef. 'Win. [or Riehni] R W B. s. v. Bann ; Wieseler on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle in Schaff's Lange's Romans pp. 304-306 ; cf. B. D. s. v. Excommunication]. (Not found in ]irof. auth.)* uTTOTaaau) 69 aTTO-^pr}ai,<; diro-Too-o-ii) ; to net apart, to separate ; in the N. T. only in Mid. dnoraaaofjiai, ; 1 aor. dncTa^a/iriv ; 1. prop, to separate one's self, withdraw one's self irom any one, i.e. to take leave of, hiil farewell to, (Vulg. ralefacio [etc.]) : Tivi, Mk. vi. 4G ; Lk. ix. 61 ; Acts xviii. 18, 21 [here L T Tr om. the dat.] ; 2 Co. ii. 13. (That the early Grk. writ, never so used the word, but said aami^firdaL nva, is shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq. ; [of. W. 23 (22) ; B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: nvl, Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 8 ; Phil, alieg. iii. § 48 ; rais tov /3iou (ppovrla-t, Euseb. h. e. 2, 1 7, 5 ; [tm pita, Ignat. ad Philiulelph. 11, 1 ; cf. Harm. mand. 6, 2, 9 ; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 6, i and 5 where see Gebh. and Harn. for other exx., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * diro-reXe'cD, -m ; [1 aor. pass. ptcp. anorfXea-diii] ; to per- fect; to briny quite to an end : lao-eir, accomplish, Lk. xiii. 32 (L T Tr WH for R G imreKS)) ', 17 afiapria airoTeke- (rSela-a having come to maturity, Jas. i. 1.^. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., and svibseq. writ.) * oiro-TMr)ni : 2 aor. mid. dTreBifirjv ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to put off or aside ; in t!ie N. T. only mid. to put off from one's self: to. iixaria. Acts vii. 58 ; [to lay up or awai/, «V rfj v\aKfi (i. e. jiut), Mt. xiv. 3 L T Tr WH (so cis s, adv., (cf. oTroTo^ia) ; a. abruptly, precipi- tously, b. trop. sharply, severely, [cf. our curtly"] : Tit. i. 13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. aTroTo/ios cf. (!rimm on Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20, 22; vi. 5, 11; xi. 10; xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim. 27; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Val. Max. 2, 7, 14, etc. ; see also Polyb. 1 7. U. 2 ; Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 1].* diro-rpe'ircD : [fr. Hom. down] ; to turn away; Mid. [pres. diTOTpeTtopai, hupv. dnoTpinov] to turn one's self away from, to shun, avoid ; rim or ri (see aTioaTpicjxi) sub fin.), 2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33 ; Aeschyl. Sept. lOGO ; Eur. Iph. Aul. 336 ; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 ji. 815'', 18 ; Polyb. al-];)* dir-ouo-ia, -as, rj, (dndvai), absence : I'hil. ii. 1 2. [From Aeschyl. down.] * diro-(|)6'pM : 1 aor. dirriveyKa; 2 aor. inf. dTnjveyKeiv; Pass., [pres. inf. dirocpepea-Sai.] ; 1 aor. inf. dvei/f)(6ijvai. ; [fr. Hom. down]; to carry off,take away: Tivd, with the idea of violence included, Mk. xv. 1 ; els tottov tlvu. Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10; jjass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring away (Lat. defero) : t\ «ir with ace. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3 ; t\ diro TITOS eVi Tira, with pass., Acts xL\. 12 (LTTr WH for Ucc. €m(p(pea-6ai).* dTro-€«-yo) [ptcp. in 2 Pet. ii. 18 L T Tr WH ; W. 342 (321)]; 2 aor. d7r((j>vyov; [fr. (Hom.) batrach. 42, 47 •tlown] ; to flee from, escape; with ace, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (where L T wrongly put a comma after dnoffi. [W. 529 (492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158 (138) ; W. § 52, 4, 1 c], 2 Pet. i. 4.» diro-9«'vvo(».oi ; 1 aor. d7re(f)6ey^dpr]v ; to speak out, speak forth, pronounce, not a word of every-day speech, but one " belonging to dignified and elevated discourse, like the Lat. profari, pronuniiare ; properly it has the force of to utter or declare one's self, give one's ojiinion, (einen AussprucJi thun), and is used not only of prophets (see Kypke on Acts ii. 4, — adding from the Sept. Ezek. xiii. 9 ; Mic. v. 12 ; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men and philosophers (Diog. Laert. 1,63; 73; 79; whose pointed sayings the Greeks call dnoc^dtypaTa, Cic. off. 1, 29) " ; [see r^diyyopai]. Accordingly, " it is used of the utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus- trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14 ; and also of the disclosures made by Paul to [before] king Agrippa concerning the dnoKakvi\ri. '" separate, sever, (often in Plato) ; to part asunder : pass. 6 ovpavbt d7rexapi(r6q. Rev. vi. 14 ; reflexively, to separate one's self, depart from : aTro^apiirBrivcu airroiis an aKKjjXtov, Acts XV. 39.* dwo-\|/«x'* ) 'o breathe out life, expire ; to faint or swoon awai/: Lk. xxi. 26. (.So Tluie. 1, 134; Bion 1, 9, al. ; 4 Mace. XV. 18.)» "Amrios, -ov, 6, Appius, a Unman praenomen ; 'Airniov dv signifies to feel around icith the fingers or hands, esp. in searching for something, often to grope, fumhle, cf. ^rjXa- lvSablin(lman's liuj/'. Schmidt ch. 10.]). d. to touch i.e. a.ssail: ticos, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, etc.). [CoMP. : dv-. Ka6-, irfpi-aTrru.] 'Air<|)ia, -ar, ij, Apjihia, name of a woman: Philem. 2. [Apparently a Plirygian name expressive of endearment, cf. SuidaeLex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. 'Ancfxt: dSe\v dcrc^av, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr. Polyb. u. s. [but see Aristot. probl. 1 7, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916», 26 ; 29, 14, 10 ibid. 952\ 20 ; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 1120", 2, etc.] ; often in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr.)* oipa, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal root .A.PQ to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius § 488 ; VaniCek p. 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated fuUy by Kuhner ii. §§ 509, 545; [Jelf §§ 787-789], and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. lGO-180, among others ; [for a statement of diverse views see Bdumlein, Griech. Par- tikeln, p. 19 sq.]. It intimates that, "under these cu-- ■cumstances something either is so or becomes so " (Klotz I.e. p. 16 7): Lat. iyitur, consequently, [differing from ovv in ' denoting a subjective impression rather than a positive conclusion.' L. and S. (see 5 below)]. In the N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. §§ 53, 8 a. and Gl, 6. It is found 1. subjoined to another word : Ro. vii. 21 ; viii. 1 ; Gal. iii. 7 ; cVel apa since, if it were other- wise, 1 Co. vii. 14 ; [v. 10, cf. B. § 149, 5]. When placed after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist- ing only in the mind . rir apa icho then ? Mt. xviii. 1 (i. e. one certainly will be the greater, ivho then ?) ; jMt. xix. 25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved ; you say that the rich will not ; who then ?) ; Mt. xix. 27 ; xxiv. 45 (I bid you be ready; who then etc. ? the question follows from this command of mine); Mk. iv. 41 ; Lk. i. 66 (from all these things doubtless something follows ; what, then ?) ; Lk. viii. 25 ; xii. 42 ; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which then ?) ; Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared ; wlial, then, has become of him?), flapa, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ; Acts vii. 1 [Rec] (Spa equiv. to ■ since the witnesses tes- tify thus ' ) ; Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous, perhaps the thought etc.) , emip apa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (N:-DN', «1 apa, Gen. xviii. 3). ovk apa. Acts xxi. 38 (thou hast a knowledge of Greek; art thou not then the Egyptian, as I suspected?); nrjTi apa (Lat. mini iijilur), did I then etc., 2 Co. i. 17. 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ. (cf. B. 371 (318) ; [W.'558 (519)]) it is placed at the beginning of a sentence; and so, so then, accord inqly, equi\'. to mo-Tf with a finite verb ; apa paprvpilre [fiaprv- pes eVre T Tr WHj, Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. x.xiii. 31 dtm fuip- Tvpure) ; Ro. x. 17; 1 Co. xv. 18 ; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in LTTr WH no conditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii. 12 ; Gal. iv. 31 (L T Tr WII 816) ; Heb. iv. 9. 3. in an apodosis, after a protasis with el, in order to bring out what follows as a matter of course, (Germ, so ist ja the obvious inference is) : Lk. xi. 20 ; Mt. xii. 28 ; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (R G, a protasis with el preceding); Gal. ii. 21 ; iii. 29 ; V. 11 ; Heb. xii. 8 ; joined to another word, 1 Co. XV. 14. 4. with yi, rendering it more pointed, apaye [L Tr uniformly apa ye ; so R WH in Acts xvii. 27 ; cf. W. p. 45; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely then, so then, (Lat. itaque eri/o) : Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26; Acts xi. 18 (L T Tr WII om. ye) ; and subjoined to a word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. Spa ovv, a combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen- tence (W. 445 (414) ; B. 371 (318), [;' Spa ad internam potius caussam spectat, ovv magis ad externam." Klotz ad Devai'. ii. p. 717; Spa is the more logical, ovv the more formal connective; " apa is illative, ojv continua- tive," Win. 1. c. ; cf. also Kuhner § 545, 3]), [R. V.] so then, (Lat. hinc igitur) : Ro. v. 18 ; vii. 3, 25 ; viii. 12 ; ix. 16, 18 ; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. ovv) ; 1 9 [L mrg. Spa] ; Gal. vi. 10 ; Eph. ii. 19 ; 1 Th. v. 6 ; 2 Th. ii. 15.* dpa, an interrogative particle ["implying anxiety or impatience on the part of the (juestioner." L. and S. s. v.], (of the same root as the preceding Spa, and only differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon the first syllable, which is therefore circumtlexed) ; 1. num igitur, i. e. marking an inferential question to which a negative answer is expected : Lk. xviii. 8 ; with yc rendering it more pointed, &pd ye [G T 2pdye] : Acts viii. 30 ; [ipa ovv . . . 8i.a>Kop.ev Lchm. ed. min. also maj. mrg. are we then pursuing etc. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i. e. a question to which an affirmative answer is expected, in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ, so ist also wold ?), he is then ? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write Spa, so that tills example is referred to those mentioned under Spa, 3, and is rendered ('hrist is then a minister of sin ; but pf/ yevoiTo, wluch follows, is everywhere by Paul opposed to a question). Cf. AV. 510 (475) sq. [also B. 247 (213), 371 (318); Hervi. ad Vig. p. 820 sqq. ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 180 sqq. ; speaking somewhat loosely, it may be said " 2pa expresses bewilderment as to a possible conclusion. . . apa hesitates, while apa con- cludes." Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. I. c.].* dpd, -as, rj, 1. a prayer ; a suppiiication ; much of ten- er 2. (in imprecation, cwr.s-e, malediction, (cf. Kardpa) ; so in Ro. iii. 14 (cf. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in Sept. (In both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 'Apa^Ca, -as, 17, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known peninsula of Asia, l}'ing towards Afi-ica, and bounded by Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and the Ocean] : Gal. i. 1 7 ; iv. 25.* [dpaPwv Tdf., see dppa,Jd>v.'\ [dpa-ye, sec Spa, 4.] [dpd7«, see apa, 1.] 'Apdji, Aram [or i?o)/(], indecl. prop, name of one of the male ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 3 sq. ; Lk. iii. 33 [not T WH Tr mrg. ; see 'ASpelv and 'ApveQ.* dpa(t>os T Tr for Sppacjios, q. v. "Apayfr 72 ^ApiTa<; 'Apo+j -a/3of, 6, an Arabian : Acts ii. 11.* dpYc'tn, -m ; (to be apyos, q- V.) ; /o Iw idle, inactive ; con- textually, to linyer, dcUiij : 2 Pet. ii. 3 ols to xpi'/ia f /cn-nXai ovK apyfi, i- e. whose piinislinicnt lias long boon inipond- ing anil will shortly fall. (In ( !rk. writ. fr. Soph, down.) [CoMP. : KaT-apy(a>-'\ ' dpYOs, -6v, anil in later writ. fr. Aristot. hist. anim. 10, 40 [vol. i. p. 627', 15] on and consequently also in the X. T. with the fem. apyi), which among the early Greeks Epimenides alone is said to ha\o used, Tit. i. 12 ; cf. Li>h. ad Phryn. p. 104 sq.; id. Paralip. p. 4,'>5 sqq.; W. C8 (67), [of. 24: B. 2.5 (23)]» (contr. fr. «fpyoj wliich Horn, uses, fr. a priv. and tpyov without work, without labor, doing nothing), inaclhr, 'uUe ; a. free from labor, at leisure, (apyov eivat, Hdt. .J, 6) : ^It. x.\. 3, 6 [Rec] ; 1 Tim. V. 13. b. Uizi/, sshuiDihuj lite labor which one our/ht to perform, (Mom. II. 9, 320 o, t aepyos auijp, 5, re noWa €op>""s-) • ■n-iTTts, Jas. ii. 20 (L T Tr WII for R G veKpd) ; yaa-rtpes apya'i i. e. idle gluttons, fr. Epimenides, Tit. i. 1 2 (Nicet. ann. 7, 4, 13.5 d. els iipyas yaare'pas 6xerqyrjs toC Kvpiov els ■naaav apta-Kelav, to please him in all things. Col. i. 10; (of the desire to please (iod, in Pliilo, opif. §50; de profug. §17; de victim. § 3 sub fin. In native Grk. writ, commonly in a bad sense ; Thcophr. char. 3 (5) ; Polyb. 31, 26, 5 ; Diod. 13, 53 ; al. ; [cf. Bp. Lglitft. on Col. 1. c.]).* dpc'o-Ku ; impf. ijpe/ particular moral excellence, as vaodesty, purity ; hence (plur. at aperal, Sap. viii. 7 ; often in 4 Mace, and in tlie Grk. philosophers) rij aperf], Phil. iv. 8. Used of God, it denotes a. his ^joft-ec : 2 Pet. i. 3. b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ' which shine forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of our salvation ' (Jn. Gerhard) : 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for lin splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of the Messiah ; in plur. for ni^nri praises, of God, Is. xliii. 21 ; .xlii. 12; Lxiii. 7.)* apTJv, 6, nom. not in use ; the other cases are by syncojie apvoi (for apfi/os), dpvi, apva ; plur. upves, apvav, dpvaat, apvas, a sheep, a lamb: Lk. x. 3. (Gen. xxx. 32; E.x. xxiii. 19, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * t4)t8(u', -S> : 1 aor. r)piBp.r)>Ta ; pf. pass. r)pidp.r)(iai ; (apiBpoi) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to number : 3It. x. 30 ; Lk. xii. 7 ; Rev. vii. 9. [CoMP. : KaT-api6pia.'] * dpi.6|i6$. -oO, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a number: a. a fixed and definite number; tov apiBpov TrevraKicrxi^ioi, in num- ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. IG ; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often in Grk. writ. ; AV. 230 (216); [B. 153 (134)]); eV toO apLffpov Totv SaSeKa, Lk. xxii. 3 ; dp. dvdpawov, a number whose letters indicate a certain man. Rev. xiii. IS. b. an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude : Acts vi. 7 ; .xi. 21 : Rev. xx. s. ■Api|ia6aCo [WH 'Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -as, rj, Arimathcea, Ilebr. HOT (a height), the name of several cities of Palestine; cf. Gesenius, Tliesaur. iii. p. 1275. The one mentioned in Jit. xxvii. 57 ; JMk. xv. 43 ; Lk. xxiii. 51 ; Jn. xLx. 38 appears to have been the same as that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel, in Mount Ephraim : 1 S. i. 1, 19, etc. Sept. \\ppa6atp, and without the art. 'PapaBep, and ace. to another read- ing 'PaiMa6at)i, 1 Macc. xi. 34 ; 'Papiadd in Joseph, antt. 13, 4, 9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus von Naz. iii. 514 ; [B. D. Am. ed.].* 'ApCoTopxos, -ov, 6, [lit. best-ruling], Aristarchus, a cer- tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ' fellow-captive ' with Paul [cf. B. D. Am. ed. ; Bp. Lghtft. and Jley. on Col. as below]: Acts xLx. 29; xx. 4; xxvii. 2; Col. iv. 10; Philem. 24.* Of lo-rdu, -a> : 1 aor. rjplaTqaa ; (to apccrrov, q. v.) ; a. to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 1 ; and often in Attic), b. by later usage to dine : irapd rtvi, Lk. xi. 37 ; (Gen. xliii. 24 ; Ael. v. h. 9. IS).* dpio-repos, -a, -6v, left : Mt. vi. 3 ; Lk. xxiii. 33 ; [Mk. X. 37 T Tr WH, on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3] ; oTrXa dpi- per contra IMcy. ad loc: W. 2.i8 (242)].* opfids, -ov. 6, (APQ to join, fit), a joining, a joint : Hcb. iv. 12. (Soph., Xen., al. ; Sir. xxvii. 2.)* apvas, see apl)v. 'ApvcC, o, indecl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 33 T WII Tr mrg.* Of vEop.ai, -ovpai ; fut. apvrjuopai ; impf. rjpvovprjv ; 1 aor. tjpvr)aapr]v (rare in Attic, where generally fjpvTjOrjv, cf. Matth. i. p. .'iSS [better Veitch s. v.]); pf. ijpytipai ; a depon. verb [(fr. Horn, down)] signifying 1. to deny, i. e. elnf'iv . . . ovk \_to nay . . . not, contradict'] : Mk. xiv. 70 ; Mt. x.xvi. 70 ; Jn. i. 20 ; xviii. 25, 27 ; Lk. viii. 45 ; Acts iv. 16 ; foil, by oti oi instead of simple on, in order to make the negation more strong and explicit : Mt. xxvi. 72 : 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; (on the same use in Grk. wi-it. cf. Kuhner ii. p. 761 ; [Jelf ii. 450; W. § 65, 2/3.; B. 355 (305)]). 2. to deny, with an ace. of the pers., in various senses : a. apv. 'li;croCi' is used of followers of Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to disomi] : Mt. X. 33 ; Lk. xii. 9 ; [Jn. xiii. 38 L txt. T Tr WII] ; 2 Tim. ii. 12, (apv. to ovopa airov, Rev. iii. 8, means the same) ; and on the other hand, of Jesus, denying that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33; 2 Tim. ii. 12. b. apv. God and Christ, is used of those who by cher- ishing anil disseminating pernicious opinions and immo- rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and Christ : 1 Jn. ii. 22 (cf. iv. 2 ; 2 Jn. 7-11); Jude 4 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1. c. apv. eavTov to deny himncif, is used in two .senses, o. to disregard his own interests : Lk. ix. 23 [R WII mrg. aTTapv.~\ ; cf. cmapviopai. p. to prove false to himself, act entirely unlike himself: 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny i. c. nlincynlc, abjure; ti, to renounce a thing, forsake it: njv aa-e^dav K. riii imBvpiai, Tit. ii. 12; by act to show es- trangement from a thing : t^v niariv, 1 Tim. v. 8 ; Rev. ii. 13 ; Tr]V bvvapiv t^s fvtrfjSfiat, 2 Tim. iii. 5. 4. not to accej/t, to reject, refuse, something offered : nvd, Acts iii. 14; vii. 35; with an inf. indicating the thing, Ileb. xi. 24. [Com P. : an-apveopai-l opvtov, -ov, Tci, (diniin. fr. aprjv, i|. v.), [fr. Lys. down], a lilllc lamb, a lamb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol- lowers Ta apvia pov in Jn. xxi. 15 ; to apviov is used of Christ, innocently Buffering and dying to expiate the sins of men, very often in Rev., as v. G, 8, 12, etc. (Jer. xi. 1 9 ; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 10.) • dpOTpido), -S> ; (aporpov, q. v.) ; to plough : Lk. xvii. 7 ; 1 Co. ix. 10. (Deut. xxii. 10 ; [1 K. xix. 19] ; Mic. iii. 12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more ancient dp6a>; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sq. [W. 24].)* aporpov, -ov, to, (ap6a> to plough), a plough : Lk. ix. 62. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)' apTra.yi\, -fjs, Tj, (ipirdCo), rajiine, pillage; 1. the act of plundering, robbery: Heb. x. 34. 2. plunder, spoil : Mt. .xxiii. 25 ; Lk. xi. 39. (Is. iii. 14 ; Nah. ii. 12. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * dpira-yiids. -oij, 6, (dpiraCii) ; 1. Ihe act of seizing, rol/- bcry, (so Plut. de lib. educ. c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a. the only instance of its use noted in prof, autli.). 2. a thing seized or to be seized, booty : dpiraypov rjyfia-dai ti to deem anything a prize, — a thing to be seized upon or to be held fast, retained, Phil. ii. 6 ; on the meaning of this pass, see pnpcpfj ; (fiyr'uiBai or iroieiaBai. ti dpiiayfia, Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2; vit. Const. 2, 31 ; [Comm. in Luc. vi., cf. Mai, No.-. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165] ; Heliod. 7, 11 and 20 ; 8, 7 ; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1, 8 p. 330 d.] ; ut om- nium bona praedam tuani duceres, Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 15, 39 ; [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. Ill) ; Wetstein ad loc. ; Cremcr 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.]).* dpirdtw ; fut. apwd(Ta> [Veitch s. v. ; cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 407]; 1 aor. fjpTraa-a; Pass., 1 aor. i^pmi'o-^Tji' ; 2 aor. rjpTrdyrjv (2 Co. xii. 2, 4 ; Sap. iv. 11 ; cf. W. 83 (80) ; [B. 54 (47) ; WH. App. p. 170]) ; 2 fut. dpnayfj- a-opai; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius § 331); fr. Hom. down]; to .':eize, carry off by force : ti, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see ^lapTrdfw)]; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one's self eagerly: ti^v ^aaCKitav toC 6eov, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6, 5, 18, etc.) ; to snatch out or aicay : ti, Mt. xiii. 19 ; t\ f'le Xeipdi Tivns, Jn. x. 28 sq. ; rifa €K -rrvpos, proverbial, to rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am. iv. 11 ; Zech. iii. 2) ; nvd, to seize and carry off speedily, Jn. vi. 15; Acts .xxiii. 10; used of divine power trans- apira^ 75 apTOs appa- fiojva sc. Tijs KX>]povoplai, as is e.Kpressed in full in Eph. V 14 [cf. W. § :,ms (Ileb. vi. 5), is both a foretaste and a pledge of future blessedness ; cf. s. v. dirapxr), c. [B.D. s. V. Earnest.] (Isae. 8, 23 [p. 210 ed. Reiske] ; Aristot. pol. 1, 4, 5 [p. 1259% 12]; al.) * appa(|)os, T Tr WII apacpos (cf. W. 48 ; B. 32 (29) ; [WH. App. p. 1G3; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; cf. P, p]), -ov, (pdjTTOD to sew together), )wt sewed together, without a seam : Jn. xix. 23.* appT|v, see aptnjv. ap-ptiTos, -oy, (prjTos, fr. PEfl) ; a. unsaid, unspoken: Horn. Od. 14, 4G0, and often in Attic, b. unspeakable (on account of its sacredness), (Hdt. 5, 83, and often in other writ.): 2 Co. xii. 4, explained by what follows: a QVK i^itv dvOpCJTTCd XoKTjtjat.* appuo-Tos, -ov, (pu>vvvp.L, q. v.), without strength, weak; sick : jMt. xiv. 14 ; Mk. vi. 5, 13 ; xvi. 18 ; 1 Co. x'i. 30. ([Hippocr.], Xen., Plut.) * dpo-iVoKoiTus, -ov, 6, (cipatjv a male ; Kolrrj a bed), one icluj lir.-i irtih a male as with a female, a sodomite : 1 Co. vi. 9 ; 1 Tim. i. 10. (Anthol. 9, 6SG, 5 ; eccl. writ.)* apoTjv, -fvos, 6, cipcrev, to, also (ace. to R G in Rev. xii. 5, 13, and in many edd., that of Tdf. included, in Ro. i. 27* ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 78 ; [W. 22]) tippi^v, -fi/os, 6, Sppev, TO, [fr. Horn, down], male : Mt. xix. 4 ; Mk. X. 6 ; Lk. ii. 23 ; Ro. i. 27 ; Gal. iii. 28 ; Rev. xii. 5, 13 (where Lchm. reads apatvav ; on which Alex, form of the ace. cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; 6G (64) ; Mullach p. 22 [cf. p.l62]; B.13(12); [.So/)/!. Lex.,Intr.p. 36; r-//; Proleg. p. 118 (and Inscrr. as there referred to) ; WH. Ap|). p. 157 ; Scrivener, Collation etc. p. liv.]).*" 'ApT€(ias, -a, 6, (abbreviated fr. 'ApTt/ii'Scflpos [i. e. gift of Artemis], cf. "W. 102 (97); [B. 20 (17 sq.) ; Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 sq. ; Chandler § 32]), Artemas, a friend of Paul the apostle : Tit. iii. 12. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]* "ApTejiis, -iSof and -tor, ^, Artemis, that is to say, the so-called Tauric or Persian or Ephesian Ar- temis, the goddess of many Asiatic peoples, to be dis- tinguished from the Artemis of the Greeks, the sister of Apollo ; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. p. 39 ; [B. D. s. v. Diana]. A very splendid temple was built to her at Ephesus, which was set on fire by Ilerostratus and reduced to ashes ; but afterwards, in the time of Alexander the Great, it was rebuilt in a style of still greater magnifi- cence : Acts xix. 24, 27 sq. 34 sq. Cf. Stark in Schenkel i. p. 604 sq. s. v. Diana ; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, Loud. 1877].* dpTc'|jLuv, -ovos (L T Tr WH -avos, cf. "\V. § 9, 1 d. ; [B. 24 (22)]), 6, top-sail [ov foresaill] of a ship : Acts xxvii. 40 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul, p. 192 sq. ; Graser in the Philologus, 3d suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq.].* dpTi, adv., ace. to its deriv. (fr. APQ to draw close to- gether, to join, Lat. arto; [cf. Curtius § 41S8]) denoting time closely connected ; 1. in Attic ^^just now, this moment, (Germ. gerade,ebcn), marking something begun or finished even now, just before the time in which we are speaking " (Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20) : Mt. ix. 18 1 Th. iii. 6, and perhaps Rev. xii. 10. 2. ace. to later Grk. usage univ. note, at this time ; opp. to past time Jn. LX. 19, 25 ; xiii. 33 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Gal. i. 9 sq. opp to future time : Jn. xiii. 37 ; xvi. 12, 31 ; 2 Th. ii. 7 ; opp to fut. time subsequent to the return of Christ : 1 Co xiii. 12; 1 Pet. i. 6, 8. of present time most closely lim' ited, at this very time, this moment : Mt. iii. 15 ; xxvi. 53 Jn. xiii. 7 ; Gal. iv. 20. axpi Tfjs upn wpas, 1 Co. iv. 11 eojf apn, hitherto ; until now, up to this time : Mt. xi. 12 Jn. ii. 10; v. 17 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Co. iv. 13 ; viii. 7 ; xv. 6 ; 1 Jn ii. 9. dff' apn, see dirdpn above. Cf. Lol/eck ad Phryn, p. 18 sqq. ; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 70 sq.].* [Stn. Spri, ijSti, vvv: Roughly speaking, it may be said that ipri just now, even now, properly marks time closely con- uecteil with tlie present ; later, .strictly present time, (see above, and compare in Eug. " just now " i. e. a inoment ayo, and " just now " (emphat.) i. e. at this precise time), viii' noiv, marks a definite point (or period) of time, the (objective) immediate present. ^5?) now {oheiuly) mth a suggested ref- erence to some other time or to some expectation, tlie sub- jective present (i. e. so regarded by the writer). ijSn and SpTi are associated in 2 Thess. ii. 7 ; vvv and ijSiii in 1 Jn. iv. 3. See Kiilmer §§ 498, 499 ; Bdumlein, Partikehi, p. 138 sqq. ; Ellic. on 1 Thess. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv. G.] apTi-Yt'vvTjTos. -01/. (tipTi and •yewdm), just born, new- born: 1 Pet. ii. 2. (Lcian. Alex. 13 ; Long. past. 1, (7) 9; 2, (3) 4.)* apTios, -a, -ov, (APQ to fit, [cf. Curtius § 488]) ; 1. filed. 2. complete, perfect, [having reference appar- ently to ' special aptitude for given uses '] ; so 2 Tim. iii. 17, [cf. Ellicott ad loc; Trench § xxii.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * opros, -ov, 6, (fr. APQ to fit, put together, [cf. Etym. Magn. 150, 36 — but doubtful]), bread; Hebr. □h'? ; 1. food composed of four mixed with water and baked; the Israelites made it in the form of an oblong or round cake, as thick as one's thumb, and as large as a plate or platter (cf. Win. R W B. s. v. Backen ; [BB.DD.]) ; aprvco 76 (^PXV hence it was not cut, but broken (see icXdo-ir and /tXam) : Mt. iv. 3 ; vii. 9 ; xiv. 17, 19 ; Mk. vi. 3G [T Tr Wll oni. L br.], 37 sq. ; Lk. iv. 3 ; xxiv. 30 ; Jn. vi. 5 sqq. ; Acts xxvii. 35, and often ; aproi t^j jr/jofleo-fus. loaves conse- crated to Jehovah, sec npoBea-ts ; on tlu' liioad used at the love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 35]; of. Mt. xxvi. 2G; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,4ti; xx. 7; 1 Co. X. 16 sq. ; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and Uke the Ilebr. uvh, food of any hind : Mt.vi. 11; Jlik. vi. 8; Lk. xi. 3 ; 2 Co. ix. 10 ; d apros rav tckvidv the food served to the cliildren, Mk. vii. 27; aprov (payelv or iaOUiv lo take food, to eat (DnS '7iN) [W. 33 (32)]: iMk. iii. 20; Lk. xiv. 1, 15; ]VIt. xv. 2; aprov (paye'iv irapd rivoi to take food supplied by one, 2 Th. iii. 8 ; t6i> tavrov upr. iaBifiv to eat the food which one has prociu'cil for him- self by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 1 2 ; pr^re aprov iadlav. prjrf olvov nivwv, abstaininjj from the usual sustenance, or usinrj it sparingly, Lk. vii. 33 ; rpayav rov liprov pera TITOS to be one's table-companion, his familiar friend, Jn. xiii. 18 (Ps. xl. (xli.) 10). In Jn.vi. 32-35 Jesus calls him- self rov aprov rov S^oit, r. u. €K tov ovpavov, t. a. r^? C^yjs^ as the divine Xoyos, come from heaven, who containing; in liimself the source of heavenly life supplies celestial nutriment to souls that they may attain to life eternal. dpTuu) : fut. apTvcna; Pass., pf. jjprvpai; 1 fut. aprvdrj- aopm ; (Al'Q lo fit) ; lo prepare, arranr/r ; often so in Horn. In the comic writers and epigi-ammatists used of ])re- paring food, to season, make sarori/, ([ra o^a, Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 13 p. 1118% 29] ; riprvpivos oivos, Theophr. de odor. § 51 [frag. 4, c. 11]) ; so Mk. ix. 50 ; Lk. xiv. 34 ; metaph. d \6yos SKari T)prvp€vos, full of wisdom and grace and hence j)leasant and wholesome, Col. iv. 6.* 'Ap4>a|d8, d, Arphaxad, (^!y3a"lS), son of Shem (Gen. X. 22. 24 ; xi. 10, 12, [cf. Jos. a'ntt.' 1, C, 4]) : Lk. iii. SC* <>PX-»ry«^os, -ov, 6, (fr. apxh q. v., and «yycXoj), a bibl. and cccl. word, aniia>u/r:l, i. e. chief of the angels (Hebr. -^p chief, prince, Dan. x. 20 ; xii. 1), or one of the princes and leaders of the angels (D'Jti*N"!n D'lnn, Dan. x. 13) : 1 Th. iv. 16 ; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile dis- tinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the author of the book of Enoch, ix. 1 sqq. ; cf. Dillmann ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to the four sides of the throne of God) of the highest rank; but others, and ajiparently the majority (Tob. xii. 15, where cf. Fritzsche : Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven (after the pattern of the seven Ams/iaspands, the high- est spirits in the r'eUgion of Zoroaster). See s. vv. Tu- ffpit'lX and MtxajjX.' apX°'^<>S> -aia, -alov, (fr. apxr) beginning, hence) prop. that has been from the her/inninr/, original, primeval, old, ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions : Lk. ix. 8, 19 ; Acts XV. 7, 21 ; x.\i. 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; Rev. xii. 9 ; XX. 2; oi apxaioi the ancients, the early Israelites: Mt. V. 21, 27 [Rec], 33 ; ra apxa'ia the man's previous moral condition: 2 Co. v. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down.)* [SvK. apxa'tos, ira\ai(is: in iraX. the simple idea of time 7Tovs), 8; Jn. viii. 44 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; ii. 13 s(j. ; iii. 8 ; more fullv an dpxrjs Kriaews or Kua-pov, Mt. xxiv. 21 ; Mk. x. 6 ; xiii. 19 ; 2 Tli. ii. 13 (where L [Tr mrg. WH mrg.] anapxfjv, q. v.) ; 2 Pet. iii. 4; kot dpxai, Ileb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26). b. in a rel.ative sense, of the beginning of the thing spoken of: i^ dpxrjs, fr. the time when Jesus gathered disci])li's, Jn. vi. 64 ; xvi. 4 ; an apxrjs- Jn. xv. 27 (since I appeared in public) ; as soon as instruction was imparted, I .In. ii. [7], 24 ; iii. 1 1 ; 2 Jn. 5 sq. ; more fully e'l/ apx^ rov (vay- yeXlov, Phil. iv. 15 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2 [see note in Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and cf .] Polyc. ad Philipp. 11,3); from the beginning of the gospel liistory, Lk. i. 2 ; from the commencement of life. Acts xxvi. 4 ; ev apxfi, in the beginning, when the church was foinided. Acts ,\i. 15. The ace. apx^v [cf. W. 124 (118) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 18] and ri)v apxrjv in the Grk. writ. (cf. Lennep ad Pha- larid. p. 82 s(j(|. and p. 94 sqq. ed. Lijis. ; Briickner in De Wette's Ildbch. on John J5. 151) is often used adver- bially, i. q. oXmr altogether, (properly, an ace. of ' direc- tion towards': usque ad initium, [cf. W. 230 (216) ; B. 153 (134)]), commonly followed by a negative, but not always [cf. e.g. Dio Cass. frag. 101 (93 Dind.) ; xiv. 34 (Dind. vol. ii. p. 194); ILx. 20; ixii. 4; see, further, Lycurg. § 125 ed. Jlatzner] ; hence that extremely difli- cult passage, Jn. viii. 25 rfjv . . . vplv, nuist in my opinion be interpreted as foUows : / am allogelhcr or icholli/ (i. e. in all respects, precisely) that which I even speak to you (I not only am, but also declare to you what I am ; therefore you have no need to question me), [cf. W. 464 (432) ; B. 253 (218)]. dp;^^^ Xa^jSavcii' to take beginning, to begin, Ileb. ii. 3. with the addition of the gen. of the thing spoken of : ioSlvwv. ]Mt. xxiv. 8 ; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) [(here R G plur.) ; twi» a-rjpciav, Jn. ii. 11] ; ^pepav, Ileb. vii. 3 ; roi) €iiayye\tov, that from which the gospel liistorv took its beginning, IMk. i. 1 : rrjs vnoa-rdcr«i>s, the confidence with which we have made a beginninrr, ojjp. to /if'xf" re\ovs> Ileb. iii. 14. ra arotx^ia rrjs dpxrjs, Ileb. V. 12 (rrjs dpxris is added for greater explicitness, as in Lat. ru- dimcnta prima, Liv. 1, 3; Justin, hist. 7, 5; a.'ad. prima apxv/o'i 77 ap^cepevi elementa, Horat. sat. 1, 1, 26, etc.); 6 t^s opxv^ '■°i' XpitTTov Xdyos equiv. to 6 tov Xpurrov \6yos 6 Trjs dpxv^t i. e. the instruction concerning Christ such as it was at the very outset [of. AV. 188 (177) ; B. 155 (13G)], Heb. vi. 1. 2. the person or thing that commences, the Jirst per- son or thing in a series, the leader : Col. i. 18 ; Rev. i. 8 Rec. ; xxi. 6; xxii. 13; (Deut. xxi. 17; Job .\1. 14 (19), etc.). 3. that bi/ which anything begins to be, the origin, active cause (a sense in which the philosopher Anaximander, 8th cent. b. C, is said to have been the first to use the word ; cf. Simpl. on Aristot. phys. f. 9 p. 326 ed. Brandis and 32 p. 334 ed. Brandis, [cf. Teichmiiller, Stud, zur Gesch. d. Begriffe, pp. 48 sqq. 560 sqq.]) : ^ dpxfi T^r KriVfms, of Christ as the divine Xoyos, Rev. iii. 14 (cf. Diisterdieck ad loc. ; Clem. Al. protropt. 1, p. 6 ed. Potter, [p. 30 ed. Svlb.] 6 Xdyor apxfj Beta Turn mvTaiv ; in Evang. Xicod. c. 23 [p. 308 ed. Tdf., p. 736 ed. Tliilo] the devil is caOed ij dpx'l tov Oavdrov Koi pi(a T^r afiaprlas). 4. the extremity of a thing : of the cor- ners of a saO, Acts x. 11; xi. 5; (Hdt. 4, 60; Diod. l,35;al.). 5. the jirst place, principality, rule, magis- tracy, [cf. Eng. ' authorities'2, (Spx<^ tikos) : Lk. xii. 11 ; XX. 20 ; Tit. iii. 1 ; oBice given in charge (Gen. xl. 13, 21 ; 2 Mace. iv. 10, etc.), Jude 6. Hence the term is trans- ferred by Paul to angels and demons holding dominions entrusted to them in the order of things (see ayycXor, 2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16 ; Mey. on Eph. i. 21]) : Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. i. 21 ; iii. 10; vi. 12; Col. i. 16 ; ii. 10, 15. See i^ovma, 4 c. /3^. • apxTy°s, -6v, adj., hailing, furnishing the first cause or occasion : Eur. Hipp. 881 ; Plat. Crat. p. 401 d. ; chiefly used as subst. 6, jj, dpxrjyot, (dpxrj and liyoj) ; 1. the chief leader, prince: of Christ, Acts v. 31; (Aeschyl. Ag. 259 ; Thuc. 1, 132 ; Sept. Is. iii. 5 sq.; 2 Chr. xxiii. 14, and often). 2. one that takes the lead in any thing (1 Mace. X. 47 dpx- Xdycui' flprfviKav) and thus affords an example, apredecessor in a matter: rrjs Triareas, of Christ, Heb. xii. 2 (who in the pre-eminence of his faith far sur- passed the examples of faith commemorated in ch. xi.), [al. bring this under the next head ; yet cf. Kurtz ad loc.]. So dpxTyns Apaprias, Mic. i. 13; fijXouf, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1 ; Trjs a~rd(Xfios koi Si;(ooTGtKoa-o(j)ta<:, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 983'' 20]. Hence 3. the author : tjjs fco^s, Acts iii. 1 5 ; r^y o-aTTj- plas, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : rmv navrav, of God, [Plato] Tim. Locr. p. 96 c. ; tov y€iiovi rav dv- 6pa>iTu>v, of God, Diod. 5, 72 ; dpxiyos Kal a'irios, leader and author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, G6, 10; Hdian. 2, 6, 22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.l,p.301 sq.* dipxi, (fr. apxa>: dpxos), an inseparable prefix, usually to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Ober-, Erz-, [Eng. arch- (chief-, high-)]'), as dpxdyyeXos, dpxt- voiprjv [q. v.], dpxifpfvs, dpxlarpos, dpxKVVovxoi, dpxvTTC- pirrji (in Egypt, inscriptions), etc., most of which belong to .\lexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. Thiersch, De Pen- tateuch! versione Ale.x. p. 77 sq. opx-upariKds, -fj, -6v, (apxi and UpartKos, and this fr. Upuopcu [to be a priest]), high-priestly, pontijical : yt'vo?. Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inscrr. Graec. no. 4363 ; see Schiirer as cited s. v. dpxi^pevs, 2 fin.]. (Joseph, antt. 4, 4, 7 ; 6, 6, 3; 15, 3, 1.)* dpx-ufKvs, -ea>s,o, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who above aU others was honored with the title of priest, the chief of the priests, 'jnjn jnjl (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. xxxv. 25, [later lysin [HJ, 2 K. xxv. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 11, etc.]) : Mt. xxi-i. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the Ep. to the Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the common duties of the priesthood ; but liis chief duty was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex- cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins of the peojile (Lev. xvi. ; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside over the Sanbetb'in, or supreme Council, when convened for judicial deliberations (Mt. xxvi. 3 ; Acts xxii. 5 ; xxiii. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly family : and he on whom the office was conferred held it till death. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes, when the kings of the Seleucidse and afterwards the Herodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them- selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was conferred on any one for life ; but it became venal, and could be transferred from one to another according to the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to. pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter- vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical dignity (Joseph, antt. 20, 10; see "Awas). Cf. Win. R WB. s. V. Iloherpriester; Oehler in Herzog vi. p. 198 sqq.; [BB.DD. s. w. Highpriest, Priest, etc. The names of the 28 (27 ?) above alluded to are given, to- gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schiirer m the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597-607]. 2. The plur. dpxi^eptis, which occurs often in the Gospels and Acts, as Jit. ii. 4 ; xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 3 ; x.xvii. 41 ; Mk. viii. 31 ; xiv. 1* XV. 1 ; Lk. xix. 47 ; xxii. 52, 66 ; xxiii. 4 ; xxiv. 20; Jn. vii. 32 ; xi. 57 ; xviii. 35 ; Acts iv. 23 ; v. 24 ; ix. 14, 21 : xxii. 30 ; xxiii. 14, etc., and in Josephus, comprises, in addition to the one actually holding the high-priestly office, both those who had previously discharged it and although deposed continued to have great power in the State (Joseph, vita 38 ; b. j. 2, 12, 6 ; 4, 3, 7 ; 9 ; 4, 4, 3 ; see 'kvvas above) , as well as the members of the families from which high-priests were created, provided they had much influence in ptiblic affairs (Josejih. b. j. 6, 2, 2). See on this point the learned discussion by Schiirer, Die dpxifpfii itu N'. T., in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, p. 593 sqq. and in his Xeutest. Zeitgescb. § 23 iii. p. 407 sqq. [Prof. Schiirer, besides reviewing the opinions of the more recent writers, contends that in no instance where indubitable reference to the heads of the twenty- four classes is made (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv. apX'''"'°'f^V^ 78 apxto 3 sq. ; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 14 ; Ezra x. 5 ; Neh. xii. 7 ; nor in Joseph, antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called dpx'fpf'r 5 that the nearest ai)i)roximations to tliis term are periphrases such as ai>xoin-ei tS>v Upiav, Neh. xii. 7, or (fyiiXapxoi tu>v Upiu>v, Ksra apocr. (1 Esdr.) viii. 92 (94); Joseph, antt. 1 1, .3, 4 ; and that the word dpx'fpf's "'''** restricted iu its api)lication to those who actually licUl, or had held, the hish-])riestly oflicc, together with the members of the few prominent families from wliich the high-priests still continued to he selected, cf. Acts iv. 6 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 3, ().] 3. In the Ep. to the Heb. Chi-ist is called ' high-priest,' because by undergoing a bloody death he offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17; iii. 1; iv. 14; v. 10; vi. -20 ; vii. 21! ; viii. 1 ; ix. 1 1 ; cf. Winzer, De saccrdotis officio, quod Christo tribuitur iu Ep. ad Hebr. (three Programs), Leips. 182.5 sq. ; UicMm, LehrbegrifE des IIc- briierbriefes, ii. pp. 431-488. In Grk. writ, the word is used by Ildt. 2, [(37), 142,] 143 and 151 ; Plat. legg. 12 p. 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5 ; Plut. Numa c. 9, al. ; [often in Inscrr.]; once (viz. Lev. iv. 3) in the Sept., where ifpfvr y.iyai is usual, in the O. T. Apocr. 1 Esdr. V. 40 ; ix. 4«, and often in the bks. of Mace. dpxi^o'R»') -fos [^^o ^ i' Tr WII KG (after Mss.), but Grsb. al. -/iiji/, -/icVor ; cf. Loh. Paralip. p 1 95 sq. ; Sicpli. Thesaur. s. v. ; Chandler § 580], o, a bibl. word [Test. xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8], chief shepherd : of Ckrist the head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4 ; see noififiv, b.* "Apxtinros [Chandler § 308], -ov, 6, [i. e. master of the horse], Anhlppus, a certain Christian at Colossse : Col. iv. 17; Philcm. 2. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. and Philcm. p. 308 sq.] • dpxiiruvd-ywyos, -ov. 6, {(rvvayayf)), ruler of a synagogue, mpr) u'SI : IMk. v. 22, 35 sq. 38 ; Lk. viii. 49 ; xiii. 14 ; Acts xiii. 15 ; xviii. 8, 1 7. It was his duty to select the readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all tilings were done with decency and in accordance with ancestral usage; [cf. Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Synagogue]. (Not found in prof. writ. ; [yet Schiirer (Theol. Literatur- Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inscrr. Grace, no 2007 f. (Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221° (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894, 990G ; Mommsen, Inscrr. llegni Neap. no. 3657 ; Garrucci, Cimitero degli antichi Ebrei, p. 67; Lampridius, Vita Alexandr. Sever, c. 28 ; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. c. 8 ; Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in Tdf.'s Ev. Apocr. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275, 284; Justin, diah c. Tryph. c. 137 ; Epiph. haer. 30, 18 ; Euseb. h. e. 7, 10, 4 ; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschrtften dargesteUt (Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq.].) * dpxi-^'KTuv, -ofos, 6, (rUrav. q. v.), a master-lmilder, architect, the su]>erintendent in the erection of buildings : 1 Co. iii. 10. (Ildt., Xen., Plat, and subseq. writ.; Is. iii. 3; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Mace. ii. 29.)* .^■^ 1-. to he the frst to do (anything), to begin, — a sense not fomid in the (irk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler : Ttv6s[li- 169 (147)], Mk. X. 42 ; Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10). See apxoiv. Mid., pres. Spxopm ; fut. cip^ofim (once [^twici'], Lk. xiii. 26 [but not Tr mrg. WII mrg. ; xxiii. 30]) ; 1 aor. ^/)|d- fiTji/; to begin, make a beginning: airo rivot. Acts x. 37 [B. 79 (69) ; cf. Matth. § 558]; 1 Pet. iv. 17; by bra- chylogj' dp^apevos ano ripot toiy nvos for, having begun from some person or thing (and continued or continu- ing) to some person or thing : Mt. xx. 8 ; Jn. viii. 9 [i. e. Rcc] ; Acts i. 22 ; cf. W. § 66, 1 c. ; [B. 374 (320)] ; dp^d- pevov is used iinpers. and absol. a beginning being made, Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Ildt. 3, 91 ; cf. W. 624 (580) ; [B. 374 S(|. (321)]); carelessly, dp^upevos dno Mav(r(v Tvpn(j)r)Ta)i' hirjppijvfvfv for, beginning Iroin J\lo- ses he went tltrough all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27 ; W. § 67, 2 ; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. hv ijp^aro iroidv re Km biM- a-Kfiv, axpi r)! fjpjpas which he began and continued both to do and to teach, utitil etc.. Acts i. 1 [W. § 66, 1 c. ; B. u. s.]. 'Apxopai is connected with an inf. and that so of- ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter- preters thought it constituted a periphrasis for tlu^ finite form of the vcrl) standing in the inf., as rjp^aro Krjpvaafw for (KTjpv^f. But through the influence jirincipally of Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), cf. W. § 65, 7 d., it is now conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was a rash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes : a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im- portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word : Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ began to speak concerning John, wliich he did not do wliile they were present) ; Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) ; Lk. XV. 14 (the beginning of want followed hard upon the squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28 ; 2 Co. iii. 1 ; esp. when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7 ; viii. 31 (cf. ix. 31 ; X. 33 sq.) ; or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp. to c'ltreXfO-ai) ; Jn. xiii. 5 (cf. 12). b. apx- denotes some- thing as begun by some one, others following : Acts xxvii. 35 sq. [W. § 65, 7 d.]. c. Spx- indicates that a thing was but just begun when it was interrupted by something else : Mt. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of corn, apxmv 79 aaeSs^eia but they were prevented from continuing by the inter- ference of the Pharisees); Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered before all had finished), 74 ; Mk. ii. 23 ; iv. 1 (he had scarcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto him) ; Mk. vi. 2 ; x. 41 ; Lk. v. 21 ; xii. 45 sq. ; xiii. 25 ; Acts xi. 15 (cf. X. 44) ; xviii. 2ij, and often, d. the ac- tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have been mentioned ; but in order that the more attention may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be- ginning, is expressly pointed out: Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xiv. 18 ; Acts ii. 4, etc. e. apx- occurs in a sentence which has grown out of the blending of two statements: Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21 (fr. airb t6t( eKrjpv^e ■ . . tSci^e, and t6t( ^p^aTo Kr)pvcr(T€iv . . . hetKvvciv). The inf. is wanting when discoverable from the conte.xt : ap)^6p.evoi, sc. to discliarge the Messianic office, Lk. iii. 23 [W. 349 (328)] ; ap^ifievos sc. Xcyeii/, Acts xi. 4. [CoMP. : ev- (-/lat), irpo-ev-{-fi.ai), in-, rrpo-im -dp)(a.^ opxwv, -oiTos, 6, (pres. ptcp. of the verb apxto), [fr. Aeschyl. down], a ruler, commander, chief, leader : used of Jesus, ap^aiv Ta>v fia(TiKea>v t^s yrjs, Rev. i. 5 ; of the rulers of nations, Jit. xx. 25 ; Acts iv. 26 ; vii. 35 ; univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3 ; Acts xxiii. 5 ; espe- cially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (where note the antithesis : whom they refused as upxovra xai hiKa- arrjv, him God sent as apxovra — leader, ruler — Km Xyrpto- TTju) ; Acts xvi. 19. ol ap^ovres Tov alavos rovTOv, those who in the present age (see atoiv, 3) by nobility of birth, learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the greatest influence, whether among Jews or Gentiles, 1 Co. ii. 6, 8 ; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 S([f[. Of the members of the .Jewish Sanhedrin : Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20; Jn. iii. 1 ; vii. 26, 48 ; xii. 42 ; Acts iii. 17; iv. 5, 8 ; xiii. 27 ; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues : Mt. ix. 18, 23 ; Lk. viii. 41 (Spxoiv t^s o-vvayayijs, cf. Jik. V. 22 apxiTvmyaiyos), and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18; apxo'' ^av <^apiiTala)v, one who has great influence among the Pharisees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devO, the prince of evil spirits: (o) apxa>v raiv Hai.p.ovia>v, Mt. i.\. 34; xii. 24; Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. xi. 15 ; 6 t'ipx- tov K6ap.ov, the ruler of the irreligious mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31 ; xiv. 30 ; xvi. 11, (in rabbin, writ. D7l>'n ItV; Spx- tov alavot tovtov, Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad Magn. 1, 3]; tipxa>v tov Kaipov TTjs avopias, Barn. Ep. 18, 2) ; t^j f^ovalas toO depot, Eph. ii. 2 (see aijp)-* apu|ia, -Tos, TO, (fr. APQ to prepare, whence apTvai to season ; [al. connect it with r. ar (dpoa) to plough (cf. Gen. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume : Mk. xvi. 1 ; Lk. xxiii. 56 ; xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xix. 40. (2 K. xx. 1 3 ; Esth. ii. 1 2 ; Cant. iv. 1 0, 1 6. [Hippocr.], Xen., Theophr. and subseq. writ.) * 'Ao-a, o, (Chald. NOX to cure), .4.w, king of Judah, son of king Abijah (1 K. xv. 8 sqq.) : Mt. i. 7 sq. [L T Tr WH read 'Aa-d(j) q. v.] * do-aCvo) : in 1 Th. iii. 3, Kuencn and Cobet (in their N. T. ad fidem cod. Vat., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xc.]), fol- lowing Lchm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J. J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck. Opuscc. ii. 246-249] in Ids larger edit., conjectured and received into their text pj]8ev aaaivea-dat, which they think to be equiv. to lixOfo-dai, xo^fniis (f>fpeiv. But there is no ne- cessity for changing the Rec. (see a-nlva, 2 b. ff.), nor can it be shown that da-aiva is used by Grk. writ, for doraco.* d-, not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), un- bridled lust, excess, licentiousness, lasciviousness, tranton- ness, outi-ageousness, shamelessncss, insolence : Mk. vii. 22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken of) ; of gluttony and venery, Jude 4 ; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3 ; 2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. drtaXclais), 18 ; of carnaUty, lasciviousness: 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 19; Eph. iv. 19; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; plur. " wanton (acts or) manners, as filthv words, indecent bodilv movements, unchaste handlins of aarifio'i 80 A(ndp)(r]<; males ami females, etc." (Fritzsehe)- I'"- xi"- 13. (In bibl. Grk. besides only in Sap. xiv. '.'ti ami 3 Maec. ii. 26. Among Grk. writ, used by Plat., Isocr. et sqq. ; at length by Pint. [LueuU. 38] and Leian. [dial, meretr. 6] of the wantonness of women [Lob. ad Pliryn. p. 184 n.].) Cf. Tiltmann i. p. l.")l st[.; [esp. Trench § xvi.].* a(ni|ios. -01», ((Trjiia a mark), iinmiirked or unstamped (money); unknown, of nn mark, insir/nijicant, iijnohk: Acts.xxi. 39. (SMacc. i. 3; in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down; trop. fr. Eur. down.) * 'Ao-iip, o, an indecl. llebr. ])rop. name, (inN [i. e. hajj- py. Gen. xx.k. 13]), (in Jose])h. 'Ao-r/po?, -ov, 6), Asher, the eighth son of the patriarch Jacob : Lk. ii. 36 ; Rev. vii. 6.* ooflc'vcia, -Of, ij, {aaSevrji), [fr. Ildt. down], leant of xlnnr/t/i. ir(akiit:ss, injiniiily; a. of Body; o. itsnative weakness and frailty : 1 Co. xv. 43 ; 2 Co. xiii. 4. p. feeble- ness of health ; sickness : .In. v. 5 ; xi. 4 ; Lk. xiii. 11,12; Gal. iv. 13 {aadiveia rqs aapKui) ; Ileb. xi. 34 ; in plur. : Mt. viii. 17; Lk. v. ITj; viii. 2 ; Acts xxviii. 9 ; 1 Tim. v. 23. b. of Soul; want of the strength and capacity re- quisite a. to understand a thing : Ro. vi. 19 (where do-^. aapKos denotes the weakness of hmnan nature), p. to do things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of skill in speaking, in the management of men : 1 Co. ii. 3. 7. to restrain corrupt desires ; proclivity to sin : lleb.« V. 2 ; vii. 28 ; jilur. the various kinds of this proclivity, Heb. iv. 15. 8. to bear trials and troubles: Ro. viii. 26 (where read TJi aadevfia for Rec. rais aadevelais) ; 2 Co. xi. 30 ; xii. 9 ; plur. the mental [?] states in which this weakness manifests itself : 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sq.* d(r6«ve'ii), -w ; impf. rjcrdivovV, pf- rjadtvrjKa (2 Co. xi. 21 L T Tr\VH) ; 1 aor. ^adivrjo-a ; {da-6ev!)s) ; [fr. Eur. down] ; to be weak, feeble ; univ. to be without strength, power- less : Ro. viii. 3 ; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab- stains from the use of liis strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; and of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 9 ; contextually, to be unable to wield and bold sway over others, 2 Co. xi. 21 ; by oxymoron, Srav do-flerM, rure Swaros fi/it u-hcn I am weak in human strength, then am I strong in strength divine, 2 Co. xii. 10 ; els nva, to bo -weak towards one, 2 Co. xiii. 3 ; with a dat. of the respect added : vriorft, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19; TrioTti, to be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris- tian, Ro. xiv. 1 ; simple acrdtvelv with the same idea sug- gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [T WII om. 'Ir rarg. br.] ; I Co. viii. 9 Rec., 11 sq. ; Ws aa-devfl, xai ovk dadenoi ; who is weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law- ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of the same weakness? 2 Co. xi. 29. contextually, to he weak in means, needy, poor : Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph. pax 636]; Eur. in Stob. 145 voL ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), ef. De Wette [more fully Ilackett, per contra Meyer] ad loc. Specially of debility in lu-alth : with i/ocrotr added, Lk. iv. 40; f^nDyAv, to he feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; :Mt. x.xv. 36, 39 L txt, T Tr WH ; Jn. iv. 46 ; xi.1-3, G; Acts ix. 37; Phil. ii. 26 sq.; 2 Tim. iv. 20; Jas. V. 14 ; 01 aaBfvoivrfs, and dadevovines, tlie sick, sick folks : Mt. X. 8 ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Lk. ix. 2 Rec. ; Jn. v. 3, 7, 13 Tdf. ; vi. 2; Acts .\ix. 12.* dir6c'v7||ia, -aroi, to, (tlo-flei/Za)), infirmiti/ : Ro. xv. 1 (where used of error arising from weakness of mind). [In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11,7 vol. i. 638', 37 ; gen. an. 1, 18 ibid. p. 726' 15.] • (urOcvTJs, -es, (to o$, -ov, (o-o(|)os), unwise, foolish: Eph. v. 15. [From Theogn. down.] * cuTTrd^o^ai ; [inipf. jjona^ofirju'l ', 1 aor. rj(nraa-d^Tjv : (fr. CTTrdd) with a intensive [q. v., but ef. Vanicek p. 1163 ; Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 324 sq.] ; hence prop, to draw to -one's self[W. § 38, 7 fin.] ; cf. doKaipai for a-Kaipa>, aa-irai- pat for tnraipa, d(T7rapi(a> for oTrapifo)) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; a. with an ace. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid wel- come, wish well to, (the Israelites, on meeting and at parting, generally used the formula ^S Dl^ty) ; used of those accosting any one : Mt. x. 12; lilk. ix. 15; xv. 18; Lk. i. 40; Acts xxi. 19. of those who visit one to see him a little while, departing almost immediately af- terwards : Acts xviii. 22 ; xxi. 7 ; like the Lat. salulare, our 'pay one's respects to,' of those who show regard for a distinguished person by visiting him: Acts xxv. 13, (Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 5 ; 6, 11, 1). of those who greet one whom they meet in the way : Mt. v. 47 (in the East even now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each other) ; Lk. x. 4 (as a salutation was made not merely by a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em- bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting frequently), of those departing and bidding farewell: Acts XX. 1 ; xxi. 6 [R G]. of the absent, saluting by letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-23; 1 Co. xvl. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12 (13) ; Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 sq. ; 1 Th. v. 26, etc. iv i\fiiian : Ro. xvi. 16 ; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 12 ; 1 Pet. v. 14. b. with an ace. of the thing, to receive joyfully, welcome: ras cnayyeXias, Heb. xi. 13, (r?)v crv/i- (popdv, Eur. Ion 587; tijc evpotav, Joseph, antt. 6, 5, 3 ; Tovs Xoyour, ibid. 7, 8, 4 ; so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524). [C()^T^. ; dTT-amTd^opai.~\ <«nrao-|j.6s, -oO. o, (.daird^ojiai). a salutation, — either oral : Mt. xxiii. 7 ; Mk. xii. 38 ; Lk. i. 29, 41, 44 ; xi. 43 ; XX. 46 ; or written : 1 Co. x\-i. 21 ; Col. iv. 18 ; 2 Th. iii. 17. [From Theogn. down.] * oro-TTiXos. -ov. ( (TTrTXor a spot), spotless: dfivos, 1 Pet. i. S 19 ; (Jmros, Hdian. 5, 6, 1 6 [7 ed. Bekk.] ; /i^Xoi/, Anthol. Pal. 6, 252, 3). metaph. free from censure, irreproach- able, 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; free from vice, unsullied, 2 Pet. iii. 14; tin-o tov Koapiov, Jas. i. 27 [B. § 132, 5]. (In eccl. writ.) * ooirfs, -I'Sos, ij, on asp, a small and most venomous ser- pent, the bite of which is fatal unless the part bitten be immediately cut away: Ro. iii. 13. (Deut. xxxii. 33; Is. xx.x. 6 [etc. Hdt., Aristot., al.] Ael. nat. an. 2, 24 ; 6, 38 ; Pint. mor. p. 380 f. i. e. de Isid. et Osir. § 74 ; Op- pian. eyn. 3, 433.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Asp ; TrL^tram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 270 sqq.]* oo-rrovSos, -ov, (o-ttoi/Si; a libation, which, as a kind of sacrifice, accompanied the making of treaties and com- pacts ; cf. Lat. spondere) ; [fr. Thuc. down] ; 1. with- out a treaty or covenant; of things not mutually acTeed upon, e. g. abstinence from hostilities, Thuc. 1, 37, etc. 2. that cannot be persuaded to enter into a covenant, im- placable, (in this sense fr. Aeschyl. down ; esp. in the phrase aanovhos TroXc/ior, Dem. pro cor. p. 314, 16; Polyb. 1, 65, 6 ; [Philo de sacrif. § 4] ; Cic. ad Att. 9, 10, 5 ; [cf. Trench § Iii.]) : joined with tlo-ropyos, Ro. i. 31 Rec. ; 2 Tim. iii. 3.* aTo-aptov, -ov, to, an assariiim or assarius, the name of a coin equal to the tenth part of a drachma [see Sijvdpioi/], (dimin. of the Lat. as, Rabbin. 1D'{<), [a pennyl : Mt. x. 29 ; Lk. xii. 6. (Dion. Hal., Plut.^ al.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Farthing.] • o ; (ScrraTos unstable, stroOing about ; cf. dicardoTaror) ; to wander about, to rove without a settled abode, [A. V. to have no certain dwelling-place^ : 1 Co. iv. 11. (Anthol. Pal. appendLx 39, 4.)* ooTcios, -ov, (Sarv a city) ; 1. of the city ; of pol- ished manners (opp. to aypotKos rustic), genteel, (fr. Xen. and Plat. down). 2. elegant (of body), comely, fair, (.Judith xi. 23 ; Aristaenet. 1, 4, 1 and 19, 8) : of Moses (Ex. ii. 2), Heb. xi. 23 ; with tm 6eai added, unto God, Godbeing judge, i.e. truly fair. Acts vii. 20; cf. W. §31,4 a. p. 212(199); [248(232)]; B. 179(156); (Pliilo, vit. Moys. i. § 3, says of !Moses yewrjOcis 6 ttois ev^s o^iv evt- (j>rjvev dar(WT(pav rj kot IdidTrjv). [Cf. Trench § cvi.] * cuTTTip, -epos, 6, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the sky), ef. adTpov, Lat. Stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; Fick, Pt'. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Vanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom. aaTTjpiKTO'; 82 uacoTia down]; a star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [ace. -f'pni' K* C; see apcrqv fin.] ; x.Kiv. 29 ; ^Ik. xiii. 25 ; 1 Co. xv. 41 ; Rev. vi. 13; viii. 10-12; L\. 1; xii. 1, 4; 6 aarfip airov, the star betokening his birth, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. ' the star of the Messiah,' on which cf. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeo- rum § 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner's Zeitschr. f. d. histor. Theol. for 1847, fasc. 3 ; [B. D. s. v. Star of the Wise Men]) ; by the figure of tlie seven stars wliich Christ Iiolds in his right hand, Rev. i. IG; ii. 1 : iii. 1, are signified the angels of the seven churches, under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20 ; see what was said S. V. ayyeXor, 2. aaTijp 6 irpwlVot the morning star, Rev. xxii. 16 [Rec. opdptvos^ ; ii. 28 (Su(7nevoi., 2 Tim. iii. 13).* d-o-TtipiKTos, -ox, (arript^a)), unslahle, unsteadfast : 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; iii. 16. (Anthol. Pal. 6, 203, 11.)» QOTop-yos, -01/, {(TTopyi) love of kindred), without natural affectum : Ro. i. 31 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aeschin., Theocr., Plut., al.) • €urTOX€o), -a> : 1 aor. TjfTTo^rjaa ; (to be aoro;^©? , fr. OToxos a mark), to deviate from, miss, (the mark) : with gen. [W. § 30, 6], to deviate from anything, 1 Tim. i. 6 (Sir. vii. 19 ; viii. 9) ; nepi ri, 1 Tim. vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. la. (Polyb., Plut., Lcian., [al.].) • daTpair^, -r/s, 17, lightning : Lk. x. 18 ; xvii. 24 ; Mt. xxiv. 27; xxviii. 3; plur.. Rev. iv. 5 ; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; of the gleam of a lamp, Lk. xi. 36 [so Aeschyl. frag. (fr. schol. on Soph.Oed. Col. 1047) 188 -Airens, 372 Dind.].* dcTTpairru; (later form oTpvos, -ov, not agreeing in sound, dissonant, inhar- monious, at variance: npbs oXX^Xour (Diod. 4, 1), Acts xxviii. 25. (Sap. xviii. 10; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 8, 1] ; Plat., Plut., 'al.].) * dr6s, fin.]* aX^s, /s, {(T(pdXKo> to make to totter or fall, to cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo. Germ, fallen, etc., Eng. /ii//, _/«//], (T(l}dX\opat to fall, to reel), [fr. Honi. down]; a., firm (that can be relied on, confided in) : SyKvpa, lleb. vi. 19 (where L and Tr have received as the form of ace. sing.. dcr(f>dKriv [Tdf. 7 -X^v ; cf. Tdf. ad loc. ; Delitzsch, Com. ad loc] see lipcrrjv). trop. certain, true : Acts xxv. 26 ; TO datpukts. Acts xxi. 34 ; xxii. 30. b. suited to confirm : Tivi, riiil. iii. 1 (so Joseph, antt. 3, 2, 1).* d(r4>aXC^u : 1 aor. ])ass. inf. d(T(j>a\ia6TJvai\ 1 aor. mid. rj(Ta\ta-dfir]v ; (do-. freq. fr. Polyb. down ; to make firm, to make secure against harm ; pass, to he made secure : Mt. xxvii. 64 (6 Td(i>os) [B. 52 (46)] ; mid. prop, to make secure for one's self or for one's own ad- vantage, (often in Polyb.) : Mt. xxvii. 65 sq. ; to make fast Totis Tro'Sas els to ^i\ov. Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2 d. 't B. § 14 7,8].* aXu9, adv., [fr. Hom. down], safely (so as to prevent escape) : Mk. xiv. 44 ; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly : yiva- iTK(tv, Acts ii. 3(j (fJ8oTfc. Sap. xviii. 6).* <«rxT)(i.ov€a), -01 : (to be daxriiicov, deformed; ttjv kc^w Xxjv daxW"^^"' °f * ha\Ci man, Ael. v. h. 1 1, 4) ; to act un- becomingly ([Eur.], Xen., Plat, al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5 ; evl rira, towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for her, 1 Co. vii. 36.* ajr\i\yjaiTvvn, -rjs, fj, (dtrx^/imi' ) ; fi". Plato down ; un- seemliness. , [n-o-$, adv., (adj. atrwros. on which see do-on-t'a), dis- solutely, proflirjatelij : (jj" (Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk. XV. 13 [A. V. riotous liritu/'].* aTaKTc'u, S) : 1 aor. r^TaxTqira ; to he araKTos, to be disor- derly; a. prop, of soldiers marching out of order or quitting the ranks : Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, G, etc. Hence b. to be neglect/id of duty, to be lawless : Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 22 ; oec. 5, 15 ; Lys. 141, 18 [i. e. c. Alcib. or. 1 § 18], al. c. to lead a disorderly life : 2 Th. iii. 7, cf. 11.* «troKTos, -ov, (raaaa), disorderly, out of the ranks, (often so of soldiers) ; irregular, inordinate (SraKToi TiSovai immoderate pleasures. Plat. legg. 2, 6G0 b. ; Plut. de Ub. educ. c. 7), deviating from the jwescribed order or ride : 1 Th. v. 14, cf. 2 f h. iii. 6. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. and] Thuc. down ; often in Plat.) * d.^KTs trepiTm- T(iv, which is explained by the added Km nfj koto rrjv napdSocriv fjv 7rape'Xa/3c nap' fifiSiv; cf. ibid. 11, where it is explained by yjrjStj/ ipya^ojuvoi, oKKii Trfpiepya^ofifvoi. (Often in Plato.) * arcKvos. -ov, {riia/ov), without offspring, childless : Lk. XX. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2 ; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Heslod opp. 600 down.)* dTcvt^u ; 1 aor. ffrevicra ; (fr. arei/^s stretched, intent, and this fr. rfiva and a intensive ; [yet cf. W. § 16, 4 B. a. fin., and s. v. A, a, 3]) ; to fix the eyes on, gaze upon : with dat. of pers., Lk. iv. 20 ; xxii. 56 ; Acts iii. 12 ; x. 4 ; xiv. 9 ; xxiii. 1 ; foil, by tls with ace. of pers.. Acts iii. 4 ; vi. 1 5 ; xiii. 9 ; metaph. to fix one's mind on one as an example, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 2 ; cis rt. Acts i. 10 : vii. 5.5 ; 2 Co. iii. 7, 13; e'r ti, to look into anything. Acts xi. 6. (3 Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, U, 5 [i. e. 6, 11% 12 Dind.] ; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. eVar.] ; Joseph, b. j. 5, 12, 3 ; Lcian. cont. 16, al.) * aT€p, prep., freq. in the poets [fr. Horn, down], rare ' in prose writ. fr. Plat. [?] down ; without, apart from : with gen. [Dion. Hal. 3, 10 ; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5] ; in the Bible only in 2 Mace. xii. l.j; Lk. xxii. C (nrep oxXou in the absence of the multitude; hence, without tumuh). 35. [' Teaching ' 3, 10 ; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.] * ari|id^u ; 1 aor. riTtp.a> p. 386 Kara ttjv ■Kpairrjv aiyfiv Trjs fjpipas). [Stn. see (f>iyyos. fin.]* Ai'vouoTos, -ov, 6, A ugustus [cf. Eng. Majesty ; see (TfffacTTos, 2], the surname of G. JuhusCaesar Octaviar nus, the first Roman emperor: Lk. ii. 1.* avSdStjs, -es, (fr. airos and {jBo/iat), self-pleasing, self- willed, arrogant: Tit. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10. (Gen. xlix. 3, 7 ; av0ai'peTo<; 84 avTupKeia Prov. xxi. 24. In (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down.) [Trcnili § .xciii.] * avS-a(p : 1 aor. ijiJXijij-a ; [pres. pass. ptcp. to av\ov- fifvov'}; {aiXos); to plaij on the Jlute, to pipe : Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32 ; 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Fr. [Alem., Hdt.,] Xen. and Plat, down.) ' aiXrj, -Tji, 1), (ao) to blow ; hence) prop, a place open to the air {Stanvcopfvos ronos aiX^ Xeyfrm, Atben. 6, 15 p. 189 b.) ; 1. among the Greeks in Homer's time an uncovered space around the house, enclosed hy a wall, in ichich the stables stood (Horn. Od. 9, 185; 11. 4, 433); hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the open country in which Jlocks were herded at night, a sheep- fold: Jn. X. 1, IG. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the house, Hebr. "li'n, Sejjt. aiXij, Vulg. atrium. In the O. T. particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the temple at Jerusalem ; so in the X. T. once : Rev. xi. 2 (rffv avXijv tijv e^toBev [Rec.^* caw6fv~] tov vaov). The dwellings of the higher classes usually had two aiXai, one exterior, between the door and the street, called also irpoai\tov (q. v.) ; the other interior, surrounded by the buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned Mt. xxvi. 69 (where t^w is opp. to the room in which the judges were sitting) ; Mk. xiv. G6 ; Lk. xxii. 55. Cf. TT'//i. RWB. s. V. Hiiuser ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Court ; BB.DD. s. V. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace : Mt. xxvi. 3, 58 ; Mk. xiv. 54 ; xr. 16 ; Lk. xi. 21 ; Jn. xviii. 15, and so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. Od. 4, 74 down [cf. Eustath. 1483, 39 tm t^? avXrjs uvopari ra Sapara 6i)Xoi, Suid. col. 652 c. auKrj • rj Toi /SactXe'mr oiKi'a. Yet this sense is denied to the X. T. by Meyer et al. ; see Mey. on Mt. 1. c.].' aiXijTfis, -ov, 6, (avKcto), a flute-player : !Mt. ix. 23 ; Rev. xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hdt. 6, GO down.) • avXC^o)iai: depon. ; impf. ijiXt^oprfv; 1 aor. jjvKltrBrjv [Veitch s. V. ; B. 51 (44) ; W. § 39, 2] ; (aCXij) ; in Sept. mostly for ^7 ; 1. prop, to lodge in the court-yard e.sp. at night ; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pass the night in the open air, bivouac. 3. rmiv. to pass the night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 ((^epxopevos ijvXifrro fit to opos, going out to pass the night he retired to the mountain; cf. B. § 147, 15). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) ' auX6s, -ov, 6, (am, avti>), [fr. Hom. down], a pipe : 1 Co. xiv. 7. [Cf. Slainer, Music of the Bible, ch. v.] * av|dvu, and earlier (the only form in Pind. and Soph. [Veitch s. v. says, ' lies. Mimnerm. Soph. Thuc. always have ai^w or av^opat. and I'ind. except ai^amt Vr. 130 (Bergk)']) aS^w (K])h. ii. 21 ; Col. ii. 19) ; im])f. riv^avof, fut. ai^rjcrci) ; 1 aor. qC^rjaa; [Pass., pres. ai^dvopai] ; 1 aor. riv^i]6r]v ; 1. trans, to cause to grow, to augment : 1 Co. iii. 6 sfj. ; 2 Co. i.x. 10. Pass, to grow, increase, become greater : Mt. xiii. 32 ; UV. iv. 8 L T Tr AVH ; 2 Co. x. 1 5 ; Col. i. 6 [not Kec] ; tls tijv (viyvaiaw toC Beoij unto the knowledge of God, Col. i. 10 (G L 'i" Tr AVI I t^ fmyi/mtrei TOV 6eov); ei'r o-wTTjpi'av [not Rec.] to the attaining of sal- vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. ace. to later usage (fr. Aristot. an. post. 1, 13 p. 78'', 6, etc., down ; but nowhere in Sept. [cf. B. 54 (47) ; 145 (127) ; W. § 38, 1]) intrans. to grow, increase : of plants, Mt. vi. 28 ; Mk. iv. 8 Rec. ; Lk. xii. 27[notTdf. ; Tr mrg. br. ai^.] ; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants, Lk. i. 80 ; ii. 40 ; of a multitude of people, Acts vii. 1 7. of inward Christian growth : ds XpttrTov, in reference to [W. 397 (371) ; yet cf. Ellic. ad loc] Christ, E])h. iv. 15 ; els vaov, so as to form a temple, E|)h. ii. 21 ; tV^npir», 2 Pet. iii. 18 ; with an ace. of the substance, t^k av^rjuiv. Col. ii. 19 [cf. W. § 32, 2 ; B. § 131,5, also Bp. Lghtft.'s note ad loc] ; of the external increase of the gospel it is said 6 Xoyos rfij^ave : Acts vi. 7 ; xii. 24 ; .xix. 20 ; of the growing authority of a teacher and the number of his adherents (opp. to IKaTTovaBai), Jn. iii. 30. [CoMP. : avv-. vir(p-av^avti>.^ * ail^o-ts, -€). harsh (Lat. au- sterus^, stringent of taste, av(TTr)pov Koi yXuKi (koi ittKpov), Plat. legg. 10, 897 a.; o'cos, Diog. Laert. 7, 117. of mind and manners, harsh, rough, rigid, [cf. Trench § xiv.] : Lk. xix. 21, 22; (Polyb. 4, 20, 7; Diog. Laert. 7, 26, etc 2 Mace xiv. 30).* avTdpKEia, -as, ^, (avTapKi^s, q. v.), a perfect condition of lifi, in which no aid or support is needed; equiv. to TeXfioTT/f KTTjoeas ayadwv, Plat. def. p. 412 b. ; often in Aristot. [defined by him (pel. 7, 5 init. p. 1326', 29) as follows : TO iravTa iirapxctv k. hti(r6at priOfvos avrdpKfS ; cf . Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 11]; hence, a sufficiency of the avrapKrj'; 85 at/TO? necessaries of life : 2 Co. Lx. 8 ; subjectively, a mind con- tented with its lot, contentment : 1 Tim. vi. G ; (Diog. Laert. 10, 1.30).* avTdpK7)s [on the accent see Chandler § 705], -€s, {avros, apKia), [fr. Aesehyl. down], sufficient for one'n self, stnmr/ enough or possessing enough to need no aid or support ; . independent of external circumstances ; often in Grk. ■writ. fr. [Aesehyl. and] Hdt. 1, 32 down. Subjectively, contented with one's lot, with one's means, though the slender- est: Phil. iv. 11, (so Sir. xl, 18; Polyb. 6, 48, 7; Diog. Laert. 2, 24 of Socrates, avTapKrjs koi aifivos). [Cf. aiirdp- xna.] * oiTo-Kara-KpiTos, -of, (avTos, KaTaKplva), self-condemned : Tit. iii. 1 1 : (eccl. writ. [cf. W. § 34, 3]).* avTOjxaTos, -ox, and -rj, -ok, (fr. avros and fiifiaa to desire eagerly, fr. obsol. theme ima>), moved by one's own im- pulse, or acting without the instigation or intervention of another, (fr. Horn, down) ; often of the earth producing plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits growing without culture ; [on its adverbial use cf . W. § 54, 2] : Mk. iv. 28 ; (Hdt. 2, 94 ; 8, 138 ; Plat. poht. p. 272 a. ; [Theophr. h. p. 2, 1] ; Diod. 1, 8, etc. Lev. xxv. 5, 11). of gates opening of their own accord: Acts xii. 10, (so in Horn. II. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. G, 4, 7 ; Apoll. Rh. 4, 41 ; Plut. Timol. 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21 ; [Dion Cass. 44, 17]).* oiToirnis, -ov, 6, (auros, OIITQ), seeing with one's oicn eyes, an eye-witness, (cf. aurijicoos one who has himself heard a thing) : Lk. i. 2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* aires, -17, -o', pron. (" derived from the particle av with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be supplied." Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219 ; [see Vanicek p. 2G8]). It is used by the bibl. writ, both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns ; and in tliis very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they de- viate greatly from prof. auth. ; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage cf. Hermann, Opuscc. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp. 732-736.] I. self as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. 1. When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is added a. to the subjects implied in the verb, the personal pronouns fym, fififis, 'l?7(roO) : Lk. xxiii. 51 [R G] ; Mk. xv. 43 ; Acts viii. 13 (6 6e ^Ipwv Kal avros entarfvo'c^ ', xv. 32; xxi. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. G ; Gal. ii. 1 7 ; Ileb. xiii. 3. b. it is added to subjects expressed, whether to pronouns personal or demonstrative, or to nouns proper or common : Jn. iii. 28 (auToi iififis ye yourselves bear witness, not only have I affirmed) ; Acts xx. 30 (i^ ipSyv avrav from among your own selves, not only from other quarters) ; Ro. xv. 14 (Ka't avros iym I of myself also, not only assured by report, cf. i. 8) ; 1 Co. v. 13 (e^ vpMV airav from your own society, opp. to them that are without, of whose character God must be the judge) ; 1 Co. vii. 35 ; xi. 13 ; I Th. iv. 9 ; avrol ovrot, Acts .^xiv. 20 ; avrov roirov (masc), Acts xxv. 25 ; 'l?jo-oCs avros Jesus himself, per- sonally, opp. to those who baptized by his command, Jn. iv. 2 ; avros 'irjaovs, opp. to those who beUeved on him on account of liis miracles, Jn. ii. 24 ; Jesus himself, not others only, Jn. iv. 44 ; air. Aauei'S, opp. to the doc- tors of the law, whose decision did not seem quite to agree with the words of David, Jlk. :;ii. 3G sq. ; Lk. xx. 42: avros 6 Sararas. opp. to his ministers, 2 Co. xi. 14 ; avros 6 6e6s, God himself, not another. Rev. xxi. 3 ; avra ra (TTovpdvia, the heavenly things themselves [i. e. sanc- tuary], opp. to its copies, Ileb. ix. 23 [see iirovpavios. 1 c.]. c. it is used to distinguish one not only from his compan- ions, disciples, servants, — as jNIk. ii. 25 {avros Ka\ 01 per avTov) ; Jn. ii. 1 2 ; iv. 53 ; xviii. 1 , — but also from things done liy him or belonging to him, as Jn. vii. 4 (r\ itokI kcu. f))Tci avros [L Tr mrg. WH mrg. avro]) ; 1 Co. iii. 15 (rivbs rb epyou KaraKarjo-erai. avros 6e a'didrjaerai} '. Lk. xxiv. 15 (aiirbs (6) 'l7;o-o£s, Jesus liimsclf in person, opp. to their previous conversation about him), d. self to the exclu- sion of others, i. e. he etc. alone, by one's self: Mk. vi. 31 (ipe'is avToi ye alone, unattended by any of the people ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc.) ; Jn. xiv. 11 (Sm ra tpya avra [WH mrg. avrov]) ; Ro. vii. 25 (avros e'ya I alone, unaided by the Spirit of Christ; cf. viii. 2) ; 2 Co. xii. 13 (aiTos c'ym, unlike the other preachers of the gospel) ; Rev. xL\. 12 ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 733 iii.; Matth. § 467, 5; Kiihner § 4C8 Anm. 2 ; [.Jelf § 656, 3] ; with the addition of povos (as often in Attic writ.) : Jn. vi. 15. e. self not pntnipted or influenced hy another, i. e. of one's self of one's own accord : Jn. xvi. 27 (so even Hom. E. 17, 254; and among Attic writ. esp. Xen.). 2. '\^^len it gives Prominence, it answers a. to our emphatic Ac, s/it, it : Mt. i. 21 (avros afL HE and no other) : Mt. v. 4-10 (auTOi) ; vi. 4 [R 6] ; xvii. 5 (avrov aKOVfre) : Lk. vi. 35 : xvii. IC ; xxiv. 21 ; Jn. ix. 21 (avros [T Tr AVH om.] . . . avTOi 86 ai/TO? avTov . . • avrds) ; Acts x. 42 [L txt. Tr txt. WII oCtoj] ; Gal. iv. 17 (aiiTovs) ; Eph. ii. 10 (avrov) ; Col. i. 17 ; 1 Jn. ii. 2 ; iv. 5 ; Jas. ii. G sq. So in Grk. writ, also fr. Ilom. down ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 7;i4 v. It is used with the same force after relative sentences, where Greek prose uses ovTos ■ Mt. xii. ;")0 {Sarts &v Trotrjarj . . . , airros fi-ov a&e\/,iu.il, exactli/, ((ierra. eben, gerade) : Ro. ix. 3 (avTos f'ytt) I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi- cal to the Israelites) ; 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore myself lowly in your presence, as ye said) ; airra ra tpya, Jn. V. 36 ; often in Luke iv avrj) rf/ ')fifpa or &pa, aiira Tw Kaipw, in that very day, hour, season : Lk. ii. 38 ; x. 21 ; xii. 12 ; xiii. 1, 81 ; xx. 19 ; xxiii. 12 ; xxiv. 13, 33 ; Acts xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul airo tovto this very thing: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 6; ciV airo TOVTO for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. ix. 1 7 ; xiii. 6 ; 2 Co. v. 5 ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; and in the same sense [for this very thing] the simple accus. (as in Attic, cf. Matth. § 470, 7 ; Kiihner ii. 267 Anm. 6 ; AV. § 21 N. 2) TotiTo avTo, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ail loc], and airo toCto, 2Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here airoi]. d. even, Lat. rel, adeii, (in Horn. ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. ]). 733 ii.) : koX avTrj fj kt'ktis, Ro. viii. 21 ; oi8e ij ifivais avrrj, 1 Co. xi. 14 ; KOI [Tr om. L WII br. kqI] aurot 6 v'los, 1 Co. XV. 28 ; Ka\ avrri 2dppa even Sarah herself, although a feeble old woman, Ileb. xi. 1 1 [yet WH mrg. reads the dat. avT^ ^dppa ; see KorajSoXTj, 1 ]. II. aiiTos has the force of a simple personal pronoim of the third person, answering to our unemphatic he, she, it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique cases, Jiim, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, — as in the gen. absolute, e. g. avTuv eKSoin-ot, XaXr/a-avros, etc. ; or in the ace. with inf., ds to etvai avTovs dvaTroXo- yriTovs, Ro. i. 20 ; or after jirepositions, c'| airov. iv ovtm. etc. ; or where it indicates the possessor, 6 noTrjp avToi ; or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active verb, as cViSuxrei auroJ, ^It. vii. 9 ; dundaatrSe avTrjv, ^It. X. 12 ; d(f>f\s avTovs, Mt. x.wi. 44 ; ^v Siavcvav airro'is, Lk. i. 22 ; ovK fta avra XdKfiv, Lk. iv. 41 ; t) aKOTia avTo ov Koreka^f, Jn. i. 5. But see avTov below. 2. Contrary to Grk. usage, in the N. T. even in the Nominative it is put for a simple personal pronoun of the thii-d person, where the Greeks say ovtos or 6 St. or use no pronoun at all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93) sqq. ; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage illustrated under I. 1 ; — those in which avTos is used of Christ, apparently to I. 1 b. But, in my opinion, the question is settled even by the following: aiirds, 5It. xiv. 2 ; Mk. xiv. 15 ; Lk. i. 22 ; xv. 14 ; so too in the Sept (cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98) ; Sir. xlix. 7 ; Tob. vi. 1 1 ; avTol. Mk. ii. 8 (ovtws avro'i &ia\oyi(ovTat in Grsb.) ; Lk. ix. 30; xiv. 1; xxii. 23: aiiro. l.k. xi. 14 [Tr mrg. AVII om., Tr txt. br.]. Whether avTrj and avTai also are .«o used, is doubtful; cf. B. 109 (95). 3. Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted, being evident from the context : Mk. vi. 5 (imdfls, sc. avToU); Jn. iii. 34 (fiiSao-i, sc. avTa); Jn. x. 29 (SfSuxe /lot, sc. avTovs) ; Acts xiii. 3 (diriXvaav, sc. avTois) ; Rev. xviii. 21 (fiSaXfi/, sc. avrov), etc. 4. Not infreiiuently avTos in the oblique cases is a d d e d to the v c r b, althoiigh the case bilonging to this very verb has preceded : ^II. viii. 1 (v. 87 d of the purification prescribed by the law of Moses to Tvomcn in cliild-bed) ; Jn. viii. 44 (yjfdrTrr]! forii/ koX 6 ■narrjp auTov, i. e. of the liar; cf. Baumg.-C'rusius and Meyer ad loc). By this rather careless use of the pro- noun it came about that at length aiiroi alone might be used for avdpanroi : Mt. viii. 4 ; ilk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14, 1 7 [here T WU Tr mrg. avriv] ; cf. W. § 22, 3 ; B. § 127, 8. 7. Sometimes, in relative sentences consisting of several members, the second member is not joined to the first by the relative or, but by a loose connection proceeds with xaiavTof, as, Lk.xvii. 31 ; Acts iii. 13 (ov ifids TrapfSwKaTc Kai rjpvrjo-acrdf avTov [L T A\ H om. Tr br. alrov]) \ 1 Co. viii. 6 (e^ ov to. navra xai ^fieis eis airov, for (tut eis ov -ij/ieis) ; 2 Pet. ii. 3. This is the usage Ukewise of Greek as well as of Hebrew ; cf. AV. 149 (141) ; [B. 283 (243)] ; Bnhdy. p. 304. m. 6 avTos, f) airr), to avTo, with the article, the same ; 1. without a noun : 6 avros, immutable, Ileb. i. 12 ; xiii. 8, (Thuc. 2, 61) ; to airS : — nou'iv, Mt. v. 46 [R G T WII txt., 47 L T Tr AVH] ; Lk. vi. 33 ; X/yeiv, to profess the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; oxetSifcii', not in the same manner but reproached him with the :<, fifd, Ka6, avd, etc., but €Tr, air, /xtT, kut, avr." Tdf. Proleg. ad N. T., ed. 2 p. xxvi. [ed. 8 p. 126]; cf. his Proleg. ad Sept.. ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xx.xiii. (not in ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it forth at length in Ids note on Ileb. i. 3, vol. ii. 1 p. 67 sqq. The question is hard to decide, not only be- cause the breathings and accents are wanting in the oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he will speak in his own person, or aec. to the thought of the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority of the passages in the N. T. avToii is correctly restored ; but apparently we ought to write Si' aiToC (Rec. eavToiJ [so L mrg. T WH]), Ro. xiv. 14 [L txt. Tr Si ovt.'] ; cir avTov, Col. i. 20 [al. eis air.]; avTOi Trep'i alrov [T Tr txt. WHeauToG], .Tn.ix.21. Cf. W.15] (143); [B. 111(97) sq.; Bp. Lghtf t. on Col. 1. c, and see esp. Hort in Westcott and Hort's Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq. ; these editors have in- troduced the aspirated form into their text "nearly twen- ty times" (e. g. Mt. vi. 34 ; Lk. xii. 1 7, 21 ; xxiii. 12; xxiv. 12 ; Jn. ii. 24 ; xiii. 32 ; xix. 1 7 ; xx. 10 ; Acts xiv. 1 7 ; Ro. i. 27 ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; Eph. ii. 15 ; Phil. iii. 21 : 1 Jn. v. 10 ; Rev. viii. 6, etc.). Cf. Rutherford, JCew Phryn. p. 432]. aiT6<|)upos, -ov, {avTos and i^tup a thief, (^apa a theft), [fr. Soph, down]; prop, caught in the act of theft; then univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime; very often in the phrases in avTopa> (as one word ewavTocpQipai) Tim Xn/x^dwti/, pass, \apj3dvfa-dai., KaToXap.- pdvfo-Bat, aXioKfcrdat, (fr. Hdt. 6, 72 on), the crime being specified by a participle : p.otxfvofi.€vr], Jn. viii. 4 [R G], as in Ael. nat. an. 11, 15 ; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn. [x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Nieias 4, 5 ; Eumen. 2, 2] ; Sext. Empir. adv. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fabric.].* air6-\ap, -pos. 6, (aiiTos and x^'P' '^^- P" to be squalid), squalid, dirty, (Xen., Plat., sqq.), and since dirty things are destitute of brightness, dart: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 to Xapnpop Tf GTiK^oif . . . 7] Tovvavrtop avxpfjpof Kot a\ap7r€S. (Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.)* a-aipe'e\C> (ibid. G L T Tr AVH ; on this rarer fut. cf. Bttni. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) ; 2 aor. d<})f'i\ov ; 1 fut. pass. dei)i6iij]v; [see aip€io~\ ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to take from, take aicay, remove, carry off': tI, Lk. i. 25; to cut off, to wTtov, Mt. xxvi. 5 1 ; Mk. xiv. 4 7 [L T Tr WH to uyTaptov^ ; Lk. xxii. 50 [^To ouf]. {Trjv KerpaXrjv tivos, 1 Mace. vii. 47 ; for ni3, 1 S. xvii. 51); to take away, ti dno with gen. of a thing, Rev. .xxii. 1 9 : ti dmi with gen. of pers. Lk. X. 42 [T WH om. L Tr br. diro], (Gen. xxxi. 31 ; Job xxxvi. 7 ; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], etc.) ; mid. (prop, to take away or bear off for one's self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev. iv. 10 ; Mic. ii. 8 ; in Grk. writ, with a simple gen. for dn-o Tipof) ", d(l>aipf'iv tos AfiapTiai to take away sins, of a4f>i uv'i'; 88 a(pir]fii victims expiating them, Ileb. x. 4, (Jer. xi. 15 ; Sir. xlvii. 11) ; mid. of (iod putting out of liis siglit, remembering no more, the sins committed by men, i. e. granting par- don for sins (see a/iapTia, 2 a.) : Ro. xi. 27.* d()>avTi$. -f'f, ((jyiuvu)), not manifest, hid den : Ileb. iv. l;{. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Acseliyl. and] lldt. down.) [(.'f. fi^Xof. and Sclunidt eh. 130.]' d4)av(5«) ; [Pass., pres. d^avi'fo/ioi] : 1 aor. r]<^avlavi^ovTes Kpi- TTTOfiev). b. to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume : Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ, and Sept. [cf. B. § 130, 5]) ; Pass, to perish : Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor Schrecken rert/ehcn) ; to vanish away, Jas. iv. 14, (Hdt. 7, 6; 167; Plat, et »>]<{■)■ c. to deprive of lustre, render uii.avur|xos, -ov, 6, (d(j>avi(a, (|. v.), disappearance; de- struction: Ileb. viii. 13. (Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Leian., al. ; often in Sept., particularly for rrst? and nOD^.) * a-4>avTos, -ov, (fr. ^atvoiim), taken out of sight, made invisible : ii(j)avTos eyevero an airaiv, he departed from them suddenly and in a way unseen, he vanished, Lk. xxiv. 31. (In poets fr. Horn, down ; later in prose writ, also ; Diod. 4,65 ffinecraiv fls to )(dcTp.a . . . a(j)ain'os eyc'i/fTO, Plut. orac. def. c. 1. Sometimes angels, withdrawing sutldenly from human view, are said dcpavds yivfo-dai: 2 Mace. iii. 34; Acta Thorn. §§27 and 43.)* dE8puv, -aiioi, 6, apparently a word of Macedonian origin, which Suidas calls ' barbarous ' ; the place into rchich the alvine discharges are voided; a privy, sink; found only in Mt. xv. 17; Mk. vii. 19. It appears to be derived not from a(f> eSpav a pndicibus, but from a(^fS/)os, the same JIacedon. word which in Lev. xii. 5 ; XV. 19 sqij. answers to the Ilelir. mj sordes nienstruorum. Cf. Fischer's full discussion of the word in his De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 698 sqq.* d4>ci8Ca (,u(j)(iS(M Lchm.,sees. V. et,t),-af, ^, (the dispo- sition of a man who is dcfxiSrjs, unsparing), tinsparing severity, with gen. of the object, toO crap-aTos, Col. ii. 23 (rav (ToipaTwv dcpeiSdv, Lys. 2, 2.0 (1 93, .5) ; Diod. 13, 60 ; 79 etc. [see I5p. Lghtft. on Col. 1. e.] ; in Plat, defin. p. 412 d. d(f)etdia means liherality').'' d4)-€t8ov, i. q. aTrflSoc, (\. V. Cf. B. 7 ; Mullaeh p. 22 ; AV. 45 (44) ; \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 91 sq., Sept. ed. 4 Prolcg. p. xxxiii. ; Scrivener's ed. of cod. Cantal). Intr. p. xlvii. (11); esp. 117/. Apj). p. 143 sq., Meisterhans §20, and Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 23; Curtius p. 687 sq.]. d6X6TT]s, -rjTos, T), (fr. d<^eXi)r without rock, smooth, plain, and this fr. (jitWeit rocky land), simplicity, [A.V. singlenessl : xapSias, Acts ii. 46, (found only here [and in eccl. writ.]. The Greeks used dcpeXeia)." a^-f\Trllw, i. q. dnf\ni(o>, q. v. ; cf. dtpfiSov. a4>-E6apo-(a, -as, 17, {a(j)6apTos, cf. dKoBapaia), (Tertull. and subseq. writ, incorriiptibilitas, Vulg. inrorruptio [and incorriipteUi]), incorruption, perpetuity: tov Kotrpov, Philo de incorr. mund. § 11 ; it is ascribed to to delop in Plut. Arist. c. 6; of the body of man exenij)t from decay after the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (6. ff. ok), 50, 53 sip;, of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 ]\Iacc. xvii. 12), Ho. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 10. nva dyairdv iv d(j>6ap- v'lq. to love one with never diminishing love, Kph. vi. 24 [cf. IMoy. ad loc. The word seems to have the mean- ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Rec."].* d-6apT05, -ov, ((pdftpai), uncorrupted, not liable to cor- ruption or decay, iui/)erishable : of things, 1 Co. ix. 25 ; 1 Pet. i. 4, 23 ; iii. 4 ; [u(^^. Ktjpvypa ttjs aluvlov trwTTjpias, Mk. xvi. WII in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion ']. im- mortal : of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52 ; of God, Ko. i. 23; 1 Tim. i. 17. (Sap. xii. 1; xviii. 4. [Aristot.], Pint., Lcian., al. [Cf. Trench § Ixviii.])" d-i{>6opCa, -ar, ^, (a(fidopot uncorrupted, fr. (jtddpai), un- corruptness: Tit. ii. 7 LTTrWII; sec d&ia(j>6opla.* d<)>-CT||u ; pres. 2 pers. sing. d0fis (fr. the form dtftiui. Rev. ii. 20 for Ree. eas), [3 pers. plur. dcjuovaiv Rev. xi. 9 Tdf. edd.2, 7,fr. a form tJ^it'o) ; cf. B. 48 (42)] ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ijc^ie, with the augm. before the Jirep., Jlk. i. 34; xi. IC, fr. the form d(pio>; whence also pros. 1 pers. plur. dcjiiopfv Lk. xi. 4 L T Tr WU for dfjntpev Rcc. and 3 pers. d(piovinv Kev. xi. 9 L T Tr WH ; [see 11'//. App. p. 167]; fut. d(f)Tja^a>; 1 aor. d(j)t]Ka, 2 pers. sing. -k€s Kev. ii. 4 T Tr WII [cf . xoTridci)] ; 2 aor. impv. a(f>es, iKperf, subj. 3 pers. sing. d0j, 2 pers. plur. dipfire, [inf. dcpflvai (Alt. xxiii. 23 L T Tr WII ; Lk. v. 21 L txt. T Tr WII)], ptcp. dcjifls. d(j)(VTfs\ Pass., pres. dlepat. [yet 3 pers. plur. de6rjv; fut. d-iKV€o^aL, -ovfiai : 2 aor. dlKeTo 6 Xoyot).* d-(t>iX-0LYa8o$, -ov, (a priv. and (fit\dya9os), opposed to goodness and good men, [R, V. no lover of good} ; found only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.* d-^iX-dp-yvpos, -ov, (a priv. and cj>t\dpyvpos), not loving moneii, not avaricious; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Heb. xiii. 5. [Cf. Trench § xxiv.] * a<^-i|is, -f-£laTaa'o (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec; cf. ^V . § 14, 1 e.) ; [impf. d^iord/irji'] ; fut. ditoarr]aopat ; 1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, toj make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. to excite to revolt : Acts v. 37 (djrecrT7;(7e Xaow . . . onia^ai avTov drew away after him ; riva. d-rro tivos, Deut. vii. 4, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively, in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, to stand off, stand aloof, in various senses [as in Grk. writ.] ace. to the context : djrd with gen. of pers. to go away, depart, from any one, Lk. xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9 ; cf. Jit. vii. 23 ajrox^pfiTf dir f'/ioC) ; Acts xii. 10; xix. 9; to desert, withdraw from, one. Acts XV. 38 ; to cease to vex one, Lk. iv. 13 ; Acts v. 38 ; xxii. 29 ; 2 Co. xii. 8 ; to fall away, become faithle.fs, dno 6eov, Ileb. iii. 12; to shun, Jiee from, airo tjjs dStKias, 2 Tim. ii. 19. Jlid. to withdraw one's .telf from: absol. to fall away, Lk. viii. 13 ; [tijs nlvu, adv., (akin to aXvt]s, see in alipvlSios above), sud- denly : Acts ii. 2 ; xvi. 2G ; x.xviii. 6. (Sept. ; [Aeschyl.], Thuc. and subseq. writ.) * d4>aPus, adv., (cfyo^os), without fear, boldly: Lk. i. 74; Phil. i. 14: 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down.]* d4)-o|j.ot6a>, -£> : [pf. pass. ptcp. d^cu/iotcu/xcVof (on augm. aop(i(t 90 a^Xi;? see WH. App. p. ICl)]; to cause a model to pass off (airo) into on imnr/c or shape llh(' it, — la express ilselfln it, (cf. aTTftKaffii', dnciKODi^fiv, dno7r\aainte'r.«, Xen. mem. 'A, 10, 2; often in Plato. P;iss. ta he iitaile Hire, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Kp. Jfr. 4 ('>), 62 («3), 70 (71) I and in Plato.) * d4i-op(SMD, -S ; to turn the eyes away from other things anil Jix them on somethiny; cf. dno^Xeira. trop. to turn one's mind to : e'ls riva, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 66, 2 d.], (els 6f6v, 4 Mace. xvii. 10; for e.\.\. fr. (!rk. writ. cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 862). Fm-tlier, if. aireihov* d-op(^a>: iiiipf. n(/)(ipifoi'; Attic fut. dcjbopio) Mt. XXV. 32 (T Wll at/wpiVm ) ; xiii. 4Si, [W. § 13, 1 c. ; B. 37 (32)] ; 1 aor. drjxiipiaa ; Pass., pf. ptc]). d(f>a>pL(Tfi.(i'os ', 1 aor. im])v. d(j>opia-6i}Te ; {opi^at to make a Spot or boundary) ; to mark off from {dno) others by boundaries, to limit, lo separate: iavrov, from others. Gal. ii. 12; rois p.a6r)Ttis, from those unwilling to obey the gospel, Acts .xLx. 9 ; «k /ifffow Tivav, Mt. xiii. 49 ; diro nvos, -xxv. 32. Pass, in a rellex. sense: 2 Co. vi. 17. absol. : in a bad sense, to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22 ; in a good sense, riva «IS T(, lo appoint, sel apart, one for some purpose (to do sonK'thing), Acts .xiii. 2 ; Ko. i. 1 ; nvd foil, by a telic inf., (ial. i. l.") [(?) seotheComm. adloc.]. ([Soph.], Eur., Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al. ; very often in Sept. esp. for V^nn, l":n, o'-in, -ijd, etc.) • d-op)iT|, -Tjs, f), {dno and 6pp.i) <|. v.) ; 1. prop, a place from which a movement or atlacl: is made, a base of operations : Thuc. 1, 90 {ttjv UfXanowTjaov Trdo'iv dva- ^apTjaLf T€ Ka\ d(f}opprji^ iKavrjv eivai); Polyb. 1,41, 6. 2. meta))li. thai hy which endeavor is excited and from which it f/oesfurlh ; thai which yives occasion and supplies matter for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail ourselves of in attempting ov performing anything: Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4 (tois iavTwv Trmcri KaXXi'ovf dopfiai elsrbv fiiov KaTuXeinovtTi), and often in (irk. writ. ; \ap^dv(iv, to take occasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 1 1 ; hihovai, 2 Co. v. 1 2 ; 1 Tim. v. 1 4, (3 Mace. iii. 2 ; both phrases often also in Grk. writ.) ; 2Co. .\i. 12; Gal. v. 13. On the mean- ings of this word see Viger. ed. Herm. p. 81 S(j. ; Phryn. ed. Zo//. p. 223 sq. ; ^Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 304].* d<|)pC?« ; (a<^/)o's) ; to foam : Mk. ix. 18, 20. (Soph. El. 719; Diod. 3, 10; Atlien. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al.].) [COMP. : cV-a^pifw.] * dppoo-vvT|, -Tjs, f), (a(j)pav), foolishness, folly, senseless- ness : 2 Co. xi. 1, 1 7, 21 ; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk. Tii. 22. [From Hom. down.] * d<}>pti)v, -ovof, 6, fj, -ov, TO, (fr. a priv. and (ppljv, cf. tv- pwv, (Ta(j)pwv), [fr. Hom. down], prop, irilhoul reason ([cidwXa, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4] ; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14), senseless, foolish, stupid ; without refection or intelligence, acting rashly: Lk. .xi. 40; xii. 20; Ro. ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 36 ; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to (f>p6vipos, as in Prov. xi. 29) ; 2 Co. xii. 6, 11 ; Eph. v. 17 (opp. to (rvvievrfs) ; 1 Pet. ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt oh. 147 § 17.]* cu^tnnxSu, -a : 1 aor. dcpvrrvoxra ; {virvoa to put to sleep, to sleep) ; a. to awaken from sleep (Anthol. Pal. 9, 517, 5). b. to fall asleep, to fall off to sleep: Lk. viii. 23; for (his the ancient Greeks used KaBvnvota; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1, l.]' a^wmpim, -a> : (a later Grk. word); 1. to be be- hindhand, come loo late (diro so as to be far from, or to fail, a person or thing) ; used of persons not present at the right time : Polyb. 22, 5, 2 ; I'osidon. ap. Athen. 4, 87 (i. e. 4 p. 151 e.) ; [al.] ; diro dyaBris tjixepas to fail (to make use of) a good day, to let the ojjportunity pass by, Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fail, to tcilh- draw, lake away from, defraud: to pdwii p, Noll. i.\. 2U (f<)i'i'J"3 to with- hold) ; pf. pass. ])tc]). drpva-Tfprjptvos (ptadot), Jas. v. 4 T Tr A\ H after t^ B ', [Kec. dTTforfprjpevos, see d7roo"T6- pfo), also s. v. dTTo, II. 2 d. bb., p. 59'].* a<|>ii)vos, -ov, ((jywvTj), voiceless, dumb ; without the faculty of speech ; used of idols, 1 Co. .xii. 2 (cf. Ps. cxv. 5 (cxiii. 13) ; Ilab. ii. 18) ; of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. .\iv. 10 TotravTa yevrj (pwv^v Ka\ ovdfv avrav [L T Tr A\'II oni. avT-l iicpcovov, i. e. there is no language destitute of the power of language, [R. V. t.xt. no kind (of voice) is with- out signification~\, (cf. the ])hrases jiioi d/SiwTor a life lui- worthy of the name of life, x^f's "X^P'^)- used of one that is patiently silent or duml) : dpvot. Acts viii. 32 fr. Is. liii. 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl. down.)' "AxoJ [ WH ''A;(as], 6, (so Sept. for ins possessing, pos- sessor ; in Jo.se])h. 'Axdfi/s, -ov, 6), Ahaz, king of Judah, [fr. c. B. c. 74 1 to c. B. c. 725 ; cf. B. D. s. v. Israel, king- dom of], (2 K. xvi. 1 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq. ; Is. vii. 1 sqq.) : Mt. i. 9.» 'Axata [\V1I 'Axaia (see I, i)], -aj, ^, Achaia; 1. in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. B. c. 146 on [yet see Diet, of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em- bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. T. : Acts xviii. 12, 27; xix. 21 ; Ro. xv. 26; xvi. 5 Rec. ; 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; 2 Co. i. 1 ; ix. 2 ; xi. 10 ; 1 Th. i. 7 sq. [B. D. 'AxaiKds, -ov, 6, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of Corinth : 1 Co. -xvi. 1 7.* 6.xo.pi., -a : 1 aor. pass, fjxpftaidrjv ; (a;^/3eioy, q. v.) ; to make useless, render unserviceable : of character, Ro. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (.xiv.) 3), where L mrg. T Tr WH read rjxpfwBrjrrav fr. the rarer Sxpfos i. q. dxpf'^os- (Several times jirop. in Polyb.)* a-xprio-TOs, -ov, (xpr)aT6s, and this fr. xpdop.ai), useless, unprofitable: PhQcm. 11 (here opp. to 6i;;(pi;oTOf). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach. 70 ; Theogu.] down.) £St^. cf. Tittmann ii. 11 sq. ; Trench § c. 17; Ellic. on Philem. U.]» axpi and axpis (the latter of which in the N. T. is nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be- fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is so far regarded that we almost constantly find axpi rjs ripfpai, «XP'5 °^' •^■^- 2- ^^ (^) ' l^'- ''-] ! ^'^'^ "XP' °^ '* not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 25 by L T Tr WH and Lk. xxi. 24 by T Tr WH ; [to these in- stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 T AVH ; xv. 25 T WH ; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148) ; on the usage in secular authors (' where -pi is the only Attic form, but in later auth. the Epic -pis prevailed ', L. and 5. s. V.) cf. Loheck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq. ; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 64 ; further, Klotz ad Devar. vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq.]) ; a particle indicating the terminus ad q u e m. (On its use in the Grk. writ, cf . Klotz u. s. p. 224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep, now of a •conj., even to; until, to the time that; (on its derivation see below). 1. as a Preposition it takes the gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6], and is used a. of Place : Acts xi. 5 ; xiii. 6 ; xx. 4 [T Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.] ; xxviii. 15 ; 2 Co. X. 13 sq. ; Heb. iv. 12 (see p^pio-fios, 2) ; Rev. xiv. 20; xviii. 5. b. of Time : Sxpi Kaipov. until a sea- son that seemed to liim opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but cf. Kaipos, 2 a.] ; until a certain time, for a season. Acts xiii. 1 1 ; [axpi (vol fiexP'i '1- ^'- ^ ^-^ '""'^ Bepiapoj, Mt. xiii. 30 AV H mrg. cf. eass, II. 5] ; cixpi i]s fjpepas until the dav that etc. Mt. xxiv. 38 ; Lk. i. 20 ; xvii. 27 ; Acts i. 2 ; laxpt (Rec. et al. cms) ttjs ijfiepar ^s, Acts i. 22 Tdf.] ; «XP' TavTTjs T^r ffnepas and axpi TTji fjpepas Tavrrjs, Acts ii. 29 ; xxiii. 1 ; xxvi. 22 ; axpi [-p'f R G] ^p.€pa)v ■nivre even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five days, Acts .xx. 6; axpis [-piTTr WH] aiy^r, Actsxx. 11 ; iixpi TOV vvv, Ro. viii. 22 ; Phil. i. 5 ; axpi TiKovs, Heb. vi. 11 ; Rev. ii. 26 ; see besides, Acts iii. 21 ; [xxii. 22] ; Ro. i. 13 ; V. 13 ; 1 Co. iv. 11 ; 2 Co. iii. 14 ; Gal. iv. 2 ; Phil. i. 6 [-pi L T WH]. c. of Manner and Degree: axpi SavaTov, Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto death) ; Rev. ii. 10 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev. xii. 11 ; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb. iv. 12 [see ptpio-por, 2]. d. joined to the rel. ov (axpis ov for axpi TovTov, Alt. Test. 2te Aull. p. 127 sq.; Opperl in the Zeit.sch. d. Deutsch. Morg. Gesellschaft, viii. p. 695]), Babylon, formerly a very celebrated and large city, the residence of the Babylonian kings, situated on both l)anks of the Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius llystaspis threw down its gates .and walls, and Xerxes ilestroyed [?] the tenqjle of Belus. At length the city was reduced ahuost to a solitude, the population hav- ing been drawn off by the neighboring ScU'ucia, built (m the Tigris by Seleueus Nieanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin- son in B. D. s. v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi. and viii., vol. ii. Essay iv.] The name is used in the N. T. 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet. V. 13 (where some have imderstood Babylon, a small town in Egypt, to be referred to; but in opposition ef. J/«//ft?/(o/r, Einl. in die petrin. Schriften, ]>. r2(i s(]q. ; [cf. 3 fin. below]). 2. of die fcrrilori/. Babylonia : Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle- gorically, of Home as the most corrupt seat of idolatry and the enemy of Christianity : Rev. xiv. 8 [here Ree.*^'' Ba/SouXcif] ; .xvi. 19; xvii. y; .xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the ojjiuion of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [cf. 1 fin. above]).* paSc'us, adv., deeply : updpnv fiadews sc. ovros (cf. Bnhdy. ji. 338), deep in the morning, iil 1 nrhi i/mrn, Lk. xxiv. 1 L T Tr WII ; so ^leyer a ; e'fioi 6« fir) yevono Kav^uadaLji-ir /tt- it from me lo v, of things fabricated, A(^ts xix. 26 ; of miracles to he performed, irroiKjht : Sm twv xeipwv tivos, ilk. vi. 2 ; bid TWOS, Acts ii. 43 ; iv. 16, 30 ; xii. 9 ; iwo nvos, Lk. ix. 7 ( U L [but the latter br. ijr' auroC]) ; xiii. 1 7 ; xxiii. 8 ; yevufieva fir Km^apv. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for its benefit (W. 116 (3S8) ; [cf. B. 333 (286)]), Lk.iv. 23 [Rec. (V r;i K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re- quests, etc. to he done, executed : Mt. vi. 10 ; xxi. 21 ; .xxvi. 42 ; Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 22 ; xxiii. 24 ; Acts xxi. 14 ; yt- vqaerat 6 Xdyor will be accom])lished the saying, 1 Co. xv. 54. joined to nouns implying a certain action : 17 anui- \fia yfyocf , 3Ik. xiv. 4 ; awoypaffii), Lk. ii. 2 ; enayyeXla yevofilvr) vno dfov given by Goil, Acts .xxvi. 6; avaKpicns, Acts x.xv. 26 ; vopov pLfTa6((Tis, Heb. vii. 12 ; aipeais, Ileb. ix. 22. of institutions, laws, etc. to he estahliihed, en- acted: TO au^jiaTov eyivero, the institution of the Sabbath, Mk. ii. 27 ; 6 vd/ioj, Gal. iii. 1 7 ; oi yeyovev ovras hath not been so ordained, Mt. xL\. 8. of feasts, marriages, en- tertainments, lo be lept, celebrated : ro traaxn, Mt. xxvi. 2 (i. (p nb'i'Jj 2 K. xxiii. 22) ; to o-dfifiaTov, Mk. vi. 2 ; ra fyKa'iVia, Jn. x. 22; [yeveaiois yevopivois (cf. W. § 31,9b.; K (i yevfciav dyopiviav), ^It. xiv. G], (ra 'OXvpina, Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 28 ; 'lirdpia, ^, 5, 1) ; ydfior, Jn. ii. 1. ourair yimjTai iv ipol so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15. 5. lo become, be made, " in passages where it is speci- fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren- dered, as resj)ects quality, condition, place, rank, cliarac- ter" {Wahl, Clavis Apoer. V. T. p. 101). a. with a predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj. : 01 XMoi ot TO» ("pToi y'evwvrai, ^It. iv. 3 ; Lk. iv. 3 ; v6aip olvov yeyc vrjfuvnv, Jn. ii. 'J ; dpxKpds yfnojifvos, Heb. vi. 20 ; SidKoms, Col. i. 25 ; 6 Xoyor irap^ fytVevo, Jn. i. 14 ; dinip, 1 Co. xiii. 11, and many other exx. ; x^P'i ovKtri yivcTm X"P'^ grace ceases to have the natureof grace, can no longer bo called grace, Ro. xi. 6 ; uKafmos ytviTat, Mt. xiii. 22 ; Mk. iv. 1 1) ; — in Jit. xvii. 2 ; Lk. viii. I 7 ; Jn. v. 6, and many other ])laccs. conte.xtually, to shoiv one's self, prove one's self: Lk. X. 36 ; .\Lx. 1 7 ; xxiv. 1 9 ; Ro. xi. 34 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 18 Rec. ; 1 Th. i. 6 ; ii. 7 ; Ileb. .xi. 6, etc. ; esj). in exhor- tations : ylveaBf, Mt. X. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; K|)h. i\. 32: Col. iii. 15; fit) yivov, .In. xx. 27; pr]ylvea-6f, Mt. vi. 16 ; Eph. v. 7, 17 ; 1 Co. x. 7 ; fjil] yiviip.eda, (Jal. v. 26 ; hence used deelaratively, i. q. lo he found, shown : Lk. xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were sinners) ; Ro. iii. 4 ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; — ylvojial tivI tis to show one's self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20, 22. b. with an interrog. jjron. as ])redicate : rt 6 IltTpos fyf vern what had become of Peter, Acts xif. 18 [cf. use of Ti eyev. in Act. Phil, in Hell. § 23, 'J'df. Acta ajjost. apocr. p. 1 04]. c. ylvftrOai o)f or ixrel Tiva to become as or like lo one : Mt. .x. 25 ; xviii. 3 ; .x.xviii. 4 ; Mk. i.x. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WII reject the pass.] ; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9) ; 1 Co. iv. 13 ; Gal. iv. 12. d. ylvtaOai els ti lo become i. c. be changed into something, come lo he, issue in, something (Germ, zu ettcas werilen) : eycvljdri els Kt(fia\fiv yojvias, Mt. xxi. 42 ; Mk. xii. 10 ; Lk. xx. 1 7 ; Acts iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, — all after Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22. Lk. xiii. 1 9 (tis bev&pov peya) ; Jn. xvi. 20 ; Acts v. 36 ; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. l.wiii. (Ixix.) 23) ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; Rev. viii. 1 1 ; xvi. 1 9, etc. (equiv. to 7 n;n ; but the expression is also classic ; cf. W. § 29, 3 a. ; B. 150(131)). e. yt'vfo-flat with Cases ; o. with tlie gen. to become Ihe jii-operti/ of any one, to come into the power of a person or thing, [cf. AV. § 30, 5; esp. B. 162 (142)] : Lk. XX. 14 [L mrg. eaTai], 33 ; Rev. xi. 15 ; [yvi>pT)s, Acts XX. 3 TTr WII (cf. eXirihos peydXr^s yiv. Plut. Phoc. 23, 4)] ; 7rpo(pi]Teia Ibias eiriXvo-ems ov yiifeTai no one can ex- plain prophecy by his own mental jKjwer (it is not a matr ter of subjective interpretation), but to cx|)lain it one needs the same illumination of the Holy Sjjirit in which it originated, for etc. 2 Pet. i. 20. yeveaOat with a gen. indicating one's age, (to be) so many years old : Lk. ii. 42 ; 1 Tim. v. 9. p. with the dat. [cf. W. 210 sq. (198)] : ylpea-6at dv8pi lo become a man's wife, Ro. vii. 3 sq. (TTTI D'S"», Lev. -xxii. 1 2 ; Ruth i. 1 2, etc.). f. joined to prc])- ositions with their substantives; ev tiki, to come or pass into a ce^-tain slate [cf. B. 330 (284)] : ev dywvia, Lk. xxii. 44 [Lbr. WII reject the pass.]; ev iKo-Tda-ei, Acts xxii. 17 ; fvnveipaTi, Rev. i. 10: iv. 2 ; ev Sd^;; [U. V. came with (in) glori/'], 2 Co. iii. 7; ev napaffdaei, 1 Tim. ii. 14; ev c'auTO), to come to himself, recover reason. Acts xii. 11 (also in Grk. writ. ; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749) ; iv XpKTTw, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be- come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7 ; iv opoiwpari dvBpwTTuiv, to become like men, Phil. ii. 7 ; iv Xdyu «oXaitfiar [R- V. irvre n:e found using'\ flattering speech, 1 Th. ii. 5. eTrdvto Tivos lo beplaced over a thing, Lk. xi.x. 19. pera twos or (rvv Tiw to become one's companion, associate with him : Alk. xvi. 10 ; Acts vii. 38 ; xx. 18 ; in-o Twa lo be made subject to one. Gal. iv. 4. [Cf. h. below.] g. with speci- fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest : els with ace. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some yivQiO'Keo 117 yiVCOCTKO) thing, Acts xx. 16 ; xxi. 17 ; xxv. 15 ; if lyivero ■ ■ ■ els TO. ZiTa fjLov when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44 ; f IS with ace. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Rev. xvi. 2 RG;of blessings. Gal. iii. 14; 1 Th. i. o [Fx'lnn. n-por; Acts xxvi. 6 L T Tr WH] ; y(vea-6ai «Vi tov tottov, Lk. xxii. 40; fVi T^f y^r, Jn. vi. 21 [Tdf. e'jri i-^i/ y.] ; S>8e, ib. 25 (f«r, Xen. an. 6, 3 [5], 20 ; [ef. B. 71]) ; inl with aco. of place, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts xxi. 35; [Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.]; iycv€TO Stmy/ios fwl Trjv fKKKi}iTiav, Acts viii. 1 ; eyevero ni. 29 ; viii. 55 ; xii. 50, etc"; cf. Bp. Lghtft.'s note on Gal. iv. 9; Green, 'Critical Notes' etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. 55); Westcott on Jolm ii. 24. yiviitTKu and eTriVra/uai are associ- ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97) ; olba and ytvdtTKu in K])h. v. 5 ; olBa and iiriina^ai in .hule 10. Co.Mi". : oi-a-, 5ia-, itri-, Kara-, TTpoytvii(TKUi.\ ^XcCkos, -ovt, TO, must, the sweet juice pressed from the grape; Nicand. alex. 184, 299 ; Pint., al. ; Job xxxii. 19; sweet vine : Acts ii. 13. [Cf. lili. DD. s. v. Wine.] • ■yXuKus. -fia, -V, sweet : Jas. iii. 1 1 (opp. to niKpuv) ; 1 2 (o]ip. to aKvKov) ; Rev. x. 9, [10]. [From Horn, down.]* •yXuo-o-a, -ris,rj, [fr. llom. down], (Ac /onjue; 1. tlie tonr/uc, a member of the body, the organ of speech : ^Ik. vii. 33, 35 ; Lk. 1. C4 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; Jas. i. 26 ; iii. 5, C, 8; 1 Pet. iii. 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10]. By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that member of the body which is chietly engaged in some act has ascribed to it w bat lielongs to the man ; the tongue is so used in Acts ii. 26 (^yaXXintraro 17 yXitaaa pov) ; Ro. iii. 13 ; xiv. 1 1 ; Phil. ii. 1 1 (the tongue of every man) ; of the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a totir/uc, i. e. the lanyuiii/e used by a jiartieular people in distinction from that of other nations : Acts ii. 11 ; hence in later Jewish usage (Is. Ixvi. 18 ; Dan. iii. 4 ; v. 19 Tbeod. ; vi. 25 ; vii. 14 Thcod. ; Jud. iii. 8) joined with (fivXrj, 'Kaos.tdvos, it serves to desig- nate people of various languages [cf. W. 32], Rev. v. 9 ; vii. 9 ; X. 1 1 ; xi. 9 ; xiii. 7 ; xiv. C ; xvii. 15. XaXfiv ire- pats yXaiacrais to speak u-ith oilier than their native i. e. in foreign lonrjiies, Acts ii. 4 cf. C-11 ; ■yXmo-o-ait XaXfivxai- vais to speak with new tongues wdiieh the sjieaker has not learned previously, Mk. xvi. 1 7 [but Tr txt. WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. Kaivais] ; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 scjq. [cor- rect and su])plement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 10; cf. also B. 1). s. V. Tongues, Gift of]. Fi-om both these e.xpressions must be carefully distinguished the simple phrases XaXf ii' y\iofy€vs. -e'cos, 6, (also [earlier] Kva(f>fvs, fr. yvaTrrco or Kvanrai to card), a fuller: Mk. i.\. 3. (Hdt., Xen., and sqq. ; Sept. Is. vii. 3 ; xxxvi. 2 ; 2 K. xviii. 1 7.) • ■YVTJerios, -a, -ov, (by syncope for ■y€i/^^ 'thick cloud,'' Ex. XX. 21, etc. ; [Trench § c.].) * •yviiji-n, -1)9, f], (fr. yivaoKw) ; 1. the faculty of know- ing, mind, reason. 2. that which is thought or known, one's mm(/ ; a. view, judgment, opinion : 1 Co. i. 10 ; Rev. xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done, aa. by one's self, resolve, purpose, intention : iyivfTo yvafirj [T Tr WH yi/M/xrjr, see yivopai 5 e. a.] tov VTTouTpi- (j)eiv, Acts XX. 3 [B. 2G8 (230)]. bb. by others, Judg- ment, advice : hihovai yvafi.Tjv, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40] ; 2 Co. viii. 10. cc. decree: Rev. xvii. 17; p^mpW t!js a-rjs yviijjirjs, without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in Grk. writ. ; [cf. Schmidt, ch. 13, 9 ; Mey. on 1 Co. i. 10].) * 'yvwpC^u ; fut. yvwpiaai (Jn. xvii. 2G ; Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. iv. 7), Attic -lu (Col. iv. 9 [LWII -iVu; B. 37 (32); WH. App. p. K'3]) ; 1 aor. eyvmpta-a; Pass., [pres. yvoipl- fo/iot] ; 1 aor. iyva>pla6r]V, in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. doV'n [see ad fin.] ; Sept. for i'-iin and Chald. i'llD ; 1. trans, to make known: ri, Ko. i.x. 22 sq. ; rt tiw, Lk. ii. 15; Jn. xv. 15; xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1; Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass, in these two exx.] ; Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. iv. 7, 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 16; tiv\ to iiva-rijpiov, Eph. i. 9; iii. 3 [GLTTrWII read the pass.]; vi. 19; tivI 3ti, 1 Co. xii. 3 ; Tivl Ti, QTi i. q. nvX on ti. Gal. i. 1 1 ; foil, by Tt interrog. Col. i. 27 ; wepi tivos, Lk. ii. 1 7 L T Tr WII ; yvwpi^eada irpos tov d(6v be brought to the knowledge of God, Phil. iv. (! ; yvapi^eadat (h ndirra to edvr] to be made known unto all the nations, llo. xvi. 26 ; contextually and emphatically i. (j. to recall to one's mind, as though what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xv. 1 ; with ace. of pers. [(Pint. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to become known, be recognized : Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. WII txt. 2. intrans. to know : tI alpfiiropat. oi yvwpl^w, Phil, i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate ti alp. ; ov yv. ; some refer this to 1 (R. V. mrg. / do not make known), cf. Mey. ad loc. In earUer Grk. yvapl^a signifies either ' to gain a knowledge of,' or ' to have thorough knowledge of.' Its later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487 ; cf. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c. Comp. : ava-, bia-yvaipi^a)].* •yviSo-is. -f£us, 7;, (yivwaKia), [fr. Thuc. down], knoivl- edge: with gen. of the obj., aairqplat, Lk. i. 77; too 6(ov, the knowledge of God, such as is oifered in the gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul's exposition of it, 2 t^o. x. 5 ; T^f So^rjt TOV 6fov iv npoaimm Xpio-Tov, 2 Co. iv. 6 ; 'li/CToC XpLo-Tov, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8 ; 2 Pet. iii. 18 ; with subj. gen. to£) 6fov, the knowledge of things which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. yvojirif, by itself, sig- nifies in general intelligence, understanding : ICph. iii. 19 ; the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv. 14; 1 Co. i. 5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8 ; xiii. 2, 8 ; xiv. 6 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; viii. 7 ; xi. Ci ; esp. of things lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1 Co. viii. 1,7, 10 sq. ; the higher knowledge of Christian and divine things which false teachers boast of, yjffvSoiw- pos yvaa-is, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [cf. Iloltzmann, Pastoralbriefc, p. 132 sq.] ; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living, 2 Pet. i. 5 ; and in intercourse with others : koto yvaaiv, wisely, 1 Pet. iii. 7. objective knowledge : what is known concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20 ; Col. ii. 3 ; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. xi. 52. Where yvaxris and a-orpta are used together the for- mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the latter wisdom as exhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1 Co. xii. 8; Col. ii. 3. \_"yv. is simply intuitive, . is ratiocinative also; yv. applies chiefly to the appre- hension of truths, a-o. superadds the j)ower of reason- ing about them and tracing their relations." Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro. 1. c), "yv. perspicientia veri, (To(j). sapientia aut mentis sollertia, qua; cognita intellectaque veritate utatur, ut res efficiendas efliciat." Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. c.) nearly re- verses Lghtft. 's distinction ; elsewhere, however (e. g. on Col. 1. c., cf. i. 9), he and others regard a-o(j>. merely as the more general, yv. as the more restricted and special term. Cf. Lghtft. n. s. ; Trench § Ixxv.] * ■yvuoTTis, -ov, 6, (a knower), an expert; a connois.^eur: Acts xxvi. 3. (Plut. Flam. c. 4 ; 6e6s 6 tu>v KpvnTav yvoiarrjs. Hist. Sus. vs. 42 ; of those who divine the future, 1 S. xxviii. 3, 9, etc.) * yvaa-TOs, -I), -ov, known : Acts ix. 42 ; tiki, Jn. xviii. 15 sq. ; Acts i. 19 ; xv. 18 R L; xix. 17 ; xxviii. 22 ; yvaarov •^oyyv^u) 120 ypufi/ia €aTa iftiv he it Inoivn to you : Acts ii. 14 ; iv. 10 ; xiii. 3H ; xxviii. "28 ; contextually, notable. Acts iv. 16; yvcaffrov TTOifiv to make known, disclose : Acts xv. 1 7 sq. G T Tr WH [al. construe yvaar. as pred. of ravra : R. V. nij'g. who (loeth these things which were known ; cf. Mey. ad loc.]. TO yvaxrrov tov 6eov. either tlitit which mai/ be knoicn of (lod, or i. (j. yi/oxris tov 6fov, for Ijoth come to the same thing: Ko. i. 19; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and AV. 235 (220), [and -Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. oi yvaoTol acfjuaintance, inlimatis, (Vs. xxx. (xxxi.) 12; [Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 9, 19] ; Xeh. v. 10) : Lk. ii. 44 ; xxiii. 49. (In (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * ^o^yuju; impf. «yoyyufoi/ ; 1 aor. iyoyyvaa; to murmur, mutter, (jrumblc, Sdi/ ani/lhing in a low tone, (ace. to Pollux and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the Tov6pv^a> and Tovdopi(ai of the more elegant Grk. writ. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 358 ; [W. 22; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil, ii. 14]) ; hence of those who confer together secretly, tI irepi Tivos, Jn. vii. 32 ; of tliose who discontentedly com- plain : 1 Co. X. 10; wpos Ttva, Lk. v. 30; fier aXX^Xwv, Jn. vi. 43; Kara rivoi, Mt. xx. 11 ; irepi tlvos, Jn. vi. 41, 61. (Sept. ; Antonin. 2, 3 ; Epict. diss. 1, 29, 55; 4, 1, 79; [al.].) [COMP. : 8m- yoyyufu.] * 'YOYyvo-|is, -ov, 6, (ytfio)) ; a. the lading or freight of a ship, cargo, mcrchandi.ie conveyed in a ship : Acts xxi. 3, (Hdt. 1, 194; [Aeschyl.], Dem., al. ; [in Sept. the load of a beast of burden, Ex. x.xiii. 5 ; 2 K. v. 1 7]). b. any mer- chandise : Rev. xviii. 1 1 sq.* yov(i%, -e'cos. 6, (TENO, yiyova). [Horn. h. Cer., lies., al.] ; a begetter, /mrent ; plur. oi yoi/eit the jiarents : Lk. ii. 41, 43 L txt. T Tr WII ; [viii. 56] ; xxi. 16 ; Jn. ix. 2, 3, 20, 22, 23; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; Ro. i. 30; Eph. vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 2; ace. plur. yoi/fir : Mt. x. 21; [xix. 29 Lchm.mrg.]; Lk. ii. 27; [xviii. 29] ; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn. ix. 18]; on this form cf. W. § 9, 2 ; [B. 14 (13)].» yovu. yuvoTos. to, [fr. Iloni. down], the knee: Ilcb. xii. 1 2 ; Tidfvai T« yovuTa to bend the knee.", kneel down, of ])ersons supplicating: Lk. xxii. 41; Acts vii. 60 ; ix. 40; XX. 3t) ; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so also npo(T7TirTT(iv tois yovaal tivos, Lk. v. 8 (of a suj)pliant in Eur. Or. 1 3.32) ; KopnTfw tU yo'i/ara to bow the knee, of those worshipjjing God or Christ : tiki, Ro. xi. 4 ; jrpo's Twa, E])h. iii. 14 ; reflexively, yom Kapirrd. Ttvi, to i. e. in honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; iv ovopan 'irjrrov, Phil. ii. 10 (Is. .\lv. 23).* •yovuircTtw, -w : 1 aor. ptcp. yovvTicTrifTos', {yownfTTjs, and tills fr. yoVu and IIETQ i. raem. ct poen. § 14 ; leg. adOai. § 29, etc. — but always to I'y ]): 2 Tim. iii. 1& [here T WH om. LTrbr. ra]: ypuppa i. (|. the written law of Jloses, Ro. ii. 27; Mojvae'cos yptippara, Jn. v. 47. Since the Jews so clave to the letter of the law that it not only became to them a mere letter but also a hin- drance to true religion. Paul calls it ypappa in a dispar^ag- ing sense, and contrasts it with to irvevpa i. e. the divine Spirit, whether operative in the ilosaic law, Ro. ii. 29, or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro. vii. 6 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7 R G T WH read the jilur. written in letters, so L mrg. Tr mrg.]. 3. Ta ypdppara, like the Lat. lillernr, Eng. letters, i. q. learning: Acts xxvi. 24 ; fl&tvai. pfpaSrjKivai yp. (cf. Germ. .<TJ, -f/s, fj, (ypdffia), cf. yXu^ij and yXuc^cij) ; a. a writing, thing written, [fr. Soph, down] : wda-a ypacjiij ererif scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; phir. ypa0ai Syiai, holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the (). T.), Ro. i. 2 ; TrpocprjTiKai, Ro. xvi. 26 ; at ypacpai rutv Trpot^^qrutv, Mt. xxvi. 56. b. ^ ypaai: Mt. ,xxi. 42; xxvi. 54; Mk. xiv. 49 ; Lk. xxiv. 27 ; Jn. v. 39 ; Acts xvii. 2, 11 ; xviii. 24, 28 ; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq. ; once ai ypa4>ai comprehends also the books of the ^T. T. already begun to be collected into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by melon, fj ypacfifi is used for God speaking in it : Ro. ix. 1 7 ; Gal. iv. 30 ; ^ ypa(j)fi is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in Gal. iii. 8. elhivai rds ypacpds, Jit. xxii. 29; Jlk. xii. 24; (Tvvuvai, Lk. xxiv. 45. c. a certain portion or section of holy Scripture: Jlk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21 ; Jn. xix. 37; Acts i. 16. [Cf. B. D. s. V. Scripture] ■ypd<^(i); [impf. fypa^oK] ; fut. ypd'^ai; 1 aor. «ypa\/^a; pf . yiypa(j>a ; Pass., [pres. ypa^opai] ; pf. yeypap.pai ; [plpf. 3 pers. sing, tyeypanro, Rev. xvii. 8 Lchm.]; 2 aor. iypd ti, Jn. xix. 22 ; pass. Rev. i. 3 ; tI fVi TI, Rev. ii. 17 ; xi.x. 16 ; tI eVi riva, iii. 12 ; itti rivos, xiv. 1. b. to commit to tcriting (things not to be for- gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 (ypdv/'ov a dbes) ; X. 4 ; ypdfjxiv fls (3i/3Xioi», Rev. i. 1 1 ; eVi to /Si/SXi'oi/ rij^ (oris, Rev. xvii. 8 ; ycypa/iu. (v t. ^i^Xlia [or tj ^i'/3X|, naked, not covered; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing : IMk. xiv. 52; Rev. iii. 17 ; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; to yvp-vov, sub- stantively, the naked bodg: eTri yvfivov, Mk. xiv. 51 ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc; (ja yv/iva, Lcian. nav. 33). b. ill- clad : Mt. xxv. 36, 38, 43 sq. ; Acts xLx. 16 (with torn garments) ; Jas. ii. 15 ; (Job xxii. 6 ; xxiv. 10 ; xxvi. 6). c. clad in the undergarment onlg (the outer garment or cloak being laid aside) : Jn. xxi. 7 ; (1 S. xix. 24 ; Is. xx. 2 ; lies. opp. 389 ; often in Attic ; so nudus, Verg. Goorg. 1, 299). d. of the soul, whose garment is the body, stript of the body, without a body : 2 Co. v. 3, (Plat. Crat. c. 20 i>. iOSh.Tjiffvx'i yvpvijToi) aafjiaTos). 2. metaph. a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare : Heb. iv. 13, (yv/ivos 6 aSi]s e'vanriov avTov, Job xxvi. 6 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 585). b. only, mere, bare, i. q. i/zAof (like Lat. nudus) : yupi/or kokkos. mere grain, not the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 3 7, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5 OTTeppara Trea-ovTa fir rrfv yffv $')pd Kai yvjiva bidKvtTai).' •yi)(iv6Ttis, -i;TOf, i). (yu/icds), nakedness : of the body. Rev. iii. 18 (see ata-xvvri, 3) ; used of want of clothing, Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin. 11,27.)* lyvvaiKapiov 123 Batfiopiov YvvaiKOLpiov, -ov. to, (dimin. fr. yvvfi), a little woman ; used contemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. [A. V. silli/ icomen ; cf. Lat. muUercula]. (Diodes, com. in Bekk. Anecd. j). 87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occasionally in Epictet.) On dimin. ending in apiov see Loh. ad Phiyn. p. 180 ; Fritz- scbe on Mk. p. G38 ; [cf. W. 24, 96 (91)].* yuvaiKcios, -eia, -elov, of or helonginr/ to a woman, femi- nine, female : I Pet. iii. 7. (From Horn, down; Sept.)* favf\, -atKos, r\ ; 1. univ. a woman of any age, wheth- er a \ irgin, or married, or a widow : Mt. i.K. 20 ; .xiii. 33 ; x.xvii. 55 ; Lk. xiii. 11 ; Acts v. 14, etc. ; j) fieiivrja-rivfifyr] Ttvl yvvf), Lk. ii. 5 R G ; jj vTravhpos yvvfi, Ilo. vii. 2 ; yuvij Xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14) ; xvii. 9 ; femina vidua, Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq. ; Eph. V. 22, etc. ; yvvri rivoi, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; .\L\. 3, 5 ; Acts V. 1, 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 2 ; Eph. v. 28 ; Rev. ii. 20 [G L'^^'H mrg.], etc. of a betrothed woman : Mt. i. 20, 24. r] yvvr) TovtraTpos his step-mother : 1 Co. r. 1 (3S Hi?*?, Lev. xviii. 8). tx^iv yvvaiKa : Mt. xiv. 4 ; xxii. 28 ; Mk. vi. 18 ; xii. 23 ; Lk. XX. 33 ; see exa>, I. 2 h. fin. yvvai, as a form of address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii. 57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and favor, Lk. xiii. 12; .In. iv. 21 ; or in respect, .In. ii. 4 ; xix. 26, (as in Horn. H. 3, 204 ; Od. 19, 221 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 16, 3). raXTi ywvias, Mt. x.\i. 42 ; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. j 17; Actsiv. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, (nip t^X"^, Ps.cxvii. (cxviii.) 22), the head of the corner, i. e. the corner-stone, (axpo- I yaviaios, q. v.) ; ai natrapts yaviai ttjs yfis, the four ex- ■ treme limits of the earth. Rev. vii. 1 ; xx. 8. b. like Germ. Winkel, Lat. angulus, Eng. (internal) corner, i. q. a secret place : Acts xxvi. 26, (so Plat. Gorg. p. 485 d. ^I'oi/ fimvm iv yoivia, Epict. diss. 2, 1 2, 1 7 ; [for other ex- amples see Wetstein on Acts 1. c. ; Stallbaum on Plato 1. c.]).* Aa^CS (the form in Rec. after the more recent codd. [minuscules, cf. Tdf. on Mt. i. 1, and Treg. on Lk. ui. 31]), AavtS (Grsb., Schott, Knapp, Theile, al.), and Aav- (18 (LTTrWH [on the « see WH. App. p. 155 and s. v. «, t]; cf. W. p. 44; Bleek on Ileb. voL ii. 1 p. 538; in Joseph, [antt. 6, 8, 1 sqq. also Nicol. of Damasc. fr. 31 p. 114] AavtSrjs, -ov), 6, (ill., and esp. after the exile TH, [i. e. beloved]), David, indecl. name of by far the most celebrated king of the Israehtes : Mt. i. 1, 6, 17, etc. ^ (TKTjvfj A. Acts XV. 16 ; r] «Xelc ToD A. Rev. iii. 7 ; oBpovos A. Lk. i. 32 ; o vios A., a name of the Messiah, viz. the descendant of David and heir to his throne (see ui'or, 1 b.) ; fj pl^a A. the offspring of David, Rev. v. 5 ; x.xii. 16; fj /3ao-iXei'a roC A. Mk. xi. 10 (see /SacriXcia, 3) ; «V AavtS, in the book of the Psalms of David, Ileb. iv. 7 [al. take it personally, cf. i. 1 sq. : yet see ex. I. 1 d.]. SaL(iov£5o(«ii ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. Sai/xowo-fltir : (Sai/iav) ; to be under the poicer of a demon : oXXos kqt' «XXtjk Saifio- vi^erat Tvxiv. PhUem. in Stob. eel. ])hys. 1 p. 1 96 ; of the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth. In the X. T. 8aipom(6p.cvoi are persons afflicted with especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such as paralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilepsy. melancholy, insanitv', etc.), whose bodies in the opinion of the Jews demons (see Satiioviov) had entered, and so held possession of them as not only to afflict them with ills, but also to dethrone the reason and take its place themselves ; accordingly the possessed were wont to ex- press the mind and consciousness of the demons dwell- ing Ln them ; and their cure was thought to require the expulsion of the demon — [but on this subject see B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Demoniacs and reff. there ; TFews, Leben Jesu bk. iii. ch. C] : i\It. iv. 24 ; viii. 16, 28, 33 ; ix. 32 ; xii. 22; xt. 22; Blk. i. 32; v. 15 sq.; Jn. x. 21 ; Satpcy vurBds, that had been possessed by a demon [demons], ilk. V. 18; Lk. viii. 36. Tliey are said also to be 6x>tov- fietfOL t'TTO or aTTO TrvevfiaTcav aKaddprojv. Lk. vi. 18 [TTr AVI I eVovX.] : Acts V. 16 : #cara6w!/a(rreuo/xei/ot vno tqv 8ta- /SdXou i. e. bv his ministers, the demons. Acts .x. 38.* 8aifi6viov, -ov, TO, (neut. of adj. daipovios, -a, -ov, divine, fr. Saifuov, equiv. to to ddov) ; 1. the dirine Power, deity, divinity; so sometimes in prof. auth. as Joseph, b. j. 1, 2, 8; Ael. v. h. 12, 57; in plur. Kaiva Smpoma, Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1 sq., and once in the N. T. ^iva baijio- via. Acts xvii. 18. 2. a spirit, a being inferior to God, superior to men [nap to Sai/ioviov ficTo^i icrn 6(ov tc Km Saifj.ovi(t)BT]ii 124 /iafj,a(TK7jii6<; BvrfTov, Plat. symp. 23 p. 202 e. (where sec Stallbaum)], in both a good sense and a bad ; thus Jesus, after his resurrection, said to his disciples ovk eljii Sai/jiomov atra- fiarov. as lirnat. (ad Sinyru. 3, 2) records it ; Tzvevfia Saifiovtov oKaSapTov (gen. of apposition), Lk. iv. 33 ; (^iroinjpov, 'I'ob. iii. 8, 1 " ; Saifioviov *j nvevfia Trovtjpi'w^ ibid, vi. S). 15ut elsewliere in the .Scriptures used, witliout an adjunct, of eril spirits or llie iiiesxengers and 7ninisters of the devil [W. 23 (22)] : Lk. iv. 35 ; ix. 1, 42 ; x. 17 ; Jn. X. 21 ; Jas. ii. 19 ; (Ps. ,\c. (xci.) 6 ; Is. xiii. 21 ; xxxiv. 14; Tob. vi. 18; viii. 3 ; Bar. iv. 35) ; nveifiara Sai/iovlaiv (Ree. Saifiovav). i. e. of that rank of spirits that are demons (gen. of appos.), Rev. xvi. 14 ; Spxav ran 8ai/jo- vi, 11,2 sq. ; (J, 8, 2 ; 8, 2, 5 ; but he sees in them, not as the N. T. writers do, bad angels, but the spirits of wicked men deceased, b. j. 7, 6, 3. Sat|ioviu8T)s, -ft, (Sai/tovtov, q. v., an. 552 e., and times without niunbcr in other aiitli.* SdKpv, -nor, TO, and to daKpvov, -ov, [fr. Ilom. down], a tear : Mk. ix. 24 R G ; Acts xx. 19, 31 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; Ileb. v. 7 ; xii. 1 7. The (nom.) form to Sd- Kpvov in Rev. vii. 17; xxi. 4, (Is. xxv. 8). dat. i)lur. SaKpvtri in Lk. vii. 38, 44, (Ps. cxxv. (cxxvi.) 5 ; Lam. ii. 11).- SaKpvu : 1 aor. t'Sdicpuo-a; to weep, shed tears: Jn. xi. 35. [From Horn. down. Stx. see icXai'm, fin.] ' SaKTvXios, -ov. 6, (fr. ScxKrvKot, because decorating the fingers), (I rinij : Lk. xv. 22. (From lldt. down.) " 8dKTv\os, -ov, 6, [fr. Batracli. 45 and Ildt. down], a Jin : 1 aor. iddpao'a: Pass., [pres. Sa/iiifo/iui] ; pf. SfSd/xao-fiai ; [akin to Lat. dnmo, dominus, Goth, ijaliini- j6a\p6s kt\. Mt. vi. 23 ; (Xevaovrai 6e f/ptpai, Mk. ii. 20 ; it opposes persons to persons or things previously men- tioned or thought of, — either with strong emphasis : iya, Se, Mt. V. 22, 28. 32, 34, 39. 44 ; i^/xfls- Be, 1 Co. i. 23 ; 2 Co. X. 13 ; (TV Be, ^It. vi. 6 : v/xflr Be, Jlk. viii. 29 ; 01 Be vloi TTJs /SactXeias, Mt. viii. 12; al dXaireKes . . . 6 Be vlos Tov dv6p. Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58 ; n-ar d Xodr . . . 01 Be *api(Taiot, Lk. vii. 29 sq. ; o Be nvevpariKos, 1 Co. ii. 15, and often ; — or with a slight discrimination, 6 6«, a^Tos Be : Mk. i. 45 ; V. 34 ; vi. 37 ; vii. 6 ; Mt. xiii. 29, 37, 52 ; xv. 2'3 sqq. ; Lk. iv. 40, 43 ; v. 16 ; vi. 8 ; viii. 10, 54 ; xv. 29 ; 01 Be, Mt. ii. 5 ; Mk. iii. 4 ; viii. 28, etc., etc. ; with the addi- tion also of a prop, name, as 6 Be 'ir/o-oCt: Mt. viii. 22 [Tdf. om. 'I.] ; ix. 12 [R G Trbr.], 22 [Tdf. om. 'I.] ; xiii. 57 ; Mk. i. 41 [R G L mrg. Tr mrg.] : dnoKp. Be (d) 'S.lp.aiv, Lk. vii. 43 R G L br. ; rj Be Mapla, Lk. ii. 19, etc. 2. fiev . . . Be, see fiev. 3. after negative sentences, hut, but rather (Germ, icohl aber) : Mt. vi. 19 sq. {pi] 6r)aav- pi^ere . . . 6rjo-avpi(eTe Be) ; x. 5 sq. ; Acts xii. 9, 14 ; Ro. iii. 4 ; iv. 5 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; vii. 37 ; 1 Th. v. 21 [not Rec] ; Eph. iv. 1 4 sq. ; Pleb. ii. 5 sq. ; iv. 13, 15; ix. 12; x. 26 sq. ; xii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 (ov;^ eavrois vpiv [Rec. fjp.^ Be) ; Jas. i. 13 sq. ; ii. 11. 4. it is joined to terms which are re- peated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions as tend to explain and establish them more exactly ; in this use of the particle we may supply a suppressed neg- ative clause [and give its force in Eng. by inserting / so>/, and that, so then, etc] : Ro. iii. 21 sq. (not that com- mon BiKaioavvr] which the Jews boast of and strive after, but BtKaioa. 3id ttiVtccos) ; Ro. i.x. 30 ; 1 Co. ii. 6 (a-o(f>lav Be ov TOV aiOivos Toirov) ; Gal. ii. 2 (I went up, not of my own accord, but etc.) ; Phil. ii. 8 ; cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 361 sij. ; L. Dindor/ in Steph. Thes. ii. col. 928 ; [cf. W. 443 (412)]. 5. it serves to mark a transition to something new (Be metabatic) ; by this use of the parti- cle, the'new addition is distinguished from and, as it were, opposed to what goes before: Mt. i. 18; ii. 19 ; x. 21 ; Lk. xii. 13 ; xiii. 1 ; Ju. vii. 14, 37 ; Acts vi. 1 ; Ro. viii. 28 ; 1 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 1, etc., etc. ; so also in the phrase eyeveTo Be', see ylvopai. 2 c 6. it introduces explana- tions and separates them from the things to be explained : Jn. iii. 19;vi. 39; 1 Co. i. 12; vii. 6, 29; Eph. v. 32, etc: — esp. remarks and explanations intercalated into the dis- course, or added, as it were, by way of appendix : Mk. v. 1 3 (^aav 8e' etc. R L br.) ; xv. 25 ; xvi. 8 [R G] ; Jn. vi. 10 ; Lx. 14 ; xii. 3 : toCto Be yeyove. 'Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4. Owing to tliis use, the particle not infrequently came to be con- founded in the Mss. (of prof. writ, also) with ydp ; cf. Winer on Gal. i. 1 1 ; Fritzsche on Mk. xiv. 2 ; also his Com. on Rom. vol. i. pp. 234, 265 ; ii. p. 476; iii. p. 196 ; [W. 452 (421); B. 363 (312)]. 7. after a parenthe- sis or an explanation which had led away from the sub- ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse again [cf. W. 443 (412)] : Mt. iii. 4 ; Lk. iv. 1 ; Ro. v. 8 ; 2 Co. ii. 12 ; v. 8 ; x. 2 ; Eph. ii. 4 ; cf. Klotz ad Devar. Se'i/ct? 126 &eiKiiiia> ii. 2 p. 37G sq. 8. it introduces the apodosis and, as it wero, opposes it to the protasis : Acts xi. 1 7 R G (1 Mace. xiv. ■>'.> : 2 Mace. i. ;M) ; after a participial con- struction whicli has the force of a protasis : Col. i. 22 (21); cf. Mattliiaeii. M70; Kiihnerii. «18; [Jclf §770]; Ivlotz u. s. p. 370 .sq.; [B. 36 4 (312)]. 9. koI . . . S/, but . . . also, yea and, mnreocer alno : Mt. x. 18 ; xvi. 18 ; Lk. ii. 3.5 [Wli txt.om. LTr br. 8«'] ; Jn. vi. 51 ; xv. 27 ; Acts iii. 24 ; xxii. 29 ; Ro. xi. 23 ; 2 Tun. iii. 12 ; iJn. i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i. 5; cf. Klotz u. s. p. G45 sq. ; B. 364 (312) ; [also W. 443 (413) ; EUic. on 1 Tim. iii. 10 ; Mey. on Jn. vi. 51]. koi iav 8f' yea even if: .In. viii. 16. 10. de never stands as the first word in tlie sentence, but generally second ; and when the words to which it is added cannot be sei> arated, it stands third (as in Mt. x. 11 ; xviii. 25 ; Mk. iv. 34 ; Lk. X. 31 ; Acts xvii. (! ; xxviii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 23 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8, etc. ; in ov iiovoi/ Si, Ro. v. 3, 11, etc.), or even in the fourth place, Mt. x. 18 ; Jn. vi. 51 ; viii. 16 sq. ; 1 Jn. i. 3; 1 Co. iv. 18; [Lk. xxii. 69 LTTrWH]. SeT)(ris, -eo)r, fj, (Seofiai) ; 1. need, indigence, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 25 ; Aeschin. di.al. 2, 39 sq. ; [Plato, Eryx. 405 e. bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385% 27]). 2. « seek- ing, asking, entreating, entreaty, {iv. Plat, down) ; in the N.T. requests addressed by men to God {Gerra. Bittge- bet, supplication) ; univ. : Jas. v. IG; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as often in the Sept., joined with npoa-evxrj (i. e. any pious address to God [see below]) : Acts i. 14 Rec. ; Eph. vi. 18 ; Phil. iv. 6 ; plur. 2 Tim. i. 3 ; joined with Trpoa-evxat, 1 Tim. V. 5; with injareiai., Lk. ii. 37; noielaBai. Sirja-iv, Phil. i. 4 ; rr. 8f^(r«£, Lk. v. 33 ; 1 Tim. ii. 1. contextu- ally, of prayers inq)lorinp; God's aid in some particular matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i. 19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppU- cation for others: [2 Co. i. 11]; ■rrepi tivo9, Eph. vi. 18; vnep Tivos, 2 Co. ix. 14 ; Phil. i. 4 ; with the addition npos Tov dfuv, Ro. X. 1.* [SvN. Strjffis, TT po(T€ V XV, ^frev^is: irp., as Prof. Grimm remarks, is unrestricted as respects its contents, while S. is petitiouary ; moreover irp. is a word of s a c r e d char- acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas 5. may also be used of a request addressed to man. In Byzantine Grk. it is used of a written supplication ( like our petition ) ; cf . Soph. Lex. s. v. See more at length Trench § Ii. ; also Bp. Lglitft. on Phil. iv. 6 ; EUic. on Eph. vi. 18 ; cf. Sclmiidt ch. vii. In 1 Tim. ii. 1 to these two words is added eyrev^is, whieh ex- presses confiding access to God ; thus, in com])inatiou, hi-qais gives prominence to the expression of personal need, irpocr- fvx'fl to the element of devotion, cyrev^ts to that of child- Uke confidence, by representing prayer as tlie heart's con- verse with God. See Iluther's extended note ad loc. ; Ellic. ad loc. ; Trench u. s.] tki ; subjunc. pres. Sctj ; impf. eSei : an impers. verb [cf. B. § 132, i2; cf. § 131, 3; fr. Horn, down]; (Se'o), sc. TtKoj, to have need of, be in want of; cf. Germ, ts hedarf), it i.« necesnary, there is need of, it behooves, is right and proper ; foil, either by the inf. alone (cf. our one ought), or by the ace. with inf. [cf. B. 147 (129)], it denotes any sort of necessity ; as a. necessity lying in the nature of the case : Jn. iii. 30 ; 2 Tim. ii. 6. b. necessity brought on by circumstances or by the conduct of others toward us : Jit. .xxvi. 35 (k&v Bti/ /ie aiToOavuv), cf. Mk. xiv. 31 ; Jn. iv. 4; Acts xxvii. 21 ; 2 Co. xi. 30; [xii. 1 LTTr Wlltxt.]; or imposed by a condition of min : 1 aor. eS«y|*dTt(ra ; (Say/ia); to make an example of, to shoir as an crumjili ; riva, to e.\l)ose one to disgrace (cf. TrapaSfiy^iaTifm, deaTpi^o)) : Mt. i. 19 L T TrWII; Col. ii. 15. A word unknown to Grk. writ. [Cf. Act. Petr. ct Paul § 33; "\V. 25 (24); 91 (87); SeiyiiaTurfios occurs on the Rosetta stone, line 30 ; Boeckh, Inscrr. 4697. CoMP. : 7rapa-d(iyp.aTi^co.'\* Sei.kvvcii {SetKvvftv, Mt. .xvi. 21 ; SeiKfUftr, Jn. ii. 18; toO SfiKvvovTos, Rev. xxii. 8 [not Tdf.]) and SflKyv/it (1 Co. xii. ;il ; Mt. iv. 8 ; Jn. v. 20 ; cf. B. 45 (39)) ; I'ut. Sel^o) : 1 aor. fSf i|a ; 1 aor. pass. ptcj). Sfixdds (Heb. viii. 5) ; Sept. mostly for HNin ; to shoic, exhibit ; 1. prop, to show i. e. expose to the eyes : tiv'l ti, Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv. 5 ; XX. 24 (for Rec. cm8ei'|.) ; x.xii. 12; x.xiv. 40 [RGL, but Tom. Trbr. WH reject the vs.]; Mk. xiv. 15; Jn. XX. 20; Acts vii. 3; 6&6v nvi, metaph., in which one ought to go, i. e. to teach one what he ought to do, 1 Co. xii. 31 : Kara tov tvttov tov SeixOfvra o'oi. Heb. viii. 5; tavTov SfiKvvmi Tivi to expose one's self to the view of one. Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; Sel^ov rjfiiv tov ■narepa render the Father visible to us, Jn. xiv. 8 sq.; of things presented to one in a vision : Twi rt. Rev. xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9 sq. ; .x.xii. 1,8; 8fi|a/ tiki, d 8fi yfvtadai, Rc\'. i. 1 ; iv. 1 ; xxii. 6. to show, i. q. to bring to pass, produce what can be seen (Germ, sehen lassen') ; of miracles per- Bei\ia 127 AeKaiToKi'; formed in presence of others to be seen by them : rjs, Jas. iii. 13. b. to show by words, to leach : foil, by on. Mt. xvi. 21 (Mda-Kfiv in Mk. viii. 31 for SfiKvut»») ; foil, by an inf. Acts X. 28. [CoMP. : dva-, aTTO-, eV-, fVi-, ino-SdKvvfii.^'' SciXfa, -as, T), (SetXof), limiilili/, fearfulncss, coirardicc : 2 Tim. i. 7. (Soph., [Hdt.], Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc, and subseq. writ.) * [Syn. Seihia, } ; 1 aor. eSdiTvqtra ; (Sfi- TTJ'oi') ; to sup : Lk. xvii. 8 ; xxii. 20 [WH reject the whole pass., see their App.] ; 1 Co. xi. 2.5 ; in an alle- gory, Simvrjcra) ptr avTov, I will make liim to share in my most intimate and blissful intercourse : Rev. iii. 20.* Seiitvov, -ou, to, and ace. to a rare and late form 6 fifiTri/or in Lk. xiv. 16 Lchm. [cf. Tdf. on Rev. xi.x. 9, 17, also W. G5 (64) ; on deriv. cf. San-dtT/], (in Ilom. the morning meal or breakfast, cf. Passow [more fully L. and S.] s. V. ; this the Greeks afterwards call to apia-Tov q. v. [and reff. there], designating as to SeiTrvoi' tlie evening meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu- ally held at evening : Lk. xiv. 17, 24 ; Jn. xiii. 2, 4 ; xxi. 20 ; plur. : Mt. xxiii. 6 ; Mk. xii. 30 ; Lk. (xi. 43 Lchm. in br.) ; xx. 46 ; used of the Messiah's feast, symbolizing salvation in the kingdom of heaven : Rev. xix. 9, 17; KvpiaKuv Sf'mvov (see levpiaKos, 1), 1 Co. xi. 20; jroteii' Sf'mvov, Lk. .\iv. 12 {apuiTov r/ bf'mvov) ; 16 (Dan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ; with the addition tiki, Mk. vi. 21 ; Jn. xii. 2. 2. univ./oof/ taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.* Seio-iSainovCa, -Of, ^, {hfitribaliiav), fear of the gods; 1. in a good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion: Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph, antt. 10, 3, 2; kqI Seo^tXiyr lilos, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. q. ij heCKla irpos to datpoviof (Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [cf. Jebb p. 263 S(j.]) ; su- perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24, 5] ; Plut. [Sol. 12, 4] ; Alex. 75, 1 ; de adulat. et am. 25, and in his Essay Trepl Trjs Seiat- Batpioi/tas ; Antonin. 6, 30 d(oaf^!js x<"P'f SetatSaipovias- 3. religion, in an objective sense ; in whicli sense Jose- phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews piri Tas Toiv tiWav i6va>v SfiaiSmfiovUis i^ovhtvi^tiv. Festus in the presence of Agi-ijjpa tlu' Jewish king employs the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19, of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave his own judg- ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz, Profangracitat u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59 ; \_K. F. Her- mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. .Mterthiimer, § 8 note 6 ; Trench §.\lviii.; (cf. Kenrick, Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108 sqq. ; Field, Otium ^J'orv. iii. p. 80 sq.)].* 8Euri-SaC)icDV, -ov, gen. -ovot, (Set'Sia to fear, and haifiav dehy) , fearing the deity or deities, Vike the Lat. religiosus; used either X. in a good sense, reverencing god or the gods, pious, religious : Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 58 ; Ages. 11, 8; Aristot. pol. 5, 11 [p. 1315% 1] ; or 2. in a bad sense, superstitious: Theophr. char. 16 (22); Diod. 1, 62; 4, 51 ; Plut. de adul. c. 16 ; de superstit. c. 10 sq. Paul in tlie opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts xvii. 22, calls them, with Icindly ambiguity, Kara iravTa Sciaidaifiovea-Tepovs (sc. than the rest of the Greeks [W. 244 (229)], cf. Mej-er ad loc.), as being devout without the knowledge of the true God ; ef. Bengel ad loc.* Stxa, 01, al, TO, [fr. Ilom. down], ten : Mt. xx. 24, etc. 6\i^is rjfiepiou SeKa, i. e. to last a short time : Rev. ii. 10 ; cf. Dan. i. 12, 14; Xum. xi. 19; Ter. heaut. 5, 1, 36 decern dierum vix mi est familia. ScKa-Svo, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later (see Passow s. v. S/xa [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. : cf. W. 23 (22); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept.; i. q. Sd)&€Ka, twelvv: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places L T Tr WII 8ciS«a ; [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. cdd. 2, 7].* \htKa.-i%, sixteen: Rev. xiii. ISLmrg. (Sept., al.) *] [86Ka-oKT<4 for Scxn Ka\ oKrti, eighteen : Tdf. in Lk. xiii. 4, 11, but Wllom. LTrbr. Kal: cf. s. v. Kai, I. 1 b.*] 8(iKa-Tr€'vT6, for the earlier irevrfKaiheKa, fifteen: Jn. xi. 18; Acts xxvii. 28; Gal. i. 18; [Gen. vii. 20 4.1d., Compl.; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Mace. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3 var. ; Diod. 2, 13; Plut. Dion 38, 1 ; al. ; cf. 8«aSuo].* AeKdv, ot, al, -aapa. tu, fourteen : Jit. i. 1 7 ; 2 Co. .\ii. 2 ; Gal. ii. 1. [(ien. .\x.\i. 41 ; Tob. viii. 10 ; .\. 7 ; I'olvl). 1, 3«, 11 ; ff. SfxaSvo.] ' ScKdn], -?)f, T), (SfKaTos). tlif tuntli ])art of any tliin : pf. deScKarcuKa ; pf. pa^s. SeSfKarw/iai ; (St- KOToy); to extict or receive the tenth part (for which Grk. writ, use heKareito [W. 24]) : with ace. of pers. from whom, Ileb. vii. G [on the i)f. cf. W. § 40, 4 a. ; Lyhtfi. St. Clement, App. p. 414]; Pass, to pay tithes (Vulg. deeimor): Ileb. vii. i). (Xeh. .\. 37.) [CoMP. : ano- ^eKaroo).] " StKTOs, -r;, -ox, (St'pfojaai), (icci'ptiil, (icceptnhh : Lk. iv. 24; I'liil. iv. 18; nvi, Acts x. 3 j ; the phrases Kinpiit fif/cToj, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for ]lin nj'), and evtavros ■SfKTos, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. Ixi. 2 for J1i"l nyd), denote that most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of (iod profusely abound. (Ex. .xxviii. 34 ; Is. Ivi. 7, [etc.]. Among jjrof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. § 20 p. 350.) • ScXedfu ; [pres. pass. SfXeufo/xat] ; (btXeap a bait) ; 1. ))rop. to hail, catch liij it hiiit: Xen. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al. 2. as often in prof, auth., metaph. to beguile bij htanilish- mentri, allure, entice, ileceire: Tim, 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18; Jas. i. 14, on this pass. cf. Philo, {sedere a tiextra alicuius, proxiniiun esse ab ali([uo), because they define the position of one standingorsittiug next another by proceeding /)'o;h the one next to Avhom he is said to stand or sit [ef. W. 367 (344)]. Kadiaai c'/c Se^iiv k. i^ fiwvvpmv Ttms ^affiXe'ior, to occupy the jilaces of honor nearest the king, Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37,40; (3E?; "2 pp'S, 1 K. ii. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 10). Hence, after Ps. cix. (ex.) 1 as applied to the Messiah (IMt. xxii. 44 ; Mk. xii. 36 ; Lk. xx. 42), Christ is said to have ascended Kadrja-Sm or KaBltrai c'k Sf^imc {at or on the right hand) of God, Mt. xxvi. 64 ; Mk. xiv. 62; xvi. 19; Lk. xxii. 69; Acts ii. 34 ; Heb. i. 13 ; f'wu or Kadiaai iv Sf^ia t. 6eov, Ro. viii. 34; Eph.i. 20; Col. iii. 1; Ileb. i. 3; viii. 1 ; x. 12; xii. 2, — to indicate that he has become a partner in God's universal government (cf . Knapp, De J. Chr. ad dextram dei sedentc, in his Scripta var. arg. p. 41 sqq. ; \^Stuart, Com. on Heb., excui-s. iv.]). That these expressions are to be understood in this figurative sense, and not of a fi.xed and definite ])lace in the highest lieavens (as Chr. Fr. Frilzsche in Xov. Opuscc. acad. p. 209 stjq. tries to prove, after the orthodox theologians of the reformed church), will be (|iicstioned by no one who carefully considers Rev. iii. 21. Christ is once spoken of as «Vraf ix hf^imv Toil 6eov, as though in indignation at his ad\ersaries [ace. Seo/Lta 129 B£a-fj.o to want, need ; whence mid. Seo/xai to stand in need of, want /or one's self) ; [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. lo want, lack: Tivos. 2. to desire, long for: Tiwf. 3. to ask; beg, (Germ, bitten) ; a. univ. — the thing asked for !x'- ing evident from the context : with gen. of the pers. from whom. Gal. iv. 12; the thing sought being specified in direct discourse: Lk. v. 12; viii. 28; ix. 38 (ace. to the reading ini^Xc^ov R L) ; Acts viii. 34 (Se'o/iai crou, jTfpi Tivos 6 npo, as Keppa fr. Kelpai), a skin, hide, leather: Heb. xi. 37. (Hom. et sqq.) * 8€p(iaTtvos, -t;, -OK, (bippa), made of skin, leathern (Vulg. pelliceus): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6; cf. 2 K. i. 8. (Hum., Hdt., Plat., Strab., al.) * Se'piD ; 1 aor. eSeipa ; 2 fut. pass, hapr^aopm ; 1. to fhiij, skin: Hom. II. 1,459; 23, 107, etc. 2. to beat, thrash, smite, (cf. Germ, durchgerben, [low Eng. hide']), so sometimes in prof. auth. fr. Arstph. ran. 019 [cf. vesp. 9 485] down : Tivd, Bit. xxi. 35 ; ]\Ik. xii. 3, 5 ; Lk. xx. 10 sq. ; xxii. 63 ; Jn. xviii. 23 ; Acts v. 40 ; xvi. 37 ; xxii. 19; els irpotnmov Sepnv rivd, 2 Co. xi. 20 ; depa hepeiv (see dj)p), 1 Co. ix. 26; Pass.: Mk. xiii. 9 ; Lk. xii. 47 (Sap^o-erai woXXas, sc. jrXij-yas, will be beaten with many stripes); 48, (oXi'yof, cf. Xen. an. 5, 8, 12 TraUiv iXiyas, Soph. El. 141.5 TTaiHv hnrXrjv, Arstph. nub. 968 (972) TvTmaBai. TroXXds, Plat. legg. 8 p. 845 a. paa-TtyovcrSat nXriyds; cf. [W. 589 (548)]; B. [82 (72)]; § 134, 0).* 8tcr|i£iiii) ; [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. itea-pevfTo (Lk. viii. 29 T Tr WH)] ; (Sta-pos) ; a. to put in chains : Lk. viii. 29 T Tr WH ; Acts xxu. 4 ; (Sept. Judg. xvi. 1 1 ; Eur. Bacch. 610; Xen. Hier. 6, 14; Plat. legg. 7 p. 808 d.). b. to bind up, bind together: t^opria, Mt. xxiii. 4 ; (Spuypara, Gea. -xxxvii. 7 ; Judith viii. 3. [Hes. opp. 479, al.j;.* 8€ri.ton, a jailer : Acts xvi. 23, 27, 30. (Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 1 ; Lcian. Tox. 30; [Artem. oneir. 3, 60; al.] ; apx'8eo-fio<^uXa|, Gen. xxxix. 21-23.)* BeaficoTrjpiov 130 Bex^o/iac S«r|uiTfjpiav, -01), TO, a prison, Jail : Mt. xi. 2 ; Acts v. 21, 23 ; xvi. 26. (Gen. xl. 3 ; [Hilt.], Thuc, Plat., Dem., al.)' 8« K. vi. 19) ; Sevre fir r.ydpovs, Mt. xxii. 4 ; tis eprniov tottov, Mk. vi. 31 ; hevre irpos fie, 5It. xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an intci-jection, come ! come note ! foil, by a hortat. subj. : SfOrc, cnroKri'ivu>p.ev, Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 and RG in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept. mostly for oS, sometimes for 1S3.) * ScuTcpaios, -ala, -aiov, (Sevrepos), [Hdt., Xen., al.], of or belonging to the second ; of one who comes, or does a thing, on the second day (cf. TpiTotos, TerapTmos, etc.) : Sfvrepaioi rfkBofitv, Acts xxviii. 13 ; cf. W. § 54, 2; [B. §123,9].* Sevrepi^rpuTOs, -ov, sfrond-fr.it (cf. ScvTfpecr^aTos sec- ond-last, last but one) : iv a-a^^ara SevreponpaiTM in Lk. vi. 1 seems to be, ike second of the first sohbath.i after the feast of the Passover; cf. Redslob in the Intelligenzblatt zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70; J5:«'f(W, Jahrbb. d. bibl. Wissen.sch. i. p. 72; [IF//. App. ad loc.]. The various oiiinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and JleClel- lan] ad loc. and Liibkert in the Stud, und Krit. for 1835, J). GiJ4 sqcj. (Kuslral. in \ ita Kutych. n. 95 calls the first Sunday after Kaster htvTtpoTrpioTrfv KvpiaKr/v). [But the genuineness of the word is ipiestionalile. It is wanting in KBLl , 33, 69 and some other authorities. Hence Tr txt. WII om. the word, L Tr mrg. br. it. Tischendorf, after expunging it in his 2d cd., restored it in his 7th, subse- quently put it in brackets, and finally (ed. 8) inserted it again. It is questioned or discarded, by Mey., Bleek, Alf., Weiss (on Mk. p. 101), IIollz., Ililgenf., Volkm., Farrar (Com. ad loc. and Life of Christ i. 435), al. For the evidence sec Tdf.'s note, and for discussions of it see WII. App. ad loc. ; Scrirencr, Intr. p. 515 sq. ; Green, •■Developed Criticism" ad loc.]* Seirtpos, -fpa, -fpov, [fr. Horn, down; Curtius §277], second : Mt. xxii. 26 ; Mk. xii. 21 ; Lk. xii. 38; .In. iv. 54 ; Rev. iv. 7, etc. ; the second, the other of two : !Mt. xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii. 31 ; 1 Co. .xv. 47 ; Tit. iii. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; bevrepos ffavaros (see ^ai/aror, 3), Rev. ii. 11; XX. 14 ; xxi. 8 ; Sfvrepa x. 177 a. rfXfuri^o-aiTar avToiis . . . 6 rSiv kokoiv Kadapos ToTTOi ov Be^(Tai). b. with ace. of pers. (o j-eceire, grant access to, a visitor; not to refuse intercourse or friend- ship : Lk. ix. 1 1 R G ; Jn. iv. 45 ; 2 Co. vii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 14 ; Col. iv. 10 ; to receive to hospitality, Mt. x. 14, 40 sq. ; Jlk. vi. 11 ; Lk. ix. 5, 53; x. 8, 10; Acts xxi. 17 Rec. ; Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; ■Kaiblov, to receive into one's family in order to bring up and edu- cate, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48; to receive eU T. o'kov!, ras (TKTfvas, Lk. xvi. 4, 9 ; 8f^a( to irvevpd fLov, to thyself in heaven, Acts vii. 59. c. with ace. of the thing offered in speaking, teaching, instructing; to receive fa- Bea 131 SrjXoo) vorahhj, give ear In, embrace, make one's own, approve, not to reject: tov \6yov, Lk. viii. 13; Actsviii. 14; xi. 1 ; xvii. 11 ; 1 Th. i. (1 ; ii. 13 ; Jas. i. 21 ; to toO irvei- fiaros, 1 Co. ii. 14 ; Ttjv TvapdKKrjaw, 2 Co. viii. 1 7 ; tiji/ ayaTrr^v rrji a\r]6(ias sc. commended to tLeiii, 2 Th. ii. 10 ; [add the eUiptieal eonstr. in Mt. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ; to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4 Rec. d. to receive i. q. to take upon one's self, sustain, bear, endure : riva, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. Ifi, (rfju aSiKtav, Hebr. SE?J, Gen. 1. 1 7 ; ttuu, o iav iirax6fi, Sir. ii. 4 ; fiiiOov ;(aXf7rw, Horn. Od. 20, 271, and often in Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ, empfangcn) : i-KKTToKds, Acts xxii. 6 ; ypajiiiara, Acts xxviii. 21 ; rr^v ^aaikdav Tov 6eov, to become a ])artaker of the benefits of God'.s kingdom, ilk. x. 15 ; Lk. .xviii. 1 7 ; \6yia (aivra, Acts vii. 38 ; eitayyfKwv, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; rrju x^pi-" ''""i' 6fov, 2 Co. vi. 1 ; — i. q. to learn: PhU. iv. 18 [(?) see the Comm. ad loc.].* [Syn. S4xo/j.ai, \a/i0oiya: The earlier classic use of these verbs sustains in tlie main the distinction laid down in the glossaries (e. g. Ammonius s. v. \a0e'!i>: \a$e7v n4v effTt, rh Keifiepotf ri aveXiffOat • Se^aadat 5e', rb SiS6/ji€voy 4k Xe'pis), and the suggestion of a self-prompted taking stiU adheres to A. in many connexious (cf. XafieTy tivo. yvvaiKa, apxh" Aa/Seii') in distinction from a receiving of what is offered ; in use, however, the words overlap aud distiuctions disappear ; yet the suggestion of a w e 1 c o m i n g or an a p- propriating reception generally cleaves to S. See Schmidt ch. 107, who treats of the comp. of S. in detail. COiMP. : hva-, wro-, Sfo-, 6iV-, eK-, air-€K-, eV-, ein-, napa-, irpotr-, viroS^xofiaL-] 8cu : [fut. 8j7tra>] ; 1 aor. i'STjcra ; pf. ptcp. ScSe/cmr (Acts xxii. 29) ; Pass., jif. ScSf/iai ; 1 aor. inf. Sedfivai (Acts xxi. 33) ; Sept. chiefly for ^DN ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; In hind, tie, fasten ; 1. prop. : ti, tir Sec/ias, Mt. xiii. 30 [Tr WII br.Gprob.om.Wj,cf.B. 150(131); W. 225 (211)]; o^o'w; Tfo-irapariv apxaii Sc5e/i. a sheet bound by the four cor- ners (to the sky), Acts x. 11 (G L T Tr WH om. deSep,. Kal) ; an animal, to prevent it from straying about, ovos Sedfiicvr], TToJXos dedtpivos, Mt. xxi. 2 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; Lk. xix. 30 ; witli TTpos T. diipav added, 'Slk. xi. 4 ; with ace. of pers. tn bind, to fasten loilh chains, to throw into chains : dyyiXovs, Rev. Lx. 14 ; a madman, Trefiats xai aXvaetrt, Mk. v. 3 sq. ; captives, Mt. [xii. 29] ; xiv. 3 ; xxii. 13 ; xxvii. 2; Mk. [iii. 27]; vi. 17; .xv. 1; Jn. .xviii. 1 2 ; Acts ix. 14; xxi. 11 ; xxii. 29 ; Rev. xx. 2 ; Pass., Mk. xv. 7 ; Jn. xviii. 24; Acts Lx. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. Sedepevov ayeiv Tiva) ; Acts .xxi. 13 ; .xxii. 5 ; .xxiv. 27 ; Col. iv. 3 ; SKicreai, Acts xii. 6 ; xxi. 33 ; 6 Xoyos tov 6eov ou ScSerm, fi". for these bonds of mine in no way hinder its course, i. e. the preaching, extension, and eflieacy of the gospel, 2 Tim. ii. 9^ the bodies of the dead, which were wont to be bound with bandages and linen cloths : 6 Te6vr)Kas SeSepfvos Tovs TToSas k. ras ;(f ipof Keipiais, bound hand and foot with grave-cloths, Jn. xi. 44 ; to crapa odoviois (Tdf. 2, 7 cV ciBov.), to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 40. 2. metaph. a. Satan is said brfoai a woman bent together, i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos- session of the woman and preventing her from standino- upright, Lk. .xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to hind, i. e. put under obligation, sc. of law, duty, etc. : StSepevos ra irvfipaTi, bound or constrained in my spirit, i. e. compelled by my convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth. as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. dvdyKTj Sc'Sfrat ^ TTpoaTaTTfi av- Tw) ; with dat. of pers. Sedta-dat rwl In be bound to one : dvSpi, of a wife, Ro. vii. 2 ; yvvaiav(p6s: S. evident, what is kuowu and un- derstood, . manifest, as opp. to what is concealed or iuvisilile ; 8. points rather to imier perception, eW((7y)s, doubtless, verily : ov Sijirov not surely (Germ, doch nicht etwa), hardly I trow ; (cf. Rost in Passow i. p. G13'' ; Ktotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 427 sip). Once in Scripture : Ileb. ii. IG.* [A£o, see Zeis.] Sid, ["written 8i before a vowel, exc. in prop, names and 2 Co. v. 7; Ko. viii. 10" 'J\lJ'. Proleg. p. 94], akin to 8/9 and Lat. dis in composition, jirop. denoting a divis- ion into two or more parts; a prejjositiou taking the gen. and the ace. In its use the bibl. writ, differ in no respect fr. the Grk. ; cf. W. 377 (353) sqq. ; 398 (372) sq. A. with the Genitive: through; I. of Place; 1. prop, after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion, or an act, that occurs through any place : hC "iXXijs oBov avaxaipfiv, Mt. ii. 12; Si' di>v8pv TdTrwi/, Ml. xii. 43 ; 6ia Trjs Sapapeias, Jn. iv. 4 ; Siii t^s 6vpas, Jn. x. 1 sq. ; add, Mt. xix. 24; Mk. ii. 23; x. 2.5; xi. 16; Lk. iv. 30; v. 19; xviii. 25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Ilcb. ix. 11 sq. ; xi. 29, etc.; St' vpav, through your city, Ko. xv. 28 ; [on 8ta wain-uv. Acts ix. 32, see was, H. 1] ; o 8ta ttovtuiv, diffusing his saving influence through all, Eph. iv. G ; o-tiffo-flai 81a Tivpot, 1 Co. iii. 15; Smo-tof. hC vSaros, 1 Pi'l. iii. 20 (Ev. Nicod. c. 9 ]). 5G8 sq. ed. Thilo [p. 228 cd. Tdf.] Sia 6aKa;(fo-flat, (ItJipX- Sia TLvos will, a thing, Ileb. ix. 12 ; 1 Jn. v. G, [but cf. W. 380 (355)]; St viTopov!js, Ro. viii. 25, (8ta n('v6ovs TO yijpas Stayeiv, Xen. Cyr. 4, G, 6 ; cf. ]\Iatthiae ii. ]). 1353). II. of Time [cf. W. 380 (35G) ; ElUc. or Mey. on Gal. ii. 1; Fritzsohe as below]; 1. of continued time; hence a. of the time throughout (during) which anything is done : Mt. xxvi. 61 ; Mk. xiv. 58 ; St oXijs (t?js R G) vvktos, Lk. V. 5 ; Sia tthwos tov ^v, Ileb. ii. 15 ; 133 8»a TravTos [so L WH Tr (exc. Mk. v. 5 ; Lk. xxiv. 53)], or written together Stairavros [so G T (exc. in lit.) ; cf. W. 4G (45) ; Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continualli/, always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. XT. (xTi.) 8) ; x. 2; xxiv. 16 ; Ro. xi. 10 (fr. Ps. Lxviii. (LxLx.) 24) ; 2 Tli. iii. 16 ; Heb. ix. 6 ; xiii. 15, (often in Grk. writ.), b. of the time within which a thing is done : hia r^t miKTOi (L T Tr ^^ H Sia wktus), by night, Actsv. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; .xxiii. 31, (Palaeph. 1, 10); hC fniepav reircrapaKovra, repeatedly witliin the space of forty days. Acts i. 3 ; — (denying this use of the prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed through: Gal. ii. 1 [cf. W. 380 (350)]; di rificpdv, (some) days having intervened, after (some) days, ilk. ii. 1 ; 8t' eVtSi/ wXciof (MI/, Acts xxiv. 17 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 50 ; [W. 380 (356) ; L. and S. s. v. A. n. 2 ; Soph. Lex. s. v. 2 ; Field, Otium Xorv. iii. p. 14]. Hi. of the Means or Instrument by which any- thing is effected ; because what is done by means of a person or thing seems to pass as it were through the same [cf. W. 378 (354)]. 1. of one who is the author of the action as well as its instrument, or of the effi- cient c a u s e : fit* avTOv (i. e. ToO diov) Ta iravra sc. eariv or iycvero, Ro. xi. 36 ; also 8t' o5, Heb. ii. 10; 8i' ov ckXtj- 6j]Te, 1 Co. i. 9 ; add [Gal. iv. 7 L T Tr WH, see below] ; Ileb. vii. 21 (^ larpLier] iratra 8ta tov 6eov tovtov, i. e. Aes- culapius, KvffepvaTai, Plat. symp. p. 186 e. ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 15, [and for exx. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1]) ; of him to whom that is due which any one has or has done ; hence i. q. hi/ the fault of any one : Bi ov to (TKavSaXov ep)^€Taif Mt. xviii. 7 ; 8t' eco? av6p. fj apapria . . . ftajjXde, Ro. V. 12, cf. 16-19; jjoSevei 8ta T^r aapKOi, Ro. viii. 3; bi/ the merit, aid, favor of any one : tV fm^ jiaaiXevaovac Sid etc. Ro. V. 1 7, cf. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. xv. 21 ; Sia to» Xptarov, and the like: Ro. v. 1 sq. 11 ; Acts x. 43; Gal. iv. 7 [Rec, but see above] ; So^d^eiv t. 6fi>v Sta 'lijo-oC Xpiarov, 1 Pet. iv. 11, and evxapiare'iv tw 6ea Sta 'Iijo". Xp. Ro. i. 8 ; vii. 25 (where L T Tr WII txt. xdpis tm dea) ; Col. iii. 17, — because the possibihty both of glorifying God and of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ ; KnvxaaOai iv ra deca dia ^Irjcr. Xp. Ro. v. 11 ; dvaTTavfO-Oat 8td TLvo^, Philcm. 7 ; ol TreTriarevKnTis Sta ttj^ ^dpiTos^ Acts xviii. 2 7 ; TroXX^y dpjjvrji Tvyxdvovres 6ia aov . . . Stci Tijs ails TTpovoiai, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ; vwepviKav Sta tov dyan-ij- aavTos fjpds, Ro. viii. 3 7 ; itepicrtrevfiv hm rivof, by the increase which comes from one, Phil. i. 26 ; 2 Co. i. 5 ; ix. 12 ; Sta t^j vpav Se^o-emr, Pliil. i. 19; add, Philem. 22 ; Ro. i. 12; 2Co. i.4; Gal. iv. 23: 1 Pet. i. 5. 2. of the instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instru- mental cause in the stricter sense: — with gen. of pers. bt/ the service, the intervention of, ani/ one ; with gen. of thing, bi/ means of with the help of an;/ thintf, a. in passages where a subject expressly mentioned is said to do or to have done a thing by some person or by some thing : ilk. xvi. 20 (tov kvAov tuv "Koyov ffe^movvroi Sta T. oTj/xetoji») ; Lk. i. 70 ; Acts i. IG ; ii. 22 (rfpcuri .]) ; 8ia ;^ii'p7-ou «m fie\nvos, 2 .In. 12; 6ia fiii^avos k. KaXa/iov. 3 .In. 13, (Plut. Sol. 17, .'!). To this head I sliipiilil refer also the use of Sia tivos in exhortations etc., where one seeks to strenj^thcn his e.xhortation by the mention of a thing or a ])erson held sacred by those whom he is admonishing (6iu equiv. to hi/ an alhisiott In, hi/ remindinr/ you o/ [ef. W. 381 (3.57)]): Ilo. -xii. 1; XV. 30 ; 1 Co. i. 1 ; 2 Co. X. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 2 [yet cf . W. 3 79 (355) note] ; 2 Th. iii. 1 2 R G. B. with the Accusative [W. 898 (372) sq.]. I. of Place; through ; often so in tlie Grk. poets, once in the N. T. ace. to LTTrWII viz. Lk. xvii. 11 hia yiiaov Zajiapfias, for R G Sta p.((Tov 2a/i. [but see fiicos, 2]. II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which anything is or is not done ; hij reason of, hccaufe of (Germ, atis Gruml). 1. of the reason for which a thing is done, or of the efficient reason, when for greater perspicuity it may be rendered h/ [cf. Kiihner § 134 Anm.] ; a. with ace. of the thing : bC ijv, viz. Ti)v Tov 6eov Tfjiepav (prop, by reason of whicli day i. e. because it will come [cf. W. 400 (373)]), 2 Pet. iii. 12; hiii T. Xo'yow (lirop. by reason of the word i. e. because the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3 ; Sia to Bi'Krjfid aov (Vulg. pro/>ler roluntalem tuam i. e. because thou didst will it), Kev. iv. 11; add. Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14, (d"a/3t(!)(TKfTai 6ia ttjv tov naTpos cj)ir ; cf. W. 399 (372)] : 8m (ftSo- vov, because prompted by envy, /or envy, Jit. xxvii. 18; Mk. XV. 10; Sm TOV ^d/dov Ticdj, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 38 ; xx. 19 ; Rev. xviii. 10, 15 ; 6m ttjv ttoXX^i/ dydnrjv, E])h. ii. 4. of any other cause on account of which one is said to do or to have done something, — as in Mt. xiv. 3, 9 ; xv. 3, 6 ; Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq. ; xii. 11 ; xiv. 11 ; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro. iii. 25 (8m Trjv ndpeatv Tciv irpoyey. ApnpTjjfi. Ijeeause of the pretermission etc., i. e. because he had left the sins un- ])unished) ; Ro. vi. 19 ; xv. 15 ; 2 Co. ix. 11 ; (ial. iv. 13 {bt dadivaav Trjs trapKos, on account of an inlirmity of the flesh, i. e. detained among you by sickness ; cf. AV'^ieseler [or iip. Lghtft.] ad loe.) ; — or to suffer or have suffered something, Mt. xxiv. 9 ; xxvii. 19 ; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25 ; Acts xxi. 35 ; 2 Co. iv. 1 1 ; Col. iii. 6 ; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; Rev. i. 9 ; vi. 9; — or to have obtained something, Ileb. ii. 9 ; v. 14; 1 Jn. ii. 1 2 ; — or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10 ; xi. 28; Ei)h. iv. 18; Ileb. v. 12 [W. 399 (373)]; vii. 18. of the imjieding cause, where by reason of some per- son or tiling something is said to have been impossible : Mt. xiii. 58 ; xvii. 20; Mk. ii. 4 ; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts xxi. 34 ; Ileb. iii. 19 ; iv. 6. bid with the ace. of a pers. is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. /o7' the sake of] : Mk. ii. 27; Jn. xi. 42; xii. 30; 1 Co. xi. 9; Heb. i. 14; vi. 7; bid Tovs €KKeKToii, Mt. xxiv. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 20 ; 2 Tim. ii. 1 ; 8ia Xpto-ToV for Christ's sake, to promote his cause, 1 Co. iv. 10; Si' iipds, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9; Pliil. i. 24 ; 1 Th. i. 5. bid Tiva, because of the example set by one : 2 Co. ii. 10 ; Ro. ii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 2 ; bid tov Xpiarovfor Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Phil, iii. 7 (equiv. to iva XpiaTov Kepbrjao), vs. 8). c. 6m to, because that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; — or having a subject ace. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12 ; Mk. v. 4 ; Lk. ii. 4 ; xix. 1 1 ; Acts iv. 2 ; xii. 20 ; xviii. 2 ; xxvii. 4, 9 ; xxviii. 18 ; Phih i. 7 ; Ileb. vii. 24 ; x. 2 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; — or with its subject ace. evident from the context, as Jit. xiii. 6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xviii. 5 ; xxiii. 8 ; Acts viii. 1 1 ; xviii. 3. C. In Composition 6m indicates 1. a passing through space or time, thruui/h, {biafialvui, bilp^op-ai, biii- Xifo), etc.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (Sia/j/j/co, 6m- TfXe'ti), biaTJjpeai), and completeness of action (biaKadapl(u>, bia(wvvvpi). 3. distribution (8m8i'8w//i, biayyiWa, 6m- (f>rjij.i(a>). 4. separation (8mXyM, Smipe'u). 5. rival- ry and endeavor (bianlva. SuiKuTe'Kfyxoftai : cf. Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 854; [Winer, as below, p. 6]). 6. transition from one state to another {biaWdcrao). biopBoa). [Cf. Win- er, De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. ; Valckenaer on Ildt. 5, 18; Ca?(icr. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch,C:int. 1810,p. 39; A. Sia^aivco 135 Bcdyeo Rieder, Ueb. d. mit melir als ein. pr'ap. zusammeng. verba im N. T. p. 1 7 sij.] No one of the N. T. writers makes more freq. use of verbs compounded with Sid than Luke, [see the list in Winer, u. s. p. 3 note ; on their constr. W. § 52, 4, 8]. 8ia-Paivw : 2 aor. Sie'jBijv, inf. Bia^ijvat, ptep. Stands ; as in Grk. writ. fi-. Horn, down ; (Wm. peiiranseo) ; to pass Ihrriur/k, cross oi'er; a. transitively; T171' ^dXacrtrav wr Sia iijpas, Ileb. xi. 29. b. intrans. : Trpos rii/a, Lk. xvi. 2G ; fif with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 9 ; (for 13^;^ 1 S. .xiii. 7).* 8ia-pd\Xu: 1 aor. pass. Sie/SXTj^Tji/; 1. p'^op. to throw ocer or across, to send over, (tI htd rtvos). 2. very often, fr. Hdt. down, to traduce, calumniate, slander, accuse, defame (of. Lat. perstrmgere, Germ, durchziehen, [6ia as it were from one to another ; see Winer, De verb, «omp. etc. Pt. V. p. 17]), not only of those who bring a false charge against one {Sie^Xrjro irpos avrbv aSiKois, Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 3), but also of those who disseminate the truth concerning a man, but do so maliciously, insidi- ously, with hostility [cf. Luciau's Essay de calumn. non temere credend.], (Dan. iii. 8 Sept.; Dan. vi. 24 Theo- dot.) ; so SiefiXrj6r] avra a>s dtacTKopTtl^wv, Lk. xvi. 1 , (with dat. of pers. to whom the charge is made, also in Hdt. 5, 35, et al. ; nva npos riua, Hdt. 5, 96, et al. ; foil, by mr with ptcp., Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 23 ; Plat. epp. 7 p. 334 a.). [Syx. see Karrjyop^bi.'] * Si.a-p£pai6o(iai. (-oiinai.) ; mid. to affirm strongli/, assert conjideiithi, [cf. W. 253 (238)]: nepi twos (Polyb. 12, 11 (12), 6), 1 Tim. i. 7 [cf. WH. App. p. 1G7]; Tit. iii. 8. (Dem. p. 220, 4 ; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ael.) * 8ia-p\e'ira) : fut. 8ia/3Xf v^m ; 1 aor. Stc^X(\j/a ; to look Ihrourjh, penetrate hij vision ; a. to took Jixedlij, stare straif/ht before one (Plat. Phaedo p. 86 d.) : Sie'/SXexJ/'e, of a blind man recovering sight, Mk. viii. 25 T WU Tr txt. [some refer this to b.]. b. to see clearly : foil, by an inf. expressing the purpose, Mt. vii. 5 ; Lk. vL 42. (Aristot., Plut.) * SidpoXos. -ov, (SiaiSaXXu, q. v.), prone to slander, slander- ■ous, accusing falsehj, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut., al.) : 1 Tim. iii. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. ii. 3 ; as subst. 6 6(d/3oXof, ii calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see Kanjyopeoi, fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11,5; [Aristot., al.]) : Sept. Esth. vii. 4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. 6 Sia^oXos [also Sia^. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118) ; B. 89 (78)] is applied v hiayevofiivaiv tivChv, Acts xxv. 13 ; iKaviiv ^(po-joti hiayevofitvov, Acts xxvii. 9 ; hiayevop-ivov tov o-a^fidTov, ?dk. xvi. 1.* Sia-^iviio-Kn) ; fut. SiayvwiTopaL ; 1. to distinguish (Lat. dignosco), i. e. to knoiv accurately, ascertain exactly: tI, Acts xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic. cognosco) : ra Kaff i/iSr your case, Acts xxiv. 22 ; (2 Mace. ix. 15 ; Dem. p. 629, 25 ; p. 545, 9 ; al.).* Sia-YV(i>pC^(i> : 1 aor. Steyvapiira ; to publish abroad, make known thoroughly: ncpl tivos, Lk. ii. 17 RG. Besides, only in [Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang. and] in Sohol. in Dekk. Anccd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate* Sid-YvoHTis, -eios, T), (see hiayivixTKo)) ; 1. a dislin- guishiiig. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. cognitio), examina- tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 18 ; Plat. legg. 9 p. 865 c.) : Acts x.xv. 21.* Sia-Yo-y7v5u : impf. Si(y6yyv(ov; to inurmur (Sia i.e. either tlirough a whole crowd, or ' among one another,' Germ, durch einander [cf. 81a, C.]) ; hence it is always used of many indignantly complaining (see yoyyvfo)) : Lk. XV. 2 ; xix. 7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7, 8 ; [Xum. xiv. 2] ; Josh, ix. 24 (18), etc. ; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24 ; Clem. Alex. i. p. 528 ed. Pott. ; Hehod. 7, 27, and in some Byzant. writ.) Cf. 117«. Dc verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.* Sta-7pT|Yopeci), -a> : 1 aor. dieyprjyopriaa ; to watch through, (Hdian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] Ttda-rjt Ttjs vvktos . . ■ Sia- yprjyopTjaavTfS, Niceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571 a.) ; to remain awake : Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down, ^(^aprip. vvva) ; [al. (e. g. R. V. txt.) to be fully awake, cf. Kiccph. u. s. p. 205 f. 86^av dnf^oKoiirjv axrirep 01 Bia- yprfyopiiaatrres Ta iv Tois CTrvots ovdpara; 117». De verb. conq). etc. Pt. v. p. 11 sq.].* 8i-d-y "''ddcd or understood, /0 ;)f«s : fiiov, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (very often in Grk. writ.) ; Btayfiv (V Tivt, fc. tok ^iW /o /((v> [\V. 593 (5jl sq.) ; B. 144 (12C)], Tit. iii. \i («V (jiiXoa-oipla, Plat. I'haedr. p. 2J9 d. ; cV fipiycfl «ai liie band marked with white with whieh Per.sian kings used to bind on the turban or tiara ; the kingly or- nament for the head : Rev. xii. 3 ; .xiii. 1 ; xix. 1 2. (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 13 ; Esth. i. 11 ; ii. 1 7 for 1713 ; 1 Maec. i. 9.)* [Sts. 8i(£5))yna, (rr4^avos: (tt. like the Lat. corona is a crown in the sense of a cliaplet, «Teath, or ijarland — tlie badge of " victory in the games, of civic wortli, of military valor, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness " ; Siiiritna is a crown as thehailge of rovaltv, i8ao-iA.ei'as7i'!upi or 8ia(a}vvvpi : 1 aor. 6ie'fa-a(ra iravraxodfv Trjv jriiXii» SieXa/ji/^e ?roX- X^) : (avTov, Jn. xiii. 4 ; Pass. Sia^avvvpal ti Io he girded : a (by attraction for [yet cf. 3Iey.]) ^v bie^oiapivos, Jn. xiii. 5 ; Jlid. 8ia^u>vwpai ti to gird one's self with a thing, gird a thing around one's self: Jn. xxi. 7 ; (Ezek. xxiii. 15 [Alex.], in Grk. writ, occasionally fr. Thuc. on). Cf. I1'7h. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 13.* 8io9s Ttjs SiaS. (n"^3n p^K, Deut. x. 8; xxxi. 9; Josh. iii. 6, etc.), the ark of the covenantor lair, in which those tables were deposited, Heb. ix. 4 ; Rev. xi. 19; ot rj 8iat)fiKi] ireptTopSjs the covenant of cir- cumcision, made with Abrahaiu, whose sign and seal was circumcision (Gen. .xvii. 10 sq(p). Acts vii. 8; of to a'pa Trjs SiadrjKrjs the blood of the victims, by the shedding and sprinkling of which the Mosaic covenant was ratified, Heb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8 ; of ai SmBfiKai the covenants, one made with Abraham, the other through Moses with the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mrg. fj SiaBi'iKij'] (Sap. xviii. 22 ; Sir. xliv. 11 ; 2 Mace. viii. 15 ; Kp. of Barn. 9 ; [cf. AV. 177 (106)]); of al 8ia^^(cm Tijr cVayyeXms, the covenants to which the promise of salvation through the Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 1 2 (vvvdfJKm ayaBav viro- axttreoiv, Sap. xii. 21); for Christian .salvation is the fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those cov- enant.*, esp. to that made with Abraham : Lk. i. 72 s([. ; Acts iii. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (where SiadrjKr) is God's arrangement i. e. the promise made to Alirahani). As the new and far more excellent bond of fiicndship which (jod in the Messiah's time would outer into with the people of Israel is called nunn n'")3, Katvrj BtadrjKr; (Jer. x.xxviii. (.x.\.\i.) 31), — which divine jn-omise Christ has made good (Ileb. viii. 8-10 ; x. 16), — we find in the X. T. two distinct covenants si)oken of, 8vo &ia6rJKtH {Gal. iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the former of which {t!j irpiiTi] Sia6rjK;i, Heb. ix. 15, 18, cf. viii. 9) the latter is contrasted, as Kaiuli Siadrjioj, I\It. xxvi. 28 ; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass, in RGL [in Jit. in Tr also]) ; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the ])ass.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Heb. viii. 8 ; KpeiTrav SiadfiKTj, Heb. vii. 22; atavios 8iadtiKrj, Heb. xiii. 20 ; and Christ is called Kpfir- Tovos or Kaivijs or veas htaOrjKrjs peairrjs '• Heb. viii. 6 ; i.\. 15; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise faith in Christ, and God promises them grace and salva- tion eternal. This covenant Christ set up and ratified by undergoing d e a t h ; hence the phrases tu aipa T^f Kaivrji: 8ta6r]KTjs, TO mp.a T^s 8ia6riKrjt, (sec aipa sub fin.), [Heb. X. 29] ; TO alpd pov Trjs 8ia6r]Kr)i, my blood by the shed- ding of which the covenant is established. Ml. xxvi. 28 T WH and Mk. xiv. 24 T Tr WH (on two gen. after one noun cf. Matthiae § 380, Anm. 1 ; Klihner ii. p. 288 sq. ; ZiaipeaK 137 BiaKovia [Jelf § 543, 1, cf. § 466 ; AV. § 30, 3 Note 3 ; B. 155 (136)]). By metonjmy of the contained for the container f) iraXaia dtadfjKTj is used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of l/ie sacred hooks of Ike 0. T. because in them the conditions and principles of the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be noted the amphiboly or twofold use [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6] by which the writer to the Hebrews, in i.x. IG sq., substitutes for the meaning covenant which SiatfijKij bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of testament (see 1 above), and Ukens Christ to a testator, — not only because the author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be- queathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is made possible for the disciples of Christ by his ileath (ix. 15), and that even the Mosaic covenant had been consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led the Latin Vulgate to render dtadrjKrj wherever it occurs in the Bible [i. e. in the New Test., not always in the Old; see B.D. s. v. Covenant, and B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Testament] by the word testamentum* Si-aipco-is, -ems, t], (Smipe'a, q. V.) ; 1. division, (/ : 1 aor. bieKaBapa (un-Attic and later form ; cf. Mocris, ed. Piers, p. 137 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 ; Veitch s. V. Kadaipo), inf. StaKadapat ; to cleanse (throughly cf. 8ta, C. 2 i.e.) t!iorouf/hl;/: Lk. iii. 17 T WH Lmrg. f r mrg. ; for R G 8iaKa8aplCo,. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat, down.) *] 8ia-KaeapiJw : f ut. SmKadapta [B. 3 7 (32) ; W. § 1 3, 1 c. ; WH. App. p. 163] ; to cleanse thoroughh/, (Vulg. per- mundo) : rr^v a\a)va, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17 [T WHetc. biav avTais, Lk. viii. 3 ; to relieve one's neces- sities (e. g. by collecting alms) : Ro. xv. 25 ; Heb. vi. 10 ; rpaTTtims , to provide, take care of, distribute, the things necessary to su.stain life, Acts vi. 2. absol., those are said dioKoveiv, i. e. to take care of the poor and the sick, who administer the office of deacon (see SmKovor, 2) in the Christian churches, to serve as deacons : 1 Tim. iii. 10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen- eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace. of the thing, to minister i. e. attend to, anytliinrj, that may serve another's interests : x^P'* hiaKovovp.ivri i(j>' rjpoiv, 2 Co. viii. 19 ; \_adpoTrjs, ibid. 20] ; Sa-a StrjKiivriae, how many thinfs I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. IS ; fVto-ToXr/ biaKovrjdfia-a vdp fjpHv, an epistle written, as it were, by our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 3. with ace. of the tbJTio- and dat. of pers., to minister a thing unto one, to- serve one u-ith or by supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; A els iavTovs, i. e. els dXXijXous to one another, for mutual use, 1 Pet. iv. 10.* SiaKovia, -as, f], (SiaKovos), [fr. Thuc, Plat, down], ser- vice, ministering, esp. ef those who execute the commands- of others: 1. univ. : 2 Tim. iv. U ; Heb. i. 14. 2. of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro- mote religion among men ; a. of the office of !M o s e s : 17 Blok. toO Bavdrov, concisely for the ministration by which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings^ death, 2 Co. iii. 7 ; Tf/s KaraKpla-fas, the ministration by which condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the office of the apostles and its administration : Acts i. 17, 25 ; XX. 24 ; xxi. 19 ; Ro. xi. 13 ; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; vi. 3 ; 1 Tim. i. 12; toO Xdyou, Acts vi. 4; toS jrvevpaTos, the ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. iii. 8 ; 77)5 Siraio- a-CvT)s, by which men are taught how they may become righteous with God, ibid. 9 : rijs KaraXKayfis, the ministry whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18 ; irpbs ttjv ipiaiv 8ia- Kovlav, that by preaching the gospel I might minister unto you, 2 Co. xi. 8. c. of the ministration or service of all who, endowed by God with powers of mind and heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, etc. : 1 Co. xii. 5 ; Eph. iv. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5. AVhat ministry is re- ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the ministra- tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian. SiaKOVOi; 138 hvaKpiv ■affection : 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; Rev. ii. 19, esp. of those who succor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac- tions [Acts xii. 25] ; the care of the poor, the supplying or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Handreic/tung) : Acts vi. 1 ; 2 Co. i.\. 13 ; ij Siaxovia r/ eir Tour aylovs, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; ix. 1 ; rj diaKovia t^9 Xfiroupyias, the ministration rendered througli this Xfiroupyia, 2 Co. ix. 12; vffiTrav *is SiaKoviav Tivl, to send a tiling to one for tlie relii'f of his want [A. V. In senil rclii'f iint(i~\, Acts xi. 2!) (ito^i'fftj/ ^pTj^ara ttoWu fls BtaKovUw Tuiv )(TjpuiV, Acta Tln)niac § 5G, p. 23.'! ed. Tdf.) ; ^ Staxovia /lou ij eis 'UpovaaX. " my min- istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis- tration intended for Jerusalem" (Fritzscho), Ho. xv. 31 [here L Tr mrg. read rj Saipoffiopla . . . iv etc.]. 4. the office of deacon in the primitive church (see hiuKovos, 2) : Ho. xii. 7. 5. the service of those who ])reparc and present food : Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oee. 7, 41).' SiciKovos, -ov, 6, r], (of unecrt. origin, but by no means, as was formerly thought, compounded of Sid and kovis, so as to mean prop. ' raising dust by hastening ' ; cf. ■ffKoveiv ; for a in the prep. Sia is short, in hiuKovos long. Bttm. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans, p. 231 sq.] thinks it is derived fr. obsol. Sia/cu i. ([. Si/Jico) [alhed with hiuiKai ; ■cf. Vanicek j). 363]); one who executes the commands of another, esp. of a master; a servant, attendant, min- ister ; 1. univ. : of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii. 13 ; witli gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 2G ; xxiii. 11 ; Mk. ix. 35 ; x. 43, (in which pass, it is used fig. of those who advance others' interests even at tlie sacrifice of their own) ; TTJs iKK\r](Tlas, of one who does what promotes the welfare and prosperity of the church. Col. i. 25 ; fiioKorai ToC BeoO, those through whom God carries on his admin- istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4 ; teachers of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5 ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; 1 Th. iii. 2 RTTr WII txt. Lmrg. ; the same are called Sio'kotoi (tov) Xpia-Tov, 2 Co. xi. 23 ; Col. i. 7 ; 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; 6i/ Kvpiia. in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7 ; [Eph. vi. 21] ; o buiK. fjLov my follower, Jn. xii. 2() ; tov Parana, whom Satan uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [d/iaprt'as, (Jal. ii. 17]; StuK. TrepiTOfiris (abstr. for coner.), of Christ, who labored for the salvation of the circumcised i. e. the Jews, Ro. xv. 8 ; with gen. of the thing to which service is rendered, i. e. to which one is devoted : Kmvrjs fim^ijicijr, 2 Co. iii. G ; TOV fiayyf\iov, Eph. iii. 7 ; Col. i. 23 ; SiKaiotnii^r, 2 Co. xi. 15. 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office assigned him by the churoli, cares for the ])oor and has ■charge of and distributes tlie money collected for their use, [cf. BB.DD., Diet, of Christ. Antiq., Schaff-IIerzog s. V. Deacon ; Bp. Lt/htft. Com. on Phil, dissert, i. § i. ; Julius Milller, Dogmatische Abhandlungen, p. 5G0 sqq.]: Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 12, cf. Acts vi. 3 sqq.; I) hiaKovos, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp. 10, 97), a wo- man to whom the care of either poor or sick women was entrusted, Ro. xvi. 1 [cf. Diets, as above, s. v. Deaconess ; Lghtft. as above p. 191; B. D. s. v. Phoebe]. 3. a ■waiter, one who serves food and drinl,- : Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3, 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31,4, 5; Leian. do merced. cond. § 2G ; Athen. 7, p. 291 a.; 10, 420 e. ; see StoKovto), 2 and -via, 5 ; [also Wetst. on Jit. iv. [Syn. SitxKOfos, SovKos, 8f pa-rrtov, {fVTjpfr-qs: '* Sid- Kovos represents tlie servant in his activity for the work; not in his relalioii, either servile, as that of the SoCAos, or more voluntary, as in the case of the BepaTrui/, to a person" Trench; [yet cf. c. g. Ro. xiii. 4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 etc.]. JoDAoj op|). to i\ev6(pos, and correlate to SeairSTns or Kvpios, ilenotca a ioiidimin, one who sustains a ]jeriiiaiient servile relation to another. Bipiirav is the voluntary perfm-mer of services, whether as a f r.ceiiian or a slave ; it is a noliler, tenderer word than Sov\os. vmjp. ace. to its etyniol. suj;f;ests subordi- nation. C'f. Trench §ix.; B. D. s. v. Minister; Mey. on Eph. iii. ".] SiaKoo-ioi. -lu, -a, lirii hii)idrt:d : INIk. vi. 37 ; Jn. vi. 7, etc. Si-aKOvu : fut. SiaKovcopiai ; prop, to hear one thronijh, hear to the end, hear with care, hear full//, [cf. Sia, C. 2] (Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause. Acts xxiii. 35 ; so in Dcut. i. Ifi ; Dio Cass. 3G, 53 (3G).* Sia-KpCvu; \m\ T Tr Wn ; like the Lat. distini/uo, useil emphatically : to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest, in effect i. (j. to prefer, yield to him the ]n'efcrence or honor : Tivd, 1 Co. iv. 7 [cf. W. 452 (421)] ; to (rS>iJia toii kv piov, 1 Co. xi. 29 [R G]. 2. to learn by discrimination, to try, decide : Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WII reject the pass.] ; 1 Co. xiv. 29 ; eavrov, 1 Co. xi. 31 ; to determine, r/ire Judg- ment, decide a dispute : 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass, and Mid. to he parted, to separate one's self from; 1. to u-ithdrarr frinn one, desert him (Thuc. 1, 105 ; 3, 9) ; of heretics withdraw- ing from the society of true Chrisf ians ( Sozoni. 7, 2 []). 705 ed. Vales.] cV tovtov ol jiiv hiiiKpiOcvm Idia cV/cXijo-ia^oi/) : Jude 22 ace. to the (preferable) reading of L T Trtxt. (Xiy^ere Siaxptvofi^vovs, those who separate themsclces from you, i. e. icho apostatize ; instead of the Rcc. fXcelrf bict- Kpiv6p(vot, which is to be rendered, makinc] for yourselves a selection ; cf. Huther ad loc. ; [others though adojiting the reading preferred above, refer 8taKp. to the following head and translate it tchile they disj>nle with you; but WII (see their Ap]).) Tr mrg. follow codd. NB and a few fitlier author, in reading tXtarf htaKpwopivovi ace. to which SiaKp. is probably to be referred to signillcation 3 : R. V. txt. " on some have mercy, v:ho are in doubt "]. 2. to separate one's self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive with, dispute, contend: with dat. of pers. Jude 9, (Polyb. 2,22, 11 [cf. W. §31,lg. ; B. 177 (1.04)]); rrpos Tiva, Acts xi. 2, (Hdt. 9, 58). 3. in a sense not found in prof, auth. to he at variance ivith one's self, hesitate, doubt : Mt. xxi. 21 ; Ro. xiv. 23 ; Jas. i. G : ivTfj Kap^la avTov, Jlk. xi. 23 ; ev eavra [i. e. -rois], Jas. ii. 4 [al. refer this to 1 : do ye not make distinctions among yonrsclvts'] ; pr^hev Siaicpi- vopevos, nothing doubting i. e. wholly free from doubt. SiaKpi 139 SiafiapTvpo/jLai Jas. i. 6 ; without any hesitation as to whether it be law- ful or not, Acts x. 20 and ace. to R C, in xi. I'i; ov Sif Kpldr) TTJ awurrta he did not hesitate througli want of faith, Ro. iv. 20.* 8id-Kpt(ris, -eas, ij, (SinKpiVco). a dlsl'mguisk'wg, discern- ing, judging: Trvivfidrai', 1 Co. xii. 10; koKov re Km kokov, Heb. V. 14; /xr) ds SiaKpiads 8ia\oyi(riiS)v not for the pur- pose of passing judgment on opinions, as to wMch one is to be preferred as the more correct, Ro. -xiv. 1 [see dia- Xoyio-fios, 1]. (Xen., Plat., al.) * 8ia-Ku\.v(i> : impf. fiieKmAuoi/; (6id in tliis compound does not denote effort as is com. said, but separation, Lat. dis, of. Germ, verhindern, haX. }> r o hihere \ cf. Sta- jcXcto), to separate by shutting, shut out ; cf. Win. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. V. p. 17 sq.) ; to hinder, prevent: rwd, Mt. iii. 14 [on the tense cf. W. § 40, 3 c.; B. 205 (178)]. (From Soph, and Thuc. down.) * Sia-XaXe'u : impf. SteXaXovv; impf. pass. BiinaKovfirjv; to converse together, to talk u-illi, (hid denoting by turns, or one witli another; see SiaKareXe'-yp^oftai)! t'i pass. \were Inlked o/"], Lie. i. 6.5; npos aKKi)\ovs (as Polyb. 23, 9, 6), tI av TtoiTjo-eiav [-tratei/ al.], of the conference of men deliberating, Lk. vi. 11. (Eur. Cycl. 175.) * Sia-Xe-yojjiai ; impf. dtsXeyofiTjv ; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing. Sie- Xe'loTo (LTTrWH in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor. Si€\ex8r]v ; (mid. of SiaKeya, to select, distinguish) ; 1. to think different things icith one's self, mingle thought with thought (cf. SiaXoy'i^ofiat) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so in Ilom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, dis- course with one, argue, discuss : absol., Acts [.xviii. 4] ; xix. 8 sq. ; [xx. 9] ; jrf pi nvos. Acts ,xxiv. 25 ; tifi, with one. Acts xvii. 1 7 ; xviii. 1 9 ; xx. 7 ; Heb. xii. 5 ; otto tSiv 'ypa(()a)v, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts xvii. 2 ; npos riva. Acts xvii. 1 7 ; xxiv. 12 ; with the idea of disputing prominent : jrpor dXX^Xous, foU. by interrog. TIE, Jlk. ix. 34 ; Tvepi twos, Jude 9.* Sia-Xttiru : [2 aor. biiXmov] : to interpose a delay, to in- liniill, leave off' for a time something alreadi/ hegun : oi ^i/Xiwf [T WII mrg. SieXemev^ KararpiKoviTa (on the ptcp. cf. W. § 45, 4 a.; [B. 300 (257)]), she has not ceased kissing, has continually kissed, Lk. vii. 45. (Is. v. 14 ; Jer. xvii. 8; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 8iii-XeKTOs, -on, 17, (SiaX/yo)) ; 1. conversation, speech, discourse, language (Plat., Dem., al.). 2. fr. Polyb. [cf. Aristot. probl. 10, 38 tov dvdpoinov pia (pavri, aWa ■SidXe/cTot TToXXai] down, the tongue or language jieculiar to an I/ people : Acts i. 19 ; ii. 6, 8 ; xxi. 40 ; xxii. 2 ; xxvi. 14. (Polyb. 1, 80, G ; 3, 22, 3 ; 40, 6, 3 S(|. ; pfBeiipriveiiiv €iSTr)V ^'EWijifutv SidXeKTOv, Diod. 1,37; Trotra pev hidX^KTOs, fj 5* eWrjviKT] dia) : impf. SieXlpnavov ; to in- termit, cease : K\aia>v oi SteXlpTravev, Acts viii. 24 WH (re- jected) mrg. ; cf. W. 345 .«q. (323 sq.) ; B. 300 (257). (Tobit X. 7 ; Galen in Hippocr. Epid. 1, 3 ; cf. Bornem. on Acts 1. c. ; Veitch s. v. Xip-rrdvco.) *] 8i-aXXao-(ro) : 2 aor. pass. SirjXKdyrjv, (see Sid, C. 6); 1. to change : ti avr'i twos [cf. "W. 200 (194)]. 2. to change the mind of any one, to reconcile (so fr. [Aeschyl-] Thuc. down) : rivd tivi. Pass, to he reconciled, nvi, to re- neio friendship witli one : Mt. v. 24 ; (1 S. xxix. 4 ; 1 Esdr. iv. 31). See Fritzsche's learned discussion of this word in his Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [in opp. to Tittmann's view that it implies mutual enmity ; see (caTaXXdo-cria, fin.] ; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. pp. 7, 10 ; [Thnlurk, Bergrede Christi, p. 1 71 (on Mt. v. 24)].* 8ta-Xo-y£^o(j.ai ; dep. mid.; impf. SieXoytfo'/iijf ; [1 aor. SieXoyKrdprjv, Lk. xx. 14 Lchm.] ; (6(d as in hiakeyopai) ', to bring together different reasons, to reckon up tlie reasons, to reason, revolve in one's mind, deliberate : simply, Lk. i. 29 ; V. 21 ; eV ry xapSia, J\Ik. ii. 6, 8 ; Lk. v. 22 ; with ad- dition of nepl Tivos, Lk. iii. 15 ; iv cavrw [or-roir], with- in himself, etc., Mk. ii. 8 ; Lk. xii. 17; ev iavTois i. q. ev dXXiJXoty among themselves, Mt. xvi 7 sq. ; npos cavrovs i. cp wpos dXXi^Xour, one turned towards another, one with another, Mk. ix. 33 Rec. ; xi. 31 LTTrWH; Lk. xx. 14; npos dXXjjXouff, !Mk. viii. 16; nap' iavTols [see napd, n. c], ;\It. xxi. 25 [LTrWIItxt. €i/ «'.] ; on, Jn. xi. 50 Rec. ; on equiv. to nepl tovtov on, 'Slk. viii. 1 7. (For I3t^■^ several times in the Psalms ; 2 Mace. xii. 43 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, and Xen. down.) * 8io-Xo'Yi, in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down, tfte tfiinking of a man deliberating ivilli himself \ hence 1. athought, inicard reasoning : Lk. ii. 35 ; v. 22 ; vi. 8 ; ix. 46 sq. ; Ro. xiv. 1 [yet some bring this under 2] ; the reasoning of those who think themselves to be wise, Ro. i. 21 ; 1 Co. iii. 20 ; on opinion : Kpira'i hia'Koyia-pu>v novr^piov judges with evil thoughts, i. e. who follow perverse opinions, rep- rehensible principles, Jas. ii. 4 [cf. W. 187 (1 76)] ; pur- pose, design: Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21. 2. a deliberat- ing, questioning, about what is true : Lk. xxiv. 38 ; when in reference to what ought to be done, hesitation, doubt- intj : \(i>p\s yoyyvfTpuiV koi StaXo-yttr/iMi/, Phil. ii. 14 [' yoyy. is the moral, SiaX. the intcllectu al rebellion against God ' Bp. Lghtft.] ; x'^'P'^ npyrjs K. SiaXoyiapoii, 1 Tim. ii. 8; [in the last two pass. al. still advocate the rendering disputing; yet cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. c.].* 8ia-Xv(i> : 1 aor. pass. Si(\v&qu ; to dissolve [cf. Bid, C. 4] : in Acts V. 3G of a body of men broken up and dispersed, as often in Grk. writ.* 8ia-^apTvpo|iai ; dep. mid. ; impf. SiepapTvpoprjv (Acts ii. 40 Rec); 1 aor. diepaprvpapriv ; in Sept. mostly for T|>n ; often in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down ; see a multitude of exx. fr. them in TI7n. De verb, conqi. etc. Pt. v. p. 20 sqq. ; to call gods and men to icitness [Sid, with the inter- position of gods and men ; cf. EUic. (after Win.) on 1 Tim. V. 21] ; 1. to testify, i. e. carnestli/, religiously to charge : foil, by an impv. Acts ii. 40 ; ipdmiov tov deoii k. Xpicrrov 'irjirov, 2 Tim. iv. 1, (2 K. xvii. 13 ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 1 , 17 (TV pr] nporepov ep^aWe Tuis noXepiois, hiapaprvpopai, np'iv etc.) ; also with eVciTrtoc toO 6(ov kt\. foil, by "iva [cf. B. 237 (204)], 1 Tim. V. 21, (foil, by pi,, Ex. .xLx. 21); foil, by the inf. 2 Tim. ii. 14 [not Lchm.], (Xeh. Lx. 26). 2. to attest, tislify to, solemnly affirm : Acts xx. 23 ; 1 Th. iv. 6 ; Heb. ii. 6 ; foil, by on, Acts x. 42 ; with dat. of pers. hiaiid-)(OnaL 140 BiaTrepa to give solemn leslimony to one, Lk. xvi. 28 ; with ace. of the obj. lo confirm a thing by (the interposition of) testimoni/, lo lestifi/, cause it to be believed : tov \6yov tov Kvpiov, Acts viii. 25 ; to fuayyeXiov, Acts xx. 2 ! ; tiji' j3a- a-iXflav TOV 6fov, Acts xxviii. 2:i ; for all the apostoUc in- struction came b:n-k finally to testimony respecting things wliich they themselves had seen or heard, or which had been disclosed to them by divine i-evelation, (Acts i. 21 sq. ; V. 32; x:41; xxii. IS); with the addition of f is and an ace. of the place unto which the testimony is borne : ra ■nepX ifiov (Is 'Upova: Acts xxiii. 1 1 ; with the addition of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : ro'ts 'lovSaiois TO» Xpimuv 'Iijo-oGk, the ^Messianic dignity of Jesus, Acts xviii. .') ; 'IodS. rqv fifTavoiav koi irlcmii, the necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21, (TJj'Upova: Toy dvoplas, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).* 8ia-|iaxoiiav : hn\>L BKfiax^ofjirjv; lo fight it out ; contend fiercilg: of disputants, Acts xxiii. 9. (Su-. viii. 1, 3; very freq. in Attic writ.) * Sia-|ievu ; [impf. 8i£'/if rav] ; 2 pers. sing, f ut. Sta/ieceTr (Ileb. i. 11 Knapp, Blcek, al., for Rec. [GLTTr WII ah] Sia/xeVfis) ; I aor. 8k;j«cu ; pf. Sia/if/iew/xa; to staij permaneni/)/, remain permancntlij, continue, [tii.per- diirr- ; Siu, C. 2] (Phili) do gigant. § 7 Trvevpa deiov piveiv Swaritv (V ^vxfj: Siafxevdv Si dUvvarov) : Gal. ii. 5 ; opp. to a7r6\\vp.m, Ilcb. i. 1 1 fr. Ps. ci. (eii.) 27 ; with an adj. or ad\ . added denoting the condition : dte'/icii'f Koxpos, Lk. i. 22 ; ovTO), as they are, 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; lo persevere : tv nvi, Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat, and subseq. writ.) * Ua-fupll : 1 aor. pass. Sievep-iOriv ; lo distribute, divide, (Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.) : pass, fit toi/ Xaov to be dis- seminated, spread, among the peo])le. Acts iv. 1 7." 8ia-v(vu ; lo express one's meaning by a sign, nod In, beckon lo, irink at, (Sid, because " the sign is conceived of as passing through the intervening space to him to whom it is made " Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 4) : Lk. i. 22. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Sir. xxvii. 22; Diod. 3, 18; 1 7, 37 ; Lcian. ver. hist. 2, 44 ; Icarom. 15 ; [al.].)» Sia-v6T)|ia, -tos, to, (Siavoeto to tliink), a thought : Lk. xi. 17. (Sept.; Sir.; often in Plat.) ' Stdvoia, -as, r), {Sid and voos), Sept. for 3S and 32S • very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl.] Ildt. down ; 1. the mind as the facultg of understanding, feelinq, ilesirine/: jMt. xxii. :'•: ; Mk. xii. ;)0 [Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. x. 27 ; Eph. i. 18 Rec. ; iv. 18 ; Ilcb. viii. 10 ; x. 16 ; 1 Pet. i. 13. 2. understanding: 1 Jn. v. 20. 3. mind \. g. spirit (LaX. animus), way of thinking and feeling : Col. i. 21 ; Lk. i. 51 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1. 4. thought ; plur. contcxtually in a bad sense, evil thoughts : Eph. ii. 3, as in Xmn. xv. 39 fivj]cr6T) ; (opp. to SiTjpepfvo>) ; to spend the nighl, lo pass Ihe whole nighl, [cf. Sid, C. 1] : tu tivi, in any em- ploj-ment, Lk.vi. 12. (Diod. 13, 02; Antonin. 7, 6G ; Plut. mor. p. 950 b. ; Hdian. 1, 16, 12 [5 Bckk.] ; Joseph, antt. 6, 13, 9 ; b. j. 2, 14, 7 [Job ii. 9 ; Phil, incorr. mund. § 2 ; in Flac. § C] ; with Tfjv iwicra added, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 3.) * Si-avvd) : 1 aor. ptcp. Siavicras ; lo accomplish fully, bring ijuile to an end, finish : TovirXoCv, Acts xxi. 7. (2 Macc. xii. 17; fr. Horn, down.) [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 85 sq.] • Sia-iT-ovT<5s, see 81a, A. H. 1. a. 8ia-iropo^pip^, -rjs, r), constant contention, incessant wrangling or strife, (.napaTpi^fi attrition; contention, wrangling) ; a word justly a, -a> ; 1 aor. Sierrepaaa ; In pass over, cross over. ■BunrXico 141 Biaa-Tropd e. g. a river, a lake : ilt. ix. 1 ; xiv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 53 Qiere T WH follow with ETTi nji» yrjv for (to) ?Ae /a/irf (cf. K. V. mrg.)] ; foil, by «r with ace. of place, Mk. v. 21 ; Acts xxi. 2 ; rrpos with ace. of pers. Lk. xvi. 26. ([Eur.], Ar- stph., Xen., subseq. writ. ; Sept. for 15>'.) * Sia.^\cu : 1 aor. ptcp. SianXfiiaas ; (Plin. pernavigo), to sail across : Ti-e'Xayor (as often iu Grk. writ.), Acts xxvii. 5 [W. § 52, 4, 8].' Sia-irovt'ci> : to tvork out laboriously, make completely la- bor. Mid. [pres. 5ia7rofoCnai] ; with 1 aor. pass. Sutto- vrjBrjv (for which Attic writ. SifirovricaiiTjv) ; a. to exert one's self, strive ; b. to manage with pains, accomplish with great labor ; in prof. auth. in both senses [fr. Aeschyl. down], c. to Jg troubled, displeased, offended, pained, [cf. coUoq. Eng. to be worked up ; W. 23 (22)] : Acts iv. 2 ; xvi. 18. (Aquila in Gren. vi. 6 ; 1 S. xx. 30 ; Sept. in Eccl. X. il for Di'J.'J.> Hesych. Sianovridfis • \v7rr]6eis.} * Sia-^op€vu : to cause one topass through a place ; to car- ry across ; Pass., [pres. SiaTropfvofiai ; inipf. 6ic— o/>fuo/iiji/] ; with fut. mid. [(not found in X. T.) ; fr. Hdt. down] ; to journey through a place, go through : as in Grk. writ. foil, by Sid with gen. of place, Mk. ii. 23 L Tr WH txt. ; Lk. vi. 1 ; foil, by ace. [W. § 52, 4, 8] to travel through : Acts xvi. 4 ; absol. : Lk. xviii. 3G ; Ro. xv. 24 ; with the addition Kara iroXeis Koi KOijias, Lk. xiii. 22. [Syn. see ep;(o;iai.] * Si-auopEu, -(3 : impf. biriiropovv ; Mid., [pres. inf. biaTro- peiadat (Lk. xxiv. 4 RG)]; impf. SirfnopoviiTju (Acts ii. 12TTrWH); in the Grk. Bible only in [Dan. ii. 3 Symm. and] Luke; prop, thoroughly (8ia)aiTopeo} (q. v.), to be entirely at a loss, to be in perplexity : absol. Acts ii. 1 2 ; foil, by 8ia to with inf. Lk. ix. 7 ; wepl nvos, Lk. xxiv. 4 (here the mid. is to be at a loss with one's self, for which L T Tr WH read the simple airope'ia-dai) ; Acts v. 24 ; iv tavTa foil, by indir. discourse. Acts x. 1 7. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, Plut., al.) ' 8io-i7pa-Y(iOTe>io|iai : 1 aor. dienpaypMrevcrajiriV, thorough- ly, earnestly (Sid) to undertake a business, Dion. Hal. 3, 72 ; contextually, to undertake a business for Ihesake of gain : Lk. xix. 15. (In Plat. Phaedop. 77 d. 95 e. to examine thoroughly.) * Sia-TTpiu : impf. pass. SieTrpiofirjv ; to saw asunder or in twain, to divide by a saw : 1 Chr. xx. 3 ; Plat. conv. p. 193 a.; Arstph. eqq. 768, and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation, [A. V. cut to the heart], Acts v. 33 ; with the addition Tois KapSlat? avTwv. Acts vii. 54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35) ; fifydXas <;(aXe7raii'ov Kal SisTrpiovTO Ka& i\p.a>v, Euseb. h. e. 5, 1, 6 [15 ed. Hoinich. ; cf. Gataher, Advers. misc. col. 916 5.].* 8i-opirttJci) : fut. diapTracra ; 1 aor. [subj. 3 pers. sin". Sia/jTrdoT;]. inf. Sia/jjrdo-ai : to plunder : Mt. xii. 29" (where L T Tr WH &p7rdfis clear) ; 1. to make clear or plain, to explain, unfold,- declare : nji' Trapa^oXijv, Jit. xiii. 36 L Tr t.\t. WH ; (Eur. Phoen. 398 ; Plat. legg. 6, 754 a. ; al. ; Polyb. 2, 1, 1 ; 3, 52, 5). 2. of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate : Mt. xviii. 31 ; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb. 1,46,4; 2, 27, 3). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. If. T. p. 622 sqq. ; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11.* Sia-o-suo : 1 aor. hutreura ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job iv. 14 for Tnan), to agitate ; hke concutio in juridical Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other projierty : nva, Lk. iii. 14 [A. V. do violence to] ; 3 Mace, vii. 21 ; the BasiUca ; [Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 7, 30, 7].* 8ia-o-Kopiri5 : 2 aor. pass. 8ie(ntdpr]v ; to scatter abroad, disperse ; Pass, of those who are driven to different places. Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down ; very often, in Sept.) * 8La- open one's self i. e. one's mind, to set forth distinct!;/, (Aristot., Polyb.) ; hence in the N. T. [so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12] III admonish, order, charge: Ttw, Mk. viii. 1.5; Acts xv. 24 ; foil, by im [cf. B. 237 (204 )], I\lt. xvi. 20 R T Tr WII mrg. ; Mk. vii. 3G ; ix. ; SieareiXaTo n-oXXii, ira etc. Mk. V. 43.' SidimipLa, -rof, nl, [(SiaaTrjvai)^, an interral, distance; space of time : i>t oipav rptav Smor. Acts v. 7, ([« ttoXXoO StaoDj/iaros, Aristot. dc audib. p. 800', 5 etc.] ; Terpaeris 8. Polyb. 9, 1, 1 ; [^avfiTras 6 xfo""' fip.cpS)V k. vvktcov icrri, Std- a-nifia, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried s. v. p. 66]).* Sia-OToXi], -rjs, );, (3ia<7reXXco, ef. dvaToKfj), a distinction, diff'u) ; 1 aor. inf. hiaarpi-^ai; pf. pass. ptcp. Sif- a-Tpapp.ei/os [ef. WII. App. p. 1 70 sq.] ; fr. Aeschyl. down ; a. to distort, turn aside : ras oSoiis Kvpiov ras ciidelas, fig- uratively (Prov. X. 10), to oppose, [ilot against, the saving purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence b. to turn aside from the ri//ht path, to pervert, corrupt : to cdvos, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41, 1 ; 8, 24, 3) ; rtva dn6 Tivos, to corrupt and so turn one aside from etc. Acts xiii. 8, (Ex. V. 4 ; voluptates anunum detorquent a vir- tute, Cic.) ; huaTpafipivos perverse, corrupt, wicked : Mt. xvii. 17 ; Lk. ix. 41 ; Acts xx. 30 ; Phil. ii. 15.* Sia-o-u^u : 1 aor. hiiauxra ; 1 aor. pass. Stfo-wdrjv ; in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; often in Sept., esp. for £3^3 and ifBfin ; to preserve Ihrourjli danger, to bring safe throutjh ; to save i. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our colloq. bring him through) : Lk. vii. 3 ; pass. Mt. xiv. 36 ; to save i. e. keep safe, keep from jierishing: Acts xxvii. 43 ; to save out of danger, rescue : Acts xxviii. 1 ; « t^j daXdcrar)!, ibid. 4 ; — as very often in Grk. writ, (see exx. in II'ih. Ue verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of the person to whom or of the place to which one is hrought safe through : jrpos *i)X«a, Acts xxiii. 24 ; cVi T^i/ y^v. Acts xxvii. 44 ; c?r n, 1 Pet. iii. 20.* SioM-ttY^, -rjs, f/, (Siardaa-a), a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv. 11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use diara^is), a disposition, arrangement, ordinance : Ro. xiii. 2 ; tXd- /3cTf TOW vifiov els Smrayds dyyf\a>v. Acts vii. 53, ye re- ceived the law, influenced by the authority of the ordain- ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration (f an- gels [nearly i. q. as being the ordinances etc.], similar to fif ovopa hixfrQai, Mt. x. 41 ; see eir, B. II. 2 d. ; [W. 398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God's assistants in the solemn jiroelamation of the Mosaic law, ef. Dent, xx.xiii. 2 Sept. ; Acts vii. 38 ; Gal. iii. 19; Ileb. ii. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 5, 3 ; [Philo de somn. i. § 22; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. c.].' Sia^a-ypia. -tos, to, (SiaTdffCTti)), aii injunction, mandati'. lleb. xi. 23 [Lehm. bliypj£\. (2 Esdr. vii. 11 ; Add. Esth. iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. (in., line 14] ; Sap. xi. 8 ; Philo, decal. § 4; Uiod. 18, G4; Plut. Marcell. c. 24 fin.; [al.].)* Sia^rapdercrio, or -tt ; to bring thoroughly to an end, accomplish, [cf. Siii, C. 2] ; with the addition of tok /Siok, tov xpovov, etc., it is joined to jjarticiples or adjectives and denotes the continuousness of the act or state expressed by the ptcp. or adj. (as in Ildt. G, 117; 7, HI ; Plat. apol. p. 31 a.) ; oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined with the same force simply to the ptcps. or adjs. : thus acTCToi SioTfXfiTf ye continue fasting, constantly fast, Acts xxvii. 33 (so diT(pd\eT|. -^j, f], {diarpecjxo to support), sustenance : 1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49 ; Menand. ap. Stob. floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.] ; Diod. 19, 32 ; Epict. ench. 12; Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 7; 4, 8, 21 ; often in Phit.; 1 Mace. vi. 49.) * Si-airyd^u : 1 aor. hirjiyacra; to shine through, (Vulg. elucesco), to dawn ; of daylight breaking through the darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [cf. Act. Andr. 8 p. 116 ed. Tdf.]) : 2 Pet. i. 19. [Plut. de plac. philos. 3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]* Siav^-^s, -er, (aiyij), translucent, transparent : Rev. xxi. 21, for the Picc. SmKpavrjS. ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll. Rh., Lcian., Pint., Themist. ; often in the Anthol.) * 8ia to show through), transparent, translucent: Rev. xxi. 21 Rec. ; see Siauy^s. (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., al.) * 8ia-(t)€'p(i) ; 2 aor. StrjveyKov [but the subj. 3 pers. sing. SifveyKr) (Mk. xi. 16), the only aor. form which occurs, can come as well fr. 1 aor. Sir^vfyKa; cf. Veitch s. v. (j)epio, fin.] ; Pass., [pres. Siarpepopm^ ; impf. 8t«p(p6fi!ji' ; [fr. Horn. (h. Merc. 255), Pind. down]; 1. lo bear or carry through any place : oKevos Sm roij Upov, Jlk. xi. 16. 2. to carry different ways, i. e. a. trans, to carry in different directions, to different places : thus persons are said 8iaepeadai, who are carried hither and thither in a ship, driven to and fro. Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7 p. 144 ; o'Kacjios vn evavrifov ■nvivp.a.Tutv 8ta(}>€p6p,evov, Philo, migr. Abr. § 27; Lcian. Ilermot. 28; often in Plut.); metaph. to spread abroad : 8ie(pipfTo 6 Xoyor tov Kvpiov 8l oXjjs Trjs x'^P"^^ Acts xiii. 49, (dyyfXiar, Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 1 ; (p^firj Siacjiepirai, Plut. mor. p. 163 d.). b. intrans. (like the Lat. differo) to differ: SoKipdCfiv ra 8ia(j)€povTa to test, prove, the tilings that differ, i. e. to distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful, Ro. ii. 18 ; Phil. i. 10, {SiaKpurts Ka\ov re koI kokov, Heb. V. 14); cf. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. HI ed. 5.; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto SoKiiia^ovres to Siacpipovra, iJTOi. (pas, T] o-KOTor, ff XevKov, fj pi\av ktX.) ; [al., adopting a secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans- late (cf. A. V.) to approve the things that excel ; see Mey. (yet cf. ed. AVeiss) on Ro. 1. c. ; Elbe, on PhU. I. c.]. Siafpfpo) Tii/of, lo differ from one, i. e. to excel, surpass one : Mt. vi. 26 ; x. 31 ; .xii. 12 ; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so in Attic auth.) ; rivos tv tivi, 1 Co. xv. 41 ; [rti/or oihev. Gal. iv. 1]. c. impersonally, 8tacv-y(D : [2 aor. di.i(pvyov] ; fr. Hdt. down ; to fee through danger, to escape: Acts xxvii. 42, (Prov. xLx. 5; Josh. viii. 22).* 8ia-(j)i]|ii5o> ; 1 aor. 8i.«pijpL6etpa ; Pass., [pres. 8iaa>, 2. (Sept. for riV\'d ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)* 8id-opo$, -ov, (8ia(j)cpo) ; 1. different, varying in kind, (Hdt. and sqq.) : Ro. xii. 6; Heb. Lx. 10. 2. excellent, surpassing, ([Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : corn- par. 8ta(j)opa>T(pos, Heb. i. 4 ; viii. 6.* 8ia-«XcUr : 1 aor. mid. Siepffipio-dfiijK ; to move by the use of the hands, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr. [Andoc, Lys.], Xen. and Plato down). Mid. to lay hands on, slay, kill [with one's own hand] : rtva (Polyb. 8, 23, 8; Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts V. 30 ; xxvi. 21.* 8ia-xXevdJu ; to deride, scoff, mock, [" deridere i. e. ridendo exagitare" AVin.] : Acts ii. 13 G LT TrWH. (Plat. Ax. p. 364 b. ; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 49] ; Aeschin. dial. 3, 2 ; Polyb. 1 7, 4, 4 ; al. ; eccles. writ.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17.* Bia)(<'}pi^oi} 144 8iSo^>; Sia-xupf^u: '0 scparale thoroughly or wholli) (cf. fiia, C. 2), (Ai'stph., Xcn., Plat., al. ; Sept.). Pass. pres. bui- Xapi^ofiai ([in reflex, sense] ef. djroxwpiX"») '" separate one's self, depart, (Gen. xiii. 9, 11, 14 ; Diod. 4, 53) : dir6 nvos, Lk. ix. 33.* SiSaKTiKOs, -r), -6v, (i. q. SiSao-KaXiKos in firk. writ.), ay>( «H(/ skilful ill leaching : 1 'lim. iii. ;.' ; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (di- SaKTiKij iipfTi'i, tlie virtue wliich renders one teaehable, docility, PLilo, jjraem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud. §7]-)' 8i8aKT<5s, -ij, -dv, (8i8do-(cu)) ; 1. 'Ml can be taught (PinJ., Xen., Plat.,al.). 2. taught, instructed, foil, by gen./»/ one [cf. W. 189 (178); 194(182); B. 100(147)]: ToO 6eov, by God, Jn. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13 ; TrveCfiaTos aylov [G L T Tr WH oni. iylm']. by the- tist : Lk. iii. 1 2. b. of Jesus : Jn. i. 38 (39) ; iii. 2 ; viii. 4 ; xi. 28 ; xiii. 13sq.; xx.lO; often in the first three Gospels. 4. by preeminence used of Jesus by liunself, as the one ■who showed men the way of salvation : Mt. xxiii. 8 L T Tr WH. 5. of the apostles : 6 SiSdo-coXor rav iOvav, of Paul, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11. 6. of those who in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 sq. ; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, cf. Jas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians : 2 Tim. iv. 3. [Horn. (h. Merc. 556), Aeschyl., al.] Si8d(rK; impf. ibibacKov, iut.hiha^a; 1 aor. t'Si'So^a; 1 aor. pass. ibi.hax6r)v\ (AAQ [cf. Vanicek p. 327]) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for i^—lin, TTlin, and esp. for naS ; to teach; 1. absol. a. to htld discourse with others in order to instruct them, deliver didactic discourses : Mt. iv. 23 ; xxi. 23 ; ilk. i. 21 ; vi. 6 ; xiv. 49 ; Lk. iv. 15 ; v. 17; vi. 6 ; Jn. vi. 59 ; vii. 14 ; xviii. 20, and often in the Gospels ; 1 Tim. ii. 12. . b. to be a teacher (see 8i8d- '\, subjunc. Saxri] [and Smcrr)v Toir apaprdvovcriv etc., where avToi seems to be an ethical dat. and t. a/iap. dependent on the verb; see B. 133 (116) notc,cf. 17'j (156); W. 523 (487), cf. 530 (494)] ; in contradistinction from what one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. 3. to supplij, furnish, necessary things : as aprov rtvi, Jit. vi. 1 1 ; Lk. .xi. 3 ; Jn. vi. 32, 51 ; rpo^yv, Mt. xxiv. 45 ; ffpacrtv, Jn. ^i. 27 ; be- sides in Jit. XXV. 15, 28 sq. ; Mk. ii. 26 ; iv. 25 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; viii. 18 ; xii. 42 ; xix. 24, 26 ; .In. iv. 10, 14, 15 ; Eph. vi. 19. 4. to give over, deliver, i. e. a. to reach out, extetid, present: as Mt. xiv. 19; xvii. 27; Jlk. vi. 41; xiv. 22 sf]. ; Lk. ix. 16 ; xxii. 1 9 ; to yjfcofilov, Jn. xiii. 26 ; TO TioTTipiov, Jn. xviii. 1 1 ; Rev. xvi. 1 9 ; ras ;(f ipay 8i8o- vai to give one the hand, Acts ix. 41 ; Gal. ii. 9. b. of a writing: hTroa-raa^iov, Jit. v. 31. c. to give to one's care, intrust, commit; aa. something to be administered; univ. : navri a ibo&rj tioXv, Lk. xii. 48 ; property, money. Jit. XXV. 1 5 ; Lk. xix. 13, 15; apiriKi>va, a vineyard to be cultivated, Jlk. xii. 9 ; Lk. xx. 1 6 ; Tof xXcir [xXflSaf] T^f /Sao-. Jit. xvi. 19; tj]v Kplaiv, Jn. v. 22; Kplpa, Rev. XX. 4: Tr)v i^ovalav iavrCiv, Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]; to epya, tva TeXeicoca) avra. Jn. v. 36 ; to epyov, Iva ttqit](T(o, Jn. xvii. 4 ; to ovopa roi 6(ov, to be declared, .In. .xvii. 1 1 [not Rec, 12 T Tr WH]. bb. to give or commit to some one something to be religiously observed : 8tadrjKr}v trepiro- fi^s, Acts vii. 8 ; r^i» TrfpiTofirjv, the ordinance of circum- cision, Jn. vii. 22 ; roi' vojlov, ibid. vs. 19 ; Xoym fii/ra, Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligator)/, to pay : wages or reward. Jit. xx. 4, 14 ; xxvi. 15 ; Rev. xi. 18; apyvpiov, as a reward, Jlk. xi%'. 11; Lk. xxii. 5; taxes, tribute, tithes, etc.: Jit. xvii. 27; xxii. 17: Jlk. xii. 14(15); Lk. xx. 22 : xxiii. 2 : Heb. vii. 4 : Bvalav sc. tw Kvpia, Lk. ii. 24 {Ovtrlav anohovvai ra 6ea>. Joseph, antt. 7, 9, 1) ; Xoyoi', render account, Ro. xiv. 1 2 [L txt. Trtxt. a7ro8.]. 6. 8i'6', 2 Tim. i. 16, IS ; dyamjv, show [A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; tKbiKqaiv, SiBoyfii 146 BiBaj/j,( 2 Th. i. 8 ; ^aaavtaiiov, Rev. xviii. 7 ; pamay.a i. '[■ pairi- ffii/ T^ra, Jn. xviii. 22 ; xix. 3 ; <^i'Xijfia i. q. tyyos, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (0if, Is. xiii. 10); (fxinrriv, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq. ; Sm t^j yXwaa-qs \6yov, ibid. 9 ; ■yt/oi/jTji', to give one's opinion, to give ad- vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 10. b. SiSiirat KXfjpovs Cryii iPJ, Lev. xvi. 8), to r/ive i. e. hand out lots, sc. to be cast into the urn [see «tX^pos, 1], Acts i. 26. c. SiSafii Ti with pred. aec. : Mt. xx. 28 ; Mk. x. 45, (to give up as a XvTpov) ; Mt. xvi. 26 ; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiv- alent). 2. 8iSw/ii' Tiva ; a. where the noun refers to the office one bears, to appoint : Kptrds, Acts xiii. 20. b. to cause to come forth : 8i8u^( ck ttjs yfis toC Sarava Ti,v \ey6vTa>v (sc. Ttvas [cf. B. l.'jS (138) ; W. § 59, 4 b.]), Rev. iii. 9 ; so also the sea, death. Hades, are said to give (up) the dead who have been engulfed or received by them, Rev. xx. 13. 3. SlSapl nea nvi; a. to give one to some one as his own : as the object of his saving care, Heb. ii. 13 ; to give one to some one, to follow liim as a leader and master, Jn. vi. 37, 39 ; x. 29 ; xvii. 6, 9, 12 [but see B. I. 4. e. aa. above], 24 ; xviii. 9 ; in these pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ, i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them 'his own' (ra (jia, Jn. x. 14). b. to (five one to some one to care for his interests : Jn. iii. 16 («80)«» sc. aira, i. e. rw Koa-iuo); Acts .xiii. 21. c. lo give one to some one lo whom hr (dreadtj belonged, to return : Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 ant- haiKe [so Lmrg. in vii. 15]). d. SiSa>p.i ifiavrov riw, to one demanding of me something, I give myxelftip as it were; an hyperbole for disregarding entirehj my private interests, I give as much as ever. I can : 2 Co. viii. 5. 4. biSapi Ttva with a predicate ace. : iavTov rvnov, to render or set forth one's self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9 ; with a predicate of dignity, office, function, and a dat. of the person added for whose beneft some one invested with said dignity or office is given, that is, is bestowed : avTov th(t>K€v K€(f>u\T)v vTTip TTavTa TT} (KK^Tjaia, head over all tilings to the church, Eph. i. 22; eSaxev roxis pip dn-o- (TToXovr kt\. sc. rfi ««leXijcriti, Eph. iv. 11. For in neitlier of these ])assages are we obliged, with many interpreters, to translate the word appointtil, made, after the use of the Ilebr. JiiJ ; esp. .since in the second Paul seems to wish to confirm the words (juoted in vs. 8, tbaiKf hap^ara ToiE avdpunroii. Those in the church whom Christ lias endued with gifts and functions for the conunon advan- tage the apostle reckons among the hopara given by him after his ascension to heaven. in. Phrases in which to the verb hlhapi, either stand- ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an infinitive, either alone or with an accusative ; Si'Sw/xi tivi foil, by an infin. denoting the object : hihwpi tivi (paytlv, give, su])ply, something to eat, give food [B. 2ill (224); AV. 318 sq. (299)], jMt. xiv. IG ; xxv. 35, 42 ; Mk. vi. 37 ; v. 43 ; Lk. viii. 55 ; ix. 13 ; Rev. ii. 7 ; Tricii', Jn. iv. 7, 10 ; with the adp, easily to be supplied from the context, Mk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; « tov npevpuTos airou eSuKfp Tjpip. 1 .Tn. iv. 1 3 ; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 6 5f os ov SlSwcn TO TTPfiipa €k perpov, by measure i. e. according to measure, moderately, [cf. W. §51, 1 d.] ; otherwise in Rev. iii. 9 SiSapi U t^s a-vpayayris, (see II. 2 b. above). Tiv'i OTTO Ttvos : Lk. x.x. 10 tpa an!) tov Kapnov tov dpne\a- vos 8aai.p [L T Tr WII Suo-ouuti'] avr^, sc. the j)ortion due. Ti foil, by eir with a noun, to give something to he put into, Lk. vi. 38 piTpop 8a>aov(rip fls top koXitov vpwy (shall they give i. e. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk. .XV. 22 8oVf SoKTvXiop (Is TTjP x^'P" oi^'oi' (put a ring on his hand) : fit tov dypopfor the Jidil, to pay its price, Mt. xxvii. 10; tlpI ti th tcls xdpai, to commit a thing to one, deliver it into one's power: .]n. xiii. 'i (llehr. "2 T.3 [riJ, Gen. ix. 2; xiv. 20; Ex. iv. 21) ; fir t. hMvomp, or (Tri ths KapSiat ( Jer. xxxviii. (.xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten upon the heart, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; or«rr. KapSias with inf. of the thing. Rev. xvii. 1 7 ; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 SiSovai Sieyeipco 147 hcepj(oiJMi, Tivi Tt €19 Triv V'^XT")* ffluToi' 5t5ovat ft? with ace. of place, to betake one's self somewhere, to go into some place : Acts xix. 31, (eit TOTTOur Trapa^oKovs, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; els ToVouf rpaxe'is, Died. 14, SI ; ciV raj eprjplas, Diod. 5, 59 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 7 ; cis Ka>p.r}v nvd, Joseph, antt. 7, 9, 7). 2. SlSw/ii Ti ev Tivi, i. e. to be or remain in, so that it is in, [cf. W. 414 (386) ; B. 329 (283)] : iv rfj ^etpi "kos, Jn. iii. 35 ; cv rals KopSlais, 2 Co. i. 22 ; cV rfi Kap8. TLvoi, 2 Co. viii. 16, (cf. 1 K. X. 24) ; eiprjvrju doivai iv rf/ yfi to bring peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. Sida>ij.i ti iirep rivos, give up for etc. [cf. W. 383 (358) sq.] : Jn. vi. 51 ; iavTov \mip Ttvos, Tit. ii. 14 ; eavTou avrikvTpov iirep rivos, 1 Tim. ii. G ; iavrov Trepi [R WH t.xt. vnep ; cf. -rrepl, I. c. 8.] Tav apapTiav, for sins, i. e. to expiate them, Gal. i. 4. 4. hihovai TivX Kara ra epya, rfjv ivpa^iv, to give one acc. to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds : Rev. ii. 23 [Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 4] ; (cf . dnoSwa-fi, ilt. xvi. 27; Ro. ii. 6). 5. Hebraistically, 6e'S/s through which wai/s go out, i. e. acc. to the context and the design of the parable ^/oces before the city where the roads from the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high- ways, the same being also their entrances ; [cf. Ob. 14 ; Ezek. xxi. 21 ; the R. V. renders it partings of the high- ways']. The phrase figuratively represents the territory of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. C34 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is e(iuiv. to the Hebr. ni'KVin, Num. xx.xiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen- gesetzten Verba u. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most frequented spots.] * Si- ; impf. Siijp/iijKeuoi/ and (without augm. cf. B. 34 (30)) hupp.ijv(vov (Lk. xxiv. 27 L Tr mrg.); 1 aor. (also without augm. ; so " all early Mss." Ilort) 8if/)- fifjvevcra (Lk. 1. c. T Tr txt. WH) ; [pres. pass, biepprjveva- /xai] ; to interpret [hm intensifj'ing by marking transition, (cf. Germ, verdeutlichen)'; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. V. p. 10 sq.] ; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said, explain, expound : ri, Lk. .xxiv. 27 ; absolutely, 1 Co. xii. 30; xiv. 5, 13, 27. 2. to translate into one's native language : Acts ix. 30, (2 Mace. i. 36 ; Polyb. 3, 22, 3, and several times in Philo [cf. Siegfried, Glossar. Pliil. s-v.]).* Si-epxo|iiai ; impf. dirjpxoprjv; fut. SieXevaopai (Lk. ii. 35 ; see W. 86 (82) ; [cf. B. 58 (50)]) ; 2 aor. 8i?i\eov; pf. ptcp. SifXrjXvdas (Ileb. iv. 14) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. where Sia has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf. Std, C.]) : to go through, pass through, [on its construc- tions cf. W. § 52, 4, 8] ; a. Sid Tivot, to go, walk; jour- ney, pass through a place (Germ, den Durchweg neh- men) : Mt. xii. 43 ; xix. 24 R L Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Mk. X. 25 [Rec." fla-eXdeiv] ; Lk. xi. 24 ; xviii. 25 L Tr mrg. ; Jn. iv. 4 ; 1 Co. x. 1 ; Sia fiidov avrav, through the midst of a crowd, Lk. iv. 30 ; Jo. viii. 59 Rec. ; [Sia fiia-ov (L T Tr WH 8. pia-ov, see 8id, B. I.) 'Sapapfias, Lk. xvii. 11]; 8i vpwv, i. e. 8ia T^t p^wpas ipoiv. 2 Co. i. IG (where Lchm. txt. d7re\6(iv) ; [Sia jrairtDi' sc. riiv dyiav (see jrar, II. 1), Acts ix. 32]. b. with acc. to travel the road which leads through a place, go, pass, travel through a region : Lk. xix. 1 ; Acts xii. 10 ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 24 ; xv. 3, 41 ; xvi. 6 ; xvii. 23 (ra cri^dcrpaTa) ; xviii. 23 ; xix. 1,21; xx. 2 ; 1 Co. xvi. 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: Tr)v ^XW SifXeuo-erat poptjiala, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart, with gen. Hom. E. 20, 2G3; 23, 876). c. absolutely: iKclvrjs SC. 68o0 (3i' before cKelvris in Rec. is spurious) ^pe\- \e hupx^trdai, for he was to pass that way, Lk. .xix. 4. d. with specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre- fix Sia makes reference to the intervening space to be passed through or gone over : ivOdbe, Jn. iv. 15 T W^H Tr mrg. ; [«s Trjv'hxamv, Acts xviii. 27]; els ro irepav, to go, cross, over to the farther shore, Mk. iv. 35 ; Lk. viii. 22 ; d Bdvaros 8i^\6ev els irdvras dvdparnovs, passed through unto all men, so that no one could escape its power, Ro. v. 12 ; ea>s tivos, go even unto, etc. Lk. iL 15 ; Acts ix. 38 ; xi. 19, 22 R (J [W. G09 (oG6)]. 2. where Sia answers to the Latin dis [cf. Sia', C] ; to go to differ- ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9 ; Am. vi. 2) : Acts viii. 4, 40 ; [x. 38] ; 8ieX5dj/Tf f dno rris Tle'pyrjs having departed from Perga sc. to various places. Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this to 1, understanding SteXddvres oi passing through the ex- SiepcoToo) 148 BiKaioi tent of country] ; ev oiy 8i^\9ov among whom i. e. in whose country / went alwut, or visited different places, Acts XX. 25 ; Si^p;(oiTo Kara riis Ku>jiai lliey went about in various directions from one village to another, Lk. ix. 6 ; of a report, to spread, Tri(Tas ; In ask through (i. c. a.sk many, one after another) : n', to find out by asking, to inquire out, Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Dio Cass. 43, 10 ; 48, 8.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. V. p. 15.* 8wTTJs, -f'y, (8ir and eras), [fr. Ildt. down], of tiro years, liBO gears old : ano StfTovs sc. naiSus, Mt. ii. 1 6, cf . Fritzsche ad loc. ; [others take Sutovs here as neut. ; see Meyer].* 8iCT(a, -as, Tj, (from fitcrijy, cf. TpuTta, TSTpafTia), the space of two years: Acts xxiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo in Place. § 16 ; [(iraec. Ven. Gen. xH. 1 ; xlv. 5].) * Si-T]7c'o^ai, -oipai, [impv. 2 pers. sing. fiiT/yoC, ptcp. Siij- yoifievosj ; f ut. 8iriyT](Top.ai ; 1 aor. SiTjyTjadprjv ; to lead or carry a narration through to the end, (cf. the fig. use of Germ, durchfiihren) ; set forth, recount, relate in full : absol. Heb. .\i. 32 ; ti, describe. Acts viii. 33 (see yevtd, 3) ; Tivi foil, by indir. di.-ic, ttcos etc., Mk. v. 16 ; Acts ix. 27 ; xii. 17 [here T cm. Tr br. the dat.] ; foil, by a eiSoi/, Mk. i.\. 9; Sera tVoiTjcrf or cVoi'j/o-ai', Lk. viii. 39; i.\. 10. (Arstph., Thuc, Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. often for ISD.) [Comp. : eK-Str]yeopai.^ * Si-^yrjo-is, Tcuf, f/, (Si.r)y(op.ai), a narration, narrative : Lk. i. 1 ; used of the Gospel narratives also in Euseb. h. e. 3, 24, 7 ; 3, 39, 1 2 ; cf . Grimm in the Jahrbb. f . dcutsche TheoL 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35 (34); ix. 15, etc.; 2 :\Iarc. ii. .Si; vi. 17.)* 8i-Tiv€K), fr. Horn, down, continuous: f If TO &irjvfK(t, (■(jiillniudly, Ileb. vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14, (8t- KruToip €S TO 8ir]i/(Kh flpeBq, App. b. C. 1, 4).* SiSdXcuro-os, -ov, (Si'f and BaXatrcra) ; 1. resembling {_0T formi7ig'\ two seas : thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2, 5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i.e. ■washed by the .sea on both sides (Dio Clirys. 5 p. 83) ; TOTTOi 8i6d\aass- ing Just Judgment on others, whether expressed in words or shown by the manner of dealing with them : Tit. i. 8 ; so of God recompensing men impartially according to their deeds, Rev. .xvi. 5 ; in the same sense also in Jn. xvii. 25 (who does not award the same fate to the loving and faithful disciples of Christ and to ' the world ') ; 1 Jn. i. 9 (who executes the laws of his government, and therefore also the law concerning the pardon of sins) ; 6 SiKuios KpiTtjs, of Christ, 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; Kpiais Sixaia, Jn. V. 30; vii. 24; 2 Th. i. 5; plur.. Rev. .xvi. 7; xix. 2; ai oSot T. 6(ov SiKami k. akrjBival, Rev. XV. 3 ; neut. to hUaiov, what is due to others, Col. iv. 1 ; what is agreeable to justice and law, Lk. xii. 57 ; Sixaiov sc. eartv, it is agreeable to justice, 2 Th. i. 6 ; accordant with deserts, Mt. xx. 4, and 7 Rec. [See reff. s. v. SiKatow, fin. ; cf. dyaSos, fin.] * SiKaioo-vvT], ->;r, ij, (SiVaiOf) ; most frequently in Sept. for p"iy and nplS, rarely for ^p^ ; the virtue or rjuatity or state of one who is 6i'«ator; 1. in the broad sense, the state of him who is such as he ought to he, righteousness (Germ. Rechtbeschaffenheit) ; the condition acceptable to God (Germ. Goltwohlgefalligheit) ; a. univ. : Xdyos rrjs 8iKaioavvT]s (hke Xo-yor 7^5 KaroXXay^s, X. rov orau/joO), the doctrine concerning the way in which man maj' at- tain to a state approved of God, Heb. v. 13; /Jao-tXfiis SiKMocriivj]!, the king who himself has the approbation of God, and who renders his subjects acceptable to God, Heb. vii. 2 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. b. inlegritg, virtue, puriti/ of life, uprightness, correctness in thinking, feeling, and acting: Mt.iii. 15; v. 6, 10,20; vi. 1 GL TTr WII ; Acts xiii. 10 ; xxiv. 25 ; Ro. vi. 13, 16, 18-20 (opp. to Aimprla, avop,la, and aKa6aptTia) ; Ro. viii. 10 (opp. to Afiaprla) ; Ro. xiv. 1 7 (? [see c.]) ; 2 Co. vi. 7, 14 (opp. to dra/iia, as in Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24) ; 2 Co. xi. 15; Eph. v. 9; vi. 14; Pliil. i.ll; 1 Tim.vi.U; 2Tim.ii.22; iii. 16; iv.8; Tit.iii.5; Ileb. i. 9 ; .xii. 11 ; Jas. iii. 18 ; 1 Pot. iii. 14 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5, 21 ; iii. 13, and very often in the O. T. ; ev oSo> SiKaiotnJwjs, walking in the way of righteousness i. q. an upright, righteous, man, !Mt. ,x.xi. 32 ; tov 6eov, the righteousness which God demands, Mt. vi. 33 ; Jas. i. 20 ; of righteous- ness which manifests itself in beneficence : 2 Co. ix. 9 sq. (cf. Tob. xiv. 11; Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1151; so C'hald. np"lV, Dan. iv. 24, and in the Talmud and rabbin, writ. [Buxtorf. col. 1891 (p. 941 ed. Fischer) ; cf.W. 32]) ; where Six. xal oo-iotijs are connected, — Lk. i. 75 ; Eph. iv. 24, (Sap. ix. 3 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4 and occasion- ally in prof, writ.), — the former denotes' right conduct towards men, the latter piety towards God (cf. Plat. Gorg. p. 507 b. ; Grimm on Sap. p. 181 sq. ; [cf. Trench § lxxx\iii. p. 328 sq. ; for additional exx. see Wetst. on Eph. 1. c. ; cf. oo-ios] ; liiTf^fia k. SiKoiocrivij, Diod. 1,2); TTOieiK Trjv SiKaioa. to do righteousness-, to live uprightly : I Jn. ii. 29 ; iii. 7 ; iii. 10 [not Lchm.] ; and in Rev. xxii. II ace. to the text now accepted ; in hke manner ipya^c- aBm SiKaioavvrjv, Acts X. 35 ; Ileb. xi. 33 ; (ijv rf/ Sikoio- iTvurj. to live, devote the life, to righteousness, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; irXjipovv TTaaav 8iKaio(TvvTjv,to perform completely whatever isright, Mt.iii. 15. When afiirmed of Christ, SiKawaivr/ denotes his perfect moral purity, integrity, siulessness : Jn. xvi. 8, 10; when used of.God, his holiness: Ho. iii. 5, 25 sq. c. in the writings of Paul fj hiKaioaivt) has a pecuhar meaning, opposed to the views of the Jews and Judaizing Clii'istians. To understand this meaning, the foil, facts esp. must be kept in view : the Jews as a peo- jile, and very many who had become converts from among them to Christianity, supposed that they secured the favor of God by works conformed to the require- ments of the Mosaic law, as though by way of merit ; and that they would thus attain to eternal salvation. But this law demands perfect obedience to all its precepts, and threatens condemnation to those who do not render such obedience (Gal. iii. 10, 12). Obedience of this kind no one has rendered (Ro. iii. 10), neither Jews nor Gentiles (Ro. i. 24 — ii. 1), — for with the latter the natural law of right written on their souls takes the jilace of the Mosaic law (Ro. ii. 14 sq.). On this account Paul proclaims the love of God, in that by giving u]) Christ, his Son, to die as an expiatory sacrifice for the sins of men he has attested his grace and good-will to mankind, so that they can hope for salvation as if they had not sinned. But the way to obtain this hope, he teaches, is only through faith (see nia-Tts [esp. 1 b. and d.]), by which a man appropriates that grace of God revealed and pledged in Christ ; and this faith is reckoned by God to the man as SiKmocrivrj ; that is to say, 8. denotes the state acceptable to God which becomes a sinner's posses- sion through that faith bij ichich he embraces the grace of God njfered him in the expiatory death of Jesus Christ (see hiKaiaa, 3 b.). In this sense i\ SiKaiotrvvr) is used without an adjunct in Ro. iv. 5 sq. 11 ; v. 1 7, 21 ; ix. 30 sq.; Ro. .xiv. 1 7 (? [see b.]) ; 1 Co. i. 30 ; Gal. v. 5 ; StKotoinvri Beoii, fj ToC 6eo\i SiKaiorriv)], the righteousness which God ascribes, what God declares to be righteousness [W. 186 (1 75)], Ro. i. 1 7 ; iii. 21 ; x. 3 ; by a pregnant use, equiv. to that divine arrangement by which God leads men to a state acceptable to him, Ro. x. 4 : as abstract for con- crete, equiv. to those whom God accounts righteous, 2 Co. V. 21; SiK. dfoii Sia iriWeur, Ro. iii. 22; fj 8«, t^s ma-Tems, which is acquired by faith, or seen in faith, Ro. BiKaioco 150 oiKaiom iv. 11, i;? ; 17 fK 6eov Siicaiotr. wliich comes from God. i. e. is adjudged, imputed, I'liil. iii. 9 (wliere the addition «rrt TT) ffiorei depends on exav, having . . . founded upon faith [ef. \V. 137 (130); 392 (3U7); yet of. Ellie. ad loe.]) ; J) CK jri'erTfo)? SiKutocr. whioli eomes from faith, Ro. ix. 30; X. (! ; ^ Sia 7ri'dr]u ; fut. SiKaito- 6i}(Tonm\ (SiKoios); Sept. for p'li' and p'^iTI ; 1. prop. (ace. to the analogy of other verbs ending in dw, as rut^Xdo), SouXdto) to make biKaios ; to render rigliteoiis or such as he ought to he ; (\\i\g. justijicn) ; but this mean- ing is extremely rare, if not altogether doubtful ; iSiKal- axra tijw KapBiav jiov stands for '33'? 'ri'JDt in Ps. Ixxii. (Ix.xiii.) 13 (unless / have shown my heart to he upright be preferred as the rendering of the Greek there). 2. riva, to show, exhihit, evince, one to he righteous, such as he is and wishes himself to he considered (Ezek. xvi. 51 sq. ; Tr]v i^xh" to declare to be like, liken i. e. comjiarc ; 6ui6u>, Sap. vi. 1 1 ; a^wai, which never means to make worthy, but to Judge worthy, to declare worthy, to treat as worthy ; see also Koivua, 2 b.) ; a. with the negative idea predominant, to ileclare guiltless one accused or who may be accused, acquit of a charge or reproach, (Deut. xxv. 1 ; Su-. xiii. 22 (21), etc.; an un- just judge is said Stxaiovv tov daefirj in Ex. xxiii. 7 ; Is. v. 23) : tavTov, Lk. x. 29 ; pass, ov SeSiKalapai, sc. with God, 1 Co. iv. 4 ; pregnantly with diro tmi/ dpapriai/ added, to be declared innocent and therefore to be absolved from the charge of sins [cf. B. 322 (277)], Acts .xiii. 38 (39) (so dtro apaprias. Sir. xxvi. 29 ; simply, to he uhsolceil, sc. from the payment of a vow. Sir. xviii. 22 (21)) ; hence figurat ively, by a usage not met with elsewhere, to he freed, dffo Trjs ipaprias, from its dominion, Ro. vi. 7, where cf. Fritzsche or [(less fully) Meyer], b. with the posi- tive idea predominant, to Judge, declare, pronounce, righteous and therej'ore acceptahle, (God is said hiKainvv SIkcwv, 1 K. viii. 32) : iavTov, Lk. .\vi. 15 ; ihiKaldxrav toi/ 6e6v declared God to be righteous, i.e. by receiving the baptism declared that it had been prescribed l)y God rightly, Lk. vii. 29; pass, by God, Ro. ii. 13; e^ tpyau eSiKai.a>6r], got his reputation for righteousness (sc. with his countrymen [but see Mey. (ed. AVeiss) ad loe.]) by works, Ro. iv. 2 ; ex rav \6ycov, by thy words, in contrast with KaraSiKaCecrdai, sc. by God, Mt. xii. 37. Especially is it so used, in the technical phraseology of Paul, re- specting God who judges and declares such men as put faith in Christ to be righteous and acceptable to him, and accordingly fit to receive the jjardon of their sins and eternal life (see StKawa-vvrj, 1 c.) : thus absolutely, SiKaioiiv Tiva, Ro. iii. 2G ; iv. 5 ; viii. 30, 33 (sc. 17/iar, opp. tu eyKoKuv) ; with the addition of e'k (inctinnei/uence of) niareas, Ro. iii. 30 ; (Jal. iii. 8 ; of dm t?js jn'oTemr, Ro. iii. 30 ; men are said SiKaiovcrOat, StKaiwBtjvai, tij x°P"^ Toil 6eov, Tit. iii. 7 ; hapeav rrj ^up- T- deov, Ro. iii. 24 ; nioTd, Ro. iii. 28 ; eV wio-Tfuf, by means of faith, Ro. v. 1 ; t!al. ii. 16 ; iii. 24; eV ra ui/ian toC \pi(TTov (as the meritorious cause of their accejitance, as the old theologians s&y, faith being the apprehending or subjective cause), Ro. v. 9; ek tm ompari tov Kvpiov ^Irjaoi) KOL iv to) Tivfvpari rov Otov i^pwv. by confessing the name of the Lord (which implies faith in him, Ro. x. 10, cf. 2 Co. iv. 13), and by the Spirit of God (wliich has awakened faith in the soul), 1 Co. vi. 11 ; iv Xpicrra through Christ, Gal. ii. 17 ; Acts xiii. 39 ; it is vehement- ly denied by Paul, that a man SixaioCT-ai e'| ipyav voiiov. Gal. ii. 16, — with the addition iva-niov uvtov, i. e. of God, Ro. iii. 20, ef. vs. 28 ; iv. 2, (see Straiotrwi;, 1 c. sub fin.) ; — a statement which is affirmed by James in ii. 21, 24 sq. (though he says simpl)' i^ epyav StKatovrat, signifi- cantly omitting vd/iou) ; to the same purport Paul de- nies that a man StKaioOrai iv vopai. in obeying the law, or by keeping it. Gal. v. 4 ; with the addition irapa tu Sea, OlKaKDfJLU 151 Si\oyo<; in the sight of God, (>al. iii. 11. Lk. xviii. 14 teaches that a man SiKatuvraL by deep sorrow for his sins, wliich so humbles him that he hopes for salvation only from divine grace. The Pauline conceptions of dixator, Sucatoanuj^. diKawa, are elucidated esp. by Winzcr, De vocabuUs SiKmos, etc., in Ep. ad Kom,, Lips. 1831 ; Usteri, Paiilin. Lehrbegriff p. 8G sq. ed. 4 etc. ; Neander, Gesch. der PHanzung u.s.w. ii. p. 567 sqq. et passim, ed. 3, [Robinson's trans, of ed. 4, pp. 382 sqq., 417 sqq.]; Baur, Paulus p. 572 sqq. [(Zeller's) ed. 2, vol. ii. 145-183 ; Eng. trans, vol. ii. p. 134 sqq.] ; Rauivenhoff, Disquisitio etc., Lugd. Bat. 1852 ; Lipsius, Die paulin. Rechtfertigungslelire, Lpz. 1853; Schmid, Bibl. Theologie des X. T. p. 562 sqq. ed. 2, [p. 558 sqq. ed. 4 ; Eng. trans, p. 495 sq.] ; Ernesti, Vom Ursprung der Siinde u.s.w. i. p. 152 sqq. ; Messner, Lehre der Apostel, p. 256 sqq., [summary by S. R. Asbury in Bib. Sacr. for 1870, p. 140 sq.] ; Jul. Kostlin in the Jahrbb. fur deutsche Theol. 1856 fasc. 1 p. 85 sqq. ; Wieseler, Commentar ii. d. Br. an d. Galater, p. 176 sqq. [see in Schaff's Lange's Rom. p. 122 sq.] ; Kalinis, Lu- therische Dogmatik, Bd. i. p. 592 sqq. ; Philippi, Dog- matik, v. 1 p. 208 sqq. ; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des X. T. § 65 ; Ritschl, Die cliristl. Lehre v. d. Versbhnung u. Rechtf. ii. 318 sqq.; PJlelderer, Paulinismus, p. 172 sqq. [Eng. trans, vol. i. p. 1 71 sqq. ; but esp. Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. Expos, of the Third Chap, of tlie Ep. to the Rom. pp. 103-198. On the patristic usage see Reithmayr, Galu- terbrief, p. 177 sq. ; Cremer, Wdrterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 285 ; Suicer, Tliesaur. s. v.]. In classic Grk. SiKatooi (Ionic Sucaico), Hdt.) is 1. i. q. SUatov vofil^ai, to deem right or fair : ri, often foil, by the inf.; to choose what is right and fair, hence univ. to choose, desire, decide : Hdt., Soph., Thuc, al. 2. with ace. of person, to SiKaiov ttoiib riva to do one Justice, in a bad sense, viz. to condemn, punish, one : Hdt., Thuc, Plat., al. ; hence StKaioicrdai, to have justice done one's self, to suffer justice, he treated rightly, opp. to dSi.Kf'iadai, Aristot. eth. Xic. 5, 9, 11 p. 1136*, 18 sqq. (In like manner the German rechtfertigen in its early forensic use bore a bad sense viz. to try judicially (so for avaKpl- veiv. Acts -xii. 19 Luther), then condemn; execute judg- ment, esp. put to death.) * SiKaCu^ia. -TOi, TO, (fr. SiKaioca ', o dediKaiaiTaL or to SeBi- Kaiinjiivov), Sept. very often for ph, npn, and OS'do; for nivp, Deut. XXX. 16; 1 K. ii. 3 ; plur. occasionally for Dnip3 ; 1. that ichich has been deemed right so as to have the force of law; a. what has been established and ordained by law, an ordinance : univ. of an appointment of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32 ; plur. used of the divine precepts of the Mosaic law : tov xvplov, Lk. i. 6 ; TOV vonov, Ro. ii. 26 ; to diKaloifia rod vofiov, collec- tively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Ro. viii. 4 ; SiKaiafuiTa Xarpdas, precepts concerning the public worsliip of God, Heb. i.x. 1 ; SiKaiafiara aapKOs, laws re- specting bodily purity [(?) cf. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b. ■a judicial decision, sentence ; of God — either the favor- able judgment by which he acquits men and declares them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16 ; or unfavorable: senr- tence of condemnation. Rev. xv. 4, (^punishment. Plat. legg. 9, 864 e.). 2. a righteous act or deed : ra StKaiti/iaTa t) ; ivos diKai- oj/io, the righteous act of one (Christ) in liis giving him- seh up to death, opp. to the first sin of Adam, Ro. v. IS, (Aristot. eth. Xic. 5, 7, 7 p. 1135", 12 sq. KaXeirai 5e fiaWov StKaionpdyTjfia to koivov, hiKaiwfui 8e ro enavopdcofia Toil dSiKTjfiaTos, [cf. rhet. 1, 13, 1 and Cope's note on 1, 3, ;i]). [Cf. reff. in 6«a.oM.] * SiKau»s, adv., [fr. Hoin. down] ; 1. justly, agreeably to rigid : Kplveiv (see SiKaios, 2), 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; to suffer, Lk. xxiii. 41. 2. properly, as is right: 1 Co. xv. 34. 3. uprightly, agreeably to the law of rectitude : 1 Th. ii. 10 (6. and aay. designate specifically nctsforfishing: — the former a cast- ing-net, generally pear-shaped; the latter a seine or drag-net. Cf. Trench § Lxiv. ; B.D. s. v. Net.] SiXo-yos, -ov, (Si's and Xeyw) ; 1. saying the same thing twice, repeating: Poll 2, 118 p. 212 ed. Hemst. ; whence SlO 152 8(1 laro/jioi; SiXoyelv and diXoyi'a, Xen. dc re equ. 8, 2. 2. double- tongued, double ill speech, saying one thing with one person, another with another (with intent to deceive) : 1 Tim. iii. K.* 8i6, conjunction i. (j. Si 5, [fr. Thuc. and Plato down], wherefore, on which account : Mt. xxvii. S ; Lk. i. 35 ; vii. 7; Actsx. 29; Ro. i. 24; ii. 1 ; lCo.xii.3; 2Co.vi.l7; Heb. iii. 7 ; Jas. i. 21 ; 1 Tet. i. 18, and often. [Cf. W. 445 (414); B. 233 (200); on Paul's use, see EUic. on Gal. iv. 31.] &i-o8€va> : impf . diprted to Chri.stianity by Paul's instrumentality: Acts .wii. 34. [Cf. B.D. s. v.]* 8i6-ir«p, conjunction, (fr. Sto and the enclitic particle "■^V [l- ^'-D) [S^- Thuc. down] ; on which very account, [A. V. wherefore^ : 1 Co. viii. 13 [Treg. 8io nep} ; x. 14; xiv. 13 where LTTr WII Si6.* SiOTrerfjs, -K, (fr. Aior of Zeus, and jreVu for TriTrroi ; in prof. writ, also SuneTrjs), fallen from Zeus, i. e. from heaven : to Sioiteres, se. ayaKfia (which is expressed in Eur. Iph. T. 977; Ildian. I, 11, 2 [1 ed. Bekk. ; cf. W. 234 (219); 592 (551)]), an image of the Ephesian Ar- temis which was supposed to have fallen from heaven. Acts xLx. 35 ; [cf. Meyer ad loe. ; Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 13 Sep].* Stdp8a>|ia, -Toy, to, (fr. Siopdoio to set right) ; correction, amcnthntnl, reform: Acts xxiv. 2 (3) LTTrWH for RG KaTopdapaTav. (Ilippocr., Aristot., Polyb. 3, 13; Plut. Num. 1 7 ; Diog. Laert. 10, 121 ; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 2.^0 so-is, -€o)£, fj, (fr. Siopdoio) ; 1. prop, in a physical sense, a making straight, restoring to its natural and normal condition something which in some way pro- trudes or has got out of line, as (in Ilippocr.) broken or misshapen limbs. 2. of acts and institutions, refir- mation : xaipos Stopdaa-tiDi a season of reformation, or the perfecting of things, referring to the times of the Messiah. Ileb. ix. 10. (Aristot. Pol. 3, 1, 4 [p. 1275'», 13]; voVou, de mund. 6 p. 400', 29; [cf. Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 20, 2]; Polyb. 3, 118, 12 rav TroAirfufidrui», Diod. 1, 75 tS>v afiapTrifiarav. Joseph, antt. 2, 4, 4 ; b. j. 1, 20, 1 ; al. ; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq.].) ' 8i-optie, [cf. W. 445 (415)]: Lk. ii. 7; xxi. 28; Acts [xiii. 35, where RG Sid];, xvii. 31 Rec; XX. 26 T WII Trmrg. ; xxii. IS ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; Gal. ii. 16 (L T Tr WII o't.) ; Phil. ii. 26 ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; iv. 6 ; Heb. xi. 5, 23 ; Jas. iv. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 1«, 24 ; ii. (i [Rec. Sto rai]. 2. for (cf. Fritzsche on Ro. i. 19, vol. i. p. 57 sij. ; [per contra Mey. ad loc. ; EUic. on Gal. ii. 16; (cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek etc. ed. 2, App. §80,3)]): Lk. i. 13; Acts .x. 20 Rec. ; xviii. 10;Ro.i. 19, 21 ; iu. 20; viii. 7; (1 Th. ii. 18 L T Tr WII for RG Sid) ; [1 Pet. i. 16' Tdf. From Hdt. down.] * At0Tp€T|s [L WII -Tp(())t]t: cf. Chandler §§ 634, 637], d, (fr. Aidf and Tpf(j)oi, nourished by Zeus, or foster-child of Zeus), Diolrephes, a Christian man, but proud and arrogant : 3 Jn. vs. 9 scp [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.]* 8iirXdos (-oCr), -di; {-rf), -do»" (-oOv), [fr. Ilom. down], twofold, double : 1 Tim. v. 17; Rev. xviii. 6 ; SwrXdrtpor (a compar. found also in Appian. liist. praef. § 10, from the positive form SiTrXdr [B. 27 (24)]) vpCiv, ticofold more than yourselves, lilt, x.xiii. 15 [(cf. Just. ^I.dial. 122)].* StirXdw, -(5 : [1 aor. e'SiTrXtDtra] ; (StTrXdoy) ; to double: SiTrXmo-oTc aiiTJj [only RG] SiTrXa [to S. T Tr AVII br.] i. e. return to her double, repay in double measure the evils she has brought upon you. Rev. .xviii. 6 [R.V. double unto her the double]. (Xen. Hell. 6, 5, 19; Plut. Cam. 41 ; Diog. Laert. G, 22.) * 8£s, adv., [Curtius § 277 ; fr. Hom. down], twice : Mk. xiv. 30, 72 ; Sir tov o-u/3/3utou twice in the week, Lk. xviii. 12 ; (tai oTTol rai Si's (si^e an-n|, c), Phil. iv. 16 ; 1 Th. ii. 18. In the phrasii Sit avodavovra, Jude 12, Sir is not equiv. to completely, absolutely ; but the figure is so ad- justed to the fact, that men are represented as twice dead in a moral sense, first as not having yet been re- generated, and secondly as having fallen from a state of grace ; see d7To6vi)(TKco, I. 4 ; [but cf. the various interp. as given in (Jley.) 1 hither or in Schaff's Lange (Fronm.) ad loc. In the Babyl. Talm. (Ber. 10 a.) we read, ' Thou art dead here below, and thou shall have no jjart in the Ufc to come ' ].' Ats, an unused nominat. for Zeis. gen. Aidr, ace. Ai'a (Alav, Acts xiv. 12 Tdf. ed. 7 ; see in «ppiji/ and B. 14 (3 73)), Zeus, Jupiter, the supreme divinity in the belief of Greeks and Romans; the father of gods and men: Acts xiv. 12 sq. (2 Mace. vi. 2.) [Cf. Zeus.] * 8i, Tiva Kara Tivoi, to set one at variance with [lit. again^t^ another: Mt. x. 35. [Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 334 sq.] * Sixoo^^curCo, -as, fi, (SixoaraTia to stand apart), dissen- sion, division; plur. : Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. iii. 3 [Rec] ; Gal. V. 20. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Solon in Dem. p. 423, 4 and Hdt. 5, 75 on ; [1 Mace. iii. 29].) * 8ixoTO)u' 3 ; ^17 yivov 8ii/'u;^09 eV npocrfv^fj (Tov, ft (OTot !j oijConstt. apostol. 7, 11 ; fifj ylvov fii'i/^ujfor iv TTpou€v\fi arov, fiaKixpios yap 6 pi) Stordtraj, Ignat. ad Heron. 7 ; [cf. reff. in Miiller's note on Barn. ep. 19, 5]). b. divided in interest sc. between God and the world r Jas. iv. 8. Not found in prof. writ. [Philo, frag. ii. 6C3].* SiuiYiios, -oi: 6. (SttoKw), /lersecution : Mt. xiii. 21 ; ilk. iv. 17 : X. ;iO : Acis viii. 1 ; xiii. 50; Ro. viii. 35; plur., 2 Co. xii. 10 ; 2 Th. i. 4; 2 Tim. iii. 11. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.] " SiuKTHs, -ov, 6, (8i(i/e<»), a persecutor: 1 Tim. i. 13. Xot found in prof, writ.* 81.UKU ; inipf. c'StWoK ; fut. dta^a (Mt. xxiii. 34 ; Lk. xxi. 12; Jn. xv. 20; 2 S. xxii. 38; Sap. xix. 2; a rarer form for the more com. Attic Sta^opai., cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 154 ; W. 84 (80) ; [B. 53 (46) ; esp. Veitch s. v. ; Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 377]) ; 1 aor. cSim|a : Pass., [pres. SiaiKopat] ; pf. ptcp. SfSiwypivos; 1 fut. SiaxS'lcopai; (fr. St'cij to fice) ; Sept. commonly for ^"li ; 1. lo inalce lo run or flee, put to flight, drive awag : (rii/a) duo noKeas ets jrdXtv, Jit. xxiii. 34, cf. x. 23 Grsb. 2. to run swifili/ in order to catch some person or thing, to run after ; absol. (Hom. n. 23, 344 ; Soph. El. 738, etc. ; hii>Kew 8p6pa, Xen. an. 6, 5, 25 ; cf. 7, 2, 20), to press on : fig. of one who in a race runs swiftly to reach the goal, Phil. iii. 12^ (where distinguished fr. xaraXa/iiSdwiJ', [cf. Hdt. 9, 58 ; Lcian. Hermot. 77]), vs. 14. to pursue (in a hostile manner): rivd. Acts xxvi. 11; Rev. xii. 13. Hence, 3. in any way whatever to harass, trouble, molest one ; to persecute, (cf. Lat. persequor. Germ, verfolgen) : Mt. V. 10-12, 44 ; X. 23 ; Lk.xxi. 12 ; [.\i. 49 WH Tr mrg.] ; Jn. V. 16 ; XV. 20 ; Acts vii. 52 ; ix. 4 sq. ; xxii. 4, 7 sq. ; xxvi. 14 sq. ; Ro. xii. 14; 1 Co. iv. 12; xv. 9; 2 Co. iv. 9 ; Gal. i. 13, 23 ; iv. 29 ; v. 11 ; PhU. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 12 ; Pass, with a dat. denoting the cause, to be maltreated, suffer persecution on account of something. Gal. vi. 12 [here L mrg. T read SmKovrai (al. -Kwvrat), see WH. App. p. 169 ; on the dat. see W. § 31, 6 c. ; B. 186 (161)]. 4. without the idea of hostility, to run after, follow after: some one, Lk. xvii. 23. 5. metaph. with ace. of thing, to pursue i. e. to seek after eagerly, earnestly endeavor tv &yia>v SoyfidTav, Pliilo, iilleg. le""'. 1. § 16 ; carrying a suggt'stion of severity, and of threatened punishment, tov vo^iov rtav eiToXwv ev 86y^acTi, the law containing ]ireee]its in the form of decrees [A. V. the law nf riiiiitiiriiiilmrnls contained in ordiiKiiicr.il, Eph. ii. 15 ; tA Ka6' fjfiwv )((ipaypa(j>oi' Tois Siiyfiaai cijiiiv. to to TOis Suyfjiatri (dat. of instrument) ov Ka6' rjfiuv, the bond against us by its decrees. Col. ii. 1 4 ; cf . \\. §31,10 Xote 1 , [B. 92 (80) ; on both pass, see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]. 3. of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right living : Acts xvi. 4. (Of all the precepts of the Chris- tian religion : /Sf/Saiofi^vai fv rois boyfiaaiv tov Kvp'iov koi rati dn-oo-ToXwi/, Ignat. a6r)(TeTm Tifiioplas ; Heb. x. 29; (Arstjih. Acharn. 12 ttw^ tovt trrcial pov. doKfls. rijv Kapbiap ; Anacr. 40, 15 [i. e. 35 (33), 16] iroa-ov, So/cfif, irovova-ti'. ipas, SiTovs ; xviii. 12 ; xxi. 28; xxii. 17, 42 ; xxvi. 00 ; Jn. xi. 56 ; Kara ro boKovv avrols as seemed good to them, lleb. xii. 10, (Lcian. Tim. § 25, and jrapu t4 SoKovv r)piv, Thuc. 1, 84). b. tho^e /loi it seemed good to, pleased, me ; / determined : foil, by inf., Lk. i. 3 ; Acts .\v. 22, 25, 28, 34 Rec. ; also often in Grk. writ. CoMP. : fV-. avV- €V- fioKCCi).* [.Syn. 5o«67»'2, (ftalv^trBat: tfialy. (j>riinarily of luminous bodies) makes reference to tlie actual oxtcruiil ajjpcar- auce, generally correct Ijnt possibly deceptive; Sok. refers to tlie subjective judgment, whidi m,\v or may not conform t(j the fact. Hence such a cnmliination as SoKti (paiviirBat is no pleonasm. Cf. Treucli § Ix.xx. ; Schmidt ch. 15.] 8oKi|iA5" ; [f"t- SoKi^dcro)] ; 1 aor. idoKipaaa; Pass., [pres. 6oKt/iufo/ia(] ; ])f. SfSoKifiacrpai: (boKipot); Sept. chiefly for ]n3 ; as in Grk. writ. fr. [lldt., Thuc], Xen. and Plat, on, to try ; 1. to test, examine, prove, scruti- nize (to see whether a thing be genuine or not), as metals : ^^pvalov hta jivpos (Isocr. p. 240 d. [i. e. Pana- then. § 14] ; ad Demon, p. 7 b. [here Bekk. jiacravi^opfv] ; Sept., Prov. viii. 10 ; Sir. ii. 5 : Sap. iii. ; apyvpuv,Vro\. xvii. 3, [cf. Zech. xiii. 9]), 1 Pet. i. 7 ; other things : Lk. xii. 56 ; xiv. 19 ; 2 Co. viii. 8 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; v. 21 ; TO 8i.u(povTa, Ro. ii. 18 ; Phil. i. 10, [al. refer these pass, to 2 ; see Siarfiepu, 2 b.] ; men, 1 Tim. iii. 10 (in the pass.) ; iavTov, 1 Co. xi. 2S ; 2 Co. xiii. 5, (cf. (^(ra^eiv lavrou. Xen. mem. 2, 5, 1 and 4) ; 6f6i/, Heb. iii. 9 (11 G, fr. Ps. xciv. (.xcv.) 9 ; on the sense of the j)hrase see jreipdfo), 2 d. /3.) ; Ta nvfipara, foil, by el whether etc. 1 Jn. iv. 1 ; foil, by indir. disc, Ro. xii. 2 ; 1 Co. iii. 13 ; Eph. v. 10. 2. to recognize as genuine after examination, to approve, deem worthy: 1 Co. xvi. 3; rtva anovSaiov uvra, 2 Co. viii. 22; iv G) hoKipd^fi for 4v tovto), o doKipd^a in that which he approves, deems right, Ro. .\iv. 22 ; Se5oKtpaa-p(6a irro tov 6(ov mnTfvdrivm to (vayye'Siov we have been approved !))• God to be intrusted with the business of ])ointing out to men the way of salvation, 1 Th. ii. 4 ; ovk ihoKlpaaav tov 6fbv 6;(fii/ iv imyvojcrd they did not think God worthy to be ke]it in knowledge, Ro. i. 28. [On 6oici/idfm (as com- pared with TTfipafcu) sec Trench § Ixxiv. ; Cremer s. v. TTft/jd^d). Cc>:\II'. : aTToSoKt^d^co.] * SoKi|iap(a. differs from Sap. in denoting a gift which is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover- eign ; a Siais flcoS is what God confers as possessor of all things ; a Sapta Beau is an expression of liis favor ; a Sapov 0eov is sometiiing which becomes the recipient's abiding pos- session. l*liilo de cherul), § 25, says irdi/v iKSrjAuts Trapttrras (Num. xxviii. 2), ort to;»' vyTwy ra f/.€y x'^P^tos ^earjs ^^iojrat, ?/ KoAeiTai Sdtris, to 5h d/ieifoyos, tjs ovop-a. oiKeXov Soiped. Again, de leg. alleg. iii. {} "o {on tlie same bibl. pass.), 8ia- Tnpri(rets bri Siapa SofxaTwy Sia(pepov(Ti- Tct p^f yap eptpaatv pey46ovs reKiiuv dyaBwv hT]\ovpid,Zwpov,tieHt fac- tion, bounty, etc- ; yet cf. e. g. Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. § 1 4yw ilpi Za^ovKiiitf, Sdtrts ayaBi} rots yovevcri pov. witli Gen. XXX. 20 d^SwpTjTat d 0eds pot Supov Ka\by . . . k. «KaAetre rh uvopa avTov Za^ouKuv. Cf. Schmidt ch. 106.] 86|a, -)j9, fj, (hoKta), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. most freq. for nu3, several times for lin, I'ln, etc. ; I. opinion, judgment, view: in this sense very often in prof. writ. ; but in the Bible only in 4 Mace. v. 17 (l^). II. opinion, estimate, whether good or bad, concerning some one ; but (like the Lat. existimatio} in prof. writ. generally, in the sacred writ, always, good opinion con- cerning one, and as resulting from that, praise, honor, glory: Lk. xiv. 10; Heb. iii. 3; 1 Pet. t. 4; opp. to OTipla, 2 Co. vi. 8 ; opp. to ala-xvvn, Phil. iii. 19 ; joined with TLpTj, Ro. ii. 7, 10 ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; 2 Pet.i. 1 7 ; So^a twos, praise or honor coming to some one, Lk. ii. 32 ; Eph. iii. 13; coming from some one, Jn. viii. 54; xii. 43; tcSi/ av6pa>TTaiv, tov 6(ov, Jn. xii. 43 ; Ro. iii. 23 ; persons whose excellence is to redound to the glory of others are called their 8dfa : thus, vpfis iaTe fj 86^a fjpav, 1 Th. ii. 20 ; d8eX0oi fjpC>v 86^a XpiaTov, 2 Co. viii. 23. fijrfii/ t^i/ ISiav 8d|aj/, or T. 8d|. aiiTov, Jn. vii. IS; viii. 50; of God, to endeavor to jiromote the glory of God, Jn. vii. 18 ; ^i/Tfii/ So^av €^ av6paina>i>, 1 Th. ii. 6 ; ttjv So^av t. irapa TOii deoii, Jn. v. 44 ; XaplSdi/ew 56^av (Lat. capture hono- rem) to seek to receive, catch at glory, Jn. v. 41, 44 ; to receive glory, 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; Rev. v. 12: tiji/ 8o'|a>/, the glory due [cf. AT.' 105 (100) sq. ; B. 88 (77) : EUic. on Gal. i. 5, cf. B. 89 (78)], Rev. iv. 11 ; StSdvai Sd^ai/ t67], .Vets vii. 2 : Xfpou/3f If So^rjs. on whom the divine glory rests (so So^a without the article, Ex. .xl. 28 (34) ; 1 S. iv. 22 ; Sir. xlix. 8 ), Ileb. ix. 5. 2. magnijicence, excellence, preeminence, dignity, grace : fiaaiXdai tov koctjiov k. fj &6^a airav, i. 6. their resources, wealth, the magnificence and greatness of their t»ities, their fertile lands, their throng- ing population, Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv. G : ^ So|a tuv ^acn\eia>v rlji -y^r. Rev. xxi. [24 ; tSv idvav, ibid.] 2(J ; used of royal state, splendid apparel, and the like : Mt. vi. 29 ; Lk. .xii. 27, (Esth.v. 1 ; Joseph, antt.8, 6, .5); glorious form and appearance : e. g. of human bodies restored to life, opp. to r/ aTtfila which characterized them when they were buried, 1 Co. xv. 43 ; ^ 8o|a T^r capKo^ " omne id, quod in rebus humanis magnificum dicitur " (Calvin), 1 Pet. i. 24 ; tlval nvi 6o|a to be a glory, ornament, to one, 1 Co. xi. 1.5 ; univ. preeminence, excellence: 2 Co. iii. 8-11. 3. majesty; a. that which belongs to God; and a. the kingly majesty which belongs to him as the supreme ruler ; so in pass, where it is joined with /3ao-tXfia, Svvafits, Kpiirot, f^ovaia, and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec. ; esp. in do.xologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; v. 11 RG; Jude 25; Rev. i. 6 ; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass, similar to each other in form it is not always clear whether Sofa is used to de- note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii. 12 T] fuXoyi'a k. rj do^a K. ^ tTo ; (SovXayoyyos, cf. naidd- yaiyos) ; to lead away into slavery, claim as one's slave, (Diod. Sic. 12, 24, and occasionally in other later writ.) ; to make a slave and to treat as a slave i. e. with severity, to subject to stern and rigid discipline: 1 Co. ix. 27. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum N. T. p. 472 sq.* SovXcia (Tdf. -la, [see I, t]), -as, ij, (SouXfi^w) ; slavery, bondage, the condition of a slave : t^s 158 Bvvafiai by some fr. AEAQ to ensnare, capture, [{?) al. al. ; cf. Vanicek p. 322]): scrvinr/, subject to: jra/iforijo-aTf ra fit^T] vfiav bovXa t;] axadapcrla, Ro. vi. 1 9. Then substan- tively, ri Soi\r] a female shire, hondmaul, handmaid : roii 6(ov, Tov Kvpiov, one who worships God and submits to him. Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 (iii. 2)); Lk. i. 38, 48. 6 fioCXos, Sept. for 12^' ; 1. a slave, bomlinan, man of servile condition ; a. properly : opp. to eXevdepos, 1 Co. vii. 21 ; xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. 28 ; Eph. vi. 8 ; Col. iii. 1 1 ; Kev. vi. 15; xiii. 16; xix. 18; opp. to Kvptos, SetmoTT]!, oIko- SfOTTorrjs, Mt. X. 24 ; xiii. 27 sq. ; Lk. xii. 46 ; Jn. xv. 15 ; Kph. vi. 5 ; Col. iii. 22 ; iv. 1 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Tit. ii. 9, and very often, b. metaph. a. one who gives himself up ivholbj to another's irill, 1 Co. vii. 23; or dominion, T^9 Apaprlas, Jn. viii. 34; Ro. vi. 17, 20; t^s (f)6opai, 2 Pet. ii. 19, (tuv rjSovdiu, Atlifu. 12 p. 531 c. ; tcui/ xplf'^' Totv, Pint. Pelop. c. 3; tov ■nivdv, Ael. v. h. 2, 41). p. the SoOXot XptoToO, tov Xpiarov, 'lijcoC XpiaTOv, are those whose service is used by Christ in extending and ad- vancing his cause among men : used of apostles, Ro. i. 1 ; Gal. i. 10 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24 ; Tit. i. 1 ; Jas. i. 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 ; of other preachers and teachers of the gospel, Col. iv. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jude vs. 1; of the true worshippers of Christ (who is Kvpios iravraiv, Acts X. 3(i), Eph. vi. 6. the SoOXot toO 6fov, niH' "\2y, are those whose agency God employs in executing his pur- poses : used of apostles, Acts iv. 29 ; xvi. 1 7 ; of Moses (Josh. i. 1), Rev. xv. 3 : of prophets (Jer. vii. 25 ; xxv. 4), Rev. i. 1 ; x. 7 ; xi. 18 ; of all who obey God's com- mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29 ; Rev. ii. 20 ; vii. 3 ; xi.\. 2, 5 ; xxii. 3, 6 ; (Ps. .xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23 ; Lwiii. (lxL\.) 37 ; l.xxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4, 21). -y. 8oCXof twos, devoted to another to the disregard of one's own interests : Mt. xx. 27 ; Mk. x. 44 ; strenuously laboring for another's sal- vation. 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. a servant, attendant, (pi a,Vmf^): Mt. xviii. 23, 26 sqq. [Syn. see bia.Kovos.'] 8ov\6(D, -u> : fut. 8ouXo)cra) ; 1 aor. iSovXuiaa ; pf. pass. hehovKwixai ; 1 aor. pass. ibov\iidr]v ; (SoCXoj) ; [fr. Aes- chyl. and Ildt. down] ; to make a slave of, reduce to bonil- af/e ; a. prop. : nva, Acts vii. 6 ; tovtco koX [yet T WH om. Tr br. «ai] 6f SouXurai to him he has also been made a bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. b. metaph.: ipavTov tiim give myself wholly to one's needs and service, make myself a bondman to him, 1 Co. ix. 19 ; Sov\ovcrdat tivi. to be made subject to the rule of some one, e. g. t^ SiKmoa-vvri, tm 6(w, Ro. vi. 18, 22; likewise vno rt. Gal. iv. 3 ; SfSouXm- /xfVos oiKU, wholly given up to, enslaved to. Tit. ii. 3 (SovXeOftK oiva, Liban. epist. 319) ; SeSoiiXm/xat ev tivi, to be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity, in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [Comp. : KaTa-SouXow.] * Sox-^i, -^£, Tj, (Se';(o^at to receive as a guest), a feast, banijuet, [cf. our reception^ : 8o)(rjv ttoim, Lk. v. 29 ; xiv. 13. (i. q. r\pm, Gen. [xxi. 8] : xxvi. 30 ; Esth. i. 3 ; v. 4 sqq. ; Athen. 8 p. 348 f. ; Plut. moral, p. 1102 b. [i. c. non posse suav. vivi etc. 21, 9].) * Sp^Kuv, -oM-of, 6, (apparently fr. SepKopat, 2 aor. cSpa- Kov; hence SpaKav prop, equiv. to o^ii /SXfVuv [Etym. Magn. 28C, 7; cf. Curtius § 13]); Sept. chiefly for|'3r\; a dragon, a great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early as Horn. R. 2, 308 sq., etc.). From it, after Gen. iii. 1 sq(j., is derived the lig. description of the devil in Rev. xii. 3-17 ; xiii. 2,4, 11 ; xvi. 13 ; xx. 2. [Cf. Baudissin, Studien zur semitisch. Religionsgeseh. vol. i. (iv. 4) p. 281 sqq.]* Spdiiu, to run, see rpexai. Spd(rcro|iai ; to grasp with the hand, to take : Tivd, 1 Co. iii. 19 [15. 291 (250); AV. 352 (330)]. (In Grk. writ, fr. Horn, down ; Sept.) * Spaxn^, -ijs, ij, (Spdcro-o/iat, [hence prop, a grip, a hand- ful]), [fr. ildt. down], a dnirjiina, a silver coin of [near- ly] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see bt^vapiov) ; Lk. XV. 8 sq.* 8ptiravov, -ov, to, (i. >{■ bparavrj. fr. hpfirat to pluck, pluck off), (1 sickle, a pruning-liook, a hooked vine-knife, such as reapers and vine-dressers use : Mk. iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv. 14-19. (Honi. and subseq. writ. ; Sept.)* Sp; W. § 12, 1 b. ; B. 33 (29)] ; fut. hvvi,v k. reparav, through the power which I exerted upon their souls by performing miracles, Ro. xv. 19 ; dvv. €ts TL, Heb. xi. 11 ; Bvv. cV) ra baipovLa kol voa-ovs depa- Ttfveiv, Lk. i.x. 1 ; ij Bvvapis rrjs dpapriat 6 vopos, sin exer- cises its power (upon the soul) through the law, i. e. thi-ough the abuse of the law, 1 Co. xv. 56 ; t^s dvatTraa^fois Toil Xpio-Tou, the power which the resurrection of Christ has, for instructing, reforming, elevating, tranquillizing, the soul, Phil. iii. 10 ; tt/s eiaeffetas, inhering in godliness and operating upon souls, 2 Tim. iii. o ; SwdpfLs picWovros aii>vos (see alav, 3), Heb. vi. 5 ; to nvevpa Tfjs Smd/ieois (see nv(vp,a, 5), 1 Pet. iv. 14 Lchm. ; 2 Tim. i. 7 ; SvvapLs is used of the power of angels: Eph. i. 21 [cf. Mey. ad loc] ; 2 Pet. ii. 11 ; of the power of the devil and evil spirits, 1 Co. xv. 24 ; tov ixBpov, i. e. of the devil, Lk. x. 19 ; TOV 8pdpaTOL) iley. as above ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16 ; see ayyfXos] : Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Pet. iii. 22. ij Svvapis TOV dfov, univ. the power of God: Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xii. 24 ; Lk. xxii. 69 ; Acts viii. 10 ; Ro. i. 20 ; IX. 17 ; 1 Co. vi. 14 ; BiivapLs va/^iotoh, Lk. i. 35 ; f] bvvapLs, esp. in do.xologies, the kingly power of God, Mt. vi. 13 Rec. ; Rev. iv. 11 ; vii. 12 ; xi. 17 ; xii. 10 ; xv. 8 ; xi.x. 1 ; and the abstract for the concrete (as rriUJn in Jew- isli writ. ; cf. Buxtorf, Lex. talm. col. 385 [p. 201 sq. ed. Fischer]) eipiiv. to 6 hvvaToi, Mt. xxvi. 64 ; Mk. xiv. 62 ; hvvapLs ToC Beoii is used of the divine power considered as acting upon the minds of men, 1 Co. ii. 5 ; 2 Co. vi. 7 ; Eph. iii. 7, 20 ; [2 Tim. i. 8 ; 1 Pet. i. 5] ; eh nva, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but WH in br.] ; Eph. i. 19 ; ivhveaBai Svvapiv «I v\jfovs, Lk. xxiv. 49 ; by meton. things or persons in which God's saving power shows its efficacy are called 8v- vap^eisdfov : thus d Xpio-rdr, 1 Co. i. 24 ; d Xdyos tov a-ravpov, 1 Co. i. 18; TO (iayyiXtov, with the addition eis (ruiTrjpiav TTavTL etc. Ro. i. 16 [cf. ^V. § 36, 3 b.]. Siivapis is ascribed to C h r i s t, now in one sense and now in another : a power to heal disease proceeds from him, Jlk. v. 30 ; Lk. v. 1 7 ; vi. 1 9 ; viii. 46 ; tlie kingly power of the M e s s i a h is his, Mt. xxiv. 30 ; [Mk. xui. 26] ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; 2 Pet. i. 16 ; Rev. V. 12; ayyeXot ttjs Swd/jLeus avrov (see ayyf\os, 2), ministering to his power, 2 Thess. i. 7 [ W. § 34, 3 b. note] ; metaphysical [or essential] power, viz. that which belongs to him as d Belos Xdyos, in the expression to prjpa TTJs Swap. avToii the word uttered by his power, equiv. to his most powerful will and energy, Heb. i. 3; moral power, operating on the soul, 2 Co. xii. 9 R G : and called IJ dda avrov SvvapLs in 2 Pet. i. 3 ; ij 8vvap.Ls tov Kvpiov, the power of Christ in\ isibly present and operative in a. Christian church formally assembled, 1 Co. v. 4. Svvafus roil dylov Ttvev/iaTos: Acts i. 8 [W. 125 (119)]; jrv. ayLov K. Svvapts, Acts x. 38 ; dnoSf l^ls Trvevparos Ka\ 8v- vdfiews (see aTri'iSfi^LS, b.), 1 Co. ii. 4 ; iv ttj SvvdpfL tov TTVfvpaTos, under or full of the power of the Holy Spirit, Lk. iv. 14 ; iv dvvdpsL TTvevparos dyiov, by the power and influence of the Holy Spirit, Ro. .xv. 13 ; by the power which, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, I exerted upon their souls, Ro. xv. 19. b. specifically, the power of performing miracles: Acts vi. 8; jrdo-a hvvapn, every kind of power of working miracles (with the addition Ka\ arj]p(Lois K. Ttpaa-i), 2 Th. ii. 9 ; plur. : [Mt. xiii. 54 ; xiv. 2 ; Jlk. vi. 14] ; 1 Co. xii. 28 sq. ; Gal. iii. 5 : ivfp- yrjpaTa bvvapeaiv, 1 Co. xii. 10; by meton. of the cause for the effect, a mightg work [cf. W. 32 ; Trench § xci.] : hii- vapLv jroLe'iv, 51k. vi. 5 ; ix. 39 ; so in the \>Iut., Jlk. vi. 2 ; Lk. xix. 37 ; joined with (rqpeia. Acts viii. 13 ; with arjpeui K. Tf'paTa, Acts ii. 22 ; 2 Co. .xii. 12 ; Heb. ii. 4 ['?] ; noLtiv Svvdpds, Mt. vii. 22; [xiii. 58]; Acts xix. 11 ; yi'i/owai Swd^ctf, Mt. xi. 20 sq. 23 ; Lk.x. 13. c. moral power and excellence of soul : 1 Co. iv. 19 ; 2 Co. iv. 7 ; Eph. iii. 16;Col.i.ll. d. the power and influence xchich belong to riches; (pecuniary ability), wealth : tov arpfivovs, ' riches ministering to luxury' (Grotius), Rev. xviii. 3; Kara 6u- vapLv KOI vnip [al. napa] Siivapiv, according to their means, 3'ea, bejond their means, 2 Co. viii. 3 ; (in this sense, for '7'n, Sept. Deut. viii. 17 sq. ; Ruth iv. 11 ; not infreq. in Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 34 ; an. 7, 7, 21 (36)). e. power and resources arising from numbers : Rev. iii. 8. f. power consisting in or resting upon a r m i e s, forces, hosts, (so, both in sing, and in plur., often in Grk. writ, fr. Hdt., Thuc, Xen. on ; in the Sept. and in Apocr.) ; hence Svvdpeis tov ovpavoi the hosts of heaven, Hebraisti- cally the stars : Mt. xxiv. 29 ; Lk. xxi. 26 ; and 6. iv tois oipavo'is, ilk. xiii. 25 ; equiv. to O'l^nn X3V, 2 K. xvii. 16 ; xxiii. 4 ; Is. xxxiv. 4 ; Jer. viii. 2 ; Dan. viii. 10, etc. [cf. (ra/Sad)^]. g. Like the Lat. ivs and joo(es/«s, equiv. to the (force i. e.) meaning of a word or expression : 1 Co. xiv. 11 ; (Plat. Crat. p. 394 b. ; Polyb. 20, 9, 11; Dion. Hal. 1, 68; Dio Cass. 55, 3; al.).* [Syx. 0la,Svvapis, ivipyfta, i^ouala, laxvs, KpoTos: Zvvafioto 160 hvaepfirjvevToi; fila force, effective, often oppressive power, cxliiljiting itself in siiijjle deeds of violence; Suy. power, natunil aliility, gen- eml anil inherent ; iv4py. Kwi/m/, power in exercise, opera- tive power; ^|ou(r. primarily liberty of action ; theii,nulhoriti/ — eitlieras delegated power, oras unrestrained, arbitrary power ; laX' stremilh, power (es)). jiliysical) lus an endowment ; KpaTos, HiiV/fe, relative and manifested power — in tlie N. T. only of God ; rb Kparos rris itrx- I'^I*'*- ^'i- 10, ^ iiffpy. ttjs Svf. Kpli. iii. 7, fi ivipy. toC Kp. rf)! iVx- I'-P''- '• l^- ^'f- S>cliniidt cli. 148 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16 ; Mcy. on Eph. i. 19.] 8uva(i6w, -5) : [pres. pass, bwafiovfuu] ; to make strong, conjirm, slrenf/llien : Col. i. 1 1 ; [Eph. vi. 10 WH mrg.] ; 1 aor. fSwapiaOrjcrav, Ileb. xi. 34 (R (i t xc8.). (Ps. Ixvii. (l.wiii.) i'J; Eccl. x. 10; Dan. ix. 27 [Tlieod. ; Ps. Ixiv. (Ixv.) 4 Aq. ; Job xxxvi. i) Aq.] and occasionally in eccl. and Byz. writ. ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 005 ; [W. 20 (25)].) [CoMP. : fV8wu/joci).]* 8uvdo-rT]s, -on, 6, (Sivafiai) ; fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. on ; poa-er/ul ; 1. a prince, potentate: Lk. i. 52 ; used of God (Sir. xlvi. 5 ; 2 Mace. xv. 3, 23, etc. ; of Zeus, Soph. Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. 15. 2. a courtier, high officer, royal minister: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of f/reat authority; but see Meyer ad loc], (hwaarai , (ien. 1.4).- Swarc'd), -o) ; {Swaros): to he powerful or miylity; slioir one's self powerful : 2 Co. xiii. 3 (ojip. to aadevSi) ; to lie ■able, have power : foil, by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L T Tr WII ; 2 Co. ix. 8 L T Tr WH. Kot found in prof. writ, nor in the Sept.* Svvaros, -T), -6v, {bvvafiai) ; [fr. Find, down], Sept. for 113 J ; able, powerful, miiihty, strong; 1. absolutely; a. mighty in irealth and influence: 1 Co. i. 26; (Rev. vi. 15 Rec); 01 Svvaroi, the chief men. Acts xxv. 5, (Joseph, b. j. 1, 12,4 rJKov 'lovdatoiv ol dvvaroi; Xcn. Cyr. 5, 4, 1 ; Thuc. 1, 89 ; Polyb. 'J, 23, 4). o Swaros, the preijminently mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i. 49. b. strong in soul : to bear calamities and trials with fortitude and patience, 2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. xiii. 9; firm in conviction and faith, Ro. xv. 1. 2. in con- struction ; a. Svparos f ijii with inf., to be able (to do some- thing; [B. 2G0 (224) ; W. 319 (299)]) : Lk. xiv. 31 ; Acts xi. 17; Ro. iv. 21 ; xi. 23 ; xiv. 4 R G ; 2 Co. ix. 8 R G ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; Tit. i. 9 ; Ilcb. xi. 19 (Lchm. Swarm) ; Jas. iii. 2. b. SvvuTos cv rtvi, mighty i. e. excelling in some- thing : iv fpyco K- y^oyij), Lk. xxiv. 19; e'u \6yois kui epyois, Acts vii. 22 ; fV ypa()>ais, excelling in knowledge of the Scriptures, Acts xviii. 24. c. npos ti, mighty i. e. having power for something: 2 Co. x. 4. d. neuter bwarov [in pass, sense, cf. B. 190 (165)] possible : el Svvarov (ea-ri), Mt. xxiv. 24 ; xxvi. 39 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; xiv. 35 ; Ro. xii. 18; Gal. iv. 15; ovk rjv Swarov foil, by inf. Acts ii. 24; Swarop Ti cVt/ tivi [B. 190 (165)], Mli. ix. 23 ; xiv. 36 ; Acts XX. 16 ; TTopa 6ea iravra Svvara fcm. Jit. xix. 26 ; Mk. X. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. to Swarliv avTov, what his power could do, equiv. to ttjh dvmpiv aiiTov, Ro. ix. 22, cf. W. § 34, 2.* iivu, Sva>; 2 aor. eSvp; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ, transi- tively) tSvaa (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WH), cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 156 sq. ; W. p. 84 (81 ) ; B. 56 (49) ; [Veitch s. vv.] ; to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in : in the N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the sea), Mk. i. 32 ; Lk. iv. 40. So times without number in Grk. writ. fr. Honi. on; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 11 ; Lev. xxii. 7, etc.; Tob. ii. 4; 1 Mace. x. 50. [CoMP. : «V, djr-€K- (-/uii), (V-. (n-(v-, nap-fiiT-, «Vi-St/Kiu.] ' Sio, gcnit. indecl. Svo (as in Epic, and occasinnallv in Hdt., Thuc, Xen., Polyb., al. for Svo'w, more common in Attic [see Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 289 sq.]) ; dat. Svai, &v'),-(7i>'inMt.xxii.40; Mk.xvi.l2; Lk.xii.52(RG -al) ; Acts xii. 6 (R G L-cti) ; Ilcb. x. 28 ; Rev. xi. 3 (R G -o-i) ; cf . Tdf. Proleg. p. 98 ; I VII. Apj). J). 1 4 7] — a form not found in llie older ami better writ., met with in Hippoer., Aristot., Theo|)hr., frequent fr. Polyl). on, for the Attic dvo'iv); ace. 8vo (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. [). 210; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. J). 276 sip; W. § 9, 2 b. ; Passow i. p. 729); two: absol., OVK (Tt elai SiJo, aXKa r. Svo^dar.] and Lk. xi. 46 ^opi-ia Svafiaa-TaKra, said of precepts hard to obey, and irksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3 ; Philo, omn. prob. lib. §5 ; Pint, cjuaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 f.) * Svv Ka\ Sucr/juf, from all regions or nations, Mt. viii. 11 ; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Ilebr. WTiVry X12p, Josh. i. 4. Often in jjrof. writ. fr. Ildt. on, both with and without fjKlov* 8vT])ie'u, -u> : [pres. pass. 8u(r'i))i.(a, -as, rj, both the condition of a Sv(T(j)T]fi.os, i. e. of one who is d/fimed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of one who uses opprobrious language, viz. defamation, re- proach : 64a bv. Sii8eKa, 01, al, Ta, [fr. Horn, down], twelve : Mt. i.K. 20 ; X. 1 ; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7 ; xxiv. 11 for SfxaSiJo] ; Rev. vii. 5 [RGt/3'] ; x.xi. 21, etc. ; 01 StiSf/ca, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence : ]Mk. ix. 35 ; X. 32 ; xi. 11 ; Mt. xxvi. 14, 20; Lk. xxii. 3, etc. S8cKaTos, ->), -ov, twelfth : Rev. xxi. 20. [Fr. Horn, on.]* 8uSeKd-<{>vXov, -ov, TO, (fr. StiSfxa, and ^vkrj tribe), the twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as consisting of twelve tribes : Acts xxvi. 7. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55, 6 ; Prot. Jac. c. 1, 3 ; Xaor o Su8fKd<^u\os, Orac. Sibyll. Cf. 8e to build) ; 1. a building, house, (Hom. et sqq.). 2. a part of a building, dining-room, hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script, equiv. to JJ, house-top, roof[}Y. 23] : Mt. x.xiv. 17 ; Mk. xiii. 15 ; Lk. V. 19; xvLi. 31. The house-tops of the Orientals were (and still are) level, and wei-e frequented not only for walking but also for meditation and prayer: Acts x. 9; hence eVl Sw/iaToiv, on the house-tops, i. e. in public : Mt. x. 27 ; Lk. xii. 3 ; inl to datfui . . . kut 6(f)da\fiovs iravros 'lapaijX, 2 S. xvi. 22.* S(i>p«d, -as, rf, (SiSa/u) ; from [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down ; a gift : .In. iv. 10 ; Acts viii. 20 ; xi. 1 7 ; Ro. v. 15 ; 2 Co. ix. 15; Heb. vi.4; rj x^P^^ edoBrj Kara to fisTpov ttjs Baptas TOO Xpiarov, according to the measure iu which Christ gave it, Eph. iv. 7 ; with an epexegetical gen. of the tiling given, viz. toO aylov -nvevjiaTos, Acts ii. 38 ; x. 45 ; biKawaivqi, Ro. v. 1 7 [L WH Tr mrg. br. r. Smp.] ; ttjs XapiTos Toil 6eov, Eph. iii. 7. The ace. bapfav (prop, as a gift, gif-wise [cf. W. 230 (216) ; B. 153 (134)]) is used adverbially ; Sept. for D3n ; a. freely, for naught, gratis, gratuitously : Mt. x. 8 ; Ro. iii. 24 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; Rev. xxi. 6 ; xxii. 1 7, (Polyb. 18, 1 7, 7 ; Ex. xxi. 1 1 ; Saipeav avev apyvplov. Is. Iii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without Just cause, unnecessarily : Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5 ; xxxiv. (.XXXV.) 19) ; Gal. ii. 21, (.Job i. 9 [?] ; Ps. xxxiv. (.XXXV.) 7 [where Sjtnm. aratriajs] ; so the Lat. gratuitus: Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor. Sen. epp. 105, 3 [bk. xviii. ep. 2, § 3] odium aut est ex ofEensa . . . aut gratuitum). [Syn. see bopa, fin.] * 8b>p€dv, see htxtpid. 8wpe'u), -i> : to present, bestow, (Hes., Pind.; Hdt., al.) ; pass. Lev. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more frequently as depon. mid. Smpeopai, -ovp-ai (Hom. et sqq.) : 1 aor. iSaprjcraprjv ; pf. SeSapr/pai ; rivi tj, Mk. XV. 45 ; 2 Pet. i. 3, 4.* Suf»|)i.a, -TOf, TO, (^Scopeopai) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction : Ro. V. 16 ; Jas. i. 1 7. ([Aeschyl], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf. Soiia, fin.] * 8upov, -ov, TO, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for i3")p, often also for nnn and ^^t^' ; a gift, present: Eph. ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; of gifts offered as an expression of honor, Mt. ii. 11 ; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to God, Mt. V. 23 sq. ; viii. 4 ; xv. 5 ; xxiii. IS sij. ; Mk. vii. 11 ; Heb. v. 1 ; viii. 3 sq. ; Lx. 9 ; xi. 4 ; of money cast into the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the support of the poor, Lk. xxi. 1, [4]. [Syn. see So^a, fin.] * Supo^iopia, -as, T), (bapo(p6pos bringing gifts), the offering of a gift or of gifts : Ro. xv. 31 LTrmrg. cf. StaKovia, 3. (Alciphr. 1, 6 ; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Ilemst.]; several times iu eccles. writ.) * 11 162 E to, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the impv. pres. of the verb eav [ace. to otlicrs a natural, instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in prose writ, (as Plat. Trot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah.': Mk. i. 24 R G ; Lk. iv. 34 ; cf. Fritzsche on IMk. p. 32 sq.' €'dv: I. a conditional particle (derived fr. fi av), which makes reference to time and to experience, introducing something future, but not determining, before the event, whether it is certainly to take place ; if, in case, (Lat. si ; Germ, wenn ; im Fall, class ; /alts ; tcofern) ; cf ., among others, Hermann ad Viger. p. 832 ; Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 4.'>0 sqq. ; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with the S u b j u n c t i V e, according to the regular usage of the more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the subjunc. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (eai/ ovv 6 o0^aX/io? (Tiv, etae \0(t)ai 6« tdiatraL r] aiturroi, vs. 24 eav 5e Tzavrei Trpo(pTjTev npos i/ias yXaaaais XaXav, 1 Co. xiv. 6. 2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the time of Aristotle on, edv is connected also with the I n- dicative, [cf. Klotz I.e. p. 468 sqq.; Kiihner § 575 Anm. 5 ; W. 295 (277) ; B. 221 (191) sq. ; Tilf. Proleg. p. 124 sq. ; WII. App. p. 171 ; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Vin- cent and Diclsnn, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77] ; and a. with the indie. Future, in meaning akin, as is well known, to the subjunc. : [eav Svo a-vnvr]aovatv. Mt. xviii. 19 T Tr] ; eav ovtoi ataTrrjO-ovai, Lk. xix. 40 L T Tr WII ; eav . . . oSr/yriaei, Acts viii. 31 T TrWH, (eav ^«jSij- Xoxroutrii/ aird. Lev. xxii. 9) ; but also b. with the indie. Present: e'av Savel^eTe, Lk. vi. 34 Lmrg. Trtxt.; e'av oTTiKeTe, 1 Th. iii. 8 T Tr t.xt. WH ; edv re dnoSvrjaicopiev, Ro. xiv. 8 Lchm. with an indie. Preterite, but one having the force of a Pres. : eav [Lchm. ai/] oi8a/i(>/, 1 .In. V. 15 without var. 3. edv joined with other particles; a. eav Se Kai but if also, hut even if, [A. V. but and if (re- tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)] ; with the Subjunc. : Mt. xviii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 11, 28 ; 2 Tim. ii. 5. b. eav Kai : Gal. vi. 1. c. eav iifj if not, unless, except; with the subjunc. Present: Mt. x. 13; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lchm. txt. aor.] ; Acts XV. 1 [Rec.] ; 1 Co. viii. 8 ; ix. IG [R G L mrg. T WH mrg.] ; Jas. ii. 1 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; with the subjunc. Aorist : ' Mt. vi. 15 ; xviii. 35 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; .In. iii. 3 ; viii. 24 ; 1 Co. xiv. 6 sq. 9 ; Ro. x. 15 ; [xi. 23 R L] ; 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; Rev. ii. 5, 22 [R L], and often, with the Indicative pres. : eav nf/ TTiareveTe, Jn. x. 38 Tdf. In some passages, although the particles eav fiq retain their native force of unless, if not, yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate them but that, without : Mt. xxvi. 42 (the cup cannot pass by without my drinking it) ; ov yap eariv KpvTrrov, eav lif) (f>avepa>dg (Treg.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall eavrrep 163 'E^palof; be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex- cept that it should be made manifest), Jlk. iv. 22 ; oiSfi'r €(mv, OS d' iavrov, see dn-o, H. 2 d. aa. ; 81' iavrov of itself, i. e. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr L txt. read avr.'] ; iv eavrco, see in biaXoyi^eadai, Xiyciv, (iTieiv. els eavTov ep\e(r6ai to come to one's self, to a better mind, Lk. .xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). Kaff iavrov hi/ one's self, alone : Acts sxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 1 7. nap' iavra, by him i. e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3). TTpos iavrov, to himself i. e. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G; T om., WII (but with air.) reject, L Tr (but the latter with air.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr air. (see auToi))] ; icith [cf. our /0] himself, i. e. in his own mind, ■npotrevxfSai, Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Mace. xi. 13) ; in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos- sessive pronoun, as rovs iavrwv veKpovs : Mt. viii. 22 ; Lk. ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the 1st and 2d pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is thereby occasioned ; thus, iv iavrois equiv. to ev nplv av- rdis, Ro. viii. 23 ; lai/rour equiv. to rjpds avrovs, 1 Co. xi. 31 ; d(f>' iavrov i. q. otto a-eavroi [read by L Tr WH], Jn. xvui. 34 ; iavrdv i. q. aeavrov [read by L T Tr WH], Ro. xii i. 9 ; eavroU for vpuv airois, Mt. xxiii. 31, etc. ; cf. ilatr thiae § 489 H. ; W. § 22, 5 ; [B. § 127, 15]. 3. It is used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun dXXriXcov, dWr/Xois, aXX^Xovr, reciprocally, mutually, one another: Mt. xvi. 7 ; xxi. 38 ; Jlk. .x. 26 [Tr mrg. WH avTov'] ; xvi. 3 ; Lk. xx. 5 ; Eph. iv. 32 ; Col. iii. 13, 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8, 10 ; see Matthiae §489 IIL : Kiihner u. p. 497 sq. ; Bnhdy. p. 273; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13]. 600», -w ; impf . etav ; fut. edaat ; 1 aor. eXacra ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to allow, permit, let : foU. by the inf., oiie av fiacre biopvyfivai [T Tr WH -pf^^vai], Mt. xxiv. 43 ; by the ace. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (ou/c eta airra XaXciv) ; Acts xiv. 16 ; xxiii. 32; xxvii. 32 ; xxviii. 4 ; 1 Co. X. 13 ; by the ace. alone, when the inf. is easil}- supplied from the context, ovk etaaev avrovs, sc. TTopevBfjvat, Acts xvi. 7 ; otK eiav airrdv, sc. el(7e\6eiv. Acts xLx. 30 ; [cf. W. 476 (444)]. 2. rivd, to suffer one to do tchat he wishes, not to restrain, to let alone : Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; Acts v. 38 R G ; edre sc. avrovs, is spoken by Christ to the apostles, meaning, ' do not resist them, let them alone,' (the fol- lowing £0)? roirov is to be separated from what precedes ; [al. connect the words closely, and render ' suffer them to go even to this extreme ' ; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed. Weiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave : rds dyKvpas . . . eXuiv els rrjv ddXatro-av, they let down into the sea [i. e. abandoned ; cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009' bot.], Acts xxvii. 40. [COMP. : Trpoff-fdo).] * ePSo|j.T|KOVTa, 01, al, rd, [fr. Ildt. down], seventy : Acts vii. 14 [here Rec.^'== efiSopriKovraTrevre} ; xxiii. 23 ; xxvii. 37 ; 01 e^bopj)Kovra [f/36. Zvo L br. WH br.], the seventy disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve apostles : Lk. x. 1, 17. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Seventy Dis- ciples.] * r6'p8o|iT)K0VTa-«| for e^SoprjKovra tf, seventy-six: Acts xxvii. 37 Rec.*] £'P8o(itiKovTs, -7;, -ov, seventh: Jn. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4; Jude 14 ; Rev. viii. 1 ; xi. 15, etc. [From Hom. down.] "Epe'p [R" G], more correctly [L T WH] "E^ep [on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103 ; Treg. "E;3., cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107 ; WH. Intr. § 408 ; cf. B. D. s. v. Heber], d, Eber or Heher, indeclinable proper name of a Hebrew : Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).* 'EppoiKis, -T], -ov, Hebrew : Lk. xxiii. 38 (R G L br. Tr mrg. br.).* 'E^paios [WH 'E^p., see their Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, a 'E^pak 164 £771»? Hebrew ("13;? a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv. 13, afterwarJs transferred to bis i)osterity descended from Isaac and Jacob; by it in (lie O. T. the Israelites are both distinguished from and desif;nated by foreign- ers, as afterwards by Faiisan., Phitarch, al. The name is now generally derived from "iiy for ^^l^^ "l^i' i. e. of the region beyond the Euphrates, whence n^il equiv. to one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen. xiv. 13 Sept. nfpaTTjs. Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr. Spraclie u. Sehrift, p. 11 sq. ; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987; Knohel, Volkertafel der Genesis, p. 17G sqq. ; Bleek; Einl. in d. A. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Enn;. trans, i. 7(J sq.] ; [B. D. 8. V. Hebrew. For Syn. see'loD8aiof.]). IntheN. T. 1. any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation : 2 Co. xi. 22; Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Euseb. li. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo, the Alexandrian Jew, 'E^paios, although liis education ■was Greek, and he had little [if any] knowledge even of the Hebrew language ; and in Pracp. evang. 8, 8, 34 he applies the same word to Aristobulus, who was both an Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jew.) 2. In a nar- rower sense those arc called 'E/3paiot who lived in Pales- tine and used the language of the country, i.e. Clialdee; from whom are distinguished o< 'EXXi/norai, q. v. That name adhered to them even after they had gone over to Christianity : Acts vi. 1. (Philo in his de conf.lingg.§ 2G makes a contrast between 'E^pnioi and ij/itir ; and in his de congr. erud. grat. § 8 he calls (ireek 17 rjiierepa SidXexros. Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He- brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke Aramaic or Greek, cquiv. to ttkttoi e^ 'E/Spaiuv ; so in the heading of tlie E])istle to the Hebrews; called by Euseb. h. e. 3, 4, 2 01 f^ ''Efipalwv ijvTei. [Cf. A'. Wieselcr, Unters. ii. d. Ilelinierl)riet', 2te Iliilfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.]' 'EPpats [Wil 'E/3/)., see their Intr. § 408], -/S05, 17, Ile- hrcu; the Hebrew language ; not that however in which the O. T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal- daic, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; cf. A. Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at the time of Jesus and the apostles had long super.seded it in Palestine: Acts xxi. 40 ; xxii. 2 ; xxvi. 14 ; 'E/3pais (^mfij, 4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Shemitic I.an- guages etc. ; ib. Am. ed. s. v . Lang, of the New Test.] ' "EPpaio-TC [A\'II 'E/3p., see their Intr. § 408], adv., (il3pat(o>), in Hebrcir, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing word and reff.) : Jn. v. 2 ; xix. 13, 17, 20 ; [xx. 16 T Tr AVH Lbr.] ; Rev. ix. 11 ; xvi. 16. [Sir. prol. line 13.] • (Y^lla ; impf. ^yyifoK ; Attic fut. f yyiS (.las. iv. 8 [Bttm. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1 C.]) ; 1 aor. rjyyta-a; pf. fjyyiKa; (cy/is) ; in (irk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on ; Sept. for ij'j: and 3"ir3. 1. trans, to bring near, to Join one thing to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7 ; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v. 8. 2. inlrans. to draw or co7ne near, to approach ; absol., Mt. x.\i. 34; Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28; xxii. 1 ; xxiv. 15; Actsvii. 17; xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [Ileb. X. 25] ; pf. ijyyiKe has come nigh, is al hand : fj fiaaiX. tov Bfov, Mt. iii. 2 ; iv. 1 7 ; x. 7 ; Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. x. 1 1 ; with the addition (4>' ipa^, vs. 9 ; ^ eprniaxris, Lk. xxi. 20 ; 17 &pa, Jit. xxvi. 45 ; 6 napaSt&ois /if, Mt. xxvi. 46 ; [Mk. xiv. 42 (where Tdf. ijyyia-fv)] ; 6 Kaipus, Lk. xxi. 8 ; i) r'liicpa, Ro. xiii. 12 ; TO reXos, 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; ij nupova-ia tov Kvpiov, das. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the ])ers()n or the place approached : Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; .vxii. 47; Acts ix. 3 ; X. 9 ; xxii. 6 ; iyyt(eiv to 6ea (in Sept. used esp. of the priests entering the temple to offer sacrillces or to perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix.. 22 ; xxxiv. 30 ; Lev. X. 3, etc.) : to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Rec, fr. Is. xxix. 13; to turn one's thoughts to God, to become ac- (piaintcd with him, Ileb. vii. 1 9 ; Jas. iv. 8 ; 6 6f6s f yyi'fft Tipi, (jod draws near to one in the bestowment of his grace and help, Jas. iv. 8. Foil, by «if and the ace. of the ])lace : i\It. xxi. 1 ; Mk. xi. 1 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; .xix. 29 ; xxiv. 28; [foil, by Trpof w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see B. § 14 7,28; al. regard this as a pregn. eonstr., cf. W. §§ 48, e. ; 66, 2 d.] ; pifxP^ damTov rjyyiac, to draw nigh unto, be at the point of, death, Phil. ii. 30 (cyyiffixjis fldTOTov, Job xxxiii. 22) ; with an adv. of Jilace, unov Kkiirrqi ovk iyyi^ti, Lk. xii. 33. [COMP. : npoa-eyyl^ui.'] * [«•y-ywrra, neut. jjlur. su])erl. (fr. iyyii) as adv., nearest, next : WII (rejected) mrg. in Mk. vi. 36 (al. ici^kXu).*] iy-ypa^a [T ^^'H epyp., see iv, III. 3]: pf. pass, iyyi- ypapjxai ; [f r. Aeschyl. and I Idt. down] ; li> engrave ; in- scribe, ivrite in or on : tI, pass, with dat. of the means [tcilh'] and foil, by iv with dat. of the place (in ndnds, tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2,3; to record, enrol : ra ovoy-aTa, pass. Lk. X. 20 T Tr WH. • 'iyyvo%, -ov, 6, 17, a snrety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor^ : KpeiTTovoi 8ia6!]Kr)s lyyvot, he by whom we get fidl assur- ance of the more e.xeelU^nt covenant made by God with us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con- nected with itf Ileb. vii. 22. (2 jSIacc. X. 28 ; Sir. xxix. 1 5 sq. Xen. vect. 4, 20 ; Acschin. Epp. 1 1, 1 2 p. 1 28 a. ; Aristot. oec. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. 1350", 19], Polyb., Uiod., al.)' €77vs, adv., (fr. iv and yuiov [limb, hand], at hand ; [but rather allied w. ayxh «yX'"' "nxius, anguish, etc. ; see Curtius § 166 ; Vanicek p. 22]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for 3np ; near; 1. of Place and position; a. ])rop. : absol. Jn. xLx. 42, [cf. also 20 G L T Tr WII (but see below)]; with gen. (Matthiae § 339, 1 p. 812; W. 195(183); [471 (439); B. §132, 24]), Lk. xix. 11 ; Jn. iii. 23 ; vi. 19, 23 ; xi. 18, 54 ; xix. 20 [Rec, but see above] ; Acts i. 12 ; with dat. (Matthiae § 386, 6 ; Kuhner § 423, 13; [Jelf § 592, 2]), Acts Lx. 38; x.xvii. 8. b. trop- ically; 01 iyyvs, those who arc near of access to God i. e. Jews, and 01 paxpav, those who are alien from the true God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles : Eph. ii. 17 (cf. Is. Ivii. 19) ; iyyvs yiv«i6ai, to be brought near, sc. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii. 13, (so with the Rabbins not infrequently to make nigh is equiv. to to make a proselyte, cf. Wetstcin ad 1. c. ; [SchbNgen, Horae etc. i. 761 sq. ; Valck. Schol. i. 363]); iyyvs crov to pr)pa itrnv. near thec i. e. at hand, already, as it were, in thy mind, Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut.'xxx. 14, [cf. B. § 129, 11; W. 465 (434)]. 2. of Time; concern- ing things imminent and soon to come to pass : Mt. xxiv. 32; xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30, 31 ; Jn. ii. 13 ; vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; xi. 55 ; Rev. i. 3 ; xxii. 10 ; of the near ad- eyyvTepov 165 eyKaipia ■vent of persons : 6 Kvpios (yyvs, of Christ's return from heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in another sense, of God in Ps. c.xliv. (cxlv.) 18); with the addition eTri dvpan, at the door, Mt. x.xiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; e'yyut Kardpas, near to being cursed, Heb. vi. 8 ; av. Mt. xiv. 2 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 7, {veKpov ix Savdrov Ka\ e'| aSou, Sir. xlviii. 5; for l"pD, 2 K. iv. 31); iyeipnv simply: Acts V. 30; X. 40; xiii. 37; 1 Co.vi. 14; 2Co. iv. 14; pass., Mt. xvi. 21 ; xvii. 23 [L WH mrg. draoT-ijtrerni] ; [xx. 19 T Tr txt. WH t.xt.] ; xxvi. 32 ; xxvii. 63; Jlk. [vi. 16 T WH (see above)] ; xvi. 6 ; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WH reject the clause], 34 ; Ro. iv. 25 ; 1 Co. xv. 4, etc. 3. in later usage gen- erally to cause to rise, raise, from a seat, bed, etc. ; pass, and mid. to rise, arise ; used a. of one sitting : iyei- perai [L Tr WH riyepdrj'] Taxi. Jn. xi. 29, cf. vs. 20 ; pres. act. imperative eytipc (see above), Mk. x. 49 [not Rec], cf. vs. 46 ; hence (like the Hebr. D'p, Gen. xxii. 3 ; 1 Chr. xxii. 1 9), in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. dvitn-qpi, II. 1 c. it is used before verbs of going, etc. : eyepdeh riKoXovdfi [-ijo-ei/ R G] airu, Mt. ix. 19 ; eyfipe [R G -pat] /cm p.erprjo'ov, Rev. xi. 1 . b. of one reclining : iyelperai (K Tov he'mvov, Jn. xiii. 4 ; (ydpfaBe, Jn. xiv. 31. c. of one lying, to raise )tp : ijydpfv airov. Acts x. 20 ; ey€pdijT€ arise, Mt. xvii. 7 ; eyfipe (see aboxe) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr txt. br.] ; Tjyepdr] otto xi/f yfjs he rose from the earth. Acts ix. 8 ; to [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a pit, Mt. xii. 11. d. of one 'down ' with disease, lying sick: act., Mk. ix. 27; Acts iii. 7; f'yepd airov 6 Kvpior, will cause him to recover, Jas. v. 15; pass. Mt. viii. 15; eyeipe ([Rec. -pai, so Grsb. (doubtfull}- in Jit.)], see above) arise : Mt. ix. 5 ; Jn. v. 8 ; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br.]. 4. I'o raise up, produce, cause to appear; a. to cause to appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract the attention of men) : fjydpe ra 'lo-paijX a-oirrjpa. Acts xiii. 23 Rec. ; ^yfipfv avrols tok Aavfld els /Sao-iXe'a, Acts xiii. 22 (so D'pn, Judg. ii. 18 ; iii. 9, 15) ; pass, iyelpopim, to come before the p ublic, to appear, arise : Mt. xi. 1 1 ; xxiv. 11, 24 ; ilk. .xiii. 22 ; Lk. vii. 16 ; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266 (250); B. 204 (177)]; conte.xtually, to appear before a Judge : Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31. b. ini riva to raise up, incite, stir up, against one ; pass, to rise against : Jit. xxiv. 7 ; Mk. xiii. 8 ; Lk. xxi. 10. c. to raise up i. e. cauxe to be born : reicva twl, Mt. iii. 9 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; mpai (rwrrjpias, Lk. i. 6;1 (see dvlcrrr^pi, I. c. f^aviarrfpi, 1) ; dXl^iv toIs SetT/xoir pov, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e. the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib- ulation, Phil. i. 16 (17) L T Tr WH. d. of buildings, to raise, construct, erect: t6v vaov, Jn. ii. 19 sq. (so D"pn Deut. xvi. 22; 1 K. xvi. 32. Aehan. de nat. an. 11, 10; Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 5 ; Hdian. 3, 1 5, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.] ; 8, 2, 1 2 [5 ed. Bekk.]; Lcian. Pseudomant. § 19 ; Anthol. 9, 696. 1 Esdr. V. 43 ; Sir. xlix. 13 ; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. g. 5, 40 ; scpulcruin, Cic. legg. 2, 27, 68). [Amraonius : dva- CTTJvai Koi eyepBrjvai biacjicpff dvao'Trjvai p.tv yap ettI epyov, iyfpBfjuai Si i^ vttvov: cf. also Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 sq. But see exx. above. Comp. : 8t-, f^, iir-, (Tuv-e-yetpci).] e-yepo-is, -e lose courai/e, Jlag, faint : adopted by L T Tr AV'Ii in place of K G exKaKeta (q. v.) in Lk. xviii. 1 ; 2 Co. iv. 1,16; Gal. vi. 9 ; Eph. iii. 13 ; 2 Th. iii. 13 — except that T WIT write ivK. in Lk. xviii. 1 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Eph. iii. 13 ; .so WH in 2 Th. iii. 13, also ; see ci», III. 3 ; [cf. Tdf.'s note on 2 Co. iv. 1 ; Meyer ibid., who thinks that €KK. may liave been a colloquial form. See the full exhi- bition of the usajje of the Mss. given by Dr. Gregorij in his Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, p. 78.] (Found a few times in Symmachus [Gen. xxvii. 4G ; Num. xxi. 5 ; Is. vii. 16 ; also Prov. iii. 1 1 Theod.] ; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 2, 2 ; in prof. writ, only in Polyb. 4, 19, 10 to iriy-nfiv ras /3oi;fleiar iviKOKfjo-av they culpably neglected to send aid, [add Philo de confus. lingg. § 13 (Mang. i. 412, 36) ovk cxxa- KovfJL€tf6s iKl'd^fl>6rjv~\.)* CY-KoXeu [see €1/, III. 3] -m; fut. f yicaXfVca ; impf. ««xd- \o%/v; [prcs. pass. fyxaXoCyaai] ; prop, to call (somctliing) In some one {iv [i. e. prob. In liis case ; or possibly, as rooted in him]) ; hence,-/o call to account, bring a charge against. accu.ie : as in classic Grk. foil, by dat. of the person [cf. \V. § 30, 9 a.], Acts xix. 38 ; .x.xiii. 28, (Sir. xlvi. 19) ; Kara with gen. of the pers. to come forward as accuser against, bring a charge against : Ro. viii. 33. Pass, to be accused (cf. B. § 134, 4, [§ 133, 9 ; yet cf. Mey. on Acts as below, W. u. s.]) ; with gen. of the thing : ordo-fcas, Acts xix. 40, (do-fj3eiar is rbv Ti/Sfpioi/ iyKKriBfl':, Dio Cass. 58, 4 ; act. with dat. of the pers. and gen. of the tiling, Plut. Arist. 10, 9 ; see W. u. s. ; Matthiae § 369) ; vrcpi tov- Tu>v, 2)1/ iyKoKoiiiai, unless tliis is to be resolved into rrepX Tovriiiv a etc., acc. to the well-known construction iyxa- Xflv Tivi Ti, Acts xxvi. 2; wtpi ni/or (act. Diod. 11,83) Acts xxiii. 29 ; x.xvi. 7, [B. § 133, 9]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Xen. down.) [Syx. see KaTtjyupia, fin.] * e-y-KOTo-Xetiru [Acts ii. 27, 31, T WII «Vk. ; T also in Ro. ix. 2!i, see his note and cf. iv, HI. 3] ; [im[)f. iyKari- XeiTTOi/ (WII txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16)] ; fut. iyKaraXfl^o) ; 2 aor. iyKiiTiXiirov ; Pass., [pres. fy/coTaXf iVofiai] ; 1 aor. (yKaTf\eL(f)6rjv; Sept. for 3T>^ ; 1. to aliandon, desert, {iv equiv. to tv nvi, in some place or condition), i. e. to leave in straits, leave helpless, (coUoq. leave in the lurch) : Tivd, JIt. xxvii. 46 and Mk. xv. 34 fr. Ps. xxi. (xsii.) 2 ; Ileb. xiii. 5 ; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9 ; after the Hebr. 3?;; with 7, riva fir aSov [or aSiji/], by forsaking one to let him go into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27, 31 (not R). to desert, forsake : Tivd, 2 Tim. i v. 1 0, 1 C ; ttjv iTntrvvayayijv, Heb. X. 25. 2. to leave behind among, to leave surviv- ing: Tjixlv a-nipfui, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (lies. opp. 376 ; Tbuc, sqq.) " «■y-Kar-oiKtw [T ^\'ll ivK., see iv, III. 3], -u; to dwell among : iv aiiTois among them, 2 Pet. ii. 8. (Very rare in j)rof. writ, as [lldt. 4, 204]; Eur. frag. [188] ap. Dion •Chrys. or. 73 (in.; Polyb. 18, 26, 13.)' (Y-Kavxao)iai. [T WH ivK., see iv, III. 8]; to glory in: foil, by iv with dat. of the obj. (Ps. Ii. (Iii.) 3 ; xcvi. (xcvii.) 7 ; cv. (cvi.) 47), 2 Th. i. 4 L T Tr WII. (With simple dat. of thing in eccl. writ, and Aesop's Fables.) ' f7-K'VTp£^. 653 d.] ; Theophr. h. p. 2, 2, 5 ; Antonin. 11, .s) : tlvo., Ro. xi. 17, 19, 23, 24 [cf. W. § 52, 4, 5] ; in these pass. Paul likens the heathen who by becoming Christians have been ad- mitted into fellowship with the ])eople for whom the Messianic salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees inserted into a cultivated stock ; [cf. Beet on vs. 24 ; B. D. s. v. Ohve].' cYKXriiia [see ci», III. 3], -rot, to. (fyKaXem), accusation: the crime of which one is accused, Acts .xxv. 16 ; tyxXij/ia f;(cii', to have laid to one's charge, be accused of a crime. Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attic writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc. on.) • [Stx. see Karriyopiu; cf. Isoc. IG, 2 ras fiiv yap SiVaf {/■Jrep Tu}V iSiwv e y K \TJ fi-dr w v Xayxdvoutri, Tas 6e KaT7)yo- ptas UTTtp Twv T/js triKius TrpayfiaTuv TTOiOiivTai, Kai TrAeio» Xp6vov Siarpiliau(n rhv naripa fj.ou S la dWovT e s ^ kt\,] CY-KO)i.poo)i.aL [see ivAll. 3], -oiipat : [1 aor. mid. ivtKopi- ^axrdprjv^ ; (fr. iv and ko/x^oio to knot, tie, and this fr. Kopfioi knot, band, (Germ. Schlelfe), by which two things are fastened together), to fasten or gird on one's self; the iyKop^apa was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which was fastened to the girdle of the vest [f'lwfiir], and dis- tinguished slaves from freemen ; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 ttjv TaTreivo(pp. iyKop^aia-atrde, gird yourselves with humility as your servile garb (iyKupfiapa) i. e. by putting on humil- ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea lies in the jihrase is shown by C. F. A. Frilzsche, with Ids usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 259 sf|q.* «■y-KOTri] [WII ivK. T ixK., see iv, HI. 3], -^s, rj, (iyKonro)), properly, a cutting (made in the road to impede an en- emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12. (Diod. 1, 32; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ; Longin. de sublim. 41, 3 ; [al.].) * . CY-Kiirro) [in Acts T WH ivK., so T in 1 Pet. where R iKK.; see iv, III. 3] ; 1 aor. iviKO\jfa; Pass., [pres. iyKoTVTO- fioi] ; impf. i vtKOTrrofirjv ; to cut into, to impede one's course by cutting off' his way; hence nniv. to hinder (Hesych. : ifiirohl^a, StttKoAito) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1, 12; in the X. T. with acc. of the obj., 1 Th. ii. 18; foil, by inf., Gal. v. 7 (see avaKoinio) ; inf. preceded by tov, Ro. XV. 22 ; fir to pfj iyKOTrrfaBat Tas Trpoo'fvxas vp.a>v, that ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; i. q. to detain [A. V. to be tedious unto] one. Acts xxiv. 4 [cf. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq.].* (■yKpaTfia [see iv, HI. 3], -as, t;. (iyKparfji), self petites) : Acts xxiv. 25 ; Gal. v. 23 (22) ; 2 Pet. i. 6. (Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sir. xviii. 29 ; 4 Mace. v. 34.) * c-yKparetJoiiai [see iv, III. 3] ; depon. mid. ; to be self- controlled, continent (iyKparris) ; to exhibit self-government, conduct one's self temperalehj : [used absol. Gen. xUii. 30] ; with dat. of respect, tt] y\6>a-a-rj, Sir. xix. 6 var. ; iran-a, in everything, every way, 1 Co. Lx. 25 (in a figure drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and sexual indulgence) ; ovk (yKpaTeietrdai., said of those who cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. Though this word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ, that have come down to us [exc. in Aristot. eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p. 1223', 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Pbry- nichus ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442 ; [W. 25].* £YKpaTTJs [see iv, III. 3], -es, (k/jutos) ; 1. prop, equiv. to 6 eV xparet av, strong, robust : Aeschyl., Thuc, sqq. 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing), ivith a gen. of the object ; so fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down. 3. mastering, controlling, curbin g, restraining : a(ppo5ia-ia>v, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1 ; ^Sov^t, ibid. 4, 5, 10 ; iavrov, Plat. ; -ab.sol. (without a gen.), controlling one's self, temperate, continent, ([Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. 1146', 10 sqq.]; Sii-. xxvi. 15 ; Sap. viii. 21 ; Philo de Jos. § 11) : Tit. i. 8.* iy-Kpiva [T WH (VK., see fV, III. 3] : [1 aor. eveKptva] ; to reckon among. Judge among : rtva nvt, to Judge one worthy of being admitted to a certain class [A. V. to number with], 2 Co. x. 1 2. (From Xen. and Plato down.) * iy-Kfyitrru) : 1 aor. cveKpv^a ; to conceal in something, Ti €19 Ti (Diod. 3, 63 ; ApoUod. 1, 5, 1 § 4) ; contextually, to mingle one thing iritli another : Iilt. .xiii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 21 here T Tr WH (Kpv^ev. (tI tivi, Horn. Od. 5, 488.) * €-yKuos [AA'H (VK; see ev. III. 3.], -ov, for the more usual iyKvpa>v, (fr. iv and kuoj), big with child, pregnant: Lk. ii. 5. (Hdt. 1, 5 etc. ; Diod. 4, 2 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 33.)* c"y-XP'M [see iv, III. 3] : 1 aor. act. impv. tyxpttrov, mid. (in T Tr) (y^^piuai [but L WH 1 aor. act. injin. iyx^p'ia-at (Grsb. iy)(pi. 'Jjn, behold me, here am I: Acts ix. 10 (1 S. iii. 8). iya>, like -JX, /am : Jn. i.23; Acts vii. 32, [cf. W. 585 (544) ; B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ipnpoaBiv pov, Jn. i. 15; inr'taa pov, Mt. iii. 11 ; IfTxvpoTfpoi pov, iljid. ; ris pov tj^J/oto, ]Mk. v. 31 ; Xe'yei poi, Kev. v. 5 ; dpvrjCTjTai pf, Alt. x. 33 ; Lk. xii. 9, (on the accent in these expressions cf. "W. § 6, 3 ; [Lip- sius. Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq. ; Lob. Path. Elementa ii. p. 323 sq. ; Tdf K. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. Ixi. sq. ; ed. 8 p. 104]) ; but 8t* ipov, Kar ipov, irpo ipov, etc., avv, iv ipol, nep'i, Sl, iiT, KOT, fls ipi. The only exception is npos, to which the enclitic pi is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 36 ; Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely npos ipi, Jn. vi. 37", and ace. to LTTrWH in Acts xxii. 8, 13; xxiv. 19 ; [also Acts xxiii. 22 T Tr WH ; Jn. vi. 35 and 45 T Tr txt. WH ; Lk. i. 43 T WH ; Mt. xix. 14 ; Jn. vi. 37', 65, Tdf. ; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. WH mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11 LTr; but npoi pi, Mt. iii. 14 Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf. Lipsius u. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms ipov, ipoi, ipi are used in case of emphasis or antithesis ; thus, ipov, Lk. X. 1 6 ; ipol, Jn. vii. 23 ; x. 38, etc. ; ipi, !Mk. xiv. 7 ; Jn. vii. 7, etc. 3. As in classic Greek, pov and rjpav are very often used for the possessive pronouns ipiis and ijHeVfpoj [B. § 127, 21]; and when so used, a. they are generally placed after their substantives, as 6 oIkus pov, ij (aij fjpSiv, etc. — the fuller form ipov only for the sake of distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 127, 22], as pijripa airov Kol ipov, Ro. xvi. 13; TrttrTftor vpiov re kol ipov, Ro. i. 12. But b. they are sometimes placed before substantives, even which have the article, when no emphasis resides in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22, 7 K. 1 ; B. u. s.] : pov tovs Xo'youy, Mt. vii. 24, 26 ; even before prepositions, pou iiro rfjv a-Tiyqv, Mt. viii. 8 ; less frequently rjpwv, as i^paiv rrjv nu^^iv. Acts xvi. 20; it is prefixed for emphasis in Tjpav to noXlrevpa, Phil. iii. 20, cf. W. u. s. ; Rost § 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth. ; [cf. Kriiger, § 47, 9, 12 who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst. having the art. the reflexive gen., with airov ipsius, and aWtjXav, requires the attributive position, the personal gen., and airov ejus, the partitive posi- tion]. 4. Ti ipol {rjp'iv) Ka\ croi (vptv) ; what have 1 (we) to do with thee (i/ou) ? [cf. B. 138 (121) ; AV. 211 (198) ; 585 (544)] : Mt. viii. 29 ; 'Mk. i. 24 ; v. 7 ; Lk. viii. 28; Jn.ii. 4; Heb. ^Sl -^-n"?, Judg. xi. 12 ; 2K. iii. 13; 2 S. xvi. 10; 2 Chr. xxxv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 24; also in classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2; Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16; Ti Tjp'iv K. avra, ibid. 1,1,16; rt ipol Kal airrois, ibid. 1, 27, 13; 22, 15. Ti yap pot, what does it concern me? what have I to do etc. : 1 Co. v. 1 2 ; cf. Bos, Ellipses Grace, p. 599, ed. Schaefer; Bnhdy. p. 98; Kruger § 48, 3, 9; Kiihner ii. 364 sq. ; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W. 586 (545)]. €Sa4>tJco : Attic fut. i8a(}>iS) [B. 37 (32) ; W. § 13, 1 c] ; (see iSa(f>os) ; to throw to the ground, — both of cities, buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men ; in both apphcations in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) cf. AV. § 66, 2 e.]. (Ps. cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 9 ; Is. iii. 26 ; Ezek. xxxi. 1 2 ; Hos. xiv. 1 (.xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [Aid.] ; rare in l)rof. writ., as [Aristot. probl. 23, 29] ; Polyb. 6, 33, C.)* tBaoos, Acts xxii. 7. (Sopt. ; in class, writ. fr. Iloiii. down.) * (Spates, (rarely fem.-ai'a [W. § 11, l]),-a(oi', (eSpa seat, chair) ; 1. sitthuj, scdentari/, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. firm, immovable, steatl/ant, (Eur., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. metaph., of tho.se who arc fixed in purpose : 1 Co. xv. .■58; Col. i. 23 ; co-Ti/fcfv ev-nj KapSla, 1 Co. vii. 37.* ^Spa(u)i.a, -Tos, TO, (cSpaiom to make stable, settle firmly). a sill I/, ]»'op, support, ( Vulcj. jirmamenlum^ : 1 Tim. iii. 1 .") [A.V. (/ruuHil]. (Efcl. writ.)* "E^cKCas [WII 'Ef-; L -«mr, soc 7W/'. Prole<^. p. 8.5], (n'pin stren<;th of Jehovah, i. c. streti^jth given In' Je- hovah ; Germ. Gottliard; Sept. 'EffKi'ar), [gen. -ou, of. B. 17 (16) no. 8], Hezekiah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1 sqq. ; XX. 1 sqq. ; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.) : Mt. i. 9, 10.* c(lcXo-6pT)c-KECa [T AVII -kIu, see I, i], -at, ij, (fr. c'dc'Xci) and 6pj)CTK(ia. q. v. [cf. W. 100 (95)]), voluntary, arbitrary icors/iip, (Vulg. superstitio), [A. V. will-wurship'], i. c. worshi]) which one devises and prescrilies for himself, contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which ought to be directed to Clu'ist ; said of the misdirected zeal and praot, f6f\6Kw4>os, etc.), does not square so well with the context. (The word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv. p. 1380, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. cLxi. p. [14G0 b. ed. Migne] i:i.U, Ilalle ed.; [Euseb. h. e. 6, 12, 1 ; Jerome ep. cxxi. vol. i. 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. 1, 16 [i. p. 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes (dfXowt pia-aodpijaKela to the Pharisees.)* ii(\u>, see 3i\a. I9ila : (cflos q. V.) ; to accustom ; Pass, to be accustomed; pf. ptcp. TO fWia-pevou usaf/e, custom : rov vdpov, pre- scribed by the law, Lk. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc, Xen., Plat., al.) * «Svapxus. -ov, 6, (fr. tdpos and apx<^), [i- q- founder of a nation, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 5(;], an ethnarch, one set over a peoi)le as nder, but without the authority and name of king (Lcian. in Macrob. § 17 avrX iBvdpxov fiatriXfvs dyayopfvdf'is BocTropou; so the governor whom the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called eSvdpxnt, of whom Josephus says, antt. 14, 7, 2, or SwiKe'i re to edvot Kat otaiTa KplfTfit Ka\ uv^^okalwv entpeXfiTaL kqi TrpotTTay- paTwv, as fii/ TToXiTfiar lipxuiv avTOTfXoiis ; likewise Simon Maccabaeus, 1 Mace. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2; Joseph, antt. 13, 6, C ; cf. [1^1, .5, 2] ; b. j. 2, G, 3) : 2 Co. xi. 32 o tdvdpxni ApcTa ToO /Sao-iXf'ms, the governor of Damascene Syria, ruling in the name of king Aretas [(q. v.) ; cf. B. D. s. v. Governor, 11].* cSviKis, -ij, -oV, (fSvos) ; 1. adapted to the genius or customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national: Polyb., Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or lan(/uaiKt'>s the pagan, the Gentile : Ml. xviii. 17; plur., Mt. v. 47 G LT Tr WII ; vi. 7 ; and 3 Jn. 7 L T Tr WII.* > cBviKus, adv., (sen cdfiKOi), like the Gentiles: Gal. ii. 14, [W. 463 (431). Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5 ; Diog. Laiirt. 7, 56].* «'6vos, -our, to; 1. a multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, swarm : 'iSvos iraipwv, (duos 'Axaiwv, edvos \auiv, Ilom. II. ; (6vos pfXiij(Tiia)v, 2, 'S7 ; pvidwv iOvea, ib. 469. 2. a multitude of individuals of the same nature or f/cnus, (to e^vor TO BrjXv !j to lippev, Xen. oec. 7, 26) : nav eSvos dpdpamav, the human race. Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation : Mt. xxi. 43 ; Acts x. 85, etc. ; edms firl edvos, Mt. xxiv. 7 ; Mk. xiii. 8; o! apxovra, ol /SacriXfis Tuivfdvuv, Mt. xx. 25; Ek. xxii. 25 ; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, Lk. vii. 5 ; xxiii. 2 ; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53 ; xviii. 35 ; Acts x. 22 ; xxiv. 2 (3), 10 ; xxvi. 4 ; xxviii. 19. 4. (tq) c^xi;, like D'ljn in the O. 'l'., foreign nations not worshipping the true Goil, /lagans. Gentiles, [cf. Trench § xcviii.] : ilt. iv. 15 (raXiXaia Twi/ fdvdv), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 R G ; cf. Rev. XV. 3 G L T Tr Wll mrg. after Jn. x. 7], and very often ; in plain contradistinction to the Jews : Ro. iii. 29 ; ix. 21 ; [1 Co. i. 23 G E T Tr WII] : Gal. ii. 8, etc. ; 6 Xaor (toO dfov, .Jews) «ai to edtnj, Lk. ii. 32 ; Acts xxvi. 1 7, 23 ; Ro. XV. 1 0. 5. Paul uses to e6i^ even of Gen- tile Christians: Ro. xi. 13; xv. 27; xvi. 4; Gal. ii. 12 (opp. vs. 13 to 0£ 'Iou8aioi i. e. Jewish Christians), vs. 14 ; Eph. iii. l,cf. iv. 17 [W. §59, 4 .a.; B. 130 (114)]. fOos. -for (-our), [cf. rjBos], to, fr. Aeschyl. [Agani. 7'_'M (?) ; better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 39; f dor f oTi Tivi foil, by an inf., .In. xix. 40 ; Acts xxv. 1 6 ; Ileb. X. 25 ; contextually, usage prescribed by law, in- stitute, prescription, rile : Lk. i. 9 ; ii. 42 ; Acts xvi. 21 ; xxi. 21 ; xxvi. 3 ; xxviii. 1 7 ; TrepiTipvfadat tw ? 5f i McbuV/ Mr, Acts XV. 1 ; aXX(i|f I to f ^t; a Trnpf'fico/cf Mmro-ijr, Acts vi. 1 4.* «Bid (of the pres. only the ptcp. edav is used, in Horn.) : pf. etwda, to be accustomed, used, wont; [plpf- as inqjf. (W. 274 (257 sq.)) fladeiv]; foil, by inf. : Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. X. 1. Ptcp. TO elo>66s in a pass, sense, that which is wont ; usage, custom : koto to (la>66s tivi as one's custom is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. IG ; Acts xvii. 2.* [fi, i: ei and i .ire frcq. intcrch.infied in N. T. spelling. This is due partly to itacism, |);irtly to the endeavor to mark the 1 sound as long or short. .See the remarks on this suliject in IK//. App. p. l-)2 sq. (cf. Intr. § 399) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 83 sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. ci. The use of i for ei is noticed s. v. I, i ; instances in which fi is substituted for i are the foil. : 'A/3fi- KTjvri Wll : 'ASSfl T Tr WH ; ' Avrf iVos T ; 'Aptoira-yihrifs T ; Bemapeiv L T Tr WII; Aaut.'S L T Tr WII : 'Eff/cems L; 'ZKapflTTis T WH ; 'EAfio-ri/3fT WII ; 'EtrAf/ T Tr WH ; Ei- «.'«?) Rec." ; 'HAfi'TTrWH: 'HAems T WH : 'Upttx'^'V WH ; 'Upo(To\vpfiT-ns T WH ; 'lirpariKetT-ris T WH, so Tr in Jn. i. 47 (48) ; 'Icuo-fi'os L T Tr WH ; Kf.'r L T Tr WH : KvpfTm Tr mrg. WH mrff. ; Afue/s T WH, so Trexc. in Mk. ii. It: Acuf fT7)s T WH. .«o Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; AtutiriKiij TWH; MtAxeiTTrWH; Niipt .' T Tr WH ; NireutiVjjs T e( 169 WH, so Tr in Mt. xii. 41 ; 'Ofei'as L T Tr WH ; nei\aros T WH ; Se^eeiV T Tr WH ; Tczfieifla WH ; X€pov$(iv L T Tr WH (-/3iV R G) ; XopafeiV T Tr WH; acpei'ScraL; eiSfo T Tr WH ; ^irapx^la T WH ; eVnrofleia WH ; rjKei T ; irai/oi/cei T WH ; (Sa/30fi T WH ; ^o^/aowfi WH ; aa^axSavti T Tr WH ; rcLKfM WH ; roxf lo;- WH ; TpaircfeiTJjs T VVH.J ct, is first a conditional particle, //" (Lat. si) ; secondly, an interrogative particle, wliether, (Lat. an, num, ne). I. el Conditional (on the difference between it and iav, see idv, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety of conditions, with various tenses and moods ; viz. 1. with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to have been done, or to be about to be, (W. §41 b., 2 ; of. 42, 2; [B. 220 (190)]). a. with the Ind. Present; o. foil. in the apodosis by the ind. pres. : Mt. .\ix. 10 (« ovtws tariv tj aiTia . . . ov (nijKpepfi yajifffrai) ; xi. 14 ; Ko. vii. 16, 20 ; viii. 25 ; xiv. 15 ; 1 Co. ix. 17 ; Gal. ii. 18 ; v. 18; Heb. xii. 8 ; Jas. ii. 8 sq., etc. p. foil, by an Imperative in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix. 1 7 L Tr txt. WH txt.] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; vii. 1 6 R G L ; Jn. xv. 1 8 ; Acts xiii. 15 ; xxv. 5 ; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15 ; Jas. iii. 14, etc. ; or the aor., as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31 ; xix. 17 [R G T Tr mrg. WII mrg.] : ilk. ix. 22 [cf. B. 55 (4«)] ; Lk. xxii. 67 (66) ; 1 Co. vii. 9. 7. foil, by the Future in the apodosis : Lk. xvi. 31 ; Acts v. 39 L T Tr WH ; xix. 39 ; Ro. vui. 1 1, 13 ; 2 Co. xi. 30, etc. 8. foil, by the Perfect or the Aorist in the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is, something else has or has not occurred : Mt. xii. 26, 28 ; Lk.xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 16; Gal. ii. 21; Ro. iv. 14; 2Pet.ii.20. e. foil, by the Imperfect, either with or without av, where in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be the ease. Three passages falling under this head have a doubtfiJ or disputed text : el exerc (T Tr WH, for the R G L ei-^fTf) . . . eXfyere av etc. Lk. xvii. 6 ; «... fivrjfio- vevovdiv ( T Tr, for R G L A\ H efivrjfiovevov) . . . et;^oi/ av, Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense the writer refers to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re- corded in the sacred Scriptures ; cf . Toiavra Xeyovrfs vs. 14) ; €1 TiKva Tov 'A/3p. eVrf (G L T Tr WII, for R ^re) . . . tVotciTf ([WII txt. TTOi.] R L add av), Jn. viii. 39 ; cf. Bllrn. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1S.J8 p. 474 sqq. [N. T. Gram. § 139, 26 ; but cf. Mey. on Lk. 1. c.]. But 2 Co. xi. id . . . KrjpvatreL . . . dvelxetrde G T Tr ^\ H mrg. (^dvej^eade L WII txt.) must not be referred to this head ; here Paul in the protasis supposes something which actually occurred, in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con- tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers. On the difficulty of the passage cf. Holsten in the Zeit- schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874, p. 1 sqq. ; [cf. also B. 226 (195) ; but W. 306 (287) and iley. ad loc.]. X,. whh a question as the apodosis : Mt. vi. 23 ; Jn. v. 47 ; vii. 23 ; viii. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. with the Ind. Future: Mt. xxvi. 33 ; Jas. ii. 11 RG ; 1 Pet. ii. 20. c. with the Ind. Perfect: Jn. xi. 1 2 ; Acts .xvi. 1 5 ; Ro. vi. 5 ; xi. 6 (where after et supply Xtifi/aa yiyavevir. what precedes), 2 Co. ii. 5; V. 16; vii. 14. d. with the Ind. Aorist, — foll.bythe Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix. 8 ; Ro. iv. 2 ; xv. 27 ; foil, by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11, 12; Jn. xviii. 23 ; 1 Co. iv. 7 ; ix. 11 ; foil, by the Aor. in the apodosis. Rev. XX. 15 ; by the Impv. in the apodosis, .In. xviii. 23 ; XX. 15; Ro. xi. 17sq. ; 1 Tim. v. 9, 10; Pliilem. 18; by the Fut. in the apodosis, Jn. xiii. 32 ; xv. 20 ; Heb. xii. 25 (where supply ovk eKffifvioiieda in the apodosis). 2. Xot infrequently, when a conclusion is drawn from some- thing that is quite certain, el with the Indie, is used argu- mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to eirel, (cf . the use of Germ, wenn) [cf. W. 448 (418)] : Mt. xii. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 31 ; Jn. vii. 4 ; Ro. v. 1 7 ; vi. 5 ; viii. 31 ; xi. 6, 12 ; Col. ii. 20; iii. l,etc. 3. When it is said what would have been, or what would be now or in the future, if something else were or had been, el is used with the Impf., Plpf., and Aor. ind. ; in the apodosis it is followed in direct disc, by av with the impf. or the plpf. or the aor. ; sometimes av is omitted, (on the causes of the omission, see B. § 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques- tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. el with the Impf., foil, in the apodosis by av with the impf. : Mt. xxiii. 30 ; Lk. vii, 39 (el ovTos ^v7rpo(f)i]Trjs, eyiviD(TKev av if this man were a prophet, he would know) ; Jn. v. 46 ; viii. 42 ; vs.. 41 ; ,xv. 19 ; 1 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 10; Heb. viii. 4, 7 (if . . . were etc. there would not be sought etc. viz. in the O. T. passage quoted vs. 8) ; by a question in the apodosis : 1 Co. xii. 19 ; Heb. vii. 11 ; by av with the aor., where the Latin uses the plupf. subjunc. : Jn. xi. 32 (ft ^r Z>5e if thou hadst been here, ovk av anlBave /lov 6 dSe\rf)us my brother would not have died [when he did (cf. below) ; B. § 139, 2.5 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur- ation]) ; Jn. iv. 10; .wiii. 30 (el fir) rjv oStos KaKonoios, nvK av o-oi TTapehaxofxev avTov, we would not have delivered him to thee) ; Acts xviii. 14; by w with the plupf. : Jn. xi. 21 (el rji i>Se . . . ovk av eTeBvrjKei, would not have died [and be now dead ; cf. W. 304 (285) and see above ; but L T Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19, b. ft with the Plpf., foil, in the apodosis by av with the plpf. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj. : Mt. xii. 7 (ft eyvoiKeire if \Q had understood i. e. if ye knew, OVK hv KaTedtKafjare tovs dvatTiovs ye would not have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 and Lk. xii. 39, (ft ]j8ei if he had perceived i. e. if he knew, eyptjyoprj- a-ev av he would have watched, sc. before the thief had approached [Tr txt. WH om. av in Lk. 1. c.]) ; Jn. iv. 10 ; viii. 19 ; xiv. 7 [R G L]. c. with the Aor. in the same sense as the Lat. plpf- subjunc. : ci eboBj] vofios . . ■ ovtws av ex vofiov rjv 17 htKaioavvrj if a law had been given, right- eousness would in truth come from the law. Gal. iii. 21 ; ft aiVois 'iTjo-oir KariiTavaev if Joshua had given them rest, OVK av nep'i. aWrji eXaXei he would not be speaking, sc. in the pass.age quoted, Heb. iv. 8 ; apodosis without av, .In. XV. 22, see av I, 3 p, 33 sq. 4. As in classic Greek, €t with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing^ wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where on might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is either not quite certain, or, although certain, yet in ac- cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre- €1 170 €t sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthias ii. p. 1474 sq. ; Kuhner ii. p. 8S7 sq. ; [Jelf § S04, !)] ; AV. § GO, C ; [B. § 139, S2]). Thus it is joiued - to tlie verb 6aviulCai : tBav- fiaCev. tl ndr] T(6vTtK(, for the matter had not yet been iii- ■vestiiaU'il ; lieiiee it is added firr^pairqiTiv avTov, cl r/fii; [KliTTrmrg. WII mrg. miXai] an(6av(v, Mk. xv. 44; fir) Oaviidiere, cl /iio-ei i/xas 6 (too-fiof (the thiug is certain) 1 ,Iu. iii. 13 ; to the phrase amarov Kpivfrai: Acts xxvi. 8, (with napdSo^ov preceding, Lcian. dial. mort. 13, 1); to KaXuv (, (1 fjSrj avr) as subjunc. : whal am I to choose if (as 1 may well assume) // has already heen k'mdled-, cf. Green, ' Crit. Notes' ad loc.]). 5. Con- trarv to Greek usage, in imitation of the Hebr. QN, ft with the Indie, is so used in oaths and asseverations that by aposiopesis the formula of imprecation [constituting the apodosis] is suppressed (W. § 55 fin. ; B. § 14a, 4) : a(i.rjV Xf'yo) iipXv, el SodrjaeTat . ■ ■ (rr/peiuv (fully expressed, ' mav God punish me, if it shall be given,' i. c. it shall by no means be given), Mk. viii. 12 ; apoaa, « fltreXfiaovrai. fli rijv Kardiravaiv pov (fully, 'let my name no longer be Jehovah, if they shall enter' etc.), Heb. iii. 11 ; iv. 3, fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 1 1 Sept. (Ilebr. DX, Gen. xiv. 23 ; Num. xiv. 30: 1 S. xiv. 45, etc. ; we have the full expression in 1 S. iii. 1 7 ; Cant. fi. 7, etc.). 6. Sometimes, as in classic Grk., after a protasis with el and the Indie, the ajiodosis is suppressed on account of mental agitation and left to be supplied by the reader or the hearer from the context, (cf. AV. 599 sq. (557)) : ft ^oiiXei irapeveyKtiv TO norfiptov tovto (sc. TrapiveyKe [but here L Tr WH adopt the impv. in place of the inf.; yet cf. B. 396 (339)]), Lk. x.xii. 42; fi 8e jrvevpa iXdXria-fv avra ^ ayye- Xos, supply in place of an apodosis the tjuestion what then ? Acts x.Kiii. 9 (the apod, added in Rec., p) 6eo- fiaxapfv, is spurious) ; et eyvats . . . ra irpos (lprjVT]v crov, sc. f'm'iTTfufs av ipoi, Lk. xix. 42 [B. 396 (339)]. 7. The conditional fi is joined with the Optative, to in- dicate that the condition is merely though t of or stated as a possibility, (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 491 sqq. ; W. 293 (275) sq. ; B. § 139, 24). No example of this construction is found in the Gospels ; very few in the rest of the N. T. a. univ. in short intercalated clauses : fi tv^oi if it so chance, it may be, (sec rvyxdvw. 2), 1 Co. xiv. 10; XV. 37; el BeXoi to BtKrjpa tov deoi: I Bet. iii. 17 (Rec. ^tXfi). b. where it indicates that something may occur repeatedly (cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 492 sq.) : fi koX Tsdaxoire, 1 Pet. iii. 14 [cf. AV. u. s.]. C. "where the condition represents the mind and judgment of others : fis ov i^ovKeiovro [R G -aavro\, el Svvaiino e^i>am [^A'H txt. (Ktroicrai (q. v.)] to ttXoIov, into which bay [or rather ' upon which beach ' ; see f |a>d] they determined to run the ship, if they could ; as though the na\igators had said among themselves, i^ixropev, el hvva- pe6a. Acts .xxvii. 39 ; so also ei t» exoiev npus pe, if they think they have anything against me. Acts x.\iv. 19. 8. with the Subjunctive, when it is assumed that something may take place, but whether it will in reality is unknown before the event, in order to make the event seem to be more certain than if edu were used (Klotz 1. c. p. 500 sqq.; AV. 294 (276) sq. ; B. § 139, 22) : el . . . 6eplpev, 1 Co. ix. 11 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, [Lchm. mrg.; al. -CTo/ifx] ; (Sept. Gen. .\liii. 3 sq. ; Sir. xxii. 26 ; 4 Mace, vi. 20). But see HI. below, under el p!j, el pr]ri. el nois, elre . . . etre, et Tts. II. el IxTEUUOGATlVE, whether. " The conditional jiarticle gets this force if a question is asked about any- thing, whether it is or is not so, and that about which the (juestion is put is uttered as it were conditionally " (Klotz 1. c. p. 508; [AV. § 57, 1 ; Bttm. 248 (214) sqq ; 254 (218) sq.]). 1. As in Grk. writ, in an indirect question after verbs of seeing, asking, deliberating, knowing, saying, etc. a. with the Indie. Present: as oiS' el nvevpa oyioi/ e(mv. rjKoixTapev (prop., ace. to the conditional force of the particle, ' ;'/' there is [i. e. has appeared, been given ; cf. elpi, I. 2] a Holy Spirit, we did not even hear'), Acts .xix. 2 ; tSapev, el epxerm, Mt. xxvii. 49; Mk. XV. 36; ^uvXeverai [T AVIl L mrg. -(rerai], el SvvaTot fOTiv, Lk. xiv. 31 ; iva fiTnjr, ft j, Gik. Particles, p. 31]. 8. el fir), a. in a conditional protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses as the simple et, see I. above, If not, unless, except, [W. 477 (444) sqq. ; B. 345 (297)] : Mt. xxiv. 22 ; Jn. ix. 33 ; XV. 22, 24 ; Ro. vii. 7, etc. b. it serves, with the entire following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been said, onli/, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308)] : ilk. vi. 5 ; 1 Co. vii. 1 7 (where Paul by the addition el fi^ eictioTm ktX. strives to prevent any one in applying what had been said a Uttle while before, viz. ov SeSovXarai . . . ev TotovTois to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironi- cal answers, unless perchance, save forsooth that, (Kiih- ner § 577, 7; [Jelf § 860, 5 Obs.]): el /if] xPli^oi^ev ktX. 2 Co. iii. 1 Rec. c. et /i^ very often coalesce into one particle, as it were, which takes the same verb as the preceding negation : unless, i. q. except, save, [Kuhner §577,8; B. 359(308)]; o. univ.: Mt. xi. 27; xii. 39; Mk. ii. 26 ; viii. 14; Jn. iii. 13 ; Ro. vii. 7; xiii. 1, 8 ; 1 Co. viii. 4 ; xii. 3 ; 2 Co. xii. 5, etc. as in classic Greek, povos, p-ovoy, is added pleonastically : jMt. xvii. 8; xxi. 1 9 ; xxiv. 36 ; Acts xi. 19; Phil. iv. 1 5 ; Rev. xiii. 1 7, etc. p. after negatives joined to nouns it is so used as to re- fer to the negative alone (hence many have regarded it as used for aWd [i.e. as being not exceptive but ad- versative]), and can be rendered in Lat. sed tantum, but only : Mt. xii. 4 (oiJk e'^ov rjv avra ayelv alone preceded) ; Lk. iv. 26 sq. ; Ro. xiv. 14 ; Rev. ix. 4 ; xxi. 27 (eav pr] is so used in Gal. ii. 16 ; on Gal. i. 19 see 'ltiKa)|3os, 3) ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 195 ; [see e'df. I. 3 c. and refl.]. 7. when preceded b}- the in- terrogative Tt's in questions having a negative force : ilk. ii. 7 ; Lk. v. 21 ; Ro. xi. 15 ; 1 Co. ii. 11 ; 2 Co. ii. 2 ; xii. 13 ; Heb. iii. 18 ; 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; v. 5 ; (Xen. oec. 9, 1 ; Ar- stph. eqq. 615). 8. with other conjunctions : el prj ha, Jn. X. 10 ; el pi) orrav, Mk. Lx. 9 ; tI ecmv, el pr/ on etc., 2 Co. xii. 13 ; Eph. iv. 9. e. it has its own verb, and makes a phrase by itself : o ovk eei(TaTo, oi&e eiaeTai [Rec. -OT/rm], Ro. .\i. 21 ; add, 1 Co. XV. 13, 15-17; 2 Th. iii. 10; foil, in the apodosis by a question having the force of a negative : Lk. xvi. 11 scj. ; .In. iii. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 5. -y. the oi denies with emphasis the idea to which it belongs : kuXov tjv avra. el OVK eyewridrj, good were it for him not to have been born, Mt. .xxvi. 24 ; IMk. xiv. 21. 8. the whole emphasis is placed on the negative itself : el aii ovk el 6 Xpurrot, .In. i. 25. b. the ou coalesces, as it were, with the word to which it belongs into a single idea : el he ovk iyKpareiov- Toi, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9 ; e'l Tir rav Ihiav ou npovoet [or -eiToi T Tr txt. WH mrg.], neglects, 1 Tim. V. 8 : add, Lk. xiv. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 22 ; Rev. xx. 15, etc. 12. el ovu, if then : Mt. vi. 23 ; vii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 13, 36 ; .In. .xiii. 14 : xviii. 8 ; Acts xi. 1 7 : Col. iii. 1 ; Philem. 1 7. [On el pev ovv see pen II. 4.] 13. elnep [so T WII (exc. in 2 Co. v. 3 mrg.), but L Tr et nep; cf. W. 45 ; Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 123], (el and irep, and this ap- parently from TTfpi), prop, if on the whole ; if only, pro- vided that, is used " of a thing which is assumed to be, but whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt " {Hem. ad Vig. p. 831, [so W. 448 (417); but cf. Baumlein, Griech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 hot.) ; Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. e'lye (in ye, 3 c.) and the reff. to Mey., Lghtft., Ellic, there given]) : Ro. viii. 9.17; 1 Co. viii. 5 ; XV. 15 ; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L T Tr WH el) : by a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about which there is no doubt : 2 Th. i. 6 ; Ro. iii. 30 L T Tr WH ; 2 Co. V. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 14. et ■k'T) ; to see (have seen), be seeing (saw), i. e. 1. to perceive (with the eyes ; Lat. conspicere, Germ, erblicken) ; a. univ. riva or Tt : Mt. ii. 2 ; iv. 16 ; xiv. 14 ; xxviii. 6 ; Mk.i. 10, 16 ; ii. 14 ; Lk. v. 26 ; vii. 22 ; Jn. i. 47 (48) sq. ; vi. 26 ; xix. 6; Acts ix. 35; xii. 16 ; Gal. i. 19; 1 Tim. vi. 16, and very often. oiBeiTOTf ovTois etSofiev we never saw in such fash- ion, i. e. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 1 2, old Germ. also hat man niclit gesehen, scit etc. ; cf. Kuinoel ad Mat. p. 280 ed. 4. iSeiv tl and d/coCtrai ti are conjoined in Lk. vii. 22 ; Acts xxii. 14 ; 1 Co. ii. 9 ; Jas. v. 11 ; iSeii/ and ISeiv Tl are also used by those to whom sometliing is pre- sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates that he saw this or that : Rev. i. 12, 17 ; iv. 1 [hero ei'Sov K. ISov a formula pecuHar to Rev. ; see tSoi, sub fin.] ; v. 1 sq. 6, 11 ; vi. 9 ; vii. 1, 9, etc. ; Jn. xii. 41 ; iScii/ opafta, Acts X. 1 7 ; xvi. 10 ; ISeiv iv opd/iaTt, Acts ix. 12 [R G] ; X. 3 ; iv TTJ opatra, Rev. ix. 1 7 ; eUipticaUy ISeiv rt ex rivoi sc. iKTTOpevdev, Rev. xvi. 13, cf. i. 16 ; llebraisticalh' (on which see W. § 45, 8 ; B. § 144, 30) I8aiv e'Sov / /uwe sureh/ seen : Acts vii. 34 after Ex. iii. 7. Frequent in the historical books of the X. T. is the ptcp. l&oiv, ISovj-fs, continuing the narrative, placed before a finite verb, and either having an ace. added, as in Mt. ii. 10 ; iii. 7 ; v. 1 ; viii. 34 ; jSlk. v. 22 ; ix. 20 ; Lk. ii. 48 ; vii. 13 ; Jn. v. 6 ; vi. 14 ; Acts xiii. 12 ; xiv. 11, etc. ; or the ace. is omitted, as being evident from the context : Mt. ix. 8, 1 1 ; x.\i. 20 ; Mk. X. 14 ; Lk. i. 12 ; ii. 17 ; Acts iii. 12 ; vii. 31, etc. b. with the ace. of a pers. or a thing, and a ptcp. [cf. W. § 45, 4 a.] : Mt. iii. 7, 16 ; viii. 14 ; ilk. i. 16 ; vi. 33 ; Lk. ix. 49 ; xxi. 2 ; Jn. i. 33, 47 (48) sq. ; Acts iii. 9 ; xi. 13; iCo. viii. 10; Ijn. v. 16; Rev. ix. 1 , and often. c. foU. by on : Mk. ii. 16 L T Tr WH ; ix. 25 ; Jn. vi. 22, 24, etc. d. foil, by an indirect question with the indie. : with ti's, Lk. xix. 3 ; with tI, Mk. v. 14 ; with nrjXlKos, Gal. vi. 11. e. fpxov koI iS«, a formula of invi- tation, the use of which leaves the object of the seeing to be inferred by the hearers from the matter under consid- eration: Jn. xi. 34 (35) ; i. 46 (47) (here 18e is equiv. to b>/ seeing learn, sc. that Jesus is the Messiah), and Grsb. in Rev. vi. 1, 5; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) (where T Tr WH fp)^. K. o^fo-df). The Rabbins use the phrases 'tni Xn and riS"7r6vTivos : 1 Th. ii. 1 7 ; iii. 1 0, (Lcian. dial. d. 24, 2 [cf. Rutherford on Babr. 11, 9]) ; with an ace. of place, to visit, go to : Acts xix. 21. [Stn. : ' When eTSo;', lSe7v are called " momentary preter- ites," it must not be supposed that thereby a quickly -p.ist action is designated ; these forms merely present the action without reference to its duration.... The un- ausrmented moods, too, are not exclusively past, but present or future as well, — tlie last mo.st decidedly in the imperative. Now it is obvious that when a perception is stated without regard to its duration, its form or mode cannot h.Tve prominence ; hence iSf7v is much less physical than dpav. iS(7f denotes to perceive with the eyes; ipav [q. v.], on tlio other hand, to see, i. e. it marks the use and action of tlio eye as the prhicipal thing. Perception as denoted by lSf7v, when conceived of as completed, permits the sensuous ele- ment to he forgotten and abides merely as an activity of the soul; for oI5a, flSiyai, signifies not"(o have seen," but"/o know." ' Schmidt cli. xi. Comp. : dir-, eV-, trpo-, aw-, ivfp- eTSoi'.l 174 II. 2 pf. oiSa, olSas (1 Co. vii. Ifi ; .Tn. xxi. 15, for the more com. oIcrBa), oiSa/KV (for lafifv, more com. in Grk.), otSoTf (icTT-f, the more usual classic form, is found only in Eph. V. 5 G L T Tr WII and Heb. .xii. 1 7, [prob. also in Jas. i. 19 ace. to the reading of L T Tr WII ; but see be- low]). oiSaa-i (and once the Attic Icracn, Acts xxvi. 4), impv. loTf, once, Jas. i. 19 L T Tr WII, [but see above], subjunc. eiSo), inf. flSevai, ptep. flSas, tiSuia (Mk. v. 33; Acts V. 7) ; plpf. jjSfiu, 2 pers. everywhere f/dus, 3 pers. jfSft, plur. 2 pers. fjSeiTe, 3 pers. ij&cia-au (for the more com. ;i&((rav [Vcitch p'. 218; B. 43 (38)]); fut. (18{j9 ai/Tov livhpa h'lKaiov^ sc. ovra, ^Ik. vi. 20 [B. 304 (261 )] ; in the form of a ptcp. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus. of the object by attraction (W. § 66, 5 a.; B. 377 (323)) an epexegetical clause is added [cf. esp. B. 301 (258)], with oTi, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq. ; Acts xvi. 3 ; or an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34; xiii. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. tiStVat is used with the ace. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41 ; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; foil, by on, Mt. ix. 6 ; Jn. xix. 35 ; Acts ii. 30 ; Ro. v. 3, and very often ; oihafiev foil, by on is not infrequently, so far as the sense is concerned, equiv. to it is tcell known, ac- knowledged : Mt. x.xii. 1 6 ; Lk. xx. 21 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; ix. 31 ; Ro. ii. 2 ; iii. 19 ; vii. 14 ; viii. 22, 28 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 8 ; 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; v. 20 ; cf. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr. ct Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp. in Paul, is the interrog. formula ouk otSare and 5 ovk oiSare on, by which something well known is commended to one for his thoughtful consideration : Ro. xi. 2; 1 Co. iii. 16 ; v. 6; vi. 2 sq. 9, 15 sq. 19 ; ix. 13, 24 ; ovk nlSarf foil, by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Rec] ; ovk olSas art, Jn. xix. 10 ; OVK fjSfiTf, Lk. ii. 49 ; dSivm foil, by an indir. quest, [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. Lk. 21, 25, 30; xiv. 5 ; XX. 13 ; 1 Co. i. 16 ; vii. 16 ; 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. ; Ro. viii. 26 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; 1 Tim. iii. 15, and very often. 2. to know 1. e. get knowledge of, understand, perceive ; a. any fact : as, ras iv6vy.r)(T(ii, Mt. xii. 25 ; ttjv vnoKpiO'w, Mk. xii. 15; Toiis dtaXoyitr^ovs avratv, Lk. vi. 8; xi. 17 ; with the addition of cV iavrci foil, by on, Jn. vi. 61. b. the force and meaning of something, which has a definite meaning: 1 Co. ii. H sq. ; t^x Trapa^oXrjv, ilk. iv. 13; livarrjpia, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foil, by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18. c. as in class. Grk., foil, by an inf. in the sense of to know how (Lat. calleo, to be skilled in) : Mt. vii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 13 ; xii. 56 ; Phil. iv. 12 ; 1 Th. iv. 4 ; 1 Tim. iii. 5 ; Jas. iv. 17 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; is o'Sare, sc. aadKlXo-XaTpc(a [-rpia WH ; see I, t], -as, 17, (fiScoXoc, q. v., and Xarpeia), (TertuU. al. idololatria), flit; worship offolse gods, idolatry : Gal. v. 20 ; used of the formal sac- rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14 ; of av.arice, as a worship of JIammon [q- v.}, Col. iii. 5 [B|). Lghtft. ad loc] ; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry and peculiar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 26].)* «lSa)XoXaTpT)s, -ov, 6, (fiSaXof, and Xdrpis i. e. a hireling, servant, slave), a worshipper of folse gods, an idolater, (TertuU. idololatres) : 1 Co. v. 10 ; Rev. xxi. 8 ; xxii. 15 ; any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11 ; vi. 9 ; esp. one who at- tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of _ the ofl'ered victims, 1 Co. x. 7 ; a covetous man, as a worshipper of JIammon, Eph. v. 5 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 100 (94 sq.)].)* tlSuXov, -ov, t6, (f'Sos [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn. 296, 9]), in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, an image, likeness, i. e. whatever represents the form of an object, cither real or imaginary ; used of the shades of the departed (in rioiu.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the mind, etc. ; in bibl. writ, [an idol, i. e.] 1. the image of a heathen god : Acts vii. 41 ; 1 Co. xii. 2 ; Rev. ix. 20, (Is. xxx. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, etc.; 6ei>v J) baifioviav ciSmXa, Polyb. 31, 3, 13); 2. a false god: Acts xv. 20 (on wliich see dXi'o-yrjfia) ; Ro. ii. 22 ; 1 Co. viii. 4, 7 ; x. 19 ; 2 Co. vi. 16 ; 1 Th. i. 9, (often in Sept.) ; (itvkatr- creiv eavTou arro t. tlSoKav, to guard one's self from all manner of fellowsliip with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21.* €Uv TtpayfLOTuiv, the image of the things (sc. the heavenly things), in Heb. x. 1, is opp. to r] OKia, just as in Cic. de off. 3, 1 7 solida et expressa effigiea is opp. to umhra ; ei/cui' r. 6eov is used of the moral likeness of re- newed men to God, Col. iii. 10 ; eiKuv toC viov tov deov the image of the Son of God, into which true Christians are transformed, is likeness not only to the heavenly body (cf. 1 Co. XV. 49 ; Phil. iii. 21), but also to the most holy and blessed state of mind, which Christ possesses : Ro. viii. 29 ; 2Co. iii. 18. b. metonymically, ei/cmi' rivor, the image of one ; one in whom the likeness of any one is seen : fiKmv 6coii is applied to man, on account of his power of command (see ho^a. III. 3 a. a.), 1 Co. xi. 7; to Christ, on account of his divine nature and absolute moral excellence. Col. i. 15 ; 2 Co. iv. 4 ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on Col. 1. c.].* [Stn. ciKwy, 6iioia>ii.a : Sp.. denotes often not mere similarity but likeness (see dfLolm/ia, b. and cf. Mey. on Ro. i. 2-'3), visible couforraity to its object ; elx. adds to the idea of likeness the suggestions of representation (as a de- rived likeness) and manifestation. Cf. Trench § xv. ; Lghtft. u. s.] ElXiKpCvEia (-I'a T [WH, see I, t ; on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144]), -as, fi, (elXtKpivrjs, q. v.), purity, sin- cerity, ingenuousness : 1 Co. v. 8 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ; tov deod, which God effects by the Holy Spu-it, 2 Co. i. 12 [W. § 36, 3 b.]. (Theophr., Se.xt. Empir., Stob.) * elXiKpivifjs, -et, ([on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144 ; L. and S. s. v. fin.] ; com. supposed to be fr. eiXr; or e\r] sunlight, and Kplva, prop, found pure when unfolded and examined by the sun's light ; hence some write f I'X. [see reff. above] ; ace. to the conjecture of others fr. tlXos, (XKiiv, prop, sifted and cleansed by rapid move- ment or rolUng to and fro), pure, unsidlied, sincere ; of the soul, an fiKLKpivTjs man : Phil. i. 10; biavoia, 2 Pet. iii. 1. (Sap. vii. 25, where cf. Grimm, Exgt. Ildb. ; [see, on the word, also Trench § Ixxxv.] ; [Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., [ Aristot., Pint.], Polyb., Philo, [al.].) * [Stn. clhiKpiv-hs, Ka6ap6s: Ace. to Trench u. s. the former word expresses freedom from the falsehoods, the latter from the d e f i 1 e m e n t s, of the flesh and of the world.] elXCo-o-u, Ionic and poetic and occasional in later prose for fXiVo-ti) [W. § 2, 1 a.] : [pres. pass. eiXia-aopaC] ; (eiXu to press close, to roll up, [cf. L. and S. s. v. fin.]), to roll up or together : Rev. vi. 14 R G ; but L T Tr WH have restored iKuraop.. (From Hom. down.) * €l(iC (fr. ?pa, — as cictt;, Lk. xxiu. 44 ; Jn. iv. 6 ; xix. 14 [L T Tr WH] ; i. 39 (40), etc. ; also of feasts : Jn. v. 1, 10 ; ix. 14 ; Acts xii. 3 ; Lk. xxiii. 54 ; Mk. xv. 42. univ. to ifrojifvov what will be, follow, happen : Lk. xxii. 49 ; iioTe raiira carai ; Mt. xxiv. 3 ; TTWff €(TTai ToiiTo ; Lk. i. 34 ; after the llebr., kgl «orat (equiv. to n'ni) foil, hy the fut. of another verb : Acts ii. 1 7 (fr. Joel iiV28 (iii. 1)) ; 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; Acts iii. 23; Ro. ix. 26 (fr. Hos. i. 10 (ii. 1)). ti' oSv iaTtv ; what then is it f i. e. hoiv stanijs the cage f what foLloics therefore f Acts xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. 2. i. (j. ■7Tupei.pl, lo he present ; to be al hand ; to be in store : oivos ovK eoTtv, Jn. ii. 3 Tdf. ; irapnoWov [Rec] op(\ov otrros, when there was present, Mk. viii. 1 ; add, ii. 15; Mt. xii. 10 RG; Ileb. viii. 4; oCttco yap rjv jrvfvpa {ayiov), U'us not yet present, i. e. had not yet been gicen [which some authorities add], Jn. vii. 39; so also in the words fjTrKff'/ia ayiov firrtp [but R G Tr accent aytov car., cf. Chandler § 938], Acts xix. 2; oKovaas . . . ovra (rira, that there icas an abundance of grain, Acts vii. 12 ; divapis Kvplov ^v fls TO lUirBai avToii, was present to heal them, Lk. v. 1 7. 3. fcTTtv with inf., as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down (see Passow i. p. 792 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. AT.] ; see e.xx. fr. the O. T. Apocr. in Waht, Clavis apoeryph. p. 155), it is possible to etc. ; with a negative (as more com. in classic Grk. also), /( w impossible : Heb. Lx. 5 ; 1 Co. xi. 20, [cf. W. § 44, 2 b.]. II. etpl [as a copula] connects the subject with the predicate, where the sentence shows who or what a jjer- son or thing is as respects character, nature, disposition, race, power, dignity, greatness, age, etc. 1. univ. : eyti) elpi Trpeai^vTTjs, Lk. i. 18 ; eyco elpi Ta^pirjX, Lk. i. 19 ; eprjpos ifTTiv 6 tqttos, ^It. xiv. 15; 7TpQ(jii}TTji et payis pov r^s (jTroo-ToX^r vpi'is care, ye are, as it were, the seal attesting my apostleslii]i, i. e. your faith is proof that the name of apostle is given me rightfully, 1 Co. i.\. 2 ; 1) eVicTToX^ (sc. o-vaTanKT), cf. vs. 1) vpeis ecrrf, i. e. ye yourselves are like a letter of recommendation for me, or ye serve as a substitute for a letter of recommenda- tion, 2 Co. iii. 2 ; toCto taTi ro aafia pov, this wliich I now hand to you is, as it were, my body, Mt. xxvi. 26 ; Mk. xiv. 22 ; Lk. xxii. 19 ; vpfU vaos 6(ov «ore' [L txt. T Tr t.xt. WII Tjpeti . . . iapiv] ye [we] are to be regarded as the temjile of (!od, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19 ; 6 6(6s vaos avTJis tariv \_i(TTi{v) R G Tr], k. to dpvLov. tlioy are to be regarded as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem- j)le in the city because present with every one in it, Rev. xxi. 22. Hence 3. elvai, getting an exjjlicative force, is often i. q. to denote, signifi), import, as o dypos icmv 6 Koa-pos, Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 scp 22 sq.; Lk. viii. 11 sq. 14 sq. ; GaL iv. 24 sq. ; Rev. xvii. 15 ; xix. 8, (Sept. Gen. xii. 26 sq. ; Ezek. xxxvii. 11); toOt' fcrrtv [so T AVH uniformly, exc. that WII om. v t'c^fXic. in lleb. ii. 14], Lchni. TovTttmv [exc. in Ro. x. 6, 7, 8 ; also Treg. e.\c. in Mt.xx\ii. 4C: Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19; Ro. ix. 8;x. 6, 7, 8; sometimes written toOto ea-rtp, see Td/. Proleg. p. 1 11 ; cf. W 45; R.ll (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to toCto aripatvei) which is either inserted into the discourse as a parcuthesis, or annexed to words as an apjjosition [cf. A\'. 530 (493) ; B. 400 (342). It is to be distinguished from ToiiTo Si iariv : tovt foriv introduces an incidental explanation for the most part of the language; toOto Se iartv subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen- erally to the thought; (cf. our ^' that is to say," and " lltal is"); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc.] : Mt. xxvii. 46 ; Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19 ; Ro. vii. 18; x. 6-8 ; Pliilem. 12 ; Heb. ii. 14 ; vii. 5, etc. ; likewise o cVti, Mk. iii. 17; vii. 11, 34 ; Heb. vii. 2 ; o eVrt peBfpprjvivopevov, this signifies, when interpreted, etc. Mk. xv. 34 ; Acts iv. 36 ; see 6 c. below. 4. In the Bible far more frequent- ly than ifl prof, auth., and in the N. T. mucli oftener in the historical than in the other books, a participle without the article serves as the predicate, being connected with the subject by the verb flvai (cf. W. § 45, 5 and esp. B. 309 (265) sqq.) ; and a. so as to form a mere periphrasis of the finite verb ; a. with the Pres- ent ptcp. is formed — a periphrasis of the pres. : eVri 7rpo(Tava7r\r}pova'a . . . Kai Trfpttraevovaa, 2 Co. ix. 12; — a periph. of the inq)f. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and Luke [B. 312 (268)] : rjv KadeiSav, Mk. iv. 38 ; ^v npod- ytov, X. 32 ; ^v avyKaOrjpevos, xiv. 54 ; ^v Stavevcav, Lk. i. 22 ; ^crav KaOijpevot, v. 17; ^v fKfiaXKojv, xi. 14 ; ij(Tav Ka6e- ^opevoi [Lchm., al. Kadrjpimt], Acts ii. 2, and other exx. ; once in Paul, Phil. ii. 2<; (Trnroddv rjv; — a periph. of the fut. : eo-oi/TaiTriTTTOi/Tfr [(Kir. R G], ilk. xiii. 25. p. with the Perfect ptcp. is formed — a periph. of the aor. [impf. (?)] : ^v eo-rar, Lk. v. 1 ; — a periph. of the plpf. : ^crav eXijXvdores, avvf\ri\v6viat, Lk. v. 1 7 ; xxiii. 55 ; esp. with the pf. pass. ptcp. : ^v rj eniypacpri iniyeypappevrj, Mk. XV. 26 ; fjv avTw KexplparKxpcvov, Lk. ii. 2C ; ^i/ rtdpappevos, Lk. iv. 1 6 ; add, viii. 2 ; xxiii. 51 ; Acts i. 1 7, etc. 7. once with an Aorist ptcp. a periph. of the plpf. is formed: 71/ . . . ^XrjdfU (R G L Tr mrg. lieliXripivos) iv tji (\)v\aKrj, Lk. xxiii. 1 9 T Tr txt. WH ; on the same use of the aor. sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. Passow i. p. 793 ; [L and S. s. V. B. 2; yet cf. B. § 144, 24 fin.]. b. so as to indi- cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq. tlfll 177 ei/Li (266)] : fjv SiSda-Koiv was wont to teach, ]\rk. i. 22 ; Lk. iv. 31 ; xix. 47 ; ^i/ [T Tr txt. WH ^\d(v} KTfpvv, Lk. xxiii. 8 ; fjV irpoahe^^o- li€vos, ilk. XV. 43 (Lk. xxiii. .51 npoafSex^To) • once in Paul, Gal. i. 23 ^a-av dv KTrjuara noWd (Germ, wolilha- ben'l, [Eng. was om; that had]), ilt. .xLx. 22 ; ilk. x. 22 ; fcri] atwirav, Lk. i. 20 ; rjv iTrorao-cro^ievor (obedient, in sub- jection), Lk. ii. 51 ; iadi i^ovtriav fX'-"'' be thou ruler over, Lk. xix. \1 \rjv (Tvv€vSoKaiv, Acts viii. 1 ; (av flfu, Rev. i. 1 8, and in other ccx. three times in Paul : fl . . . ^XjriifoTer ecrpev fiovov if we are tliose who have only hoped, or to whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. 1 !i ; ^v . . . KaroK- \dcrauiv, the reconciler, 2 Co. v. 1 9 ; arivd ea-Tt \6yov e^ovTa s pv66ypa(j)ov ;) ; iyi) rts ei'/ii ; who (how small) am I i the language of one holding a modest opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness. Acts xi. 17, cf. Ex; iii. 11. b. flpi T\t,\ike sum altquis \n\.a.t., to he somebody (eminent) : Acts v. 36 ; elvai n, like the Lat. aliquid esse, to he something (i. e. something excel- lent) : Gal. ii. 6 ; vi. 3 ; in these phrases ns and ti are emphatic; cf. Kiihner §470, 3 ; [W. 170(161); B. 114 (100)] ; ehai ti after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii. 7, cf. iley. ad loc. ; also in questions having a negative force, 1 Co. X. 19 [cf. W. § 6, 2]. ov&iv €lpi, 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; 2 Co. xii. 1 1 ; oiSeV ecrriv, it is notliing, is of no ac- count, ilt. x.xiii. 16, 18; .Jn. viii. 54 ; Acts xxi. 24 ; 1 Co. vii. 19. c. Ti'f cVti, e. g. r) ivapa^oXrj. what does it mean? what is the explanation of the thing? Lk. viii. 9 Wr elri ij TTapajioXr) avrrj ; Acts x. 17 ti m> eirj to opapa; ilk. i. 27 Ti f'oTi toCto ; what is this ? expressive of astonishment, Lk. XV. 26 Ti ftr] Tavra; what might be the cause of the noise he heard? Lk. xviii. 36 ; Jn. x. 6 Tiva rjv, a c\a\fi avTois. Ti io-Tt what does it mean ? Mt. ix. 13: xii. 7 ; Lk. XX. 1 7 ; .In. .xvi. 1 7 sq. ; W icrriv el pf) on, E|)li. iv. 9 ; see II. 3 above. d. ovtos, avTrj, tovto ianv foil, by a noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, etc. a. is so employed that tlie pronoun refers to something which has just been said : ovtos yap iaTi 6 vdpos, the law is summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this, ilt. vii. 12. p. in John's usage it is so employed that the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as it were for the predicate : aZrri ianv ?; viKr) . . . rj hIotk f]po)v, 1 Jn. V. 4 ; ovttj ianv rj papTvpia tov Bfov, r)v etc. 1 Jn. V. Rec. ovtos, qvttj, tovto v6s, <^iXos, etc. V. dpi with Prepositions and their cases. 1. aTTo Ttvos (rmrov), lo come from, be a native of : Jn. i. 44 eifii 179 eifit (45) [cf. ajro, rr. 1 a.]. 2. e"r ti, a. to have betaken one's self to some place and to be there, to have gone into (cf. W. § 50, 4 b. ; [B. 333 (286)]) : els olcov, Mk. ii. 1 [RG; al. eV] : ds t'ov aypov. ilk. xiii. 16 [RG]; els t. icoinji', Lk. xi. 7; dt tou koKttov, Jn. i. 18, where cf. Tholuek, [W. 415 (387) ; B. u. s.] ; (on Acts viii. 20 see □TToiXcia, 2 a.), metaph. to come to : els xoKrjv irixpias (hast fallen into). Acts viii. 23. b. to be directed towards a thing : oxrre ttjv ttlotiv v^o>v . . . eivai els Oeov, 1 Pet. i. 21 ; to tend to anything : Ro. xi. 36 [W. § 50, 6]. c. to be for i. e. conduce or inure to, serve for, [B. 150 (131) sq. ; W. § 29, 3 a.] : 1 Co. .-dv. 22 ; Col. ii. 22 ; Jas. v. 3 ; efiol els eXdxurrov ecm, it results for me in, i. e. I account it, a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (fir axpeXeiav, Aesop, fab. 124, 2). d. In imitation of the Hebr. n'H foil, by h, etvai ets nva or ti stands where the Greeks use a nomi- native [W. and B. u. s. ; esp. Soj)?i. Le.x. s. v. els, 3] : Mt. xLx. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31 etrovrai. els trapKa p.iav (fr. Gen. ii. 24) ; 1 Jn. v. 8 els to ev elv ex Trfs yfis) ; iv. 22 ; vii. 52 ; viii. 23 ; xviii. 36 ; Acts iv. 6 ; xix. 25 : xxiii. 34 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 ; or eortv £^ vpMV, your fellow-countrjTnan, Col. iv. 9. c. to be of i. e. proceed from one as the author [W. 366 (344) sq. ; B. 327 (281)] : Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17: Acts v. 38 sq. : 2 Co. iv. 7 ; 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; Heb. ii. 11 ; elvm f| ovpavoii, e^ avdpiynuiv, to be instituted by the authority of God, by the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25 ; Mk. xi. 30 ; Lk. xx. 4 ; to be begotten of one, Mt. i. 20. d. to be of i. e. be con- nected with one; to be related to, [cf . Win. § 5 1 , 1 d. ; cf . in eK, n. 1 a. and 7] : 6 vofios ovk ecrriv ex Tricreas, has no connection with faith. Gal. iii. 12 ; e^ epywv vofiov elvai (Luth. mit Werken umgehen). Gal. iii. 10 ; esp. in John's usage, to depend on the power of one, to be promptrd and governed by one, and reflect his character: thus elvai ex TOV Sta^oXov, Jn. viii. 44 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; eK tov notnjpov, 1 Jn. iii. 12; « toO Kocr/iou, Jn. xv. 19 ; xvii. 14, 16 ; 1 Jn. iv. 5 ; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1 Jn. ii. 1 6 ; opp. to ck tov 6eov elvai, Jn. viii. 4 7 ; 1 Jn. iv. 1-3 ; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see yemda, 2 d.) : 1 Jn. iv. 4, 6 ; V. 19 ; 3 Jn. 11 ; « ttjs aXrjdelas eivai, either to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii. 21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed bv the love and pursuit of truth, as .Jn. xviii. 37 ; 1 .Tn. iii. 19; d i)v f'K TTJs yris ex Tijs y^r earl, he who is from the earth as respects origin bears the nature of this his earth- ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 31. e. to be ofi. e. formed from : Rev. .xxi. 21 ; 1 Co. xi. 8. 4. evTivi, a. with dat. of place, to be in i. e. be present, to stay, dwell ; a. prop. : Mt. xxiv. 26 ; Lk. ii. 49, etc. : on the surface of a place (Germ, auf), as eu ttj o3m, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere; ev Ta dypa, Lk. xv. 25. at : ev Se^ta roi 6eov, Ro. viii. 34 ; to lire, dwell, as in a city : Lk. .xviii. 3: Acts ix. 10 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 2, etc. ; of God, ev ovpavo'ts, Eph. vi. 9 ; of things which are found, met with, in a place : 2 Tim. ii. 20, etc. p. things so pertaining to locality that one can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and unprop., as eivai ev tTT)pia salvation is (laid up, embodied) in none otlier, can be expected from none, Acts iv. 1 2 : with dat. of the thing, (V (contained, wrapped up) in .sometliing : Eph. v. 18 ; lleb. x. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 18. 5. c«;ii in I a. Tivos. to be on: im tov hafiaros, Lk. xvii. 31 ; cVl T^f Ke(f>a\ris, Jn. xx. 7; to be (.«et) over a thing. Acts viii. 27 ; to preside, rule, over, Ro. ix. o. b. Tivi, to be at [W. 392 (367)] : eVi 6ipats, Mt. xxiv. 33 : Mk. xiii. 29. c. rivd, lobe upon one : ;(apir ^i/ eVi rira, was with him, assisted hira. Lk. ii. 40 : Acts iv. 33 ; Trveiijia T/v €771 Tira, had come upon one, was impelling liim, Lk. ii. 25, cf. Lk. iv. 18 ; Sept. Ls. Ixi. 1 ; add. Gal. vi. 16 ; elvai err'i to avTO, lo he (assembled) Ingelher [cf. avro's, Ld. 1], Acts i. 15 ; ii. 1, 44 ; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ace. to the reading ^re for Rec. avvepxf7To\riii\l/ia, Ro. ii. 1 1 ; Eph. vi. 9 ; dSiicta, Ro. ix. 14. c. Ttvd (tottov), by, hi/ the side of: ^Ik. v. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. irpvs Tti/a [cf. W. 405 (378)], a. towards: irpos fi', but cf. W. § 6, 2 ; [B. 50 (43). Co.Mi'. : OTT-. eirr-, t^. fV-. 0"l;iA-fl/il.] * cVvEKtv, see (vfKa, evfKfv. A-^ip, see el, III. 13. elirov, 2 aor. act. fr. an obsol. pres. EIIQ [late Epic and in composition ; see Veitch] (cf. cTrot [Curtius § 620]), Ion. EinQ (like eparda, elpan. ; tXicro-o), fiXiVcr.) ; sub- junc. (Ittih, optat. eiTToipn, impv. eiVe, inf. elnelv, ptcp. elnwv ; 1 aor. etna (Jn. x. 34 R G T Tr WH, fr. Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6; Acts xxvi. 15 L T Tr AVH ; Heb. iu. 10 Ldmi. fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10; add [Mk. ix. 18 T AVH Tr t.\t.]: Job -xxLx. 18; .xxxii. 8, etc.; Sir. xxiv. 31 (29); 1 Ma- e. vi. 11, etc.; cf. Kiihneri. 817, [esp. Veitch s. v. pp. 232, 233]), 2 pers. etnas (Mt. .x.xvi. 25, [64] ; Mk. xii. 32 [not T WH ; Jn. iv. 1 7 where T WH again -^es ; Lk. XX. 39]), 3 pers. plur. etnav (often in L T Tr WH [i. e. out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between 3 pers. plur. -nov of the Rec. and -nav, the latter ending has been adopted by L in 56, by T in 82, by Tr in 74, by WH in 104,cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123], e.g. Mt. xii. 2 ; xxvU. 6 : Jn. xviii. 30, etc.) ; impv. elnov (Mk. xiii. 4 L T Tr WH ; Lk. X. 40 T WH Tr mrg. ; Acts xxvui. 26 G L T Tr WH, [also Mt. iv. 3 WH ; xviii. 1 7 T WH : xxu. 1 7 T WH Tr mrg. : xxiv. 3 WH ; Lk. xx. 2 T Tr ^VB. ; x.xii. (06) 67 T Tr WH ; Jn. x. 24 T WH], for the Attic einov, cf. W.§6, 1 k. ; [Chandler § 775]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 515 sqq. ; [but Win. (p. 85 (81)) regards elnov as impv. of the 2nd aor. ; cf., too, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 348 ; B. 57 (50); esp. Fritz. 1. c.]). in the remaining persons elnaTa (Rev. xxii. 17), e'tnare (Mt. [x. 27 ; xxi. 5] ; x.xii. 4 ; xxvi. 18, etc. ; Mk. [.xi. 3] : xiv. 14 ; xvi. 7 ; [Lk. x. 10 ; xiii. . 32; XX. 3 ; Col. iv. 17]), eindrwaav (Acts .xxiv. 20) also freq.in Attic, [A'eitch s. v. ; WH. App. p. 1 64 : Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 219]; ptcp., after the form chiefly Ion., e'tnas ([Jn. xi. 28 Tr WH] ; Acts vii. 37 L T Tr WH [also xxii. 24 ; xxiv. 22 ; xxvii. 35]); the fut. epm is from the Epic pres. ftp. Acts ii. 16 ; to elprjpt- vov, Lk. ii. 24 : Acts xiii. 40 ; Ro. iv. 18 ; ippi&q, Mt. v. 21, etc.; Ka6a>s «piyKfj», Heb. iv. 3. b. with ace. of the pers. to speak of, designate by words: ov elrrov, Jn. i. 15 [(not WH txt.) : B. 377 (323) ; cf. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. {say o/")] ; o pr)9(is, ilt. iii. 3. etnfiv Tiva koKSis, to speak irell of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (cu EiVcii' Tiva, Horn. Od. 1, 302) ; KoKas, to speak ill of one. Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. xxii. 28 ; cf. Kiihner § 409, 2 ; 411, 5 ; [W. § 32, 1 b. ^. ; B. 146 (128)]. c. with an ellipsis of the ace. aiTo (see avTos, II. 3) : Lk. xxii. 67; Jn. ix. 27; xvi. 4, etc. ai (iiras (sc. auTo), i. e. you have just expressed it in words; that 's it ; it is just as you say : Mt. xxvi. 25, 64, [a rabbin- ical formula ; for exx. cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on vs. 25; al. seem to regard the answer as non-committal, e. g. Origen on vs. 64 (opp. iii. 9 1 De la Rue) ; Wunsche, Erlaut. der Evang. aus Talmud usw. on vs. 25 ; but cf. the f'ym dpi of Mk. xiv. 62 ; in Mt. xxvi. 64 WH mrg. take it interrogatively]. 2. the person, to whom a thing is said, is indicated a. by a dat. : flndv ti tivi, Lk. vii. 40, and very often ; eiirov vpw sc. ain-o, I (have just) told it you ; this is what I mean ; let this be the word : Mt. xxviii. 7 ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 381 ; [Jelf § 403, 1 ; Goodwin § 19, 5; esp. (for exx.) Herm. Vig. p. 746]. Ttvi ntpi twos [cf. W. § 47, 4], Mt. xvii. 13 ; Jn. xviii. 34. to say anything to one by way of censure, Mt. xxL 3 ; to cast in one's teeth, «peiTc /loi t^v Tiapa^oXjjv, Lk. iv. 23. to tell what anything means, e. g. to pvaTTjpiov, Rev. xvii. 7. b. by the use of a prep. : npos Tiva [cf. B. 172 (150); Kruger § 48, 7, 13], to say (a thing) to one, as Lk. iv. 23; V. 4; xii. 16, and many other places in Luke; to say a thing in reference to one [W. 405 (378)], ISIk. xii. 12; Lk. xviii. 9; xx. 19. 3. eiirov, to say, speak, simply and without an ace. of the obj., i. e. merely to de- clare in words, to use language ; a. with the addition of an adverb or of some other adjunct : opolas, Mt. xxvi. 35 ; aia^avTas, Mt. xxi. 30 : Ka6a>s, Jit. xxviii. 6 ; Lk. xxiv. 24 ; Jn. i. 23 ; vii. 38 ; fin^e 8id napaffoXris, making use of a parable [see dtd, A. HI. 3] he spake, Lk. viii. 4 ; iv irapa- fioXa'is, Mt. xxii. 1 ; with an instrumental dative : fure Xoyw, say in (using only) a (single) word, sc. that my ser- vant shall be healed, Mt. viii. 8 (where Rec. Xdyov) : Lk. vii. 7. b. with the words spoken added in direct dis- course ; so a hundred times in the historical books of the N. T., as Mt. ix. 4 sq. ; viii. 32 ; [xv. 4 L Tr WH], etc. ; 1 Co. xii. 15 ; [2 Co. iv. 6 L txt. T Tr WH, (cf. 4 below)]; Heb. i. 5 ; iu. 10 ; x. 7, [15 L T Tr WH], 30 ; xii. 21 ; Jas. ii. 3, 11 ; Jude 9; Rev. vii. 14; nep'^as eiKfv he said by a messenger or messengers, Mt. xi. 2 sq. The following and other phrases are freq. in the Synoptic Gospels : 6 Se dnoKpiOels elnev, as Jit. iv. 4 ; xv. 13 ; Kai dnoKpidels €L7T€v, Jit. xxiv, 4 ; diroKpideiixa ij p^Ttjp enrev. Lk. i. 60 : diroKpiScls 6 2lpaiv einev, Lk. vii. 43, etc. ; dTTOKpiBevres 6« eiirou [j-irav T Tr WH], Lk. xx. 24 ; bu'., John usually writes dneKpidrj KOI ciTTcv : Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 19 ; iii. 10 ; iv. 10, 13, 1 7 ; vi. 26,29; vu. 16, 20 [RG], 52 ; i.\. 11 [R GL br.], 30, 36 [L Tr mrg. om. WH br. »c. eijr.] ; xiii. 7 ; xiv. 23 ; xviii. 30 ; — [ewrai/ avTai \iyovTfS, Mk. viii. 28 T WH Tr mrg., cf. xii. 26]. c. foU. by oti : Jit. xxviii. 7 ; Jlk. xvi. 7 ; Jn. vi. 36 ; vii. 42; viii. 55; xi. 40 ; xvi. 15 ; xviii. 8; 1 Jn. i. 6, 8, 10; 1 Co. i. 15; xiv. 23 ; xv. 27 [L br. WH mrg. om. oTt]. d. foil, bv ace. and inf. ; Tt oui' epov/t€v *A|3paa/i Toi* jTOTepa fjpiov (vpriKevai [WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. €vpr)K. ; cf. 1 b. above] «caTo adpKa; Ro. iv. 1. 4. elnf'w some- times involves in it the idea of commanding [cf. B. 275 sq. (237)] : foil. !iv the inf., f ote hoBr^vai avTfi (paye7v. Mk. V. 43 ; ctTTC TO) d5eX(^c5 pov peplaaaOai p€T ipov ttjv K\rjpo- vopiav, Lk. xii. 13 ; oaa av eXiruxrw ip'iv (sc. Tijpe'iv [in- serted in R G]), Trjpe'iTf. Jit. xxiii. 3, (Sap. ix. 8). foil, bv the ace. and inf., 6 elni^v ex o^kotovs (^JurXd^i/^ot, 2 Co. iv. 6 [R G L mrg., cf. B. 273 sq. (235) ; but L txt. T Tr WH read Xdfii/^ei. thus changing the construction fr. the ace. with infin. to direct discourse, see 3 b. above] ; €i7r€v avT^ (for favTci, see avTov) tpwvrjd^vat tovs 8ov\ovs tovtovs, he commanded to be called for him (i. e. to him) these servants, Lk. xLx. 15; cf. W. §44, 3 b. ; Kriiger § 55, 3, 13. foil, by tva with the subjunc. : Jit. iv. 3 ; xx. 21 : Lk. iv. 3 : to elrrt'iv is added a dat. of the pers. bidden to do something. Mk. iii. 9 ; Lk. x. 40 cf. iv. 3 ; Rev. vi. 11 ; ix. 4. " Jloreover, notice that Tva and o(ppa are often used by the later poets after verbs of command- mg ; " Hermann ad Vig. p. 849 ; cf. W. § 44, 8 ; [B. 23 7 etTTW? 182 €l.prjVLKOi\ovs, Jn. xv. 15 ; (Horn. Od. 19, 334 ; Xen. apol. Socr. § 15 ; Lcian. Tim. § 20). [Comp.: dvr-, air-, jrpo- «jroi/.] «l'-iTus, see fl, III. 14. ttpT)v€iu : (^elprjvrj) ; 1. to make peace : 1 Mace. vi. 60 ; Dio Cass. 77, 12, etc. 2. to cultivate or keep peace, i. c. harmony : to be at peace, live in peace : 2 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; (V dXXijXoif, Mk. ix. .OO ; iv iavTolt [T Tr airoir], 1 Th. V. 13 : fi(Ta TivQs, Ro. xii. 18; (Plat. Theaet. p. 180 b. ; Dio Cass. 42, 15, etc.; Sept.).* cEp^vT], -17s, r), (apparently fr. eipa to join ; [al. fr. (Ipu) i. I). Xf'yo) ; Etym. Magn. 303, 41 ; Vanicek p. 892 ; Loh. Path. Prolog, p. 194 : Ben/e;/, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept. chieliy for Di'iv) ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; peace, i. e. 1. a state of national tranqulllili/; exemption from tlie rage and haroc of war : Rev. vi. 4 ; jroXX^ flpn'^t Actsxxiv. 2 (3) ; TO [WII txt. om. to] Ttpus flpfjvrjv, things that look tow- ards peace, as an armistice, conditions for the restoration of peace, Lk. xiv. 32 ; alre'ia-6m fip^xiji/. Acts xii. 20 ; cpftiK elpqvriv, of the church free from persecutions, Acts ix. 31. 2. peace between individuals, i. e. harmony, concord : Mt. x. 34 ; Lk. xii. 5 1 ; Acts vii. 26 ; Ro. xiv. 17; iCo. vii. 15; Gal. v. 22 ; Eph. ii. 17; iv. 3 ; i.q. the author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [cf. B. 125 (109)] ; iv flpfjVTj, where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18 ; oSuf elptjvrfs, way leading to peace, a course of life pro- moting harmony, Ro. iii. 1 7 (f r. Is. lix. 8) ; fier flprjvqs, in a mild and friendly spirit, Ileb. xi. 31 ; noteiv etpqvriv, to promote concord, Jas. iii. 18 ; toeiiect it, Eph. ii. 15; Cirelv, 1 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; SioiKdv, 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; with p.eTa ■TravTtov added, Heb. xii. 14; ra ttjs elpffvrjs SwoKfH', Ro. xiv. 19 [cf. B. 95 (83) ; W. 109 (103 sq.)]. spec, (jood order, opp. to aKaracnacria, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 3. after the Ilebr. Dl^!?, securiti/, safetij, prosperity, felicitij, (because peace and harmony make and keep things safe and ]iros- pcrous) : Lk. xix. 42; Heb. vii. 2; dpS^vr) k. aa(j)d\€i.a, opp. to oXeOpos, 1 Th. V. 3 ; iv uprjvij iarl ra V7rap\ovTa avTov, his goods are secure from hostile attack, Lk. xi. 21 ; vTraye fls tlpijvrfv, Mk. v. 34, and nopfiov eit elp. Lk. vii. 50 ; viii. 48, a formula of wishing well, blessing, ad- dressed by the Hebrews to departing friends (Dl'Su''? iS 1 S. i. 17 ; XX. 42, etc. ; properly, depart into a place or state of peace; [cf. B. 184 (160)]) : nopdea-Bai iv elpi]vj). Acts xvi, 36, and ujrdyfTe iv dpjjirij, .fas. ii. 1 6, gn in p/ ace i. e. mai/ happiness attend ynu: diroXvftv riva /ifT elpfivrji, to dismiss one with good wishes. Acts xv. 33 ; iv dprivji, with my wish fulfilled, and therefore happy, Lk. ii. -'9 (see a7To\vco, 2 a.) ; jrpoTrc/xTf tw rtea iv dp. free from dan- ger, safe, 1 Co. xvi. 1 1 [al. take it of inward peace or of harmony; cf. Mey. ad loc.]. The Hebrews in invok- ing Ijlcssings on a man called out ^S wflV! (Judg. vi. 23 ; Dan. x. 19) ; from this is to be derived the explana- tion of those expres.sions which refer apparently to the Messianic blessings (sec 4 below) : (Iprjvr] ra oiku TovTco, let peace, blessedness, come to this liouseliohl, Lk. X. 5 ; vios eiprjvrjt, worthy of peace [cf. W. § 34, 3 N. 2 ; B. 161 sq.(141)], Lk. X. 6; ikOirin t] clprjvri in airoi/, let the peace which ye wish it come iq)on it, i. e. be its lot, Mt. X. 13 ; to the same j)urport inavan. i) dp. vp.. in avrov, Lk. X. 6 ; ^ ftp. vfi. irpbs vpas i7riiTTpa(j>riTa, let your peace return to you, because it could not rest iqion it, i. e. let it be just as if ye had not uttered the wish, Mt. x. 13. 4. spec, the Messiah's peace : Lk. ii. 14 ; odus dprjvrjs, the way that leads to peace (salvation), Lk. i. 79 ; dp. iv ol'pavM, peace, salvation, is pre])ared for us in heaven, Lk. xix. 38 ; eiayytXi^faBai dprjvqv. Acts x. 36. 5. acc. to a conception distinctly peculiar to Christianity, the tranquil state of a soul assured of its salvation through Christ, and so fearing nothing from God and content with its earthly lot, of whatsoever sort that is : Ro. viii. 6 ; iv dpfivT] sc. Svres is used of those who, assured of salvation, tranquilly await the return of Christ and the transfor- mation of all things which will acconqiany that event, 2 Pet. iii. 14 ; [ttXtjpovv ndoTjs . . . dpT}VT]s iv rai ntareCfiv, Ro. XV. 13 (where L mi'g. ivn dprjuji)^ ; ix^'-" ^" Xpiorm dpfjvriv (opp. to iv Tw Koapui 6Xl-\lfiv 'i^eiv), Jn. xvi. 33; fX^^" dp. irpos T. 6euv, with God, Ro. v. 1, {dp. npos riva, Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 b. ; cf. Diod. 21, 12 ; [cf Mey. on Ro. 1. c. ; W. 186 (175) ; 406 (379)]) ; eiayyfXi'feo-^m dpl^vrjv, Ro. X. 15 [R G Tr mrg. in br.] ; to dayyiXtovT^i dprjvijs, Eph. vi. 15 ; in the expression dpTjvriv ucjilrjpi ktX. Jn. xiv. 27, in which Christ, with allusion to the usual Jewish formula at leave-taking (see 3 above), says that he not merely wishes, but gives peace ; r/ dp!]vrj tov Xpiorov, which comes from Christ, Col. iii. 15 [Ilec. 0eoC] ; toO 0(oC, PMl. iv. 7, [cf. W. 1 86 (1 75)]. Comprehensively of every kind of peace (blessing), yet with a predominance apparently of the notion of jieace with God, eipiji/ij is used — in the salutations of Christ after his resurrect ion, fip^w; vpiv (D5S DlSiy), Lk. xxiv. 36 [T om. WH reject the cl.] ; Jn. XX. 19, 21, 26 ; in the phrases 6 Kvpios t^9 dpt]vj]s, the Lord who is the author and ])romotcr of peace, 2 Th. iii. 1 6 ; 6 Oeos t^s dp. Ro. xv. 33 ; xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; Pliil. iv. 9 ; 1 Th. v. 23 ; Heb. xiii. 20 ; in the salu- tations at the beginning and the close of the apostolic Epp. : Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 3 ; 2 Co. i. 2 ; Gal. i. 3 ; vi. 16 ; Eph. i. 2 ; vi. 23 ; Phil. i. 2 ; Col. i. 2 ; 1 Th. i. 1 ; 2 Th. i. 2; iii. 16; iTim.i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; Tit.L4; [Philem. 3] ; lPet.i. 2; v. 14; 2 Pet. i. 2; 2Jn.3; 3 Jn. 15(14); [Jude 2] ; Rev. i. 4. Cf. Kling in Ilerzog iv. p. 696 sq. s. v. Friede mit Gott ; Weis.<, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 83 b.; [Otto in the Jahrbb. fiir deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678 sqq. ; cf. W. 549 (511)]. 6. of the ble.'f.ied state of devout and upright men after death (Sap. iii. 3) : Ro. ii. 10." 6lpT)viK6s, -Tj, -6v, 1. relating to peace : inioT^p^i, the arts of peace, Xen. oec. 1, 17; cpya, ibid. C, 1 ; xpdo^i €tpr)v 183 et? Diod. 5, 31 ; often in 1 Mace. 2. peaceable, pacific, looing peace : Jas. iii. 17; (Plat., Isoc, al. ; Sept.). 3. bringing peace with it, peaceful, salutari/, (see ftjjlivT], 3) : Heb. xii. 11.* €lpT]vo-iroii'u, -o) : [1 aor. elprivorroirjaa] ", (cipjjvoTrotos) ; to make peace, establish harmoni/ : Col. i. 20. (Prov. x. 10; in ilid., Hermes ap. Stob. eclog. ph. 1, 52 [984].)* ctpr)voiroi6s, -Of, masc. a peace-maker (Xen. Hell. C, 3, 4 ; Dio Cass.) ; pacific, loving peace : Mt. v. 9 ; [others {cf. A. V.) dispute this secondary meaning ; see Meyer ad loc.].* el'p», flit. epa>, see (ittov. tts, a Prep, governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit : into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Pkoperly I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place en tered, or of entrance into a place, into ; and a. it stands be- fore nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden : as cir (ttiu) itoXiv, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11 ; Mk. i. 4-5, and often; ds r. oIkov, Mt. ix. 7 ; trvvayarYV"' Acts xvii. 10 ; n-Xotov, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; 6d\av oKavdav) ; or before jiersons, I\Ik. viii. 19 sq. ; Lk. xi. 49; Jn. xxi. 23; Acts xviii. 6; xx. 29; xxii. 21, 30; xxvi. 17; see dnoarreWa, lb.; or before a collective ndun in the singular number, as els tov Srjpov, Acts xvii. 5 ; .xix. 30 ; els Ton o)(\ov, Acts xiv. 14 ; els top \a6v. Acts iv. 1 7. 2. If the surface only of the place entered is touched or occupied, els, like tlie Lat. In, may [often] be rendered •on, upon, (Germ, auf), [sometimes by unto, — (idioms vary)], to mark the hmit reached, or where one sets foot. Of this sort are els to Ttipav [A. Y. urUo], Mt. viii. 1 8 ; xiv. 22 ; Mk. iv. 35 ; els ttju yfjv, Lk. xii. 49 (L T Tr WH eirl) ; Acts xxvi. 14 ; Rev. viU. 5, 7 ; ix. 3 ; xii. 4, 9 ; els rfji/ kKIvtiv, Rev. ii. 22 ; els ohov, Mt. x. 5 ; !Mk. vi. 8 ; Lk. i. 79 ; els t!)v 686v, Mk. xi. 8' [L mrg. ev w. dat., H'' R G L] ; els T. dypov, Mt. xxii. 5 ; Mk. xiii. 16 ; els to opos [or f IS op. ; here A. V. uses into2, Mt. v. 1 ; xiv. 23 ; xv. 29 ; xvii. 1 ; Mk. iii. 1 3 ; ix. 2 ; Lk. ix. 28 ; Jn. vi. 3, etc. ; fis Til Se^id, Jn. xxi. 6 ; crneipeiv e'ls n (tiji» (rdpKo), Gal. vi. 8 [here A. V. unto ; cf. Ellic. ad loc] ; dvairlTireiv els Turtov, Lk. xiv. 1 ; Se^^opai els ras dyKiiXas, Lk. ii. 28 ; TvnTeiv els Trjv Ke(f>a.\r]v, Mt. xxvii. 30, [eis rriv criayova, Lk. vi. 29 Tdf. ; pan[(eiu els t. aiayova, Mt. v. 39 L T Tr txt. WH, where R G eVi], and in other phrases. 3. of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity of a place ; where it may be rendered to, near, towards, (cf. Fritzsche on Mk. j). 81 sq. [for exx. only]) : els t. ddXacaav, Mk. iii. 7 G L T Tr mrg. ; els iroXiv, Jn. iv. 5 cf. 28 ; €is TO pvr]pelov, Jn. xi. 31, 38 ; xx. 1, 3 sq. 8; eyyi^eiv els etc. ilt. xxi. 1 ; 31k. xi. 1 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; xLx. 29 ; els Tovs paypois, Lk. xiv. 23 ; itlirreLV els t. iroSas, at, Jn. xi. 32 [T Tr WH jTpos] ; Kkiveiv TO jrpoViaTroi/ els r. yrjv, Lk. xxiv. 5 ; els Tr)v x^P^i "«, Lk. xv. 22. 4. of the limit to which ; with ace of place, as far as, even to : Xapnetv eK . . .els, Lk. xvii. 24 ; with ace plur. of pers. to, unto: Acts xxiii. 15 (els v/ias, for R ( ; irpos) ; Ro. v. 12 ; xvi. 19 ; 2 Co. Lx. 5 [L Tr Trpdr] ; x. 14. 5. of local direc- tion ; a. after verbs of seeing: inalpeiv toOs 6da\- poijs ci's Ti, Tiva, Lk. vi. 20 ; ^Xeneiv, Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 22 ; Acts iii. 4 ; dvafiKeiTeii/, !Mk. vi. 41 ; Lk. ix. 16 ; Acts xxii. 13; ep^\inetv, Mt. vi. 26 ; drevl^eiv, q. v. b. after verbs of saying, teaching, announcing, etc. (cf. Germ, die Rede richten an etc ; Lat. dicere ad or coram ; [Eng. direct one's remarks to or towards] ; e.xx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Bnhdy. p. 217; Passow i. p. 802"; [L. and S. s. v. I. b. 3]; Kriiger § 68, 21, 6) : KqpviraeLV, as rjv Kripvaaav els ras (rvpayioyiis airaiv els o\t]v t^k TaXiX. prKacldng to the synagogues tliroughout all Galilee, Mk. i. 39 (Rec. iv rats away., as Lk. iv. 44 [where T ^Yil Tr txt. now els ; cf. W. 416 (387) ; B. 333 (287) ; but in IMlc. 1. c. T Tr txt. WH now read rikBev Kr)pv(Tpi(eiv, Ro. xvi. 26 ; eiayyeXl^eadai, 2 Co. X. 16 ; els vpas. 1 Pot. i. 25: 'Keyeiv [Rec : al. XaXfi;/] els t6v Koa-pov, .Jn. viii. 26; [XoXeii'Toi'Xo'yoi' eisTiji'ITepyj)!', Acts xiv. 25 T WHmrg] ; Siapaprvpeadm and paprvpeiv, Acts xxiii. 11. n. of Time; 1. it denotes entrance into a period whioh is penetrated, as it were, i. e. duration through a time, (Lat. !/! ; Germ, hinein, hinaus) : els tov aiijva, and the like, see aliov, 1 a.; fis to SirjveKis, Hel). vii. 3; X. 1. 12. 14: els err) TroXXd, Lk. xii. 19; t^ cVt- toeiv, Acts ii. 20 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; iieTa\\d(T(Teiv, Ro. i. 26 ; )ieTaa-)(rjfiaTi(ea-6m, 2 Co. xi. 13 sq. ; avvotKO- 8opel(T6m, Eph. ii. 22 ; Krl^eiv Tivu els, Eph. ii. 15 ; Xa/t- ^dpeiv TL els, Ileb. xi. 8 ; Xoyi^eaOai e'ls ti, see Xoyi^ofiai, 1 a. eax'a-Or] els Svo. 'SH. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38, (Polyb. 2, 16, 11 (T)^i^eTai els dvo p-eprj) ; Beeiv els deap.ds, Mt. xiii. 30 [G om. Tr WH br. eij] ; els ev TeXeiovadat, Jn. xvii. 23; a-vvdyeiv els ev,Jn.xi.52. 2. after verbs of g o i n g, coming, leading, etc., eis is joined to nouns desig- nating the condition or state into which one passes, falls, etc. : eltrepxetjOai els ttjv /SatriX. tojv ovpav. or tov 6eov, see ^aa-tXela, 3 p. 97'' : fis T. fw^K, Mt. xviii. 8; xix. 17; XXV. 46 ; els r. j^apdv, Mt. xxv. 21, 23 ; els KoXacriv alavtov, ib. 46 ; ep^effOai els Kpicriv, Jn. v. 24 ; ela-fpepeiv, el(T6p)(. els netpaapuv, JNlt. vi. 13; xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WH eX^rf] ; ep^eaBai els to x^^pov. Mk. v. 26 ; els drreXeypov, Acts xix. 27 ; eis irpoKOTrqp, Phil. i. 12 ; fxeTa^alveiv els t. (tafjv, Jn. v. 24 ; 1 .Tn. iii. 14 ; iropevetrBau els BdvaTov, Lk. xxii. 33 ; vndyeLV els dirdiKeiav, Rev. xvii. 8, 1 1 : virdyetu or nopeveadai els elprjvrju, see elprfvrj, 3 ; v7ro(rTpe'etu els hia<^Bopdv, Acts xiii. 34 ; trvvrpexet-v els avd^va-tv, 1 Pet. iv. 4; pdWetv els BXlifriv, Itev. ii. 22; nepiTpiiTeiv els ftaviav, Acts xxvi. 24 ; p€TatrTpf(Peiu and i7Tpf<\ieiv ets ti. Acts ii. 20 ; Rev. xi. 6 ; 6hr]ye\v els t. aXrjdeiav [T ev ttj dX.], Jn. xvi. 13; alxpaXoiTi^eiv els vnaKorjv, 2 Co. X. 5 ; napa- hihovai els BXiyfriv, iMt. xxiv. 9 ; els Bdvarov, 2 Co. iv. 1 1 ; €is Kplp,a BavaTov, Lk. xxiv. 20 ; irvyKKeieiv els cmeiOeiav, Ro. xi. 32; ep.niT!Teiv els Kpl/ia, els oveiStcrp-ov Kal waylUa, els TTeipairp.ov, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq. ; vi. 9. 3.- it is used of the business which one e n t e r s i n t o, i. e. of what he undertakes : elaepxea^Om els t. kottov tivos, to take up and carry on a labor begun by another. .Tn. iv. 3.S ; Tpixeiv eis TToXepov, Rev. Lx. 9 ; epxopai els airoKoKii'^eLs, I come, in my narrative, to revelations i. e. to the mention of them, 2 Co. -xii. 1. II. fis after words indicating motion or direc- tion or end; 1. it denotes motion to something, after verbs of going, coming, leading, calling, etc., and answers to the Lat. ad, to : KoKe'iv Tiva els ydpov, ydpovs, SfiTTTOi', etc. to invite to, etc., 31t. xxii. 3 ; Lk. xiv. 8, lo ; •In. ii. 2; xaKeiv Tiva els pLeTuvmav, etc., Lk. v. 32; 2 Th. ii. 11 ; tlyeiv Tivd els peTuvouiv, Uo. ii. 4; e7n(TTpe(jieiv els TO s. Acts xxvi. IS ; eKTpeiretrdat. els paTaioXoylav, 1 Tim. i. 6 ; peTaTiOetrSai els eTepov evayyeX. Gal. i. 6 ; x^P^' erai els perdvoiav, 2 Pet. iii. 9, etc. 2. of ethical di- rection or reference; a. univ. of acts in which the mind is directed totvardf!, or looks to, something : ^Xeneiv els trpoiTijmov twos (see /SXeVo), 2 c.) ; dno^Xeireiv els t. ptadimoSodiav, lleb. xi. 26 ; dcjyopdv els • ■ ■ 'irjtrovv, ib. xii. 2 (see A. L 5 a. above) ; maTeveiv as Tiva, and the like, cf. under wiorf uto, nicrTis, c'Xjri'fw. [tXms], etc. ; e'jn- dvptav exeiv els n, directed towards etc. Phil. i. 23 ; Xe'yfiK el's Tiva, to speak with reference to one, Acts ii. 25 (Diod. Sic. 11, 50); Xeyeiv ti eXs Tt, to say something in reference to something, Eph. v. 32 ; XaXe7v ti fis ti, to speak something relating to something, Ileb. vii. 14 ; ojivveiv fis Ti, to swear with the mind directed towards, Jit. V. 35 ; eiSoKe'iv ets Tiva, Mt. xii. 18 [R G] ; 2 Pet. i. 17. b. for one's advantage or disadvantage; o. for, for the benefit of, to the advantatje of: els fipas, Eph. i. 1 9 ; f IS vpas, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but WH br.] ; Eph. iii. 2 ; Col. i. 25 ; irXovTe'iv els 6e6v, to abound in riches made to subserve God's purposes and promote his glory, Lk. xii. 21 [so too W. 397 (371) ; but cf. Jley. ed. Weiss ad loc] ; Christ is said rrXovTe'iv els irdvTas, to abound in riches redounding to the salvation of all men, Ro. x. 12 ; TrXeovd^fiv els ti, Phil. iv. 17; eXerjpoavvrjv iroieiv els to eBvos, Acts xxiv. 17; fis roiis tttoixovs, for the benefit of the poor, Ro. xv. 26 ; fis tovs ayiovs, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; ix. 1 , cf . 1 3 ; KOTTidv fis Tiva. Ro. xvi. 6 ; Gal. iv. 1 1 : fis Xpiorop, to the advantage and honor of Christ, Philem. 6 ; f'^jyii- (ea-dai ti e'ls Tiva, Mk. xiv. Rec. ; 3 .Tn. 5 ; Xfiroupyos fir TO edvr], Ro. XV. 16 ; yevojxeva els Ka(j)apvaoip (for Rec. iv Ka,repvaoip [cf. W. 416 (388) ; B. 333 (286)]), Lk. iv. 23. p. unto in a disadvantageous sense, (againxt) : fiT]8ev aTonov els avTov yevopevov, Acts xxviii. 6. c. of the mood or inclination, affecting one t o w a r d s any person or thing; of one's mode of action towards; o. in a good sense : dydnrj eis Tiva, unto, towards, one, Ro. V. 8 ; 2 Co. ii. 4, 8 ; Col. i. 4 , 1 Th. iii. 1 2 ; to airo fir dXXr;Xovs cppove'iv, Ro. xii. 16 ; 0iXooTopyos. ib. 10; (piXo- |f i/os, 1 Pot. iv. 9 ; ;(()?)(TTds, Eph. iv. 32 ; (iTro/caraX- Xdo-o-fii' fis avTov [al. avT. see auToC], Col. i. 20 [cf. AV. 397 (371)]. p. in a bad sense: apapTdvetv eis Tiva (see apaprdvo), b.) ; Xoyoi' elireiv and ^Xarrtprjpeiv fis Tiva, Lk. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 29; fiXda-(\>ripos eis Tiva, Acts vi. 11 ^ j3XaiT(pTjiJiS>v Xf-yo) fi's Ttra, Lk. xxii. 65 ; e'mfiovXr) eis Tiva, Acts xxiii. 30 ; exBpa, Ro. viii. 7 ; diTiXoyi'a. Heb. xii. 3; dappeiv eis Tiva, 2 Co. X. 1. d. of reference or relation; icith respect to, in reference to ; as regards, (cf. Kiihner ii. 408 c. : [.Telf § 625, 3 e.]) : Lk. vii. 30 ; Acts XXV. 20 [T Tr WH om. eis] : Ro. iv. 20 ; xv. 2 ; 2 Co. x. 16 ; xiii. 3 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; Eph. iii. 16 ; Phil. i. 5 ; ii. ffl? 185 eif 22; 1 Th. V. 18 ; els rl eSiaracras; ' (looking) unto what ^i. e. wherefore) didst thou doubt ? Mt. xiv. 31 ; cf. Her- mann ad Oed. C. 528' (Fritzsche). of the considera- tion influencing one to do anything: ixeravoelv els Ki'ipvyfid Tims, at the preaching of one, i. e. out of regard to the substance of his preaching, Mt. xii. 41 ; 8e}(epoveiv, unto moderation, modesty, i. e. not beyond it, Ro. xii. 3. b. the end which a thing is adapted to attain (a use akin to that in B. II. 2 b. ; [cf. W. 213 (200)]) : dpyos K. aKapnos eiV rt, 2 Pet. i. 8 ; evSeTOs, Lk- ix. (j2 R G; xiv. 35 (34) ; ev)^pr]jro>, 1 Th. iii. 2, 5 ; Col. iv. 8 ; Phil. iv. 16 [L br. els] ; 1 Pet. ii. 14 ; epxopat, .In. ix. 39 ; Trotelv ti els, 1 Co. X. 31 ; xi. 24. Modelled after the Hebr. are the phrases, iyeipetv Tivd els ffaios edvwv. Acts xiii. 47 (fr. Is.xlix. 6 Alex.) ; cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 814 ; B. 150 (131) ; [\V. § 32, 4 b.]. 8. eis rt, indicating purpose, often depends not on any one pre- ceding woi-d with which it coalesces into a single phrase, but has the force of a telic clause added to the already complete preceding statement ; thus, els So^av toS 6eov, Ro. XV. 7 ; Phil. i. 11; ii. 11; els \66vTa ea-dleiv, (Vulg. aedificabitur ad manducandum idololhi/la), 1 Co. viii. 10; /i^ oIkIos ovk e\eTe els to eirdieiv k- TTiveiv, 1 Co. xi. 22 ; els to npoer^epeiv Saipd Te Ka'i Bvtrlas Ka6itTTaTai. (Vulg. ad offerenda miinfra el hostias), Heb. viii. 3 ; add, Heb. Lx. 28 ; 1 Th. ii. 16; iv. 9 ; Phil. i. 23 ; or pp. (is to with the inf. has the force of a separate telic clause (equiv. to Iva with the subjunc), [Meyer (on Ro. i. 20) asserts that this is its uniform force, at least in Ro. (cf. his note on 2 Co. viii. 6) ; on the other hand, Harmsen (u. s.) denies the telle force of els to before an inf. Present; sf. also AV. 329 (309) ; esp. B. as above and p. 265 note ; EUic. on 1 Thess. ii. 12; and see below, d. fin.] : Lk. xx. 20 R G ; Acts iii. 19 [T WH Trpos] ; Ro. i. 11 ; iv. IG, 18 ; xi. 11 ; xii. 2; xv. 8, 13; 1 Co. ix. 18; x. 6 ; Gal. iii. 17; Eph. i. 12, 18; 1 Th. ii. 12, 16 : iii. 5; 2Th.i. 5: ii. 2, 10; Jas. i. 18 ; Heb. ii. 1 7 : vii. 25 ; ix. 14, 28 ; xii. 10 ; xiii. 21 ; els to pfj, lest, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; 1 Pet. iii. 7. d. the end by which a thing is completed, i.e. the result or ef- fect : Acts X. 4 ; Ro. vi. 1 9 (els r. dvofilav [but WH br.], so that iniquity was the result); x. 10; xiii. 14; 1 Co. xi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 16; Eph. v. 2, etc.; els to with inf. so that [cf. ^3. above] : Ro. i. 20 ; 2 Co. viii. 6. C. CoxsTRUCTious in some respects peculiar. 1. Various forms of pregnant and brachylogical construction (W. §66, 2; [less fully, B. 327 (282)]; Bnhdv. p. 348 sq.) : ai>^eiv Tiva els etc. to save by trans- lating into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 [see o-mfw, b. sub-fin.] ; 8ta- aa>(eiv. 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Sept. Gen. xix. 19, and often in Grk. writ.) ; purOovirSai epyaras els r. dpireXSiva, to go eh 186 eh into etc. Mt. xx. 1 ; eXevBepovv tir etc. Ro. viii. 21 ; dno- SiBuvai Ttva (It AiyvTTTOv, Acts \u. 9 ; (vo\os els yefvvav, to cloj)art iiitu etc. [cf. B. 1 70 (148) note], Mt. v. 22 ; (tXai- (tsTivas, to break .iiid distribute among etc. JMk. viii. 1!) ; atT(f}aXL^eo'dai €is to ^vXov, Acts xvi. 24 ; KTiiaOai ^(pvaov fts T. ^(^vas, Mt. X. 9; IvrfrvKiyixiVov els eva tottov. rolK'il uj) and laid away in etc. .In. x\. 7. 2. Akin to this is tlie very conimon use of ds after verbs signify ini^ rest or continuance in a place, because the idea of a pre- vious motion into the place spoken of is involved (cf. W. § 50, 4 b.; B. 332 (286) sq. ; Kiihner ii. p. 317; [Jelf § 646, 1] ; Bnhdy. p. 215 ; [yet cf. also exx. in Soph. Lex. s. V. fij, 1]) : fvpfdi] eWA(a>Tov, sc. transferred or carried off to, Acts viii. 40, cf. 39 TTUfv/jia kvjjIov ijpjracre tov ^IXm- TTOv, (Esth. i. 5 Tolf e^ceci rotj (vp^ddaiv ei? t. noXiv ', so (jiavfladai is foil, by ds in 2 Jlacc. i. 33 ; vii. 22). 8ft jif Tijv fup7i)v Tioirja-ai fls 'Upocr. sc. by going, Acts xviii. 21 Kcc. ; likewise iroipas (x aTToBave'iv els 'Upoar. Acts xxi. 13 ('H<^at(rTi(oi' els 'EK^drava dnedave, Ael. v. h. 7,8); avveiBaKei/ r^plv els "Ko-trovy Acts XX. 14 ; t^ peWovaa So^a els fjpds dnoKa\vm (Ijecause it is nearly equiv. to to have placed one's self) els n, Lk. vi. 8; Jn. xx. 19, 26 ; 1 Pet. v. 12; KaBija-dm, to have gone unto a place and to be sitting there, Mk. xiii. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 4, (on this use of these two verbs in Grk. auth. cf. Mattliiae ii. p. 1344 sq. ; [cf. W. and B. u. s.]). f'rat els with ace. of place see elpl, V. 2 a. ; Oi els T. oiKoi/ pov sc. 6Vrf9, Lk. ix. 61 ; tois els paKpdv sc. oiJo-i (Germ, ins Feme hin hefindlich). Acts ii. 39. 6rfpa ev, Eph. ii. 14 ; with the article, d els, povelv, Phil, ii. 2 [WH mrg. avTo'] ; ev elvai are one, i. e. are of the eU 187 eiaep'x^ofiat same importance and esteem, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; fir to ev eivat (see e'lfii, V. 2 d.), 1 Jn. v. 8 ; more fully to ev Koi to airo, 1 Co. xii. 11 ; Ix Koi TO avTo Tivi, 1 Co. xi. 5. 3. the numerical force of eh is often so weakened that it hardly differs from the indef. pron. tis, or from our indef. artiilc (W. 117 (111), [cf. 29 note 2; B. 85 (74)]) : Mt.viii.Ul (fis ypafi^arevs) ; xix. 10 ; xxvi. G9 ; Jn. vi. 9 {irai^dpiov eir, where T Tr WII om. and L br. ev) ; Rev. vUi. 13 ; ix. 13, (Arstph. av. 1292; Xen. mem. 3, 3, 12 ; Plat, de rep. /i. Lex. s. v. leaflets]), is Kaff els, and in combination KaSels, (so that cither xard is used adverbially, or els as indeclinable) : 6 Kad' els, i. q. fls eKaaros, Ro. xii. 5 (where L T Tr WII to koS' els, as respects each one, severally ; cf. what is said against this reading by Fritzsche, Com. iii. p. 44 sq., and in its favor by Meyer) ; with a partit. gen. 3 Mace. v. 34 ; els Kaff [T AVII Tr nu'g. Kara^ eis, everyone, one hij one, Mk. xiv. 19 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; Ka6' era, Kaff ev, (as in Grk. writ.), of a series, one by one, successively : Kaff ev, all in succession, Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.] ; Kad' eva ndvres, 1 Co. xiv. 31 (Xen. vcnat. 6, 14) ; Kaff ev cKacrTov, Acts xxi. 19 (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 22 (27) ; Ages. 7, 1) ; iiieisoi Kaff eva eKaa-ros, ye severally, every one, Eph. v. 33. 5. like the Ilclir. nnS, els is put for the ordinal npoiTos, first [W. § 37, 1 ; B. 29 (20)] : p.la aa^^dTwv the first day of the week, Bit. xxviii. 1 ; Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xx. 1, 19 ; Acts XX. 7 ; 1 Co. xvi. 2 [L T Tr WIT pia o-a^^dTov'] ; (in Grk. writ, so used only when joined witli other ordinal num- bers, as eis Ka\ TpirjKoaros, Hdt. 5, 89 ; Diod. 16, 71. Cic. de senect. 5 uno et octoyesimo anno. [Cf. Soph. Lex. el8e, Lk. xiv. 21 ; the place into which not being expressly noted ; .In. xviii. 10 (sc. eir TfjvavXrjv) ; Heb. i. 6 Sran . . . ei(7aydyrj, Xt'-yei, God, having in view the time when he shall have again brought in the first-bom into the tcorld (i. e. at the time of the irapovaia) says etc. 2. to bring in, the place into wliich not being expressly stated: Acts vii. 45 (sc. et'r ttju y^v) ; Lk. ii. 27 (sc. els TO lepov). [CoMP. : TTop-eiO'd-yco.] * €to--aKo{r(i) ; fat. elaaKovfTopai', Pass., 1 aor. elaj^KovcrSTjvj 1 fut. ela-aKova6>)(jopai. ; St-pt. very often for ^"p'd,hi\l also for njj' to answer ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. II. 8, 97 down ; to hearken unto, to give ear to ; i. e. 1. to give heed to, comply with, admonition ; to obey (Lat. obedio i. e. ob-audio) : tcvos, 1 Co. xiv. 21, (Deut. i. 43 ; ix. 23 ; Sir. iii. 6, etc.). 2. to listen to, assent to, a request; pass, to be heard, to have one's request granted ; a. of per.sons offering up prayers to God : Heb. v. 7 (on which see uTTo, I. 3 d. fin.) ; Mt. vi. 7. b. of the prayers offered up: Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 31, (Ps. iv. 2; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 29 (20), etc.).* !]p. Acts i. 21, (Eur. Phocn. ."):!(i h oUovs eicrfiXOe K. i^9,\ff [W. 624 sq. (580) ; but cf. B. 390 (334)]) ; lig- ui-ativcly, of moral pursuits unimpeded by difficulties, Jn. X. 9. b. «Vepx- fir is joined with nouns designat- ing not a place, but what occurs in a place : «s touj yapovs, ilt. XXV. 10; fi's ttjv xapavToxi Kvpiov, 21, 23. c. eiatKBeXv cif nva is used of demons or of Satan taking possession of the body of a person : 5Ik. ix. 25 ; Lk. viii. 30 ; xxii. 3 ; Jn. xiii. 27. d. of things : — as of food, that enters into the eater's mouth, Mt. xv. 11 ; Acts xi. 8 ; figuratively, hope is called uyKvpa elcrtpxoptvTi els to cVm- repov ToC KaTaTT(Taa-paTos, i. e. we tirml}- rely on the hope that we shall be received into heaven, Heb. vi. 19 ; cries of complaint are said daipx- c's to. ?yra tivos, i. e. to be heard, Jas. v. 4 ; of forces and inlluences : nvevpa fu^r elarjXOdf iv avTolv (Tr om. \\ H br. €v ; Rec. err avrovs [U. 338 (2!ll)]), a pregnant construction, t/ie breath of life entered into and remained in them, Rev. xi. 11 [W. § 50, 4; B. 329 (283)]. 2. ]\Ietaph. used, a. of entrance into any condition, state of things, society, employment : eh T. fuiji', Mt. .xviii. 8 sq. ; xix. 1 7 ; BIk. i.x. 43, 45 ; els T- paai\. tHu ovpavav or rov 6eov (see ^aaiKfla, 3 p. O?*) : Tovs elaepxopivovi, that are trying to enter, or rather, that have taken the road to enter, are (engaged in) en- tering, Mx. xxiii. 13 (14); Lk. xi. 52; used absol. of those who come into (i. e. become members of) the Christian church, Ro. xi. 25, (hence in 1 Co. v. 12 sq. oi ccro) and oi flu are distinguished) ; ti's t. KaTanavaiv, Heb. iii. 11,18; iv. 1, 3, 5 sq. 10 sq. ; els ttjv So^ai/, Lk. xxiv. 26; eif nf ipacrpov, to come (i. e. fall) into temptation, Mt.xxvi. 41 ; ilk. xiv. 38 [T WH ?X5,Te] ; Lk. xxii. 40, 46 ; elt Tov KQfiTov TWOS (sec flS, B. I. 3), Ju. Iv. 38. el(r€pX€0^d. els T. Koirpov, to enter the world [cf. W. 18], is a. i. cp to arise, come into existence, her/in to he [i. e. among men] : used thus of sin and death, Ro. v. 12; of death. Sap. ii. 24 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4 ; of idols, Sap. xiv. 14. p. of men, to come into life : whether by birth, Antonin. G, 56 ; or by divine creation, Philo, opif. mund. § 25. 7. to come before the public : 2 Jn. 7 [Rec] ; to come to men, of Christ, Jn. xviii. 37 ; ela-epxop.. els t. Koa-pov, when he Cometh into the world, i. e. when he was on the point of entering it, viz. at his incarnation, Heb. x. 5. b. of thoughts coming into the mind: elu^os, pevos, Tvudot, etc. [cf. W. 427 (3;iM). Co.MI'. fTT-, Trap-, (rvv~ eiaepxopai.^ cUr-Ka\eo)iai, -oiipai, (mid. of eiaKoKew) : 1 aor. J>tcp. eliTKaXetTapevos', to call in unto one's self, to invite in to one's house : nva. Acts x. 23. [Polyb., al.] ' ctir-oSos, -ov, 17, (dSdr), [fr. Horn, on], an entrance, i. e. both the place or wag leading into a place (as. a gate), and the act of entering ; only in the latter sense in the N. T. With gen. of place, tS>v Aylav, entrance into the holy ])lace, i. e. reception into heaven, Helj. x. 19 [but in 20 apjiar- ently called oSo'f] ; els t. ^aaiXeiav tov Kvplov, 2 Pet. i. 11 ; of the act of coming forwartl to administer an ofHce, Acts xiii. 24 ; with -rrpos Tiva added, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1.* (l(r-Tn\haM, -u : 1 aor. «Vejrij8i)J ; of affections entering the soul, Mk. iv. 19 ; see ela-epxopai, 2 b. (Of the earlier Grk. writ. Xen. alone uses this verb, Cyr. 2, 3, 21 ; Sept. often for X13.) * tlo-^pe'xu: 2 aor. elaebpapov \ to run in: Acts xii. 14. [Thuc, Xcn., al.] • iiir-^ifm ; 1 aor. elcrtjveyKa ; 2 aor. elarjveyKov ; [pres. pass. ela(j>epopat ; fr. Horn, down] ; to bring into, in or to ; a. n, foil, by els with ace. of place, 1 Tim. vi. 7 ; pass. Heb. xiii. 11 ; nva sc. els t. oUiav, Lk. v. 18 sq. ; [tivU en\ T. (Tvvayayiis etc. Lk. xii. 11 T Tr txt. WH] ; ti els Tas oKoas Tivos. i. e. to tell one a thing. Acts xvii. 20 ((pe'peiv n els to Sra tivos, Soph. Aj. 149). b. to lead inlii : Twa els neipaa-pov, Mt. vi. 13 ; Lk. xi. 4. [CoMP. : ?rap-6ia>s «| oipavov. Jn. vi. 31 sq. ; Acts Lx. 3 [here RG an-d] ; Gal. i. 8 ; dvaroXfi, 8ivap.is f'l v\j/ovs, Lk. i. 78 ; xxiv. 49 ; esp. after verbs of goins, 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; fK/3aX- Xfiu TO Kdp) : t\ €k tov Orjo-avpov. Mt. xii. 35 [but see under II. 9 below] ; xiii. 52 ; to Satfioviov cK Ttvos, out of the body of one, ]Mk. vii. 26 ; dwoKvXieiv TOV \l6ov €K [L Tr txt. dno ; cf. W. 364 (342) note] rfji Ovpas, Mk. xvi. 3 ; a'ipetv, Jn. xx. 1 sq. ; Ktvea, Rev. vi. 14 ; {^fiv Ik -y^s AiyuTrrou, Jude 5 ; hiauin^eiv €k tt)s Ba.\daa7)s, Acts xxviii. 4. Metaph., ex r^r x^^P°^ nvoi, out of the power of one [cf. B. 182 (158)] : after e^epx^eadai, Jn. x. 39 ; after dwdyetv, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; after apwa(eiv, Jn. X. 28 sq. ; after l^aipeicrdai. Acts xii. 1 1 ; after pveo-Qai, Lk. i. 74; after ex nw Xaoij, Acts iii. 23 ; itpo^t^d^ui or av/i^i^d^ui ex tov o;(Xoii, Acts xix. 33 ; e'xXeyeiv ex tov xoajiov, Jn. .xv. 1 9. ex pecrov Tivtiv a(j)opl(etv, Mt. xiii. 49 ; e^epxeudai, Acts x\ ii. 33; dpndCeiv, Acts xxiii. 10; e^aipeiv, 1 Co. v. 13; ex TraoTjf . 27«) fin. ; ek TrXovfTtov irevrjTa yevea-dai kol eV [SaaiXews idLoiTrjv (pav^vai, Xen. an. 7, 7, '2S ; ylyvofiai Tv(p\6s efc Se6o/>KoTOff, Soph. O. T. 4j1 ; eXacjioi/ e^ av&pus yeveaBm, Palaejih. 3, 2 ; add, Lys. adv. Ergocl. init. ; Tac. aun. 1, 74 e.K pauperi- bus divites, ex contemtis metucndi). Also of the state out of the midst of which one does .something : ex jroXX^r ffKi\(f(af ypacjyeiv, 2 Co. ii. 4. 6. of any kind of s e p- aration or dissolution of connection with a thing or person [of. B. 157 (138)]: dvajTavecrdai ex (released from) T<5v kottodv, Kev. xiv. 13; ampi](j>{iv fV (set free from) T^f Tov dtajSoXou nayldosy 2 Tim. ii. 2(i ; peravoatv ck etc. Rev. ii. 21 sc[.; ix. 20 sc].; xvi. 11 ; imaTpe(petv [L T TrWH iiTToa-Tp-l (K ([L QTrd], by severing their connec- tion with) TTJs ivrnXrjs, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; rrfpflv rtva ck etc. to keep one at a distance from etc. [cf. B. 327 (281)], Jn. xvii. 15 ; Rev. iii. 10 ; also hiarripelv, Acts xv. 29 ; viKav eic TiKof, by conquest to free one's self from the power of one [cf. B. 147 (128) ; W. 3G7 (344)], Rev. xv. 2: l^^oiadmU Trjs yfis, to be so lifted up as to dissolve present relations to the earth ['taken out of the s])here of earthly action' Westcott], .In. xii. 32; i\ev6cpos ck Tramav (elsewhere always dno rivos), 1 Co. ix. 10. 7. Hebraistically : CKSlKflv TU alpd TIVOS (K x^tpos Tivos (l^p DT Dp3, 2 K. ix. 7), to avenge the blood (murder) of one at the hand of (on) the slayer. Rev. xix. 2 [B. 182 (158)] ; xpivetv to Kpifui Tirar cK TLvos, to judge one's judgment on one, vindicate by vengeance on [cf. B. u. s.], Rev. xviii. 20 (cf. Sept. Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 84). II. of the OuiGix, SouncE, C.\use; 1. of gen- eration, birth, race, lineage, n ativity; a. after verbs of begetting, being born, etc. : iv yaa-rpl ex^'" ?K Ttvos, Mt. i. 18 cf. 20 ; koIttju txeiv ex t. Ro. i.\. 10 ; yti^ vdv T^va (K with gen. of the woman, Mt. i. 3, 5 sq. 16 ; ylveiis dxpoliva-Tia, Ro. ii. 27. In a supernatural sense : to nvfvpa to ck 6eov sc. ov, from the divine nature [cf. W. 193 (182)], 1 Co. ii. 12 cf. Rev. ii. 11 ; men are said yevvdtrOat €k Trvevparos, Jn. iii. 5 sq. 8 ; yfyevvrjpevot civai. (K 5fo£i (sec yevvda, 2 d.), and to the same purjjort flvai fK deoi. 1 Jn. iv. 4, G ; v. 19, (seetlpl, V. 3 d. [and cf. 7 below]). b. flvat, ytvitrOai, cpxea^dm, etc., ix with the name of the city, race, people, tribe, family, etc.. lo spring or oriijinate from, come from : ex Na(ap(T f'rat. Jn. i. 46 (47) ; ex iroXfr^vapiov (be- cause the agreement comes from the promised denary [cf. AV. 368 (345) ; B. u. s.]), Mt. xx. 2. Cognate to this is the phrase iroieiv iavToi (plXovs ix toO papavd, Lk. ,xvi. 9. 5. esp. after neut. and pass, verbs, ix is used of the cause (whether thing or person) by which the act expressed by the accompanying verb is aided, sustained, ef- fected: aXpeXdadai ex TiTOf. IMt. xv. 5; ]Mk. vii. 11; ^r}piov(T6ai., 2 Co. vii. 9 ; XvTTelaSai, 2 Co. ii. 2 ; esp. in the Apocalypse: dSixeirrdai, Rev. ii. 11; dnoBavelv, viii. H; \_d7r0xTf iveadai], ix. 18; (payTi^errBm, xviii. 1 ; axoTi^fo-Bai [LTAA^ri trKoTov(rdm~\,ix. 2: Trvpova-dm, iii. IS: yepi^eaBai, XV. 8 (cf. Is. vi. 4); Jn. vi. 13; yipeiv, Mt. xxiii. 2.5 (where L om. Tr br. e^) : nXrjpova-Bat, Jn. xii. 3 [Treg. marg. fTrXijo-flrj] : x"P™i^'^^'"-' ^''^^'- ^'^* -' ' "'^o'"'*'"'» xviii. 3, 19; pedva-xeadat, peBveiv, xvii. 2, 6 [not Treg. ni!""?-]' ^" "' ^°- '• 1'' ^ *-""■ '•''■ ^^ ' ^'^'' "'■ "' av^t]a-iv TTouiadai, Epli. iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; reXeiovaBaiy Jas. ii. 22 ; xexomaxais. Jn. iv. 6, (Ael. v. h. 3, 23 fit toO 191 iroTou iKodfvSev) . Also after active verbs : yefxl^eiv, Jn. vi. 13; Rev. viii. 5; jrorif""'. Rev. xiv. 8 ; [on « with the gen. after verbs of fulness, cf. B. 163 (142 sq.) ; W. 201 (1S9)]. 6. of that on which a tiling depends, or from which it results: ovk €tmv tj ^cojj etc tojv virap^ov- Tav, does not depend upon possessions, i. e. possessions cannot secure life, Lk, xii. 15; evwopia tjixuv coti ck ttjs ipya(Tias TaurTjr, Acts xix. 25 ; to e^ v/imv, as far as de- pends on you, Ro. .xii. 18 ; in the Pauline phrases BUaws, iiKauMTvvr), SiKmoiiv ck iri(TTca>s, e^ tpyav, see [the several words, esp.] p. 150 : c^ (as the result of, in consequence of) fpyuiv Xa/3eii/ to TTvevfui, Gal. iii. 2, 5 ; c^ dvaardaeajs XajSetv Tovs veKpovs, Heb. xi. 35 ; ea-Tavpoidrj i^ dtjOsvfias^ 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; add, Ro. xi. 6 ; Gal. iii. 18, 21 sq. ; Eph. ii. 8 scp 7. of the power on which any one depends, by which he is prompted and governed, whose character he reflects : « ^eou (equiv. to BeoirveviTTOv) XoXeii/, 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ; in the Johannean expressions, ilvm ix deov. Jn. viii. 47 (in a diiierent sense above, U. 1 a.) ; « toO 8«ij3dXoii, ex Tov Trovrjpov, ix rov Koapov, see dpi, V. 3 d. ; ex t^j oKrjdfias eiiim, to be led by a desire to know the truth, be a lover of the truth, Jn. .xviii. 37; iJn. iii. 19; oi ix vopov, the subjects of the law, Ro. iv. 14 ; oi e^ ipiBciai cquiv. to ol epiOevopcvoL [cf. ipi6€ia\ Ro. ii. 8 ; 6 etc TTifTTfiii^ equiv. to 6 7n(rr€vu>u, Ro. iii. 26 ; iv. 1(J. cti/at ex tivos also means to be bound to one, connected with him; to have relations mitk him ; see elpi, V. 3 d. ; hence the periphrasis ol ix ■n-fpiTopjjs, the circumcised : Acts xi. 2 ; Ro. iv. 12; Gal. ii. 12; 01 ovTfs ix nfpiToprjs, Col. iv. 11; ot €x TTfpiToprjs TTUTToi, Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. 8. of the cause for which: fK toC ttovov, for pain, Rev. xvi. 1 ; of the reason for (because of) which : Rev. viii. 13 ; .xvi. 11; €K TouTou, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; cf. Meyer on these pass, [who urges that ix tovtov used of time denotes "the point of departure of a temporal series" (W. 367 (344)) : from this time on, thenceforth. This argument seems not to be decisive in the second example (Jn. xix. 12), for there the verb is in the imperfect. On the use of the phrase in classic Grk. see L. and S. s. v. ex, II. 1 ; Kriiger § 68, 1 7, 7. Cf. our Eng. upon this, hereupon, in which the temporal sense and the causal ofteii seem to blend. See below, IT. 1 fin.]. 9. of the supply out of (from) which a thing is taken, given, received, eaten, drunk, etc. [cf. W. § 30, 7 and 8 ; B. 159 (139) sqq.] : \apfidvetv ix, Jn. i. 16 ; xvi. 14 sq. ; 8i86vai, 8ia8i- 86vat, Mt. XXV. 8 ; Jn. vi. 11 ; 1 Jn. iv. 13 ; itrBUiv, 1 Co. ix. 7 ; xi. 28 ; (fiayfiv, Jn. \i. 26, 50 sc]. ; Rev. ii. 7 ; peri- ^ftv, 1 Co. -x. 1 7 (but see jtrre'x, to declare, prove to be, Ro. i. 4 [cf. s. v. opl^u), 2 and Mey. ad loc.]. 13. of that from which a rule of j udging or acting is derived; after, accord- ing to, [cf. W. 368 (345)] : xpli>eiv ix, Lk. xix. 22 [A. V. out o/ thine own mouth, etc.]; Rev. xx. 12 (Xen. Cvr. 2, 2, 21 ix Tuiv epyuiv xplveaBai) ; Sixaiovv, KaTa&txd^av, Mt. xii. 37 ; ivopd^eiv ix, Eph. iii. 15 (Horn. II. 10, 68 ; Soph. O. T. 1036, etc.) ; ix toii e)^etv, according to your ability, 2 Co. viii. 11. m. B}- Attractiox, common in classic Grk. (cf. W. § 66, 6; [B. 377 sq. (323)]), two prepositions coalesce as it were into one, so that ix seems to be used for iv, thus apai ra ix Trjs oixlas aiiTov concisely for to iv rfj olxlq avTOv i^ avTTJs, ^It. xxiv. 1 7 ; 6 irarrip 6 i^ ovpavov 5a)0"ft for 6 nartjp 6 iv oupava 6wo"ft ix Toij ovpavov, Lk. xi. 13 ; TTjV €x AaoStKetaf iiTKTToXrjv for ti^v ct? AaoSiK. yeypap- pimjv xal ix Aaodixeias xoptariav, Col. iv. 16, (2 ^lacc. iii. 18). [To this constr. some would refer intyvovs iv iavra Ti]v i^ avrov hvvapiv i^iKOovaav, ^Ik. v. 30, resoh- ing TTjv iv avria bvvaptv i^eXSovcrav i^ avrov ; cf. Field f Otium Xorvicense, pars iii. ad loc.] IV. of Time [W. 367 (344)] ; 1. of the (temporal) point from which; hat. ex, inde a; from, from ... on, since: ix xP"'''^" ixavav, Lk. viii. 27 [RGTrmrg.]; ix yewT^f, Jn. ix. 1 (Horn. II. 24, 535 ; Od. 18, 6) ; ix Kot- Xi'as prjTpos (see xoiXla, 4) ; ix VforjjTos. Mt. .xix. 20 [R G] ; Mk. X. 20 ; Lk. xviii. 21 ; Acts xxvi. 4 (Ilom. II. 14, 86); ix TOV aidvot (see aioiv, 1 b.), Jn. ix. 32 (Ael. v. h. 6, 13 ; 12, 64 f'l alavos) ; i^ apx^f- Jn- vi. 64 ; xvi. 4 ; ix yevtav dpxolayv. Acts xv. 21 ; i^ iraju oxtu). Acts ix. 33 ; ix ttoX- Xv, Lk. xiii. 15 ; 1 Co. i. 12 ; Ileb. vi. 11 ; avrav, Jn. vi. 7 [R G] ; rav trneppaToiv, 1 Co. xv. 38. cIs fKaaros, every one (see els, 4 b.) : without a partit. gen.. Acts xx. 31 ; Col. iv. 6 ; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40 ; Acts ii. 3 ; xvii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, etc. cKao-roj, when it denotes ' individually, every one of many, is often added apposi- tively to nouns and pronouns and verbs in the plural number, (Matthiae ii. p. 704 sq. ; [AV. 516 (481) ; B. 131 (114)]): r]pels aKo{iop.ei> fKacrros, Acts ii. 8; crKop- •nidOriTf CKaaros, Jn. xvi. 32 ; inopevovTO iravTfS • . . , fKaaros ■ ■ ■ , Lk. ii. 3 ; add, Acts iii. 26 ; 1 I'et. iv. 10 ; Rev. V. 8 ; xx. 13 ; likewise ds eKaa-ros, Acts ii. 6 ; xxi. 26 ; vfjieis ol Kaff eva iKaaros ttjv tavTov yvvaiKa dyandra, you one by one, each one of you severally, Eph. v. 33. In imitation of the Hebr., «aoror ra d8f\(j)w airov (ITIkS D'N, Gen. xxvi. 31), Mt. xviii. 35 ; pera tov irKrj- alov avToii (^^^),'^^-bH V'H, Judg. vi. 20, etc.), Eph. iv. 25, cf . Ileb. viii. 1 1 Rec. tKooTOTt, adv., at every time, cdways : 2 Pet. i. 1 5. (Ildt., Tbuc, Xen., Plat.^ al.) * cKardv, oi, a'l, ra, [fr. Horn, down], a hundred : l\It. xiii. 8 (sc. Kapnovs) ; .xviii. 12; Jn. xix. 39, etc. t KaTovTocTns [R (i T], -ts, and eKaTovrafTrjs [L Tr WII], -e't, (fr. «oTovand «rot; on the want of uniformity in ac- centuation among authors, copyists, and grammarians see Lob. ad I'hryn. p. 406 sq. ; W. § 6, 1 b. ; B. 29 (20) ; [ Td/. Proleg. p. J 02 ; Ellendl, Lex. Soph. s. v. SfKtrrjs ; esj). Chandler §§ 703, 709; Gottling p. 323 sq.]), centenarian, II liiindnd yiiira old: Ro. iv. 19. (Pind. I'yth. 4, 502.) * ; cKaTovTairXao-iuv, -ov, a liundredfiild, a hundred titnesi as tnuch : Mt. xix. 29 [R G] ; Mk. x. 30 ; Lk. viii. 8. (2 S. xxiv. 3 ; Xen. oec. 2, 3.) * «KOTovrApxus, -ov, 6, {eKOTov and ap)^tD ; on the termi- nations dpxris and ap)(os sec the full exposition in W. 61 (60) ; cf. B. 73 (64) ; Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc. p. 151 sq.; ITilf. Proleg. p. 117; WII. App. p. 156 S(|.]), a centurion : Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.], 13 G L T Tr WII ; [xxvii. .54 T]; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 TAVIl; [xxiii. 47 T Tr AVII] ; Acts x. 1, 22 ; x.xi. 32 L T Tr WII : [xxii. 26 L T WII] ; x.xiv. 23 ; xxvii. 1, L T Tr ^\U. 11 G L T Tr AATI, 31, 43 L T Tr AVII ; gen. plur. T WII in Acts xxiii. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. 11 d. ; I Ml. 7, 81 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.). See the foil, word.' «KOTdvTapxos, -on, 6, i. q. eKaTovrdpxis, q. v. : Mt. viii. 5, 8 [in 5, 8, Tdf. -apxTjil- 13 Rec; xxvii. 54 [Tdf. -ipxisl ; Lk. vii. 2, 6 [TWII -dpxt]s-~\; xxiii. 47 [TTrAVII -dp- Xrjs'] ; Acts xxi. 32 R G ; xxii. 25, 26 [L T WII -dpxn^l ! xxvii. 6 [RG, 11 Rec., 43 R G], also xxviii. 16 Rec; gen. pluc. Acts xxiii. 17 and 23 RGLTr. (Xen. Cyr. 5, .3, 41; Pint., al.)* €K-PaCv(i) : 2 aor. e^i^rjV, [fr. Horn, down]; to ijo out: Ileb. xi. 15 LTTrWII.* cK-pdXXci>; impf. 3 pers. plur. f^fQaWov (Mk. vi. 13 [Tr mrg. aor.]) ; f ut. eic^aXo) ; plpf. (K^efiXijKeiv (without aiigm., Mk. xvi. 9 ; cf. W. § 12, 9 ; B. 33 (29)) ; 2 aor. clf/SaXoK; [Pass, and Mid. pres. c/c/3uXXo/iai] ; 1 aor. pass. (^(I3\r)6r]v\ fut. pass. eK^Xrjdi'jiropaL; [fr. Ilom. down] ; Sept. generally for U'^i, occasionally for N'i'in, ly'lin T^tyn ; to cast out; to drive out; to send out; 1. with the included notion of more or less vio- lence; a. to drive out, (cast out') : a person, Jit. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15 (fV) ; Lk. xx. 12, etc.; pass. Mt. viii. 12 [T AVH (rejected) mrg. i^eKfvaovrai] ; 8aip6- wa, Mt. vii. 22 ; viii. 16, 31; ix. 33 ; Mk. i. .34, 39 ; Lk. xi. 20 ; xiii. 32, etc. ; tx rivoi, Mk. vii. 20 ; dno, Mk. xvi. 9 [LAVHTrtxt. irapa] ; i'v rin, hy, tlirouyh [W. 389 (304)], IMt. ix. 34 ; xii. 24, 27 scp ; Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. xi. 15, 19 sq. ; TM imparl nvos, Mt. vii. 22 ; [Mk. ix. 38 R« G] ; eVi ra ov. Tivof, Lk. ix. 49 [AA'II Tr mrg. cV; «Vtm ov. ^Ik. ix. 38 R"^'^ L T Tr AVII] ; Xoyw, Mt. viii. 16 ; nva e^o, T^STToXfMs, Lk. iv. 29; Acts-vii. 58. b. to ca.it out: nvd foil, by e^a, Jn. vi. 37 ; ix. 34 sq. ; xii. 31 (sc. out of the world, i. e. be deprived of the power and influ- ence he exercises in the world) ; Lk. xiii. 28 ; f| Jn. 10. d. to compel one to depart : diro ran opiwv, Acts xiii. 50 ; to hid one depart, in stern though not violent language, Jit. ix. 25 ; Mk. v. 40 ; Acts ix. 40 ; xvi. 37 (where distinguished fr. i^dyeiv) ; to bid one go forth to do some business, Mt. i.x. 38 ; Lk. x. 2. e. so em- ployed that the rapid motion of the one going is trans- ferred to the one sending forth ; to command or cau.se one to depart in haste : Mk. i. 43 ; Jas. ii. 25 ; to nduTa (se. Trpo^ara), to let them out of the fold so that they rush forth, [al. to thrust them forth by laying hold of them], Jn. x. 4. f. to draw out ivith force, tear out : Ti, Mk. ix. 47. g. -with the impUcation of force over- coming opposing force ; to cause a thing to more straight on to its intended goal : Tr)V npicFiv els vtK09, Mt. xii. 20. h. to reject with contempt; to cast off or away; to ovofui ■TIV09 as irovrjpov, Lk. vi. 22, (Plat. Crito p. 46 b. ; de rep. 2 p. 377 c. ; Soph. O. C. 636, 646 ; of actors driven from the stage, hissed and hooted off, Dem. p. 449, 19). 2. without the notion of violence; a. to draw out, extract, one thing inserted in another : to xapcpos to eV TM uipdaXfia. Lk. vi. 42 ; « roi o(j>da\ijiov, ibid, and Mt. vii. 5; dno tov 6(f>d. 4 (where LTTrWII «). b. to ■bring out of, to draw or bring fortli : t\ c'k tov drjaavpov, Mt. xii. 35 ; xiii. 52 ; money from a purse, Lk. x. 35. c. to except, to leave out, i. e. not receive : ri, foil, by e^oj [or f^aiBfv], Rev. xi. 2 (leave out from the things to be measured, equiv. to ^7) avTrju fifTpfj, i. q. cKyapt^ai, q. v. : Pass. [pres. (Kya- lj.icTKop.ai.] : Lk. XX. 34 sq. R G; cf. yapltjKui and Fritzsche on Mk. p. 529 sqq. Not found elsewhere.* 13 €K-Yovos, -ov, (fKyivojuii), sprung from one, born, begotten, (Ilom. and sqq.) ; commonly as a subst. 6, r/ cKyovos, 01 ?icyoi»ot, a son, daughter, offspring, children, descendants; in Sept. com. in neut. plur. txyova and ra exyoua, for ''^^, Dent. vii. 13 [Alex.] ; .xxviii. 4, etc. ; D'Ni'Ni', Is. xlviii. 19 ; Ixi. 9 ; 12, Is. xlix. 15 ; also in Sir. xl. 15 ; xhv. 11, etc. In the N. T. once: 1 Tim. v. 4 tcki/o § (Kyova, grandchildren, [(A. V. renders it by the obsol. nephevjs ; cf. Eastwood and Wright, Bible Word-Book, or B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Nephew)].* lK-8airavd(i> : [fut. iKSairavrjO-a] ; 1 fut. pass. eKdaTrava- Srjo-opm ; to exhaust by expending, to spend wholly, use up : Tas TTpodohovs, Polyb. 25, 8, 4. Pass, reflexively, to spend one's self wholly : foil, by vwep twos, of one who con- sumes strength and life in laboring for others' salvation, 2 Co. xii. 15 ; cf. Kypke ad loc. ; \_.'3oph. Lex. s. v.].* lK-S£'xo|jiai ; impf. (^fSf )(6pr]v ; (« froJ7i some person or quarter) ; 1. to receive, accept, ([Horn.], Aeschyl., Hdt., sqq.). 2. to look for, expect, wait for, await: tI, Jn. V. 3 RL; Heb. xi. 10; Jas. v. 7; rivd, Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 11; aXXijXovf cKSextcrde wait for one another, se. until each shall have received liis food, 1 Co. xi. 33, cf. 21 ; foil, by eois etc. Ileb. x. 13 ; [absol. 1 Pet. iii. 20 Rec, but see Tdf.'s note ad loc.]. Rarely with this meaning in prof, auth., as Soph. Phil. 123 ; Apollod. 1, 9, 27 § 3 ; eas av yetnjTat n, Dion. Hal. 6, 67. [CoMP. : d'i!-€K8f)(0pai. Cf. Sej(opai, fin.]* eK-S-nXos, -ov. (SijXof), evident, clear, conspicuous : 2 Tim. iii. 9. (Hom. H. 5, 2 ; Dem. p. 24, 10 : Polyb.) * Ik8i^|ie'ii>, -m ; 1 aor. inf. (KSrjprjaaL ; (cKSripos away from home) ; 1. to go abroad (Hdt., Soph., Plat., Joseph., al.) ; hence univ. to emigrate, depart : ejc tou a-apaTos, from the body as the earthly abode of the spirit, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. to be or live abroad : 2 Co. v. 9 ; «iTro toO Kvplov, abode with whom is promised us, 2 Co. v. 6 ; in these exx. opp. to iv&TjpCo, q. v.* eK-SiS(D|U : Mid., fut. iKddicropai. ; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. f^eSoTo, T WH i^eSfTo (see diroSiSoipi) ; a com. word in (irk. auth. fr. Hom. II. 3, 459 on; to give out of one's house, power, hand, stores ; to give out, give up. give over; hence also to let out for hire, to farm out, Hdt. 1, G8; yfapyiai Se (KdeBoptvai SoiXois, Plat. legg. 7 p. 806 d. ; al. In the N. T., Mid. to let out for one's advantage: Mt. xxi. 33, 41 [Rec. iKBoaerai, cf. Tdf.'s note; B. 47 (41)] ; Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. .xx. 9.* «K-Si-Tj'ytoii.ai, -oC/iai ; dep. mid. ; prop, to narrate in full or wholly; univ. to relate, tell, declare: ti. Acts xiii. 41 (Hab. i. 5) ; xv. 3. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 23 p. 1434", 4] ; Joseph., [Pliilo], Galen, [al.] ; Sept.) * ckSikeu, -tti ; fut. (KSiKfjo'co ; 1 aor. e^eSiKricTa ; ((kSikos, q. V.) ; Sept. for DP:, ^p3, 031? ; a. rivd, to vindicate 07ie's right, do one justice, [A. V. avengel : Lk. xviii. 5 (1 Mace. vi. 22) ; nva dm nvos, to protect, defend, one person from another, Lk. .xviii. 3 ; eavro», to avenge one's self, Ro. xii. 19. b. ti, to avenge a thing (i. e. to pun- ish a person for a thing) : ttjv napoKoriv, 2 Co. x. 6 ; to alpd TLios diTo or fK nvos, to demand in punishment the blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer eKBiKijaK 194 eK€lPO<^ the penalty of his crime, [A. V. avenge one's blood on or (1/ llie hand o/] : Kev. vi. 10; xix. 2; see «, I. 7. (In Grk. auth. fr. [Apollod.], Diod. down.) * iK-8£io| Co. vii. 11; Lk. xxi. 22 ; TToifiw Tfjv fKdiKTjtriv rivoi, to vindicate one from wrongs, accomplish the avenging of, Lk. xviii. 7 sq. ; Tivl, to avenge an injured person. Acts vii. 24 (Judg. xi. 86) ; «'(cSiKi/o-tf Tivos, objec. gen., the punishment of one, 1 Pet. ii. 14 ; StSoVai tK^iKrjaiv nvi, to inflict punishment on, [render vengeance to] one, 2 Th. i. 8 ; cf. [Sir. xii. G] ; Ezek. xxv. 14. (Polyb. 3, 8, 10.) • €k8ikos, -ov, (8i'kij right, justice, penalty); 1. wilh- iiul Itiw and Justice (cf. Lat. exlcx), unjust : Aescliyl., Soph., Eur., Acl. n. an. 16, 5. 2. exacting penalti/frotn (ex) one ; an avenger, punisher : Ro. xiii. 4 ; nepi tivos, 1 Th. iv. 6 ; (Sap. xii. 12 ; Sir. xxx. 6 ; 4 Mace. xv. 26 (29) ; [Plut. de garrul. § 14 p. 509 f.] ; Hdian. 7, 4, 10 [5 ed. Bekk. ; al.]).» {k-Siukcd : f ut. (Khiui^a) ; 1 aor. i^(Sla>^a ; 1. to drive out, lianish : rivd, Lk. xi. 49 [here WII Trmrg. Siai^ova-tv; some refer this to 2]; (Thuc. 1, 24; Lcian. Tim. 10; Sept. 1 Chr. viii. 13; Joel ii. 20, etc.). 2. to jiursue i. q. to persecute, oppress with calamities : riva, 1 Th. ii. 1.5 [some refer this to 1]; (Ps. cxviii. (c.xix.) 157; Sir. XXX. 19; Dem. 883, 27).» 4'k-Sotos, -01», (cxSiScDfit), given over, delivered up, (to enemies, on to the power, the will, of some one) : Xa^/3d- v(iv Tiva (kSotov, Acts ii. 23 (but Xo^oVref is rejected by GLTTrWll); BMvm or iroifiK riva ckS. Ildt. 3, 1; Dem. 648, 25; Joseph, antt. 6, 13, 9; Palac])h. 41, 2; al. ; Bel and the Dragon vs. 22 ; iavrov ikS. SiSdrai ra BavuTa, Ignat. ad Smyrn. 4, 2." «K-8oxif|, -Tji, fj, (cic8e';(0fjai), the act or manner of receiv- ing from ; hence in prof. auth. 1. reception. 2. succession. 3. [a taking in a certain sense, i. e.] interpretation. 4. once in the sacred writings, expec- tation, awaiting, [cf. eK8t';(0fini, 2] : Heb. x. 27.* CK-8vu: 1 aor. e^eSva-a; 1 aor. m\d. (^eSvaaiirjv; (Si'm) ; to take off': rivd, to strip one of his garments, Mt. .xxvii. 28 [L WII mrg. ivSCa:] ; Lk. x. 30; nvd tl (as in Grk. fr. Horn, down), [a thing /com a person] : Mt. xxvii. 31 ; ilk. XV. 20; Mid. to take off from one's self, to put off one's raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3, 4, 19); fig. to put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. he un- clothed'] : 2 Co. v. 4 ; the reading tK&vrrajuvoi, adopted in vs. 3 by certain critics [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al.], is due to a correction by the cop^-ists ; see yvjivos, 1 d. [COMP. : dff-eicS^ojaat.] * €Kei, adv. of ])lace, there; a. properly: j\It. ii. 13, 15 ; v. 24, and freq. In Lk. xiii. 28 fxfl is not used for (V fKeiva Tto Kaipa foil, by orav (ut that time . . . when etc.), but means in that place whither ye have been ban- ished; cf. Meyer ad loc. ol cK(i, sc. ovres, standing there, Mt. xxvi. 71 [Tr mrg. airoX fxct]. It answers to a relative adv. : oS to Trvevpa, eVei iXfvdepla, 2 Co. iii. 1 7 Rec. ; Mt. vi. 21-; xviii. 20; xxiv. 28; Mk. vi. 10; Lk. xii. 34 ; Ilebraistically, where a preceding adv. or rel. pron. has already attracted the verb, iitd is added to this verb ])leonastically : Rev. xii. C (iTTrAVII (oVou eXfi fKfi Tonov), 14 (offou Tp(o8os), quite astonished, atnazed: Acts iii. II. (Polyb. 20, 10, 9. Eccl. and Byzant. writ. ; ttrrifying, dreadful, Dan. vii. 7 Theod.) * lK-9a«[idJa) : [impf. i^fdaiiia^ov] ; to wonder or marvel greatly (see U, \1. 6) : em nvi, at one, Mk. xii. 1 7 T WH. (Sir. xxvii. 23 ; xliii. 18 ; Dion. Hal., Longin., al.) * «K-8eTos, -ov, {(KTidr)iii), cast out, exposed: irutelv fKSera (equiv. to eKTidtvai) ra Ppe(f>r), Acts vii. 19. (Eur. Andr. 70; [Manetho, apotelcs. 6, 52].)* «K-Ka6a£piii : 1 aor. i^eKudapa [on the a cf. B. 41 (35)]; (e/c either i. q. utterly or for ck rii/of) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. II. 2, 153 down; to cleanse out, clean thoroughly: ep-avTov OTTO twos, to avoid defilement from one and so keep one's self pure, 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; with ace. of the thing by the removal of which something is made clean, [A. V. purge out], 1 Co. v. 7. (For '\^yi i. q. to cleanse, Judg. vii. 4 var. ; for ^i?3 i. q. to take away, Deut. xxvi. 13.) * «K-KaCw: 1 aor. pass. e^eKavBrjv; 1. to burn out. 2. to set onfre. pass, to be kindled, to burn, (Ildt. and sqq. ; often in Sept.) : properly, of fire ; metaph. of the fire and glow of the passions (of anger. Job iii. 1 7 ; Sir. xvi. 6, and often in Plut.) ; of lust, Ro. i. 27, (Alciplir. 3, 67 ovToys e^€Kavdrjv els epcoTa}.* (KKaKc'u, -a> ; [1 aor. e^eicd/ojcra] ; {kokos) ; to be utterly spiridess, to be wearied out, exhausted ; see iyxaKia [cf . W. 25]. €K-K€VT€a>, -CO : 1 aor. f^eKevrqaa : 1. to put out, dig out : TO. op.p.aTa, Aristot. h. a. 2, 17 [p. 508'', 6] ; 6, 5. 2. to dig through, transfix, pierce: two. Rev. i. 7; o-^ovrat. fls ov (i. e. (Is tovtov, ov [cf. W. 158 (150)]) f^e- K€VTri, Jn. xLx. 37. (Polyb. 5, 56, 12; Polyaen. 5, 3, 8; for tp'n, Judg. ix. 54; J-in to kill, Num. xxii. 29. 2 Mace. xii. G. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis le.xicc. etc. p. 540 sq.)* ck-kXcui) : 1 aor. pass. e^f/cXau-fli/i' ; to break off; to cut off: Ro. xi. 1 7, 19, 20 R G T WH (on this vs. see (cXdm). (Sept. Lev. i. 17; Plat. rep. 10 p. 611 d.; Plut., Alciiilir., al.)* «k-kXcCu : 1 aor. inf. t icKXeio-at ; 1 aor. pass. i^fxXdaOrjv ; [fr. (Hdt.) Eur. down]; to shut out: Gal. iv. 17 (viz. from intercourse with me and with teachers cooperating with me) ; i. q. to turn out of doors : to prevent the a\y- proach of one, pass, in Ro. iii. 27.* €KKXT)v, Col. iv. 16; with gen. of the possessor, toC 6(ou (equiv. to nin' hr\p^ Xum. xvi. 3; xx. 4), 1 Co. xi. 22; and mention of the place, 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 1. Plur. ai e(CKX?y(riai : Acts xv. 41 ; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 19 ; Rev. i. 4 ; iii. 6, etc. ; vvitli ToC 6eov added, 1 Th. ii. 14 ; 2 Th. i. 4 ; roi Xpto-rov, Eo. .xvi. 1 G ; with mention of the place, as t^s 'Aarias, TaXartas, etc. : 1 Co. xvi. 1,19; 2 Co. viii. 1 ; Gal. i. 2 ; T^f 'louSams Toif evXpiaTw, joined to Christ [secev, I. Cb.], i. e. Christian assend)lies, in contrast with those of the Jews, Gal. i. 22 ; exicXijo-iai tqjv eSviov, gathered from the Gentiles, Ro. xvi. 4 ; twv aylwv, composed of the saints, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 17 fKKKrjala kot oIkov tivos, the church in one's house, i. e. the couqjany of Christians belonging to a person's family ; others less aptly understand the phrase of the Christians accustomed to meet for worship in the house of some one (for as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 23, the whole Corinthian church was accustomed to assemble in one and the same place ; [but see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]) : Ro. xvi. 5 ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 ; Col. iv. 1 5 ; Pbilem. 2. The name i) (KKKrfdia is used even by Christ while on earth of the company of his adherents in any city or village : Mt. xviii. 1 7. bb. the whole body of Christians scattered throughout the earth; collectively, all who worship and honor God and Christ in whatever place they may be : Jit. xvi. 18 (where perhaijsthe Evan- gelist employs tijw (KKKr)aiav although Christ may have said Tiji/ /3a(7iXf t'ai' fiuv): 1 Co. .xii. 28; Eph. i. 22; iii. 10; V. 23 sqq. 27, 21), 32; Phil. iii. G; Col. i. 18, 24; with gen. of the possessor : toC Kvplov, Acts xx. 28 [R Tr mrg. AVII r. deoC] : Toi deoi, Gal. i. 1 3 ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 5. cc. the name is transferred to the assembly of faithful Christians already dead and received into heaven : Heb. xii. 23 (on tliis pass, see in dnnyparf)a, h. and TrpwroroKos, fin.). [Tn general, see Trench § l,and B.D. s.v. Church, esp. Am. ed.; and for patristic usage Soph. Lex. s. v.] tK-KX(vu [Ho. xvi. 17 T TrWII]; 1 aor. i^fKXiva; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down ; Sept. chiefly for "I'D ,and nuj; intrans. to turn aside, deviate (from the right wav and course, Jlal. ii. 8, [cf. Deut. v. 32]) ; metaph. and absol. to turn (one's self) airay [B. 144 (12G)s(i. ; W. 251 (23t))], either from the path of rectitude, Ro. iii. 12 (Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 8) ; or from evil (a malis declinare, Cic. Tusc. 4, 6): aitb KOKoiJ, 1 Pet. iii. 11 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 15; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 27; Prov. iii. 7); ano with gen. of pers. to turn away from, keep aloof from, one's sorieti/ ; to shun one: Ro. xvi. 17, (oCr, Ignat. ad Eph. 7,1).'* cK-KoXv)jLpdu, -S) : 1 aor. ptcp. i KKo'XviJifUjo^as ; to swim ou\ of: Acts xxvii. 42. (Eur. Ilel. 10119; Diod., Dion. Ilal.V CK-KO|j.C^u : impf. pass. e|f KOfiifo/x^i/ ; to carry out ; a dead man for burial (Polyb. 35, 6, 2 ; Plut. Agis 21 ; ITdian. 2, 1, 5 [2 ed. Bekk.], etc. ; in Lat. efferre) : Lk. vii. ] 2.' €K-Koirf|, -fji, tj, [Polyl)., Plut., al.], see iyKOTtr). €K-K6irru : fut. fKK6\j^u> ; 1 aor. imi)V. (KKoi\rov, subjunc. (KKu'^a: [Pas.s., pres. eKKi'mropai]; 2 aor. e^eKuirr^v; 2 fut. iKKonija-o/jiai, ; to cut out, cut off'; a. properly : of a tree, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 19; Lk. iii. 9; xiii. 7, 9, (Ildt. 9, 97, etc.) ; a hand, an eye : Mt. v. 30 ; xviii. 8, (tuv I'lipSuKpLov, Dem. p. 744, (13) 17); pass, ck «rat, a branch from a tree, Ro. xi. 22, 24. b. figuratively : t^k dc^op/xiji', to cut off occasion, 2 Co. xi. 12, (t^i/ iXni&a, Job xix. 10). In 1 Pet. iii. 7 read iyKonTecrBai. ; see tyKOTn-m.* cK-KpcpiapLai. (mid. of iKKptpavvvpi, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 224 s(]. ; [Veitch s. v. Kpep.ap.ai] ; B. 61 (53)) : [impf. e^fKp(papr]v] ; to hang from : f^eKptparo airov aKovav, hung upon his lips (Vcrg. Aen. 4, 79). Lk. xix. 4>i, where T ^^TI (^(upepeTo, after codd. NB. a form which T con- jectures "a vulgari usu baud alienuui fuisse;" [cf. B.u. s.; W/r. App. p. 1G8]. (Plat., Philo, Pint., al.) ' fK-Kpc'(io|J'<>'''> see the preceding word. (K-\aX(a, -a : 1 aor. inf. cK\a\i]tnu ; to speak out, di- vulge : TLvl, foil, by on. Acts xxiii. 22. (Judith xi. 9 ; Demosth., Philo, Dio Cass., al.) * tK-Xo(Mrci> : fut. iK\ap\j/a> ; to .shine forth : Mt. xiii. 43 ; Dan. xii. 3 var. (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * EK-\av9 : to cause to forget ; Mid. to forget ; pf. exXt- ^rjirpat, foil, by gen.: Heb. xii. 5. (Horn, et S(iq.) * cK-Xe'-yw : ])f. |)ass. ptcp. «VXfXey/ieVos, once in Lk. ix. 35 L mrg. T Tr AVH ; Mid., impf. t$e\(y6prjv (Lk. xi v. 7) ; 1 aor. i^(\(^apr)v ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for in3 ; to pick out, choose; in the N. T. (exc. Lk. ix. 3.5, where the reading is doubtful) always mid., «Xe'yo^ai, to jjick or choose out for one's self: ri, Lk. x. 42; xiv. 7 ; Tu/a, one from among many (of Jesus choosing his disci- ples), Jn. vi. 70; xiii. 18 ; .xv. IG ; Acts i. 2; oTrd Tivav, from a number of persons (Sir. xiv. 16), Lk. vi. 13 ; t'/c Tov KOCT/iou, Jn. XV. 19 ; used of. choosing one for an oflice, Acts vi. 5 ; foil, by tK rivav, Acts i. 24 ; to discharge some business, Acts xv. 22, 25 ; iv {jpiv (al. iplv) cftXe- |aTo 6 dcos, foil, by the ace. and inf. denoting the end, eVXetTTo) 197 eK\v(o God made choice among us i. e. in our ranks, Acts xv. 7, where formerly many, misled by the Hebr. 3 in3 (1 S. xvi. 9 ; 1 K. viii. IG, etc., and the Sept. of these pass.), wrongly regarded ev rjfiiv as the object on which the miml of the chooser was as it were fixed ; [W. § 32, 3 a. ; B. 159 (138)]. Especially is God said (KXe^aadat those whom he has judged fit to receive his favors and sepa- rated from the rest of mankind to be pecuharly his own and to be attended continually by his gracious oversight : thus of the Israelites, Acts xiii. 17 (Deut. xiv. 2, [cf. iv. 37] ; 2 Mace. v. 19) ; of Christ ians, as those whom he has set apart from among the irreligious mid- titude as dear unto himself, and whom he has rendered, through faith in Christ, citizens in the ilessianic king- dom : Mk. xiii. 20 ; 1 Co. i. 27 sq.; with two ace. one of the object, the other of the predicate [W. § 32, 4 b.], Jas. ii. 5 ; rtva ev XpiffTW, xo that the ground of the choice lies in Christ and his merits, foil, by ace. with inf. denot- ing the end, Eph. i. 4. In Lk. ix. .35 L mrg. T Tr WH Jesus is called 6 vlos tov Beov 6 eVXeXey/xeVor (II G L txt. dyairr/Tdr), as being dear to God beyouil all others and exalted by him to the preeminent dignity of ilessiah ; but see c/cXfKTor, 1 b.* Ik-XeCitu ; fut. exXcii/'ia ; 2 aor. i^eXmov ; 1. trans. a. to leace out, omit, pass hg. b. to leave, quit, (a,-p[a.c&) : TO ^v, TOV ^lov, to die, 2 Mace. x. 13 ; 3 Mace. ii. 23 ; Soph. Eloctr. 1131; Polyb. 2, 41, 2, al. ; Dion. Hal. 1, 24 ; Luc. Macrob. 12; Alciphr. 3, 28. 2. intrans. to fail; I. e. to leave off', cease, slop : to. err), Ileb. i. 12 fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 28 (where for Dori) ; ij Trlcrris, Lk. xxii. 32 ; riches, ace. to the reading eKXirrg (L txt. T TrWII), Lk. xvi. 9 (often so in Grk. writ., and the Sept. as Jer. vii. 28 ; xxviii. (Ii.) 30). as often in classic Grk. fr. Thuc. down, it is used of the failing or eclipse of the light of the sun and the moon : toO ^Xt'ou iKKnroin-os [WH cxXei- jroiTOf], the suji haring failed \ot faiHng~\, Lk. xxiii. 45 Tdf. ; on this (without doubt the true) reading [see esp. WH. App. ad loc, and] cf., besides Tdf.'s note, Keim iii. 440 [Eng. trans, vi. 173] (Sir. xvii. 31 (2G)). to expire, die ; so ace. to R G L mrg. iKKl-mjTe in Lk. xvi. 9, (Tob. xiv. 11; Sap. v. 13; Sept. for ^'U, Gen. xxv. 8, etc.; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 29; Lam. i. 19; for ni3, Jer. xlix. (xiii.) 1 7, 22. Plat. legg. 6, 759 e. ; 9, 85G e. ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 26).* «K-XcKTOs, -rj, -ov, {i), picked out, chosen; rare in Grk. writ., as Thuc. G, 100; Plat. legg. 11 p. 938 b.; 12, 948 a., etc. ; Sept. for -iin3 and Tn3 ; in the N. T. 1. chosen hg God, and a. to obtain salvation through Christ (see eVXe-yeu) ; hence Christians are called oi ckXcktoi toC Oeoii, the chosen or elect of God, [cf. W. 35 (34) ; 234 (219)], (nin; n"n3, said of pious Israelites, Is. Ixv. 9, 15, 23 ; Ps' civ. (cv.) 43, cf. Sap. iv. 15) : Lk. xviii. 7; Ro. viii. 33 ; Col. iii. 12; Tit. i. 1 ; without the gen. deoC, Mt. xxiv. 22, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 20, 22 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 ; with the addition of toO Xpiarov, as gen. of possessor, Mt. xxiv. 31 ; Jlk. xiii. 27 [T Tr om. gen.] ; kXi/toi koi cicXeKTot K. iTKTToi, Rcv. xvii. 14 ; yevos €K\fKT6v, 1 Pet. ii. 9 (fr. Is. xUii. 20, cf. Add. to Esth. viii. 40 [vi. 17, p. G4 ed. Fritz.]) ; f/cXeKToi, those who have become true par- takers of the Christian salvation are contrasted with /cXijToi, those who have been invited but who have not shown themselves fitted to obtain it, [al. regard the ' called ' and the ' chosen ' here as alilce partakers of salvation, but th» latter as the ' choice ones ' (see 2 be- low), distinguished above the former; cf. Jas. Morison or Meyer ad loc], Mt. -xx. 16 [here T "WII om. Trbr. the cl.] ; xxii. 14 ; finally, those are called eK\(KTOL who are destined for salvation but have not yet been brought to it, 2 Tim. ii. 10 [but cf. Iluther or Ellic. ad loc.]. " b. The M e s s i a h is called preeminently 6 exXf ktos toi" 6eov, as appointed by God to the most exalted office conceiv- able : Lk. xxiii. 35, cf. Lx. 35 L mrg. T Tr ■\^TI ; cf. Dillmann, Das Buch Henoch [Ubers. u. erklart; allgem. Einh], p. xxiii. c. Angels are called IkK^ktoI, as those whom God has chosen out from other created beings to be peculiarly associated with him, and his high- est ministers in governing the universe : 1 Tim. v. 21 ; sec aytoy, 1 b. ; ^aprvpofiat. fie eyw fiev vpdv ra ayia koi TQvs Li povs dyye'Xou? Toii 6eov, Joseph, b. j. 2, 16, 4 sub fin. ; [yet al. explain by 2 Pet. ii. 4 ; Jude 6 ; cf. Ellic. on 1 Tim. 1. c.]. 2. univ. choice, select, i. e. the best of its kind or class, excellent, preeminent : applied to cer- tain individual Christians, 2 Jn. 1, 13; with iv Kvplm added, eminent as a Christian (see ev, I. 6 b.), Ro. xvi. 13 ; of things : Xidos, 1 Pet. ii. 4, [6], (Is. xxviii. 16 ; 2 Esdr. V. 8 ; Enoch c. 8 Grk. txt., ed. Dillmann p. 82 sq.).* «KXo7ifj, -rjs. f], {(K\eya>), election, choice ; a. the act of picking out, choosing: truevos eKKoyrjt (gen. of quality; cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. 161 (140 sq.)]), i. q. U\(kt6v, sc. too 6(011, Acts ix. 15; spec, used of that act of God's free will by which before the foundation of the world he de- creed his blessings to certain persons; — ij KaT «Xoy^i/ TTpodfOLs, the decree made from choice [A. Y. the purpose ace. to election, cf. W. 193 (182)], Ro. Lx. 11 (cf. Fritz- sche ad loc. p. 298 sqq.) ; — particularly that by which he determined to bless certain persons through Christ, Ro. xi. 28 ; kut eKKoyfjv ^dp'Tor, according to an election which is due to grace, or a gracious election, Ro. xi. 5 ; with gen. of the pers. elected, 1 Th. i. 4 ; 2 Pet. i. 10. b. the thing or person chosen : i. q. «Xektoi, Ro. xi. 7. (Plat,, Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Dion. Hal., al.)* «K-Xvu: [Pass., pres. eicXuo/iat] ; pf. ptcp. «(cXfXu/ifVos ; 1 aor. i^(\v6r]v; 1 fut. iKKvOrjaoixai; often in Grk. writ, fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl. down ; 1. to loose, unloose (cf. Germ, aiislosen), to set free: riva tivos and ck Ttcor. 2. to dissolve ; metaph. to weaken, relax, exhaust, (Sept. Josh. X. 6 ; Jer. xiv. (xxxviii.) 4 ; Aristot. h. an. 9, 1 sub fin. [p. C10% 27]; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 3; 13, 8, 1). Com- monlv in the Pass. a. to have one's strength relaxed, to be enfeebled through exhaustion, to grow iveak, grow wearg, be tired out, (often so in Grk. writ.) : of the body, Mt. ix. 3G Rec. ; xv. 32 ; Jlk. viii. 3 ; thus for t]"i', 1 S. xiv. 28 ; 2 S. xvii. 29 ; for nin,, 2 S. iv. 1 etc. ; of the mind, Gal. vi. 9 (pf) e'(tXuofi€foi if we faint not, sc. in well-do- ing). Cf. Grimm on 1 ^lacc. iii. 17. b. lo despond, become faint-hearted : Heb. xii. 5, (Deut. xx. 3 ; Prov. eKfiaaaco 198 eKirXrjaaai iii. 11); willi -rait y\rvxais added, Ileb. xii. 3; roTj (rai- fiaat, TOiS ■\//-i;^aif, Polyb. 2()', 4, 7; rj ^vxfj, 29, 6, 14 ; 40, 12, 7; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. ix. 8; 2 Mace. iii. 24.* ^K-iido-cru ; impf. i^liiaaaov ; 1 aor. i^ifia^a ; to tcipa off. to wipe awaij: witli ace. of object and dat. of instru- ment, Lk. vii. 38, 44 ; Jn. .\i. 2 ; xii. 3 ; «xiii. 5. (Sopli., Eur., riippoer., Aristot., al. Sir. xii. 11 ; Bar. vi. (oji. Jer.) 12, 23 (13, 24).)» 4K-|i.uKrt)p(^(i) : inijjf. «'^f/jvicTrjpifoi/; to deride bi/ turninr/ vj) the noM', to sneer at, srolfal : riva, I^k. xvi. 14 ; xxiii. 35. (For j;'S, Ps. ii. 4; [x.x.xiv. (xxxv.) 16]; 2 K. xix. 21 [liere the simple verb]; 1 Esdr. i. 49 Alex.; Ev. Nicod. c. 10. Prof. writ, use the simple verb (fr. fiiiKTTjp the nose) ; [cf. W. 2,^)].) • cK-vcvu : 1 aor. i^ivevtra ; 1. to bend to one side (rij Kf(f>a\7j, Xen. ven. 10, 12). 2. to take one's sel/awai/, withdraw: Jn. v. 13, where Chrvsostom says that i^i- veva-e is equiv. to «^('xXive ; but others derive the form from fKvea, q. v. (.Sept. for tie, Judg. iv. 18 Alex. ; nj£). to turn one's self, Judg. xviii. 26 Alex. ; 2 K. ii. 24 ; xxiii. 1 6 ; [add 3 Maee. iii. 22 ; Joseph, antt. 7, 4, 2]. In prof, auth. also transitively, to avoid a thing ; as to /3e'Xij, Diod. \r>, 87; ■n\j]yi)v, ib. 17, 100.)* ^K-v€u : 1. properly, to swim away, escape by swim- mincj, (Thuc. 2, 90). 2. to escape, slip away secretly, ([Pind. 01. 13, 163] ; Eur. Hipp. 470, etc.) ; in tliis sense many interpp. take c'leVuaf in Jn. v. 13. But Jesus witluirew not to a.\ou\ danger but the admiration of the people ; for the danger first arose after his withdrawal.* €K-vt)4>oi : I aor. (^(vr]\\ra ; a. prop, to return to one's self from drunkenness, become sober, (Gen. ix. 24 ; [1 S. XXV. 37]; Joeli. .0; [Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 2] ; Lyneeus ap. Ath. 4, 5 p. 130 b.). b. metniph. to return to soberness of mind (cf. ami/rj(f)a>) : 1 Co. xv. 34, (Plut. Dem. 20).* cKoio-ios, -OK, (efcwx ), voluntary : Kara eKoia-iov, of free will, Philem. 14. (Num. xv. 3 ; Kad' eKova-iav, Thuc. 8, 27 — [" The word understood in the one case appears to be Tponov (Por])hyr. de abst. 1, 9 Ka9' (Knimov Tponop, comp. Eur. ]\Ii'(I. 7.")1 iKovaiai rpi'ma) ; in the other, yvaipTjv so fKovrria [doubtful, see L. and S.], c'^ {Kov(TLas, etc. ; " cf. Lobfcl; Phryn. p. 4 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Pliilem. 1. c. ; cf. W. 46.-! (432)].)' e'Kouo-lus, adv., [fr. Eur. down], voluntarily, willingly, of one's own accord: lleb. x. 26 (ck. dfiaprdveiv [A. V. to sin wilfully'] is tacitly opposed to sins committed inconsiderately, and from ignorance or £rom weakness) ; 1 Pet. V. 2.* cK-^oXoi, adv., (fr. ck anil wdXai, formed like cxrore [cf. ^Y. 24 (23) ; 422 (393) ; B. 321 (27 f,)-]), from of old ; of a long time : 2 Pet. ii. 3 ; iii. 5. (A later Grk. word, fr. Philo down; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 4.') srjq.) * «K-ir€ipaJ(i) ; iut.eKndpdao); [1 aor. c'|fn-fi'pa(ra, 1 Co. x. 9" L mrg. T WII mrg.] ; a word wholly biblical [put by Philo (de congr. erud. grat. § 30, Mang. i. 543) for Sept. TTfipaf. in quoting Deut. viii. 2] ; to prove, test, thoroughly [A. V. lemptl : tiwi, liis mind and judgment, Lk. x. 25 ; Tov Beov, to put to proof God's character and power : ' Mt. iv. 7 ; Lk. iv. 12, after Deut. vi. IG, where for nsj ; Tou XpKTTi'iv, by irreligion and immorality to test the ])alience or the avenging power of Clirist (exalted to God's right hand), 1 Co. x. 9' [(yet L T WII Tr txt. Kvpiov), 9'' L mrg. T WHmrg. Cf. Ps. l.Kxvii. (Ixxviii.) CK-^c'|iir(D : 1 aor. i^iir^p.'^a ; 1 aor. pass. ]itcp. (Kirip- (pdds; to send forth, send away: Acts xiii. 4; xvii. 10. [From Ilom. down.] * «K-ir«pi(ra, Thuc. 2, 92). 2. mot- aph. a. nvos [W. 427 (398), and De verb. comp. etc. u. s.], to fall from a thing, to lose it : r^t x<'P"'°f> ^J-^l- ^^ 4 ; TOV ihiov arqpiypov, 2 Pet. iii. 1 7, (ttjs irpbs tov Srjpov evvolas, Plut. Tib. (Jracch. 21 ; ^acriKeias, Joseph, antt. 7, 9, 2; also with prepositions, eK tuv eovraiv, Ildt. 3, 14 ; OTTO Ta>v i\7riSo>v, Thuc. 8, 81); nodev, Rev. ii. 5 Rec. (enfidev, Ael. V. h. 4, 7). b. absol. to perish ; to fail, (pioperly, to fall from a place which one cannot keep, faU from its position) : ij dyawrj, 1 Co. xiii. 8 R G ; to fall powerless, fall to the ground, be without effect : of the divine promise of salvation by Christ, Ro. i.\. 6.* tK-irXe'o) : [impf. e^eirkeov] ; 1 aor. e^iixKevaa ; to sail from, sail away, depart by ship : diro with gen. of place, Acts XX. 6 ; els with ace. of place. Acts .xv. 39 ; xviii. 18. [.Soph., Ildt., Thuc, al.]" (K-Tr\T]p6u> : \>!. eKTTeTrXrjpaKa; to fill full, to Jill up com- pletely ; metaph. Trjv eirayyeXiav, to fulfil i. e. make good : Acts xiii. 33 (32), as in Polyb. 1, 67, 1. [From Ildt. down.]* eK-irX'fjpiixris, -eas, rj, a completing, fulfilment : r. ruiepau T. dyvKTpov, the time when the days of purification are to end. Acts xxi. 26. [Dion. Ilal, Strab., Philo, al.] * «K-Ti-Xifio-crw, -^TU) : Pass., [pros. eKTrXrja-cropai. or -rrDpat (so R G Mt. xiii. 54 ; Tr AVII Acts xiii. 12)] ; im]if. e|- e7T\T]C7 : 1 aor. i^epi^aia-a ; Pass., 1 aor. e^epi^ddrjv ; 1 fut. iK.pi^u>dr]CTOfiai.; to root out, pluck up by the roots: ri, ^h. xiii. 29 ; xv. 13 ; Lk. xvii. 6 ; Jude 12. (Jer. i. 10; Zeph. ii. 4; Sir. iii. 9; [Sap. iv.4]; iMacc. v. 51 [Alex.]; 2 Mace. xii. 7 ; [Sibyll. frag. 2, 21 ; al.] ; Geopon.) * tK-o-Too-is, -f MS, J], {e^iaTTjp.L) ; 1. univ. in Grk. writ. any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state ; displacement, (Aristot., Plut.). 2. a throwing of the mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether such as makes a lunatic {Siavoias, Deut. xxviii. 28 ; rciiv Xoyitrpav, Plut. Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself, so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the forms and images lying within, and thinks that he per- ceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him by God, (Philo, quis rerum divin. heres § 53 [cf. 51 ; B. D. s. v. Trance; Delilzsch, Psychol, v. 5]) : eneiTfaeii [Rec, al. eyevero^ iir avTov CKoracrt?, Acts X. 10 ; flBev iv fKO-Tairei opapa, Acts xi. 5 ; yiviaQai iv «(TTacrei, Ai*ts xxii. 1 7, cf. 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 3. In the O. T. and the Xew amaze- ment [cf. Longin. 1, 4 ; Stob. flor. tit. 104, 7], the state of one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and won- (i) : pf. pass, i^icrpappai ; 1. to turn or twist out, tear up, (Horn. II. 17, 58). 2. to turn inside out, invert ; trop. to change for the ivorse, pervert, corrupt, (Arstph. nub. 554; Sept. Deut. xxxii. 20) : Tit. iii. 11.* [«k-o-mJcd : 1 aor. c'lfVowra ; /o .save /"rom, either to keep or to rescue from danger (fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down) : els alyiaXov iKtrwirm to ttXoIoj' to bring the ship safe to shore, Acts xxvii. 39 WH txt.; al. elitrai, see i^adia. and «'L 7 c.*] eK-raptto-o-u ; post-classical ; to af/ito/e, trouble, exceed- ingly: T. Tvokiv, Acts xvi. 20. (t. Sripov, Plut. Coriol. 19, and the like often in Dion Cass. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5 ; Sap. xvii. 3, etc.) * cK-TeCv3 and nSt? ; to stretch out, stretch forth : nj» x^P" (often in Sept.), Mt. viii. 3 ; xii. 13 ; xiv. 31 ; xxvi. 51 ; Mk. i. 41 ; iii. 5; Lk. v. 13; vi. 10; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xxvi. 1; with the addition of iiri nva, over, towards, against one — either to point out something, Mt. xii. 49, or to lay hold of a person in order to do him violence, Lk. xxii. 53 ; iKT. T. x^'P" f'f 'no"'"! spoken of God, Acts iv. 30 ; dyKvpas, properly, to carry forward [R. V. lay out'] the cable to which the anchor is fastened, i. e. to cast anchor, [" the idea of extending the cables runs into that of car- rying out and dropping the anchors " (Hackett) ; cf. B. D. i/CTeXew 200 eK •■ 1 aor. inf. «icTfXttrai ; to _finish, complete : Lk. xiv. 29 sq. (From IIoiu. down ; i. q. ry'^a, Deiit. x.\xii. 45.)* JK-Ttveio, -ay. ^, (tKT«i/ijs), a later Grk. word, (cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 311) ; a. prop, cxicnfion. b. intenlness (of mind), eanies^ne.ss : ivUnvfla, rurneMij, Acts.xxvi. 7. (2 Mace. xiv. 38; Judith iv. 9. Cf. Grimm on 3 Maec. vi. 41 [where he refers to Cic. ad Att. 10, 17, 1].)* «KTtWjs, -f'f, (cCT-eiVu), prop, stretched out; &g.- intent, earnest, assiduous : npoa-tvxn^ Acts xii. 5 R G (fix"?» Ignat. [interpol.] ad Eph. 10 ; Se'ijfftr k. iKeu'ia, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2) ; ayam). 1 Pet. iv. 8. Xcut. of the compar. cktc- vecrrtpov. as adv., more intently, more earnestli/, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. Wll reject the pass.]. (fKTevqs t^iXos, Aeschyl. suppl. 983 ; Polyb. 22, 5, 4 ; then very often fr. Philo on ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 31 1.) * cKT€vus, adv., earnestli/, fervently : Acts xii. 5 L T Tr WH ; iyawav, 1 Pet. i. 22. (Jonah iii. 8 ; Joel i. 14 ; 3 Mace. V. 9. Polyb. etc. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 31 1 ; [W. 25; 4G3 (431)].)* €k-tC9t)|i,i : l.aor. pass. ptcp. «re^fir; Mid., impf. f^eri- Ofiiriv; 2 a.0T.i^(6(p.r]v; to place or set out, expose ; 1. prop.: an infant, Acts vii. 21 ; (Sap. xviii. 5; [Hdt. 1, 112]; Arstph. nub. 531; Ael. v. h. 2, 7 ; Lcian. de saerif. 5, and often). 2. :Mid. metaph. to set forth, de- clare, expound : Acts xi. 4 ; W, Acts xviii. 26 ; xxviii. 23 ; ([Aristot. passim]; Diod. 12, 18 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 12, 2; Athen. 7 p. 278 d. ; al.).* €K-Tivdv (ktos tovtihv, drf 01 . . . IKAriaav etc. [cf. B. 287 (246) ; W. 158 (149) sq.]) ; 1 Co. XV. 27. (Sept. for naS foil, by jO, Judg. viii. 26 ; naSp, 1K.X. 13; 2 Chr. Lx.'l2; xvii. 19.)* cK-rpt'iroi : Pass., [pres. (KTpcnopai] ; 2 aor. i^tTpawriv: 2 fut. fKTpanrjaopai; 1. to turn or ticist out; pass, in a medical sense, in a fig. of the limbs : iva piij to x'^Xqu (KTpanri. lest it be wrenched out of (its jiroper) place, dislocated, [R. V. mrg. put out of Joint], (see exx. of this use fr. med. writ, in Steph. Thesaur. iii. col. 607 d.), i. e. lest he who is weak in a state of grace fall therefrom, lleb. xii. 13 [but Liinem., Delitzsch, al., still adhere to the meaning turn aside, go astray; cf. A. V., R. V. txt.]. 2. to turn off or aside; pass, in a mid. sense [cf. B. 192 (166 s(i.)], to turn one's self aside, to be tumid aside; (in- trans.) to turn aside; Ilesych. : e^fTpdnTjaau • e^exXivav, (r^r 680O, Lcian. dial. deor. 25, 2; Ael. v. h. 14. 49 [48] ; e|ia rijr odov, Arr. exp. Al. 3, 21, 7 [4]; absol. Xen. an. 4, 5, 15; Arstph. Plut. 837 ; with mention of the place to which, Hdt. 6. 34 ; Plat. Soph. p. 222 a. ; al.) ; figu- ratively : f(9 paraioXoyiav, I Tim. i. 6 ; «Vi toit pvdovs, 2 Tim. iv. 4 ; oTritro) rii/ds, to turn away from one in order to follow another, 1 Tim. v. 15, (fir dStKovs Trpd^fis, Jose|)h. antt. 8, 10, 2). with ace. to turn away from, to shun a thing, to avoid meeting or associating with one : Tar k(vo- (piijvias, 1 Tim. vi. 20, (tov eXfyx""' Po'.vb. 35, 4, 14; FaXXous (KTpiTTtaSai KoX (xvvohov (ftfvyew TijV p.(T auTuv, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 40).* eK-Tpt'eiil7ci) : fut. int^fv^opai ; pf. eKrrecjxvya; 2 aor. t|- f(f>vyov; [fr. Horn, down] ; toflceoutofjlec niray; a. to seek safely in flight; absol. Acts xvi. 27; exTovo'iKOv, Acts xix. 16. b. to escape : 1 Th. v. 3 ; Heb. ii. 3 ; ti, Lk. xxi. 36 ; Ro. ii. 3 ; nvd, Heb. xii. 25 L T Tr WII j. K^o^iw 201 eKau [rhi x^'^fii rivos, 2 Co. xi. 33. Cf. W. § 52, 4, 4 ; B. 146 (12S) soPc'ii>, S) ; to frighten away, to terrify ; (o Mrou) in/o violent friyhl : Twd, 2 Co. x. 9. (Deut. xxviii. 26 ; Zeph. iii. 13, etc. ; Thuc, Plat., al.) * cKoPos, -ov, Stricken with fear or terror, exceedingly frightened, terrified: Mk. vs.. 6 ; Heb. xii. 21 fr. Deut. ix. 19. (Aristot. physiogn. 6 [p. 812\ 29] ; Plut. Fab. 6.) ' 6K-4>«a.; 2 aor. pass. i^((\>ir,v (W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60) ; Kriiger § 40, s. v. (fiva : [Veitch ibid.]) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to generate ov produce from ; to cause to grow out : orav 6 »cAdSo£ . . . Ta<^vXAa i«^vr] (subj.pres.), when the branch has become tender and puis forth leaces, R (not R") GT WH in Mt. xxiv. 32 and Mk. xiii. 28 ; [al., retaining the same accentuation, regard it as 2 aor. act. subj. intrans., with TO <^i;X. as subject ; but against the change of sub- ject see Meyer or Weiss]. But Fritzsche, Lchm., Treg., al. have with reason restored [after Erasmus] €K (W. 77 (74) ; [cf. 85 (82); esp. B. 68 (60)]) ; 1 aor. e^ex^a, 3 pers. sing. e|ex" ([whereas the 3 sing, of the impf. is contr. -c;^« -f'x"' cf. Rutherford, New PhrjTi. p. 299 sq.] ; cf. Btlm. Gram, p. 196 note *** [Eng. trans, u. s. note f]), inf. ixxecu (Ro. iii. 15; Is. llx. 7; Ezek. ix. 8); Pass., [pres. ixxdrai. Mk. ii. 22 R G L Tr mrg. br. : impf. 3 jjers. sing, i^ex^^ro. Acts xxii. 20 R G, ^ex^'^^'^" L T Tr WII]; pf. eV«'- Xvf-'^t ; 1 aor. e^fxy^V ' 1 fit. iKx^^nTOfiai (see B. 69 (60) sq.); [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for 'IjDa; to pour out; a. prop. : (f>iaXi]v, by meton. of the container for the contained. Rev. xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 1?, 17; of wine, which when the vessel is burst runs out and is lost, Mt. ix. 1 7 ; Mk. ii. 22 [RGLTrmrg. in br.] ; Lk. v. 37; used of other things usually guarded with care which are poured forth or cast out : of money, Jn. ii. 15 ; e^ei(vdr) ra tnrXdy- Xva, of the ruptured body of a man. Acts i. is (e^exvdri ij KoiXia airrov fif T. y^v, of a man thrust through with a sword, 2 S. XX. 10). The phrase alfia ixx^iv or ckxv- v(^v)eii' is freq. used of bloodshed : [Mt. .-cxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 50 ; Acts x.xii. 20; Ro. iii. 15 ; Rev. xvi. 6" (where Tdf. ai/wzra)] ; see ai/xa, 2 a. b. metaph. i. q. to bestow or distribute largely (cf. Fritzsche on Tob. iv. 17 and Sir. i. 8) : TO nvfOfia to aywv or drr!) toC nvevfuiTos, i. e. the abundant bestowal of the Holy .Spirit, Acts ii. 33 fr. Joel ii. 28, 29 (iii. 1, 2); inl riva, Acts ii. 17 sq. ; x. 45: Tit. iii. 6 ; ^ ayairq to\> Oeoii eKKe'xvrai ev rais Kap&iais r]fia>v Slit iTV. dylov, the Holy Spirit gives our souls a rich sense of the greatness of God's love for us, Ro. v. 5 ; (opYTi", Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 8, [cf. .xvi. 11]). The pass., like the Lat. effundor, me effundo, is used of those who give themselves up to a thing, rush headlong into it, (ye- XojTi, Alciphr. ; els iraipas, Polyb. 32, 11, 4) : absol. tj TrXdvt] rov BaXadfx fiitrBov e^exvOrjo'au, led astray by the hire of Balaam (i. e. by the same love of reward as Ba- laam) they gave themselves up, sc. to wickedness, Jude 11, (so eKxvdrjvai in Arstph. vesp. 1469 is used absol. of one giving himself up to joy. The passage in Jude is generaDy explained thus : "for hire they gave themselves up to [R. V. ran riotously m] the error of Balaam " ; cf. W. 200 (194) [and De Wette (ed. Briickner) ad loc.]).* «K-xivcK, and (L T Tr WH) iKxivva, see tKxiat. [CoMP. : uTrep- (Kxyvw.^ cK-xupc'(i>, -m ; [f r. Soph, and Hdt. on] ; to depart from ;. to remove from in the sense oi fleeing from : Lk. .\xi. 21. (Forn^a, Am. vii. 12.)* eK-<|fuxo) : 1 aor. €^€'i/fu|a ; to expire, to breathe out one's life (see tK-nvia): Acts v. 5, 10; xii. 23. (Hippocr., Jambl.) ' £Kv ojjoj ; [but in Joseph. 11. t'C. Bekker edits -wv]. Cf. Frilzsche on Mk. p. 794 sq.; B. 22 (19 sq.) ; W. 182 (171) n. 1 ; [but see WII. Apj). p. l.')8'']. (The Sept. sometimes render T\'\ freely by tkaLuiv, as Ex. .\.\iii. 1 1 ; Deut. vi. 11; IS. viii. 14, etc.; not found in (irk. writ.)* 'E\o(iCTt]s (T WII 'EXa/ifiTTjs, [see s. v. ft, i]), -ov, o, aii Ehimite, i. e. an inhabitant of the province of Elymais, a region stretching southwards to the Persian Gulf, but the boundaries of which are variously given (cf. Win. KWU. s. V. Elam; Val/tinr/cr in Herzog iii. p. 747 sqq. ; Dilliiiann in Schenkel ii. p. 91 sq. ; Schrailer in Rielini p. 3.58 sq. ; (jrimm on 1 Mace. vi. 1 ; [BB.DD. s. vv. Elam, Elamites]) : Acts ii. 9. (Is. xxi. 2; in Grk. writ. 'EXu/iaio5, and so Judith i. 6.) • cXdo-o-uv [in Jn., Ilo.] or ttoiv [in Heb., 1 Tim. ; cf. B. 7], -ov, (compar. of the Epic adj. iXaxis equiv. to /luc^ds), [fr. Mom. down], lesx, — either in age (i/ounf/er'), Ko. i.\. 1 2 ; or in rank, Heb. vii. 7 ; or in excellence, worse (o])p. to KoKos), Jn. ii. 10. Neuter cXarrox, adverbially, less [so. than etc., A. V. under; cf. AV. 239 (225); 595 scj. (554); B. 127 sq. (112)] : 1 Tim. v. 9.* «XaTTOvtw [B. 7], -Qi : 1 aor. T]\aTT6vT](Ta ; (e Xarroi/) ; not found in prof. auth. [yet see Aristot. de plant. 2, 3 p. 825', 23] ; to be less, inferior, (in possessions) : 2 Co. viii. 15 fr. Ex. xvi. 18. (Prov. xi. 24; Sir. xix. (5) 6 ; also transitively, to make less, diminish : Gen. viii. 3 ; Prov. xiv. 34 ; 2 Mace. xiii. 19, etc.) • «XaTTOw [B. 7], -S) : 1 aor. ^XaT-rtocra ; Pass., [pres. «XarroC/iai] ; pf. ptcp. TjXn-rrwfiivos ', (eXaTTuv) ; to make less or infiriar: nvd, in dignity, II eb. ii. 7; Pass, to he made less or inferior: in dignity, Ilcb. ii. 9; to decrease (opp. to ai^dvo)), in authority and ])opularity, Jn. iii. 30. (Many' times in Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. on.)* cXavvu ; pf. ptcp. cXrfKaKas ; Pass., [pres. iXavvniiai] ; iuqif. tjXavvofiriv; to drive: of the wind driving ships or clouds, Jas. iii. 4 ; 2 Pet. ii. 17; of sailors projielling a vessel by oars, to row, Mk. vi. 48 ; to be carried in a ship, to sail, Jn. vi. 19, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; often also with vrja or vavv added) ; of demons ■driving to some place the men whom they jiossess, Lk. viii. 29. [COMP. : air-, crvv-ekavvw-l * iXa4>p[a, -as, ij, (e\apis, -d, -01/, lif/lit in welrjht, quick, agile; a light i^tnpTiov is used fig. concerning the commandments of Jesus, easy to be kept, Mt. xi. 30 ; neut. to f\a(f)paii, substantively, the lightness : T^t dXiyjffws [A. V. our light ajflictionl. 2 Co. iv. 1 7. (From Hom. down.) * iXAxio-Tos, -I/, -ov, (superl. of the adj. puKpos, but com- ing fr. iXaxvs), [(Ilom. h. Merc. 573), Ildt. down], .small- est, least, — whether in size : Jas. iii. 4 ; in amount : of the management of affairs, wtoros eV eXa;(iVTw, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to fv TToXXu) ; xix. 17 ; iv iXaxiTTOi I'StKos, Lk. xvi. 10; in importance: what is of the least moment, 1 Co. vi. 2 ; in authority : of commandments, Mt. v. 19 ; in the estimation of men: of persons, Mt. xxv. 4lt, 45; in rank and excellence: of persons, ^It. v. 19; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; of a town, Mt. ii. G. oiSe [It G oiiTf] (\d\i(TTov, not even a very small thing, Lk. xii. 20 ; ep,t:\ fU fXdx'O'Tov fOTi (see €1^1, V. 2 c), 1 Co. iv. 3.* «Xaxio-T>, q. v.), refutation, rebuke; (Vulg. cnrreptio ; Augustine, convictio) : eXfyliv tirx^v ISias Trapavopias, he was rebuked for his own transgres- sion, 2 Pet. ii. 16. (Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 22 [p. 74 ed. Olear.] ; Sept., Job xxi. 4 ; xxiii. 2, for ri'b' conqilaint ; [Protevangel. Jacob. 16, 1 to vSap t^s eXe'y^fcos Kvpiov (Se])t. Num. v. 18 to vBojp tov cXey/ioO)].) * eXcYxos, -ov, 6, {iXeyxa) ; 1. a proof, that bi/ which a thing is proved or tested, (to npaypa tov fXe-y;(o>' Smo-ft, Dem. 44, 15 [i. e. in Phil. 1, 15] ; ttjs (i\jfvxias, Eur. Here, fur. 162 ; ivddS' 6 eXeyxosTov irpaypoToi, Epict. diss. 3, 10, 11 ; al.) : twv [or rather, TTpaypdT(iiv~\ oh ^Xeiropivtov, that by which invisible things are jiroved (and we are convinced of their reality), Heb. xi. 1 (Vulg. argumen- tum lion apparentium [Tdf. rerum arg. non parentnm']) : [al. take the word here (in accordance with the i)reced- ing uTrdoTacns, q. v.) of the inward result of proving \iz. a conviction ; see LUnem. ad loc.]. 2. conviction (Au- gustine, convictio) : jrpdr ?Xey;(oi', for convicting one of his sinfulness, 2 Tim. iii. 16 R G. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. chiefly for nnDin.) * «Xt'YX" ; fut. fXf'ylm; 1 aor. inf. (Xey^ai, impv. fXtylov; [Pass., pres. eXtyxopai ; 1 aor. iXfyxSrjvl ; Sept. for n'pin ; 1. to convict, refute, confute, generally with a suggestion of the shame of the person convicted, [" €'Xfy;^fii' hatei- gentlich nicht die Bedeutung ' tadeln, sclinialien, zurecht- weisen,' welche ilim die Lexika zuschreiben, sonderu bedeutet nichts als iiberfUhren " (Schmidt eh. iv. § 12)] : Tivd, of crime, fault, or error ; of sin, 1 Co. xiv. 24 ; iXfyxopfvoi vTTo TOV vopov ojff TTapa^drai, Jas. ii. 9 ; vno TTji avvdhrjo-fas, Jn. viii. 9 R G (Philo, opp. ii. p. 649 [ed. ilang., vi. 203 ed. Richter, frag, trtp'i dvatrrdafttis icm eXeeti'o? 203 e'Xeo? (cpi, -S>; fut. c'Xfijo-ia ; 1 aor. rjXirjiTa; Pass., 1 aor. TiKer)6r)v ; 1 fut. (Xerjdrjaoiiai ; pf. ptcp. rjXfrjiievos ; (e Xeor) ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. most freq. for nn to be gracious, also for oni to have mercy ; several times for S"3n to spare, and Dnj to console ; to have mercy on : nva [ W. § 32, lb. a.], to succor one afflicted or seeking aid, Mt. ix. 27; XV. 22; xvii. 15; xviii. 33; xx. 30 sq.; Mk. v. 19 [here, by zeugma (W. § 66, 2 e.), the ocra is brought over with an adverbial force (W. 463 (431 sq.), /)»«•]; X. 47 sq.; Lk. xvi. 24 ; xvii. 13; xviii. 38 sq. ; Phil. ii. 27; Jude 22 Rec; absol. to succor the afflicted, to bring help to the wretched, [A. V. to show mere;/}, Ro. xii. 8 ; pass, to experience [A. V. obtain'] mercy, Mt. v. 7. Spec, of Ood granting even to the unworthy favor, benefits, opportunities, and particularly salvation by Christ : Ro. ix. 15, 10 R G (see cXedm), 18 ; xi. 32 ; pass., Ro. xi. 30 sq. ; 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 13, 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10.* [Stx. 4K(4a, oiKTelpa: e'A.. to feel sympathy with the misery of another, esp. sucli sympathy as manifests itself in act. less freq. in word ; whereas oiVt. denotes the inward feeling of compassion which abides in the heart. A criminal begs (\eos of his ju Grimm understands la'pios licrc as referring to God; see Kvpios, c. a.]. [Cf. Trench § xlvii. ; and see eX»'<>> fin.]* iXru9cpCa, -at, 17, (iXfiiOfpos), libcrti/, [fr. Find., Ildt. down] ; in tlie N. T. a. liberty to do or to omit things having no rehition to salvation, 1 Co. x. 29; from the yoke of the Mosaic law, (ial. ii. 4 ; v. 1, 13 ; 1 Pet. ii. 16 ; from Jewish errors so blinding the mental vision that it docs not discern the majesty of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 1 7 ; free- dom from the dominion of corrupt desires, so that we do by the free impulse of the .soul what the will of God re- quires : 6 vufios TTJs (Xfvdepias, i. e. the Christian religion, which furnishes that rule of right living by which the liberty just mentioned is attained, Jas. i. 2.5; ii. 12; free- dom from the restraints and miseries of earthly frailty : so in the expression ^ (Xevdtpia T^r So^tjs (epe.xegct. gen. [W. .531 (494)]), manifested in the glorious condi- tion of the future life, Ho. viii. 21. b. fancied liberty. i. e. license, the liberty to do as one i)leases, 2 Pet. ii. 1 9. J. C. Erler, Commentatio exeg. de libertatis cliristianae notione in N. T. libris obvia, 11S30, (an essay I have never had the good fortune to see).* cXevScpos, -ipa, -cpov, (EAEY0Q i. ij. (p)(opm [so Curtius, p. 497, after Etym. Magn. 329, 43 ; Suid. col. 1202 a. ed. Gaisf. ; but al. al., ef. Vanieek p. 61] ; hence, prop, one who can go whither he pleases), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for '2'3n,yree; 2.. freehorn; in a civil sense, one who is not a slave : Jn. viii. 33 ; 1 Co. vii. 22 ; xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. 28; Kph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11 ; Rev. vi. 15; xiii. 16 ; xix. 18 ; fem., Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. (opp. to ^ trmdia-Kri) ; of one wlio erases la be a slave, freed, manumitled : ylvc a6ai (\fvdf pov, 1 Co. vii. 21. 2. free, exempt, uure- slraineil, nol liounrl by an oblir/alion : 1 Co. ix. 1 ; , 4k n-ai/Tcav (see ex, I. 6 fin.), 1 Co. ix. 19 ; avnTivos, free from i. e. no longer under obligation to, so that one may now do what was formerly forbidden by the person or thing to which he was bound, Ro. vii. 3 [cf. W. 1 96 sq. (185); B. 157 sq. (138), 2G9 (231)]; foil, by an inf. [W. 319 (299); B. 2G0 (224)], i\(v6(pa idvTi,vos, -IV?;, -«vok, (fXe'0af), of ii'ory : Rev. .Kviii. 12. [Alcae., Arstph., Polyb., al.] * 'E\iaKeC)ii. (D"p" 'N whom (iod set tij)), Eliakim, one of the ancestors of Christ : Jit. i. 13 ; l.k. iii. 30.» fcTviyiia, - tov lepuv. Acts xxi. 30; eif Trii/ dyopdv, Acts xvi. 19 ; tls KpiTjjpia, Jas. ii. G (irpos TOV Stipov, Arstph. eqq. 710; and in Latin, as Caes. b. g. 1, 53 (54, 4) cum trinis catenis vinctus traheretur, Li v. 2, 27 cum a lictoribus jam traheretur). 2. metaph. to draio by inward power, lead, impel : Jn. vi. 44 (so in Grk. also; as emdvpias . . . «X/coiJtriyr «n-i rjSovds, Plat. £\Xa? 205 eXTTt? Phaedr. p. 238 a. ; viru rrjs fiSovTJs eXxd/xevot, Ael. h. a. 6, 31 ; likewise 4 Mace. xiv. 13; xv. 8 (11). trahit sua quemque voluptas, Vergil, eel. 2, 65) ; jrdn-ur e\Kv npos ■ifiavrov, I by my moral, my spiritual, intiuence will win over to myself the hearts of all, Jn. xii. 3'2. Cf. Mey. on Jn. vi. 44 ; [Trench § xxi. Comp. : e^cAxo).] * 'EWds, -a&os, J), Greece i. e. Greece jirojjer, as opp. to Macedonia, i. q. 'Axam (q. v.) in the time of the Ro- mans : Acts XX. 2 [cf. AVetstein ad loc. ; Mev. on xviii. 12].- "EXXt|v, -rjvos, o ; 1. a Greek by nationality, whether a native of the main land or of the Greek islands or colonies : Acts .xviii. 1 7 Rec. ; "EXX;;i'e's Tt koX ffap^apoi, Ro. i. 14. 2. in a wider sense the name embraces all nations not Jews that made the language, cus- toms, and learning of the Greeks their own ; so that where 'EXXiji/e j are opp. to Jews, the primary reference is to a difference of religion and worship : Jn. vii. 35 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; Acts xi. 20 G L T Tr [cf. B.D. Am. ed. p. 967] ; Acts xvi. 1,3; [xxi. 28] ; 1 Co. i. 22, 23 Rec. ; Gal. ii. 3, (Joseph, antt. 20, 11, 2) ; 'louSaioi re /cat'EXXi;- ves, and the like : Acts xiv. 1 ; xviii. 4 ; xix. 10, 17; xx. 21 ; Ro. i. 16 ; ii. 9, 10 ; iii. 9 ; X. 12 ; 1 Co. i. 24 ; x. 32; xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11. The word is used in the same wide sense by the Grk. church Fathers, cf. Otto on Tatian p. 2 ; l^SopIi. Lex. s. v.]. The "EXXr/i/ey spoken of in Jn. xii. 20 and Acts xvii. 4 are Jewish proselytes from the Gentiles ; see Trpoa^Xuros, 2. [Cf. B. D. s. V. Greece etc. (esp. Am. ed.)] * 'E\Xi)vik6s, -fi, -6v, Greek, Grecian : Lk. xxiii. 38 [T AVH Tr t.xt. om. L Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Rev. ix. 11. [From Aeschyl., Hdt. down.] * 'EXXt]vis, -iSos, fj; 1. « Greek woman. 2. a Gen- tile woman ; not a Jewess (see "EXXiji', 2) : Mk. vii. 26 ; Acts xvii. 12.* 'EXXT)vioT-r|s, -ov, 6, (fr. iWrjvi^o) to copy the manners and worship of the Greeks or to use the Greek lancruage {\T. 94 (89 sq.), cf. 28]), a Hellenist, i. e. one who imi- tates the manners and customs or the worship of the (ireeks, and uses the Greek tongue : emjiloved in the K. T. of Jews born in foreign lands and speaking Greek, \_Grecian Jetcs'] : Acts xi. 20 R [WH ; see in 'eXXt^k, 2] ; ix. 29 ; the name adhered to them even after thev had embraced Christianity, Acts vi. 1, where it is o])p. to oi 'Effpaloi, q. v. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Hellenisten ; Eciiris in Herzog v. p. 701 sqq. ; [BB.DD. s. v. Hellen- ist : Farrar, St. Paul, ch. vii. ; Wetst. on Acts vi. 1].* 'EXXi]vto-rC, adv., (fXXijr/i'fo)), in Greek, i. e. in the Greek language: Jn. xix. 20; Acts xxi. 37. [Xen. an. 7, 6, 8 ; ah] * cXXo'vau. i. q. eXXoyem. q. v. cXXoYc'u [see eV, III. 3], -a> : [Pass., 3 pers. sing. pres. thXayeirm R G L txt T Tr ; impf. iWoyaro L mrg. WH ; ef. WH. App. p. 166: Tdf. Prolcg. p. 122; Mullach p. 252 ; B. 57 sq. (50) ; W. 85 (82)] : (Xoyor a reckoning, account) ; to reckon in, set to one's account, lai/ to one'.': charge, impute : tovto ipai iWoyei (E T Tr WII IKKoya [see reff. above]), charge this to my account, Philem. 1 8 ; sin the penalty of which is under consideration, Ro. V. 13, where cf. Fritzsche p. 311. (Inscr. ap. Boeckh i. p. 850 [no. 1732 a. ; Bp. Lghtft. adds Edict. Diocl. in Corp. Inscrr. Lat. iii. p. 836 ; see further his note on Philem. 18; cf. B. 57 .«q. (50)].)* ■EX|io)8d(i (Lchm.EX^nSd/i,TTrWH 'EXpabap [on the breathing in codd. see Td/. Proleg. p. 107j), 6, Elmodam or Elmadam, proper name of one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.* eXirCJu;. impf. rj\TTi^ov, Attic fut. eKmit (Mt. xii. 21, and often in Sept. [(whence in Ro. xv. 12); cf. B. 37 (32); W. § 13, Ic.]; the com. form eXTriVm does not occur in bibl. Grk.) ; 1 aor. IjXnuTa ; pf. IfKniKa \ [i)res. pass. eXwi^opai] ; (cXTrif, q. v.) ; Sept. for np5 to trust; n^n to flee for refuge ; '7n' to wait, to hope ; to hope (in a reUgious sense, to wait for .salvation with joij and full of confidence) : tI, Ro. viii. 24 sq. ; 1 Co. xiii. 7 ; (tg) iXmCopfva, things hoped for, Ileb. xi. 1 [but WH mrg. connect i\n. with the foU. npayp.'\ ; once with dat. of the obj. on which the hope rests, hopefulbj to trust in : Tw mopan airov (^s in prof, autli. once rfj TV)(ri, Thuc.'3, 97, 2), Mt. xii. 21 GLTTrWH [cf. B. 176 (153)] ; Kodas, 2 Co. viii. 5. foil, by an inf. relating to the subject of the verb i\iriCto [cf. AV. 331 (311); B. 259 (223)] : Lk. vi. 34 ; xxiii. 8 ; Acts .x.xvi. 7 ; Ro. xv. 24 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Phil. ii. [19], 23 ; 1 Tim. iu. 14 ; 2 Jn. 12 ; 3 Jn. 14 ; foil, by a pf. inf. 2 Co. v. 11 ; foil, by Sri with a pres. Lk. xxiv. 21 ; Sti with a fut., Acts x.xiv. 26 ; 2 Co. i. 13 ; xiii. 6 ; Philem. 22. Peculiar to bibl. Grk. is the constr. of this verb with prepositions and a case of noun or pron. (cf. B. 175 (152) sq. [cf. 337 (290); W. § 33, d. ; Ellic. on 1 Tim. iv. 10]) : «s rti/a, to direct hope unto one, Jn. v. 45 (pf. ^Xn-iVaxf. in whom you have put your hope, and rely upon it [W. § 40, 4 a.]): 1 Pet. iii. 5 LTTrWH; with addition of on with fut. 2 Co. i. 10 [L txt. Tr WH br. on, and so detach the foil, •clause] ; fVi tivi, to build hope on one, as on a foundation, (often in Sept.), Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10); 1 Tim. iv. 10; vi. 17 ; ei/ tiki, to repose hope in one, 1 Co. xv. 19 ; foil, bv inf. Phil. ii. 19; «Vi with ace. to direct hope towards something : «Vi rt, to hope to receive something, 1 Pet. i. 13; em toi/ dfov. of those who hope for some- thing from God, 1 Pet. iii. 5 R G ; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.). [CoMP. : air-, 7rpo-fX77i'fo).] * eXiris [sometimes written iKnis ; so WII in Ro. viii. 20 ; Tdf. in Acts ii. 26 ; see (in 2 below, and) the reff. s. V. dt^eiSoi'], -ISos, fj, (fXmo to make to hope), Sept. for nca and na^^n, trust ; npnp that in which one confides or to which he flees for refuge ; mpri expectation, hope ; in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of good or of ill ; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation of evil, fear ; as, 17 rav kokQiv cXtt/s. Lcian. T\Tannie. c. 3; Tov ct>6^ov iXvls. Thuc. 7, 61 ; KOKri «Xjri's. Plat. rep. 1 p. 330 e. [cf. legg. 1 p. 644 c. fin.] ; nojn^pa iKir. Is. xxviii. 1 9 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics, and always in the N. T.. in a good sense : expectation of good, hope ; and in the Christian sense, jo'iful and con- fident expectation of eternal salvation : Acts xxiii. ; 'EXu/Aa? 206 €fi^aTev(i> xxvi. 7; Ro. V. 4 sq. ; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 3; iii. 15; liyaSfi iKnis (often in prof, auth., as Plat. Phaedo67c. ; |ilui-. (XniSet ayaBai. k-gg. 1 p. 649 b. ; Xen. Ages. 1, 27), 2 Th. ii. 10: eXwir fi\{Trofiivr), hope whose object is seen, Ro. viii. 24 ; 6 ddn rfji (\7ri80s. Cod, tlie author of hope. Ro. xv. 13; 17 n-Xijpoc^Ofjm t^s (\niSos. fulness i. e. certainty and strength of hope, Hob. vi. 11;^ ofioKoyia r^t e\n- the confession of tliose things whioli we hope for. Hub. x. 23 ; to Kavx^j^a rrji i\n. liope wherein we glory, Heb. iii. G ; (nauayuiyi) Kpfirrovos t'X- »ri8or, the bringing in of a better ho])e, Heb. vii. 19; (Knis witli gen. of the subj.. Acts xxviii. 20; 2 Co. i. 7 (6); Phil. i. 20; with gen. of the obj., Acts xxvii. 20; Ro. V. 2 ; 1 Co. Lx. 10 ; 1 Th. v. 8 ; Tit. iii. 7 ; with gen. of the thing on which the hope depends, fj tXTrir Trjt ipya- (rlas avToiv, Acts xvi. 19; rfis KXf)a-es, Kph. i. 18; iv. 4; Tov fiayyeXiov, Col. i. 23 ; with gen. of the pers. in whom hope is reposed, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. lo.'i (13G)]. eV [or ((f> — so Acts ii. 2« LT ; Ro. iv. 18 L ; viii. 20 (21) T WH ; cf. Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 5Gu ; (but see above, init.)] eXiriSi, relj-ing on hope, having hope, in hope, (Eur. Here. fur. 804; Diod. Sic. 13, 21 ; eV AttiSi aya6!j, Xen. raera. 2, 1, 18) [W. 394 (36.S), cf. 42.5 (39G) ; B. 337 (290)]: Acts ii. 2G (of a return to life); Ro. iv. 18; with gen. of the thing hoped for added : (aiTJs alaiviov. Tit. i. 2 ; ToC /ifTexfix, 1 Co. ix. 10 [G L TTr WH] ; in hope, foil, by on, Ro. viii. 20 (21) [but Tdf. reads 810'ri] ; on ac- count of the hope, for the hope [B. 1G5 (144)], with gen. of the thing on which the hope rests, Acts xxvi. 6. Trap' eXnlSa. beyond, against, hope [W. 404 (377)] : Ro. iv. 18 (i. e. where the laws of nature left no room for hope). «X"" eXTi'Sa (often in (irk. writ.): Ro. xv. 4; 2 Co. iii. 12; with an inf. belonging to the person hoping, 2 Co. X. 15 ; iXniha exfiv ds [Tdf. irpbi] 6env, foil, by acc. with inf. Acts .\xiv. 1.5, (eiy \pi.(TTuv 'ixfiv ras (Knidas, Acta Thomae § 28 ; [t. tXTri'Sa fis t. 'IijctoCj» cV t. irveu- ftart €xojTfs,Barn. ep. 11, 11]) ; «Vi with dat. of pers. 1 Jn. iii. 3 ; e'XTriSa /11) exoirres, (of the heathen) having no hope (of salvation), Eph. ii. 12; 1 Th. iv. 13; fi eXm's eoTiv CIS 6f6v, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21. By meton. it denotes a. the author of hope, or he who is its foun- dation, (often so in Grk. auth., as Aeschyl. choeph. 776; Thuc. 3, 57; [cf. Ignat. ad Eph. 21, 2; ad Magn. 11 fin.; ad Philad. 11, 2; ad Trail, inscr. and 2, 2, etc.]): 1 Tim. i..l ; 1 Th. ii. 19; with gen. of obj. added, rrjs So^rjs, Col. i. 27. b. the thing hoped for : Trpoo-St- XKrSai TTiv fiaKaplav iXiriSa, Tit. ii. 13; iXniSa 8iKawavtn)s aiTfKS(x(a-dai, the thing hoped for, which is righteous- ness [cf. Mey. ed. Sieffert ad 1.], Gal. v. 5, (■npoaSoKoiv rar iffo deov f\ni8as, 2 Macc. vii. 14)^ &ia Affi'Sa nyi/ OTro- KdpiVTjv (V TOis ovpavois. Col. i. 5 ; KparrjcraL ttis npoKfip-i- vtjs ("XttISos, Heb. vi. 18 (cf. Bleek ad \oc.). — ZocLlcr, De vi ac notione vocis i\ms in X. T. Gissae 1856.* 'EX«nas. 6, [B. 20 (18)], Elyma.t, an ajjpellative name which Luke interprets as payos, — derived either, as is commonly supposed, fr. the Arabic ivaA£ (elj-mon), i. e. wise ; or, acc. to thfe more probable opinion of De- litzsch (Zeitsclir. f. d. luth. Theol. 1877, p. 7), fr. the Aramaic Kp'Sx powerful : Acts xiii. 8. [BB.DD. s. v.] * O^ut (LT'EXat, [WH tkai; sec I, t]), Eloi, Syriac form (^^i^, ■rl'7S<)for Hebr. 'Sk (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2) : Mk. XV. 34. [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 1 1 .] * cfiavTov, -fit, -ov, (fr. ifiov and avrov), reflexive pro- noiui of 1st pers., of mi/sc/f, used only in gen., dat., and acc. sing. [cf. B. 110 (9(1) sqq.] : dw' epavTov, see ano, II. 2 d. aa. ; in ipaxnov, under my control, Jit. viii. 9 ; Lk. vii. 8 ; ip^vTuv, mi/nelf as opji. to Christ, the supjioscd minister of sin (vs. 17), Gal. ii. 18; tacitly opp. to an animal offered in sacrifice, Jn. xvii. 19; negligently for avTos ipe, 1 Co. iv. 3 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. As in (irk. writers (Matthiae § 148 Anm. 2, i. p. 354; Passow s. v. p. 883), its force is sometimes so weaki-ned that it scarcely differs from the simple pers. pron. of the first person [yet denied by Meyer], as Jn. xii. 32; xiv. -Jl ; Philcm. 13. C)i-Pa[v(i> [see iv, III. 3]; 2 aor. «WjSijv, inf. ipjirpiai, ptcp. epfids ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to go into, step into : Jn. V. 4 R L ; els to ttXoioi;, to embark, Mt. viii. 23, and often. l)i.-PdX\(i) [see (V, III. 3]: 2 aor. inf. (pfiiiKdv, to l/iroio in, cast into : Ws, Lk. xii. 5. [From Horn. dmvn. Ct)Ml'. : 7rap-ep/3aXXM.] * i(ji-Pairra) [see ev, III. 3] : 1 aor. ptcp. ip(id\j/as ; to dip in: Ti, Jn. xiii. 2G* Lchm., 2G'' RGLtxt.; ttjk x^P" *'" Tw Tpu/3Xtw, Jit. xxvi. 23 ; mid. 6 ipfianTojievos per epttv [Lchm. adds tt/v x^'P"] f'f ''''> [WH add ev in br.] Tpu- ^Xi'oj-, ^\k. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Xen., al.)* «IxPaTCvu [see iv. III. 3] ; {ip^aTrjs stepping in, going in); to enter; 1. prop.: noKiv, Eur. El. 595; narpi- Sos, Soph. O. T. 825 ; els to opos, Joseph, antt. 2, 12, 1 ; to frequent, haunt, often of gods fre([uenting fav(]rite spots, as vijtrov, Aeschyl, Pers, 449; tw x<"P'9' ^^on. Hal, antt. 1, 77; often to come into possession of a thing; thus (Is vavv, Dem. p. 894, 7 [6 Dind.] ; rr/v yf/v. Josh. xix. 51 Sept.; to invade, make a hostile incursion into, els with acc. of place, 1 Macc. xii. 25, etc. 2. tropically, (cf. Germ, eingehen) ; a. to go into details in narrating: absol. 2 JIacc. ii. 30. b. to investigate, search into, sci-u- tinize minutely: rais iniarripats, Pliilo, plant. Xoe § 19; a pfi eoipoKe ip^arevav. things which he has not seen, i. e. things denied to the sight (cf. 1 Jn. iv. 20), Col. ii. 18, — where, if with G L [in ed. min., but in ed. maj. rein- serted, yet in br.] T Tr WH Iluther, Meyer, we exjiunge pi), we must render, " going into curious and subtile sjieculation about things which he has seen in visions granted him " ; but cf. Baumg.-Crusius ad loc. and W. § 55, 3 e. ; [also Reiche (Com. crit.), Bleek, Ilofm., al., defend the prj. But sec Tdf. and WH. ad loc, and Bp. Lghtft.'s 'detached note'; cf. B. 349 (300). Some in- terpret "(conceitedly) taking his stand on the things which" etc.: see under 1]: Phavor. ipffarevcTar iTri^rjvaL TO (I'SoK i^epfvvTjcrai. rj «(i-Pipd^u : 1 aor. ive^l^aaa ; to put in or on, lead in, cause to enter; as often iu the Greek writ. two. els ro wKolov : Acts xxvii. 6.* €|i-P\€'irw [see eV, III. 3] ; impf. eW/SXen-oi/ ; 1 aor. cVe- ^Xf\|/a, ptcp. (fi^\€\jras; to turn one's eyes on; look at; I. prop.: with ace. Mk. viii. 25, (Anth. 11, 3; Sept. Judg. xvi. 27 [Alex.]) ; tivI (Plat. rep. 10, G08 d. ; Poiyb. 15, 28, 3, and elsewhere), Mt. xix. 26 ; Mk. x. 21, 27: siv. 67 ; Lk. xx. 17 ; xxii. 61 ; Jn. i. 3G, 42 (43), (in aU these pass. f'ft/3Xe'i//-as iievos (-fn. xi. 38, where Tdl. efifipi/ioiiiie- vos ; see epmraa, init.) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. eve^pifioivro (Mk. xiv. 5, where Tdf. -/movvto, cf. epcoTiia u. s.); 1 aor. (ve&pip.rfcrapr)v, and (Mt. ix. 30 LTTrWJI) eve- fipip.T]6r)V [B. 52 (4C)] ; (Ppifiilofiai, fr. ^plprj, to be moved with anger) ; to s/iort in (of horses ; Germ, darein schnauhen') : Aeschyl. sept. 461 ; to he very angry, to be moved with indignation : tivI (Liban.), Mk. xiv. 5 (see above) ; absol., with addition of ev eavrm, Jn. xi. 38 ; with dat. of respect, ib. 33. In a sense unknown to prof. auth. to charge with earnest admonition, sternly to charf/e, threateningly to enjoin : Mt. Lx. 30 ; Mk. i. 43.* ifiia, -m [(cf. vSkr. vain, Lat. vom-ere; Curtius § 452; Vanicek p. 886 sq.)] : 1 aor. inf. epea-at ; to vomit, vomit forth, throw up, fr. Horn, down : Ti.va ex toO a-Toparos, i. e. to reject with extreme disgust, Kev. iii. 16.* e(i-(iaCvo|jiai [see ev. III. 3] ; nvi, to rage against [A. V. to be exceedingly mad against^ one: Acts xxvi. 11 ; be- sides only in Joseph, antt. 17, 6, 5.* 'EnHttvo^X, o, Innnanuel, (fr. Ijg;' and Sk, God with us), i. q. savior, a name given to Christ by Matthew, i. 23, after Is. vii. 14. Ace. to the orthodox interpreta- tion the name denotes the same as Sedudpunros, and has reference to the personal union of the human nature and the divine in Christ. [See BB. DD. s. v.] * "E|i|iaoiis (in Joseph, also 'A^^aouf), i7,-Bmmai(s (Lat. gen. -unti.s), a village 30 stadia from Jerusalem (ace. to the true reading [so Dind. and Bekk.] in Joseph, b. j. 7, 6, 6 ; not, as is com. said, foil, the authority of Luke, 60 stadia), apparently represented by the modern Kulo- nieh (cf. Eivald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel, 2te Ausg. vi. p. 675 sq. ; [_Caspari, Chronolog. and Geograph. Intr. to the Life of Christ § 191 ; Sepp, Jerus. u. d. heil. Land, i. 52]) : Lk. xxiv. 13. There was a town of the same name in the level country of Judtea, 1 75 stadia from Jerusalem, noted for its hot springs and for the slaughter of the Syrians routed by Judas Maccabaeus, 1 Mace. iii. 40, 57; afterwards fortified by Bacchides, the SjTian leader, 1 Mace. ix. 50, and from the 3d cent^ on called JS'lcopolis [B. D. s. v. Emmaus or Nicopolis], A third place of the same name was situated near Tibe- rias, and was famous for its medicinal springs. Cf. Keim iii. p. 555 sq. (Eng. trans, vi. 306 sq.) ; Wolff in Riehm p. 376 sq. ; [esp. Hnckelt in B. D. Am. ed. p. 731].* * 4|L|i.e'vti> [Tdf. evpeva. Acts xiv. 22 ; see ev. III. 3] ; 1 aor. evepeiva ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; (Augustine, immaheo), to remain in, continue ; a. prop, in a j)lace : ei^ Tivi, Acts x.xviii. 30 T Tr WII. b. to persevere in anything, a state of mind, etc. ; to hold fast, be true to,, abide by, keep : Tjj mVi-fi, Acts xiv. 22 (v6pa>, SpKots, etc. in the Grk. writ.) ; ev nvi (more rarely so in the classics, as ev Tols p LTTr, [but WH'^ppap, see their Intr. § 408] ), 6, ('^nr\ i. e. ass), Emmor [or Iliimnr, ace. to the Hcbr.], proper name of a man : Acts vii. 16 ; see concerning him. Gen. xxxiii. 19; x.xxiv. 2 sq.* I(i6s, -Tj, -6v, (fr. epoii), possess, pron. of the first pers.,, mine; a. that which I have ; what I possess : Jn. iv. 34 ; xiii. 35 ; [xv. 11^ x°P° h ^M (^^^ peva>, 1. 1 b. a.)] ; xviii.. 36 ; Ro. X. 1 ; Philem. 12, and often; rij epfj x"p'> with my own hand [B. 117 (102) note], 1 Co. xvi. 21 ; Gal. vi. 11 ; Col. iv. 18 ; as a predicate, Jn. vii. 16; xiv. 24; xvi. 15 ; substantively, to epov that which is mine, mine own, esp. my money, Mt. xxv. 27 ; divine truth, in the- knowledge of wliich I excel, Jn. xvi. 15; univ. in ])lur. TO epa my goods, Mt. xx. 15 ; Lk. xv. 31. b. proceeding from, me : ol epoi Xoyoi, Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. ix. 26 [here Tr mrg. br. Xdy.] ; d Xdyor d epos, Jn. viii. 37 ; ^ fVroX^ fj ipri, Jn. XV. 12; fj epr/ SiSaxn, Jn. vii. 16, and in other exx. c. pertaining or relating to me ; o. ajjpointed for me : 6 Kmpos 6 epos, Jn. vii. 6. p. equiv. to a gen. of the object : fj eprj avdpvrjcris, Lk. xxii. 19; 1 Co. xi. 24 ; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given by W. § 22, 7 ; [Kiih- ner § 454, Anm. 11 ; Kriiger § 47, 7, 8]. -y. eariv epov it is mine, equiv. to, it rests with me : Mt. xx. 23 ; ilk. X. 40. In connecting the article with this pron. the N. T. writ, do not deviate fr. Attic usage ; cf. B. § 124, 6. c(i-irai-y(i.ovTi [see iv, III. 3], -ijs, fj, (epwaiCai), derision. mockery : 2 Pet. iii. 3 G L T Tr WH. Xot found else- where.* en-iTai.'Y[i6s [see ev. III. 3], -ov, 6, (epTrai^o)), unknown to prof, auth., a mocking, scoffing : Ileb. xi. 36 ; Ezck. xxii. 4 : Sir. xxvii. 28 : Sap. xii. 25 ; [Ps. xx.xvii. (xxxviii.) 8] ; torture inflicted in mockery, 2 Mace. vii. 7 [etc.].* «(i-ira£5« [see e'v, III. 3]; im\)i. everrai^ov: iut.epTral^d) (ilk. X. 34 for the more com. -^ovpai and -^opai) ; 1 aor. evenm^a (for the older eve-naicra) ; Pass., 1 aor. eveimlxGriv (Jit. ii. 1 6, for the older evenaicrdrjv) ; 1 fut. e'pTrnixSijrropai ; ■efiTraiKTir; 208 eiitrpoaOev ■(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 240 sq. ; Kriiger § 40 s. v. ■naiZa ; [Veitch ibid.] ; B. 64 (56) sq.) ; to play in, rivi, I's. «iii. (civ.) 26 ; Eur. Baccb. 86 7. to play with, trifle with, (Lat. illudere) i. e. a. to mock : absol., Mt. xx. 1 !) ; xxvii. 41 ; Mk. x. 34; xv. 31 ; Lk. xxiii. 11 ; rtw (Ildt. 4, f34), Mt. xxvii. 2i), [.31]: Mk. xv. 20; Lk. xiv. 29; xxii. 63 ; xxiii. 36 : in pass. Lk. xviii. 32. b. to delude. deceive, (Sopb. Ant. rSii) ; in pa.ss. Mt. ii. 16, (Jer. x. 15).* «(i-ira(KTns [see iv. III. 3], -on, 6, (fiiirai^a), a mocker, a scoffer: 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Jude 1« ; playing like children, Is. iii. 4. Not used by prof, auth.* €|ji-Tr€pi-iraT€a> [T \\ H cV-, see cV, III. 3], -cS : fut. i^-jrt- fimaT-ijaa : >') go ahout in, walk in : ev rifft, among per- sons, 2 Co. vi. 16 fr. Lev. xxvi. 1 2. (Job i. 7 ; Sap. xix. 20 : [Pbilo. Plut.]. Lcian., Acbill. Tat., al.) • «(i.^iirXT)(ii [not ffjLTTLfi. irX. (sec iv. III. 3) ; for eupho- ny's sake, Loll, ail I'liryn. j). 9."); Veitch p. .536] and efj.miT\aa> (fr. which form comes the pres. ptcp. f^imifKaiv. Acts xiv. 1 7 [W. § 1 4. 1 f. ; B. 66 (58)]) ; 1 aor. (verrXrjaa ; 1 aor. pass. iveitKTicBijv ; pf . pass. ptcp. iiat(Ti\rfaii.ivos ; Sept. for s'?'3 and in |)ass. often for >'3!y to be satiated; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to fill up, Jill full : riva -rtvos, to bestow something bountifully on one, Lk. i. 53; Acts xiv. 17, (Jer. x.xxviii. (xxxi.) 14 ; Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 9 ; Is. xxix. 19; Sir. iv. 12); to fill with food, i. e. sati.vaav: Etym. Magn. 672, 23 Tn^Trpatrai' orate gathering of the hair into knots, Vidg. capiUalura, [A. V. plaiting^. 1 Pet. iii. 3 (xo/ivs. Strab. 1 7 p. 828).' c|t-in>eu [T WH e'v-, see ev. III. 3] ; 1. to breathe .in or on, [fr. Horn. down]. 2. to inhale, (Aeschyl., Plat., al.) ; with partitive gen., anetXijs k. (fiovov, threat- ening and slaughter were so to speak the element from which he drew his breath. Acts ix. 1 ; see Meyer ad loc., cf. W. §30. 9 c.; [B. 167 (146)]; ennviov Cuijs, Sept. Josh. X. 40.* «(i.^optvo(ioi [see ev. IIL ."] : depon. ])ass. with fut. mid. ep.7Top(vvpav ano ^oiviKtjS, Diog. Laiirt. 7, 2; yKavKas, Lcian. Nigrin. init.) ; to deal in; to use a thing or a person for gain, [A. V. make merchandise o/], {Sipav ToO TwpaTos, Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 8 ; 'hwiraaia eveno- pevero ir\r)6ij yvvaiKoiv, Athcn. 13 p. 569 f.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 3 ; cf. W. 223 (209); [B. 147 (129)].* e|iiropCa [see ev. III. 3], -ar. ^, (epnopos), trade, mer- ' chandise : Mt. xxii. 5. (Ilesiod, sqij. ; Sept.) * €|iir()piov [see ev, 111. 3], -ov, to, (epnopos), a place where trade is carried on, esp. a seaport ; a mart, emporium ; (Plin. forum nundinarium) : oueos e'pnopiov a market house (epexeget. gen. [W. § 59, 8 a. ; A. V. a hou.'ie of merchandise^), Jn. ii. 16. (From Hdt. down ; Sept.) * €fi^iropos fsee ev, IH. 3], -ov, 6. (Tropes) ; 1. i. q. 6 e'lr' dWoTpias ves 7!\tiu [see cu, TTT. 3] ; impf . tviirrvov ; f ut. iiitrrvato ; 1 aor. iviirrvara ; fut. pass. cjxTTTuaflijcrofiat ; [fr. Hdt. ■down] ; to spit upon : nvl, Mk. x. 34 ; xiv. 05 ; xv. 19 ; av£5ai [see iv. III. 3]; fut. efiCpavlaa [B. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. (ve(j)dviaii ; 1 aor. pass. ev((^avia6r]v; fr. Xen. and Plato down ; (ipavi^e(Tdai "Keyovres. Diog. Laert. prooem. 7; so of God. Joseph, antt. 1, 13. 1), Mt. x.xvii. 53 ; Tw TTpouimio toC Btov, of Christ appearing before God in heaven, Ileb. be. 24 ; (of God imparting to souls the knowledge of himself. Sap. i. 2 ; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol. 1.2,4). 2. to indicate, diiclose, declare, make Inoivn: foil, by oTi, Heb. xi. 14 ; with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 15 ; t\ Tipoi Tiva. ib. 22; rt KaTa. tivos. to report or declare a thing against a person, to inform against one, Acts xxiv. 1; XXV. 2; jrepi tipos. about one, Acts x.xv. 15. [Stn. see 6i;Xd(B.] ' c)i-<)>opos [see ev. III. 3], -ov, (<^o/3os), thrown into fear, terrified, affrighted: Lk. xxiv. 5, [37] ; Acts x. 4 ; (xxii. 9 Rec.) ; xxiv. 25 ; Rev. .\i. 13. Theophr. char^ 25 (24), 1 ; [1 Alacc. xiii. 2 ; in a good sense. Sir. xix. 24 (21)]. (Actively, inspiring fear, terrible, Soph. O. C. 39.) * 4)i-(t>uo-d(i>, -a [see ev, III. 3] : 1 aor. hetpvarjaa; to blow H or breathe on : riva, Jn. xx. 22, where Jesus, after the manner of the Hebrew prophets, expresses by the S}Tn- bolic act of breathing upon the apostles the communi- cation of the Holy Spirit to them, — having in view the ])rimary meaning of the words pn and Ttvevpu [cf. e. g. Ezek. xxxvii. 5]. (Sept.; Diosc, Aret., Geop., al. ; \to inflate, Aristot., al.].) * e(i-»jTos [see (v, HI. 3], -ov, {ip.(^va> to implant), in prof. auth. [fr. Hdt. down] inborn, implanted by nature; cf. Grimm, E.xeget. Hdb. on Sap. [xii. 10] p. 224; im- planted bij others' instruction : thus Jas. i. 21 tok cfKpvrov \6yov, the doctrine implanted by your teachers [al. by God: cf. Bruckner in De Wette, o» Huther ad loc], Si^acrBe iv npavrrjTt, receive like mellow soil, as it were.* €v, a preposition taking the dative after it ; Hebr. 3 ; Lat. in with abl. ; Eng. in, on, at, with, bi/, among. [W. § 48 a. ; B. 328 (282) sq.] It is used I. Locai,ly; 1. of Place proper ; a. in the in- terior of some whole ; within the hmits of some space : cv yafrrpi, Mt. i. 18 ; iv Bt]6\e€fi, ^It. ii. 1 ; iv ttj TroXet, Lk. vii. 37 ; iv rjj louSat'a. iv -rfi ipjjpxo, iv tw TrXot'w, iv toj ovpavM, and innumerable other exx. b. in (un) the surface of a place, (Germ, auf): iv tw opei, Jn. iv. 20 sq. ; Heb. viii. 5 ; iv -rrXa^i, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; iv rrj ayopa, JNIt. x.x. 3 ; iv rfi 68m, !Mt. v. 25, etc. c. of proximity, at, near, by : iv rais "ycowats rav TrXaTeimy, ^It. vi. 5 ; iv ra 2i.\adfi, at the fountain Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4 ; iv toj ya^o- (pvKaKia, Jn. viii. 20 [see B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Treasury ; and on this pass, and the preceding cf. AV. 385 (360)] ; Kadi^dv iv rr/ 8e|ta 6eov etc., at the right hand : Heb. i. 3 ; viii. 1 ; Eph. i. 20. d. of the contents of a writ- ing, book, etc. : iv rfi imoToXfi, 1 Co. v. 9 ; iv Kf^oKlbi ^tj3\iov ypa(f)(iv, Heb. x. 7 ; iv ttj 0i/3Xm, toj ffiffXiio, Rev. xiii. S; Gal. iii. 10: iv tw v6p.a, Lk. xxiv. 44 ; Jn. i. 45 (46) ; iv Tois TrpncpT^-rats, in the book of the prophets, Acts xiii. 40; iv 'HXi'a, in that portion of Scripture which treats of Elijah, Ro. xi. 2, cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; [Delitz.'t (Ileb. ix. 9), and by syncope eVfoTcos; fut. mid. cVorijcro/iat ; to place in or among; to put in; in pf., plpf., 2 aor., and in mid. (prop, as it were to stand in siyht, stand near) to be upon,, impend, threaten: 2 Th. ii. 2; fut. mid. 2 Tim. iii. 1. pf. ptcp. close at hand, 1 Co. vii. 26; as often in (irk. writ, (in the granunarians 6 ivforo)! .sc. xP"^"^ '^ '''c present tense [i^f. Pliilo de jilant. Noe § 27 Tpiptpijs ^pumi, 05 els rov rrapeXrjXvOoTa Km cVeirrwTd Kai peWovTu Ttpve- a6ai TricjwKfv] ), jiresent : 6 Katpos 6 «VtcrTuis, Ileb. i.\. 9 ; tu ivearioTa o])|). to ra ptXKovra, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; 6 fvefTTtJas alibv novrjpos in tacit contrast with roi jLteXXoj/rt alaivi, (ial. i. 4, (Basil, ep. 67 ad Melet. [iii. p. 151 c. ed. Benedict.] uXJjeXipa SiBuypara fj ((j)i)8ia irpiij re tok ivetTTorra alSiva (cat roi» piWovra). [!Many (so R. V.) would adopt the meaning present in 2 Th. ii. 2 and 1 Co. vii. 26 also ; but cf. JSley. on Gal. 1. c] * iv-ur\ia>; 1 aor. evta-xvcra; [cf. B. 145 (127)]; 1. iiitrans. to yrow sirony, to receive strength: Acts ix. 19 [here AVII Tr mrg. e'vicrx^dr]^ ; (Aristot., Theojdir., Diod., Sept.). 2. trans, to make strony, to strenythen, (2 S. xxii. 40 ; Sir. 1. 4 ; llippocr. leg. p. 2, 26 6 xpdvos raira ndvra evia-xvet) ', to strengthen one in soul, to inspirit : Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.].* ivK-, see e'y/c- and s. v. ev, III. 3. [ev-fUvw, see eppevia arul s. v. ev, III. 3.] cvvaros or evaros (which latter form, supported by the authority alike of codd. .and of inscrr., has been every- where restored by LTTrWlI; cf. [s. v. N, v; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80] ; Kruger § 24, 2, 12; W. 43; [found once (Rev. x.xi. 20) in Ree."]). -drr], -arov, [fr. Ilom. down], ninth : Rev. xxi. 20 ; the evdrq apa, spoken of in Mt. x.x. 5; xxvii. 45sq. ; Mk. xv. 33sq. ; Lk. xxiii. 44; Acts iii. 1 ; X. 3, 30, corresponds to our 3 o'clock in the after- noon; for the si.Kth hour of the Jews coincides with the twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth with us. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Hour.]* ivvea, oi, at, rd, [fr. Ilom. down], nine : Lk. xvii. 1 7 ; see the full. ^vord. tvv£VT)KOVTa-evvf'a, more correctly e'vevijKovTa evvea (i. e. written separately, and the first word with a single v, as by L T Tr WH ; cf. [s. v. N, v; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80 ; WH. App. p. 148] ; W. 43 sq. ; Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc- ]). 95). ninety-nine : Mt. xviii. 1 2 S(i. ; Lk. xv. 4, 7.* evveo'i 217 evo-)(o6i), Dan. iv. 16 Theodot., fr. dn-eveoo).* ev-veud) : impf. ivlvevov; to nod to, signifij or express by a nod or sign : rivi ti, Lk. i. 62. (Arstph. in Babyloniis frag. 58 [i. e. 22 ed. Brunck, 16 p. 4.55 Didot] ; Lcian. dial, meretr. 12,1; with it^6aXjia added, Prov. vi. 13; x. 10.)» evvoia, -ar, 17, {vovs) \ 1. the act of thinking, consid- eration,medilation; (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a thought, no- tion, conception; (Plat. Phaedop. 73 c, etc. ; esp. in phil- osoph. writ., as Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57 ; Acad. 2, 7 and 10 ; Epict. diss. 2, 11, 2 sq., etc. ; Pint. plac. plulos. 4, 11, 1 ; Diog. Laert. 3, 79). 3. mind, understanding, viJl; manner of thinking and feeling ; Oerm. Oesinnting, (Eur. Hel. 1026 ; Diod. 2, 30 var. ; TOiavr-qv euvniau e^Trotelv rivi, Isoc. p. 112 d. ; TT]pr](Tov TTjv ifxrjv [iov\r]v Kal '^vvoiav, Prov. iii. 21 ; (j>v\da-; 1 aor. iv(iKr)(Ta; Sept. for 32^' ; to dwell in ; in the N. T. with iv rtvi, dat. of pers. in one, everywhere metaphorically, to dwell in one and influence him (for good) : iv rwi, in a person's sn\il, of the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 11 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; of TriVrtt, 2 Tim. i. 5; [of sin, Ro. vii. 17 T WII (for simple oiVIi/)] ; iv v/iiv, in your assembly, of Christian truth, Col. iii. l(j ; iv avTois, in a Christian church, of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. iii. 16 ; [al. understand tlie plirase in Col. and Co. 11. cc. internally, "in your hearts"; but see Meyer].* €V-ovTO, TO, see iveifxi. 4v-opK(^; to adjure, put under oath, solcmnhi entreat, with two ace, one of him who is adjured, one of him by whom he is adjured [B. 147 (128)] : 1 Th. v. 27 L T Tr WII, for RG 6pKiXM^[on the inf. fol'. cf. B. 276 (237)]. Elsewhere not found except once [twice] in mid. ivop- Kt^opm in Boeckh, Inscrr. ii. p. 42, no. 1933 ; [and Joseph, antt. 8, 15, 4 Dind., also Bekk.] ; the subst. ivopKto-fios occurs in Synes. [1413 b. Migne] ; once also ivopKeto in Schol. ad Lcian. Catapl. c. 23 ivoprw erf koto, mv Trarpos ; [to which Soph. Lex. s. v. adds Porph. Adm. 208, 18 ivopKu o-e (Is rbv 6euv Iva aTreX^j/s].* €vdTt)s, -TITOS, fj, (fr. fff, ivos, one), uidty (Aristot., Plut.) ; i. q. unanimity, agreement : with gen., t^s n-i'o-Tf wr, Eph. iv. 13 ; Toi TTveip,aTos, ib. vs. 3.* €v-oxXe'u, -w ; [pres. pass. ptcp. «Vo;(Xov/i€i/09] ; {ox\ia>, fr. oxKos a crowd, annoyance) ; in tlie classics fr. Ar- stph., Xen., Plat, on; to excite disturbance, to trouble, annoy, (iv, in a. person) ; in Grk. writ. foU. by both riva and nvi; pass, with airo nvos, Lk. vi. 18 T Tr WII ; absol. of the growth of a jioisonous plant, fig. represent- ing the man who corrupts the faith, piety, character, of the Christian church : Heb. xii. 1.5 fr. Deut. xxix. 18 after cod. Alex, which gives ivox>^fl ^o^ f" X°^V' which agreeably to the Hebr. text is the reading of cod. Vat. (Gen. .\lviii. 1 ; 1 S. xix. 14, etc.) [COMP. : jrap-f raxXeo).] * i'voxos, -ov, i. q. d ivexofjtevos, one who is held in any- thing, so that he cannot escape; hound, under obligation, subject to, liable : with gen. of the thing by which one is bound, SovXdas, Heb. ii. 15 ; used of one who is held by, possessed with, love and zeal for anything ; thus twv I3il3\iav. .Sir. prolog. 9 ; with dat. roh ipcoriKois, Plut. ; [on supposed distinctions in meaning betw. the constr. w. the gen. and w. the dat. (e. g. ' the constr. with the dat. expresses 1 i a b i 1 i t y, that with the gen. carries the mean- ing further and implies either the actual or the right- ful hold.' Green) see Schafer on Demosth. v. p. 323; cf. W. § 28, 2; B. 170 (148)]. As in Grk. writ., chieflyr in a forensic sense, denoting the connection of a person either with his crime, or with the penalty or trial, or with that against whom or which he has offended ; so a. absol. guilty, irorthy of punishment: Lev. xx. 9, 11, 13, IC, 27; 1 Mace. xiv. 45. b. with gen. of the thing by the violation of which guilt is contracted, (/«(7^// of am/thing: Tov iTwpaTos K. ToC olpaTos ToO Kvpiov, guilty of a crime committed against the body and blood of the Lord, 1 Co. xi. 27 [see Meyer ; W. 202 (190 sq.)] ; ndvTcov, sc. f'lTaX- /ifiTMi', Jas. ii. 1 ; oJ ?ra;^oi' uou. Is. liv. 1 7. c. with gen. of the crime : alwviov opapTrjparos \^an eternal sin2,^ik. iii. 29 L T Tr txt. WII ; (ribv ^ini'ui/, Plat. legg. 11, 914 e. ; xXoir^r, Philo de Jos. §37; UpoavXlat, 2 Mace. xiii. 6; Aristot. oec. 2 [p. 1349% 19], and in other ex.x.; but much of tener in the classics with dat. of the crime ; cf . Passow or [L. and S.] s. v.). d. with gen. of the penalty : Savdrov, Mk. .xiv. 64 ; Mt. xxvi. 66 ; (icn. xxvi. 1 1 ; alavtov Kpiafas, Mk. iii. 29 Rec. ; gfo-ftoO [ah dat.], Dem. p. 1229, 11. e. with dat. of the tribunal; liable to this or that tribunal i. c. to punishment to be imposed by this or that tribunal : TTJ KpltTfi, Tw avveSplco, Mt. V. 21 sq. ; tvoxos ypacpfj, to be indirteil, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 64; cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Ilebr. ii. ■] p. 340 sip ; [W. 210 (198)]. f. by a use unknown to Grk. .writ, it is connected with eis and the ace. of the place where the punishment is to be suffered : th t. yeeu- vav ToC TTvpos, a pregn. constr. [W. 213 (200) ; 621 (577)] (but cf. B. 170 (148) [who regards it as a vivid circumlo- cution for the dat.; cf. Green, Crit. Notes (ad loc.) 'liable as far' in respect of penal consequence 'as the fiery G.']^ viz. to go away or be cast into etc. Mt. v. 22.* MvToKfia 218 evrot iynr- pee «/nn-- anil s. v. fv, ill. 8 fine print. cvTaX)i.a, -Tor, to, (tWAXo^ai [see e i/reXXo)]), a precept : pliir.. -Mt. XV. 9; Mk. vii. 7 ; Col. ii. 22. (^Is. .\.\i.\. 13 SiSda-KoiTa evTaKfiaTa dvBparraiv ; [Job .\xiii. 11,12]. Not fuunil in prof. auth. ; [W. 2.^].) * {vTaia^ci) ; 1 aor. inf. €VTa(piaaai ; to see to to cWai/xa (fr. tv and radios), i. e. to prepare a body ./or burial, by the use of every requisite provision and funereal adorn- ment, to wit, baths, vestments, flowers, wreaths, jier- f umes, libations, etc. ; to lay out a corpse (Lat. pollin- gere) : Mt. xxvi. 12; Jn. xix. 40. (Gen. 1. 2 sq.; Anthol. 11, 123, 5; Plut. de esu earn. 1, .'), 7 mor. p. 993 c.) * €VTa<|>ia(r(ios, -oO, o, ((vracpid^u), ([. v.), preparation of a body /or liiirial: Mk. xiv. 8 ; .In. xii. 7. (Sehol. ad Kur. Phoen. 1G54; [Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1009].)« Iv-Tt'Wu : («XXm eipiiv. to TfXc'm) ; several times in the poets (Pind. Olymp. 7, 73) and the later writers (fn-eTaX/ce, .Joseph, antt. 7, 14, 5 [but Hekk. ivTeraXBai]; Ka6ios iirreTa\Tal ooi. passively, Sir. vii. 31); generally, and so always in the X. T., depon. mid. ci/re'XXo^at; fiit. «vrfXoOftat ; 1 aor. (veTdKajirjv ; pf. 3 pers. sing. IvrtToKTai (Acts xiii. 47) ; Sept. very often for i^5V; to order, com- mand to be done, enjoin : nepi tivos, Ileb. xi. 22; iveret- \aTO Xe'ymx, Mt. XV. 4 [R T] ; rtfl, Acts i. 2 ; [with Xiyav added, Mt. xvii. 9] ; with ovtu> added, Acts xiii. 47; Ka6as, [Mk. xi. C IIL mrg.] ; Jn. .xiv. 31 R GT; foil, by inf. Mt. xix. 7; Tivl, foil, by inf. [13. § 141, 2; 273 (237)], Jn. viii. 5 Rec; rm, Iva [cf. B. 237 (204)], Jlk. xiii. 34 (Joseph, antt. 7, 14, 5; 8,14,2); rm rt, Mt. xxviii. 20; ^Mk. .\. 3; Jn. XV. 14,17; nvi nfpl rtvos, gen. of pars., Mt. iv. G ; Lk. iv. 10, fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 11 sq. SiaOijKrjii (vrfWetrBta npos Ttva, to command to be delivered to oni', lleb. ix. 20; cf. «ferft'Aaro avrio Trpos \aov avTov, Sir. xiv. 3 ; the phrase fVTeKkeirBat (jtvi) SiadijKTjv occurs also in Josh, xxiii. 16; Judg. ii. 20 ; Jer. xi. 4 ; Ps. ex. (cxi.) 9, but in another sense, as appears from the full expression Sta6r)Kriv, ^v ivfTeiXaro vpXv 7>oifiv, Deut. iv. 13. [Syn. see KcKeva, fin.]- «VTeflflcv, adv. of place, /rom this place, hence, (as ««- £ev thence) : Mt. xvii. 20 RG; Lk. iv. 9 ; xiii. 31 ; xvi. 26 Rec. ; Jn. ii. 16 ; [vii. 3] ; xiv. 31 ; xviii. 36 ; einfiBtv K- (VTiiidfv, on the one side and the other, on each side : Jn. xLx. IS ; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. [cf. Num. xxii. 24 ; Dan. xii. 5 Thcodot.] ; metaph. hence, i. e./rom that cause or ori- gin, froin this source, i. q. « tovtov [see ix, II. 8],- Jas. iv. 1 [W. 161 (152); B. 400 (342)].* c'v-T€u|is. -f(ur. fj, (ivTvyxre- cious: \idos, 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, (Is. xxviii. 16); honorable, noble, Lk. xiv. 8 ; rivi, dear to one, Lk. vii. 2 ; tvripov (Xf" '■"'" '" ''"/'^ one dear or in honor, to value highli/, Phil. ii. 29. [(Soph., Plat., al.)]* fvToXT|, -ijf, ij, {ivreWto or ivrtWopai, q. v.), fr. Pind. and lldt. down; .Sept. often for nVi-p, in the Pss. the plur. fVroXai also for D'Hlpa ; an order, command, charge, prcrepi ; 1. iniiv. a charge, injunction : Lk. xv. 29 ; ivTo\i)v "Kap^dvdv jrapd twos, Jn. X. 18 ; npos riva, Acts xvii. 15 ; Xa/3f i>» fvroXas irept tivos. Col. iv. 10 ; that which is prescribed to one liy reason of his odice, eiToXr)!/ ex^'" foil, by inf., lleb. vii. 5 ; (vtoXtjv StSuvai nvt, Jn. .\iv. 31 LTrWII; with ti fwr^ added, of Christ, whom (lod commanded what to teach to incn, Jn. xii. 49 ; {j (irroXi) airov, of (iod, respecting the same thing, vs. 30. 2. a commandment, i. e. a prescribed rule in accordance with which a thing is done; a. univ. eVroX^ aapKixfj [-I'w; G L T Tr WII], a precept relating to lineage, Heb. vii. 16 ; of ihe Mo.saic precept concerning the priesthood, lleb. vii. 18 ; of a magistrate's order or edict : ivroXtiv StSuvat, ira, Jn. xi. 57. b. ethically; a. used of the coniniand- nientK of the Mosaic law : ij ivroXfj Toij 6eoi, what God prescribes in the law of Moses, Mt. xv. 3, (and Rti in vs. 6) ; Mk. vii. 8 sq. ; esp. of particular ])recepts of this law as distinguished from 6 vo'/nof (the law) their bod)' or sum : !Mt. xxii. 36, 38; Mk. x. 5 ; xii. 28 scjq. ; Ro. vii. 8-13 ; xiii. 9 ; Eph. vi. 2 ; lleb. ix. 19 ; Kara t. citoXiji', according to the precej)t of the law, Lk. xxiii. 56 ; plur., Mt. [v. 19] ; xxii. 40; Mk. x. 19: [Lk. xviii. 20]; njpelv Tas evToXds, Mt. xi.x. 17 ; iropiVfaOai iv t. fVroXaif, Lk. i. 6; o vdpos Toiv fvToXtav, the law containing the jirecepts, Kjili. ii. 15 (see SiJ-y^ia, 2). p. of the precepts of Jewish tradition: eiToXai dvdpmniov, Tit. i. 14. 7. univ. of the commandments of God, esp. as' promulgated in tlie Chris- tian religion: 1 Jn. iii. 23; iv. 21 : v. 3 ; eVroXiji/ hibovai, 1 Jn. iii. 23 ; ivroXriv (^fiVjlva, 1 -In. iv. 21 ; evTo\r]v Xa^fiv napa tov imrpos, 2 Jn. 4 ; rfipTjois firroXwv 6eov, 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Tijptix Tas emoXas airov, 1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. ; iii. 22, 24 ; v. 2 [here L T Tr AVII ctoiw/xei'], 3 : or rov Btov, Rev. xii. 17; .xiv. 12; Troifivraf ti'ToXas avrov, Rev. .x.xii. 14 RG; irepmarflv Kara ras eVroXat avrov, 2 Jn. 6 ; of those things which (iod commanded to be done by Christ, Jn. XV. 10' ; of the precepts of Christ relative to the orderly management of affairs in religious assemblies, 1 Co. xiv. 37 R G L Tr AVH ; of the moral precepts of Christ and his apostles : eWoXt/v 8i86vai, Iva, Jn. xiii. 34 ; eVroX^i» ypd(f>(iv. 1 Jn. ii. 7 s(]. ; [2 Jn. 5] ; ras (vro\as TTjpf'iv, An. [.xiv. 13] ; XV. 10"; ej((tv rds ivT. k. TT]p('iv avrds, "hidjere in inemoria et servare in vita " (^1 ugustlne), .In. xi\. 21 ; avTTj foTiv r] (VT. Iva, Jn. xv. 12, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 23. ^ (vto\jj, collectively, of the whole body of the moral preec])ts of Christianity: 1 Tim. vi. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 2, (thus ri cvToXrj TOV Beov, Polyc. ad Phil. 5).* IvToinos, -OK, (t-o'ttos), a dweller in a place ; a resident or native of a place : Acts xxi. 12. (Soph. [?], Plat., al.) * «vt4s, adv., ([fr. eV], opp. to cktos), within, inside : with gen. evTos vpSiv, within you, i. e. in the midst of you, Lk. xvii. 21, (ivTos avrav, Xen. an. 1, 10, 3 [but see the pass.]: ivros TovTav, Hell. 2, 3, 19; al.) ; others, within evrpeira 219 eVCOTTlOV you (i. e. in your souls), a meaning which tlie use of the word permits (eWo's fiov, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 4 ; cviii. (cix.) 22, etc. ; [Ilippol. ref. haer. 5, 7.8; Petrus Alex, ep. can. 5]), but not tlie context ; to f j'To'f, the inside, lit. xxiii. 26.* «v^pe'iriD; [Mid., pres. cWpeVo/tat ; impf. iveTpfTTOfirjv^ ; 2 aor. pass, everpcmrfv ; 2 fut. mid. [i. e. pass, with mid. force, B. 52 (45)] evrpanrjcrofiai ; prop, to turn about, so in pass, even in Hom. ; nvd, prop, to turn one upon him- self, i. e. to shame one, 1 Co. iv. 14 (Diog. Laert. 2, 29 ; Ael. V. h. 3, 17 ; Sept.); pass, to be ashamed: 2 Th. iii. 14 ; Tit. ii. 8. Mid., nvd, to reverence a person : Mt. xxi. 37 ; Mk. xii. 6 ; Lk. xviii. 2, 4 ; xx. 13 ; Ileb. xii. ; Ex. X. 3; Sap. ii. 10 ; Polyb. 9, 36, 10; 30, 9, 2 ; Biois, Diod. 19, 7 ; so in (irk. writ., esp. fr. Plut. on ; the earlier Greeks said evrpeTrecrOat rivoi ; so also Polyb. 9, 31, 6 ; [cf. W. § 32, 1 b. a.; B. 192 (166)].* cv-Tp€' : [pres. pass. ptcp. iirrpe(p6ii€vos'] ; to nourish in: Tiva Tivi, a person in a thinf/; metaph. to educate, form tlie mind : toi? Xoyot? t^s iriiTTews, 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; rois voiiots, Plat. legg. 7 p. 798 a.; Pliilo, vict. offer. § 10 sub fin.; TOLs ifpois ypdp.paa-1. Phil. leg. ad Gai. § 29 sub fin.* c'v-Tpo(ios, -01/, (jpopos, el. e/x(^o/3o5), trembling, terrified : Acts vii. 32 and xvi. 29 evrp. yevopfvos, becoming tremu- lous, made to tremble; Heb. xii. 21 [Tr mrg. WII mrg. ^KTpopos, q. V.]. (Sept. ; 1 Mace. xiii. 2 ; Plut. Fab. 3.) * €v-Tpoir^, ~ijs* fj, (evrpena, q. v.), fthame : Trpos ivrpoTrfjv vplti Xe'yo) [or XoXm], to arouse your shame, 1 Co. vi. 5 ; XV. 34. (Ps. xxxiv. (.XXXV.) 26 ; Ixviii. (IxLx.) 8, 20 ; respect, reverence. Soph., Polyb., Joseph., al.) * ev-Tpv(|>aci), -w ; (see Tpv(j)da and rpvcprj) ; to live in lux- tiri/, lire delicatehj or luxnriovshj, to rerel in : (v rals aTTdrats [L Tr txt. WHmrg. dyuTrms, seedydjn;. 2] airaiv, (on the meaning see aTrdTrj), 2 I'et. ii. 13 [cf. W. § 52, 4, 5]. (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 30; Diod. 19, 71 ; also to take de- light in : iv dyadois, Is. Iv. 2 ; with dat. of thing, 4 Mace, viu. 7; Ildian. 3, 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.].) *■ ev-TV'YX'^'"" ■ "- ^"i"- evcTvxov ; generally with a dat. either uf pers. or of thing; 1. to light upon a person or a thing, fall in with, hit upon, a person or a thing; so often in Attic. 2. to go to or meet a person, esp. for the purpose of conversation, consultation, or supplication, (Polyb., Plut., Aelian, al.) : with the addition mpi twos, gen. of person, for the purpose of consulting about a per- son. Acts XXV. 24 [R. V. made suitl ; to make petition : iveTv^ovTw Kvpia Kal iSfrjdrjv avToiJ, Sap. viii. 21 ; eveTv^ov Tw ^aaiKfl TTjv aiToKv(nv . . . cdrovpfvoi, 3 Macc. vi. 37 ; hence, to pray, entreat: vnep with gen. of pers. to make intercession for any one (the dat. of the pers. approached in prayer being omitted, as evident from the context), Ko. viii. 27, 34 ; Heb. vii. 25, (foil, by Trepi with gen. of person, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 56, 1); tiv\ xard nvos, [to plead with one against any onej, to accuse one to any one, Ro. xi. 2, cf. 1 Macc. viii. 32 ; x. 61, 63 sq. ; xi. 25. (Not found in Sept.) [Comp. : vnfp-fvrvyxdva.']* «v-Tu\£; l(rrdvat. Acts vi. 6; Kadi)crdai, Rev. xi. 16; 6vpa dveiaypevr) ev. Ttvor, i. q. a door opened for one (see 6vpa, c. y. [B. 173 (150)]), Rev. iii. 8 ; after verbs signifying motion to a place : ndevat, Lk. v. 18 ; dvn^alvetv. Rev. viii. 4 ; ^dWeiv, Rev. iv. 10 ; irmreiv or jtecreiv (of worshippers). Rev. iv. 10 ; T. 8 ; [vii. 11] ; npoaKweiv, Lk. iv. 7 ; Rev. iii. 9 ; XV. 4, [cf. B. u. s.; 147 (129); W. 214 (201)]. b. in metaphorical phrases after verbs signifying motion : /3ao"Tdffti/ TO ovopa . . . evojTnov eBvuiv (see ^aCTTti^co, 3), Acts ix. I."); uKdvhaKa ^dWeiv ivdm. tivos, to cast stum- bling-blocks (incitements to sin) before one. Rev. ii. 14 ; after wpoipx(0'6<>h to go before one Uke a herald, Lk. i. 1 7 ; [after npo7Topevea-6at, Lk. i. 76 WH]. in phrases in which something is siqijiosed to be done by one while standing or appearing in the presence of another [cf. B. 176 (153)] : after dpvela^dai. Lk. xii. 9 (Lchm. epirpo- adev) ; [dTrapve'toSai. ibid.] ; opoKoyelv, Rev. iii. 5 [Rec. e|o/i.]; KaTJiyopeiv, Rev. xii. 10; [abeiv. Rev. xiv. 3]; Evwf 220 e^uy(i> Kavxaa-ffai, to come before God and glory, 1 Co. i. 29 ; StKatoiv eavTov, Lk. xv\. \5. o. i. i[. (i/nid (willi) ■ in the soul of any ono : xapa ylverai fvamov twv dyyiXav, Lk. XV. 10 [al. understand this of God's joy, by reverent suggestion described a.s in llie presence «/'the angels; cf. ev ovp. vs. 73 ; ecrrat crot do^a fVwTT. tuv (rvvavaKfififVoiv, Lk. .xiv. 10 [al. take this outwardly ; of. 2 below] ; after verbs of remembering and forgetting: els fivrifio- fTvvov svajTT' (L T Tr WIl fiMTTpoaSfv^ Toi) Oeov, Acts X. 4 ; pvr]a$r]Vin ivoijT. T. deov. Acts x. 31 ; Kev. xvi, 1!' ; fTriXf- 'Kt]a-fiivov ivi>iT. T. ^eoC, I A. xii. 6 [cf. B. § 134, 3]. 2. hrj'are one's cyt's ; //( one's presence ami siijlil or hearlnrj ; a. ])roi). : ayf'iv fvuin. tivos, TA. xxiv. 43 ; this same phrase signiKcs a living together in Lk. xiii. 2G (2 S. xi. 13; 1 K. i. 25) ; crqiu'ia noif'iv, Jn. xx. 30 ; dvaKplveiv, Lk. xxiii. 14 ; evarr. ttoXXmv paprvpav, 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; add Lk. [v. 25] ; viii. 47 ; Acts xix. 9, 19 ; x.wii. 35 ; [1 Tim. V. 20]; 3 Jn. 6; Rev. iii. 5; [xiii. 13; xiv. 10]. b. metaph. : nianv e\€ ivamov tov deov, have faith, satisfied with this that it is not hidden fi-om the sight of (iod. Ho. xiv. 22 ; a^aprdi^tLv ei/. tivos (see d/iapravo) ad fin.), Lk. XV. 18, 21 ; esp. in affirmations, oaths, adjurations: fvuinwv ToC 6(ov, Toi Kvpiov, etc.. Gal. i. 20 ; 1 Tim. v. 21 ; vi. 13 ; 2 Tim. ii. 14; iv. 1. Hence those are said to do something in the presence of one who have him present to their thought, who set him l^efore their mind's eye : npoojpoiprjv [npoop. L T Tr WII] tov Kvptov evam- pov, Acts ii. 25 ; Tanetvoiadai iu. tov Kvpiov, Jas. iv. 10, (Sir. ii. 17). c. (il the instance of any one, hij his power ami , authnriti/: Rev. xiii. 12, 14; xix. 20. d. before the eyes of one, i. e. if he turns his eyes thither : Ilcb. iv. 13 (where ovK d(f)avTis fvd)7T. avTov is explained by the following •yu^w . . . Toit dcpdaXpols alrov ; cf. Job xxvi. 6 yvpvos 6 aSrjs evwniov aiiroi, liefore his look; to his viewy e. he- fore one i. e. he looking on and Judging, in one's judg- ment [W. 32: B. 172 (150) ; § 133, 14] : i(t)dvrja->iv evim. avTwv i(7fi "Krjpos, ]>k. xxiv. 11 (cf. Greek 'HpaxXfi'S^ Xr)pos trdvTa 5o. ICG; W. 33].* 'Evwx [^^'11 'Evax, see their Intr. § 4ns], ("Ai/co;^.or, -ou, o, Josei)li. antt. 1, 3,4 ; Ilebr. Ijijn initiated or iulii- ating, [cf. B. I), s. v.]), Enoch, father of Methuselah (Lk. iii. 37); on account of his extraordinary piety taken up alive by God to heaven (Gen. v. 18-24 ; Heb. xi. 5 ; [cf. Sir. xliv. IG; Joseph, antt. 1, 3, 4]) ; in the opinion of later Jews the most renowned antediluvian proj)het; to whom, towards the end of the second century before Christ, was falsely attributed an apocalyi)tical book which was afterwards combined with fragments of other apocryphal books, and preserved by the Fathers in (ircek fragments and entire in an Ethiopic transla- tion. This translation, having been found among the Abyssinian Christians towards the close of the last cen- tury, has been edited by Richard Laurence, archbishop of Cashel (" Libri Henoch versioaethiopica." Oxon. 1838), and by A. Dillmann (" Liber Henoch, aethiopice." Lips. 1851); it was translated into English by R. Laurence (1st ed. 1821 ; 3d ed. 1838 [reprinted (Seribners, N. V.) 1883; also (with notes) by G. II. Sehodde (Andover, 1882)], into (ierman by A. G. HoiTman (Jen. 1833-3H, 2 vols.) and by A. Dillmann (Lips. 1853) ; each of the last two translators added a commentary. From this book is taken the ' projihecy ' in Jude 14 sq. ; [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.), also Diet, of Chris. Biog., s. v. Enoch, The Book of].* «5, see (K. f|, oi, ai, 7-u, indecl. ninncral, six: Mt. xvii. 1; Lk. xiii. 14, etc. e'l-aY-yc'XXco : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 jjcrs. phir. f^ayydXrjTe ; llrst in lloni. II. 5, 390; properly, to lell out or forth [see f'/c, XI. 4], to declare abroad, divulge, publish : [Mk. xvi. WII (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']; with He- braistic emphasis, to make known bi/ praising or proclaim- ing, to celebrate, [A. V. shoiv forth] : 1 Pet. ii. 9. (For 130, Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 28; Ixxviii. (Lxxix.) 13, cf. Sir. xliv. 1 5.) • c'^OYopa^o) : 1 aor. i^rjyopaa-a ; [pres. mid. i^ayopd^o- pai] ; 1. to redeem i. e. by payment of a price to re- cover from the power of another, to ransom, bug off, [cf. iK, VI. 2] : prop. dtpanaiviSa, Diod. 3G, 1 p. 530 ; metaph. of Christ freeing men from the dominion of the Mosaic law at the price of his vicarious death (sec dynpd^io, 2 b.), Tivd, Gal. iv. 5 ; witlb addition of c'k ttjs Kardpas tov vdpov. Gal. iii. 13. 2. to hug tip, Polyb. 3, 42, 2; Pint. Crass. 2; Mid. W, to buy up for one's self , for one's use [W. § 38, 2 b. ; B. 192 (166 sq.)] : trop. in the obscure phrase e^ay. toc Katpdv, Eph. v. 16 and Col. iv. 5, where the meaning seems to be to make a wise and sacred use of every opportunity for doing good, so that zeal and well-;i/ (Acts vu. 10 [so Grsb.] ; xii. 11 [so Grsb.] ; xxiii. "27; see reff. in [aipico and] anipxafiai), inf. e^fXecrdai (Acts vii. 34) ; Sept. usually for '7"Xn ; to take out [cf. fV, VI. 2] ; 1. to pluck out, draw out, j. e. to root out : tov 64>Sa\p.6v, Mt. v. 29 ; xviii. 9. 2. JliJ. a. to choose out (for one's self), select, one person fi'om many : Acts xxvi. 1 7 (so for nn3 in Is. xUx. 7 [but there the Sept. has ef eXclafiTji» ; perh. Is. xlviii. 10 is meant] and sometimes in Grk. writ.; first in Hom. Od. 14, 232) [al. refer Acts 1. c. to the next head ; (see Hackett ad loc.)]. b. to rescue, deliver, (prop, to cause to he res- cued, but the middle f(M-ce is lost [cf. W. 253 (238)]) : Tiva, Acts vii. 34 ; xxiii. 27 ; nva e< Ttvos, Acts vii. 10 ; xii. 11; Gal. i. 4; (Ex. iii. 8, etc. ; Aesohyl. suppl. 924; Hdt. 3, 137; Dera. 256, 3; Polyb. 1, 11, 11).* (|-aipu : fut. i^apa (1 Co. v. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. i^dpare (ib. G L T Tr WH) ; 1 aor. pass, i^rjp- 6t]v, to lift up or take away out of a, place; to remove [cf. tK, VI. 2] : nua ex, one from a company, 1 Co. v. 2 Rec. [see aip, 3 c] ; vs. 13 fr. Deut. [xix. 19 or] xxiv. 9.* t^iT€'(i>, -£ : 1 aor. mid. f^rjTtjadprjv; to ask from, de- mand of, [cf. eic, \^. 2]. Mid. to ask from (or he;/) for one's self : rtvd, to ask that one be given up to one from the power of another, — in both senses, either for good, to beg one from another, ask for the pardon, the safeti/, of some one, (Xen. an. 1, 1, 3; Dem. p. 546, 22; Plut. Per. 32; Palaeph. 41, 2) ; or in a bad sense, /or torture, for punishment, (Plut. mor. p. 417 d. de defect, orac. 14; in prof. auth. often with this sense in the act.) ; so of Satan asking the apostles out of the power and keeping of God to be tried by afflictions (allusion being made to Job i. 1-12) : Lk. xxii. 31 (Test. xii. Patr. p. 729 [test. Benj. § 3] eiiv ra TTPevpara tov BeAtap sis ndoav TTOvrjplav 6X1- ■^fo)? € ^aiTTjawirrai vpds).* i|-a(vT]s, affn/a, avii) : fut. f'|aX€i'\|/-a): 1 aor. ptcp. (^aXeiifras :, 1 aor. pass, infin. i^aXetcpdrjvai [(WII -Xicpd^vat : see their App. p. 154, and s. v. 1, i below)] ; 1. (e^ denoting completeness [cf. «, VI. 6]), to anoint or wasli in every jMTt, hence to besmear : i. q. cover with lime (to white- wash or plaster), to t€i;(os, Thuc. 3, 20 ; touj toi;(ous tow Upov [here to overlay with gold etc.], 1 Chr. xxix. 4 ; ttiv oiKiav, Lev. xiv. 42 (for n?D). 2. (e^ denoting re- moval [cf. cK, VI. 2]), to wipe off] wipe away: SaKpvov OTTO [GLTTrWH «] riiv ocpSaXp-wv, Rev. vii. 17; x.xi. 4 [R G WH mrg., al. eV] ; to obliterate, erase, wipe out, blot out, (Aeschyl., Ildt., al. ; Sept. for nnn) : ti. Col. ii. 14; TO ompxi ck Trjs /Si'SXou, Rev. iii. 5 (Ps. Lxviii. (Ixix.) 29, cf. Deut. ix. 14 ; xxv. 6) ; ras afiaprlas, the guilt of sins, Acts iii. 19, (Ps. cviii. (cix.) 13; to di/a- pr)pa, rai dvo/jilas, Is. xliii. 25; Ps. 1. (Ii.) 11 ; Sir. xlvi. 20: T. apaprias diTaX(is, ^, (J^avlurqpi, q. v.), a rising up (Polyb. 3, 55,4); a rising again, resurrection: ravveKpav or (L TTr WH) ^ « twi/ veKpav, Phil. iii. 11.* €|-ava-T€'\Xci> ; 1 aor. i^aviTsiXa ; 1. trans, to make spring up, cause to shoot forth : Gen. ii. 9, etc. 2. in- trans. to spring up : Mt. xiii. 5 ; ilk. iv. 5. (Rare in prof. auth. [of. W. 102 (97)].)* €^v-[o~n]p.i: 1 aor. c^ai/eVTT^o-a; 2 aor. e^.TvcoTTji/; 1. to make rise up, to raise up, to produce : a-irfppa, ilk. xii. 19 ; Lk. XX. 28, (Hebr. y-]], D'pn, Gen. xxxviu. 8). 2. 2 aor. act. to rise in an assembly to speak (as in Xen. an. 6, 1, 30): Acts XV. 5.* «l-an-aToua, -S ; 1 aor. i^tpTd-rqaa ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. fem. t^aTrarqdeiaa ; (c|- strengthens the simple verb [cf. ex, VI. 6]), to deceive: Ro. vii. 11; xvi. 18; 1 Co. iii. 18; 2 Co. xi. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 : pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 [L T Tr WH]. (From Hom. down ; twice in the O. T. viz. Ex. viii. 29 ; Sus. vs. 56.)* e|dirtva, (a somewhat rare later Grk. form for i^airlvqs, l^al4>vt)s, q. V. [W. § 2, 1 d.]), adv., suddenly : Mk. ix. 8. (Sept.; Jambl., Zonar., al. ; Byzant.)* e|-airopi'ii) and (so in the Bible) depon. pass, i^airoplo- fuu, -ovpat ; 1 aor. i^rinopr]6t)v ; to he utterly at a loss, he utterly destitute of measures or resources, to renounce all hope, be in despair, [cf. ix, YL 6], (Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) : 2 Co. iv. 8 (where it is distinguished fr. the simple diropeopai) ', tcvos of anrthing : tov f^i/, 2 Co. i. 8, on this gen. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 828 sq. (toC dpyvplov, to be utterly in want of, Dion. Hal. 7, 18; act. with dat. of respect, ToTs Xoyia-pois, Polyb. 1, 62, 1 ; once in the O. T. absol. Ps. Ixxxvii. (Lxxxviii.) 16).* €^-a'iro-, sec e^aipeti}. €|«'pa(jta, -Tos, TO, (fr. e^epda to eject, cast forth, vomit forth; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. G4), i-07nit; what is cast out by vomiting: 2 Pet. ii. 22, cf. Prov. xxvi. 11. (Dioscor. de venenis c. 19 (p. 29 ed. S[)reng.) [an example of the verb. Cf. Wetst. on Pet. 1. c., and esj). GataLcr, Advers. misccll. <(j1. 853. sq.].) * [cl-epauvdu T Tr WII for e^epevvcla), q. v. ; see epawda.] i^pevvcM, -a : 1 aor. i^j]pevvr](Ta ; to search out, search anxiously and diligently : nepl twos, 1 Pet. i. 10 [where T Tr WII e^epavv. (p v.]. (1 Mace. iii. 48; ix. 26 ; Sept.; Soph., Eur., Polyb., Pint., al.) * '&^PX°H-0'^ i inqif. e^VPX^H-V > ^"'- e^e'Xeiitropai ; 2 aor. i^riXdov, plur. 2 pcrs. e^rjXdeTe, 3 pers. e^rjXdov. ami in L T Tr^VII the Alex, forms (see dnep^opai., init.) e^t)\- Bare (^It. xi. 7, 8, 9; xxvi. 55 ; Jlk. xiv. 48, etc.), i^rfKBav (1 Jn. ii. 19 ; 2 Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Bov, 3 Jn. 7, etc.]) ; pf. f'lfXijXu^a; plpf. i^f\T)\vdeiu (Lk. viii. 38, etc.) ; Sept. for Ni" times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. properly ; a. with mention of the place out of which one goes, or of the point from which he departs ; a. of those who leave a place of their own accord : with the gen. alone, ilt. x. 14 (L T Tr WH insert e^a) ; Acts xvi. 39 R G. foil, by « : Mk. v. 2 ; vii. 31 ; Jn. iv. 30 ; viii. 59 ; Acts vii. 3 sq. ; 1 Co. v. 10 ; Rev. xviii. 4, etc. foil, by e^io with gen. — with addition of eis and ace. of place, Mt. xxi. 1 7 ; Mk. xiv. 08 ; or napd with ace. of place, .Acts xvi. 13 : or npos two, ace. of pers., Ileb. xiii. 13. e^epX- dno with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 R G ; Mk. xi. 12 : Lk. ix. 5; Phil. iv. 15; [Ileb. xi. 15 RG]; e^e'px- UnBev, Mt. XV. 21 ; Mk. vi. 1, 10 ; Lk. ix. 4 ; [xi. 53 T Tr txt. WH txt.]; Jn. iv. 43; Sflf v f ^^^^ov, Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 24 [vet see 0. below], i^epx- ex etc. to come forth from, out of a place : .Mt. viii. 2.s ; Rev. xiv. 15, 17, 18 [L oin. WH br. c^ijX.] ; xv. G ; e^eXde'w diro, to come out (towards one) /ro»!, Mt. xv. 22. In the Gosjiel of John Christ, who by his incarnation left his place with God in heaven, is said e^e\6eiv napii tou deov : xvi. 27 and R G Lmrg. in vs. 28; dirb toO 6env, xiii. 3 ; xvi. 30 ; ck tov deoii, from his place with God, from (iod'-s abode, viii. 42 and L txt. T Tr WII in xvi. 28. p. of those expelled or cast out (esp. of demons driven forth from a body of which tliey have held possession) : ev is often placed before anotlier finite verb of de- parture : Mt. viii. 32 ; xv. 21 ; xxiv. 1 (e^iKdutv [from the temple, see xxi. 23] erropeicTo uiro tov Upoii, he departed from its vicinity) ; Mk. xvi. 8; Lk. xxii. 39; Acts xii. 9, 17; xvi. 3li, 40; .xxi. 5,8. 2. figuratively; a. fxrivav, fK )Uaov Tivwv, to go out from some assembly, i. e. to for- sake it : 1 Jn. ii. 1 9 (opp. to pepevT)Kei.cTav peS' f)pa>v) ; 2 Co. vi. 17. b. to come forth from pliij: : 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. e|frdo-arc, inf. e^e- Taaai; to search out; to examine slrictli/, inquire: nepi TiKoy and with the adv. oKpiSas added, Mt. ii. 8 ; foil, by an indir. quest. Mt. x. 11 ; TLi/a inquire of some one, foil, by a direct question, Jn. x.xi. 12. (Sept.; often in Grk> writ. fr. Thuc. down.) * [€|e'4)VTls. see e^m(pl>r]s-} e^-Ti-yt'oiiai, -oiipar, impf. «|r;youfii)i' ; 1 aor. f'^i;y7) *^^- «"x"/""' """^ *" cleave to, come next to, a thing), successively, in order, (fr. Hom. down) ; d, ij, to e|^r, the next follotring, the next in suc- cession : so fi c'l^s fipepa, Lk. ix. 37 ; elliptically e'l/ t^ e|^f, sc. fipepa, Lk. vii. 11 (here WH txt. Tr txt. L mrg. eV t^VX^w 224 e^ovBepoQ) T<3 (itjs sc. XP"''V< ''^'"' ofierwarih) ; t^ «l^t, sf. rjfiipa, Alts x.\i. 1 ; XXV. 17 ; xxvii. 18.* ^I"1X"'> "^ • '" sound forth, emit sound, resound; pass, fl^yfirai Ti the soiinil of sonu'tliinj; is borne forth, is propagated : d(j>' vjiiiv «'^'JX'/'''" " ^"7"^' '""'' i^^p'^ov, from your city or from your ehiirch tlie word of the Lord lias sounded forth i. e. lias heeu.dissemiuated by report, 1 Th. i. 8, cf. De Wette ad loc. (Joel iii. 14 (iv. ly) ; Sir. xl. 13 ; 3 Maec. iii. 2. Polyb. 30, 4, 7 [not Dind.] ; Philo in Flacc. § 6 ; [quis rer. div. her. § 4] ; Jiyzant.) * 'ify%, -f(i)r, T], («x"' f"'- «^<^)> "■ '"'^''. whether of body or of mind (Xeii., Plat., Aristot., al.) ; a power acquired hi) custom, pnirtire, use, (" iirma (juaedani facilitas, duTpoXoyla /ifyiorj)!' c^iv «x""' l^iod. "2, 31 ; XoyiKiji' f^iv TTfpiTToi.ovfj.fvos, Pliilo, aUeg. legg. 1, 4).* €|-£o-n)|ii : likewise e^tarua and e^KTTuva) (Acts viii. 9 ptcp. e^ioTmi» K G, f lio-TaKcoK IjTTrWII [see (orijfii]) ; 1 aor. €^e(TTtj(Ta ; 2 aur. e^efrrrjv ; pf. inf. i^etjTaKivaL ; Mid., [pres. inf. (^ia-Taa-dm} ; inipf. 3 pers. plur. i^iaravro ; i. In pres., iuii)f., fiil., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position, to displace : riva tov , to throw one out of his mind, drive one out of liis senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; (f>p(va>v, Eur. Bacch. 850 ; hence simply to amaze, astonish, throw into wonderment: riva, Lk. xxiv. 22 ; Acts viii. 9. .2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to ■he amazed, astounded : Mt. .\ii. 23 ; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii. 56 ; Acts ii. 7, 1 2 ; viii. 13 ; ix. 21 ; x. 45 ; xii. 16, (Sept. for T>ri, to tremble, Ex. xix. 18; Ruth iii. «, etc.); f'lt- (TTTfaav fKO-Tcia-ft peyuKr/, they were amazed with a great amazement (see eKoraa-is, 3), Mk. v. 42; iv iavro'is e^i- crravTo, Mk. vi. 51 ; with dat. of the thing: /layeiair c§- earaKe'vat, had been put beside themselves with magic arts, carried away with wonder at them, Acts viii. 11 [but this form of the perf. is transitive; cf. B. 48 (41) ; Veitch 33'J] ; i^laravTo cVi with dat. of tiling, Lk. ii. 47 (Ex. .xix. 18; Sap. v. 2). b. to he out of one's mind, be- side one's self insane : 2 Co. v. 13 (opp. to craxppovflv) ; Mk. iii. 21 [cf.B. 198(171); W. § 40, 5 b.] ; (Grk. writ., where they use the word in this sense, generally add Toil (j)poiifiv, Tu>v (f)pfvav : Isoc, Eur., Polyb., al.)." t^-iOTtvw : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. f^i(rxii(n]T(, to he eminently able, to have full strength, [cf. ck, VI. 6] : foil, by an inf. Eph. iii. 1 8. (Sir. vii. 6 ; rare in Grk. writ., as Dioscor., .Strab., Plut.) * 4'|-o8os, -ov, t), (686s), exit, i. e. departure: Ileb. .\i. 22; metaph. ij €|oSds th/os the close of one's career, one's final fate, Lk. i.\. 31 ; departure from life, decease : 2 Pet. i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2 ; vii. 6 ; [Pliilo de caritate § 4] : with addition of tov (ijv, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 2 ; [of tov fiiov. Just. dial. c. Tryph. § 105].* t^\o6pevu and (ace. to the reading best attested by tlie oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LTTr WH [see o\o6pei(oJ) i^oheOpeva: fut. pass. i^o\o6p(v6rj(Topai; to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to extirpate : « ToO Xauf, Acts iii. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the 0. T. Apocr., and in Test. xii. Patr. ; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 1:11, 6, (i ; hardly in native Grk. writ.) * €^op.oXo-y€w, "(5 : 1 aor. e^top.oXuyrjoa ; Mid., [pres. «A o/xoXoyoC'^«i] ; fut. e^opo\oyT]oop.ni: [1 aor. subj. 3 ])ers. sing. -yijiTijTm, I'hil. ii. 11 K G L txt. Tr txt. WIl] ; (t'l either /o/-//i _/)-oHj the heart, freely, or publicly, openly [cf. W. 102 (97)]) ; act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro- fess ; 1. to confess : toe (i/xapxiar, Mt. iii. 6 ; Mk. i. 5 ; [Jas. V. 16 L T Tr WII], (Joseph, antt. 8, 4, 6 ; [cf. b. j. 5, 10, 5; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]); Tar TTpd^fLS, Acts xix. 18; to nupimToifinTa, Jas. v. 16 K(i; (JiTTaii, Plut. Eum. c. 17; ti)v dXijdeiau livfv jiaad- va>v, id. Anton, c. 59). 2. to jjni/'ess i. e. to acknowl- edge openly and joyfully: to ovopd Tii/or, Rev. iii. 5 Rec; foil, by !^i, Phil. ii. 11 ; with dat. of jiers. [cf. W. § 31, If.; B. 176 (153)] to one's honor, i. e. to celebrate, give praise to (so Sept. for S rriin, Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 5 ; cv. (evi.) 47; cxxi. (e.\xii.)'4, etc.; [W. 32]): Ro. xiv. 11 ; XV. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (.wiii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61,3); Tivl (dat. of pers.) foil, by on: Mt. xi. 25 ; Lk. x. 21. to jirofess that one will do something, to promise, agree, engage: Lk. xxii. 6 [Lebm. om.] ; (in tliis sense the Greeks and Ji)sc])lius use ofiokoyiiv).' €^V, Sei' f^ftTTL. e|-opkC^u ; 1. to exact an oath, to force to an oath, (Uem., Polyb., Apollod., Died., Plut., al.), for which the earlier Grks. used i^opxda, [cf. W. 102 (97)]. 2. to ad- jure : Tiva Kard twos, one by a person [c£. Kara, I. 2 a.], foil, by "iva [B. 23 7 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 03 ; (Gen. .x.xiv. 3).* c^-opKiiTTiiis, -oC, 6, («^opxifo)) ; 1. he who exacts an oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs a formula of conjuration for expelling demons : Acts xix. 13. (Joseph, antt. .s, 2, 5 ; Leian. epigr. in Anthol. 11, 427: often in the church Fathers.) * e|-opvio-(rcj : 1 aor. ptcp. f'^opi^avres', fr. Ildt. down; 1. to dig out: tovs 6(()6a\povs (prop, to jiluck out the eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Ale-x.] ; 1 S. xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116; Joseph, antt. 0, 5, 1 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 1, 1 ; al.) koI bibuvai Tivi, metaph. to renounce the most precious things for another's advantage. Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5, 67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35 ; [Wet- stein ad loc.]) ; in opposition to a very few interj). who, assuming that Paul suffered from a weakness of the eyes, understand the words literally, " Ye would have plucked out your sound eyes and have put tliem into me," see Meyer ad loc. ; [cf. reff. s. v. o-icdXoi/', fin.]. 2. to dig through : Trjv ariyrjv, ^Ik. ii. 4.* c^-ovSevEw, -(» : 1 aor. pass, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. e|ou- btvTjBy ; pf. pass. ptcp. c^ovSevqpivos ; to hold and treat (IS of no account, utterly to ilcspise : ToxXdyoi», pass., 2 Co. X. 10 Lclini. to set at nought, treat with contumely: a person, pass., Mk. ix. 12 LTr WH, (Ezek. -xxi. 10). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; [B. 28 (25) ; W. 91 (87) ; Soph. Lex. s. V. ; WH. App. p. 166].* «^-««Beviw, -£ : [1 aor. pass, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. €$oub(va6!j]; i. q. e'louSfveo), q. V. : Mk. ix. 12RG; often in Sept., esp. for n;3 and DSO. [Cf. reff. in the preced- ing word.] * ^^ov6e 225 e^ovaid^co (^ovitvio), -01 : 1 aor. i^ovBivrjcra : Pass., pf. ptcp. e^ov- £(vriiiivos\ [1 aor. ptcp. t^ovBfuriOeis:^; (see oMfi's) ; to innke of no account, to despise ulterli/: Tivd, Lk. xviii. 9; Ro. xiv. 3, 10 ; 1 Co. xvi. 11 ; rt, 1 Th. v. 20 ; Gal. iv. U (where it is coupled witli eKTrnio) ) ; in pass, oi i^ovBevr)- ficvoi, 1 Co. vi. 4 ; ra i^ovBevrmiva, 1 Co. i. 28 (see ayevr]s) ; ■6 Xo'yoi i^ovdevrjtiivoi, 2 Co. x. 10 [liere Lclim. e'^ouS.] ; « {\l6os 6) e^ovdevrjdeis ino twv oiKobofiovvraiv, set at nought, i. e. rejected, cast aside. Acts iv. 11. To treat ■with contempt (i. e. aoc. to the context, with mockery) : Lk. xxiii. 1 1 ; (for n3, Prov. i. 7 ; ni3, Ezek. xxii. 8, etc. ; CXO, 1 S. viii. 7. Sap. iv. 18 ; 2 Mace. i. 27 ; Barn. ep. 7, 9; and other eccl. writ.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; f and reff. s. v. e^oi;8et/e's fiaaiKevs, Rev. xvii. 1 2 ; ei/ii i^o i^ovcrlav, I am under authority, Mt. viii. 9 ; with TaaaofKvoi added, [Mt. viii. 9 L WH br.] ; Lk. vii. 8 ; i^ovala tivqs, gen. of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as tSiv jrvfypdrav Tuiv aKaddprmp, Mk. vi. 7 ; with fitrre eK^aAX€ii> avTd added, Mt. x. 1 ; i^ovaiav Traarjs (TapKos, authority over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (Tracrijf aapKus Kvpelau, Bel and the Drag. vs. 5) ; [gen. of the subject, tov Sai-ai/a, Acts xxvi. 18] ; eni Tiva, power over one, so as to be able to subdue, drive out, destroy, Rev. vi. 8 ; fVi to. Saip^via, Lk. ix. 1 ; or to hold submissive to one's will, Rev. xiii. 7 ; cTTi Tas TrXrjyaf, the power to inflict plagues and to put an end to them. Rev. xvi. 9 ; «Vi rat/ edvav, over the heathen nations, Rev. ii. 26 ; i-rri rtvos, to destroy one, Rev. XX. 6 ; 1^^ '" i$ovaiav em tov TTvpoi, to preside, have control, over fire, to hold it subject to his will. Rev. xiv. 18 ; €7ri Twi' v?)drQ}v, xi. 6 ; eTrdvco tivos f^ovatav fx^^^> ^^ be ruler over a thing, Lk. xix. 1 7. b. specifically, o. of the power of judicial decision: e^ovaiav i^eiv with an inf. of the thing decided : aravpciiaai and drroKv- o-ai nva, Jn. xix. 10; foil, by Kard tivos. the power of deciding agiiinst one, ibid. 11; napabovvai nva . • . T7 i^ova-ia tov fjyciiovos, Lk. xx. 20. p. of authority to manage domestic affairs: Mk. xiii. 34. c. me- tonjTnically, o. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk. iv. 6 ; jurisdiction : ck ttjs i^ovaias '"Rpahov itrrlv, Lk. xxiii. 7 (1 Mace. vi. 11 [cf. Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 2; Is. xxxix. 2]). p. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use of honeslates, dignitates, auctoritates [so the Eng. authori- ties, dignities, etc.] in reference to persons); aa. a ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44 ; 11, 32) : Ro. xiii. 1-3; plur. : Lk. xii. 11; Ro. xiii. 1; Tit. iii. 1. pp. the leading and more powerful among created be- ings superior to man, spiritual potentates ; used in the plur. of a certain class of angels (see dp)(fj. Svvapis, 6p6vos, KvptoTrjs:) : Col. i. 16 ; 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 226 sq. ; [Bp. Lghtf t. on Col. 1. c.])" ; with eV To'is (TTOvpavloii added, Eph. iii. 10 ; ivaaa e'^ovala, 1 Co. XV. 24; Eph. i. 21 ; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons: in the plur., Eph. vi. 1 2 ; Col. ii. 15 ; collectively [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 469], ij t^oviria toO dipos (see ai;p), Eph. ii. 2; ToO o-Korouf, Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or c. a.) above (cf. Lk. xxii. 53 in 2), and regard o-kotos as per- sonified; see o-KoTOj, b.]. d. a sign of the husband's authority over his wife, i. e. the veU with which propriety required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as ^a- aCKiia is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal power, i. e. a crown). [Stx. see Sura^ir, fin. On the inf. after ef and e'f ?;j«i/ cf. B. 260 (223 sq.).] » €^ou(rtd^ci> ; 1 fut. pass. i^ov^iau6J]h. eminence, excellence, superiority, (Cic. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 c^o;^^ in nullo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem e.\aequat); Sv- Spff oi KOT f^o;(i7>' oiT«f Trjs noXeuis, tlu' prominent men of the city, Acts x.w. 'i:!.* cg-virvijo) : 1 aor. subjunc. f'^uTrvio-co; (vnvot) ; to tvake vp, airuken out of sleep: [trans, aurov^, Jn. xi. 11. ([Jndg. .xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15 ; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6, 31 ; Plut. [do solert. anim. 29, 4] ; Test. xii. Patr. [I.evi § 8; Jud. § 25, etc.]; the better Grks. said dcj^imfi^a:, set Loh. ad Phryn. p. 224 ; [W. § 2, 1 d.].)» «^uTTvos. -ov, (vnvos), roused out of sleep: Acts xvi. 27. (1 Esdr. iii. 3; [Joseph, antt. 11, :!, 2].)* «{lo, adv., (fr. f^, as eo-m and f tcrto fr. is and ds) ; 1. without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. .\i. 4 ; joined with verbs: iardvai, Mt. xii. 4C, 47 [WH txt. om. the vs.]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. IG; xx. 1 1 [Lchm. om.] ; KaBqaQm, jMt. xxvi. G9 ; or with some other verb dcclariu'^ that the person without is doing something, Jlk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. o e^to, absol. he who is withnul, prop, of place; metaph., in plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church [cf. Bj). Lghtft. on Col. as below ; iley. on Mk. as below] : 1 Co. V. 12, 13 ; Col. iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; those icho are not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (cf. Meyer) WH mrg. f^u)6ev, q. v.]. With a noun added : al ?| has the force of the Lat./orns (Germ. hinau.i,heraus), forth out, out of; a. adverbially, after the verbs t^epxopai, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 68; Lk. xxii. 62; Jn. xix.4,5; Rev.iii. 12; ayo), Jn. xix.4, 13; irpoayas, Acts xvi. 30 ; i^dyai, Lk. -xxiv. 50 [R G L br.] ; /3dAX&) and cK^iiXXo), iMt. V. 13 ; xiii. 48 ; Lk. viii. 54 R G ; xiii. 28 ; xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. vi. 37 ; ix. 34, 35 ; xii. 31 ; xv. 6 ; Acts ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; ScGpo ?|o), .In. xi. 43 ; e|u Trotflp Tiva, Acts v. 34. b. as a prep, with the gen.: after dmXBeiv, Acts iv. 15; dn-otrreXXetf, Mk. v. 10; fK^dWeiv, Mk. xii. 8; Lk. iv. 29; xx. 15; Acts vii. 58; c^e'p;(f tr^at, Mt. xxi. 1 7 ; Acts xvi. 13; Heb. xiii. 13; (KKopfifaem, Jlk. xi. 19 ; i^dyeiv, Jlk. viii. 23 [R G L Tr mrg.] : trvptiv two. Acts xiv. 1 9 ; (\k(iv nvd, Acts xxi. 30. c$u8«v, adv., (fr. e^- osition with the gen. [cf. ^X. § 54, 6] : Mk. vii. 15 ; Rev. xi. 2" [R"'"^" G L T Tr WH ; .xiv. 20 where Rec. r|(o].* c^-u6e'u. -o>: 1 aor. (^aa-a [so accented by (i Ted. 7 Tr, but L Wll e'^oitra] and in Tdf. e^eaaa [ 117/. App. p. 162] (cf. W. p. 90 (8(1) ; [B. 69 (61) ; .'^teph. Thesaur. and A'eitch s. v. wdfa]) ; lo thrust out; expel from one's abode: Acts vii. 45, (Thuc., Xen., al.). to propel, drive : to •nXolov fls alyiaXov, Acts xxvii. 39 [WH txt. eKtraiaat; sec cWtifu], (the same use in Thuc., Xen., al.).* c|uTEpos, -ipa. -epov, (a comparative fr. e^u, cf. iamrtpos, dvioTfpoi, KaTuiTffws), outer: t6 o-kotos to e^Mrepov, the v d^vpaiv, Lk. xxii. 1 ; €v rrj foprij, during the feast, ^It. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; Jn. iv. 45; vii. 11 ; xii. 20; fivai iv TJj eoprfj, to be engaged in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23, cf. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc. ; (Is TTiv iopTrjv, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; dvaffaivfiv (to Jerusalem) els rr)V iopTT)v. Jn. vii. 8, 1 ; ?pxfcr6ai fls rrjv iopTr)v, Jn. iv. 45 ; xi. 56 ; xii. 1 2 ; ttjs eoprrjs pfvoiarjs, in the midst of the feast, .In. vii. 14 ; Kara iopTrjv, at every feast [see Kard, II. 3 a. /3.], ^It. xxvii. 15 ; Mk. xv. 6 ; Lk. xxiii. 1 7 [Rec] ; rhv «' oprijj/ troie'iu to keep, cele- brate, the feast. Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; Kara to t6os Trjr iopT^ls. after the custom (if the feast, Lk. ii. 42.* tir-o-yYtXCa, -as, t], {i-nayykWu)) ; 1. announcement : 1 Jn.i. 5 (Rec., where ayyikia was long since restored) ; (tar' iTTayyeKlav fw^s Tr]S iv XpiaTM 'irjcrov, to proclaim life in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tiin. i. 1 [AV. 402 (376); cf. Kard, II. fin. But others give inayy. here as else- where the sense oi promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise; a. the act of promising, a protnise given or to be given: irpofrdix^^^^'- "^h^ ^"^^ Tivos inayyeXiav (^assent ; the ref- erence is to a promise to surrender Paul to the power and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 21 ; [add, itrayye- Xias 6 Xoyos ovTos, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva^ tion by Christ, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 14] : Acts vii. 17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gal iii. 17 sq. 21; iv. 23 ; Heb. xi. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see fipaSvvaj, 2) ; Ileb. viii. 6 ; xi. 9 ; foil, by the inf. Heb. iv. 1 ; yiixrai iwayyeXKa 227 eTraipco Tivi, Ro. iv. 13 ; Trpos Tiva, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6 ; ipprjdr] nvi, Gal. iii. IG ; iari Tin, belongs to one, Acts ii. 39 ; inayyiXKccr6ai xiji/ in. 1 Jn. ii. 25 ; ix"" inayyeKias, to have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [cf. W. 177 (166)] ; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; dvai iv iirayye- Xi'a, joined with a promise [al. al. ; cf. W. 391 (366)], Eph. vi. 2-, Tj yfj Trjs iirayyeXias, the promised land, Heb. xi. 9 ; TO TiKva rrji eVayyeXmt, born in accordance with the promise, Ro. ix. 8 ; Gal. iv. 28 ; to Trvevfia ttjs inay- ■yeXi'ar to ayiov, the promised Spirit, Eph. i. 13 ; al SiadTj- Koi TJjy «VayyeXi'ar, covenants to which was united the promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12; 4 iwayyf\la tov 6eov, given by God, Ro. iv. 20 ; in the plur. 2 Co. i. 20 ; al eVayyfXiat tcov naripaiv, the promises made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8 ; with the gen. of the object, TTJs fia^f. 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; r^t irapovfrlas airov, 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; xar' iwayyeXlav according to promise. Acts xiii. 23 ; Gal. iii. 29 ; 8i irrayyeXlas, Gal. iii. 18. b. by meton. a promised good or blessing (cf. iXjris, sub fin.) : Gal. iii. 22 ; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic] ; dnotrriWeiv ttjv cVayyeXiai/ rov Trarpos fiov, the blessing promised by my Father, Lk. xxiv. 49 ; neptp-iveiv. Acts i. 4; KOfil^fcrdm ttjv iTvayyeklav, Heb. X. 36; xi. [13 T Tr WH, irpoahixeaQai L], 39 : \ap.^dv€iv ras «TrayyeXtas, Heb. xi. 13 [RG]; iinTvy\av€iv eVa-yycXtwi/, ib. vs. 33; KKr^povop-iiv Tas eVayyeAias, Ileb. vi. 12: iTrirvyxaveLV ttjs cTrayyeXi'aff, jb. 1 5 ; KXr^povopMi ttjs irrayyeXtas^ vs. 1 7 — (to reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 1.5, 17 with xi. 13, 39, which at first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac- cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the expiatory sacrifice offered at length to God by Christ, were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before Christ's return from heaven ; [al. explain the appar- ent contradiction by the difference between the initial and the consummate reception of the promise; see the Coram, ad 1.]); with the epexeget. gen. Xa(3fiv t^k iirayyeXiav ToC dyiov irvfvpaTos, the promised blessing, which is the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33; Gal. iii. 14, [cf. W. § 34, popo- (Tvvrjv, Bar. iv. 29). iTrdyeiv to ai^d tivos iwi riva, to bring the blood of one ujxiii any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt of, make liim answerable for, the violent death inflicted on another : Acts v. 28, (like iirdyeiv dpLapriav iirl nva. Gen. XX. 9 ; Ex. xxxii. 21, 34 ; dfiaprias TraTepaiv iirl reKva, Ex. xxxiv. 7).* cTT-a^uvCloiJiai ; to contend: tivi, for a thing, Jude 3. (tw 'Avvi^a, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2 ; rah vixais, added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13, 4 ; by others in diff. senses.) * eir-a6potJo)VT)v, Lk. xi. 27 ; Acts ii. 14 ; xiv. 11 ; xxii. 22, (Dem. -140, 13 ; Sept. Judg. ii. 4 ; ix. 7 ; 2 S. xiii. 36) ; rfiv Tn-ffivav (iri nva, to lift the heel against one (see irrepva), Jn. xiii. 18. Pass. fTnyp^i), was taken up (of Christ, taken 'up into heaven). Acts i. 9; reflex, and metaph. to be lifted up with pride, to exalt one's self: 2 Co. xi. 20 (Jer. xiii. 15; Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4; X.XXV. (.vxxii.) 1 ; 1 Mace. i. 3 ; ii. 63; Arstph. nub. 810 ; Thuc. 4, 18 ; Aeschin. 87, 24 ; with dat. of the thing of which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zoph. i. 11 ; Ildt. 9, 49 ; Thuc. 1, 120 ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24) ; — on 2 Co. x. 5 see vijfoipa.' tir-ai(rxvvo|iai ; !ut.e7rai.(Txvv6iiaopai; I aor. inr](Tx^v6Tiv, and with neglect of augui. (iraiiTx^'vBTjv (2 Tim. i. 16 L T Tr Wn ; cf. [ 117/. Ajjp. p. 161] ; B. 34 (30) ; [W. § 12 fin.]) ; fr. Aeschyl. down ; to be ashamed (cVi on account of [ef. Is. i. 29 Alex. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8] ; see aia-xivia) : absol. 2 Tim. i. 12; rtra [on the accus. cf. W. § 32, 1 b. a. ; B. 192 (166)], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 ; W, of a thing, Ro. i. 16 ; 2 Tim. i. 8, 1 6 ; cVi rtw, dat. of a thing, Ro. vi. 21 ; foil, by the inf. Ileb. ii. 11 ; with the ace. of a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Ileb. xi. 16. (Twice in the Sept. : Is. i. 29 [Alex. ] ; Job xxxiv. 19.) • cir-oiT£'o), -w ; 1. to ask be.iiiles, ask for more : Hom. II. 23, 593. 2. to (isk again and again, importunately : Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3; [xviii. 35 L T Tr WH] ; (Ps. cviii. (cix.) 10 ; Sk. xL 28 ; Soph. Oed. Col. 1364).' tir-OKo\o«Be' ; 1 aor. emiKoXovSjja-a ; tofolhiir (close) upon,f(iUiiic iift':r; in the X. T. only metaph. roif ix""^^ Tivos, to tread in one's footsteps, i. e. to imitate his ex- ample, 1 Pet. ii. 21 ; with the dat. of a pers. 1 Tim. v. 24 (opp. to irpouya, to go before ; the meaning is, ' the sins of some men are manifest now, even before they are called to account, but the misdeeds of others are exposed when finally ju' and i'OD ; 1. to give ear to, listen to ; to per- ceive by the ear. 2. to listen to i. e. hear with favor, grant one's prayer, (Aeschyl. choeph. 725 ; rav fixav, Leian. Tim. 34) : tivos, to hearken to one, 2 Co. vi. 2 fr. Is. xlix. 8 ; often so in Sept.* iir-aKpodo)iai, -wpat : 3 pers. phir. inipf. fTTrjKpowPTo : to listen to : with the gitn. of a pers. Acts xa i. 25. (Plat. comic, in Bckk. anccd. p. 360; Lcian. Icarom. 1 ; Test, xii. Patr. ]). 710, test. Jos. § 8.) * br-6,v, conj. (fr. en-fi and tip), after, when : with the sub- junc. ])res. Lk. .xi. 34 ; with the sidijunc. aor., answering to the Lat. fut. exact, (fut. perf.), Mt. ii. 8 ; Lk. xi. 22. Cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 547.* ^ 4ir4vaYK€s, {di'dyia). [hence lit. on cowpuhion']'), neces- sarily : nXr/v tC)v ejrdvayKes tovtiov, besides these things which are necessarily imposed. Acts xv. 28 [B. 27 (24)]. (Ildt., Andoc, Plato, Dem., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., Aelian. Kpict.) " ^TT-av-d-yw ; 2 aor. inf. (Travayaydv^ impv. tTravdyayi, [ptcp. (TTafayayav, Mt. xxi. 1 s T M' 1 1 txt. Tr niig.] ; 1. lit. to lead nji upon, sc. rh liKolov, a ship upon the deep, i. e. to put out, Lk. v. 3 (Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 28 ; 2 Mace, xii. 4) ; with eir to /3dfloj added, into the deep, ibid. 4. 2. to lead back; intrans. to return [cf. B. 144 (126)]: Mt. xxi. 18 ; (2 Mace. vs.. 21 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 3 ; Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Hdian., al.).* iiT-ava-(ii)i.vif|s, fj, {IwavopBoco) , restoration to an up- right or a right state; correction, improvement, (in Grk. writ. fr. Dem. down) : of life and cliaractor, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. Tov Seov . . '. xpovov ye npos tTravupdaxriv (nirot?) rrpoai^dvfiv, Plut. dc sera num. vind. 6] ; with toU l3iov added, Polyb. 1, 35, 1 ; Epict. diss. 3, 21, 15 ; aeavTod, id. ench. 51,1; [^rjdiK!) 8i to ■npos dvBpasntvaiv tiravopBieaLV Tjdwv, Philo de ebriet. § 22 ; cf. de confus. lingg. § .'«O fin.] ; (cf. iiravopBovv Koi els perdvoLav aTrdyfiv, Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 10).' eir-ovw, ailv., (Vtti' and «i/m [cf. W. 102 (97); B. 319 (273)]), Hdt. et sqq.; often in the .Sept.; above; 1. adverbially, a. of place: Lk. xi. 44; b. of number; beyond, more than : irpaBrjvai iirdva rpiaKoo'iav Srjuapiav, sold for more than three hundred denaries, Mk. xiv. 5 ; a>(pdri (Tidvu) irfvraKocriois d8€\wpu>, see avTofjjwpos, p. 87*^. 'Eiratjipds, -a [B. 20 (17 sq.)], 6, Epnphras, a Christian man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23. The conjecture of some that the name is contracted from 'En-a(^poStTos (q. v. [cf. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that these two names belong to one and the same man, is not probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epaphras ; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 61 note *]. The name is com. in inscriptions.* eir-a(j)p£^p68iTos, -ov, 6, (f r. ' ArjypoStTT], prop. ' charming '), Epaphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry: Phil. ii. 2.5 ; iv. 18. See 'Eiratppas above.* eir-cYctp» : 1 aor. tnriyeipa ; to raise or excite against : Ti fVi Ttva, Acts xiii. 50 (Si(i>yp6v) ; Kara Tivos, to stir up against one : rar \jfvxas . . . Karii rav u8fX(^wi', Acts xiv. 2.* €irei, [fr. temporal eni and f i, lit. thereupon when ; Cur- tius, Erlaut. etc. j). 182 ; cf. Etym. Magn. 356, 7], conjunc- tion, (Lat. cum), when, since, [cf. W. § 53, 1] ; used 1. of time, after; so once in the N. T. : Lk. vii. 1 (where L T Tr txt. WH txt. ejrctSij). 2. of cause, etc., since, seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [.xxi. 46 TTrWH]; -xxvii. 6; Mk. xv. 42 ; Lk. i. 34 ; Jn. xiii. 29 ; xi.x. 31 ; 1 Co. xiv. 12 ; 2 Co. xi. 18 ; xiii. 3 ; Heb. v. 2, 11 ; vi. 13; ix. 17; xi. 11 ; irtd ovv since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6. Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech, we must often supjily in thought between fVct aud the proposition depending upon it some such phrase as (/ it is (or icere) otherwise ; so that the particle, although retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other- wise, else, or for then, (Germ, sonst^ ; so in Ro. xi. 6, 22 ; Heb. ix. 26 ; eVfl &pa, 1 Co. v. 10; vii. 14, [cf. W. § 53, 8 a.]: eVfi alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (447); B. 233(200)]: Ro.iii.6; lCo.xiv.l6; xv.29; Heb. x. 2 ; (4 Mace. i. 33 ; ii. 7, 19 ; vi. 34 (35) ; vii. 21 ; viii. 8). Cf. Matthiae § 618; [B. § 149, 5].* eir€i-Sii, conjunction, (fr. iird and 5^), Lat. cum jam, when now, since now, [cf. W. 434 (404), 448 (41 7) ; Ellic. on Phil. ii. 26]; 1. of time; tvhen now, ajler that; so once in the N. T. : Lk. vii. 1 L T Tr txt. WH txt. 2. of cause; since, seeing that, forasmuch as : Mt. xxi. 46 [RGL]; Lk. xi. 6; Acts .xiii. 46 ; xiv. 12; xv. 24; 1 Co. i. 21, 22; .xiv. 16 ; xv. 21 ; [2 Co. v. 4 Bee.»']; Phil. ii. 26.* e'lrci-Sifj-Trtp [eVftSij TTfp Lchm.], conjunction, (fr. eml, S!) and nep), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg. quoniam quidem, since noiv, [cf. W. 448 (417)] : Lk. i. 1. (Aristot. phys. 8, 5 [p. 256', 25] ; Dion. Hal. 2, 72; Philo ad Gai. § 25, and Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.) " eir-eiSov [Tdf. 7 c0eISow] ; impv. tinbe (Lchm. e(^iSf, cf. W. § 5, 1 d. 14 ; B. 7 ; [reff. s. v. d^ciSof] ; besides see elha, I.) ; to look upon, to regard : foil, by a telic inf., cTTEiSei/ d(p(\(iv TO oi/ciSor ^011 ([R. V. looked upon me to take away etc.], Germ, hat hergeblickt), Lk. i. 25 ; eVt ti, to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, cf. Lat. ani- madvertere), Acts iv. 29.* 6ir-«i(ii ; (fVi, and tlpi. to go) ; to come upon, approach ; of time, ^0 . come on, be at hand; ptcp. eVtajv, -oCcra, -ox, next, folloicing : rfj iniovari, sc. fjpepa. on the following day. Acts xvi. 11 ; xx. 15; xxi. 18, (Polyb. 2, 25, 11 ; 5, 13, 10.; Joseph, antt. 3, 1, 6 ; [Prov. xxvii. 1] ; etc.) ; with rjpepa added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down), Acts vii. 26; ry emoCa-;] vvkti. Acts xxjii. 11. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 4G4.* eirtC-irep, conjunction, («Trfi, ffep), since indeed, since at all events; [it introduces a " known and unquestioned certainty "] : Ro. iii. 30 R G (but L Tr ei n(p. T WII eiTTfp). Cf. Nermann ad Vig. p. 784 ; [Baumlcin p. 204 ; W. 448 (417). Fr. the Tragg. down.]* eireKTaytoyT} 230 €Trep/ enlerinr/ ; to enter against : iiri riva, ace. of pers., Lk. xxi. 35 L T Tr txt. WII ; with simple dat. of pers. 1 JIaec. xvi. 16.* eireiTa, adv., («Tri, etTa), thereupon, thereafter, then, a/tenrarJs ; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 RG; Lk. xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21 ; .las. iv. 14; /i€Ta toOto is added re- dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc. ; W. § 65, 2 ; [B. 3i)7 (340)]) ; a more definite specification of time is added epexegetically, pfrii (ttj rpla, fial. i. ]8; 8ia Se- KaTf(T(rapi>>v erav, Gal. ii. 1. b. in enumerations it is used a. of time and order: TrpCiTov . . . cTTfixa, 1 Co. XV. 46 ; 1 Th. iv. 17 ; irpoTfpov . . . eireira, ITeb. vii. 27 ; aTrapxn ■ ■ ■ fneira, 1 Co. xv. 23 ; eira [but T Tr mrg.WII mrg. ?7r€6Ta] . . . (iretra, 1 Co. xv. 5, 6 ; (Trtira . . . fTrena, ib. 7 L mrg. T Tr mrg. WII mrg. p. of o r d er a 1 o n e : npioTov ■ . . (TTfiTa, Ileb. vii. '1 ; Tpirov . . . eTreira . . . cTrfi- To (R O fira), 1 Co. xii. 28.* iit-tKiiva (i. ij. eV (Kelva sc. pipt] [cf. W. §6, 1 1. fin.]), adv., Jietjond : with the gen., Ba/SuXwTOS, Acts vii. 43. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down both with and without the gen. ; in the Sept. Am. v. 27; Gen. xxxv. 16; Jer. xxii. 19.)* «ir-€k.T«(vti> : [pres. mid. ptcp. iirtKTdvopevos] ; to stretch out to or towards; Slid, to stretch (one's self) /"'/;■- icard to : witli dat. of tiling indicating the direction [W. §52,4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see (iMirpoa-dev, 1 fin.).* tirev8un)s, -ov. 6, {iirevilvui or iwfv&va, q. v., [cf. ^^ . 25 ; 94 (90)]), (in njijiir garment, (Tertull. superindumentum) : Jn. xxi. 7, where it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work. (Soph. frag. 391 Dind.[(248 Ahrens); Poll. 7, 45 p. 717]; Sept. twice [thrice] for S'i^D, 1 S. xviii. 4 [Alex.] ; 2 S. xiii. 18 ; [add Lev. viii. 7 Ale.-i.].) * er-ev-Svu) : 1 aor. mid. inf. inevSvcraadai ; to put on over [A. V. to be clothed upon'] : 2 Co. v. 2, 4. (Plut. Pelop. 11 ; actively, Josejjh. antt. 5, 1, 12.) * £ir-e'pxo|j.ai ; fut. iireKficTopai; 2 aor. iirrfKBov (3 pers. plur. eir^\6av, Acts .xiv. 19 L T Tr WII) ; Sept. ch icily for X13 ; 1. to come to, to arrive ; a. univ., foil, by aird with a gen. of place. Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; to come on, be at hand, be future : iv toIs ala; 1 aor. eTnjpaTTja-a ; 1 ;ior. pass. ptcp. «Vfpa)T7)nc.ix. 11 ; xii. I8 ; Lk. iii. 10, 14 ; xx.27; xxiii. 3 [R G L]. and often in the Synoptic Gospels ; foil, bv fi, ichefher, Mk. viii. 23 ; xv. 44 ; Lk. x.xiii. 6 ; or some other form of the indirect question. Acts xxiii. 34 ; inripo>- T!on of Acts xxi v. 16 drrpoiTKoirov Tr]fia ; for this formula does not mean ' ace. to the decree of the senate' (ex senatus consullo, the Grk. for which is Kara ra ha^aiTa T?i PovXf)), but ' after inquiry of or appUeation to the senate,' i. e. ' with government sanction.' " Ze- zschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten- tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; [Farrar, Early Days of Christi- anity, i. 138 n. ; Kiihler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 1878) pp. 331-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana- logical) pa.ssive sense of eTxfp. viz. 'the thing asked (the demand) of a good conscience towards God ' i. q. the avowal of consecration unto him].* €ir-«x ecp' (al. d eavToi ^aatXia, Rev. ix. 11 ; txfiv 8a(TiX(lav im Tav ^aa-tXeav, Kev. xvii. 18 ; os tjv ini Trjs yd(r]s. w'ho was over the treasury. Acts viii. 27:6 em TOV KoiTwvos, he who presided over the bed-chamber, the chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (Passow i. 2 p. 1035° gives manv e.xx. fr. Grk. auth. [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. III. 1; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 474 ; Soph. Lex. s. v.] ; for exx. fr. the O. T. Apocr. see TI'n/(/, Clavis Apocr. p. 218"). e. of that to which the mental act looks or refers: Xc'-yt ik e'jrt TIVOS, to speak upon (of) a thing. Gal. iii. 16 (Plato, 232 Charm, p. 155 d. ; legg. 2 p. 662 d.; Ael. v. h. 1, 30; scribere super re, Cic. ad Att. 16, 6 ; disserere super, Tac. ann. 6, 28; cf. W. 37o (351) ; [B. 336 (289)]). f. of one on whom an obligation lias been laid; fvxrjvi\fi.v ev, [Acts V. 23 L T Tr WII] (1 l\Iacc. i. 55 ; [Plut. G. <;racch. 14, 3 p. 841 c.]) ; cf. JIatthiae ii. p. 1366 § 584 ; Passow s. v. p. 1034'' ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 1 a. sub fin.]. But the cxx. of this signification adduced from the N. T. [with the exception of Acts 1. e.] (and most of those fr. Grk. auth. also) are such as to allow the ren- dering of fVi by sii/ier also, over or ahoce [so W. 374 srj. (351)] : fir\ T^f 6a\aaarii at the sea, upon the shore, or above the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, Jn. vi. 19 (?[cf. 1 a. above]); xxi. 1, (Ex. xiv. 2; Deut. i. 40; 1 Mace. xiv. 34 ; xv. 1 1 ; Polyb. 1, 44, 4 ; cf. the French Boulogne sur mer, Chalons sur Marne, [Eng. Stratford on Avon"], etc. ; cVl tov Trorafiov, Ezek. i. 1 ; [Xen. an. 4, 3, 28]; eVl toC 'lop?idvov, 2 K. ii. 7) ; eaBieiv e'nl t^s TpmriCrji Tivos (Germ, iiher Jemands Tische essen, [cf. Eng. orer one's food, over one's cups, ete.]), food and drink placed upon the table, Lk. xxii. 30 cf. 21 ; avKrjv firi TTJs 6&0V, a fig-tree above (i. e. liigher than) the way, Mt. xxi. 19. b. be/ore, with gen. of a pers., in the pres- ence of one as spectator, or auditor, [W. 375 (351) ;'B. 336 (289)] : Mt. xxviii. 14 [L Tr AVIl mrg. wrd] ; Mk. xiii. 9 ; Acts xxiv. 19, 20 ; xxv. 9 ; xxvi. 2 ; 1 Co. vi. 1, 6 ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [some bring this under II. below ; see i^aprvpiw^ : em toC firjpaTos Kaiaapos, Acts xxv. 10. C. fTTi TOV (Rec. r^s) fidrov at the bush, i.e. at the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken of, ;Mk. xii. 26 (sec e'v, I. 1 d.). II. of Time when; with gen. of a pers. in the time or age of a, man, [" in the days o/"] ; at the time when an office was held by one ; under the administration of, [cf. W. 375 (352) ; B. 336 (289)]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 2; iv. 27; Acts xi. 28; (1 Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this phrase is equiv. to " in or of the reign etc. of" and is preceded by a specification of the year etc., see 15. D. Am. ed. p. 651 note'']; 2 Mace. viii. 19; xv. 22; for numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow i. 2 p. 1035, [less fully in L. and S. s. v. A. II.]). with the gen. of a thing, at the time of any occurrence: ctti rffs peroiKftrias Ba/3vXa)vor, at the time of the deportation to Baljylon, j\It. i. 1 1 ; [on Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH see bv(Tpi)'] : of the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on : ctti tS>v TTpotrevxav pov, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers, when I am praying, Ro. i. 10 (9) ; Eph. i. 16 ; 1 Th. i. 2 ; Philem. 4. of time itself, ifr' iaxdruiv and (ace. to another reading) icrxarov ran rjpepiii/ (lit. fit the end of the days) : 2 Pet. iii. 3; Heb. i. 2 (1), (for the llebr. D'P'n n->nN3, Gen. xlix. 1 ; Num. xxiv. 14; ,Jer. xxxvii. (xxx.) 24 ; Mic. iv. 1 ; Dan. x. 1 4) ; irt iaxarov tov xpo^ov, Jude 18 L T TrWH ; [raj/xpoVui/, 1 Pet. i. 20 L T TrWII]. B. with the Dative, used of Place [W. 392 (366) sq. ; B. 336 (289) sq.] ; and 1. properly ; a. of the place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl.. Germ. »»/'with the dat.) [Eng. on, etc.], where contin- uance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of : e0' w ( L txt. T Tr AVH onov) KarfKeiTo, Mk. ii. 4 ; \i6os €7ri XWw [-floi' T Tr AVH], Mk. xiii. 2 ; im TtivaKi, Mt. xiv. 8,11; ilk. vi. 25; (itX rois xpnlifiaTois, Mk. vi. 55; avaxXivai TraiTas cttI tw p^oprw, Mk. vi. 39 ; cTrcKctro en avTu>, lay upon it, .In. xi. 38 ; ecf 'in-nois, Rev. xix. 14. b. of the place in which (Lat. in with the abl.. Germ, auf with the ace), after verbs expressing motion towards a jjlacc, to denote a remaining in the jilace after the motion, [Eng. upon, at, etc.] : ffaWfivXiBov iiTiTwi. dat. of JUTS., .In. viii. 7 Rec. ; olKohopdv, ilt. xvi. IS ; fTroiKoSopelv, E])ll. ii. 20; eTTtfidWecv, Mt. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 31) finlidWfiv eni Ti) ; (mppdiTTfiv, ilk. ii. 21 (where LTTr WII have (jri with ace.) ; InminTfiv, Acts viii. 16. c. of the place above which (Lat. super. Germ, iiber, [Eng. orcr]) : fir' aira, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which Mt. .x.wii. 37 cTrava) rrji KccjiaXrjs avToii). d. of the ])lace at, or by, or near which: im Biipais and in\ rf/ 6vpa, Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Acts v. 9. (and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1037': [L. and S. s. v. B. I. 1 a. ; cf. A. 1. 2 a. above]); enl rf/ Trpo^aTtKy, .In. v. 2; €7ri TO) TTorap^, Re\'. ix. ]4;'e7rt t// (rroa, Acts iii. 11 ; i-TT [L T Tr WII Trap'] avrois einpeLvai, Acts x.\\iii. 14. 2. Metaph. ; a. of that upon which any action, effect, condition, rests as a basis or support; jirop. upon the ground of; and o. of that upon which any- thing is sustained or upheld: f^v fn-i rew, to sus- tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where LTr, the sec- ond time, h\ [cf. W. 3.S9 (364) note]) ; Lk. iv. 4, (Deut. viii. 3 for hi\ H'n ; Plat. Alcib. 1 p. 105 c. ; Plut. de cu]). (livit. 7 p. 526 d. ; Alciphr. cpp. 3, 7, etc.) ; crwuvai. €m Tols lipTois, to understand bj- reasoning built upon the loaves, Mk.vi. 52 [cf. W.392 (367) ; B. 337 (290)]. p. of that upon which anything rests (our upon)' en eXniSi [see in (\nis, 2], supported by hope, in hope, [cf. W. §51, 2f.], Actsii. 26; Ro. iv. 18; 1 Co. ix. 10, [differently in e. below] ; to do any thing im. ra uvopaTi Tivos, relying upon the name i. e. the authority of any one [cf. W. 393 (367)] : iXfvaovTm tnl tu> ompaTl pov, ai)j>roj>riating to themselves the name of Messiah, which belongs to me, Mt. .xxiv. 5 ; ilk. xiii. 6 ; Lk. xxi. 8, (in which pass. 'Keyovres, on iyw elfjti 6 XpioTOf is added by way of explanation) ; jianri^itrBaL inl [L Tr WII ei/] to) oi/. XpKTTov, so as to repose your hope and confidence in his Messianic authority. Acts ii. 38; bixf^al nva en\ ra ov. pov, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted to my authority and instruction, Mt. .xviii. 5 ; Mk. ix. 37 ; Lk. ix. 48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his. name being introduced, ajipeal being made tohis authority and command : as KTjpva-a-ftv, Mda-Keiv, etc., Lk. x.xiv. 1 7 ; Acts iv. 17, 18 ; v. 28, 40 ; Svvapiv noidv, haipi'ivia ck^uX- Xfiv, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [cf. W. 3;i3(367)],Mk. ix. 39; Lk.i.x. 49 [WH Tr mrg. «]. 7. of that upon which as a foundation any super- 233 structure is reared : voixoBfTelaBai, Heb. vii. 11 (tV avrji, for which L T Tr WH have in aiTrjs) ; viii. G ; after verbs of trusting, believing, hoping, etc. : apxel- (rdai inl Ttvi, 3 Jn. 1 ; irapprjcnd^ecrdai, Acts xiv. 3 ; irenot- Bevai, ait. xxvii. 43 L txt. W'll nirg. ; Lk. xi. 22 ; xviii. 9; Mk. .X. 24 [TWHom.Trmrg.br. the cl.]; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Heb. ii. 13 ; nurrevfiu, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; Ro. i.x. 33 ; x. 1 1, etc. ; iXm^dv (see eXn-ifta), [cf. C. I. 2 g. a. below]. 8. of the reason or motive underlying words and deeds, so that eVi is equiv. to for, on account of, [W. 394 (368) ; B. 337 (290)] : Mt. xix. 9 R G T Tr WH txt. ; Lk. v. 5 (eVi Tw prjfiarl oov, at thy word. Germ, aiif; [cf. W. §48, 0. d. ; in reliance o«]) ; Acts iii. IC [WH om.] ; iv. 9 ; xi. 19 [L Tr mrg. have the gen.] ; xxi. 24 ; 1 Co. viii. 11 {anoKkva^Bai iiri Tivi, Germ, zu Grutule gelien ilher etc. [cf. W. 394 (3(J8) note, but L T Tr WH read eV]) ; Phil, iii. 9 ; after alvtlv, Lk. ii. 20; bo^d^eiv, Actsiv. 21 ; 2 Co. ix. 13 [cf. W. 381 (357)] ; fiapTvpiiv, Heb. xi. 4 ; evxapi- (TTeiv etc. to give thanks for, 1 Co. i. 4 ; 2 Co. ix. 1 5 ; Phil, i. 5 ; 1 Th. iii. 9. eff) m (equiv. to eVl toutm, orifor that, on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Ro. v. 12 (on the various interpp. of this pass, see Dietzsch, Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50 sqq.) ; 2 Co. v. 4 [Rec*:' CTTftS/;]: Phil. iii. 12, (e to — oa-aravas — ovk 'l(J x^af Savaraia-ai. airovs, Tlieoph. ad Autol. 2, 29 p. 138 ed. Otto ; e0' a TevfdSiov eypay^fv, for the reason that he had ac- cused Geunadius, Synes. ep. 73 ; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 710 ; the better Greeks commonly used e0' otr in the same sense, cf. W. 394 (368) ; [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro. 1. c. ; EUic. on Phil. 1. c.]). Used esp. after verbs sig- nifying a mental affection or emotion, where we also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow i. 2. p. 1 039'> ; Kriiger § 68, 41, 6 ; [cf. W. 393 (368) c.]) : as ayoKKiav, Lk. i. 47 ; ^a'lpeLV, Mt. xviii. 13 ; Lk. i. 14 ; xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, etc.; )(apa. corai, Lk. xv. 7 ; )(apav (Rec. x°P'-^) ^/(<"> Philem. 7 ; napaKaXciv, irapaKoKeladai, 2 Co. i. 4 ; vii. 13 ; 1 Th. iii. 7 ; xXaiVii/, Lk. xix. 41 R G ; KOTTCTov TTOieiv, Acts viii. 2 ; KOTTTfcrdai, Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr WH t.xt. the ace] ; utwaa-Bm. Acts xx. 38 ; oXo\v((tv, Jas. V. 1 ; (TTvyvd^ew, Jlk. x. 22 ; trvWvnela-Bat, Mk. iii. 5; /ifTavof'iv erri, to grieve over, repent of, 2 Co. xii. 21 ; anXayxviCcrOai., Mt. xiv. 14 GLTTr WH; Mk. vi. 34 RG; Lk. vii. 13 [Tdf. the ace] ; paKpo6vp.flv, Mt. xviii. 26 [Tr the ace], 29 [L Tr the ace.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see fiaKpoBvp-ea, 2] ; Jas. v. 7 ; opyi^fuBai, Rev. xii. 1 7 [Lchm. om. eVi] ; f KTrXijo-oretr^ai, Mt. vii. 28 ; Jlk. i. 22 ; Lk. iv. 32 ; Acts xiii. 1 2 ; Siarapdcra-ecrdat, Lk. 1.29; e^laTaadai, Lk. ii. 47 1 dapffdadai, ."\Ik. x. 24 ; 0dp^os. Lk. v. 9 ; Acts iii. 10 ; davpdC€Lv. !\Ik. xii. 1 7 ; Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22 ; ix. 43 ; xx. 26 ; Acts iii. 12 ; KavxairGai, Ro. v. 2; e7Tma-xivev {in the case of the dead), if any one has died, Heb. ix. 17. %. of the purpose and end [unto, for ; W. 394 (368) e.] : eV ovopari avrov, to worship and profess his name. Acts xv. 14 Rec. ; Kd\eiv Tiva cTil Tivi, Lat. ad (diijuiil. Gal. v. 13 ; 1 Tli. iv. 7, (in\ ^erla, Xen. an. 7, 6, 3 ; cf. W. u. s.) ; KTicrdevres eVt "pyois dyadois. Eph. ii. 10 ; (fipoi'elv eVi nut to take thought for a thing, Phil. iv. 10 ; icj)' u (by a later Grk. impropriety for en I rivi, cf. AV. § 24, 4 ; [B. § 139, 59 ; but on the ex- treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of or in direct questions, see Pres. T. D. Woolsey in the Bibliotheca Sacra for Apr. 1874, p. 314 sqq.]) napei; for what pur- ]iose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid [al. quod'\ cenisti? JMt. xxvi. 50 R [but G L TTr WH c0' 5, see C. I. 2 g. y. aa. below] (Tlieoph. en'i noLa UKona; cf. Hdt. 7, HGr TTvBopevoi, en oiai rjXBov; [but the view of many ancient expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis r " that for which thou hast come — do " is thoroughly es- tablished byDr. Woolsey U.S.]). of the issue or unde- signed result: 'Xoyupaxf'iv €n\ Kara(TTpo votrnv; [cf. Mey. on Phil. I.e.; but G L T Tr ^\ll give the ace. see C. I. 2 c- below]) ; nporr- Tidtvai enl, Lk. iii. 20 ; en\ nain tovtois, besides all this, Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. T Tr mrg. WH ev, see iv, I. 5 e. p. 211"] ; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. T Tr WH iv (and there is no Tovrnis) ; see iv. u. s.] ; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15 ; 1 Mace X. 42 ; [classic exx. in Wetst. on Lk. 1. c.]) ; add also' Heb. viii. 1 [see Liinem. ad loe] ; ix. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 16. e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of time) with the principal matter imder consideration, {in Germ, generally liti, i. e at, on, etc.) [W. 392 (36 7)] : evxapt-iyTC) T(o Oew fitw enl naarj rjj pivela vpCiv. at every men- tion of 3'ou, as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but see Mey., Ellic, Bp. Lghtf t. ad 1., atid s. v. jray, I. 2] ; (rjrc'»- 8op.ai inl Tfi Ova-la, while engaged in (busied over) the sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17 ; inl frvvreXeia tujv aiavGiv. Heb. ix. 26; enl rij npoirr/ StaOtjKr]. ib. 15; anelpeiv and Oepl^eii» «TTt 234 ill (i\oyiai.s, so that blessings attenil, i. e. bountifully, frei'h , "2 Co. ix. G ; eVi Trntr;; rfi avay' S\rjv rrfv yrfv, Acts vii. 11 ; CTKOTOS fyeVfTO fVi nuaav Tr]v yrjv, Mt. xxvil. 45. over i. e. alotif) : «lUTty/ffi em tuv alyiakov, Mt. xiii. 2 [\\ . 408(380); differently in d. below]. b. of motion to a place whose surface is occupied or touched (Germ, aw/ with tlie ace), upon, unlo, etc. ; after verbs of g o i n g, coming, ascending, descending, falling, etc. : TTopevfrrBai eirl ttjv oSov, Acts viii. 26 ; ix. 11 ; em ras SteioSovi, Mt. xxii. 9 ; trpoipx^rOai, Acts xx. 13 [hero Tr WH nn-g. npoaepx-l ; <\>(vy(iv, Mt. xxiv. 16 (where L Tr AVTI txt. fis) ; e^tpxeaGai, l.k. viii. 27; e^Uvai, Acts xxvii. 43 ; em^aiveiv, Mt. xxi. 5 ; iva^aivew, Lk. v. 1 9 ; xix. 4 ; Acts X. 9 ; Rev. xx. 9 ; KaTajSaivetv. Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.] ; Rev. xvi. 21 ; ampxeo-Om, Lk. xxiii. 33 [L Tr AVII epxetrdai] ; mnTeiv em roiis TrdSar, Acts X. 25 ; em irpoaairov, to fall upon the face, JSIt. xvii. «■; xxvi.39; Lk.v.l2; xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; Rev. vii. 11. After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, build- in", laving, throwing, etc.: TtSfVat, Mt. V. 15; Lk. xi.33; fVmStVai, Mt. .xxiii. 4 ; Lk.xv.5; Acts xv. 10, etc.; -riBemt r'a yovaraem, Acts xxi. 5; otitoSo^xfiv, Mt. vii. 24, 26 ; Lk. vi. 49 ; Ro. xv. 20; e7roiKobofi.e'iv, 1 Co. iii. 12 ; SepeXuivv, Lk. vi. 48 ; fiuWeiv, .In. viii. 59 ; Rev. ii. 21 ; xiv. 16 ; xviii. 19 ; impaWeiv, Lk. v. 36 (tVi^ emrivi., Mt. ix. 16) ; emiiciWeiv tIis xe'tpai em Tiva, Mt. xxvi. 50, etc. (see emfidWa, 1 a.); empplnreiv, Lk. xix. 35 and tropi- cally 1 Pet. v. 7 ; l>amCei.v, Mt. v. 39 [L T Tr txt. W^I els] ; TVTrreiv, Lk. vi. 29 [Tdf. els'] ; dvaPt^a^eiv, Mt. xiii. 48 [not Lchm. txt.] ; emfiifia^eiv, Lk. x. 34 ; Karayeiv, Lk. V. 11 ; aaspeveiv, Ro. xii. 20 ; bi&ovai, Lk. vii. 44 ; xix. 23 ; Rev. viii. 3 ; ava(j>epeiv, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; Kpejiav, Mt. xviii. 6 £LTTrAVIl7r€/n']; ypi^eiv, Rev. ii. 17; iii. 12; xi.x. 16; e'mypdrjieiv, Ileb. viii. 10. After verbs which include an- other verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance into, (where Germ, uses <(uf or ilher; our on, to, etc.) : dmriWeiv, Mt. v. 45 ; ^pixeiv, ibid. ; nveeiv, Rev. vii. 1 (liere we see the difference betw. eiri with the gen. to blow ofcr a thing, (>erm. iihcr, and e'ni with the ace. to blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it. Germ, einen anwehen, wehend auf einen kommen) ; [api)arcntly nearly the same view of the distinction betw. the cases is taken by Tliierscli § 274, 6 ; Hermann on Eur. Alcest. 845. But Kriiger (§ 68, 40, 3), KidiiuM- (ii. § 438, I. 1 b.), al., regard c. with the ace. as denoting merely movement towards a ])lacc, while e. with the gen. involves the idea of actual or intended arrival ; cf. L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1. Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially synonymous: e.g. Bllyn. Gram. §14 7 (p. 417 Eng. trans.); Matthiae § 584 ; Passow p. 1034°; — esp. in the N. T., see AV. 409 sq. (382) ; 408 (381) note ; B. 338 (291). On the variations of case with this prep, in the Rev. cf. Alford on iv. 2] ; 8taa-oi6!jvai em t)]v yrjv, Acts xxvii. 44. c. It is used of persons over whom anytliing is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them, (Germ. Uher with the dat.) [AV. 408 (381) note] : ovopd- fetw TO ovopa 'lijcou em Tiva, to name the name of Jesus (as a spell, a nuigic formula) over one, se. that help may come to him from that name, Acts xix. 13 ; npoa-- eixeadai eiri Tiva, Jas. v. 14. d. As €is (q. v. C. 2 p. 186"), so em also stands after verbs of rest and con- tinuance [B. 337 (290) sq.; W. § 49, 1. 1] : KuBeiheiv em Ti, Mk. iv. 38 ; viov, Mt. Lx. 235 eTTt 9 ; Mk. ii. 14 ; iaTrjKemi iiri, Rev. iii. 20 ; xv. 2 ; ema-Trivai eVi, Acts X. 17 I xi. 11 ; ini rfjv Se^idv on the right hand, Kev.v.l. f. of mere direct ion towardsa terminus (so that the terminus itself is not readied) : nopfvecdm em. TO dnoXaiXos, to recover it (where we say after), Lk. xv. 4 ; iKTflviiv 7(39 x^'par i-nl, against one, to take liim, Lk. xxii. 53 ; tou-ards one, in pointing him out, Mt. xii. 49 ; i^ip^^eaBm (tt'i X.ijotijj', to take a robber, Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52, cf. Lk. xiv. 31. 2. It is used metaphorically, a. with the ace. of a pers. after verbs of coming, falling, bringing, etc. o. of «vils befalling (falling ' upon ') one, and of pertur- bations coming upon the mind: to ciifia nvos (the penalty for slaying him ) rjKei or epx^Tai. i-nl rwa, Alt. xxiii. 35 st[. ; xxvii. 25 ; inayfw to aifia Tii'ot (ni TWa, Acts v. 28 ; epj^fo-Oai and ^xeii/ ctti riva, of other evils, Jn. xviii. 4 ; Ei)h. V. 6 ; Rev. iii. 3 ; after ylufo-dat, Lk. i. 65 ; iv. 36; Acts V. 5; inipxeaOai [iiriurepx- LTTrWH], Lk. xxi. 35 ; (TTimnTetv, Lk. i. 1 2 ; Acts xiii. 11 [L T Tr WH ■jriTTTeiv] ; xix. 17 [L TrmTTTfii'] ; Ro. xv. 3 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10); Rev. xi. 11 [Rec. mVTeiv] ; iTnarrji/ai., Lk. xxi. 34. p. of blessings coming upon one: after eppffo-dat, Mt. X. 13 ; ejriTriWeii/, of a trance, Acts x. 10 [L T Tr AV H yiff o-^ai] ; imcTKrjvovv, 2 Co. xii. 9 ; e(f>daa-€v and ^yyKfv e(/)' vjidi (upon you sc. fr. heaven, [cf. W. 407 (380) note]) 17 iiaaiXela rod dead, Mt. xii. 28 ; Lk. x. 9 ; xi. 20. the Holy Spirit is said at one time enl rwa tKxela-dat, Acts ii. 1 7 sq. ; x. 45 ; Tit. iii. 6 ; at another, ajToirTiWerrdai [or i^airoiTTeX. T Tr WH], Lk. xxiv. 49 ; again, inipxea-dai, Acts i. 8 ; once more, Karafiaivdv, Mk. i. 10 [L txt. T Tr WH eir] ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. i. 33 : ^neaev n KKrjpus inl Tiva, Acts i. 26 ; after words of rest and continuance : x^P's V" ^'"^^ ■''""'' Lk. ii. 40 ; Acts iv. 33 ; fTravarravKrdai, Lk. x. 6 ; the Holy Spirit is said at one time cTTi Tiva fieveiv, descending upon one to remain on him, Jn. i. 32 sq. [B. 338 (291)] ; and again draTraiJco-^at, 1 Pet. iv. 14. b. of one upon whom anything is im- pose d, as a burden, office, duty, etc. : Tr)v jxipifivav iirip- piTTTCiv em 6e6v, 1 Pet. V. 7 ; avvTe\flv dcadrjKrjv eVi Tiva, to ])ut a covenant upon one, to be kept by him, Meb. viii. 8, (in Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 6 "3 V n"13 m.3 is to make a covenant t. 7, 1, 4 etc. [cf. W. 422 (394)]) ; im nXetvv more widely, to a greater degree, further, the more, [differently below, II. 1] : Acts iv. 17; [xx. 9 AVH mrg.] ; 2 Tim. ii. 16; iii. 9: e<^' orrav, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, [differently U. 1 be- low] : Mt. XXV. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13. e. of care, pow- er, control over anything, (Germ, iiber with the ace.) [W. § 49, 1. 3 1..], (cf. above, A.L 1 d. and B. 2 b.) : /3«- a-tXeijeiv eiti Tiva (Hebr. '?;' "^iy"?), Lk. i. 33 ; xix. 14, 27 : Ro. V. 14 ; rjyovfjievov eV A'iyvnTov, Acts vii. 10 ; KaBlcTTrnjn., Heb. ii. 7 R [(fr. Ps. viii. 7), L Tr WH br.] ; eiri t6v oikov avTov sc. eaTi, Heb. iii. 6 ; lepea fieyav errt tov oIkov tov deov SC. KaBeo-TTjKOTa, Heb. x. 21 ; KadiaTavai SiKaaTi]V e-nl, Lk. xii. 14 (apxovTa, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 fin.) ; e^ovtria, IJc. x. 10 ; Rev. vi. 8 ; xvi. 9 ; xxii. 14 ; (^ivXarra-eiv (pyXams, Lk. ii. 8 ; of usm-ped dignity : xmepaipecrSai en'i nuvTa Xeyop-evov 6e6v, 2 Th. ii. 4 cf. Dan. xi. 36 sq. [al. refer the use in Th. 1. c. to g. y. /3/S. below]. Akin to this is the expression ttkttos eni Ti (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things intrusted to its care), Mt. XXV. 21. f. of the e n d which the mind reaches or to which it is led; Lat. ad, to, unto : e-jTiiTTpefpeiv, fniarpefpeadm eni Tiva, esp. to God, Lk. i. 1 7 ; Acts ix. 35 ; xi. 21 ; xiv. 15 ; xxvi. 20 ; Gal. iv. 9; 1 Pet. ii. 25. g. of direction towards a person or a thing ; a. after verbs of trusting and hoping, (Germ, auf, upon ; see above, B. 2 a. -y.) : after eXiri^eiv, 1 Pet. i. 13 ; iii. 5 R G ; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.) ; mareveiv, Acts ix. 42 ; xi. 17; xvi. 31 ; xxii. 19 ; Ro. iv. 24 ; nitTTis, Heb. vi. 1 ; nenoiBivai, Mt. xxvii. 43 (where L txt. WH mrg. iwl with dat.). p. of the feelings, affections, emotions. Germ, iiber, over: KonTofiai, Rev. i. 7 ; xviii. 9 [R G L WH mrg. w. dat.] ; kXhiw, Lk. xxiii. 28 ; Rev. xviii. 9 ; ev(()paivea-6ai, Rev. xviii. 20 [G L TTrWIIw.dat.]. unto, loirards, hat. crga: imXayxvi- (ofiai, Mt. XV. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ix. 22; [fioKpo^ujueu, Mt. xviii. 26 Tr, 29 LTr] ; xpW'd^' Lk. vi. 35; xpi'^ottis. Ro. xi. 22; Eph. ii. 7. -y. of the direction of the will and action; 00. of purpose and end [ W. § 49, 1. 3 d.] : eVl TO fidiTTitTp.a avTov, to receive his baptism, Mt. iii. 7 ; eTrl 6eapiavTaiTT)v, Lk. xxiii. 48 ; e0' 6 irapei, Mt. xxvi. 50 G L T Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. f.) ; where aim and result coalesce: ev\ to crvfi(pepov,\iiih. xii. 10. pp. of tilings done with hostility ; against: after aTroTo^ia, Ro. xi. 22 ; dvaiTTr]vai, Mk. iii. 26 ; eyeipecrdai, Mt. xxiv. 7 ; ]\Ik. xiii. 8 ; Lk. xxi. 1 ; iireyeipeiv Siaypov, Acts xiii. 50 ; pepi- a-drjvai. Mt. xii. 26 ; Mk. iii. 24 sq. ; e-waipeiv ti em, Jn. xiii. 18 ; pdpTvp, 2 Co. i. 23 ; paprvptov, Lk. ix. 5 ; daxyj- /uoveii/, 1 Co. vii. 36 (tif Tiva, Dion.Hal. 2. 26); poixdaBai, Mk. X. 11 ; ToXpav, 2 Co. x. 2 ; ^pvxeiv ubovTas, Acts vii. 54. YV- of tl'^'' 'o which one refers in writing or speaking [cf. W. § 49, 1. 3 d.] : after Xe'yeiv. Heb. vii. 13 ; 6 ovv paKapi(Tp6s • . • aKpo^variav, sc. \eyeTai [W. 587 (546), cf. B. 394 (338)], Ro. iv. 9 ; 7rpo(pr]Tela, 1 Tim. i. 18; on Mk. ix. 12 sq. see ypd' oaov xP"'">v for so long time as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 31» : (!al. iv. 1 ; and simply ecjy oaov as lon d. above], Mt. i.\. 15 ; 2 Pet. i. 13 ; e, eVtjSoao), fVi^XcVo). incKTtlvu}, Ctc. 3. imposi- tion : iniKaOi^Q}. (ttitIOtj^i, iiril^i^d^ii), fVtiSapew, fmypd(f)Q>, eTTtpplnToj. (TnTaa-a-a. ctc. 4. accumulation, increase, addition : ineKraywyr), eVitruvdyo), (Tnawpfvai, fViKaXe'u (by a cognomen), etc. 5. repetition : eVaiTt'co. fVnrapi- fivrjaKoy, etc. 6. »/>, '//>'/'^/r//: eVa/pw. eVawiyw. fVaf^pi^o). etc. 7. af/ainst : iirt^ovXTj, i-navi(TTr)jii. eiriopKOi, «Vt- opKfoi. etc. 8. superintendence : eVio-Tnrrjf. ciri.-Pa(vu ; 2 aor. eVc'^rji' ; pf. ptcp. eiri^e^i^Kois \ 1. to get upon, mount : eni ti, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. Hell. 3, 4, I, etc. i Gen. xxiv. 61); ™ ttXoiw [to embark in'], Acts xx%-ii. 2 (Thuc. 7, 70) ; tis to irko'iov. Acts xxi. G R G ; used without a case, of going aboard (a ship). Acts xxi. 2; to go up : eU 'UpotroK. Acts xxi. 4 L T Tr WII, [yet al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter : els with the ace. of place, Acts xx. 18; with the dat. of place (as also in Grk. writ.). Acts x.w. 1.* ^in-pdXXu; irapf. em^aWov; fut. fVi^aXi; 2 aor. eVc- /SaXoi/, [3 pers. plur. -\av. Acts xxi. 27 T Tr WII ; Mk. xiv. 46 T WII, (seedn-€'p;(o^ai, init.)]; 1. Transitively, a. to cast upon : rivi lip6\ov, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; riv\ to Ifidna, ^Ik. xi. 7 ; [xoi'i' eVi rdr Kf(f>. Rev. xviii. 1 9 WII mrg.] ; to lai/ upon, eVi Tiva ttjv x^'P" '^'' ™f x^'P"*' "^^d of seizing one to lead him off as a i>risoner : Mt. xxvi. 50 ; Mk. xiv. 46 RGL; Lk. XX. 19; .xxi. 12; Jn. vii. 30 [L mrg. e/3aXei'], 44 (L Tr WII the simple fi6X\(w) ; Acts v. 18 ; .xxi. 27, (for the Ilebr. '3 h^ T nh- Xou, Pint. i)Iac. phil. 4, 8 ; absol. fViSaXu)!/. sc. ra prjpaTt TOV 'l>;o-oC, when he had considered the utterance of Jesus. Mk. xiv. 72 ; cf. Kypke, [Wotst., McClellan] ad loc; 15. 145 (127); [and for the diff. interpp. sec Mev. and esp. Morison ad loc.]. 3. Impersonally, fViiSfiXXfi ^oi (V belongs to me, falls to my share: to fVi|3(iXXoi' (sc. /joi) /tcpos T^f ova-las. Lk. xv. 12 (KTrjfiaTaiv to cntjUaXXov, Ildt. 4, 115; TO fViSdXXoi' avrois p-tpos, Diod. 14, 1 7, and the like often in other writ, [see Meyer; o-ol cVijSdXXn ij K\rjpovopla, Tob. vi. 12 (cf. iii. 17; iMacc.x. 30, etc.)]).' €iri-Pap«'u, -tt) ; 1 aor. inf. fTn^aprjaai ; to put a hurilen upon, fii liiiiil. [cf. fVi. D. 3] : trop. la be burdensome ; so in the X. T. ; rivd. 1 Th. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; absol. Iva pf) tVi- fiapa> • that I press not too lieavily ' i. e. lest I give ]j:un by too severe langu.igc, 2 Co. ii. 5. (Dion. Hal., Ap])ian.)* tTn-Pipi^a: 1 aor. int^l^aaa: to cause to mount; to place upon, [cf. cVi, D. 3] : riva or tI tVi n, Lk. x. 34 ; xix. 35 ; Acts xxiii. 24. (Thuc, Plat., Diod., al. ; Sept. several times for 3'3^n.) * liri-pXtiritf : 1 aor. ine^\c^a ; in the Sept. often for U"2n and nj3, also for ns^ ; to turn the eges upon, to look upon, gaze upon, (eVi u/ion [cf. eVi, D. 2]) : tVi riva, contcxtually, to look upon one with a feeling of admira- tion and respect, to look up to, regard, Jas. ii. 3 ; eontextu- ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid. i. q. to have regard for, to regard. Lk. ix. 38 (where for «Vi- ffKf^av [R L] and tVi'^Xei/'a» [' • T] write [with Tr WII] €7n^\t\j/ai, 1 aor. act. inf. ; cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc, and aliove in Seopai. 3 a., [also B. 273 (234) note]) ; e'lrl Tijx TaT!(lvuiaiv TWOS. Lk. i. 48 ; often in the O. T. in the same sense, as 1 S. i. 11; ix. 16; Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 16; l.xviii. (Ixix.) 1 7 ; Tob. iii. 3. etc. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Plato down, both lit. and fig.) * cir£-pXT)(io, -T09, TO, (eVt/3(iXXQ)), //('// which is thrown or put upon a thing, or that which is added to it ; an addition ; spec, that ichich is sewed on to corer a rent, a patch ; Vulg. assumentum [(also commmura)], (i. q. iirlppapa) : ^It. ix. 16 ; ]\Ik. ii. 21 ; Lk. v. 36. [Sept., Plut., Arr.]* ciri-Pod(D, -0) ; to cry out to [cf. eVi, D. 2], C7-y out : folL by ace. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 R G, [but L T Tr WH ^oaa, (\. V. 2, and fin. From llom., Ildt. down].* e'lri-PouX^i, -^f, f), a plan formed against one [cf. ia eirlyftos (opp. to f) avadfv KaTfpxoiiivr]), the wisdom of man, liable to error and misleading, Jas. iii. 15. (From Plato down ; nowhere in the O. T.) * eiri-7Cvo|i.ai : 2 aor. in-fyfvofirjv ; 1. to become or hajipen afterwards ; to be burn after. 2. to come to, arrive : of time, Teo-o-apftr/caiSeicarr; vv^ eVeyeVfTo, Acts xxvii. 27 L [ed. ster.], T [edd. 2, 7] ; Ijapoi fTnyiyverai apr), Horn. II. 6, 148). 3. to arise, spring up, come on : iinyevopivov votov, a south wind having sprung up. Acts xxviii. 13; (Thuc. 3, 74; 4, 30).» erri-'Yivuo-Ku ; [impf. fVeyrVoxTKOf] ; f ut. cViycoxro/iat ; 2 aor. iTTiyv(jdv'. pf. tV^yi'ojKa; [Pass., pres. eVtyti/a)(rKo/iat ; 1 aor. cVfyi'&xr^i;!'] : (eVi denotes mental direction tow- ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept. chiefly for ^'"1' and 130, "'''^n ; 1. to become Ihoroui/h- Iij acquainted ivith, to know thoroughli/; to /enow accu- rately, know well, [see reff. s. v. ewiypuxris, init.J : 1 Co. xiii. 12 (where ■ytKoxricm ck p.epovs and iitiyiv. i. e. to know thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [W. § 39, 3 X. 2]) ; with an ace. of the thing, Lk. i. 4 ; 2 Co. i. 13 ; TTjv x^P*-^ ^o^ Bcov, Col. i. G ; rr^v a\rf6eLav, I Tim. iv. 3 ;• rriv 6h6v t^s StKaioaivris, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [cf. B. 30.5 (2G2)] ; TO hiKalii>pa Toil 6foi', Ro. i. 32 ; t\ foil, by on (by the fa- miliar attraction [W. C26 (581); B. 376 (322); some bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge^), 1 Co. xiv. 37 ; Tivd, one's character, will, deeds, deserts, etc., 1 Co. xvi. 18 ; 2 Co. i. 14 ; [pass. opp. to ayvoovfLevoi, 2 Co. vi. 9] ; nva ano tivos (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20 [Lchm. «] (" a GaUicis armis atque insignibus cogno- sces," for the more common ex, Caes. b. g. I, 22, 2 [cf. B. 324 (278 sq.); W. 372 (348)]); by attraction rira, Sri etc. 2 Co. xiii. 5 ; iTZLyivuitTKiirov vtov, tov naripa, ^It. xi. 27. 2. univ. to know; a. to recognize: rivd, i. e. by sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person is, Mt. xiv. 35 ; Mk. vi. 54 ; Lk. xxiv. 16, 31 ; Mk. vi. 33 [R T, but G WII mrg. without the accus.] ; by attrac- tion, nvd, on. Acts iii. 10; iv. 13; nvd, his rank and authority, ilt. xvii. 12; with ace. of the thing, to recog- nize a thing to be what it really is : rrfv (paivrjv toC IIcVpou, Acts xii. 14 ; t^v yfjv. Acts xxvii. 30. b. to know i. q. to perceive : ri, Lk. v. 22 ; iv tavrco. foil, by ace. of the thing with a ptcp. [B. 301 (258)], Mk. v. 30 ; foil, by on, Lk. i. 22 : ru 7ivevp,an foil, by on. ^Ik. ii. 8. c. to know i. e. to Jind out, ascertain : sc. airo. Acts ix. 30 ; foil, bv on, Lk. vii. 37 ; xxiii. 7 ; Acts xix. .34 ; xxii. 29 ; xxiv. 11 L T Tr WH ; xxviii. 1 ; ti, foil, by an indirect quest.. Acts xxiii. 28 L T Tr WH ; [8t' rjv alrlav etc. Acts xxii. 24] ; jrapd nvos (gen. of pers.) jrfpi nvos (gen. of thing). Acts xxiv. 8. d. to know i. e. to understand : Acts xxv. 10. [From Hom. down.]' ert--YV), an inscription, title : in the N. T. of an inscription in black letters upon a whitened tablet [B. D. s. v. Cross], Lk. xxiii. 38 ; with the gen. ttjs aiTias, i. e. of the accusation, Mk. xv. 26, (ypdfipara ttjv alrlav t^j 6avaTdj(X€: (£Tri8i]pot) ; 1. to be present among one's people, in one's city or in one's native land, [cf. em, D. 1], (Thuc, Plato, al. ; opp. to dTroSripe'iv, Xen. CjT. 7, 5, 69 ; eniSjjpfiv iv raSf ra ^ia, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 12 [p. 88 ed. Otto]). 2. to be a sojourner, a foreign resi- dent, among any people, in any country : Acts ii. 10; ol fTTiSrjpovvres ^ivoi. Acts xvii. 21 ; (Xen., Plato, Theophr., Lcian., Aelian, al.).* eTnBtaTd(Taofj,ai 238 eiri-dv/Mta, lm-Sia-Td; impf. cVcfijTow; 1 aor. infC'irriaa; fr. Ildt. down ; Sept. for tynT and in 1 S. xx. 1 ; Eccl. vii. 29 (28) for E'pa ; to inquire for, seek fir, search for, seek diligently, ((Jerm. herbeisuchen [the em- seems to be di- rective rather than intensive]) : two, Lk. iv. 42 (for Ree. ffijTouv) ; Acts .\ii. 19 ; i. ij. to desire, wish fir, crave: tI, Mt. vi. 32 ; Lk. xu. 30 ; Ko. xi. 7 ; Phil. iv. 1 7 ; Heb. xi. 14; xiii. 14; irepi tivos. Acts xix. 39 [R G T] (but if your inquiry or desire has reference to other matters) ; with the inf. Acts .xiii. 7 (as in Polyb. 3, 57, 7 ; Diod. 1 9, 8); I. (\. to demand, clamor for: (n^fieioi/, Mt. xii. 39 ; xvi. 4; Mk. viii. 12 RG; Lk. xi. 29 (where TTr WH fr/T» [as L T Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.]).* 4in9av4Tios, -01». (^nraxos), doomed to death : 1 Co. iv. 9. (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 35.) * 4irC-9eo-is, -fus, rj, (emTiBrifu), a laying on, imposition : Tail/ xfwiiiv, Acts viii. 18 ; 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 6 ; Heb. VI. 2. The imposition of hands, xfipoOeala, was a sacred rite transmitted by the ilews to the Christians, and i- : 1 aor. eirfKadiaa ; 1. lo cause to sit upon, to set upon : Mt. xxi. 7 llec.''' 2. intrans. to sit upon : Matt. I. e. [Rec."] G L T Tr WII al.* tiri-KoXc'ii), -co : 1 aor. eVf icaXea-a ; [Pass, and Mid., pres. fVixaXoG/iui] ; pf. pass. (TnKeKXrjixai. ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. iireKiK\rjTo, and with neglect of augm. [cf. W. § 12, 9 ; B. 33 (29)] (■TriKCKXrjTo (Acts xxvi. 32 Lchm.) ; 1 aor. pass. fTTfKXrjdrjv ; fut. mid. tViKaXeVopai ; 1 aor. mid. eVfKaXt- iTafj.rjv ; Sept. very often for S<">p ; 1. to put a name upon, to surname : rivd (Xen., Plato, al.), Mt. x. 25 G T Tr WH (Rec. (KaXecrav) ; pass, d eViKaXov/ierof, he who is surnamed, Lk. xxii. 3 RG L; Acts x. 18; xi. 13; xii. 12; XV. 22 R G; also os «ViKaXeiTat, Acts x. 5, 32 ; d «Vi- K\r]deU, Mt. X. 3 [RG] ; Acts iv. 3G ; xii. 25 ; i. q. os fVf- KKfiOtf, Acts i. 23. Pass, with the forde of a mid. [cf. W. § 38, 3], to permit one's self to be surnamed : Heb. xi. 1 6 ; Mid. w. Tiva : 1 Pet. i. 1 7 1 1 TTcnipa eniKoKeiaBf tov etc. i. e. if ye call (for yourselves) on him as father, i. e. if ye sur- name him your father. 2. cVixaXfiTai to ovopd tivos iitl Tim, after the Ilebr. "3 '?;• "2 DU N^pJ, tlie natne of one is named upon some one, i. e. he is called hi/ his name or declared lo be dedicated to him (cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1232") : Acts xv. 17 fr. Am. ix. 12 (the name referred to is the people of God) ; Jas. ii. 7 (the name ot tov XpioroO). 3. nvt with the ace. of the object ; prop, to call something to one [cf. Eng. to cry out upon (or against) one] ; to charge something to one as a crime or reproach ; to summon one on any charge, prose- cute one for a crime ; to blame one for, accuse one of (Arstph. pax 663; Thuc. 2, 27; 3, 36; Plat. legg. 6, 761 e. ; 7, 809 e. ; Dio Cass. 36, 28; 40,41 and often in the orators [cf. s. v. Kanjyopea^) : el tu olKoSecnroTrj BeeX- fe^oiX in(Kd\f(Taii (i. e. a<^cused of commerce with Beel- zebul, of receiving his help, cf. Mt. ix. 34 ; xii. 24 ; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15), ttocw paWov roiy otKiaKols avTov, Mt. X. 25 L WH mrg. after cod. Vat. (see 1 above), a read- ing defended by Rettig in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1838, p. 477 sqq. and by Alex. Bttm. in the same journal for 1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132); [also by Weiss in Mey. ed. 7 ad loc.]. But this expres- sion (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelze- bul. 4. to call upon (like Germ, anrufen), to invoke ; Mid. to call upon for one's self, in one's behalf: any one as a helper, Acts vii. 59, where supply tov Kvptov 'irja-oiv (fioTid6v, Plat. Euthyd. p. 297 c. ; Diod. 5, 79) : rtva lidpTvpa, as my witness, 2 Co. i. 23 (Plat. legg. 2, 664 c.) ; as a judge, i. e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto : Kai- aapa, Acts xxv. 11 sq. ; x.xvi. 32; xxviii. 19; [tov 2f/3a- (TTov, Acts xxv. 25] ; foil, by the inf. pass. Acts xxv. 21 (to be reserved). 5. Ilebraistically (Uke n'lrr Di?3 S"(p to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Gen. iv. 26; xii. 8; 2 K. v. 11, etc.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1231' [or Hebr. Lex. s. v. SIp]; an expression finding its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name : Ps. iii. 2 ; vi. 2 ; vii. 2, etc.) cTrocaXoC^ui to uvopa tov xvpiov, I call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i. e. to invoke, adore, worship, the Lord, i. e. Christ : Acts ii. 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; ix. 14, 21 ; xxii. 16 ; Ro. x. 13 sq. ; 1 Co. i. 2 ; tov Kvpiov, Ro. x. 1 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; (often in Grk. writ. iiriKoKficrdai toI/s Beovs, as Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 35 ; Plat. Tim. p. 27 c. ; Polyb. 1.7, 1, 13).* eiri-KdX«(i(ia, -Tor, to, {eiriKaKimra) , a covering, veil; prop, in Sept.: Ex. xxvi. 14; xx.Kvi. 19 Compl. [cf. xxxix. 21 Tdf.] ; metaph. i. q. a pretext, cloak: ttjs xaictaf, 1 Pet. 11. 16 (TrXouTOf 5e noWtov eTTiKctXvpp.' eorl kukwv, Menand. ap. Stob. tior. 91, 19 [iii. 191 ed. Gaisf.] ; "quaerentes libidinibus suis patrocinium et velamen- tum," Seneca, vita beata 12).* 4iri-KaXiiirTw : [1 aor. cirfKaXvcpdrivl; to cover over: al apapriai emKoKvirrovrai, are covered over so as not to come to view, i. e. are pardoned, Ro. iv. 7 fr. Ps. xxxi. (.xxxii.) 1.* €7rt-KaT-apaTOS, -ov, (iniKaTapaopai to imprecate curses- upon), only in bibl. and eccl. use, accursed, execrable, ex- posed to divine vengeance, lying under God's curse : Jn. vii. 49 R G ; Gal. iii. 10 (Deut. xxvii. 26) ; ibid. 13 (Dent. xxi. 23) ; (Sap. iii. 12 (13) ; xiv. 8 ; 4 Mace. ii. 19 ; in Sept. often for intj).* cirC-Kci.|i.ai ; impf. eneKfiprjv ; to lie upon or over, rest upon, be laiit or placed upon ; a. prop. : ini twi, Jn. xi. 38; sc. on the burning coals, Jn. xxi. 9. b. figuratively, a. of things : of the pressure of a violent tempest, ;^ei- pwvos iiTiKfipevov, Acts xxvii. 20 (Plut. Timol. 2S. 7) ; dvdyKr] poi (TTiKetTai, is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Iloin. L. 6, 458) ; eiriKelpfva. of observances imposed on a man by law, Heb. ix. 10 [cf. W. 635 (589)]. p. of men ; to press upon, to be urgent : with dat. of pers. Lk. v. 1 ; fir€KfLVTO cuTovpfvoi, Lk. xxiii. 23 (ttoXXw paXXof en-cicftTo d^taiv, Joseph, antt. 18, 6,6; ^aXXov eniKfivro ffXao-rprj- povvrei, 20, 5, 3).* eirt-KeXXiD : [1 aor. eVc'/cf iXa] ; to run a ship ashore, to bring to land; so fr. Horn. Od. 9, 148 down; eireicetXav (RG fwo>K(i.Xav) TTjv vavv. Acts xxvii. 41 L T Tr WII ; but in opposition see Meyer ad loc. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009.]* [tin-KeaXoiov, -ov, to, head-money, poll-tax, (Aristot. oec. 2 ]). 1346', 4 and 1348». 32) : Mk. xii. 14 WII (rejected), mrg. for ktjvo-ov (al.).*] 'EiriKovp€ios [-pior T AVH ; see I, t], -ov, 6, Epicurean,. belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the ])hilosopher : Acts xvii. IS.* eiriKovpCa. -as. fj, (fniKovpeo) to aid), aid. succor: Acts- (Sap. xiii. 18 ; fr. Thuc. and Eur. down.) * xxvi. :i.i. eiTlKpiVO) 240 eirifievta jin-Kp(vu : 1 aor. eneKpiva ; lo adjudge, approve t>y nne's decision, decree, give sentence : foil, by the ace. with inf., Lk. x.xiii. 24. (Plato, Dcm., Pint., lldiaii., al.)* CTri.-Xa|ipdvu ; 2 aor. mid. fnfXafiufjLtjv ; to take in addi- tion [cf. tVi, U. 4], to take, lay hold of, lake possession of, overtake, attain to. In the Bible only in the mid. ; Sept. for ins and p'inn ; a. prop.'to lay hold of or to seize upon anything tvith the hands (Germ, sich an elwas anhallen) : tu>v a(ji\av vtjos, Ildt. 6, 114 ; hence, univ. lo take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. .\iv. 31 ; Lk. i.\. 47 [Tr WII ace.]; (x.\m. 26 KG); Acts -wii. 19; xxi. .30, 33; with ace. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L T Tr WII, but in opposition see Meyer ; for where the ptcp. «ViXa/Sd/ieKoi is in this sense joined with an ace., the ace., by the ax'IH^" "^" koivoO, depends also upon the aceompanyin'4 finite verb (cf. B. § 132, 9; [so W. (ed. Liinem.) 202 (190)]): Actsi.x.2r; xvi. 19; -xviii. 1 7, cf. Lk. -xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing : ttjs xf ; to bear witness to, establish by testi- mony: foil, by the ace. with inf., 1 Pet. v. 12. (Plato, Joseph., Plut., Lcian., al.) [Comp. : a-vv-eiripapTvpta.'] * liri|«'Xeio, -as, r), ((mpeXfis careful), care, nlUnlion : Acts xxvii. 3. (Prov. iii. S; 1 Maec. xvi. 14 ; 2 Mace. xi. 23 ; very com. in (Jrk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)* tm-(MX€0(i.ai., -oiipai, and (■nipi\opi.aL : fut. inip(\r)(jopai ; I aor. iiTfpMiQTjv; with gen. of the object, to lake care of a jjerson or thing ( : fut. imopKrjaa, cf. Kriigfr § 40 s. v., and § .-iO, 12, 4 ; [Yeitcli s. v. ; B. 53 (46)] ; {cniopKos, q. v.) ; to sivear falsebj, forswear one's self: Mt. v. 33. (Sap. xiv. 28 ; 1 Esdr. i. 4G ; by Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * tirC-opKos, -ov, (fr. eVi [q. v. D. 7] against, and opKos) ; [masc. as subst.] a/alse swearer, aperjurer : 1 Tim. i. 10. (From Hom. down.) * «irtoi!6l3os, Lk. i. 1 2 ; Acts xix. 1 7 [L Tr eireaev] ; Rev. xi. 11 LTTrWH; eKcrraa-ts, Acts x. 10 Rec; d^Xuf, Acts xiii, 11 [RG]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its inspiration and impulse : cVt rivt. Acts viii. 16 ; eVi riva, X. 44 [Ijchm. fTTfo-f] ; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5) ; of reproaches Cftst upon one : Ro. xv. 3 [Noteworthy is the absol. use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. eTrfVeo-cv (al. cyeVero) ora- inl n [i. e. eVi is directive, not intensive; cf. ini, D. 2] (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq.) ; to long for, de- sire : foil, by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2 ; l&elv riva, Ro. i. 11 ; 1 Th. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; PhU. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br. ; W, 1 Pet. ii. 2 (fVi TJ, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2) ; riva, to be possessed with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30, 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26 RGTTrWIImrg. ; to pursue with love, to long after: 2 Co. ix. 14 ; Phil. i. 8, (tos ivroXas 6fov, Ps. cxviii. (cxLX.) 131) ; absol. to lust [i. e. harbor forbidden desire] : Jas. iv. 5, on which pass, see (pdovos- (Hdt., Plat., Diod., Plut., Lcian.) • •oOijaii; 242 eTTKTKOTT'q ^i-'inSdrio-is, -eui, >;, lonr/ing : 2 Co. vii. 7, 11. (Ezek. xxiii. 11 Aq. ; Clem. jVlex. strom. 4, 21, 131 p. 527 a.) * iiTi.-tr66r\TOi,-ov, longed for: Phil. iv. 1. ([Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. G.'i, 1 ; Barn. ep. 1, 3]; App. liisp. 43; Eustath.; [cf. \V. ii;i4. :!].)• iirnro9£a [WII -jroSfia, see s. v. €i, i],-as, t], loiujing: llo. XV. 23 ; ciiral Xfyo^. [On the passage ef. 15. 2iM (2.32).] * 4iri.-iropevo(iai. ; to go or Joiinwi/ to : Trpos nva, Lk. viii. 4; (foil, by eVi with the ac-c. Ep. Jer. CI (G2) ; Tolyb. 4, 0, 2 ; freq. used by Polyb. with the simple ace. of place : both lo go to, traverse regions, cities (so tiji» y^p, Ezek. xxxix. 14 for 13i? ; Tar Swd/iftr, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also lo make a hostile inrond, occrrun, march over).* liTt-ppdirTco (T Tr WH «Vi/xiTTTti), sec P, p) ; (panrw to sew); lo sew upon, sew lo: iiri tivi [UG; al. ni/aj, i\Ik. ii. 21.* 4iri-pp£irro) (LTTrWII iirip'mTui, see P, p) : 1 aor. fne))pi\j/a; (piiTTa); to throw upon, place iipon : ri inl ti, Lk. xix. 35 ; ( Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) : Tt}v pepinvav fVi 6e6v, i. e. to cast upon, give up to, God, 1 Pet. V. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (Iv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Horn. Od. 5, 310 down.] • eirCcn)|ios, -ov, (o'tjpa a sign, mark) ; 1. proj). liaving a ninrk on it, marked, stamped, coined : apyvptou, ^pvaot, (lldt., Thuc, Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. »»«/■/■«/ (Lat. inxignis). hoih in a good and bad sense ; in a good sense, of note, illustrious : Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.) ; in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. IG (Eur. Or. 249 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 7, 1 ; Pint. Fab. Max. 14 ; al.).* eiri, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. 9.* tiri-o-KittJw ; [impf. firea-Kia^ov, Lk. ix. 34 L mrg. T Tr txt. WII] ; fut. eTTta-Kidaa ; 1 aor. enta-Kiaa-a ; to throw a shadow upott, lo envelop in shadow, to overshadow : rivi. Acts v. 15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud surrounding and enveloping persons with brightn ess: nvu, Mt. xvii. 5 ; Lk. ix. 34 ; rivi, Mk. ix. 7. Trojii- cally, of the Holy .Spirit exerting creative energy u|)on the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a use of the word which seems to have been drawn fi-om the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the immediate presence and power of God) : with the dat. Lk. i. 35. (In prof. auth. generally w. an ace. of the olijoct and in the sense of ol/sruring: Hdt. 1, 209 ; Soiih., Aristot., Theophr., Philo, Lcian., Ildian., Geop. Sci)t. for llDD to cover, Ps. xe. (xci.) 4 ; cxxxix. (cxl.) 8 ; lur JDC/, Ex. xl. 29 (35) infT; (cf. Germ, sich worauf verstehen) ; a. to be acquainted with : ri. Acts xviii. 25 ; Jas. iv. 14 ; Jude 1 ; nvd, Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is said or is to be interpreted, to understand : Jli. xiv. 68; 1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to know, vepl tivos, Acts xxvi. 26 ; foil. -by an ace. with a ptcp. Acts xxiv. 10 [W. 346 (324) ; B. 301 (258)] ; foil, by on. Acts xv. 7 ; xix. 25 ; xxii. 19; foil, by (Bf, Acts X. 28 ; by wtot, Acts xx. 18; by ttoO, Heb. xi. 8. [Syn. see ywao-Ka.'] * ^irtii) ; fut. (mcrrpi^ffa) ; 1 aor. iiritrTpe^a : 2 aor. pass. eTrea-Tpdcprjv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Ijijn^ 32D and 3t3n, nj3, and times without number for 2V\y and 3'iyn ; 1. transitively, a. to turn to : eVi t6v 6(6v, to the worship of the true God, Acts ,xxvi. 20. b. to cause to return, to bring back ; fig. riva iiri Kvptov tov deov, to the love and obedience of God, Lk. i. 16 ; fVi tckvo, to love for the children, Lk. i. 1 7 ; iv (ppovrjo-d SiKalaiv, that they may be in [R. V. to walk in] the wisdom of the righteous, Lk. i. 17 ; Tiva enl riva, supply from the conte.xt eVi rf/v d\r)6fiav and em rfjv 686v, Jas. v. 19 sq. 2. intrans. (W. § 38, 1 [cf. p. 26 ; B. 144 (126 sq.)]) ; a. to turn, €-}rt<7TpoT|, -rjs, fj, (tVioTpe^o)), conrer.s'/on (of Gentiles fr. idolatry to the true God [cf. W. 26]) : Acts xv. 3. (Cf. Sir. xUx. 2 ; xviii. 21 (20) ; in Grk. writ, in many other senses.) * im-(rvv-aya ; fiit. eTnaruvd^o) ; 1 aor. inf. eTvio'vva^ai ; 2 aor. inf. ento'vpayaye'lu ; Pass., pf. ]>tcp. ema-vvrjy^evos ', 1 aor. ptcp. imoX'pfvaai\ to heap up, accumulate in piles : SiBaa-KaXovs, to choose for themselves and run after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut., Athen., Artemid., al.) • iiri.-Tayl], -fjs, r/, (emTcia-cra), an injunction, mandate, cominatid : Ro. xvi. 2G ; 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 ; Tit. i. 3 ; jxeTa 7T(l(Tr]s «VtTay^t, with every possible form of author- ity, Tit. ii. 15; kut ennayrjv, by way of conunand, 1 Co. vii. 6 ; 2 Co. viii. 8. (Sap. xiv. IG, etc. ; Polyb., Diod.) * 4iri-Tdcrdva>v, Plato, legg. 6 p. 766 c. ; Plut. Lye. 3 ; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael. v.'h. 3, 26): Gal. iv. 2.' (■m-rvyxavo : 2 aor. inenixov; 1. to light or hit upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thuc, Xen., Plato). 2. to attain to, obtain : Jas. iv. 2 ; with gen. of thing, Heb. vi. 15 ; xi. 33 ; with ace. of thing : tovto, Ro. xi. 7 (where Rec. toCtov). Cf. Matthiae § 328; [W. 200 (188)].* £iri-<{)aivdv«ia, -as, v> (iirKpavfis), an appearing, appearance, (TertuU. apparentid) ; often used by the Greeks of a clorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad- vent to help; in 2 ilacc. of signal deeds and events betokening the presence and power of God as helper ; cf. Grimm on ilacc. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Xote B) in the Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq. (1882)]. In the N. T. the 'advent' of Christ, — not only tliat which has already taken place and b}- which €Triif)aPV'> 246 eTTO? liis presence and power appear in the saving light he has slied iipun niankiml, 2 Tim. i. 10 (note the word (bwTiaain-oi in tliit jjass.) ; Ijut also that illustrious return from heaven to earth hereafter to occur: 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1,8; Tit. ii. 13 [on which see esp. I'rof. Abbot u. s.] ; Tj (7Ti(f>dvfm (i. e. the breaking forth) Tijt napov- rrlas avTov, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.] * (iriavT|$. -fs, (^(maivo>), consjuctioiis, manl/esl, iltus- triuus: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the Sept. here and in Judg. .xiii. C [Ale.x.]; Ilab. i. 7; Mai. i. 14 thus render the word X"]1J terrible, deriving it in- correctly from nX"; and so confounding it with nST:.' ('n'L-(|>av(rKU (i. q. the iTrifjiaiiTKa) of (!rk. writ., cf. ^V. 90 (><■'>); B. Cr (59)): fut. (TTicPava-a) ; to shine upon: Tivi, Eph. V. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will j)our upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5 ; xxxi. 2G ; [xli. 9] ; Acta Thomac § 34.) ' ciri-4>cp(» ; [impf. (TTec'pfiv TTvpi, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [cf. W. § .02, 4, 7]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, ((papiiaKov, Plat. ep. 8 p. 3.'')4 b.) : t\ (ttI riva, in pass., Acts xix. 12, where LTTrWII a7to(j)ipe(r$ai., (j. v.* €irt-4>wv€(i), -ci> : [impf. eVft^mi'oiii'] ; loculloutto,slioul: fall. In- direct disc, Lk. xxiii. 21 ; Acts xii. 22 ; foil, by the dat. of a pers., Acts xxii. 24 ; W, Acts xxi. 34 L T TrWII. [(Soph, on.)] • iiri-^ii>trKo> ; [impf. eirecpoKrKov] ; to grow light, to dawn [cf. B. U8 (GO)] : Lk. xxiii. 54 ; foil, by ds, iAIt. xxviii. 1, on which see fls, A. U. 1.* tirixt^P^'^t -a: impf. enexfipovv; 1 aor. fjiexdpria-a; (xdp) ; 1. prop, to put the hand to (Ilom. Od. 24, 38G, 395). 2. often fr. lidt. down, to take in hand, undertake, altcmpt, (anything to be done), foil, by the inf. : Lk. i. 1 ; Acts ix. 29 ; xix. 13 ; (2 Mace. ii. 29 ; vii. 19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the Jahrbb. f. dcutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.» eVi-xtw; fr. Horn, down; to pour upon: ri, Lk. x. 34 (sc. fVl TO T-pau/iara; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. v. 11).* em-xopTye'iD, -m ; 1 aor. impv. iTiixoprjyrjaaTe ; Pass., [pres. eV(;(opi)yoC/jaj]; \ iul. imxopr)yr)6i](Topm\ (see )(opj]- ■yc'w) ; to supplij, furnish, present, (Germ, darreichen) : Tivi TJ, 2 Co. ix. 10 ; Gal. iii. 5 ; i. q. to show or afford by deeds: t^i/ dpfrrjv, 2 Pet. i. 5; in pass., f(cro8or, fur- nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. U ; Pass, to be supplied, min- istered unto, assisted, (so the simple p^opi^eio-^tii in Xen. rep. Athen. 1, 13; Polyb. 3, 75, 3; 4, 77, 2; 9, 44. 1 ; Sir. xliv. 6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, where Vulg. subminhlratuw. (Rare in prof. writ, as Dion. Hal. 1, 42; Phal. ep. 50; Diog. Laert. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr. probl. 1, 81].)* cVi-xopHYta, -as, fj, (eVt;(Opi;ye'o), q. v.), (Vulg. submin- islralio), a sujiplging, supply: Eph. iv. IG; Phil. i. 19. (Eccl. writers.) * tVi-xp'" : 1 aor. (Ve';(/)t ; 1 aor. cVuKoSo/iijo-a, and without augm. iiroiKo86p.rj(ra (1 Co. iii. 14 T TrWII; cf. Tdf.'s note on Acts vii. 47, [see oiVoSo/iew]) ; Pass., pres. eiroi- Kobopoipai ; 1 aor. ptc]). (7roiKo&opri6(vres ; in the N. T. only in the fig. which likens a cum])any of Christian believers to an edifice or temple; to build upon, build uji, (^'ulg. superaedijifo) ; absol. [like our Eng. build uj>'] viz. 'to finish the structure of which the foundation has already been laid,' i. e. in jdain language, to give con- stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con- formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where LT TrWII oIkoS. [Vulg. aedifcol); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Tdf.) ; M Tin/ dfptXiof, 1 Co. iii. 12; W, ibid. 14 ; «V Xpia-ria, with the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in sjiiritual life, Col. ii. 7 ; eVoncoSo/ji/^. eVi 6(pc\la tS)v dnoaroKav, on the foundation laid by the ajiostlcs, i. c. (dropping the fig.) gathered together into a church by the ajiostles' preaching of the gospel, Eph. ii. 20 ; iiroiKobopdv iavritv Ttj iriarei, Jude 20, where the sense is, 'resting on your most holy faith as a foundation, make progress, rise like an edifice higher and higher.' (Thuc, Xen., Plato, al.) * €Tr-oKt'\Xo) : 1 aor. tTraxeiXa ; to drive upon, strike against : Tr]v vavv [i. e. to run the ship «.s/iore]. Acts xxvii. 41 IIG; see fVifce'XXu. (Ildt. C, IC ; 7, 182; Time. 4, 26.) • t'lr-ovoiid^u : [pres. pass, iirovopd^opai] ; fr. Ildt. down; Sept. for XTp ; to put a name ujton, name ; Pass, to be named: Ro. ii. 17; ef. Fritzsche ad loc* tir-oirreiu [ptcp. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LTTrWII]; 1 aor. ])tcp. €7TojTT(ii7avTfs; 1. to be an overseer (Homer, Ilesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attenlirely; to watch (Aeschyl., Dem., al.) : tI, 1 Pet. iii. 2 ; (k tivos, sc. tt;!/ dvaaTpo(l)riv, 1 Pet. ii. 12.* c'lroimis, -01), d, (fr. unused effonroo) ; 1. a/i over- seer, inspector, see iiriaKoims ; (Aeschyl., Pind., al. ; of God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39 ; vii. 3.5 ; 3 Mace. ii. 21 ; Add. to Esth. V. 1 ; dudpairlvav tpyav, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything : so in 2 Pet. i. 16; inasmuch as those were called enom-ai, by the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high- est] grade of the Elcusinian mysteries (Phit. Aleib. 22, and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig- nate those pri\ileged to be present at the heavenly spec- tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.* «iros, -for. (-ouf), to, a word : as eiros dneiv (see dnov, 1 a. p. 181«), Ilcb. vii. 9.* [Stx. iiros seems primarily to desifrnatc a word as an ar- ticulate manifestation of a mental state, and .so to differ from i>7l!ia ((|. v.), tlie mere vocable; for its relation to Kiyos see Ad-yos 1. l.j eTTOvpuvio'; 247 epyacria en^updvios, -01/, (ovpavot), prop, existing in or above heaven, heavenly ; 1. existing in heaven : 6 irarfip iirov- pdvtos, i- e. God, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. {deoi, deos, Horn. Od. 1 7, 484 ; II. 6, 131, etc. ; 3 Mace. vi. 28 ; vii. 6) ; ol eVou- pavioi the heavenly beings, the inhabitants of lieaven, (Lcian. dial. door. 4, 3 ; of the gods, in Theocr. 25, 5) : of angel?, in opp. to ewiyeioi and Ka-raxBovwi, Phil. ii. 10; Ignat. ad Trail. 9, [cf. Polyc. ad Philipp. 2] ; o-w/iaTa, the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, ace. to the universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 37C ; Gfrorer, Pliilo etc. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq. ; Siegfried, Philo von Ale.x. p. 30G ; yet cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loc], cf. Job x.xxviii. 7 ; Enoch .xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. xv. 40 ; rj 0acr(Xciai7 ivovp. (on which seep. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; sub- stantially the same as 17 warpis 17 iwovp. Ileb. xi. 16 and 'lepuv(Ta\r)p. inovp. xii. 22 ; KKrjcns, a calling made (by God) in hea\ en, Ileb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref. to its e n d as well as to its o r i g i n ; cf . Liinem. ad loc], cf. Phil. iu. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noij § 6]. The neut. to e'novpavia denotes [cf. W. § 34, 2] a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes of God to grant salvation to men through the death of Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see «Vtycioj). b. the heavenly re- gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels : Eph. i. 3, 20 (where Lchm. txt. ovpavoii) ; ii. 6 ; iii. 10; the lowei- heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi. 12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air]. c. the heavenly temple or sanctuary : Heb. viii. 5 ; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly origin and nature : 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to xpixus) ; 17 Sii>pea fj iiTovp. Ileb. vi. 4.* turd, 01, ai, rd, seven : Mt. xii. 45 ; xv. 34 ; Mk. viii. 5 sq. : Lk. ii. 36 ; Acts vi. 3, etc. ; often in the Apocalypse ; ol cTjTa, sc. SiaKovoi, Acts xxi. 8. In Mt. xviii. 22 it is joined (instead of eTrraKts) to the numeral adv. efidopr]- KovraKii, in imitation of the Ilebr. 'jyp, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 164; Prov. xxiv. 16; [see c^bopr/KovraKts, and cf. Keil, Com. on Mt. 1. c.]. tirroKis, (e'jTTd), seven times : Mt. xviii. 21 sq. ; Lk. xvii. 4. [(Pind., .\rstph., al.)]* iirraKt.s-xiK'-oi.j-aij-a, seven thousand: Ro.xi.4. [(Hdt.)]* €TTU), see CtTTOX/. "Epoo-Tos, -ov, 6, Erastus, (epaaros beloved, [cf. Chan- dler § 325 ; Lipsiiis, Gram. L'ntersuch. p. 30]), the name of two Christians : 1. the companion of the apostle Paul, Acts xix. 22 ; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth, Ko. xvi. 23. AMiich of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv. 20 cannot be determined.* epawdu, a later and esp. Alexandrian [cf. Sturz, Dial. Maci-d. et Alex. p. 117] form for ip^vvaa, q. v. Cf. Tdf. ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. .x.x.xvii. ; [ed. maj. p. xxxiv. ; esp. «d. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.] ; B. 58 (50). cp'yd^op.at ; depon. mid.; impf. eipya^opjjv (rjpya^oprjif, Acts xviii. 3 LTTrAVH; [so elsewh. at times; this var. in augm. is found in the aor. also] ; cf. W. § 12, 8 ; B. 33 (29 sq.) ; Steph. Thesaur. iii. 1970 c.;[Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 124 ; Cramer, Anecd. 4, 412 ; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. dpyaa-apTju (rfpyaa-. Mt. XXV. 16; [xxvi. 10]; Mk. xiv. 6, in T WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 T Tr WH ; cf . reff. as above]) ; pf . eipyaa-pai, in a pass, sense [cf. W. § 38, 7 e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk. writ. [cf. "Veitch s. v.] ; (epyov) ; Sept. for ^^'-3, 13;;, sometimes for riK^i^ ; 1. absol. a. to work, labor, do work : it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14 ; Jn. V. 17; ix. 4; 2 Th. iii.- 10; with addition of rair XefKTi, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 11; with ace. of time: vvKTa KQi ijpepav, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but L txt. T Tr WH the gen., as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see ifpepa, 1 a.) ; cf. W. § 30, H and Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5] ; with the predominant idea of working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 {iv tw dpneXavi) ; Acts xviii. 3 ; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; 2 Th. iii. 12 ; ace. to the concep- tion characteristic of Paul, 6 ipya^op^evos he that does works conformed to the law (Germ, der Werkthdtige) : Ro. iv. 4 sq. b. to trade, to make gains by trading, (cf. our "do business") : ev nvi, with a thing, Mt. xxv. 16 (often so by Dem.). 2. trans, a. {to work i. e.) to do, work out : W, Col. iii. 23 ; 2 Jn. 8 (with which [ace. to reading of L T Tr txt.] cf. 1 Co. xv. 58 end) ; prjSiv, 2 Th. iii. 11 ; epyov. Acts xiii. 41 (hyD hi'D, Hab. i. 5) ; epyov KoKov eXs riva, Mt. .x.xvi. 10; ev Tivi (dat. of pers. [cf. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Rec. eU c>i] ; tpya, wrotujht, pass., Jn. iii. 21 ; to. epya toO ^foO, what God wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28 ; ix. 4 ; rov Kvplov, to give one's strength to the work which the Lord wishes to have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; to dya66v, [Ro. ii. 10]; Eph. iv. 28; irpos nva. Gal. vi. 10; kokov tivi ti, Ro. xiii. 10 (jLvd n is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kiihner § 411, 5]) ; Ti «if Ttva, 3 Jn. 5. with ace. of virtues or vices, (to work i. e.) to exercise, perform, commit : StKawcrivTjv, Acts x. 35 ; Heb. xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2 ; Zeph. ii. 3) ; riji/ dvo- piav, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; dpapriav, Jas. ii. 9. aripeiov, bring to pass, effect, Jn. vi. 30 ; to Upd, to be busied with the holy things i. e. to administer those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi- ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also, 1 Co. ix. 13 ; Tr]v ddXaaro'av lit. work the sea (mare exerceo, .Justin, hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [cf. " do busi- ness on," Ps. cvii. 23] and make one's hving from it. Rev. xviii. 1 7 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk. writ., as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966', 26] : Dion. Hal. antt. 3, 46 ; App. Punic. 2 ; [Lcian. de elect. 5 ; W. 223 (209)]). to cause to exist, produce : W, so (for R G ko- repydCerat) 2 Co. vii. 10 L T Tr WH ; Jas. i. 20 L T Tr AVH. b. to work for, earn by working, to acquire, (cf. Germ, erarbeiten) : ttjv /3pci(rii/, Jn. vi. 27 {^^pfipara, Hdt. 1, 24; rd eTTtTTjSfia, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2; Dem. 1358, 12; dpyvptov, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d. ; ^tov, Andoc. myst. [18, 42] 144 Bekk.; Brja-avpovs, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6; /3pM/ia, Palaeph. 21, 2; al.); ace. to many interpreters also 2 .In. 8 ; but see 2 a. above. [Comp. : kot-, nepi-, 77po(T-epydCopat.~] * ep-yatria, -ai, ij, (epyd^opai) ; 1. i. q. to epyd^ecrdat, a working, performing : aKadapdlai, Eph. iv. 19. 2. work, bitsiness: Acts xi.x. 25 (Xen. oec. 6, 8 et al.). 3. gain got by work, profit : Acts xvi. 19 ; napexfiv ipya- o-lav Tivl, ib. 16 ; xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above] ; epyuTT]': 248 fpyoif (Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1 ; cyneg. 3, 3 ; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4. endeavor, pains, [A. V. diligence'] : 8i'8m/n ipyacrlav, after the Latinism operam do, Lk. xii. 58 (Ilermog. dc invent. 3, 5, 7).* cp^dn^s, -ou, o, («pyafo^at) ; 1. as in Grk. writ, a icorhnan, a laborer: usually one who works for hire, Jit. X. 10; Lk. X. 7; 1 Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer, Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; xx. 1 sq. 8 ; Lk. x. 2 ; Jas. v. 4, (Sap. xvii. IG) ; tliose wliose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen in the restricted sense], Acts xLx. 25 (opp. to roir Tfxvi- Tais [A. V. craft.imen^, ib. 24), cf. Bengel ad loc. ; those who as teachers labor to propagate and promote Christi- anity among men : 2 Co. xi. 13 ; Pliil. iii. 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15, cf. Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; Lk. x. 2. 2. one tvho does, a worker, perpetrator : -nji ddiKias, Lk. xiii. 27 (rrjs avojxiai, 1 Mace. iii. tl ; tovkoKuiv kcu affivuiv, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).* cp-yov, -ov, TO, anciently/"«pyoi'. {(sidrmWirk, [Eng. work; cf. Vanicek p. 922]); Sept. for S^^iJ, rrj^i^ and count- less times for riDsSp and Tvsy'^ ; work i. e. 1. busi- ness, employment, that with which anij one is occupied : Mk. xiii. 34 (SiSovai nul to epyov airov) ; . Acts xiv. 26 (ttXj/poCv) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; thus of the work of salvation committed by God to Christ : Stdovat and riKeioCv, Jn. xvii. 4 ; of the work to be done by tlie apostles and other Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding olficers of the religious assemUies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v. 13 ; Phil. i. 22 ; to epyov nvos, gen. of the subj., the work which one does, service which one either performs or ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; epyov jtokiv nvos to do the work of one (i. e. incumbent upon him), eiayyeXi- OToC, 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; to tpyovTivos i. e. assigned by one and to be done for Ms sake : to epyov toii 6eov reKeiovv, used of Christ, Jn. iv. 34; (toC) XpioroO (WH txt. Trmrg. Kvpiuv^, Phil. ii. 30 ; toC Kvpiov, 1 Co, xv. 58 ; xvi. 10 ; with gen. of thing, els epyov SiaKovlas, Eph. iv. 12, which means either to the work in which the ministry consists, the work performed in undertaking tlie ministry, or to the execution of the ministry, of that which one under- takes to do, enterprise, undertaking : Acts v. 38 (Dent. XV. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, any thing accomplished by hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. ttoi- rjfia, KTia-pa) : 1 Co. iii. 13—15 ; with the addition of tS>v Xetpiov, things formed by the hand of man. Acts A-ii. 41 ; of the works of God visible in the created world, Heb. i. 10, and often in Sept. ; ra ev t!j yfi tpya. the works of nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10 ; of the arrange- ments of God for men's salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec. ; t() epy. rov Oeov what God works in man, i. e. a life dedi- cated to God and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20 ; to the same effect, substantially, epyov dya66v. Phil. i. 6 (see dya66s, 2) ; ra epya tov SiafioXov, sins and all the misery that springs from them, 1 .Jn. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done: the idea of working is emphasized in opp. to that which is less than work, Jas. i. 25 ; Tit. i. IG ; to epyov is dis- tinguished fr. 6 Xdyos : Lk. .xxiv. 19 ; Ro. xv. 18 ; 2 Co. x. 1 1 ; Col. ui. 1 7 ; 2 Th. ii. 1 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 8, (Sir. iii. 8) ; plur. iv Xoyois ko'i ev epyois. Acts vii. 22 (4 Mace. v. 38 (37) ; for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk. writ., see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 2C8 sq. ; Bergler on Alciphr. p. 54 ; Bornemann and Kiihner on Xen. mem. 2, 3, 6 ; P.assow s. v. p. 1159 ; [L. and S. s. v. L 4 ; Lob. Paralip. pp. G4 sq., 525 sq.]). epya is used of the acts of God — both as creator, Ileb. iv. 10; and as gov- ernor, Jn. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41 ; Rev. xv. 3 ; of sundry signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him and to accomplish Iheir salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [cf. epya Tr/t (ro(f)las ib. 1 9 T WH Tr txt.], and esp. in the Gosp. of John, as v. 20, 36 ; vii. 3 ; x. 38 ; xiv. 11 sq. ; .xv. 24, (cf. Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2) ; they are called to epya ToC narpd!, i. e. done at the bidding and by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37 ; ix. 3 sq., cf. x. 25, 32; xiv. 10; KoKd, as beneficent, Jn. x. 32 sq. ; and connected witli tlie A'crbs heiKvvvai, •noie'iv, epyd^eoBm, Te\eiovv. epya is applied to the conduct of m e n, measured by the standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad, Mt. x.\iii. 3 ; Lk. xi. 48 ; Jn. iii. 20 ; Rev. ii. 6 ; xvi. 11, ete. ; or good, Jn. iii. 21 ; Jas. ii. 14, 1 7 sq. 20-22, 24-26 ; iii. 13; Rev. ii. 5, 9 [Rec], 19; iii. 8; vopos epyav, the law wliich demands good works, Ro. iii. 27; with a suggestion of toil, or struggle with hindrances, in the phrase KOTaTraveiv aTro Tav epytov avrov, Ilcb. iv. 10; tO' recompense one koto to epya airoU, Ro. ii. 6 ; 2 Tiui. iv. 14 ; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. Ixi. (Ixii.) 13), cf. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev. xviii. 6 ; .\x. 12 sq. ; the sing, to epyov is vised collectively of an aggregate of actions (Germ, das Ilandeln), Jas. i. 4 ; TiKos, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling and acting, liis aims and endeavors : Cial. vi. 4 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 7 ; Rev. xxii. 1 2 ; to epyov toi! vd/iou, tlie course of action demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: dyaBttu epyov, i. e. cither a benefaction, 2 Co. L\. 8 ; plur. Acts ix. 3G ; or every good icork springing from piety, Ro. ii. 7; Cob i. 10; 2Tli. ii. 17; Tit. i. 16; 2 Tim. ii. 21; iii. 17; Heb. xiii. 21 [T Wllora. fpy.] ; plur. Eph. ii. 10; or v.hat harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 1 ; epyov koKov, a good deed, noble action, (see (caXdf, b. and c.) : Mt. x.xvi. 10 ; Mk. xiv. G ; plur. (often in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25 ; vi. 18 ; Tit. ii. 7; iii. 8, 14; Heb. x. 24 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12; to. epya to ev StKaioavvT) equiv. to ra Sixaia, Tit. iii. 5 ; ra epya toii 5foC, the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 2S (Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same sense epya pov i. e. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26 ; epyov jrloTeaSy wrought by faith, the course of conduct which s])rings from faith, 1 Th. i. 3 ; 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; epya tl^ia Trjs peTavolas, Acts xxvi. 20 ; epya irenXripapeva evu>i:iov tov 6eov. Rev. iii. 2 ; epya Tromjpa, Col. i. 21 ; 2 Jn. 11, cf. Jn. iii. 1 9 ; vii. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; epya vexpa, works devoid of that hfe which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrought, which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of God and of all reward : Heb. vi. 1 ; ix. 14 ; uKapTra, Eph, v. 11 (uxpr^tTTa, Sap. iii. 11 ; the wicked man peTa twu epyav avTov o-vvarroXe'iTat, Barn. ep. 21,1); avopa, 2 Pet. ii. 8 ; epya daefielai, Jude 15 ; toC ctkotovs, done in d.ark- ness, Ro. xiii. 1 2 ; Eph. v. 1 1 ; [opp. to epy. toO (paros, Ro. .xiii. 12 L mrg.] ; in Paul's writ, epya vopov, works demanded by and agreeing with the law (cf. Wieseler^ epedi^u) 249 ipi(j)t.ov Com. ub. (1. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.) : Ro. iii. 20, 28; ix. 32 Rec. ; Gal. ii. IG; iii. 2, 5,10; and simply e'pya: Ro. iv. 2, 6; i.x. 12 (11); ib. 32GLTTr'\VII; xi. 6 ; Epb. ii. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see Sikoiocd, 3 b.). to fpya rtvos TToifif, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth- er, to follow in action another's example : Abraham's, Jn. viii. 39 ; that of the devil, Jn. viii. 41. cpeSC^u ; 1 aor. fipedicra ; {ipiSa to excite) ; to stir up, excite, stimulate : rivd, in a good sense, 2 Co. ix. 2 ; as com. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, in a bad sense, to pro- voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lchm. irapopyt^eTc* ((xiSia: to fix, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptcp. e'pei- aatra (fj npapa), stuck [R. V. struck^, Acts xxvii. 41. (From Horn, down.) * epeviYO(iai : fut. cpev^opai ; 1. to spit or S2nie out, (Ilom.). 2. to lie emjjtied, discharge itself, used of streams (App. Mithr. c. 103) ; with the ace. to empty, discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters: Lev. xi. 10 Sept. 3. by a usage foreign to classic Greek [W. 23 (22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter : Mt. xiii. 35 (Ps. Ixxvii. (Lxxviii.) 2 ; cf. xviii. (xix.) 3 ; cxliv. 7 [Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Loheck ad Phryn. p. 63 ; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].* IpEvvdu, -u> ; 1 aor. impv. ipeivyjcrov ; (f/ epevva a search) ; fr. Horn, down ; to search, examine into : absol. Jn. vii. 52 ; Ti, Jn. v. 39 ; Ro. viii. 27 ; 1 Co. ii. 10 ; Rev. ii. 23 with which passage cf . Jer. xi. 20 ; xvii. 1 ; xx. 1 2 ; foil, by an indir. quest. 1 Pet. i. 11 (2 S. x. 3 ; Prov. xx. 27). The form ipavvdco (q. v. in its place) T Tr WH have received everywhere into the text, but Lchm. only in Rev. ii. 23. [CoMP. : f^ fpevpiia.] * £ptl|i£a, -as, r), (epripos), a solitude, an uninhabited re- gion, a waste: Mt. XV. 33 ; Mk. viii. 4; Heb. xi. 38; opp. to TToXis, 2 Co. xi. 26, as in Joseph, antt. 2, 3, 1.* e'fni(ios, -ov, (in classic Grk. also -or, -?;, -oj/, cf. W. § 11, 1 ; [B. 25 (23) ; on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 393, 394 ; W. 52 (51)]) ; 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin- habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15 ; irk. i. 35 ; vi. 32 ; Lk. iv. 42 ; ix. 10 [RGL], 12; Acts i. 20,etc. ; 17 dSos, leading through a desert. Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see rdfa, sub tiu. of persons : deserted by others ; deprived of the aid and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances, kindred ; bereft ; (so often by Grk. writ, of every age, as Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pcrs. 734; Arstph. pax 112; tpripos TE Koi lino TiavTu>v KaroKeK^dds, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed. Bekk.] ; of a flock deserted by the shepherd, ITom. II. 5, 140) : ywij, a woman neglected by her husband, from whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is. liv. 1 ; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ's presence, in- struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 [L and WH txt. om.] ; Lk. xiii. 35 Rec. ; cf. Bleek, Erkliir. d. drei ersten Evv. ii. p. 20«, (cf. Bar. iv. 19 ; Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ; 2 Mace. viii. 35). 2. subst. ^7 epripos, sc. x^pa ! Sept. often for la'l'p ; a desert, wilderness, (Hdt. 3, 102) : Mt. xxiv. 26 ; Rev. xii. 6, 14 ; xvii. 3 ; al eprjpoi, desert places, lonely regions : Lk. i. 80; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti- vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the desert of Juda;a [cf. AY. § 18, 1], Mt. iii. 1 : Mk. i. 3 sq.; Lk. i. SO ; iii. 2, 4 ; Jn. i. 23 ; of the desert of Arabia, Acts vu. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44 ; 1 Co. x. 5 ; Heb. iii. 8, 17. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wiiste; Furrer in Schenkel v. C80 sqq. ; [B. D. s. vv. Desert and Wilderness (Am. ed.)]. tpHliou, -5 : Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33)) (prjpovrai]: \>i. ptvp. rjpriptopivos : 1 aor. ^pT;/jai6i;i/ ; (eprf /iof) ; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. usually for a^n, 3'"inn, DO©; to make desolate, lay waste ; in the N.T. only in the Pass. : ttoXlv, Rev. xviii. 19 ; to ruin, bring to desolation : /3a- o-t\(lav, Mt. xii. 25 ; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught : ttXoCtov, Rev. xviii. 17 (16) ; rjprjpapftnjv koi yvpvrjv ttokIv Tiva, to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rev. xvii. 16.* tpTi(i.(i)), a making desolate, desola- tion: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see /3S/- \vypa, c. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9, 13 ; Sept. several times for na-^n, m'd, etc.) * iplla: [fut. e'pio-a), cf. B. 37 (32)]; (cpts) ; to wrangle, engage in strife, ( Lat. r i x ari) : Mt. xii. 1 9, where by the phrase ovk iptaei the Evangelist seems to describe the calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and practices. [(From Horn, down.)]* IpiBeCa (not ^pldeia, cf. W. § 6, 1 g. ; [Chandler § 99]) [-5ia WH ; see I, i and 7'df. Proleg. p. 88], -€i'ar, >), {ipiBdi» to spin wool, work in wool, Hehod. 1, 5 ; Mid. in the same sense, Tob. ii. 1 1 ; used of those who electioneer for office, courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar- istot. poht. 5, 3 ; the verb is derived from epi6os working for hire, a hireling ; fr. tlie Maccd. age down, a sjiinner or weaver, a worker in wool. Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office, Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302', 4 and 1303% 14] ; hence, apparently, in the N. T. a courting distinction, a desire to put one's self forward, a partisan and factious spirit lohich does not disdain low arts : partisanship, factiousness : Jas. iii. 14, 16; xar ipiBdav, Phil. ii. 3 ; Ignat. ad Phila- delph. § 8 ; 01 i^ ipiBe'ias (see ix, II. 7), Phil. i. IG (1 7) [yet see EK, n. 12 b.] ; i. q. contending against God, Ro. ii. 8 [yet cf. INIey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc] ; in the plur. at ipidflai [W. § 2 7, 3"; B. § 1 23, 2] : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20. See the very full and learned discussion of the word by Fritzsche in liis Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq. ; [of which a summary is given by EUic. on Gal. v. 20. See further on its derivation, Loheck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365 ; cf. AV. 94 (89)].* 4'ptov, -ov, TO, (diniin. of to epos or flpos), rcool: Heb. ix. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down.]* e'pts. -tSof, fi, ace. tpiv (Phil. i. 15), pi. eptSes (1 Co. i. 11) and cpus (2 Co. xii. 20 [R G Trtxt. ; Gal. v. 20 R G WH mrg.] ; Tit. iii. 9 [R G L Tr] ; see [ WH. App. p. 157] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326 ; JIatthiae § 80 note 8 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq. ; [W. G5 (G3) ; B. 24 (22)]) ; conten- tion, strife, wrangling: Ro. i. 29; xiii. 13 ; 1 Co. i. 11 ; iii. 3 ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20 ; Phil. i. 15 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]* cpC4>iov, -ov. TO, and tpu^os, -ov, 6, a kid, a young goat : Mt. XXV. 32 s(i. ; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14. p. 661 b.] * 'EpfJiat; 250 epxofiai 'Epjids, ace. 'Epfiav [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, (Doric for 'EpIiTJs), Hennas, a certain Christian (whom Origen ami others thought to be the author of the book entitled " The Sheplieril " [ef. Salmon, in Diet, of Chris. Biog. s. V. Hernias 2]) : Ko. xvi. 14.* €p|iiivtia [^^'l^ -via ; see I, t], -as, r/, (ipfxr/veia)), intcrpre- Utlion (of wliat has been spoken more or less obscurely by others) : 1 Co. xii. 10 [L t.\t. Siepp. q. v.] ; xiv. 26. [From Plato down.] * €p|ii)V6UTTis, -ov, 6, (ipfirjveia, q. v.), an interpreler : 1 Co. .\iv. 28 I. Tr ^V^I mrg. (Plat, ijolitie. p. 290 c; for ]"'7p in Oen. -xlii. 23.) * cp|iT|VEvci> : [pros. pass, tpprjvfuopai] ; (fr. 'Ep/ii}f, who was held to be the god of speeeli, writing, eloquence, learning); 1. to explain in ivords, expound : [Soph., Kur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans- late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4, 4) : Jn. i. 38 (39) 11 G T, 42 (43) ; ix. 7 ; Heb. vii. 2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for Djnri.) [CoMP. : hi; ii(6-fppriveia.'\* 'Epiiiis, aee. 'Epprjv, 6, pro]), name. Homes; 1. a Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury): Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.* 'Epfio-yevtis, [i. e. born of Hermes ; Tdf . 'Ep/ioy.], -ovs, 6, JLniKii/i'iHS, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. l.").* tpirtTov, -oC, TO, (fr. epna to creej), crawl, [Lat. serpo ; hence serpent, and fr. same, root, reptile; Vanicok p. 1030 sq.]), a creepiny thing, reptile; by prof. writ, used chiefly of serpents ; in Horn. Od. 4, 418 ; Xen. mem. 1, 4, 1 1 an animal of any sort ; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad- rui)eds and birds, Acts x. 12 ; xi. G ; Ro. i. 23 ; and to marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7 ; on this last pass. ef. Gen. ix. 3. (.Sept. for m~^ and \y<9-) * ep«6p6s, -a, -01/, red; fr. Horn, down ; in the N. T. only in the phrase ^ cpv0pa 6d\aaa-a the Red Sea (fr. lldt. 6ev, Jn. iii..31 ; Smadev, Mk. v. 27; S,8e, Mt. viii. 29; Acts i.\. 21; evedSe, Jn. iv. 15 [R G L Tr], IG; ««, Jn. xviii. 3 [cf. Vi. 472 (440)] ; jroO, Heb. xi. 8; eas tivos, Lk. iv. 42; S^pi tivos, Acts xi. 5. The purpose for which one comes is indicated — either by an inf., JNIk. [v. 14LTTrWII]; .xv. 3G ; Lk. i. 59 ; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15 [T WII Sie'px-]' ^°d ■*''^'T often ; or by a fut. ptcp., Mt. xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27 ; or by a foil, iva, Jn. xii. 9; els TovTo, Iva, Acts ix. 21 ; or by Sm Tiva, Jn. xii. 9. As one who is. about to do something in a place must neces- sarily come thither, in the popular narrative style the phrases epxfrai Kai, rjXde xal, etc., are usually placed be- fore verbs of action : Jit. xiii. 19, 25; Mk.ii.l8; iv.]5; V. 33; vi. 29; xii. 9 ; xiv. 37 ; Lk. viii. 12, 47; Jn. vi. 15 ; xi. 48; xii. 22; xi.x. 38; xx. 19, 26; xxi. 13; 3 Jn. 3 ; Rev. V. 7; xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9 ; epxov k. iSe (or jSXeTre), Jn. i. 46 (47) ; xi. 34; [and Rec. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also Grsb. exc. in vs. 3] ; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ([T Tr AVH Syjfeade'], see etSco, I. 1 e.) ; — or ekddiv is used, foil, by a ep')(pfjiai, 251 epxpfiai finite verb: Mt. ii. 8 ; viii. 7 ; ix. 10, 18 ; xii. 44 ; xiv. 12, 33 [R G L] ; xviii. 31 ; xxvii.- 64 ; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25 [Tdf. fiVcX^.]: -"^ii- 14>42 ; xiv. 45 ; xvi. 1 ; Acts xvi. 37, 30 ; — or (pxafievos, foil, by a finite verb : Lk. xiii. 14 ; xvi. 21 ; xviii. 6. in other places e\6aiv must be rendered whe7i I (ihou, lie, etc.) am come : Jn. xvi. 8 ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Phil. i. 27 (opp. to awoiv). p. to come i. e. to appeal; make one's appearance, come before the public : so xar eio)(T)v of the Messiah, Lk. iii. 16 ; Jn. iv. 25 ; vii. 27, 31 ; Heb. X. 3 7, who is styled pre-eminently 6 e/);(o/xevos, i. e. he that cometh (i. e. is about to come) ace. to prophetic promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W. 341 (320) ; B. 204 (176 sq.)] : Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 19 sq. ; with (Is TOP Koa-fJiov added, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27 ; ev ra omfiari Tov Kvjilov, he who is already coming clothed with divine authority i. e. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy- fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, — taken fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 25 sq. : Mt. xxi. 9 ; xxiii. 39 ; Mk. xi. 9 ; Lk. xiii. 35 ; xix. 38 [Tdf. om. epx- (so WH in their first mrg.)] ; Jn. xii. 13. epjfecrSm vised of Elijah who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11-13; of John the Baptist, Mt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. 33 ; Jn. i. 31 ; with els jxaprvpiav added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of "false Christs" and other deceivers, false teachers, etc. : Mt. xxiv. 5 ; Mk. xiii. 6 ; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass, with the addition cVi ra ovofiari p.ov, relying on my 7iame, i. e. arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic dignity) ; Jn. x. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Rev. xvii. 1 ; with the addition eV rm ovopari tm iSi'm in his own authority and of his own free-will, Jn. v. 43. of tlie Holy Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the invisible lielper of Christ's disciples after his departure from the world: Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 7 sq. 13. of the ap- pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious teacher and the author of salvation : Mt. xi. 19 ; Lk. vii. 34 ; Jn. v. 43 ; vii. 28 ; viii. 42 ; with the addition of els T. Kocrpov foil, by iva, Jn. xii. 46 ; xviii. 37 : els Kptpa, Iva, Jn. ix. 39 ; foil, by a telle inf. 1 Tim. i. 15 ; (p^fcBm dnitno Tivos, after one, Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7 ; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30 ; «5 {\6u>v 8i' vSaros Koi oipaTos, a terse expression for, 'he that publicly appeared and appro\ed himself (to be God's son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death which he underwent '[cf. p. 210" bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6; epxe- o-Sai foil, by a telle inf., Mt. v. 1 7 ; x. 34 sq. ; Lk. xix. 1 ; foil, by iva, Jn. x. 10; IkijkvBivai and epxea-Bai iv a-apxl are used of the form in which Christ as the di\inc Logos appeared among men : 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3 [Rec] ; 2 Jn. 7. of the return of Jesus hereafter from heaven in majesty: Mt. x. 23; Acts i. 11 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; xi. 26; 1 Th. V. 2 ; 2 Th. i. 10 ; with iv iii S6^t, airoO added, Mt. xvi. 27 ; XXV. 31 ; ]\Ik. viii. 38 ; Lk. ix. 26 ; f'm rav ve(pf\a>v (borne on the clouds) pera Swdpeas k. So^rjs, Mt. xxiv. 30 ; iv Vf(fie\ais, iv ye^cXi; ktX., Mk. xiii. 26 ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; iv T^ /Sao-iXeia airov (see iv, L 5 c. p. 210'" top), Mt. xvi. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 42 [fit rrjv ^. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.] b. of time, like the Lat. veiiio : with nouns of time, as epxovrai fjpepai, in a fut. sense, will come [cf . B. 204 (1 76 sq.) ; W. § 40, 2 a.], Lk. xxiii. 29 ; Heb. viu. 8 fr. Jer. -x.xxviii. (xxxi.) 31 ; i\eicrovTai. rjpipai, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 20 ; Lk. v. 35 ; xvii. 22 ; xxi. 6 ; jj\6ev ij rjpipa, Lk. xxii. 7; Rev. vi. 17; epxerai. Sipa, ore, ■h\. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; xvi. 25 ; foil, by Iva, Jn. xvi. 2, 32 ; rj\6ev, is come, i. e. is present, Jn. .xvi. 4, 21 ; Rev. .xiv. 7, 15 ; e'XijXv^e 17 &pa, ha, Jn. xii. 23 ; .xiii. 1 (L T Tr WH ^Xdev) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii. 1; i\i]\v9fi rj oipa avrov, had come (Lat. aderai), Jn. vii. 30 ; viii. 20 ; 'ip^. vv^, Jn. ix. 4 ; ij rjp,ipa tov Kvplov, 1 Th. V. 2; Kaipol, Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc- cur at a definite time : 6 deptcrpos, Jn. iv. 35 ; 6 ydpos toO dpvlov. Rev. xix. 7 ; r/Kdev ij Kpiais, Rev. .xviii. 10. in imi- tation of the Ilebr. X3n, 6, r], to ipxdpevos, -ivr), -evov, is i. q. to come, future [cf. B. and W. u. s.] : 6 aloiv, ^Ik. x. 30 ; Lk. xviii. 30 ; ^ «oprij, Acts .xviii. 21 [Rec] ; ij opyrj, 1 Th. i. 10 ; TO. ipxopeva, things to come, Jn. .xvi. 13 (□"Nan the times to come, Is. xxvii. 6) ; in the periphrasis of the name of Jehovah, d i>v xal 6 tjv Ka\ 6 ipxopevos, it is equiv. to iaopevos, Rev. i.4 ; iv. 8. c. of things and e vent s (so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent of natural events : noTapol, Jit. vii. 25 [R G] ; KaraKXv- crpos, Lk. xvii. 27 ; \tp6s. Acts vii. 11 ; of the rain coming down in'i Trjsyrjs, Heb. vi. 7 ; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii. 4, 32; Mk. iv. 4 ; of a voice that is heard (Hom. II. 10, 139), foil, by ix with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 1 7 [?] ; Mk. ix. 7 [T WH Tr mrg. eyeVfTo] ; Jn. xii. 28 ; of things that are brought: 6 Xixvos, Mk. iv. 21 (cVio-i-oXij, Liban. ep. 458 ; other exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given in Kypke, Kui- noel, al., on Alk.l. c). 2. metaph. a. of Christ's invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power which through the Holy Spirit he will e.xert in the souls of his disciples : Jn. .xiv. 18, 23 ; of his invisible advent in the death of believers, by which he takes them to himself into heaven, Jn. .xiv. 3. b. equiv. to to come into being, arise, come forth, show itself, Jind place or in- fluence : TO pav tovttjv, Jn. xii. 27 ; els Kpicriv, to become liable to judgment, Jn. v. 24; fir iwiyvcoaiv, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim. iii. 7 ; els to (jjavepov, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22 ; els iTpoKoi!t}v i\rj\vde. has turned out for the advancement, Phil. i. 12 ; epx- (Is n, to come to a thing, is used of a writer who after discussing other matters passes on to a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1 ; fi? fauTw, to come to one's senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Epict. diss. 3, 1, 15 ; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. § 3, p. 702 ed. Fabric), tpx-iirl nva to come upon one: in a bad sense, of calamities, Jn. xviii. 4 ; in a good sense, of the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Acts xi.x. 6 : to devotee epu 252 kaOia upon one, of the guilt and punishment of murder, Mt. xxiii. 35. epx- irpos tov 'Iijo-oCv, to commit one's self to the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with him, .In. v. 40 ; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, G5 ; iTpus to <^Sk, to sub- mit one's self to tlie power of tlie lii;lit, Jn. iii. 20 sq. n. Uxjo: djrio-o) Ttj/os('">ns '^/H), to follow one, Mt. xvi. 24 ; [Mk. viii. 34 K L Tr mrg. Wll] ; Lk. ix. 23 ; xiv. 27, (Gen. x.xiv. 5, 8; xx.wii. 17, and elsewhere); srpor Tiva, Lk. XV. 20 ; triv Tint, to accompany one, Jn. x.\i. 3 [cf. B. 210 (182)] ; oSAv ep)((aeiu, Lk. ii. 44 [cf. W. 226 (212)]. [COJIP. : av-, iir-av-, an-, hi-, (la-, etr-eis-, nap- (ta-, /) arrive at, as well as to iju {ffatveiy). palutiv jirimarily signi- fies to walk-, tai:e strps, picturing tlie mode of motion ; to go awai/. iropeufo-flai expresses motion in general, — often con- fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the bearing; hence the regular word for tlie march of an army. x^P^^" always empliasizes tlie idea of separation, change of place, and does not, like e.g. iropeueirflai, note the external and perceptible motion, — (a man may be recog- nized by liis iropda). Cf. Schmidt ch. xxvii.] cpu, .«ee (iTTov. cpurdu, -a, [(inf. -rni' L T Tr, -rav K G WII ; see I, i)] ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ^pcirojv and (in Jit. xv. 23 L T Tr WIT, Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) lip^Tom, cf. B. 44 (38) ; [W. 85 (82) ; T.'\ iv9i\%, -^Tor, ij, (fr. ivmyii, eadtjv, hence it would be more correctly written «Vfl^f [so Rcc."^' in Lk.], cf. Kiihner i. p. 217, 3), formerly fiirdfis (cf. Lat. vestis, (icrni. Weste, Eng. (r.s7, etc.), ctotldny, raiment, apparel: Lk. xxiii. 11; xxiv. 4 L TTr WII ; Actsi. lORG; x. 30; xii. 21 ; Jas. ii. 2 sq. [From Horn, down.]* «creiiiris [Kec.''' laO.'], -fwr, ij, (fr. iaSio), and this fr. (o-dijs, q. v.), clolhinf/, apparel: plur., Lk. xxiv. 4 R G; Acts i. 10 L TTr WII; [cf. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18; Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 7 and Heinichen's note]. (Rare in prof, ■writ. [Aristot. rhet. 2, 8, 14 var.] ; cf. AV. § 2, 1 c.) • (. 129]) ; impf. ijaBiov; 2 aor. e(t>ayov (fr. 4>ArQ) ; fut. (pdyopai (2 pers. cpdyecrai, Lk. .xvii. 8 [rcff. s. v. KaraKavxdopai, init.]), for the classic eSofitti, see Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 185; Kiihner i. p. 824; [W. 89 (85) ; B. 58 (51) ; but esp. Veitch s. v.] ; Sept. for '75N; [fr. Ilom. down]; to eat; Yu\g. manrluco, [^eilo, etc.] ; (of animals, to devour) ; a. absol. : Mt. xiv. 20 sq. ; XV. 37, 38; x.xvi. 26 ; Mk.vi. 31; viii. 8; Jn. iv. 31, and often ; ev tw ay(lv, to give one (something) to eat, Mt. xiv. IG; .x.\v. .35, 42; Mk.v. 43; vi. 37; Lk. ix. 13, (and with addition of an ace. of tlie thing to be eaten, Jn. vi. 31, 52; ?/c rims. Rev. ii. 7; [cf. AV. 198 (1H7) sq.]); tf)(peiv Tivt (f>ay(iu, to bring one (something) to eat, Jn. iv. 33; spec, in opp. to abstinence from certain kinds of food, Ro. -xiv. 3, 20 ; iadUiv k. mveiv (and ^aytiv k. mf'iv), to use food and drink to satisfy one's hunger and thirst, 1 Co. xi. 22 ; contextually, to be supported at the ex- pense of others, 1 Co. ix. 4 ; not to shun choice food and in a word to be rather a free-liver, opp. to the narrow .and scrupulous notions of those who abstain from the use of wine and certain kinds of food, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34 ; opp. to fasting (to vrjaTfieiv), Lk. v. 33 ; of those who, careless about other and esp. graver matters, lead an easy, merry life, Lk. xii. 19 ; xvii. 27 sq. ; 1 Co. XV. 32, (Is. xxii. 13) ; of the jovial use of a sacrificial feast, 1 Co. X. 7 fr. Ex. x.x.xii. G ; preceded by a nega- tive, to abstain from all nourishment, Acts xxiii. 12, 21 ; to use a spare diet, spoken of an ascetic mode of life, Mt. xi. 18; of fasting. Acts ix. 9 ; iadUiv (k. ttivciv) ptrd TWOS, to dine, feast, (in company) with one, Mt. ix. 11 ; Mk. ii. 16; Lk. v. 30 ; with one (he providing the enter- tainment), i. e. al his house, Lk. vii. 36 ; perd raiv pfdvov- TCDV etc., of luxurious revclUng, Jit. xxiv. 49 ; Lk. .xii. 45 ; «TTi Tpaire'Cl' toO Xpio-ToO, the food and drink spread out on Christ's table, i. e. to enjoy the blessings of the salvation procured by Christ (which is likened to a ban- quet), Lk. xxii. 30 ; f'a-Blfiv tivi, to one's honor, Ro. xiv. 6. b. construed w. an ace. of the thing, to eat {con- sume) a thing [AA'. 198 (187) note]: Mt. vi. 25; Mk. i. 6 ; Jn. iv. 32 ; vi. 31 ; Ro. xiv. 2 ; 1 Co. viii. 13 ; x. 25, etc. ; apTov, to take food, eat a meal, (after the Hebr. onS SdX, Gen. xliii. 25 ; Ex. ii. 20 ; 1 S. xx. 24 ; Prov. -xxiii. 7), Mt. XV. 2 ; Mk. iii. 20; Lk. xiv. 1, 15 ; tov eav- Tov apTov, obtained by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12 ; Sprov Trapd Tivos (gen. of pers.) to be supported by one, 2 Th. r^o) 253 eaj(aro<; iii. 8 ; to irapa rirar, the things supplied by one, Lk. x. 7, i. q. TO ■napaTiQifi.eva ill vs. 8 [cf. W. 386 (343_)] ; 1 Co. X. 27; /i^re cipTov iod. firjre oivov n'lvetv. to live frugally, Lk. vii. 33 ; to Kvpiaxov SeOTvov (payeiv. to celebrate the Lord's supper, 1 Co. .-d. 20 ; to nda-xa. to eat the paschal lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi. 1 7 ; Jlk. xiv. 12, 14 ; Lk. xxii. 8, 11, 15, 16 L T Tr AV'H ; Jn. xviii. 28 ; toj dvtrias, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts, said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16 (where hv stands by attraction for 5, because caBUw with a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the X. T. [W. 198 (187) note]), by a usage hardly to be met with in class. Grk. (AV. § 28, 1 ; [B. 1.59 (139)]), ?« tivos, to (take and) eat of a thing : Lk. xxii. 16 [R G] ; Jn. vi. 26, 50 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 28; on the other hand, «V toO Kapjrov (L T Tr WH t6v Kapjrov), e< Tov yaXaKTos i, a poetic form in use fr. Horn, down, very rare in prose writ. ; from it are extant in the X. T. the'ptcp. iadi^v in ilk. i. 6 T Tr WH ; [Lk. x. 7 L T Tr WH] ; Lk. vU. 33 L Tr WH, [also 34 WH] ; the pres. subj. 2 pers. plur. ccr^iji-c in Lk. xxii. 30 LTTrWH; [cf. /careo-^iw]. It occurs several times in the Sept., as Lev. xvii. 10; Judg. xiv. 9 [Alex.]; Is. ix. 20; Sir. xx. 16 ; ia6^T(, Lev. xLx. 26. Cf. ITdf. Proleg. p. 81] ; B. 58 (.51). •Eo-Xtt (TTr WH, [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. fi, j]) or 'Eo-Xi, 6, EsU, one of Christ's ancestors: Lk. iii. 25.* ev\aKri, Lk. xii. 38 AVH (rejected) mrg. (Sept.; Xen., Dio Cass., Athen., al.)*] "Eo-p»n [or 'Eirpav in Lk. R«^ L txt. Tr mrg. ; AVH 'Ecrp., see their Intr. § 4')8], o, Esrom or Hezrom or Hes- ron, one of Christ's ancestors : Mt. i. 3 : Lk. iii. 33.* ['Eo-piov or 'Eo-p. see the preceding word.] «irxaTos, -7j, -Of, (f r. ej^a, eo-;(oi' adhering, clinging close ; [ace. to al. (Curtius § 583 b.) superl. fr. t'l, the outer- most']), Sept. for pTlS, n"")nx ; [fr. Horn, down] ; ex- treme, last in time or in place ; 1. joined to nouns : TOTTot, the last in a series of places [A. V. lowest'], Lk. xiv. 9 sq. ; in a t e m p o r a 1 succession, the last : to-)(aToi e^Bpos, that remains after the rest have been conquered, 1 Co. XV. 26 ; KoSpdimji, that remains when the rest have one after another been spent, Mt. v. 26 ; so XeirTov, Lk. xii. 59 ; ij icrj^. aoKiviy^, the trumpet after which no other will sound, 1 Co. xv. 52, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; at eo-^. TrXiTyai, Rev. xv. 1 ; xxi. 9 ; ^ eV^an; fjpipa rijs eopTrjs, Jn. vii. 37. 'OTien two are contrasted it is i. q. the latter, opp. to d npaTos the former (Deut. xxiv. 1-4) : thus TO tpya (opp. to tUv irpuiTaiv), Rev. ii. 19 ; j] TrKainj, Mt. xxvii. 64 (where the meaning is, ' lest the latter deception, caused by the false story of his resurrection, do more harm than the former, which was about to pro- duce beUef in a false Messiah ') ; 6 c6(v, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40; with gen. of pers. i. q. your soul, ibid. 39. [2. as a prep, with the gen. (W § 54, 6) : Rev. xi. 2 Rec.« (see c|o)5ev, 2).] " £irTcpas, -epa, -epov, (conipar. of etria, [cf. B. 28 (24 sq.)]), inner: Acts xvi. 24; to taaTtpov tov KaTanerd- o-fioTos, the inner space which is behind the veil, i. c. the shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn from the earthly temple, Ilcb. vi. 19.* «Toipos, -ov, 6, [fr. IToni. down], Sept. j.n ; a comrade, mate, partner, [.\. V./cZ/ow]: Mt. xi. 16 (where T Tr WII Tolf Mpots [q. v. 1 b., and cf. WIT. Intr. § 404]) ; voc. in kindly address, /(■('tfif/ {my good friend) : Mt. xx. 13; xxii. 12; xxvi. 50.* eTtpi-'yXwo'O'OS, -ov, 6, (erfpos and yXaxrcra), one who speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to ojaoyXoitr- aoi) : Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 1 Aq. ; Polyb. 24, 9, 5 ; Strab. 8 p. 333 ; [Philo, confus. lingg. § 3 ; al.] ; but different- ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ; see what is said about ' speaking with tongues ' under y\ui; (irtpo^vyo! yoked with a fUfferent yoke; used in Lev. xix. 19 of the imion of beasts of different kinds, e. g. an ox and an ass), to come under an unequal or different yoke (Beza, imparl Juyo copulor), to be unequally yoked : rivi (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10 N.4 ; B. § 133, 8), trop. to hare fellowship with one who is not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid- ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.* erepos, -epa, -tpov, the other; another, other ; [fr. Horn. on] ; Sept. chiefly for ini*. It refers 1. to n u m b e r, as opp. to some former pers. or thing ; a. without the article, other : joined to a noun (which noun denotes .some number or class within which others are distinguished from the one), Mt. xii. 45 and Lk. xi. 26, eWa erepa m/f I'/xuTo, i. e. from the number of the ■nvixipara or demons se\eii others, to be distinguished from the one already mentioned ; add, Mk. xvi. 12 ; Lk. vi. 6 ; ix. 56, etc. ; Jn. xix. 37 ; Actsii. 40; iv. 12,etc. ; Ro. vii. 3; viii. 39; xiii. 9; erepat yeveal, other than the ])resent, i. e. past generations, Ei)li. iii. 5 ; as in class. Grk. aWos, so sometimes also erepos is elegantly joined to a noun that is in apposition : twii^e so in Lk., viz. mpoi bio KaKOvpyoi two others, who were malefactors [Bttm. differently § I.^jO, 3], Lk. xxiii. 32; erfpovs f(S5ofir]KOVTa e([uiv. to erepovs padrjTas, otrives rja-ap (jid. Lk. X. 1 ; rcliqua privata aedijicia for 'the rest of the buildings, which were private ' Caes. b. g. 1, 5 ; cf. Hornemann, Scholia ad Luc. p. 147 sq. ; W. 530 (493); [Joseph, c. Ap. 1,15, 3 and IMiiller's note], simply, with- out a noun, i. q. SKKos tis another, Lk. ix. 69 ; .xxii. 58 ; Acts i. 20 ; Ro. vii. 4 ; irepoi ttqKXoI, Mt. xv. 30 ; Lk. viii. 3; Acts XV. 35 ; ovhh erepov, Acts xvii. 21 ; erf pa, other matters. Acts xix. 39 RGT; ttoXXh koi erepa, many other things also [hardly "also," see Kal, 1. 3 ; cf. remark s. V. TToXis, d. a. tin.], Lk. iii. 18 ; erepos with gen. of pens. (ial. i. 10; Tu €T(pojv (opp. to TO iavTov), Phil. ii. 4; ct. with Tis added. Acts viii. 34 ; neut. 1 Tim. i. 10 ; [e'l/ erepif, introducing a quotation, lleb. v. 6, cf. Win. 592 (551) — but in Acts xiii. 35 supply ■\|/'aX;iaJ]. in partitive formulas : «XXoi . . . erepoi. 8c, lleb. xi. 36 cf. Acts ii. 13 ; o TTpoiTos • ■ ■ ertpos, Lk. xiv. 19 sq. ; xvi. 7; o StuTepor . . . eVf/jos, Lk. xix. 20 (where L T Tr WH o erepot) ; Tivis . . . €T(pot 8f, Lk. xi. 16 ; w pcv . . . aXXw fie . . . iripia oi . ■ ■ aXXw 8«, 1 Co. xii. 9 sq. ; oi fiiu . . . aXXoi [L oi^ 8« . . . tVfpoi fie, !Mt. xvi. 14. b. with the article, the other (of two) : ol crepoi, the others, the other jiarty, Mt. xi. 16 TTrWII (sec ira'tpos). distinctively: els or 6 (Is ... 6 cTfpos, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 41 ; xvi. 13; xvii. 34 stp ; xviii. 10 ; xxiii. 40 ; to irepov wXoTo», Lk. v. 7 ; Ty fie irepa sc. Tjfiipa, the next day, the day after. Acts XX. 15 ; x.xvii. 3, (Xen.Cyr. 4, 6, 10, [al.]). 6 cTtpos, the other, when the relation of conduct to others is under consideration is often put by way of example for any other person whatcrer, and stands for ' the other affected by the action in question ' [and may be trans, thy neigh- bor, thy fellow, etc.] : Ro. ii. 1 ; xiii. 8 ; 1 Co. vi. 1 ; x. 24, 29; xiv. 17; Gal. vi. 4; [Jas. iv. 12 RG]; plur. ol, al, TO erepoi, -at, -a, the others i. e. the rest, Lk. iv. 43. It re- fers 2. to quality; another i. e. one not of the same nature, form, class, kind; different, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down) : Ro. vii. 23 ; 1 Co. xiv. 21 ; xv. 40 ; 2 Co. xi. 4 ; Gal. i. 6 ; Heb. vii. 11, 13, 15 ; Jas. ii. 25 ; Jude 7. [Syx. see «XXor.] e'repus, adv., otherwise, differently : Phil. iii. 15. [From Horn, (apparently) down.] * «Ti, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; a. of a thing which went on formerly, whereas now a differ- ent state of things exists or has begun to exist : added eToifid^o) 255 «TO? to a ptcp., Mt. xxvii. 63 ; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44 ; Acts ix. 1 ; xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol. : en (8e) airov \a\ovvTos, Mt. xii. 46 ; xvii. ; xxvi. 47 ; Mk. .xiv. 43 ; Lk. viii. 49 ; xxii. 47 ; add, Lk. ix. 42 ; xxiv. 41 ; Jn. xx. 1 ; Acts X. 44 ; Ro. v. 8 ; Heb. Lx. 8 ; with a finite verb, Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning of a sentence : i'n yap Xpiaroi ovtu>v f)p.av dad. . . . airi- eav€, Ro. V. 6; of. W. § 61, S p. 553 (515); [B. 389 (333)] ; with another notation of time, so that it may be trans, even (cf. hat. Jam) : en ix KOiXias firjrpos, Lk. i. 15 (en eK fipe(j)eos, Anthol. 9, 567, 1; en ujr' dpxris, Plut. cousol. ad ApoU. 6 p. 104 d.). b. of a thing which continues at present, even now : Mk. viii. 1 7 R G ; Lk. xiv. 22; Gal. i. 10; 1 Co. xv. 17; with vvv added, 1 Co. iii. 2 [L WH br. cti] ; further, longer, (where it is thought strange that, when one thing has estabhshed itself, another has not been altered or abolished, but is still adhered to or continues) : Ro. iii. 7 ; vi. 2 ; ix. 19; Gal. V. 11. c. with negatives: ov . . . en, ovk en, no longer, no more, Lk. xvi. 2 ; xx. 36 ; xxi. 1, 4 ; xxii. 3 ; Iva ij.fl en lest longer, that . . . no more. Rev. xx. 3 ; ov iifj en. Rev. ui. 12; xviii. 21-23 ; oiSets, /iii/Sei'f, -Sepia, -Set» en, nobody, nothing more, Mt. v. 13 ; Heb. x. 2, (see prjKtn, ovKen). 2. of degree and increase; with the comparative, even, yet : Phil. i. 9 ; Heb. vii. 15, (W. 240 (225)). of what remains, \jiet'] : Jn. iv. 35 ; vii. 33 ; xii. 35 ; xiii. 33 ; Mt. xix. 20 ; jVIk. xii. 6 ; Lk. xviii. 22 ; of what is added, besides, more, further : en ana^, Heb. xii. 26 sq. ; en eva ^ 8vo, Mt. xviii. 16 ; add, Mt. xxvi. 65 ; Heb. xi. 32 ; en 8e yea moreover, and further, (Lat. prae- terea vera), Heb. xi. 36 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1 ; Diod. 1, 74 ; cf. Grimm on 2 ilacc. vi. 4) ; en de xal {but or) yea moreover also (Lat. praeterea vera etiam), Lk. xiv. 26 R G T L mrg. ; Acts ii. 26 ; en re .2 * (TOi|iav, Artem. oneir. 2, 57. 2. i. q. eroi- p6n)s, the condition of a pers. or thing so far forth as pre- pared, preparedness, readiness : Hipp. p. 24 [i. 74 ed. Kiihn] ; Joseph, antt. 10, 1, 2; readiness of mind (Germ. Bereitwilligleit^, ttjs Kapblas, Ps. ix. 38 (x. 17) : ev eroi- paala toC eiayyeXiov, with the promptitude and alacrity which the gospel jjroduces, Eph. vi. 15.* eToi|ios (on the accent cf. [Chandler § 394] ; W. 52 (51)), -7) (2 Co. ix. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 5), -ov, and -as, -ov (Mt. xxv. 10 [cf. WH. App. p. 157"; W. § 11, 1 ; B. 25 (22)]); fr. Horn, down ; prepared, ready ; a. of things : Mt. xxii. 4, 8, [(Lk. xiv. 1 7)] ; Mk. xiv. 15 [L br. er.'] ; 2 Co. ix. 5 ; ready to hand : to erotpa, the things (made) ready (in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches al- ready founded by them, 2 Co. x. 16; i. q. opportune, seasonable, 6 Kaipos, Jn. vii. 6 ; aoiTrjpla eTolprj diroKaXv- , to he in readiness, foil, by the inf. (Philo, leg. ad' Gai. § 34 sub fin.) : 2 Co. x. 6 [cf. W. 332 (311)]. (For ]UJ, Ex. xLx. 11, 15 ; Josh, viii. 4, etc.) * €to((Ui)S, adv., [fr. Thuc. on], readily ; erolpms e)(a to be ready : foil, by iuf.. Acts xxi. 13 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 [(not WH)]. (Sept. Dan. iii. 15; Diod. 16, 28 ; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 2 ; 13, 1, 1.) * cTos, -ovs, [gen. plur. erav, cf. B. 14 (13)], to, [fr. Horn, down], Hebr. niC/, a year : Lk. iii. 1 ; Acts vii. 30 ; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8 ; Rev. .x.x. 3, etc. ; eni e^eiv, to have passed years, Jn. viii. 5 7 ; with iv da-6evcia added, Jn. v. 5 [cf. W. § 32, 6] ; elvat, yiveadai. yfyoW- vai irav, e. g. ScoSfica, to be twelve years old [cf. Eng. (a boy) of twelve I/ears'] : Jlk. v. 42; Lk. ii. 42; iii. 23 [cf. W. 349 (328)] ; viii. 42 ; Acts iv. 22 ; yeyovvia eXarrov erav e^rjKovra, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which a thing is done [W. § 31, 9 a. ; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20 ; Acts xiii. 20 ; ace, in answer to the quest, how long ? : Mt. Lx. 20 ; Mk. v. 25 ; Lk. ii. 36 ; xiii. 7 sq. 11, 16 ; xv. €V 256 evayyeKi^o) 29 ; Acts vii. 6, 30, 42 ; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17 ; Rev. xx. 2, 4, 6. preceded by a prep. : and, from . . . on, since, Lk. viii. 43 ; Ro. xv. 23 ; iu the same sense «, Acts Lx. 33 ; xxiv. 10 [A. X. of many years] ; 8ta with gen., . . . years haring intervened, i. e. after [see hid, 11. 2] : Acts xxiv. 1 7 ; Gal. ii. 1 ; eis, for . . . years, Lk. xii. 1 9 ; fW with ace. (see enl, C. II. 1 p. 235'' hot.), for (the space of), Acts xix. 10; fierd with ace, after, Gal. i. 18; iii. 17; TTpo with gen., before [Eng. ago ; cf. irpo, b.], 2 Co. xii. 2 ; *ot' fTos, yearly, Lk. ii. 41. [Syn. cf. eVmuroy.] eiJ, adv., (prop, «u, the unused neut. of the adj. eis in Horn.), well: ev Trpaaaa, not as many interp. take it, contrary to ordinary Grk. usage, to do ivell i. e. act rightly (which in Greek is expressed by opBas or koKw TTpaacro)), but to he welt off, fare well, prosper. Acts xv. 29 [R. V. it shall be well with yoii] (Xen. mem. 1, 6, !S ; 2, 4, G ; 4, 2, 26 ; oec. 11,8; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 1 ; ooris xaXcos TcpaTTtt, ov\i (cat eZ irpaTTft ; Plat. AIc. i. p. 116b.; lir]v (Acts viii. 25 L T Tr WH) ; 1 aor. fitjyye- Xiadp.i]v ; (fvdyyfXos bringing good news) ; Sept. for ■>i73; to bring good news, to announce glad tidings; Vulg. evangelizo [etc.] ; used in the O. T. of any kind of good news : 1 S. x.x.xi. 9 ; 2 S. i. 20 ; 1 Chr. x. 9 : of the joyful tidings of God's kindnesses, Ps. .xxxix. (xl.) 10; to o-u- lijpiov 6(ov, Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 2; in particular, of the Messianic blessings: Is. xl. 9 ; Iii. 7 ; Ix. 6 ; l.xi. l,etc.; in the If. T. used esp. of the glad tidings of the coming kingdom of God, and of the salvation to be obtained in it through Christ, and of what relates to this salvation. L In the A c t i V e (rare in Grk. auth. also, in fact found only in later Grk., as Polyaen. 5, 7 ; ci^yytXiKet alra,. Dio Cass. 61, 13; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268; [W. 24]) : w. dat. of the pers. to whom the news is brought, Rev. x. 7 Rec. ; w. ace. of the pers. to whom the announce- ment is made, ibid. G L T Tr WII ; Rev. xiv. 6 R G ; by a construction not found elsewhere, «Vi Tiva (cf. Germ, die Botschaft an einen bringen), ibid. GLTTr WH. II. Passive [cf. W. 229 (215); B. 188 (163)]; of persons, glad tidings are brought to one, one has glad tidings pro- claimed to him : Mt. xi. 5 ; Lk. vii. 22 ; Heb. iv. 2, 6 ; of tilings, to be proclaimed : fiayyeXiferat f/ ^aaiXda toD 6€ov, the glad tidings are published of the kingdom of (iod close at hand, Lk. xvi. 16 ; to eiayyiXwv, the joyful announcement of man's salvation is delivered. Gal. i. 1 1 [B. 148 (129 S(j.)] ; to p^p-a to (iayye\icr6(V cif vpds, the word of good tidings brought unto you (see els, A. I. 5 b. [cf. "\V. 213 (200)]), 1 Pet. i. 25 ; impers. eiriyyeXiadr, Tint, the good news of salvation was declared, 1 Pet. iv. 6. III. as deponent Middle (in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. eqq. 643 down), to proclaim glad tidings ; spec. to instruct (men) concerning the things that pertain to Christian salvation : simply, Lk. ix. 6 ; xx. 1 ; Acts xiv. 7 ; Ro. XV. 20 ; 1 Co. i. 1 7 ; ix. 16, 18 ; rlvt Xoyw (vt]yye- XuTupriv Ip'iv el KaTe)(eTe, if ye hold fast in your minds with what word (i. e. with what interpretation; for he contrasts his own view of Christian salvation with his opponents' doctrine of the resurrection) I preached to you the glad tidings of salvation, 1 Co. xv. 2. w. dat. of pers. (as com. in Grk. writ.), to any one : Lk. iv. 18 fr. Is. Lxi. 1 ; spec, to bring to one the good tidings con- cerning Jesus as the Messiah: Gal. i. 8; iv. 13; Ro. i. 15 ; eiayy. w. aec. of the thing : univ., tjjv ntb"2 ; l. a reward for i/ooil tidings (cf. TO 8iSa(r)caXta, the fees given the SiSdcntaXof ) , Horn. Od. 14, 152; Cic. ad Att. 2, 3 and 12; 13, 40; Plut. Demetr. 17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2 S. iv. 10. 2. good tidings: Lcian. asin. 26 ; App. b. civ. 4, 20 ; Plut. ; al. ; plur. Sept. 2 S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt. ; but in each place eiay- -yeXia should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20 .ai'i7P flayyeXias- In the N. T. spec. a. the glad tidings of the kingdom of God soon to he set up, and subsequently also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom: Mk. i. 15 ; viii. 35 ; x. 29 ; xiii. 10 ; xiv. 9 ; xvi. 15 ; Mt. xxvi. 13 ; w. a gen. of the obj. added : Trjs ^ao-iXfiar, Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; Mk. i. 14RLbr. After the death of Christ the term to evayyeXiov comprises also the preaching of (concerning) Jesus Christ as having suffered death on the cross to procure eternal salvation for men in the kingdom of God, but as restored to life and exalted to the right hand of God in heaven, thence to return in majesty to consummate the kingdom of God ; so that it may be more briefly defined as the glad liilings ^f salvation through Christ; the proclamation of the grace ■of God manifested and pledged in Christ; the gospel f A-S. god-spell (see Skeat, Etym. Diet. s. v.)] : Acts XV. 7 ; Ko. i. 16 G L T Tr AVH ;' x. 16 ; xi. 28 ; 1 Co. iv. 15; ix. 14, 18[GLTTrWH], 23; xv. 1; 2Co. viii. 18; , -a> : 1 aor. inf. evapea-rrja-ai ; pf. inf. eiTjpe- iTTqKivai, and without augm. elapecTTrjK. Ileb. xi. 5 L WH [cf. WH. App. p. 162; B. 35 (30)]; to he well-pleasing: T» Sea (Sept. for D*rlSsn-nK ^bnnn. Gen. V. 22, 24 ; vi. 9),'Heb. xi. 5 sq. (Sir.' sliv. 16 ;' Philo de Abr. § 6 ; de exsecr. § 9 ; tivI, Diod. 14, 4). Pass. pres. evape- aToiip.ai\ Tivi [B. 188 (163); W. § 39, 1 a.]. In he well pleased with a thing: Heb. xiii. 16 (Diod. 3, 55 ; 20, 79; Diog. Laert. 10, 137).* «v-Apeo-Tos, -ov, (fr. ev and dpecrros), well-pleasing, ac- ceptable : Ro. xii. 2 ; tivi, to one, Ro. xii. 1 ; .\iv. 18 ; 2 Co. V. 9 ; Eph. V. 10 ; Phil. iv. 18 ; ev tivi, in anything. Tit. iL 9 ; iv Kvpico (see ev I. 6 b., p. 21 1' mid.). Col. iii. 20 (R om. ev) : e'vamov with gen. of pers., in one's judgment : Heb. xiii. 21. (Sap. iv. 10; L\. 10; Clem. Al. [sfrom. 2, 19 p. 481, 21 etc.; Just. M. apol. 1, 44 sub fin.; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 49. 5].) See the foil, word.* eu-ape'oTois, adv., in a manner well-pleasing to one, ac- ceptahly: tw 6ea. Hob. xii. 28. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; gladly, willingly. Epict. diss. 1, 12, 21 ; frag. 11.)' EiipovXos, -ov, 6, [lit. of good counsel], Eubulus, a Christian: 2 Tim. iv. 21.* ev-ye, used in commendation, well done .' Lk. xix. 1 7 L T TrWII. (Arstph., Plat., al.; Sept. for nsn.) Cf.fu,fin.* ti-ycv^s, -e's, (fr. ev and yevos) ; 1. well-horn, of nohle race: Lk. xL\. 12 (of a prince) ; iCo. i. 26. 2. noble- minded: compar. eiyevetrrepos. Acts xvii. 11. (Sept.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. andTragg. down.)* evBii 258 €v6vvTi.\aix^ava>, 2) ; with gen. of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [W. 185 (1 74)], Acts iv. 9. (2 Mace. vi. 13 ; ix. 26 ; Sap. xvi. 11, 24 ; in (!rk. auth. fr. Horn, down.) * (iipymu, -&>; (fifpyeVijs), to do good, bestoxv benefits : Acts X. 38. (Sept.; often in Attic writ.) * «ifp'ycTtis, -ou, o, a benefactor (fr. Pind. and lldl. down) ; it was also a title of honor, conferred on such as had done their country service, and upon princes; equiv. to Soler, Paler Patriae: Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hdt. 8, 85; Thuc. 1, 129; Xen. vect 3, 11; Hell. 6, 1, 4; Plat, de virt. p. 379 b. ; al. ; cf. 2 Mace. iv. 2; joined with o-MTijp, Joseph, b. j. 3, 9, 8 ; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12 [Tdf. viii. 1. 25]; Diod. 11, 26.)» cii-6eTos. -ov, (fr. ev and Beros), Grk. writ. fr. Aocliyl. and Hippdcr. down; prop. wr-ll-/jlacpd ; a.,/'': fit ", Lk. ix. 62 Rti; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 ct al.) ; with dat. of the thing/be which : Lk. ix. 62 L T Tr WII (to- npay/jLOTL, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149,4]). b. useful: Ttvt, Ileb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend on the ptcp.] ; (of time, seasonable, Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 6 ; Susan. 15).* «iOe'us, adv., (fr. (i6vs), straightway, immediately, forth- with : Mt. iv. 20, 22 ; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks., esp. Mark's Gospel [where, however, T Tr ^VII have- substituted tl6i% in some 35 out of 41 cases] ; elsewhere only in (ial. i. 16 ; Jas. i. 24 ; Rev. iv. 2, (for DXna, Job V. 3). shortly, soon : 3 Jn. 14. [From Soph, down.] cv9vSpO|M', -S : 1 aor. tv^uSpo^ijo-a [see eiSoKeoj] ; (f i- 6vSp(>pos, i. e. f ifliir and Spofios) ; to make a straight course^ run a struir/hl course : foil. Vjy eir w. ace. of place. Act» xvi. 11; eidv8pop.!ia-as rj\6ov €ir. Acts xxi. 1. (Philo, alleg. legg. iii. § 79 ; de agricult. § 40.) • ei9v(«'«, -co; (fi!5u/ios) ; 1. trans, to put in good spirits, gladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat, de rep. 2, ;!83 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen., Plat.). 2. intrans. to be joyful, be of good cheer, of good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v. 13. (Eur. Cycl. 530 ; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) * ci'-e«(ios, -ov, {(t and fli'/idt) ; 1- well-disposed, kind, (Horn. ()d. 14,6.3). 2. of good cheer, of good courage : kcts xxvii. 36 ; [compar. as adv. xxiv. 10 Rec. (see flQvp.iiis)'], (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down ; 2 Mace. xi. 26).* eie«|iws, adv., [Aeschyl., Xen., al.], cheerfully: Acts xxiv. 1 L T Tr WII, for Rec. devfioTipov the more con- fuhnlly* cvSvvu ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. evBvvarf ; (ev6vs) ; a. to make straight, level, plain : ttjv 6&6v, Jn. i. 23 (Sir. ii. G ; xx.xvii. 15). b. to lead or guide straight, to keep- straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : o cv6ipa>v. the steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cycl- ■ie evOv<; 259 evXojeco 15; of a charioteer, Num. xxii. 23; Isocr. p. 9; al.) [Coup. ; KaT-fvdvvio.'] * tv6vs, -ela, -V, Sept. for lU'", [fr. Find, down], straight; a. prop, straight, level : of a way, []\It. iii. 3^ ; Mk. i. 3 ; Lk. iii. 4 ; Acts ix. 11 ; els eidilav (L T Tr WII els eidelas), sc. oSov (an ellipsis com. also in class. Grk. cf. W. § ()4, 5), Lk. iii. 5; evBela 68o's the straight, the right wag, is fig. used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal i. e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; ai 6Sol Kvpiov, the. right and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the Three vs. 3). b. trop. straightforwanl, upright, true, sincere, (as often in prof, auth.) : xapbLa, Acts viii. 21 (f u^fif rfi Kaphla often in the Pss., as vii. 1 1 ; xxxi. (.\x.xii.) 11 ; xxxv. (xx.xvi.) 11).* «vOis, adv., [fr. Pind. down], i. q. etideas, with which it is often interchanged in the Mss. [see (ideas'] ; straight- way, immediately, forthwith: Mt. iii. 16; xiii. 20; Jn. xiii. 32, etc. [Cf. Phryn. ed. Loh. p. 145.] eifluTT]s, ->;7-o5, ij, (fr. the adj. ivdvs), rectitude, upright- ness : trop. pa/38os ddCrriTos, an impartial and righteous government, Heb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (-xlv.) 7.* evKaipt'u, -m : impf. evKaipovv [so L T Tr WII in Mk. vi. 31 ; II G in Acts xvii. 21] and rjvKalpovi/ [R G in Mk. 1. c. ; L T Tr WII in Acts 1. c], (betw. which the Mss. vary, see evSoKea, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. fvKmpj]iTa> ; (fuKoipor) ; a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 125 sq. ; \_Rulherford , New Phryn. p. 205; Soph. Le.x. s. V.]) ; to have opportunity : 1 Co. xvi. 12 ; to have leisure, foil, by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31 [(Phit. ii. p. 223 d. Cleom. Anax. § 9)] ; to give one's time to a thing, fts n, Acts xvii. 21.* cvKaipta, -as, fj, (evKmpos), seasonable lime, opportunity. (rjTew (VK; foil, by [iva B. 237 (205)], Mt. x.xvi. 16; [Lk. xxii. 6 Lchm. mrg.] ; by roii with inf. Lk. xxii. 6. (Sept. ; in Grk. writ, first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) * «il-Kaipos, -ov, ((V and Katpos), .reasonable, timely, oppor- tune : fioj)6(ia, Heb. iv. 16 ; rjpiipa (Ck. a convenient day, Mk. vi. 21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29 ; [Ps. ciii. (civ.) 27 ; Soph. O. C. 32] ; Theophr., Polyb., al.) * «iKa£pus, adv., seasonably, opportunely ; tvhen the op- portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 11 ; opp. to aKaipais (q. v.), 2 Tim. iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8, 3 ; Plat, and sqq. ; Sir. xviii. 22.) • «ii-KOiTos, -ov, (fv and kottos), that can be done nyith easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al. ; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace. iii. 18; in the N. T. only in the phrase cvv, Plat. legg. 7 p. 8] 5 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno the Stoic contrasts fj (vKdff. caution, as a fi/Xoyns (kkXio-is a reasonable shunning, with 6 (^o/3or, Diog. L.aert. 7, 116, cf. Cic. Tusc. 4, 6, 13). 2. reverence, veneration: f] TTpos TO dfiov fix. Diod. 13, 12; Plut. CamiU. 21 ; de ser. num. vind. c. 4, and elsewh. : irpiis tovs vopovs, Plut. Ages. 15 ; d(ov, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § i> ; simply reverence towards God, godly fear, piety : Heb. xii. 28 and, in the opinion of many, also v. 7 [cf. ano, II. 2 b. ; see below]. • 3. fear, anxiety, dread : Sap. .xvii. 8 ; for nJNT , Josh, xxii. 24 ; .Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 9 ; Plut. Fab. 1 (the' d^ovXla of Fabius seemed to be (vKa^eia) ; so, most probabl)-, in Heb. V. 7 (see [above and] cltto, I. 3 d.), for by using this more select word the writer, skilled as he was in the Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of God than if he had used cpo^os. [Syx. see SetXi'a, fin. ; cf. Trench § xlviii. ; Delitzsch on Heb. v. 7.] * evXaP^'oiiai, -oiJp.ai : 1 aor. ptcp. eiXa^rjdeis ; prop, to show one's self evKa^r^s, i. e. 1. to act cautiously, cir- cumspectly, (Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be- ware, fear: as in 1 Mace. iii. 30; xii. 40 [Alex, etc.] and often in prof, auth., foil, by fir) lest [B. 241 sq. (208)], Acts .xxiii. 10 RG (Deut. ii. 4 ; 1 S. xviii. 29 ; Job xiii. 25 ; Jer. v. 22 ; Dan. iv. 2 ; 2 Mace. viii. 16 ; Sir. xH. 3). 3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (jov deov, Plat. legg. 9 p. 879 e. ; Sept. Prov. ii. 8; xxiv. 28 (x.xx. 5); Nah. i. 7) : God's declaration, Heb. xi. 7.* cvXa^ris, -es, (cu and XajSfiv), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down ; 1. taking hold well, i. e. carefully and surely; cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [A. V. devout'] : Acts ii. 5 ; viii. 2, (!\Iic. vii. 2 [Alex, etc.]) ; joined with SiKmos (as in Plat, polit. p. 311 b.) : Lk. ii. 25; cvK. Kara rnv i/o/ioK, Acts xxii. 12 LTTrWH. [Cf. reff. s. V. cCXd/3em, fin.] * evXo-yetj.-a) ; fut. evXoyjjtrco: impf. €v\6yovu and rjvXoyovu (Mk. X. 16, where the Mss. fiuctuate betw. the two forms [cf. WH. App. p. 162]) ; 1 aor. eiXdyi/aa (ijiXdyijo-a, Mt. xiv. 19 LTr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L; Heb. xi. 20 and 21 L) ; pf. ei\6yr]Ka (rjvXoyqKa, Heb. vii. 6 L ; see euSoKew init. [cf. Veitch s. v.; Tdf. on Lk. 1. c.]) ; Pass., pf. ptcp. evXoyrj- fiivos; 1 fut. fvXoyijflijo-ofiat; (^eijKoyos): Sept. very often for Ilia and 'n"^2; Vulg. henedico; mostly w. ace. of the obj., to bless one ; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele- brate with praises : tov 6e6v, Lk. i. 64 ; ii. 28 ; xxiv. 51, 53 [Tdf. om.] ; Jas. iii. 9; absol. in the giving of thanks : Mt. xiv. 19 ; xxvi. 26 [cf. 3 below] ; Mk. vi. 41 ; viii. 7 R G T [?] ; xiv. 22 [cf. 3 below] ; Lk. xxiv. 30 ; 1 Co. xiv. 16. (When used in this sense fvKoyfiv differs from eu;(ap(o-T€ii' in referring rather to the form, elx.- 1° the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage purely bibl. and ecd. like the Hebr. pa, 2. to in- voke blessings : nva, ujjon one, Mt. v. 44 Rec. ; Lk. \\. 28 ; Ro. xii. 14 ; absol., 1 Cor iv. 1 2 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; of one tak- ing leave, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq. ; of one at the point of death, Heb. .xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9) ; in congratulations, Heb. vii. 1. G sq. (Gen. xiv. 19) ; Mk. x. 16 K G L ; Lk. ii. 34 ; ev\oyr)p(vos (1^3), praised, blessed, [cf. fiXoyrjTos]: Mt. xxi. 9 ; xxiii. 39 ; Mk. xi. 9 sq. ; Lk. xiii. 35 ; xix. 38 ; Jn. xii. 13, (in all which pass, it is an acclamation borrowed fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 26). 3. with ace. of a thing, to consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God's bless- ing on a thing, pray him to bless it to one's use, pronounce ev\oy>]T6<; 260 a consecratory blessinr/ on : tx6v&ia, Mk. \u\. 7 L Tr WH ; Toiis apTovs, Lk. ix. 16; to jTorrjiHov, 1 Co. x. 16; t^k Svalav, 1 S. ix. 13; and porh. tuv aprov, Ml. xxvi. 26; Mk. xiv. 22, (but see above under 1) ; cf. liuckerl, Das Abcndmalil, \i. 220 sq. 4. of God, to cau.ie lo prosper, to make liappi/, lo bestow blessings on, [of. W. 32] : rivd. Acts iii. 26 ; foil, by iv with dat. of the blessing, iv nacrr] (vKoyia, with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 {iv ayadois. Test. xii. Patr. [test. Jos. § 18] p. 722 [iv fiXoyian yrjs, iv TrpwToyevr]iia ; (ei/TOor); lo icisli (one) tcell; to be uxll-rlis- /M/sed, of a peaceable spirit : tivi, towards any one, Mt. V. 25. (3 Mace. vii. 1 1 ; Soph., Arstph., Xen., Polyb., Plut., Ildian.) » eilvoia, -as, f/, (divooi), good-icill, kindness: 1 Co. vii. 3 Kcc. ; per euvotas, Eph. vi. 7. [Prom Aeschyl. down.] * «ivouxtijw : 1 aor. evvoixKra ; 1 aor. pass. (vvov\i, -0) : [Pass., pres. euoSoG/iat ; fut. fvuboiOrjaopcu', 1 aor. sn1)j. doSioBij, 1 Co. xvi. 2 WII mrg. who regard the eioBaiTat of the text here as perf. (either ind. or subj.) see their App. p. 172] ; (evoSos) ; Sept. principally for nSv and ri'Ssn ; to grant a prosperous and expedi- tious Journey, to lead by a direct and easy way : Gen. xxiv. 48 ; much more freq. tropically, to grant a success- ev7rdpeBpo<; 261 evpt,6T] to nprjyfia, Hdt. 6, 73 ; o, n av eioSarai [see above, init.] whatever (business) has prospered, i. e. (contextually) its gains, 1 Co. xvi. 2.* €v-iTdp-£8pos, -ov, (eu, and irape&pos [sitting beside]), sitting constanlUj by ; assiduous : wpos to ivnapebpov ra Kvpio), that ye may be constantly devoted to the Lord and his cause, 1 Co. vii. 35, for Kec. ciirpoa-e&pov, wliich does not differ in sense, [A.V. attend ujMtiJ. (Hes}-ch. evTTapfdpov KoKoiS Trapa/xevoi'.) * (i-TK\.@i\s, -e'f, (ev, and -neWofUiu to comply with, obey), easily obeying, compliant, [A. V. easy to he intreated'] : Jas. iii. 1 7. (Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * «v^irepi-frxaros, -ov, (fr. ev and nfpu ; impf. evpia-Kov (Mk. xiv. 55 [R G T] ; Lk. xix. 48 [R G T] ; Acts vii. 1 1 [exc. Tr WH]) and more rarely Tjvpia-Kov (ef. Kiihner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Veitch s. V. fin.] and reff. under evSoKia) ; fut. evprjdoi; pi. evprfKa; 1 aor. (vpr/a-a (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks., occurs in Aesop, f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.] ; Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ. ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 721; W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14 Rec. ; 2 aor. cipov, 1 pers. plur. in Alex, form [ WH. App. p. 164; B. 39 (34) ; W. § 13, 1 (^seed7repxopm)~\evpapev, Lk. xxiii. 2 T Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. dpav, Lk. \iii. 35 Tr WH ; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often djpocrav) ; Pass., pres. evpia-Kopai ; impf. 3 pers. sing. evpiaKero, Heb. xi. 5 RG, ri(jpla-K(T0 LT Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. [Veitch u. s.]) ; 1 aor. evpedrjv ; fut. dpfSijaopai ; 2 aor. mid. tvp6p.rjv and later eipdiiT)v (Heb. ix. 12, [cf. reff. above (on 2 aor. act.)]) ; Sept. numberless times for XSD, sometimes for J't^ri to attain to, and for Chald. noty ; [fr. Horn, down]; to find; i. e. 1. prop, to come upon, hit upon, to meet with; a. after searching, to find a thing sought: absol., opp. to frjTeii', Mt. vii. 7 sq. ; Lk. xi. 9 sq. {0)Tei Koi fupijcreif, Epict. diss. 4, 1, 51) ; riva, Mt. ii. 8 ; Mk. i. 37 ; Lk. ii. 45 ; Acts xi. 26 (25); xiii. 22; 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); 2 Tim. i. 17; Rev. xx. 15, etc. ; ovx fvpi(TK€To, he had vanished, Heb. xi. 5 ; with a specification of place added : tripav w. gen. Jn. vi. 25 ; iv w. dat. Acts v. 22 ; evpidrj fls. Acts viii. 40 (see els, C. 2) ; w. ace. of the thing, Mt. vii. 14 ; xiii. 46 ; xviii. 13 ; Lk. xxiv. 3 ; Jn. x. 9; Acts vii. 11 ; Ro. vii. 18 Rec, etc.; foil, by indir. disc, Lk. v. 19; oi)( evp€6r]i/inquiri/,lhoii(jlil, i'.c(imi'iialion, scrutiny, obsercalion, hearing \ lo find out III/ practice and experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un- derstand: KaTTjyopiav, Lk. \\. 7 [T Tr t.xt. WM KaTi)yo- pfiv]; Ttvd full, by ptcj). in tlie j)redicate, Acts xxiii. 29 ; by on, Ro. vii. 21 ; after an examination (n-cipaffiv), rivd [ti] w. a pred. adj. [ptep.]. Rev. iii. 2 ; of a jud^e : alriav ffavuTov, Acts xiii. 28 ; alriav, kokov, adUrjfia iv rivt, Jn. xviii. 38 ; xix. 4, G ; Acts xxiii. 9 ; xxiv. 20 ; after a com- putation, w. an ace. of the price or measure, Acts xix. 19 ; x.xvii. 28 ; after (leliboration, to tI iroii)(Ta>m, Lk. xix. 48; TO Trios K6\dau)VTiu airois, Acts iv. 21. Pass, evpi- (TKOfiai lo lie found, i.e. lo be seen, be jiresant; Lk. i.\. 36 ((Jen. xviii. 31); often like the Ilebr. KXPJ '" be dis- covered, recognized, detected, to show one's self out, of one's character or state as found out by others (men, God, or both), (cf. W. § 65, 8) : fvpidij iv yaa-rpl exovtra, Mt. i. 18; iva (vpfdSxn Ka6i>s k. ij/ifls, 2 Co. xi. 12; fi- pedrj fioi ij fVroXij fls Savarov sc. ov(Ta, the commandment, as I found by experience, brought death to me, Ro. vii. 10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none showed themselves as hav- ing returned) ; Acts V. 39; 1 Co. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co. v. 3 ; Gal. ii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; Rev. v. 4 ; rivi, dat. of the pcrs. taking cognizance and judging [W. §31, 10; B. 187 (162)], 2 Pet. iii. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet cf. B. 1. c. and § 133, 14 ; W. § 31, 4 a.] ; Iva evpeda iv aira i. e. iv Xpiirra, sc. &v, Phil. iii. 9 ; cpf^^iaTt fiipiOeh i)s avdpai- nos, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph, b. j. 3, 6, 1 ; .so the Lat. inrenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; rejierior, Tuscul. i. 39, 94). tvpi(TK(iv 6(6v (opp. to fi/Tcii' aiiTov, see fijTeu, 1 c. [cf. e/cfrjT/w, a.]), Ui get l-noirlii/ge of, rome lo know, God, Acts xvii. 27 ; fvpttrKfrai (o 6fus) Tivi, discloses the knowledge of himself to one, Sap. i. 2 ; ef. Grimm, exgt. Hdb. ad loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch, i. § 5 ; Orig. c. Cels. 7, 42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. (vpiaKerai 6 6e6s is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im- plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9 ; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4, 15 ; Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 13) ; hence evpidijv [L and Tr in br. WII mrg. add fV] Toif e'fie /xi) fi/ToCo-t, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixv. 1, means, ace. to Paul's conception, / granted the knowledge and deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ., to find for one's self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure : y^irpaxn», lleb. ix. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage, the Act. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense [cf.B. 193(167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.] : Ti]vfi,xfjv,Mt.s. 39 ; xvi. 25 ; avdvava-iv (Sir. xi. 1 9) rais ij/vxais vp-aiv, Mt. xi. 29 ; /ifTavoias rtmov, place for recalling the de- cision, changing the mind, (of his father), llcb. xii. 17 [cf. AV. 147 (139)]; (TKrjvaiia rm Sfa. ojiportunity of building a house for God, Acts vii. 46 ; dp. x"?'"' Kracc, favor, Ileb. iv. 16; xdpiv Trapa Tm ^fw, Lk. i. 30; ivuimnv Tov 6eov, Acts vii. 46 ; cXfo? vapa Kvpiov, 2 Tim. i. IS; ("riia |n NSD, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3 ; xxx. 27; xxxii. 6 ; Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, etc.; 1 Esdr. viii. 4). [CoMP. : dv-evp'uTKa.'] €vpo-KXvi8voi, 6, (fr. fZpos the S. E. wind, and Kkihav a wave), a S. E. wind raising mighty waves : Acts xxvii. 14 Rec. But respectable authorities read (Ipv- kXvSqiv, ])referred by Griesbach et al., from (upis broad, and kXvSoiv, a wind causing broad waves, ((ierni. der Breilsjiiiltiide, the Wide-washer); Etym. Wagn. p. 772, 30 s. v. Tv(j)o>v • '*Tu^wv yiip ((TTiv f)Tov uvipov (T<^ohpd TTVOri, hi Kill ivpvKkvhuiV Kiikf'iTai." Otliers (vpaKv\tj>v, (j. v.* cvpv-xupos, -OK, {(vpvs broad, and x"f"')' spacious, broad : Mt. vii. 13. (Sept. ; Aristot. h. anini. 10, 5 [p. 637', 32]; Diod. 19, 84; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3; c. Ap. 1, 18,2].)* €u-o-€'P«io, -as, T), (fCcrf^Tjs), reverence, respect ; in the Bible everywhere ]>lely loivards God, godliness : Acts iii. 1 2 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; iv. 7, 8 ; vi. 5 S(|. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; 2 Pet. i. 3, C sq. ; r/ kot tvai^eiav BibaiTKuXla, the doctrine that promotes godlino.-^s, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [see kutu, IL 3 d.] ; rj d\r]6fta tj kot fv(T(ji(tav, the truth that leah. antl. 18, 5, 2 ; [vepl ro 6(iov] c. Ap. 1, 22, 2 ; (is 6fovs Km yoveas, Plat. rep. 10 l>. Gl.ic.) * li-a-ipfdi, -Si; (ei3(rf/3ij9) ; to be eia^e^rfs (pious), to act piously or reverently (towards God, one's country, magis- trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rev- erence is due) ; in prof. auth. foil, by els, ■ntpi, npos riva ; rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (roi/s Beovs) and in the Bible : tov "ihiov oIkov, 1 Tim. v. 4 ; 6f6v, lo Avor- ship (iod. Acts xvii. 23 ; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var. ; xi. 5 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 11, 1].* ««o-6Pt|s, -«, (fu and a-e^opai), pious, dutiful (towards God [A.V. devout, godly'] ; eitrefiico) : Acts x. 2, 7; x.xii. 12 R G; 2 Pet. ii. 9. ([Theogn.], Find., Tragg., Ar- stph.. Plat., al. ; thi-ice in Sept. for 2"\1 noble, gener- ous, Isa. x.xxii. 8 ; for p''nS, Is. xxiv. 16 ; xxvi. 7 ; often in Sir. and 1 Mace.) [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] * €io-«Piis, m\\., jtiously, godly : f^i/, 2 Tim. iii. 12: Tit. ii. 12. (Find. [-jSc'mt], Soph., Xen., Plat., al. ; 4 Mace, vii. 21 [Fritzsche om.].)* «i'o-ii(ios, -ov, (eS and aijpa a sign), well-marked, clear and definite, distinct : Xoyoy, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to be understood']. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb., Flut.) • eiltrirXaYxvos, -of, ((S and anXdyxvov, q. v.), prop, hav- ing .■'Irony bowels ; once so in Ilippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foes., i. 197 ed. Kiihn] ; in bibl. and cccl. lang. compassionate, tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32 ; 1 Pet. iii. 8 ; pree. Manass. 7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Froleg. § 29) ; Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. § !) ; cf. Ilarnack's note on Herra. vis. 1, 2].* e4irxi)|iivus, adv., (see suo-xw"")' '" " seemly manner, decently: 1 Co. xiv. 40; ntpmaTeiv, Ro. xiii. 13 ; 1 Th. iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4; Cyr. 1, 3, 8 sq. ; al.)* tvcrxit"»'^»^! -^fi h' (^itrxw'^"' ^- ^O» charm or elegance evo'-xrj/u.ccv 263 evyaptcTTeo} of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesti/, seemliness (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) ; of external charm, «omeliness : 1 Co. xii. 23.* €vio-xT||iuv, -ov, (fZ, and crxniia the figure, Lat. habitus') ; 1. of elegant figure, shapelg, graceful, comelij, bearing one's selfhecominglg in speech or behavior, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat.) : to elaxhl^ova fjiiwp, the comely parts of the body that need no covering (opp. to ra dirxw""" rjfiwv, TS. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24; of morals: upos to fvarxijiov, to promote decorum, 1 Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in- fluential, wealthy, respectable, [^.Y . of honorable estate"]: Mk. XV. 43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph, de vita sua § 9 ; Plut. parallel. Graec. et Rom. c. 15 p. 309 b.)' «vTovus, adv., (fr. ivrovos, and this fr. fv and relvto to stretch [cf. at full stretch, well strung, etc.]), vehemently, forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8; 2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9, G; Arstph. Plut. 1095; Diod., al.) * evTpairtXio, -as, fj, (fr. evrpaTreKos, fr. eZ, and Tpiwai to turn: easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas- antry, humor, facetiousness, ([Hippoer.], Plat. rep. 8 p. 563 a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 3; Plut., al.) ; in a bad sense, scurrility, ribaldry, low jesting (in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4 ; in a mild- er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 13; [ij eirpaTreXiu Treiratbevpivq v^pts ea-Tip, rhet. 2, 12, IG (cf. Cope in loc.) ; cf. Trench § xxxiv. ; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays etc. p. 187 sqq. (Speech at Eton) 1882].* EuTvxos [i. e. fortunate; on accent cf. W. 51 ; Chan- dler § 331 sq.], -ov, 6, Eutychus, a young man restored to hfc by Paul : Acts xx. 9.* c«(j)T)|iia, -as, fj, (ev(prip.os, q. v.), prop, the utterance of good or auspicious words ; hence good report, praise : 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to dvacprjpila), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed. Dind.] ; Ael. v. h. 3, 47. (In diff. senses in other auth. fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat, down.) * €v(t>T|pios, -ov, (fv and (^ijfxrf), sounding well; uttering words of good omen, speaking auspiciously : neut. plur. fv(j)r)pa, tilings spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will to otliers, Phil. iv. 8 [A. V. of good report, (R. V. mrg. gracious)]. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)* cv-opeu, -a : 1 aor. (itpoprjcra (Lchm. T]v(f>6pjjpaivu ; Pass., pres. (vp. [cf. IIV/. App. p. 1(12]) ; 1 aor. (i in Sept. very often actively for n'Du' to make joyful, and pass, for miv to be joyful, sometimes for ]jn to sing ; in Gfrk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; to glad- den, make joyful: nvd, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to Xum'iv). Pass. io be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32; Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9) ; Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut. xxxii. 43) ; Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1) ; Rev. xi. 10; xii. V2: ev rivi, to rejoice in, be deUghted with, a thing. Acts vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); eVi tlvi, Rev. xviii. 20 L T Tr WH (for Rec. cV avTTjv) ; of the merriment of a feast, Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. .xiv. 25 (26); xxvii. 7); with \apTTpa>9 added, to hve sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19 (Horn. Od. 2, 311 ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 12).* Eiv dyaOuiv 6 Oeos fvxupLOTq- Tai, PhUo, quis rer. div. her. § 36). simply, so that tm ^€1» must be added mentally : Ro. i. 21 ; [1 Co. xiv. 1 7] ; 1 Th. V. 18 ; esp. where the giving of thanks customary at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating, is spoken of: Mt. xv. 36 ; xxvi. 27 ; ]VIk. viii. 6 ; xiv. 23; Lk. xxii. 17, 19 ; Jn. vi. 11, 23 ; 1 Co. xi. 24; eixapiTrfiv Tat Sea 8ia 'Iijcr. Xpiorov, thi'ough Christ i. e. by Christ's help (because both the favors for which thanks are given and the gratitude which prompts the thanks are due to Christ [cf. W. 378 (354) note]) : Ro. i. 8 ; vii. 25 R WH mrg. ; Col. iii. 17; rw ^eoi ev ovopan 'Kpiarov (see ovopa, 2 e.), Eph. v. 20. Of that for or on account of which thanks are given to God, we find — nfpi tivos, gen. of pers., concerning, with regard to one, [1 Th. i. 2] ; 2 Th. i. 3 [cf. Elbe, in loc] ; w. on added epex- egeticaUy, Ro. i. 8 (where R G vrrcp) ; 2 Th. ii. 13 ; w. addition of c'wi and dat. of the thing for, on account of, which, 1 Co. i. 4 ; xmep rtuos, gen. of pers., Eph. i. 16 ; viTcp w. gen. of the thing, /or, on account of, 1 Co. X. 30 ; Eph. V. 20 ; the matter or ground of the thanks- giving is expressed by a foil, oti: Lk. xviii. 11 ; Jn. xi. 41; iCo.i. 14; iTh. ii. 13; Rev. xi. 17; or is added asvndetically without on, 1 Co. xiv. IS (XaXw L T Tr WH, for which R G XaKav, the ptcp. declaring the cause which prompts to thanksgiving [W. 345 sq. (324) ; B. 300 (258)]). Once fixap- ti, for a thing, in the pass. 2 Co. i. 11 [cf. B. 148 (130); W. 222 (209)]; « the Fathers tvxapKneiv ri ia to consecrate a thing by giving thanks, to 'bless': 6 fiii^a/jKTTTj^fif I'pTos k. orxof, Justin M. apol. 1, 65 fin,; ^vxopi.o^deiaa Tpo^jytj, ibid. c. 66; €V)(api(TTia 264 "E(f>ecro<: el(r\v 01 (v\api' tavTwv added (see tVi, A. I. 1 f. p. 232»), Acts xxi. 23.* EvXO)iai; impf. rjixoprjv (Ro. ix. 3) and evxoprjv (Acts xxvii. 29 T Tr, sec fv8oKta> init. [cf. Veitch s. v. ; Ti/f. Proleg. p. 121]) ; [1 aor. mid. d^apriv Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf., where others read the opt. -alprjv; dcpon. verb, cf. W. § :i8, 7] ; 1. to prai/ to God (Sept. in this sense for S^ijnn and in>;) : TM 6fa (as very often in class. Grk. fr. Ilom. down [cf. W. 212 (199) ;'b. 177 (1,")4)]), foil. by ace. w. inf.. Acts xxvi. 29 ; irpos top deuv (Xen. mem. 1, 3, 2 ; symp. 4, 55 ; often in Sept.), foil, by ace. w. inf. 2 Co. xiii. 7; irrep w. gen. of pers., /or one, Jas. v. 16 where L WH t.xt. Tr mrg. Trpoaevxerde (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 10). [Stn. see uiTf'ffl, fin.] 2. to wish : ri, 2 Co. xiii. 9 ; foil, by ace. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re- ligious sense, to pray, jirai/ for, in both the preceding pass.] ; Acts xxvii. 29 ; rivxoprjv (on this use of the impf. cf. W. 283 (2GG); B. § 139, 1.3; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]) e'j/ai, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [CoMP. : irpoa- fvxopai-~\ * €v-XpTi; (eS\lfvxos) ; to be of good courage, to be of a cheerful spirit: Phil. ii. 19. (Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 9; [Poll. 3, 28 § 135 fin.] ; in epitaphs, ev\/^ux" ' i- q- Lat. hare pia anima .')' tv«8£o, -as, fj, (fr. eiwSrjs ; and this fr. f u and ofa. pf. oSaSa) ; a. a sweet smell, fragrance, (Xen., Plat., Plut., Hdian., al.) ; metaph. Xpiarov eva&ia ea-p-fv tm diai, i. e. (dropping the fig.) our efficiency in which the power of Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to God, 2 Co. ii. 15. b. a fragrant or sweet-smelling thing, incense: Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, etc.; hence ocr^aij eitaSiat, an odor of something sweet-smelling, in Se|)t. often for nin'J"n'7> «" "dor of acquiescence, satisfaction ; a sweet odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex. xxix. 18; Lev. i. 9, 13, 17, etc., agreeably to the ancient [anthropopathic] notion that God smells and is pleased with the odor of sacrifices. Gen. viii. 21 ; in the N. T. by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a thing well- pleasing to God: Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. G05 (562) cf. 237 (222)].* [EuuSia, -as, Phil. iv. 2 Rec." for Eio&ia, q. v.] evuvvfios, -oc, (eu and livopa) ; 1. -dWo|iai ; 2 aor. ptcp. ecfiaXopiems L T Tr WII ; (e'jri and aWnpiai, <{. v.) ; fr. Ilom. down; to leap upon, spring upon: inl two. Acts xix. IG [here RG pres. ptcp.]; (1 S. X. G; xi. 6; xvi. 13).* e4i-dira| [Treg. in Ileb. i' aira^ ; cf. Lipsius, gram, Untcrs. p. 127], adv., (fr. erri and ana^ [cf. W. 422 (393) ; B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. e. a. our all at once: 1 Co. xv. G. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 10^ Hoi), vii. 27 ; ix. 12 ; x. 10. (Lcian., Dio Cass., al.) * 6ciSov, see €7reiBov. 'Eeo-ivos, -rj, -ov. ICpliesian : Rev. ii. 1 Rec.* ■E4>eVios, -a, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. e. a native or in- habitant of Ephesus : Acts xix. 28, 34 sq. ; xxi. 29.* "E<|>€(ros, -ou, ij, Ephesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor, capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular Asia [see 'Ao-m], situated on the Icarian Sea between Smyrna and jSIiletus. Its chief splendor and renown came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned one of the wonders of the world. It was bin-ned down B. c. 35G by Merostratus, rebuilt at the common expense of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan. 7, 2, Gsq.; Liv. 1,45; Plin. h. n. 5, 29 (31) ; 36,14(21)), and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly destroyed by the Goths. At Ephesus the apostle Paul founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise is awarded in Rev. ii. 1 sqq. The name of the city oc- curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24 ; xix. 1, 17, 26 ; xx. 16 sq.; 1 Co. XV. 32 ; xvi. 8 ; Eph. i. 1 (where ev 'E(pe'a-a> is omitted by cod. .Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by T AVH Tr mrg. ; see ]VH. App. ad loc. ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ephesians, The Ep. to the]) ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. IS ; iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (ace. toGLTTrWTI) ii. 1. Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena 1874; \_Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877)].* i4>evpeT>']^ 265 «%<» «-£vp€TT|s. -oO, 6, {i(J3€vpt(TKa> to find out), an inventor, contriver, (xVnacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 1499) : KaKoiv, Ro. i. 30 {KOKtiv evp(Tai, Philo in Flacc. § 4 mid.; 6 Kaivwv d^iKT^fxarcov evperrji, ibid. § 10; ndarjs KOKias evperrjs, 2 Mace. vii. 31 ; Sejauus facinorum om- nium rcpertor. Tacit, ann. 4, 11).* i^r\\>.ipla, -as, 17, (e0i;/ie'ptof, -ov, by day, lasting or act- ing for a day, daily), a word not found in prof. auth. ; Sept. in Citron, and Neh. ; 1. a service limited to a stated series of days (of. Germ. Taijdienst, Wochen- dienst) ; so used of the service of the priests and Levites : Neh. .xiii. 30; 1 Chr. xxv. 8; 2 Chr. xiii. 10, etc. 2. the class or course itself of priests who for a week at a time performed the duties of the pricstli/ office (Germ. Woch- nerzunft) : 1 Chr. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 13, etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 2, 15 ; so twice in the N. T. : Lk. i. 5, 8. For David di- vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en- tire week from sabbath to sabbath, 1 Chr. xxiv. 4 ; 2 Chr. viii. 14 ; Xeli. xii. 24 ; these classes Josephus calls waTpiai and e(pr]pfpibes, antt. 7, 14, 7 ; de vita sua 1 ; Suidas, ((prj- fifpla • f] Trarpid. Xeyerat Se Koi f] rrjs ripepas \ei.rovpyla. Cf. Fritzschc, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD. s. v. Priests ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii.] * €({>-ifjp.£pos, -ov, (i. q. 6 eVl Tjfiepav wu) ; 1. Inst in (j J or a rfa?/ (Find., Hippocr., Plut., Galen. ; al.). 2. dally: J] Tpo(pri (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hal. 8, 41 ; Aristid. ii. p. 398 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15.* e(j>iS€, see eVetSov. (->.Kveo)iai, -ovixai ; 2 aor. inf. ('(f>iKt-icmi|ii: 2 aor. iiTfaTrjv, ptcp. tViords, impv. iviaTqBi; pf. ptcp. £0eoTa)f ; to place at, place upon, place over; in the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indie. 3 pers. sing. ('ma-rarat (for e'^iVr.), 1 Th. v. 3 T Tr WH ; see reff. s. v. d(j)ei8ov} and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf. and 2 aor. (see dvltxTj^pi) ; to stand by, be present : Lk. ii. 38; Acts xxii. 20; indva w. gen. of pers. to stand over one, place one's self above, Lk. iv. 39 ; used esp. of per- sons coming upon one suddenly : simply, Lk. x. 40 ; xx. 1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii. 7 ; w. dat. of pers.. Acts iv. 1 ; xxiii. 11 ; of the advent of angels, Lk. ii. 9 ; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Lcian. dial, deor. 17, 1 ; freq. of dreams, as Hom. II. 10, 496; 23, 106; Hdt. 1, 34; al.) ; w. dat. of place. Acts xvii. 5; foil, by fVi with ace. of place. Acts x. 17; xi. 11 ; of evils coming upon one : w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see above] ; firi two, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9 ; xix. 1 ; Soph. O. R. 777; Thuc. 3, 82). i. q. to be at hand i. e. be ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, cf. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547; Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand i. e. impend: of time, 2 Tim. iv. 6. to come on, of rain, Acts xxviii. 2. [Comp. : Kar-, iTvv-e(fila-rripi.'\* [€(j)v(Sios, see alcftvidios-'] ■E4>pa£(i or (so R Tr) 'E(l)patfi [cf. I, t, fin.], (X L H 'E(^peV> Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop, name of a city situated ace. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow and Parthey, p. 1 96, 1 8, t w e n t y], ace. to Jerome twenty- miles from Jerusalem ; ace. to Joseph, b. j. 4, 9, 9 not far from Bethel ; conjectured by Robinson (Palest, i. 444 sq. [cf. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called et-Taiijibeh, a short day's journey X. E. of Jerusalem : Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; Keim iii. p. 7 sq. [Eug. trans, v. 9].* €<{><|>a8d, ephphatha, Aram. nriiiriK (the ethpaal impv. of the verb X\r\3, Hebr. nn3, to open), be thou opened (i. e. receive the power of hearing ; the ears of the deaf and the ej'es of the blind beingconsidered as closed) : i\Ik. vii. 34. [See Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.] * «xBe's and (Rec, so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) ^^/f (on which forms cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq. ; [esp. Ruth- erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.] ; Bleek; Br. an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 1 000 ; [Tdf Proleg. p. 81 ; W. pp. 24, 45 ; B. 72 (63)1), adv., yesterday: Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28; of time just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph, down.].* t'xflpo, -as, T], (fr. the adj. E;^5pds), enmity : Lk. xxiii. 12 ; Eph. ii. 14 (15), 16 ; plur. Gal. v. 20 ; ?x^pa (Lchm. eX^P" f^'"- ""-^i' [^'^"'S- inimicn'l) B(ov, towards God, Jas. iv. 4 (where Tdf. tw dew) ; fis 6e6v, Ro. viii. 7 ; by meton, i. q. cause of enmilii, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer. (From Find, down.)]* «X9p6s, -a, -6v, {(x6os hatred) ; Sept. numberless times for 3'lN also for "li", several times for XJlb' and N3b'3, a, hater ; 1. passively, hated, odious, hateful (in Hom. only in this sense) : Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to dyamjTo'j). 2. actively, hostile, hating and opposing another : 1 Co. xv. 25 ; 2 Th. iii. 15 ; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed, Jas. iv. 4 Lchm.; Gal. iv. 16, cf. Meyer or Wieseler on the latter pass, used of men as at enmity with God by their sin: Ro. v. 10 (cf. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21 ; Jas. iv. 4) [but many take ex^P- ^'^'^'^ (^^ ™ ^'- ^^> ^'^'^ ^ above) pas- sively; cf. Meyer]; rfj Siavoia, opposing (God) in the mind. Col. i. 21 ; ix6p6s avdpamos, a man that is hostile, a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28 ; 6 ix^P°^i ^^^ hostile one (well known to you), i. e. Kar i^oxnv the devil, the most bitter enemy of the divine government : Lk. x. 19, cf. Mt. xiii. 39 (and eccl. writ.). 6 ix6pds (and ix^pos) sub- stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst., is trans, in A. V., exc. twice (R. V. once) foe : eaxaros €xdp6s, 1 Co. XV. 26] : w. gen. of the pers. to whom one is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq. ; x. 36 ; xiii. 25 ; Lk. i. [71], 74 ; vi. 27, 35; xLx. 27, 43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in the words of Ps. cix. (ex.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44 ; Mk. xii. 36 ; Lk. xx. 43 ; Acts ii. 35 ; 1 Co. xv. 25 [LTjr. ; al. om. gen. (see above)]; Heb. i. 13; x. 13. w. gen. of the thing: Acts .xiii. 10; tov aravpov toO XpioToC, who o-iven up to their evil passions evade the obligations imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.* «XiSva, -rjs, fj, a viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hdt., Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.) ; yevvrjpaTa exiSxmi' offspring of vipers {anguiyenae, Ovid, metam. 3,531), addressed to cunning, maUgnant, wicked men : Mt. iii. 7 ; xii. 34 ; xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7.* t'xu ; fut. e|a) ; impf. «'xov, [1 pers. plur. eixapev, 2 Jn. exio 266 ^X^ 5 T Tr AVH], 3 pers. pliir. (txi^v QTk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH ; Rev. jx. 8 L T Tr WH ; but cf. ISopli. Lex., Intr. p. 38 ; Td/. Proleg. p. 123; WII. App. p. IGo];' B. 40 (35)) and e'ixoTav (L T Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24 ; but cf. Bttm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491 ; sec his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); \_Sopli. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Td/. Proleg. p. 124; IK//. App. p. 1G5; cf. SoXiom]) ; pres. mid. ptcp. c}(on€vos; to have, — with 2 aor. act. iv, sc. ti, having a cov- ering hanging down from the head, i. e. having the head covered [B. § 130, 5 ; W. § 47, k. cf. 594 (552)], 1 Co. xi. 4 ; Saipaxas, Rev. ix. 1 7 ; fidxcupav, .In. xviii. 10 ; add, Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mk. .xiv. 3 ; of a tree having (bearing) leaves, "Mk. xi. 13 ; eV -yaorpi €xm>, sc. tfifipvov, to be pregnant [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. 144 (120)], (see yaarijp, 2). Metaph. iv lavrio «x^*^ ^^ aTroKpipa, 2 Co. i. 9: ttjv fiapTvpiav, 1 Jn. v. 10 : ev KapSia f x"" Tivd, to have (carry) one in one's heart, to love one constantly, Phil. i. 7. c. trop. to hare (hold) possession o/"the mind ; said of alarm, agitating emotions, etc. : eix^" '"'^'■"5 rpo/ios k. ?K(7ru(7ir, Mk. .xvi. 8 (Job xsi. 6 ; Is. xiii. >S, and often in prof, auth. ; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1294 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 8]). d. to hold fast, keep : fj fiva o'ov. ^v f'^oc dnoKei- fuvqv iv (TovSapia, Lk. xix. 20 ; trop. tov dcov ex^'" *'" (TTiyvdxTfi, Ro. i. 28 ; to keep in mind, ray cvroXds, Jn. xiv. 21 (see ivroXtj, sub fin.) ; rrjv p-aprvpiav, Rev. vi. 9 ; xii. 17 ; xix. 10 ; to pvoTTjpiov rrjs TriaTiQjs €v Kadapa fjvvei- brjaft, 1 Tim. iii. 9; vnorvTrcoaiv vytaivofToiv Xoytov^ '2 lim. i. 13. e. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com- prise, involve : epyov, Jas. i. 4 ; ii. 1 7 ; «dXao-ii', 1 Jn. iv. 18 ; p.i(i6aTToboalav, Heb. .\. 35 (Sap. viii. IG). See exx. fr. (irk. auth. iu Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 8 and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aeslimo, to re- gard, consider, hold as, [but this sense is still denied by Meyer, on Lk. as below ; Mt. xiv. 5] : rivd w. ace. of the predicate, e^f M^ Traprirqfievov, have me excused, Lk. xiv. 18 ; Tii/a o)s nporpijTrjif, Mt. xiv, 5 ; xxi. 26, {fx^i-v ^lavvrjv k- lap^pjji/ ois Sfov's, Ev. Xicod. 5) ; rtvii €VTip.ov (sec firripos), Phil. ii. 29 ; ttjv ^vxi]v pov [G om. pov^ Tipiav epavrw. Acts XX. 24 R G ; nva eis Ttpoi^rj-rqv (a Hebraism [see tis, B. II. 3 c. y. fin.]), for a prophet, :Mt. xxi. 46 L T Tr WH, cf. B. § 131, 7 ; Tivd, OTi ovTtos [T Tr WH ovrms, on etc.] Trpo- <^^T7)s ?!/, Mk. xi. 32, cf. B. § 151, 1 a.; [W. § 66, 5 a.]. 2. to hare i. q. to own, possess ; a. external things such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils, goods, food, etc. : as tok /3iw, Lk. xxi. 4 : 1 Jn. iii. 1 7 ; KTTjpara, Mt. xix. 22 ; Mk. x. 22 : 6rioavp6v. INIt. .xix. 21; Mk. X. 21 ; dyadd, Lk. xii. 19 ; Trpoiiara, Lk. .xv. 4; Jn. x. 16 ; hpaxpds, Lk. XV. 8; jrXoia, Rev. xviii. 19; KKrjpovopiav, Eph. V. 5 ; [cf. Mt. x.xi. 38 LT TrWH, where R G kotu- '], to be destitute, be poor, Mt. xiii. 12 ; xxv. 29 ; Mk. iv. 25 ; Lk. viii. 18 ; xi.x. 26 ; 1 Co. .xi. 22; 2 Co. viii. 12, (Neli. viii. 10 ; 1 Esdr. Lx. 51, 54 ; Sir. xiii. 5 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1295'' ; [L. and S. s. v. A, I. 1 ; cf. W. 594 (552)]) ; «V tov cx^'"» '" proportion to your means [see «, II. 13 fin.], 2 Co. viii. 11. b. Under the head of possession belongs the phrase ex^m Tivd as com- monly used of those joined to any one by the bonds of nature, blood, marriage, friendship, duty, law, compact, and the like : noTepa, Jn, viii. 41 ; d8e\[Xoi>, Lk. .xi. 5 ; naiBaywyois, 1 Co. iv. 15 ; ex*'" <'^piov, to have (be subject to) a master. Col. iv. 1 ; Seo-jrori)», 1 Tim. vi. 2 ; /Sao-iXta, Jn. xix. 15 ; with ((fi' iavToiv added. Rev. ix. 11 ; ex*' ''''"' "pivovTa avTov, Jn. .xii. 48; exeiv otKovopotf, Lk. xvi, 1 ; 8ov\ov, Lk, xvii, 7 ; dpx'e/Je'a, Heb, iv, 14 ; viii. 1 ; Troipeva^ ^It, is., 36 ; exoif i'TT epavritv aTpa- rtojTaf, Lk. ^ii, 8 : e'xet»' tov vlov k. tov iraT^pa, to be in living union with the Son (Christ) and the Father by faith, knowledge, profession, 1 Jn, ii. 23 ; (v. 12) ; 2 Jn. 9. With two accusatives, one of which serves as a predicate : naTtpa tov 'A^padp, Abraham for our father, Mt. iii. 9 ; add, Act^ .xiii, 5 ; Phil, iii, 17; Heb, xii, 9 ; ex^tv Tiva yvvdlKa, to have (use) a woman (unlawfully) as a wife, Mt. xiv, 4 ; Mk, vi. 18 ; 1 Co. v. 1 [where see Jleyer], (of lawfid marriage, Xen. C}t. 1,5,4). c. of attend- ance or companionship: exetv rti/a /iefl" (avTov, Jlt. XV. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7; Jn. xii. 8. d. exeiK Ti to /iare athing in readiness, have at hand, have in store : ovk exoM*" *' MT ferre apTovs, Mt. xiv. 1 7 ; add, xv. 34 ; Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.] ; iv. 1 1 ; xii. 35 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; xiv. 26 ; OVK ex©, 6 napadrja-u) avra, Lk. xi. 6 ; ttoO owd^o> Tovs KopTTovs pov, Lk. xil. 1 7 ; Ti' (cf. B. § 139, 58) (f>dyo)ot, 'Slk. viii. 1 s(|. ; exeiK Tivd, to have one at hand, be able to make use of : MeoiVe'a k. t. Trpo^rjTas, Lk. xvi. 29 ; napd- K\r)Tov, 1 Jn. ii. 1 : pdprvpas, Heb. .xii. 1 ; ovSiva cx'^ etc. Phil. ii. 20 ; uvdpwirov, Iva etc. Jn. v. 7. e. a person or thing is said exeif those things which are its parts or are members of his body : as x"pa5> I'oSaf, oi^Bakpovs, Mt. -xviii. 8 sq. ; Mk. ix. 43, 45,47 ; ovs, Rev. ii. 7, 11, etc. ; 2.Ta, Mt. xi. 15 ; Mk. vii. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; viii. 18; /le'X?;, Ro. xii. 4 ; 1 Co. xii. 12; adpKa k. ooTta, Lk. xxiv. 39 ; aKpoffvoTiav, Acts xi. 3 ; an animal is said exeii» head, horns, wings, etc. : Rev. iv. 7 sq. ; v. 6 ; viii, 9 ; i.\. 8 sqq, ; xii, 3, etc, ; a house, city, or wall, exeiv 6epe\iovs, Heb. .xi. 10 ; Rev. xxi. 14 ; crTaoiv. Heb. ix. 8 ; [add eViOToX^i' txovirav (R G Trepie'x-) tov tvitov ToiiTov, Acts xxiii. 25]. f. one is said to have the dis- eases or other ills with which he is affected or af- flicted: pda-Tiyas, Mk. iii. 10 ; do6(veiat, Acts .xxviii. 9; wounds, Rev. xiii. 14 ; SXitj/iv, Jn. xvi. 33 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; ex." 267 '^X" Ke V. ii. 1 0. Here belong the expressions Saiixiviov c'xel^', to be possessed by a demon, Mt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. o'-i ; viii. 27 ; Jn. vii. 20 ; viii. 48 sq. 52 ; x. 20 ; BeeXfe/SoOX, ilk. iii. 22 ; irveviia aKaOaprov, Mk. iii. 30; vii. 25; Lk. iv. 33; Acts viii. 7 ; irveiiia novrjpov, Acts xLx. 13 ; jrvevfia dcrdf- veias, i. e. a demon causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 11 ; nvfiifia SXaKov, Mk. is. 17; Xeyemra, Mk. v. 15. g. one is said to hace intellectual or spiritual faculties, endow- ments, virtues, sensations, desires, emotions, affections, faults, defects, etc. : uo^iav, Kev. .xvii. 9; yvacnv. 1 Co. viii. 1, 10; ^fapitxixaTa, Ro. xii. G ; Ttpo- 6l3oi', 1 Tim. V. 20 ; xupQ"; Philem. 7 [Rec." x^f"! > ^ Jn. 4 [WH txt. xap'!']; Xi/Tnjv, Jn. xvi. 21 ; 2 Co. ii. 3 ; Phil. ii. 27 ; iTnOujiiav, Phil. i. 23 ; imiroOiav, Ro. xv. 23 ; fivftav TivoSt 1 Th. iii. 6. (rvveldTja-iv KaXrjv, dyadfjVy djrpoaKOTTov. Acts xxiv. 16; 1 Tim. i. 19 ; 1 Pet. iii. 16 ; Heb. xiii. 18 ; trvvei^-qo-iv apapTiv, Heb. x, 2 ; dyvititriav Geov, 1 Co. XV. 34 ; dcrdeveiav, Heb. vii. 28 ; apaprUiv, Jn. ix. 41; XV. 22, etc. h. of age and time: rjXiKiav, mature years (A. V. to ie of age), Ja. ix. 21, 23; eVrj, to have (completed) years, be years old, Jn. viii. 57 ; with €v Tivi added : in a state or contUtion, Jn. v. 5 [W. 256 (240) note 3; B. § 147, 11]; in a place, rea-a-apas rjfiepas iv rm fivrjiielm, Jn. xi. 1 7 ; beginning or end, or both, Heb. vii. 3 ; Jlk. iii. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 37 [see rfKos, 1 a.]. i. e^^tv Ti is said of opportunities, benefits, advantages, conveniences, which one enjoys or can make use of: (3d5oE yrji, Mt. xiii. 5 ; yrjv ttoXKtjv, Mk. iv. 5 ; iKpdSa, Lk. viii. 6 ; KMpov, Gal. vi. 10; Heb. >'.. 15 ; Rev. .xii. 12; i^ovaiav, see c^ovcrla, ])assim ; flprjvrjv 8id rivos, Ro. v. 1 (where we must read e'xopifv, not [with T Tr WH L mrg. (cf. WH. Intr. § 404)] €xa>p.fv) ; iXevBepiav, Gal. ii. 4 ; nvevpa deov, 1 Co. vii. 40 ; nvev/ia Xpujrov, Ro. viii. 9 ; vovv XpicTTov, 1 Co. ii. 16 ; ^arjv, Jn. v. 40 ; x. 10; xx. 31 ; t^i» fmiji', 1 Jn. V. 12; (ayfjv ataviov, Mt. xLx. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36 [cf. W. 266 (249)] ; v. 24, 39 ; vi.40,47, 54 ; 1 Jn. v. 13 ; tVayyeXi'at, 2 Co. vii. 1 ; Heb. vii. 6 ; fjnaSov, Mt. v. 46 ; vi. 1 ; 1 Co. ix. 1 7 ; Tu cuTfuxaTa, the things which we have asked, 1 Jn. v. 15 ; eirmvov, Ro. xiii. Z ; Tifirjv, Jn. iv. 44; Heb. iii. 3 ; \6yov aol.as, a reputation for wisdom. Col. ii. 23 [see \6yos, 1. 5 fin.] ; Kapirov, Ro. i. IC ; vi. 21 S(]. ; xdpiv, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. AVH txt. xapdii] ; XdpKTpxi, 1 Co. vii. 7; npoa-ayoyyTjv, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12; hviiiTav °'"' ^^^- thou hast this (which is praiseworthy [cf. W. 595 (553)]) that etc. Rev. ii. 6 ; iv ip.oi ovk tx^i ovBe'v, hath nothing in me which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ, er hat mir nicJits an), Jn. xiv. 30 ; o ia-riv . . . aa^lidTov exov dSo'x, a sabbath-day's journey distant (for the distance is something which the distant place has, as it were), Acts i. 12; cf. Kypke ad loc. o. €x-. dvr-, an-, iv-, en-, Kar-, per-, Trap-, tTfpi-, irpo-, 7rpo [RGL; x.xii. 18 TrWH]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12, 14, 21. p. (as OTOV, aa. until, till (the time when) : foil, by the indie, Jn. i.\. 18; foil, by the subj. (without av), Lk. xiii. 8 ; xv. 8 [RGLT]; after a negation, Lk. .xxii. 16, 18 [RGLT]. pp. as long as, whilst (Cant. i. 12), foil, by the indie, pres., Jit. v. 25 (see lixpi, 1 d. tin.). c. before adverbs of time (rarely so in tlie earlier and moi-e elegant writ., as (as o-^L Thuc. 3, 108; [cf . W. § 54, G fin.; B. 320 (275)]) : tws upri, up to this time, until now [Vig. ed. Herm. p. 388], Jit. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v. 1 7 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. 9 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 3 ; viii. 7 ; xv. 6 ; ems noTc, how long? Mt. xvii. 17; Jlk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41 ; Jn. X. 24; Rev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (.xiii.) 2sq.; 2 S. ii. 26; 1 JIacc. vi. 22) ; eoir a-rjpepov, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. ace. to a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, enq)loyed of the local terminus ad (jiiera, unto, as far as, crcn to; a. like a Ijrcp., with a gen. of jilace [W. § 54, (i ; B. 319 (274)] : (as a8ov, (as ToO ovpavoii, Mt. xi. 23 ; Lk. x. 1 5 ; add, Mt. xxiv. 31; .xxvi. 58; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk.ii.15; iv. 29 ; Acts i. 8; xi. 19, 22; xvii. 15 ; .x.\iii. 23 ; 2 Co. .xii. 2; with gen. of pers., to the place where one is : Lk. iv. 42 ; Acts ix. 38, ((as 'Xnep^oplav, Ael. V. h. 3, 18). b. with ad- verbs of place [W. and B. as in c. above] : (as ova, Jn. ii. 7; ctijj (aa, Jlk. xiv. 54; tws Kara, Jit. xxvii. 51 ; Jlk. XV. 38 ; 6ms- l>&(, Lk. xxiii. 5 [cf. W. § 66, 1 c.]. c. with prepositions : ccds (^a rris 7ro\(as, Acts xxi. 5 ; 6cof (Is, Lk. .xxiv. 50 [RGL mrg., but L txt. T TrWH eojf npos as far as to (Polyb. 3, 82, 6 ; 12, 1 7, 4 ; Gen. xxxviii. 1)]; Polyb. 1, 11, 14; Ael. v. h. 12, 22. 3. of the limit (terminus) of quantity; with an adv. of number: tas (nraKis, Jit. xviii. 21 ; with numerals: Jit. Z,K 269 ^aca xxii. 26 («ojf tS>v kviTo) ; cf. xx. 8 ; Jn. viii. 9 (Rec.) ; Actsviii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; ovk lariv ewr eVoj, there is not so mucli as one, Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1. 4. of tlie limit of measurement: ea>s fj^ia-ovs, Ilk. vi. 23 ; Esth. V. 3, 6 Alex. 5. of the end or limit in acting and suffering: etaj tovtov, Ul. xxii. 51 [see Ha, 2]; fmr Toi Sfpia-fiov, Mt. xiii. 30 LTr WHtxt. ; ems davdrov, even to death, so that I ahnost die, Mk. xiv. 34 ; Jit. xxvi. 38, (Sir. iv. 28; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 13; xxxvii. 2; 4 Mace. xiv. 19). [Z, I, on its substitution for o- see 2, «r, s.] ZoPouXmv, o, indecl., ([iSai [but on the Hebr. form see B. D.] habitation, dwelling, Gen. xxx. 20), Vulg. Zabu- lon; Zebulun, the tenth son of Jacob; by melon, the tribe of Zebulun : Mt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.* ZaKxatos, -ov, 6. ("3? pure, innocent ; cf. 2 Esdr. id. 9 ; Neh. vii. 14), Zaccliceus, a chief tax-collector : Lk. xix. 2, 5, 8. [B. D. s. v.]- Zapd, 6, (nit a rising (of hght)), indecl., Zarah [better ZeraK], one of the ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 3 ; cf. Gen. xxxviii. 30.* Zaxaptas, -ov, 6, (n'")3! and in'i3i i. e. whom Jehovah remembered), Zacharias or Zackarloh or Zechai-iah ; 1. a priest, tlie father of John the Baptist : Lk. i. 5, 12 sq. 18, 21, 40, 59, 67; iii. 2. 2. a prophet, the son of Jehoiada the priest, who was stoned to death in the mid. of the ix. cent, before Christ in the court of the temple: 2 Chr. xxiv. 19 sqq. ; Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 51. Yet this Zachariah is called in JNlt. 1. c. the sou not of Jehoiada but of Burachiah. But most interpreters now think (and correctly) that the Evangelist confounded him with that more noted Zachariah tlio prophet who lived a little after the exile, and was the son of Bara- chiali (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose prophecies have a place in tlie canon. For Christ, to prove tliat the Israelites throughout their sacred history had been stained with the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first and the last example of the murders committed on good men; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew canon. But opinions dififer about this Zachariah: For according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek church follows (and whicli has been adopted by Chr. W. ]\Iiillcr in tlie Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq., and formerly by Hilr/eiifel'L krit. Untersuchungen iib. die Evangg. Justins, etc., p. 155 and die Evangg. nach Uirer Entstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the Baptist is meant (cf. Protev. Jac. c. 23) ; others think (so r".it: recently Keim, iii. 184 [Eng. trans, v. 218], cf. Weiss, uas Matthiiusevang. p. 499) a certain Zachariah son of Baruch (ace. to another reading Bapta-Koiov), who during ^he war between the Jews and the Romans was slain by the zealots «V /ieVoj tm iepui, as Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 4 relates. Those who Iiold this opinion believe, either that Jesus divinely predicted this murder and in the prophetic style said i^ovfia-are for (poveiKrerf [cf. B. § 13 7, 4 ; "W. 273 (256) n. ; § 40, 5 b.], or that the Evange- list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an anachronism put this murder into the discourse of Jesus. These inventions are fully refuted by Frilzsclie on Mt. 1. c, and Bleek, Erkliir. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p. 177 sqq. ; cf. Hilgenfeld, Einl. in d. N. T. p. 487 sq. ; [and Dr. James Morison, Com. on ]Mt., 1. c. ; B. D. s. v. Zech- ariah 6 and s. v. Zacharias 11].* ?d, fin.) ; (^v ex veKpaiv, trop. out of moral death to enter upon a new life, dedicated and acceptable to God, Ro. vi. 13 ; [similarly in Lk. xv. 32 T Tr WH]. i. q. not to be mortal, Ileb. vii. 8 (where Svdpanot dnodvri Sia toi/ Trartpa, Jn. vi. 57 ; by the gift and power of Christ it is shared in by the faith- ful, who accordingly are said fr/o-fii' Bi airov, Jn. vi. 57; Si' avTov, 1 Jn. iv. 9. with a d.at. denoting the respect, nvfipari, 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; ovopa fx^'^ °''' Cv' *"" "fpof ^ '' thou art said to have life (i. e. vigorous spiritual life bringing forth good fruit) and (yet) thou art dead (etliically), Rev. iii. 1. In the O. T. f^>/ denotes to live most happily in the enjoyment of the theocratic blessings : Lev. xviii. 5 ; Deut. iv. 1 ; viii. 1 ; xxx. 16. 3. to live i. e. pass life, of the manner of living and acting ; of morals or char- acter : pfTi'i livSpas with ace. of time, of a married woman, Lk. ii. 31) ; x'^P" ""t^""' w'ithout recognition of the law, Ro. vii. 9 ; «Ivipio-aiof , ^Vcts .xxvi. 5 ; also ev Kutrp-at, Col. ii. 20 ; with itr and a dat. indicating the act or state of the soul: fv TiicTfi, Gal. ii. 20; ev ttj afiapria, to devote life to sin, Uo. vi. 2 ; with adverbs expressing the manner : eia-ffias, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. ii. 12; dtraiTas, I^k. xv. 13; e6i/iKws, (!al. ii. 14; dhiKas, Sap. xiv. 28; fjJK tiw (dat. of pers., a phrase com. in Grk. auth. also, In Lat. vivere alicui; ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 176 sqq.), to devote, consecrate, life to one; so to live that life results in benefit to some one or to his cause : tw dea, Lk. xx. 38; Ro. vi. 10 sq. ; Gal. ii. 19, (4 Mace. xvi. 25); t^ Xpia-Ta, 2 Co. V. 15; that man is said eavrw ^ijv who makes his own will his law, is his own m.aster, Ro. xiv. 7; 2 Co. V. 15; w. dat. of tlie thing to which life is de- voted : TTJ btKatoo-vvri, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; TrvevfiaTi, to be actu- ated by the Spirit, Gal. v. 25 ; Kara p (av, D'D □"'n (Gen. xxvi. 1 9 ; Lev. xiv. 5 ; etc.), living irnler, i. e. bubbling uj), gushing forth, flowing, with the suggested idea of refreshment and salubrity (opp. to the water of cisterns and pools, [cf. our spring ivater']), is figuratively used of tlie spirit and truth of God as satisfying the needs and desires of the soul: Jn. iv. 10 sq. ; vii. 38; e'n-i fuo-nt jr?)yuf iSuTuv, Rev. vii. 1 7 Rec. b. having vital potcer in itself and exerting the same upon the soul : fXTTis C\i.i, see (T^evvvpt and s. v. 2, en. Aiof, (dat. Aa). ace. Aia (or Ai'ai/), (fr. old nom. Ai'c), Zeus, corresponding to Lat. Jupiter (A. V.) : Acts xiv. 12 (see Alt); 6 iepfvs tov Aios toC ovtos irpo T^s TToXemy, the priest of Zeus whose temple was be- fore the city, ibid. 13 (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. See Ai's.* tia; to hoil with heat, be hot; often in Grk. writ.; thus of water, Horn. L. 18, 340; 21, 362 (3G.J) ; metaph. used of ' boiling ' anger, love, zeal for what is good or bad, etc. (Tragg., Plat., Plut., al.) : ^eav (on this uncon- tracted form cf. Blt?n. Ausf. Spr. [or his School Gram. (Robinson's trans.)] § 105 Jf. 2. i. p. 481 ; Matthiae i. p. 151 ; [Iladley § 371 b.]) ra nvevnan, fen'ent in spirit, said of zeal for what is good. Acts xviii. 25 ; Ro. xii. 1 1 ; cf. esp. Riickert and Fritzsche on Ro. 1. c* ^T|X€v; i. q. fv^om, q. v.; 1. to enri/, be jealous: Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [c. 19, 2 p. 56, 34 Didot] ov^eis rav t ayaSov to avSp(Ji>7nvov ^rjrovvroiv (f)6ovei fj fijXeijei Trore. 2. in a good sense, to imilalt: emulous!//, striae after: epya apeTrjs, ov \6yovs, Democr. ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf. ; intrans. to be full of zeal for r/ood, be zealous: Rev. iii. 19 LTTr txt. WH, for Rec. IfjKaxTov [cf. WH. App. p. 171].» IfjXos, -ov, o, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L T Tr WH ; [2 Co. be. 2 T Tr WH]) t6 f^Xor (Ignat. ad Trail. 4; Sia f^Xos, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [" in Clem. Rom. §§ 3, 4, 5, 6 the masc. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any law " (Lghtft.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2 Hilfienfeld (1876) p. 7; cf. WH. App. p. 158 ; W. § 9, N. 2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. feu [Curtius §567; Vanioek p. 757]); Sept. for nSJP; excitement of mind, ardor, fervor of spirit ; 1. zeal, ardor in embracing, pursuing, de- fending anything : 2 Co. vii. 11 ; ix. 2 ; Kara f^Xor, as re- spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6 ; with gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of for a pers. or thing, Jn. ii. 17 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10 ; Ro. x. 2, (1 Mace. ii. 58 ; Soph. O. C. 943) ; incp twos, gen. of pers., 2 Co. vii. 7; Col. iv. 13 Rec. with subject, gen. fijXoj 6eov, with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and soUcitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2 ; the fierceness of indignation, punitive zeal, wvpos (of penal fire, which is personified [see nvp, fin.]), Heb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11; Sap. V. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry, jealousy : Ro. xiii. 13 ; 1 Co. iii. 3 ; Jas. iii. 14, 16 ; cVXij- trdriaav ^r)\ov, Acts v. 17; xiii. 45 ; plur. ^Xot, now the stirrings or motions of f^^or, now its outbursts and man- ifestations : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20 ; but in both pass. L T Tr [WH, yet in Gal. 1. c. WH only in txt.] have adopted f^Xos (^Xoi re rai (j)d6vot. Plat. legg. 3 p. 679 c.). [On the distinction between fi^Xos (which mav be used - in a good sense) and (^^okoj (used only in a bad sense) cf. Trench, Syn. § xxvi. ; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, U, 1 (Sto Kal iJTLfiKiS ifTTiv 6 ^rf\os Kai iiTieiKav, to 6e doV€iv v avrjKovrav els (xa>rqplav, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 1). b. to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend- ing for a thing, [zealous /or] : vopiov. Acts xxi. 20 (2 Mace. iv. 2) ; twv TraTpiKuiv napadoafcov. Gal. i. 14 (t&jv alyv7rTiaKQ>v Tr'Saapdrcov, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 19 ; rrjs dp)^aias k. iTa}(f>povos dyoiyrjs, Diod. excerpt, p. 611 [fr. I. 37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers. : 6eov, intent on protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend- ing for the Mosaic law, Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth. also on emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)* !;T)(ita, -as. fi, damage, toss, [Soph., Hdt. down] : Acts ^i)fiioa> 272 fnyo? xxvii. 10, 21 ; riyetirSai (tjfilav (Xen. mem. 2, 4, 3 ; rivd, ace. of pers., 2, 3, 2), W, to regard a thing as a loss : Phil, iii. 7 (opp. to Kf p8os), 8.* );i))iidu. -o> : ((rj/jiia), to affect with damage, do damar/e to : Tiva ([Thiic], Xen., Plat.) ; in the N. T. only in Pass., flit. (rifiio>6i'j, al. ; but " as often"] ill prut. aiUh. [fut. mid.] fi;/iiMcro/iat in ])ass. sense; cf. I^rii^er § 39, 11 Anm. ; Kiiliner on Xen. mem. u. s. ; [L. and S. s. v. ; Veiteh s. v.]) ; 1 aor. « frj/jtu- £rjv ; absol. to sustain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss : 1 Co. iii. 15 ; eu rivi t< tivos, in a thing from one, 2 Co. vii. 9 ; with ace. of the thing : (one from whom another is taken away [as a ijcnalty] by death, is said tijx ^vxr)v Ttxof (rjiiiova-dai., lldt. 7, 39), ttjv ypvx'l" airov, to forfeit his life, i.e. ace. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 2(j ; Mk. viii. 36, for wliich Luke, in i.\. 2.5, iavrov i. e. him- self, by i)ein:r shut out from the everlasting kingdom of God. Ttavra e'f^/iiw^i/i', reflexive [yet see Meyer], 1 for- feited, gave u[) all things, I decided to suffer the loss of all these [(?)] things, Pliil. iii. 8.* Ziivds [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15 ; W. § 16 N. 1], -av, [B. 20 (18)], d, Zcnas, at first a teacher of tlie Jewish law, afterwards a Christian : Tit. iii. 13. [B.D. s. v.] * 5t)Tt'ii), -c5 ; impf. 3 ]iors. sing, f^qrei, plur. f^ijTovv; fut. .fr;rf), Col. iii. 1 ; f\prjvj)v, 1 Pet. iii. 11 ; a(j>0api)v k- nvnrjtf, Acts xvii. 25 ; nveiipa ^oirjs (k Toii 6(oii, the vital spirit, the breath of (i. e. imparting) life. Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek. xxxvii. 5); jrao-a ^Inixh fw^f. gen. of possess., eve;-// livin(j soul. Rev. xvi. 3 G L T Tr txt. WII ; spoken of earthly life : tj fo)^ Ttvos, Lk. xii. 15 ; Acts viii. 33 (see alpa. 3 h.) ; Jas. iv. 14 ; iv tij ^arj aov, whilst thou wast livin" on earth, Lk. xvi. 25 (ev rfi ^wfj avrov. Sir. xxx. 5; 1. 1); ev Tfi ^(jutj TavTTj, 1 Co. XV. 19; Trdaai al ripipai Tr\s ^co^? rivos, 18 Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. cxxvii. (cxxviii.) 5; Sir. xxii. 12 (10)). iirayyeXia ia>rjs rrjs vvv K. ttjs pcXKovarfs, a promise looking to the present and the future hfe, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; (a?! and ddvaros are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; Phil. i. 20 ; of a life preserved in the midst of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the life of Paul is meant here, which e.xerts a saving power on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic duties) ; of the hfe of persons raised from the dead ; iv KaivoTrjn ((arjs, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life, dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4 ; of the life of Jesus after liis resurrection, Acts ii. 28; Ro. v. 10; of the same, with the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through him both to the hypostatic \6yos and to Christ in whom the Xdyof put on human nature : oifrntp 6 Trartjp e)(ei ((ofju iv eavra, ovtws e^tiiKtv Koi tw vt&j ftoi^i^ ^X^'*' ^'^ iavrw, Jn. v. 26 ; iv avTW (sc. Toi Xoyto) ^coij ijv kul tj ^oiTj rjv to <^ws tqiv dv6pa>TTu>v, in him life was (comprehended), and the hfe (transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the light (i. e. the intelligence) of men (because the life of men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence springs up), Jn. i. 4; 6 Xdyos rrfs fm^s-, the Logos having life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 Jn. i. 1 ; ij fmij ifpavepadrj, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh, ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth that life which is next to be defined : viz. b. life real and genuine, " vita quae sola vita nominanda " (Cic. de sen. 21, 77), a life active and vigorous, devoted to God, blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their trust in Christ, but after the resurrection lo he consummated by new accessions {among them a more perfect body), and to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated the conception, in their way, by employing □"!! to de- note a happy life and every kind of blessing : Deut. xxx. 15,19; Mal.ii.5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35 ; xii. 28, etc.) : Jn. vi. 51, 63 ; xiv. 6 ; Ro. vii. 10; viii. 6, 10; 2 Co. ii. 16 ; Phil. ii. 16 ; [Col. ui. 4] ; 2 Pet. i. 3 ; 1 Jn. v. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of toO deov, sup- plied by God [W. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; ij iv Xpitrrai, to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 ; p€Ta^efir)Kivm ix tov Bavdrov els ^arjv, Jn. v. 24 ; 1 Jn. iii. 14; o\j/ei>s rijs (. the light illumined by which one arrives at life, .In. viii. 12. more fully (afj alavios and fj ((OTj f) aiwvtos [(cf. B. 90 (79)); see below] : Jn. iv. 36 ; [xii. 50] ; xvii. 3 ; 1 Jn. i. 2 ; ii. 25 ; [pi'ipara (arjs alav. Jn. vi. 68] ; fir fo»;!» al. unto the attainment of eter- nal life [cf. (Is. B. II. 3 c. 8. p. 185»], Jn. iv. 14 ; vi. 27 ; 8i8nvai (ariv al, Jn. X. 28; xvii. 2; 1 Jn. v. 11 ; f^^iv C<^fjv (II., Jn. iii. 15, [and 10], (opp. to aTroXXuo-^ai), 36 ; v. 24, fw/ 274 fojOTTOte» 39; vi. 40, 47, 54; xx. SlLbr. ; l.Tn. v. 13; ouk txetw iafiv al cv iavTa, 1 Jn. iii. 15; (in Enoch xv. 4, 6 the wicked an;;cls arc said before their fall to have been spiritual and partakers of eternal and immortal life), fmi) and ij fuij, without epithet, are used of the blessing of real life after the resurrection, in Mt. vii. 14; Jn. xi. 25 ; Acts iii. 15; v. 20; xi. 18; Ro. v. 17, 18 (on which see StKaiacris, fin.); 2 Co. v. 4; Col. iii. 3; 2 Tim. i. 10; Tit. i. 2; iii. 7; ^aiq (k vfKpiiiv, life breaking forth from the abode of the dead, Ko. xi. 15; elaiXBeiv els T. fa^i', Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45; avd- rrraais fu^r i. q. eir foiji' (2 Mace. vii. 14), Jn. v. 29 (on the gen. cf. W. 188 (K7)) ; arecpavos rrji fm^r i. (j. 17 fw^j ill vvv(t ; f ut. (oxra; 1 aor. mid. impv. fwo-m; to gird: rivd, Jn. x.xi. 18; Mid. to gird one's self: Acts xii. 8 L T Tr WH. (Ex. x.xix. 9; Horn, et al.) [CoMP. : dva-, Sia-, nept-, ^wo-yoveu, -to ; f ut. ^a)oyovr](T03 ', pres. inf. pass, ^taoyovtl- aBm: (fr. fwoydvos viviparous, and this fr. fmdf and TENQ) ; 1. Jirop. to bring forth alive ('Jlieophr., Diod., Lcian., Plut., al.). 2. to give life (Theophr. de cans. pi. 4, 15, 4 ; Ath. 7 p. 298 c.) : to Trdvra, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 LTTr WII, [(1 S. ii. 6)]. 3. in the Bible to preserve alive : rfiv \ffvx']'', Lk. xvii. 33 ; pass. Acts vii. 19. (Forn;nn, Ex. i. 17; Judg. viii. 19; [I S. xxvii. 9, 11; 1 K. xxi'. (XX.) 31].)* Juov [or fcoof (so L WH uniformly, Trcg. in lleli. and Rev.; see Etym. Magn. 413, 24, and reff. s. v. I, t)],-ou, Tu, (foJos alive) ; 1. a living being. 2. an atiiiiial, brute, beast: Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10; Rev. iv. 6-9 [on vs. 8 cf. B. 130 (114)], etc. [Syn. : (uov differs from Briplov (at least otymologi- cally ; but cf. Schmidt as below) in giving prominence to the vital element, while e^ipiov emphasizes the bestial element. Hence in Rev. as above (. is fitly rendered living creature in contradistinction to the Briptov beast, cf. xi. 7 ; xiii. 1 , etc. See Trench § Ixxxi. ; Sclimidt ii. ch. 70.] ^uo^irou'u, -S) ; f nt. foioiroi^CTO) ; 1 aor. inf. ^acmoirjaai ', Pass., ))res. ^airrroiovpai : I fut. ((noiroirjOrjO-opai ; 1 aor. ptcp. fcijon-oiij^fij ; (fojoTToids making alive); 1. to produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot., Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give life : TO ndvTa, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 R G [cf. Neh. ix. 6 ; 2 K. V. 7 ; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.] ; by spiritual power to arouse and invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; to give fwij alwuwr (in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63; of tlie dead, to re- animate, restore to life : 1 Co. xv. 45 ; nvd, Jn. v. 21 ; Ro. iv. 1 7 ; viii. 11 ; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22 ; i. q. to give increase of life: thus of physical life, irparov to naiSiov pfkiri, flra yaXaxTi fmoTroieirai, Barn. ep. c. 6, 1 7 ; of the spirit, fmoTTotij^fis nveipLOTi, quickened as respects the spirit, endued with new and greater powers of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18, on which cf. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitalter, p. 182 ed. 2; \^Zezschwitz, De Christi ad inferos de- scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 20]. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7) of seeds (piickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing up, growing : 1 Co. xv. 36. [CoMP. : o-u-fwoTrow'a.] ' 275 H if, a disjunctive conjunction [cf. W. § 53,6]. Used 1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu- tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the place of the other: or (Lat. aul, vel); a. to distin- guish one thing from another in words of the same con- struction : Mt. V. 17 (tod vofiov rj roiis TtpocfiriTas), 30 (XevKrjv fj iieXmvav) ; vi. 31; vii. IG; Ilk. vi. 50; vii. 11 sq. ; Lk. ii. 24 ; ix. 25 ; Jn. vii. 48 ; xiii. 29 ; Acts i. 7 ; lii. 12 ; iv. 7 ; Ro. i. 21 ; iii. 1 ; 1 Co. iv. 3 ; v. 10 sq. ; x. 19 ; Gal. i. 10, etc. b. after an interrogative or a de- clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove the same thing in another way : Mt. vii. 4, 9 ; xii. 29 ; xvi. 26 ; xxvi. 53 ; ilk. viii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 4 ; xiv. 31 ; xv. 8 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; xiv. 10 ; 1 Co. vi. 16. c. before a sen- tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand : Mt. XX. 15 (i. e. o>; if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye etc.) ; Ro. iii. 29 ; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; x. 22 ; xi. 14 [Rec] ; xiv. 36 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; ^ ayvoeire etc., Ro. vi. 3 ; vii. 1 (cf . vi. 14) ; 5 ovK. olhare etc., Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Co. vi. 9, 16, 19. d. Tj .. .i], either. . . or, Mt. vi. 24 ; xii. 33 ; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts xxiv. 20 sq. ; 1 Co. xiv. 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques- tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrwn ; a. pre- ceded by 7ToT€pov, Jn. vii. 17; cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 574 sq. ; preceded by the interrog. fir). 1 Co. ix. 8 ; preceded by /iijTi, 2 Co. i. 1 7. b. without an interrog. particle in the first member of the interrogation : ri ea-ri ei/toTrm- T£pov, flnfw ... 5 clvfiv, Mt. is. 5 ; Mk. ii. 9 ; Lk. v. 23 ; add, Mt. xxi. 25 ; xxiii. 1 7, 1 9 ; xxvii. 17; Mk. iii. 4 ; Lk. vii. 19 ; Acts viii. 34. c. ff . . . ^ . . . ^, Mk. xiii. 35. 3. as a comparative conj., than ; a. after compara- tives : Mt. X. 15 ; xi. 22; Lk. is. 13; xvi.l7; Jn.iii. 19; iv. 1 [Trmrg. cm. WH br. if] ; Acts iv. 19 ; Ro. xiii. II, and often. ^ is wanting after nXeiovs foU. by a noun of number: Mt. xxvi. 53 T Tr WH ; Acts iv. 22; xxiii. 13, 21 ; xxiv. 11 (where Rec. adds fj) ; cf. Matthiae § 455 note 4 ; Kuhner u. p. 847 ; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1] ; W. 595 (554) ; [B. 168 (146)] ; Lob. ad PhrjTi. p. 410 sq. bi after irepov : Acts xvii. 21. c. Trpiv jj, before that, before, foil, by ace. with inf. [cf. B. § 139, 35 ; W. § 44, 6, also p. 297(279)]: Mt.i.l8; 3ilk.xiv.30; Actsii. 20 RG WH mrg. ; vii. 2 ; foil, by the aor. subjunc, Lk. ii. 26 Tr txt. om. WH br. ij; xxii. 34 R G [al. ?««] ; foil, by pres. optat. Acts XXV. 16. a. after 6tka> i. q. to prefer: 1 Co. xiv. 1 9 (foil, by ijnfp, 2 Mace. xiv. 42) ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq. ; W. § 35, 2 c. ; [B. § 149, 7] ; Kiihner ii. p. 841 ; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 3]. e. after oi: Jn. xiii. 10 R G, where after ov \peiav e^ft the sentence goes on as though the writer had said oIk oKXov Tivbs xpfax 'x^'i [cf- ^- ^08 (4 73)]. f. after ryyefiaiv positive notions, to which in this way a comparative force is given : after Ka\6v iari \)l is good . . . rather than] i. q. it is better, Mt. .xviii. 8 sq. ; Jlk. ix. 43, 45, 47 ; cf. Menander's saving koXov to prj (,rjv, 5 Cn" ad\iais, and Plaut. rud. 4, 4, 70 tacita mulier est bona semper, quam loquens ; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. ,xlix. 12 ; Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 8 ; Jon. iv. 3, 8 ; Tob. vi. 13 ; xii. 8 ; .Sir. XX. 25 ; xxii. 15 ; 4 Mace. Ix. 1 ; also after Xvo-treXci [it is gain . . . rather than] i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. C), Lk. xvii. 2 ; after }^apa eerrat [there will be Joy . . . more than'\, Lk. XV. 7 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bttm. Gram. § 149, 7 ; [B. p. 360 (309)] ; Winer, Kiihner, al., as above. 4; with other particles; a. oAX' 17, see dXXa. I. 10 p. 28'. b. fj yap, see yap, I. fin. c. f/ Kal [cf. W. § 53, 6 note], a. or even, or also, (Lat. aut eliam, vel etiam) : [ilt. vii. 10 LTTrWH]; Lk. xi. 11 G L T Tr WH, 12 ; xviii. 11 ; Ro. ii. 1 5 ; 1 Co. .xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 13. p. or also (Lat. an etiam), (in a disjunctive question) : Lk. xii. 41 ; Ro. iv. 9. d. ^rrep, than at all (Lat. (juam forte ; Germ. als etica), after a compar. [cf. Jelf § 779 Obs. 5] : Jn. xii. 43 [L J) irep, AVHmrg. vntp], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Hom., Hes.). e. ^Toi ■■■!}, either indeed [cf. Kiihner § 540, 5] . . . or: Ro. vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19 ; Hdt. and sqq.). r\^i\v, assuredly, most certainly, full surely, (a particle used in asseverations, promises, oaths [cf. W. § 53, 7 b. ; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 38 sq.]) : Heb. vi. 14 R G ; see «', in. 9. (Sept. ; very often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down.) * ■i]-y€iiov€vcD ; (^yf/imv) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; a. to be leader, to lead the icay. b. to rule, command : with gen. of a province [cf. B. 169 (147)], to be governor of a prov- ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2 ; of a procurator, Lk. iii. 1.* ii-y£(iovCa, -as, i), (^yepav), [Ildt., Thuc, Plat., al.], chief command, rule, sovereignty : of the reign of a Ro- man emperor, Lk. iii. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 18, 4, 2.* •i].ye|nJv, -ovos, 6, (^y/o/iai), in class. Grk. a word of very various signification : a leader of any kind, a guide, ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover- eign ; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ' legatus Caesaris,' an officer administering a province in the name and with the authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov- ince: Mt. X. 18; Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12 ; 1 Pet. ii. 14. 2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses ; Luth. Landpfeger), an officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor and had charge of the imperial revenues ; in causes re- lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called eViVpoTTor, SiotKTjTTis, in prof. auth.). In the smaller provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of the province ; and such was the relation of the procu- fjyeofiai 276 1]KCi) rator of Judsea to the proconsul of SjTia (cf. Krehs, Observv. p. 61 sqq. ; Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 432 sqq. ; TlVn. IIWB. s. v. Procuratoren ; Sicff'ert in Ilerzog 2 s. V. LandpUeger; Kreiilc! in ScLenkel iv. 7; [BB. DD. s. V. Procurator]) ; so of Pilate, Felix, Festus: Mt. xsvii. 2, 11, 14 sq. 21, 23 [R G LTrmrg.], 27;- xxviii. 14 ; Lk. XX. 20 ; Acts xxiii. 24, 2G, 33 ; xxiv. 1, 10 ; xxvi. 30 ; IltXaror 6 t^j 'louSamr ^■yfju!»', Joseph, antt. 18, 3, 1 ; (Tacit, ann. 15, 44 Christus Tiberio inijieritante per procuratorem Pontium Pilatum supplicio adfcctus crat). 3. Jir.it, leading, chief: so of a principal town as the capital of the region, Mt. ii. 6, where the meaning i?, ' Thou art by no means least among the chief cities of Judah;' others less aptly (Bleek also [(where?); in his (posthumous) Synopt. Erkliirung etc. i. 119 he repudiates this interp. (ascribed by him to Hof- mann, Weiss, u. Erfiill. ii. 56)]), 'Thou shall by no means be regarded as least among i. e. by the princes, the nobles, of the state.' The saying is taken fr. ilic. v. 2 (1), whore the Ilebr. '^SxS (which the Sept. give cor- rectly, €'v ;(iXid<7i) seems to have been read 'a'^N? by the Evangelist [cf. Kder^hcim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 206].* i^'y€'o|iai, -oO/iat ; pf. i\yrj^ai ', 1 aor. Tfyrja-dfirjv ', (f r. ayo) [cf. Curtius p. 688]); dep. mid.; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to lead, i. e. a. to go before ; b. to be a leader ; to rule, command ; to have authority over : in the N. T. so only in the pres. ptcp. ryyolfuvos, n prince, of regal power (Ezek. xliii. 7 for ^S-p ; Sir. xvii. 1 7), Mt. ii. 6 ; a (royal) governor, riceroij. Acts vii. 10; chief, Lk. xxii. 26 (opp. to 6 hioKovwv) ; leading as respects influence, controlling in counsel, Iv rto-i, among any. Acts xv. 22 ; with gen. of the pers. over whom one rules, so of the overseers or leaders of Christian churches: Heb. xiii. 7, 17, 24, (oiKov, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; tmi' irarpiav, 1 Esdr. V. 65 (66), 67,(68); r^j n-oXeus, Judg. ix. 51 Alex.; a military leader, 1 Mace. ix. 30 ; 2 ilacc. xiv. IC; used also in Grk. writ, of any kind of a leader, chief, com- mander. Soph. Phil. .386; often in Polyb. ; Diod. 1, 4 and 72 ; Lcian. Alex. 44 ; al.) ; with gen. of the thing, roii Xo'you, the leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman : Acts xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also toC Xo'you fjyffiav in Jambhch. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. duco) i. q. to consider, deem, account, think: with two ace, one of the obj., the other of the pred.. Acts xxvi. 2 ; Phil. ii. 3, 6 (on which see ipjrayiios, 2 [W. § 44, 3 c.]) ; iii. 7 [cf. B. 59 (51) ; W. 274 (258)] ; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1 ; Ileb. X. 29; xi. 11, 26 ; 2 Pet. i. 13; ii. 13; iii. 9, 15. two ois rtva, 2 Th. iii. 15 [cf. W. § 65, 1 a.] ; rwa vrrfpeKTrepta- o-ojt, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. v. 13 (Trepi jroXXoO, Ildt. 2, 115 ; vtpl TrXei'oTou, Thuc. 2, .89) : w. ace. of the thing foil, by Srav, Jas. i. 2 ; dvayKoiov, foil, by an inf., 2 Co. ix. 5; Phil. ii. 25 ; SUaiov, foil, by an inf., 2 Pet. i. 1 3 ; foil, by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii. 8. [Comp. : Si-, cV 8i-, f^, vpo^iofuu.* Stx. : SoKc'd) 1, fiyeonai 2, fo/il^a 2, ofo^ai: riy. and »0/1. denote a belief restins, -oc, (ijSur and oaiirf), sweet-smelling (Plin. jucunde olens) ; neut. to 1)8. as subst. garden-mint (i. q. nivBt], Strab. 8, 3, 14 p. 344 ; Theophr. hist, plant. 7, 7 ; cf. cans, plant. 6, 22 (20)), a kind of small odoriferous herb, with which the Jews used to strew the floors of their houses and synagogues ; (it was called by them xn:"*:, see Buxtorf Lex. talm. s. v. p. 1228 [p. 623 ed. Fischer]) : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. [BB.DD.] • Vjflos, -f OS (-our), TO, (akin to c^os, j)rob. fr. EQ, whence rip.ai, e^a, [cf. Vanicek p. 379]) ; 1. a customary abode, dwelling-place, haunt, customary state, (Horn., lies., Hdt., al.). 2. custom, usage, (cf. Germ. Sitzen, Sine) ; plur. to ^dr) morals, character, (Lat. mores) : 1 Co. XV. 33 fr. Menander ; cf. Menand. fragm. ed. Meineke p. 75. (Sir. XX. 26 (25) ; 4 Mace. i. 29 ; ii. 7, 21.) • t|'k(i) ; impf. T]Kov (Acts xxviii. 23, where L T Tr WII ^X^oi-) ; fut. jjla ; 1 aor. r,^a (Lk. xiii. 35 R G ; Rev. ii. 25 ; iii. 9 Rec.) ; pf. ^ra (often in Sept., as Gen. xiii. 7, 9; xiv. 16; [xlvii. 4] ; Josh. Lx. 12 (7) ; Job xvi. 22, etc. ; in the N. T. once, Mk. viii. 3 R" L T Tr txt., see WH. App. p. 169; the older and more elegant writ. [Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc, al.] use only the pres. impf. and fut. : cf. Lob. ad Phrvn. p. 743 sq. ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 205 ; [Veitch s. v.] ; W. 87 (83) ; [B. 59 (51)]) ; Sept. for Si3; to have come, have arrived, be present, [W. 274 (258) ; B. 203 (176)] ; hence impf. with force of plupf. (cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1136 ; Kruger § 53, 1, 4) : absoL of persons, Mt. xxiv. 50; Mk. viii. 3 ; Lk. xii. 46; xv. 27; Jn. viii. 42 ; Heb. x. 7, 9, 37 ; 1 Jn. v. 20 ; Rev. ii. 25 ; iii. 9 ; xv. 4 ; foil, by dird with gen. of place, Mt. viii. 1 1 ; Lk. xiii. 29 ; by « with gen. of place, Ro. xi. 26 ; with tjXl ■ni ijfiepa addition of ds w. ace. of place, Jn. iv. 47 ; jioKpodev, ilk. viii. 3 ; itpos riva. Acts xxviii. 23 Rec. ; metapli. to come to one i. e. seek an intimacy with one, become his fol- lower: Jn. vi. 37; tVi nva, to come upon one (une.Kpect- edly), Rev. iii. 3. of time and events : absol., Mt. xxiv. 14 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10 ; Rev. xviii. 8 ; cus av ^t) [L T \VH Tr in br. 17!«; see above and B. 231 {VJ^y] (sc. o Koipo's), ore fim/re, Lk. xiii. 35 ; eVi nva, metaph. to come upon one, of things to be endured (as evils, calami- tous times) : Mt. xxiii. 3« ; Lk. xix. 43. [Comp. : dv, Kad-rjKoi.l * TJXC (L ijXi, T fjXfi [see 117/. App. p. 1.5.5, and s. v. ei, i; on the breathing cf. Td/. Prolcg. p. 107; TI-7/. Intr. §408; WH «"Xmi]), a Hebr. word, •'7X, my God: Mt. xxvii. 40. [Cf. cKait, and the ref. there.] * 'H\t (E" 'HXi [on the breathing in codd. see Td/. Proleg. p. 107], TTrWII "HXei [see 117/. App. p. 155, and s. T. ei, i]), indecl., Hcli, the father of Joseph, the husband of Mary : Lk. iii. 23.* 'HXi'at ([so E^' "^'^ G ; WII 'HXemj cf. 117/. App. p. 155 ; Td/. Proleg. p. 84 and see ei, 1, but] LTr 'HXi'as, Tdf. 'HXei'ar, [on the breathing in codd. see Td/. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408; current edd. are not uni- form]), -ov [B. 17 (16), 8 ; but once (viz. Lk. i. 1 7 T Tr mrg. WH) -a], 0, (H^Sx or in^Ss i. e. either ' strength of Jehovah' or 'my God is Jehovah'), Elijah, a prophet born at Thisbe [but see B. D. s. v., also s. v. Tishbite], the unflinching champion of the theocracy in the reigns of the idolatrous kings Ahab and Ahaziah. He was taken up to heaven without dying, whence the Jews expected he would return just before the advent of the Messiah, whom he would prepare the minds of the Israelites to receive (1 K. xvii.-xLx. ; 2 K. ii. 6 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 12 ; Mai. iv. 4 (iii. 22) ; Sir. xlviii. 1, 4, 12 [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, App. viii.]) : Mt. xi. 14; xvi. 14; xvii. 3 sq. 10-12; xxvii. 47, 49; Mk. vi. 15; viii. 28 ; ix. 4sq. 11-13; xv. 35 sq.; Lk. i. 17; iv. 25 sq.; ix. 8, 19,30, 33, 54 [R G L] ; Jn. i. 21, 25 ; Jas. v. 1 7 ; e'l» 'HXi'a, in the narrative concerning Ehjah, Ro. xi. 2 [see ev, I. 1 d.].* ijXiKta, -ac, fj, (^Xi| mature, of full age, Horn. Od. 18, 373 [al. of the same age; cf. Ebcltng, Lex. Hom. s. v.; Pape, Lex. s. v.]) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. age, time of life; a. univ. : Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [in these pass. ' term or length of life ' : but others refer them to 2 below ; see Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. p. 4 ; Jas. Mori- son, Com. on Mt. 1. c.] cf. Trrixus, and De Wette, Meyer, Bleek on ilt. 1. c. ; Trapa . ij(K'pa, -as, 17, (fr. ^pepos, -ov, prop, rjpipa S>pa the mild time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359 ; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq. ; Vanicek p. 943]) ; Hebr. Df ; dag ; used 1. of lite natural dag, or the interval between sunrise and sun- set, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night ; a. prop, fjpepai, by day, in the daytime, [cf. colloq. Eng. of a day; W. § 30, 11 ; B. § 132, 20], Rev. xxi. 25 ; ij/ic- paf K. WKTos, day and night [cf. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob. Paralip. p. 62 sq. ; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v. 5 ; Lk. xviii. 7 ; Acts ix. 24 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; iii. 10 ; [2 Th. iii. 8 L t.xt. T Tr WH] ; 1 Tim. v. 5 ; 2 Tim. i. 3 ; Rev. iv. 8 ; vii. 15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; x.x. 10; ^pepas pia-ijs, at midday, Acts xxvi. 13 ; vvktu kqI tjpipav [W. 230 (210) ; B. § 131, 11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts .xx. 31 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 R G ; hyper- bolically i. q. without intermission, Xarpdav, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xxvi. 7 ; ripspai oSof, a day's journey, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxxi. 23 [ptaj ^qpipas 686v, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 2, 9 ; cf. W. 188 (177) ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. D.ay's Journey]) ; ras fjpipai, ace. of time [AV. and B. as above], during the days, Lk. xxi. 37; iKctvrjv t. rfp^pav, Jn. i. 39 (40); nda-av rjpepav, daily, Acts v. 42 ; ck Srjvapiov ttjv yjpepav, so some- times we say, for a shilling the dag, Mt. xx. 2 ; SaiScKci ela-tv &pai ttjs tjpepas, Jn. xi. 9 ; to the number of days are added as many nights, ilt. iv. 2; xii. 40; yiverai fipipa, day dawns, it grows Ught, Lk. iv. 42 ; vi. 13 ; xxii. 60; Acts -xii. 18; xvi. 35; .xxhi. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39, (Xen. an. 2, 2, 13 ; 7, 2, 34) ; vepmaTeiv iv t. i^pepa, Jn. xi. 9 ; i; r/pipa (palvet. Rev. ^ iii. 1 2 ; ij ijpt'pa kXIvci, the day dechnes, it is towards evening, Lk. ix. 1 2 ; xxiv. 29. b. metaph. the ' day ' is regarded as the time for abstaining from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are perpetrated at night and in darkness : 1 Th. v. 5, 8 ; hence 6 alav ovtos (see aia>v, 3) is likened to the night, aiiiiv pe'XXui' to day, and Christians are admonished to live ilecorously as though it were light, i. e. as if o alatv 6 piWcov were already come, Ro. .xiii. 12 sq. ecos ^ptpa eoTiv while it is day, i. e. while life gives one an oppor- tunity to work, Jn. ix. 4. of the light of knowledge, 2 Pet. i. 19. 2. of the civil day, or the space of twenty-four hours (thus including the night) : Mt. vi. 34 ; Mk. vi. 21 ; Lk. xiii. 14, etc. ; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv. 13; to hours, months, years. Rev. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10; 7j e'v ^pipa Tpv(f>ri, the revelling of a day, i. e. ephemeral, very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above]; ■f)fiepa 278 r) fie pa inTOKis riji ijji. seven times in the (space of a) ilav, Lk. xvii. 4; tlie tlat. 17/if'pa of tlie day on (in) icliich [cf. W. § 31, 9 ; B. § l.!3 (■>«)] : as TpiVj; ijiifpa, Mt. xvi. 21 ; Mk. ix. .■)! [Rec.] ; Lk. xvii. 29 sq. ; Acts ii. 41, etc. ; li/ie'pa k. j^liipa, day by day, every day, '2 Co. iv. lU (after the Ilebr. OVl 01' Estb. iii. 4, wbere Sept. Kad' iKaarriit rijii- pav, and Dl' DV Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. fjpipav Kaff t'lpfpav, [cf. AV. 468 (432)]); j^p/pav c^ rjpipai (see «, IV. 2), ■> Pet. ii. 8; as an ace. of time [W. 230 (215 sq.) ; B. § 131, 1 1] : 5\r)v t. ^pipav, Ko. viii. 3C ; .\. 21 ; piav rjpipav, Acts x.\i. 7; and in the plur., Jn. ii. 12; iv. 40; xi. G; Acts ix. 19; x. 48; xvi. 12; xx. G; xxi. 4, 10; XXV. G, 14; xxviii. 7, 12 [L dat.], U; Oal. i. 18; Kev. xi. 3,9. joined with Prepositions: «jTrd with gen. /com . . .forth, from . . . on, Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 53 ; Acts x. 30 ; XX. 1 8 ; Phil. i. 5 ; axpi. w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2 ; [22 Tdf.] ; ii. 29 ; xxiii. 1 ; xxvi. 22; axpi- irlvre ^ptpav, until five days had passed, i. e. after five days, Acts xx. (i ; pixpi w. gen. until, Mt. xxviii. 15 [LTr, WII in br.]; tcos w. gen. until, Mt. xxvii. G4 ; Acts i. 22 [T «xp'J ; Ko- >*'• 8 ; 8m w. gen., see fiia, A. II. ; vpo w. gen. before, Jn. xii. 1 (on which see Trpo, b.) ; iv w. dat. sing., Mt. .xxiv. 50 ; Lk. i. 59 ; Jn. v. 9 ; 1 Co. X. 8 [L T Tr WH txt. oni. eV] ; Heb. iv. 4, etc. ; cV w. dat. plur., Mt. xxvii. 40 ; Mk. xv. 20 [L T Tr om. AVII br. ev] ; Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. «V], 20, etc. ; eis, unto, (against), Jn. xii. 7 ; Kev. ix. 15 ; cTri w. ace. /or, (Germ, aicf . . . hin). Acts xiii. 31 (for many days successively) ; xvi. 18 ; xxvii. 20; Ilcb. xi. 30; Kaff npipav, daily [W. 401 (374 sq.)], Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 49 ; Lk. xvi. 19 ; xxii. 53 : Acts ii. 46 sq. ; iii. 2; xvi. 5; xLx. 9; 1 Co. xv. 31; 2 Co. xi. 28 ; Heb. vii. 27 ; x. 1 1 ; also to KaB' rjpipav, Lk. xi. 3 ; xix. 47 ; Acts xvii. 1 1 [L T Tr txt. om.AVII br. to], (Polyb. 4, 18, 2; cf. jMatthiac ii. p. 734 ; [Jelf § 45G] ; Bnhdy. p. 329 ; B. 96 (84)) ; Ka6' knaaTrfv -qpipav, every day, Heb. iii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 12) ; also Kara iraaav rjp.. Acts xvii. 17; pcTa, after, Mt. xvii. 1 ; xxvi. 2; .\xvii. G3; Mk. viii. 31 ; Lk. i. 24 ; Jn. iv. 43 ; xx. 2G ; Acts i. 5 ; xv. 36, etc. ov TrXf I'ouf elfj\v €po\ -qpipat a(^ r)9, sc. rjpepas. Acts xxiv. II. A specification of the number of days is thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were adverbially and without any grammatical connection, (cf. FritzscheonMk. p. 310sq.; W. 516 (481) and § 62, 2; [B. 139 (122)]) : ^81; fiptpai (Rec. fjpipas, by correc- tion) Tpfis, Mt.xv. 32 ; I\Ik. viii. 2 ; laa-fi ripipai oKTci, Lk. ix. 28. fjixepav Siayevopevav Tivav, certain days having intervened. Acts xxv. 13. rjpfpa and -qpfpai arc used w. the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity usually celebrated on a fixed day : tu>v a^vpav. Acts xii. 3; TTj! TTfVTfKoa-Tijs, Acts ii. 1; xx. 16; toC (7a/3/3droii, Lk. xiii. 14, 16 : Jn. .xix. 31 ; 7; Kvpiaicri rjpfpa, the Lord's day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, .Sun- d.ay therefore. Rev. i. 10; the foil, phrases also have reference to sacred or festival days : Kpiveiv rjptpav nap r)p,ipav, to exalt one day above another, and Kpiveiv rtaaav ^ptpav, to esteem every day sacred, Ro. xiv. 5; (f>pov('ii' t!]v fitiipav, to regard a partieidar day that is selected for religious services, Ro. xiv. 6 : j^pepat naparripeiaBat, to observe days. Gal. iv. 10. After the Ilebr. usage, which in reference to a definite period of time now elaj)sed speaks of a certain number of days as fulfilled or completed (see (iesenius s. v. X73), we have the phrases (TrXfjirdTjaav ai rjpipai riji XtiTovpyias, the days spent in priestly service, Lk. i. 23 (when he had been employed in sacred duties for the appointed time) ; tov TiepiTfpeiv avTov, for liim to be circumcised, Lk. ii. 21 ; TOV KaOapiapov avTly, Ro. xiii. 12; Heb. x. 25, cf. 1 Th. v. 4; (rj) y]pepa tov Kvpiov, XpLCTOv, 'Irja-oii XpiOToii, tov viov TOV avffpwnov, Lk. xvii. 24 R (; T Tr WII mrg. ; 1 Co. i. 8 ; v. 5 ; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. i. 6, 10; iTh.v. 2; 2Th.ii. 2; 2 Pet. iii. 10; >) rjpipa Kvplov rj peydXrj, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)); tJ^c/jh 1} a v'lui TOV dvBpoijTov d7roKa\vTrT€Tat, Lk. xvii. 30; tj ripipa T. 6eov, 2 Pet. iii. 12; ij fjpipa iKflvq rj peyakr] tov TravTOKpdropos. llev. xvi. 14, (even in the prnphucies of the O.T. the ilai/ if Jehovah is spoken of, in wlucb Jehovah will execute terrible judgment upon his adversaries, as Joel i. 15 ; ii. 1, 11 ; Is. ii. 12 ; xiii. 6, 9 ; Am. v. 18, 20 ; Jer. x.xvi. 10 (.\lvi. 10) ; Ezek. xiii. 5 ; xxx. 2 sqq. ; Ob. 15 ; Zeph. i. 7 sqq. ; Mai. iii. 17) ; ;; i)p. iKfivrj and fKelvr] .) nil; Mt. vii. 22 ; Lk. vi. 23 ; x. 1 2 ; x.xi. 34 ; 2 Th. i. 1 ; 2 Tim. i. 12, 18 ; iv. 8 ; >) iaxdrr) rjp., Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54 ; xi. 24; xii. 48; ^^. djroXuT/jwo-fus, Eph. iv. 30; cTria-Kom'/r (see (TTta-KoTrrj, b.), 1 Pet. ii. 12; Kplceais, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22,24; xii. 3G; Mk. vi. 11 R Lbr.; 2Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7, cf. x\cts xvii. 31 ; ttjs Kpio'fas, 1 Jn. iv. 17; opyiis k. dn-oxu- \v-\j/ea>s SiKaioKpiaiat t. 6eov, Ro. ii. 5 (D>'r"Dl', Ezek. xxii. 24 ; njn;-1S Dl', Zepb. ii. 3 S(i.; [n-)3;*-D1', Prov. .xi. 4 ; Zeph. i. 15, 18, etc.]); 1} ^/i. 1) ^eydXi; Trjs opyiji avTov, Rev. vi. 1 7 ; i;^. a^ayrji, of slaughter (of the wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(Jer. xii. 3, etc.)]. Paul, in allusion to the phrase ^pepa Kvpiov, uses the expression dvOpairlvr) i/fieTepo^ 279 r}pefj,o<; ijixipa tor a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of trial [A. V. man's judgment] (cf. the Germ. Landtaij, Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 3. 4. By a Hebraistic usage (though one not entirely unknown to Grk. writ. ; cf . ■Soph. Aj. 131, G23; Eur. Ion 720) it is used of time in general, (as the Lat. dies is sometimes) : Jn. xiv. 20 ; xvi. 23, 26; Heb. viii. 9 [cf. B. 31G (271); W. 571 (531)]; T171/ €/*'?'' VH-^h""'^ the time when I should appear among men as Jlessiah, Jn. viii. 5G ; iv t;/ r/fi. tt/ wovTjpa, in the time of troubles and assaults with which demons try Christians, Eph. vi. 13 ; jj/i. cra-njpias, the time when any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2; els i^pepav aliafos, for all time, forever (see atav, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 18; much of tener in the plur. : ^fiipai Trouripal, Eph. v. 1 6 r a(f> ijfic- pS>v dpxain^v, Acts XV. 7 ; al npuTepov ■qp.. Heb. x. 32 ; Tiacras riis j'lpepas, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20 (D'O'n-Ss, Deut. iv. 40 ; v. 2G (29), and very often ; r/para irdvra, Hom. II. S, 539 ; 12, 133 ; 13, 82G, etc.) ; al eaxa- Tai fjp.. (see ea-xaros, 1 sub fin.). Acts ii. 17; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; Jas. V. 3 ; al rjp. avrai, the present time, Acts iii. 24 ; the time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, etc.; eV Tais Tip. (Keivais (see fKe'ivos, 2 b. p. 195") ; irpu tovtoiv Trnv ijpcpaiv, Acts v. 3G : xxi. 38 ; irpar oXiyar fjp. for a short time, Heb. xii. 10; iKeva-ovrai f/p. orav etc., Mt. ix. 15 ; Mk. ii. 20 ; Lk. v. 35 ; ore etc. Lk. xvii. 22 ; ij^ova-iv rjp. em (re, Kal foil, by a fut. Lk. xix. 43 ; epxpvrai r/p., Kai foil, by fut. Heb. viii. 8 ; ehevaovrai or ep^ovTai rjp., ev ais etc., Lk. xxi. G; xxiii. 29. with a gen. of the thing done or to happen: rrjs dtToypaa>vTJi, Kev. X. 7 ; r^r aapKos avroij. of his earthly life, Heb. v. 7. al rip. with the gen. of a pers., ont's time, one's days, i. e. in which he lived, or held office : Mt. ii. 1 ; xi. 12 ; xxiii. 30 ; xxiv. 37 ; Lk. i. 5 ; iv. 25 ; xvii. 26, 28 ; Acts vii. 45; xiii. 41 : 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xxvi. 1 ; 1 S. xvii. 10 ; 2 S. xxi. 1 ; 1 K.x. 21 : Esth. i. 1 ; Sir. xliv. 7 ; .xlvi. 7; Tob. i. 2; 1 Mace. xiv. 36, etc.) ; al rjpepat tov vloii Toil dvdp. the time immediately preceding the return of Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. .xvii. 2G ; piav tS)v r)p. tov vl. T. dvdp. a single da}- of that most blessed future time when, all hostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign, Lk. xvii. 22. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists ■who imitate them measure the duration and length also of human I ife by the number of days : n-ao-of toi ^pepas [L mrg. Tr mrg. WII dat.] ttjs (airjs [G L T Tr WH om.] ^pmv, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq. ; Judith X. 3 : Tob. i. 2 (3) ; Sir. xxii. 12 ; xxx. 32 (24) ; 1 Mace. i.K. 71); 7rpo/3f/3r;Koit ev Tals ripepais avToii, far advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36 (D'P'3 S3, [Sept. ■Kpofi. ripepaiv or rjpipaii]. Gen. xviii. 1 1 ; xxiv. 1 ; Josh, xiii. 1 ; [xxiii. 1 ; 1 K. i. 1 ; see irpo^aiva, fin.']) ; dpxh ripepaiv, beginning of lite, Heb. vii. 3 (ai eo-p^arai -qpepai riKos, one's last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. c. 1); fipipai dyada'i, 1 Pct. iii. 10. ijpLCTepas, -epa, -epov, (fjpe'is), possess, pron. of the 1 pers. plur., [fr. Horn, down], our : with a subst., Acts ii. 11; .xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. .xv. 4; [1 Co. xv. 31 Rec." '"] ; 2 Tim. iv. 15 ; 1 Jn. i. 3 ; ii. 2 ; 01 riperepoi, substantively, 'our people,' (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14. [Xeut. TO fipeTepov, substantively: Lk. xvi. 12 WH txt. Cf.^W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. § 127, 19 sqq.] * T) (i^v, see rj. ■i]|ii9avT|s, -es, (fr. ijpt half, and 6ptjctku>, 2 aor. e6avov), half dead : Lk. x. 30. ([Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, G2; Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. 11]; a!.)' TJ'uKTus, -fia, -v\ gen. riplaovs (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex. x.xv. 9 ; etc.], for the uncontr. form i^piaeoi which is more com. in the earher and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Ildt. down]) ; neut. plur. rfpiar), Lk. xix. 8 R G, a form in use from Theophr. down, for the earlier rfpiaea adojjted by Lchm. (cf. Passow [also L. and S.] s. v. ; W. § 9, 2 d. ; ripia-eia in T Tr [^fiiVia WH] seems due to a corruption of the copyists, see Sleph. Thes. iv. p. 1 70 ; Btlm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 248; Alex. Btlm. in Stud. u. Krit. for 18G2, p. 194 sq. ; [N. T. Gram. 14 (13) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 118; but esj). WH. App. p. 1 58]) ; Sept. for n'Vnp, much oftener 'Sn ; h a If; it takes the gender and number of the annexed substantive (where to rjpta-v might have been expected) : Ta rjpia-Tj Twv vnapx^vTuiv, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk. writ, say 6 rjpio-vs tov fiiov, ol ijpia'eis tu>v imteaiv, see Passow s. V. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2 ; Kiihner § 405, 5 c] ; raj fjpi^okiov, etc.), half an hour : Rev. viii. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133 ; Geop. ; al. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * ijviKa, a rel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom. down], at which time ; when : foil, by the indie, pres., of a tiling that actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 R G ; foil, by av with subj. pres., whensoever: ibid. L T Tr WH ; foil, by av and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., at length lohen (tchensoever it shall have etc.) : 2 Co. iii. IG ; Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr. see W. 296 (278) sq. ; 308 (289) ; B. § 139, 33.] • TJirep, see i}', 4 d. TJirios, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently derived fr. enos, elite'iv, so that it prop, means affahle [so Etyra. Magn. 434, 20 ; but cf. Vanicek p. 32]) ; fr. Horn, down ; miild, gentle : 1 Th. ii. 7 (where L WH vfjinos, q. v. fin.) ; npos nva, 2 Tim. ii. 24.* "Hp, Lchm. "Hp [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], (li^ watchful, fr. 11^' to be awake), Er, one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.* Tjpefios, -ov, quiet, tranquil : ^pepov k. rfavxtov ^lo», 1 Tim. ii. 2. (Lcian. trag. 207 ; Eustath., Hesych. ; com- 'HpcoSir; 280 HpcoBldif jiarat. r)peii(arepoi, fr. an unused ripeiiTjt, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, (>3 ; more com. in the earlier Grk. writ, is the adv. ^pipa. [Cf. W. § 11 fin. ; B. 28 (24).]) • • 'Hppoi>ovvT(s, Joseph, antt. 14, 15, 10): Mi. xxii. IG; Mk. iii. G; xii. 13. Cf. Keim, Jcsu von Naz. iii. 130 sqq. [Eng. trans, v. p. 15fi sq.], and in Schenkel iii. 65 sqq. ; [cf. B. D. s. v. ; Edcrsheim, Index s. v.].* 'HpuSiis [WH 'HpahiAi, see 'HpuSi/r and I, t], -uSot, rj, II: rnrliv, see fJTTwv.^ ijoTJxdJa; 1 aor. i^crvxacra; {7Jcrv)(os [i. q. i;oTj;(to9]) ; as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, lo keep quiet, i. e. a. to rest, to cease from labor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead a quiet life, said of those who are not running hither and thither, but stay at home and mind their business : 1 Th. iv. 11. c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold one's peace: Lk. xiv. 4 (3) ; Acts xi. 18; xxi. 14, (Job xxxii. 7 ; ^(rvxacrav Kal ovx fvpotrav \6yov, Neh. v. 8).* [SYN.^(7ux°Cf '"> " 'y^f, IT tairav: ria. describes a quiet condition in the genera], inclusive of silence ; aiy. de- scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially in speechlessness (silence from fear, frrief, awe, etc.) ; atuir., the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence from speech, esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i. ch. 9.) ijo-ux'*> "Of; ^1 (fi"- tl^6 adj. 7)(rux'or, q. v.; the fern, e.x- presses the general notion [W. 95 (90)], cf. ahia, aperrj. f'x^pa, etc.), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. quietness : descrip- tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of others, 2 Th. iii. 1 2. 2. silence : Acts xxii. 2 ; 1 Tim. ii. 1 1 sq.* ijo-uxios, -a, -ov, [(perh. akin to ^^ai to sit, Lat. se(/a(us ; cf. Cuitius § 5G8 ; Vanicek p. 77)]; fr. Hom. down; quiet, tranquil : 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; ;3iOs, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 13, 16, 1.* tjtoi, see rj, 4 e. TJTTOw : {rJTTuiv) ; to make less, inferior, to overcome (the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph, antt. 12, 7, 1 [other e.xx. in Veitch s. v.]) ; Pass, ^rrdo/iai, fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down ; pf. rj-rrrnxai ; 1 aor. ^TTrjSrjv {ria-aoiOrjv, 2 Co. xii. 13 LTTrWH; in opp. to which form cf. Fritzsche, De conform. N. T. crit. quam Lchm. ed. p. 32 [yet see Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ad fid. cod. Tat. p. xc. ; WH. App. p. 166 ; B.' 59 (52) ; Veitch s. v.]) ; lo he made inferior ; to he overcome, worsted : in war, utto tivos, 2Macc. X. 24; univ., rm [cf. B. 168 (147); W. 219 (206)], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one, 2 Pet. ii. 19; absol. ib. 20. t'i imp nva, i. q. ijrrov ej( etc., from its tossinr/; cf. Vanicck, ]). .'503]; Sept. for □"), [fr. Ilom. down], the sea; [on its distinc- tion from niXayos see the latter word] ; a. univ. : iMt. .\.\iii. 1.5; Mk. .\i. 23; Lk. .wii. 2, 6; xxi. 20; Ro. ix. 27; 2 Co. xi. 26 ; Heb. xi. 12 ; Jas. i. 6 ; Jude 13 ; Rev. vii. 1—3, etc. ; ipya(((r6ai r!]V SaK. (see c'pya^o/xat, 2 a.), Rev. xviii. 17; to niXayos xi/s 6a\. (see ireXayos, a.), Mt. xviii. 6 ; joined with yij and oipayos it forms a periph- rasis for the whole world. Acts iv. 24 ; xiv. 15 ; Rev. v. 13; X. 6 [LWIIbr.]; .\iv. 7, (Ilagg. ii. 7; Ps. cxlv. (cxlvi.) 6; Joseph, antt. 4, 3, 2; [c. Ap. 2, 10, 1]); among the visions of the Apocalypse a i/la.isi/ sea or sea of (jlass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not (juite clear : Rev. iv. 6 ; xv. 2. b. spec, used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115) ; B. § 124, 8b.] of the Mediterranean Sea: Actsx. 6, 32; xvii. 14; of the Red Sea (see ipvBpoi), tj ipvdpa 6aK.. Acts vii. 36 ; 1 Co. X. 1 sq. ; Ilcb. xi. 29. By a usage foreign to native Ork. writ. [cf. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351', 8 i} in-o Tov KavKaaov 'KipiVTj r^v KoKovoiv ol eKfl ^aXarrai/, and Ilesych. defines Xlpunj : ;) 6d\a(Tcra koi 6 wKfni/df] em- ployed like tlie Hebr. D' [e. g. Num. xxxiv. 11], by i\It. j\lk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the L ake of rtwijcra- ptT (q. v.) : r/ 6u\. Tris TaXiXaiar, Mt. iv. 18 ; xv. 29 ; Mk. i. 16 ; vii. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is called mare. Sueliicnm, the Suabian Sea); r^r Ti|3fpid8os, Jn. xxi. 1 ; r^t TaXiX. t^s Ti3fpiu8ot (on which twofold gen. cf. W. § .iO, .-! N. 3; [B. 400 (343)]), Jn. vi. 1 ; more frequently simply 7) BoKaaca : Mt. iv. 15, 18 ; viii. 24, 26 sip 32; xiii. 1, etc.; Mk. ii. 13; iii. 7; iv. 1, 39; v. 13, etc. ; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25 ; xxi. 7. Cf. Furrer in Schen- kcl ii. 322 sqq. ; [see TevvrjcrapfT]. SdXiroj; 1. prop, to warm, keep warm, (Lat./bi-co) : Horn, et sqq. 2. like the Lat. foveo, i. q. to cherish ■with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29; 1 Th. ii. 7 ; ([Theocr. 14, 38]; Alciphr. 2, 4; Antonin. 5, 1).* 6dvaT0i; 0a|xop [Treg. Ga/id/j], J7, (inn [i. e. palm-tree]), Ta- mar, ])rop. name of a. woman, the daughter-in-law of Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. xxxviii. 6) : jNIt. i. 3.- ea|ipiu, -S}\ Pass.j impf. fdafijioifiriii; 1 aor. iSapf-irjdrjii ; (fti/Li/ior. q. v.); 1. to he astonished: Acts ix. Rec. ( Horn., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify : 2 S. xxii. 5 ; pass, to be amazed : Mk. i. 27 ; x. 32 ; foil, by cVi w. dat. of the thing, Mk. x. 24 ; to be frightened, 1 Mace, vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Pint. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp. : 6d|x|3os [allied with rdffios amazement, fr. a Sanskrit root signifying to render immoimhle; Curtius § 233; Vanieek p. 1130], -ovs, to; fr. Horn, down; amazement: Lk. iv. 36; v. 9; Acts iii. 10.* flavacri(i.os. -oi'. (6aveiv, Bavaros), deadly: Mk. .xvi. 18. ([Acsrhyl.]. Soijh., Eur., Plat., stjq.) * 6ovaTTr)-(j)dpos, -ov, {BavaTos and (pipa), deatJi-hringinij, deadli/ : Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22 ; Job xxxiii. 23 ; 4 jMacc. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl., Plat., Arist., Diod., Xen., Plut., al.) * Oavaros. -ov, o, (Bave'iv) ; Sept. for niO and T\n, also for 151 pestilence [W. 29 note] ; (one of the nouns often anarthrous, cf. W. § 19, 1 s. v.; [B. § 124, 8 c.]; Grimm, Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop, the death of the hodij, i. e. that separation (whether natural or \ iolent) of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. ahov] (on this see i>hiv) ; Phil. ii. 27, 30 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; ix. 15 sq. ; Rev. ix. 6 ; xviii. 8 ; opp. to fm^, Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 20 ; with the implieil idea of future misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21 ; 2 Tim. i. 10; Ileb. ii. 14 sq. ; i. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12. Since tlie nether world, the abode of the dead, was con- ceived of as being very dark, xa>pa Ka\ ayjj.ivoi cis Bdvarov, that has received a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 3 ; wXr;y^ Bavarov, a deadly wound [dcalh-slroke, of. W. § 34, o b.]. Rev. xiii. 3, 12; «Sets' Bdi/aTov, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26 ; Heb. xi. 5 ; also ycvca-But Bavdrov [see yeva, 2], Mt. xvi. 28 ; Jlk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 ; SwKeiv riva axpi Bavdrov, e\ en to de- struction, Acts xxii. 4 ; KaraKpiveiv Tiva Bavdra, to con- demn one to death (ad mortem daiinian , Tacit.), Mt. xx. ,18 [here Tdf. els Bdv.^; Mk. x. 33, (see «aTaxpiVm, a.); TTopeifcrBai fis Bdv. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 33 ; irapa- 8iSo'i/at Tiva els Bdv. that he may be put to death, Mt. X. 21 ; Mk. xiii. 12 ; pass, to be given over to the peril of death, 2 Co. iv. 11 ; n-apaS. els Kpl/ia Bamrov, Lk. xxiv. 20; an-oKTelvai riva ev BavuTia (a Hebraism [cf. B. 184 (159 sq.)]), Rev. ii. 23; vi.'s, [cf. W. 29 note]; alrla Bavdrov (see alrla, 2), Acts xiii. 28; x.xviii. 18; a^iov n Bavdrov, some crime worthy of the penalty of death, Acts xxiii. 29 ; xxv. 11, 25 ; [xxvi. 31] ; Lk. x.\iii. 15, 22 [here ainov (q. v. 2 b.) Bav.^ ; ei'o;(05 davdrov, worthy of punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. G6; Mk. xiv. l;4; Bavdra TeXevTaTui, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xv. 4 ; Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 1 7 Sept. (Hebr. n3V jlio) ; cf. W. § 44 fin. N. 3 ; [B. u. s.] ; Bdv. aravpov, Phil. ii. 8 ; jToi'o) Bavdrai, by what kind of death, Jn. xii. 33 ; xviii. 32; xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to his power and confining them in his dark dominions : Ro. vi. 9; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54, 56; Rev. xxi. 4; Hades is associated with him as his partner : 1 Co. .xv. 55 R G ; Rev. i. 18 (on which see xXtij); vi. 8; xx. 13, [14'], (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5 ; cxiv. (cxvi.) 3 ; Hos. xiii. 14 ; Sir. xiv. 12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone is worthy of the name, i. e. the. misery of soul arising from sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the death of the body. 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, 6 ^los fiiiav o\os (iWo ovhev rjv el fifj Bdvaros [cf. Philo, |)raem. et poenis § 12, and reff. in 4 below]) ; opp. to rj fmij, Ro. vii. 10, 13 ; 2 Co. ii. 16 ; opp. to o-iiiTJ)pla, 2 Co. vii. 10; i. q. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; a-a^eiv V'^X')" ^" bavdrov, Jas. v. 20 ; jieTafiefir^Kevai eV toC Bavdrov els t. •^air]v, Jn. V. 24 ; 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; fievetv ev tu> Bavdra, 1 Ju. iii. 14 ; Beiopeiv Bdvarov, Jn. viii. 51 ; yeveaBai Bavdrov, 52 (see 1 above) ; djiaprla and afiaprdveiv trpos Bdvarov (see aiiapria, 2 b.), 1 Jn. v. 16 sq. (in tlie rabbin, writers nn^ San — after Num. xviii. 22, Sept. dfiapTia Bavar-q- cni> ; 1 aor. inf. Bavaraaai, [3 pers. plur. subjunc. Bavaruiawat, Mt. xxvi. 59 R G] ; Pass., [pres. Bavarovfiai^ ; 1 aor. iBavarutBr^v ; (fr. Bdva- ros) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for iron, J"in, etc. 1. prop, to put to death : nvd, Mt. x. 21 ; xxvi. 59 ; xxvii. 1 ; Mk. xiii. 12; .xiv. 55 ; Lk. xxi. 16 ; 2 Co. vi. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; pass., by rhetorical hyperbole, to be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro. viii. 36. 2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy, render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifico [A. V. mortifi/']: ri, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass, with dat. of the thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything [lit. to he made dead in relation to; cf. W. 210 (197) ; B. 178 (155)]: Ro. vii. 4.* OttTTTw : 1 aor. eBa^a ; 2 aor. pass, erdcfirjv ; f r. Horn, down; Sept. for tiP; to bury, inter, [BB.DD. s. v. Bur- ial ; cf. Becker, Charicles, sc. ix. Excurs. p. 390 sq.] : Tivd, Mt. viii. 21 sq. ; xiv. 1 2 ; Lk. ix. 59 sq. ; xvi. 22 ; Acts ii. 29 ; v. 6, 9 sq. ; 1 Co. xv. 4. [CoMP. : a-vv-Bdirrai.']* edpo [WH eapd], 6, (rr^n a journey, or a lialt on a journey [al. 'loiterer']), indecl. prop, name, Terah, the father of Abraham : Lk. iii. 34.* flappe'u (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and earlier Attic 5apo-«'a)),-(B; 1 aor. inf. flapp^crai ; [fr. Horn, on] ; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, confident : 2 Co. V. 6, 8 ; Heb. xiii. G ; to be bold : rij nerroiBri(Tet, with the confidence, 2 Co. x. 2 ; ctr rtva, towards (against) one, 2 Co. X. 1 ; ev Tivi, the ground of my confidence is in one, 1 am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii. 16. [Syn. see ToXiido).^ * Oapo-e'o), -a ; (see Bappta) ; to he of good courage, be of good cheer ; in the X. T. only in the impv. : Bdpa^et, Lk. viii. 48 R G; Mt. i.x. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49 ; Acts xxiii. 11, (Sept. for Xrn-'7S, Gen. xxxv. 1 7, etc.) ; Bapeelre. ilt. xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for ?Xl-n-'7X, Ex. xiv. 13 ; Joel ii. 22, etc.). [Syn. see ToXpAa.l * 8dp{. (davfia^ov, fut. ^aK^utrofiai (Rev. xvii. 8 R GT Tr, :v form far more com. in the best Grk. writ. also than flau/i.io-u; cf. Kruger §40 s.v. ; Kiihner §343 s. V. ; [Veitcli s. v.]) ; 1 aor. iBavfiaaa ; 1 aor. pass. i6av- fjidcrdriv in a mid. sense (Rev. xiii. 3 R" L Tr txt.) ; also 1 fut. i)ass., in the sense of the mid., 6aviiaa6i]aoixai (Rev. xvii. 8 L AVII ; but the very few exx. of the mid. use in prof. auth. are doubtful ; cf. Stephanus, Thesaur. iv. p. 259 sq. ; [yet see Veitch s. v.]) ; to wonder, wonder at, marvel: absol., Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec, 33; xv. 31 ; xxi. 20 ; xxii. 22 ; xxvii. 14 ; 3Ik. v. 20 ; vi. 51 [Rec. ; L br. Tr mrg. br.] ; xv. 5 ; Lk. i. 21 [see below], G3 ; viii. 25 ; xi. 14 ; xxiv. 41 ; Jn. v. 20; vii. 15 ; Acts ii. 7 ; iv. 13 ; xiii. 41 ; Rev. xvii. 7 sq. ; with ace. of the pers. Lk. vii. 9 ; with ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. "\VII reject the vs. (see Trpds, I. 1 a. init. and 2 b.)] ; Jn. v. 28 ; Acts vii. 31 ; 6aviui fiiya (see davjia, 2), Rev. xvii. 6 ; jrpoo-ojTToi', to admire, pay regard to, one's external appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16 (Sept. for D'J3 K:yj, Deut. x. 1 7 ; Job xiii. 10; Prov. xviii. 5 ; Is. ix.' 14, etc.) ; foil, by hia rt, jMk. vi. 6 ; Jn. vii. 21 where Sm toDto (omitted by Tdf.) is to be joined to vs. 21 [so G L Tr mrg. ; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc. ; AV. § 7, 3], (Isoer. p. 52 d.; Ael. v. h. 12, 6; 14, 36) ; [foil, by iv w. dat. of object, ace. to the eonstr. adopted by some in Lk. i. 21 iOavfi. iv tm ^povl^dv avTov, at his tarry- ing; cf. W. §33, b.; B. 204 (227); 185 (IGOsq.); Sir. xi. 19 (21); evang. Thorn. 15, 2; but see above]; foil. by iiri w. dat. of pers. Jlk. xii. 1 7 [R G L Tr] ; by cVi w. dat. of the thing, Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22 ; ix. 43 ; xx. 26; [Acts iii. 12], (Xen., Plat., Thue., al. ; Sept.) ; nepi nvoi, Lk. ii. 18 ; by a pregnant eonstr. [cf. B. 185 (161)] iSav/j-acrev Tj yfi oTTiVm ToO Bripiov. followed the beast in wonder. Rev. xiii. 3 [cf. B. 59 (52)]; foil, by on, to marvel that, etc., Lk. xi. 38 ; Jn. iii. 7 ; iv. 27 ; Gal. i. 6 ; by et (see ei, I. 4), Mk. XV. 44 ; 1 Jn. iii. 13. Pass, to be ivondercd at, to b'e had in admiration, (Sir. xxxviii. 3 ; Sap. viii. 1 1 ; 4 ^Macc. xviii. 3), foil, by iv w. dat. of the pers. whose lot and condition gives matter for wondering at another, 2 Th. i. 10; iv with dat. of the thing. Is. Ixi. 6. [CoMP. : «- flaii^iufa).] * 6au|iourios, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (6aviJ.a), [fr. lies., Horn. (h. Merc. 443) down], wonderful, mar- vellous; neut. plur. flau/xatrta (Sept. often for niN^2J, also for ahs), ivotulirful deeds, wonders: Mt. xxi. 15. [Cf. Trench §xci.]" 8ou(nion, view atlenliveli/, contemplate, (in Grk. writ, often used of public shows; cf. 6ia, Biafia, 6ia- Tpov, 6eiirpl^u>, etc. [see below]) : xi, Mt. xi. 7 ; Lk. vii. 24 ; Jn. iv. 35 ; xi. 45 ; of .august things and persons that are looked on with admiration : tI, Jn. i. 14, 32 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36) ; nva, with a ptcp., Mk. xvi. 14 : Acts i. 1 1 ; foil, by on, 1 Jn. iv. 14 ; 6(a6Tivai vn-o TWOS, Mk. .xvi. 1 1 ; rrpos to deaSfivai avrols, in order to make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1 ; xxiii. 5 ; to view, lake a view of: Ti, Lk. xxiii. 55 ; ni/d, Mt. xxii. 11 ; in the sense of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr. xxii. 6 ; .Joseph, antt. 16, 1, 2) ; to learn btj lookinej : foil, by oTt, Acts viii. 18 Rec; to see with the et/es, 1 .In. iv. 12; i. q. (Lat. conspicio) to perceive: nvd, Jn. viii. 10 RG; Acts xxi. 27; foil, by ace. with ptcp., Lk. v. 27 [not Lmrg.] ; Jn. i. 38 ; foil, by ort, Jn. vi. 5.* Cf. 0. F. Fritzsche, in I"ritzsc)iiorum Opuscc. p. 29.'j sqq. [Ace. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, eeaaflai in its earlier classic use denotes often a wonderi ng regard, (cf. even in Strabo 14, 5, TO 67rTO fleofiaTo i. q. flaufiara). This .specific shade of meaning, however, gradually faded out, and left the more general signification of such a lookiu; cf. hut. fumus, Eng. dustj), brimstone : Lk. xvii. 29 ; Rev. ix. 1 7 sq. ; xiv. 10 ; xix. 20 ; [xx. 10] ; xxi. 8. (Gen. xLx. 24 ; Ps. x. (xi.) 6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Horn. II. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481, Beio'; 285 eiXa 493; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 c. ; Ael. v. L. 13, 15 [IC]; Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) * Octos. -eia. -eiov, (6f6s), [fr. Horn, down], divine : fi deia SvvatJLis, 2 Pet. i. 3 ; vins (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4 ; neut. to Sfioi/, dirinily, dcitij (Lat. numen divinuvi), not only used by the Greeks to denote the divine nature, power, providence, in the general, without reference to any individual deity (as Hdt. 3, 108; Thuc. 5, 70; Xen. C\t. 4, 2, 15 ; Hell. 7, 5, 13; mem. 1, 4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p. 242 c. ; Polyb. 32, 25, 7 ; Diod. 1,6; 13, 3 ; 12 ; IC, 60 ; Lcian. de sacrif. 1; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by PhUo (as in mundi opif. § 61 ; de agric. 17 ; leg. ad Gai. 1), and by Josephus (antt. 1, 3, 4 ; 11, 1 ; 2, 12, 4 ; 5, 2, 7; 11, 5, 1; 12, 6, 3; 7, 3; 13, 8, 2; 10, 7 ; 14,9,5; 17, 2, 4 ; 20,11, 2; b. j. 3, 8, 3; 4, 3, 10), of the one, true God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.* 6ei6n)s, -ijTor, 17, divinity, dirine nature : Ro. i. 20. (Sap. xviii. 9 ; Philo in opif. § 61 fin.; Plut. symp. 665 a. ; Lcian. calumn. c. 17.) [Syx. see ^eoTTjr.]* fleiiiSr]?, -ef, (fr. Btiov brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone, sulphuroun : Rev. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 228 ; \_Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 6e'\ii(i.a. -ror, to, (fifXm), a word purel_v bibl. and eccl. [yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815'', 21]; Sept. for yijn and Jli"] ; will, i.e. a. what one toishes or has determined shall be done, [i. e. objectivelj', thing willed^ : Lk. xii. 47 ; Jn. v. 30 ; 1 Co. vii. 37 ; 1 Th. v. 18; 2Tim. ii. 26; Heb. x. 10; Rev. iv. 11; deXrujia toC 6eov is used — of the purpose of God to bless mankind through Christ, Acts xxii. 14 ; Eph. i. 9 : Col. i. 9 ; of what God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2 ; Col. iv. 12 [AV. Ill (105)]; 1 Pet. iv. 2 ; and simply to eiXrjfia, Ro. u. 18 [W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17),' [but here the better txt. now adds airov, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how- ever, 6i\i))ia is so used even without the art. ; cf. Ignat. ad Rom. 1,1; ad Eph. 20, 1, etc.]) ; toC Kvpiov, Eph. v. 1 7 ; plur. commands, precepts : [Mk. iii. 35 WII. mrg.] ; Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7; 2 Mace. i. 3) ; cVti to 6e- Xr;^a Tivus, foil, by Iva, Jn. vi. 39 sq. ; 1 Co. xvi. 12, cf. Mt. xviii. 14 ; foU. by inf., 1 Pet. ii. 15 ; by ace. with inf., 1 Th. iv. 3. [Cf. B.'237 (204) ; 240 (207); W. § 44, 8.] b. i. q. TO de\eiv, [i. e. the abstract act of loiUing, the subjective] will, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [cf. W. 604 (5G2)]; 2 Pet. i. 21 ; Troteii/ t. 6i\. Ttvos (esp. of God), Mt. vii. 21 ; xii. 50 ; xxi. 31 ; ]VIk. iii. 35 [here WH mrg. the plur., see above] ; Jn. iv. 34 : vi. 38 ; vii. 17; ix. 31 ; Eph. vi. 6 ; Heb. x. 7, 9, 36 ; xiii. 21 ; 1 Jn. ii. 1 7 ; to BcX. (L T Tr WH ^ov\r)fia) Tivos KaTfpyd(e [Veitch s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]); impf. TJdeKov ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. BeXricrci, Rev. xi. 5 WH mrg.] ; 1 aor. ridiXija-a ; (derived apparently fr. fKelv with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop, to seize with the mind ; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its root as uncertain [he inchnes, however, to the view of Pott, Fick, Vanicek and others, which connects it with a root meaning to hold to}) ; Sept. for n3X and rsri ; TO WILL, (have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved or determined, to purpose: absol., d 6e\ to be unwilling: with the aorist inf., Mt. ii. 18 ; xv. 32 ; x.\ii. 3 ; IStk. vi. 26 ; Lk. XV. 28 ; Jn. v. 40; Acts vii. 39 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Rev. ii. 21 [not Rec], etc.; with the present inf., Jn. vii. 1 ; Acts xiv. 13; xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc.; with the inf. ora. and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30 ; xxi. 29 ; Lk. xviii. 4, etc. ; BeXa and ov 6fXa> foil, by the ace. with inf., Lk. i. 62 ; iCo. x. 20; on the Pauline phrase ou -fle'Xm v/jar ayvoflv, see dyvoeco, a. ; corresponding to deXio vpas clSevai, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii. 1. diXeiv, used of a purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry- ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to Tioieiv, irpao- aciv, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. § 61, 7b.) ; to ii/ep- ■yfii/, PhD. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19 ; Jn. vii. 44. One is said also 6iK(iv that which he is on the point of doing : Mk. vi. 48 ; Jn. i. 43 (44) ; and it is used thus also of things that tend or point to some conclusion [cf . W. § 4 2, 1 b. ; B. 2.i4 (219)]: Acts ii. 12; .xvii. 20. Xavedvci airois TovTo df'Xoinas this (viz. what follows, oti etc.) escapes them of their own will, i. c. they are purposely, wil/itlh/, ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows : this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. c. holding as their opinion [for e.xx. of this sense see Soph. Lex. s. V. 4]), they are ignorant etc. ; but cf. De Wette ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. § 150, 8 Rem.], ras ^eXta 286 defieXio^ (mBvyilas ToO narpbs vjiuiv BiXere woiftv it is your purpose to fuldl the lusts of your father, i. e. ye are actuated by him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44 [W. u. s. ; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to desire, to wish : ri, Mt. XX. 21 ; Mk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. v. 39 [but WII in br.] ; Jn. XV. 7 ; 1 Co. iv. 21 ; 2 Co. xi. 12 ; foil, by the aorist inf., Mt. V. 40 ; xii. 38 ; xvi. 25 ; xLx. 1 7 ; Mk. x. 43 sq. ; Lk. viii. 20 ; xxiii. 8 ; Jn. v. 6, 35 (ye were desirous of rejoicing) ; xii. 21 ; (lal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20; 1 Pet. iii. 10; foil, by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27 ; Gal. iv. 20 {JjBt^ov I could wish, on which impf. see (Cxoiiai, 2) ; the inf. is wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb, Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk. L\. 13 ; Jn. xxi. 18 ; foil, by the ace. and inf., Mk. vii. 24 ; Lk. i. G2 ; Jn. xxi. 22 sq. ; Ro. xvi. 19 ; 1 Co. vii. 7, 32 ; xiv. 5 ; Gal. vi. 13 ; oi SfXia to he unwilliiuj, (desire not) : foil, by the aor. inf., Mt. xxiii. 4 ; Lk. xix. 14,27; 1 Co. x. 20 ; foil, by Iva, Mt. vii. 12; Mk. vi. 25; i.\. 30; x. 35 ; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xvii. 24 ; cf. W. § 44, 8 b.; [B. § 130, 46] ; foil, by the delib. subj. (aor.) : ^eXetf avXKi^ioficv aird (cf. the Germ. wiUsI du, sollen wir zusammenlesen'i [Goodwin § 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ; add, Mt. XX. 32 [where L br. adds tra] ; xxvi. 1 7 ; xxvii. 17, 21 ; Mk. .X. 51 ; xiv. 12; xv. 9, 12 [Trbr. fle'X.] ; Lk. ix. 54 ; xviii. 41 ; xxii. 9, (cf. W. § 41 a. 4 b. ; B. § 139, 2) ; foil, by ei, Lk. xii. 49 (see €i, I. 4) ; foil, by ^, to prefer, 1 Co. .Kiv. 19 (see^, 3 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foil, by an inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing : Mk. xii. 38; Lk. XX. 46 ; cf. W. § 54, 4 ; "[B. § 150, 8]. 4. in imi- tation of the riebr. ysn, to take delight, have pleasure [opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem. ; cf. AV. § 33, a. ; but see exx. below] : ?i/ TIM, in a thing. Col. ii. 18 {iv KoKa, to delight in goodness. Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1 ; (cf. els fwijK, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3) ; Ps. c.\i. (cxii.) 1 ; cxivi. (cxlvii.) 10] ; tn tlvi, dat. of the pers., 1 S. xviii. 22 ; 2 S. XV. 26 ; [1 K. X. 9] ; 2 Chr. ix. 8 ; for 3 nyi, 1 Chr. xxviii. 4). Tivd, to love one : Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi. (.\xii.) 9; [xvii. (xviii.) 20; xl. (xii.) 12]; Ezek. xviii. 32, cf. 23 ; Tob. xiii. 6 ; opp. to /iio-fti/, Ignat. ad Rom. 8, 3 ; 6f\T]drivai is used of those who iind favor, ibid. 8, 1). Ti, Mt. Lx. 13 and xii. 7, (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; Ueb. x. 5, 8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7). As respects the distinction between /3ovXo/iai and 6eK, the former seems to desig- nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap- pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the verb BeXeiv (see just above). The reverse of this dis- tinction is laid down by Bltm. Lexil. i. p. 26 [Eng. trans, p. 194]; Delitzsch on Heb. vi. 17. Ace. to Tillmann (Syn. i. p. 124) deXeiv denotes mere volition, ^ovKeaBai inclination; [cf. IFAis^on on Dem. 9, 5 ; 124,13]. [Philip Buttraann's statement of the distinction between the two words is «juoted with approval by Schmidt (Syn. iii. ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (besides many exx.) the assumed relationship between /3. and piXirls, Miri's : the use of 6. in the sense of ' resolve ' in such passages as Time. 5, 9 ; of B(\uv i. q. ^St'tus in the poets ; of 3. as parallel to (TTiBviieiv in Bern. 29, 45, etc. ; and pass, in which the two words occur together and $. is apparently equiv. to ' wish ' while 9. stands for ' will,' a.s Xen. an. 4, 4, 5 ; Eur. Ale. 281, etc., etc. At tlie same time it must he confessed tliat scholars are far from harmonious on the subject. Many agree with Prof, (irimm that 6. j,'ives [jrominence to the emotive ele- ment, |8. to the rational and volitive ; that 0. signifies the choice, wliilo /3. marks the clioice as deliberate and inteltigeul ; yet they acknowledge that the words are sometimes used indiscriminately, anil esp. that 9. as the less sliarjily delined term is put where ^. would he proper ; see Ellciidl, Lex. Soph.; Pape, Ilandwijrterb. ; Seller, Wtirterh. d. Ilom., s. v. povKofiai ; Suhle mid Schneideuiin, Handwijrterl). ; Crosby, Lex. to Xen. an., s. v. 48e\m ; (Arnold's) Pllloii, Grk. Syn. § 129; Webster, Synt. and Syn. of the (irk. Test. p. 197; Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii". 603 ; Schlcusner, N. T. Lex. s. v. j3ouX. ; Mimthe, Observv. phil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. etc. p. 3 ; Valc.kcnaer, Scholia etc. ii. 23 ; Westermann on Dem. 20, 111; the commentators gener.aUy on Mt. as above ; Bp. Lglilfl- on I'liilem. 13, 14 ; Riddle in Schaff' s Lange on Kph. p. 42 ; this seems to he roughly intended by Ammonius .also : ^ovKfffOai fi^u «ttI fiivov KeKTeop rod KoyiKov • rh fie BiKav Koi eVl a\6yov (liov; (.Tnil F.nst.ith. on Iliad 1, 112, ]). 61, 2, says oux' a.n\iiis dc-\u, aWa. ^ovXofjiai, 'Sir^p iwlracrts ToO 6e\etv cVti'v). t)n the other hand, L. and S. (s. v. cflt'A») ; Passow ed. 5 ; Rust, Worterb. ed. 4 ; Schenkl, Schulwurterli. ; Donaldson, Crat. § 463 sq. ; Waht, Clav. Apocr., s. v. $oi\.; Cremers. vv. $ov\oiitti and SeKto; esp. Slallb. on Plato's de repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (cf. too Cope on Aristot. rlict. 2, 19, 19) ; Frankc on Dem. 1,1, substantially rever.se tlie distinc- tion, as does JCliicoll on 1 Tim. v. 14; Wordsworth on 1 Th. ii. 18. Although tlie latter opinion may seem to bo favored hv that view of the derivaticm of the words which allies 0oiK. with roliiplus (Curtins § 659, cf. p. 726), and makes fle'A.. sig- nify ' to hold to something,' ' form a fixed resolve ' (see above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T. will be evident to one who looks out the pass, referred to above (Fritzsche's explan.ation of Mt. i. 19 is hardly natu- ral) ; to which maybe added such as Mt. ii. 18 ; ix. 13 ; xii. 38 ; XV. 28 ; xvii. 4 (xx. 21, 32) ; xxvi. 15, 39 (cf. Lk. xxii. 42) ; Mk. vi. 19 ; vii. 24 ; ix. ;30 ; x. 35 ; xii. 38 ; xv. 9 (cf. Jn. xviii. 39), 15 (where R. V. ivishing is questionable; cf. Lk. xxiii. 20) ; Lk. x. 24 ; xv. 28 ; xvi. 26 ; Jn. v. 6 ; vi. 1 1 ; xii. 21 ; Acts X. 10; xviii. 15; Uo. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to fiuru, and indeed the use of 8e\a tliroughout this cliapter) ; 1 Co. vii. 36, 39 ; xiv. 35 ; Eph. i. 1 1 ; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc. Such passages as 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one .side, now on the other; cf. 1 Co. xii. 11, 18. 0(\u> occurs in the N. T. about five times as often as $ovKoij.m (on the relative use of tlie words in classic writers see Tycho Momrasen in Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept. (beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to afford little Hght ; see e. g. Gen. xxiv. 5, 8 ; Deut. xxv. 7 ; Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7, 9, etc. In modern Greek ee\a seems to have nearly driven ^oiKojim out of use ; on 0i\a as an auxiliary cf. -lebb in Vincent .and Dickson's Handbook, Ap]i. §§ 60, 64. For exx. of the associated use of tlie words in classic Grk., see Stepli. Thesaur. s. v. /3ouAo,uoi p. 366 d. ; Bp. Lghtft., Creraer, and esp. Schmidt, as above.] e€|i6'Xios, -OK, {Bitia [i. e. thing laid down]), laid down as a foundallun, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 60; efufXioi. \i0oi, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst., 6 6(fii\ioi [sc. Ai'^os] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Rev. xxi. 19), and to deixtUov (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [Ar- istot. phys. auscult. 2, 9 p. 200*, 4] ; Pans. 8, 32, 1 ; [al.]), the foundation (of a building, wall, city) : prop., Lk. vi. Oe/MeXioo) 287 6e(k 49 ; Tidivai SffifKiov, Lk. vi. 48 ; xiv. 29 ; plur. ol fle^ieXiot (chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10 ; Rev. xxi. 14, 19 ; neut. TO flf/i. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.) ; metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of an institution or system of trutli ; 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; tlie rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl- edge, Heb. vi. 1 (fifTavolas gen. of apposition [\V. 031 (494)]) ; a course of instruction begun by a teacher, Ro. XV. 20; Christ is called Bc/iiX. i. e. faith in him, which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth, 1 Co. iii. 11 ; Toiv aTToarToXmi/ (gen. of appos., on account of what follows : Svtos ■ ■ ■ XpicrroC, [al. say gen. of origin, see eVoiKoSo/ie'o) ; ef. W. § 30, 1 ; Meyer or EUicott ad loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon which foundation the Christian church has been built, Eph. ii. 20 ; a solid and stable spu-itual possession, on which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay hold on eternal life, 1 Tim. vi. 19; the church is appar- ently called 6efi. as the foundation of the ' city of God,' 2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several times also for pmx, a palace, Is. xxv. 2 ; Jer. vi. 5 ; Amos i. 4, etc.) * 6e|i£\i6ir], [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; ovfipoi. Pint, de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f. ; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (cf. 308) ; Nonn. paraphr. ev. loan.' 1, 99]. {efirrviva-TOi also is used passively, but uVffuoTor, evVvfuCT-Tot, nvpinvevaroi, [SuaSiaTTveuirTot], actively, [and hv(TavdnvevaTOi appar. either act. or pass. ; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)* 9e6s, -ov, 6 and ij, voc. 6ei, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24 ; Judg. [xvi. 28;] .xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25 ; Is. xxxviii. 20] ; Sir. xxiii. 4 ; Sap. ix. 1 ; 3 Mace. vi. 3 ; 4 Mace. vi. 27 ; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57 ; Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 16 ; [5, 20, 7 ; vit. Const. 2, 55, 1. 59] ; ef. W. § 8, 2 c. ; [B. 12 (11)] ; ([on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vanicek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Ddderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean- ing to supplicate, implore ; hence the implored ; per con- tra cf. Max Mailer, Chips etc. iv. 227 sq. ; L. and S. s. v. fin.]) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. for Sx, DTiSx and DIH'. ; a god, a goddess ; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities : Acts xxviii. 6 ; 1 Co. viii. 4 ; 2 Th. ii. 4 ; once 17 6eos, Acts xix. 37 G L T Tr WIT ; 6(ov (po>v!) koI ovK dvdpuinov. Acts xii. 22 ; avOpanos oyv Txotet? aeavTou deov, Jn. X. 33 ; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles : Acts xiv. 1 1 ; xix. 26 ; Xfyofievoi deoi, 1 Co. viii. 5" ; 01 (piaa pfj ovTcs deoi, Gal. iv. 8 ; toC d(ov 'Pecfxxv [q. v.]. Acts vii. 43 ; of angels: elcrl deal iroXXoi, 1 Co. viii. 5' (on which cf. Philo de soran. i. § 39 6 iiev dXjjBeia 6fos els iimv, ol 8' ev KaTaxprjtret Xeyop-evoL TrXeious). [On the use of the sing. deui (and Lat. dcus) as a generic term by (later) heathen writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit. note D ; cf. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam, for Xov. 184S,p. 389 sqq.; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i. §ii. ; seeBib. Sacr. for July 1856,p.666 sq., and foraddit. exx. NiigeUbach, Homer. Theol. p. 1 29 ; also his Xaclilio- merische Theol. p. 139 sq. ; Stephanus, Thes. s. v.; and reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. i. p. 120 note.] 2. Whether Christ is called God must be determined from Jn. i. 1 ; xx. 28 ; 1 Jn. v. 20 ; Ro. ix. 5 ; Tit. ii. 13 ; Heb. i. 8 sq., etc. ; the matter is stiU in dispute among theologians; cf. Grimm, Insti- tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq. [and the discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab- bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. etc. u. s., esp. pp. 42 sqq. 113 sqq.]. 3. spoken of the onli/ and true God: with the article, Mt. iii. 9; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: c'k toO d. Jn. viii. 42, 47 and often in John's writ. ; vjro tov 6. Lk. i. 26 [T Tr WH dno] ; Acts xxvi. 6 ; napa toO 6. Jn. viii. 40 ; ix. 16 [L T Tr WH here om. art.] ; Ttapa rm 6. Ro. ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mrg. br. the art.] ; ix. 14 ; iv Tto 6. Col. iii. 3 ; errX tm 6. Lk. i. 47 ; eis tov 6. Acts xxiv. 15 [Tdf. jrpds] ; cVl tw 0. Acts xv. 19; xxvi. 18, 20 ; TTpos TOV 6. Jn. i. 2 ; Acts x.xiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. iii. 2 ; xx. 38 ; Ro. viii. 8, 33 ; 2 Co. i. 21 ; v. 19 ; vi. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 5, etc. ; with prepositions : djro 6eov, Jn. iii. 2 ; xvi. 30 ; Ro. xiii. 1 [L T Tr WH vno'] ; wnpa deoi, Jn. i. 6; ^£09 288 Oepairevw fK 6fod, Acts V. 39 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; Phil. iii. 9 ; Trapa 6fo, 2 Th. i. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; Kara Seov, llo. viii. 27 ; 2 Co. vii. 9 S(i. ; cf. W. § 19 s. V. o 6f6s rivot (gen. of pers.), the (guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him : Mt. xxii. .32 ; Mk. xii. 26 s(|. [:i9 WU nirg. (sec below)]; Lk. XX. 37; Jn. xx. 17; Acts iii. 13; xiii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16 ; Ileb. xi. 16 ; Rev. xxi. 3 [without o ; but GT Tr WII txt. om. the phrase] ; o 6eus /lov, i. (j. ov ti'^xi, u koi 'Karpfvo) (Acts xxvii. 23) : Ro. i. 8 ; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr nirg. l)r. the gen.] ; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; Pliil. i. 3; iv. 19 ; Philem. 4 ; Kvptos 6 6e6s (Tov, i}p.S>v, vfiaiv, avTwv (in imit. of Ilebr. ^'il'^X nin', irrlbx "•, DD-n^s "•, or\'rh^ '") : Mt. iv. 7 ; xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 29 [see above]; Lk. iv. 8, 12; x. 27; Acts ii. 39; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. p. 169 ; [and Bp. Lglitft. as (luoted s. v. Kvpios, c. a. init.]; 6 6e6s k. naTrjp TOV Kvptov i)po>v ^\Tf(Tov XpitTToO '. Ro. XV. 6 ; 2 Co. 1. 3 ; XI. 31 [L T Tr WII om. tjp. and Xp.] ; Eph. i. 3 ; Col. i. 3 [L Wllom. /cai] ; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words the gen. depends on o 6e6i as well as on irarrip, cf. Fritz- sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq. ; [Oltramarc on Ro. I.e.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 4 ; but some would restrict it to the latter; cf. e. g. Meyer on Ro. 1. c, Eph. I.e.; EUic. on Gal. 1. c, Eph. 1. c] ; 6 5cos roO Kvp. fjp. 'Iijo-. Xp. Eph. i. 1 7 ; o 6e6s be Xtyfrat 0f or tov 'KJipovos . . . 6e6s irpos av- Taa-lav k. 6d/vos TovTov (sec aiav, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4 ; the pens, or thine to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone he lives, c. g. fj KoiXia, Phil. iii. 1 9. 6€oiri|3ci.a, -as, fj, (^€oo-fj3ijr), reverence toicards God, (jodlincss: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin. p. 985 d. ; Sept. Gen. xx. 11 ; Job .xxviii. 28 ; Bar. v. 4; Sir. i. 25 (22) ; 4 Mace. i. 9 (Fritz.) ; vii. 6, 22 (var.).) • 6coa-c|3TJs, -c's, (6e6s and ai^opai), icorshipping God, pious: Jn. ix. 31. (Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; [cf. Trench § xlviii.].)» GcooTU-yilS. "Cy, {6i6s and (jTvytta ; cf. Ofopiaris-, dfopvarjs, and the subst. Otoa-rvyla, omitted in the Icxx., Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35, b), hateful to God, exceptionally impious and wicked; (\ n\g. deo odihilis) : Ro. i. 30 (Eur. Troad. 1213 and Cyclop. 396, 602; joined with abiKoi in Clem, hom. 1, 12, where just before occurs o! 6ebv fwrovvrfs)- Cf. the full discussion of the word by Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. i. ]). 84 sijcp ; [and see W. 53 sq. (53)].' 6t6TT)s, -i;Tof, ij, {deltas, Tertull., Augustine [de civ. Dei 7, 1]), deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead: Col. ii. 9. (Lcian. Icar. U; Plut. de defect, orac. 10 p. 415 c.) * [SvN. ee((Tr)r, flf iiStt) s: Beir. deity differs from BeiSr. divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf. Trench § ii. ; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. on Col. 1. c. ; I'ritzsclic on Eo. i. 20.] OE6iXo$, -ov, (Bfoi and (piXos), Thcophilus, a Christian to whom Luke inscribed his Gospel and Acts of the Apostles : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts i. 1 . The conjectures concern- ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among others) Win. RWB. s. v. ; Bleek on Lk. i. 3 ; [B. D. s .v.] ; see also under Kparicrros' Scpaircla, -as, i), (6epanevw) ; 1. service, rendered by any one to another. 2. spec, medical service, curing, healing: Lk. Lx. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ([Hippocr.], Plat., Isocr., Polyb.). 3. by meton. household, i. e. body of attendants, servants, domestics : Mt. xxiv. 45 R G ; Lk. xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 469 ; for D■^3;•, Gen. xlv. 16)." 6epair€«av\a depia-ei kokci, Prov. xxii. 8; ■eav i. i6eppaiv6p.rjv; (fieppios) ; fr. Hom. down ; to make warm, to heat ; mid. 19 to warm one's self: Mk. xiv. 54, 67; Jn. xviii. 18, 25; Jas. ii. 16.* Be'piiT) (and dippjx; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 331, [Ruther- ford, New Phryn. p. 414]), -i;f, jj, heal: Acts xxviii. 3. (Eccl. iv. 11 ; Job vi. 17; Ps. xviii. (.\L\.) 7; Thuc, Plat., Menand., al.) * Be'pos, -ovs, TO, {Bfpco to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28 ; Lk. xxi. 30. (From Horn, down; Hebr. ]"p, Prov. vi. 8 ; Gen. viii. 22.) * ©eo-o-aXoviKeis, -e'mr, o, a Thessalonian : Acts xx. 4 ; .xxvii. 2; 1 Th. i. 1; 2 Th. i. 1.* 0eo-povv\ [fut. Scu/jiyo-to, Jn. vii. 3 T Tr WII] ; 1 aor. edeapr^aa ; {6(a>p6s a spectator, and this fr. Odopxu, q. v. [cf. Vanicek p. 407; L. and S. s. v.; Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.]); [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; Sept. for nX") and Chald. ntn ; 1. to he a spectator, look at, behold. Germ, schauen, (the Beapoi were men who attended the games or the sacri- fices as public deputies; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 19); absol. : Mt. xxvii. 55 ; Mk. xv. 40 ; Lk. xxiii. 35 ; foil, by indir. disc. Mk. xii. 41 ; xv. 47; used esp. of persons and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy : Tiva, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10, 16 sq. 19 ; Acts iii. 16 ; xxv. 24; Rev. xi. 1 1 sq. ; 6 deatpoiv rov viov 6fa>pe1 tov Tra-epa, the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn. xii. 45 ; rivi with ptcp. [B. 301 (258) : Mk. v. 15] ; Lk. X. 18; Jn. vi. 19; [x. 12]; xx. 12, 14; [1 Jn. iii. 17]; Ti, Lk. xiv. 29 ; xxi. 6 ; xxiii. 48 ; Acts iv. 13 : ra (rqpua, Jn. ii. 23 ; vi. 2 L Tr WH ; Acts viii. 1 3, (davpaa-za ripara. Sap. xix. 8) ; to epya tov Xpia-Toii, Jn. vii. 3 ; ti with j)tcp., Jn. XX. 6 ; Acts vii. 56 ; x. 11; foU. by on, Acts Bewpia 290 6>jaavp6pi7v, QfciaQai, dpav, (TKOTreTy: 6fup, is nsed primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose ; 6iwp. wonlil be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting an army. fleSirfl. of a l.av spectator looking at the parade. B(wp. as denoting the careful observ.ation of details can even be contrasted with'^pai" in so far as tlie latter denotes only perception in tlie general ; so used Bewptlv quite coincides witli (TKOTT. Schmidt i. ch. 11; see also Green, ' Crit. Note ' on Mt. vii. 3. Cf. s. vv, dpda, (rKoTrta.] 6Eup(a, -as, ij, (dfcopoi. on which see Becopto) init.) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], lldt. down ; 1. a vieiving, beholding. 2. that tvhich is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. .\.\iii. 48 (3 Jlacc. V. 24)." Oijioi, -rjs, T), {rWrjpi) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; that in which a thing is put or laid away, a receptacle, reposi- tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. .xviii. 11 ; Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144.* 6t|Xd^ ; 1 aor. idr)\a, Lk. xxiii. 29 R G. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. xxi. 16 (Aristot., Plat., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for pr) ; paarois, Lk. .xi. 27; Job iii. 12; Cant. viii. 1; Joelii. IG; Theocr. iii. Ifi.* 8f|\vs. -eia, -v, [cf. 5i;Xafm, init.], of the female sex; ij BrjXeta, subst. a woman, a female : Ro. i. 26 sq. ; also ro eijXv, Mt. xLx. 4 ; jNfk. x. 6 ; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27 ; vii. 2 ; Ex. i. 16, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) " 6^pa [Lat. /era ; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey, Vanicek p. 415; cf. Curtius §314], -as, fj; fr. Horn, down; a hunting of wild beasts to destroy them; hence, figuratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V. a trap'], Ro. .xi. 9, on which cf. Fritzsche.* 6t)PCV(d : 1 aor. inf. Brfpexxrat ; (fr. Bi]pa, as aypda f r. aypa [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]) ; fr. Hom. down; to go a hunting, to hunt, to catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wait for, strive to ensnare ; to catch ar fully : t\ ck tTToparos Ttvos, Lk. xi. 54.* 6T]pio|i.axeu, -u : 1 a.or. (8ripi.opdxi(Ta; (Brjpiopdxos) ; to fglit ivilh wild beasts (Diod. 3, 43, 7 ; Artem. oneir. 2, 54 ; 5, 49) ; el i6r)ptopdxtTa ev 'Efpeirw, 1 Co. xv. 32 — these words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con- demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain tlu'm tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious men (so 6t]piopax(i-v in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [etc.] ; oiotr Brjplois paxdfifBa says Pompey, in App. bell. civ. 2, 61 ; sec 6r)piov). The former opinion encounters the objec- tion that I'aul would not have omitted this most terrible of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. .\i. 23 sqq.* 8t)PCov, -ov, to, (dimin. of Bijp ; hence a little beast, little animal; Plat. Tlicaet. p. 171 c.; of bees, Theocr. 19, 6 ; but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi- tive ; the later dimin. is Brjpi&ioi/ [cf. Epictet. diss. 2, 9, 6]) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. for n"n and 710713, an ani- mal; a wild animal, wild beast, beast: prop., Mk. i. 13; Acts X. 12 Rec; xi. 6; x.xviii. 4 sq. ; Ileb. xii. 20; [Jas. iii. 7] ; Rev. vi. 8; in Rev. xi. 7 and ehh. xiii.-xx., under the fig. of a 'beast' is depicted Antichrist, both his ])erson and his kingdom and power, (see di/Ti^pio-Tof ) ; metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious. Tit. i. 12 [coUoq. ' ugly dogs '], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273 ; Pint. 439; nub. 184; [cf. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other exx. arc given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 379; Brjpia dvdpa>wdpop(l>a, Ignat. Smyrn. 4, cf. ad Ephes. 7). [Syn. see ^wof.J * 6T)(raup(5 ; 1 aor. cBrjcravpiara ; pf. pass. ptcp. TfBrjcav- pta-pevos ; {Brjcravpos) ; fr. Ildt. down ; to gather and lay tip, to heap up, store up : to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3 ; Tivl, Lk. xii. 21 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; ri, 1 Co. xvi. 2 ; Brja-avpoiig eavra, Mt. vi. 1 9 sq. ; i. q. to keep in store, store up, reserve : pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; inetaph. so to live from day to day as to increase either the bitterness or thchap])inessof one's consequent lot : upyr^v taura, Ro. ii. 5', xaKo, Prov. i. 18 ; fuiji/, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, (evTvxiuv, .\]ip. Samn. 4, 3 [i.e. vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.] ; TeBrjuavpirrpivos Kara twos 4>66vo9, Diod. 20, 36). [CoMf. : diro- BrjaavpiCo)-] * Oiio-avpis, -ov, 6, (fr. eEQ [rlBijpi'] with the paragog. term, -avpos) ; Sept. often for ISIK ; Lat. thesaurus ; i. e. 1. tite place in which goods and precious things are col- lected and laid up; a. a casket, coffer, or other recep- tacle, in which valuables are kept: Jit. ii. 11. b. v ai /3Xa/3at avrai Biyyd- vov ; Pass., pres. SXi^ofiai ; pf. ptcp. TeffKifijiivos ; [aUied with_/7o(/rum, o^(C(ion; fr. llom. down] ; to press (as grapes), press hard upon : prop, nva [A. V. throng^, Mk. iii. 9 ; 68or TeffKijifi-ivr) a compressed loay, i. e. nar- row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. to trouble, afflict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo) : nva, 2 Th. i. 6 ; pass. (Vulg. tribulor, [also angustior'] ; tribulationem patior) : 2 Co. i. 6 ; iv. 8 ; vii. 5 ; [1 Th. iii. 4 ; 2 Th. i. 7] ; 1 Tim. V. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (oi dXi^ovres for D'"}i' in Sept.) [CcoiP. : aTTo-, o-vv-dXi^co.^ * eXiiJ/is, or 6\'l^i,ls [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -ems, ij, (0\i^a), prop, a pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga- len) ; in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afflic- tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also pressura (2 Co. i. 4"; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. IG (17) ; and in Col. i. 24 passio]) ; (Sept. for rrjy, also for ly ynS, etc.): Mt. x.xiv. 9; Acts vii. 11 ; xi.'l9 ; Ko. xii. 12; 2 Co. i. 4, 8 ; iv. 17 ; vi. 4 ; vii. 4 ; viii. 2 ; 2 Th. i. 6 ; Rev. i. 9 ; ii. 9, 22 ; vii. 14 ; joined with a-Temxapla [cf. Trench § Iv.], Ro. ii. 9 ; viii. 35. (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq. ; Is. [viii. 22] ; XXX. 6) ; with dvdyKr], 1 Th. iii. 7 ; with fiiwyjuo'f, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 17; 2Th.i. 4; of the afflic- tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24 ; of the straits of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the word a wider reference] ; Jas. i. 27 ; of the distress of a woman in child-birth, Jn. xvi. 21. 6\iy\fiv e^a (i. q. eXiiSofiai), Jn. xvi. 33 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; Rev. ii. 10 ; myp-is fTTi Tiva (pxerai, Acts vii. 1 1 ; tV 0\i\j,(i, 1 Th. i. 6. plur. : Acts vii. 10 ; xiv. 22 ; xx. 23 ; Ro. v. 3 ; Eph. iii. 13 ; 1 Th. iii. 3 ; fleb. x. 33 ; roi) XpioroC, the afflictions which Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, liis fol- lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see diTai/awX?)- poa) ; S\l\j/is TTis KapSias (k. avmxn), anxiety, burden of heart, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; 6Xiyl,w ^mv, Col. ii. 18 (twv fi8a>\ii>v, Sap. .\iv. 27 ; tuv Smpovaiv, Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 2 ; Tan/ dewv, ib. 9, 9, 14 ; tou flfoO, Hdian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.]; often in Josephus [cf. Krehs, Observv. etc. p. 339 sq.] ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 7) ; religious discipline, religion : r)pfTt'pa 6pr)crK('ia, of Judaism, Acts xxvi. 5 (t^v «V")" BprjaKtlav KaTaKiTTov, Jiiit into the mouth of God by Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 1 ; with gen. of the subj. rdv ^lovhalav, 4 Mace. v. 6, 13 (12); Joseph, antt. 12, 5, 4 ; 6p. KoiriiiKT], i. c. worthy to be embraced by all nations, a world-religion, b. j. 4, 5, 2; piety, irepX r. 6(6v, antt. 1, 13, 1 ; koto Tf/v fp(f>vToi' 6pr](rKfiav twv fiap^apav npos to fiadiXixov ovopa, Charit. 7, 6 p. 165, 18 ed. Reiske ; of the reverence of An- tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Josej)!!. antt. 13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. G; [esp. Trench § xlviii.].' epfjo-KOs (TWII %0-Kosr, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]; AV. § 6, 1 c. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 2S), -oi;, 6, faring or worshipping God; religious, (apparently fr. rpca to tremble; hence prop, trembling, fearful ; ct.J. G. Jfuller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121 ; on the different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur- tius § 316 connects with 6pa ; hence ' to adhere to,' ' be a votary of ' ; cf. Vanicek p. 395]) : Jas. i. 26. [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] * 6pio|iPfiliD ; 1 aor. ptcp. flpta/i/Sfyo-ar; (5pia/i/3o9, a hymn sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus ; among the Romans, a triumphal procession [Lat. triumphus, with which word it is thought to be allied; cf. Vanicek p. 317]) ; 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion. Hal., App., Plut., Hdian., al.) ; riva, over one (as Pint. Thes. and Rom. comp. 4) : Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers through Christ's death). 2. by a usage imknown to prof, auth., with a Hiphil or causative force (cf. W. |). 23 and § 38, 1 [cf. B. 147 (129)]), with the ace. of a ])ers., to cause one to triumph, i. e. metaph. to grant one complete success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative sense ; see Mey. ad loe. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.].* flpt?! '"pixosi ilat. plur. dpi^i, 17, [fr. Horn, down], the hair; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44; xxi. 18 ; Jn. xi. 2 ; xii. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 34 ; 1 Pet. iii. 3 [Lchm. om.]; Rev. i. 14; with 7-^9 KfffydXrjt added (Horn. Od. 13, 399. 431), Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 38; .xii. 7. b. tlie hair of animals : Rev. ix. 8 ; fvSebvfi. Tpl\as Kn/ii;Xou, with a garment made of camel's hair, Mk. i. 6, cf. Mt. iii. 4 ; iv . . . Tptxv Ka/iijXfimv TrKiypaaiv nfpieitaTijaai', Clem. Alex, strom. 4 p. 221 ed. .Sylb.' SpoEu, -S> : {6po6t clamor, tumult) ; in Grk. writ, to cry ahinil. muke a noise by outcry; in the N. T. to trouble, frighten ; Pass. pres. Bpoovfuu ; to be troubled in mind, to be frightened, alarmed: Mt. .xxiv. 6 [B. 243 (209)] ; Mk. xiii. 7 ; 2 Th. ii. 2 ; [1 aor. ptep. dparjdevrfs, Lk. xxiv. 37 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]. (Cant. v. 4.) " ep<5(iPos, -ov, 6, [allied with rpif^w in the sense to thicken; Vanicek p. 307], a large thick drop, esp. of clotted blood (Aeschyl. Eum. 184); with aiparos added (Acschyl. chocph. 5;S3, 54«; Plat. Critias j). 120 a.), Lk. xxii. 44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass, (see WH. App. ad loc.)].' ep6vos, -ou, 0, (ePAQ to sit; cf. Curtius §31G), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for SD3, a throne, seat, i. e. a chair of state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to k i n gs, hence by melon, for kingly power, royally: Lk. i. 32,52; Acts ii. 30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world : Mt. V. 34 ; xxiii. 22 ; Acts vii. 49 (Is. Ixvi. 1) ; Rev. i. 4 ; iii. 21 ; iv. 2-G, 9, 10, etc. ; Ileb. iv. 16 ; viii. 1 ; xii. 2. to the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine administration: Bit. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21 ; xx. 11; x.xii. 3 ; hence the divine power belonging to Christ, Heb. i. 8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor. p. 807 b.) : Mt. xix. 28 ; Lk. xxii. 30 ; Rev. xx. 4. to elders: Rev. iv. 4 ; xi. 16. to Satan: Rev. ii. 1 3 ; cf. Bleek ad loe. to the beast (concerning which see 6i]piov) : Rev. xvi. 10. 6p6vos is used l)y meton. of one who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in j)lur. of angels: Col. i. 16 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loe.]. ©vdxtipo, -ajv, TO, (and once -as, ^, Rev. i. 1 1 Lchm. evdretpav [cf. Tdf. ad loe; IF/Z.App. p. 156 ;B. 18 (16)]), Thyatira, a city of Lydia, formerly Pelopia and Euhippia (Plin. h. n. 5, 31), now Akhissar, a colony of Macedonian Greeks, situated between Sardis and Perganuun on the river Lyeus ; its inhabitants gained their living by traffic and the art of dyeing in ])urple : Acts xvi. 14 ; Rev. i. 11; ii. 18, 24. [B. D. s. v.] • 6u-yaTt)p, gen. dvyarpot, dat. Bvyarpi, ace. Bvyaripa, voc. Bvyarep, plur. Bvyaripes, ace. -(pas, rj, (of the same root as Gothic i:/u»/(/a)",Kng.r/a)/f//i/er, Germ. 7'oc/i?ec [Curtius §318; Vanicek p. 415]); Hebr. n3; [fr. Ilom. down]; a daughter: prop., Mt. Lx. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts vii. 21, etc. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc. cf. W. § 29, 2 ; B. § 129 a. 5 ; WJI. App. p. 15S] in kindly address : Mt. ix. 22 ; Mk. v. 34 [L Tr WII Btiydrrip'] ; Lk. viii. 48 [Tr WH dvyarrjp'], (see vlot 1 a. fin., tckvov b. u.). b. in phrases modelled after the Hebr.: o. a daughter of God i. e. acceptable to God, rejoicing in (Jod's pecu- liar care and protection: 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap. ix. 7 ; see vlos t. 6eov 4, tikvov h. y.). p. with the name of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its inhabitants and citizens (very often so in the O. T., as Is. xxxvii. 22 ; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 19 ; Zeph. iii. 14, etc.) ; in the N. T. twice r/ 6vy. tiiiv, i. e. inhabitants of Jeru- salem : 'Mt. xxi. 5 ; Jn. xii. 15, (Is. i. 8 ; x. 32 : Zech. i.x. 9, etc. ; see ^lav, 2). y. Svyaripes 'IfpovcraXrjp, women of .Jerusalem : Lk. xxiii. 28. 8. female descendant : al 6vyaT(pfs 'Aapoji/, women of Aaron's posterity, Lk. i. 5 ; Ovyarqp 'Affpaap. daughter of Abraham, i. e. a woman tracing her descent from Abraham, Lk. xiii. 16, (4 Mace. Oirfdrpiov 293 6vpa XV. 28 (25) ; Gen. xxviii. 8 ; xxxvi. 2 ; Judg. xi. 40 ; Is. xvi. 2, etc.). Owvarptov, -ov, to, a little daughter : Mk. v. 23 ; vii. 25. [Strattis Incert. 5 ; Menand., Athen., Plut. reg. et imper. Apoplitbeg. p. 179 6. (Ale.x. 6;; al.] * BvcWa, -Tjs, r], (dvQ> to boil, foam, rage, as litWa fr. aa, Stjiu), a sudden storm, tempest, whirlwind: Ileb. xii. 18. (Deut. iv. 11; v. 22; Horn., Has., Tragg., al.) [Cf. Scbmidt ch. 55, 11 ; Trench § Ixxiii. fin.] * SvCvos [WH om. the diajr. (cf. I, i, fin.)], -r/, -ov, (fr. 6vla or dla, the citrus, an odoriferous North-African tree used as incense [and for inlaying ; B. D. s. v. Tbyine wood; Tristram., Nat. Ilist. of the Bible, p. 401 sq.]), thyine (Lat. citrinus) : ^{ikov. Rev. .wiii. 1 2 as in Diosc. 1, 21 ; cf. Plin. h. n. 13, 30 (16).* 9u)i.Ca|ia, -TOi, TO, (Qvtuaw), Sept. mostly for jTI'DP, an aromatic substance burnt, incense : generally in plur.. Rev. V. 8 ; viii. 3 sq. ; .wiii. 13 ; ij S>pa toO 6., when the incense is burned, Lk. i. 10; dv), prop, a utensil for fumi- gating or burning incense [cf. W. 9() (91)] ; hence 1. a censer: 2 Chr. xxvi. 19; Ezek. viii. 11 ; Ildt. 4, 162; Thuc.6,46; Diod. 13,3; Josejih. antt. 4, 2, 4 ; 8,3,8; Ael. V. h. 12, 51. 2. the altar tf incense: Philo, rer. div. haer. § 46 ; vit. Moys. iii. § 7 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 6, 8 ; 3, 8", 3 ; b. j. 5, 5, 5 ; Clem. Ale.x. ; Orig. ; and so in Heb. ix. 4 [(where Tr mrg. br.), also 2 Tr mrg. in br.], where see Bleek, Liinemann, Delitzsch, Kurtz, in opp. to those [(A. V. included)] who think it means censer; [yet cf. Harnnck in the Stud. n. Krit. for 1876, p. 5 72 sr|.].* 6u)iid(i>, -M : 1 aor. inf. dvfuaa-ai [RG -da-ai'] ; (fr. dvfm, and this fr. Ovw, q. v.) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Hdt., Plat, down; Sept. for IDp and TDpn; to burn incense: Lk. i. 9.» "'■ ■'" 8u|iO|i,axe'<<>, -w ; (6vfi6s and naxojiai) ; to carry on tear with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.) ; to be very angry, be exasperated [A. V. highly displeased'] : nvi, with one. Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 62 sq.* Oujios, -oil, d, (fr. 6vai to rush along or on, be in a heat, breathe violently; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl. p. 41 9 e., 5v/i6f OTTO TT]i 6i(Tea)s k. ffVfcot Trjs ^v^ris; ac- cordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were in the body, and the rage with which the man pants and swells), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. often for nx anger, and nan excandescentia ; also for inn aestus. In the N. T. 1. passion, angry heat, (excandescentia, Cic. Tusc. 4, 9, 21), anger fo-rthwith boiling up and soon subsiding again, (upyr), on the other hand, denotes indignation tvhich has arisen gradually and become more settled; [cf. (Plato) deft. 415 e. dvfxos' opfxri /3ia(o? ai/f u Xoyto"/ioO' voa-os Ta^ecos yj/vxTjs dXoyio-Tou. opyrj- TrapuKXjyo-is rov SvpiKoi eis to TipaipflaBai. Greg. Naz. carm. 34 6vp6s p.h cmiv aBpnos (ea^is p(v6s, opyrj 8t 6vp6s eppivinv, Ilerm. mand. 5, 2, 4 eV 8e TTjs TTiKpias dvfios, tK fie rov 6vfiov opyr) ; cf. Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope's note] ; hence we read in Sir. xlviii. 10 Kondaai opyrjv npo 6vpov, before it glows and bursts forth ; [see further, on the distinction betw. the two words, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. iii. ch. 142]) : Lk. iv. 28; Acts .xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8 ; Hcb. xi. 27 ; 6 6. toO 6eoi, Rev. xiv. 19 ; xv. 1, 7 ; xvi. 1 ; e'xeiv dvpov, to be in a passion. Rev. .\ii. 12 (Ael. V. h. 1, 14) ; opyfj /cai 6vfi6s (as Sept. Mic. v. 15 ; Isocr. p. 249 c. ; Hdian. 8, 4, 1 ; al.) : Ro. ii. 8 (Ree. in the in- verse order; so Dent. ix. 19 ; xxix. 23, 28, [cf. Trench u. s.]) ; plur. dvjioi impulses and outbursts of anger [W. 176 (16C); B. 77 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20, (2 ilacc. iv. 25, 38 ; ix. 7 ; x. 35 ; xiv. 45 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 20; Sap. x. 3 ; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.] ; Plat. Pro- tag, p. 323 e. ; [Phileb. p. 40 e. ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13] ; Polyb. 3, 10, 5 ; Diod. 13, 28 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ; Plut. Cor. 1 ; al.). 2. glow, ardor: 6 oims tov 6vp.ov [see oiVof, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine. Germ. Glut ice in (which either drives the drinker mad or kills him with its deadly heat ; cf. Is. U. 1 7, 22 ; Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15) sqq.) : Rev. xiv. 8 ; xviii. 3 ; with roC 6eov added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10 ; with T^s opyrjs Toil Bfoii added [A. Y.ferreness], Rev. xvi. 19 ; -xix. 15; ci. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269 note.* 9„(i,(5u, -M : 1 aor. pass. (6vp(J>6r]v ; (6vp.6s) ; to cause one to become incensed, to jJrovoke to anger ; pass. (Sept. often for nin) to be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ, fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down.) * 9iipa, -as, Tj, (fr. dia to rush in, prop, that through which a rush is made ; hence Germ. Thur [Eng. door ; Curtius § 319]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for nSl and nna, sometimes also for '\yjS; a (house) door; [in plur. i. cj.' Lat. fores, folding doors; cf. W. 176 (166) ; B. 24 (21) ; cf. irCXr]] ; a. prop. : xXci'tii/ etc. tiji» 6., Mt. vi. 6; Lk. xiii. 25; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19, 26; Acts xxi. 30; dvolyew. Acts v. 19; pass. Acts xvi. 26 sq. ; Kpovetv, Acts xii. 13 ; Sia ttjs 6. Jn. x. 1 sq. ; irpos Tr)v e., Mk. i. 33; xi. 4 [Tr WH om. T171/ ; cf. W. 123 (116)] ; Acts iii. 2; to npos Tr]v 6. the vestibule [so B. § 125, 9 ; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Jlk. ii. 2 ; Trpof ttj 6. Jn. xviii. l(i ; iin t;/ 6. Acts v. 9 ; irpo TTjs 6. Acts xii. 6 ; fVi Ta>v 6vpa>v, Acts v. 23 [R G irpo]. b. dvpa is used of any 0]>ening like a door, an entrance, icay or passage into: 17 6. toC p.vr)y.eiov, of the tomb, Mt. xxvii. 00 ; xxviii. 2 RG ; Mk. xv. 46 ; xvi. 3, (Horn. Od. 9, 243 ; 12, 256 ; al.). c. in parable and metaph. we find a. fj 6ipa tS>v irpofiaTav, the door through which the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings salvation to those who follow his guidance, Jn. .x. 7, 9 ; cf. Christ. Fr. Fritzsche in Fritzscliiorum opuscc. p. 20 sqq. ; (in Ignat. ad Philatl. 9 Christ is called 17 dvpa tov naTpoi, 81' ^9 ^larlp-j^ovrai 'A^paafi . . . Kal 01 Trpocji^rat ; cf. H.arnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 3 sq.). p. 'anopen door ' is used of the opportunity of doing something : r^y TildTeass, of getting faith. Acts xiv. 27; open to a teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co. ii. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and literal language, the phrase 6vpa ptydXr) k. evfpyrjs [A. V. a great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity 01 vpeo<; 294 dwpa^ of teaching a great multitude the way of salvation, and one encouraging the hope of the most successful results : 1 Co. xvi. 9. y. the door of the kimjdum of heacen (likened to a palace) denotes the condit ions which must be comi)licd with in order to be received into the kingdom of (!od: Lk. xiii. 24 (for Kec. ttvXijs); power of entering, access into, God's eternal kingdom, Itev. iii. 8 cf. 7, [but al. al.; add here Rev. iv. 1]. 8. he whose advent is just at hand is said in\ 6vpms c'l/ai, Mt. xxiv. 33 ; Jlk. .\iii. 29, and npo 6vpwv «o-TTjKfVat, Jas. v. !). c. ftiTr]Ks 6vpe6v, Eph. vi. IG. It differs from ao-Tris (Lat. clipeus), which was smaller and circular. [Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.] • OupCs, -i'8os, ij, (dimin. of dvpa, prop, a little door; Plat., Dio Cass.), a tvindow : Acts xx. 9 ; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph., Thcophr., Diod., .Foseph., Phit., al. ; Sept.)* Svpupos, -ov, 6, rj, (fr. Bvpa, and a>pa care ; cf. upKvapos, iTvXwpos, Ttfiaipos ; cf. Curtius § .')01, cf. p. 101 ; [Vanicek p. 900; Allen in Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 129]), a door- keeper, porter; male or female yamVor : masc, Mk. xiii. 34 ; Jn. x. 3 ; fem. Jn. xviii. IG sq. ([Sappho], Aeschyl., Hdt., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Joseph., al. ; Sept.) * 6v(r(a, -as, i), (Bva), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for nnjO an offering, and nOI; a sacrifice, victim; a. prr)p. : Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, fr. IIos. vi. 6 ; Mk. ix. 49 ([U G L Tr txt. br.], sec dXi'fco ) ; Eph. v. 2 ; Heb. x. 5, 2(i; plur., Mk. xii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 1 ; Ileb. i.\. 23 ; [x. 1, 8 (here Rec. sing.)] ; dviiyftv Bvaiav nvl, Acts vii. 41 ; dva- €p(tv, Heb. vii. 27, (see avaya, and dvarf>ipa> 2) ; [SoCrat 0. Lk. ii. 24] ; Trpotr^eptti/, Acts vii. 42; Heb. v. 1 ; viii. 3 ; X. [11], 12; [xi. 4] ; pass. Heb. ix. 9 ; 8ia rijs Bvtrlas avTov, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he offered (not, by offering up himself; that would have been expressed Ijy Bia rtjs 6vc'pciv Bvaiav aiviafas. Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can mean, alutiriv ins Bvaiav, the author would not have added, as he has, the explanation of the words ; he nuist thei-efore be supposed to have rcjiroduced the Ilebr. i)hrase niirt-'n^t, and then defined this more exactly; Lev. vii.'s (13) [cf. 2 (12)]; Ps. cvi. (fvii.) 22; see airftrif) ; «Vt tj; dvaia . . . rijs Trt'oTf tof vfiwv (e])ex. gen.), in llie work of exciting, nourishing, increasing, your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to God [cf. eVi, p. 233" hot.], Phil. ii. 17.* Svo'i.ao-TTJpiov, -ov, TO, (neut. of the adj. 6vcria]v, cf. W. § 5, 1 d. 1 2) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. mostly for n^J, also for Dniy, to slay ; 1. to sac- rifice, itumolate : ahnol. Acts xiv. 13; nvl, dat. of pers. (in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18 ; ripi ti, 1 Co. x. 20. 2. to slay, kill : absol., Acts x. 13 ; xi. 7 ; W, Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30 ; pass. Mt. .xxii. 4 ; to ■ndaxa, the paschal lamb, ilk. xiv. 12; pass., Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, 6). 3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x. 1 ; tito. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 24; 1 Mace. vii. 19.* 0(i>|xas, -5, 6, (Dl'Sri [i. e. twin], see hlhvpos), Thomas, one of Christ's apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Jn. xi. 16 ; .xiv. 5; xx. 24-29 [in 29 Rec. only] ; xxi. 2; Actsi. 13. [B. D. s. v.] * BupaJ, -oKos, 6 ; 1. the breast, the part of the body from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot. hist. an. 1, 7 [cf. 8, p. 491% 28] ; Eur., Plat., al.) : Rev. L\. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast- plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting the body on both sides from the neck to the middle, (Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) : Rev. ix. 9, 17 ; ivSieadat T. doipoKa T^s &iKatopaKa nitrreuis, i- e. irlaTiv ws BwpuKci, 1 Th. V. M, (fvbvfO'Oai 8iKaLoo'VVT)v ws SojpaKa, Is. li.\. 1 ' ; ez^S. dwpoKa diKaioavvTjv, Sap. v. 19 (18)).* 295 [I, 1 : on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see Lijisius, Gram. Untersnch. p. 3 sqq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 42, and Index II. s. v. ; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. Vat., praef.'p. xi. sq. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 109 ; \VH. Intr. § 410 ; W. § 5, 4 ; B. pp. U, 44 sq., 09 ; and s. vv. aflcpos, (i^of, 'Upv^vs etc., Trpor, 1) : Mt. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3 ; Gal. i. 19 (where el /xij is employed ace. to a usage illustrated under el, HI. 8 c. ^.) ; ii. 9, 1 2 ; Acts xii. 1 7 ; xv. 1 3 ; x.xi. 18; 1 Co. XV. 7 (?) ; Jas. i. 1, the leader of the Jewish Christians, and by them surnamed 6 SUaios t/ie Just, the overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to the year 62 or 63 (or ace. to Hegesippus in Euseb. h. e. 2, 23 [trans, in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly- probable [see Heinichen's note ad loc.]), in which year he suffered martyTdom, Joseph, antt. 20, 9, 1. In opposi- tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in B. D. s. v. James], which identifies this James with James the son of Alphaeus, and understands 6 d8eX. 138 sqq. ; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq. ; ISieffert in. Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq. ; and reff. s. v. dSeXipos, 1 (esp. Bp. Lghtft.)]. 4. An unknown James, father of the apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to the opinion of those interpreters who think that not dSfX0di/ but vlov must be suppUed in the phrase 'lovBav 'loKoi^ov ; see 'loiSas, 8. l'a|jia. -TOf, TO, (Idopiai) ; 1. a means of healing, rem- ed;i, medicine; (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hdt. 3, 130; Thuc. 2, 51 ; Polvb. 7, 14, 2 ; Plut., Lcian., al). 2. a heal- ing: plur.,' 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30 ; (Jer. .xl. (xx.xiii.) 6, etc. ; Plat. legg. 7 p. 790 d.).* ■laiiPp^s, d. and d "lawfis [cf. B. 20 (18)], Jambres (for which the Vulg. seems to have read Mafi^ptjs. as in the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menach. c. 9 in the Ge- mara; cf. Buxtorf, Lex. Tahn. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed. Fischer]), and Jannes, two Egyptian magicians who in the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron in order to destroy his influence with the king : 2 Tim. iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de- rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists and the Kabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and JambresJ. ^lavvd 296 tdiiof These Jlagi are mentioned not only in tlic tract of the Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ. of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 1 1 ; the book Sohar on Num. xxii. 22 ; Numenius ntpX TciyaBni in Orig. c. Cels. 4, 51 ; Eu.seb. praep. evang. 9, 8 ; Evang. Nicod. c. 5, and other writ, enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. apocr. p. 552 sq. ; [and Wetstein on 2 Tim. 1. c. ; Iloltzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].* 'lawd, (L T Tr AVH 'lawai) ; Jonnai, Vulg. Janne [Tdf. t.\t. (cod. Amiat.) Idiiiiae^, indecl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 24.* Tavvris, 6, see 'lafi^pfis. lda|xai, -u/iat; [perh. fr. tos. Lob. Technol. p. 157 sq. ; cf. Vanicek p. 87] ; a depon. verb, whose pros., impf. laitrjv, fut. laaofiai, and 1 aor. mid. laaafirjv have an act. signif., but whose ])f. pass, lafmi, 1 aor. pass. id6r]v, and I fut. pass, ladrjaoiiai have a pass, signif. (cf. Kriiger § 40 S. V. ; [ Veitch s. v. ; B. 52 (46) ; W. § 38, 7 c.]) ; [fr. Horn, down]; Sept. for K3T; to heal, cure: nvd, Lk. iv. 18 K L br.; v. 17; vi. 19;'ix. 2 [here T WII om. Tr br. the ace.], 11, 42 ; xiv. 4 ; xxii. 51 ; .In. iv. 47 ; Acts i.x. 34 ; X. 38 ; xxviii. 8 ; pass., Mt. viii. 8, 13 ; xv. 28 ; Lk. vii. 7 ; viii. 47; xvii. 15; Jn. v. 1 3 [Tdf . dtrflevoii'] ; and Acts iii. I I Rec. ; Tiva ano nvoi. to cure (i. e. by curing to free) one of [lit./re;n ; cf. B. 322 (277)] a disease: pass., Jlk. V. 29 ; Lk. vi. 18 (17). trop. to make whole i. e. to free from errors and sins, to bring about (one's) salvation: Mt. xiii. 15 ; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; pass., 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; Jas. v. IG ; in fig. discourse, in pass. : Heb. xii. 13.' Tap«8 (T WII 'Idpfr, Lchm. 'ldpe6; [on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), 6, (Ileb. IT descent), Jared, indecl. prop, name ('lapd6i;s ['lape'Sfs, ed. Bekk.] in Joseph, antt. 1, 2, 2), the father of Enoch (Gen. v. 15, 18 ; 1 Chr. i. 2 [here A. V. Jered^) : Lk. iii. 37.* loo-is, -ewf, ^, a healing, cure : Lk. .xiii. 32 ; Acts iv. 22, 30. (Prov. iii. 8 ; iv. 22 ; [Arcliil.], Hippocr., Soph., Plat., Lcian., al.) ' torjTr]s, Tit. i. 12; with airov added, Mk. xv. 20 Tdf. (see above) ; to 'iSia [cf. B. § 1 27, 24], those things in which one differs from others, his nat- ure and personal character, — in the phrase ex rdv i&la>v XaXcii', Jn. viii. 44 ; [cf. the fig. to iSia toO (TapoTos, 2 Co. V. 10 Lmrg. (cf. Trmrg.) ; see Sid, A. I. 2]; iStot, my own : rais ISiats x^P"'' (unassisted by others), 1 Co. iv- IStCOTT)^ 297 IBovfiai'a- 12; thine own: tw tw iSi'o) o0^aX/im, Lk. vi. 41. b. of what pertains to one's property, fainihj, dwelling, country, etc. ; of property, ovbi els ti toiv vnap^ovTcv airio eXeyev ISiov (Ivai, Acts iv. 32 ; to. tSta, res noslrae, our own things, i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 L T Tr WH [cf. B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; rfi I8ia yevea, in his own generation, i. e. in the age in which he Hved, Acts xiii. 3C ; ij Ibia TToKis, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi- tant, Lk. ii. 3 [R G Tr mrg.] ; Bit. ix. 1 ; rfj Ihla hiaXeura, in their native tongue. Acts i. 19 [WHom. Trbr. iSi'a]; ii. G, 8 ; ij lUa Seicndat/jiovia, their own (national) religion, Acts XXV. 19 ; oi iStot, one's own people (Germ. p.ev, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4 ; when a thing is specified which seems impossible and yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41 ; Acts xxvii. 24. The simple i&ov- is the exclamation of one pointing out something, Mt. xii. 2, 47 [WH here in mrg. only] ; xiii. 3 ; xxiv. 26 ; Mk. iii. 32 : Lk. ii. 34 ; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35 [T Tr WH ihe] ; Lk. xxii. 10 ; Jn. iv. 35 ; 1 Co. -xv. 51 ; 2 Co. V. 17; Jas. v. 9; Jude 14; Rev. i. 7; Lx. 12;. xi. 14 ; xvi. 15 ; xxii. 7 [Rec] ; in other places it is i. q. observe or consider: Mt. x. 16 ; xi. 8 ; xix. 27 ; xx. 18 f x.xii. 4 ; Mk. x. 28, 33 ; xiv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 48; vii. 25 ; xviiL 28, 31, etc. ; also Ka\ Ibov, Mt. xxviii. 20 ; Lk. xiii. 30;. Ihoii yap, Lk. i. 44, 48 ; ii. 10 ; vi. 23 ; .xvii. 21 ; Acts Lx. 11 ; 2 Co. vii. 11; Iboi where examples are adduced: Jas. iii. 4 sq. ; v. 4, 7, 1 1 ; for the Hebr. 'Jjn, so that it includes the copula : Lk. i. 38 ; i. q. here 1 am : Acts ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. (Soii is inserted in the midst of a speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. '\hnv (see the Comm.)]; Lk. xiii. 16; Acts ii. 7 ; xiii. 11; xx. 22, 25. The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which are quoted in the New are these : Mt. i. 23 ; xi. 10 ; xii. 18; xxi. 5 ; Jlk. i. 2 ; Lk. vii. 27 ; Jn. xii. 15 ; Ro. ix. 33 ; Heb. ii. 13 ; viii. 8; x. 7, 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6. Like the Hebr. T\iT\, iSou and koX ibov stand before a nominative which is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in- clude the copula or predicate [cf. B. 139 (121 sq.)] : e. g. ivas heard, Mt. iii. 17; is, is or was here, exists, etc., 3It. xu. 10 LT Tr WH, 41 ; Mk. .xiii. 21 R GL; Lk. v. 12, 18 ; vii. 37 ; xi. 31 ; xiii. 1 1 (R G add rjii) ; xvii. 21 ; xLx. 2, 20; xxii. 38, 47 ; xxiii. 50 ; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec, 27 R G] ; Acts viii. 27, 36 ; 2 Co. vi. 2 ; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8 ; vii. 9 [not L] ; xii. 3 ; xiv. 14; xix. 11 ; xxi. 3; is approaching, Mt. XXV. 6 G L T Tr WH (Rec. adds epxeToi] ; but also in such a way as to have simply a demonstrative force : Mt. xi. lo'; Lk. vii. 34. 'ISovjiaCa, -as. 17, Idumcea, the name of a region be- tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petrjea, inhabited by Esau or Edom (Gen. xxxvi. 30) and his posterity (the Edomites), (Josh. .xv. I, 21; xi. 17; xii. 7). The Edomite's were first subjugated by David; but after IBpd)andcr], not far from Colossa; and Laodicea, now Pamhuck Kiilasi, [for reff. see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1 sq. ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.] : Col. iv. 13.* Upartla [Wll-ri'a ; cf. I, t], -as, ^, (IfpaTfvio), the priest- hoo/l, the office of priest : Lk. i. 9 ; lleb. vii. 5. (Sept. for T\iT\3 ; Aristot. pol. 7, 8 ; Dion. Ilal. ; Boeckh, Inscrr. ii. pp.' 127, 23: 3G3, 27.)» lepdrevpia, -rot, to, (UpaT€vo)), [^priesthood i. e.] a. the (iffirr- of priest. b. the ordir or body of priests (see .dSfX^oTTjf, al)(fia\a(Tla, diaanopa, depanfia) ; SO Christians are called, because they have access to God and offer not external but ' spiritual ' (Tri/fvpariKa) sacrifices : 1 Pet. ii. 5 ; also iepar. fiacriXetov, ib. 9 (after Ex. xLx. 6 Sept.), priests of kingly rank, i. e. exalted to a moral rank and freedom which exempts them from the control of every one but God and Christ. ([Ex. xxiii. 22, etc. ; 2 Mace. ii. 1 7] : not found in prof, auth.) * lepaTcvu; (fr. if pdopai and the verbal adj. ifpards, though this adj. does not occur) ; to be priest, disrharrje the priest's office, be busied in sacred duties : Lk. i. 8. (Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 1 ; Ildian. 5, 6, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.] ; Pau- san., Heliod., Inscrr. [see L. and S.] ; Sept. for jn3.) * 'Itp€iXrophesied from [c] B. c. 627 until the cle- struction of Jerusalem [b. c. 586]. He afterwards de- parted into Egypt, where he appears to have died ; [cf. B. D. s. V. Jeremiah, 1. 6] : Mt. ii. 1 7 ; xvi. 14 ; xxvii. 9 (in the last pass, his name is given by mistake, for the words quoted are found in Zeeh. xi. 12 sq. ; [cf. Prof. Brown in Journ. of Soc. for Bibl. Lit. and IC.xeg. for Dec. 1882, p. 101 S(iq. ; Toy, Quot. in X. T. p. 68 sqq. ; for a history of attempted explanations, see Dr. Jas. Morisun, Com. on Mt. 1. c.]).* upevs, -ta>9, 6, (ifpos), [fr. Horn, down], Ilebr. |n3, a priest ; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the priests of the Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13 ; of the ])riests of the Jews, Mt. viii. 4 ; xii. 4 sq. ; Mk. i. 44 ; [ii. 26] ; Lk. i. 5 ; v. 14 ; Jn. i. 19; Heb. vii. [14 L T Tr 'WH], 20 (21) ; viii. 4, etc.; of the hitjh- priest. Acts v. 24 KG (Ex. x.xxv. 18; 1 K. i. 8 ; 1 Mace. xv. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 1) ; and in the same sense Christ is called Upivi in Heb. v. 6 (fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also Upfiis piyas, Ilel). x. 21 (see apxtepfis, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as blending with iep. into a technical or official appellation, but as descriptive, great ; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and brought into close intercourse with God, they devote their life to liim alone (and to Christ) : Rev. i. 6 ; v. 10; XN. IJ, cf. i. o; V. 9. 'IcpiXu (Tdf. 'Up(tx(^ [see his Proleg. p. 8.5; 117/. App. p. lo.i, ands. V. €f, t; AVH 'lep. sec their Intr. §408; on its accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proleg, j). 103]), r/, inded. (on its declens. in other writ. cf. W. § 10, 2 ; in Strabo 'lepiKois -ovvtos ; 'Upixovs, -ovvtos in Joseph., cf. W. 1. c; Ilebr. in'")', fr. n'"\ to smell, so called from its fertility in aromatics), ,/ericho, a noted city, abounding in Ijalsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum ; i;f. Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 33 7; B. D. s. v. Balm], honey, Cyprus [prob. Arab, "el-henna"; cf. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam- pliirc], myrobalanus [Arab. " zukkum "], roses, and other fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the northern shore of the Dead Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin, between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 1 .'>0 stadia from the former and 60 from the latter. Josej)!!. b. j. 4, 8, 3 calls its territory Sflov x<^piov. It is mentioned in the N. T. in Mt. xx. 29 ; Mk. x. 46 ; Lk. x. 30 ; xviii. 35 ; xix. 1 ; Ileb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that reKanai were stationed there, with an a/5;(ireXa)i';;s. for the purjjose of collecting the revenues. For a fuller account of the city see Win. RWB. s. v.; Arnold in Ilerzog vi. p. 494 sq. ; Furrer in Schenkel iii. 209 sq. ; Keim iii. 1 7 sq. [Eng. trans, v. 21 sq. ; BB.DD. s. v. ; cf. also Robinson, Re- searches etc. i. 547 sqq.].* wp69uTos, -ou, (fr. Upos and 6vo>, cf. tiSwXo^uror), sac- rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods ; as in Plut. s_\Tnp. 8, 8, 3 init., used of the//e.i;o). Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com- posed of E'lT' possession, and chu, so that it signifies tran- quil possession, habitation of peace ; but the matter is very imcertain and conjectures vary; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 628 sq. ; [B. D. s. v.] ; on the earlier name of the city see below in Sakrjp ; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [Vulg. e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. xxiii. 37 ; but esp.] in the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma, -ae, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1, 3]), — Jerusalem [A. V. Hierusalem and lerusalemi, the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin and Judah, in a region so elevated that avafiaiveiv, vhy, to go up, fitly describes the approach to it from any quarter. The name is used in the X. T. 1. to de- note, either the city itself, Mt. ii. 1 ; Mk. iii. 8 ; Jn. i. 19, etc. ; or its inhabitants, Mt. ii. 3 ; iii. 5 ; xxiii. 3 7 ; Lk. xiii. 34. 2. ^ vvv 'Upovcr. [Me Jerusalem that now is'\, with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic svstem, so designated from its primary external location. Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted ^ avm 'Up. (after the rabbin, phrase nSi'^D biO D'StyiT, Jerusalem that is above, i. e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which the earthly Jerusalem nao Siy Q'SsyiT was supposed to be bmlt [cf. Schottgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), i. e. metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing the form of the church, but after Christ's return to put on the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom. Gal. iv. 26 ; 'Ifpouo-. €TTovpavios, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heav- enlv abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens of which true Christians are to be regarded while still liv- ini: on earth, Heb. xii. 22 ; fi Kaivrj 'Up. in the visions of John 'the Revelator,' the neic .Jerusalem, a splendid visi- ble citv to be let down from heaven after the renovation of the world, the future abode of the blessed : Eev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10. 'l€poiro\v(i£TT|s [Tdf. -pelTrjs, see «i, t ; WH 'ifpoo-oXv- /iciTjjs, see their Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, a citizen or inhabitant of Jerusalem : Jlk. i. 5 ; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 17, etc.]* lepo-o-vXe'u, -to ; (UpoavXos, q. v.) ; to commit sacrilege. /epoffuXos 300 to rob a temple : Ro. ii. 22, where the mcnninr; is, ' thou who abhorrest idols and their contiiiuination, dost yet not hesitate to plunder their shrines ' ; ef. Fritzsche [and Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) * UpioTiXos, -ov, (fr. Upov and ), >/uilt;/ o/ sacrilege : Acts xix. 37 [A. V. rubbers of temples; cf. Bp. Lf/hlft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.]. (2 Jlaec. iv. 42; Arstph., Xon., Plat., Polyb., Died., al.) • Upoup'ycu, -a ; (fr. if povpyos, and this fr. itpuf and EPrQ) ; to be busied with sacred lliint/s ; to perform sacred rites, (Philo, Ildian.) ; used esp. of persons sacrificing (Joseph, antt. 7, 13, 4, etc.) ; trans, to minister in the man- ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: tov vofiov, of those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing a violent death, 4 Mace. vii. 8 ; to dayyeXiov, of the preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. Ki (where Fritzsche treats of tlio word fully; [cf. W. 2-_'2 sq. (2o;))]).* *l€pou see ayadaicrvvj], init.], -i/s, fj, ('i(pos), priesthood, the priestly office: Ilcb. vii. 11 f^i[. 14 KG, 24. (Sir. xlv. 24 ; 1 Esdr. v. 38 ; 1 Mace. ii. 54 ; iii. 49 ; 4 Mace. V. 34 ; Hdt., Plat., Dem., Diod., Joseph., Plut, Hdian., ah)* 'l€ TOLOvTta f] fTnTipla avrrj, sc. cVti, ^ulli- cient ... is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6 ; after the Lat. idiom satisfacere alicui, to ik. iroiciv tivi, to take away from one every ground of complaint [A. V. to content'], Mk. XV. 15 (Polyb. 32, 7, 13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. ToU. [§ 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.] ; Diog. Laert. 4, 50) ; t4 (K. \ap^dva> (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either by accepting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until the case had been decided). Acts xvii. 9. b. suffi- cient in ability, i. e. meet, fit, (Germ, tiichtig [A. V. irorthy, able, etc.]) : vpos n. for something, 2 Co. ii. 10 ; foil, by an inf. [B. 260 (223 s,].)], Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7 ; Lk. iii. 16 ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; foil. by tm with subjune. [B. 240 (207) ; cf. W. 335 (314)] : Mt. viii. 8 ; Lk. vii. 6.* UaviTTis, -i]Tos, rj, sufficiency, ability or competency to lid a thing : 2 Co. iii. 5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll.; [al.].)* Uavou, -w : 1 aor. Udvaaa ; (Ikovos) ; to make suffi- cicnl, render fit ; with two ace, one of the obj. the other of the predicate : to equip one with adequate power to perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. G ; tivu. iii ti, Col. i. 12. [Sept. ; Dion. Hal, al] * iKerr)pco<; 301 'IWvpiKOV iKeT^ipios, -a, -ov, (iKerrjs a suppliant), pertaining to a suppliant, fit for a suppliant; rj iKfrrjpia, as subst., sc. Aala or pdBSos ; 1. anolive-hrunch; for suppliants approached the one whose aid they would implore hold- ing an olive-branch entwined with white wool and fillets, to signify that they came as supphants [cf. Trench § li. sub fin.] : Xa/x/Safeii/ iKerrjpiav, Ildt. 5, 51 ; iKeTripiav riBi- vm or Trpo^aWfaBai. vapa Tivi, etc. 2. i. q. iKetria, supplication (Isocr. p. 186 d. var. ; Polyb. ; 2 Mace. ix. 18): plur. joined with SfijCTftf (Polyb. 3, 112, 8; sing. Job xl. 22 Sept.), Heb. v. 7.* tK(j.as, -dSos, T), moisture : Lk. viii. G. (Sept. Jer. xvii. 8; liom. II. 17, 392; Joseph, antt. 3, 1, 3, and often in other auth.) * 'Ikoviov, -ov, to, Iconium, a celebrated city of Asia Minor, which in the time of Xen. (an. 1, 2, 19) was 'the ' last city of Phrygia,' afterwards the capital of Lycaonia (Strab. 12 p. 568; Cic. ad divers. 15, 4); now Konia j[or Konieh'] : Acts xiii. 51 ; xiv. 1, 19, 21 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11. Cf. Overbeck in Schenkel iii. 303 sq. ; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. ; Leicin, St. Paul, i. 144 sqcp].* i\ap6s, -a, -ov, (iXaor propitious), cheerful, joyous, prompt to do anything: 2 Co. ix. 7; Prov. xix. 12 ; xxii. « ; Sir. xiii. 26 (25) ; xx\ i. 4 ; 3 Mace. vi. 35 ; Arstph., Xen., al.* IXaponis, -r]TOi, fj, cheerfulness, readiness of mind : Ro. xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22 ; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noe § 40), Plut., al.] ; Acta Thom. § 14.) * i\d(rKO)iai ; (see below) ; in class. Grk. the mid. of an act. iXao-KM Qo render propitious, appease) never met •with; 1. to render propitious to one's self, to ap- pease, conciliate to one's self (fr. iXaor gracious, gentle) ; fr. Horn, down ; mostly w. ace. of a pers., as 6e6v, 'Aflij- vrjv, etc. (tox d(6v iKdcracrdai, Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 5) ; very rarely w. ace. of the thing, as Trjv opyijv, Plut. Cat. min. 61 (with which cf. e'^iKdcrKfadai. 6vii6v, Prov. xvi. 14 Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to hecome propitious, be placated or appeased ; in 1 aor. impv. iKdirBrjTi,, he pro- pitious, he gracious, he merciful, (in prof. auth. iXjjSt and Dor. TKaBi, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an unused verb XKrjpi., to be propitious ; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sp. ii. p. 206 ; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 839; Passow [or L. and S., or Veitch] s. v. IXrjpi), with dat. of the thing or the pers. : Lk. xviii. 13 (rmr dpaprlaLs, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 9 ; [bixvii. (Ixxviii.) 3.s] ; rij ajxapria, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 1 1 ; iXdadrj u Kvpws Trepi rrjs Kaxias, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex. ; l\acT6rj(rfTm Kvp. tw 8ov\(o v ^^wy iXaer^oC /cai xapiarriptav Sfopfmjv, vit. Camill. 7 fin. ; iroietcrdai iXairpov, of a priest offering an expia- tory sacrifice, 2 Mace. iii. 33). 2. in Alex, usage the means of appeasing, a propitiation : Pliilo, alleg. leg. iii. § 61 ; ■Kpoaolcovaiv iKacrpov, for riSQn, Ezek. xliv. 27 ; Trepl Tail dpapTiav, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2 ; iv. 10, (lepior Tov Watrpov, Num. v. 8 ; [cf. rjpepa r. Diaapov, Lev. xxv. 9]; also for nn'Sp, forgiveness, Ps. oxxix. (cxxx.) 4; Dan. ix. 9 Theo'dot.). [Cf. Trench § Lxxvii.]* tXacTT^pios, -a, -ov, (iXao-xo/xat, q. v.), relating to ap- peasing or expiating, hacing placating or expiating force, expiatory : pvrjpa iXatrrljpiov, a monument built to propi- tiate God, Joseph, antt. 16, 7, 1 ; 'CKacrrrfpws ddvaTOs, 4 Mace. xvii. 22 ; x^ipas iKiTqpiovs, fl (BovXcl Se IXaorr)- piovs, fKTfivas 6fa, Niceph. in act. S.S. ed. Mai, vol. v. p. 335, 17. Neut. j-6 IXaa-Trjpiov, as subst., a means of appeasing or expiating, a propitiation, (Germ. Versoh- nungs- oder Siihnmittel) ; cf. W. 96 (91); [592 (551)]. So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of the people, the loss of which they had merited by their sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the victim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased and their sins were expiated) ; hence the lid of expia- tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propitiatorium ; Luth. Gna- denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seat'] : Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv. 18 sqq. ; Lev. xvi. 2, etc. ; more fully iXaa-Trjpwv iiriBepa, Ex. xxv. 1 7 ; xxxviii. (xx.xvii.) 7 (6), for the Hebr. n^i)3, fr. 133 to cover, sc. sins, i. e. to pardon). Theod- oret, Theophyl., Oecum., Luther, Grotius, Tholuck, Wilke, Phihppi, Umbreit, [Cremer (4te Aufl.)] and others crive this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz. that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly that which the cover or ' mercy-seat ' had been typi- cally, i. e. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, Tan Plengel, [Godet, Oltramare] and others ad loc. 2. an expiatory sacrifice; a piacidar victim (Vulg. propitia- tio) : Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words x^p^- o-rripia sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-offerings, a-airqpia sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 355 ed. Reiske, the reference is not toasacrifice but to a m o u u m c n t, as the preceding words show : xaraXf I'l/^fii' yap aiiTovs avddr]pa KdXKia-Tov «ai piyiCTTOv TJj 'Adrjva Koi eniypd- \jf€tv, i\a(rrrjpiov 'Axatoi rrj 'iXmSi)- [See the full discus- sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. Exposition of the Thu-d Chap, of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]* atus, -av, (Attic for iXaos [cf. W. 22], fr. Horn. down), propitious, merciful : tiropai. tX. Tois dSiKiais, i. e. I will pardon, Heb. viii. 1 2 ; Jor. xxxviii. (x.xxi.) 34 ; xhii. (xxxvi.) 3 ; also toU apapriait. 1 K. viii. 34 ; 2 Chr. vi. 25, 27, etc.; iXttis iroi, sc. eorw [or e'ri, B. § 129, 22] o 6f6s, i. e. God avert this from thee, Jit. xvi. 22 ; Sept. for nS'Sn foil, by S, he it far from one, 2 S. xx. 20 ; xxiii. 17.* 'IXXvpiKiv, -ov. TO, Illyricum, a region lying between Italy, Germany, Macedonia and Thrace, having on one lfiaova-iv') ; [xiii. 1 7 WII mrg.] ; cf. W. § 41 b. 1 c. ; B. § 139, 39 ; Jleyer on 1 Co. iv. 6 ; Wieseler on Gal. iv. 17; [Soph. u. s.]. (In the earlier Grk. writ. 2va is joined with the indie, of the past tenses alone, 'to denote something which would have been, if something else had been done, but now has not come to pass ' Her- mann ad Vig. p. 847, cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 630 sq. ; Kuhner § 553, 7 ii. 903 ; [Jelf § 813 ; cf. Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson's Modern Greek, § 79].) e. the final sentence is preceded by jireparatory demon- strative expressions [W. § 23, 5] : ds tovto, to this end, Jn. xviii. 37 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 21 ; iii. 9 ; iv. 6, (Barn. ep. 5, 1, 11 ; [14, 5]) ; «? airo ToiiTo, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; 8ia tovto, Jn. i. 31 ; 2 Co. xiii. 10 ; Philem. 15 ; 1 Tim. i. 16 ; tovtov x^P'^i Tit. i. 5. 2. In later Grk., and esp. in Hellenistic writers, the final force of the particle Iva is more or less weakened, so that it is frequently used where the earlier Greeks employed the Infinitive, yet so that the leading and the dependent sentence have each its own subject. The first e.xtant instance of this use occurs in the Amphic- tyonic decree in [pseudo-] Dem. p. 279, S [i. e. de coron. § 155] : Trpecr^eucrai npos ^tXiTrnov Kat d^Loirv Iva ^orjdrjcrj, [cf. Odyss. 3, 327 XiVtreo-flai . . . Iva VTjptpTfs (vlaTrrj (cf. 3, 19)], but it increased greatly iij subsequent times ; cf. "W. § 44, 8 ; B. 237 (204) ; [Green 171 sq. ; Goodwin § 45 N. 5 b. ; Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson's Modern Greek, § 55]. Accordingly "va stands with the subjunc^ in such a way that it denotes the purport (or object) rather than the purpose of the action expressed by the preceding verb. This occurs a. after verbs of caring for, deciding, desiring, striving: /3Xe- n€tv, 1 Co. xvi. 10 ; Col. iv. 1 7 ; 2 Jn. 8 ; fi)T<3, 1 Co. iv. 2 ; xiv. 1 2 ; , Mt. vii. 12 ; :Mk. vi. 25 ; ix. 30 ; x. 35 ; Lk. vi. 31 ; so that it alternates with the inf., 1 Co. xiv. 5 ; Si8api, to r/rant, that, Mk. x. 37 ; Rev. ix. 5, etc. ; noia. Rev. xiii. 1 2 [here L T Tr WH indie, fut. (cf. 1 c. above)]. b- after verbs of saying (commanding, asking, exhorting; but by no means after KeXcwii/ [cf. B. 275 (236)]) r dneiv, in the sense of to bid, Mt. iv. 3 ; Mk. iii. 9 ; Lk. iv. 3 ; also Xeyeiv, Acts xix. 4 ; 1 Jn. v. 1 6 ; ippfi^r]. Rev. vi. 1 1 [WH indie, fut.] ; i.x. 4 [LTTrmrg.AVH indic.fut. (see 1 c. above)] ; Stapapripopat, 1 Tim. v. 21 (otherwise [viz. telic] in Lk. xvi. 28) ; ipaTui, to ask, beseech, Mk. vii. 26 ; Lk. vii. 36 ; xvi. 27 ; Jn. iv. 47 ; xvii. 15, 21 ; xix. 31 ; 2 Jn. 5 ; -napaKaXa, Mt. xiv. 36 ; Mk. v. 10, 18 ; vii. 32 ; viii. 22; Lk. viii. 32 ; iCo. i. 10; xvi. 12, 15 sq.; 2 Co. viii. 6 ; ix. 5 ; xii. 8 ; 1 Tb. iv. 1 ; 2 Th. iii. 1 2, (Joseph, antt. 12, 3, 2) ; irpoa-evxnpai [q. v.], Mt. xxiv. 20 ; jNIk. [xiii. 18] ; xiv. 35 ; Seopat, Lk. L\. 40 ; xxii. 32, (Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 83) ; e-niTipm, Jit. xii. 1(5 ; [xvi. 20 L WH txt.]; XX. 31; Mk. iij. 12; viii. 30; x. 48; Lk. xviii. 39 r ivTfWopai., Mk. xiii. 34 ; Jn. xv. 1 7 ; evToXrjv SiSapi or \apl3dvQ), Jn. xi. 57; xiii. 34 ; xv. 12; ypd^a, with the involved idea of prescribing, Mk. ix. 12 [cf. W. 462 (430) and the txt. of L T] : .xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28; Sia- (TTeWopai, Mt. xvi. 20 [L WII txt. fwiTipw (see above)]; Mk. V. 43 ; vii. 36 ; ix. 9 ; napayyiWa, Mk. vi. 8 [cf. W. 578 (538)] ; avvrldepai, Jn. ix. 22 ; dyyapeiai, Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. XV. 21 ; Kripiirato, Mk. vi. 12; dirayyeWa, Mt. xxviii. 10; c'^opKif"), Mt. xxvi. 63. [For exx. (of its use with the above verbs and others) drawn from the later Grk. writ, see Sophocles, Glossary etc. § 88, 1.] c. after words by which judgment is pronounced con- cerning that which some one is about to do (or which is going to happen), as to whether it is expedient, be- fitting, proper, or not; as avprpfpei, Mt. xviii. 6; v. 29 sq. ; Jn. xi. 50 ; xvi. 7 ; XvtrixcXf 1. Lk. .xvii. 2 ; apxeTov icrn, Mt. X. 25; also after a^tos, Jn. i. 27; Uavos, Mt. viii. 8 ; Lk. vii. 6 ; cXa'xioToV pol iartv, tva, 1 Co. iv. 3 ; TjyaWida^aTo, Iva iSi;, Jn. viii. 56 ; )(pfiav ?;(, Jn. xviii. 39 ; after /uaOoi, 1 Co. i.\. 18. e. it looks back to a de- monstrative pronoun; of. AV. 338 (.317); [B. § 139, 45] : noBev fioi tovto, tva fXfli; ktK. for to eXBflv t^v etc. Lk. i. 43 ; esp. in John, cf. vi. 29, 50 ; xv. 13 ; xvii. 3 [here T Trtxt. indie. ; see 1 d. above] ; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23 ; V. 3; 2 Jn. 6; Phil. i. 9; t'v tovto), Jn. xv. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 17. (dfov §€ TO dvtfaTotf fv Tfwrta biiKwrat, ifa . . . «^ ovk oinav iroi;i ra yivofifi/a, 'rhe()|ilul. ad Autol. 2, 13; after ToSe, Epict. diss. 2, 1, 1 ; [other exx. in Soph. Lex. S.V.G]). 3. According to a very ancient tenet of the gramma- rians, accepted by Kiihner, § 553, 2 Anm. 3; [T. S. Green, N. T. Gram. p. 172 sq.'], and not utterly rejected by A lex. Bllm. N. T. Gr. p. 238 stj. (206), Iva is alleged to be used not only TfXiKis, i. e. of design and end, but also frequently «^aTiicMs, i. c. of the result, signifying with the issue, that; with the result, that; so that (etpuv. to SxTTc). But C. F. A. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 836 s(i(i. and Win. 338 (317) and 457 (426) sqq. have clearly shown, that in all the passages adduced from the N. T. to prove this usage the telic (or final) force prevails: thus in Iva liTj \v6fi 6 vofios M(i)V(T(os, that the law of Moses may not be broken (which directs a man to be circumcised on the eighth and on no other day), Jn. vii. 23 ; ouk coTc €v (TKoTf I, 7va f] f]fxfpa vfias • • . KaraXa^ij, that the day should overtake you (cf. the final force as brought out by turning the sentence into the pass, form in Germ, um )!om Tage erfasst zu werderi), I Th. v. 4 ; npoinvxea-da, «ra diepfiTivcvrj, let him ])ray (intent on this, or with this aim), that (subsequently) he may interpret, 1 Co. xiv. 13; likewise eirevdrja-are, Iva etc. 1 Co. v. 2, and fifrfvorf aav, Iva iirj. Rev. ix. 20; fierddfo-tv, . . . iva etc. that the change may be to this end, that etc. Heb. xii. 27 ; "iva fifj . . . TroirJTf. that ye may not do. Gal. v. 1 7 (where ij aap^ and TO trvfi'iia are personified antagonistic forces con- tending for dominion over the will of the Christian ; cf. Wieseler ad loc.) ; the words Iva . . . payfi ktX. in Ro. iii. 19 describe the end aimed at by the law. In many passages where 'va has seemed to interpreters to be used tK^aTiKws, the sacred writers follow the dictate of p i e t y, which bids us trace all events back to God as their au- thor and to refej- them to God's purposes (./o. Dama- scen. orthod. fid. 4, II) (6oi tjj ypa(pfj. riva (KfiariKun 6<^eLKovTa Xeyeadat, alTto\oyiKois Xfydv) ; so that, if we are ever in doubt whether iva is used of design or of result, we can easily settle the question when we can interpret the passage ' that, by God's decree,' or ' that, according to divine purpose' etc.; passages of this sort are the following: Mk. iv. 12; Lk. ix. 45; xi. 50; xiv. 10; Jn.iv. 36; ix. 2; xii. 40; xix. 28; Ro. v. 20; vii. 13; viii. 17; xi. 31sq.; iCo. vii. 29; 2Co. iv. 7; vii. 9; also the phrase tva 7rX?7pm5j, wont to be used in refer- ence to the O. T. prophecies : Mt. i. 22 ; ii. 15 ; iv. 14 ; xii. 1 7 L T Tr WH ; xxi. 4 ; xxvi. 56 ; xxvii. 35 Rec. ; Jn. xiii. 18 ; xvii. 12 ; xl\. 24, 36 ; 2va nXrjpad^ 6 Xo'-yos, Jn. xii. 38; xv. 2.5, cf. xviii. 9, 32. [Cf. Win. 461 (429). Prof. Sophocles although giving (Lex. s. v. iva, 19) a co- pious collection of ex.\. of the ecbatic use of the word, defends its telic sense in the phrase Iva jrXijp., by calling attention not merely to the substitution of Sir mi TtKrip. in Jit. viii. 17; xiii. 35, (cf. ii. 23), but esp. to 1 Esdr. i. 54 (tij avaTr\!]pu>aiv pj]paTos roi nxiplnv iv (TTopari '\(pf plov) : ii. 1 (elt (TvvrfXtiai' p!]paT0t Kvp. ktX.) ; 2 Esdr. i. 1 (^Toi TeXeaBqvai \6yov Kvpiov dno O'TopUTOs Ifpepiov) ; Jo- sepli. antf. 8, 8, 2 lin. Taiira fi' inpaTreTo Kara tjjv tou Bfoii jiovXrjiTiv Iva Xd(3.7 tcXos ii 7rpof(j>i]TeviTev \\)(ias ', <'f. Bib. Sacr. '61 p. 729 S(j(i. ; Lutliardt's Zeitschr. '83 p. 632 sq(i.] 4. The elliptical use of the particle; a. the telic Tea often depends on a verb not expressed, but to be repeated or educed from the context (cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq. ; W. 316 (297) ; [B. § 139, 47]) : dXX' (sc. TJ\6(v, cf. vs. 7) iva paprvpfjar), Jn. i. 8; dXX' (sc. iyiveTO d7TuKpv(}}ov} iva els (jiavepov e\&rj, iMk. iv. 22 ; aXX (sc. KpaTf'tTf /if) 2va etc. ^Ik. xiv. 49 ; add, Jn. xv. 25 ; 1 Jn. ii. 19. b. the weakened iva (see 2 above) with the subjunc. (or indie, fut. [cf. 1 c.]. Rev. xiv. 13 L T Tr WH) denotes something which one wishes to be done by another, so that before the ti/o a verb of commanding (exhprting, wishing) must be mentally supplied, (or, as is commonly said, it forms a periphrasis for the imperative): iva . . . iiridjis rds ;^€lpaj avTJj, Blk. v. 23; fj yvvrj Iva (jn'ifirjTai Tov "tvhpa, Kph. V. 33 ; Gal. ii. 10; add 2 Co. viii. 7 ; "iva dva- navaavTai [LTTrWH -TrarjcrovTai (see avaTtaia init.)], (ienn. sie sollen ruhen [A. V. that they may rest etc.], Rev. xiv. 13; [perh. also Col. iv. 16, cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc], (2 Jlacc. i. 9 ; Epict. ench. 23 (17) ; diss. 4, 1, 41 ; among the earlier Greeks once so, Soph. O. C. 155 ; in Latin, Cic. ad divers. 14, 20 'ibi ut sint omnia parata'; in Germ, stern commands: 'dass dugehestl' ' dass du nicht saumest ! ' cf. AV. § 43, 5 a. ; [B. 241 (208)]). c. iva without a verb following, — which the reader is left to gather from the context ; thus we must mentally sup- ply evayy(\i(a>pe6a, evayyfXl^oivrai in Gal. ii. 9, cf. >V. 587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; iva koto x^P'"' ^'^- V' t''** the promise maybe a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [AV. 598 (556) ; B. 392 (336)] ; Iva oXXois iiveais sc. yivi)Tai, 2 Co. viu. 13 [W. 586 (545) ; B. § 129, 22] ; Iva sc. yivrirai, 1 Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco- luthon [AV. 599 (557); B. 234 (201)]: Iva . .. KavxaaBa, for Kavxarai. {tva ois avdpanros, sc. e'pydfi;, Epict. diss. 3, 23, 4.) 5. Generally ira stands first in the final sentence; sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in which the main force of the sentence lies [AV. 550 (511) ; B. §151, 18] : Acts xix. 4 ; Ro. xi. 31 (join tm vperipcf Ae'« tva) ; 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [R G] ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; xii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 10; r& XoOTw 'iva ktX. 1 Co. vii. 29 Rec."' '" L T. Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke more rarely, than the rest: [on Jn.'s use see AV. 338 (317) sq.; 461 (430); B. 236 (203); 244 (210) note; § 140, 10 and 12; on Luke's cf. B. 235 sq. (203)]. It is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Scliaeffer's reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy's) ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488.] tva Tt 305 'JouSato? Iva tC [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exc. (by mistake?) in Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly Ivarl [so Rec.'"'" G T uniformly ; see W. §5,2]; Lat. ut ([uid i i. e. for what j)urpose ? loherefore ? whij f an elliptical formula, due to the fact that a questioner begins an answer to his own .question with the word Iva, but not knowing how to com- plete it reverts again to the question, as if to ask what will complete the answer: that (what?) may or miyltt happen, (ut (quid ?) fiat or fieret) ; see Herm. ad Vig. p. 847; Kuhner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25, 1 fin.; [B. § 149, 2] : Mt. ix. 4 ; xxvii. 46 ; Lk. xiii. 7 ; Acts iv. 25 ; vii. 26 ; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6 ; XXV. 32 ; xxvii. 46 ; Num. xiv. 3 ; xxii. 32 [Aid.] ; Judg. vi. 13 [Ale.x.,Ald.,Compl.] ; 1 S. i. 8 ; 2 S. iii. 24 ; xv. 19 ; Job iii. 12; x. 18; Jer. ii. 29; xiv. 19; xv. 18; Dan. x. 20 [Theodot.] ; Ps. ii. 1 ; x. 1 (ix. 22) ; xxi. (xxii.) 2, ■etc.; Sir. xiv. 3; 1 Mace. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192; Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 c; al.) * 'Idirn-r) (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra- phers prefer 'Uirr), cf. Movers, Phbnizier, ii. 2 p. 176 Anm.),-7;9, 17, (Hebr. ijj' i. e. beauty, fr. r\2\ to shine, be beautiful; [al. make the name mean 'an eminence'; al. al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean, lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim. It was subject to the Jews from the time of the Macca- bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car- ried on a flourishing trade ; now Yafa (not Jaffa) : Acts ix. 36, 38, 42 sq. ; x. 5, 8, 23,32; xi. 5, 13. Cf. Win. RWB. ■s. V. Joppe ; EUetscki in Herzog vii. p. 4 sq. ; Fritzsche in Schenkel iii. 376 sq. ; [BB.DD.]. * •lopSdviis, -ov [B. 17], 6 [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (pv, fr. Ti; to descend ; for other opinions about the origin of the ^ame see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.'s Kitto s. v. -Jordan]), the Jordan, the largest and most celebrated river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor- rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon, flows at iirst into Lake Samochonitis (Merom so-called; [mod. el-Huleh; see BB.DD. s. v. Merora (Waters of)]), and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented during its course by many sm.aller streams, and finally empties into the Dead Sea : Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13 ; iv. 15, 25 ; xix. 1 ; Mk. i. 5, 9 ; iii. 8 ; x. 1 ; Lk. iii. 3 ; iv. 1 ; Jn. i. 28 ; iii. 26 ; x. 40 ; cf . Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. Jordan ; Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq. ; Furrer in Schenkel iii. p. 378 sqq. ; {Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land, pp. 144-186].* Ws, -oO, o, (on its very uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591 ; [Vanicek p. 969]) ; 1. poison (of animals) : lo? do-Trt'Scoi' xmb ra x^^^l avT&v, the poison of asps is under their lips, spoken of men given to reviUng and calumniating and thereby injuring others, Ro. iii. 13 (fr. Ps. cxxxix. (cxl.) 3 (4)) ; by the same fig. (yXSicra-a) iietrTT] lov davaTri6pov, Jas. iii. 8 ; (in Grk. writ, fr. Find. down). 2. ntst : Jas. v. 3 ; (Ezek. xxiv. 6. 11 sq. ; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24) ; Theogn., Theocr., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Lcian., al.).* 'lovSa, (see 'loiJSas-, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop. 20 name ; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang from him. 3. the region which this tribe occupied (cf.W. 114 (108)); so in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice) ; ttoXis 'louSa (Judg. xvii. 8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a matter of dispute w h a t city is meant ; the most probable conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, — a city assigned to the priests, situated ' in the hill country ' (Xf/Spojw Iv Tw opct 'loi&a. Josh. .xxi. 11), the native place of John the Baptist ace. to Jewish tradition. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Juda, a City of.]* 'louSaia, -05, 17 [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (sc. y^, which is added Jn. iii. 22, or X'^P", ]\Ik. i. 5 ; fr. the adj. 'louSaiof, q. v.), Judcea (Hebr. mirr) ; in the O. T. a region of Palestine, named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it: Judg. xvii. 7-9 ; Ruth i. 1 sq. ; 2 S. ii. 1, etc. Its bound- aries are laid down in Josh. xv. I sqq. After the time of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer- tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with the metropoUs of Jerusalem: 1 K. xiv. 21, 29 ; xv. 7, etc. In the N. T. the name is given 1. in a narrower sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from Samaria, Galilee, Peraaa, IdumiEa (Mk. iii. 8) : Mt. ii. 1, 5,22; iii. 5; iv. 25; xxiv. 16; Mk. iii. 7; xiii. 14; Lk. ii. 4 ; Jn. iv. 3, 47, 54 ; Acts i. 8; viii. 1, etc. ; it stands for its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5 ; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33 ; XXXV. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to all Palestine : Lk. i. 5 ; [iv. 44 WH Tr mrg.] ; vii. 1 7 ; xxiii. 5 ; Acts ii. 9 ; X. 37 ; xi. 1, 29, (and perh. 2 Co. i. 16 ; Gal. i. 22) ; ■naaa fj x^P" '"i^ 'lovSalas, Acts xxvi. 20; «s xa opia rijs 'lovSaias Trepav Toii 'lopSdvov, into the borders of Judcea (in the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Peraea, Mt. xix. 1 ; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x. 1 R G, cif Ta op. Trji 'louS. 81a toC nipav tov 'lop8., Jesus is said to have come »1/0 the borders ofJuda:a (in the nar- rower sense) thrniKjh Pcraa; but ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH, viz. km Trepav roii 'lop8. and (in particular that part of Juda>a whicli lay) hfijond the Jordan, Mark agrees with Matthew ; [others regard Trepav toC 'lop8. here as parall. with r^t 'louS. and like it dependent upon opta]. 'louSattu; (fr. 'lou8aIof, cf. 'EXXi/wo-tijs [W. 92 (87)]), to adopt Jewish customs and rites, imitate the .lews. Juda- ize : of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal. ii. 14. (Esth. viii. 17 ; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10, 3 ; Evang. Nicod. c. 2 ; Plut. Cic. 7 ; to favor the Jews, Joseph, b. j. 2, 18,2.)* ■JouSatKos, -17, -6v, Jetcish : Tit. i. 14. (2 Jlacc. vm. 11 ; xiii. 21 ; Joseph, antt. 20, 11, 1 ; Philo [in Flac. § 8].)* "lovSatKus, ?idv.,Jcwishly, after the manner of the Jews: Gal. ii. 14. [(Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 3.)] • 'lovSatos, -am, -a'iov, ('loi;8a), [Aristot. (in Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Pint., al. ; Sept. ; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jexcish ; a. joined to nouns, belonging to the Jetcish race : avfip, Acts x. 28 ; xxii. ^lovSalafiK 306 7o 3, (1 JIacc. ii. 23); SvBpanos, Acts xxi. 39; yjftvSonpo- iy jf xai 'lovSmoi, Acts xiv. 5; sing., Ro. i. IG ; ii. 9 ; oi Kara ra (dvr) 'lovhaioi., who live in foreign lands, among the (ren- tiles, Acts xxi. 21 ; 'louSmot is used of converts from Judaism, Jewish Christians (see tdi/os, 5) in Gal. ii. 13. [SvN. 'E/Spaios, 'louSoios, 'Iffpor)AiT5)s: " restricting our- selves to the employment of tliese three words in the N. T. we may say that in the first is predominantly noted language; in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation" (Trench § xxxix.); cf. B.D. s. vv. Hebrew, IsraeUte, Jew.] The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state of things in his day he looked upon the Jews as a body of men hostile to Christianity, with whom he had come to sec that both he and all true Cliristians had nothing in common as respects religious matters, even in his record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis- tinction between the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin- guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter sprang from an alien race : Jn. xi. 8 ; xiii. 33. And those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, cf. vi. 41, 52) opposed his divijie Master and his Master's cause, — esp. the rulers, priests, members of the Sanhe- drin, Pharisees, — he does not hesitate to style oi 'lou- Saioi, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus : i. 19 ; ii. 18, 20; V. 10, 15sq. 18; vi. 41, 52; vii. 1, 11, 13; ix. 18, 22; X. 24, 31, 33 ; xviii. 14. [Cf. Westcott in B.D. s. v. Jew, and Com. on John, Intr. I. i. i. a. sub fin.] 'Iou8o'Cos (Eur. Or. lOlJJ, itrucrrfpor (4 Mace. xvii. 5), and other compounds in Koumanoudes, 'S.vvaycuyq ktX. p. 16G sq.]), like the angels : Lk. xx. 36. (Eccl. writ. ; [cf . Jo-OS dyyeXots yeyovas, Philo de sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 2 ; AY. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100(95)].)* 'Icratrxdp [Rec."'^] and 'la-a^dp [R" G L] (^Icrtrdxap Tdf. , 'lo-o-axdp TrAVH),o, {^y^yp', fr. C?'. there is, aad n3E? a reward [(cf. Jer. .xxxi. 16) ;et cf. Miihlau u. Volck s. v.] ; Joseph, 'laaa-xapis [^ladxapts^), Issachar, the son of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18) : Rev. vii. 7.* to-T))», found only in the Doric form Icrapn, to know; from which some derive the forms tore and "uryLev, con- tracted from '(rare and tcrapev ; but these forms are more correctly derived from eiSoi, lapev i. q. tSp-ev, etc., (cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 548) ; on the phrase tare [Rcore] ytvaxTKovTfs, Eph. v. 5, see yivucKio, I. 2 b. 'lo-KapiuTt]!, and (Lchm. in Mt. x. 4 ; T WII in Jlk. xiv. 10 ; L T Tr WH in Jlk. iii. 19 ; Lk. vi. 16) 'itrKapiad, i. e. n'V")p U^'X ; see 'louSas-, G and ^Ipaiv, 5. ia-os (not lo-os [yet often so R'' ''^ G Tr], which is Epic ; cf. Bornemann, Scholia in Luc. p. 4 ; GottUng, Lehre Tom Accent p. 305 ; [Chandler § 406] ; Lipsius, Gram- mat. Untersuch. p. 24 ; [L. and S. s. v. fin. ; W. 52]), -ij, •ov, equal, in quality or in quantity : f) la-jj Saped, the same gift, Acts xi. 17; icrai paprvpiai, agreeing testimonies, JMk. .xiv. 56, 59 ; to-oi' noielv Tivatrivi, to make one eijual to another, in the payment of wages, Jit. x.\. 12 ; iavrov T<5 dea, to claim for one's self the nature, rank, author- ity, which belong to God, Jn. v. 18 ; ra ta-a airoKa^etv, Lk. vi. 34. The neuters lo-oi» and 1fi).* UroTus, -Tyros, i], (lo-os) ; 1. equality : e| icroTTjTos [cf. (K, V. 3] by equality, 2 Co. viii. 13 (14), i. q. Snais yevrjTcu ia-oTijs, 14. 2. equity, fairness, what is equi- talde, joined with to hUaiov: Col. iv. 1. (Eur., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al. ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c, yet per contra Meyer].) * UroTipLOs, -ov, (lo-or and npij), equally precious ; equally honored : Tivi, to be esteemed equal to, tcroripov ffpXv jrioTtv {a like precious faith with us], concisely for tvLcttiv Tjl rjpoiv TTtoret itroTtfiov [W. § 66, 2 f . ; B. § 133, 10] : 2 Pet. i. 1. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ael., al.)* Iv\a\ Toii 'lap., Mt. xix. 28 ; Lk. xxii. 30 ; Rev. vii. 4. By meton. for the posterity of Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because it made reference to the promises of salvation through the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see 'louSaioj, b.]): Mt. ii. 6; viii. 10; ix. 33 ; Lk. i. 54, 68, 80 ; Acts iv. 8[RG]; Eph. ii. 12; Ro. xi. 2, 7, 26, etc. (E.x. v. 2; xi. 7, and often) ; 6 \a6s 'lap.. Acts iv. 10, 27 ; yf) 'lap. i. e. Palestine [(1 S. xiii. 19, etc.)], Mt. ii. 20 sq. ; ^aai- Xfvf 'lap; Mt. xxvii. 42 ; Jn. i. 49 (50) ; jj eXmt tov 'lap. Acts xxviii. 20 ; 6 'lo-p. tov deov (gen. of possession), i. e. Christians, Gal. vi. 1 6 ; o 'lo-p. Kara adpKa, IsraeUtes by birth, i. e. Jews, 1 Co. x. 18 ; in an emphat. sense, ov yap Trdyrcs ol f| 'Itrp. kt\. for not all those that draw their bodily descent from Israel are true IsraeUtes, i. e. are those whom God pronounces to be Israelites and has chosen to salvation, Ro. i.x. 6. 'Io-pat)XCTT|s (T WII 'lapariXflrqs, Tr only in Jn. i. 47 (48) ; [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 86, and cf. s. v. ei, »]), -ov, S, ('lo-paijX, q. v.), an Israelite (Hebr. ''Sx'ljy' ; Sept. 'lefpa?;- Xi'tijs, 2 S. xvii. 25), one of the race of Israel, a name held in honor (see 'lo-pa^^X) : Jn. i. 47 (48) ; Ro. ix. 4 ; xi. 1 ; 2 Co. xi. 22 ; avSpes 'laparfXirai [W. § 65, 5 d. ; B. 82 (72)], Acts ii. 22; iii. 12; v. 35; xiii. 16; [xxi. 28], (4 Mace, xviii. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 2, 9, 1). [Cf. B. D. (Am. ed.) s. V. .Syn. see 'louSator, b.] * ['I, in the midst, Jn. viii. 3, and iv ru piaa. laTrjfii 308 KTTOpeO) Acts iv. 7; fvoimov nvos, Acts vi. G; before judges: ds avTois, befori' the imMubors of the Sanhcdriii, Acts xxii. 30 ; fV Ta a-vveSp'ia, Acts v. 27 ; «Vi wilh gon. of (he jiulge, pass. aTaBijaeudi, ilk. .xiii. 9 ; Tiva ujiajiov m6v Tivos, to [set one i. e.] cause one to make his a|)i)earanco faultless before etc. Judo 24 ; to place (i. e. designate the ])laee for one to occupy) : iv fiiaa rivaiv, jNIt. xviii. 2 ; Jlk. ix. 3G ; trap iavrif, Lk. ix. 47 ; tie he^iSsv, Mt. xxv. 33 ; «Vi Ti (ace. of place), Mt. iv. 5 ; Lk. iv. 9. Mid. to place one's self, to xiand (Germ, sich hinstellen, Idntreten) : arro liaKpodev, Rev. .xviii. 15 ; likewise in the passive : crafe's, Lk. . xviii. 11, 40; xix. t; \Jv 6vpS>v (at, Germ, an ; cf. above and see t jri, A. I. 2 a.)] ; xii. 14; eiinpoaBiv tivos, before one as judge, Mt. xxvii. 11 ; kvkXw (tivos), around. Rev. vii. 11 : p.i(Tos vficov. in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 2G ; « 8c|iwk Tivos, Lk. i. 11; Acts vii. 55 sq. ; iv p-iaa, Jn. viii. 9 ; Trpos w. ace. (G L T Tr WII w. dat. [see n-pos', II.]) of place, Jn. XX. 11 ; iiTi w. ace. of place (see tVi, C. 1.), jMt. xiii. 2; Rev. iii. 20 ; vii. 1 ; xiv. 1 ; xv. 2 ; cVi Tois irohas, to stand upright, Acts xxvi. IG ; Rev. xi. 11 ; Ttapi w. ace., Lk. v. 2 ; vii. 38 ; tls, Jn. xxi. 4 (L T Tr mrg. WII mrg. cm [see iirl, C. I. 1 d.]) ; «€(, Mt. xxvii. 47 ; Mk. xi. 5 ; Jas. ii. 3 ; &Sf, Mt. xvi. 28 ; xx. G ; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 [here T Tr Wil airoC, q. v.] ; on-ou, Mk. xiii. 14; c^m, ilt.xii. 4G, 47 [here WII in mrg. only]; Mk. iii. 31 ; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; /xaxpo^fi', l^k. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Tr txt.] ; I'mo p.aKp6d(v, Rev. xviii. 10, 17; [Lk. xxiii. 49 L T WII 'I'r mrg. (but djTo in br.)]; TTcip/jco^f»', Lk. xvii. 12. • b. al> solulely; o. to stand by, stand near, (in a place al- ready mentioned, so that the reader readily understands where) : Mt. xxvi. 73 ; Jn. i. 35 ; iii. 29 ; vii. 3 7 ; xii. 29 ; xviii. 18, 25 ; xx. 14 ; Acts xvi. 9 ; xxii. 25 ;' with a ptcp. or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of the one standing) : Mt. xx. 6 ; Lk. .xxiii. 10; Acts i. 11 ; ix. 7 ; .xxvi. G ; opp. to Kadi^eiv, Ileb. ,x. 1 1 sq. p. if what is said to stand had been in motion (walking, flowing, etc.), to stop, stand still : Mt. ii. 9 (Rec. fcrrri, L T Tr WH i•/;< hestanden [A. V. abode not etc.] ; but the Ziirich version correctly, besteht nicht [WH read (o-ttikcv, impf. of ctti/kw, q. V.]) ; iv Trj xdptn, Ro. v. 2 ; iv tu> fiayyf\i(a, 1 Co. -w. 1 ; els ^v (sc. xa/"") icrTTjKaTf, into which ye liave entered, that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v. 1 2 [but L T Tr WH read or^re (2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur.) enter and standfast ; B. § 147, 16, cf. p. 329 (283)]. N. B. From (o-TrjKa is formed the verb o-tijku, which see in its place. [CoMP. : dv-, eTT-av-, i^-av, dv6-, d(j)-, 8i-, iv-, i^, ifx- (-p-at), icj>-, KaT-e(P', crvv-((p-, Kad; dvri-Kad-, djTO-Kad; pe6-, Trap-, Wfpi-, wpo-, (jvvlaTrjpi,.] La-Topc'cii : 1 aor. inf. icrropTJa-ai ; (laTuip [allied with oiSa (iCTTo)), videre (visus), etc. ; Curtius § 282], -opos, one that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in) ; fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. down ; 1. to inquire into, examine, inves- tigate. 2. to find out, learn, by inquiry. 3. to ia-^vpo<; 309 I(oaifV7], indccl., (in Joseph, [e. g. c. Ap. 1, 14, 16; 32, 3 ; 33, 5] 'lucn/TTOf), 6, (^jDf, fr. t]P'^ to add, Gen. xxx. 23 sq. [cf. B. D. s. V. Joseph]), Joseph ; 1. the pa- triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob : Jn. iv. 5 ; Acts vii. 9, 13 sq. 18; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; ^uXij 'laxri?^, i. e. the tribe of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or Jonam], one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 30. 3. the son of Judah [or Judas ; better Joda] another an- cestor of Jesus : Lk. iii. 26 (where L mrg. T Tr WH 'Iw- (r^;(, q. v.). 4. the son of Mattathias, another of the .same: Lk. iii. 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the mother of Jesus : Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 24 ; ii. 13, 19 ; Lk. L 27; ii. 4, 16, 33RL, 43RGLmrg.; iii. 23 ; iv. 22; Jn. i. 45 (46) ; vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord: Mt. .\iii. 55 L T Tr WII (for R G 'lojo^t [q. v. 2]). 7. Joseph of Arimathcea, a member of the Sanhedrin, who favored Jesus : Mt. xxvii. 57, 59 ; Mk. xv. 43, 45 ; Lk. xxiii. 50 ; Jn. xix. 38. 8. Joseph, surnamed Bapra- /3at (q. V.) : Acts iv. 36 L T Tr WH (for R G 'loxr^s [q. V. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsahas [better Barsab- bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23. [See 'laa-rjs, 3.] "IiDCTTix.) Josech, see 'Imcrijc^, 3. 'Iwo-Cas (LTTrWII 'loxrfi'as [see WH. App. p. 155; s. V. ei, i]), -ou, o, (in'TO' i. e. whom 'Jehovah heals'), Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one years was slain in battle c. B. c. 611 (2 K. xxii. sq. ; 2 Chr. xxxiv. sq.) : Mt. i. 10 sq.* tura, TO, iota [A. V. jot^, the Hebr. letter % the small- est of them all ; hence equiv. to the minutest part : Mt. V. 18. [Cf. I, I.] * K Ka-yw [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the Kayw etc. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Vig. p. 52G ; W. § 5, 4 a. ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4 ; cf. I, t)], (by crasls fr. Koi iyi) [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi. 15 T ; Lk. ii. 48 WH; xvi. 9 T Tr WH ; Acts x. 26 T Tr WH ; xxvi. 29 WH, etc. ; cf. B. 1 ; W. § 5, 3 ; WII. App. p. 145 ; esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for the first time in Horn. E. 21, 108 [var., cf. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Merc. 17, 3) ; cf. Ebelmf/, Lex. Hom. p. 619]), dat. Ka/ioi [rai efioi Acts x. 28 RG], ace. Kofie ; 1. (ind I, the koi simply connecting : Jn. X. 27, etc. ; and I (together), Lk. ii. 48; distributively, und I (in like manner) : Jn. vi. 56 ; xv. 4 ; xvii. 26 ; and I (on the other hand), Jas. ii. 18 (xayu epya ex'") i ^^^ xxii. 29 ; Acts xxii. 19 ; and I (indeed), Jn. vi. 57 ; Ro. xi. 3. at the beginning of a period, Lat. et equidem, and I (to speak of myself) : Jn. i. 31, 33 sq.; xii. 32; 1 Co. ii. 1 ; with the kqI used consecutively (see under koi, I. 2 d.), cf. our and so : Mt. xi. 28 ; Jn. xx. 15 ; Acts xxii. 13 ; 2 Co. vi. 1 7 ; KajM . . . Km, both . . . and : Kafif o'lSare, koi oidare mdfv fi/ji. both me (my person) and my origin, Jn. vii. 28. 2. / also ; / as well ; I likewise ; in like manner I : so that one puts himself on a level with •others, Mt. ii. 8 ; x. 32; Lk. .\i. 9 ; xvi. 9 ; Jn. .xv. 9, [10 Tdf.] ; xvii. 18 ; Acts x. 26 ; 1 Co. vii. 40 ; 2 Co. xi. 16, 18, 21 sq. ; in the second member of a comparison, after ■«iroTor, ojf, KaBuii, Acts xxvi. 29 ; 1 Co. vii. 8 ; xi. 1 ; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; see under Kal, IT. 1 a. with a suppression of the mention of those with whom the writer compares himself: Eph. i. 15 (as well as others); 1 Th. iii. 5 (as well as my companions at Athens ; cf. Ltinemann ad loc). KOfiol: Lk.i.3; Actsviii.l9; lCo.xv.8; icd^if': 1 Co. xvi. 4. i. q. / in turn : Mt. xvi. 18 ; xxi. 24 ; Lk. XX. 3; Gal. vi. 14. 3. even I, this selfsame I, the Kai pointing the statement : Eo. iii. 7 ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 835. Ka0d, adv. for xaff a, according as, Just as : Mt. xxvii. 10. (Xen., Polyb., Diod., al. ; O. T. Apocr.; Sept. for inX3, Gen. vii. 9, 10, etc., and for 3, Gen. xix. 8 ; Ex. xii. 35, etc.) * Ka9-aCp6; fut. Ka6(Xa> (Lk. xii. 18 [see a^aipiai, init.]) ; 2 aor. KadiWov, (fr. obsol. eXoj) ; pres. pass, «a- 6ai.povp.ai ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for T'lin, to cause to go down; D"in, I'jTIJ, "|"^?i ^- to take down: with- Kadaipo) 312 Kadap6<; out the notion of violence, riva, to detach from the cross one crucified, Mlc. xv. 36, 46 ; Lk. xxiii. 53, (Polyb. 1, 86, 6 ; Philo in Flacc. § 10) ; riva aTTo tov ^vXov, Acts xiii. 29 (Sept. Josh. viii. 29 ; x. 27) : >vith the use of force, to throw down, cast down : riva airu 6p6vov, Lk. i. 52. 2. to pull down, demolish : ra; aTodrjKai, opp- to oiKohojidv. Lk. xii. 18; Xo-yHT/iour, the (.'sulille) reasonings (of oj)- ponents) likened to fortresses, i. q. to refute, 2 Co. x. 4 (5) ; to destroy, (Sfrj, Acts xiii. 1 9 (Jer. xxiv. 6 ; Time. 1 , 4 ; Ael. v. h. 2, 25) ; ttju /nfyaXftorijTd Tivof, Acts xix. 27, where if preference is given (with LTTr WH) to the reading rijs ftcyaXfioTr/Tor aiirrjs, it must be taken as a partitive gen. somewhat of her mni/ni/icencc ; cf. B. 158 (138) note [so Meyer; cf. Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 13. Al. trans- late that she should even he deposed from her magnifi- cence ; cf. W. § 30, 6 ; B. § 132, 5].* Ka6a(pu; pf. pass. ptcp. KeKaSapiilvos; (Kadapos); to cleanse, prop, from filth, impurity, etc. ; trees and vines (from useless shoots), to prune, Jn. xv. 2 (^Se'vSpa . . . viro- Tciivoiicva KaSaipfTai, Pliilo de agric. § 2 [cf. de somniis ii. § 9 mid.]); metaph. from guilt, to expiate: pass. Ileb. x. 2 RG [see KoBaplCoi, init.], (.ler. xiii. 27; and so in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down). [COiMl". : 8m-, fK-Kofiaipu.]' KoBdirep, (koO' iinep), according as. Just as, even as, [("xa- 6d marking the comparison, Wp (akin to the prep, nfpi) the hititudcof the application") : Ho. ix. unVIItxt.; x. 15WlIt.\t.; also] xi. 8 and 1 Co. x. 10 in TTr WH; 2 Co. iii. 13, 18 [here Wrimrg. (caSajo-TTf/)]; iTh. ii. 11; Kadtl- TTfpitai', Ro. iv. 6; 2Co.i. 14; 1 Th. iii. 6, 12; iv.5; Ileb. iv. 2, and U G in Heb. v. 4 ; Kaddnep foil, by ovtoi (or oSras), Ro. xii. 4 ; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11. ([From Arstph. down] ; Sept. for 117X2, Ex. vii. 6, 10.)* KoB-diTTu : 1 aor. KaO^ylm; 1. to Jit or fasten to, hind on. 2. to lai/ hold of, fasten on (hostilely) : Tilt x"P"S alrov. Acts xxviii. ." [cf. W. 257 (241)]; toO Tpa)(Ti\ov, Epict. diss. 3, 20, 10. [In ilid. fr. Horn, down, (w. gen. fr. Hdt. on).] * KaBaptJu (Hellenistic for Kadalpco, which classic writ, use) ; Attic fut. [cf. B. 37 (32) ; W. § 13, 1 c. ; WH. App. p. 163] Ka6api.a> (Heb. ix. 14) ; 1 aor. cKaddpta-a [see be- low] ; pres. pass. Kadapi^opai ; 1 aor. pass. fKadaplaSriv ; pf. pass. ptcp. K(Ka0a,n(rpems (Heb. X. 2 TTrWII; on the forms eKad € piad:;, T WH in Mt. viii. 3; Ilk. i. 42, \_eKa6e pitrev, Tr in Acts x. 15 ; xi. 9] and K(Ka8 f pKTjxivoi Lchm. in Heb. x. 2, cf. [JW/. Proleg. p. 82 ; TI7/. .\pp. p. 150] ; Slurz,T>a dial. Maced. etc. p. 118; Delitzsch on Heb. X. 2 ; Kriiger Pt. ii. § 2, 2, 6 p. 4 ; [B. 29 (25 sq.) ; W. 43]) ; (icaflapds) ; Sept. mostly for ina ; 1. to make clean, to cleanse ; a. from physical stains and dirt : e. g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 2G] ; Lk. xi. 39 ; food, Mk. vii. 19; riva, a leper, to cleanse hi/ curing, Mt. viii. 2 sq.; X.8; xi. 5; Mk.i. 40-42; Lk.iv. 27; v. 12sq.; vii. 22; xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv.8) ; to remove hy cleansing : fj Xitrpa (KaBapiadrj, Mt. viii. 3 (KaOapieii to af/ia to avairiov f| 'lo-paijX, Dent. xix. 13 ; eKa6dpi.^e T!]V7!fpi Tavra avvi]6eiav, the custom of marrying heathen women, Joseph, antt. 11 , 5, 4 ; Ka6alp(iv alfia, Hom. H. 16, 667; cf. eKKaBalpai). b. in a moral sense ; a. to free from the defilement of sin and from faults ; to purify from wickedness : iavrov ano lio\v(Tpov trapKor, 2 Co. vii. 1 ; t^ Triortt Tar Kapbias, Acts XV. 9 (KapSIav (iiro apaprlas. Sir. .xxxviii. 10) ; Tat )(tipas, to abstain in future from wrong-doing, Jas. iv. 8. p. to free from the guilt of sin, to purify: Tivii awi> vdoTjt dpLap- Tias, 1 Jn. i. 7 ; [t. a. tt. dSi/ciac, ibid. 9] ; tI^v (rvvelhijiriv dm vfKpwv tpytjiv, Heb. ix. 14; Tr]V iKKKrjtrinv Tw XovTpto ToO iISaTot (instrumental dat.), Eph. v. 26 ; \auv (nxiTw, Tit. ii. 14. y. to consecrate by cleansing or purij'ying: ti ttr Tivi, dat. of instr. [W. 388 (363)], Ileb. ix. 22 ; i. q. to- consecrate, dedicate, ti tivi (dat. of instr.), ibid. 23. 2. to pronounce clean in a levitical sense : Acts x. 15 ; xi. 9, (Lev. xiii. 1 3, 1 7, 23, 28). [CoMP. : 8ta-(ca5api'fa).] ' Ka8apio'|i6s, -ov, 6, (Kadapi^ai), a cleansing, purif cation; a ritual purgation or washing, (Vulg. purgalio,piirifcalio, emundatio) : used with a gen. of the snbj., twi/ 'lovSaiwv, of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals, Jn. ii. 6 ; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25 ; with a gen. of the obj., and that a person, — of the levitical purification of women after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22 ; and of lepers, Mk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14 ; with a gen. of the thing, Afiapnaii' or «papTij^d- Tav, a cleansing from the guilt oj' sins (see Ka6api(a>, 1 b. /3.) : wrought now by baptism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex- piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on which cf. Kuriz, Com. p. 70 ; (E.x. xx.\. 10 ; t^e aitaprlas pov, Job vii. 21 ; of an atonement, Lcian. asin. 22).* KaBopis, -d, -oil ; [akin to Lat. eastus, in-cestus, Eng. chaste, chasten ; Curtius § 26 ; Vanieek p. 1 77] ; fr. I lom. down ; Sept. mostly for liriD ; clean, pure, (free from the admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter- ates, corrupts) ; a. physically : Mt. xxiii. 26 ; xxvii. 59 ; Heb. x. 22 (23) ; Rev. xv. 6 ; xix. 8, 14, and Rec. in xxii. 1 ; )(pv and n^'i^. [Xen., Aristot., al.]) * Ka8-t^o|iai, ; impf. e/ca^efo^iiji' ; [fr. Hom. down] ; lo sit down, seat one's self, sit : Jn. xx. 12 ; foil, by iv with dat. of place, ilt. xxvi. 55 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 20 ; Acts vi. 15; foil, by eVi with gen.. Acts xx. 9 L T Tr WH ; by eni with dat., Jn. iv. 6 ; £«1, Jn. \i. 3 Tdf. ; [oj where, Acts ii. 2 Lchm. Cf. Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 336 sq. ; B. 56 (49); 60(52). CoMP. : ■napa-ica6i^opm.']' Ka9-ets, more correctly KaS' els, see eis, 4 c. p. 187''. KaB-t^iis, ((card and «l^j, q. v.), adv., one after another, successively, in order : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts xi. 4 ; xviii. 23 ; 01 Ka6f^. those that follow after. Acts iii. 24 [cf. W. 633 (588)]; evra Kad. sc. xp°'"f [R- ^- *"<"' aflerwards~\, Lk. viii. 1. (Ael. v. h. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier Grk. e'l^y and e(j)f^7Js are more usual.) * Kafl-tiSii) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. eKaSevSov ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. mostly for 23U ; 1. to fall asleep, to drop off to sleep : Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop. : Mt. viii. 24 ; Lx. 24 [on this and its paral. cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 1198']; xiii. 25; xxvi. 40, 43, 45 ; Mk.iv. 27,38; v.39; xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 sq. ; Lk. viii. 52 ; xxii. 46 ; 1 Th. v. 7. b. euphemistically, ^0 Je rfead : iTh-v. 10; (Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 6 ; Dan. xiL 2). c. metaph. to yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one's salvation : Ej)h. V. 14 ; 1 Th. V. 6.* Ka6TiYiiTT)s, -oC, 6, (Kadriyfopai to go before, lead) ; a. prop, a yuide: Xumen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8 R G, 10. (Dion. II. jud. de Thuc. 3, 4 ; several times in Plut. [cf. Wetst. on ilt. I.e.]) * Ka9-T|K(i> ; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph, down] ; 1. to come down. 2. to come to, reach to ; impers. KadrjKei, it is becoming, it is fit (cf. Germ. zul:ommen), Ezek. xxi. 27 ; ov KadrJKcv (Rec. KadrJKov), foil, by the ace. with inf., Acts xxii. 22 [W. 282 (265) ; B. 217'(187)] ; ra pi, Ka6i,Kovra, things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, shameful, Ro. i. 28 ; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Cf. avTjKw." Kd6-i]|uii, 2 pers. sing. KaBrj a later form for Kadr)), inf. KaBijaBat, ptc|). Kadripevos'] ; impf fxadripijv; and once the rare [cf. Veitch p. 347] fut. xaflij- o-o/iai, Lk. xxii. 30 T Tr txt.WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix. 28 also ; cf. KaOi^a, fin.] ; {^pai) ; a verb of which only the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [cf. B. 60 (52)] ; Sept. for 2\?\; 1. to sit down, seat one's self: foil, by €v w. dat. of place [cf. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1 ; Lk. xxii. 55 [here T Tr WH /x/cros] ; tU, Mk. xiii. 3 [B. § 147, 16]; perd w. gen. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 58 ; Kadou tic Se^iav pov, i. e. be a partner of my power, Mt. x.xii. 44 ; Mk. xii. 36 [Trtxt. WH mrg. KdAo-oi»] ; Lk. xx. 42 : Acts ii. 34; Heb. i. 13 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 1) : KaSov &8c ino with ace, Jas. ii. 3. rrapd w. ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 ; i-ndva> w. gen. of place, Mt. xxviii. 2 ; with ««, Mt. xv. 29 ; Jn. vi. 3 [Tdf. «a^e'ffxo] ; the place to be supplied fr. the context, 5It. xiii. 2. 2. to sit, be seated, of a place occupied : foil, by (u with dat. of place [W. as under 1], Mt. xi. 16 ; xxvi. 69 ; eV rfj fif|ia t. Seov, Col. iii. 1 ; eV Tois Serials, Jlk. xvi. 5 ; eVi nvos, Mt. xxiv. 3 ; xxvii. 19; [Acts XX. 9 R G] ; cVi toO 6p6vov [but also, esp. in the crit. edd., with the dat. and the ace. (see below) ; cf. Alford on the foil, pass.]. Rev. iv. 2 etc. ; t^s ve(p€Xr,s [or w. the ace], Rev. xiv. 15, and in other exx. ; tVi tiki» Acts iii. 10 ; eVi' ti [cf. B. 338 (291)], Mt. Lx. 9 ; 31k. ii. 14 ; Lk. V. 27 ; Jn. xii. 15 ; Rev. iv. 4 ; vi. 2 [R dat. (a& in foil.)] 4 sq. ; xi. 16 ; xvii. 3 ; xLx. 11 ; jrapa ttjv 6S6v, Mt. XX. 30 ; Mk. x. 46 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; irpos to (pas, Lk. xxii. 56 ; eirdvo) twos, Mt. xxiii. 22 ; Rev. vi. 8 ; irepi Tiva, Mk. iii. 32, 34 ; airivavrt rivos, Mt. xxvii. 61 ; « Se^iav Ttvos, Mt. xxvi. 64 ; 31k. xiv. C2 ; Lk. xxii. 69 ; f/cei. 3Ik. ii. 6; o5, where. Acts ii. 2 [L itaflffiJfiefoi] ; Rev. xvii. 15; without specification of place, Mk. V. 15; Lk. v. 17; viii. 35; Jn. ii. 14; Lx. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 30. (cd^ij/iot as descrip- tive of a certain state or condition is used of those who sit in discharging their office, as judges, Kddt, Kplvav, Acts- xxiii. 3 ; of a queen, i. q. to occupy the throne, to reign [A. V. / sit a queen~\. Rev. xviii. 7 ; of money-changers, Jn. ii. 14 ; of mourners and penitents : iv a-aKKot, clothed in sackcloth, eV inroSa, covered with ashes, Lk. x. 13 ; of those who, enveloped in darkness, cannot wallc about,. 3It. iv. 16 ; Lk. i. 79 (Is. xiii. 7) ; of a lame man, Acts xiv. 8. i. q. lo have a fixed abode, to dwell : em npoa-ayirov Trjs yrjs, Lk. xxi. 35 : Rev. xiv. G (where Rec. KaroiKovvTas) ; cTTi 6p6mv, Rev. XX. 11 G T [WH mrg. ; but see above] ; iv 'lepovaaXrjp, Nch. xi. 6 ; [tV Spei 2apapelas, Sir. 1. 26. CoMT. : a-vy-KddrjpMi]. KoBTKiepav, i. q. Ka6' fjpepav, see fi/iepa, 2 p. 278*. Ka6t])i.epiv6s, -^, -6v, (fr. Ka6' fipepav), daily: Acts vi. 1. (.Judith .xii. 15 ; Theophr., Athen., Plut., Alciphr. epp. i. 5; Joseph, antt. 3, 10, 1; [11, 7, 1]; Polyaen. 4, 2, 10.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53 [(yet see L. and S.) ; W. 25 (25 sq.)].* KaS-C^u; fut. Kadla-a [B. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. iKaBitra (impv. 2 sing. Kadiaov once, Mk. xii. 36 Trtxt. WH mrg.) ; pf. KeKdOiKa (Mk. xi. 2 [not WH Tr mrg. ; Heb. xii. 2 L T Tr WH ; a late form, see Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. mid. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. Kadi KaOirjfii 314 i6co^ 6p6vov], to confer the kingdom upon one, Acts ii. 30 ; riva (V Sf |i« avTov, Epb. i. 211 ; rivd, to appoint one to act as jiiiliji', 1 Co. vi. 4 (^SticaoTijj', Plat. legg. 9 p. 873 e. ; Tolyb. 40, 5, 3; crvveSpioi' Kpiriov, Josepli. antt. 20, 9, 1). 2. intrans. ; Sept. fur IJj; ; a. lo sit dotcn : univ., Mt. v. 1 ; xiii. 48 ; Mk. i.\. 35 ; Lk. iv. 20 ; v. 3 ; xiv. 28, 31 ; xvi. G ; Jn. viii. 2 ; Acts xiii. 14 ; xvi. 13 ; with a telie inf. 1 Co. .\. 7 ; with specification of the place or seat : fV Se^ia tivos, Ileb. i. 3; viii. 1 ; .\. 12; .xii. 2; eVi twl, Mk. xi. 7 [Kec.]; «IS Tov vaov, 2 Th. ii. 4 [B. § 147, 16 ; W. 415 (386)] ; inl with ace. [cf. B. 338 (290)], Rev. xx. 4 ; Jn. .xii. 14 ; Wk. xi. 2, [7 L T Tr WH] ; Lk. xix. 30 ; [add Acts ii. 3, see B. § 1 29, 1 7 ; W. 516 (481)] ; «Vi roi ^ij^aror, of a judge, Jn. xix. 13; Acts xii. 21; x.w. 6, 17; Karivavrl [or ani- vavri Tr etc.] rti/or, Mk. xii. 41 ; with adverbs of place, Mk. xiv. 32; Jit. xxvi. 36. \>. to sit: [absol. (of a dead man restored to life) (Kadiaev sat, sat up, Lk. vii. 15 L mrg. WH mrg.] ; iv tu 6p6va, llev. iii. 21 ; eVi w. gen. of the seat, Mt. -xxiii. 2; xxv. 31 ; « be^wv k. i^ eiav., Mt. XX. 21, 23 ; Mk. x. 37, 40. i. q. to have fixed one's abode, i. e. to sojourn [cf. our settle, settle down], Acts xviii. 1 1 ; foil, by ev with dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 49 [here A.V. tarry'], (Ex. xvi. 29 ; Jer. xxx. 11 (xlix. 33) ; [Neh. xi. 25]). Mid. [Pass.? cf. Rutherford, New Phryii. p. 336 sq.] to sit : iin dpoviov, Lk. xxii. 30 [R G L : see Ka- Brjfiai]; tm Bpuvovs, Mt. xix. 28 [WH KadrjaeaBe; see Ka6r)ii.m. CoMP. : ava-, iiti-, napa-, Trepi; crvy-KaBi^a).] Ka6-(t](ii : 1 aor. KaSiJKa ; [iv. Horn, on] ; to send doivn, let duicn: ets, Lk. v. 19; 8ta w. gen. of place, ibid, and Acts ix. 25 ; pres. pass. ptcj). Ka6i.ip.evos let down, inl T^r •yi;?, Acts X. 11; ex toO oipavoO, Acts xi. 5.* Ka9-io-T7]p.i (also Kadia-Tua, whence the ptcp. Kadtarav- T€f Acts xvii. 15 RG; and Kadio-ruvw, whence KuSiarci- vovTfs ibid. LTTrWH ; sceio-rf/jiH.init.) ; fiit. KaTaa-Ti)crai ; 1 aor. KaTtaTTja-n \ Pass., pres. Kadia-rapai ; 1 aor. Karfo-ra- Ajx; 1 iut. KaTa(TTa6r]tToy,ai,\ Sept. for U"C!7\, D'Pn Tpijn, ^^^r^n, Tp^.n, Y^} > (pi'op- fo set down, put doion), to set, place, put : a. nva iiri twos, to set one over a thing (in charge of it), Mt. xxiv. 45 ; x.\v. 21, 23 ; Lk. xii. 42 ; Acts vi. 3 ; also eVi rivi, Jit. xxiv. 47; Lk. xii. 44 ; ini ti, Heb. ii. 7 Rec. fr. Ps. viii. 7. b. two, to appoint one in administer an office (cf. Germ, bestellen): irpea^vri- povs, Tit. i. 5 ; riva els to with inf., to appoint to do something, Heb. viii. 3 ; to npos t. deov to conduct the worship of God, Heb. v. 1 ; foil, by iva, ibid. ; rivd with a pred. ace. indicating the office to be administered [to make one so and so; cf. W. § 32, 4 b.; B. § 131, 7], (so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), Lk. xii. 14; Acts vii. 10, 27, 35 ; Heb. vii. 28. o. to set down as, con- stitute (Lat. sisto), i. q. to declare, shotv to be : pass, with apapTo>\6s, Si'raior, Ro. v. 19 [cf. Prof. T. Dwif//il in New Englander for 1867, p. 590 sqq. ; Dietzsch, .\d.am u. Christus (Bonn, 1871) p. 188]. d. lo constitute (Lat. sisto) 1. q. to render, make, cause to be : riva ovk apyov, ■oihi oKapTTov, i. e. (by Utotes) laborious and fruitful, 2 Pet. i. 8. e. to conduct or brinf/ to a certain place : Tira, Acts xvii. 15 (2 Chr. xxviii. 15 for S'DH ; Josh. vi. 23 ; 1 S. V. 3 ; Horn. Od. 13, 274 ; Xen. an. 4, 8, 8 and in other prof. auth.). f. Mid. to show or exhibit one's self; come forward as : with a pred. nom., Jas. iv. 4 ; n ■yXa)(r(7a . . . fj aTTiXovcra, Jas. iii. 6. [CoMP. : dvri-, djro- Ka6lcrTTipi.] '* KaBo (i. e. Kaff o), adv., [fr. Lys. and Phit. down], ac- cordiiif/ tu what, i. e. 1. as : Ro. vui. 26. 2. according as ; in so far as, so far forth as: 1 Pet. iv. 1 3 (Rec.«i^ (caflcir) ; 2 Co. viii. 12 [W. 307 (288); cf. B.§139, 30].* Ka6o\iK6s, •fi,-6v, {koSoXov, q. v.), general, universal (oc- casionally in prof. auth. fr. [Aristot. and] Polyb. down, as Ka6. (cai koivS) iuTopia, Polyb. 8, 4, 1 1 ; often in ecol. writ. ; the title ij Ka6o\iKri iKKXrjaia first in Ignat. ad Smyrn. c. 8 and often iu Pul}c. martyr, [see ed. (Gebh. Harn.) Zahn, p. 133 note] ; cf. KadoXiKij uvd(TTa(Tis, [Justin c. Tryph. 81 sub (in.]; Theoph. ad Autol. [1. i. § 13] p. 40 ed. Otto) ; imcTToXal KaBoXiKal, or simply KaduXtKai, in the title of the Epp. of James, Peter, John, and .hide (R G L ; cf. Taiv (iTTa XeyopivcDV KaBoXixav SC. fTTiaToXav, Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most prob. because they seemed to be written not to any one church alone, but to all the churches. [Cf. Diet, of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Catholic] * KaeiXou (i. e. kuO' SXov [" as it is written in auth. before Aristot." (L. and S.)]), whoUij, entirely, at all: Acts iv. 18. ([Ex. xxii. 11]; Ezek. xiii. 3, 22; Am. iii. 3, 4; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot. and sqq.) • KaB-oirXtJw : pf . pass. ptcp. Ka6(i>TrXia-p.ivos ; lo arm [fully (cf. Kara, IIL 1 G.n.)], furnish with arms: Lk. xi. 21. (Xen., Pint., al. ; Sciit.) • Kafl-opdti), -S> : 1. to look down, see from above, victofrom on high, (Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to see thoroughly [cf. /tard, HI. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un- derstand (Germ, erschaucn) : pres. pass. 3 pers. sing, ko- BopaTai, Ro. i. 20 (3 Mace. iii. 11, and often in class, (irk.). Cf. Fritzschc, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61.* KaOoTi (i. e. Kaff o n), according to what, i. e. 1. so far as, according as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18, 19 (36), 5; for IC^N^, E.\. i. 12, 17). 2. because that, because, [cf. W. § 53, 8] : Lk. i. 7 ; xix. 9 ; Acts ii. 24, and L T Tr WH (for Rec. Stdri) in Acts xvii. 31, (Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4 ; Polyb. IS, 21 (38), 6). 3. as. Just as : Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1 ; .ludith ii. 1 3, 15 ; x. 9, and often in Thuc. et al.' KaSiJs (i. e. Kaff ois), a particle found occasionally in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic Ka6d and Ka66, but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ; cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 74 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 425sq. ; [W. 26 (25)]; 1. according as, just as, even as : in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31 ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; foil, by ovtois in the second member [cf. W. § 63, ,5], Lk. xi. 30 ; xvii. 26 ; Jn. iii. 14 ; 2Co.i. 5; x. 7; Col. iii. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 6 ; foil, by rai also, Jn. xv. 9 ; xvii. 18 ; XX. 21 ; 1 Jn. ii. 18 ; iv. 1 7 ; 1 Co. xv. 49 ; it is annexed to preceding words after the demonstrative ovtods, Lk. xxiv. 24 ; with ovTas unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6 ; xxviii. 6 ; iMk. xvi. 7 ; Lk. i. 2, 55, 70; xi. 1 ; Jn. i. 23 , v. 23 ; Acts x. 47 [here LTTrWH mr]; XV. 8; Ro. i. 13; xv. 7; 1 Co. viii. 2; x. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 14; ix. 3; xi. 12; Eph. iv. 17, and KaOuicnrep 315 Kat often ; KaOas bihas TrapeKoXecrd ere . . . iv Tricrrct, sc. ovrai Ka\ viiv ■jvapoKoKm, 1 Tim. i. 3, cf. W. 570 (530) ; [B. 38(i (331)] ; ijp^aTo aiTetadai (sc. ovra noulv airoU), Kadois ktK. ilk. XV. 8 [B. § 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 sq.)] ; in com- paiison bj- contrary we find the negligent use : dya-nanev aXXfiXovs, oi Kadois KiiiV kt\. 1 Jn. iii. 11 -sq., cf. De AVette ad loc. and W. G23 (579); 0^709 eanv 6 Spros . . . oil Kadios etc., not such as they ate etc., Jn. vi. 58. with the verb fip.i, equiv. to Lat. quails, such as, 1 Jn. iii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth). 2. according as i. e. in proportion as, in llie degree that : Mk. iv. 33 ; Acts vii. 1 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; xi. 29 ; 1 Co. xii. 11,18; 1 Pet. iv. 10. 3. since, seeing that, agreeably to the fact that, [cf. W. § 53, 8; 448 (417)] : Jn. xvii. 2; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al. regard Ka6. as cor- responsive rather than causal or explanatory] ; 1 Co. i. 6; v. 7; Eph. i. 4; Phil. i. 7. 4. it is put for the simple as, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. disc. Acts XV. 14 : it serves to add an epexegesis, 3 Jn. 3 (to a-ov Tji aXrjdcia). b. of time, when, after that, (cf. Lat. !(/) : 2Macc. i. 31; [K'eh. v. 6]; here many bring in Acts vii. 1 7 ; but see 2 above. Ko9s Trepi, Just as, exactly as : Heb. v. 4 T Tr WH [also 2 Co. iii. 1 8 WII mrg.]. (Huuer., Psell., Tzetz.) * Ka£, a con]., and ; the most freq. by far of all the par- ticles in the X. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3 sqq. ; B. 361 (310) sqq., and cf. EUicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and re see s. v. rt ad init.] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque. Germ, und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as ol ^apia-aioi Ka\ SaSSovKoioi, Mt. xvi. 1 ; 6 flfof Kal iraTr^p, he who is God and Father (see 6f6s, 3) ; iv KapSia KaXfj koi ayadrj, Lk. viii. 15 : ttuXu- ficpas Kai noKvrpoTTois, Heb. i. 1 ; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given : 17 viodeala Kal fj Sd^a Ka\ al 8ia6!JKai Kai fj vopoSecria Kai ij Xarpfla Kal at iirayyiktai, Ro. i.\. 4 ; ayla Kcu hiKaia Kal ayaOr], Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 21 ; Jn. xvi. 8 ; Acts xv. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25 ; Heb. ix. 10 ; Rev. V. 12; xviii. 12 sq. ; cf. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it connects numerals ; and so that (contrary to the more com. usage) the greater number precedes : S«a k. oktm, Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WII om. Kal; Tdf. beKaoKTo], 16 ; TeaaapaKovra k. e^, Jn. ii. 20; add, Jn. v. 5 GT; Acts xiii. 20; cf. W. §37, 4; [Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18 ; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co. xiii. 1 (cf. Deut. xix. 15 Sept.) fVl aroparos 8uo papripav Koi rpiaiv (in ^Mt. xviii. 16 ^ rp. cf. AV. 440 (410) note) at the mouth of two witnesses and (shoidd there be so many) of three ; a similar use of Kai, to lend a certain indefinite- ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with otlier than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 a-rjptpov koI (R"G; but LTTr WH ^) aCpiov, cf. Kiihner § 521, 2; Eheling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 614'']. c. it joins to par- titive words the general notion ; so that it is equiv. to and in general, and in a word, in short : 6 IlfVpos k. oi OTrdoToXoi, Acts v. 29 ; ol dp^^iepds [cai 01 Trpfo-^vrepot Rec] Kal TO ovviBpiov o\ov, ilt. xxvi. 59 ; koI SiKaiaifiaci a-apKos, Heb. ix. 10 llec. Tr br. WH mrg. ; koI inl tow 'laparjX rov 6cov, Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ. ; cf. W. 437sq. (407); 520sq.(485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400 (343)] ; with ri preceding, i} re . . . airov Svvapis xal SeioTT]!, Ro. i. 20 [see ri, 2 a.] ; and, on the other hand, it joins to a general idea something particular, which is already comprised indeed in that general notion but by this form of expression is brought out more emphatically (which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls ovvKaTaXiydv to p-ipos Tw oXa) ; so that it is equiv. to and especially [cf.W. u. s.] : TO irdvra Kal rd TOiv haipovt^opiva>v, Mt. viii. 33 ; toIs pa- drjTals aijTGv K. T^ HfTpco, ilk. xvi. 7 ; at ti)val avTwv k. rwv dpxiepiwv, Lk. xxiii. 23 [R G] ; aivyvvai^l Kal Mapidp, Acts i. 14 ; iv 'loiSa k. 'UpovadXiip, 1 Mage. ii. 6 ; ttSs 'loiSa K. 'lepovaaXrfp, 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, cf. xxxii. 33 ; often so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and sentences; a. ixniY.,a.s diaKadapiel Trju aXcovaavTiw K- a~ovd^(i Tov tTLTOv ktX' Mt. iii. 1 2 ; ciarjXdov . . . Kal idt' baaKov, Acts v. 21 ; and in innumerable other exx. b. In accordance with the simplicity of the ancient popular speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul- tivated language expresses either by more exact parti- cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con- struction (cf. AV. §60,3; B. 288 (248) sqq.; 361 (310) sq.) : e. g. that very freq.. formula iyivero . . . Kai (see yivopat, 2 b.) ; Kal eidov Kal (equiv. to on) (rctcrpos iyivero. Rev. vi. 12 ; ri^frai vlov k. KaXiaeis to ovopa avTov (equiv. to ov ovopa KaXiaets). ilt. i. 21 ; koXov ia-Tiv Tjpds ^de flvai, Kat. (equiv. to oBev) Troifjo'topcv a-KJjvds, ilk. ix. 5 ; clauses are thus connected together in clusters ; as, Mt. vii. 25, 27 (an example of six clauses Unked together by Kai) ; Mt. xiv. 9 sqq.; Mlc. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ii. 13-16; X. 3; 1 Co. xii. 5-6; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16 ; i.\. 1^ (where nine sentences are strung together by Kai), etc. after a designation of time Kal annexes what will be or was done at that time : rjyyiKfv ^ Upa koI napaStSoTui jctX. Mt. xxvi. 45 ; ^v Se o>pa Tpirt] Kal iaravpoiO'av avTov, ilk. XV. 25 ; cyyiis ^v to nda-xa . ■ . k. dve^rj fls 'Upoar. 6 'l>;o-oCs, Jn. ii. 13; fjpipai tpxavrai koi , Heb. viii. 8 ; add, Lk. xxiii. 44 ; Jn. iv. 35 ; v. 1 ; xi. 55 ; Acts V. 7 ; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as ijbr) Sc rjv o^e «cat 01 Koplv6i.o(. i^airivrjs irpvpvav ixpoiovTO, Thuc. 1, 50; cf. aiatthiae § 620, 1 a. p. 1481 ; AV. 43G (405 sq.) ; [B. 361 (310")]. c. it joins afiirmative to negative sentences, as pij cnjKo({)avTrjcraT€ Knl dpKeiodc, Lk. iii. 14 ; ovre avrXrjpa txfis Kal TO cppeap iarl (ia6v, Jn. i\. 11 ; ovtc . ■ ■ eV(6ex"'<" Kal . . . KinXwi, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ., as Eur. Iph. Taur. 578; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding negative : prjiiore ae napa&a . . . Kai 6 KpiTT]s ae irapaSa . . . icai els (^uXaKijf ^Xri6r]tTTi. Mt. v. 25 ; add, Mt. vii. 6 ; x. 38 ; xiii. 15 ; xxvii. 64 : Lk. xii. 58 ; xxi. 34 ; Jn. vi. Kai 316 Kat, 53 ; xii. 40 ; Acts xxviii. 27 ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Heb. xii. 15 ; Rev. xvi. 15 ; [sec li. 3G8 (.Ho) d. ; cf. W. S .'jG. 2 a.]. d. it annexes what follows from something gaid before (icai consecutive), so as to be ecpiv. to and so: Mt. V. 15 (koi \dn7rti) ; ilt. xxiii. 32 (itai jrXijpoxraTe) ; 2 Co. xi. 9 {koi iv iravri) ; Ileb. iii. 11>; 1 Jn. iii. 19 (itai eiiirpoadev) ; 2 Pet. i. 19 (koi e^oMf ") • *° i° statements after imperatives and words having tlie force of an im- perative : 8evT€ ima-a) /xov, Koi iroirjiru) vfias etc. Jit. iv. 19; fine \uya>, koi laSfjoreTat 6 Truly /iou, Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 7 ; drri'oTT/Tf tw Sio^dXw Kat (jxC^erai a(j> ii/imv, .Tas. iv. 7; add, Mt. vii.'r; Mk. vi. 22: Lk. x. 28; Jn. .\iv. IG; Uev. iv. 1 ; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. pp. 187 (and 41G), [cf. Sir. ii. 6 ; iii. 1 7]. e. with a certain rhetorical em- pliasis, it annexes sometliing apparentlj- at variance with what has been previously said ; so that it is etjuiv. to and yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.) ; so the Lat. alque (cf. Beier on Cic. de off. 3, 11, 48) : Mt. iii. 14 (koX (TV tpxn npo' fO; Mt. vi. 26; .x. 29; Mk. xii. 12; Jn. i. 5 (koi t) cTKOTia ktX.), 10 (#cai 6 Koo-fios) ; Jn. iii. 11, 32 ; V. 40 (xai ov OtXcTf) ; Jn. vi. 70 ; vii. 28 ; viii. 49, 55 (icai ovK iyvoJKan) ; Jn. Lx. 30 ; 1 Co. v. 2 ; 2 Co. vi. 9 ; Ileb. iii. 9 ; Kev. iii. 1 (. . . (jjs, rai vfKpbs el), etc. when a vain attempt is spoken of : Mt. xii. 4.) (fijrei xai ovx fv- pi(TK€i.) ; -xiii. 1 7 ; xxvi. 60 ; Lk. xiii. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 18. f. like the Hebr. 1 (see Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 396"), it begins an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis, cf. the Germ, da [or Eng. ?/««], (in class. Grk. some- times 8e; see hi, 8) [cf. B. 3G2 (311) d.; W. § 53, 3 f.; Ellic. on Phil. i. 22] : with ore or a temporal ur preced- ing in the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g. Thuc. 2, !)3, where see Kriiger)], Lk. ii. 21 ; Acts -xiii. 18 sq. [here WH txt. om. rai; see it, L 7] ; mr . . . koI ISoi, Lk. vii. 1 2 ; Acts i. 10 ; X. 1 7 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; cav . . . (cat fiVfXfuo-. Rev. iii. 20 T WH mrg., although here Kal may be rendered also (I also will come in, etc.), de- claring that, if the first thing (expressed in the jirotasis) be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and containing an urgent rejoinder to another's speech (cf. W. § 53,3 a.; Matthiae §620, 1 d. ; Kiihner § 521, 3 ii. p. 791 sq.) : «at Ti's Siivarai craBrfvai ; Mk. x. 26; koi r'n ((ttI fiov TrXrjcriov ; Lk. x. 29 ; Ka'i Tis itmv kt\. Jn. ix. 36 [G T Tr WH] ; add, Jn. xiv. 22 [G T]. Peculiar is 2 Co. ii. 2 : «' yap iya> Xuiru vpai, (cat riy . . . e'/ioC (a swarm of exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem, homil. 2, 43, e. g. et 6 dfos '^tvherat, Ka\ ris aXrjBevfi ;), where the writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him- self as it were, utters the substance of the negative apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is he thai etc., for then there is no one who etc. h. it introduces parentheses [cf. W. § 62, 1]: Ka\ fKa\i8riv axpi Tou SeCpo, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the Lat. et, e. g. praeda — et aliquantum ejus fuit — militi concessa, Liv. 27, 1) ; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 35 sq. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words and sentences («ai epexegetical or 'explicative'), so that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [W. § 53, 3 c. ; cf. § 66, 7 fin.] : xdpiv Kat aTTooroX^i/, Ro. i. 5, where cf. Fritzsche ; ntp't eXirtSof icni ava(TTii, 1 Co. ii. 2 ; icat tovto, Lat. idquc (Cic. off. 1, 1, 1 te . . . audientem Cratippum idquc Athenis), our and this, and that, and thai loo, i. q. especially : Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. G, and LT Tr WH in 8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9) ; also Ka\ TaSra (com. in Grk. writ.), 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec. ; Heb. xi. 12; cf. Klotz, Devar. i. p. lO.S; ii. 2 p. 652 sq. ; [cf. AV. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran- sition to new matters : Mt. iv. 23 ; viii. 14, 23, 28 ; ix. 1, 9, 27, 35 ; x. 1 ; Mk. v. 1, 21 ; vi. 1, 6 ; Lk. viii. 26 ; Jn.'i. 19 (cf. 15) ; 1 Jn. i. 4, etc. ; esp. in the very com. (cat iyt- v(TO, Mt. vii. 28 ; Lk. vii. 11 ; viii. 1, etc. (see ylvopai, 2 b.). 5. Kai . . . Kat, a repetition which indicates that of two things one takes place no less than the other: both . . . and, as veil . . . as, not only . . . but also, [W. § 53, 4] : it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as (cai [L br. ic.] yirvxnv koi aSipa, Mt. x. 28; add, Mk. iv. 41 ; Jn. iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first (c.] ; Ro. xi. 33 ; Phil. ii. 13 ; i v. 1 2, etc. : Ka\ iv oXiyw icai iv jioXXm [L T Tr A\ II ptyoKa] both with little effort and with great [but see /xeyar, 1 a. y. fin.]. Acts xxvi. 29 ; but also clauses and sentences, as Mk. ix. 13 ; Jn. vii. 28; ix. 37 ; xii. 28 ; 1 Co. i. 22 : and even things that are contrasted [cf. W. u. s.; B. § 149, 8 b.] : Jn. xv. 24 ; Acts xxiii. 3 ; Kai . . . (cat oxi, Lk. v. 36 ; Jn. vi. 36 ; now . . . now, Mk. Lx. 22 ; Kai ov . . . Kai, Jn. xvii. 25. 6. rt . . . Kat, see ri, 2. n. It marks something added to what has already been said, or that of which something already said holds good; accordingly it takes on the nature of an adverb, also (Lat. etlam, quoque. Germ.- auch [cf. W. and B. as ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis ujion the word which immediately follows it; cf. Klotz, Dev.ar. ii. 2 p. 638.]) ; 1. used simply, a. also, lilceivise : Mt. v. 39 sq. ; xii. 45 ; Mk. ii. 28 ; Lk. iii. 14 ; Jn. viii. 19; Ro. viii. 17 ; 1 Co. vii. 29 ; xi. 6. etc.; very freq. with pronouns: koI vpels, Mt. xx. 4, 7; Lk. xxi. :ll ; .In. vii. 47, etc. : Kay a, koi iya>, see Kaya, 2; Kal Kai 317 Kaivo'; avTos, see ai'Tos, I. 1 a. preceded by an adverb of com- parison in the former part of the sentence : kuBois . . . Kai, Lk. vi. 31 [WHtxt. om., LTr mrg.br., koi i^eir] ; Jn.vi.57; xiii.15,33; lJn.ii.18; iv.l7; lCo.xv.49; uanep . . . ovra Kai, Ro. xi. 30 sq. ; 1 Co. -w. 22 ; Gal. iv. 29 ; KaOaTrep . . . ovTot Kai, 2 Co. viii. 11; oj? . . . Kai, ^It. vi. 10 ; Lk. xi. 2 RLbr. ; Acts vii. 51 [L Kadas ; 2 Co. xiii. 2 see as, I. 1 fin.] ; Gal. i. 9 ; Pliil. i. 20, (Thuc. 8, 1 ; aa-TTfp . . . Kai, Xen. mem. [2, 2, 2 (and Kiilmer ad loo.)] ; 3,1,4; [4,4, 7; cf.B. 362 (311) c.]) ; with d preceding, Gal. iv. 7. sometimes Kai .stands in each member of the comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14 ; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace, ii. 10; vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 635 ; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1 , 1 , G [also in his Grk. Gram. § 524,-2 vol. ii". 799 ; cf. Ellie. on Eph. v. 23 ; W. § 53, 5]). b. i. q. even [A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel, adeo ; Germ, sogar, selbst) : Mt. v. 46 sq. ; x. 30 ; Mk. i. 27; Lk. X. 17; iCo. ii. 10; Gal. ii. 17; Eph. v. 12, etc. c. before a comparative it augments the gra- dation, even, still, (Germ, noch) : Mt. .\i. 9 ; [Jn. xiv. 12]; Heb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g. ; al. regard the Kai in this pass, as corresponsive (also) rather than ascensive, and connect it with okto]. d. with a ptcp. i. q. al- though [cf. Kruger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see liaKpodvfifo), 2]. 2. joined with pronouns and par- ticles, also ; a. with comparative adverbs : mr Kai, Acts xi. 1 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 7 ; ix. 5, etc. ; Ka6a>s Kai, Ro. xv. 7 ; 1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co. i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, etc.; ovra Kai, Ro. V. 15 [WH br. Kai], 18 sq. ; vi. 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 12, etc. ; 6p.oiws koI, Jn. vi. 1 1 ; aurairas Kai, Lk. xxii. 20 [R GLTr'mrg., TTrtxt.Wn k. i>a: (but WH reject the pass.)] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; KaBanep Kai (see KaOairep). b. added to words designating the cause, it marks some- thing which follows of necessity from what has been previously said : hi6 Kai, Lk. i. 35 ; Acts x. 29 ; Ro. i. 24 Rec. ; Heb. xiii. 12; [1 Pet. ii. 6 R] ; Sta toiito Kai, Lk. xi. 49 ; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. Kai]. c. after the interrog. ti, Kai (wliich belongs not to tI, but to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather; cf. Biiumlein, Partikeln, p. 152]) points the significance of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover, (Germ, noch) [cf. 'W. § 53, 3 a. fin. ; esp. Kriiger § 69, 32, 16] : tI Kai ^aTrrl^ovTac ; [A. V. why then etc.], 1 Co. XV. 29; tI Kai iXirl^ei; (prop, why doth he also or yet hope for, and not rest in the sight ?), Ro. viii. 24 [R G T] ; Iva Ti Kai, Lk. xiii. 7. d. dXXa Kai, liut also: Lk. xxiv. 22; Jn. v.lS; Ro. i. 32; v. 3, 11 ; viii. 23 ; i.\. 10; 2 Co. vii. 7 ; viii. 10, 19, 21 ; ix. 12 ; 1 Jn. ii. 2, etc. ; i. q. Lat. at etiam (in an apodosis after d) : Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442 (412)]. e. 3e Kai, and 8e . . . Kai, hut also, and also: Mt. iii. 10 [RG]; xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [AVH br. Se']; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61; xiv. 12, 26 [L t.xt.TrWHtrt Tc Kai, see ?T«, 2 fin.] ; xviii. 1 [R G], 9 [Lbr. Kai] ; Jn. ii. 2 ; iii. 23 ; xviii. 2, 5 ; Acts v. 16 ; 1 Co. i. 16 ; iv. 7 ; xiv. 15 ; XV. 15 ; 2 Co. iv. 3, etc. »cai . . . yap, iap Kai, el k(u, T] Kai, Kalye. Ka\ . . . 5c, see yap II. 10, cavl. 3, el III. 6 sq., i; 4 c, yi 3 e., 8e 9. The examples of crasis with xal in the N. T., viz. Kayai (rafioi, KOfic), (ca/tei, KOKeWev, KoKeivos, Kav, are noticed each in its place ; for references see especially Kaya>, init. Ka'id<|>a; [WII Kaia(^as (cf. I, i fin.) ; Lchm. in Lk. iii. 2 Kar(^ar], -a [B. 20 (18) ; W. § 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many to be the same as X3'3, a stone, a rock ; others more cor- rectly i. q. XD'3, depression, Targ. on Prov. xvi. 26 [ace. toDehtzsch (Brief and. Rom. ins Ilebr. etc. p. 28) Xil'P]), Caiaphas; ace. to Joseph, (antt. 18, 2, 2) 'Ioxti^ttos, o Ka\ Kaid(ljas ClcoaTjirov, rou Kai Ka'idav eniKaXovfjifvov, antt. IS, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap- pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of Judsea, after the removal of Simon, son of Camith, a.d. 18 [cf. Schilrer, X. T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and was re- moved A.D. 36 by ViteUius, governor of SjTia, who ap- pointed Jonathan, son of the liigh-priest Ananus [i. e. Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc- cessor (Joseph, antt.18,4,3): Mt. xxvi. 3,57; Lk. iii. 2 ; Jn.xi.49; xviii. 13sq. 24, 28; Acts iv. 6. Cf. Hausrath in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.* Kai-yc, see yl, 3 e. Kdiv [WH Kalv (cf.I, I fin.)],-6,indecl., (in Joseph. with a Grk. ending, Kdij, -los ; Ilebr. rp i. e. a spear, although the author of Genesis, iv. 1, derives it fr. njp to produce, beget, acqiure, so that it is i. q. rjp, Ps. ci^'. 24 [cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.]), Cain, the fratricide, the first-born son of Adam : Heb. xi. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 2 ; Jude 11.* Kaivav [so R G L both 1 and 2 ; Tr Kdivav in 1 and Tr txt. in 2, but Tr mrg. Kaivdp. in 2, WH Kaivav 1, Kaivdp. 2 ; T KaiVd/x both 1 and 2], o, (Ilebr. |yp a lance-maker [al. 'possessor ' or 'possession ']), Cainan; 1. son of Enos (Gen. v. 9 sq.) : Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar- phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24 ; xi. 12 ; [1 Chr. i. 18 Alex.], which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. D. s. v.] * Katvds, -r), -6v ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down] ; Sept. for lyin ; new, i. e. a. as respects form ; recently made, fresh, recent, unused, unicorn (opp. to naXaios old, antiquated) : as do-fcds, Mt. ix. 1 7 ; Mk. ii. 22 [T om. Tr WH br. the cl.] ; Lk. v. 38 ; IfiaTiov, Lk. v. 36 ; nXripiopji, Mk. ii. 21 ; p.vTj}xeiov, ^It. xxvii. 60 ; with iv w oCScVoj oiiSeiy iredr] added, Jn. xix. 41 ; Kaiva k. itaKaui, Mt. xiii. 52; nezo, which as recently made is superior to what it suc- ceeds : StaefjKTi, Mt. xxvi. 28 (T WH om. Kaiv.) ; Mk. xiv. 24 R L ; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Ileb. viii. 8. 13 ; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31) ; Katvoi olpavol, Kaivrj -y^, 2 Pet. iii. 13 ; Rev. xxi. 1, (Is. IxT. 17 ; Ixvi. 22) ; 'icpouoraXij/i (see 'lepoa6\vp.a, fin.). Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2; SvSpanros (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. ii. 15 ; iv. 24, (xapSia, jrvelpa, Ezek. xviii. 31 ; xxxvi. 26) ; Kaiva iravra Trota, I bring all things into a new and better condition. Rev. xxi. 5 ; yivvijfia t^s dftiri'Kov, Mt. x.xvi. 29 ; Mk. xiv. 25. b. as respects substance ; of a new kind ; unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unh-eard of, (erepa koi Kaiva Saipovia, Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1) : SiSa;^^, ]Mk. i. 27; Acts xvii. 1 9 : c'l/roXij, given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7 sq. ; 2 Jn. 5 ; ovofia, with the added explana- tion o ovbui olbev {tyvw Rec), Rev. ii. 1 7 (Is. l.xii. 2 ; Ixv. 15) ; wSt), Rev. v. 9 ; xiv. 3, (Ps. cxiiii. (cxliv.) 9 ; v/ivos. KatvoTT)'; 318 Kaipoi Is. xlii. 10; Sviia, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (xl.) 4, etc.) ; \iyeiv ri «m [^ L T Tr WII] uKoveiv Kaivortpov, Acts .wii. 21 (newer sc. than that wlik-li is aheady ; [cf. '\V. 244 (228 sq.)]); KTtms, !ji in a new condition or state of (moral) life, Ro. vi. 4 (fh KaivorrjTa aidlov fw^r, so as to produce a new state which is eternal life, Ignat. ad Eph. 1 9 ; among prof. writ, it is used by Time. 3, 38 ; Isocr., Athon., al. ; often by Plut., [applied to the 'novelties' of fashion (French nouveaule)']).'' Katirep [Treg. kol irtp in Ilcb. ; fr. Horn. Od. 7, 224 down], conjunc, [originally even very much, cf. Donald- son § 621 ; Biiumlein p. 200 sq.; Kriiger § 56, 13, 2; B. § 144, 23 ; W. § 45, 2 fin.], aUhough ; it is joined to a ptcp. (in Grk. writ, sometimes also to an adj., so that av must be supplied) : Phil. iii. 4 ; Ileb. v. 8 ; vii. 5 ; xii. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, Kainep ioriv, Rev. xvii. 8 Rec. ; but since Grsb. Km Trdpea-rai [correctly irapfirTai (see in jrdpei/ii)] has been restored after the best codd.* Kaipds, -oC, o, (derived by some fr. xdpa or Kdpr/, to, the head, summit, [al. al. ; cf. Vanicek p. 118]); Sept. for nj? and n;;iO ; in Grk. writ. [fr. Hes. down] 1. due measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure of time ; a larger or smaller portion of time; hence a. univ. ajixcd and dep'nite time: Ro. xiii. 11 ; 2 Co. vi. 2; virrepoi xatpol, 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; lixpt Kaipov, up to a certain time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in axpt, 1 b. referred apparently to b. below ; cf. Frilzsche, Rom. i. p. 309 sq.] ; Acts xiii. 1 1 ; npos Kaipdv, for a certain time only, for a season, Lk. viii. 13 ; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; jrpor Kaiphv aipas, for the season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 1 7 ; Kara Kmpov, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v. 4 [R G L] ; at the (divinely) appointed lime, Ro. v. 6 [al. bring this under b.j ; before the time api)oinled, Mt. viii. 29 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; tarai. Kaipos, ore etc. 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; 6\iyoii Kaip6vt)(ei, a short time (in which to exercise his power) has been granted him. Rev. xii. 12 ; iv (Keivio tm Kaipa, Mt. xi. 25 ; xii. 1 ; xiv. 1 ; Eph. ii. 12 ; kut exeivov t. k., Acts xii. 1 ; xix. 23 ; Kara t. k. tovtov, Ro. ix. 9 ; iv airw tm K. Lk. xiii. 1 ; eV m k. Acts vii. 20 ; iv tw vvv k., Ro. iii. 26 ; xi. 5 ; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13) ; iv navri k. always, at every season, [ Aristot. top. 3, 2, 4 p. 1 1 7*, 35], Lk. xxi. 36 ; Eph. ■^. 18; els riva Kaipov, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a thing, the time of etc. i. e. at which it will occur: t^c ipfis dvaXiiaf los, 2 Tim. iv. 6; r^r imiTKonfis, 1 Pet. v. 6 l.chni. ; I.,k. xix. 44 ; irdpaapov, Lk. viii. 13 ; toC up^aKrOai TO Kpipa, for judgment to begin, 1 I'et. iv. 1 7 ; Kaipoi twv Xoyoiv, of the time when they shall be proved by the event, Lk. i. 20 ; — or when a thing usually comes to pass : toO depia-fiov, Mt. xiii. 30 ; Ti>v Kapnav, when the fruits ripen, -Alt. x.xi. 34, 41 ; trvKwv, Mk. xi. 13. with the gen. of a pcrs. : KoipoX idvwv, the time granted to the Gentiles, until (iod shall take vengeance on them, Lk. -xxi. 24; (5 iavTov ( 1 Tr \\ II avrov) k. the time when antichrist shall show himself oj)enly, 2 Th. ii. 6 ; 6 Kaipos fiov, the time appointed for my or, 6 u/itVfpor, the time for appearing in public, appointed (by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6, 8 ; Katp, the time suited to the thing under consideration, at its proj)er time, Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit. i. 3. 6 Kmpos alone, the time when things are brought to a crisis, the decisive epoch waited for : so of the time when the ilessiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii. 33 ; 6 Kaipos fjyyiKfv, Lk. x.xi. 8 ; iyyCs iariv, Rev. i. 3 ; xxii. 10. b. ojiportune or seasonable time : with verbs suggestive of the idea of advantage, Kaipov pcraXap,- I3dveiv, Acts xxiv. 25 ; exfiv, Gal. vi. 10 (Plut. Luc. 16) ; i^ayopd^«r6ai, Eph. v. 16 ; Col. iv. 5, see i^ayopd^a, 2; foil, by an inf., opportunity to do something, Ihb. xi. 15 ; napa Kaiptiv rjKiKias, l)ast the opportunity of life [A. V. jiastai/c-l, llcb. xi. 11 (simplyn-apd Kaipov, I'ind. 01. 8, 32; several times in Plato, cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. j). 1 26). c. the rigid time : iv Kaipu (often in class. Grk.), in due sea- son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster- eotyp. only)]; 1 Pet. v. 6; also Kaipto, Lk. xx. 10 LT Tr WH ; ra Kaipa, Mk. xii. 2. d. a (limited) period of time : [1 Co. vii. 29] ; plur. the periods prescribed by God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall, Acts xvii. 20 ; Kaipoi Kap7!ood must elapse before the divine kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur., the several parts of tliis period, Eph. i. 10; 6 Kaipbs 6 ivearais, the present period, i. q. o aiiov oJrof (see ataiv, :>), lieb. ix. 9, opp. to Kaipiis SiopBoxreios, t\n: time when the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. alaiv piX- Xwk), ib. 10; 6 Kaipos ovtos, i. q. 6 aioyv ovtos (see aiav, 3), Mk. X. 30; Lk. xviii. 30; 6 vvv Kaip. Ro. viii. 18; iv Kaipa iaxdra, the last period of the present age, the time just before the return of Christ from heaven (see etrxaros, Kaiaap 319 KaKeipot), -tivo, (by crasis fr. koI and fKelros [cf. W. § 5, 3 ; esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. Si']); 1- iKfivos referring to the more remote subject; a. and he (Lat. et ille) : Lk. xi. 7 ; xxii. 12; Acts xviii. 19; raiiTa . . ■ KoKciva [A. V. the other'], Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. b. he also: Acts xv. 11 ; Ro. xi. 23 [Rec." «ai ex.] ; 1 Co. x. 6. 2. cKe'ims Kaicia 320 Kaicoay referring to the nearer subject [cf. exeiras, 1 c] ; a. and he (Lat. et is, Germ, und selbif/cr) : Mt. xv. 18; Jn. vii. 29 ; xLx. 35 [L Tr WII koX eV.]. b. he also (Germ. auch selbiger) : Mt. xx. 4 [T WII xdi ck.]; Mk. xii. 4 scj. ; xvi. 11, 13 ; Lk. xxii. 12 ; .In. xiv. 12 ; xvii. 24. KQKta, -Of, !], (xaKot), [fr. Theogni.-i down], Sept. chietly for x"'> ^"J ^X'"^ > ^- I'Mllynilij, malice, ill-will, de- sire to injure : Ko. i. 29 ; Eph. iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Tit. iii. 5; Jas. i. 21; iPet. ii. 1. 2. wickedness, depravilij : 1 Co. V. 8 [cf. AV. 120 (114)] ; xiv. 20 ; Acts viii. 22 (cf. 21) ; wickedness that is not ashamed to break the laws, 1 Pet. ii. 16. 3. Hellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt. vi. 34 (as Amos iii. G ; [1 S. vi. 9] ; Eocl. vii. 1.5 (14) ; xii. 1 ; Sir. .xix. 6 ; 1 Mace. vii. 23, etc.).* [Syn. Kaxta, w Of Tip! a: associated Ro. i. 29; I Co. v. 8. Ace. to Trench, Syn. § .xi., endorsed by EUic. (on Eph. iv. 31) and Bj). Lglitft. (on Col. iii. 8), kok/o denotes rather the vi- cious disposition, irovT)pia the active exercise of the same ; cf. Xen. mem. 1,2, 28 ei ^Ivavr'bs (i.e. 2uJKpaT7?s) 4iroUtTi(f>av\oy, «iVoTtijy hy ^S6k€i Trovrjphs eJuat ' el 5' avrhi (TttiippovStv SifreXf i, ir«y ttv hiKaiws rfjs oiiK evov/Tris aifTu naKia^ airiav ^xoi; But Frit/.sehe, Meyer (on Ro. 1. c. ; yet of. Weiss in ed. 6), al. dis- sent, — seeming nearly to reverse tills distinction; cf. Suidas s. v. KUKla' ?ffriv tj tov KaK^aat rhv -ntKas (TttouS^, irapct rip i.TroiTT6\ip ', see Trov7jp6s, 2 li.] KaKOTJOeia [-5m AA II ; see I, t], -as, jj, (fr. KaxorjBjjs, and this fr. KOKik ami tj6oi), bad character, depravitij of heart and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al. ; 4 Mace. i. 4, where cf. Grimm p. 299 ; spec, used of malignant subtlety, malicious craftiness : Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22 ; Add. to Esth. viii. 1. 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3.5, 5; Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 4; IG, 3, 1 ; [c. Ap. 1, 24, 4]; Polyb. 5, 50, 5, etc.). On the other hand, .\ristot. rhet. 2, 13, [3 p. 81] defines it to em TO xe'tpov vTToXafijiaveiv niivra, [taking all things in the evil part, Cencvan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].* KaKoXoYt'u, -i ; 1 aor. inf. «aicoXoy^ffai ; (xaKoXoyor) ; i. q. (caKws Xe'-ym (which the old grammarians prefer, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200) ; 1. to speak ill of, revile, abuse, one ; to calumniate, traduce : nva, Mk. ix. 39 ; tI, A.cts xix. 9 ; (2 Mace. iv. 1 ; Lys., Plut., al.). 2. riellenistically, to imprecate evil on, curse : nva, Mt. xv. 4 ; Mk. vii. 10, (so for bSp, Prov. xx. 20 ; Ezek. xxii. 7 ; Ex. xxii. 28).* KaKoirdSeia [-6ia W^H ; see 1, 4], -as, f), (xaKon-a^ijt suffer- ing evil, afflicted), prop, the suffering of evil, i. e. trouble, , -u ; 1 aor. inf. KaKoiroirjaai ; («nxoTroioj) ; 1. to do harm : Mk. iii. 4 ; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do wrong: iPet. iii. 17; 3Jn. 11. ([Aeschyl, Arstph.], Xen., Polyb., Anlunin., Plut.; Sept.)* KaKoiroibs, -oc, (kokov and Troie'oj), doing evil; subst. an evil-doer, malefactor : Jn. .xviii. 30 [but L mrg. T Tr WII KOKuv TToiHivl ; 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14 ; iii. IG [T Tr mrg. WII om. the el.]; iv. 15. (Prov. .xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb., Plut.) • Ka.K6$,-t'j,-6ii, Sept. for ;?"!, [fr. Hom. down], bad, [A.V. (almost uniformly) evil'] ; 1. univ. of a bad nature; not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a mode of thinking, feeling, acting; base, wrong, ivicked: of persons, Ml. xxi. 41 [cf. AV. G37 (592); also B. 143 (12G)] ; xxiv. 48 ; Phil. iii. 2 ; Rev. ii. 2. hm\oyi : (fr. obsol. KaKovxos, fr. kokov and ex'") i to treat ill, oppress, plague : Tivd ; pres. pass. ptcp. kokov ;(ou/if 1/01, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii. 3. (1 K. ii. 26; .\i. 39 Alex.; Diod. 3, 23; 19, 11; Dio C. 35 (3C), 9 (11) ; Plut. mor. j). 114 e.) [Comp. : irvy-KaKov- Xe'm.] • KaKOw, -a>: fut. KaKoxrco; 1 aor. tKaxoxra ; (kukos): 1. to opj/ress, afflict, harm, maltreat : Tivd, Acts vii. G, 19 ; xii. 1 ; xviii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 13, (E.x. v. 22; xxiii. 9 Alex. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. down). 2. by a usage foreign to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concito) ; render evil affected, (Vs. cv. (cvi.) 32; Joseph, antt. 16, KUKW; 321 KaXe(a 1,2; 7, 3 ; 8, G) : rfju yjrvxriv tivos kotc'i twos, against one, Acts xiv. 2.* KaKus, (kukos), adv., [fr. Horn, down], badly, ill, i. e. a. [in a physical sense] miserably : e^f t", '" be ill, sick [see ■«X«! II- a.], J^It. iv. 24 ; viii. 16 ; ix. 12 ; xiv. 35 ; [xvii. 15 LTrtxt.WHtxt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 17; [vi. 55]; Lk. V. 31 ; vii. 2, etc. ; nacrxfiv, Mt. xvii. 15 [RGT Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ; baijiovl^ecrBai, Mt. xv. 22 ; kokovs (cnxajs oTToXeVft, Mt. xxi. 41, on tliis combination of words with verbs of destroying, perishing, etc., whicli is freq. in Grk. writ, also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc. ; W. §68, 1. b. [mor- ally] improperly, u^ronrjly : Jn. ,\viii. 23 ; kokus ciirdv nva, to speak ill of, revile, one. Acts xxiii. 5 ; with bad in- tent, aiTelaSat, .Tas. iv. 3.* KciKuo-ts, -fair, fj, (xuKoa), ill-treaimeni, ill-usage, (Vulg. ■affliclio) : Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19 ; Ex. iii. 7, 1 7 ; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.] ; Thuc, Xen., Pint., al.) • Ka\d)Li^, -r)s, ij, a stalk of grain or of a reed, tke_ stalk (left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12. (Ex. V. 12 ; XV. 7 ; Is. xvii. 6 ; Hom. et sqq.) * Kd\a)ios, -ov, 6, fr. Find, down, Lat. calamus i. e. a. a reed : Mt. xi. 7 ; xii. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b. a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21) : Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48 ; Mk. xv. 19, 36. c. a measuring reed or rod: Rev. xi. 1 ; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii. 16-19). d. a writer's reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see Gardthausen, Griecli. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq.].* KaXc'u, -w; impf. (koKovv: hit. KoKiaai (W. § 13, 3 c); 1 aor. eKokecra; pf- K(KhT}Ka; Pass., pres. KoKovnat; pf. 3 pers. sing. KeKXrjTm (1 Co. vii. 18 LTTrWII; [Rev. xix. 13 LTTrWH]), ptcp. KeK^rj/ievos; 1 aor. iKKr^6r)v; 1 fut. KXrj&rjcroiiat ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Hebr. Xip ; Lat. rocn: i. e. 1. to call (Germ, rufen [ci. ^oaa, fin.]) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice : S^pis ov TO (Trjfi€pov KaXeirat, as long as the word ' to ; (i. q. koXco; ttoiu, cf. Lob. ad PhrjTi. p. 199 sq. [W. 25]); to do well, act uprightly: 2 Th. iii. 13. (Etym. Magn. 189, 24; [Lev. v. 4 Aid. (as quoted in) Philo de -somn. 1. ii. § 44].) * KaX6$, -ij, -6v, [prob. j)rimarily ' sound,' ' hale,' ' whole ; ' cf. Vanicek p. 140 sq. ; Curtius § 31], Sept. for nS' beau- tiful, but much oftener for 31U good ; beautiful, applied by the (j reeks to everything so distinguished in form, ex- cellence, goodness, usefulness, as to be pleasing ; hence (ace. to the context) i. q. beautiful, handsome, excellent, eminent, choice, surpassing, precious, useful, suitable, com- mendable, admirable ; a. beautiful to look at, shapely, magnificent : Xt'flois koXoi; «icdcr/iijTat [A. V. goodly"], Lk. -xxi. 5. b. good, excellent in its nature and character- istics, and therefore well-adapted to its ends : joined to the names of material objects, univ. 1 Tim. iv. 4 (i. q. pure) ; esp. of things so constituted as to answer the purpose for which that class of things was created ; good of its kind : TO raXd, of fish, opp. to such as are thrown away (ra trairpd), Mt. xiii. 48; a-mpfia, Mt. xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq. ; Kapnot, Mt. iii. 10 ; vii. 17-19; xii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 9 [L WH br. xaX.] ; vi. 43 ; 8tv8pov, opp. to (rairpou, jMt. xii. 33 ; Lk. vi. 43 ; y^, Mt. xiU. 8, 23 ; Jlk. iv. 8, 20 ; Lk. viU. 15 ; KOikov TO a\at (is an excellent thing), Mk. ix. 50 ; Lk. xiv. 34 ; so too d rd/ios, good in its substance and nature, and fitted to beget good, Ro. vii. IG; 1 Tim. i. S; SiSao-KoXia, true and approved teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; KapSia koXij k. dyaOij. l.k. viii. 15 ; ■napadr^Krj [(p v.] (containing [rather, consisting of] xaXd), 2 Tim. i. 14; fitrpov, ample meas- ure (rabbin. n31D m3 ; Eng. good measure), Lk. vi. 38 ; /3afl/ids (firm [but see /Sa^^ds]), 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; also depi- Xfos, 1 Tim. vi. 19 ; i. (j. genuine, approved, ndvra Sow/id- frrf, TO (cnXAj/ KaT(\fTc, 1 Th. V. 21 ; i. q. precious [A.V. goodly^, ptipyapirai, Jit. xiii. 45 ; i. q. superior to other kinds, oli/os, .lu. ii. 10; joined to names of men desig- nated by their ollice, compclint,able, such as one ought to he : ■notpr]v. .In. x. 1 1 , 1 4 : diuKovor, 1 Tim. iv. (i ; oiKovopLOs, 1 Pet. iv. 10; arpaTiwTijs. 2 Tim. ii. 3; joined to nouns denoting an effect estimated by the power it involves, or by its constancy, or by the end aimed at by its author, i. q. praiseworthy, noble: arpaTela, 1 Tim. i. 18; dyav, 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7 ; opokoyla, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq. j fpyov, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. G ; Jn. x. 33 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; plur. Jn. X. 32. koKov eariu, it is expedient, proflubUy wholesome : foil, by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1 ; w. nvi adiled [so in 1 Co. 1. e. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [cf. \V. 241 (22ti); B.§149, 7]; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, R (i [also LTr mrg. in 47] ; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; ix. 15 ; k. iariv foil, by the ace» and inf., Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, L (but see above) TTr (but not mrg., see above) WH ; Ileb. xiii. 9 ; foil, by d [ef. B. 217^(187 sq.) ; W. 282 (265)], Mt. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. ix. 42 ; xiv. 21 ; foil, by idv [B. and W. u. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8 ; it is pleasant, delightful, foil, by ace. with inf. : Jit. xvii. 4; Jlk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea- son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy ; morally good, noble, (Lat. honcslus; [cf. Aristot. to xafl' aiiTo KaXdi/]): SidKpi(Tis koXoO t( Ka'i KaKov, Heb. v. 14; epya, Jit. v. 16 ; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25 ; vi. LS; Tit. ii. 7, 14 ; iii. 8,14; Heb. x. 24 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2, and Lehm. in 2 Pet. i. 1 ; dvaarpocpfj, Jas. iii. 13 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12; itoX^ (rvvflSrjirts, con- sciousness of good deeds, [A.V. a good conscience], Heb. xiii. 18; KoKd, KaXdx ivdnnov ruios, in one's judgment, Ro. xii. 1 7 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; 1 Tim. ii. 3 an, Gal. iv. 18 ; tokoKov Karipyd^fcBai, Ro. vii. 18 ; woteiv, ib. 21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 1 7; «aXdi/ ianv, It Is right, proper, becoming, foil, by an inf. : Jit. xv. 26 (L T e^fariv) ; [Jlk. vii. 27] ; Gal. iv. 18 [here Tr mrg. impv.] ; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor : fiaprupia, 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; Svopa, Jas. ii. 7 ; oi koKov to kuv- Xi7fia vpav, 1 Co. v. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably, roiiforling and confirming : 6foii prjpa (Sept. for 31D IJlj which is spoken of the divine promises, Josh. xxi. 45 ; Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its promises full of consola- tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. koXXi'co», -ov, belter : neut. adverbially, av koWiov fTnyivaxTKfis, i. e. better than by thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242 (227)]. The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf. Trench § cvi. fin. ; Zezschxdiz, Profangriicitiit u. s. w. p. 60 sq. (cf. dya^dj, fin.) ; Westcott on Jn. x. 11.] * Kd^v|i|j.a, -Tof, TO, {KokvirTa), a veil, 'a covering: 2 Co. iii. 13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33) ; [icdXv^/ia, or its equiv., is suggested KoXvirro) 323 Kav to the reader by the context in 1 Co. xi. 4 nara Ke(f)a\jjs fX'""' see ()(a, I. 1 b.]; metaph., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that which prevents a tiling from being understood. (Horn., Tragg., Arstph., al. ; Sept.)* KoXvirrtD ; f ut. KaXv^jfa ; 1 aor. iKaKinffa ; Pass., pres. inf. KdXvTrrftrdm ; pf. ptcp. /cffcaXu/ifie'i/or ; [allied with KpiwTca ; Vanicek p. 1091; Curlitt.-; Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept. for n33 ; often in Horn., Tragg. and other poets, more rarely in prose ; to cover, cover vp; prop. : rtva, Lk. .xxiii. 30 ; Tt Tivt, a thing with anj^hing, Lk. viii. 16 ; pass. Mt. viii. 24 ; trop. lo hide, veil, i. e. to hinder the knowledge of a thing : pf. pass., Mt. x. 26 ; 2 Co. iv. 3 ; TrX^flor ajtap- Tiiov, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them, 1 Pet. iv. 8 ; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas. V. 20; cf. Ps. Ixxxiv. (Lx.xxv.) 3 (2) ; xxxi. (xxxii.) 1 sq. [CoMP. : dva-, cmo-, im-, Kara-, irapa-, nepi-, crvy-KoXijnTO).] * KoXus, (koXos), adv., [fr. Horn, down], beautifully, fine- ly, excellendy, well: [univ. 8ta to KoXaJs- oUoSofirja-dai (Tr -fifia-dat, q. v.), Lk. vi. 48 T Tr WH] ; spec. a. rightly, so that there shall he no room for blame : joined to verbs of speaking (aiT0Kplve, a form which passed over from the Epic (cf. Horn, batrach. 191) and com. language [Apoll. Dysc. synt. 323, 22 ; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying Greek ; condemned by Phryn. [as below] ; derived by syncope and assimilation from KaTafiiai (which the earlier and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. Kafijiiv, Kafijiovi], Ka/i.- p-opoi, fr. Kara jiev, narapxtvr), Karafiopos, cf. Bllm. Gram. § 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De Vitus lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 1 73 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq. ; Schdfer ad Lamb. Bos p. 368; [cf. B. 62 (55) ; AV. 24, 46]) i 1 aor. fV,;,^- pxia-a ; to shut the eyes, close the eyes : often w. rois 6(ji0aK- fiois added ; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts .xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept. Is. vi. 10, for I'pry, i. e. to besmear), in both which pass, the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob- stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel. (Is. XXIX. 10; Lam. iii. 43; Kapfiveiv to ttjs ^vxV^ opfia, Philo de somn. i. § 26.) * Kd|i,vu; 2 aor. fKa/iov, pf. KfKfujKa; 1. to grow weary, be weary, (so fr. Horn, down) : Rev. ii. 3 Rec. ; Heb. xii. 3. 2. to be sick : Jas. v. 15 (Soph., [Hdt.], Arstph., Eur.. Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Lcian. al.).* [KopioC, see jcaym.] Kd[nrrfc); fut. Kofi-ij/m: 1 aor. «a/xi/ra: a. to bend, bow: TO yow (and to yoivara), the knee Qhe knees'), used by Horn, of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest (B. 7, 118 ; 19, 72) ; in bibl. Grk. with dat. of pers. to one i. e. in honor of one, in religious veneration ; used of worshippers: Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 18 (where for J?"^3 foil, by S) ; npos Tiva, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii. 14. b. reflexively, to bow one's self: KapLyj/fi ndv ■yow; e/iot, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr. Is. .xlv. 23); eV tm ovonari 'irjcrov, in devout recognition of the name (of Kvpios) which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [cf. W. 390 (365) ; Bp. Lghtft., Jlcyer, in loc.; also ovofia, esp. sub fin. CoMP. : dva-, (rvy-KafXTmo].' Kov [Grsb. kSv; see «tdyoi, init.], by crasis for ko'i idv [cf. W. § 5, 3 ; B. p. 10 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 97 ; WH. App. p. 145""]; hence joined with the subjimctive; 1. and if: Mt. x. 23 G L; Mk. xvi. 18 ; [Lk. xii. 38 (bis) T Tr txt. WH ; Jn. viii. 55 L T Tr WH ; 1 Co. xiii. 2' L WH, 2' Tr txt. WH, 3" L Tr AA'H, 3' L V»'H]; Jas. v. 15 ; by aposiopesis with the suppression of the apodo- sis, Kav fiiv TTOirjoyi Kapnov, sc. (v exci it is well (or some such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9 ; cf. W. 600 (558) ; [B. § 151, 26]. 2. also or even if; a. if only, at least, in abridged discourse: k&v rav i/uzrio)» airoij, sc. a\j/afiat, Mk. V. 28 ; also Iva (sc. atfrmoroi airroii) Kav toC Kpaa~n-eSov . . . d^tovrai, Jlk. vi. 56 ; iva ep;^o^eVoi; UfTpov (sc. rl avTov imcTKtdaTi avrav) Kav r/ crxia etc. Acts v. 15 ; k&v as Ka 324 KaTrrfKevco a^ Rec." in Jn. ii. 1, 11], prop, name of a village of Galilee about tliree hours distant from Nazareth towards the northwest, surviving at present in a place (partly unin- habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-JelXl ; cf. Jl(il>inson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 3 16 sq. ; also his Later Bibl. Researches, p. 108; cf. Ewald, Gescli. Christus u. s. w. p. 147 (ed. 1) ; RUelsrlii in Herzog vii. 234 ; \_Por- ter in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in- clined to reopen the question of the identification of Cana ; see e. g. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. ; Zeller, in Quart. Statem. of Palest. Expl. Fund, No. iii. p. 71 s(j. ; Arnaud, Palestine p. 41 2 sq. ; Conder, Tent Work etc. i. 150 sq.] : Jn. ii. 1, 11 ; iv. 41) ; xxi. 2.' Kavava-u)s L T Tr WH in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. IS (for lv(i KarafiVrjs, (). v.); acc. to the interp. of Bleek (Erkliir. i!. drci erstcn Evv. i. p. 41 7) et al. a native of Cana (see Kara) ; but then it ought to be written Kai/mos. The reading Kavavaios seems to be a clerical error occasioned by the preceding eaSSaior [or Af/3^aios] ; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. X. 4. [But -alof is a connnon ending of the Gre- c-ized form of names of sects (cf. 'Ao-o-iSmof, ^apiaaio!, 'S,a&&ovKaios, 'Etro-aios)- Hence the word is prob. derived fr. the Aramaic JNJp (sec next word) and corresponds to fjjXoiTijr, t\. V. (cf. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp. Liihtfl. Fresh Revision etc. p. 138 sq.] * KavavCrns, -ov, 6, (fr. Chald. ;x:p, Ilebr. NJP), i. q. o frjXuTijs (acc. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acts i. 13), q. v., the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon : R (; (the latter with small le) in Mt. x. 4 and Jlk. iii. IS.» KavSaio], -i)s, rj, Can'diice, a name common to the queens of a region of Ethiopia whose capital was Napata; just as the proper name Ptolemi/ was common to the Egyp- tian kings, and Henri/ to the Reuss princes (Strabo 1 7, 1. 54 p. 820; Plin. h. n. 6, 3.5 ; Dio Cass. 54, 5) : Acts viii. 27 ; cf. Laurent, Die Kijnigin Kandake, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 18G2, p. 632 sqq. [reprinted in his N. T. Studien p. 140 sq. ; cf. esp. B. I). Am. ed. s. v.].* Kaviiv, -dvot, 6, (rawa, Hcbr. njp a cane, reed ; Arab. — . ' SLo a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff [cf. Vanicel:, Fremdworter etc. p. 21]), prop, a rod or straight piece of rounded wood to whicli any thing is fastened to keep it straight ; used for various purposes (see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.) ; a measuring rod, rule; a carpenter's line or measuring tape, Schol. on Eur. ilippol. 468; hence i. q. to fitrpov tov m)Srip.aTos (Pol- lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the Olympic games ; accordingly in the N. T. 1. a definitely hounded or fixed space within the limits of which one's power or influence is confined ; the province assigned one; one's sphere of activity : 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2. Metaph. nn;/ rule or standard, a principle or law of in- vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class. Grk., as tov Ka\ov, Eur. llec. 602; opoi tu>v ayaBiav k. Kavova, Dem. pro cor. p. 324, 27) : Gal. vi. 16 ; Phil. iii. 16 Rec. Cf. Credner, Zur Geseh. des Kanons (Hal. 1847), p. 6 sqq.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T., A\)p. A; briefly in B. D. s. v. Canon of Scripture; for ex.x. of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].* Kair£pvaov|i or more correctly (with LTTrWIl [cf. 117/. App. p. 160; Scrivener, Introd. p. 561]) Ka(j)ap- vaovp, (133 a village, and Dinj consolation; hence 'the village of consolation,' [al. 'village of Nachum' (a prop, name)]; Kanapvaovpi,Vtol. 5, IG, 4), ri, Capernaum or Capharnaum, a flourishing city of Galilee (Mt. xi. 23 ; Lk. X. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24 ; hence 17 Trapa6aKa(TtTia, Alt. iv. 13), near the place where the Jor- dan flows into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in the O. T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf. also B. D. s. V. Caphar]. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10, S) a fountain in Galilee called Viy the neighboring residents KiKpapvauvjx, and (vita 72) 'koijitiv Kfpas uvdos KaT7T]\fvova-av, Philo de caritat. § 14, cf. leg. ad Gaium § 30, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence some suppose that KamjKddv t. \oyov tov Sfov in 2 Co. ii. 17 is equiv. to to trade in the word of God, i. e. to try to get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as ped- lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities for the sake of gain (oi KairrjKoi aov pia-yovm tov oJpov voari, Is. 1. 22 Sept. ; KaTTrjXoi, 01 tov oivnv Kepavvvvre^, Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; 01 CKniTov xapdiav, 'Mt. xviii. 35 (ano KapSias fi\apiaTos To'is ^foif, Antonin. 2, 3) ; iv oXi; T. K. and e'f oKijs t. k., ilt. xxii. 37 ; Mk. xii. 30, 33 ; Lk. x. 27, and Rec. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5; xxvi. 16 ; Ps. exviii. (c.xLx.) 34) ; ner dXrjdivrjs KopSlas, Heb. .\. 22. (pevvav Tcis KapSias, Ro. viii. 27 ; Rev. ii. 23 ; SoKifid^dv, 1 Th. ii. 4: yivuxTKdv, Lk. xvi. 15, (eTa^etv, Jer. xvii. 10 ; Ps. vii. 10) ; Siavotyfw ttjv k. (see Siavoiyo), 2), Acts xvi. 14; Tjv J] KapSla k. ^ V"'X7 f"'"' there was perfect unanimity, agi-eement of heart and soul. Acts iv. 32; TiBevai Tt iv TJj K. (^Ss and aS '7J? D^tv, 1 S. xxi. 12; MaL ii. 2 ; Dan. i. 8 ; ridivat iv urrideao'iv, iv (fipforiv, etc., in Horn.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66 ; lofx in the heart 1. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V. conceived in thy heart'] ; also els t. KapSiav [L T Tr WH iv T. K.] foil, by the inf., Lk. xxi. 14 ; ^aXXetv fls ttjv k. Tivos. foil, by Iva, to put into one's mind the design of doing a thing, .In. xiii. 2 ; also SiSovai foil, by an inf., Rev. xvii. 17; dva^aivft iifi ttjv k. tivos, foil, by an inf., the purpose to do a thing comes into the mind. Acts vii. 23 ; iv Tji KapSla joined to verbs of thinking, reflect- ing upon, doubting, etc. : ivdyfUicrBaL, SiaXoyi^cadai, Mt. ix. 4; Mk. ii. 6, 8; Lk. iii. 15; v. 22; Xiyeiv, (hfiv (ishl 10K), to think, consider with one's self, ^It. xxiv. 48 ; Lk. xii. 45 ; Ro. x. 6 ; Rev. xviii. 7, (Deut. viii. 1 7 ; ix. 4): avp^dWeiv, to revolve in mind, Lk. ii. 19; Sia- Kplveadai, to doubt, Mk. xi. 23 ; 8i(zXoyiv k. 1 Co. iv. 5 : Trpoatpeia-6ai Tjj K. 2 Co. ix. 7 ; Kplveiv (to determine) and iSpaios iv ttj K. 1 Co. vii. 37. 8. of the soul so far forth as it is affected and stirred in a bad way or good, or of the soul as the seat of the sensiliilities, affections, e/notions, desires, appetites, pa-isions : f/ xapSla Kaiofiivri tjv, of the soul as greatly and peculiarly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32; al i-i6vp.lai. tS>v KapSiav, Ro. i. 24 ; trrijpiffii' ray k. of the cultivation of constancy KapBlOyPCOCTTTJii 326 anil onilurance, Jas. v. 8. in ref. to good-will and love : (X"" Tii-a fv Tjj K. to have one in one's heart, of constant re- membrance and steadfast affection, Phil. i. 7 (' te tamen in toto pectoro semper liabct ' Ovid, trist. .5, 4, 24) ; eivat (V rfi K. Tivos. to be clic'rished in one's heart, to be loved l)V one periictually and unalterably, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; evboKia T^f K. llo. X. 1. in ref. to joy and pleasure : r)vpdvdT] f) K. Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9) ; xafyt'icreTai fj k. Jn. xvi. 22 ; dvrip Kara Trjv K. Tov Oeoii, i. e. in whom (iod deUghts, Acts xiii. 22 ; of the pleasure given by food, Acts xiv. 17 ([W. 15G (148) note] see 2 a. above), in ref. to grief, pain, anguish, etc. : q \{mr) nfnXrjpuiKf ttjv k. Jn. xvi. G ; odCvT] TJJ Kapdia fiov. Ho. ix. 2 ; rj k. Tapdaafraiy Jn. xiv. 1, 27 ; (Tvvoxfi KapBlas, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; (Bap^lt^ r. Kap()Uii pepipvais jSiunitais, I^k. xxi. 34 [ef. 2 a. above] ; Sia-nplopat t;/ k. Acts \\\. <)-i ; (Tvvr(TpLpp.tvos TTJV K. Lk. iv. 1 .S Iv T^ br. ; Kajtviyrj- aavTij K. Acts ii. 37 [L T Tr Wll tijv k.] ; trvvSpinTiiv tijv «.Acts xxi. 13. c. o/ a noulcotisciuuso/ good or bad deeds (our conscience') : 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq. (Eccl. vii. 22 ; so aaS, Job x.wii. 6 ; jj Kaphia ■n-arda-a-ei Tivd, 1 S. xxiv. 6 ; 2 S. xxiv. 10). 3. u»cdof the middle or central or inmost part of any tliinrj, eveti thouijh inanimate : r^r y^r (which some understand of Hades, others of the sepulchre), ^It. xii. 40 (rijs 6a\dcrcrr]i, Jon. ii. 4 for ^'l ; and for the same fv 11.(11 a> 6aKdJ? [see rrcnta, 1. 1 e.]), JNIt. iii. 10; vii. 17-19 ; xiii. 2G; Lk. iii. 9; vi. 43; viii. 8 ; xiii. 9; Rev. .xxii. 2 ; SiSoVai, Mt. .xiii. 8 ; !Mk. iv. 7 sq. ; (pftv, Mt. vii. IS T WII ; Jn. xii. 24 ; xv. 2, 4 sq. ; (trop. xv. 8, IG); dnoSiSuvai, to yield fruit, Rev. xxii. 2; to render (pay) the fruit, Mt. xxi. 41 ; by a Hebraism, 6 Kapnbs Tfjs KoiXtas, i. e. the unborn child, Lk. i. 42 (]D3 '13, Dent, xxviii. 4, where Sept. to fKyova rrjs KoiXias) ', ttjs 6(TwT6s, Eph. V. 9 (Rec. T. TrvfifiaToi) ; ttjs SiKaiotrvvijs, Phil. i. 11 [cf. b. below] ; of Christian charity, i. e. benefit, Ro. xv. 28; Kapnov TToKiiv (j>ip(iv, to accomplish much (for the propa- gation of Christianity and its furtherance in the souls of men), Jn. xv. 8, IG ; used of men's deeds as exponents of their hearts [cf. W. 372 (348)], Mt. vii. IG, 20; dya- 6oL, .las. iii. 1 7 ; Kapnoi T^r liaa. toO BeoC, deeds required for the attainment of salvation in the kiu'jdom of God, ]\It. xxi. 43 : TToiclv KapTTOvs d^lovs riji- p(Tavoiac, to exhibit deeds agreeing with a change of heart, Mt. iii. 8 ; Lk. iii. 8, (cf. li^ia TJjs fKTavoiai epya jrpdatretv. Acts x.xvi. 20). b. advantage, profit, utility: Phil. i. 22 ; iv. 17; cx^^" ""P" TTov, to get fruit, Ro. i. 13; vi. 21 sq. ; ttjs SiKatoa-vvTjs, benefit arising from righteousness [al. make it gen. of apposition, W. § .09, 8 a.], Ileb. xii. 1 1 ; which consists in righteousness (gen. of appos.), Jas. iii. 18 [cf. Phil. i. U in a. above, and Meyer ad loc. ; Prov. xi. 30 ; Amos vi. 12]. c. by a Ih4)raism 01 «apjroi TUK ;((iXf'ffli', i)raises, which arc presented to (iod as a thank-oilcring: lleb. xiii. 1.') (Hos. xiv. 2; Prov. xii. 14; xxix. 49 (xxxi. 31)). Cf. W. 33 (32) note 1. d. avvaytiv Kapnov fi9 fcor/y alaviov, to gather fruit (i. e. a reaped harvest) into life eternal (as into a granary), is used in fig. discourse of those who by their labors have fitted souls to obtain eter- nal life, Jn. iv. 3G.* Kapi7o-4)opt ; 1 aor. fKni>TTo(j>6pr)(Ta ; pres. pass. ptcp. KapTTfKJiopovpei^os', {Kap77o6pos, -ov, (Kapndc and (^ipu>), fruit-hearing, fruitful, productive: Acts .xiv. 17. (Pind., Xen., Theo- phr., Diod., Sept.) * KapTcpt'u, -a> : 1 aor. iKapTeprja-a ; {Kaprtpos [f r. xdpTos i.<.: KpaTos, 'strong']); to lie steadfast : Ileb. xi. 27 [A.V. endured']. (Job ii. 9; .Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down.) [CoMP. : npoa-icap- T€pio}.~\ * Koip(t)os, -fos (-our), t6, (fr. xdpcfxa to contract, dry up, wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff, [A.V. mote'] : Mt. vii. 3-5 ; Lk. vi. 41 sq., where it figuratively denotes a smaller fault. ((Jen. viii. 11 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down.) * Kara, [on its ne;;lect of elision before a vowel see Tdf. Proleg. ]). 95 ; cf. W. § 5, I a. ; B. 10 ; WH. App. p. ItG"], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the ace. I. With the Genitive (W. §47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]) ; 1. prop. a. doumfrom, down : koto Kara 327 Tou Kprinvov, Mt. viii. 32 ; Mk. v. 13 ; Lk. viii. 33 ; KaT()(e(v xara Trjs K((j>a\rjs (so that it flowed down from his liead [cf. W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit Kara witli L T Tr AVH ; see Karaxea), Mk. xiv. 3 ; lience Kara Kf0aX^r (a veil hanging down from his Iiead) f';(a)f, 1 Co. -xi. 4 ([A. V. Jiacinij his head covered^ cf. /ca- TaireTaa-fia [or rather «aXv/i/ia (q- v.), but see f;(a), 1. 1 b.]). b. doicn upon {ilown into) anytliing : Acts.xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (3.37) note'; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Crete]; trop. ij KiiTu liadovs ■HToixeia reaching down into the deptli, i. e. daKpovs, before the eyes. Gal. iii. 1 ; here, too, ace. to some [cf. W. 400 (374) note ^] belongs xaTo deov, Ro. viii. 27, but it is more correctly referred to 3 c. a. be- low, d. of the place where: kqt olkoi/ (opp. to (V T(5 icpw), at home, pi-ivately [W. 400 (374) note ^], Acts ii. 46 ; v. 42. e. of that whicli so joins itself to one thing as to separate itself from another; our /or, bg : KaT I'Stai/, apart, see ISios, 2 ; Ka6' iavrov, alone (by himself), Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 17 [R. V. in itself], (2 Mace. xiii. 13; 01 Kad' avroiis "EWrives, Thuc. 1, 138; oi Bo(uToi Ka6' avTovi, Diod. 13, 72; other exx. are given by Alberll, Observv. etc. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e Philone p. 460 sq.) ; «x^'" ''' '"'^' eauTuV, to have a thing by and to one's self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one's mind, Ro. xiv. 22 (Joseph, antt. 2, 11, 1 ; HeUod. 7, 16 ; [cf. W. 401 (375) note 1]) ; hence, of that which belongs to some pers. or tiling : koto rfjv ova-av fKKKrjcriav, belonging to [A. V. in] the church that was there. Acts xiii. 1 ; 17 (KK\r)a-la Kar oIkov tivos, belonging to one's household (see (KK\r)ala, 4 b. aa.) ; hence it forms a periphrasis — now for the gen., as ra Kara 'lovSaiovs (Brj (i. q. Tav '\ov- baiatv), Acts -x.xvi. 3; now for the possessive pron., oi Kaff vpds noiTjTal, your own poets. Acts xvii. 28 [here WH nirg. Kad' 17/ias, see their Intr. § 404] ; vopov roO Ka6' vpas, [a law of your own]. Acts xviii. 15 ; to kut epi Trpi'iBvpoii, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see npoBvpos]; t) Kaff vpas ttiVtis. Eph. i. 15, (tj Kara Tov Tvpavi/ov ^porrjs Te «at hiivapii, Diod. 14, 12; fie'xpi tuiv koB' ijpas p^poVui», Dion. ILal. antt. 2, 1 ; cf. Grimm on 2 ]Macc. iv. 21 p. 88 ; a throng of exx. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schicelghaeuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [cf. W. 154 (146) ; 400(374) note 2; esp. B. § 132, 2]). 2. of Time [cf. W..401 (374)]; during, about; hat. tempore : Kar (kcIvov or tov- rov TOV Katpov, Acts xii. 1 ; xix. 23 ; Ro. ix. 9 ; Heb. ix. 9 [R G] ; Kara to airo. at the same time, together. Acts .xiv. 1 (see airus, IIL 1); Kara to pfirovvKTiov, Acts xvi. 25 : Kara peVow r^r vvktos, Acts xxvii. 27 ; [possibly also Kara pajr^ixjipiav, at noon, Acts viii. 26 (see pfcrr)p^pia, b.)] ; /tnrd Kaipov. see Kaipos, 2 a. ; kot dpxds (Hdt. 3, 153), in the besinning (of things), Heb. i. 10 ; «nrd ttjv rjpipap tov TTfipaa-pov. Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this pass, liave ren- dered tlie prep. 3 in the context by as («V rm TiapairiKpa- Kara 328 o-^KJ), Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8), some would take it and Kara here i.q. /I'i'e n.< in the day etc. ; \vi\g.secun(liim']\ Kara nai/ mi^- Parov, Acts xiii. 27 ; xv. 21 ; xviii. 4 ; Kad' (KatrTrjv !}fiipav, Heb. iii. 13 ; Kara lirjva (Jva) iKaoTov, Kt'v. xxii. 2; kot" ovap, during a dream, see ovap. 3. it denotes ref- erence, relation, proper t ion, of various sorts; a. distributivcly, indicating a succession of tilings fol- lowing one another [AV. 401 (374) ; B. § 147, 20] ; a. in ref. to place: Kara ■iro\ii', in every city, (ciVy bi/ city, from city lo city), Lk. viii. 1,4; Acts xv. 21 ; xx. 23 ; Tit. i. 5, (Thuc. 1, 122) ; kot iKKXrjirlav, in every church. Acts xiv. 23 : w. the plur., Karh ivtiXeii, Lk. xiii. 22 ; Kara rat Kojfias, Lk. ix. G (lldt. 1, !)(>) ; kotii tuttovs, Mt. xxiv. 7; .Mk. xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 11 ; koto to? o-urayuydr, in every synagogue, Acts xxii. 19 ; [cf. Kara t. oUovs fla-rropfvofif- vos, Acts viii. 3]. p. in ref. to t i m e : kot cror, yearly, year by year, Lk. ii. 41 ; also kot evtavrov (see eviavrot) ; Ka6' fifiepav etc., see fjiiipa, 2 p. 278*; Kara fiiav (Ta^^aTov [K (i -rav], on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2 ; Kara ioprifv, at any and every feast, Mt. xxvii. 15; 5Ik. XV. 6 ; Lk. xxiii. 1 7 [Rec. ; cf. B. § 133, 26. Others iin- derstand the phrase in these pass, (contextually) at or pirTp.tvov, Lk. xxii. 22; Ka6' 6poia>aiv 6eov, Jas. iii. 9 ; Kara Xoyoi» riglitly, justly, [A. y. reason would etc.]. Acts xviii. 14 ; Kara Tiva, agree- ably to the will of any one, as pleases him, [W. 401 .sq. (375)]: so Kara 6e6v, Ro. viii. 27 [cf. 1 c. above]; 2 Co. vii. 9, 11 ; Kara XpitTTov 'Ir/a'oOv, Ro. xv. 5 ; Kara Kvptov, 2 Co. xi. 17; Kara roi' KaOapiapov, after the manner of purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii. G ; ot KaTii crupKa orrer, who bear, reflect, the nature of the flesh, i. q. 01 aapKiKol, ;ind ot Kara nvevpa owes i. ij- ot TTPfvpaTiKOi, Ro. viii. 5; Kara ri yvwcrofiai ; in accordance witli what criterion i. e. by wliat sign shall I know? Lk. i. 18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the titles of the records of the life of Christ : evayy. (wliich word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) Kara Mar^aioK, MapKov, etc., as" Matlhew etc. composed or wrote (it). This use of the prep, was not primarily a mere periphrasis for the gen. (Marflat'ou, etc., see H. 1 e. above), but indicated that the same subject had been otherwise handled by others, cf. r) noKaia SiadijKj] Kara Toiis e ^80 firjKovTa (in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also to the Greek translations made by others) ; ot vTTopvq- /xaritrfiot ot Kara Neepiav, 2 Macc. ii. 13 [see Grimm ad loc.]. Subsequently Kara with an ace. of the writer came to take the place of the gen., as ^ kutii MaCaea nevraTett- ;^09 in Epiphanius [haer. 8, 4. Cf. W. 402 (375); B. 3; 157(137); and see, further, Sopli. Lex. s. v. evayye\tov, Ja.i. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4]. p. in proportion lo, accorilinij lo the measure of: ^apltrpara Kara ttjv X'ipiv Trjv Sbdeiaav fjpiv 8id(popa, Ko. xii. G ; kotii tu perpov, 2 Co. .\. 13; Eph. iv. 7; Kara ri}i' o-KXrjporrjra aov, Ro. ii. 5; Kara top \p6vov, Mt. ii. 1 G ; tKcicrrw Karii njf Ibiav 8vvaptv, Mt. XXV. 15 ; without the art. kotci Svvapiv, 2 Co. viii. 3^ (opp. to vrrep Svvapiv, as Hom. II. 3, 59 Kar' ato-av, ov8' vnip alaav) ; Kaff oaov, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb. iii. 3 ; vii. 20; ix. 27; KaTa too-ovto, by so much, Heb. vii. 22. y. used of the cause; through, on account of from, owing lo, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence of, by virtue of) [AV. 402 (37G)] : Kara ndaav ahlav, \_for every cause], Mt. xix. 3 ; Kara ir)v xdpiv tov 6eov, 1 Co. iii. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, (Kara rijK Toij 6eo0 TTpo- voiav, Joseph, antt. 20, 8, G) ; KaTa x^fv, Ro. iv. 16: also opp. to Kara 6p.j)v, ov kot itnTayriv, by way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co. vii. 6, cf. 2 Co. viii. 8; Kara Kparos, Acts xL\. 20; Kaff opownjTa, Heb. iv. 15; on the phrase Kara avBpa-nov see twBpanoi, 1 c. [cf. a. above]. d. of the end aimed at: the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad [W. 402 sq. (37G)]): kut iTiayyeXlav fco^s, to proclaim life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see eirayyeXla, 1]; kot fia-i^itav, tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. 1] (see da-e- ^em ; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to the use set forth above, in c.]) ; Kara ttIotiv, to awaken, produce faith. Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of Kara fr. Ilom., Hdt., Thuc, Xen., may be seen in Passow s. v. H. 3 p. 1598"; [L. and S. s. v. B. IH. 1] ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 632; Kuhner ii. p. 412) ; many refer to this head also «car dnpiiav (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (370)]) Xe'yu, 2 Co. xi. 21 (kotq TTju Tipi]V Tov 8eov TovTo TTOtav, to the honor of God, Joseph, antt. 3, 11, 4) ; but see arijiia. m. In Composition Kara denotes, 1. from, down from, from a higher to a lower place: with special ref. to the terminus from which, as Kara^aiva), Kara^ijia^ai, etc. [cf. W. 431 (401 sq.)] ; with more prominent ref. to the lower terminus {down), as xara/SaXXti). KaTa-naria. etc. [cf. AV. u. s.]; also of the situation or local position,' as KaraKfipm. KadfvSco, KaraTWrfjii, Ka6i(a>, etc. fro7n top to bottom, uu-taph. of things done with care, thoroughly, as KaTafjLav6dva>, KaBopdto, etc. 2. in succession, in course : Kade^rjs ; one part after another, KaTapri^ai, narev- 6vvu>, etc. 3. under, underneath : KaraxBoinos ; the idea of putting under resides in verbs denoting victory, rule, etc., over others, as KaTaSwaa-Tcicii, KaTaKvptiva, ko- rflovcruifm, itaTaSovXow ; likewise in verbs naming that with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed, etc., as KaTaKaXiTTToj. KaTaXidu^co, KaTa(T ; impf. 3 pers. plur. icarc^aiKOj'; iut. Karafirj- a-opai; 2 aor. KaTf^rjv, impv. Kard^rjdi. (ilt. xxvii. 40; Lk. xL\. 5 ; Jn. iv. 49 ; Acts x. 20) and Kard^a (Mk. xv. 30 [R G (where L T Tr WH ptcp. Kara^ds)]. see dmfialva) j pi. Karaffi^tjKa; [fr. Horn, on] ; Sept. fori")'; to go down^ come down, descend; 1. of persons; a. prop.: absol., the place from which one has come down being evident from the context, «carajSas eonj, Lk. vi. 17 (cf. 12) ; xvii. 31 [foil, here by inf., so Jit. xxiv. 17] ; Lk. xLx.^ 5 sq.; Jn. v. 7; Acts xx. 10; Eph. iv. 10; foil, by duo -w. gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1 ; xiv. 29 ; xvii. 9 Ree. ; xxvii, 40, 42; Mk. ix. 9 [LTrmrg. WHt.xt. eV]; xv. 30, 32; by fK w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 G L T Tr WH [see (k, I. 3]; by tU w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [RGLbr. Tr;^ al. om. eif etc.] ; Acts viii. 38 ; [Ro. x. 7] ; Eph. iv. 9. b. to come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city of Jerusalem ; also of celestial beings coming down to earth: absol., Mt. iii. 1 6 ; Lk. ii. 51 ; x. 31 ; Jn. iv. 47, 49, 51 ; Acts [vii. 34]; viii. 15 ; x. 20; [xxiii. 10] ; xxiv. 1, 22 ; foil, by diro w. gen. of the place, Jlk. iii. 22 ; Lk. x. 30; Acts XXV. 7; 1 Th. iv. 16; ck toC oipavov, Mt.. xxviii. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13 ; vi. 33, 38[RG; al. ^770], 41 sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. cf. B. 297 (255)] ; Rev. x. 1 ; xviii. 1 ; xx. 1. foil, by els w. ace. of place, Lk. x. 30; xviii. 14 ; Jn. ii. 12 ; Acts vii. 15 ; xiv. 25 ; xvi. 8 ; xviii. 22 ; x.xv. 6 ; by eVi w. ace. of place, Jn. vi. 16 ; w. ace. of the pers., Mk. i. 10 [R G L mrg.] ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. i. 33, 51 (52) ; by iv w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [R L] (see iv, I. 7) ; by irpos w. ace. of pers.. Acts x. 21 ; xiv. 11 ; contextually i. q. to be cast down, of the devil, Rev. xii. 12. 2. of things, to come (i. e. be sent) down : Acts x. 11 (Rec. adds tV airov) ; xi. 5 ; foU. by dno w. a gen. of pers., Jas. i. 1 7 ; « tov uvpavov dub tov 6(ov, Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10; to come (i. e. fall) down : fr. the upper regions of the air ; as ^poxVt ^'t- ^ii- 25, 27 ; XaiXa\^, Lk. viii. 23 ; nip dno [Lchm. tic] tov ovp. Lk. ix. 54 ; « tov ovp. els T. ■y^i', Rev. xiii. 13; ix tov ovp. otto t. 6fov, Rev. XX. 9 [R G Tr] ; xa^of" «"'' "^"^ ""P- «'f' ''"'"' ^^^- •^^■'- -^ » Bpop^oi in\ Trjv yriv, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. AVH reject the pass.] : of a way leading downwards. Acts viii. 26. 3. figuratively, /ca-ra^. cws uSou, to (go i. e.) be cast down to the lowest state of wretchedness and shame : Mt. xi. 23 L Tr WH ; [Lk. x. 15 WH txt. Tr mrg. CoMP. : , <]. v.); 1. a throtc- ing or laying down : toC cmipp-aToi (sc. (Is triv p.i)Tpav), the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the womb, Lcian. amor. 1 9 ; Galen, aphorism, iv. § 1 ; of the seed of animals and plants, Pliilo de opif. mund. §§ 22, 45 ; oiTipjiaTa ra fts y^v rj p.T]Tpav Kara^aWopeva, Anto- nin. 4, 36: accordingly many interpret the words 2appa Siyaptv (Is KaTa!3o\r]v (nrepparos eXa/3e in Ileb. .\i. 11, she received |iower to conceive seed. But since it belongs to the male KaTajBdWav to aireppa, not to the female, this interpretation cannot stand [(ace. to the reading of A\'IImrg. airfj 'S.appa, Abr. remains the subj. of eXa^cv; but see 2 below)] ; cf. Bleek [and, on the other side, Kurtz] ad Ice. 2. a founding (laying down a foun- dation) : els Kara^. (mippaTos. to found a posterity, Ileb. xi. 11 [but cf. above] (Tvpavvlbos, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; apa.Tji -ff/KBTi; KOTaSoXfj Twv av6pu)irii>v, Plut. aquae et ignis com]). <;. 2). OTTO KaraiSoXris Koa-pov. from the foundation of the world : Mt. xiii. 35 [L T Tr AVII om. Kocrpov'} ; xxv. 34 ; Lk. xi. 50 ; Heb. iv. 3 ; ix. 26 ; Rev. xiii. 8 ; xvii. 8 ; npo KarafioX^s Kocrpov, Jn. xvii. 24 ; Eph. i. 4 ; 1 Pet. i. 20.* KaTa-PpaPv, Acts iv. 2 ; ras Tjptpas rairas, Acts iii. 24 (i L T Tr WII ; 6e6v [al. o]. Acts .wii. 23 : 'ijjcroiv, ib. 3 ; Christ, Phil. i. 16 (1 7), 18 ; Col. i. 28; nvi ri. Acts .\iii. 38; xvi. 17; 1 Co. ii. 1; with the in- eluded idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising (hut. jiracdicare) : ti, Ro. i. 8 [A.V. is spoken o/] ; 1 Co. .\i. 26. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 5, 38 where it means to denounce, report, betray; twice in the O. T. viz. 2 Mace. viii. 36 ; ix. 1 7. [Cf. AVestcott on 1 .In. i. 5.]) [COMP. : npo-KaTayyiXKa.} ' Kara-iiKoM, -a> : impf. 3 pers. plur. /caTcyf Xuv ; to de- ride, [A. V. laugh to scorii] : twos, any one [cf. Ii. § 132, 15], Mt. ix. 24 ; Ml;, v. 40 ; Lk. viii. 53. (From [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down ; Sept.) * KaTa-YivMO-Kii) ; pf. pass. ptcp. Ka-cyvaa-pivns ; to fintl fault with, blame: KaTpyvoia-pei/os rjv. he had incurred the censure of tlie Gentile Christians; Luther rightly, ts icar Klage iiber ihn kommen [i.e. a charge had been laid against him; but al. he stood condemned, see Meyer or EUic. in loc. ; ef. Bttm. § 134, 4, 8], Gal. ii. 11 ; to accuse, con- demn : TWOS, anyone, 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq., with which cf. Sir. xiv. 2 paxapios, ov oil KOTeyvto fj ^/'ux^ avTOXj. (In these and other signif. in Grk. writ. fr. [.Ve.-ichyl. and] Ildt. down ; [see Ellicott u. s.].) * KaT-a-yvvjii. : fut. icared^oj ; 1 aor. KoTt'a^a (iuq)V. Kara^oi', Deut. xxxiii. 11); Pass., 2 aor. KaTeuyriv. whence sul)junc. 3 pers. ])lur. Kareayaaw; 1 aor. KaTtdx^Brjv in Sc])t. .ler. xxxi. (xlviii.) 25 ; (on the syllabic augment of these forms cf. Dttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., cf. i. p. 323 sq. ; Matthias i. p. 520 sq.; AV. § 12, 2 ; \_Curtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118 ; A'eiteh s. v. ; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. Ixxix.]) ; fr. Horn, down ; to break : tI, Mt. xii. 20 ; .Tn. xix. 31-33. [Syn. see Schmidt cli. 115, 5 and cf. pr;yi/vpt.']* KaTa-Ypdci) : impf. 3 pers. sing. KaTcypa(j)fv ; to draw (forms or figures), to delineate: Jn. viii. 6 cod. D etc. which TTr AVH (txt.) would substitute for R G (ypa(pfv. (Pausan. 1, 28, 2. Differently in other Grk. writ.) [Peril, it maybe taken in .Tn. 1. c. in a more general sense : to ynark (cf. Pollux 9, 7, 104, etc.).]' Kar-a-yw : 2 aor. Karrfyayov ; 1 aor. pass. KaTT)x6r]v ; Sept. for Tlin, to make to descend ; to lead down, bring down : rwd. Acts xxii. 30 ; Ro. x. 6 ; two foil, by ds w. ace. of place, Acts ix. 30; xxiii. [15 L T Tr AA'II], 20, 28; Twd foil, by irpos w. ace. of pers.. Acts x.xiii. 1 5 [R G] ; to irXolov fVi Tijv yi)v to bring the vessel (down from deep water) to the land, Lk. v. 11 ; (caruyfir^ai, to be brought (down) in a ship, to land, touch at : foil, by ei's w. aec. of place, Acts xxi. 3 [LTTrAA'II KOTijKeoptv']; x.\vii. 3; x.\viii. 12; often so in Grk. writ.* KaT-a-y ; fut. KaTa8ov\aia\fiv, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (otttoSm rfjv Ke(f>a\Tiv, Joseph, antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame, malce ashamed : nvd, 1 Co. i. 27 ; xi. 22 ; pass, to be ashamed, blush with shame : Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; ix. 4 ; 1 Pet. iii. 16 ; by a Ilebr. usage one is said to be put to shame who suffers a repulse, or wliom some hope has deceived ; hence eXjris ov KaTaicrxivfi, does not disappoint: Ro. v. 5 (cf. Ps. .xxi. (xxii.) 6 ; xxiv. (xxv.) 2 sq. ; cxviii. (cxix.) 116) ; pass., Ro. ix. 33; x. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. C, (Is. xxviii. 16 ; Sir. ii. 10).* KaTa-KaCu: impf. 3 pers. plur. KaTcVaioi'; h\t. KaraKavira; 1 aor. inf. KaraKaOaai; Pass., pres. KaTaKaiofMu: 2 aor. KaTeKdrjV, 2 iui. naTOKarjaofiai [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 1 70*] ; 1 fut. KaroKavdijcrofjiat (Kiihner i. 841 ; [Veitch s. V. (cai'u; B. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept. chiefly for ^ycf; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see Kara, III. 4], consume by fire : ri, Mt. xiii. 30 ; Acts xix. 19 ; pass., 1 Co. iii. 15 ; Ileb. xiii. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH (vpedrjo-eTai, see fvpt (sec Kara, IH. 6) : 1 aor. icarfKXijpo- KaTaKXrjpoi'Ofj.ieo 332 Kara\afx.^dva> ionjaa; to distribute bij lot; to distribute as an inheritance : Tivi T«, Acts xiii. 19 Rec. ; see the foil. word. (Deut. i. 38; x.\i. 11) ; Josh. xi.\. 51 Alil.jCompl. ; 1 Mace. iii. 36, — in all with the var. KaroKKripovuiKiii. Not found in prof, aiith.) * KaTa-KXiipovo|jLe', -u [see Kara, III. G] : 1 aor. (carficXijpo- viifj-Tja-a ; lu ilislnhute by lot, to distribute as an inheritance : TiW Ti, Acts xiii. 1 9 G L T Tr WH. (Xum. xxxiv. 18 ; Deut. iii. 28 ; Josh. xiv. 1 ; Judg. xi. 24 Ale.>:. ; 1 S. ii. 8; 1 Esr. viii. 82. Also often intrans. to receive, obtain, ac- quire as an inlieritance ; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21. Not found in prof, auth.) * KaTo-K\£vo) : 1 aor. KareKXiva ; 1 aor. pass. Kar(KKl8r)v ; fr. Hum. down; in the X. T. in ref. to eating, to make In recline: rtva, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 TTrWII], (em to Bclnvov, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 21) ; mid., with 1 aor. pass., to recline (at tabic) : Lk. vii. 3G L T Tr WH ; xxiv. 30 ; els TTiv npaiTOKKiijiav, Lk. xiv. 8, (eir to euBletv, Judith xii. 15 ; eU TO Se'tTTvov, Joseph, antt. 6, 8, 1 [var.]).* Kara-icXii^u: 1 aor. pass. ptcp. KaTaxXutr^eis; fr. [Find., Ildt.], Aeschyl. down ; to overwhelm with water, to sub- merge, deluge, [cf. koto, IH. 4] : 2 Pet. iii. 6. (Sept. sev- eral times for 'IBU'.)' KaTa-K\vo-(i6s, -oO, 6, (KaraKKv^o)), inundation, deluge : of Xo.ah's dcliigL', ^It. xxiv. 3>i sij. ; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 5. (.Sept. for hurp ; Plato, Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.) • KaT-aKo\ouS£u, -M ; 1 aor. ptcp. KaTaKoXovdtjaas ; to fol- low after [see Kara, III. 5] : Lk. xxiii. 55 ; nvi. Acts xvi. 1 7. [Sept., Polvb., Plut., Joseph., al.] * KaTa-KoiTTti) ; 1. to cut up, cut to pieces, [see koto, in. 4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, etc.; Ildt. et sqq. 2. to heat, bruise : laxirov \idois, Mk. v. 5 ; [al. retain here the primary meaning, to cut, gash, mangle^.' KaTa-Kp»](iviJ~ ject to one's self, to subdue, master: rivos. Acts .xix. 16 (Diod. 14, 64 ; for 1733 Gen. i. 28 ; Sir. xvii. 4). b. to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over: TWOS, Mt. x.\. 25; jNIk, x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign government of God, Jer. iii. 14).* Kara-XoXcu, -u ; to speal: against one, to criminate, tra- duce : Tivos (in class. Grk. mostly w. the ace. ; in the Sept. chiefly foil, by Kara rtvos). Jas. iv. II; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2 ; iii. 16 [here TTrmrg. WH eV to KaraXaXeta-de, wherein ye are spoken against^.* KaTOrXoXid, -as, fj, (xoTaXaXos, q- v.), defamation, cril- spcaking : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)]. (Sap. i. 11 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 30, 1 ; 35, 5, and eccl. writ. ; not found in class. Grk.) * KaTo-XoXos, -ou, o, a defamer, evil speaker, [A. V. iac7> bitcrs'] : Ro. i. 3i). (Found nowhere else [Ilerm. sim. 6, 5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7, 2 ; 9, 26, 7].)* KaTa-Xa|i.pdv : 2 aor. KareXa^oV, pf. inf. KaTeiXrjtjitvai; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. (caTfiX^Trrat (Jn. viii. 4 as given in LTTrWIitxt), pf. ptcp. KaTei.\rjpp.evos ; 1 aor. /ta- TeiXfitpdjiv (Jn, viii. 4 R" '" "• G) [on the augm. cf. ^\'. § 12, 6], and Kare\!)(j)8qv (Phil. iii. 12 R G), and kotc- \rip(j)6r]v (ibid. L TTrWII; on the /i see s. v. M, /i) ; Mid., pres. KaToKapffuvopai; 2 aor. (taTcXa/So'/ii;»; cf. Kiilmer i. p. 856 ; [Veitch, s. v. \apfidiio>~\ ; Sept. for J"i?n, nzh, also for alio, etc. ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to lay hold of; i. e. 1. to lay hold of so as to metke one's ■ own, to obtain, attain to : w. the ace. of the thing ; the prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; PhU. iii, 12 sq. ; tijv Sixaio- s) ou Ka- TeXa/SfK, Jn. i. 5. 2. to seize upon, take possession of, (Lat. occupare) ; a. of evils overtaking one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down) : Tivd, axoTia, Jn. xii. 35 ; [so |)hysi- cally, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the wicked with destruction, 1 Th. v. 4 ; of a demon about to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of Christ by his holy power and influence laying hold of the human mind and will, in order to promiit and govern it, Phil. iii. 12. 3. to detect, catch: nva ev tivi, in pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH inl t.] ; with a ptcp. indicating the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the mind; KaTa\e7 [ 1 aor. leareXen/^a (in later auth. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 713 sqq. ; [Veiteh s. v. XeiVa>; WH. App. p. 169 sq.]); 2 aor. /coTAiTror; Pass., pres. «a- ToXfiTTOfioi; pf. ptcp. KaroXfXfi/i/iei/os [WH -Xt^/ieVor, see (their App. p. 154'', and) s. v. I, t] ; 1 aor. KaTf\ei0T)v; (see Kara, in. 5) ; Sept. for Tni'n, TXEfn, 2];; ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to leave behind; with ace. of place or pers. ; a. i q. to depart from, leave, a pers. or thing : IMt. iv. 13 ; Kvi. 4 ; xxi. 1 7 ; Heb. .xi. 27 ; metaph. ^vdfiav ohov, to for- sake true religion, 2 Pet. ii. 15. pass, to be lift : .Jn. viii. 9; i.q. to remain, foil, by iv with dat. of place, 1 Th. iii. 1. b. i. q. to bid (one) to remain : nva in a place. Acts xviii. 19 ; Tit. i. 5 [R G; al. uTruXfiVm]. c. to forsake, leave to one's self a, pers. or thing, by ceasing to ca,re for it, to abandon, leave in the lurch : tov narepa k. ttjv jj.rjT€pa, Mt. xix. 5 ; Mk. x. 7 ; Eph. v. 31, fr. Gen. ii. 24 ; pass, to be abandoned, forsaken : eis aSou [or airjv (q. v. 2)], Acts ii. 31 Rec. (see iyKaToKflira, 1) ; w. ace. of the thing, Mk. xiv. 52 ; Lk. [v. 28] ; xv. 4 ; toi/ \6yov, to neglect the office of instruction. Acts vi. 2. d. to cause to be left over, to reserve, to leave remaining: e/iavra, Ro. xi. 4 (1 K. xix. 18) ; KaraXeiVfTat, there still remains, iirayyeXla, a promise (to be made good by the event), Heb. iv. 1 (fiaxV' Xen. C)T. 2, 3, 11 ; awTtjpias iXirls, Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 4)'; Tim with inf. (to leave any business to be done by one alone), Lk. x. 40. e. Uke our leave behind, it is used of one who on being caUed away cannot take another with him : Acts xxiv. 27 ; xxv. 14 ; spec, of the dying (to leave behind), Uk. xil 19, [21 L mrg. T Tr WH] ; Lk. XX. 31, (Deut. xxviii. 54 ; Prov. xx. 7 ; and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. E. 24, 726; Od. 21, 33 on). f. like our leave i. q. leave alone, disregard: of those who sail past a place without stopping, Acts xxi. 3. [Comp. : ey-Kara- XeiVa.] * Kara-XiPdJu : fut. KardXtdada ; (see Kara, HI. 3 [cf . AV. 102 (y7)]) ; to overwhelm with stones, to stone : Lk. xx. 6. (Eccles. writ.) * KaT-aXXoYii, -ijr, f/, (KaraXXa : 2 aor. KaripaQov ; met with fr. Ildt. down; es]). fre<[. in Xen. and Plat.; lo learn thoroughly [see (card, III. 1], examine carefully; to consider well: ri foil, by TTtSs, Jit. vi. 28. (Gen. xxiv. 21 ; Job xxxv. 5, etc. ; napdevop, Sir. ix. 5 ; (cdXXof oXXdrpiof, ibid. 8.) * KaTa-|iapTvptii>, -a ; lo bear witness against : tI tivos, testify a thing against one [B. 165 (144), cf. 178 (154)], Mt. x.wi. 62; xxvii. 13 ; Mk. xiv. 60, and RG in xv. 4. (1 K. XX. (xxi.) 10, 13 ; Job xv. 6 ; among Grk. writ. esp. by the Attic orators.) • KaTarp.€'vu ; to remain ■perma.neniXy, to abide: Acts i. 13. (Num. xxii. 8 ; Judith xvi. 20 ; Arstph., Xen., Philo de gigant. § 5.) * KaTojiovas, and (as it is now usually written [so L T TrW'II]) separately, Kara fiovas (sc. ;(: pres. pass. ptcp. icaTaTroi/ovfievos; prop. to tire dotvn tvith toil, exhaust loith labor; hence to afflict or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly: Ttva, in pass.. Acts vii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis- tressed']. (3 Mace. ii. 2, 13 ; Ilippocr., Theophr., Polyb.,. Diod., Joseph., Aelian., al.) * KaTO-TTOVTCJci) : Pass., pres. KaTairovrl^opai ; 1 aor. Kare- jTovrlirdrjv ; to plunge or sink in the sea ; Pass, in the in- trans. sense, to sink, to go dotvn : Mt. xiv. 30 ; a grievous offender for the purpose of killing him, to drown : pass. Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 5 ; 14, 15, 10 ; c. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al. ; Sept. ; [cf. W. 24; Lob. Phryn. p. 361 note].)' KaT-dpa, -as, t}, ((coto and dpd, cf. Germ. Verfuchung, Verwunschung, [cf. Kmd, IH. 4]); Sept. chiefly for nSSp ; an execration, imprecation, curse : opp. to eiXoyio (q. v.), Jas. iii. 1 ; y^ KaTopas iyyvs, near to being cursed by God i. e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu- sion is to Gen. iii. 17 sq.), Heb. vi. 8; v^o KaTdpav civai, to be under a curse i. e. liable to the appointed penalty of beinc cursed, Gal. iii. 10 ; i^ayopd^eiv Ttfa in t^s k. to redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse, ib. 13; TCKva Kardpas, men worthy of execration, 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse is exhibited, i. e. undergoing the appointed penalty of cursinc, Gal. iii. 13; f'yoj Kordpa iyfvr]8rjv, Protev. Jac. c. 3. "(Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) * jcarapao/juii 336 KaTCKTKevd^CO Kar-cip&oiiax, -S>iuu; (dcp. mid. fr. Korapa) ; 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. KaTr)pd(Ta); [pf. pass. ptcp. KaTTjpaixivos (sec below)] ; fr. llom. down; Sept. mostly for "j^p and 1iS; lo curse, ■doom, imprecate evil on : {o\>^. to diKoydv) absol. Ho. xii. 14; w. dat. of the obj. (as in the earlier (Jrk. writ.), IJi. vi. 28 Rec. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. Of)] CU ; [.Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 16]) ; w. ace. of the obj. (as often in the later (irk. writ., as Pint. Cat. min. 32, 1 var. [B. § 133, 9 ; W. 222 (208)]), Mt. V. 44 llee. ; Lk. vi. 28 V, L t.xt. T Tr WII ; Jas. iii. S); a tree, i. e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. .\i. 21 (see Heb. vi. 8 in nardpa). pf. pass. ptcp. icanjpa/itvor in a pass, sense, accursed (Sap. xii. 11 ; [2 K. Lx. 34]; Plut. I>uc. 18 ; and Kficarrjp.i/i. Deut. xxi. 23 ; [Sir. iii. IG]): Mt. XXV. 41 (also ooeasionally KfKaT-apawoi, Num. xxii. 6; xxiv. 9; [but Tilf. etc. -r^p-; see Veiteh s. v. .dpiiopai]).* KaT-apYc'o), -w; fut. KarapyTjrrW, 1 aor. Karijpyrja-a; pf. (ca- TrjpyrjKa; Pass., pros. KarapyoOpat; pf. KaTijpyijpai ; 1 aor. Karri pyTjBi}v; 1 lui. KaTopyrjOrja-opai; causative of the verb dpycQ), equiv. to apyav (i. e. atpyov [on the accent cf. Chandler § 444]) iroiw; freq. with Paul, who uses it 25 times [elsewhere in N. T. only twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept. 4 times (2 Esdr., see below)] ; 1. to render idle, un- employed, inncticf, inoperative : T^f yrjv, to deprive of its strength, make barren [A. V. ciimhrrl, Lk. xiii. 7; to cause a pers. or a thing to have no further elliciency ; to deprive of force, intluonco, power, [A. V. hrinr; to nouijlit, make of none effect'] : tI, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; riva, 1 Co. ii. 6 [but in pass.] ; diaboUc powers, 1 Co. xv. 24 (Justin, apol. 2, 6) ; Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8 ; rov Savarov, 2 Tim. i. 10 (Barnab. ep. 5, G) ; tov 8id,3n\ov, Heb. ii. 14 ; pass. 1 Co. XV. 26 ; to make void, t^x iTrayyeXiav, Gal. iii. 1 7 ; pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to, do aii'aif icith, annul, abolish : W, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11 ; TOV vopMv, Ro. iii. 31 ; Eph. ii. 15 ; to;' Kaipuv toO di/dpou, Barnab. ep. Li, 5; pass. jro'Aepos KaTupye'irai eTrovpavicov ■KOI «Triyeiwv, Ignat. ad Eph. 13, 2 ; tva Kurapyrjd^j to triiapa t^s ctpaprias, that the body of sin might be done away, i. e. not the material of the body, but the body so far forth as it is an instrument of sin ; accordingly, that the body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. G. Pass, to cease, pass away, he done away : of things, Gal. V. 11 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8, 10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 13 sq.; of persons, foil, by aiso rivor, lo he severed from, separated from, dis- charged from, loosed from, 3.ny one ; to terminate all in- tercourse with one [a pregn. constr., cf. W. 621 (577); B. 322 (277)] : diro toO XptffToC, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. cf. W. § 40, 5 b.] ; aTTo Tou vnpov, Ro. vii. [2 (R'" om. t. ».)], 6. The word is rarely met witli in prof, auth., as Eur. Phoen. 753 Karapy. x^P"' *o make idle, i. e. to leave the hand imeraployed ; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. KarrjpyrjKfvai] roii .Kaipovs, in the sense of to let slip, leave amused; in Sept. four times for Chald. ^£33, to make to cease, i. e. restrain, check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 5; vi. 8.* KaT-api9|i«u, -& : to number with : pf. pass. ptcp. Korr]- ,pi6prjp(vos ev (for Rec. (riv) ijp'iv, was numbered amoni/ us. Acts i. 17; cf. 2 Chr. xxxi. 19; [Pl.at. politicus 2G6 a. ■etc.].* Kar-aprtju'; fut. KarapTiaay (1 Pet. v. 10 LTTrWlI [B. 37 (32) ; but Rec. KarapTiaai, 1 aor. ojjtat. 3 pers. sing.]); 1 aor. inf. KaTapriaai; Pass., pres. KornpTifopai ; pf. KarijpTeo-pat ; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. icanjpTiVu ; ])rop. to ruHilrr «prior i. C-Jil, sound, complete, [sc<' Kara, III. 2] ; hence a. lo mend (what has been broken or rent), to rt'ptiir: to Si'icrva, Mt. iv. 21 ; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these exx. to ne.Kt head]; i. q. to complete, ra vaTepijpara, 1 Th. iii. 10. b. to Jit out, equip, put in ordir,(irrnniii:, ad- just : Tovs alavas, the worlds, pass. Heb. .\i. 3 (so, for ["Dn, ijXiov, Ps. Ixxiii. (Ixxiv.) 16; o-fX^wji', Ixxxviii. (l.xx.xi.x.) 38) ; cKfir) KaTrjpTKTixivi] «if dn'uXctai', of men whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es- cape destruction [but see Jley. (ed. Weiss) in loc], Ro. ix. 22 (wXuia, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like) ;' of the mind : Karrjprta^ptvos u>s etc. so instructed, e((uij)ped, as etc. [cf. B. 311 (267) ; but al. take KarripT. as a circum- stantial ptcp. when perfected shall be as (not ' above ') his master (see Jley. in loc); on this view the passage may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40 ; mid. to Jit or J'rame for one's self, prepare: aivov, Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3; Sept. for ID'^) ; o-wpa, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi- cally, lo strenijlhen, perfect, complete, make one what he ought to be: nvd, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above)]; Gal. vi. 1 (of one who b)- correction may be brought back into the right wav); pass.. 2 Co. xiii. 11; riva iv navri fpyw [(T AVn om.)] dyadui, Heb. xiii. 21 ; KaTrfprLcrpivoi eV tu avTia vol kt\. of those who have been resUjred to harmony (so TTCLvra fls tu>vt6, Hdt. 5, lOG ; iva KaTaprtaO^ r/ araata- fouCTo woXtr. Dion. Hal. antt. 3,10), 1 Co. i. 10. [Co.mp.: TTpo-Karaprtfo).] * Kar-dpTio-is, -fcos, i}, {KarapTi^a, q. v.), a strengthening, perfecting, of the soul, (Vulg. consummatio) : 2 Co. xiii. 9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2, 7 [var.]; Alex. 7, 1.)* KaTapTKTuos, -oiJ, o, i. q. /tardpTttris, q. v. : tivos (is rt, Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)] • Kara-o-ctu: 1 aor. «nrfW lo-a ; 1. lo shake down, throw down, [cf. Kara, III. 1 ; (fr. Thue. on)]. 2. lo shake : rrjv x^'pO' *« ""^^e a sign by shaking (i. e. rap- idly waving) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 28 ; Tnr Xfipas, ib. de Josepho § 36) ; of one about to speak who signals for silence, Acts xix. 33 ; hence simply xarao-f if iv Tivl, to make a sign, to signal with the hand to one, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4. 4; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a disre- gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument, dat. tt/ Xeip'i was added. Polyb. 1, 78, 3; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 48; so of one about to make an address : Acts xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 16; xxi. 40; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 2.* KaTo- : 1 aor. KaricrKa^a ; pf. pass. ptcp. kots- a-Koppfvos ; lo dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy : n. Ho. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. xix. 10 ; pass. Acts xv. IC [R G L], fr. Amos ix. 11 [(but see KaTatrrpecjx»)]- (Tragg., Thuc, Xen., S(iq.).* KaTa-, -a, inf. -(rKijuoiv (Mt. xiii. 32 L T Tr A\ H, ilk. iv. 32 WII, see awoh^KaToio; [but also -(rKjqvoiiv, Mt. 1. c. R G ; Mk. 1. c. R G L T Tr ; cf . Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 23]) ; fut. KaracTKrivoKra) ; 1 aor. KaTecrKrjvaa-a ; prop, to pilch -one's tent, to fix one's abode, to dwell: ecj) fXrriSi, Acts ii. ■2G fr. Ps. XV. (xvi.) 9 ; foil, by e'v w. dat. of place, Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; mro w. ace. of place, Mk. iv. 32. (Xen., Poljb., Diod., al. ; KareiiKrivdKKv 6 deiis ra vaia TovTa, Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 5 ; add, Sir. xxiv. 4, 8 ; Sept. mostly for ]D'd-) ' KaTewrKT|vuo-is. -ewr, 7, (jcaToiTKTjVoa), q. v.), prop, the ^pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp- ment, abode : of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58; (for piy?, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; cf. Sap. ix. 8; Tob. i. -4; Polyb. 11, 26, 5 ; Diod. 17, 95).* Kara-o-Kia^u ; to overshadow, cover with shade, [see koto, in. 3] ; tI, Heb. ix. 5. (Hes., Eur., Plato, al. ; Karaa-Kiaa, Horn. Od. 12, 43G.)* KOTo-o-Koire'ai, -a> : 1 aor. inf. KaracrKOTrijcrai ; to inspect, view closely, in order to spy out and plot against: ri. Gal. ii. 4 ; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2 S. X. 3 ; Josh. ii. 2 sq. ; 1 Chr. .xix. 3 ; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623) ; so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen. ■down).* KaTa-sTKOiros, -ov, 6, (Karao"Ke7rTOjLtai [i. q. KaTacTKOTrcw]), an inspector, a spy: Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xiii. 9, 11 ; 1 S. xxvi. 4 ; 1 Mace. xii. 26 ; in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down.) * KaTa-) ; dep. mid., in prof. auth. sometimes also pass. ; to circumvent by artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices; to outwit, overreach ; to deal craftily with : nvd. Acts vii. 19 fr. Ex. i. 10. (Judith v. 11; x. 19; Diod., Philo, Joseph.. Lcian.. al.) * KaTa-o-rt'Wu : 1 aor. ptcp. KaraoTfiXas ; pf. pass. ptcp. KaTea-TaXfjLfvos ; a. prop, to send or put doicn, to ■lower. b. to put or keep down one who is roused or Incensed, to repress, restrain, appease, quiet: rivd, Acts xix. 35 sq. ; 3 Mace. vi. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 7 ; b. j. 4, 4, 4 : Plut. mor. p. 207 e.* KaTa.- [(fut. 1 Tim. y. 11 Lchm. mrg.)] ; (see a-rprividai) ; to feel the im- pulses of sexual desire, [A. V. to grow wanton'] ; (Vulg. luxurior) : Ttvdr, to one's loss [A. V. against], 1 Tim. v. 11 ; Ignat. ad Ahtioch. c. 11.* KaTa-irTpo(|>TJ, -^r, rj, {KaTaarTpea^<'> [or -a'tpdrra] : 1 aor. KaT€aa^ ; to hill off [cf. Kara, IH. 1], to slaughter-: Lk. xix. 27. (Sept.; Hdt., Tragg., Xen., Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 4 ; Ael. v. h. 13, 2; Hdian. 5. .5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) * KaTa-pa'Y£5u : pf. pass. ptcp. KaTftTryd5<» : 1 aor. inf. Karavyaaai ; to beam down upon ; to shine forth, shine hriyhtii/; 2 Co. iv. 4 Lmrg. Tr mrg., where al. aiyao-ai q. V. ; cf. 0ci)Ti(7;xof. b.; (trans. Sap. xvii. .'), etc.; intrans. 1 JIacc. vi. 39; Ileliod. o, 31)."] KaTa4)aY«, see KaTftrOlta- KaTa-<)>€p(u ; 1 aor. KarljixyKa; Pass., pres. KaTa^ipojiai.; 1 aor. KaTr)v()(dqv \ [fr. Horn, down] ; to hear down, hrinr/ down, cast down : ^frrj(l)op, ])rop. to cast a pebble or calcu- lus sc. into the urn, i. e. to give one's vote, to approve, Acts xxvi. 10 ; aiVtci^aTa Kara tivos (see Kara, I. 2 b. [but the crit. edd. reject kotIx ktX.]), Acts x.xv. 7 LTTrWH. Pass, to he hnrnc down, to sird; (from the window to the pavement), airo roi vrrfov, from sleep (frqm the effect of his deep sleep [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 371 (348)]), Acts XX. 9'; metaph. to he ireiyhed down hy, overcome, carried away, KaTacpepofievos virva ^adei, sunk in a deep sleep, Acts XX. 9»; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401)] is the expression in prof. auth. KaTacpepofiai ds vnvou, to sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, .5 ; Ildian. 2, 1, 3 [2]; 9, 6 [5]; rolcriv inTvoiatv, Hipp. p. 1137 c. [(Kuhn iii. p. .539)], and in the same sense simply Kara- (f>€pofiai ; cf. [L and S. s. v. I. 2 d.] ; Steph. Thes. iv. col. 1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed].* KaTa-4)ei)Y8eCpw : pf. pass. ptcp. KaTec^^apfieVor; 2 fut. pass. KaTa(f>dap!]a-opiat : [see Kara, III. 4] ; 1. to corrupt, deprave ; Karecpdappiivoi rbv voxiv, corrupted in mind, 2 Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy ; pass, to be destroyed, to perish : foil, by ev w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii. 1 2 R G. [From Aeschyl. down.] * KaTa-<)>i,\c'ci), -a ; impf . KaTei\ovv ; 1 aor. KaTec^lXrjira ; to kUs much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e- osculor, etc.) : rtud, Mt. xxvi. 49 ; Mk. xiv. 45 ; Lk. vii. 38,45; XV. 20; Acts xx. 37. (Tob. vii. 6; 3 Mace. v. 49; Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 10 ; 7, 5, 32; Polyb. 15, 1, 7; Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7 ; Ael. v. h. 13, 4; Plut. Brut. 16; Lcian. dial. deor. 4, 5 ; 5,3; ^tXflKand Karat^iXfiv are dislinguiflied in Xen. mem. 2, 6, 33 ; Phil. Alex. c. 67. Sept. for pp} prop, to join mouth to mouth.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 780; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 18, note •'.• Kara-^ipovc'u, -cu ; fut. KaracfjpovrjfTa ', 1 aor. KaTfp6vTjtTa ; [fr. Ildt. down] ; to contemn, despise, disdain, think little or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. § 132, 15], Mt. vi. 24 ; xviii. 10 ; Lk. xvi. 13 ; Ro. ii. 4 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; 1 Tim. iv. 12; vi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Heb. xii. 2.* KaTo4)poviiTt)s, -ov, 6, {Karacfipoviio), a de.^piser : Acts. xiii. 41. (Ilab. i. .') : ii. 5 ; Zeph. iii. 4 ; Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 41 ; Joseph, antt. G, 14, 4 ; b. j. 2, 8, 3 ; Plut. Brut. 1 2, and in eccl. writ.) * KaTa-x*'"»: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. Kart^^eev (see iKxf'a)', to pour tliiirn upon ; pour over, pour upon : «Vi ttjp Kt^dKijv (L T Tr WW em rrjs K((j)a\rjs), Mt. xxvi. 7 ; koto t^s KfCJxt- \^s (Plat. rep. 3 p. 398 a. ; Epict. diss. 2, 20, 29), Mk. xiv. 3 (where L T Tr WH om. Kard [cf. W. 381 (357) sq.; Hdt. 4, G2 ; Plat. legg. 7 p. 814 b. ; Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 36, 2. Cf. Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 66 sq.]).' Kara-xflovios, -ov, (^kotoi [see «card, III. 3], j(6ajv [the cnrl\i]), subterranean, Vulg. iifernus: ])hir., of those who dwell in the world below, i. e. departed souls [cf. W. § 34, 2; but al. make the adj. a neut. used indefinitely; see Bp. Lghtft. in loc], Phil. ii. 10. (Horn., Dion. IL. An- thol., etc., Inscrr.) * KaTa-xpao|iai, -w/iat ; 1 aor. mid. inf. «caraxp^cacflai ; in class. Grk. 1. toiisemuchor excessively or ill. 2. to use up, consume by «.sf, (Germ, v e rhrauchen). 3. to use fully, the Kara intensifying the force of the simple verb (Germ, g ebrauchen), (Plato, Dem., Diod., Josejjh., al.) : 1 Co. vii. 31 [cf. B. § 133, 18 ; W. 209 sq. (197)]; Tifi, ib. i.\. 18.* KaTa-i)fvxo : 1 aor. Kari'^v^a ; to cool off, (make) cool i Lk. xvi. 24. (Gen. xviii. 4 ; Hippocr., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) • KttTttSuXos, -OV, (Kara and eiSa>\ov : after the analogy of KaTUfi-eXos, KaTiiyofios. KaTa\pvTtwv [esp. 2 e. and 1 c.]) : tov 6eov, Ro. iv. 1 7 (which, by a kind of attraction somewhat rare, is to be resolved Karivavri 6(ov, m fwla-r(v(Te, who is the father of us all ace. to the judg- ment and appointment of God, whom he believed, — the words xadwr . . . riBfiKa forming a parenthesis ; cf. -^ Fritzsche ad loc; [B. 287 (247); but al. resolve it, KaTfvavTi T. 6(ov Kariv. ov enlarr., cf. Meyer (per contra ed. Weiss) ad loc. ; W. 164 (155)]) ; or, he being witness KaTevojinov 339 Kare'^ci) [in the sirjht o/] : tcC Bioti, L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ii. 1 7 and xii. 19.* Kar-evM-inov, adv., not met with in prof. auth. ([W. 102 (9 7)] see ivamiov), over against, opposite, he/ore the face of, before the presence of, in the sight of, before : foil, by the gen. [B. 319 (273 sq.) ; cf.W.§ 54,6]; a. prop, of place, Jude 24 (Lev. iv. 17; Josh. i. 5; iii. 7; xxiii. 9). b. metaph. having one as it were before the eyes, before one as witness : toC 6eov, Rec. in 2 Co. ii. 17 ; xii. 19, (see KaTtvavTL) ; before God as Judge, Eph. i. 4 ; Col. i. 22 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. inloc; also B. 173, 180, 188].* KaT-eJouo-ui^u ; not found in prof, aiith. ; to exercise au- thority, wield power, [see Kara, III. 3] : tlvos, over one, Mt. XX. 2.5 ; Jlk. X 42.* KaT-€p"ya^o(jLai ; pf. inf. KaT€ipyda6ai (1 Pet. iv. 3 L T Tr WII) ; 1 aor. mid. KaTeipyaa-ditT]V, and KaTr)piya(Tajir)v (Ro. vii. 8 T Tr. ; [2 Co. vii. 11 T]) ; 1 aor. pass. Karup- yda-driv, and KaTTjpydadrjv (2 Co. xii. 12 Tdf.) ; see efyyd- fo/iai, init. ; adepon. mid. verb ; \_a,cc. to Fritzsche,^ova. i. p. 107 the Kard is either intensive (Lat. p e rfcere) or descensive (Lat. p e r petrare)~\ ; a. to perform, ac- complish, achieve, [R. V. often worki : Ro. vii. 15, 17 sq. 20; Ti 8td TLVOS (gen. of pers.), Ro. xv. 18 ; arravra ku- repyaa-dfjLevoi having gone through every struggle of the fight, Eph. vi. 13 [cf. 31eyer in loc] ; trrjixeia, pass. 2 Co. xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. to perpetrate, Ro. i. 27; ii. 9; 1 Co. v. 3; 1 Pet. iv. 3. b. to work out (Lat. efficere),i. e. to do that from which something results; of man : t^v aayTrjplav, make every effort to obtain salva- tion, Phil. ii. 12; of things : bring about, result i», Ro. iv. 15; V. 3; vii. 8; 2 Co. vii. 10 (where L T Tr WH ipyd^.) ; Jas. i. 3, and R G in 20 ; tI tcvi, Ro. vii. 13 ; 2 Co. iv. 17 ; vii. 11 ; ix. 11. c. Karepy. riva ctr ti, to fashion,!. Q. render one fit for a thing: 2 Co. v. 5. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Hdt. down ; several times in Sept.)* KaT-«'pxo(i.Qi ; 2 aor. «raT^X^of, 1 pers. plur. KanjX^afiev (Acts xsvii. 5 T Tr WH ; on which form see dnepxopai, init.) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; tocome down, go down; prop, of one who goes from a higher to a lower locality : foil, by «f w. ace. of place, Lk. iv. 31 : Acts viii. 5 ; xiii. 4 ; [xix. 1 T Tr mrg.] ; and L T Tr WH in xv. 30 ; foU. by dnd ■w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 37; Acts xv. 1 ; xviii. 5; xxi. 1 ; foil, by mro and els. Acts xi. 2 7 ; xii. 1 9 ; of those who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Horn.) 1408, 29 (Od. 1, 183) KaTeXBeiv, ov p.6vov Th oTrXtas Kara) nov iXOeiv. oKKa Ka\ to €s Xip-iva iXdfiv, ojaircp koX KaTa^rjvai k. icara7rXeO(Ta( k. KaTa^OijvaL k. KaTapat, to eWifievlaat Xeyrrat ; also 1956, 35 (Od. 24, 115) KaTrjXdov 5 dvTi tov iveKipevi- (tStjp, if TToWaxov eppi'Brj, fj dvrl toC dn-Xmj ^\6ov ; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer, s. v.] : foil, by els. Acts xviii. 22 ; xxi. 3 L T Tr WH ; xxvii. 5 ; Trpdr riva. Acts ix. 32. Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God : Jas. iii. 15.* KaT-e(rHu, ptcp. plur. KareaBovres (Mk. xii. 40 Tr WH; see eadiw and eo-da> ; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. d. Apokry- phen, i. p. 150 [who says, ' The shorter form occurs freq. in the Sept., Lev. xix. 26 ; Sir. xx. 15, (16),elsewh. almost exclusively poetic ; see Bttm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p. 185 ' (cf. Veitch s. v. to-fliM)]) ; fut. KaTav «Vi T^v 'AfifpviSa ; many other e.\.\. are given in Passow s. v. II. .'3 ; [L. and S. s. v. B. 2]). c. lo hold fti.ll, keep secure, kerp firm possession of: with ace. of the thin;l, TOK Xoyov, I.k. viii. 15 ; foil, by the orat. obliq., 1 Co. XV. i [B. §§ 139, 58; 150, '.'O ; W. 561 (522)] ; ras na^a- SoiTfts, 1 Co. xi. 2 ; TO KaXt'iif, 1 Th. v. 21 ; tijv Trapprjaiau [t. apxfjv etc.] /xe'xP' «Xouf fiefiaiav KaTaa^tiv, Ileb. iii. G, 14 ; TrjV ofxakoylav TTji iXiriSos aKXiw], Ileb. .\. 23. 2. erjuiv. to Lat. obtlnere, i. e. a. fo ijet possession of, lake : Mt. xxi. 38 R G ; Lk. xiv. 9. b. to possess : 1 Co. vii. 30 ; 2 Co. vi. 10.* Kan^YOpcw. -w ; impf. Karrjyopovu ; fut. KanjyopTjaia ; 1 &or.£KaTT]yt')pq(ra', prcs. pass. Kan^yo^oOjuai ; (/taru and dyo- peia>, pro]), to speak against [cf. Kara, III. 7] in court, in the assembly of the people), to accuse ; a. before a judge: absol. [to make accusalionl. Acts .\xiv. 2, 19; Ttrar, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10 ; Mk. iii. 2 ; Lk. vi. 7 T TrtKt. WII; .\i. 54 llLTrbr. ; xxiii. 2, 10; Jn. viii. 6 ; Acts XXV. 5 ; x.xviii. 19 ; with the addition of a gen. of the thing of which one is accused (as Dem. 515 tin.) : Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. 11, (unless it be thought preferable to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen. by attraction [so B. § 132, li> fin.], since the com. constr. in t!rk. authors is (coTTj-y. ri tivos, cf. Matthiae § 370 Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 37.S p. 859; cf. W. § 30, 9 a.) ; Tivos nepl Tivos, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thuc. 8, 85 ; Xen. Heli. 1, 7, 2) ; w. gen. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3 (unless TToXXd should be taken adverbially : much, vehe- menlhj); Ttoaa, ib. 4 LTTrWII (Eur. Or. 28); foil, by Kara w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 9'[rf. W. § 28, 1 ; p. 431 (402); B. § 132, 16]); pas.s. to he accused (as 2 Mace. x. 13 ; Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 25 ; cf. B. § 134, 4) : ino rims, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 L T Tr AVII for Rec. napa (to tI ktX. why [A. V. wherefore'] he was accused; unless it is to be explained, u'lial accu- sation was brought forward etc.) ; 6 Karrjyopoviifvos, Acts XXV. 16. b. of an extra-judicial accusation (Xen. mem. 1, 3, 4) : absol. Ro. ii. 15 ; tivos, Jn. v. 45 [cf. B. 295(254)]; Rev. .\ii. 10 RGTr; solecisticallv i-tw. Rev. xii. 10 L T AVII [cf. B. § 132, 16].» [Stn". oiTioffflai, SiaSii^^fv, ^yKa\f7i>,^TriKa\e7v, KarnyopiTv : aiViao-flai to accuse with primary reference to the ground of accusation (alrla), the crime; naT-nyopcTi/ to accuse formally and before a tribunal, brinj^ a cliar^'O ajrainst {Kari suggestive of animosity) publicly; iyKa\e7v to accuse with publicity (KaK(7v), but not necessarily formally or before a tril)unal ; iv iKaKt7v ' to cry out upon', suggestive of public- ity and hostility ; Sia$i\\etv prop, to make a verbal assault wliich readies its goal (Sid) ; in distinction from the words which allude to authorship (oiVido/iai), to juilicial procedure {taTTiyopeai), or to open averment {iyKoKfw, e'lriKaAe'tu), Sia- ffiWo! expresses the giving currency to a damaging insinua- tion. 5id6o\oj a secret and calumnious, in distinction from KoT^yopos an open and formal, accuser. Schmidt ch. 5.1 KaTi)Yop£o, -as, i}, (xarqyopot) , [fr. Hdt. down], accusa- tion, churi/e : w. gen. of the jiers. accused, Lk. vi. 7 R G LTrmrg. ; [Jn. xviii. 29 T WII] ; (card tivos, Jn. xviii. 29 [R G L Tr] ; 1 Tim. v. 19 ; w. gen. of the crime, Tit. i. C- KaTTJ-yopos, -OD, 6. {KaTtjyopio) [(]. V. ad fin.]), an ac- cuner: Jn. viii. 10; Acts ,\.\iii. 30, 35 ; xxiv. 8 [R] ; xxv. 16, 18 ; Rev. .xii. lORTr. [(Fr. Soph, and Ildt. down.)] • KOT^-yup, o, an accuser: Rev. xii. 10 GLTWII. It is a form unknown to Grk. writ., a literal transcription (if tbo Ilcbr. ^U■^P, a name given to the devil by the Rabbins; cf. Buxlorf, Lex. C'hald. tahn. et rabb. p. 2009 (p. 997 ed. Fischer); [Schiitlgen, Horac Hebr. i. p. 1121 sq. ; cf. B. 25 (22)].' KaTTJ4>cia, -as, f/, (fr. KaTq<\>r)s, of a downcast look ; and this fr. Kara, and tu (parj the eyes; Etym. M.agn. [496, 53] Kari'icpfia • dno toC KaTio ra (j>dr] /3dXXf iv Toiis ovaSi^opevovc r; Xufl-ou/itTOur; because, as Plut. de dysopia [al. de vitioso pudore (528 e.)] c. 1 says, it is Xiinj kuto) ^XfTretv jrot- oiaa), prop, a downcast look expressive of sorrow; hence shame, dejection, (jloom, [A. Y. heaviness']: Jas. iv. 9. (Horn. E. 3, 51; 16, 498 etc.; Thuc. 7, 75; Joseph. antt. 13, 16, 1 ; Plut. Cor. 20; [Pelop. 33, 3, and often; Dion. Ilal., Char., etc.] ; often in Philo.) * Kar-Tixt'cD, -m : 1 aor. Karfixnira ; Pass., pros. KaTrjxovpai ; \)! . KaTrjxy]pai ; 1 hot. KaTrjxJ]6riv ; nowhere met with in the O. T. ; very rare in prof. auth. ; 1. prop, lo sound, towards, sound doivn upon, resound : Appovia Karrixfi rijs OiiKdrrqs, Philostr. p. 791 [icon. 1,19]; to charm with re- sounding sound, to fascinate, nvd piOois, Lcian. .Tup. trag. 39. 2. to teach orally, lo instruct: Lcian. asin. § 18; Philopatr. 17. In the N. T. only used by Luke and Paul: Tiva, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pass, e'k tov vopov, by hearing the law, wont to be publicly read in the syna- gogues, Ro. ii. 18; w. ace. of the thing, aiirSs ire vroXXd Ka- Trjx'ja'io Tu>v (lyvoovpivav, .Joseph, de vita su;i § 65 fin. ; w. ace. of a tbitig and of a pers., tov oKrjdovs \6yov ^paxia KaTr)xriv KaTT]xf)VTat 7Tfp\ a-ov i. e. tovtojv, a ktX. ibid. 24 (KaTijx^J&^'ts iTfp'i Twv trvplSfliijKtWaiv, [pseudo-] Plut. de ihiviis [7, 2]; 8, 1 ; 7, 1). To this construction the majority refer Lk. i. 4, construing it thus: tt/v d(T(pa\. tHiv Xiiymi', nepX S>v Karrjxiidni [W. 165 (156) ; B. § 143, 7; (see above)]. CL (lilherl, Disserlatio de christianae catecheseos historia (Lips. 1836)Pt. i. p. 1 sqq. ; Zezschwitz, System der christl. Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for eccl. usage, Suicer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].* Kar tSCav, see iStof, 2. KaT-i6u, -S> : pf . pass. KaTiapuu ; (see tor, 2) ; to rust over [cf. icard. III. 3], cover with rust : Jas. v. 3. (Epictet. diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11].)* I Kar-urxvu : imj)f. Kario'xvov ; fut. «;aripa rijs ^fdnjTor in Christ, Col. ii. 9, cf. i. 19 ; ij o-oc^i'a iv o-eo- fiari, Sap. i. 4 ; diKaicKrvvrj is said to dwell where right- eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. iii. 13. 2. trans, to dwell in, inhabit : with ace. of place. Acts i. 19 : u. 9, 14; iv. 16; ix. 32, 35; xi.\. 10, 17; Rev. xii. 12 Rec. ; xvii. 2 ; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Comp. : iy- #CaTOtK€ 17]) ; to behold fur one's self as in a mirror [W. 254 (238) ; B. 193 sq. (107)] : tiji/ do^av toC Kvpiov, the glory of Christ (wliich we behold in the gospel as in a mirror from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainly so in Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 33 prjSi KaTOTTrpia-atii^v iv SX\a tivI rrjv arr]v idiav rj iv (rol tc5 Bew* KaT6p8a)|io, -Tos, to, (xaTop^o'tu to make upright, erect), a right action, a successful achievement : plur. of whole- some public measures or institutions. Acts xxiv. 2 (3) [R G ; see SiopBapa} ; (3 Mace. iii. 23 ; Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph., Plut., Lcian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 251 ; [Win. 25].* Kdrti) (fr. KaTa), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. Kara- ripa; [cf. W. 472 (440)] ; 1. down, dowmcards: Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 9 ; Jn. viii. 6, 8 ; Acts xx. 9. 2. beloic, beneath, [cf. W. u. s.] ; a. of place : !Mk. xiv. 66 ; Acts ii. 19 ; icos koto) [A. V. to the bottom'], Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38, (E^ek. i. 27; viii. 2) ; ra Karw, the parts or regions that he beneath (opp. to tq Svw, heaven), i. e. the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession : djro SifToCs Kcu KaTMTepo), from a child of two years and those that were of a lower age [cf. W. 370 (347)], Mt. ii. 16 ; OTTO flKo«( of the sun : Mt. XX. 1 2 ; I-k. xii. 55 ; Jas. i. 1 1 , [al. refer all these pass, to the next head] ; (Is. xUx. 10; [Gen. xxxi. 40 Alex. ; cf. Judith viii. 3] ; Sir.xviii. IG ; Athen. 3 p. 73 b.). 2. Eurus, a very dry, hot, cast wind, scorching and drying up everything; for D"1P, Job xxvii. 21; Hos. xii. 1; avefios Kaia-m>, Jer. xviii. 17 ; Ezek. xvii. 10 ; Hos. xiii. 15 ; TTfeO/ia Kaiaav, Jon. iv. 8, [cf. Hos. xii. 1] ; (on this wind cf. Schtiusner, Thes. ad Sept. iii. p. 297; Win. RWB. [also BB. DD.] s. v. Wind). Many suppose it to be referred to in Jas. i. 11 ; yet the evils there men- tioned are ascribed not to the Kaia-a>v, but to the ^lot.* Kounipidju : {KavTr}pLov [(cf. raico)] a branding-iron) ; to marl: b;/ brandinr/. In brand : [pf. pass, ptcp.] KeKavrrj- piatTfiivoi Tr]V iSiav pat vTTcp vpSiv MuKESdo-tv, wliich I boast of on your behalf unto the IMacedonians [B. § 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see below]) ; 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii. 1 ; Lcian. ocyp. 1 20) ; foil, by iv w. dat. of the obj. [W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23], to glory in a thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk. ; but the Lat. says glorior in aliquo) : Ro. ii. 23 ; v. 3 ; 1 Co. iii. 21 ; 2 Co. v. 12; x. 15 ; xi. 12 [cf. B. 105 (92)] ; xii. 5, 9 ; Gal. vi. 13 sq. ; 2 Th. i. 4 R G ; Jas. i. 9, (Jer. ix. 23 sq. ; 1 Chr. xvi. 35) ; tv Btio, iv ra 6ea, in God, i. c. the knowledge of God. intimacy with him, his favors, etc. Ro. ii. 1 7 ; V. 1 1, («Vi-oir deois, Theoph. ad Autol. 1,1,1); iv Kvpia, 1 Co. i. 31'; 2 Co. x. 17''; iv Xpiara 'IrjToi, Phil. iii'. 3 ; foil, by iwl w. dat. of the obj. [cf. w". § 33 d. ; B. § 133, 23], Ro. V. 2 (Prov. xxv. 14; Sir. xxx, 2: Diod. xvi. 70) ; irtpl tivos, 2 Co. x. 8 ; «is ti, in regard of, in reference to, 2 Co. x. 16 (Aristot. pol. 5, 10 p. 1311, 4). imip w. gen. of pers., to one's advantage, to the praise of one, \_on one's behalf] : 2 Co. vii. 14 ; xii. 5. ivamov Tou 6(ov, as though standing in his presence, 1 Co. i. 29 [cf. B. 173 (15(1). CoMT. : iv-, KaTa-Kavxaopai..']* Kavxil"!, -Tof, TO, (Kavxiiopm), very rare in prof, auth.; Sept. for nSnn praise, and mXiir\ ornament, beauty ; several times in Sir. 1. that of which one glories or can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. ii. 16 ; to KavxrjH-a «x"" *'' iavTov fiovov, his glorying confined to himself [R. V. in regard of himself alone]. Gal. vi. 4; to k.t^s ikTrlSos, the matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, uf which we glory, Ileb. iii. 6. 2. As yiwqpa, hiayixa, Btkripa, lapia, Knpvypa (2 Tim. iv. 17), KXavp-a, n^iipapa, pavr]p.a, etc., are used for yivvrja-is. Stasis, 6eXr}(Tis, ktX. [cf. Ellicott on Phil. iv. G], so also (which II. A. W. Jleyer persists in denying [as respects the New Testament (see his note on Ro. iv. 2) ; so Ellicott and Bp. Lglitft. on Gal. vi. 4 ; Liinem. on Heb. U! s.]) is xaOxw "^'^'1 for Kavxw'-^ (Find. Isthm. 5, G5 [cf. Meyer on Phil. i. 26 note ; on the apparent use of nouns in p.a in an active sense see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 257 sq.]), a glorying, boasting: iCo. v. 6; Phil. i. 20; iTre'p twos {see Kavxaofiai, sub fin.), 2 Co. v. 12; ix. 3.* Kaixifis, -fojy, ij, (Kovxaopai.), the act of glorying: Ro. iii. 27 ; 2 Co. ix. 4 Uec. ; 2 Co. xi. 10, 17 ; Jas. iv. 16 ; arirpavos Kavxrjareas, crown of which we can boast, 1 Th. ii. 19; Ezek. xvi. 12; Prov. xvi. 31; iirip twos, (on be- half) of one [cf. Kavxaopm, sub fin.], 2 Co. vii. 4; viii. 24 ; fVi TWOS, before one, 2 Co. vii. 14 ; ^x'^ L^n" ""it. odd.] Kuvx'/"'"' '" Xp'ci'M '^apvaov|i, see Kanepvaovfi. Ke7XP«i£ [T WII K(vxp- (cf. WII. App. p. 150)], -av, ai, Cenchrece or Kenchrece, a port of Corinth, about 60 [70 ; Strabo (as below)] stadia from the city, on the eastern side of the isthmus, the emporium of its trade with Asia (Strabo 8 p. 380) : Acts xviii. 18; Ro. xvi. 1. [It still retains the ancient name ; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 299 sq.]» Ke'Spos, -ov, T], [fr. Horn, down], a cedar, a well-known tree, the wood of which is fragrant : p^f i/xappos tIov k/- Spmv, Jn. xviii. 1 R Tr txt. WII (so also 2 S. xv. 23 ; 1 K. XV. 13, [cf. ii. 37]) ; toC (sic !) KiSpov, ibid. Tdf. ; but see the foil, word.' KeSpiiv, [B. 21 (19)], indccl. (in Joseph. KeSpuv, -wvor [see below]), Cedron [or Kidron], (Ilebr. pTlp i. e. dark, turbid), the name of a [winter-] torrent, rising near Jerusalem and flowing down through a valley of the same name (having the Mt. of Olives on the E.) into the Dead Sea : ;(fipappof tov Kfdpav, Jn. xviii. 1 G L Tr ■tceifiai, 343 Kevo^o)via anrg., aco. to the more correct reading [but see WIJ. App. ad loc] ; (xcifiappos KeSpivor, Joseph, antt. 8, 1, -5 ; (jyapay^ K(dpa)voSy ib. 9, 7, 3 ; b. j. 5, 6, 1 ; (pdpayyi Badela . . . ij Kffipoiv o>v6pa(TTai, ib. 5, 2, 3). [B. D. s. v. Kiih'on, cf. C'tdron, 2 ; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the iloly Land, p. 9G sq.] * Ketjiai; impf. 3 pers. sing. ?k€ito ; /o //e ; 1. prop.: of an infant, foil, by eV w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 [Tdf. om. K«'/x.], 16 ; of one buried : ottov or ov, ^It. x.xviii. 6 ; Lk. x.xiii. 53; Jn. xi. 41 Rec. ; xx. 12; of things that ■quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [RGLbr.]; Jn. XX. 5-7 ; xxi. 9 ; with iiri ti added, 2 Co. iii. 15 ; iizava TLvoi (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14 ; also of things put'or set in any place, in ref. to which we often use to stand : thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6 ; xix. 29, (^irpas Keijiivai, Xen. oec. 8, 19); of a throne, Kev. iv. 2 (Jer. xxiv. 1 ; Horn. II. 2, 777 ; Od. 17, 331) ; Ke'iaBai npos ti, to be brought near to a thing [see irpos, I. 2 a.], Mt. iii. 10: Lk. iii. 9; absol., of the site of a city, TtTpdyavos Kftrai, Rev. xxi. 1 G ; of grain and other things laid up, gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co. iii. 11. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God's intent) set, i. e. destined, appointed : foil, by els w. ace. indicating the purpose, Lk. ii. 34 ; Phil. i. 1 7 (16) ; 1 Th. iii. 3. b. as very often in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1694''; [L. and S. s. v. IV. 2]), of laws, to be made, laid down : Tivl, 1 Tim. i. 9. c. d Kocrpos oXos iv tw ffow/pw «cirai, lies in the power of the evil one, i. e. is held in subjec- tion by the devil, 1 Jn. v. 19. [COMP. : dvd-, avv-avd-, ■dvri-, aTTO-, €jri-, Kara-, wapd-, Trepi-, irpo-Kfipat.^ * KcipCa, -as, fj, a band, either for a bed-girth (Schol. ad Arstph. av. 817 Kfipia- eiBos C'^vtjs c'k irxpiviav. Trapfot- Kos IpdvTi, ;; Sf(rpoC(ri rds icKlvas, cf. Prov. vii. 16 ; [Pint. Alcib. 16, 1]), or for tying up a corpse after it has been swathed in linen : in the latter sense in Jn. xi. 44 ; [al. take it here of the swal/iinr/s themselves].* Ktipu : [ 1 aor. cKeipa (Acts viii. 32 T WII mrg.)] ; 1 aor. mid. (Kfipdprjv ; fr. Horn, down ; to shear : a sheep, Acts viii. 32 ([cf. above] fr. Is. liii. 7). Mid. to get or let be shorn [W.§38,2b.; B.§135,4]: rij» «^aX^v, Acts xviii. 1 8 ; -absol. of shearing or cutting short the hair of the head, 1 Co. xi. 6 [cf. W. § 43, 1].* Keis, see Kit. KcXtvo-iio, Tos, TO, ((tfXfOo)), 6". Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, an order, command, spec, a stimulating cry, either that by which animals are roused and urged on by man, as horses by charioteers, hounds by hunters, etc., or that by which a signal is given to men, e. g. to rowers by the master of a ship (Lcian. tyr. or catapl. o. 19), to sol- diers by a commander (Thuc. 2, 92 ; Prov. xxiv. 62 (.x.xx. 27)) : iv K(\evDos, 6, a Lat. word, a centurion : Jlk. xv. 39, 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 6.]» [Kcvxpcal, see Keyp^ptai.] Kcvws, adv., vainly, in vain, [W. 4G3 (431); Aristot. on] : Jas. iv. 5.* KcpaCa [WII Kfpea (see their App. p. 151)], -ac, f/, (^Ktpai), a little horn ; extremity, apex, point; used by the Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacritical points. In ^It. V. 18 [(where see Wetstein ; cf. also Edershdm, Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 sq.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little lines, or projections, by which the Ilebr. letters in otlier respects similar differ from each other, as n and D, 1 and n, 2 and 3, [A.V. tittle'] ; the meaning is, ' not even the mi- nutest part of the law shall perish.' [( Aeschyl.,Thuc.,al.)] ' K6pa|jicvs, -/cijs, 6, {KepavmpC), a potter : I^lt. .xxvii. 7, 1 ; Ro. ix. 21. (Horn., Hes., Arstph., Plat., Pint., al. ; Sept. several times for ti''"-) * Kepa)UKds, -ij, -6v, (icc'pafior) ; 1. in class. Grk. of or hi longing to a potter: hence it. y^, such as a potter uses, Ilippocr. ; T('\vri, Plat, polit. p. 288 a. 2. in the Bible made of clay, earthen : Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41), for which the Greeks use «pa/ieoCr, -S, -oiv, and Kfpdpws [al. -^ciof], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94)].' KEpii)i,iov, -OV, TO, (neut. of the adj. Kepa/itot, see the preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. KfpanosJ), an earthen vessel, a pot. Jar ; a jug or pitcher : with vharos added, a water-pitcher, !Mk. xiv. 13 ; Lk. xxii. 10. (The- ophr. cans, plant. 3, 4, 3 ; oXvov, .ler. xlii. (xxxv.) 5 ; Xen. anab. 6, 1, 15 ; Dem. p. 934, 2G ; Polyb. 4, 56, 3 ; fkaiov, Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 2.)* KEpajjios, -on, 6, {Kepavniu) ; 1. clay, potter's earth. 2. anything 7nade of clay, earthen ware. 3. spec, a (roofing) tile (Thuc, Athen., IWian., al.) ; Me roo/ itself ( Arst])h. fr. 1 29 d.) : so 8ia toiv Kipiifiav, through the roof, i. e. through the door in the roof to which a ladder or stairway led u]) from the street (accordingly the Rabbins distinguish two ways of entering a house, 'the wav through the door ' and ' the way through the roof ' \_LdXaiov, -ou, TO, (neut. of the adj. icc(^aXaior, belong- ing to the head) ; 1. the chief or main point, the principal thing, (Vulg. capitulum) : Heb. viii. 1 [cf. B. 154 (134)] ; (freq. so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Thue. and Plat. down). 2. the pecuniary sum total of a reck- oning, amaunt, (Pint. Fab. 4) ; the principal, capital, as distinguished fr. the interest (Plat. legg. 5, 742 c.) ; univ. a sum of money, sum, (Vulg. sumjna) : Acts xxii. 28 ; so Lev. vi. 5 ; Num. v. 7 ; xxxi. 26 ; Joseph, antt. 1 2, 2, 3 ; Artem. oneir. 1,17; see other exx. in Kypke, Obserw. ii. p. 1 1 6 ; [L. and S. s. v. 5 b.].* K€<{>aXaL6u, -w: 1 aor. cKc^aXatujCTa [TWII eK€(j>dKlostTa (see below)] ; (Kee^oAaiox); 1. to bring under heads^ to sum up, to summarize, {Thuc.,ATistot.,al.). 2. in an unusual sense, to smite or wound in the head: Mk. xij. 4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb yva66a>, which means tis yvaBovs Tvwrto to smite on the cheek, since KCpdXaiov is nowhere used of the head of the body. , Tdf. [WII] (after codd. N B L) have adopted idKlaaav (fr. KfCpaKiov, i. ([. Kf(pa\ls. q. v.). But nei- ther Ke(j)aXi6u) nor KKpaXi^ia has yet been noted in any Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [Comp. : dva-KecjioKatooi.'] * Kt^aXi], -ijs, T], Sept. for i^XI ; the head, both of meur Jit. v. 36 ; ]Mk. vi. 24 ; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Ptec], 46 ; Jn. xiii. 9; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4; Rev. i. 14; iv. 4, and often; and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, etc.; on the phrases K\iv€iv TTjv K., inaipfiv TTjv K., see kKivw, 1 and inaipto ; on the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under av6pa^. Since the loss of the head destroys the life, Ke(j)d\ri is used in phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments : so in TO aipa vpav (Trl ttjv k. vpuiv (see aipa, 2 a. p. 15"), Acts xviii. 6, and similar phrases in class. Grk.; see Passow s. v. p. 1717'; Pape s. v. 3 ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent j of persons, master, lord : twos, of a husband in relation to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3 ; Eph. v. 23 ; of Christ, the lord of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [cf. B. 124 sq. (109)] ; of the church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [cf. B. § 143, 4 c.]; Tou o"a)/xaTof ttjs €kk\. Col. i. 18; Trda-qs dpxrjs Ka\ e^nvaiaSy Col. ii. 10 ; so Judg. .xi. 11 : 2 S. xxii. 44, and in Byzant. writ. of things : Ke<^. yuivias, the corner-stone, see yaX.i.6(D : jNIk. xii. 4 T WH (approved also by Weiss, Volkmar, al.), for Kfa\m6aj, q. v. Ke(|)ttXis, -I'Sof. f], (dimin. of KfcfiaXfj, formed after the analogy of d/iof if, mvoKls, etc. ; cf. BltJn. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443 ; KUhner § 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708) ; 1. a little head (La,t. capitellum, cajiitulum). 2. the highest part,, extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column, 1 K. vii. 9, 31 etc.; Geop. 14. 6, 6 ; hence the tips or knobs (the umbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua ; see Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52 sq. ; Hich, Diet, s. V. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod .around wliich parch- ments were rolled seem to have been called Kf, -m : fut. Kqpiiaa ; (loj/xos a muzzle) ; to stop the month by a muzzle, to muzzle : ^oiv, 1 Co. Lx. 9 T Tr WHmrg. (Xen. r. eq. 5, 3) ; see )pu), in Grk. writ. esp. Attic, that witich is promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla- mation by herald ; in the N. T. the message or proclama- tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc- lamation of the necessity of repentance and r(!forniation maile by the ])rophet Jonah [A.V. preaching'], to Krjpvyixa 'idivii, Mt. xii. 41 ; Lk. xi. 32, (.Ion. iii. 4) ; the annoiuice- mcnt of salvation procured by Christ and to be had through him : absol., 1 Co. i. 21 ; Tit. i. 3 ; w. gen. of the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4 ; xv. 14 ; w. gen. of the obj. 'hjaov XpioTov, concerning Jesus Christ, Ko. xvi. 25, cf. Philippi ad loc. ; [ttJj alwviov awTqpias, Mk. xvi. AVII in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; the act of publish- ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 17 [but R. V. that the message might be fully proclaimed ; see nXripoipoptai, a.].' K'fjpv^, less correctly [yet so L AVII] Krjpv^ (on the ac- cent see W. § 6, 1 c. ; [B. 13 (12)]; Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler § 622 ; Gdttling p. 254 sq. ; Lob. Paralip. p. 411 ; W. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. s. v.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -vkos, 6, (akin to y^pvs a voice, a sound, yrjpva to utter a sound, to speak ; [yet cf. Vanicek p. 140]) ; com. in Grk. Avrit. fr. Horn, down ; a herald, a messenger vested with public authority, who conveyed the official messages of kings, magistrates, princes, nulitary commanders, or who gave a public summons or demand, and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen. xii. 43 ; Dan. iii. 4 ; Sir. xx. 15. In the X. T. God's am- hassador, and the herald or proclaimer of the divine word : iiKaioaviTji, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah, 2 Pet. ii. .0 ; used of the apostles, as the divine messen- gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em- braced through him, 1 Tira. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 11.* KTipv(r) ; imjjf. iKr]pvevov ; (kIv8vvos) ; to be in jeop- ardy, to he in danger, to be put, in peril : 'Lk. viii. 23 ; 1 do. XV. 30 ; TovTo to fiepos KivSvvfiiei fls dneXeyixov c\6ftv, this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute. Acts .xix. 27 ; KivS. (yKaXfia-dm, we are in danger of being accused, ib. 40. (From [Find.] and Ildt. down ; Sept.) * KivSuvos, -ov, 6, danger, jieril : Ro. viii. 35 ; tx tivos, prepared by one, \_from one], 2 Co. xi. 26 ; ibid, with a gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [»/", cf. W. § 30, 2 a.] ; so Tffs 6a\da-cTris. Plat. Euthyd. p. 279 e. ; <]e rep. i. p. 332 e. ; Oakatraiov, HeHod. 2, 4, 65.* Kivcu, -Sa ; fut. Ktvrja-co ; 1 aor. inf. Kiv^aai ; Pass., pres. Kivovjiai: 1 aor. cKivriBriv; (fr. Ki'm, poetic for IQ, e'fif, Curtius § 57; hence) 1. prop, to cause to go, i. e. to move, set in motion, [fr. Horn, down] ; a. prop, in pass. [cf. AV. 252 (237)] to be moved, move : of that motion whichis evidenceof life, Acts.xvii. 28 (Geo- vii. 21) ; Kivflv SaKriiXo) (popria, to move burdens with a finger, ^It. .xxiii. 4 ; rtjv Ke(j)a\rii>, to move to and fro [A.V. wag], (expres- sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39 ; Mk. xv. 29, (Sept. for !-'!<■' i'.'^Di.Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 8; Job .xvi. 4; Sir. xii. 18, etc.) ; b. to move from a place, to remove : t\ t s, ij, {Kiviai), [fr. Plato on], a moving, agita- tion : TOU vSaTos, Jn. v. 3 [R L].* K£s (LTTrWH KWs [cf. WH. App. p. 155; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; B. 6 note', and see ei, t]), 6, indecl., (u/'p [perh. ' a bow ' (Gesen.)] fr. 'cnp to lay snares), Kish, the father of Saul, the first king of Israel : Acts xiii. 21.* t'XPnK'i: 1 aor. act. impv. xpwo"; to lend : Tivi ti, Lk. .\i. 5. (From Hdt. down.) [Stn. see daud^a, fin.] * K\dSos, -ov, 6, ((cXaw) ; a. prop, a young, lender shoot, broken off for grafting. b. univ. a branch : Mt. xiii. 32 ; xxi. 8 ; xxiv. 32 ; Mk. iv. 32 ; .xiii. 28 ; Lk. xiii. 19; as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root, so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19, 21 ; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25 ; xl. 15 ; Menand. frag. ed. Jleineke p. 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg., Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) * KXalw; impf . eKXaioK ; fut. /cXniJcra) (Lk. vi. 25 ; Jn. xvi. 20 ; and Tr WHtxt. in Rev. xviii. 9, for Kkavacjiai, more com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and found in Lev. x. 6 ; Joel ii. 1 7, and ace. to most edd. in Rev. .xviii. 9 ; cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v., i. p. 175 sq. ; Kuhner § 343 s. v., i. p. 847 \ [Veitch s. v.] ; B. 60 (53) ; [W. 87 (83)]) ; 1 aor. iK\avu>v (see /3a(TiXeia, 3 e. p. 97"" sub fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; toO Aod^S, the power of David (who is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re- ceiving into the Messiah's kingdom and of excluding from it, Rev. iii. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where T) kK. oiKov Aavid is given to the steward of the royal palace).* xXfUt ; fut. «Xf (Vm, Rev. iii. 7 L T Tr WH ; 1 aor. «Xf tera ; Pass., pf. jc/icXftirfiai, ptcp. KeKXcurpivos ; 1 aor. iKke'idOrfv; Hebr. 1JD; [fr. Hom. down] ; to shut, shut up; prop.: t^i/ ^tipai', Mt. vi. 6 ; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; plur., Jn. XX. 19, 26; Actsxxi. 30; a prison, pass. Acts V. 23 ; ■nvKwvas, pass. Rev. ,xxi. 25 ; rr)v ajiva-a-ov. Rev. XX. 3 G L T Tr AVH. metaph. : tov ovpavov, i. e. to cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25 ; Rev. xi. 6 ; ra (T7r\dy\va avTov awo' Tivos, to shut up eom|)assion so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid of pity towards one [W. § 66, 2 d., cf. B. 322 (277)], 1 Jn. iii. 17; r^v /3ao-iX. tS>v ovpavwv, to obstruct the entrance into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14) ; so used that 7T)v /3ao-. Toil Beoi must be understood. Rev. iii. 7 : t. 6vpav, sc. TTjs fiacT. T. 6eov, ibid. 8 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. [C'oMi'. : ano-, (k; Kara-, (Tuy-xXfio).] * KXe|i)ia, -^os, TO, (xXfTTTw) ; a. thinij stolen [Aris- tot.]. b. i. ii- K\onri I ht ft, i.e. the act committed [JEur., Arst])h., al.] : plur. Rev. ix. 21.* KXeoiras [on thedecl.cf. B. 20 (18)], (apparently coutr. fr. KXeuTrarpos, see 'Avriiras [cf. Letronne in the Kevue Archeologi(jue, 1844—45, i. p. 485 sqq.]), 6, Cleopas, one of Christ's disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lijhift. Com. on Gal. p. 267 ; B. D. s. v.] * kXc'os, -oi/f, TO. (kXc'ci) equiv. to KoKiui) ; 1. i-umor, rcjjurt. 2. i/lori/, praise: 1 I'et. ii. 20. (In both sen.ses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; for ^nW, Job xxviii. 22.) ' KXe'im]s. -ov, 6. (KX/irria), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 33J, a thiif: Mt. vi.l9 sq. ; .xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 33, 39; Jn. x. 1,10; iCo. vi. 10; iPet. iv. 15; an embezzler, pilferer, Jn. ,xii. 6 ; ipxitrBai or fJKeiv as kK. iv vvkt'i, i. q. to come unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2, 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3 ; xvi. 15 ; the name is transferred to false teachers, who do not care to instruct meu, but abuse their confidence for their own gain, .Jn. x. 8. [.SvN. see XrjcrTrjs, fin.] * KXt'irru; fut. /cXe'i/'a) (Sept. also in E.x. xx. 14 ; Lev. .\i.\. 11 ; Deut. V. 19, for K\i\jrop.ai more com. [(?) cf. Vcilch s. V. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. 848] in prof, auth.) ; 1 aor. (KKeyjfa ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. for 3JJ ; a. /<> steal; absol. to commit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; xix. l.S ; Mk. X. 19 ; Lk. xviii. 20; Jn. x. 10 ; Ro. ii. 21 ; xiii. 9; Eph. iv. 28. b. trans, to steal i. e. take awai/ bif stealth : Tiva, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 13.* KXrJiia, -QTOf, TO, (fr. (tXatj, (j. v.), i. (j. xXdSos, a tender and Jlexible branch; spec, the shoot or branch of a vine, a vine-sprout : Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031 ; Aes- chin. in Ctes. p. 77, 27 ; Theophr. h. pi. 4, 13, 5 ; apiriXov KXfjfia, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept., Ezek. xv. 2; .wii. 6 sq. ; Joel i. 7).* KXt||xt|s [cf. B. 16 sq. (i5)], -tyros, 6, Clement, a com- panion of Paul and apparently a member of the church at Philippi: Phil. iv. 3. Ace. to the rather improbable tradition of the catholic church, he is identical with that Clement who was bishoi) of Rome towards the close of the first century; [but see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. 1. c. 'Detached Note'; Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biogr. i. 555 sq.].* KXiipovo^eo), -o) ; U\X. KKr)povopT)fTa; I HOT. fKXjjpovoptjaa; l[)i. KfK^r]pov6pr)Ka', (kXtj^oi/o/xos, dapaiav, 1 Co. xv. 50; ravra [Rec. Travra], Rev. xxi. 7 ; ovop.a, Heb. i. 4 ; t?)w eiikoylav, Heb. xii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp. : naTa-KkrjpomiJ.iai.'] * K\T]povo|XLa, -as, fj, (^liKripovojioi), Sept. time and again for ThU}, several times for nu^T, HK'lia, etc. ; 1. an inheritance, property received (or to he received^ by inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.) : Mt. x.\i. 38 ; Mk. xii. 7; Lk. xii. 13; xx. 14. 2. what is given to one as a possession ([cf. Eng. " inheritance "] ; see kXtj- povofietD, 2) : Stdot/ai ri tlvl KKr^povofxtav, Acts vii. 5 ; XajLi- fidveiu Ti fh K\r]p. Heb. xi. 8 [(cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14 p. 1 153'", 33)]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em- ploys nSn: now of the portion of the holy land allotted to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, etc.), now of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession (Deut. iv. 38 ; xv. 4, etc. — and nothing appeared to the Israelites more desirable than the quiet, prosperous, per- manent possession of this land, see K\t^povop,ea>, 2), the noun Khr^povofiLa, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is used to denote a. the eternal^ blessedness in the con- summated kingdom of God which is to be expected after the visible return of Christ : Gal. iii. 18 ; Col. iii. 24 (rijs /cXijp. gen. of appos. [W. § 59, 8 a.]) ; Heb. ix. 15 ; 1 Pet. i. 4 ; ijixav, destined for us, Eph. i. 14 ; toD d^ov, given by God, 18. b. the share uMch an individual loill have in that eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 32; Eph. v. 5." kXt]po-v6(j.os, -ov, 0, (kXtjpos, and i/e'yuo/xai to possess), prop. one who receives by lot; hence 1. an heir (in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down); a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7; Lk. XX. 14 ; Gal. iv. 1. b. in Messianic usage, one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship : so of Christ, as K\rjpov6iios iravrtov, all things being sub- jccted to his sway, Heb. i. 2 ; of Christians, as exalted by faith to the dignity of sons of Abraham and so of sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of God's kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii. 17; Gal. iii. 29 ; with toO 6eov added, i. e. of God's possessions, equiv. to T^f Sd^ijf (see So^a, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 1 7 ; Beov 8ta Xpio-ToO, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through him we have obtained^ v[o6eala),G3\.i\. 7 Rec.,for which L T Tr WH read Sm fifoO [see biA, A. III. 1] (cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 148 [who advocates the Rec. as that reading in which the others prob. origi- nated (but cf. Meyer in loc. ; WH in loo.)]) ; toO ko- crfiov, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq.; (airjs aiavlov. Tit. iii. 7 ; rr/s ^acTLKeias, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac- quired or obtained the jiortion allotted him : w. gen. of the thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7 ; tov (tkotovs, used of the devil, Ev. Nicod.c. 20 [or Descens. Clir. ad Inferos 4, 1]. (Sept. four times for ty^V : Judg. xviii. 7 ; 2 S. xiv. 7 ; Jer. viii. 10; Mic. i. 15.)* KXrjpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down ; Sept. mostly for h'^il and n'^nj ; a lot; i. e. 1. an object used in casting or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd, or a bit of wood, (hence K\rjpos is to be derived fr. icXdio [cf. EUicott on Col. i. 12]) : Acts i. 2G (see below) ; j3d\- \fiv K\fjp., Mt. xxvii. 3.5 ; Mk. xv. 24 ; Lk. xxiii. 34 ; Jn. xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19 ; Jon. i. 7, etc.) ; the lots of the several persons concerned, inscribed with their names, were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken, and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the one chosen (Hom. II. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, etc.; Liv. 23, 3 [but cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lot]) ; hence 6 K\ijpos ttItttci. iizl Tiva, Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6 ; Jon. i. 7). 2. what is obtained by lot, allotted portion : Xayxaveiv and Xafi^dveLv TOV KKrjpov Trjs fitoKoviaf, a portion in the min- istry common to the apostles. Acts i. 17, 25 RG; etrrt fioi /cX^pos €v TIKI, dat. of the thing. Acts viii. 21 ; like K\r)povop.ia (q. v.) it is used of the part wliich one will have in eternal salvation, Xa/Seii/ tok kX. evrols ijyiaerfieVois, among the sanctified. Acts x.xvi. 18 (Sap. v. 5) ; of eter- nal salvation itself, KKijpos twv ayicov, i. e. the eternal sal- vation which God has assigned to the saints. Col. i. 12 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, oi KXijpoi, those whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al- lotted charge~\, used of Christian churches, the adminis- tration of which falls to the lot of the presb}i;ers : 1 Pet. V. 3, cf. Acts xvii. 4 ; [for ]iatristic usage see Soph. Lex. s. V. , cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 246 sq.].* kXtjpoo), -o> : 1 aor. pass. iKKr]pa>6r]v ; (icX^pos) ; in class. Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to choose by lot : rivd [Hdt. 1, 94 ; al.]. 3. to allot, as- sign by lot : Tivd nvi, one to another as a possession, Pind. 01. 8, 19. 4. once in the N. T., to make a KXrjpos i. e. a heritage, private possession : rtva, pass, ev m (KKr]pd>- Brjiifv [but Lchm. cKXrjdrjfiev^ in whom lies the reason why we were made the (cX^por tov d(ov (a designation trans- ferred from the Jews in the O. T. to Cliristians, cf. Add. to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. Hne 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in loc. ; [cf. Deut. iv. 20 ; ix. 29]), the heritage of God Eph. i. 1 1 [see Ellicott in loc.]. (In eccles. writ, it sig- nifies to become a clergyman [see reff. s. v. KXrjpos, fin.].) [CoMP. : jrpo(7-KX7;po(a.] * K\fj(ri9i -fo)?, t], (xaXcw) ; 1. a calling, calling to, [(Xen., Plat., al.)]. 2. a call, invitation : to a feast K\r]TO<; 350 KXvBeovi^Ofiai, (3 Mace. V. 11 ; Xen. symp. 1, 7); in the X. T. every- where in a technical sense, Ihe divine iiivilalion to embrace sdlralion in Ihe kini/domo/Goil, which is made esp. through the preaching of the gospel : with gen. of the author, toO 6foO, Epb. i. IS; dfieraiitX. . . . ^ kK, roO 6iov, God does not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de- cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which he promised their fathers (i. c. the ixitriarchs), Ro. xi. 29 ; fi tivo) [ij. V. (a.)] icX^6s, a furnace, an oven : so Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 28.* KXC|ia or KXtjLta (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. Kplfui), -rot, TO, (kXi'kw) ; 1. an inclination, slope, declivity: twv opw>',Polyb. 2, 16,3; [al.]. spec. 2. /Ae [supposed] sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards Ihe poles, a zone : Aristot., Dion. II., Plut., al.; Joseph, b. j. 5, 12, 2, 3. a tract of land, a region: Ro. xv. 23 ; 2 Co. xi. 10 ; Gal. i. 21 ; (Polyb. 5, 44, 6 ; 7, G, 1 ; Ildian. 2, 11, 8 [4ed. Bekk.]; al.).' KXivdf>u>v, -ov, TO, (dimin. of liKivr) ; see ywatKapiov), a small bed, a couch: Acts v. 15 LTTrWII. (Arstph. frag. 33 d. ; Epict. diss. 3, 5, 13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57 ; [cf. xXti/i'Sioi', and Pollux as there referred to].) * kXivi], -i;s, rj, (/cXi'i/u) ; fr. Ildt. down ; Sept. for TM2:p, also for tvi>' ; a bed : univ., Mk. vii. 30 ; Lk. xvii. 34 ; a couch to recline on at meals, Alk. iv. 21 ; vii. 4 [T AVII om.] ; Lk. viii. 16 ; a couch on which a sick man is carried, Mt. ix. 2, G ; Lk. v. 18 ; plur. Acts v. 15 R G ; jiaWfiv els kXIvtjv, to cast into a bed, i. e. to afflict with disease, Rev. ii. 22.» kXivCSiov, -ov, to, (icXiwj), a small bed, a couch : Lk. v. 19, 24. (Dion. H. antt. 7, G8; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An- tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut. ; [cf. Pollux 10, 7].) • kXCvcu; 1 aor. EicXii-a ; pf. Kc'xXiKa; 1. trans. a. to incline, bow : ti/v K((j)a\rjv, of one dying, Jn. xix. 30; TO npoaioTTOv els t. yfjv, of the terrified, Lk. xxiv. 5. b. i. q. to cause to fall hack: napefi^o\as, Lat. inclinare acies, i. e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (p^axriv, Horn. D. 14, 510; Tpiar, 5, 37; 'Axotour, Od. 9, 59). c. torecline: Ttjv Kf(puXriv. in a place for repose [A. V. lay one's heacQ, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58. 2. intrans. to incline one's self [cf. B. 145 (1 27) ; W. § 38, 1] : of the declining day l_A.'V. ivtar airay, be far sprnl'], Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29; Jer. vi. 4 ; a^a Toi K\tfat to TpWov p-epos ttjs wktos, Polyb. 3, 93, 7 ; iyKklvavTOi roC ^Xi'ou t'f iairtpav, Arr. anab. 3, 4, 2. [CoMP. : ava-, «V, Kara-, 7rpoo--v, Kv/ia: «Ciio a «'ai-c, suggesting uninter- mpted succession; kMSuv a billow, surge, suggesting size anil c X t e n s i n. So too in the fig. application of the words. Schmidt ch. 56.] KX«Sci)vC|o|iat,ptep. KXvSaiwfo^fvor; (k\vS(ov); tobe tossed by the waves ; metaph. to be agitated (like the waves) mentally [A. V. tossed to and frol : with dat. of instrum. navTi avepa rgi hiha(rVL'P the bowels, 31p the interior, the midst of a thing, Dn"i the womb ; the belli/ : and 1. the whole belli/, the entire cavity ; hence fj ava and f] koxio koiXi'o, the upper [i. e. the stomach^ and the lower belly are distinguished : very often so in Grk. ^vrit. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the lower belli/, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex- crement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. elnep cit KotXiav e)(a>pfi 6ia (TTOfiaxov wav to ■!tlv6)l€Vov) : Mt. xv. 1 7 ; Jlk. vii. 19. 3. the gullet (hat. slomachtis) : Mt. xii. 40; Lk. XV. 16 [WH Trmrg. xopTaadijuai. e'k etc.] ; 1 Co. vi. 1 3 ; Kev. x. 9 sq. ; SoiAcidv Trj «otXia, to be given up to the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see SovXeva, 2 b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also S>v 6 6eos fj KoiXia, PhU. iii. 19; KoiKias opf^is, Sir. xxiii. G. 4. the womb, the place where the foetus is conceived and nourished till birth : Lk. i. 41 sq. 44; ii. 21 ; xi. 27; xxiii. 29; Jn. iii. 4, (very often so in Sept. ; very rarely in prof. auth. ; Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74 ; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2, 16, 43) ; eK (beginning from [see «k, IV. 1]) KoiKias nn'pos, Mt. xLx. 12 ; Lk. i. 15 ; Acts iii. 2 ; xiv. 8 ; Gal. i. 15, (for DS iP5n, Ps. xxi. (.x.\ii.) 11 ; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 6; Job i. 21 ; Is. xlix. 1 ; Judg. xvi. 1 7 [Vat. drro k. /i. ; cf. W. 33 (32)]). 5. in imitation of the Hebr. jp3, tropi- cally, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35 ; xxxii. 18 [Sept. ya}ii.tvoi, i. e. a life repugnant to the holy law, iljid. 13, 1, 1 ; oi ytip ms KOivov apTov ovbe ws koivov TTopa Tavra (i. e. the bread and wine of the sacred supper) Xap^avopiev, Justin Mart, apol. 1, 66; (ot Xpiortai/ot) Tpdne^av Koivfjv TrapaTidevTat, dXX' ov Koivfjv, a table communis but not profanus, Ep. ad Diogn. 5, on which cf. Otto's note) ; koivov koI [R G ^] aKddapTov, Acts x. 14 ; koiv. fj dxad; ib. x. 28 ; xi. 8, (icoii/a fj oKdOapra ovk Itrdioptv, Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 20). [Cf. Trench § ci.] * Koivou. -w; 1 aor. inf. KOivQxrai [cf. W. 91 (86)] ; pf. KfKoivaiKa : pf . pass. ptcp. KCKoivaiievos ; (^koivos) ; 1. in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see KOIVOS, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un- hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by ^c^tf Xoa), cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33 [where he calls attention to Luke's accuracy in putting Koivovv into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts xxi. 28) and /Sf/S^XoCv when they address Felix (xxiv. 6)]) : Rev. xxi. 27 Rec. ; Mt. xv. 11, 18, 20 ; Mk. vii. 15, 18,-20, 23 : pass. Heb. ix. 13 ; tI, Acts ,xxi. 28; yaarepa. piapocpayia, 4 Macc. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un- clean : Acts X. 15 (cf. 28) ; xi. 9; see SiKaida, 3.* KOivuvEU), -Si ; 1 aor. iKOwaivqaa : pf . KeKOivtovTjKa ; (koivo)- vos) ; a. to come into communion or fellowship, to become a sharer, be made a partner : as in Grk. writ. w. gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. 1. 11 ; 2 Macc. xiv. 25)] ; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.), Ro. XV. 27; [1 Pet.iv. 13]. b. to enter into fellouh ship, join one's self as an associate, make one's self a sharer Koivavta 352 KoKu^a or partner: as in (irk. writ., w. dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. V. 22; 2 Jn. 11 ; raU xpdais tivo?, so to maku another's necessities one's own as to rolieve them [A. V. communi- cating to the necessities etc.], Ro. xii. 13; w. tlat. of pcrs. foil, by eis tl (as in Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 a.), Phil. iv. 15 ; foil, by iv w. ilat. of the thin^ which one shares with another. Gal. vi. (^KoiViavrftrns iv rraai tu TrXiyo'iov aov KoX uiiK «'/«is 'i8in (Ivm, Uarnab. ep. 1!», S) ; cf. \V. § 30, 8 a. ; [B. § Vii, S; Bp. Lghtft. or EUicott on Gal. 1. c. CoMP. : avy-KuLvu>vi(t).~\ * Koivuvta, -ay, 17, (Kon-urar), fellowship, association, com- muniii/, fiimmunion. Joint participation, intercourse; in the N. T. as in class. Grk. 1. the share which one has in antjthing, participation; w. gen. of the thing in which he shares : nvfifiaros, Phil. ii. 1 ; tou Aylov nvevfia- Tos, 2 Co. -xiii. 1.3 (14) ; tC>v TradrffiaTav tov XpioroO, Phil, iii. 10; rrjs nioTeais, Philem. 6 [cf. B|). Lghtf t.] ; toC aliMTos ToD XpioToO, i. 0. in the benefits of Christ's death, 1 Co. X. 1 ti [cf. Meyer ad loc] ; tov awfiUTos tov Xp. in the (mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; TJjs 8ia- Kovtas, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; toO jivaTrjpiov, Eph. iii. 1) Rcc. cts Koivutviav TOV v'lov TOV Bfov, to obtain fellowship in the dignity and blessings of the Son of God, 1 Co. i. 9, where of. Meyer. 2. intercourse, fellowship, intimacy : he^ia KOLvavtas, the right hand as the sign and pledge of fellowship (in fulfilling the apostolic office). Gal. ii. 9 f where see Bp. Lt;htft.]; ti's kolv. (j)a>T\wp6s (tkotos; what in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (n'r ovv xoivuvia TTpos *A7roXXaji/a to) pr)hiv oiKfiov iTTtTfTrjdfVKiWt, J'liilo, Ici;. ad Gaium § 14 fin. ; el 8i tis 'iaTL Kaivavia npbs ■6eovs Tjiiiv, Stob. serm. 2S [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]) ; used of the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians : absol. Acts ii. 42; with els to evayyiXiov added, Phil. i. 5 ; Koivatvlav ex"" J"^^' ^A'™"» M""' dXXi;\mi', 1 Jn. i. 3, 7 ; of the fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, /xrra TOV TraTpus K- p.€Ta tov vloij aiiTov, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6, (which fel- lowship, ace. to John's teaching, consists in the fact that Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as God and Christ, a'nd of the blessings arising therefrom). By a use unknown to [irof. anth. Koivmvta in the N. T. denotes 3. a benefaction Jointly contributed, a col- lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and proof of fellowship (cf. Grimm, Exeget. Ildbch. on AVisd. viii. 18, p. 1 76) : 2 Co. viii. 4 ; cir Tiva, for the benefit of one, 2 Co. i.\. 13; noifia-dai koiv. (to make a contribu- tion) etr Tiva, Ro. xv. 20 ; joined with emoita, Ileb. .xiii. IG. [Cf. B. § 132, 8.]* KoivuviKOf, -i), -6v, (koivovio) ; 1. social, sociable, ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel- lowship: Plat. def. p. 411 e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 1283% 38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242", 26 koivcovikuv avdpanros fwov] ; Polyb. 2, 44, 1 ; Antonin. 7, 52. 55; often in Plut.; irpii^tK Koiv. actions liaving reference to human society, Antonin. 4, 33 ; 5, 1. 2. inclined to make others sharers in one's possessions, inclined to imparl, free in giv- ing, liberal, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [where, however, see ■Cope']; Lcian. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.' Kotvwv6s, -J], -OK, ((coiKor), [as adj. Eur. Ijih. Taur. 1173 ; commonly as subst.]; a. a jiartner, associate, com- railc, companion : 2 Co. viii. 23 ; fx^^" ''"'" «otvavuv, I'hilem. 1 7 ; ei/11 KotvwKof Tivt, to be one's partner, Lk. v. 10 ; Tivos (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing something, Ileb. x. 33 ; Ttvot iv ru at/iart, to be one's partner in shedding the blood etc. Mt. xxiii. 30. b. a partaki;r, sharer, in any thing ; w. gen. of the thing : tUv vadr)pdTwv, 2 Co. i. 7 ; t^s 8o'|i/t, 1 Pet. v. 1 ; 6(tas (pvaeios, 2 Pet. i. 4 ; tov BvataaTrjplov, of the altar (at Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing in the worship of the Jews, 1 Co. .x. 18; tUv baifioviav, partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fellow- ship with them, because they are the authors of the heathen worship, ibid. 20; (iv ™ d(j)6dpTa> xoiviavol . . . iv Tois , fin.).* koCtt). -r)s, 1], (KEQ, KEIQ, Kelfiai, .akin to Koipaa) ; fr. Iloni. Oil. v.), .'J41 down; Sept. chiefly for 331^0, also for HD^'l/ etc. ; a. a place for lying down, resting, sleeping in ; a bed, couch : (tr t^i» KoiTrjv (see ft^i, V. 2 a.) clalv, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec, the marriage-bed, as in the Tragg. : t. koItj]v lualvtiv, of adultery (Joseph, antt. 2, 4, 5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), Ileb. xiii. 4. c. cohabita- tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4 sq. 21-25, etc.; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur. sexual intercourse (see irepmaTta), b. a.), Ro. xiii. 13 [A.V. chambering'] ; by meton. of the cause for the effect we have the peculiar expression Kolrrjv exf" « tivos, to have conceired by a man, Ro. ix. 10; koiVi; crneppuTos, Lev. .xv. 1 G ; xxii. 4 ; xviii. 20, 23 [here k. eit anfpiMaTta-pov] ; on these phrases cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.* KoiTuv, -u>vos, 6, (fr. KoiTTj ; cf. wfiCpav etc.), a sleeping- room, bed-chamber : 6 eVi toO koit. the officer who is over the bed-chamber, the chamberlain. Acts .\ii. 20 (2 S. iv, 7 ; E.K. viii. 3; 1 Esdr. iii. 3 ; the Atticists censure the word, for which Attic writ, generally used Sw/iaVioi' ; cf. Lob. ad I'hryn. p. 252 .sq.).* KOKKivos. -ri, -ov, (fr. kokkoc a kernel, the grain or berry of the ilex coccij'era ; these berries are the clusters of eggs of a female insect, the kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine, crimson)], and when collected and pulverized produce a red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9, 41, 65 ; 16, 8, 12; 24, 4), crimson, scarlet-colored: Mt. xxvii. 28; Heb. ix. 1 9 ; Rev. xvii. 3. neut. as a subst. i. q. scarUt cloth or clothing : Rev. xvii. 4 ; .wiii. 1 2, 1 G, (Gen. -xxxviii. 28 ; Ex. XXV. 4 ; Lev. xiv. 4, 6 ; Josh. ii. 18 ; 2 S. i. 24 ; 2 Chr. ii. 7, 14; Plut. Fab. 15; (fiopelv kokkivo, scarlet robes, Epiet. diss. 4, 1 1, 34 ; iv kokkIvois TrfprnuTflv, 3, 22, 10), Cf. JTi». RWB.s. V. Carmesin ; 7Jo.v/o//in .Schenkel i. p. 501 sq. ; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [B.D. s. v. Colors, n.' 3].* k6kkos, -ov, 6, [cf. VaniceJc, Fremdworter etc. p. 26], a grain : Mt. xiii. 31 ; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 31 ; Lk. xiii, 19 ; xvii. 6 ; Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 37. [Horn. h. Cer., Ildt., down.]* KoXd^u : pres. pass. ptcp. (toXafo/ifrar ; 1 aor. mid. sul)- junc. 3 pers. plur. KoXdo-mi/Tai ; (xoXof lojiped); in (irk. KoXaKeia 353 /coXttos writ. 1. prop, to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2. to check, curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun- ish : so in the N. T. ; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lchm. in 4 ; mid. (0 cause to he punished (3 Mace. vii. 3) : Acts iv. 2 1 .* KoXaKEia (T WH -Kia [see I, t]), -ar, i}, (/coXn/cevw), flattery : Xoyof KoXaKelai, flattering discourse, 1 Tli. ii. 5. (Plat., Dem., Tlieojilir., Josepli., Hdian., al.) * KoXao-is, -«•>!, T), (KoXafw), correction, punishment, pen- atttj : Mt. .XXV. 4G ; xoXao-ii/ ?;(«, brings witli it or bas con- nected with it the tliought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. IS. (Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., etc. ; 2 Mace. iv. 38 ; 4 Mace. viii. 8 ; Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, etc.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77, (9) ; 4, 44, (3) ; Ael. v. h. 7, 15 ; al.) * (Stn. «tdAaiTis, Ti/iiupia: the noted definition of Aristotle which distinguishes KiKaais from Ti/iupla as that which (is disciplinarv and) lias reference to him who suffers, while the latter (is peual and) has reference to tlie satisfaction of him who iutiicts, may be found in liis rhet. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cojje, lutr. to Arist. Ehet. p. 232. To much the same effect, Plato, Protag. 324 a. sq., also Deff. 416. But, as iu other cases, usage (esp. the later) does not always recognize the distinc- tion ; see e. g. Philo de legat. ad Gaium § 1 fin. ; frag, ex Euseb. prep, evang. 8, 13 (Maug. ii. 641); de vita Moys. i. 16 fin. ; Plut. de sera nnm. vind. §§ 9, 11, etc. Plutarch (ibid. § 25 sub fin.) uses Ko\d(o/iai of those undergoing the penalties of the other world (cf. Just. Mart. 1 apol. 8 ; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 6, 7 ; Just. Jlart. 1 apol. 43 ; 2 apol. 8 ; Test. xii. Patr., te.st. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polyc. 2, 3 ; 11, 2; Ign. ad Rom. 5, 3 ; Jlart. Ign. vat. 5 etc.). See Trench, Sjti. § vii. ; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s. ; Bartlett, Life and Death Eternal. Note G. ; C. F. Hudson, Debt and Grace, p. 188sqri.] KoXao-o-aevs, see KoXocrtrae^?. K-oXacrtrat, see KoXoacrai. KoXa<|>L^u ; 1 aor. (Ko\al^oiiai ; («oXac^or a fist, and this fr. KoXajrro) to peck, strike) : to strike with the fist, give one a blow with the fist (Terence, colnphum infringo, Quintil. col. duco), [A. V. to buffet'] : nvd, Mt. xxvi. 6 7 ; Mk. xiv. 65 ; as a specific term for a general, i. q. to maltreat, treat with violence and con- tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 20. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) The word is fully discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lex.x. X. T. etc. p. 67 sqq. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 75 sq.* KoXXdu, -w : Pass., pres. icoXXai^ai ; 1 aor. eKoXX^Sr/c ; 1 fut. KoXXi/ft'/o-o^ai (Mt. xix. 5 LTTrWH); (iciXXa gluten, glue) ; prop, to glue, glue to, glue together, cement, fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to- gether; in the N. T. only the pass, is found, with reflex- ive force, to join one's self to, cleave to; Sept. for pDT ; 6 KoviopTos 6 koK\t}0€\s rifiiv. Lk. X. 11 ; eKoWrjOrjo-av avTrjs al a^apTiaL tixP'- ^o^ ovpauov, her sins were such a heap as to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl- edge of heaven). Rev. xviii. 5 G LTTrWH (e'koXX. fj ^vj(r} fiov oTTiVo) aov, Ps. Ixii. (Ixiii.) 9 ; al ayvoiat rjpitov vnepfjveyKQi' eojs Tov ovpavox), 1 Esdr. viii. 72 (74) ; v^pt,^ Tf ^Ir) Tc oi/pavov «fi, Horn. Od. 15, 329; 17, 565). of persons, w. dat. of the thing, KoXKrjdrjTi ra apuart join thyself to etc. Acts viii. 29 ; w. dat. of pers., to form an intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations 23 with, unite one's self to, (so Barn. ep. c. 10, 3 sq. 5. 8 ; also with ficrd and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11 ; 19, 2. 6 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 1 ; 30, 3 ; 46, 2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.'s note], 4): t^ yvvaiKi, Mt. xix. 5 LTTrWH; ttj nopvr), 1 Co. vi. 16 (Sir. .xix. 2); ra Kvpico, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K. xviii. 6 ; Sir. ii. 3) ; to join one's self to one as an asso- ciate, keej) companj' with. Acts v. 13 ; ix. 26 ; x. 28 ; to follow one, be on his side, Acts xvii. 34 (2 S. xx. 2 ; 1 Mace. iii. 2; vi. 21) ; to join or attach one's self to a master or patron, Lk. xv. 15 ; w. dat. of the tiling, to give one's self steadfastly to, labor for, [AV. cleave to]: TM ayada, Ro. xii. 9, aya6a, Kpimi SiKaia, Barn. ep. 20, 2 ; Trj €iXoyi'a,so cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 31, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat., Diod., Plut., ah) [CoMP. : TrpoCT-KoXXdo).] * KoXXoiipiov (T Tr KoWvpiov, the more common form in prof. auth. [cf. Lob. Pathol, proleg. p. 461 ; WH. App. p. 152]), -ou, TO, (dimin. of KoWvpa, coarse bread of a cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as Pumpernickel), Lat. colh/rium \^A.V. ege-salve], a prepa- ration shaped like a KoWvpa, composed of various mate- rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor. sat. 1, 5, 30; Epict. diss. 2, 21, 20 ; 3, 21, 21 ; Cels. 6, 6, 7): Rev. iii. 18.* KoXX«PioTitis, -oil, 6, (fr. KoWv^os i. q. a. a small coin, cf. KoXo/3ot clipped ; b. rate of exchange, premium), a money-changer, banker: Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15. Menand., Lys. in PoU. 7, 33, 170; o /iev koWv^os doKtp.ov, TO Se KoXXuStoT^y dSoKifiov. Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 440. Cf. what was said under KfpfiaTiiTTrjs.' KoXXijpiov, see KoWovptov. KoXopou. -m : 1 aor. fKoXo,3ci)[Ta : Pass., 1 aor. e'lcoXo- PoiBrjv ; 1 fut. Ko\o^u}6rja-opai ; (fr. koXo/3os lopped, mu- tilated) ; to cut off {tqs xclpas, 2 S. iv. 12; tovs jrdSas, Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24] ; tijv piva, Diod. 1, 78) ; to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80, 13) ; hence in the N. T. of time, (Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail : Mt. xxiv. 22 : Mk. xiii. 20.* KoXoo-o-acis, and (so LTrAVH) KoXaa-craeis (see the foil, word ; in Strabo and in Inscrr. KoXoo-otjkos), -ems, o, Vulg. Colossensis, Pliny Colossinus; Colossian, a Colos- sian ; in the heading [and the subscription (R Tr)] of the Ep. to the Col.* KoXo|xpTr]piaii ^v\wv, 1 Pet. i. 9 ; r^f 8d|i)r (TTetpavov, 1 Pet. v. 4 ; pitrB'ov ti^ixias, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], {tov u^lovtijs Bvo'aefieius piaOov, 2 Mace. viii. 33; ho^av iadXriv [al. KafimffTai], Kur. ni|ii>. 432; TTJV d^uwirapa ^fii/, Plat. legg. 4 p. 718 a., and other exx.elsewh.). b. toreceive what was previously one's own, to get back, receive back, recover : to epov (rvv tokco, Mt. XXV. 27 ; his son (of Abraham after he had con- sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29; TOV d8<\(}>!>v dvvfipLorTov, Pliilo (Ic Joscplio § 35 ; 01 8e nap' eXniSas lavTovs KCKopicrpevoi, having received each other back, been restored lo each other, contrary to their ex;)ccla- tions, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the latter had been prevented by God, Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 4; TT/v dbeXfpriv. Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery of hostages, captives, etc., Thuc. 1, 113 ; Polyb. 1, 83, 8 ; 3, 51, 12; 3,40, 10; the city and temple, 2 Mace. x. 1 ; a citadel, a city, often in Polyb. ; Trjv ^aaCKelav, Arstph. av. 549; tt/v jrarpaav dpx'iv, Joseph, antt. 13, 4, 1). Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given back to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one is said Kopi^ea-Oai that which he has done, i. e. either the reward or the punishment of the deed [W. i)20 sq. (57G)]: 2Co. V. 10; Col. iii. 25; with Trapa Kupiou added, Eph. vi. 8 ; ([ApapTiav, Lev. x.x. 1 7] ; eKaaros, Ka6i>s enolria-e, Kopielrat, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [CoMl". : ck-, : pf. pass. ptcp. xiKovtapevos ; (fr. Kovia, which signifies not only ' dust ' but also • lime ') ; to cover with lime, plaster over, whitewash : Td(poi xeKOviapevoi (the Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement hy KOVLOpTO. is apjjUed to a hypocrite who conceals his malice under an outward assumption of piety, Acts xxiii. 3. (Dem., Aristot., Plut., al. ; for Tty, Deut. xxvii. 2, 4.) * Kovioprds, -ov, 6, (fr. Kovia, and opvvfiL to stir up) ; 1. prop, raiseil clusl, flying dust, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb., al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x. U; Lk. Lx. 5 ; x. 11 ; Acts xiii. ol ; xxii. 23. (For pns, Ex. ix. 9 ; Xah. i. 3 ; for 13;;, Deut. ix. 21.)* KOTrdJci) : 1 aor. «oTratra ; (xon-ot) ; prop, lo grow iveari/ or lired ; hence ti/ cease from violence, cease raging : 6 ai/f/jor (Ildt. 7, 191), Mt. xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 39; vi. 51. (Gen. viii. 1 ; Jon. i. II scj. ; [cf. esp. Pliilo, somn. ii. 35].)* KOirerds, -oC, 6, (fr. KoirTOfiai, see fCOTrrca), Sept. for 13pp ; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation tcitli beating of the breast as a sign of grief : kottctov Troieiadm eVi tivi. Acts viii. 2; i-nl riva, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker's an- nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31; Plut. Fab. 17.) * Koirrj, -!js, 71, (kowt-o)) ; 1. prop, several times in Grk. writ, the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk. a cutting in pieces, slaughter : Heb. vii. 1 ; Gen. xiv. 1 7 ; Deut. xxviii. 25 ; Josh. x. 20 ; Judith xv. 7.* Koiridd), -S), [3 pers. plur. Konioia-Lv (for -Sxriv), Mt. vi. 28 Tr ; cf. ipaTaay, init.] ; 1 aor. iKoiriatra ; pf. KeKoiriaKa (2 pers. sing. itfKojriWfr, Rev. ii. 3 LTTr WH, cf. [W. § 13, 2 c] ; B. ir, (;i8) [and his trans, of Apollon. Dysk. p. 54 n. ; Tdf. Prolog, p. 123 ; WH. App. p. IGrt ; Soph. Lex. p. 39]) ; ((coTTor, q. v.) ; 1. as in Arstph., Jo.seph., Plut., al., lo groto weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or burdens or grief) : Mt. xi. 28 ; Rev. ii. 3 ; KeKomaKois cV rr)s oBomoplas, Jn. iv. 6 (iuro t^s oSoijvopias, Joseph, antt. 2,15,3; 8pa/iOuwat Kal ou K07riao"ouo"t, Is. xl. 31). 2. in bibl. (irk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil (Sept. for i'r); of bodily labor: absol., Mt. vi. 28; Lk. v. 5; xii. 27 [not Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38 ; Acts xx. 35 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 2 ; E])h. iv. 28 ; 2 Tim. ii. 6 [cf. W. 556 (51 7) ; B. 390 (334)] ; W, upon a thing, Jn. iv. 38. of the toil- some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot- ing the kingdom of God and Christ : 1 Co. xv. 10 ; xvi. 16, (cf. Jn. iv. 38) ; foil, by ev w. dat. of the thing in which one labors, eV Xoyio k. StSaa-KoXla, 1 Tim. v. 1 7 : cV vp.1v, among you, 1 Th. v. 12 ; eV Kvptco (see ev, I. G b. p. 211' mid. [Lbr. the cl.]), Ro. xvi. 12; f?s rcva, for one, for lus benefit, Ro. xvi. 6 ; Gal. iv. 1 1 [cf. B. 242 (209) ; W. 503 (469)] ; fis tovto, looking to this (viz. that piety has the promise of life), 1 Tim. iv. 10 ; eis o, to which end. Col. i. 29 ; ftf Kevov, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 (itfKmr f'/coTrmo-a, of the frustrated labor of the prophets, Is. .xlix. 4).* KOiros, -ov, 6, (kottto)) ; 1. i. q. ro Kowreiv, a beat' ing. 2. i. q. kottctos, a beating of the breast in grief, .5orrow, (Jer.li. 33 (xiv. 3)). 3. /oAor (so Sept. often for S"3i')' '• 6- ^- f'l'oMe (Aeschyl., Soph.) : (co'jrous ■Kapix'^iv Tiv'i, to cause one trouble, make work for him, Jit. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. .xi. 7; Gal. vi. 17; kotvov napix- Ttvi, Lk. xviii. 5. b. intense labor united with trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5 ; xi. 23 ; of manual labor, joined with p6x6os [(see below)], 1 Th. ii. 9 ; cv icoVu k. p6xda>, l_toil and travail], 2 Co. xi. 27 (where L T Tr'WH oui.'fV) ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; of the lar borious efforts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58 ; Rev. ii. 2; plur. Rev. .xiv. 13; 6 kottos ttjs ayaTrqs, the labor to which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1 Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Rec; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv. 38 (on whicli see fit, B. I. 3) ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; of that which such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; plur. 2 Co. .X. 15 (cf. Sir. .xiv. 15).* [Sy.n. kSttos, /iuxBos, Tr6yo!: primarily and in general classic usage, irofos gives prominence to the effort (work as requiring force), «((Trostothe f at igue,^(fx9o$ (chiefly poetic) to the hardship. But in the N. T. vivos lias passed over (in three instances out of four) to the meaning pain (hence it has no place in the 'new Jerusalem', IJev. xxi. 4) ; cf. the deterioration in the case of tlie allied Troyripis, irivris. Schmidt, cli. 85 ; cf. Trench § cii. (who woidd traus tt. ' toil ', k. ' wea- riness', //. 'labor').] Koirp£a [Chandler § 96], -as. tj, i. <\. rj Kowpor, dung: Lk. .xiii. 8 Rec." ; xiv. 35 (34). (Job ii. 8 ; 1 S. ii. 8 ; Neh. ii. 13; 1 Mace. ii. 62; [Strab., Poll., al.].)* Koirpiov, -ov, TO, i. q. ^ Konpos, dung, manure : plur. Lk. xiii. 8 [Rec."' Kojrpiav]. (Ileraclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669 [quaest. conviv. lib. iv. quaest. iv. § 3, 6] ; Strab. 16, § 26 p. 784 ; Epict. diss. 2, 4, 5 ; Plut. Pomp. c. 48 ; [Is. v. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (.xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other later writ.) * KOTTTi» : impf. 3 pars. plur. (kotttov ; 1 aor. ptcp. Ko'i/^as (:\Ik. xi. 8 T Tr txt. WII) ; Mid., impf. eKonroprjv ; fut. K6\lropai; 1 aor. cKo^jfaprjv: [fr. Horn, down]; to cut, sli-il.e, smite, (Sept. for 71371, 1112, etc.) : ri dwo or €k Tivos. to cut from, cut off, Mt. -xxi. 8; Mk. .xi. 8. Mid. to beat one's breast for grief, Lat. plango [R. V. mourn'] : j\It. .xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al. ; Sept. often so for 13D) ; riva, to mourn or bewail one [cf. W. § 32, 1 y.] : Lk. viii. 52 ; xxiii. 27, (Gen. xxiii. 2; I S. XXV. 1, etc.; Arstph. Lys. 396 ; Anthol. 11, 135, 1) ; c'ffi' Tiva, Rev. i. 7 ; [xviii. 9 T Tr WH], (2 S. xi. 26) ; 4iti Tivi. Rev. xviii. 9 [R GL], cf. Zech. xii. 10. [Comp. : ava-, cmo-. CK-. (V-, Kara-, irpo-, irpoa-KOTTTOi. Syn. cf. dprjveu.] * K6pa^,-av ykioTraV, cf. coiitr. Apion. 1, 22, 4; [BB.IJD. s. v. Corbau; Ginshurg in the Bible Educator, i. 155]). 2. Kop^avat, -a [see B. u. s.J, l/ie sacred treasury : Mt. xxvii. [L nirg. Tr inrg. Kopffau'] (tov icp&v dri(ravp6v, KaKeWai 8e Kop^avas, Joseph. 1). j. 2, 0. 4).* Kopi (in Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 2 sqrp with the (irk. ter- minations -eou, fi; -rjv), 6, (Ilebr. mp i. e. iee, hail), A'o- rah (Vulg. Core), a man who, with others, rebelled against Moses (Num. xvi.) : Judc 11.* KopEwu)ii ; ((co'por satiety) ; to satiate, sate, satisfy : 1 aor. pass. ptc]). KopeaBenrcs, as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, w. gen. of the thing with whieli one is filled [B. § i:S2, i;)],Tpo0^E, Acts xxvii. 38; trop. (pf.) KfKopetrpi- foi eWf, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the ciin^uMDnate .Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.* KoplvBios. -OK, 6, a C'iirinlhiaii,nn inhnhilanl of Corinth: Acts xviii. 8 ; 2 Co. vi. 11. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)]* KopivSos, -ou, ij, Corinl/i, the metropolis of Achaia projjcr, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be- tween the j.Bgean and Ionian Seas (hence called himaris, Ilor. car. 1, 7, 2; Ovid.metam. 5, 407), and having two harbors, one of which called Cenchrcie (see Keyxpfai) was the roadstead for ships from .Vsia, the other, called Leehicon or Leclucum, for ships from Italy. It was utterly destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the Achsean war, is. c. 14(1 ; but after the lapse of a century it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [b. c. 44]. It was emi- nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts, especially the study of rhetoric and jihilosophy; but it was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption, particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came lo the citj- in his second missionary journey, [c] A. D. 53 or 54, and founded there a Christian church : Acts .xviii. 1 ; xix. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 1, 23 ; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [BB. DD. s. v.; Diet, of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 209 s'ln-]' KopvT|\ios, -ov, 6, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman centurion living at Caesarea, converted to Christianity by Peter : Acts x. 1 sqq.* K6pos, -oti, o, (Ilebr. 13), a corns or cor [cf. Ezek. xlv. 14], the largest Hebrew dry measure (i. e. for wheat, meal, etc.); ace. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. s. v. Weights and Meas- ures sub fin.; F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii. 10 sq.] : Lk. xvi. 7 [A. V. measure']. (.Sept. [Lev. xxvii. 16; Num. .xi. 32]; 1 K. iv. 22; v. U ; 2 Chr. ii. 10; [xxvii. 5].) • Kocr)ie(D, -<5; 3 pers. plur. impf. eKotrp-ow; 1 aor. e'lto- ; ra lii/Tjiieia, to decorate [A.V. yiirnish], Jit. .xxiii. 29 (ragout, Xen. mem. 2, 2, 13) ; tu Upoi/ Xi'dotr (tai dvaOipain. \\\ ]>ass. Lk. xxi. 5 ; roiis ScfieXiovs roi Tfi\ovs Xidai npiai, Rev. x-xi. 19; nvd (with garments), vu^c^^j/, pass. Rev. xxi. 2 ; iavras tv tlvi, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this jjass. see Kara- oToXij. 2). metaph. i. q. to einhellijih with /tonor, gain honor, (I'inil. nem. 6. 78; Thuc. 2, 42; KCKocrp.. rfj dperji. Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 21 ) : eaurds, foil, by a ptcp. designating the act by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iii. 5; t-ijv StSo- iTKoKiav ev iracnv, in all things, Tit. ii. 10." Koo-)i,iKds, -ij, -6v, (Ko<7/ioj), o/ or belonging to the world (\ u\^. saecularls) ; i.e. 1. relating to the universe : Tovpavov Tovh( Kai Ta>v KoapiKuiv ndi/Toyv, Aristot. phys. 2, 4 ]). 196", 2."); oi^p. ill dfdpiamvus, Lcian. paras. 1 1 ; KocrpiKri Sidra^is, Pint, cousol. ad ApoU. c. 34 p. 119 e. 2. earthly: to ayiov KoirpiKov, [its] earthly sanctuary [R.V. of this world], Ileb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. c. haring the character of this (present) corrupt age: at KoapiKoi fTTidvpiai, Tit. ii. 12; (so also in eccles. writ.).* K6v- (The word occurs in Orph. 8, 11 ; 11, 11 ; in eccl. writ, of Satan ; in rabbin, writ. TiD"ipl0Ilp is used both of human rulers an k., properly, ]Mt. xxvi. 13 ; hyperbolically, i. q. far and wide, in widely sej> arated places, Ro. i. 8 ; [so tV navrl tm KotTfia, Col. i. 6] ; Tore KucTftos, 2 Pet. iii. 6 ; the earth with its inhabitants: (fjv ev Kuu-fuf, opp. to the dead, Col. ii. 20 (Xrja-Tfjs rji/ koI xXaTTr]! iv Ttf Koafia, i. e. among those living on earth, Ev. Nicod. 26). By a usage foreign to prof. auth. 5. the inhaliilants of the world: dearpuv (■yevqSrjfj.fV ra Koa/ia) Kal ayyeXois <■ avSpamois, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121)]; par- ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race (first so in Sap. [e.g. x. 1]) : Mt. xiii. 38 ; .wiii. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 9 ; Jn. i. 10, 29, [36 L in br.] ; iii. 16 sq. ; vi. 33, 51 ; viii. 26; xii. 47; xiii. 1; xiv. 31; xvi. 28; .wii. 6, 21, 23; Ro. iii. 6, 19; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. [cf. W. 189 (178)]; iv. 13; v. 10;.xiv.lO; 2 Co. v. 19 ; Jas. ii. 5 [cf. W. u. s.]; 1 Jn. ii. 2 [cf. W. 577 (536)]; apxaios Koa-fios, of the antediluvians, 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; yevvaaOaL eis r. /c. Jn. xvi. 21 ; tpx^aBat els tov Koa^pov (Jn. Lv. 39) and els t. k- tovtov, to make its appear- ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn. i. 9 ; iii. 19, cf. xii. 46 ; of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27 ; of Jesus as the :\Ic-ssiah, Jn. ix. 39 ; .xvi. 28 ; xviii. 37 ; 1 Tim. i. 15 ; also elaepx«T6ai els T. k. Ileb. X. 5 ; of false teachers, 2 Jn. 7 (yet here L T Tr WII e^epx- ds t. k. ; [so all texts in 1 .In. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin and death, Ro. v. 12 (of death. Sap. ii. 24; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4 ; of idolatry. Sap. xiv. 14). diroaTeWeiv riva fls T. K.. Jn. iii. 17; x. 36 ; xvii. 18 ; 1 Jn. iv. 9 ; ipas t. k., Mt. v. 14; Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5; o-mrljp t. k., Jn. iv. 42; 1 Jn. iv. 14, (truTripia tov k. Sap. vi. 26 (25) ; IkirXs t. k. Sap. .XIV. G ; TrpuiToirXacTTos TiaTrjp tov k-, of Adam, Sap. X.I); <7-roi;(€raToOK. (seeoTotxeTov, 3 and4) ; ivTaKoapa, among men, Jn. xvi. 33 ; xvii. 13 ; Eph. ii. 12 ; iv koct/jm (see W. 123(11 7)), 1 Tim. iii. 1 6 ; dvai iv tm k., to dwell among men, Jn. i. 10; ix. 5; .xvii. 11, 12 RG; 1 Jn. iv. 3 ; eivai iv Koa-pw, to be present, Ro. v. 13; i^iKBeiv ix TOV Koa-pov, to withdraw from human society and seek an abode outside of it, 1 Co. v. 10; dvaiTTperjxiTdm iv tu (C., to behave one's self, 2 Co. i. 12; likewise elmi. iv t<5 K. TovTw, 1 Jn. iv. 1 7. used sjjec. of the Gentiles cotlec- tit-eli/, Ro. xi. 12 (where it alternates with to edvij), 15; [the two in combination: to edvq toO Koirpov, Lk. xii. 30]. hyperbolically or loosely i. q. the majority of men in a place, the multitude or mass (as we say the public) : Jn. vii. 4 ; xii. 19 [here Trmrg. adds oXot in br.] ; xiv. 19, 22; xviii. 20. i. q. the entire number, dcre^av, 2 Pet. ii. 5. 6. the ungodly multitude ; the whole mass of men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause of Christ [cf. W. 26] : Jn. vii. 7; .xiv. [17], 27 ; xv. 18 sq. ; xvi. 8, 20, 33 ; xvii. 9, 14 sq. 25 ; 1 Co. i. 21 ; vi. 2 ; .xi. 32 ; 2 Co. vii. 10 ; Jas. i. 27 ; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 4 ; ii. 20 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1,13; iv. 5 ; v. 19 ; of the aggregate of ungodly and wicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 38 ; in Noah's time, ibid. 7 ; with uvtos added, Eph. ii. 2 (on which see altav, 3) ; elvai in tov k. and «k tov k. tovtov (see ei'/ii, V. 3 d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 1 Jn. iv. 5 ; XaXeii' ix tov Kovpov, to speak in accordance with the world's character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn. iv. 5 ; apxaiv tov k. tovtov, i. e. the devil, Jn. xii. 31 ; xiv. 30; xvi. 11 ; 6 iv rm k. he that is operative in the world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; to nvevpa toO k. 1 Co. ii. 12; Ti ia toO k. tovtov, ibid. i. 20 [here G L T Tr WH om. tout.] ; iii. 19. [to a-Toix^'ia toO ku- a-pov. Gal. iv. 3 ; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and aTot- Xetov, 3 and 4).] 7. worldly affairs ; the aggregate of things earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow- ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, etc., which, although hollow and frail and fleeting, stir desire, seduce from God and are obstacles to the cause of Christ : Gal. vi. 14 ; 1 Jn. ii. 16 sq. ; iii. 17; elvat ix tov k., to be of earthly origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36 ; somewhat differently in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on which see dpi, V. 3 d.) ; KepSaiveiv tov K. oXoK, Mt. .xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 3G ; Lk. ix. 25; ol xpinpevoi TO) K. TovTca [crit. txt. toi» xotrpov; see xpdopat, 2], 1 Co. vii. 31 ; pepipvdv ra tov /c. 33 sq. ; ipiKos and (pt\ia toC k. Jas. iv. 4 ; dyairdv tov k. 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; vlkHv tuv k., the in- centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 .Tn. v. 4 scp ; the obstacles to God's cause, Jn. xvi. 33 ; [cf. iXdirai xt5i,vos, -ou, 6, a haskel, nicker basket, [cf. B. D. s. v. Basket] : Alt. xiv. 20 ; [xvi. 9] ; IMk. vi. 43 ; [viih 19] ; Lk. ix. 1 7 ; Jn. vi. 13. (Judg. vi. 19 ; Ps. Lxx.\. (Ixxxi.) 7 ; Arstph. av. 1310 ; Xen. mem. 3, 8, 6 ; al.) * KpiippaTos (LT Tr WIl /cpaSarror; eod. Pin. Kpu^aKTos [I'xf. in Acts V. 15; cf. KC. >Jov. Test, ad iid. eod. Vat. praef. p. Ixxxi. sq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. SO]), -ou, 6, (Lat. ijrabalH.i), a pallet, ramp heil, (a rather mean bed, hold- ing only one person, called by the Greeks a-KL/jmovs, (rKijiTroStov) : Mk. ii. 4, 9, 1 1 sq. ; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-12 [in 12 T WII om. Tr br. the cl.] ; Acts v. 15 ; ix. 33. Cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 175sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 62; Volkmar, Marcus u. d. Synop.se u.s.w. p. 131; IMcClellan, New Testament etc. p. lOG ; AV. 25].* Kf&\ta (with a long ; hence ptcp. Kpa^ov, Gal. iv. 6 L T TrWIl [(where Rfi (tpnfop); cf. 15.61 (.53)]) ; imjif. «pa- foi»; fut. KfKpu^ofxai (Lk. xix. 40 R(iLTrmrg.), and Kpa^o) (ibid. T WII Trtxt.), the former being more com. in (irk. writ, and usevTi pfydXr/ foil, by direct disc, Mk. v. 7 ; Acts vii. 60 ; eV (fxov?/ pey. Rev. xiv. 15 : Kpd(a) Xtyav, to cry out saying, etc., Mt. viii. 29 ; xiv. 30 ; [x v. 22 (where lUifKpavyatTfv)]: XX. 30,*q. ; xxi. 9 ; xxvii. 23; Mk. iii. 11; xi. 9 [TTrWII om. Lbr. Xty]; Jn. xix. 12 [here LT Tr WII t'/tpaOy.] ; .Vets xvi. 17; xix. 28; Rev. xviii. lb; (epafo) (jiwvt) pfydXtj Xe'ywi', Rev. vi. 10; vii. 10; xi.x. 1 7 [here T AA'II br. add eV] ; Kpd^ai eXrye, Mk. ix. 24 ; KpdCftv K- \cyetv, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x.47; Lk. iv. 41 R<; Trtxt. AA'II; Acts xiv. 14; of those who utter or teach a thing publicly and solemnly, Ro. ix. 27 ; KtKpaye and (Kpa^e XtyMi/. foil, by direct disc, Jn. i. 15 ; vii. :i7 ; f/cpa^e BL^dtTKuif /c. Xeywr, Jn. vii. 28 ; cKpa^e k. f iTrfv, Jn. xii. 4J : uf those who ufl'er earnest, importunate, prayers to God, foil, by direct disc, Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6, (often so in O. T., as Job xxxv. 12; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 7; commonly with irpus xvpiov, irpos rtiv 6(6i> added, Judg. X. 12 [Alex.]; Ps. iii. 5; cvi. (cvii.) 13, etc.). «i/i, to cry or call to : Rev. vii. 2 ; xiv. 15, (cf. Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 145; trfpor Trpor erepov, Is. vi. 3). [CoMP. : di/a-xpafw. Syn. see (3od(U, fm.] * KpaitrdXT) [\\TI KpfrrdXrj, see their App. p. 151], -rjs, rj, (iv. KI'.\2 the bead, and TraXXu to toss about; so ex- plained by (ialen and Clem. Alex. Paedag. 2, 2, 26 and Phryn. in Ikkkcr, .\necd. p. 45, 13 [cf. A'anicek p. 148]), Lat. crapula (i. e. the giddiness and headache caused by drinking wine to excess) : Lk. xxi. 34 [A. V. surfeiting; cf. 'J'rcnch § Ixi.]. (Arstph. Acliarn. 277; Alciphr. 3, 24; Pint. mor. p. 127 f. [de sanitate 11]; Lcian., Ildian. 2,5,1.)* Kpav(ov. -ov, TO, (dimin. of the noun Kpdvov [i. e. xdpa ; Ciirtius § 38]), 6j)vaL ; (icpdror) ; only bibl. and eccles., for the classic Kparvvai ; Sejjt. mostly for ptn ; in pass, several times for |'0N ; to strengthen, make strong, (A'ulg. conforto [and in Eph. iii. 16 conrohoro']') ; Pass, to be made .'strong, to increase in strength, to groiv strong : pass, with dat. of respect, ^TvevpcTi, Lk. i. 80 : ii. 40 [here G L T Tr AATI oni. Trvfir Kpareo) 359 Kpefiavvvfti fiaTi] ; Swafift, Eph. iii. IG, (cf. lij)(ietv tois (ra\fjv, i. e. fKfivov OS e'oTiv r) Ke^aKrj, Christ, Col. ii. 19; tijw irapa- Soa-iv, Mk. vii. 3 sq. 8; tos napaSocrds, 2 Th. ii. 15; tijv SiSaxfiv, Rev. ii. 14 sq. ; also with a gen. of the thing, of blessings in which different individuals are participants : T^t 6po\oylas, Ileb. iv. 14 ; t^s fXTriSos, Heb. vi. IS [al. refer this ex. to 2 above], (cf. 2 S. iii. 6). c. to con- tinue to hold, to retain: of death continuing to hold one, pass. Acts ii. 24 ; tos ufiapTias (opp. to d'S n>'lE^, rii'nn, etc.; a crying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv. 6 ;' Lk. 1.42 T WH Tr txt. ; Acts xxiii. 9 ; Eph. iv. 31, and RG in Rev. xiv. 18; of the waiUng of those in dis- tress, Heb. V. 7 ; Rev. xxi. 4.* Kpe'as, ro, [cf. Lat. caro, cruor; Curtius § 74], plur. Kpea (cf. W. 65(63); [B. 15(13)]); [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. very often for -\t!2 ; (the) flesh (of a sacrificed animal) : Ro. xiv. 21 ; 1 Co. viii. 13.* KpeiTTuv and (1 Co. vii. 38 ; Phil. i. 23 ; in other places the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co. vii. 9 [here TTrWHLtxt. tt-']; xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9 [here and in the preced. pass. LTTrWH -o-tr-; see WH. App. p. 148 sq. ; cf. 2, o-, s]) Kpelca-cov, -ovos, neut. -Of, (compar. of Kparvs, see KpdrKrros, cf. KiUiner i. p. 436 ; [B. 27 (24)]), [fr. Horn, down], better; i. e. a. rnore useful, more serviceable : 1 Co. xi. 1 7 ; xii. 31 R G ; Heb. xi. 40 ; xii. 24 ; with iroWa fiaXXoi/ added, Phil. i. 23 [cf. pdWov, 1 b.] ; Kpu(T(Tov (adv.) rtoiiiv, 1 Co. vii. 38 ; Kpeir- Tov ianv, it is more advantageous, foil, by an inf., 1 Co. vii. 9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [cf. B. 217 (188) ; W. §41 a. 2 a]. b. 7nore excellent: Heb. i. 4; vi. 9; vii. 7, 19, 22; viii. 0; ix. 23 ; X. 34 ; xi. 16, 35 ; Kp. iart, foil, by an inf., 1 Pet. iii. 17.* KpeV'^H^'^h see the foil. word. Kp£|j.dvw|ii, also Kpfpavvva [" scarcely classic " (Veitch KpeiruXr) 360 Kpivay s. V.)], Kptfiaat -a> ["still later" (ibid.)], and (Sept. Job x.wi. 7 ami IJyzant. writ.) Kpffia^a, (in the N. T. the pres. does not occnir) : 1 aor. (Kptfjuia-a ; 1 aor. pass. «Vpe- ftatrdrju; fr. Iloin. down; Sept. for nyiT; lo hany up, au-ijicnd : t\ «Vt Tt (Kec), Trepi ti (LP I'r WII), [eit ti, Tdf. edd. 2, 7], Jit. xviii. G; tiw'x em ^i\ov, Acts v. 80; .\. 3t>, ((ien. .\1. 19, 22; Deut. xxi. 22; Esth. vi. 4, etc.); simply KptiiaaBfls, of one crucified, Lk. xxiii. 39. Mid. KpipapLai (for Kpepavwjiai, cf. Dltiii. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 22-4); intrans. to he sii.':jii nihil, lo lianij: foil, by « with gen. of the thing, Acts xxviii. 4 (see «, I. 3) ; (VI ^i'>Xoii, of one hanging on a cross. Gal. iii. 13; trop. ev rwi, Mt. xxii. 40, where the meaning is, all the Law and the Prophets (i. c. the teaching of the O. T. on morality) is summed up in these two precepts. [Co.mp. : iK-Kpipiapxu..'\* [KpeirdXi], see KpamaKrj] Kpii(iv6s. -oil, 6, (fr. Kpfptivvvp-i), a aleep (place), a preci- pice. : Mt. viii. 32 ; Jlk. v. l.'i ; Lk. viii. 33. (2 Chr. xxv. 12; Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)* Kpiqs, o, plur. Kp^Tfs, a Cretan, an inhabitant of the island of Crete: Acts ii. 11 ; Tit. i. 12 [cf. Fiirrar, St. Paul, ii. 534].* KpT|(rKT]s [cf. B. 17 (1."))], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un- known man: 2 Tim. iv. 10.* KpriTT], -7)9, T], Crete, the largest and most fertile island of the Mediterranean archipelago or jEgean Sea, now called Candia: Acts xxvii. 7, 12 sq. 21 ; Tit. i. 5. [Diet, of Geog. or McC. and S. s. v.] * Kpi9r|, -^r, T). (in Grk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] only in plur. ni Kpidiii), Sept. for mi't7, barley: Rev. vi. (i Kpidfji lit;, i,pii9i avrov, i. e. tov ^foC, Rev. xiv. 7 ; iv Ttj (cpiVei, at the time of the judgment, when the judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq. : Lk. x. 14; .xi. 31 sq. : Kpicriv TToteiv Kara ndvrav, to execute judgment against (i. e. to the destruction of) all, Jude 15. spec. sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem- nation and punii-.hmenl : Heb. x. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 4; with gen. of the pers. condemned and punished. Rev. xviii. 10 ; r) Kplais avTov ^pdtj, the punishment appointed him was taken away, i. c. was ended. Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. liii. 8 Sept.; TriTrTctv els Kplciv [R" els vnoKpKrtv^, to become liable to condemnation, Jas. v. 12: aluvws Kpiais, eternal Kpia-jro<: 362 KpVTTTO} damnation, Alk. iii. 29 [Rec] ; ij Kplais t^s ■yfcWr/r, tlu' judgment condemninij; one to Gehennu, the ])enalty of (iehenna, i. e. to be .suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 3.'!. In Jolin's usage Kpir]v, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 377 ; Fritzsche on Jit. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [cf. (taXun-rw ; fr. Ilom. down] ; Sept. for N'3nn, Tnon, ]3-i, ptp, in3, n33 ; to hide, conceal; a. prop. : W, Mt. xiii. 44 and L T Tr WH in XXV. 18; pass., Heb. xi. 23 ; Rev. ii. 17; Kpv^rjvai i. q. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v. 14 ; 1 Tim. v. 25 : fKpiffrj (quietly withdrew [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]) k. i^rjKdev, i. e. departed "secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; KpviTToi Ti ev with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 25 ; pass. xiii. 44 ; KfKp. iv Tw 6ea, is kept laid up with God in heaven, xpvaToXXi^o) 363 KTia/jLa Col. iii. 3 : tI tis n, Lk. xiii. "21 [R G LeveKpvyjfev] : iavTov els with ace. of place, Rev. vi. 15; riva diro npoconvov Tivc,s to cover (and remove [cf. W. § 30, (i b. ; 6(), 2 d.]) from the view of any one, i. e. to take away, rescue, from the si^lit, Rev. vi. IG ; expi^t] an avri>ii, withdrew from them, Jn. xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally Kp. nvd n; cf. ■aTTOKpiinTa, b.). b. metaph. to canceal (that it may not become known) : KfKpvppivos, clandestine, Jn. xix. 38 ; t\ ano tivos (gen. of pers.), 'Sit. xi. 25 L T Tr WH ; [Lk. xviii. 34] ; K(Kpvp.p(va things hidden i. e. unknown, used of God's saving counsels, Jit. xiii. 35 ; an o(^6aKpS>v Tii/of. Lk. xix. 42 [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin. CoMP. : ano-, eV, 17€pi-KpV7VTW.~\ * Kpvo-TttXXiJo) ; (Kpuo-ToXXor, q. V.) ; to he of crij^talline brhjhtness and transparency ; to shine like crystal : Rev. xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.)* Kpuo-ra?Aos, -ov. 6, (fr. xpios ice ; hence prop, anything congealed (cf. Lat. crusta) and transparent), [fr. Horn, down], cn/nlal : a kind of precious stone. Rev. iv. 6 ; xxii. 1 ; [cf. B. I), s. v. Crystal. On its gend. cf. L. and S. s. v. II.] ' Kpu(|>atos, -aia, -alov, {Kpvcjia), hidden, secret : twice in Mt. vi. 18 L TTr WH. (Jer. xxiii. 24 ; Sap. xvii. 3 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) * Kpv({>fj [LWH-^,7; cf. fiK^, init.],adv., (/epu7rT),secreN ly, in secret: Eph. v. 12. (Find., Soph., Xen. ; Sept.) * KTOo^iai., -i/xat ; fut. KTi^aopai (Lk. xxi. 19 L Tr WH) ; 1 aor. eKTrjo-dpLr/v ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for njp ; to acquire, get or procure a thing yi^r one's self [cf. W. 260 (244)] ; (pf. KCKTripat. to possess [cf. W. 274 (257) note] ; not found in the X. T.) : ti, Jit. x. 9 ; Acts viii. 20 ; ocra xTQipai. all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price added [W. 206 (194)], ttoXXoC, Acts xxii. 28; with « and gen. of price (see «, II. 4), Acts i. IS; to eavroii [^ ktIo^is t. dvdpimmv, Teach- ing of the Twelve etc. c. 16]) ; oXij ^ ktI : 1 aor. eKVK\aja-a ; Pas?., jjres. ptcp. kvkXov- fievos ; 1 aor. ptcp. KVK\a>6(is ; (kvkXos) ; Sept. chiefly for 223 ; 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur., Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass : of persons standing round, «I'd, Jn. X. 24 [Tr mrg.AVII mrg. (KVKkfva-av (.~\ * KvpT|vaios, -ou, 6, (Kvprivr), q. v.), a Cyrencean [A. V. (R. V. Acts vi. 9) Cyrenian'], a native of Cyrene : Mt. xxvii. 32 ; Mk. xv. 21 ; Lk. xxiii. 26 ; Acts vi. 9 ; xi. 20 ; xiii. 1. [(Hdt., al.)]* Kvp^vT). -i)r, T], Cyrene, a large and very flourishing city of Libya Cyrenaica or Pentapolitana, about 11 Roman miles from the sea. Among its inhabitants were great K vprjvio^ 365 KVpiOi numbers of Jews, whom Ptolem v I. had brought thither, and invested with the rights of citizens: Acts ii. 10. [BB. DD. s. v.] • Kuprjvios (Lchm. Kvpivos [-pfiras Tr mrg. WH mrg. (see fi, ()]), -on, 6, Quirin[-i-']us (in full, Publlus Sulpiciuf: Quirinus [correctly Quirinius; see Woolseij in Bib. Sacr. for 1878, pp. 499-513]), a Roman consul A. u. C. 742; afterwards (not before the year 759; governor of Syria (where perhaps he may previously have been in com- mand, 751-752). While filling that office after Arche- laus had been banished and Judfea had been reduced to a province of Syria, he made the enrolment mentioned in Acts V. 37 (cf. Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 1). Therefore Luke in his Gospel ii. 2 has made a mistake [yet see added reff. below] in defining the time of this enrolment. For in the last jears of Herod the Great, not Quirinius but Sentius Saturninus was governor of Syria. His suc- cessor, A. V. c. 750, was Quintilius Varus ; and Quiri- nius (who died in the year 774) succeeded Varus. Cf. Win. 11 WB. s. vv. Quirinius and Schatzung; Slraass, Die Halben u. die Ganzen (Berl. 18(15) p. 70 sqq. ; Ilil- genfcUl in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie for 1805, p. 480 sqq. ; Keim i. 399 sq. [I'^ng. trans, ii. 115]; Scliilrer, Neutest. Zeitgeschichte, p. 161 sq. : Weizsackcr in Schen- kel V. p. 23 sqq.; \_KeU, Com. lib. Mark. u. Luk. p. 213 sqq.; il/cCVt'W«i!, New Testament etc., i. p. 392 sqq. ; and M'oohetj in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Cyrenius, and at length in Bib. Sacr. for Apr. 1870, p. 291 sqq.].* Kup(o, -as, r], Cijria, a Christian woman to whom the secoml Ep. of John is addressed: 2 Jn. 1, 5, [G L T KC (and WHmrg. in vs. 1)]. This prop, name is not un- common in other writers also ; cf. Liii-ke, Comm. ub. die Brr. des Joh. 3d ed. p. 444. [But R Tr al. Kvpia, regard- ing the word as an ajipellative, laili/ ; (al yvmiKes evdiis dno T6ffO"apeo"KaiS€Ka eVwv viro tqiv dvBpSiv Kvpiai koKovv Till, Epictet. enchir. 40). Cf. Westcott on 2 Jn. u. s.] • KupioKos, -ij, -6v, a bibl. and eccles. word [cf. W. § 34, 3 and Soph. Lex. s. v.], ofov hclonf/lnf/ to lite Lord ; 1. i. q. the gen. of the autlior toO Kvplov, thus Kvpiaxov Seijrvoi', the supper instituted by the Lord, 1 Co. xi. 20 ; 'Koyia KvpiaKa, the Lord's sayings, Pa])ias a p. Eus. h. e. 3, 39, 1 . 2. relaling to the Lord, ij Kvpiaxri r)p.epa, the day devoted to the Lord, sacred to the memory of Christ's resurrection. Rev. i. 10 [cf. ' KvptaKq Kvpiov', Teaching 14, 1 (where see Harnack) ; cf. B. D. s.v. Lord's Day; Bp. Lghtfl. Ign. ad Magn. p. 129 ; Miiller on Barn. ep. 15, 9] ; ypanl Kvp. the writings concerning the Lord, i. e. the Gos]iels, Clem. Alex., al. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.] • Kvpuvu ; fut. KvpifviTu); 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. Kvpicvarf ; (icuptor) ; to be lord of, to rule over, hare do- minion over: with gen. of theobj. [cf. B. 169 (147)], Lk. xxii. 25 ; Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2 Co. i. 24 ; absol. ol Kvpieiovres, supreme rulers, kings, 1 Tim. vi. 15 ; of things and forces i. q. to exercise influence upon, to have power over : with gen. of the obj., 6 Bdvaroi, Ro. vi. 9 ; f/ afiaprla, 1 4 ; 6 vop-os, Ro. vii. 1. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb., sqq.; Sept. for huo [etc.].) [COMP. : Kara-Kvptfio).} * Kvpios, -ov, 6, (prop, an ailj. Kvpios. -a, -of, also of two term. ; prop. i. q. 6 f^coi/ Kvpos, liaving power or author- ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to tvhom a person or thing be- longs, about which he has the poivcr of deciding; master, lord; used a. un'iv. of the possessor and disposer o/ a thing, the owner, (Sept. for niN, '^yj^) : with gen. of the thing, as tov dfineXwuos, Mt. .xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii. 9; Lk. XX. 15; tov Bepia-p-oi, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; t^s oiKias, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12) ; tov wciXou, Lk. xix. 33 ; tov cra^jBarov, possessed of the power to determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releas- ing himself and others from its obligations, ^It. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 28 ; Lk. vi. 5. with gen. of a pers., one who has control of the person, the master [A. V. lord] ; in the household : SoiiXov, TraiSiVici/f, oiKovopov, Mt. x. 24 ; Lk. xii.46sq.; xiv. 21 ; xvi.3, 5; Acts xvi. 16, 19, etc. ; ab- sol., opp. to 01 SoiiXoi, Eph. vi. 5, 9 ; Col. iv. 1, etc.; m the state, the sovereign, prince, chief: the Roman em- peror [(on this use of Kvpios see at length Woolsey in Bib. Sacr. for July 1861, pp. 595-608)], Acts xxv. 26 ; once angels are called Kvpioi, as those to whom, in the administration of the universe, departments are in- trusted by God (see ayyeXos, 2) : 1 Co. viii. 5. ^b. Kvpioi is a title of honor, expressive of respect and rev- erence, with which servants salute their master, ^It. xiii. 27 ; xxv. 20, 22 ; Lk. xiii. 8 ; xiv. 22, etc. ; the disciples salute Jesus their teacher and master, Mt. vLii. 25 ; xvi. 22; Lk. ix. 54; x. 17, 40; xi. 1 ; xxii. 33, 38; Jn. xi. 12; xiii. 6, 9, 13; x.xi. 15-17, 20 sq., etc., cf. xx. 13; Lk. xxiv. 34; his followers salute Jesus as the Messiah, whose authority they acknowledge (by its repetition showing their earnestness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.]), Kvpie, Kvpie, Mt. vii. 21 ; and R G in Lk. .xiii. 25 ; employed, too, by a son in addressing his father, Mt. .xxi. 30 ; by citizens towards magistrates, Mt. xxvii. 63 ; by any one who wishes to honor a man of distinction, ^It. viii. 2, 6, 8; xv. 27 ; Mk. vii. 28; Lk. v. 12; xiii. 25 ; Jn. iv. 11, 15, 19 ; v. 7 ; xii. 21; XX. 15; Acts ix. 5 ; xvi. 30; xxii. 8. c. this title is given o. to GoD, the ruler of the universe (so the Sept. for 'j'lS, niSx, D'riSx, nirr and n; ; [the term Kvpios is used of the gods from Pind. and Soph, down, but " the address Kvptf, used in ju-ayer to God, though frcq. in Epict. does not occur (so far as I am aware) in any heathen writing before the apostoUc times; sometimes we find xiipif 6 6e6s, and once (2, 7, 12) he writes Kvpie cKerfaov" (Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 314 note 8)]), — both with the art., o Kvpios : Mt. i. 22 [R G] ; v. 33; Mk. V. 19; Lk. i. 6, 9, 28, 46 ; Acts vii. 33 ; viii. 24; xi. 21 ; 2 Tim. i. IG, 18, [but see eXfor, 3]; Ileb. viii. 2; Jas. iv. 15; v. 15; Jude 5 [R (J], etc. ; aud without the art. (cf. W. 124 (118) ; B. 88 (77) sq.) : Mt. x.xi. 9; x.wii. 10; Mk. xiii. 20; Lk. i. 1.7, 38, 58, 66; ii. 9, 23, 26, 39 ; Acts vii. 49 ; Ileb. vii. 21 ; xii. 6 ; 1 Pet. i. 25 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; Jude [5 T Tr txt. WH txt.], 9 ; Kvptos toG olpavoii K. Tris yfjs, Jit. xi. 25 ; Lk. x. 21 ; Acts .xvii. 24 ; Kvpios Tu>v Kvpievoirraiv, 1 Tim. vi. 1 5 ; Kvpios 6 6e6s, see 6f6i, 3 p. 288" [and below] ; xvpws 6 6ebs 6 navroKpaTtiip. Rev. iv. 8 ; Kvpios aa^autO, Ro. i.\. 29 ; ayycXos aud 6 «yyeXo? Kupi'ov, Jit. i. 20 ; ii. 13, 19; .xxviii. 2 ; Lk. i. 11; ii. 9 ; Kvpioi; 366 KtoXvoy Acts V. 19; viii. 26; xii. 7; nvtviia kv/jiov. Lk. iv. 18; Acts viii. SO; witli i)re])ositions; inro (U (i add the art.) Kvptov, Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; rrapa mipiov, Ml. .\.\i. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) T.i ; napa Kvplto, 2 Pet. iii. 8. p. to the Messiah ; and that oo. to the ^lessiah regarded univ. : Lk. i. 43; ii. 11 ; Mt. xxi. 3 ; xxii. 45 ; Mk. xi. 3 ; xii. 36 ; Lk. xix. 34 ; xx. 44. pp. to Jesus as the Messiah, since by his death he acquired a special ownership in mankind, and after Ids resurrec- tion was exalted to a partnership in the divine adminis- tration (this force of the word wlien applied to Jesus ap|)cars esp. in Acts x. 36 ; Ko. xiv. « ; l Co. vii. 22 ; viii. (J ; Phil. ii. 9-11) : Eph. iv. 5; with the art. d Kvp., Jlk. xvi. 19 sij. ; Acts ix. 1; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. iv. 5; vi. 13 sq. ; vii. 10. 12, 34. SI).; i.\. 5, 14; x. 22; xi. 26 ; [xvi. 22 G L TTrWlI]; Phil.iv. 5; [2 Tim. iv. 22 TTrWII]; Ileb. ii. 3 (cf. 7 sqq.) ; Jas. v. 7, etc. after his resurrection Jesus is addressed by the title 6 Kvpios pov xai 6 deot pov, Jn. XX. 28. dir6 tov Kvp., 1 Co. xi. 23 ; 2 Co. v. 6 ; npo? t6v k. 2 Co. v. 8; 6 Kvpios 'Irjo-ovs, Acts i. 21 ; iv. 33; xvi. 31 ; XX. 35 ; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; [xvi. 23 T Tr WII] ; 2 Co. i. 14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.] ; Rev. xxii. 20 ; 6 Kvp. 'Itjct. Xpto-Tot. 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 23 R G L] ; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) [Wllbr. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 [R G], etc. ; o Kvpios tj^iiv, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; Ileb. vii. 14; 2 Pet. iii. 15; Rev. xi. 15, etc.; with 'l/jo-oCf added, [LTTr WM in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13]; Heb. xiii. 20; Rev. xxii. 21 [LTTr (yet without ^/i.)]; so with Xpurros, Ro. xvi. 18 [G L T Tr WII] ; and 'l^troCs Xpiaros, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. 155(136)]; iii. 11 [RG], 13 [Rec.]; v. 23 ; 2Th. ii. 1, 14. 16; iii. 6 [{^pi,p)']; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 3; Gal. vi. 18 [WII br. fipi^f] ; Eph. i. 3 ; vi. 24 ; Ro. xvi. 24 [R G] ; 1 Tim. vi. 3, 14 ; I'liilem. 25 [T Wllom. rjpoiu] ; Phil. iv. 23 [(t L T Tr WII om. ij^i.], etc. ; 'lijiroCs Xpiaros 6 Kvpiot jipav, Ro. i. 4 ; and Xp. 'Iijo-. 6 Kvp. {ripibv). Col. ii. 6; Eph. iii. 1 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 2 ; 2 Tim. i. 2; 6 Kvp. Ka\ 6 a-toTrip, 2 Pet. iii. 2 [cf. B. 155 (136)] ; with 'Irjcrovs Xpitrros added, 2 Pet. iii. 18; without the art., simply Kvptos: 1 Co. vii. 22, 25; X. 21 ; xvi. 10 ; 2 Co. iii. 1 7 ; xii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24 ; Jas. v. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Kvpios Kvplo)v i. e. Supreme Lord (cf. W. § 36, 2; [B. § 123. 12]) : Rev. xix. 16 (cf. in a. above; of God, Deut. x. 1 7) ; with prepositions : ana Kvpiov, Col. iii. 24 ; Kara Kvpiuv, 2 Co. xi. 17 ; Trpoj Kvpiov, 2 Co. iii. 16 ; (rvv Kvp. 1 Th. iv. 17; inro Kvp. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase eV Kvpla. freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found oidy in Rev. xiv. 13, see iv, L 6 b. p. 211"". The appel- lation 6 Kvpiot, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke and John even into historic narrative, where the words anil works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related : Lk. vii. 13; x. 1 ; xi. 39; xii. 42; xiii. 15 ; xvii. 5 sq. ; .xxii. 31 [RGLTrbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here TTrmrg. 'I;;- (ToCs] ; vi. 23 ; xi. 2. There is nothing strange in the appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences after his resurrection : Lk. x.xiv. 34 ; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20, 25; xxi. 7, 12. d. There are some who hold that Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro. iv. 8; ix. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16; iii. 20; x. 26; 2 Co. vi. 17 sq.; x. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title Kvptos everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; 1 Th. iv. 6 ; 2 Th. iii. 16 (6 Kvpios TTji flpr)vT]s, cf. 6 6(os Ti]S (iprjvTjs, 1 Th. V. 23 ; but most of the blessings of Christianity are derived aUke from God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words «'(taoTO) i>s 6 Kvpios eSuKfv, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac- count of the words Kara ttiv x^P'" ''<'•' 6eoii tt/v SoSf'tadv /ioi in vs. 10. On the other hand, Kpivoptvoi imo rov Kvp. in 1 Co. .xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of Christ, on account of .\. 22, cf. 21. Cf. Gahki; Kki- nere theol. .Schriftcn, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq. ; WiiiiT, De sensii vocum Kvpiot et 6 Kvpios in actis et epistolis apostolorum. Erlang. 1828; Wesselus Scheffer, diss, theol. exhibens disquisitioneni de vocis icuptos absolute positae in N. T. usu. Lugd. 1 846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [^Stuart in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. X. T. § 76 ; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v. ; Abbot in the Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for June and Dec. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dec. 1883 p. 101 sq. On the use of a capital initial, see WII. Intr. § 414]. The word does not occur in the [Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.), the] 1 Ep. of John, [nor in the Second or the Third ; for in 2 Jn. 3 Kvplov is dropped by the critical editors. SvN. see Seo-rrdrijs, fin.]. KvpioTTis, -ijTos, 17, (d Kvpios), dominion, power, lordship ; in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see e^ovtrla, 4 c. j3. ; cf. (jerm. Herrschaft, [or Milton's " domimtlinns "] ; in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dojninanles), so used of angels (Kvpioi, 1 Co. viii. 5; see icvpior, a. fin.) : Eph. i. 21; 2Pet. ii. 10; JudeS; plur. Col. i. 16. (Eccles. [e. g. ' Teaching' c. 4] and Byzant. writ.) * Kvpdu, -£> : 1 aor. inf. Kvpixrai ; pf. pass. ptcp. KfKvpa- pivos; (/tupos the head, that which is supreme, power, influence, authority); fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; to make valid ; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify : 8ia6rjKr]v, pass. Gal. iii. 15; dydirriv fir riva, to make a public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : jrpo-Ki/pdo).] * Kuuv, Kvi/ot; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the N. T. masc. ; Ilebr. 3S3; a dog; prop.: Lk. xvi. 21 ; 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; metaph. (in various [but always reproach- ful] senses; often so even in Horn.) a man of impure mind, an impudent man, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. s.] : Mt. vii. 6 ; Phil. iii. 2; Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass, others less probably understand sodomites (hke □''3'75 in Deut. xxiii. IS (19)) [cf. B. D. s. v. Dog].* KuXov, -ou, TO ; in ( irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; a mem- ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi- nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30; Xum. xiv. 29, 32 sq. ; 1 S. xvii. 46 ; Is. Lxvi. 24) for -ijg and D'lJiJ, a dead body, carcase, inasmuch as the mem- bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart : so the plur. in Heb. iii. 17 fr. Kum. xiv. 29, 32, [A. V. carcases].' KwXvw; impf. 1 pers. plur. eKioXvopev (Mk. ix. 38 TTr txt. WII); 1 aor. e'lcmXiia-a; Pass., pres. KtoXiio/in» ; 1 aor. (Ku>\{i6i]v; (fr. KoXos, lopped, clipped; pro-p. to ctit off, cut Koifjir] 367 \a6pa short, hence) to hinder, prevent,forbid ; [fr. Find, down] ; Sept. for xSa, twice (viz. 1 S. -xxv. 26 ; 2 S. xiii. 13) for ;'J^ : Tim foil, by an inf. [W. § 65, 2 0. ; cf. B. § 148, 13], Mt'. xix. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 2 ; Acts xvi. 6 ; xxiv. 23 ; 1 Tli. ii. 16 ; rieb. vii. 23 : t'l KuiXiei. fie fiaiTTiaBrivai. ; what doth hinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36 ; the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone before, lHj. ix. 38 sq. ; x. 14; Lie. ix. 49; xi. 52; xviii. 16; Acts xi. 17; Rp. i. 13; 3 Jn. 10; avrov'is wanting, because it has preceded, Lk. Lx. 50 ; the ace. is wanting, because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. rwd nvos, to keep one from a thing. Acts xxvii. 43 ; with ace. of the thing, ttjv 7rapa(j>povLau, to restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii. 16; to XaKfiv yKwatrms, 1 Co. xiv. 39 ; rl, foil, by tov fir], can any one hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should not be baptized? Acts x. 47 ; in imitation of the Ilebr. sSs foil, by IP of the pers. and the ace. of the thing, to tcithhold a thing from any one, i. e. to deny or refuse one a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (to iivrjfidoi/ uno (Tov, Gen. xxiii. 6). [COMP. : SiaKtoXvoi.} * Ku|M), -rjs, Tj, (akin to xeiiiai, Kuifiaa), pro]), the common sleeping-place to wliich laborers in the fields return ; Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. home]), [fr. Hes., Hdt. down], a village : Mt. ix. 35 ; x. 11 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; Lk. v. 17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. noXiu], and often in the Synopt. Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near which the villages lie and to whose municipality they belong: Kaicrapei'ar, ]\lk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for r\lJ3 with the name of a city ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 2:^0'' [B. D. s. V. Daughter, 7] ; also for '"ixn and Hl'liT) with the name of a city) ; by meton. the inhabitants of villages. Acts viii. 25 ; used also of a small town, as Beth- saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22 ; Jn. i. 45 ; of Bethlehem, Jn. vii. 42 ; for 1';', Josh. x. 39 ; xv. 9 [Compl.] ; Is. xhi. 11. [B. D. s. V. Villages.] K, as in 1 ilacc. xv. 23 ; see Matthiae § 70 note 3 ; W. § 8, 2 a.; [B. 21 (19); WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester, De Co insula, Hal. 1833; ["but the best description is in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u. s. w. (Halle 1852) " (How- son) ; cf. Leivin, St. Paul, ii. 96].* Kuo-d|j., 6, (fr. DCP to divine, [but cf. B. D.]), Cosam, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 28.* Ka^os, -ri, -6v, (kottu to beat, pound), blunted, dull; prop. iSeXos, Hom. II. 11, 390; hence a. blunted (or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq. ; .xii. 22; XV. 30 sq. ; Lk. i. 22 ; xi. 14, (Hdt. et sqq. ; Sept. for dSn Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull, in hearing; deaf: Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Hom. h. Merc. 92 ; Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sept. for CTI, Ex. iv. 11 ; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14^ etc.).* Xa-yx"voj : 2 aor. TKaxov ; 1. to obtain by lot (fr. Hom. down) : with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [cf. B. 269 (231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment, obtain : tI, Acts i. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 ; on the constr. of this verb w. gen. and ace. of the thing, see Matthiae § 328 ; W. 200 (188); [cf. B. § 132, 8]. 2. to cast lots, determine by lot, (Isocr. p. 144 b. ; Diod. 4, 63, [cf. ps.- Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]) : nepl tihos, Jn. xix. 24.' Ad^apos, -ov, 6, (rabb. 1I>''7, apparently the same as "^,U;'?^> whom God helps [cf. Philo, quis haeres § 12]; ace. to others, i. q. lij? vh without help), Lazarus ; 1. an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised from the dead by him : Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 43 ; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq. 17. 2. an imaginary person, e.xtremely poor and wretched : Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.* XdSpa [so RGTTr] (in Hom. 'kadp;), fr. \av6dvo>,. \ac\a'^ 368 \a\ea> XaSeii/), and L [WIIKC (see the liiUoi-'s Pnu'f. p. xii. ami s. V. tiKi])] \d6))f (fr. \adpos, -a, -ov, cf. Passow [esp. L. and S.J s.'v. ; W. 47; 15. G9 (til)), adv. s ; 1 aor. fXdXijo-a; pf- AeXuXi/Ko; Pass., pres. XaXoOfiat; pf. \f\aXrjnaty 1 aor. iXaKt'jOrjVj 1 fut. XaXrjdrj' 00/iai; [fr. Soph, down] ; found in bibl. (irk. much more freq. than in prof, auth., in Sept. times without number for "13^ or "lan, more rarely for ^^N ; prop, to utter a sound (cf. [onomatop. la-la, etc.] Germ.-^aHeH), to emit a voice, make one's self heard ; lience to utter or form words with the mouth, to speak; having reference to the sound and pronunciation of the words and in general the form of what is uttered, while X/ym refers to the meaning and s u b s t a n c e of wliat is spoken ; hence XaXflv is employed not onl}' of men, esp. when chatting and praltlinf/, but also of animals (of birds, !Moscli. 3, 47 ; of locusts, Theocr. 5, 34 ; XaXoCcrt /xeV, ov (ppa(ovcn St, of dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani- mate things (as trees, Tlicocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo, Dio C. 74, 21, 14). Accordingly, everytliing Xeyofifi/oi/ is also XaXovfjifvov, but not everything XaXfw/ifrai/ is also 'Kcyofievov (Eupolis in Plut. Ale. 13 XaXeiK apia-ros, uSwa- Tiirarof Xeytiv) ; [the difference between the words is evident'wliere they occur in proximity, e. g. Ro. iii. 19 otru o vd^oi Xf'yei, roir eV tm vo^u XaXei, and tlie very com. (\d\r]v (fiwms added, each, thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean- ing of which the prophet understood, cf. Jn. xii. 28 sq.), ib. 3 ; (rdXjrtyyof XdkoioTjS per c/ioC, \(yu>v (Kec. \eyov, 1 fin.), Ileb. xi. 4 ace. to the true reading XaXei [GLTTrWJI ; the Rec. XaXftrm must be taken as pass., in the exceptional sense to iie tailed of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (^Trpdypa KOT dyopiiv XaXovpevov, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. n-dwtr avTTjv XaXoOo-ii', Alei|)hro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. \Vag- ner)]. 2. to speak, i.e. to use the tonr/ue or the faculty of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absol. 1 Co. xiv. 11 ; of the dumb, receiving the power of speeeli, Mt. ix. 33; xii. 22; xv.31; I.k.xi.l4; Rev. xiii. !.■) : (roir [TTrWII om.]) dXuXous XnXfiv, Mk. vii. 37 ; e'XuXei updas, ib. 35 ; of a dumb man. p!) iivudpevus XaX^(rat, I.k. i. 20 (of idols, crropa a^ovai K- ov \dKi] tI rivi, to speak ani/thinr/ lo any one, lo speak to one about a thinij (of teaching): Mt. ix. 18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which see apxh^ 1 b.) ; x. 6 ; xiv. 25 ; xv. 11 ; xviii. 20 sq. ; 2 Co. vii. 14; pr/paTa, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; Acts xiii. 42; oiKoSopriv K. -napaKKfjartv, things which tend to edify and comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promulgalinf/ a thing lo one, rbv vopov, pass. Heb. ix. 19 ; XaXi n-po's rtva, to speak unto one: Lk. i. ,19; [ii. 15 Lmrg. TWH]: Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi. 14 [RG], 26, 31 ; Heb. v. 5, (Sn igi, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11, 17, 22) ; Xdyovs Trpos nva, Lk. xxiv. 44 : iXaXijcrav rrpos avTovs fvayyiki^opfvoL . . . 'lt](ToZv, Acts xi. 20 ; oaa av \a\i}(Tij TTpos vpas. Acts lii. 22; uvopari. Kvpiov [where L T Tr WH prefix cV], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see Svopa, 2 f.) ; Ttvi (to one) eV napa^oXals. Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34 ; ev napoipiais, Jn. xvi. 25 ; €^ ipavToii, to speak from my- self (i. e. utter what I myself have thought out), Jn. xii. 4LI; air epavToi (see otto, IL 2 d. aa. p. 59*), .In. vii. 17 sip ; xiv. 10: xvi. 13 ; ex ttjs y^f (see ex, IL 2 sub fin.), Jn. iii. 31 ; ck toii Koapov, 1 Jn. iv. 5 (see Kotrpos, 6) ; ck 6eov, prompted by divine infiuenee, 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ; XaXeTi/ t'ov \6fyov, to announce or preach the word of God or the doctrine of salvation : Mk. viii. 32 ; Acts .xiv. 25 [here in T WH mrg. foil, by cis ttjv Uepytjv ; see «r, A. I. 5 b.] ; xvi. 6 ; Phil. i. 14, etc ; tuv Xoy. tov Seoii, Acts iv. 29, 31 ; Tivl T. Xoyoi/, Mk. ii. 2 ; Acts .xi. 19 ; with wapa^oXals added, Mk. iv. 33; tiv'i tuv Xoy. toO Kvpiov [Wlltxt. 5foi}], Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9) ; nv\ t. Xoy. tov deoi, Acts xiii. 46 ; Heb. xiii. 7 ; to prjpaTa tov deov. Jn. iii. 34 : to prjp- ttJs C^rjs, Acts v. 20 ; irpos Tiva to etayy. TOV Beov, 1 Th. ii. 2 ; XaXfic k. hthd(TK€iv Ta irepl tov 'Irja-oij [R G Kupiou], Acts xviii. 25 ; to pv(TTrjpwv tov Xpiarov, Col. iv. 3. XaXf iy is used of the O. T. prophets utter- ing their predictions; Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24; xxvi. 22 [cf. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)] ; 2 Pet. i. 21; Jas. V. 10; of the declarations and prophetic an- nouncements of God: Lk.i.45,55; Jn.ix.29; Acts vii. 6 ; esp. in tlie Ep. to the Heb.: i. 1, 2 (1); iii. 5 ; iv. 8; xi. 18; xii. 25; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are said XaXeTv ev nvi : Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 3 : 8ia oropaTos twos, Lk. i. 70 ; Acts iii. 21 ; 6ia 'Ho-aiou, Acts xxviiu 25; of the sayings of a n g e 1 s : Lk. ii. 17, 20 ; Jn. xii. 29 ; Acts x. 7 ; xxiii. 9 ; xxvii. 25 ; the Holy Spirit is said XaXij(r«i' what it will teach the apostles, Jn. xvL 13; 6 vSpos asamanifestationof God is said XaXeti» tiki what it commands, Ro. iii. 19; finally, even voices are said XaXcIw, Acts xxvi. 14 [RG]; Rev. i. 12; x. 8. i. q. to make kiwicn hi/ speak- int/, to speak o/, relate, with the imphed idea of extolling: 'Sit. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 36; Acts iv. 20; [cf. Heb. xi. 4 Rec. (see 1 fin. above)]. 6. Since XaXfij» strictly denotes the act of one who utters words with the living voice, when writers speak of them- selves or are spoken of by others as XoXoOi^es, they are conceived of as present and addressing their readers with the living voice, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. ix. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 17, 23 ; -xii. 19 ; Heb. ii. 5 ; vi. 9 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16, or XoXfii» is used in the sense of commnmling, Heb. vii. 14. The verb \a\eiv is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess. [Com p.: hta-, tV, Kara-, npocr-. o-uX-XaXe'o) ; cf. the cat- alogue of comj). in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.] XoXia, -a?, v, (\aKos, cf. iittm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119 Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity, talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see Xakico, init.] ; in a «"ood sense conrersafion ; in the Jf. T. 1. speech, i. q..v7ijr!/: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro- Xafid 370 Xufi^di nunciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec; Mt. xxvi. 73; speech which discloses the speaker's native country : hence of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hav- ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer].* Xo|ia [KG (on the accent see Tilf. Proleg. 102)] in Jit. xxvii. 4G and Xaji^ia [RG] Jlk. xv. 31, (the llebr. word n^S fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 1), iclnj; in the former pass. Lchm. reads Xi/fiu, in the hitter \efua, Tdf. Xf^d in both, Tr WII Xefid in Mt. but "Kand in :Mk. ; the form in ij or e reproduces the Chald. KoS or na^; on the re- markable diversity of spelling in the codd. cf. Tdf. on each pass., [WII on Mt. 1. c], and Fritzsche on Mk. p. 603.* Xa|ipdvu; imjif. (Kan^avov, fut. Xrj^oixai, (hTTrW H Xi)f»\//-o^ai, an Alexandrian form ; see s. v. M, ;*) ; 2 aor. f\a^ov (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B *] «XdjSaTc, 1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. aTi-epxoitat, iuit.), impv. Xd^f (Rev. X. 8 sq.), not \a^€ (W. § G, 1 a. ; B. 62 (54)) ; pf. flXrftpa, 2 pers. fiXries (Rev. xi. 17 WII ; sec KOTTiaoi) ; on the use of the pf. interchangeably with an aor. (Rev. v. 7; viii. 5, etc.) cf. B. 197 (170); W. 272 (255); Jehb in Vincent and Dickson's Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. §§ G7, U8], ptcp. «iXTjt^cir; [Pass., pres. ptcp. Xn^jSawo/iefor ; pf. 3 pers. sing. ei'XijTTTni, Jn. viii. 4 Wllmrg. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times for np'^, ■'■cry often for XWJ, also for tjh and several times for ?nx ; [fr. llom. down] ; I. to take, i. e. 1. to takewilh the hand, lay hold of, any pers. or thing in order to use it : absol., where the context shows what is taken, Jit. xxvi. 2G ; Mk. xiv. 22 ; {tov) apTov, Mt. xxvi. 26 ; Acts xxvii. 35 ; to fii^Xiov, Rev. V. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. s.] ; fj.d\mpav (grasp, lav hand to), Jit. xxvi. 52, and in many other cxx. After a circumstantial style of description (see av- lp, Rev. xxii. 17 ; to drink, to o^or, Jn. xix. 30 ; ouk cXa/3f, he did not take it, i. c. refused to drink it, Jlk. xv. 23. to take up a thing to be carried ; to take upon one's self: toi> aravpov nvTOv, Mt. X. 38 [L mrg. «p>;] ; to take tcith one for future use : Sprovs, Jit. xvi. 5, 7 ; XapmiSat, Jit. xxv. 1 ; eXaioK fiffl' iavTwn, ibid. 3. 2. to take in order to carry away: without the notion of violence, tos aadivdas, i. e. to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 1 7 ; with the notion of violence, to seize, take away forcibly : Jit. v. 40; Rev. iii. 1 1 ; TrjV flpi]vr)v ix [Ucc. drro, (WII br. tie)] T^r y^r, Rcv. vi. 4. 3. to take what is one's own, to take to one's self, to make one's own ; a. to claim, procure, for one's self: Ti, Jn. iii. 2 7 (opp. to what is g i v e n) ; iavrm fiaai- \eiav, Lk. xix. 12; with ace. of the pers. to associate with one's self as companion, attendant, etc. : Xafiuvr. aireipav €p;(eTai, taking with him the band of soldiers (whose aid he might use) he comes, Jn. .wiii. 3 (crrpaT'ov Xafitov ep^fTai, Sojih. Tracll. 259) ; Xap/3. yvvaiKa, to lake i. e. marry a wife, Jlk. xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, ((Jen. iv. 19, etc. ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16 ; Eur. Ale. 324; with iavra added. Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that ■ which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q. to seize, lay hold of, apprehend : rtvd, Jit. xxi. 35,39; Jlk. xii. 3, 8, and very often in (irk. writ. fr. Horn. down ; trop. ti, i. e. to yet possession of, obtain, a thing, Phil. iii. 12 [cf. W. 27G (259)] ; metaph., of affections or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, occujm) : nvd eXa- fifv (Karaaii, Lk. V. 26 ; (pu^os, Lk. vii. IG (very often so even in Horn., as rpopos fAXn/Ue yvla, II. 3, 34 ; pc Ipipos aipe'i, 3, 446; ;(dXos, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sap. xi. 13 (12)) ; nvclpa (i. e. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; neipav ytapySiv duo ToC Kapnov, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i. e. to ailmil, receive: Tiva paTrtV/zao'ii', Jlk. xiv. 65 LTTrWII [cf. Lat. verberibus aliipiem accipere'], but see ^dXXm, 1 ; tivo. ei's TO ffiin, unto his own home [see tStos, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27 ; cif oiKiav, 2 Jn. 10 ; fts TO TrXoToK, .In. vi. 21. to receive what is offered ; not to refuse or reject : Tivd, one, in order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20 ; ti, prop., toreceive, Mt. xxvii. 6; trop. : tov Xoyov, to admit or re- ceive into the mind. Jit. xiii. 20 ; Jlk. iv. 16, (for which in Lk.viii. ISSc'xofTai) ; Tiji/papTupi'av, to believe the testi- mony.Jn.iii. ll,32sq.; Top^/iaTdTirar, Jn. xii.48; xvii. 8. Tn imitation of the Ilebr. C-JD Hipi (on the various senses of which in the O. T. cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 915 sq.), npvrraTtov Xap^dvto, to receive a person, give him access to one's self, i. e. to regard any one's power, rank, external circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice or neglect something : used of p a r t i a 1 i t y [A. V. to ac- cept the person'], Lk. xx. 21 ; with avdponrov added, GaL Xafi^o 371 AaoS^ aociKeia ii. 6, (Lev. xix. 15 ; Mai. ii. 9, etc. ; Bavna^av to npoaam., Deut. X. 1 7 ; Job xxxii. 22) ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c.]. 5. lo take, i. q. to choose, select : riva «c Tiviaf, pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification lo take may- be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow s. V. B. d. fin. ; [L. and S. II. 3]), by which Xa/i/Sai/fiK joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose idea is expressed by the subst. : \aji^. ap)(i]v to take be- ginning, i. q. apxa/iai to begin, Ileb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9, and often; Ael. v. h. 2, 28 ; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ; Xrjdijii nvos, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph, antt. 2, 6, 10; 9, 1 ; 4, 8, 44 ; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 sub fin. ; h. anim. 4, 35) ; vTiiifjivijcriv Tivos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5 ; ire'ipdv Tivos, to prove anijlhinij, i. e. either to make trial of: ^s sc. 6a\dtT does not occur in the Epp. to the Thess., Philem., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude. [CoMP. : ava^ dm-, trvv-avTi.- (-fim), dno-, «Vt-, koto-, /MeTOr, Trapa-, (2 Co. iv. 6 L txt. T Tr WH) ; 1 aor. TKafiifra : [fr. Horn, down] ; to shine : Mt. v. 15 sq. ; .xvii. 2 : Lk. xvii. 24 ; Acts .vii. 7 ; 2 Co. iv. 6. [CoMP.: CK-, TTfpi-Xdp.niii-'] * Xav9dvii> (lengthened form of Xijdm) ; 2 aor. fKaBov, (whence Lat. latere) ; Sept. several times for dS;'J, etc.; [fr. Hom. down] ; to he hidden : Mk. vii. 24 ; Lk. viii. 47 ; Ttvd, lo be hidden from one. Acts xxvi. 26 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5 (on which see deXa, 1 sub fin.), 8 ; ace. to the well- known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptcp. i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. ^latthiae § 552 ^.; Passow s. v. ii. p. IS""; [L. and S. s. v. A. 2]; W. § 54, 4; [B. § 144, 14]) : eXadov ^evia-avres, have un- awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [Comp. : c'k-, ciri- XalruTos, -ij, -6v, (fr. Xa^evo), and this fr. XSs a stone, and |f'(a to polish, hew), cut out of stone : fiv^p.a, Lk. x.xiii. 53, and thence in Evang. Xicod. c. 11 fin.; (once in Sept., Deut. iv. 49; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14; Deut. xxxiv. 1 ; [Josh. xiii. 20] ; nowhere in Grk. auth.).* AooSiKcCa l-nia T WH (see I, .) ; R G L Tr accent -SiVfia. cf. Chandler § 104], -as, fj, Laodicea, a city of Phrvia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co- lossae. After having been successively called Diospolis and Rhoas. it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice, the wife of Antiochus H. [B.C. 261-246]. It was de- AaoBiKei'^ 372 TuiTpevo) stroyed by an earthquake, a. d. 6(! [or earlier, see Bp. Lijhift. Com. on Col. ami Pliileiii. p. 38 sij.], together with Colo.sfffi and IliurajKilis (,co/)/e; 1. a people, tribe, nation,
t, Gen. xlix. 10 ; Deut. xxxii. 8 ; Is. iii. 13, etc.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap- parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ, cf. 25) ; 01 irpfafivTepoi. toD XaoC, Mt. xxi. 23 ; xxvi. 3, 47; xxvii. 1 ; o\ ypappmfi's Tov \aov, Mt. ii. 4 ; oi irpayroi Tov XaoO, Lk. xix. 47 ; to npeo'^vrepiov tov "Kaou, Lk. xxii. C(i ; apxovTfi tou XaoC, .Vets iv. .s. with a gen. of the possessor, tov Seov, avTov, /loO (i. e. tov Bfov, Ilebr. nin" D>', □■7l'7l'), the people whom Ooil has chosen for himself, selected as peculiarly his own : Ileb. xi. 25 ; Mt. ii. 6; Lk. i.68; vii. 16; without the art. Jude 5 (Sir. xlvi. 7; Sap. xviii. 13) ; cf. W. § 19, 1 ; the name is trans- ferred to the community of Christians, as that which by the blessing of Christ has come to take the place of the theocratic peo])le of Israel, Heb. iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 4 ; particularly to a church of Christians gathered from among the Gentiles, Acts xv. 14 ; Ro. ix. 25 sq. ; 1 Pet. ii. 10; with dt tiepmoirjiTiv added, 1 Pet. ii. 9; irtpiov- o-ios. Tit. ii. 14, cf. Acts xviii. 10 ; Lk. i. 1 7. 6 Xadj the people (of Israel) is distinguished from its princes and rulers [(1 Esdr. i. 10; v. 45; Judith viii. 9, 11 ; etc.)], Mt. .xxvi. 5 ; Mk. xi. 32 [here WH Tr mrg. read oxXos] ; xiv. 2 ; Lk. XX. 19; xxii. 2 ; xxiii. 5 ; Acts v. 26, etc. ; from the priests, Ileb. v. 3 ; vii. 5, 27. 2. indefinitely, of a great part of the population gathered together antj- iL-here: Mt. xxvii. 25 ; Lk. i. 21 ; iii. 15; vii. 1,29; viii. 47 ; ix. 13 ; xviii. 43, etc. ; to ttX^^os toC XaoC, Lk. i. 10. [The Gospels of Mk. and .In. use the word but three times each. Syx. see S^ftos, fin.] XopiTY^, -yyos, 6, the throat (Etym. Magn. [557, 16]: Xapuy^ pcv hi ov XaKovyLtv . . . v : 1 aor. iKaToprjcTa ; Jif. pass. ptcp. XfXoro- prjpivos; (fr. \aT6pMi a stone-cutter, and this fr. Xas a stone, and Tcfivai) ; lo cut stones, to hew out stones : Mt. xxvii. 60 ; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for 3Yn ; once for 71^3, Ex. xxi. 33 sqq. ; Diod., [Dion. II., Strab., al. (cf. Soj/h. Lex. s. v.)], Justin ilart.) * Xarpcla, -as, 7. (XaTpfCw, q. v.) ; 1. in Grk. auth. seroice rendereil for hire; then any service or ministra- tion (Tragg., Plut., Lcian.) ; the service of God: tov 6(ov, Plat. apol. 23 b. ; KaTafpttv fit Xarpfiav [to offer a sacrifice in service], Jn. xvi. 2 ; fmrtXe'iv ras Xarpeiat, lo perform the sacred services (see iirtTe\ea>, 1), S])oken of the [)riests, Heb. ix. 6 ; univ. of any worship of God, ^ XoytKfj X. Ro. xii. 1 [cf. W. § 59, 9 a.] ; (of the worship of idols, 1 ]Macc. i. 43).' Xarpfvu ; f ut. XaTpevcro) ; 1 aor. iXdrpevaa ; (Xdrpir a hireling, Lat. lutro in Enn. and Plant. ; XaTpov hire) ; in Grk. writ. a. lo serve for hire; b. univ. lo serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of slaves and of freemen ; in the N. T. to render religious service or homage, to worship, {Hehr. HD;;, Deut. vi. 13; X. 12; Josh. .xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, Xarp. 6eai: Mt. i\'. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7; xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix. 14; Rev. vii. 15; xxii. 3; of the worship of idols. Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx. 5 ; xxiii. 24 ; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the manner ofworsh ipping are these : ffta [so R G] Xarprufiv TTvevpaTi (flat, of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3, 'Kd'^avov 373 "kiyci} but LTTrWH have correctly restored n-i/fv/ian deov, i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that the dat. of the pers. (ra dea) is suppressed ; ev ra nvfi- /lari iiov iv rw eiayy., in my spirit in delivering the glad tidings, Ro. i. 9 ; tm 6ea iv Kadapa (Tvvet8rj(Tfi, 2 Tim. i. 3 ; H(Ta aiSovs Kal fiXa^eias or [so L T Tr \\ II] fier fiXa/3. K. fie'ouf, Ileb. xii. 28 ; tV oaioTr^rt k. dLKat-ofrvurj, Lk, i. 7-4 ; (without the dat. deai) tnja^Tflais k. Berjaea-i, Lk. ii. 37; Xarpfuciv, absol., to worsltip God [cf. W. 593 (552)], Acts x.xvi. 7. in the strict sense ; to perform sacred services, to offer gifts, to tcorship God in the observance of the rites instituted for his worship: absol., Heb. ix. 9; x. 2; spec, of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office : with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is rendered, Ileb. viii. 5; xiii. 10. [(Eur., al.)]* Xdxavov, -ov, to, (fr. Xaxaivu) to dig ; hence herbs grown on land cultivated by digging ; garden-herbs, as opp. to wild plants); any pothei'b, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 32; ilk. iv. 32 ; Lk. xi. 42 ; Ro. .xiv. 2. (1 K. xx. (x.xi.) 2 ; Gen. ix. 3 ; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2, etc. ; Arstph., Plat., Pint., al.) • AePPaios, see GaSSaior. Xe-ycMV and (so T, Tr [but not in Mt. xxvi. 53], WH [see fin.], also Lchm. in Jlk. v. 9, 15) Xeyiav (of. ?'), we find Xtytix tv iavTa, to mi/ ivilliiii one's self, i. c. lo Ihinh with unc's self: Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; Lk. iii. 8; iv ri] Kap&ia airov, Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said to sjieal.; \eyeiv, not only when he uses language orally, but also when he ex- presses himself in writing [(ef. b. sub fin.)] : 2 Co. vii. 8 ; viii. 8 ; ix. 3, 4 ; xi. 16, 21 ; Phil. iv. 11, and often in Paul; so of the writers of the O. T. : Ko.x. 16, 20; xi. 9; XV. 12 ; Xt'y" ij ypa4>fi, Ko. iv. 3 ; x. 11 ; xi. 2 ; Jas. ii. 23, etc. ; and simply Xeyf ^*^- '1 ^iyovaa, i- c. 17 ypacfiri (our // is said): Ho. .w. 10, [11 LTrmrg.]; Gal. iii. 16; Ejdi. iv. 8: V. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and 588 (547) ; 15. § 12!l, 16; Xey€4, sc. 6 6f6s, 2 Co. ri. 2 ; Xe'yfi AnutS eV \//-aXfiu, Acts xiii. 35 ; Xe'yfi o 6e6s, Ileb. v. 6 ; 'fV tm 'Qaqi, Ilo. ix. 25; ei/ 'HXia, Ko. xi. 2; tv AuutS, Ileb. iv. 7; Xe'yfi TO TTvevfia ro ayiov, Ileb. iii. 7 ; 6 ro'^os X«y€t, 1 Co. xiv. 34: ri, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 19. f. Xe'yeti» is used of every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix. 14; XV. 1 ; xvii. 25 ; xviii. 1 ; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq. ; Lk. iv. 22; vii. 20; Jn. vii. 11 ; ix. 10: xix. 10; Ro. x. 18 sq.; xi. 1, 11, etc.; foil, by ei interrog. [seeti. II. 2], Acts xxi. 37; Xt'yfi Ttr, i. q. one bids the question be asked, :\Ik. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11 ; of reply. Mt. xvii. 25; xx. 7 ; Mk. viii. 24 [Lmrg. direv] ; Jn. i. 21 ; xviii. 17; of acclaim. Rev. iv. 8, 10; of exclamation. Rev. xviii. 10, 16, of entreaty, Mt. x.xv. 11 ; Lk. xiii. 25: i. q. to set forth in languatje, make plain, Ileb. v. 11. g. Xeyo) w. ace. of the thing, lo say a thing : o. Lk. i.i. 33 (i. o. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate or not) ; ].ik. xxii. 60 ; to express in words, Philem. 21 ; toCto, Jn. viii. 6 ; xii. 33 ; roiaOra, 'Ileb. xi. 14 ; ravTa, Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27, 45; xiii. 17; Jn. v. 34; Acts xiv. 18; 1 Co. ix. 8; raht (referring to what follows). Acts xxi. 11 ; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 18 , iii. 1, 7, 14 ; ri. what f Ro. X. 8; xi. 4 : Gal. iv. 30, 1 Co. xiv. 16 ; rroXXd, Jn. xvi. 12; TO Xryo^f va, Lk. xviii. 34 ; Acts xxviii. 24 : Ileb. viii. 1 ; VTrd T1.V0S, -Vets viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LTTr AVII XoXou- /je'rotj]; xxvii. 11 ; \eya> oKrjdeiav, 3a. viii. 45 sq.; Ro. ix. 1 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; dXij^ij, .In. xix. 35 ; dv6pu>7Tivov, Ro. vi. 19; s. ib. ix. 27 ; in Jn. everywhere [twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] afifjv ip!)v X«'yw croi (iipiiv), I most solemnly declare to thee (you), i. 51 (52); iii. 11, etc.; with the force of an asseveration Xt'yu tivi, without d/i^x: Mt. xi. 22; xii. 36; xxiii. 39; Lk. vii. 9, 28; x. 12; xii. 8; xvii. 34 ; xviii. 8, 14 ; m\ X«'yTT0S, 1 c], Ro. iii. 5 ; Gal. iii. 15 ; 1 Co. ix. 8 ; AvKaovKTri, Acts xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where it is used, Xeyu, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi- cally a. i. q. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain : foil, by an ace. with inf.,Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. xii. 18; Lk. XX. 41 ; xxiii. 2 ; xxiv. 23 ; Acts v. 36 ; viii. 9 ; xvii. 7 ; xxviii. 6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9; with the included idea of insisting on, TrepiTepvfo-dm (that >lou must be [cf. W. § 44, 3 b.: B. § 141, 2]), Acts xv. 24 Rec ; with the simple inf. without a subject-acc, Lk. xxiv. 23; Jas. ii. 14; 1 Jn. ii. 6, 9; foil, by Sti (where the ace with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 1 1 ; xii. 35 ; Lk. ix. 7 ; Jn. iv. 20 ; xii. 34 ; 1 Co. XV. 1 2 ; Xe'yo) Tici oTt etc. to declare to one that etc. [cf. B. §141,1]: Mt.iii. 9; v. 20, 22; xii. 36; xiii. 17; xvii. 12; xxi. 43 [AVH mrg. om. on] : xxvi. 21 ; Mk. ix. 13 ; xiv. 18, "^elfifia 376 XeiTovpyLa 25,30; Lk. iii. 8; x. 12; xiii. 35 [Tr WHom.Lbr. on] ; xiv. 24 ; xviii. 8 ; xix. 20, 40 [WH txt. om. Tr br. 6Vt] ; xxi. 3 ; xxii. 16, 37, etc.; Jn. iii. 11 ; v. 24 sq. ; viii. 34 ; X. 7 [Tr "WII om. L br. iVi] ; xvi. 20 ; Gal. v. 2 ; Xeyw Tiud, on, by familiar attraction [cf. W. § 6C, 5 a.; B. § 151, 1] for Xe'yo), on Tis : .In. viii. 54; ix. 19; x. 36 (where for vfiels XcyeTe, on ovtos, ou . , . dirtoTetXe, jQXa- a-(prjiiel; the indirect discour.se passes into the direct, and (i\aa-(j}r]fj.eU is put for p\acr(j)r]iiel [B. § 141, 1]). b. i. ij. to teach : with dat. of pers. foil, by direct disc, 1 Co. vii. 8, 12; n nw, Ju. xvi. 12; Acts i. 3 ; toOto foil, by on, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to comnmut/, direct : with an ace. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46 ; Xeyovtrt (sc. aird) k. oi ■noiovtriv, Mt. xxiii. 3; n' nvi, Mk. xiii. 37; Jn. ii. 5 ; nvl foil, by an imperative, Jit. v. 44 ; Mk. ii. 11 ; Lk. vii. 14 ; xi. 9 ; xii. 4 ; xvi. 9 ; Jn. ii. 8 ; xiii. 29 ; 1 Co. vii. 1 2 ; Xe'yw witli an inf. of the thing to be done or to be avoided [cf. AV. § 44, 3 b.; B. § 141, 2] : Mt. V. 34, 39; Acts xxi. 4, 21; Ro. ii. 22; xii. 3 ; foil, by iva, Acts xix. 4 ; nepi twos (gen. of the tiling) foil, by iva, 1 Jn.v. 16, (see Iva, 11. 2 li.); foil, by fi.ij with subjunc. 2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of aslcin.-), seeking, entreatiix/ : with dat. of pers. foil, by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15; 2 Co. vi. 13; foil, by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.) ; B. u. s.], Rev. X. 9 [Rec. imp\'.]. pfai^fjK tlv\ Xe'yca, to cjive one a (jreet- ing, bid him welcome, salute him, 2 Jn. 10 sq. (see ^a'P^i fin.). d. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean to sai/, (often so in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow s. v. p. 30" ; [L. and S. s. V. C. 10]) : rtm, Mk. xiv. 71 ; '.Jn. vi. 71 ; n, 1 Co. x. 29 ; toOto foil, by direct disc. Gal. iii. 1 7 ; toCto foil, by on, 1 Co. i. 12. e. to call hij a nnine, to call, name ; i. (p «aXm Tiva with ace of pred. : n' /le Xf'yftr , cf. W. 596 sq. (555) ; B. 394 (338). CoMP. : dvn-, Bia- (-/iai), eV,- eiTi-, Kara-, vapa- ^-fiai),7rpo-, cruX-Xfycu; cf. the catalogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1, 00.] XeilJi|xa [WII Xi/iita, see their App. p. 154 and cf. I, t], -7-oy, TO, (XciVm), a remnant: Ro. xi. 5. (Ildt. 1, 119; Pint, de profect. in virtut. c. 5 ; for jT^Xiy, 2 K. xix. 4.) * Xtlos, -fKi. -cior. [(cf. Lat. /ei';»)], smooth, level: opp. to Tpaxys, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. xl. 4 Alex. ; Prov. ii. 20 ; 1 S. xvii. 40 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * XeCiru ; [2 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. XiVi;, Tit. iii. 13 T WH mrg. ; pres. pass. Xf iVo^at ; f r. Horn, down] ; 1. trans, to leave, leave behind, forsake ; pass, to be left be- hind (prop, by one's rival in a race, hence), a. to lag, be inferior: ev firjScvl, Jus. i. 4 (Hdt. 7, 8, 1); [al. associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be destitute of, to lack : with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5 ; ii. 15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be zvanting or absent, to fail : XeiVfi n nw, Lk. xviii. 22 ; Tit. iii. 13, (Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al.) ; ra XeiVowa, the things that re- main [so Justin JIart. apol. 1, 52, cf. 32; but al. are wanting'], Tit. i. 5. [CoMP.J aito-, Sia-, (<-, eVi-, Kara-, iv-Kara-, irfpi-, WTTO-XeiVm.] * XttTOvpYe'o), ptcp. XeiTovpyaiv: 1 aor. inf. \eiTovpyrjcrai; (fr. XfM-oupydr, q. v.) ; 1. in Attic, esp. the orators, to serve the slate at one's own cost; to assume an office which must be administered at one's own expense ; to dis- charge a public office at one's own cost; to render public service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes. August, p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat, ed. Bindseil (post Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and F. Francke, Conf. Luth., Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1840)]; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p. Ixxxv. sqq. ; Biickh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 sqq. ; Liibker, llealle.K. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] s. v. XeiTovpyla). 2. univ. to do a service, perform a irork ; Vulg. ministro, [A. V. to minister'] ; a. of the priests and Levites who were busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the temple (so Sept. often for P.yo ; as Num. xviii. 2 ; E.x. xxviii. 31, 39; xxix. 30; Joel i. 9, etc.; several times for n3>', Num. iv. 37, 39 ; xvi. 9 ; xviii. 6 sq. ; add. Sir. iv. 14 [xlv. 15; 1. 14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 Mace. x. 42; [Philo, vit. Moys. iii. IS; cf. Vfiiv Xeirovpyovai k. ovto). ttiv X«- Tovpyiav Totv TrpocjiTjTuiv k. bi^aoKaXiov (of bishops and deacons), Teaching of the Twelve Apost. c. 15 (cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 etc)]) : Heb. x. 11. b. X. tm Kvpla,, of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in some other way : Acts xiii. 2 ; cf. De Wette ad loc c. of those who aid others with their resources, and re- lieve their poverty : nin tv tivi, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25." X«Tovp.yia, -as, r), (fr. XfiTovpyea, q. v.) ; 1. prop. a public office which a citizen undertakes to administer at his own expense: Plat. legg. 12 p. 949 c; Lys. p. 103, 22; Isocr. p. 391 d. ; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5 ; 23 (29), 4, and others. 2. uniy. an;/ service: of military ser- vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1,03. 73; of the service of work- men, c 21 ; of that done to nature in the cohabitation of man and wife, Arislot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343", 20. 3. in biblical Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests relative to the prayers and sacrifices offered to God: Lk. i. 23 ; Heb. viii. 6 ; L\. 21, (for r^-\\^y_, Num. viii. 22 ; xvi. 9 ; xviii. 4; 2Chr. xxxi. 2; Diod. 1,21; Joseph.; [Philo de caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al. ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.]); hence the phrase in Phil. ii. 1 7, explained s. v. dvy). 2. univ. a minister, servant : so of military laborers, often in Polyb. ; of the servants of a king, 1 K. x. 5 ; Sir. x. 2 ; [of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2 S. xiii. l^» (cf. K)]; of the servants of the priests, joined with iiTnjpcVat, Dion. Hal. antt. 2, 73; riiv ayiuiv. of the temple, i. e. one hiisicil with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, cf. [Philo, alleg. leg. Ui. § 46] ; Neh. x. 39 ; Sir. vii. 30 ; twi/ flcii/, of heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.417a.; 'l7(Tou XpttrroO, of Paul Ukening himself to a priest, Ro. XV. 16; j)lur. tov dfov, those by whom God administers his affairs and executes his decrees ; so of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 6 ; of angels, Ileb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [cf. Philo de caritat. § 3] ; t^j ;(opiTOf toii 6eov, those whose ministry the grace of God made use of for proclaiming to men the necessity of repentance, as Xoali, Jonah : Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. c. 7 ; rbv ajroaToXov Koi Xet- Tovpyhv ifiSii' r^r xpetas fiov, by whom ye have sent to me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil, ii. 25.' [X€(ia, see Xapa.'] XiVTiov, -ov, TO, (a Lat. word, lintenm), a linen cloth, towel (Arr. peri])l. mar. rubr. 4) : of the towel or apron, wliich servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig. 26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq. ; with which it was supposed the nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was cov- ered, Ev. Nicod. c. 10; cf. Thilo, Cod. Apocr. p. 582 sq.* Xeirfe, -ISoi, fj, (XeVo) to strip off the rind or husk, to peel, to scale), a scale : Acts i.x. 18. (Sept. ; Aristot. al. [cf. Ildt. 7,61].)» Xe'irpa. -ar. ^, (fr. the adj. Xerpor, q. v.), Hebr. n> ")V, leprosy [lit. morbid scatiness'\, a most offensive, annoy- ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which generally pervades the whole body ; common in Egypt and the East (Lev. xiii. sq.) : Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42; Lk. T. 12 sq. (Ildt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf. Orclli in Herzog 2 s. v. Aussatz ; Greenhill in Bible Educator iv. 76 sq. 174 sq. j Ginshurg in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. ; Eders- heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 sqq. ; JIcCl. and S. s. v.] * X«irp'";i"3 and >;i">S ; [Theophr. c. p. 2, 6, 4] see Xe'irpa) : ilt. viii. 2 ; x. 8 ; xi. 5 ; Mk. i. 40: Lk. iv. 27; vii. 22; xvii. 12; of one [(Simon)] who had formerly been a leper, Jit. .xxvi. 6; Mk. xiv. 3.* XewTis, -r), -ov, (X«V(a to strip off the bark, to l)eel), thin ; small; to \f7rr6v, a very small brass coin, equiv. to the eighth part of an as, [A. V. a mite ; cf. Alex.'s Kitto and H.D. s. v. ; cf. 7^. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii. 17!l]: Mk. xii. 42; Lk. xii. 59; .xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp. 1, 9 adds Kfppa; Pollii.x, ononi. 9, 6, sect. 92, supplies vupLtrpa)* Afut and Afutf (T Tr (yet see below) WII Acutt's [but Lcbm. -U; sec ei. i]), gen. Afui (TTr WII Afvfi)i J'ec. Aevtv (T WII AtuftV, so Tr e.xc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21 (19); W. § 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. 'iS a joining, fr. niS, cf. Gen. .xxix. 34), Levi ; 1. the third son of the patri- arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5, 9; [Rev. vii. 7]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alphaius, a col- lector of customs [(A. V. /luhlican)^ : Mk. ii» 14 [here AVII (rejected) mrg. 'laKw/Sov (see their note ad loc, cf. Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)]; Lk. v. 27, 29; ace. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the apostle (Mt. ix. 9) ; but cf. Grimm in the Theol. Stud, u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq.; [their identhy is denied also by Nicholson on Matt. ix. 9 ; yet see Patritius, De Evangcliis, 1. i. c. i. quaest. 1 ; Vennhtcs in AIcx.'s Kitto, s. V. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. § 1].* AeutTi]s (T WII AeveiTTjs [so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; see ft. i]). -OV, 6, a Levile ; a. one of Levi's posterity. b. in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr. ')h 'ja, D'^.fj) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as- sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temi)l(', to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other things; so Lk. x. 32; Jn. i. 19; Acts iv. 36; [(Plut. quaest. conv. 1. iv. quaest. C, 5; Philo de vit. Moys. i. § 58). See BB.DD. s. V. Levites; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed. p. 63 sqq.]' A€«itik6s [T WH Afu«T. ; see «. t], -^, -6v, Leriliml, pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit. Moys. iii. § 20.] * XevKaCvu: 1 aor. tXfVKaca [cf. W. § 13, 1 d. ; B. 41 (35)]: (Xniicos) : fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for J'jSn ; to ichiten. iiinke while: ri. Mk. ix. 3: Rev. vii. 14.* [XeuKopiS>s. l^It. xvii. 2 ; esp. bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white: \ea3v 377 \i6d^cc spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted to the splendor of the heavenly state, ilk. xvi. 5 ; Lk. ix. 29; Acts i. 10; Rev. iil. 5 ; iv. 4 ; vi. 11; Tii. 9, 13; xix. 14, (shining or wliite garments were worn on festive and state occasions, Eceles. ix. SS ; cf. Heindorf on Hor. sat. 2, 2, 61) ; with ojerei or iis 6 ;(imi/ added : Mk. ix. 3 R L ; 3It. .XX viii. 3, (Ittttoi XevKorepoi x'ovos, Hom. II. 1 0, 437) ; eV Xfuxoij sc. liurriois (added in Rev. iii. 5 ; iv. 4), Jn. XX. 12 ; Rev. iii. 4 ; cf. W. 591 (.550) ; [B. 82 (72)] ; used of white garments as the sign of innocence and purity of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx. 11. 2. (dead) u-hile: lit. v. 36 (opp. to fie'Xar ) ; Rev. i. 14: ii. 17; iv. 4 ; vi. 2; xiv. 14 : xix. 11: spoken of the wliitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.* Xc'uv, -error, 6, [fr. Ilom. down], Sept. for '"iN, n""!!St, T33 (a young lion), etc. ; a lion; a. prop.: Heb. xi. 33 ; 1 Pet. v. 8 ; Rev. i v. 7 ; Lx. 8, 1 7 ; x. 3 ; xiii. 2. b. metaph. ippiaBrfv eV o-To/xarof X/oi^of, I was rescued out of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 1 7 (the fig. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole phrase) ; equiv. to n brave ami )nir/lili/ hero : Rev. v. 5, where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9 ; cf. Xah. ii. 13.* \t|8h. ->)s. ^. (\ridiji to escape notice, \i]6oimt to forget), [fr. Horn. down], forgelfulness: 'Kr^Srjv twos Xo/Seii' (see Xa/i^aro), I. 6), 2 Pet. i. 9.* [Xii(id. see Xajifi'.] Xnvos, -oil Tji (also o, Gen. xxx. 38, 41 [cf. below]), [Theocr., Diod., al.] ; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped receptacle, rat, in which grapes are trodden [A. V. wine- press^ (Hebr. ni) : Rev. .\iv. 20 ; xix. 15 ; ttjv Xiji/oi» . . . TOW /teyav (for R Tr mrg. tiji» lieyaXrjv), Rev. xiv. 19 — a variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew, see Gesenius, Lchrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in Grk. writ.; cf. AV. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p. 153 sq. ; B. 81 (71). 2. i. q. iTroXijuoK (Is. xvi. 10 ; Mk. xii. 1) or TtpoKijviov (Is. v. 2), Hebr. 2T>y, the lower vat, dug in the ground, into wliich the must or new wine flowed from the press : Jit. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Kelter; /iOs^o//in Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. s. v. ATine-press].* Xfjpos, -ov, 6, idle tall; nonsense : Lk. xxi v. 11. (4 Mace. V. 10; Xen. an. 7, 7,41 : Arstph., al. : plur. joined with natdiai. Plat. Protag. p. 347 d.; with (pXvapiat, ih. Hipp. maj. p. 304 b.) * XiQo-riis, -ov, 6, (for Xijro-Ti?^ fr. 'Xrjt^opai. to plunder, and this fr. Ion. and Epic Xr/u, for which the Attics use Xfi'n, booty), [fr. Soph, and Ildt. down], a robber; a plun- derer, freebooter, brigand : Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 48 ; Lk. xxii. 52 ; Jn. x. 1 ; xviii. 40 ; jjlur., Mt. xxi. 13 ; xxvii. 38,44; Mk. xi. 17; xv. 27; Lk. x. 30, 36 ; xix. 46 ; Jn. X. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 26. [Not to be confounded with KXiTrTrji thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the distinction is obscured in A. Y.) : cf. Trench § xliv.] * Xij+is (L T Tr WII Xrjp-^n, see M, /x), -ewr,-^, (Xa/i/Savoj, X^xp'o/uw), [fr. Soph, and Thuc. down], a receiving : Phil, iv. 15, on which pass, see SoVir, 1.* Xtov (in Hom. and Ion. Xir/v), [forXt-Xax. Xdm to desire; cf. Curtius § 532], adv., greatly, exceedingly : Mt. ii. 16 ; iv. 8; viii. 28; xxvii. 14; Mk. i. 35 ; Lx. 3 ; xvi. 2; Lk. xxiii. 8 ; 2 Tim. iv. 15 ; 2 Jn. 4 ; 3 Jn. 3 ; (2 Mace. xi. 1 ; 4 Mace. viii. 16 ; Tob. ix. 4, etc. ; for nso, (jen. i. 31 ; iv. 5; IS. xi. 15); \iav i< nepio-aov, exceedingly beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 [\VH om. Tr br. «WtpKr.]. See iiTTfp- XCPavos, -ov, 6, (more rarely f) [cf. Lob. u. i.]) ; 1. the frankincense-tree (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Theophr., al.). 2. frankincense (Hebr. r\ijh ; Lev. ii. 1 sq.; 16; Is. be. G, etc.) : Mt. ii. 11 ; Rev. xviii. 13 ; (Soph., Theophr., al.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 187; [Vanicek, Fremdwcirter, s. v. On frankincense see esp. Birdwood in tlie Bible Educator, i. 328 sqq. 374 sqq.] * XiPavuTos, -oC, 6, (Xi'/Savof) ; 1. in prof. auth. frankincense, the gum exuding ix tov \i^avov, (1 C'hr. ix. 29 ; Hdt., Menand., Eur., Plat., Diod., Ildian., al.). 2. a censer (wliich in prof. auth. is fj \i^ava>TLs [or rather -Tpi'r, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 255]) : Rev. viii. 3, 5.* XipcpTivos, -ov, 0, a Lat. word, libertinus, i. e. either one who has been liberated from .slavery, a freedman, or the son of a freedman (as distinguished fr. ingenuus, i. e. the son of a free man) : ^ crvvaytjyyri fj Xeyofievrj (orrwr Xcyo/zeVdJi' Tdf.) 'Ki^epTiiiii}v, Acts vi. 9. Some suppose these liber- tini [A.V. Libertines'] to have been manumitted Roman slaves, who having embraced Judaism had their syna- gogue at Jerusalem ; and they gather as much from Tac. Ann. 2, 85, where it is related that four thousand libertini, infected with the Jewish superstition, were sent into Sar- dinia. Others, owing to the names Kvprjvalaiv koi 'AXf- lai/Spfoji» that follow, think that a gcog ra|)hical mean- ing is demanded for Xi/3fpr., and supj)Ose that Jews are spoken of, the dwellers in Libertum, a city or region of proconsular Africa. But the existence of a city or region called Libertum is a conjecture which has nothing to rest on but the mention of a bishop with the prefix " libertinensis " at the synod of Carthage A. D. 411.- Others with far greater probability appeal to Philo, leg. ad Gjiium § 23, and understand the word as denot- inu Jews who had been made captives by the Romans uniler Pompey but were afterwards set free ; and who, although the\- had fixed their abode at Rome, had built at their own expense a synagogue at Jerusalem which they frequented when in that city. The name Libertines adhered to them to distinguish them from the f ree-b orn Jews who had subsequently taken up their residence at Rome. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Libertiner ; Hausrath in Sehenkel iv. 38 sq. ; [B. D. s. v. Libertines. Evidence seems to have been discovered of the existence of a " svnan'Oijue of the libertines " at Pompeii ; cf. De Rossi, BuHct°di Arch. Christ, for 1864, pp. 70, 92 sq.] * AipvT|, -^f, ij, Libya, a large region of northern Africa, bordering on Egypt. In that portion of it which had Cyrene for its capital and was thence called Libya Cy- renaica (17 irpor Kvprjvjjv .\tffvr], Joseph, antt. 16, 6, 1 ; ^ A. ij Kara Kupijw;» [q. v.], Acts ii. 10) dwelt many Jews (Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 2 ; 16, 6, 1 ; b. j. 7, 11 ; c. Apion. 2, 4 [where cf. Midler's notes]) : Acts ii. 10.* XiSd^u ; 1 aor. cXWaeU one with stones, in order either lo wound or to kill him : Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v. 26 [cf.W. .50.^4 71): B.242(208)]; 2Co..xi.25. (Aristot., I'olvb., Strab. ; XiddCeiv evXidots, 2 .S. xvi. 6.) [CoMP. : KaTn-\t$d^oi.^ * Xiflivos, -I), -ov, {\idos) ; fr. I'hid. down ; of slone: Jn. ii. G ; 2 Co. iii. 3 ; Kev. ix. 20.'' Xi6o-PoX«(i>, -a; impf. 3 pers. jihir. fXiOo^iiXovv ; 1 aor. (\tdo^6\r]tTa ; Pass., pres. Xi^o/SoXoO/iai ; 1 fut. Xi^ojSoXi;- fii'iaofiai ; (\i6o^6\os, and this fr. Xi'^or and ^dWai [cf. W. 102 (90); 2.1, 2ii]) ; Sept. for SpD and DJ"; ; i. q. XM^ai (q. v.), to slone; i. e. a. to kill ht/ sloninr/, lo stone (of a species of punishment, see XiSafw) : riva, Mt. xxi. 35; xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Acts vii. 68 sq. ; pass., Jn. viii. 5 ; Ileb. xii. 20. b. lo pell with stones : Tivd. Mk. xii.4[Rec.]; Acts xiv. 5. ([Diod. 17, 41, 8]; Plut. mor. p. 1011 e.)' X£9os, -01), o, Sept. for [3X, [fr. Horn, down] ; a slonr : of small stones, Mt. iv. G; vii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; iv. [3], 11 : xi. 11 ; xxii. 41 ; Jn. viii. 7; phir., Mt. iii. 9 ; iv. 3 ; Mk. V. 5 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; xix. 40 ; Jn. viii. 59 ; x. 31 ; of a large stone, Mt. xxvii. GO, C6 ; xxviii. 2 ; Mk.xv.4G; xvi. 3.sq.; Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41 ; xx. 1 ; of building stones, Mt. xxi. 42, 44 [T om. L WII Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ; xxiv. 2; Mk. xii. 10; xiii. 1 sq. ; Lk. .xix. 44; xx. 17sq. ; xxi. 5 sq. ; Acts iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7 ; metaph. of Christ : Xi5os oKpoyaiviaios (q. v.), cVXf/tTur (cf. 2 Esdr. V. 8), fVTt/ios, 1 IVt. ii. G (Is. xxviii. 1 G) ; fii, (sec (da>, II. b.), 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; \l6ot irpoaKofiixaTos, one whose words, acts, end, men (so stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7) ; Ho. ix. 33 ; of Christians : \i6oi (avris, living stones (see fiiu, u. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii. 5; of the truths with which, as with building materials, a teacher builds Christians up in wisdom, \l6ot rifuoi, costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 12. XWor /juXiko's, Mk. ix. 42 R G; Lk. xvii. 2 LTTrAVII, cf. Kev. xviii. 21. of precious stones, gems: XW. n'/iior, Rev. .xvii. 4 ; xviii. 12, IG; xxi. 11, 19, (2 S. xii. 30; 1 K. X. 2, 11) ; lairmi. Rev. iv. 3 ; ivhchvjxtiioi XlBov (for RGTXiVoi/) Kadapuv, Rev. xv. 6 LTrtxt.WII (ICzck. xxviii. 13 nayra [or Tiav} 'Ki6ov XP']crTbv fv&fSfa-m; [see WII^lntT. ad 1. c.]) ; but (against the reading \i6ou) [cf. Scrivener, Plain Introduction etc. p. 658]. spec, stoues cut in a certain form : stone tab- lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7; statues of idols, Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Ezek. xx. 32).» Xi96-irTpuTos, -ov, (fr. XWoj and the verbal adj. orpwro's fr. arpujvvvijn), spread (pared) vilh stones {mptpdov, So))h. Antig. 1204-5) ; to \i6., substantively, a mosaic or tes- sellated pavement : so of a place near the praetorium or palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 13 (see ra^^ada) : of places in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3 ; Jose[)h I b. j. G, 1, S and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement consists of tes.scUated work, Kjjict. diss. 4, 7, 37, cf. Esth. i. 6 ; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 ; Plin. h. n. 3G, .GO cf. 64.* XiK(id(i), -co : fut. X(K/i^(T to collect), (Vulg. collectd), a col- lection : of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1 Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Xot found in prof. auth. [cf. W. 25].)* XoYC|o|iai; impf. Aoyifofiiji'; 1 aor. eXoyicrd/xrji'; adepon. verb with 1 aor. jiass. iXoyladrjv and 1 fut. pass, \oyia6q- iTofiai; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in prof. auth. the pres. ptcp. is once used so, in Ildt. 3, 95 ; [cf. Veitch s. v. ; W. 25D (243) ; B. 52 (46)]) ; (Xo'yor) ; .Sept. for JE'n ; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul, being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his Epp., and only four times in the rest of the X. T.] ; 1. (rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate, count over ; hence a. to take into account, to make ac- count of: Ti Tivi, Ro. iv. 3, [4] ; raetapli. to pass to one's account, to impute, [A. V. reckon^ : tI, 1 Co. xiii. 5 ; Tfct Tt, 2 Tim. iv. 16 [A. V. la>/ to otie's charrje^; nv\ SiKoio- , dfj-apTtav, Uo. iv. 6, [8 (yet here L mrg. T Tr WIT txt. readoS)] ; ra Ttapainaiji.aTa, 2 Co. v. 19 ; in imitation of the Hebr. S ac'nj, 'Koyl^tTai ti (or tk) eis ti (equiv. to fir TO or axTTc elvai Tt), a tltinij is reckoned as or to he something, i. e. as avail in r/ for or equivalent to something, as having the like force and weight, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 137 ; [cf. W. § 29, 3 Note a. ; 228 (214) ; B. § 131, 7 Rem.]) : Ro. ii. 26 ; ix. 8 ; tU olSev. Acts xLx. 27; Is.xl. 17; Dan. [(Thcodot.i.r)] iv. 32; Sap. iii. 17; ix. 6; ^ TTicrriff els hiKaiotrvvr^v, Ro. iv. 3, 5, 9—11, 22 sq. 24 ; Gal. iii. 6 ; Jas. ii. 23 ; Gen. xv. 6 ; Ps. cv. (cvi.) 31 ; 1 Mace. ii. 52. b. i. q. to number among, reckon with: Tiva fierd tipwv, Jik. xv. 28 [yet G T ^VII om. Tr br. the vs.] and Lk. xxii. 37, after Is. liii. 12, where Sept. ev Tois dvojiois. c. to reckon or account, and treat accord- ingly : Ttva mr ti, Ro. viii. 36 fr. Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23 ; cf. B. 151 (132); [W. 602 (560)]; [Ro. vi. 11 foil, by ace. w. inf., but G L om. Tr br. the inf. ; cf. W. 321 (302)]. 2. (in animo rationes conferre) to reckon inwardly, count up or weigh the reasons, to deliberate, [A. V. reason'] : vpos iavrois, one addressing himself to an- other, Jlk. .\i. 31 R G (jrpos ip-avTov, with myself, in my mind. Plat. apol. p. 21 d.). 3. hj reckoning up all the reasons to gather or infer; i. e. a. lo consider, take ac- 'count, weigh, meditate on : ti, a thing, with a view to obtain- ing it, Phil. iv. 8; foil, by on. Ileb. xi. 19; [Jn. xi. 50 (Rec. SmXoy.)] ; toCto M\. by on, 2 Co. X. 11. b. to suppose, deem, judge : absol. 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; is \oyi^ofiai, 1 Pet. V. 12; n, anything relative to the promotion of the gospel, 2 Co. iii. 5; ti ets Ttva (as respects one) imep (toCto) o etc. to think better of one than agrees with what etc. [' account of one above that wliich ' etc.], 2 Co. xii. 6 ; foil, by on, Ro. viii. 18 ; toOto foil, by on, Ro. ii. 3 ; 2 Co. X. 7 ; foil, by an inf. belonging to the subject, 2 Co. xi. 5 ; foil. Ijy an ace. with inf., Ito. iii. 28 ; xiv. 14 ; Phil. iii. 13 [cf.'w. 321 (302)] ; rtvd Hi nva. to hold {A. V. ' count '] one as, 2 Co. x. 2 [cf. W. 602 (560)] ; with a preparatory ovras preceding, 1 Co. iv. 1. c. to determine, purpose, decide, [cf. American ' calculate 'J, foil, by an inf. (Eur. Or. 555) : 2 Co. x. 2. [CoMP. : dva-, hia-, napa-, ouX-Xoyi'foftai.] * Xc-ytKos, -i), -ov, (fr. Xo'yos reason), [Tim. Locr., Dem., al.], rational (Vulg. rationabilis) ; agreeable to reason, following reason, reasonable : Xarpei'a Xoytit^, the worship wliich is rendered by the reason or soul, ['spiritual'], Ro. .xii. 1 (XoytKi; Ka\ avaipoKTos irporrcfiopd, of the offer- ing which angels present to God. Test. xii. Patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547 ed. Fabric. ; [cf. Athenag. suppl. pro Christ. § 13 fin.]) ; ro Xoyticoi' yd\a, the milk -.vhich nour- ishes the soul (see yd\a), 1 Pet. ii. 2 (Xoyiitr) Tpo(p^, Eus. h. e. 4, 23 fin.).* X6-yiov, -ov, TO, (dimin. of Xo'yor [so Bleek (on Heb. v. 12) et al. ; al. neut. of Xo'yios (Mey. on Ro. iii. 2)]), prop. a little word (so Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 969 (973)), a brief utterance, in prof. auth. a divine oracle (doubtless because oracles were generally brief) ; Hdt., Thuc, Arstph., Eur. ; Polyb. 3, 112, 8 ; 8, 30, 6 ; Diod. 2, 14 ; Ael. v. h. 2, 41 ; of the Sibylline oracles, Diod. p. 602 [fr. 1. 34]; Plut. Fab. 4; in Sept. for rivn the breast-plate of the high priest, which he wore when he consulted Jehovah, Ex. xxviH. 15 ; xxix. 5, etc. ; [once for I^N, of the words of a man, Ps. xviii. (xi.\.) 15]; but chiefly for n";r?S of any utterance of God, whether precept or promise ; [cf. Philo de congr. erud. grat. § 24 ; de profug. § 1 1 sub fin.] ; of the prophecies of God in the O. T., Joseph, b. j. 6, 5, 4 ; vopovs Kat Xoyta SeaTTtaOevTa 8td 7Tpo [A. V. thoughts]. (Thuc, Xcn., Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. for n^iynn, as Prov. vi. l.S; ,Ier. xi. 1!»; Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 10.)* Xo'yop.axc'», -loi/ed : 1 Tim. iv. 5; cf. De Wette and Iluther ad loc. c. Xoyot TOV 6eov, as Din" IDT often in the O. T. prophets, an oracle or utterance by which God discloses, to the proph- ets or through the prophets, future events : used collec- tively of the sum of such utterances. Rev. i. 2, 9 ; cf. Diisterdieck and Bleek ad 11. cc. . c. what is de- clared, a thought, declaration, aphorism, (Lat. sententia} : Toi/ Xdyoi/ ToiiTov (reference is made to what follows, so that yap in vs. 12 is exjjlicatiiTi), Mt. .xix. 11 ; a dictum, maxim or weighty saying : 1 Tim. i. 15 ; iii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 11 ; Tit. iii. 8 ; i. q. proverb, Jn. iv. 37 (as sometimes in class. Grk., e. g. [Aeschyl. Sept. adv. Theb. 218]; 6 lia- Xaios Xdyos, Plat. Phaedr. p. 240 c.; conviv. p. 195 b. ; legg. 6 p. 757 a.; Gorg. p. 499 c; verum est verbum (juod memoratur, ubi amici, ibi opes, Plaut. True. 4, 4, 32 ; add, Ter. Andr. 2, 5, 15; al.). 3. discourse (Lat. ora- tii>)\ a. tlie act of spealing, speech: Acts xiv. 12; 2 Co. X. 10 ; Jas. iii. 2 ; Sia Xo'you, by word of mouth, Acts XV. 27 ; opp. to dt cttkttoXwv, 2 Th. ii. 15 ; hiii Xdyou ttoX- \ov. Acts XV. 32; \6yM ttoXXw, Acts x.x. 2; vepX ov rroXir fjplv 6 Xdyor, of whom we have many things to say, Ileb. V. 1 1 ; 6 Xdyoj iipav, Mt. v. 37; Col. iv. 6 ; X. KoKaKflas, 1 Th. ii. 5. Xdyof is distinguished from aorpia in 1 Co. ii. 1 ; fr. livaoTpocpri. 1 Tim. iv. 12; fr. Svnafiis, 1 Co. iv. 19 sq.; 1 Th. i. 5; fr. (,iyov, Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. x. 11; Col. iii. 17; fr. (pyov k. iiXi';5fia, 1 Jn. iii. 18 (see €pyov, 3 p. 248° bot.) ; oiSfvos Xdyou ri'/iim», not worth mentioning (Xdyou aitov, Ildt. 4, 28; cf. Germ, der Hede werlli), i. e. a thing of no value, Acts xx. 24 TTrWH (see XL 2 below). b. i. q. the faculty of speech: Eph. vi. 19; skill and practice in speaking : IdiaTrjs tm Xdyo» dXX' ou Tj yva>(r€t, 2 Co. -xi. 6 ; bwaros iv «pyw k. XdyM, Lk. xxiv. 19 (uvbpas Xdy« Suvarous, Diod. 13, 101); Xdyof ao//€mf (see Sdo-tr, 1 ), Phil. iv. 1 5 [where cf . Bp. Lghtft.] ; CIS Xdyoi/ vpap, to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan- tage, ib. 1 7 ; a-vvaipav Xdyoi/ (an expression not found in Grk. auth.),'to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23; xxv. 19. 4. account, i. e. answer or ex- planation in reference to judgment : Xdyoi/ 8t86vai (as often in Grk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro. xiv. 12RGTWIIL mrg. Tr mrg. ; also diroSiSovat, Heb. xiii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2 ; Acts .xLx. 40 [RG]; nepl twos, Mt. xii. 36 ; [Acts .xLx. 40 LTTrWII]; Tivl TTffJi iavToO, Ro. .\iv. 12 Ltxt.br. Tr t.xt. ; ahfw Tiva Xdyoi/ Tttpi twos, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (Plat, polit. p. 285 e.). 5. relation : vpos ov r)p.'w 6 Xdyot, with whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do'], Heb. iv. 13 ; kotu Xdyoi/, as is right, justly. Acts xviii. 14 [A. V. reason would (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4. 5; 5, 110, 10)], (n-apa Xdyoi/, unjustly, 2 Mace. iv. 36 ;^ 3 Mace. vii. 8). 6. reason, cause, ground : Ww Xdyw, for what reason? why? Acts x. 29 (« ti'vos Xdyou; Aeschyl. Choejih. 515; f'| ovSevos \6yov. Soph. Phil. 730: ti'w S^aiwXdyo. kt\. ; Plat. (iorg. p. 612 c.) ; irapeKTOs Xdyov TTopvkas (Vul2. exceptafornicationis causa) is generally referred to this head, Mt. v. 32 ; [xix. 9 L WII mrg.] ; but since where Xdyor is used in this sense the gen. is not added, it has seemed best to include this passage among those mentioned in I. 6 above. m. lu se\ cral jiassage? in the writings of John 6 Xdyos \6yxv 382 \ovco denotes the essential Word of God, i. e. the personal (hypostatic) wisdom and power in union witli God, liis minister in the creation and government of tlie universe, the cause of all the world's life both physical and ethical, which for the procurement of man's salvation put on hu- man nature in the person of Jesus the ilessiah and shone forth conspicuously from his words and deeds: Jn. i. 1, 14 ; (1 Jn. v. 7 llec.) ; with t!js fw^f added (see fu^, 2 a.), 1 Jn. i. 1; toO 6fov, Rev. .\i.\. Ki (although the in- terpretation which refers this passage to the hypostatic Xoyos is disputed by some, as by Daw, Keutest. Theolo- gie p. '216 sq.). Respecting the combined Hebrew and Greek elements out of which this conception originated among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. LiicLe, Com. lib. d. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 249-294 ; [cf. esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Word (and for works which have appeared subsecjuently, see IFe(.s.< in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6 ; Sc/iiiro; Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 34 II.) ; Bj). Lghtft. on Col. i. 15 p. 143 sq. : and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen, Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 10]. X6yx1i ->??' V' •'•• '^^ '■'°° point or head of a spear: Ildt. 1,.")2; Xen. an. 4, 7, Hi, etc. 2. a lance, spear, (shaft armed with iron) : Jn. xix. 34. (Sept. ; Find., Tragg., sq([.) * XoiSopt'u, -to ; 1 aor. (XotSoprjaa ; pres. pass. ptcp. Xoi6o- poififvos; (XoiSopos) ; to reproach, rail at, revile, heap abuse upon : rim, Jn. ix. 28 ; Acts xxiii. 4 ; pass., 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Find, and Aeschyl. down ; Sept. several times for D'1.) [Comp. : dvi-i-XoiSopc'ia.] ' XoiSopla, -as, T), (\oi&opea), railing, reviling: 1 Tim. v. 14: 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept.; Arstph., Thuc, Xen., sqq.) * XotSopos, -ov, 6, a railer, revilcr: 1 Co. v. 11 ; vi. 10. (Prov. XXV. 24 ; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj.]. Pint., al.) * Xoi|i6s, -oO, 6, [fr. Horn, down], pestilence; phir. a pestilence in divei's regions (see Xt/xos), Mt. xxiv. 7 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. xxi. 1 1 ; metajih., Ukc the Lat. pestis (Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 35 ; Cic. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow, pest, plague : Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5 ; Ael. v. h. 14, 11 ; Prov. xxi. 24 ; plur., Ps. i. 1 ; 1 Mace. xv. 21 ; avhpes Xotfjiot, 1 Jlacc. x. Gl, cf. 1 S. x. 27 ; xxv. 1 7, etc.).* Xoiiros, -ri, -nv, (XfiVa), Xe'Xowra), [fr. Find, and Ildt. down], Sept. for in', inu, "'Sty, Ufl ; plur. the remain- ing, the rest : with substantives, as ol Xotn-oi dn-oVroXot, Acts ii. 37 ; 1 Co. ix. 5 ; add, Mt. xxv. 11 ; Ro. i. 13 ; 2 Co. xii. 13; Gal. ii. 13; Pliil. iv. 3 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16; Rev. viii. 13 ; absol. the rest of any number or class under con- sideration : simply, Mt. xxii. 6; xxvii. 49 ; Mk. xvi. 13; Lk. xxiv. 10; Acts .xvii. 9; xxvii. <4; with a descrip- tion added : oJ Xotn-oi ot etc.. Acts xxviii. 9 ; 1 Tli. iv. 13 ; Rev. ii. 24; ot XotTroi TrtjvTff, 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; Phil. i. 13 ; naa-i Tois X. Lk. xxiv. 9 ; with a gen. : ot Xotjroi tujk afOpuTToiv, Rev. ix. 20 ; tov trneppaTos, ib. .\ii. 1 7 ; riv vcKpSiv, ib. XX. 5 ; with a certain distinction and contrast, the rest, who are not of the specified class or number : Lk. viii. 10 ; xviii. 9 ; Acts v. 13 ; Ro. xi. 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 12 ; 1 Th. V. 6 ; 1 Tun. v. 20 ; Rev. xi. 13 ; xix. 21 ; to Xotvrti, the rest, the things that remain: Mk. iv. 19 ; Lk. xii. 26 ; 1 Co. xi. 34 ; Rev. iii. 2. Xeut. sing, adverbially, to XotiroV what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. e. a. hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in (irk. writ, fr. Find, down) : Mk. xiv. 41 RT WH (but to in br.); Mt. -xxvi. 45 [ WII om. Tr br. to] ; 1 Co. vii. 29 ; Heb. x. 13 ; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 G L Tr [WII (but see above)] ; 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; cf. llerm. ad Vig. p. 706. ToG XoiTToO, henceforth, in the future, E])h. vi. 10 LTTrWII; Gal. vi. 17; Ildt. 2, 109; Arstph. pax 1084; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10; oec. 10, 9; al ; cf. llerm. ad Vig. p. 706 ; often also in full toC X. xpovov. [Strictly, t4 X. is ' for the fut.' tov X. ' in (the) fut.' ; to X. may be used for ToC X., but not toO X. for tA X. ; cf. Jleycr and EUicott onGal. u. s.;B.§§128, 2; 132, 26; W. 463 (432).] b. al last ; already : Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see Passow or L. andS. s. v.). c. to Xotjrtjv, dropping the notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover, [A. V. often ///in//'/], forming a transition to other things, to which the attention of the hearer or reader is directed: Eph. vi. 10 RG; Phih iii. 1; iv. 8; 1 Th. iv. 1 Rec; 2 Th. iii. 1 ; o Se XoijrtJv has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2 KG ; XotjTtji/ in 1 Co. i. 16; iv. 2 LTTrWII; 1 Th. iv. 1 G LTTrWII. AovKos, -ti, 6, (contr. fr. Aovkovos ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 14], W. 103 (97) [cf. B. 20 (18); on the diverse origin of contr. or abbrev. prop, names in as cf. Loheclc, Patholog. Proleg. p. 50C ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]), Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17 ; x.\. 5-15 ; xxi. 1-18; xxviii. 10-16) ; he was a physician, and ace. to the tradition of the church from Irenteus [3, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has been recently assailed with little success, the author of the third canonical (iospel and of th^ .Vets of the Ajwstles : Col. iv. 14 ; 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; Philem. 24.* AouKics, -ou, 6, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of Cyrene, a prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch : Acts xiii. 1 ; perhaps the same Lucius that is mentioned in Ro. xvi. 21.* Xourptiv, -oC, T<5, tXova), fr. Horn, down (who uses \oiTp6v fr. the uncontr. form Xocv TrXi/ymf, by washing to cleanse from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [W.372 (348), cf. § 30, 6 a.; B. 322 (277)] ; 6 XfXou/xcVof, absol., he that has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage see Kadapos, a. [and cf. Syn. below]) ; XfX. to (tuijui, with dat. of the instr., CSqt», Heb. x. 22 (23) ; mill, to wash one's se//[cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]: 2 Pet. ii. 22; trnp. AvBBa 383 Av<7avCa<; Christ is described as 6 "Koiaas fjixas diro rav afiapriSiv fffiSiv, i. e. who by suffering the bloody death of a vicari- ous sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev. i. 5 RG [al. Xi^o-ar (q. v. 2 tin.). Comp. : ano-'koia>.'\* [Stn. Ko6a>, viirra, irKvva: n\. is used of things, esp. garments; \. and v. of persons, — v. of a part of the body (hands, feet, face, eyes), A. of tlie whole. All three words occur in Lev. xv. 11. Cf. Trench, N. T. S\ti. § xlv.] AiiSSa, -7)f [Acts ix. 38 R G L, but -as T Tr WH ; see WH. App. p. 156], ^, and Ai'SSa, -oji-, rd ([LTTrWH in] Acts ix. 32, 35 ; cf. Tf/f. Proleg. p. 1 16 ; B. 18 (16) sq. [cf. W. 61 (60)]) ; IIebr.iS(l Chr. viii. 12; Ezra ii. 33; Neh. xi. 35) ; Lt/r/ila, a large Benjamite [cf. 1 Clir. 1. c] town (Aij36o Kw/iT), noKfcos toC jxeyiBovs ovk dnoSeovaa, Joseph, antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the Roman empire, about nine [' eleven ' (Ordnance Survey p. 21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd: Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp. 244-248; Arnold in llerzog viii. p. 627 scj. ; [BB. DD. s. V.].* AvSia, -as, 17, Lijdia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith : Acts xvi. 14, 40. The name was borne by other women also, Horat. carm. 1,8; 3, 3.* AuKaovia, -as, fj, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Jlinor, situated between Pi,sidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and Iconium [cf. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in- habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char- acter of which cannot be determined : Acts xiv. 6. Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. ; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Gesellsch. x. ('56) p. 378; \_Wriglit, Hittites ('84) p. 56].* AvKaovio-Ti, (XuKaovi'fo), to use the language of Lyca- onia), adv., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts .xiv. 11 (see \vKaovia)* AukCo, -as, fj, Lycia, a mountainous region of Asia Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the Mediterranean : Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D. s. V. : Diet, of Geogr. s. v. ; reff. in Bj). Lghtft. on Col. p. 1.]* XvKos, -ov, o, Ilebr. 3X1, a wolf: Mt. x. 16 ; Lk. x. 3 ; Jn. X. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa- cious, destructive men : Mt. vii. 15 ; Acts xx. 29 ; (used trop. even in Horn. II. 4, 471; 16, 156; in the O. T., Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).* Xv|xaCvo|iai. : 'im\>i. eXvjxaivoixrjV, dep.mid. ; (Xi'/i?; injur v, ruin, contumely); fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; 1. to affix a slicjma to, to dishonor, spot, dcjile, (Ezek. xvi. 25 ; Prov. xxiii. 8 ; 4 JMacc. xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame- fulli/ or with injury, to raraye, devastate, ruin : eXvfiaii/fTo TTiv c/cKXijo-mv, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per- secutor, [A. V. made havock of]. Acts viii. 3.* XviTEu, -S> ; 1 aor. (Kinrjcra ; ])f. XeXi-nr^Ka ; Pass., pres. XuTToC/iat ; 1 aor. iXvm'idijv ; fut. XvTrTjdijaofiai ; {Xirrrj) ; [fr. lies, down]; to make sorrowful; to affect with sad- ness, cause grief, to throw into sorrow : riva, 2 Co. ii. 2, 6 ; vii. 8 ; pass., Mt. xiv. 9 ; xvii. 23 ; xviii. 31 ; xi.x. 22 ; xxvi. 22 ; Mk. x. 22 ; xiv. 19 ; Jn. .xvi. 20 ; .xxi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 4; 1 Th. iv. 13; 1 Pet. i. 6; joined with dSij/iowiv, Mt. xxvi. 37 ; opp. to x^'P"") 2 Co. vi. 10 ; Kara 6e6v, in a manner acceptable to GSod [cf. W. 402 (375)], 2 Co. vii. 9, 1 1 ; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend : to Trveiiui TO ayiov, Eph. iv. 30 (see TTViVfia, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv. 15. [CoMP. : crwX- Xutt/oi». Syn. see Bpr^via, fin.] * \iTn\, -rjs, Tj, [fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down], sorrott',/)ain, grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. ii. 7 ; opp. to x^P") J"- -"^^'i- -^\ Heb. xii. 11 ; XiJttiji/ f^oJ (see ex™» I. 2 g. p. 267''), Jn. xvi. 21 sq. ; Phil. ii. 27 ; with addition of dno and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3 ; X. jiol eort, Ro. Lx. 2 ; iv \ijrT] 'e'p)^eepeiv [R. V. griefs'], 1 Pet. ii. 19.* Auo-avCas, -ov, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy, who from B. c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot of Mount I^cbanon, and was put to death B. c. 34 at the instance of Cleopatra: Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3; 15, 4, 1 ; b. j. 1, 13, 1, cf. b. j. 1, 9, 2. 2. a tetr.arch of Abilene (see 'A^iXr]v!}), in the days of John the Bap- tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa I. and Herod Agrippa II., Josephus mentions t) Avaavlov rerpapxia (antt. 18, 6, 10, cf. 20, 7, 1), ffaaiXfia r) tov Avcravlov KoXovplvr) (b. j. 2, 11, 5), 'A^i'Xa r) Xvaavlou (antt. 19, 5, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be meant, and that the region which he governed continued to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred- ner, Strauss, Gfrbrer, Weisse), denying that tliere ever was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly- sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8, expressly distinguishes Chalcis from the tetrarchy of Lysanias ; nor is it probable that the region which Ly- sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only si.x years ' took its name from him ever after. Therefore it is more correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly- sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be meant; and that he is identical with the one spoken of by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Abilene; Wicscler in llerzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitrage zur richtig. Wiirdi- gung d. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204]; Blcelc, Synopt. Er- kliir. u. s. w. i. p. 154 sq. ; Kneucker in Schenkel i. ]i. 26 sq. ; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in Riehm s. v. ; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 79 sqq. ; Avataf 384 \v(o Kenan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d' Abilene (in the Me- inoires de I'Acad. des inscrip. et bcllos-lettres for 1870, Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 4i)-8-t) ; BB.DD. s. v.].* Aixrlas, -ov, 6, (^Clamlius) Li/sias, a Konian fhiliarcli [.\. V. ' cliiyf captain '] : Acts .\.\iii. 2ij ; xxiv. 7 [Kcc], •.'2. [1!. 1). Am. cd. s. V.]* Xvo-is, -eat, ij, (Xiio)), [t'r. Horn, down], ii luo.iing of any himd, as that of marriage; hence onco in the N. T. of divorce, 1 Co. vii. 27.* Xvo-iTcXt'u, -. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1.]» XvTpov, -ov, TO, (Xuo)), Sept. passim for 133^ ^'^^^, P'l^i etc. ; the price for redeemini/, ransom (paid for slaves, Lev. xix. 20; for captives, Is. xiv. 1.3 ; for the ransom of a life, Ex. xxi. 30 ; Xinn. xxxv. 31 sq.) : avrl ttoXXoji/, to liberate many from the misery and penalty of their sins. Mt. XX. 28 ; Mk. x. 45. (Find., Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., al.) • Xurpdu, -<5 : Pass., 1 aor. iXvTfxaSrjv; Mid., pres. inf. "KvTpoOadm ; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. XvTpaxnjTat ; {XvTpoy, q. V.) ; Sept. often for Sxj and ms ; 1. to release on receipt of ransom: Plat. Theaet. p. l(i.5 e. ; Diod. 19, 73 ; Sept., Num. xviii. 15, 1 7. 2. to redeem, liberate hij /ini/ment of ransom, [(Dem., al.)], jienerally expressed by the mid. ; univ. to liberate : tlvu apyvptm, and likewise tK with the gen. of the thing; pass, ix Trjs iiaraias dva- , 2 [cf. (!raec. Ven. Lev. xxv. 10, etc. ; Ps. xlviii. (xHx.) 9]) : Lk. i. 68; ii. 38; specifically, re- demption from the penalty of sin: Heb. ix. 12. [(Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 12, 7; 'Teaching' 4, C; etc.)]» Xwrpw'His, -ov, 6, (XuTpdco), redeemer; deliverer, liber- ator: Acts vii. 35; [Sept. Lev. xxv. 31, 32; Philo dc saerif. Ab. et Cain. § 37 sub fin.]; for ^KJ, of Go' \vxviav Ttvos {(KKXi](Tiat) ex ToG tuttov avriji, to move a diurcli out of the place which it has hitln'i-to held among the churches; to take it out of the number of churches, remove it altogether. Rev. ii. 5.* Xvxvos, -ov, o, Sept. for 13, [fr. Horn, down]; a lamp, candle [V], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat. candelabrum), [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlvi. ; Becker, Charicles, Sc. ix. (Eng. trans, p. 15G n. 5)] : Mt. v. 15 ; Mk. iv. 21 ; [Lk. xi. 36]; xii. X>; Rev. xxii. 5; <^as \vxvov. Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to <|)>ov ([Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33 ; xv. 8], see uTTTtt), 1 ). To a "hunj) " are likened — the eye, 6 Xvxvos Toil (TwpaTos, i. e. which shows the body which way to move and turn, Mt. vi. 22 ; Lk. xi. 34 ; the prophecies of the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowl- edge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven down even to the time when by the Holy Sjiirit that same light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts of men, the light by which the prophets themselves had been cnlijliteiu'd and which was necessary to the full per- ce])tion of the true meaning of their prophecies, 2 Pet. i. Ill; to the brightness of a lanij) that cheers the be- holders a teacher is compared, whom even those rejoiced in who were unwilling to comply with his demands, Jn. v. 35 ; Christ, who will hereafter illumine his follow- ers, the citizens of the heavenly kingdom, with his own glory, Rev. xxi. 23.* Xiio; im])f. iXvoV, 1 aor. iKvrra; Pass., ])res. Xiopai; im])f. i\vupr]v ; ]>f. 2 pers. sing. XiXvirai, ptcp. XfXvpevos; 1 iun: eXCBriv ; I fnt-XvOijiTopat; fr. Horn, down ; Se])t. sev- eral times for nili) to oi)en, Tftn and Chald. K-)0 (Dan. iii. 25; v. 12); to loose; i.e. 1. to loose anij person (or thin;/) tied or fastened : prop, the bandages of the feet, the shoes, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27; Acts [xiii. 25] ; vii. 33, (so for hm to take off, Ex. iii. 5 ; Josh. V. 15); ■naXov {hehiptvov), Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2, [3 L mrg.], 4 sq. ; Lk. xix. 30 sq. 33 ; bad angels. Rev. ix. 14 sq. ; ToK fiovv dno t>)s (paTvijs, Lk. xiii. 15; troj). of husband and wife joined together by the boml of matri- niou}', XfXvirat affo yvvaiKos (ojip. to fic'ficirat yvi/aiKl), sjioken of a single man, whether he has already had a wife or has not yet married, 1 Co. vii. 27. 2. to loose one bound, i. e. to unbiiid, release from bonds, set free : one bound up (swathed in bandages), Jn. xi. 44 ; bound with chains (a ))risoner). Acts xxii. 30 (where Rec. adds aTTo Tail/ Sfirpdv) ; hence i. q. to dischnr(/e from prison, let go, Acts xxiv. 26 Rec. (so as far back as Horn.) ; in Apocalyptic vision of the devil (KcxXfiapcvou), Rev. xx. 3 ; fK TTJt (j)vXnK?is avroi, 7 ; metaph. to free (niro Sea-pov) from the bondage of disease (one held by Satan) by restoration to health, Lk, xiii. 16 ; to release one bound by the chains of sin, « tS>v apapnSiv, Rev. i. 5 L T Tr WII (see Xoiio fin. [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.]). 3. to loosen, undo, dissolve, anything bound, tied, or compacted to- \vco 385 fiayoif gether : the seal of a book, Rev. v. 2, [5 Rec] ; trop., Tov Sea/iov rrji ■yXucroTjc titos, to remove an impediment of speech, restore speech to a thmib man, ]\Ik. vii. 35 (-Tustin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nomen Battos propter linf/uae obHgalionem fuit ; 6 linguae j^oilis .■iolutis loqui primum coepit) ; an assembly, i. e. lo dismiss, break u]) : ttju xruvayayfiv, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (ayoprjv, Hom. II. 1, 305; Od. 2, 257, etc.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; Trjv a-Tpari.di', Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 2) ; of the bonds of death, \v€iv ras w&ivas tov ■Savdrov, Acts ii. 24 (see ciSiV). Laws, as having bind- ing force, are likened to bonds; hence \ieiv is i. q. lo annul, subvert; to do away with ; to deprive of authority, whetlier by precept or by act: ivToKfjv, Mt. v. 19; rov vopov, Jn. vii. 23 ; to o-dftSaToK, the commandment con- cerning the sabbath, Jn. v. 18 ; tt)v yparjyTjv, Jn. x. 35 ; cf. Kuinoel on Mt. v. 1 7 ; [on the singular reading Xvci toi» 'iricrovv, 1 Jn. iv. 3 WH mrg. see Westcott, Com. ad loo.] ; by a Chald. and Talmud, usage (equiv. to IjnS, H'W [cf. W. 32]), opp. to 8e'vpav, Xen. an. 2, 4, 1 7 sq.) ; to dissolve something coherent into parts, to destroy : pass., [tovtoiv irdvTav Xuo/ie'i/mv, 2 Pet. iii. 11] ; to (rroix^ia {Kavtroviieva), 2 Pet. iii. 10; ovpavol (jj-upoijftfvoi), ib. 12; metaph. to overthrow, do away with : ra spya rov 8ial3oKov, 1 Jn. iii. 8. [CoMP. : dva-, dno-, tia-, €<-, cm-, Kara-, Trapa-Xuo).] * AuCs [WH Aui't], -iSof, 17, Lois, a Christian matron, the grandmother of Timothy : 2 Tim. i. 5.* Amt, S, (ai'? a covering, veil), [indecl.; cf. B.D.], Lot, the son of Haran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27, 31 ; xii. 4 sqq. ; xiii. 1 sqq. ; xiv. 12 sqq. ; xix. 1 sqq.) : Lk. xvii. 28 sq. 32 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7.» M [M, (i: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Stur;, De tlial. Maced. et Alex. p. 1.30 sq.) retention in .such forms as Kxifi^ofjiai, ape- KT}fjLrpdT\, TrpofTuinoKT^yuTTTqs, avd\r]fi^Ls, and the like, see (the several words in their places, and) W. 4S; B. 62 (54) ; esp. TJf. Proleg. p. 72 ; Kuenen and Cobet, Praef . p. Lxx. ; Scriv- ■ener, Collation etc. p. Iv. sq., and In trod. p. 14 ; Fritzsche, Rom. vol. i p. 110 ; on -/u- or -mm- in pf. pass, ptcps. (e. g. Siea-rpafi- ^4i/os, TTipipepa/ifjiii/os, etc., see each word in its place, and) •cf. ir//. App. p. 170 sq. ; on the dropping of fi in 4iiTriir\rjfxi, 4fiTnTrpd(o, see the words.] Made, 6, (ai'O tQ be small), Maath, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 26.* MayaSdv, sec the foil. word. Ma-ySaXd, a place on the western shore of the Lake of Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards the north ; according to the not improbable conjecture of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 267) identical with Ss-S'lJn (i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38) ; in the Jerus. Talmud '71^-3 •(Magdal or Mif/dal) ; now Medschel or Medjdel, a wretched ilohammedan village with the ruins of an an- cient tower (see Win. RWB. s. v.; Robinson, Palest, ii. p. 396sq.; ^rnoW in Ilerzog viii. p. 661 ; Kneucker in Schenkel iv. p. 84 ; [Ilackett in B.D. s. v. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]) : Mt. xv. 39 RG, with the var. reading (adopted by L TTrWH [cf. WH. App. > O V p. 160]) MayaSdv, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. o^.^); if either of these forms was the one used by the Evann-elist it could very easily have been changed by the copyists into the more familiar name MaySaXa.* 25 Ma'ySaXip'fi, -^s, }), (MaySoXd, q. v.), Magdalene, a icoman of ilagdala : Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; .xxviii. 1 ; Mk. XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1, 9 ; Lk. viii. 2 ; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25 ; X.X. 1,18.* [Ma-yeSiov (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see 'Ap^ayeSmi/.] (laYeto (T WH fiayla, see I, t), -ay, 7, (/idyoj, q. v.), magic; phir. magic arts, sorceries : Acts viii. 11. (The- ophr., Joseph., Pint., al.) * \i.a^iiv ovp. was adopted, but without changing the sense ; [yet Lchm. inserts tv]." (ia9T|W|S, -oil, 6, {pxtvOava), a learner, pupil, disciple ■■ Univ., opp. to hihauKoKos, Mt. .\. 24; Lk. vi. 40; rivot, one who follows one's teaching : 'Icodxraw, Mt. ix. 14 ; Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; rav ^aptcr., Jit. xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 33; MwiJo-e'oot, Jn. ix. 28; of Jesus, — in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews who favored him, joined his party, became his adher- ents : Jn. vi. G6 ; vii. 3 ; xix. 38 ; oj(\os padjjToyv avrov, Lk. vi. 17; 01 fi. avTov iKavol, Lk. vii. 1 1 ; anav to jrX^^or rmii pad. Lk. .xix. 37; but especially the twelve apostles : Mt. X. 1 ; xi. 1 ; xii. 1 ; Mk. viii. 27 ; Lk. viii. 9 ; Jn. ii. 2 ; iii. 22, and very often ; also simply oJ padryral, Mt. xiii. 10; .xiv. 19; Mk. x. 21 ; Lk. ix. HJ; Jn. vi. H [Rec], etc. ; in the Acts 01 pa6r)Tai are all those who confess Jesus as the Messiah, Christians : Acts vi. 1 sq. 7 ; ix. 1 9 ; xi. 26, and often ; with toO itupiou added. Acts ix. 1. The word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the N. T., nor in the Apocalypse ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt.], Arstph., Xen., Plato, down. )ia6^Tpia, -or, 17, (a fem. form of padrjrris; cf. ■«/^aXnjs, •^dKTpui, etc., in Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 425), a female ilis- ciple ; i. q. a Chriitian woman : Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2, 52; Diog. Laert. 4, 2 ; 8, 42.)* [MaB9a6Cas, see Marradias.'] MaBBatos, filaBddv, see MarOaios, MaT8dt>. MaflBar, see MarddT. MaBooo-dXa, T WII Ma^outraXa [cf. Trlf. Proleg. p. 103], o, (n'7u'?nr) man of a dart, fr. ino, construct form of the unused no a man, and vhp a dart [cf. B. D. s. V.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of Noah (Gen. v. 21) : Lk. iii. 37.» Ma'ivdv (TTrWH M(vva), indecl., (Lchm. Mewas, gen. Mfwa), 6, Menna or Menan, [A. V. (1611) Menam}, the name of one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm. br. Toi M.].* |xaCvo|xai; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to be mad, lo rave : said of one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right mind, Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to iTaxpporrivr)! pr/para aTrofj^OtyytirSai, Acts x.wi. 25 ; joined willi ^aipuviov f\iiv, Jn. x. 20. [CoMT. : (p-palvopai.'\* (ittKaplJu ; Attic fut. paxapuii [cf. B. 37 (32)]; (paKa- ptot) ; fr. Horn, down ; .Sept. for ItyN ; to pronounce blessed : riva, Lk. i. 48 ; Jas. V. 1 1 (here Vulg. heati/ico).' (laKoptos, 'a, -ov, (poetic /icutap), [fr. Pind., Plat, down], blessed, happy, joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 11 ; vi. 15 (cl. jidK»pts 6eol in Ilom. and Hes.) ; «Xjri's, Tit. ii. 13; as a pri'dicatc, Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 14; \\u 14 ; riyovpal Tiva paK- Acts .xxvi. 2 ; paxap. iu tlvi, Jas. i. 25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptcp. taking tin- place of the subject, poKijipios 6 etc. (Ilebr. "3 'ydV^, Ps. i. 1 ; Deut. xxxiii. 29, etc.) blessed the man, wiio etc. [W. 551 (512 sq.)] : Mt, v. 3-11 ; Lk. vi. 20- 22 ; Jn. xx. 29 ; Rev. i. 3 ; xvi. 15 ; xix. 9 ; xx. 6 ; xxii. 14 ; by the addition to the noun of a ptcp. which take» the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq. ; Rev. xiv. 13; foil, by os with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6 ; Lk. vii. 23 ; xiv. 15 ; Ro. iv. 7 sq. ; the subject noun in- tervening, Lk. xii. 37, 43 ; xxiii. 29 ; Jas. i. 12 : paK. . . . 071, Mt. xiii. IC; .\vi. 17; Lk. .xiv. 14; foil, by tdv, Jn. xiii. 1 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 40. (laKapurpids, -ov, 0, (paKapl(u)), declaration of blessed- ness : Ro. iv. 9 ; Gal. iv. 15 ; 'K.cyeiv rhv pax. tivos, to utter a declaration of blessedness upon one, a fuller way of say- ing paKapl^eiv Tivd, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6. (Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d. ; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34] ; Plut. mor. p. 471 c. ; eccles. writ.) * MaKtSovia, -as, f/ [on use of art. with cf. W. § 1 8, 5 a. c], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the ^Egean Sea, on the W. by Illyria, and on the N. by Dardania and Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)] : Acts xvi. 9 sq. 12; xviii. 5 ; xix. 21 sq. ; xx. 1, 3 ; Ro. xv. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 5 ; 2 Co. i. 16 ; ii. 13 ; vii. 5 ; viii. 1 ; xi. 9 ; Phil. iv. 15 ; 1 Th. i. 7 sq.; iv. 10; 1 Tim. i. 3.* MoKtSuv, -ovos, 6, a Macedonian : Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B. § 1 2.3, 8 Rem.] ; xix. 29 ; xxvii. 2 ; 2 Co. ix. 2, 4.* lioLKeXXov, -ov, TO, a Lat. word, maccHum [])rob. akin to pd)(-ri\ Vanicek p. G8" (cf. Plut. as below)], a place where meat and other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro- vision-market, \_X.y .shambles']: iCo. X. 25. (Dio Cass. 61, 1 8 Tijv dyopav Toij' oxjfo»', TO paKcKKov; [Plut.ii. p. 277 d.. (quaest. Rom. 54)].) * liaKpdv (pro]), fem. ace. of the adj. paxpos, sc. obov, a long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept. for pin"', [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; far, a great waxj : absol., d-nixfiv, Lk. xv. 20 ; of the terminus to which, far hence, e'lajroo-TfXo) ; 1 aor., impv. fj.aKpodvfirjv. The reading [of L T Tr WH] koi fiaKpodvp.e1 fV auro'is; by which to paxpo- Bvpeiv is denied to God [cf. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac- cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands the notion of slowness on God's part in avenging the right ; cf. De 'Wette ad loc. ; [but to this it is replied, that the denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as- sumption of apparent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.].' )iaKpo6v|i(a, -ac, }], (paKpodvpos [^cf. paKpo0vpea>]), (Vulg. longanimitas, etc.), i. e. 1. patience, endurance, con- stancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear- ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq. ; avBpanos &>v pyjoenoTe ttjv dXvTrtav atrov Traph Sewv, oKKa poKpoBvplav, Menand. frag. 19, p. 203 ed. Jleineke [vol. iv. p. 238 Frag, comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]) : Col. i. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. Ivii. 15 ; Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 5 ; cf. 1 Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer- ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for Q'3X 1I1S, Jer. xv. 15) : Ro. ii. 4 ; ix. 22 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; GaL v. 22 ; Eph. iv. 2; Col. iii. 12; 1 Tun. i. 16 [cf. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim. iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 1 ; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).' [Syv. paKpoBvpia, viTopovl\ (occur together or in the same context in Col. i. H ; 2 Cor. vi. 4, 6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10 ; .Jas. v. 10, U ; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64 ; Ignat. ad Eph. .3, 1) : Bp. Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. c), "The difference of meaning is best seen in thgir opposites. WhUe (mo. is the temper which does not easily succumb under suffering paK. is the self-restraint which does not hastUy retaliate a wrong. The one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18 ; xvi. 32) . . . This distinc- tion, though it applies generally, is not true without excep- tion". . .; cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at length) Trench, N. T Syn. § hii.] ().aKpo8v|i- aria) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept. for 'Sn, disease, Dent. vii. 15 ; xxviii. 61 ; Is. xxxviii. 9, etc.) ; joined with voaos, Mt. iv. 23 ; ix. 35 ; x. 1.* [loXaKos, -f), -ov, soft ; soft to the touch : ipdna, Mt. .xi. 8 R G L br. ; Lk. vii. 25, (Iparlav no\vTf\S>v k. paKaKoiv, Artem. oneir. 1, 78; ea-dfjs, Hom. Od. 23, 290; Artem. oneir. 2, 3 ; x'™"' Horn. II. 2, 42) ; and simply tA paXaxd, soft raiment (see Xfuxot, 1) : Mt. xi. 8 TTrWH. Like the Lat. mollis, metajih. and in a bad sense : effeminate, of a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.; [Diog. Laert. 7, 173 fin.]).* UaXeKi^iK (MeXfXcijA, Tdf.), o, (SsSSn? praising God, fr. ^Snp and hn), Mahalaleel [A. V. MaleleeQ, son of Cainan: Lk. iii. 37.* (loXioT-a (superlative of the adv. paXa), [fr. Hom. down], adv., especially, chieffy, most of all, above all: Acts xx. 38; x.w. 26; Gal. vi. 10; Phil. iv. 22; iTim. iv. 10; v. 8, 17 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. i. 10; Philem. 16:2 Pet. ii. 10; fiaXiora yfaxm;?, especially expert, thoroughly well-informed, Acts xxvi. 3.* |id\Xov (compar. of pd\a, very, very much), [fr. Hom. down], adv., more, to a greater degree ; rather ; 1. added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a fiaXkoi' 388 fiavddvm greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree, more, more fulbj, (Germ, in hohercm Grade, Maasse) ; a. words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the ablative (dat.) : ttoXXm inucli, 0^/ far, Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in bolli these verses the under- lying thought is, the measure of salvation for whieli we are indebted to Christ is far greater than that of the ruin which came from Adam ; for the difference between the consequences traceable to Adam and to Christ is not only one of quality, but of (juantity also; cf. Riickert, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 281 sq. [al. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Goiiet) content them.^elves here witii a logical increase, /«;• more cerlainh/']) ; 2 Co. iii. 9, 11 ; Phil. ii. 12 ; noara hoir much, Lk. .\ii. 24 ; Ro. .ni. 12 ; Philem. 16 ; Ileb. ix. 14 ; ToaovTa by so much, Strut by as much, (sc. fiaWov), Ileb. .\. 25. b. in comparison it often so stands that than before must be mentally added, [A. V. the more, so much the morel, as Mt. xxvii. 24 (jiaWov dopv^os yiverai [but al. refer this to 2 b. a. below]) ; Lk. v. 15 {bii)px"o ftoKKov) ; Jn. V. 18 {fiaWov f^TjTovv) ; xix. 8 ; Acts v. 14 ; i.x. 22 ; xxii. 2; 2 Co. vii. 7; 1 Th. iv. 1, 10; 2 Pet. i. 10; ?j-i HaWov KOi /iuWov, I'hil. i. 9 ; or the person or thing with which the comparison is made is evident from what pre- cedes, as Phil. iii. 4 ; it is added to comparatives, Mk. vii. 30 ; 2 Co. vii. 13 ; ttoXXu ^aXXoi» Kptla-aov, Phil. i. 23 ; see [Wetstein on Phil. 1. c.'] ; W. § 35, 1 cf. 603 (501); [15. § 123, 11]; to verbs that have a comparative force, HaWuv 8ta(j)epfiv rivos, to be of much more value than one, Mt. vi. 20. lioXKov Ij, more than, Mt. xviii. 13 ; fiaWav with gen., irivTuiv ipaiv, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Xen. mem. 3, 12, 1). joined to positive terms it forms a perii)lirasis for a comparative [cf. W. § 35, 2 a.], foil, b}- ij, as fiaKiiptov fi. for fiaKapiwrepov. Acts xx. 35 ; add, 1 Co. i.K. 15 ; Gal. iv. 27; TToXXw /iuXAoi/dxaynaia, 1 Co. xii. 22; sometimes /xaX- Xoi/ seems to be omitted before ^; see under ^, 3 f. c. /iaXXoi» 8e', what moreover is of greater moment, [A. V. yea rather} : Ro. viii. 34 (2 Mace. vi. 23). 2. it marks the preference of one thing above another, and is to be rendered rather, sooner, (Germ, eher, vielmehr, lleber); a. it denotes that which occurs more easily than something else, and may be rendered sooner, (Germ, eher) : thus ctoXXm p-aWov in arguing from the less to the greater, Ml. vL.'io'; Ro.v.9sq.; Heb.xii. 9[here LTTr WllwoXi ^.] ; also TToXi [R G ttoXXm] fiaWov sc. ovk fKcf>cv^oiie6a, i e. much more shall we not escape (cf. W. p. 633 (5SS) note [B. § 148, 3 b.]), or even tpSiKov ixia-6atro8ncrlav \rj-^np.fda (Heb. ii. 2), or something similar (cf. Matthiac § 034, 3), Heb. xii. 25. woo-o) fiaWov, Mt. vii. 11 ; x. 25 ; Lk. xii. 28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 10. in a question, oifiaXXov; (Lat. nonnepotiusf) \do not . . . more"], 1 Co. ix. 1 2. b. it is opposed to something else and does away with it; accordingly it may be rendered the rather (Germ. vielmehr); a. after a preceding negative or prohibi- tive sentence: Mt. X. 6, 28; XXV. 9; Mk. v. 20 ; Ro. xiv. 13; iTim.vi. 2; Heb. xii. 13; /i5XXoj/ 8f , Eph. iv. 28 ; v. 11. ov)(\ fiSWov; (jionne polius?) not rather etc.? 1 Co. V. 2; vi. 7. p. so that ^aXXoc belongs to the thing ■which is preferred, consequently to a noun, not to a verb: Jn. iii. 19 (jfyainfaav /laXXoi» to «rxdros tf tA e^mt, i. e. when they ought to have loved the light they (hatiil it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20) ; xii. 43 ; Acts iv. 19; V. 29 ; 2 Tim. iii. 4. that which it opposes and sets aside nuist be learned from the context [cf. W. § 85, 4] : Mk. XV. 1 1 (sc. ff Tov'lrfo-oiv) ; Phil. i. 1 2 (where the mean- ing is, ' so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis- advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of disciples is increased in consequence of it'). y. by way of correction, fioXKov 8«, nay rather ; to speak more correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (Jo.seph. antt. 15, 11, 3; Ael. v. h. 2, 13 and often in prof. auth. ; cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 1 70 s(].). c. it does not do away with that with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the preference: more wiUiiKjly, more readily, sooner (^GcTOi.licber), 6e\a> /laXXoi/and fv&OKw fiaXKov, to prefer, 1 Co. xiv. 5;' 2 Co. v. 8, (/3ouXo^ai p£K\ov, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1,1); {ijXoCi', 1 Co. xiv. 1 {fiaWov sc. fijXoCrf) ; }(po>pai, 1 Co. vii. 21. MttXxos (■]'75 Grecized ; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. Lutli. Theol., 1870, p. 005), -ou, d, JMalchus, a servant of the high-priest : Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf. Hackclt in B. D. s. v.] • )id|i|j:if, -ijf, Tf, 1. in the earlier (irk. writ, mother (the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2. in the later writ. ([Philo]. Joseph., Plut, A])p., Ildian., Artem.) i. q. rf\6r), grandmother (see Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 133-135 [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5 ; 4 Mace. xvi. 9.* |xa)i.uvd$ ((iLTTrWII), incorrectly fia/i/iwr/ar (Rec. [in Mt.]),-a [B. 20 (IS) ; AV. § 8, l],d, mammon (Chald. KJ10K"p, to be derived, apparently, fr. px ; hence what is trusted in [ef. liuxlorf. Lex. chald. talniud. ct rabbin, col. 1217 sq. (esp. ed. Fischer p. 613 scp) ; ace. to Gesenius (Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. ti-^pti treasure (Gen. xliii. 23) ; cf. B. D. s. v. ; Edershcim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 209]), riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi- fied and opposed to God; cf. Phil. iii. 19) ; Lk. xvi. 9, 11. (" lucrum punice mammon dicitur," Augu.stine [de serm. Dom. in monte, 1. ii. c. xiv. (§ 47)]; the Sept. trans, the Hebr. nj^OS in Is. xx.xiii. drfaavpol, and in Ps. xxxvi. (x.xxvii.) 3 ttXovtoj.) * Mava ; 2 aor. epaSov ; pf . ptcp. fiefiadrjKas ; Sept. for np"^ ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to lenrn,be apprised; a. Univ.: absol. to increase one's knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 7 ; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv. 31 ; Ti', Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Phil. iv. 9 ; 2 Tim. iii. 14 ; Rev. xiv. 3 ; in Jn. vii. 15 supply aiVd ; foil, by an indir. quest., Mt. ix. 13 ; Xpurrov, to be imbued with the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20 ; ti' foil, by ano w. fiavia 389 Maptd/M gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Jit. xxiv. 32 ; Mk. xiii. 28 ; djro w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Jit. xi. 29 ; Col. i. 7 ; as in class. Grk. (cf. Kriiger § 68, 34, 1 ; B. § 147, 5 [cf. 167 (146) and d-n-o, II. 1 d.]) ; foil, by Trapd w. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 cf. Jn. vi. 4.5 ; foil, by (V w. dat. of pers., In one i. e. by his example [see ■ iv, I. 3 b.], 1 Co. iv. 6 [cf. W. 500 (548 sq.) ; B. 394 sq. (338)]. b. i. q. In hear, be informed: foil, by oti. Acts xxiii. 27 ; 7-1 olrd ra/os (gen. of pers.), Gal. iii. 2 [see otto, u. s. ]. o. to learn bi/ use and practice ; [in the Pret.] to be in the habit of, accustomed to : foil, by an inf., 1 Tim. V. 4 ; Tit. iii. 14 ; Phil. iv. 1 1 , (Aesehyl. Prom. 1068 ; Xen. an. 3, 2, 25) ; c/xadev d<}>' hv €na6e tj]v imaKoriv, Ileb. v. 8 [cf. AV. § 68, 1 and dno, u. s.]. In the difficult passage 1 Tim. V. 13, neither dpyai depends upon the verb fiavdd- vova-t (which would mean " they learn to be idle ", or " learn idleness " ; so Bretschneider [Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and W. 347 (325 sq.) ; [cf. Stallbaum's note and reif. on Plato's Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor -irepupxoiKvoi (" they learn to go about from house to house," — so the majority of interpreters ; for, ace. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptcp. joined to the verb fiavddveiv and belonging to the subject denotes tvhat sort of a person one learns or perceives him- self to be, as efiaSev eyKvos ovcra, "she perceived herself to be with child," Hdt. 1,5); but fiavddvetv must be taken absolutely (see a. above) and emphaticall}-, of what they learn by going about from house to house and what it is unseemly for them to know ; cf. Bengel ad loc, and B. § 144, 17; [so AVordsworth in loc.]. [Comp. : Kara- fiav6dv : 1 fut. pass. iiapavdr]aop.ai. ; fr. Horn. II. 9, 212; 23, 228 on; to extinguish (a flame, fire, Ught, etc.) ; to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass. to wither, wilt, dry up (Sap. ii. 8 of roses ; Job xv. 30). Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, (v6(ra, Eur. Ale. 203 ; TM Xi/ia, Joseph, b. j. 6, 5, 1) ; i. q. to have a miserable end: Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig. suggested by what he had just said (10) ; [B. 52 (46)].* (lapavafld [so Lchm., but juipdv dSd U G T Tr WH], the Chald. words Ti^Vi XJ'^p. i- c our Lord cometh or will come : 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB.DD. ; cf. Klostermann, Pro- bleme etc. (1883) p. 220 sqq. ; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 1 74 ; Nestle in Theol. Stud, aus AVurtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]* (lapyapCrqs, -ov, 6, a pearl : Mt. xiii. 45 sq. : 1 Tim. ii. 9; Kev. xvii. 4 ; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereLT WH accent -pnai, R G Tr -plrai. (cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 101)] ; Tovs iiapyapiras /SdWfix (fnrpoirdeu ;(oi'pMy, a proverb, 1. 6. to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in- competent as they are, through their hostility to the gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them. Mt. vii. G (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq. ; Job xxviii. 18 sq.).* Mdp9o, -as (Jn. xi. 1 [cf. B. 1 7 (15) ; WH. App. p. 156]), ^, (Chald. srn^ mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis- ter of Lazarus of Bethany: Lk. x. 38. 40 sq. ; Jn. xi. 1, 5, 19-30; xii. 2. [On the accent cf. Kautzsch p. 8.]* Mapidfi indecl., and Mapla, -as. fi, (D'">p 'obstinacy,' ' rebelliousness ' ; the well-known proj). name of the sister MupKo<; 390 fiaprvpea of Moses; in the T;irgums D'")P; ef. Dclilzscli, Zeitsdir. f. luth. Tlieol. for is"? p. 2 [Maria is a good Latin name also]), Mary. The women of this name mentioned in the N. T. are the foil. 1. the mother of Jesus Christ, the wife of Joseph ; her name is written Mnpi'a [in an oblitiue case] in Mt.i. 16, 18; ii. 11; Mk.vi.3; Lk. i. ■11; Actsi. 14 [IIGL]; Mnpid/x in Mt. xiii. 5,'); Lk. i. 27, 30-06 [{in 38 L inrg. Ma/ji'a)]; ii. 5, 1C:34; [Acts i. 14 TTr WII]; the reading varies between the two forms in Mt. i. 20 [WII txt. -plav] ; Lk. ii. 1 9 [L T Tr WII t.Kt. -pia] ; so where the other women of this name are men- tioned, [see Til/. Prolog, p. 116, where it appears that in his text the gen. is always (seven times) -pias; the nom. in Jlk. always (seven times) -pla; that in Jn. -pidii oeciu's eleven times, -pia (or -av) only three times, etc. ; for the facts respecting the I\Iss., sec (Tdf. u. s. and) IK//. App. p. 1.5G] ; cf. B. 1 7 (1.5). 2. Mary May- (lalenc (a native of Magdala) : Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; xxviii. 1; Mk. XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1,9; Lk. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25; .\x. 1, 11, 16, 18. 3. the mother of James the less and Joses, the wife of Clopas (or Alphseus) and sister of the mother of Jesus : Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; xxviii. 1 ; Mk. XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1 ; Lk. xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25 (see 'laKaifioi, 2). There are some, indeed, who, think- ing it improbable that there were two living sisters of the name of JIary (the common opinion), suppose that not three but four w(nnen are enumerated in Jn. xix. 25, and that these are distributed into two ])airs so that ij abeXtf)!] TTJs p-qrpos 'lr]crov designates Salome, the wife of Zebedee ; so csp. Wieseler in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1840, p. 648 sqq., [cf. Bp. Lghtft. com. on Gal., Dissert, ii. esp. pp. 255 S(p 264] with whom Liieke, Meyer, Ewald and others agree ; in opp. to them cf. Grimm in Ersch and Gruber's Encykl. sect. 2 vol. .xxii. p. 1 sq. In fact, instances are not wanting among the Jews of two living brothers of the same name, e. g. Onias, in Joseph, antt. 12, 5, 1 ; Herod, sons of Herod the Great, one by Jlari- aume, the other by Cleopatra of Jerusalem, Joseph, antt. 1 7, 1, 3 ; b. j. 1, 28, 4 ; [cf. B. D. s. v. Mary of Cleophas ; Bp. Lghtft. u. s. p. 264]. 4. the sister of Lazarus and Martha: Lk.x.39,42; Jn..\i. 1-45; xii. 3. 5. the mother of John Mark: Acts xii. 12. 6. a cer- tain Christian woman mentioned in Ro. xvi. 6.* MdpKOs, -ov, 6, Marl:; ace. to the tradition of the church the author of the second canonical (iospcl and identical with the ./ultn Marl: mentioned in the Acts (see 'ImuiJnjr, 5). He was the son of a certain ^larv who dwelt at Je- rusalem, was perhaps converted to Christianity by Peter (.\ct3xii. 11 sq.), and for this reason called (1 Pet. v. 13) Peter's son. He was the cousin of Barnabas and the companion of Paul in some of his apostolic travels ; and lastly was the associate of Peter also: Acts xii. 12, 2.0; XV. 37, 39 ; Col. iv. 1 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; Philem. 24 (23) ; 1 Pet V. 13, cf. Euseb. h. e. 2, 15 sq. ; 3, 39. Some, as Grotius, [Tillcmnnl, Hist. Eccl. ii. 89 sq. 503 sq. ; Palri- tiiis, De Evangeliis 1. 1, c. 2, quaest. 1 (cf. Colelerius, Patr. Apost. i. 2G2 sq.)], Kienlon (in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 423), contend that tliere were two Marks, one the disciple and (•ompanion of Paul mentioned in the Acts and Pauline Epj)., the other the associate of Peter and mentioned in 1 Pet. v. 13; [cf. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. Introd. § 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 10].* ^dp)iapos. -ov, 6, T], (papfiaipo) to sparkle, glisten) ; 1. a sliinc, rock, (lloni., Eur.). 2. marble ([cf. Ep. Jer. 71], Theophr., Strabo, al.) : llev. xviii. 12." (idpTvp, -vpos, 6, see pdprvs. )iapTvp('ci), -t5; impf. 3 pers. plur. (paprvpovv, fut. fiap- Tvpr](Tto ; 1 aor. (papTvpT^ua ', i)f. p(papTvpT]Ka ; Pass., pres. papTvpovpai; IniliLepapTvpovpijv; l}i. p€papTvpf}pai', 1 aor, fpapTvprj6qi>; fr. [Simon., Pind.], Aeschyl., lldt. down; to be a witness, to bear witness, testify, i. e. to affirm tliat one has seen or heard or experienced something, or that (so in the N. T.) he hioics it because taught by divine revelation or inspiration, (sometimes in the N. T. the apostles are said paprvpeiv, as those who had been eye- and car- witnesses of the extraordinary sayings, deeds and sufferings of Jesus, which proved his ^Messiahsliip ; so too Paul, as one to whom the risen Christ had visibly apjieared ; cf. Jn. .\v. 27 ; xi.\. 35 ; xxi. 24 ; Acts xxiii. 11; 1 Co. XV. 15; 1 Jn. i. 2, cf. Actsi. 22 sq.; ii. 32; iii. 15; iv.33; v. 32; x. 39,41; xiii. 31 ; xxvi. 16; [cf. Westcolt, (" Speaker's ") Com. on Jn., Introd. p. xlv. sq.]) ; a. in general ; absol. to give (not to keep bad) testimony : Jn. xv. 27 ; Acts x.xvi. 5 ; foil, by on recitative and the orat. direct., Jn. iv. 39 ; also preceded by Xeyui/, Jn. i. 32 ; paprvpdv fls with an ace. of the place into (unto) which the testimony (concerning Christ) is borne. Acts xxiii. 11 [see els, A. L 5 b.]; paprvpa, in- serted parenthetically (W. § 62, 2), 2 Co. viii. 3 ; i. q. to prove or conjirm by testimony, 1 Jn. v. 6 sq. ; used of Jesus, predicting what actually befell him, Jn. xiii. 21 ; of God, who himself testifies in the Scriptures that a thing is so (viz. as the author declares), foil, by the reci- tative on, Ileb. vii. 17 K. papr. foil, by irept w. gen. of a pcrs., to bear witness concerning one: Jn. i. 7 sq. ; Trfpi roil avBpanrov, concerning man, i. e. to tell what one has himself learned about the nature, character, conduct, of men, .Jn. ii. 25 [see SvdpaiTros, 1 a.] ; jrept tivos, foil, by direct disc, Jn. i. 15 ; the Scriptures are said to testify Trept 'Itjo-oO, i. e. to declare things which make it evi- dent that he was truly sent by God, Jn. v. 39 ; God is said to do the same, — through the Scriptures, ib. 37 cf. viii. 18; through the expiation wrought by the baptism and death of Christ, and the Holy Spirit giving souls assur- ance of this expiation, 1 Jn. v. 6-9 ; so John the Baptist, as being a ' prophet ', Jn. v. 32 ; so the works which he himself did, ib. 36 (there foil, by on) ; x. 25 ; so the Holy Spirit, Jn. xv. 26 ; the apostles, 27 ; so Christ him- self TT(p\ eavTov, Jn. v. 31 ; viii. 13 sq. 18. jrepi w. gen. of the thing, Jn. xxi. 24 ; irepl toO KaKov, to bring for- ward evidence to prove to kokov, Jn. xviii. 23. with the ace. of a cognate noun, paprvplav paprvptlv irepi w. a gen. of the pers., Jn. v. 32; 1 Jn. v. 9 Rec. ; 10, (T171' avrriv papTvpiai/ paprvpfiv, Plat. Eryx. p. 399 b. ; rfji' paprvpiav avTov r)v ttj apcrji fiaprvpei, Epict. diss. 4, 8, 32 [cf. tV . 225 (211); B. 148 (129)]); w. an ace. of the thing, to fUipTvpeaj 391 /xapTUpiov testify a thing, bear witness to (of) anything: .In. iii. 11, 32 ; supply aire in Jn. xix. 35 ; rtvi ti, 1 Jn. i. 2 ; or ijiapTvpj]ac ■ ■ ■ Xpiarov, who has borne witness of (viz. in tliis book, i. e. the Apocalypse) what God has spoken and Jesus Christ testified (sc. concerning future events ; see \ayos, I. 2 b. f.), Rev. i. 2 ; o jiapTvpav ravra he that tcsltfieth these things i. e. has caused them to be testified by the prophet, his messenger. Rev. .xxii. 20 ; fia-nipr^a-ai iifiiv ravra inX [LTrmrg. WHmrg. eV] rais iKKkr^a-ims. to cause these things to be testified to you in the churches or for, on account of, the clmrches. Rev. x.xii. 16, — unless eni be dropped from the text and the passage translated, to you, viz. the (seven) churches (of Asia Minor), the prophet reverting again to i. 4 ; cf. De Wette, Bleek, Dusterdieck, ad loc. ; [al., retaining ewl, render it ouer, concerning, cf. x. 11 ; W. 393 (3G8) c; see «Vi, B. 2 f. /3. fin.], of testimony borne not in word but by d e e d, in the phrase used of Christ fiaprvpfiv tIju kqXtjv oiioXoyiav, to witness the good confession, to attest the truth of the (Christian) profession by his sufferings and death, 1 Tim. vi. 13, where cf. Hofmann. Pass.: Ro. iii. 21 (a righteousness such as the Scriptures testify that God ascribes to believers, cf. iv. 3). /lapr. foil, by ^Tt that, Jn. i. 34 [cf. W. 273 (25G)]; [iv. 44]; xii. 17 [here R" Tr txt. WH ore] ; 1 Jn. iv. 14 ; n€pl w. gen. of a pers. foil, by on, Jn. v. 36 ; vii. 7 ; koto, tivos, against [so W. 382 (357), iley., al. ; yet see xard, I. 2 b.] one, foil, by oTi, 1 Co. .XV. 15. w. a dat. of the thing i. e. for the benefit of, in the interests of, a thing [cf. B. § 133, 11] : T^ dXrjdfia. Jn. v. 33 : xviii. 37 ; aoO rfi dXij- Seia (see aXij^eia, II.), to bear witness unto thy truth, how great it is, 3 Jn. 3, 6 ; used of the testimony which is given in deeds to promote some object : t<5 \6yat. Acts xiv. 3 [T prefixes tVi] ; with a dat. (of a thing) incommodi : fiapTvpflre (TTrWH paprupei eVrt) rots epyois Tu>v Trarepav, by what ye are doing ye add to the deeds of your fathers a testimony wliich proves tliat those things were done by them, Lk. xi. 48. w. a dat. of the person : to declare to one by testimony (by sug- gestion, instruction), Ileb. -x. 15; foil, by direct dis- course. Rev. xxii. 18 GLTTrWHj to testify to one what he wishes one to testify concerning him : Acts xxii. 5 ; foil, by OTI, Mt. xxiii. 31 ; Jn. iii. 28 ; Ro. x. 2 ; Gal. iv. 15: Col. iv. 13; foU. by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 43; to -give testimony in one's favor, to commend [^V. § 31, 4 b. ; B. as above] : Jn. iii. 26 ; Acts xiii. 22 ; xv. 8 ; pass. papTvpoiiiiai witness is borne to me, it is witnessed of me (W. § 39, 1 ; B. § 134, 4) : foil, by ort, Heb. vii. 8 ; foil, bv oTi recitative and direct disc, Heb. vii. 17 L T Tr AVH ; foil, by an inf. belonging to the subject, Heb. xi. 4 sq. b. emphatically; to utter honomhle testimony, ■give a good report: w. a dat. of the pers., Lk. iv. 22; eVi Tiw, on account of, for a thing, Heb. xi. 4 [here L Tr read /lap. eVi (ctX. tm dea (but see the Comrn.)] ; pepapTvpr^Tai Tij/i iwo Ttfos, 3 Jn. 12; pass, paprvpovpai lo he home (r/ood) witness lo, to be well reported of, to hare (good) testimony borne to one, accredited, attested, nf good report, ■approved: Acts vi. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1 sq. ; 18, 1 ; 19, 1 ; 47, 4) ; foil, by (v w. a dat. of the thing in which the commended excellence appears, 1 Tim. v. 10; Heb. xi. 2, (fVi nvi, for a thing, Athen. 1 p. 25 f. ; [yet cf. W. 387 (362) note]) ; 8td nvos, to have (honorable) testimony borne to one through (by) a thing, Heb. xi. 39 ; vTTo w. gen. of the pers. giving honorable testimony, Acts X. 22; xvi. 2; xxii. 12, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 38, 2; 44, 3 ; Ignat. ad Philad. c. 5, 2 cf. 11,1 and ad Eph. 12, 2; Antonin. 7, 62) ; w. dat. of the pers. testLfWng (i. q. iiro Tivos), Acts .x.xvi. 22 R G. c. Mid., ace. to a false reading, to conjure, implore : 1 Th. ii. 1 2 (1 1 ), where T Tr AVH have rightly restored pLaprvpopemt. [CoMP. : em-, avv-eTTt; Kara-, uvp-papTvpiUi.'\ * jiaprvpia, -at, j}, (jiapTvpta, q. v.), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. a testifying : the office committed to the prophets of tes- tifying concerning future events. Rev. xi. 7. 2. what one testifies, testimony : univ. Jn. v. 34 ; in a legal sense, of testimony before a judge: Lk. x.xii. 71 ; Mk. xiv. 56 ; w. gen. of the subj., ^Ik. .xiv. 59 ; Jn. viii. 1 7 ; 1 Jn. V. 9 ; Kara Tiros, against one. ilk. xiv. 55 ; in an historical sense, of the testimony of an historian : Jn. xix. 35 ; xxi. 24 ; in an ethical sense, of testimony con- cerning one's character : 3 Jn. 12 ; 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; Tit. i 13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting mat- ters relating to the truth of Christianity : of the testi- mony establishing the Messiahship and the di^'inity of Jesus (see paprvpea, a.), given by — John the Bap- tist: Jn. i. 7; V. 32; fj papr. toC 'laidwov, i. 19; Jesus himself, w. a gen. of the subj., Jn. v. 31 ; viii. 13 sq. ; God. in the prophecies of Scripture concerning Jesus the Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him, in the works done by him, Jn. v. 36 ; through the Holy Spirit, in the Christian's blessed consciousness of eternal hfe and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism [(cf. reff. s. V. ffdima-pa, 3)] and the expiatory death of Christ, w. a subject, gen. rov 6eov. 1 Jn. v. 9-11, cf. 6-8 ; the apostles, crov rfju papr. nfpt e'pov. Acts xxii. 18 [W. 137 (130)]; the other followers of Christ: Rev. vi. 9; w. a gen. of the subj. aircii', Rev. xii. 11; w. a gen. of the obj. 'irjaov, ib. 17 ; xix. 10 ; xx. 4 (tx"" tWs papT. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in bearing it. Rev. vi. 9 ; xii. 1 7 ; xix. 1 0, [see l^o), I. Id.]; others, however, explain it (o have the duty of testifying laicl upon one's self) ; elsewhere the " testimony " of Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things, of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11, 32 sq. ; ij papr. 'lijtroO, that testimony which he gave concerning future events relating to the consummation of the kingdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20) : Sia TTjv p. 'IrjiTov Xpitrrov, to receive this testimony, ib. 9.' (lopnipiov, -ov, TO, (pdpTvp [cf paprvs^), [fr. Find., Hdt. down], Sept. for t];^ nn;', oftener for nny. (an or- dinance, precept); most freq. for n;'rt (an assembly), as though that came fr. lip to testify, whereas it is fr. ^;V to appoint ; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the subj.: TTJs a-vveiSqafms, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj. : ano- didovQL TO p TTjs dvaoTarreQis 'Irjaov, Acts iv. 33. b. ToC XpiiTToC, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W- § 30, fiapTvpo/xai 392 fiaTaio'; 1 a.] : the proclamation of salvation by the apostles is so called (for reasons given under /lapTvpia, init.), 1 Co. i. 6 ; also tov mpiov r]jiu>v, 2 Tim. i. 8 ; toC 6eov, concerning God [W. u. s.], i. e. concerning what God has done through Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co. ii. 1 [here WH txt. jiutrT^pioj'] ; w. the subject, gen. r]p.av, given by us, 2 Th. i. 10. «is /ujpT. rail' XaXrjfl^iro/ie'i/aji', to give testimony concerning tliose tilings which were to be spoken (in the ]\[ossiali's time) i. e. concerning the Christian revelation, lleb. iii. 5 ; cf. Delitzsch ad loc. [al. refer it to the Mosaic law (Num. .\ii. 7, esp. 8); cf. Riehm, Lchrbegriff d. Ileb. i. 312]. c. eU /utp- Tvpiov avTois for a testimony unto them, that they may have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or that : e. g. that a leper has been cured, Jit. viii. 4 ; Mk. i. 44 ; Lk. V. 14 ; that persons may get knowledge of something the knowledge of which will be for their benefit, Mt. x. 18 ; xxiv. 14 ; Mk. xiii. 9 ; that they may have evidence of their impurity. Mk. vi. 11 ; in the same case we find «IS iiapT- iiT avTois, for a testimony ai}ain:^ri Snx, as Ex. xxxviii. 26 ; Lev. xxiv. 3, etc.* |iaprvpo|iat (fr. paprup [cf. /idpTvsJ) ; 1. to cite a witness, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Tragg., Thuc, Plato, sqq.) ; to affirm by appeal to God, to declare solemnly, protest : TavTa, Plat. Phil. p. 47 c; 5rt, Actsxx. 26 ; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God's name, exhort solemnly: tivI, Acts xxvi. 22 L T Tr WH ; foil, by the ace. w. inf., Eph. iv. 17; «is to foil, by ace. w. inf. [cf. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) TTrWH. [CoMP. : Sia-, Trpo-papTvpopai''] * [LOfrnK ( Aeolic papTvp, a form not found in the N. T. ; [etymologically one who is mindful, heeds ; prob. allied with Lat. memor, cf. Vanicek p. 1201 ; Curtius § 466]), -wpos, ace. -upu, o ; plur. /«ipTvpes, dat.plur. /lapn^iri; Sept. for l^l; [lies., Simon., Theogn., al.]; a witness (one who avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or knows by any other means) ; a. in a legal sense : Mt. xviii. 16 ; xxvi. 6a; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii. 58 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. v. 19 ; Heb. x. 28. b. in an historical sense: Acts x. 41 ; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; [2 Tim. ii. 2] ; one who is a spectator of anything, e. g. of a con- test, Heb. xii. 1 ; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48; Acts i. 22 ; ii. 32 ; iii. 15; v. 32 G L T Tr WH ; x. 39 ; xxvi. 16; I Pet. v. 1 ; w. a gen. of the possessor ' one whotestifiesforone', Actsi. 8LTTr WH; xiii. 31 ; w. a gen. of the possessor and of the obj.. Acts v. 32 Rec. : pdpTvpa fivai Ttw, to be a witness for one, serve him by testimony. Acts i. 8 RG; .x.\ii. 15; [Lk. xi. 48 T Tr WH]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation appeal is made ; hence the formulas fiaprvs pov iariv & 6(6s, Ro. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 8 ; 6(bi paprvt, 1 Th. ii. 5 ; pdprvpa Toi/ Bfov fTTiKoXovpai, 2 Co. i. 23 ; vpfis pdprvpes k- 6 ^«ds,. 1 Th. ii. 10; the faithful interpreters of (iod's counsels are called God's witnesses : Rev. xi. 3 ; Christ is reck- oned among them. Rev. i.'5 ; iii. 14. c. in an ethi- cal sense those are called pdprvpes 'Ijjctov, who after his example have proved the strengtii and genuineness of their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [ef B. D. Am. ed. and Diet, of Chris. Antiij. s. v. Martyr] : Acts xxii. 20 ; Rev. ii. 13; xvii. 6.* )ia(r66s, Doric for pacrros (q. v.) : Rev. i. 1 3 Tdf. [" this form seems to be Western " (Ilorl, App. p. 149)]. )i.aa-(rdo)iai (R G) more correctly pacrdopai ( L T Tr WII): impf. 3 pers. plur. ipxuravTo; (M.\Q, pdaara>, to knead) ; to chew, consume, cat, devour, {Kpias, Arstj)h- Plut. 321 ; TO deppara Tutv Qvptdv, Joseph, b. j. 6, 3, 3 ; pi'fas ^{iKav, Sept. Job xxx. 4, and other ex.\. in other auth.) : (paaavTo ras y\m; i. q. paoTiyoa, q. v.; Tivd, Acts xxii. 25. (Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. 11, and often in Hom.) * |idu par. 2 K. xvii. 15; D'San, /idraia, -ler. viii. 19; fi'SmXa, Dent, xxxii. 21 ; Jer. xiv.'22) : Acts xiv. 15. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.] * (lOTaio-nis, -T]Tos, n, {pmaios, q. v.), a purely hibl. and eccles. word [(PoUilx. 1. 6 c. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for S?ri (ofteninEccles.), also for Xiu;, etc. ; raniV^; a. u-hat is devoid of truth and appropriateness: xmcpoyKa /laTato- Tip-or (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18. b. percerse- ness, depravation : tov voos, Eph. iv. 1 7. c. frailty, want ofviijor: Ko. viii. 20.* (laTaioo : (fiaratos) ; 1 aor. pass. ifiaTaiuiffriv ; to make empty, I'ain, foolish : ipaTaiw&rjtrav iv to7? StaXoyKr/iotff avrav, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell into error, Ro. i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 15; Jer. ii. 5; 1 Chj-. xxi. 8 ; [etc.] ; nowhere in Grk. auth.) * Itdrnv (accus. [cf. W. 230 (21G) ; B. § 131, 12] of pLarr,, i. q. paria, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Find., Aeschvl. down, in vain, fruitlessly: Mt. xv. 9 and Mk. vii. 7, after Isa. xxix. 13 Sept.* Marealos (LTTrWII Mae^mor, cf. B. 8 (7); [TF//. App. 159'; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5 p. 5G2]), -ou [B. 18 (16)], 6, (commonly regarded as Hebr. rvm gift of God, fr. jjTp and n; ; but 7^'^n is in Greek Marfiiaf, and the analogy of the names "jn (fr. JH a festival) in Greek 'Ayyaior, '3J ZaKxaios, and others, as well as the y V Syriac form of the name before us <^A^, [and its form in the Talmud, viz. Ti": or ■xn:3 ; Sanhedrin 43' ; Meu- schen, IS. T. e.x Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to adopt the Aramaic form "jlti, and to derive that from the unused sing, iio, a man, plur. Vi'ro ; hence i. q. manly, cf. Grimm in the .Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723 sqq.), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards an apostle of Jesus: Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. ilk. ii. 14 ; Lk. v. 27sqq.; seeAcui,4); Mt.x.3; Mk.iii.18; Lk.vi.15; Acts i. 13. Ace. to Papias (in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39) he wrote down c^patSt StaXeKTO) ra (KvpiaKo) \6yta, i. e. the sayinf/s of our Lord ; this collection of discourses, perhaps already re- touched by some one else and translated into Greek, the author of our first canonical Gospel combined with ac- counts of the acts and sufferings of Christ, and so it came to pass that this Gospel was ascribed by the church to Matthew as its author. [But this theory seems to be ren- dered unnecessary by the fact that \6yia had already come to denote " sacred oracles " i. q. Upti ypappara, Joseph, b. ]'. 6, 5, 4, or Upai ypacjiat, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 1 ; see the added reff. s. v. \6yiov. Cf. Fisher, Super- nal. Origin of Christianity, pp. 1 60-16 7; and reff. in SchafT, Hist, of the Christ. Church, i. 622 sq. ; Bleel; Einl' ins X. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 115 sq.] * Maredv (L T Tr WH Maeddv [see reff. s. v. Marealos']), 6, (jriip a gift), Matthan, one of Christ's ancestors : Mt. i. 15.'* Ma-rflttT (Tdf. y\a66a8, [see reff. s. v. MaT^atof]), 6, (jiPO, fr. mj), Matlhat ; 1. one of Christ's ances- tors, the son of Levi: Lk. iii. 24. 2. one of the ancestors of the man just spoken of: Lk. iii. 29 [here TrWn Uaeedr (see as above)].* MaTBias (T Tr "\VH Maflflm? [?ce reff. s. v. MaT^moy]), -a [yet cf. B. 18 (16)], o, (sec Mar^aios), Matthias, the apostle who took the place of Judas Iscariot : Acts i. 23, 26.* Ma-rraBa, 6, (see the preceding names), Mattatha, the son of Xathan and grandson of David : Lk. iii. 31.* MaTTaBias, -ou [B. 1 8 (1 6)], 6, Mattath ias ; 1. one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. MaBdadlov (cf. reff. s. v. hlarSaios, init.)]. 2. one of the ancestors of the man just mentioned : Lk. iii. 26 [Trmrg. MaTa6iov].* Iidxaipa, gen. -as [so (with R G) Lchm. in Lk. xxi. 24] and -17?, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lchm. in Lk. xxii. 49 ; Acts xii. 2] and -rj (betw. which forms the codd. vary, cf. [Scriv- ener, Collation, etc. p. Ivi. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; 11 '/f. App. p. 156']; W. 62 (61); B. 11; Delitzsch on Heb. xi. 34 p. 584 note), !/, (akin to paxrj and Lat. mactare) ; 1. a larye In ife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh : Horn., Pind., Hdt., al. ; hence Gen. xxii. B; 10 ; Judg. xLx. 29 Alex.,for nS^Sn. 2. a, "inm/Zsa-orrf, distinguished fr. the large sword, the popcpaia (.Joseph, antt. 6, 9, 5 diro- Ttpvei TTjii K«paKr)V ry poptpala. rfj ckcivov (Goliath's), pd- Xaipav OIK ex^v avrds), and curved, for a cuttinf/ stroke; distinct also ir. ^i<^os, a straight su-ord, for thrusting, Xen. r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7 ; but the words are freq. used interchangeably. In the X. T. univ. a sivord (Sept. often for 3in) : as a weapon for making or repelling aa attack, Mt. xxvi. 47, 51, 52, [55] ; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq. ; Lk. xxii. 36, 38, 49, 52 ; Jn. xviii. 10 sq. ; Acts xvi. 27 ; Heb. xi. 37 ; Rev. vi. 4 ; xiii. 10, [14] ; by a Hebraism,. dTopa paxalpas, the edge of the sivord (3""n "3, Gen. xxxiv. 26 ; Josh. viii. 24 ; 1 S. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, etc. [but in the Sept. the rendering o-r. ^i(f>ovs or or. pop !-'''• ''"• 26 (2 S. xviii. 17). 7. meas- ure and height: oiKoSopai, Mk. xiii. 2 ; ^ponos , Rev. xx. 11; /onj,fid;^atpa. Rev. vi. 4; as respects . stature and age, pi/cpoi Koi pcydXot, small and great, young and old, Acts viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Ileb. viii. 11 ; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix. .5,18; XX. 12, (Gen. -xbc. 11; 2K.xxiii.2; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 30). [neut. sing, used adverbially : tv peyaXu, Acts xxvi. 29 LTTrWH (for R Ge'i-TroXXM, q. v. in noXvs, d.) in great sc. degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa's words (V oXlya (q. v.) in a little (time) thou wouldst fain etc. ... I woiUd to God that both in little and in great i. e. in all re- spects etc. ; cf . the use of oXiyov k. p-tya or apiKpov k. ptya (yet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g. Plat. Phileb. 21 e.; Apol. 19c.; 21b.; 26 b.; but see d. below.] b. of number and quantity, i. q. nu- merous, large: dycXij, Mk. v. 11; abundant, iropi(Tp6s, 1 Tim. vi. G ; piirSairoSoala, Heb. x. 35. C. of age: pf ifo)!», the eider, Ro. ix. 1 2 after Gen. xxv. 23, (Skhtiuv o pe'yas, Polyb. 18, 18 (35), 9; 32, 12, 1). d. used of i n- tensity and its degrees: Swa/us, Acts iv. 33 ; viii. 10; neut. fv pcyaXu, with great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 L T Tr WH [but see y. above] ; of the affections and emotions of the mind: x''P°' ^^'' ''• ^^'' -"'x""- 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxiv. 52; Acts XV. 3 ; <^r;/3or, >Ik. iv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 9 ; viii. 37 ; Acts v. 5, 11 ; Rev. xi. 11 ; dvpos, Rev. xii. 12: Xwn;, Ro. L\. 2; (Ko-Taa-is, yik. V. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); nlo-Tis, Mt. xv. 28; Xapis, Acts iv. 33; dyairr), Jn. xv. 13. of natural events fieya^ 395 fiedoBe powerfully affecting the senses, i. q. violent, mighty, strong : «M/ios, Jn. vi. 18; Rev.vi.13; ;3povTi7,Rev. xiv. 2; ^a^afo) Rev. xi. 19 ; xvi. 21 ; a-eia-iios, Mt. viii. 24; .xxviii. 2 ; Lk. xxi.ll; Acts xvi. 26; Rev.vi. 12; xi. 13; xvi. 18; XaiAai//-, Jlk. iv. 3 7 ; wraxTii, Mt. vii. 2 7. of other external things, such as are perceived by h e a r i n g: Kpavyrj, Acts xxiii. 9 ; Rev.xiv. 18 [R G] ; /jeifov xpa^av, to cry out the louder, Mt. XX. 31 ; (pavfi, Mt. .xxiv. 31 [Tom. /anes, Tac.ann. 15, 27; Suet. Calig.'5.)* («Yio-ros, see pJyas, init. \i.i9-(pfi.r\viia : Pass., 3 pers. sing. fiidep/jLTiveieTai, ptcp. pf6epiiJ]v€voiievov ; to translate into the language of one icith whom I icish to communicate, to interpret : Mt. i. 23 ; 31k. V. 41 ; XV. 22, 34; Jn. i. 38 (39) LTr WH, 41 (42) ; Acts iv. 36 ; xiii. 8. (Polvb., Diod., Plut., [Su-. prol. 1. 19; al.].)*_ (teOri, -»;s, ij; (akin to /Jdv, wine ; perh. any intoxicating drink, Lat. temeluni ; cf. Germ. Meth [nieadj), intoxication ; drunkenness : Lk. xxi. 34 ; plur., Ro. xiii. 13 ; Gal. v. 21. (Hebr. "'yd, intoxicating drink, Prov. xx. 1 ; Is. xxviii. 7; and ;i"l3i:', intoxication, Ezek. xxiii. 32; xxxix. 19; [Antipho], Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf. Trench § Lxi.] » |ue-«m)ni and (in 1 Co. xiii. 2 R G WH [cf. icttt/^i]) fif^iordwa; 1 aor. /icTcaTrjaa ; 1 aor. pass. subj. fiera- trradit ; fr. Hom. down ; prop, to transpose, transfer, remove from one place to another : prop, of change of situation or place, opiy, 1 Co. xiii. 2 (Isa. hv. 10) ; rivd elt Ti, Col. i. 13 ; Ttra [T Tr WH add «, so L in br.] ttjs oiKovofilai, to remove from the office of steward, pass. Lk. xvi. 4 (t^5 ;(pfiaf, 1 ilacc. xi. 63) ; rivd ck tov f^i/, to re- move from life, Diod. 2, 57, 5 ; 4, 55, 1 ; with « toO f^v omitted. Acts xiii. 22 (in Grk. writ, also in the mid. and in the intrans. tenses of the act. to depart from life, to die, Eur. Ale. 21 ; Polyb. 32, 21, 3; Heliod. 4, 14). met- aph. Ttvd, without adjunct (cf. G«rm. verrucken, [Eng. pervert'^), i. e. to lead aside [A. V. turn away'} to other ten- ets: Acts xix. 26 (t^i/ Kap&lav roO XaoC, Josh. xiv. 8).* )ic6-aSECa (T WH fifdodla, see I, i,), -as, ij, (fr. fudoSfia, i. e. 1. to follow up or investigate by method and set- tled plan ; 2. to follow craftily, frame devices, deceive : Diod. 7, 10 ; 2 S. .xix. 27 ; [Ex. xxi. 13 Aq.; (mid.) Charit. 7, 6 p. 166, 21 ed. Reiske (1783) ; Polyb. 38, 4, 10]), a noun occurring neither in the O. T. nor in prof, auth. fie06pi 396 fieWfa cunninfi (iris, fleceil, craft, trickerij: f/ fitd. r^r TrXaKijs, which T) nXdvi) uses, Eph. iv. M ; tov Sia^dAov, phir. ib. vi. 11 [A.\'. wUes. Cf. Bp. Lgktft. Tolyc. ad Phil. 7 p. 918.] * |xc9- : Pass., pres. iifBiiaxopai ; 1 aor. ifiedvaBifv ; {ii . fj.(6v, -in- piOri) : fr. Ildt. down; Sept. for nn, nnri (Kal np), and 13p', to intoxicate, make drunk; pass, [cf. W. 252 (237)] to get drunk, become intoxicated : Lk. xii. 45 ; Jn. ii. 10; 1 Th. v. 7 [B. 62 (54)]; olva [W. 217 (203)], Eph. V. 18; c'/c toO oIvov, llev. ,\vii. 2 (see eV, n. 5) ; Tov vUrapos, Plat. symp. p. 203 b. ; Lcian. dial, deor. 6, 3 ; airo Tifos, Sir. i. 16; .\xxv. 13.* |u'6u (fr. pJ6v, see pfdrj) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for nn and IDC/; to be drunken : Mt. .xxiv. 49 ; Actsii. 15; 1 Co. xi. 2l'; 1 Th. v. 7 [cf. B. 62 (54)]; «'k toO a'lpar:.! [see «, II. 5 ; Tr mrg. tw ai/iari], of one who has slied blood profusely. Rev. xvii. 6 (Plin. h. n. 14, 28 (22) ebrius jam sanguine civium ct tanto magis eum sitiens).* (lei^drepos, -a, -ov, see piyas, init. (icl^uv, see piyai, init. |u'\av, -avos, to, see the foil. word. licXas, -aiva, -av, gen. -avos, -alvrjs, -avos, [fr. Horn, down], Sejjt. severiil times for ihiy, black : Rev. vi. 5, 12 ; opp. to XfvKos, Mt. v. 36. Xeut. to peXav, subst. black in/i:(Plat. Phaedr. p. 276 c. ; Dem. p. 313, 1 1 ; Plut. mor. p. 841 e. ; al.) : 2 Co. iii. 3 ; 2 Jn. 12 ; 3 Jn. 13 ; [cf. Gardtliauxen, Palaeographie, Buch i. Kap. 4 ; Eder.dieim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 270 sq.-; B. D. s. v. Writing, sub fin.]* McXtds, gen. -a [B. 20 (17) sq.], (TTrWH MeXfd, indecl., [on the accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), 6, (nsS? abundance), Melea, one of king David's descend- ants: Lk. iii. 31.* (leXci, 3 pers. sing. pres. of pf\a used impers. ; impf. fp(\fv ; it is a care : nvl, to one ; as in Ork. writ, with nom. of the thing, oiSev rovrav, Acts xviii. 1 7 ; with gen. of the thing (as often in Attic), pfj rav ^ou>v pfXfL tw ee.: 7TpO-pf\fTd (Mt. xxiv. 6 ; and L T Tr WII in 2 Pet. i. 12) ; impf. i'peWov [so all odd. in Lk. ix. 31 (exc. T); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. R G) ; vii. 39 (e.\c. T) : xi. 51 (exc. LTr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where U pres.) ; x.4 (exc. L Tr)] and ^peWov [so all edd. in Lk. vii. 2 ; X. 1 (exc. R G) ; xix. 4 ; Jn. iv. 47 ; xii. 33 ; xviii. 32 ; Acts xii. 6 (exc. R G L) ; xvi. 27 (exc. R G) ; xxvii> 33 (exc. RGT); Ileb. xi. 8 (exc. L) ; cf. reff. s. v. fiovXopai, init. and Rutherford's note on Babrius 7, 15], to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptcp., o ^eX- Xuv, absol. : tq pfWovra and ra ivearaiTa are contrasted, Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; fit to piWov, for the future, hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but sec fls, A. II. 2 (where Grimm supplies fTof)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; to /icXXoira, things future, things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more jierfect state of things which will exist in the aiiyv peWav, Col. ii. 17; with nouns, 6 alaiv 6 peWav, I^It. xii. 32 ; Eph. i. 21 ; ^ p(W. fa)i7, 1 Tim. iv. 8; fi oiKOvptvr] 17 piW. Ileb. ii. 5 ; f] p. opyrj, Mt. iii. 7 ; to xplpa to ptWov, Acts ,xxiv. 25 ; TToXic. Heb. xiii. 14 ; tq pcXXovra dyaSd. Ileb. ix. 1 1 [but L Tr mrg. WII txt. yivope'vav} ; x. 1 ; toC piXXovros sc. 'Afidfi, i. e. thelSIessiah, Ro. v. 14. 2. joined to an infin. [cf.AV. 333sq. (313); B.§140,2], a. lobeonthe point of doing or suffering something: w. inf. present, ypeXX'ev «auTow dvaipfiv. Acts .xvi. 27 ; TeXevrdv, Lk. vii. 2 ; d7rodvi)o-/t«i', Jn.iv.47; add, Lk.xxi. 7 ; Acts iii. 3; xviii. 14 ; XX. 3 ; xxii. 26 ; xxiii. 27 ; w. inf. passive, Acts xxi. 27; xxvii. 33, etc. b. to intend, have in mind, think to: w. inf. present, Mt. ii. 13; Lk. x. 1 ; xix. 4; Jn. vi. G, 15; vii. 35; .xii. 4 ; xiv. 22 ; Acts v. 35 ; .xvii. 31; xx. 7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2 ; x.xvii. 30 ; Heb. viii. 5; [2 Pet. i. 1 2 L T Tr WII]; Rev. x. 4; w. inf. aorist (a constr. cen- sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently /LteXo? 397 fiev by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Horn, down ; cf. W. 333 (313) sq. ; Lob. ad Pliryn. p. 745 sqq. ; [but see Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 420 sqq.]) : Acts .xii. 6 LT WH; Rev. ii. 10 (liakf'ti/ RG); iii. 16; xii. 4; w. fut. inf. fcrfadm, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. c. as in Grk. writ, fr. Horn, down, of those things which will come to pass (or which one wUl do or sufier) by fixed necessity or divine appointment (Germ. so//en ^are to he, des- tined to be, etc.]) ; w. pres. inf. active : Mt. xvi. 27 ; xvii. 12; XX. 22; Lk.ix.31; Jn.vi.71; vii.39; xi.ol; xii. 33; xviii. 32; Acts xx. 38; xxvi. 22, 23; Heb. i. 14; xi. 8 ; Kev. ii. 10"; iii. 10; viii. 13, etc. ; 'HXi'as 6 /iiWcou tpx^' a6ai, Mt. xi. 14 ; 6 fiiWaiv \vTpol:(T6ai, Lk. xxiv. 21 ; Kpl- veiv, 2 Tim. iv. 1 [WH mrg. Kpivai] ; w. pres. inf. passive : Mt. xvii. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 4 ; Lk. ix. 44 ; xix. 11 ; xxi. 36 ; Acts xxvi. 22; Ro. iv. 24; 1 Th. iii. 4; Jas.ii. 12; Rev. i. 19 [Tdf. yei^eV^atJ ; vi. 11 ; t^s p.fK\ovar}s airoKoKvTm- aBai bo^rjs, 1 Fct. V. 1 ; w. aor. inf. : rrjv jieXKovcrav iu^av a7TOKaKvcp6rji'aiy Ro. viii. 18; rrjv fieWovcrau TriaTiv dno- KaXvfjidnvai, Gal. iii. 23 ; used also of those things which we infer from certain preceding events will of necessity follow : w. inf. pres.. Acts xxviii. 6 ; Ro. viii. 13 ; w. inf. fut.. Acts xxvii. 10. d. in general, of what is sure to happen: w. inf. pres., Jit. xxiv. 6 ; Jn. vi. 71 ; 1 Tim. i. 16 ; Rev. xii. 5 ; xvii. 8 ; w. inf. fut. tcrfadm, Acts xi. 28 ; xxiv. 15. e. to be always on the point of doing with- out ever doing, i. e. to delay: «' /xe'XXcij ; Acts -xxii. 16 (Aeschyl. Prom. 36; ri /icXXctc ; Eur. Hec. 1094 ; Lcian. dial. mort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth. ; 4 Mace. vi. 23; Lk. 1). licXos, -ouf, TO, [fr. Horn, down], a member, limb : prop, a member of the human body, Ro. xii. 4; 1 C6. xii. 12, 14, 18-20, 25 sq. ; Jas. iii. 5 ; to /i. tou «rto/ioTot, 1 Co. xii.. 12, 22; fiov, 0|iai ; 1 aor. (fiffiy^apTiv ; in class. Grk. f r. Hesiod (opp. ]84) fxiv yap . . . aWwSi . . . iripKoSi [here TTrWHom. Lbr. 8e'], 1 Co. xii. 8-10; a pev . . . foil, by a\\a Si three times, Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7 sq. ; SKXos fiiv, aWos Si, 1 Co. xv. 39 ; TovTo nev . . . TovTO Si, on the one hand . . . on the othir; partly . . . partly, Ileb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth. cf. W. 142 (135). fiiv is followed by another particle : ?jr«iTa, Jn. xi. G ; 1 Co. xii. 28 ; Jas. iii. 1 7 ; koi vvv. Acts xxi-i. 4,6; TO vvv. Acts xvii. 30 ; TroXi [R G ttoXXw] /laXXov, Heb. xii. 9. II. Examples in which piv is followed neither by Si nor by any other adversative particle (piv ' solitarium ') ; cf. W. 575 (.534) SC).; 15. 365 (313) sq. These cxx. are of various kinds ; cither 1. the antithesis is evi- dent from the context ; as. Col. ii. 23 (' have indeed a show of wisdom', but are folly [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc.]) ; r) piv . . . a-toTtipiav, SC. but they themselves prevent their own salvation, Ro. x. 1 ; to pev . . . Svvapea-tv, sc. but ye do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 1 2 ; (IvSpdinoi pev [L T Tr WII om. pev] . . , upviovaiv, sc. o Se 6eos Kaff iavTov upvvet, Ileb. vi. 16. Or 2. the antithetic idea is brought out by a different turn of the .sentence : Acts xix. 4 [Rec], where the cxjjected second member, 'irjtroCi 8« eariv 6 ipj(6pevos, is wrapped up in Tour* eoTiv ft? Tov Ijjcrovv', Ro. xi. 13 e(ji oaov pev ktK,, where tho antithesis napa^r/Xd Se ncrX. is contained in eiTTas Trnpa^r]X6><7a> ; Ro. vii. 12 6 pev vopos ktX., where the thought of the second member, ' but sin misuses the law,' is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive to a conjunctive construction (cf. Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 839), we find pev . . . re, Acts xxvii. 21 ; pev . . . koi, 1 Th. ii. IS; in distributions or partitions, ^Mk. iv. 4-8 [here RG pev . . . Se . . ■ Koi . . . /cat] ; Lk. viii. 5-8 ; or, finally, that member in which 6« would regularly follow immediately precedes {Herm. ad Vig. \i. 839), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet see Meyer ad loc; cf. B. § 149, 12 d.]. Or 3. the writer, in using piv, perhaps had in mind a second mem- ber to be introduced by Si, but was drawn away from his intention by explanatory additions relating to the first member: thus Acts iii. 13 (ok vpel^ piv — Rec. om. this piv — etc., where 6 6eoi Se rjyeipev e< veKpav, cf. 15, should have followed) ; esp. (as occasionally in class, (irk. also) after irpitTov pev. Ro. i. 8; iii. 2; 1 Co. xi. IS; Tof pev ■TTparov \6yov ktX. where the antithesis toi/ Se Sevrepov \6yov kt\. ought to have followed. Acts i. 1 . 4. piv ovv [in Lk. xi. 28 T Tr AVH pevoiv}, Lat. quidem irjitur, [Eng. so then, now there/ore, verily, etc.], (where piv is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and oi'w marks an inference or transition, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 662 sq. ; \_Herm. Vig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. § 149, 16]): Acts i. 18; V. 41; xiii. 4: xvii. 30; xxiii. 22; xxvi. 9 ; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here T om. Trbr. ovv] ; dWa pev ovv, Phil. iii. 8 G L Tr ; el piv ovv, Heb. vii. U. 5. piv solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed, verily, (Germ. freiUch), [cf. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p. 522 ; Har- tung, Partikeln, ii. 404] : el piv, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; pev ovv now then, (Germ, nunfreilich), Ileb. ix. 1 [cf. B. u. s. On the use of pev ovv in the classics cf. Cope's note on Aristot. rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. pevoiivye, q. v. in its jilace. III. As respects the Position of the particle: it never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as ne.ar the beginning as possible ; generally in the second or third place, by preference between the article and noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are Acts iii. 21 ; 2 Co. x. 1 ; Col. ii. 23 ; Acts xiv. 12 Rec. ; thefifth place, Eph.iv. 11; Ro.xvi.l9 RWHbr.; 1 Co. ii. 15 R G ; (Jn. xvi. 22, see below)] ; moreover, in the Mei) 399 fiepi^of midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the force of which is to be strengthened, as «ai vfifls ovv Xvittjv fiiv vvv ex^'"' [hut LT Tr WH . . . ovv vvv fxiv Xvw.], Jn. xTi. 22; cf. W. § 61, C. The word is not found in the Rev. or in the Epp. of John. Mevva or Me'vvas, see MaiVai/. [lev-oiv i. q. fiiv ovv, set' /xeV, II- 4 sq. (i€V-oCv-7e [/icnoCv ye L Tr], (/ieV, oiiv, ye), nay surely, nay rather ; three times in answers by which what was previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin- ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where fiev ovv is never so placed ; cf. Sturz, De dial. JIac. et AIe.\. p. 203 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342 ; [B. 370 sq. (318) ; W. § 61, 6]) : Lk. xi. 2S [where T Tr WII nevoiv] ; Ro. Lx. 20; X. 18 ; also Phil. iii. 8 [where L G Tr fiiv oSv, WH fiev ovv yel, and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed. Bekk.].- (u'v-Toi,, (fiev, Toi), [Tr iiev rot in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par- ticle of afhrmation, and hence also often of opposition (on its various use in class. Grk. cf . Devar. p. 1 24 sq. and Klotz's comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq. ; Herm. ad Vig. p. 840 sq.), but yet, nevertheless, howbeit : Jn. iv. 27 ; vii. 13 ; .xx. 5 ; xxi. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Jude 8 (the connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows : 'although these examples were set forth as warnings, nevertheless' etc.) ; o/ims /xeVoi, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii. 42 ; fievToi, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. S (if ye do not have re- spect of persons, but rather observe the law of love, with which 7rpocrto7roX>;i//i'a is incompatible ; [_if however, howbeit if])." (it'vu ; impf. efievov ; f ut. jxevw ; 1 aor. efiewa ; plupf. Hefievi'iKeii/ without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19 ; cf. eV;3aXX&), [and see Tdf. Prolog, p. 1 20 sq.]) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. chiefly for nn>; and aip, also for n3n^ Ip', etc.; to re- main, abide; I. intransitively; in reference 1. to PLACE ; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn, tarry : iv w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27 ; x. 7 ; Jn. vii. 9 ; xi. 6; Acts XX. 15; .xxvii. 31 ; xxviii. 30 [R G L] ; 2 Tim. iv. 20 ; with adverbs of place : «fi, ^It. x. 11 ; Jn. ii. 12; X. 40; [xi. 54 WHTrtxt.] ; S)8f, Mt. xxvi. 38 ; Jlk. xiv. 34 ; -napi Ttvt, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40) ; .xiv. 25 ; Acts xviii. 20 [R G] ; .xxi. 7 ; a^v tiw, Lk. i. 56 ; Ka6' iavTov, dwell at liis own house, Acts xxviii. 16, of. 30. i. q. tarry as a guest, lodge : jroO, Jn. i. 38 (39) ; iv w. dat. of place, Lk. xix. 5 ; Actsi.x.43; Tropd tim, in one's house. Acts ix. 43 ; xviii. 3 ; x.\i. 8 ; of tarrying for a night, Hera Tivos, triv rivi, Lk. xxiv. 29. i. q. to be kept, to remain : dead bodies eVt roO aravpov, Jn. xi.x. 31 ; to K^rnia iv tj afiiteKm, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. q. not to depart, not to leave, to continue to be present : iiera nvos (gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. iv 19 ; to be constantly present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv. 16 R G; also napa w. dat. of pers., Jn. .xiv. 1 7 ; cVi nva, to put forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. i. 32 sq.; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 36 ; to KoKvpfia in'i tj avayvaxrei, of that which continually pre- vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii. 14. In the mystic phraseology of John, God is said fJvew in Christ, i. e. to dwell as it were within him, to be con- tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en- ergy, Jn. .xiv. 10 ; Christians are said pevew iv ra 6ea>, to be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27 ; iii. 6 ; hence one is said fieveiv in Clirist or in God, and conversely Christ or God is said ixeveiv in one : Jn. vi. 56 ; xv. 4 sq. ; 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; iv. 13, 16 ; 6 6ebs pivei iv aira k. airos iv TO 6ea, 1 Jn. iv. 15; cf. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 268 sq. pevei Ti iv ipoi, something has established itself perma- nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in me : to prjpard pov, Jn. xv. 7 ; o Xayor toC 6eov, 1 Jn. ii. 14 ; ij xapii !) ipTj (not joy in me i. e. of which I am the object, but the joy witli which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11 Rec. ; o TjKovaaTe, 1 Jn. ii. 24 ; the Hoi)- Spirit, Jn. ii. 1 7 ; iii. 9 ; ij dXij^tia, 2 Jn. 2 ; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 1 7 ; in the same sense one is said exeiv n pevov iv iavrci, as Tov \6yov Tov Seov, Jn. V, 38 ; ^ojfjv aioiviov, 1 Jn. iii. 15. i. q. to persevere ; ev tiki, of him who cleaves, holds fast, to a thing: iv toi Xdyw, Jn. viii. 31 ; iv rfj dydirj, 1 Jn. iv. 16 ; iv TTLOTei, 1 Tim. ii. 15 ; iv ols {iv Toirots, a) epaSes, 2 Tim. iii. 14 ; iv rfj SiSa^y, 2 Jn. 9, {iv tm 'lovBa'iapa, 2 Jlacc. viii. 1 ) ; differently ev rfj dydn-i; rivot, i. e. to keep one's self always worthy of bis love, .In. xv. 9 sq. p. to be held, or kept, continually : iv rw davara, in the state of death, 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; iv tj (tkotiii, Jn. .xii. 46 ; iv ra (jioiTi, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to time ; to continue to be, i. e. not to perish, to last, to endure : of persons, to survive, live, (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Obserw. i. p. 415 sq.) : Phil. i. 25 [so ippiveiv, .Sir. xxxix. 11] ; with els tov alava added, Jn. xii. 34 ; Ileb. vii. 24 ; also of him who becomes partaker of the true and everlasting hfe, opp. to iTapdye(j6ai, 1 Jn. ii. 1 7 ; cojs "ipTi, opp. to ot KOiprjOfvres, 1 Co. XV. G ; uXlyov, Rev. xvii. 10 ; eas ep^opai, Jn. xxi. 22 sq. ; of things, not to perish, to last, stand : of cities, Mt. xi. 23; Heb. xiii. 14; of works, opp. to Karaicaieo-^a», 1 Co. iii. 14 ; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 1 1 ; 1 Co. xiii. 13; Heb. xiii. 1; Xdyos deov, 1 Pet. i. 23; (where Rec. adds els t. atS>va) ; of institutions, Heb. xii. 27. d KopiTos, Jn. .xv. 16 ; vnap^is, Heb. x. 34 ; dpapria, Jn.ix.41; ^^mo-ir, opp. to ^ diroXXv/ieV?;, Jn. vi. 27; one's SiKuioa-ivT) with eis tov alaiva added, 2 Co. i.x. 9 ; to pijpa^ Kvpwv. 1 Pet. i. 25. things which one does not part with are said piveiv to him, i. e. to remain to him, be still in (his) possession : Acts v. 4 (1 Mace. xv. 7). 3. to STATE or COXDITIOX ; to remain as one is, not to become another or different : with a predicate nom. povos, Jn. xii. 24 ; dadXevros, Acts xxvii. 41 ; c'yapos, 1 Co. vii. 11 ; iria-ros. 2 Tim. ii. 13; lepevs. Heb. vii. 3 ; with adverbs, oijTQis. 1 Co. vii. 40 ; us Kaydi, ibid. 8 ; iv w. dat. of the state, ibid. 20, 24. H. transitively ; rivd, to wait for, await one [cf. B. § 131,4]: Acts xx. 23 : with iv and dat. of place added, ibid. 5. [Cojip. : dva-, dia-, iv-, ijri-, Kara-, irapa-, avv-rrapa-, irepi-, Trpoa-, viro-pevo).] )i, separate into parts, cut into pieces : pass. luiiipiaTai 6 Xpia-Tos ; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye claim as jours, been like yourselves divided into ])arts, so tliat one has one part and another another part? 1 Co. i. 13 [L Wlltxt. punctuate so as to take it as an ex- clamatory declaration ; see Jleyer in loc] ; trop. /if/i€- fiiuTai !] yvvq Km ij TrapBevos, differ in their aims, follow different interests, [A. V. tliere is a difference heticeen; but L Tr \VH connect fif^. with what precedes], 1 Co. -vii. 33 (34) ; to divide into jjarties, i. e. be split into fac- tions (Polyb. 8, 23, 9) : xaff epavToH to be at variance with one's self, to rebel [A. V. divided] against one's self, Mt. xii. 25 ; also eir ip-avTov, ib. 26 ; Mk. iii. 24-26. b. to distribute : tI ritri, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 4 1 ; io bestow, impart : nvl, 1 Co. vii. 17; tl Tin, Ro. xii. 3 ; 2 Co. X. 13; lieb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9) ; .mid. pepiCopai Tt /i«ra tivos, to divide (for one's self) a thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Dem. p. 913, 1). [CoMi-. : ■ fita-, avp-pfpi^w-] * )iE'pi)jiva, -ai. r), (fr. /lepi'fw, pepl^opai, to be drawn in .different directions, cf. [Eng. ' distraction ' and ' curae ipiae meumanimum diverse trahunt'] Ter. Andr. 1,3, 25; Verg. Aen. 4, 285 sq. ; [but ace. to al. derived fr. a root '.meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to pdprvs, memor, etc. ; cf. Vanicek p. 1201 ; Curtius § 466 ; Fick iv. 283 ; see paprvs]), care, anxiety : 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. Uv. (Iv.) 23) ; Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34; w. gen. of the obj., care to be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28 ; tov aiavos (tovtov), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Horn. h. Merc), lies., Pind., al.] • litpilivdu, -a; fut. pfpipvijcrui ; 1 aor. subj. 2 pcrs. plur. pepipi>riaT]Te ; {pipipva) ; a. to be anxious; to be troubled with cares : absol., ^It. vi. 27, 31 ; Lk. xii. 25 ; pr)biv pep. be anxious about nothing, Phil. iv. 6 ; with dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit- ous [cf. W. § 31, 1 b.] : Tji ^vxij, about sustaining hfe, TO a-apari, Mt. vi. 25 ; Lk. xii. 22 ; Trepi tivos, about a thing, Mt. vi. 28 ; Lk. xii. 20 ; ei'r rfiv avpiov, for the morrow, i. e. about what may be on the morrow, Mt. vi. 34; foil, by an indir. quest, irat tj ti, Mt. x. 19 ; Lk. xii. 1 1 [here Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. WII br. 5 W] ; joined with TvplidCf(Tdai {6opv^a() foil, by jrfpi jroXXd, Lk. x. 4 1 [WII mrg. om.] b. tocarefor,lool:oulfor,{athiDs); to seeh to promote one's interests : ra eavTrjs, Mt. vi. 34 Rec. ; TO Tov Kvplov, 1 Co. vii. 32-34 ; to tov Koapov, 1 Co. vii. 34 ; tavrrfs, Mt. vi. 34 L T Tr WII (a usage unknown to Grk. writ., although they put a gen. after other verbs of carinf/ or providing/ for, as (mp(\eicrdai, (ppovri^fiv, iTpoiiofiv, cf. Kruger § 47, 11 ; W. 205 (193) ; B. § 133, 25) ; to Ttfpi Ttvos, Phil. ii. 20 ; Iva to avro vtrtp dWiiXoiv pfpipvoxTt Ta HcXi), that the members may have the same care one for another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for JJjS'l, to be anxious, Ps. xx.vvii. (xxxviii.) 19; IJT to be disturbed, annoyed in spirit, 2 S. vii. 10 ; 1 Chr.'xvii. 9 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. -and Soph, down.) [CoMP. : npo-pfpipvau).] * (Kpts, -I'Sos, ri, (see pipos), Sept. chietly for p7n, HpSn, njD ; [fr. Antipho and Thue. down] ; a part, i. q. 1. a part as distinct from the whole: (t^s) MoKcSovias, Acta xvi. 12 [on which see llort in WII. Ai)p. ad toe.]. 2. an assigned part, a j)orli<>n, share : Lk. x. 42 (see ayaftlj, 2) ; (iTTi poL p(p\s perd tivos, I have a portion, i. e. fellow- ship, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. ovk cctti jioi /ifpit *; KXijpos tu TivL, I have neither part nor lot, take no share, in a thing. Acts viii. 21 ; tKavuvv Tiva ds Tiji/ pfpi&a Ttvos, to make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen.; al. gen. of apposition]. Col. i. 12.* |i€pi;t eXiriSoi avrov, of the thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Itec, but GLTTrWII (teT6Q)pi^<0 407 IJLerpias in hope of partaking (of the harvest) ; with a gen. of the thing added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21 ; Heb. ii. 14; <^iiX^£ iripas, to belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii. 13; sc. T^s Tpocjyrji, to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; yd- "KaKTos. to partake of, feed on, milk, Heb. v. 13; cktov (vjs apTov se. Ti or Tti/dt (see «, I. 2 b.), 1 Co. x. 17; cf. B. § 132, 8; [W. §§ 28, 1 ; 30, 8 a.].* |i€T-6«piEpi^ea6ai i) kuttvov 5 Kovioprov, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 5 ; of the wind, Svcpos ^pos fifTeapioOds, Arstph. nub. 404 : and many other e.xx. also in j)rof. auth. ; in. Sept. cf. Mic. iv. 1 ; Ezek. x. 16 ; Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one's soul, raise his spirits; to buoy up tcitli hope; to inflate rvith pride : Polyb. 26, 5, 4 ; 24, 3, 6 etc. ; joined with (pvcrav, Dein. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [([uis rer. div. her. §§ 14, 54 ; cong. erud. grat. § 23] ; pass, to be elated ; to take on airs, be puffed up with pride: Arstph. av. 1447 ; often in Polyb. ; Diod. 11, 32, 41 ; 16, 18 etc. ; Ps. cxxx. (cxxxi.) 1 ; 2 Mace. vii. 34 ; with the addition of nj» iiavouxv, V. 1 7. Hence iii] fifTeinpl^eirde, Lk. xii. 29, some (following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek yreat things, (Lnih. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta- phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep by winds and waves, tn cause one to waver or fluctuate in mind, Polyb. 5, 70, 10; to agitate or harass with cares; to render anxious : Philo de monarch. § 6 ; Schol. ad Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914 ; ad Eur. Or. 1537 ; hence Lk. xii. 29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither he ye anxious, or and waver not between hope ami fear [A. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live not in careful suspense)'}- Kuinoel on Lk. 1. c. discusses the word at length ; and numerous exx. from Philo are given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.* |«TOiK«(rCa, -ar, r), (for the better form fifroiKfjcni, fr. fiEToticc'u [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to ■another, esp. a force^d removal: with the addition Ba- jSuXii/or (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby- lonian exile, Mt. i. 11 sq. 17. (Sept. for nSj i. e. mi- gration, esp. into captivity ; of the Babylonian exile, 2 K. xxiv. 16 ; 1 Chr. v. 22 ; Ezek. xii. 1 1 ; for n6j, Obad. 20; Nah. iii. 10. Elsewli. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.)* |MT-oiKt|w: fut. (Attic) /ifTotKiM [cf. B. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1 c.] ; 1 aor. /ieroj(ci, -S ; 1 aor. iiifTpjjcra ; 1 fut. pass. iierpjjBqcropxu ; (fUrpov) ; fr. Hom. Od. 3, 1 79 down ; Sept. several times for T\D ; to measure ; i. e. 1. to measure out or ojf, a. prop, any space or distance with a measurer's reedorrule : rbv vaov, r!jv aiXr/v, etc.. Rev. xi. 2 ; x.xi. 15, 17 ; with T<5 (caXd/jM added. Rev. xxi. 16 ; ev aira, i. e. ra (taXd/isi, Rev. xi. 1. b. mtiiaph. to Judge according to any rule or standard, to estimate : iv a pirpa fierpfLTe, by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru- mental eV seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf. W. 388 (363) ; B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur- ther below], ilt. vii. 2 ; RIk. iv. 24 ; pass, to be judged, estimated, ibid. : /lerpc iv lavr'av iv tauroj, to measure one's self bv one's self, to deri\e from one's self the standard bv which one estimates one's self, 2 Co.x. 12 [cf. W. § 31; 8 fin.]. 2. to ineasure to, mete out to, i. e. to give by measure : in the proverb ra airai y-irpa co perpfire [or (so L T Tr WH) a liirpco /i€rp.], i. e., dropping the fie, ' in proportion to your own beneficence,' Lk. vi. 38. [COMP. : avTi-pfTpea-l ' IieTpi)-nf|S [on the accent see Chandler § 51 sq.], -ov, 6, (fierpio)), prop, a measurer, the name of a utensil known as an amphora, which is a species of measure used for liquids and containing 72 sextarii or |e'oTot [i. e. some- what less than nine Eng. gallons ; see B. D. s. v. Weights and Measures, sub fin. (p. 3507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. n2, 2 Chr. iv. 5): Jn. ii. 6. (Polyb. 2, 15, 1; Dem. p. 1045, 7 ; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.) * |MTpioira9e'ai, -w ; ([cf. AV. 101 (95)]; fr. fierpioTradris, adhering to the true measure in one's passions or emo- tions ; €(pr] (viz. Aristotle) riiv ao(j)6v /if) e'rai piv dnaSrj, perpioTradlj 8e, Diog. Laert. 5, ."SI ; ficrpion-u^eia, modera- tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp. to the dndSfia of the Stoics ; fr. pirpios and ttoBos) ; i. q. perplais or Karct to p.(Tpnv irdax'^^ '" ''« affected moderately or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions, esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44 ; de Josepho § 5 ; [Joseph, antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]) ; hence of one who is not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others, but bears with them gently ; like other verbs of emotion (cf. Kriiger § 48. 8), with a dat. of the pers. toward whom the feelinj is exercised : Ileb. v. 2; cf. the full discus- sion by Bleek ad loc* (icTpCws, (liirpios), adv., [fr. Hdt. down] ; a. in due measure. b. moderately : ov fierptas, [A. V. fterpov 408 M not a little], exceedingly, (Plut. Flam. 9, ct al.), Acts XX. 12.» |UTpov, -ou, TO, Sept. chiefly for TXTS, [cf. inrjnjp], meas- ure; 1.. an instrument for measuring; a. a vessel/or receiving and delenninitig the quantity of things, whether ilnj or liquid : in proverb, ilisc, fUTptiv /JLtrpa, of the measure of the benefits whieli one confers on others, l^k. vi. 3S ; fifTpov TreTTieapivoif kql (TUTiiXfvpLivov, fig. etjiiiv. to most abundant requital, ibid. ; TrXrjpoui/ to pirpov twv irarepun', to add what is wanting in order to fill uj) their ancestors' prescribed number of crimes, ilt. xxiii. 32 [see irKt/pSa, 2 a.] ; 6K fuTpov [A. V. bg measure ; see «k, J'. 3] i. e. sparingly, Jn. iii. 34 (also ev perpu, Ezek. iv. 11). b. a graduated stuff /or measuring, measuring-rod : Rev.xxi. 15 ; with avdpaTTov added [man'.s- measure], sucli as men use, Kev. xxi. 1 7 ; hence in proverb, disc, the rule or stand- ard of judgment : IMt. vii. 2 ; Mk. iv. 24. 2. deter- mined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit : witli a gen. of the thing receivc4, 6], and is used a. of time : Mt. xiii. 30 R G T WII nirg. ; Lk. xvi. IG T Tr Wn ; Acts xx. 7 ; 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; Heb. ix. 10 ; /i. eavd- Tov, Phil. ii. 30 ; fi/yp' ^^ trrjpepov sc. jjpipas, Mt. xi. 23 ; xxviii. 15 ; /tf'xpi t/Aous, Heb. iii. 6 [here WII Trmrg. br. the clause], 14 ; avo . . . p-expt. Acts x. 30 ; Ro. v. 14 ; pf'XP'f 01' (see axpi, 1 d.; [B. 230 (198) sq. ; AV. 29« (278 sq.)]) foil, by an aor. subjunc. having the force of a f ut. pf. in Lat. : Jlk. xiii. .iO ; Gal. iv. 1 9 T Tr AVII. b. of place : diro . . , fie'xP'' '^"^ ^^- 1^- '^- ^^ measure and degree : p€XP^ Savdrov, so that he did not shrink even from death, Phil. ii. 8 (2 Mace. xiii. 14 ; Plat, de rep. p. 361 c. fin.; p.. (^oKou, Clem. honi. 1, 11); KaKoiradeiv p. Seapav, 2 Tim. ii. 9 ; /itypts alparos avriKaTicn-qri, lleb. xii. 4. 2. with the force of a conj unction: till, foil, by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.* (iVi, Sept. for Sx, [rs, |"«, a particle of negation, which differs from oi (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (or to speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively), but /jrj denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref- erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in- directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holils also of the compounds oi&fls, pj]8(lc, ovKiri, pr/KfTi, etc. But pfi is either an a d v e r b of negation, not (Lat. nan, ne); or a conjunction, that . . . not, lest, (Lat, He); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e- (generally) iinjilying aneg. ans. ; in indir. quest, whether nut (suggesting apprehension)]. Cf. Ilerm. ad Vig. § 2Gr p. 802 sqq.; Mattliiae § 608; Bttm. Gram. § 148 (cf.. Alex. Bttm. X. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.) ; Kiihner ii. §§«12 sq. p. 739 sqq. ; [delf §§ 738 sqq.] ; Rost § 133; Win. §§ 55, 5G ; F. Franke, De particulis negantibus. (two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq. ; G. F. Gayler, Particu- larum Graeci sermonis negativarum accurata disputatio, etc. Tub. 1 836 ; E. Priifer, De pr/ et oi particulis ei)i- tome. Vratisl. 183G ; \_Gildersleece in Am. Joui\ of Philol. vol. i. no. i. p. 45 sqq. ; Jcbb in Vincent and Dickson's ridbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. §§ 82 sqq.]. I. As a negative adverb; 1. univ. : w prj ird- pfOTi TavTa, where prj is used because reference is made merely to the thought that there are those who lack these things, 2 Pet. i. 9 ; a prj iapoKev, which (in my opinion) he hath not seen (because they are not visible), Col. ii. 18 [but here ('. T Tr WII om. Lbr. p^\ cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ; AV. 480sq. (448)] ; tJSt] KtKpirat, on pif 7Teni(nfvKev, be- cause he hath not belieced, represented b\' the writer as the- thought toO (cpiVavTot, Jn. iii. 18 (diiferently in 1 Jn. v. 10, where the faith denied is considered as something positive- and actual) ; a prj bu, in the judgment of the writer, Tit. i. 11. 2. in deliberative questions with the subjunctive: Smpei ^ prj Sapev, Mk. xii. 14 (irortpov^ j3lav (poipev fj prj ^wpev eiuai, Xcn. mem. 1, 2, 45); prj noirja-apfv Til Kaxd (for so it woidd have run had there been no anacoliithon ; but Paul by the statement which he interposes is drawn away from the construction with which he began, and ]>roceeds oti noirjcrmpev )ct\., sothat these words depend on Xeyeivin the intervening statement [W. 628(583); B. § 141, 3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con- ditional and final sentences (cf. W^ § 55, 2; [B. 344 (296) sqq.]) : iau prj, unless, if not, see e.\x. in edv, I. 3 c. (av etc. Koi prj, Mk. xii. 19; cav etc. 8e prj, Jas. ii. 14; cdj» Tts tSr] . . . pfj TTpof SdvaTov, 1 Jn. v. 16; ei pfj, fl 8e prj, fi 6« prj-yf, etc., sec el. III. p. 171 sq. To this head be- long the formulae that have Sv or edv as a modifier (W. § 55, 3 e. ; [B. § 148, 4]), oi-, otrns, oaoi liv or e'dvprj : Mt. X. 14 ; xi. 6 ; IMk. vi. 11; x. 15; Lk. vii. 23 ; ix. 5; xviii. 17; Rev. xiii. 15; of av etc. icai /xij, ^Ik. xi. 23 ; Lk. x. 10; 05 av . . . pij im. TTopveia. Mt. xix. 9 G T Tr AVII txt. ; of the same sort is Tvav nvfvpa, 6 prj 6p6\oyfi, 1 Jn. iv. 3. Iva fil,Mt.vii. 1; xvii. 27; Mk. iii. 9; Ro. .xi. 25 ; Gal. v. 17; vi. 12, etc.; "iva . . . Ka\ pi], ^Mt. v. 2p sq.; Mk. iv. 12; Jn. vi. 50; xi. 50; 2 Co. iv. 7, etc. ; ?ra . . . ji^, 2 Co. xiii. 10; "va 6 . . . prj, Jn. xii. 46 ; "va (weakened ; see 'va, II. 2) pij : after hiaa-riWopai [here L AV^II txt. imrtpda], Alt. xvi. 20 ; TO BeXijpd itniv. Iva prj, Jn. vi. 39 ; ovTws etc. 'va 6 . . . prj, Jn. iii. IG ; irapaKaXoi, tva . . . Ka\ prj, 1 Co. i. 10; orraiprj, Mt. vi. 18 ; Acts .xx. IG ; 1 Co. i. 29 ; orras ol . ■ • pi], Lk. .xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infinitive (W. §55,4f.; [B.§§140, 16; 148,6; cf. Prof. Gildersleeve M 409 111) u. s. p. 48sq.]); a. after verbs of s a y i n g, declaring, denying, commanding, etc.: aTTOKpiS^vai, Lk. xx. 7; ^1* auroj K€)(pr]^aTLo>, 1 Co. v. 9, H ; irapay- ■yeAXm, Actsi.4 ; iv. IS; v. 28,40; 1 Co. vii. 10 sq. ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; vi. 17; TrapaKaXi, Actsix. 38 RG; xix. 31; 2Co. vi. 1 ; aiTovfiai, Epli. iii. 1 3 ; hiap.apTvpopai, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; €v^o- /lat, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; napaiTovpai., Ilcb. xii. 19[here WH txt. om. pTj ; cf. W. and B. as below] ; d|ia), Acts xv. 38 ; cVi- ^oi [L T Tr WU 0oa], Acts xxv. 24 ; dmXeyoi (cf. AV. §65, 2 ^. ; [B. § 148, 13]), Lk. XX. 27 [Tr WII L nirg. Xeya] ; anapvovpat (q. v.), Lk. xxii. 34 ; also after verbs of d e c i d- ing: Lk. xxi. 14; Kplvco, Acts xv. 19; Kpluai tovto, to /jij, Ro. xiv. 13 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 ; flc'Xu, Ro. xiii. 3 ; after verbs of hindering, avoiding, etc.: eyKOTrriD (Rec. dvaKOTrro}} Tira pr], Gal. V. 7 (cf. W. [and B. u. s. ; also § 140, IC]) ; Toi pi], thai . . . not, (Lat. ne), after kotcxo), Lk. iv. 42; KpdTovpai, Lk. xxiv. IG ; xuXvm, Acts x. 47 ; Karajravo), Acts xiv. 18 ; navio, 1 Pet. iii. 10 ; vTvoariWopat, Acts xx. 20, 27 ; Trpoa^xw pv, ^It. vi. 1 ; but toO pi] is added also to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ut ne, that . . . not : Ro. vii. 3 ; 6v. as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv. 7 ; as pi] cpxopfvov pov, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv. IS ; 0)9 pi] ev avTos imi> vopov, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Rec. om.] ; we have both the negative particles in ov ovk ciSotcs [or (with L T Tr WH) iSovTfs^ ■ ■ ■ M opaivT€S, whom being ignorant of (in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen] . . . although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8 ; also with the article : TO pi] vopov e;(oi^a (Germ, die docli nicht liahcn, they that have not, etc.), Ro. ii. 14 ; 6 hk pi] yeveoKoyovpevos, hut he, although not etc. Heb. vii. 6 ; — or since, because, inasmuch as : pi] d(T6(vr]a-as rij nicrTd ov [but G L T Tr AA H om. ov ; cf. B. § 148, 14] KOTfTOTjo-e TO iavToi aatpa vevcKpmp. (ovk d) KaOijKoma, Ro. i. 28 ; 2 Mace. vi. 4, (on the otlier liaml, in ra ovk dvfjKovTa, Eph. V. 4 [where L T 'IV WII a oCk aviJKtv], the uvK coalesces with dvTjKovra and forms a sinj^le idea, un- seemly, unlawful). 6. in indeiiendent sentences of forbidding, dehorting, admonishing, desiring, etc., fifj is Prohibit ive (cf. W.§ uL;, 1), Lat. ;ie, Jio/ ; a. with the 1 pers. plur. of the subjunc. present : fiij yivaiifda KfvoSo^oi, Gal. V. 26 ; add, Gal. vi. 9 ; 1 Th. v. 6 ; I Jn. iii. 18 ; aorist : Jn. xi.\. 24 ; before the word depending on the exhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. with a present im- perative, generally where one is bidden to cease from something already begun, or repeated, or continued : Mt. vi. 16, 19; vii. 1; xix. 6; MJi. ix. 39; xiii. 11; Lk. vi. 30; vii. 6, 13 ; viii. 49, 52 ; x. 4, 7, 20 ; Jn. ii. 16 ; v. 28, 45 ; vi.43; vii. 24; xiv. 1,27; xix. 21 ; Acts x. 15; xi.9; xx. 10 ; Ro. vi. 12 ; xi. 18, 20 ; xii. 2 [liere L Trmrg. WH mrg. give the inf.], 14; 1 Co. vi. 9; vii. 5; 2Co. vi. 14, 17; Gal. V. 1 ; vi. 7 ; Eph. iv. 30 ; Col. iii. 9, 1 9, 21 ; 1 Th. v. 1 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 15 ; 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; v. 16, 19 ; Heb. xii. 5 ; xiii. 2; Jas. i. 7, 16; 1 Pet. iv. 12, 15 sq. ; Ijn. ii. 15; iii. 13; Rev. V. 5, and very often. c. with the third per- son (nowhere in tlie N. T. with the second) of the aorist impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to be begun, and wliere things about to be done are forbid- den : ii!] fTTKTTpeijfdTb), Mt. xxiv. 18 ; Lk. xvii. SI ; fi^ ko- ra^dra, Mk. xiii. 15, and LTTrWH in Mt. xxiv. 17 (wliere R (i badly Kara^atveTa) ; fifj ■yi'mTu, Mt. vi. 3 ; •yfVfO-do) [but T Tr ^^'II yiv(a-6a>], Lk. xxii. 42 ; cf. Xen. Cyr. 7, 6, 73; Aeschyl. Sept. c. Theb. 1036. d. as in tlie more elegant Grk. writ, where future tilings are for- bidden (cf. Henn. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the aorist subjunctive: fir/ 8d|i)re, Mt. iii. 9; v. 17; pri (jxy Pr,e?ji, Mt. i. 20 ; x. 26, 31 [here L T Tr WII pres. impv. (poti€ia6e'\, (alternating with the im])v. jires. (po^fia-de in Mt. X. 28 [G L T Tr]) ; fi^ ni/^. Col. ii. 21 ; /nij dvoarpa- v /3oi/X^ iyevero, Iva Toiis Sfapoirat diroKTdvuKn, prj Tis . ■ . 8ia(j)iyni, Acts x.wii. 42 Rec. (the more elegant Greek to express the thought and jiurpose of the soldiers ; but the best codd. read Siacjtvyr], wliich G LTTrWH have adopted). b. with the subjunc- tive aor. : [(receded by the pros., Mk. xiii. 36 ; 2 Co. viii. 20 [cf. (Joodwin § 43 Rem.]; xii. 6; Col. ii. 4 (where L T Tr ^Vll Iva prideis for R G pr) tk [ — an oversight ; in R G as well as in the recent crit. edd. tlie purpose is expressed by an inserted (va]). III. As an Interbogative particle it is used when a negative answer is expected, Lat. nu7n ; (W. § 57, 3 b. ; [B. 248(213)]); 1. in a direct question : Mt.vii. 9sq. ; i.x. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. .xvii. 9 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; iv. 12, 33; vi. 67; vii. 35, 51 sq. ; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 3; ix. 20; 1 Co. i. 13; ix. 8sq.; x. 22; Jas. ii.[I AVII], 14; iii. 12, etc. ; fiij yap (see ydp, I.), Jn. vii. 41; p^ ovk (wliere ouk be- longs to the verb, and prj is interrogative), Ro. x. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq. ; prj yap . . . oi, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. in an indirect (juestion with the indicative (Germ, ob etwa, oh wohl, whether piissihhj, ichcthcr perchance), where in ad- monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is as we fe.ar [cf. B. § 139, 57 ; W. § 41 b. 4 a.] : Lk. xi. 35, cf. B. 243 (209) ; Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334 sq. ; [Rid- dcll, Plato's Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138]. IV. The particles oi pi) in combination augment the force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise, by no means ; (this formula arose from the fuller ex- pressions ov beivov or Seor or <^d/3or, prj, which are still found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kiihner ii. § 516, 9 p. 773 sq. ; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost siglit of that ov prj is used even of things not at all to be feared, but rather to be desired; .so in the N. T. in Mt. V. 18, 2i;; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 1 7; xxii. 16 ; Jn. iv. 48;xx. 25 ; 1 Th. v. 3) ; cf. Matthiae § 517; Ktihner ii. p. 775; Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq. ; [Gildersleeve in the Arai^r. Jour, of Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq. ; Goodwin § 89] ; W. § 56, 3 ; Ml^ 411 fj.TjEei'; [B. 211 (183) sq.]. 1. with the fut. indicative: oi lirj earai crot tovto, this shall never be unto tliee, Mt. xvi. 22; add, Mt. xxvi. 35 ; Lk. xxii. 34 R G L ; x. 19 (where R" G AVII mrg. dSiKrja-y) ; Jn. vi. 35 [here L Tr mrg. jrf i- vdaei. and L T Tr WH fiii/^i/o-et] ; xiii. 38 RG; Mk. xiii. 31 TTrWH; Heb. x. 17 LTTrWH; in many pas- sages enumerated by W. 506 (472) ; [cf. B. 212 (183)], the manuscripts vary between the indie, fut. and the subjunc. aor. In a question, oi fir] -jToirjtrei rfju (KbUrjaiv ; Lk. xviii. 7 RG. 2. with the aor. subjunctive (the use of wliich in the N. T. scarcely differs from that of the fut. ; cf. W. § 56, 3 ; [B. § 139, 7]), in confident as- sertions : — subjunc. of the 1 aor., Mt. xxiv. 2 ; Mk. xiii. 2 ; Lk. vi. 37 ; Jn. xiii. 8 ; Heb. viii. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 11; vii. 16; xviii. 21, 22, 23; xxi. 2 7,etc. ; 1 aor. mid. subj., Jn. viii. 52 (wliere Rec. yfiiaeTai.); thus these N. T. exx. prove that Dawes made a great mistake in denying (in his iliscellanea Critica, p. 221 sqq. [ed. (Th. Kidd) 2, p. 408 sq.]) that the first aor. subjunc. is used after ov /xij ; [cf. Goodwin in Transactions of Am. Philol. Assoc, for 1869-70, pp. 46-55 ; L. and S. s. v. ov /ir), T. lb.; B. § 139, 8] ; — subjunc. of 2 aor., Mt. v. 18, 20, 26 ; Mk. X. 15 ; Lk. i. 15 ; xii. 59 ; Jn. x. 28 ; xi. 26 ; 1 Co. viii. 13; Heb.xiii.5; Rev. iii. 3 [RGLTrmrg. WHtxt.], and often, in questions: with 1 aor., Lk. xviii. 7 LT Tr WII ; Rev. xv. 4 (in L T Tr AVII with the subj. aor. ami the fut.) ; witli 2 aor., Jn. .xviii. 11. in declarations introduced by on : with 1 aor., 1 Th. iv. 15; with 2 aor., Mt. xxiv. 34 [here R G T om. on] ; xxvi. 29 [L T TrWH cm. on]; Lk. xiii. 35 [TWPIom. Lbr. on]; xxii. 16; Jn. xi. 56 ; in relative clauses : witli 1 aor., Mt. xvi. 2S ; Jlk. Lx. 1 ; Acts xiii. 41 ; Ro. iv. 8 ; with 2 aor., Lk. .xviii. 30. 3. witli the present subjunc. (as sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. W. 507 (473)) : ov8e oii fii) ae eyKaTaXeiVt», Heb. xiii. 5 Tdf. (for eyKaroKina Rec. et al.), [cf. B. 213 (1«4)]- _ ^ liTiYe, (I 8( f-^yfj see ye. 3 d. |ii]Sa)ius, (adv. fr. /xTjSa/idr, and this fr. firjSe, and afios some one [perh. aUied w. Sfia, q. v.]), [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt. down], hi/ no means, not at all : sc. touto yevoiro, in re- plies after an impv. [A. V. Not sol, Acts x. 14 ; xi. 8. (Sept. for n'7''7n.) * (it)8«'. (/iij, q. v., and hi), [fr. Horn, down], a negative disjunctive conjunction; [cf. W. § 55, 6; B. § 149, 13] ; 1. used in continuing a negation or prohibi- tion, hut not, and not, neitlier; preceded by fii), — either so that the two negatives have one ■\erb in common : preceded by jtiiy with a participle, Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xii. 24 ; by fiij w. a pres. subjunc, 1 Co. v. 8 [here Lmrg. pres. indie] ; 1 Jn. iii. 18; by firj w. impv., Mt. vi. 25; Lk. X. 4 ; .xii. 22 ; xiv. 12 ; 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; by fifi w. an aor. subj. 2 pers. plur., Jit. x. 9 sq. ; by els to /ii), 2 Th. ii. 2 LTTrWH; — or so that jii/Sf has its own verb: pre- ceded by OS eav (&v) /irj, Jit. x. 14 ; Mk. vi. 11 ; by 7va fir), Jn. iv. 15; by on-mj fifj, Lk. xvi. 2G ; w. a ptcp. after /iij w. a ptcp., Lk. xii. 47; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after jiTj w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq. ; Heb. xii. 5; fir)hev\ eirtTidei, foil, by firjSe w. impv. 1 Tim. v. 22 ; w. 2 pers. of the aor. subj. after /i^ w. 2 pers. of the aor. . subj., Mt. vii. 6 ; xxiii. 9 sq. ; Lk. xvii. 23 ; Col. ii. 21 ; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; after ftr/Se w. an aor. subj. Jlk. viii. 26 [T reads /xij for the first firjSe, T WII Tr mrg. om. the sec- ond clause] ; after nrjSeva w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14 [Tdf. repeats /iriSeva] ; firjSe . . . firjSe w. 1 ])ers. ]ilur. pres. subj. 1 Co. X. 8 sq. [see below] ; irapayyeWu, full, by yjj w. inf. . . . fj.rjhe w. inf., Acts iv. 18 ; 1 Tim. i. 4 ; vi. 1 7 ; KoKtjv TO tir) . . . urfhe with inf. Ro. xiv. 21 ; w. gen. absol. after /iiJTra) w. gen. absol. Ro. i.x. 11 ; w. impv. after els TO fif], 1 Co. .X. 7 ; firjhe is repeated several times in a neg- ative exhortation after els to fii) in 1 Co. x. 7-10. 2. not even (Lat. ne . . . quidem) : w. an inf. after typai\ra, 1 Co. V. 11 ; after Sxjre, Mk. ii. 2 ; iii. 20 (where R G T badly ^ijrf [cf. W. 489 sq. (456) ; B. pp. 3G7, 369]) ; w. a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3 ; 2 Th. iii. 10. |ii)8ets, firfSe/iia, firj^ei/ (and iirjBev, Acts .xxvii. 33 L T Tr WH, — a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as early as B. c. 37S, cf. Meisterhans. Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 73] ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181 sq. ; W. § 5, 1 d. 1 1 ; [B. 28 (25)] ; Kuliner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. firjSe and eh), [fr. Horn, down] ; it is used either in connection with a noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, neut. nothinr/, and in the same constructions as /ii); ac- cordingly a. with an imperative : /irjSeis being the person to whom sometliing is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 18,21; X. 24; Gal. ^•i. 17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 1 2 ; Tit. ii. 1 5 ; Jas. i. 1 3 ; 1 Jn. iii. 7 ; neut. firfSev, sc. ea-TO) [A. V. have thou nothing to do tcith etc.], Mt. xxvii. 1 9 ; fir^beis in the dat. or the ace. depending on the impv., Ro. xiii. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22 ; ^ijScV (accusative), Lk. iii. 13 ; ix. 3 ; y.. «jbo/SoC, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH txt. ^17]. b. /iTjSei'f with the optative : once in the X. T., Jlk. xi. 14 (where Rec. olheis) [cf. AV. 476 (443)]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc., the nrjbels depending on the verb ; as, juj/Sfw ci'nyE, Mt. viii. 4; xvii. 9 ; accus., Lk. iii. 14; x. 4; ^t^Sci- (ace), Acts xvi. 28 ; KaTa firjSeva Tpcmov, 2 Th. ii. 3. d. with the particles Iva and omns (see /i^, I. 3) : with Iva, Mt. xvi. 20 ; Mk. V. 43 : vi. 8 : vii. 36 ; ix. 9 ; Tit. iii. 13 ; Rev. iii. 1 1 ; with oTtats, .^cts viii. 24. e. with an infini- tive ; a. with one that depends on another verb : — as on napayyeKKw, Lk. viii. 56 ; ix. 21 ; Acts .xxiii. 22 ; SeUmfu. Acts X. 28 ; Siardcrcroiuii, Acts .xxiv. 23 ; dva- BejiaTi^oj ijiavTov, Acts .xxiii. 14 ; xplvio (ace. w. inf.), Acts xxi. 25 Rec. ; evxofi-at, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; ^oiXo/iat (acc. w. inf.), 1 Tim. v. 14; vnopipvriaKa) rivd. Tit. iii. 2, etc.; napoKoXa Tiua foil, by to pt] w. acc. and inf., 1 Th. iii. 3 L (ed. ster.) TTrWH. p. with an ijif. depend- ing on hia to: Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with a participle (see p-q, I. 0) ; in dat.. Acts xi. 19 ; Ro. xii. 1 7 ; accus. prfSeva, Jn. viii. 10 ; Acts ix. 7 ; fir/deu, Acts iv. 21 ; xxvii. 33 ; 1 Co. x. 25, 27 ; 2 Co. vi. 10; 2 Th. iii. 11 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. ii. 8 ; Jas. i. 6 ; 3 Jn. 7 ; prjSeplav npo- xjKO'irr}P. 2 Co. vi. 3 ; pijheplav tttoijo'iv. 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; pr^he- plav ahiav. Acts xxviii. 18 : dva(Bo\fjv prjd. XXV. 1 7. g. noteworthy are — pj/Sels with a gen.. Acts iv. 17; xxiv. 23; priSfp sc. ToiiTav, Rev. ii. 10 [RGTWHmrg.]; eV firjBer 412 flfjTTOTe liriSfvi, in nothin:/, 1 Co. i. 7 [but -j^aplanaTi is expressed here]; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)] ; vii. 9; Phil. i. 28; Jas. i. -1. y.r)biv (Ivai, to be nothing i. e. of no account, opp. to elvai n, Gal. vi. .3 (Soph. Aj. 754 ; other exx. fr. C;i-i<. auth. see in Passow ii. p. 231'' ; [L. and S. s. v. II. ; cf. li. § 129, o]) ; firjSev (ace.), nolhinij i. e. not at alt, in no respect: Acts x. 20; xi. 12, (Lcian. dial. deor. 2, 4; Tim. 43) ; as accus. of tlie obj. after verbs of harm, loss, damage, advantage, care, [cf. W. 227 (213); B. § 131, lOj: as, ^XaTTTfif, Lk. iv. 35 [cf. AV. 483 (400)]; C(- \tla6ai, Jlk. V. 2G ; varipiiv, 2 Co. xi. 5 ; nepiy.vav, Pliil. iv. 6. h. examples of a double negation, by which the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. quistiuam fol- lows a negation (cf. W. § 55, 9 b.) : /iij/cei-i fitjSeis, Mk. xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; /xijSfci fjLijSfv, Jlk. i. 44 [Lom. Tr br. jiijStV] ; Ho. xiii. 8 ; prjdepiav iv nrfhevi, 2 Co. \\. 3 ; fiTi . ■ . (V fjLTjbevi, Phil. i. 28 ; pi) . . . prjSev, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; pi] . . . prjSfpiav, 1 Pet. iii. (! ; pij tis • ■ ■ Kara pr]8fva rpo- TTcv, 2 'I'll. ii. 3. (iTiSeiroTe, (prjSt and nori), adv., tici-er: 2 Tim. iii. 7." (iTiSt'irw, {pr)bi and TTci), adv., not yet : Ileb. xi. 7.* MiiSos, -ov, 6, a Meile, a native or an inhabitant of Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief citj- was Ecbatana [see B. D. s. V.]: Aots ii. 9. [Cf. B. D. and SchalT-IIerzog .s. v. Media.] * (iil9«'v, see prjdflt' li.i]Ke'Ti, (fr. prj and (Tt), adv., employed in the same constructions as /X17; no longer ; no more; not here- after: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with 1 pers. plur. pres. subj. Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres. imperative : [Lk. viii. 49 L T Trtxt. WH] ; Jn. v. 14 ; viii. 1 1 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta- tive : Mk. xi. 14. e. "ma prjKen : 2 Co. v. 15 ; Eph. iv. 14. f. wiUi an infm. depending — on another verb: on |8oc3 (emj3oi>), Acts xxv. 24; on dTTfiXm, Acts iv. 17; on Xtyo) K. papTvpopai, Eph. iv. 17; on f I's to, 1 Pet. iv. 2; on ai(TT€, Mk. i. 45 ; ii. 2; roij prjKeri dovXfvftv, Ro. vi. (!. g. with a ptcp. : Acts xiii. 34 [cf. W. § G5, 10] ; Ro. .\v. 23; 1 Th. iii. 1. h. ou prjKCTi (see pri, IV. 2) : with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 L T Tr mrg. WH.* fiiiKos, -eos (-0119), TO, fr. Horn, down ; Sept. very often for ^1S • lenrjtk: Rev. xxi. IG; ro TrXdros Km prfKos koi /Seizor Kai C\j/os, language used in shadowing forth the greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received from Christ, E]ih. iii. 18.' |iT|KvvtD : {piJKos) ; fr. Ildt. and Pind. down ; to make long, to lengthen ; in the Bible twice of plants, i. q. to cause to grow, increase : effyvrevae Kuptos koI v€t6s ipfjKvvetf ('7'ir), Is. xliv. 14 ; hence Pass. [al. Mid.] pres. prjKvvo- pai; to grow up: Mk. iv. 27 [fiTjxufijTat (Trmrg. -eTai)].' (iTiXuTT), -fji, fj, (fr. pr)\ov a sheep, also a goat; as napri- Xarri ['camlet'] fr. KaprjKos [cf. Loh. Paralip. p. 332]),' a sheepskin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1. For iTi'HN an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in 1 K. xix. 13, 19; 2 K. ii. 8, 13 sq., doubtless because these mantles were made of skins ; hence more closely 1i?_E' ni'HS, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept. Se'ppif Tpixlfr])- In tlie Byzant. writ. [Apoll. Dysk. 191, 9] pr]\uiTri denotes a monk's garment.' ^L■f\v, [(fr. Horn, down)], a particle of affirmation, vcrili/, certainly, truly, (Sap. vi. 25) ; ^ p^v, see under ;5fin. \i.i\v, gen. pr/ms, o, (w. Alex. ace. prjvav. Rev. xxii. 2 Echni.; on which form see reff. under iir^a-i;!', (in.); [fr. Hom. down] ; 1. a month : Lk. i. 24, 2(1, 3«, 5« ; iv. 25 ; Acts vii. 20; xviii. 11 ; xix. 8; xx. 3 ; xxviii. 11 ; Jas. v. 17; Rev. ix. 5, 10, 15; xi. 2; xiii. 5; xxii. 2. 2. the time of new moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium ; after the use of the Ilebr. ty"in, which denotes both a 'mouth' and a 'new moon,' as in Num. xxviii. 11 ; xxix. 1 ) : Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. Ixvi. 23] (the first day of each month, when the new moon appeared, was a festival among the Hebrews; cf. Lev. xxiii. 24; Num. x.wiii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 4); [al. refer the passage to 1 (see !Mey. ad loc.)].' |ii)vvw [cf. Curtius § 429]: 1 aor. }pr]ii\i as a s u b j u n c t i v e, and render lest haply I should be running etc. ; see W. 504 sq. (470), cf. EUicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps already done, but which the writer wishes had not been done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the samesentence, iTh. iii. 5 (where /iijTTus depends on ■yi''ai; cf. Schott, Liinemann, [Ellicott], ad loc. ; [B. 353 (304) ; W. 505 (470)]).* |iT]p6s, -oC, 6, the thigh : Rev. xix. 1 6. (From Hom. down ; Sept. for ^1;.)* t>.^ri, (liTj and the encUtic te), [fr. Hom. down], a cop- ulative, conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing fr. ovTf as prj does fr. oi. It differs fr. /iijSe in that prjSe separates different things, but pr)re those which are of the same kind or which are parts of one whole ; cf. W. § 55, 6 ; [B. § 149, 13 b.]) : prjrf . . . pfjTe, neither . . . nor, Lk. vii. 33 [.T/i7j . . . prjSf] ; ix. 3 (five times) ; Acts xxiii. 12, 21 ; xxvii. 20 ; Heb. vii. 3 ; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for pfj . . .pT)T( we must with L T Tr WH substitute p-rj . . . /i7;8e'). pf) . . . prjTe . . . prjTe, Mt. V. 34-36 (four times); 1 Tim. i. 7 ; Jas. v. 12 ; Rev. vii. 3 ; Iva pi) . . . pfjTe . . . pr]Te, Rev. vii. 1 ; pijSe . . . pr)T€ . . . ptjTt, 2 Th. ii. 2 L T Tr WH ; prj fivai dmiTTaiTiv, pj)8i liyyiXov (for that is something other than dwiorao-is), prjTf nvevpa (because angels belong to the genus nvfipara), Acts xxiii. 8 RG; cf. W. 493 (459) ; [B. 367 (314) sq.].* |i,T|TT]p, gen. prjTpos, dat. prjrpl, ace. prjre'pa, fj, [fr. Hom. down ; fr. Skr. ma ' to measure ' ; but whether denoting the ' moulder,' or the ' manager ' is debated ; cf . Vanicek p. 657 ; Curtius § 472; (cf. pirpovy], Hebr. QN, a mother; prop. : Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often ; trop. of that which is like a mother : Mt. xii. 49 sq. ; Mk. iii. 35 ; .In. xix. 27 ; Ro. xvi. 13, cf. 1 Tim. v. 2 ; a city is called ^ prjnjp rav nopvav, tliat produces and harbors the harlots. Rev. xvii. 5 ; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians] originated, Gal. iv. 2C [here G T Tr WII om. L br. navrav (on the origin of which cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.)]. liT|Ti [so G T WH R (commonly), but pij n L (exc. 1 Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25 ; Mk. iv. 21)], (pr/ and Ti), whether at all, whether perchance, an interroga- tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question (Germ, doch nicht etwa ? [in Eng. generally untranslated; cf. W. § 57, 3 b.; B. 248 (213)]) : Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22, 25; Mk. iv. 21 ; xiv. 19 ; Lk. vi. 39 ; ,Tn. vii. 31 [RG] ; viii. 22; xviii. 35; xxi. 5 [here all texts /iij rt (properly)] ; Acts X. 47 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 11 ; /:i;;Vt apa, 2 Co. i. 1 7 ; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to belieye what he asks about (see prjTroTe, 3 a.) : Mt. xii. 23 ; Jn. fiijTiye 414 fii/u,eofJ.ai iv. 29. tl /tijTt, see el, III. 10. ixijTiye (or /xijti yc) see in its place.* (iTJTiYe [so G T WII ; but -fi^n ye R L, /jlij ti ye Tr], (fr. firj, TL, ye), to say nothing of, not to vienlion, which ace. to the context is cither a. much less; or b. much more, much rather; so once in the N. T., I Co. vi. 3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. SOI sq.* liTJTis [so R G Jn. iv. 33], more correctly fit) rtr ; 1. proliibitive, let no one [cf. B. 31 (28)] : [w. 1 aor. subj. 1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter- rogative, (Lat. niim rjuis ?) hath any one etc. : Jn. vii. 48 ; [2 Co.xii. 17,cf. B. §151,7; W. 574 (534)]; where one would gladly believe what he asks about doubtfully (see /xijri, sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33.* (iTJTpa, -as, i), (firjTijf)'), the womb : Lk. ii. 23 (on which see Siavoiya, 1 ) ; Ko. iv. 1 9. (Hdt., Flat., al. ; Sept. for on"',-) ' |XT]TpaXuias (alst) fjLr]Tpa\oiat), L T Tr WII [see WH. App. p. 152] ftr/TpoKaas, -ov, 6, (/i^rrjp, and a\oida> to thresh, smite), a matricide: 1 Tim. i. 9. (Aeschyl., Plat., Lcian., al.) * |it]Tp6-iroXis, -ftijf, ^, (fifirrjp and jro'Xtf), a metropolis, chic/ city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22) fin. ; [in this sense fr. Xen. down].* |i(a, see under eli. (uaCvu ; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. ^taz/^coo'ii'; pf . 3 pers. sing. )j.ep.lavTm (unless it be better to take Ibis form as a plur.; cf. Kriiger § 33, 3 Anm. 9 ; Bttm. Gram. § 101 Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. § 101 Anm. 13 ; B. 41 (3G) ; [AV. § 58, 6 b. j3.]), ptcp. nepnafTiiivos (Tit. i. 15 R G) and liefua/xfievos (ibid. L T Tr WH ; also Sap. vii. 25 ; Tob. ii. 9 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk. ; cf. Matthiae i. p. 415 ; Kriiger § 40 s. v. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on Theophil. ad Autol. l,lp. 2sq. ; [Veitchs. v.]); fr. Horn, down ; 1. to dye with another color, to stain : e\e- (pairra (polviKt, Horn. II. 4, 141. 2. to dejile, pollute, sully, contaminate, soil, (Sept. often for X^Q) : in a physi- cal and a moral sense, a-apxa (of licentiousness), Judc 8 ; in a moral sense, Tqv avvei&rjcnv, tov voiiv, pass. Tit. i. 15 ; absol. to defile with sin, pass. ibid, and in Ileb. xii. 15 ; for S'Dnn, Deut. xxiv. 6 (4) ; in a ritual sense, of men, pass. Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5, 8; Xum. xix. 13, 20; Tob. ii. 9).* [Stk. iiialvw, iioKuva: aco. to Trench (N. T. Syn. § xxxi.) ixtalvai to slain differs from iio\vfw to smear not only in its primary and outward sense, but iu the circumstance that (like Eng. stain) it may be used in good part, wliile noK. admits of no worthy reference.] |iC(ur|ia, -ros, to, (fttaiVo)), that which defiles [cf. kov- XIH-^f 2] ; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio) : trop. ludofiara TOV Kocrfiov, vices the foulness of which contaminates one in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind, 2 Pet. ii. 20. (Tragg., Antiph., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Pint.; Sept., Lev. vii. S (18); Jer. xxxLs. (xxxii.) 34; Judith ix. 2; 1 Mace. xiii. 50.)' |iiaa-|i6s, -ov, 6. (piaiva), the act of defiliny, defilement, pollution : iniOvjiia fuaap-ov, defiling lust [W. § 34, 3 b.], 2 Pet. ii. 10. (Sap. xiv. 26 ; 1 Mace. iv. 43 ; Plut. mor. p. 393 c. ; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. 17; test. Benj. 8; Grace. Ven. (passim) ; Herm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].) * lilYpia or (so L T) /iiyfia, (on the accent cf. Lipsius, Granim. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [cf. W. § C, 1 e. ; Kpip-a, init.]), -ros, to, (plyvvp.1.), that which has been pro- duced by mixint/, a mixture : Jn. xix. 39 [WIT txt. eXiypa, q. v.]. (Sir. x.xxviii. 8 ; Aristot., Plut., al.) * |i.tYvv|jii and lito-yio: 1 aor. e/ii^a; pf. pass. ptcp. fiefuy- jiivoi; fr. Iloni. down; to mix, mingle: ti nw, one thing with another. Rev. viii. 7 Rec. ; xv. 2; also ti ev twi [cf. B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 G L T Tr WII ; /xera tivos, with a thing, Mt. xxvii. 34 ; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see al/ia, 2a.). [Syn. seCKfpawv/ii, fin. Comp. : a-vv-ava-iiiyuvpLi.'}' (jiiKpos, -ti, -ov, compar. piKporepos, -epa, -epuv, [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for jon^ jpp, 0>'p, small, little; used a. of size : Mt. xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 31 ; hence of stature, ttj riKiKia, Lk. xix. 3 ; of length, Jas. iii. 5. b. of space : neul. TtpoiKBuiv [npoa-eXB. T Tr \\'H mrg. in Mt., Tr WII mrg. in Mk. (see npoaep^opai, a.)] fuKpov, having gone forward a little, Mt. x.vvi. 39; Mk. .xiv. 35, [cf. W. § 32, G; B. § 131, 11 sq.]. c. of age: less by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat- ure]; 01 liiKpni, the little ones, young children, Mt. .xviii. 6,10,14; !Mk.ix. 42; diro puKpov ea>s peyiiKovl^ A. V, from the least to the greatest']. Acts viii. 10; Ileb. viii. 11, (Jer. vi. 13; .xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34); fxiKpos re Ka't ptiyas, [both small and great] i. e. all. Acts xxvi. 22; plur.. Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16 ; xix. 5, 18; xx. 12. d. of time, short, brief: neuter — nom., ? n [or tri oni.] /iiKpov (sc. earai) Kai, (yet) a little while and etc. i. e. shortly (this shall come to pass), Jn. xiv. 19 ; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)]; en piKpov oaov o(Tov (see offos, a.) ; without ko'i, Ileb. x. 37 (Is. x.wi. 20); to fitxpoV [Tr WHom. to], Jn. .xvi. 18; — pLKpov acc. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2) ; piKpov xpovov, Jn. vii. 33; xii. 35 ; Rev. vi. 11 ; .x.\. 3 ; peril piKpov, after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73 ; Mk. xiv. 70, (tt^u piKpuv, Sap. XV. S). e. of quantity, i. e. number or amount : p.tKpa C^pyj, 1 Co. v. 6 ; Gal. v. 9 ; of number, piKpbv ■noip.viov, Lk- xii. 32; of quantity, piKpa bvpapii. Rev. iii. 8 ; neut. piKpnv (ti), a little, 2 Co. xi. 1,16. f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42; Lk. ix. 4S; xvii. 2; o p.tKp6repos ev rfj /3aCTtXfta TaJf ovp. he that is inferior to the other citizens of the kingdom of hca\en in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. but little in etc. ; cf. W. 244 (229) ; B. § 123, 13], Mt. xi. 11 ; Lk. vii. 2S.- MiXT)TOs, -on, ri, Miletus, a maritime city [now nearly ten miles fr. the coast (cf. Acts xx. 38)] of Caria or Ionia, near the mouths of the Maander and not far [c. 35 m. S.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many [some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales, Anaximander, and other celebrated men: Acts xx. 15, 1 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 90 sq.] ' (iCXiov, -ov, TO, (a word of Lat. origin [cf-. B. 18 (16)]), a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile] : Bit. V. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) * |jLi|ii(0|i.ai, -oipat ; (plfios [an actor, mimic]) ; to imitate : fllfiTJTI^i 415 Mi)(^ai]\ Tiva, any one, 2 Th. iii. 7, 9 ; ri, Heb. xiii. 7 ; 3 .In. 1 1 . [Find., Aesehyl., Hdt., al.] * liipiiir/js, -oil, 6, an imitator : ylvonai tivos (gen. of pers.), 1 Co. iv. IG; xi. 1 ; Eph. v. 1 ; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 14; Heb. vi. 12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where LT TrWH ^Tj^iarai). [Plat., Isocr., al.]* |ii)iLVT|(rKu ; (MNAfi [allied w. fiiva, /landdva) ; of. Lat. marieo, moneo, menlio, etc. ; cf. Curtius § 429]) ; to remind: Horn., Find., Theogn., Eur., al. ; Pass, and Mid., pres. fiifiKijo-KOfiai (Ileb. ii. 6 ; xiii. 3 ; rare in Attic) ; 1 aor. (fivi^trdriv ; pf. ficfivrijmi, \ 1 fut. pass, in a mid. sense, ixv,ia6i]s, Lk. xxiv. 6. pf. liifivrjiim, in the sense of a present [cf. W. 274 (257)], to be mindful of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4 ; iravra y.ov fteiivrja-df, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co. xi. 2 ; pres. /ni/ii/^o-Ko/xat, w. gen. of the pers., to remem- ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii. 6) ; xiii. 3. [Comp. : dva-, in-ava-f rmo-jUfivrfaKia.'] * |xureii>, -a>; impf. f/uio-ouv; fut. /nio-i^trco; 1 aor. f'^iVijcra ; \)i. liffiiarjKa; Pass., pres. ptcp. utaoi/jievos ; pf. ptcp. fieiJ.KTrjiJ.evos (Rev. xviii. 2); Sept. for Njb"; [fr. Hom. down]; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest; pass, to be hated, detested : riva, Mt. v. 43 and Kec. in 44 ; xxiv. 10; Lk. i. 71 ; vi. 22, 27 ; xix. 14 ; Jn. vii. 7 ; xv. 18 sq. 23- 25 ; xvii. 14 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [1 1] ; iii. 13, 15 : iv. 20 ; Rev. xvii. 16 ; pass., Mt. x. 22 ; xxiv. 9 ; [Mk. xiii. 13]; Lk.xxi.l7; tI: Jn.iii.20; Ro.vii.15; Eph.v.29; Heb. i. 9 ; Jude 23 ; Rev. ii. G and Rec. in 15 ; pass. ib. xviii. 2. Not a few interpreters have attributed to fj-weiv in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30) ; Deut. xxi. 15 sq. ; Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. xiv. 26 ; xvi. 13 ; [Jn. xii. 25] ; Ro. ix. 13, the signification to love less, to postpone in lone or esteem, to slight, through oversight of the circumstance that 'the Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability, are wont both to feel and to profess lore and hate where we Occidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and indifference to a thing ' ; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 304 ; cf. Riickert, Magazin f. Exegese u. Tbeologie dea N. T. p. 27 sqq.* (ii(r9airo8oo-Ca, -as, f/, (fj.ia66s and a-jroSiSojiit ; cf. the fxia-doSoa-ia of the Grk. writ. [W. 24]), payment of /cages due, recompense : of reward, Heb. x. 35 ; xi. 2G ; of pun- ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in ecdes. writ.) * |iio-9-airo-86Tiis, -ov, 6, (iiiados and ajroSi3cu/i( ; cf. the /jLctrdoSorr]! of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator) ; one icho pays tcages, a rewarder: Heb. xi. G. (Several times in eccles. writ.) • |j.t, fin.) ; fwrBus dSticias, wages obtained by iniquity. Acts i. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [cf. W. § 30, 1 a.]. 2. re- tcard : used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils- and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18; — of divine recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun- ishments: Rev. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en- deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss, Die Lehre Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr. fiir christi. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mehlhorn, A. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol., 187C, p. 721 sqq. ; [cf. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-14]); Mt. V. 12 ; vi. 2, 5, 16 ; x. 41 sq. ; Mk. ix. 41 ; Lk. vi. 23^ 35; 1 Co. iii. 8, 14; 2jn.8; Rev.xi.18; txeiv iii.it6ijv, to have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mt. v. 46; 1 Co. ix. 17; with Trapa Tti> iraTpi vfjoiv iv t. ovp. added, Mt. vi. 1. c. of punishments : fi^iados dSixlas, 2 Pet. ii. 13 ; rrjs Svarae^elas, 2 aiacc. viii. 33.* )ii,(r6du : (fjiados) ; 1 aor. mid. efitcrdiocrdfjiTjv ; to let out fir hire; to hire [cf. W. § 38, 3]: rtvd, Mt. xx. 1, 7. (Hdt., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. for "^JU, Deut. -xxiii. 4; 2 Chr. xxiv. 12.)' |i£(r6M|io, -Tos, ro, (jiiaOooi) ; 1. the price for which any- thing is either let or liircd (Hdt., Isocr., Dem., Ael., al. ; of a harlot's hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mic. i. 7; Prov. xix. 13; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [cf. Philo in Flac. § 16 fin.]). 2. that ichich is either let or hired for a price, as a house, dweUing, lodging [(cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip, p. 9 note ')] : Acts xxviii. 30.* [iio-fluTos. -OV, o, (fuaSdai), one hired, a hireling: Mk. i. 20; Jn. X. 12 sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. for lOr.) * MitvXtjvi]. -79, r), Mitylene, the chief maritime town of the island of Lesbos in the iEgean : -Vets xx. 14. ILeicin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.] * Mixa^\, o, (h^yrp, i. e. 'who like God?'), Michael, fica 416 fioi'xaXi^ the name of an arcliangcl, who was supposed to be the guardian angel of the IsraeHtes (Dan. xii. 1 ; x. 13, 21) : .lude 9 ; Rev. xii. 7. [BB.DD. .s. v.] • |ivd, -as, Tj, a word of Eastern origin [of. Schradtr, Keil- tnschriften u. s. w. p. 143], Arab, ^^j), Syr. | «1Vi, Ilebr. np (fr. njO to appoint, mark out, count, etc.), Lat. mina ; 1. in the O. T. a weight, and an imaginary coin or money of account, equal to one humlrcd shekels : 1 K. X. 17, cf. 2 Chr. ix. 1(1 ; 2 Esdr. ii. «9, (otherwise in Ezek. xlv. 12 [cf. Bible Educator, inde.x s. v. Maneh; Schroder in Kichni s. v. IMinc p. 1000 sq.]). 2. In Attic a weight and a sum of money etjual to one hun- dred drachmae (see SpaxH-'l [and B. D. s. v. Pound ; esp. Schroder in Riehm u. s.]) : Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.» |iv^|uu, see iiiiivjjaKto. Mvdo-ov, -os, 6, (MNAQ), Mnason, a Christian of Cyprus: Acts xxi. IG. (The name was com. also among the Grks. ; [cf. Benseler's Pape's Eigennamen, s. v.].) ' )ivfui, -as, i], {iJ.iiivri), remembrance, memory, viention : cVi TooTi TJi jtvela lituiv, as often as I remember you [lit. 'on all my rcniunibrance' etc. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3 ; TtoifXaBm litieiaf tivos, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9 ; Eph.i. 16; iTh.i. 2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 254a.; Diog. Laert. 8. 2, 66 ; Sept. Ps. ex. (cxi.) 4) ; fiv. t)^ei.v Tivos, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph., Eur., al.) ; abiaKenrTov (\(iv t^w nep'i twos iiveiav, 2 'lim. i. 3.* |ivii|ia, -Tos, TO, (/ifao/xai, pf. pass, fiifivrjiiai) ; 1. •a monumenl or memorial to perpetuate the memory of any person or thing (Horn., Pind., Soph., al.). 2. a se- pulchral monument (Horn., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.). 3. a sepulchre or tomb (receptacle where a dead body is de- posited [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sq.]) : Mk. V. 3 G L T Tr AVII ; v. o ; [xv. 46 T WH] ; Lk. viii. 27 ; xxiii. 53 ; xxiv. 1 ; Acts ii. 29 ; vii. 16 ; Rev. xi. 9, (Joseph, antt. 7, 1, 3 ; Sept. for 13p).* |iVT|)uiov, -ou, to; 1. ani/ visible object /or preserv- ing or recalling the 7nemor>j of an;/ person or thing ; a vie- .morial, monument, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., sqq.) ; in bibl. Grk. so in Sap. x. 7 ; specifically, a sepulchral monument : ■oiKoSoiif IV fivrififla, hk. xi. 47 ; Joseph, antt. 13, 6,5. 2. in the Scriptures a sepulchre, tomb : Mt. xxiii. 29 ; xxvii. 52,60; xxviii. 8; Jlk. v. 2; vi. 29; Lk. xi.44; Jn. v. 28; xi. 17, 31, and often in the Gospels; Acts xiii. 29 ; Sept. for lap, Gen. xxiii. 6, 9 ; 1. 5 ; Is. xxii. 16, etc. fivii)i.T\,-Tjs,j],litvaofim);' a., memory, remembrance; b, mention : fivfipiv TToidaBal rtvos, to remember a thing, call it to remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 15 ; the same expression oc- curs in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, but in the sense of Lat. mentionem facere, to make mention of :i thing.' (ivT]|iovev ; f ut. /xoi;^eijo"ci) ; 1 aor. €^oix^v(Ta; Pass., pres. pt(;\i. fj.oiXfvofjLei'rj ; 1 nor. 'mi. fxccx^vBrji/aL; (fioip^o'f) ; fr. Arstph. and Xen. down ; Sept. for ^NJ ; to commit adul- tery; a. absol. (to he an adulterer) : Mt. v. 27 ; xi.\. 18; Mk. x. 19; Lk. xvi. 18; xviii. 20; Ro. ii. 22; xiii. 9; Jas. ii. 11. b. riva {yvvalKo), to commit adultery with, have unlawful intercourse with another's wife : Mt. V. 28 (Deut. V. 18; Lev. xx. 10; Arstph. av. 558 ; Plat, reji. 2 p. 3U0 b. ; Lcian. dial. deor. 6, 3 ; Aristaenet. epp. 1, 20; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 2, 14); pass, of the wife, to suffer adulter//, he dehauched : Mt. v. 32' L T Tr AVH ; [xix. 9 WH mrg.] ; Jn. viii. 4. By a Hebraism (see lioi\aKii, b.) trop. fiird Tivos (yvvaiKos) inoix^veiv is used of those who at a woman's solicitation are drawn away to idolatry, i. e. to the eating of things sacrificed to idols, Rev. ii. 22; cf. Jer. iii. 9, etc.* (loixos, -oO, o, an adulterer: Lk. xviii. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. 9; Hi-b. xiii. 4. Hebraistically (see /ioixaXir, b.) and fig. faithless toward God, ungodly : Jas. iv. 4 RG. (Soph., Arstph., Xen., Pint., sqq. ; Sept.) ' (loXis, (fioXos toil) ; an adv. used by post-Hom. writ, in- discriminately with lioyis; a. with difficulty, hardly, (cf. Sap. ix. II), where /ifTa ttovov corresponds to it in the parallel member) : [Lk. ix. 39 Trmrg. WH (al. fioyis, q. V.)] ; Acts xiv. 18 ; xxvii. 7 sq. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. not easily, i. e. scarcely, very rarely : Ro. v. 7.* MoXox, 6, (Hebr. ^Sb, 03*70, also D^bo; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 794 S([.), indecl., Moloch, name of the idol- god of the Ammonites, to which human victims, particu- larly young cliildren, were offered in sacrifice. Ac- cording to the description in the Jalkut ([Rashi (vulg. Jarchi)] on .Jer. vii. [31]), its image was a hollow brazen figure, with tlie head of an ox, and outstretched human 27 arms. It was heated red-hot by fire from within, and the little ones placed in its arms to be slowly burned, while to prevent their parents from hearing their dying cries the sacrificing-priests beat drums (see yUwa) : Acts vii. 43 fr. Am. v. 26 Sept., where Hebr. U22h:^, which ought to have been translated ^aaiKims vjj.a>v, i. e. of your idol. Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Moloch ; /. G. Miiller in Herzog ix. 714 sq.; Merx in Schenkelv. 194 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v. Molech, Moloch ; W. Rohertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. ed. 9, s. V. ; Baudissin, Jahve et Moloch etc. and esp. in Herzog 2 vol. x. 168-178].* |i.o\vvu : 1 aor. act. ifiokwa ; Pass. pres. fioKivoiiai ; 1 aor. efjLoXvvdrjv ; fr. Arstph. down ; to pollute, stain, con- taminate, defile ; in the N. T. used only in symbohc and fig. discourse : ovk ifioKwav to iiidna airHv, of those who have kept themselves pure from the defilement of sin, Rev. iii. 4 (cf. Zech. iii. 3 sq.) ; /iera yvvaiKoiv ovk ijut- \{jv8rjCTav, who have not soiled theniSL'h es by fornication and adultery, Rev. xiv. 4 ; i; a-vvd&T^iTis fioXiverai, of a conscience reproached (defiled) by sin, 1 Co. viii. 7 (in- explebih quodam laedendi proposito conscientiam pol- luebat, Amm. Marcell. 15, 2; opp. to Ka6apa a-uveLhr)^, -^y, J], (fiefiefiofiai), blame : exftu fiofKJjtjv irpos Tcva, to have matter of complaint against any one. Col. iii. 13. (Pind., Tragg., al.) * HOVT|, -rjs. f], (fjLfvo)), [fr. Ildt. down], a slaying, abiding, dwelling, abode: Jn. xiv. 2; novrjv noieiv (LTTrWH TToieicrdai, as in Thuc. 1, 131 ; Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 7 ; 13, 2, 1), to make an (one's) abode, napd nvi metaph. of God and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most blessed influence on the sotds of believers, Jn. xiv. 23 ; see TToiS), 1 c* liovo-yev^js. -is, {povos and ykvos), (Cic. unigena ; Vulg. [in Lk. unicus, elsewh.] and in eccl. writ, unigenitus), single of its kind, only, [A. V. only-begotten'] ; used of only sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents), Hes. theog. 426, 448 ; Hdt. 7, 221 ; Plat. Critias 113 d.; Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1; 2, 7, 4 ; povoyevcs tckvov narpi, Aeschyl. Ag. 898. So in the Scriptures: Heb. xi. 17; povoyeinj eivai nvi {to be one's only son or daughter), Judg. xi. 34 ; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42; ix. 38 ; [cf. Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex- pression 6 povoy. vios Tnv 6(0V and uJof Toii deov 6 poi/oy., Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below] ; 1 .Jn. iv. 9 ; povoyfvijs napa narpos, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owing to the omission of the art. (cf. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of Christ, denotes the only son of God or one who in the sense in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren. He is so spoken of by John not because 6 \oyos which was fi'(rapKa>deis in him was eternally generated by God flOVO<} 418 /jLOp0(i> the Father (the ortliodox interpretation), or came forth from the being of God just before the beginning of tlie world (Subordinationism), but because by the incarna- tion (cWupKoxTir) of tlie Xdyor in liim he is of nature or essentially Son of God, and so in a very different sense from that in which men arc made by him rixva tov 6€ov (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the title o uiof TOV 6coi is given only to the historic Christ so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone, but 6 Xdyos d (paapKOideis or Jesus through the Xdyor united with (iov-64>6a\)io$, -ov, {fiovos, 6(j)daXii6s), (Vulg. tusrus, Mk. i.x. 47), deprived of one eye, having one eye : Mt. xviii. 9 ; Mk. ix. 47. (Hdt., Apollod., Strab., Diog. Laert., al. ; {Loh. ad Phryn. p. 130: Bekk. Anecd. i. 280; Ruther-^ ford. New Phryn. p. 209 ; W. 24].) * )iovdu, -Si : (iiovos) ; fr. Horn, down ; to make single or solitary ; to leave alone, forsake: pf., pass. ptcp. X'7P<* fiefiovuiiievri, i. e. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, cf. 4.* |jLopTJ, -^f . ij, [fr. root signifying ' to lay hold of ', ' seize ' (cf. Germ. Fassung); Fick, Pt. i. p. 174; Vanicek p. 719], fr. Ilom. down, the form by which a person or thing strikes the vision ; the external appearance : children are said to reflect ^jrvx^s re xai iiop(f>fis oiioioTrjTa (of their parents), 4 M:icc. XV. 3 (4) ; e(t>iivf po>dT] iv eTepa iiop(j>!j, Mk. xvi. 12 ; ev pop(^Tj 6eov \jT:dp\uiV, Phil. ii. ; nopfprjv dov\ov Xa^tof, ibid. 7; — this whole passage (as I have shown more fully in the Zeitscbr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33 sqq., with which compare the different view given by Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449 sqq.) is to be explained as follows : toho, although (for- merly when he was Xdyos Sa-apaos) he bore the form (in which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God (the sovereign, opp. to /xo/)0. SovXov), yet did not think that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re- tained (see apnayfios, 2), but emptied himself of it (see Kevuoi, 1) so as to asswnc the form of a servant, in that lie became like unto men (for angels also are SoCXot tov 6eov, Rev. xi.x. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion as a man. (God fievsi del aifKlas ev ttj avrov popf^ij. Plat, de rep. 2 p. 381 c., and it is denieil that God (pavTu^eudai. aWoT€ ev aKKaii IBeats . . . Kal dWaTTOvra to avTav etSof els TToXXas pop(f>as . . . Ka\ t^c eavTov l&eas eK^aivetv, p. 3>'0 d,; i^KttJT af TToXXd? ixop(pcis laxot 6 6e6s, p. 3S1 b. ; evQS owpaToi ovaiaxi peTaaxrjiiaTi^etv Ka\ pera^apuTTe tv eir 7ro\vTp6novi popfpiis. Pliilo leg. ad Gaiiiin §11; ov yap ai(nrep to vupirrpa TrapaKoppa Ka't &(ov pop(f}ti yiveTai, il)id. § 14 fin.; God epyois pev Kal xdptfnv evnpyrjs Kal navros ovTivoaovv (pavepoiTepos, pop(pf]v 8e Kal peyeOos rjplv dfj>ave~ (TTOTos, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 22, 2.) * [Svx. pop(pi], axTipo-- ace. to Bp. Lghtft. (see the thorough discussion in his ' Det.aclie(l Note ' on Phil, ii.) and Trench (N. T. Syn. § Ixx.), popityr) fnrm differs from «t-x'IM'» figure, shape, fashion, as that which is intrinsic and es.sential. from that which is outward and accidental. So in tlie main Benjel, Philippi, al.. on Ro. xii. 2 ; but the distinction is re- jected by many ; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsclie in loc. Yet the last-name J commentator makes |iop0j> SovKou in Phil. I.e. relate to the c o m p I e t e form, or nature, of a servant ; and (rxvpa to the external form, or human body.] (jLopifxiu, -M : 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. pop\a.nt or tree. 2. 6,^, (jl. offspring; a. of men [(cf. fig. Eng. scion)'], a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. b. of animals, a young one. 3. a calf, a bullock, a heifer; so everywhere in the Bible, and always masc. : Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30 ; Heb. ix. 12, 19 ; Rev. iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly for ID a bull, esp. a young bull; then for 1p3 cattle; for lit? an ox or a cow; also for '7Ji' a calf). [(Eur. on.)]* IMvo-iKos, -rj, -6v, {fiovira [music, eloquence, etc.]) ; freq. in Grk. writ. ; prop, devoted to and skilled in the arts sacred to the muses ; accomplished in the liberal arts ; specifically, skilled in music ; playing on musical inslru- ment.-i; so Rev. xviii. 22 [R. V. minstrels'].' (lox^os, -ov, 6, hard and difficidl labor, toil, travail ; hardship, distress : 2 Co. xi. 27 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; see /coTTof, 3 b. (Hes. scut. 30G ; Find., Tragg., Xen., al. ; Sept. cliiefly for Soi'.) [Sym. see kottos, fin.] * )ive\6s, -oO, o, (enclosed within, fr. ^v'to to close, shut), marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Horn, down; Sept. Job xxi. 24.) • |ivcu, -u> : pf. pass, /ieiiv-jiiat ; (fr. uvoi to close, shut [(cf. Lat. ?nu(us) ; Curtius § 478]) ; a. to initiate into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al. ; 3 JIacc. li. 30). b. univ. to leach fully, instruct; to accustom one to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with a thing: iv iravri k. iv naai fiffivjifiai, to every condition and to all the several circumstances of life have I be- come wonted ; I have been so disciplined by experience that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12; [but others, instead of connecting iv rravrl etc. here (as object) with /lefi. (a constr. apparently without prece- dent; yet cf. LUnemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the infinitives that follow as explanatory of the iv iravri etc., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere (see jrar, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epexegetic (W. § 44, 1): in everything and in all things have I learned the secret both to be filled etc.].* |iC9os, -ov, 6, fr. Horn, down ; 1. a speech, word, saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. a true narra- tive, b. a fiction, a fable ; univ. an invention, false- hood: 2 Pet. i. 16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso- phists and Gnostics, esp. concerning the emanations and orders of the aeons, are called /ivdot [A. V. fables] in 1 Tim. i. 4 ; iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 4 ; Tit. i. 14. [Cf. Trench § xc, and reff. s. v. yevcaXoyla.] * |iuKao|i.ai, -wnai ; (fr. )j.i or ^0, the sound which a cow utters [Lat. mugio]), to low, bellow, prop, of horned cattle (Horn., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) ; to roar, of a lion. Rev. x. 3.* (luKTTipCJu : {fivKTTjp tlic nosc) ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. /iUKTT/piff TQi ; prop, to turn up the nose or sneer at; to mock, deride : Tivd, pass, ov fivKTrfpi^eToi, does not suffer himself to be mocked. Gal. vi. 7. (For j;,'S, Job xxii. 19 ; Ps. IxxLx. (Ixxx.) 7 ; Jer. xx. 7 ; y\f,i, Prov. i. 30 ; nr3, Prov. XV. 20 ; [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 39,1 (and Harnack's note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp. adv. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.].) [CoMP. : fV IXVKTTJpi^ia.] * [luXiKos, -17, -6v, (fivKri a mill), belonging to a mill: 'Slk. ix. 42 R G ; Lk. xvii. 2 L T Tr WH.* (jivXivos, -Tj, -ov; 1. made of mill-stones : Boeckh, Inscrr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. hvXikos (see the preceding word) : Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.* |iv\os, -ov, 6, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; 1. a inlll-slone [(Anthol. etc.)]: Rev. xviii. 21 [LWH ixv- Kivoi, q. v.] ; /iuXot ociKor, Mt. xviii. 6 ; Mk. ix. 42 L T Tr WH ; Lk. xvii. 2 Rec. ; a large mill consisted of two stones, an upper and an under one; the "nether" stone was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass, whence the name 11. ovikos. 2. equiv. to iivkrj, a mill [(Diod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt. xxiv. 41 LTTr WH; c^mwj p.v\ov, the noise made by a mil!, Rev. xviii. 22.* (jiuXuv [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. § 584], -Zvos, 6, place where a mill ru7is ; mill-house : Mt. xxiv. 41 R G. (Eur., Thuc, Dem., Aristot., al.) * Mvpa (LTTr'WII Mippa (Tr pp- see P, p) [cf. Tdf. on Acts as below and 11'//. App. p. ICO]), av, rd, Mijra, a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half (20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region of Asia Minor between Caria and Pamphylia [B. D. s. v. Myra; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.] : Acts xxvii. 5. * (ivpids, -a8o9, 17, (fiupi'os), ffr. Hdt. down], Sept. for n^^") and 13"!;. a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on which pass, see dpyvpiov, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen. i. q. an innumerable multitude, an unlimited number, (flike our myriads], the Lat. sexcenti. Germ. Tausend): Lk. xii. 1 ; Acts xxi. 20 ; Rev. v. 1 1 [not Rec'.' ] ; ix. 16 [here L T SicrpupmSf r, q. v.] ; used simpi)-, of innumerable hosts of a n g e 1 s : Heb. xii. 22 [here G L Tr put a comma after livptdo-tv]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxiii. 2; Dan. vii. 10.' fLupC^u : 1 aor. inf. livpicai ; (/xupov) ; fr. Hdt. down ; to anoint : JNIk. xiv. 8." livpCos, -a, -ov, [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. 'innumer- able, countless, [A. V. ten thousand]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv. 19. 2. with the accent drawn back (cf. Bttm. Aasf. SprclJ. § 70 Anm. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L. and S. s. v. III.]), itvpioi, -lai, -to, ten thousand : Mt. xviii. 24.* fivpov, -ov, TO, (the grammarians derive it fr. fivpoi to flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap ; but prob. more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to pi'ppa, Hebr. "lo, "«n ; [Fick (i. 836) connects it with r. sniar ' to smear', with which Vanicek 1198 sq. associates (Tfivpva, fivpTos, etc.; cf. Curtius p. 7 H]), ointment: Mt. xxvi. 7, 9 Rec., 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq. ; xxiii. Mvaia 420 Af&xr^? 56; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3, 5; Rev. xviii. 13; distinguished £r. (Katov [q. v. and see Trench, Syn. § xxxviii.], Lk. vii. 46. ([From Aeschyl., lldt. down] ; Sept. for J3!? fat, oil, IVdv. xxvii. i) ; for ni'D JPU', Ps. cxxxii. (cxx.xiii.) 2.) * M«(r£a, -as, ij, Mijsia, a province of Asia Minor on tlie shore of the J3gean Sea, between Lydia and the Pro- pontis ; it had among its cities Pergamum, Troas, and Assos : Acts xvi. 7 sq.* |iv(rTTJpiov, -ov, TO, (/iuonjs [one initiated ; fr. ixvla, q. V.]), in class. Grk. a hidden thing, secret, mystery: ftvarijpiov to swim, prop, 'floating land'), an island: Acts xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9, 11; Rev. i. 9 ; vi. 14 ; xvi. 20. (Sept. for 'S ; [fr. Hom. down].) • vr\(mLa, -as, S), (vrjarcva, q. v.), a fasting, fast, i. e. ab- stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a rehgious exercise : of private fasting, Jit. xvii. 21 [T WII om. Tr br. the vs.] ; Mk. ix. 29 [T WII om. Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. ii. 37; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast prescribed by the Mosaic Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq. ; .xxiii. 27 sqq. [BB.DU. s. v. Fasts, and for reff. to Strab., Philo, Joseph., Plut., see Sojih. Le.x. s. v. Ij) and kept yearly on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month Tisri : Acts xxvii. 9 (the month Tisri comprises a part of our September and October [cf. B.D. s. v. month (at end)] ; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, i/ Xftpe'ptos o)pa, when navigation was usually dangerous on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage referred to). b. a fasting to which one is driven by want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 27; (Ilippocr., Aristot., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael., Athen., al. ; Sept. for Dli").* VT|a-Teiiii) ; fut. vrjcncuaro) ; 1 aor. [inf. vrjcrreiia-at (Lk. v. 34 T WII Tr txt.)], jjtcp. vrjcmvaas ; (fr. vqaris, q. v.) ; to fast (Vulg. and eccles. virit. jcjuno), i. e. to abstain as a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely, if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-18; ix. 14sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. V. 33, [34, 35]; xviii. 12; Act» X. 30 R G ; xiii. 2, [3] ; or from customary and choice nourishment, if it continued several days, ^It. iv. 2, cf. xi. ]-S; vr](TT€vn avvej^ois Kal apTov eo'diet p.6vov pcTa d\a- Tos Ka\ TO noTov avTov vdoip. Acta Thom. § 20. (Arstph., Plut. mor. p. 626 sq. ; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 34, 5 (where see Miiller)]; Sept. for Qii"-) * viidXcas (so Rec." in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11, [where Rec."" -Xaios], after a later form) and vrjrpaKios [" alone well attested" (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three term.; fr. vrj^a), sober, temperate; abstaining from wine, either entirely (Joseph, antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least yj-om its immoderate use : 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11; Tit. ii. 2. (In prof, auth., esp. Aeschyl. and Plut., of things free from all infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.) * VTia> ; 1 aor. imjjv. 2 pers. jilur. vrf^arf ; fr. Theogn., Soph., Xen. down ; to be sober ; in the N. T. every wh. trop. to be calm and collected in spirit ; to be temperate, dispassionate, circumspect : 1 Th. v. 6,8; 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 13 ; v. 8; fis ras npoa-evxas, unto (the offering^ of) prayer, 1 Pet. iv. 7. [Syn. see aypvnvtw ; and on the word see Ellic. on Tim. I. c. Comp. : ava-, eVwi^eij.] * NC-yep, 6, (a Lat. name [' black ']), Niger, surname of the prophet Symeon : Acts xiii. 1.* NiKcivup, [(i. e. ' conqueror ')], -opos, o, Nicanor, of An- tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je- rusalem : .\cts vi. 5.* viKoo), -i; pres. ptcp. dat. vikovvti. Rev. ii. 7 Lchm. IT LTTr, [yet all viKavras in xv. 2] (cf. epairda, init.);^ fut. riKijcrci) ; 1 aor. iviKrjaa ; pf. vevtKiiKa ; {y'lKJf) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to conquer [A. V. overcome~\ ; a. absol. tO' viK-q 426 ■carry off the victory, come off victorious: of Christ, vic- torious over all his foes, Rev. iii. 21 ; vi. 2; eviKfjo-fv . . . dvo'i^m kt\. hath so tomiuered that he now has the right and power to open etc. Rev. v. 5 ; of Christians, that hold fast their faith even unto death against the power of their foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 26; iii. 5, 12, 21 ; xxi. 7; w. « toO 6>jplov added, to conquer and thereby free themselves from the jiower of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from ; cf. W. 367 (;U4 sq.) ; B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when one is ar- raigned or goes to law, to tcin the case, maintain one's •cause, (so in the Attic orators; also vixav Si'ktji', Eur. El. 955) : Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li.) 6). b. with ace. of the obj.: rivd, by force, Lk. ,\i. 22; Rev. xi. 7; xiii. 7 [Lom.WIITrmrg.br. the cl.] ; of Christ the conqueror of his foes, Rev. xvii. 14 ; tov koo-^ov, to deprive it of power to harm, to subvert its iiilluence, Jn. xvi. ,'i3 ; viKav Tiva or ti is used of one who by Christian constancy and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from his adversary's devices, solicitations, assaults: the devil, 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. ; Rev. xii. 1 1 ; false teachers, 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; rbv KoiTjiov, ibid. v. 4 sq. viKav to novr^pov ev rw dya6&, by the force which resides in goodnes.*, i. e. in kindness, to cause an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro. xii. 21 ; vKaadai inrb tov kukov, to be distui'bed by an in- jury and driven to avenge it, ibid. [CoMP. : vvfp-viKuoj-l' vCkt], -t]t, T), [fr. Horn, down], victory : 1 Jn. v. 4 [cf. VlKOt]. * Nik68i)(ios, (viKri and S^jtor [i. e. 'conqueror of the people 'J ), -01), d, Nicodemus, (rabbin. |n"1pj), a member of the Saidiedrin who took the part of Jesus : Jn. iii. 1, 4, 9 ; vii. oO ; xix. 31).* NiKoXatTTjs, -01), 6, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola' itan: plur., Rev. ii. 6, l.'j, — a name whicli, it can scarcely be doubted, refers symbolically to the same ]iersons who in vs. 14 are charged with holding tijv diSaxijV Ba\aa/i, i. e. after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block before the church of God (Num. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well as of committing fornication ; for the Grk. name fiiKo- Xaos coincides with the Ilebr. D>''73 ace. to the interpre- tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc- iion of the people. See in BaXaa/i ; [cf. BB. DD. s. vv. Nicolaitans, Nicolas ; also Connn. on Rev. 11. cc.].* NiKoXaos, -ov, o, {vIkt) and Xadj), Nicolaus [A. V. Nico- las], a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem : Acts vi. 5.* NiKo-iroXis, -f MS, T), (city of victory), Nicopolis : Tit. iii. 12. There were many cities of this name — in Armenia, Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace — wliich were generally built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?) •cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.] on the river Nestus (or Nessus), since he calls it a city ' of Macedonia.' [B. D. s. v.] • viKos, -ous, TO, a later form i. i\. vikyj (cf. Lob. ad Pliryn. p. 647; [B. 23 (20); W. 24]), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57, (2 Mace. X. 38 ; [1 Esdr. iii. 9]) ; els v'ikos, until he have gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20 ; KareTroBri 6 6avaTos tU vIkos, [A. V. death is swallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly vani[uislied, 1 Co. xv. 04. (The Sept. sometimes trans- late the Ilebr. nVJ/ i. e. to everlasliuy, forever, by «r i/iicor, 2 S. ii. 26 ; Jobxxxvi. 7; Lam. v. 20; Am. i. 11; viii. 7, because ni"J denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and in S)riac victory.') ' Nivtvt, 17, Ilebr. nU'J (supposed to be compounded of [■J and nu, the abode of Ninus; [cf. Fried. Delitzsch as below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the Grk. and Rom. writ. 17 Nixos [on the accent cf. Pape, J^igen- namen, s. v.], Nitieveh (Vulg. Ninivc [so A. V. in Lk. as below]), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar- ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed [about] B. c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca- vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay- ard ; cf. Layiinl, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849, 2 vols. ; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh and Bal)ylon, Loud. 1853; [also his art. in Smith's Diet, of the Bible] ; H. J. C. Weissenborn, Ninive u. s. Gebiet etc. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe, Lips. 1844; Spiegel in Ilerzog x. pp. 361-381 ; [esp. Fried. Delitz.ich in Ilerzog 2 (cf. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587-603 ; Schradcr, Keilinschrif ten u. s. w. inde.x s. v. ; and in Riehm s. V. ; W. liubcrtson Umilh in Encyc. Brit. s. v.] ; llilzig in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq. ; \_RawHnson, Five Great Mon- archies etc. ; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond. 1875)]. In the N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 R G.' [Niveu£TT)s RG (so Tr in Lk. .xi. 32), or] NtDevtrj/r [L (so Tr in Lk. xi. 30)] or Ntixuei'Tijt T WH (so Tr in Mt. xii. 41) [see «, t and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WII. App. p. 154''], -01), 6, (Njwui, q. v.), i. q. NiVtos in Hdt. andStrabo; a Nincvitc, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41 ; Lk. xi. 30, and LTTrWIl in 32.* viiTTTJp, -rjpos, 6, (viirra), a vessel for washing the hands and feet, a basin : Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) * vtiTTu : (a later form for i/ifw ; cf. Lob. ad I'hryn. p. 241 [Veitch s. V. w'fu ; B. 63 (55) ; W. 88 (84)]) ; 1 aor. ?wf a; Mid., pres. viirTofiat; 1 aor. evt\ifdprjv ; Sept. for I'nT; to wash : Ttva, Jn. xiii. 8 ; roiis noSas tivos, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 1 2, 14 ; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. to tvash one's selflcL B. § 135, 5 ; W. § 38, 2b.] : Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15 ; tos x^^P"'' '° ""^^^ one's (own) hands, Jlk. vii. 3 ; tovs n68as, Jn. .xiii. 10 [T om. WII br. tovs tt.] : viyj/ai to irpofrumov aov, Mt. vi. 1 " : vlirrovTat Taj ^fipas avTOiv, ^It. xv. 2. [CoMI*. : arro- vinro). Syn. see Xouo), fin.] * voia, -a ; 1 aor. (mrjaa ; [pres. pass. ptcp. (neut. plur.) voovp.eva\ ; {voiis) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for yyr) and piann, and for '7».3E'n ; 1. to perceive ivith the mind, to understand : absol., with the addition 7^ KapSla, Jn. xii. vorjfJM 427 l'OfJ.O to pastui'e),fr. Hom. [i. e. batrach.] down ; 1. pasturage, fodder, food : in fig. discourse evprjTei vofifjv, i. e. he shall not want the needful sup- plies for the true life, Jn. x. 9 ; (Sept. for ni'.l?, n'i'.io, ni:)- 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen, Uinsichgreifen) : of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2 Tim. ii. 17 (of idcers, vofiTjV n-oieiT-ai cXkos, Polyb. 1, 81, 6 ; of a conflagration, to Trip Xap^avet vop.x]v, 11, 4 (5), 4 cf. 1, 4>!, 5; Joseph, h. j. 6, 2, 9).» vo)ii^(ii; impf. «Vo/iifov; 1 aor. EKo/iicra ; impf. pass. cVo- fii^ufi-qv ; (ro/iof) ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus- tom or usage ; to follow custom or usage ; pass, vofil^erai it is the custom, it is the received usage : ov ivopi^ero Tipotr- tvxr) (ivai, where ace. to custom was a place of prayer, Acts xvi. 13 [but LTTr WHread o5 ('vopi(opfv Trpoaev- XTjv eh. where we supposed there ivas, etc. ; cf. 2 below], (2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose : foU. by an inf., Acts viii. 20 ; 1 Co. vii. 36 ; foil, by an ace. w. inf., Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv. 19; ,xvi. [13 (see 1 above)], 27 ; xvii. 29 ; 1 Co. vu. 26 ; 1 Tim. vi. 5; foil, by oTt, Mt. V. 1 7 ; x. 34 [W. § 56, 1 b.] ; .xx. 10 ; Acts xxi. 29 ; 0)1 cvopi^fTo, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23. [Syn. see hyiopai, fin.]* vo)uk6s, -rj, -6u, (vopos), pertaining to (the) law (Plat., Aristot., al.) : pdxat. Tit. iii. 9 ; 6 i/ofiiito'f, one learned in the law, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the Mosaic law [A. V. a lawyer ; cf. ypappardt, 2] : Mt. xxii. 35; Lk. x. 25 ; Tit. iii. 13 ; plur., Lk. vii. 30; xi. 45 sq. 52 ; xiv. 3.* vo|jii|i.us, adv., {vopj.pos). lawfully, agreeably to the law, properly : 1 Tim. i. 8 ; 2 Tim. u. 5. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., al.)* v6(jiio-(ia, -TOf, to', (TOfi(fu,q. v.); 1. anything received and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg., Arstph.). 2. money, (current) coin, [cf. our lawful money] : Mt. xxii. 19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).* voiio-SiSdaKoXos, -ov, 6, (vopos and SiSdaKoKos, cf. irepo- SiddaKoXoi, tepo8i3uuKaXos, xopo&i$d(TKaXoi), a teacher and interpreter of the law: among the Jews [cf. ypapparevs, 2], Lk. V. 17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris- tians also went about as champions and interpreters of the Mosaic law, 1 Tim. i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exc. in eecl. writ.]) * vo|xo9€, -u> : Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. vevopoBerqTai ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. vevopodenjTo (on the om. of the augm. see W. 72(70); B. 33(29)); (i/o/io^eTijs) ; fr. [Lys.], Xen. and Plat, down ; Sept. several times for rriin ; 1. to enact laws ; pass, taws are enacted or prescribed for one, to be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato ; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for exx.]) ; 6 Xaos in aiTJjs (R G eV aiTrj) vevopo6eT7]Tat (R G VfvopoSeTrjTo) the people received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation of the priesthood, Heb. vii. 11 [W. § 39, 1 b.; cf. B. 337 (290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V. under it) ; see cnl, A. U., cf. B. 2 a. y.]. 2. to sanc- tion by law, enact : ri, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [cf. W. and B. u. s.].* vo|io-6€'ti]s, -ov, 6, (yopoi and Tidr/pi), a lawgiver: Jas. iv. 12. ([Antipho, Thuc.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al.; Sept. Ps. ix. 21.)* vofios, -ov, 6, (vipa to divide, distribute, apportion), in prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything received by usage, a custom, usage, law ; in Sept. very often for niin, also for npn, jTH, etc. In the Jf . T. a command, law; and 1. oi any law whatsoever: Sia iroiov vopov; Ro. iii. 27; vopos SiKawtrivrji, a law or rule pro- ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance of which we are approved of God, Ro. Lx. 31, cf. Meyer [see ed. Tl'eis»], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loc. ; a precept or injunction : Kara to^oi/ e vtoX^s aapK- Heb. vii. 16 ; plur. of the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x. 1 6 ; vopos TOV voos, the ride of action prescribed by reason, Ro. vu. 23 ; the mention of the divine law causes those things even which in opposition to this law impel to action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law, to be designated by the term vopos, as erepos vopos ev toIs fieXe. Koi ^aXpioi, the religious dispensation contained in the O. T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (6 vo/jos, oi rrpocf). k. to. tiWa TTarpia ffiff\ia, prol. to Sir.). Paul's doctrine concerning 6 i5w : ilid., pres. ptcp. vo(T(pi,^6fievos ; 1 aor. evo- a-i afar, apart); to set apart, separate, dii-ide ; mid. to set apart or separate for one's self, i. e. to purioin, embezzle, icilhdraw cocerlli/ and appropriate to one': own use: y^prjfiaTa, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 42; Plut. LucuU. 37; Aristid. 4; fiTjSev rav sk t^s 8iapirayr]S, Polyb. 10, 16, 6 ; ;(puCT-, -m ; (vovBertjs, and this fr. vovs and Tidrjpi ; hence prop. i. q. ev ra va rlBrifU, lit. 'put in mind'. Germ. ' an das Herz legen ') ; to admonish, warn, exhort : riva. Acts XX. 31; Ro. XV. 14; 1 Co. iv. 14; Col. i. 28; iii. IG; iTh. V. 12, 14; 2 Th. iii. 15. ([1 S. iii. 13] ; Job iv. 3 ; Sap. xi. 11 ; xii. 2; Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.)* voi)HT)via, and ace. to a rarer uncontr. form (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 148 [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; WH. App. p. 145]) veoixrjvia (so Lt.xt. TrWH), -as, f/, (w'or. /j^t» a month), neto-moon (Vulg. neotnenia; barbarous Lat. noi-iluniu}7i) : of the Jewish festival of the new moon [BB.DD. s. v. New Moon'], Col. ii. 16. (Sept. chiefly for uin ; also for Uin IPX, Ex. xl. 2 ; and E/St "tyin, Num. X. 10; .xxviii. 11 ; see iitjv, 2. Pind., Arstph., Thuc, Xen., al.) * vow£X»s, (voiis and e;(a) [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599]), adv. wiselij, prudentbj, discreetly: Mk. .xii. 34. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 30 p. 1436'', 33 vovvex'^s k. St/caioir] : Pol}b. 1, 83, 3 vovvc)(iis k. (ppoviiiws ', [2, 13, 1] ; 5, 88, 2 vovve)(S>s K. irpaypaTtKois ; [al.].) * voSs (contr. fr. voos), 6, gen. foor, dat. vot, (so in later Grk. for the earher forms vov, via, contr. fr. v6ov, v6vas, Jude 25 ; used to distinguish this present age, preceding Christ's return, from the age which follows that return: Lk.vi. 21,25; Eph. ii. 2 ; Ileb. ii. .S ; 2 Pet. iii. LS; 1 Jn. ii. 2H ; with ei/ ra xaipa tovtco added, Mk. X. 30. c. Sometimes viiv with the present is used of what will occur forthwith or soon, Lk. ii. 29 ; Jn. xii. 31 ; xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Acts xxvi. 17. with a preterite, of what has Just been done, Mt. x.xvi. G5; Jn. xxi. 10; or very lateli/ (but notv,just now, hyperbolically i. q. a short time at/o), vvv i^i^rovv ac Xiddirai oi 'louSaioi, Jn. xi. 8 ; cf. Kypkc ad loc. ; Vig. ed. Ilcrm. p. 425 sip with a future, of those future things which are thought of as already begun to be done, Jn. xii. 31 ; or of those which will be done i7i.s'ta;i(/^, Acts .xiii. 11 [here al. supply eori ; W. § 04, 2 a.] ; or soon, Acts xx. 22 [here jrop. merely has inherent fut. force; cf. B. § 137, 10 a.]. d. with the imperative it often marks the proper or fit time for doing a thing : Mt. xxvii. 42 sq. ; Mk. xv. 32; Jn. ii. 8. Hence it serves to point an exhortation in aye vvv, come now : Jas. iv. 13 ; v. 1, (where it is more correctly written ilye wv, cf. Pas- sow ii. p. 372). e. with other particles, by which the contrast in time is marked more precisely : xai vvv, eren now (now also), .In. xi. 22 ; Phil. i. 20 ; anil now, Jn. xvii. 5 ; Acts vii. 34 [cf. 2 below] ; x. 5 [W. § 43, 3 a.] ; xx. 25; xxii. 16; aXXa vvv, Lk. xxii. 36; dXKa kol vvv, but even now, Jn. xi. 22 [T Tr txt. WH om. LTrmrg. br. aX\d] ; cTi mv, 1 Co. iii. 2 (3) [L WII br. ?ti] ; vvv hi (see vvvi below) hut now, Jn. xvi. 5 ; .xvii. 13 ; Heb. ii. 8 ; ToTf . . . vvv 8f, Gal. iv. 9 ; Ro. vi. 21 sq. [here vvv'i Sc] ; Heb. xii. 26 ; nork . . . vvv St, Ro. xi. 30 [WH mrg. j/ui/i] ; Eph. V. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10 ; vvv ijbri, now already, 1 Jn. iv. 3. vvv ovv, now therefore. Acts x. 33 ; xv. 10 ; xvi. 36 ; xxiii. 15, ((icn. xxvii. 8, 4.!; xx.xi. 13,30 ; .\lv. 8; 1 Macc.x. 71). TO VVV (xov, sec !)(a>, II. b. f. witli tlie article ; o. w. neut. ace. absol. of the article, ra vvv, as respects the present ; at present, now (in which sense it is written also Taviiv [so Grsb. always. Roc. twice ; classic edd. often ravvv ; cf . Tdf Proleg. p. 1 1 1 ; Chandler, Accent, § 826]) : Acts iv. 29; xvii. 30; xx.32; x.xvii. 22,(2 Mace. xv. 8; often in class. Grk. ; also to viiv, 1 Mace. vii. 35; ix. 9; cf. Kriigcr § 50, 5, 13; Bnhdy. p. 328; lillm. Gram. § 125, 8 Anm. 8 (5)) ; the things that now are, the present things, Judith ix. 5; ace. absol. (ui respects the things tiour taking place, eipiiv. to as respects the case in hand. Acts v. 38. p. 6, tj, TO vvv, the present, joined to substantives : as 6 viiv aia>v, 1 Tim. vi. 17 ; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. ii. 12 ; Kaip6s,Ko.m.2G; viii. 18; xi.5; [2 Co. viii. 14 (13)] ; .j i/D>''lfpoiio'nXi}/j, Gal.iv. 25 ; oi vCi/oi/javoi, 2 Pet. iii. 7; fiuO Tijs Trpos iifj-as vvv (or wvl) airiiXoyias, Acts .xxii. 1 . y. TO vvv with prepositions : ' V)' ^^^- ^^'^- 21 ; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ; under these circumstances ; in the present state of affairs ; since these things are so ; as it is : Lk. xi. 39 (vvv i. e. since ye are intent on observing the requirements of tr.adition ; [but al. take vvv here of time — a covert allusion to a former and better state of things]) ; Col. i. 24 [al. of time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lglitft., EUic. ad loc] ; Ka\ vvv,l Jn. ii. 28 ; 2 Jn. 5 ; Kai vvv Sevpo, Acts vii. 34. vvv 8e (and vvv\ Si see wvl), but now; now however; but as it is; (often in class. Grk. ; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426 ; Matthiae ii. p. 1434 sq.; Kuhner § 498, 2 [or Jelf § 719, 2]): 1 Co. vii. 14 ; Jas. iv. IG, and R G in Heb. ix. 26 ; esp. after a. conditional statement with el and the indie, preterite, Lk. xix. 42 ; Jn. viii. 40 ; ix. 41 ; xv. 22, 24 ; xviii. 36 ; 1 Co. xii. 20; [cf. B. § 151, 26]. In Rev. vvv does not occur. [Syn. see dpn-l wvl (vvv with iota demonstr. [Kriiger § 25, 6, 4 scj.; Kuhner § 180, e. (Jelf § 160, c.) ; Bitm. Gram. § 80, 2]), in Attic now, at this very moment (precisely now, neither before nor after; Lat. nunc ipsum), and only of Time, almost always with the pres., very rarely with the fut. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 19). Not found in the N. T. exc. in the writ, of Paul and in a few places in Acts and the Ep. to the Heb. ; and it differs here in no respect from the simple vvv\ cf. Fritzschc, Rom. i. p. 182; [W. 23]; 1. of Time; with a pres. (Job xxx. 9), Acts xxiv. 13 L T Tr WH ; Ro. xv. 23, 25 ; 1 Co. xiii. 13 (Spri . . . T0T6 &e . . . WVL Si) ; 2 Co. viii. 11, 22 ; Philcm. 9, U (sc. oi/To) ; with a perf. indicating continuance, Ro. iii. 21 [al. refer this to 2] ; with a preterite (Ps. xvi. (xvii.) U), Ro. vi. 22 (opp. to ToTf) ; vii. 6 ; Eph. ii. 13 (opp. to iv TM Kaipa (Keivcf) ; Col. i. 22 (21) [and iii. 8 ; also Ro. xi. 30 Wri mrg.], (opp. to Trors); Col. i. 26 [RCJLmrg. j cf . W. § 63 I. 2 b. ; B. 382 (328)] (opp. to dno twv alaivav) ; vv^ 431 ^evi^co with a fut., Job vii. 21 ; Bar. vi. 4 (Ep. Jer. 3) ; 2 Macc. X. 10 ; TTjs Trpos ifias jt^i/i airoXoylas, Acts xxii. 1. 2. contrary to Grk. usage, in stating a conclusion (see vvv, 2), but since the case statids thus, [a*' it /s] : 1 Co. [v. 11 R G T L mrg.] ; xiv. 6 E G (i. e. since 6 yXaicrcrr] XaXav without an interpretation cannot edify the church) ; hut now (Germ, so aber), Heb. ix. 26 L T Tr WH ; after a conditional statement with d (see vxiv, fin.), Ro. vii. 17; 1 Co. xii. 18 [RGTWHmrg.]; xv. 20; Ileb. viii. 6 [here L Tr mrg. WII txt. nv\ cf. 4 ; xi. 16 Rec, cf. 15 ; [B. § 151, 26].* vv|, gen. vvKTot, fj, [fr. a root meaning 'to disappear'; cf. Lat. tiox, Germ, nacht, Eng. night ; Curtius § 94], (Sept. for h^h and nS'S), [fr. Horn, down], nir/ht : Mk. vi. 48 ; Actsxvi. 33; xxiii. 23; Jn.'xiii. 30; Rev. xxi. 25 ; xxii. 5 ; 2va r) vv^ /xi) (ftalvrj to rpiTov aiTTJs, i. e. that the night should want a tliird part of the light which the moon and the stars give it. Rev. viii. 12 [al. understand this of the want of the light etc. for a third part of the night's du- ration] ; gen. micros, hi/ night [W. § .'30, 11 ; B. § 132, 26], Mt. ii. 14; xxviii. 13; Lk. ii. 8 [but note here the article; some make rrfs wktos depend on qbvXaKrif ] ; Jn. ill. 2 ; Acts ix. 25 ; 1 Th. v. 7 ; vuktos koX ijixipas, Mk. V. 5 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; iii. 10 ; 1 Tim. v. 5, [whore see Ellicott on the order] ; ^/xepat <■ vvktos, Lk. xviii. 7; Acts ix. 24; Rev. iv. 8 ; vii. 15; xii. 10, etc. ; jiiu-qs vvktos, at mid- night, Mt. XXV. 6 ; in answer to the question when: TouTT/ TTj vvKTi, this night, Lk. xii. 20 ; xvii. 34 ; Acts xxvii. 23 ; Tij vvKTL iitelvj}. Acts xii. 6 ; tij eTTioiiarj v. Acts xxiii. 11; in answer to the question how long: vvxTa kcu rjfjiepav, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xx. 31 ; xxvi. 7 ; differently in Mk. iv. 27 (night and day, sc. applying himself to wliat he is here said to be doing) ; Tas vvktos, during the nights, every night, Lk. xxi. 37; vvktos Tfo-a-apoK. Mt. iv. 2; Tpeif, ib. xii. 40 ; Sia t^s wktos, see Sid, A. II. 1 b. ; Si' SKrjs (t^s) wktos, the whole night through, all night, Lk. v. 5 ; €v vvktI, when he was asleep. Acts xviii. 9 ; (icXeTn-ijr) eV vvKTL, 1 Th. V. 2, and Rec. in 2 Pet. iii. 10; £v rfi vvktI, in (the course of) the night, Jn. xi. 10 ; ev tij vvktX TavTjj, Mt. xxvi. 31, 34 ; Mk. xiv. 30 ; iv TJj wkt\ f/ ktX. 1 Co. xi. 23 ; Karii piuov ttjs vvktos, about midnight. Acts xxvii. 27. Metaph. the time when work ceases, i. e. the time of death, Jn. ix. 4 ; the time for deeds of sin and shame, the time of moral stupidity and darkness, Ro. xiii. 1 2 ; the time when the weary and also the drunken give themselves up to slumber, put for torpor and sluggishness, 1 Th. v. 5. vva-tru (-TTto) : 1 aor. ej»u|a ; to ulrikc [?], pierce ; to- pierce through, transfix; often in Hom. of severe or even deadly wounds given one ; as, tov fiiv fyx^^ "^^ ■ • ■ crv- yipbs 8' apa piv ckotos etXf, II. 5, 45. 47 ; (j^daaas avTov eKelvos vvTTCi KUToidev vno tov ^ov^oiva hopaTt KCii Trapaxpijpa- Siepyd^fTai, Joseph, b. j. 3, 7, 35; so ttjv irXfvpav X6yxv> Jn. xix. 34, of. xx. 25, 27. On the further use of the word cf. Frilzsclie, Rom. ii. p. 559. [Corap. : KaTa-vv6rjs, fr. vij [of. vi^mor] and uiBtay [to push; al. oBojiai to care about (cf. Vanicek p. 879)], cf. vahvvos, vavvpos, fr. (^ and d&vvrj, ovopa), slow, slug- gish, indolent, dull, languid: Ileb. vi. 12 ; with a dat. of reference [W. § 31, 6 a.; B. § 133, 21], raw oKoals, of one who apprehends with difficulty, Ileb. v. 11 ; vaBpos xai Trapcipivos (v To'is (pyois. Sir. iv. 29 ; vwBpos k. ■napiipivos ipydTT)s, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 1. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Anthoh, al.) [Syn. see apyos, fin.] * vwTos, -ov, 6, [fr. root 'to bend,' 'curve,' akin to Lat. natis; Pick i. 128; Vanicek p. 420], (Ae 6ac^- : Ro. xi. 10 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. (In Horn. 6 viTor [" the gend. of the sing, is undetermined in Ilom. and lies." (L. and S.)], plur. TO vara; in Attic generally to vSitov, very rarely 6 rcoTof ; plur. always to vcora; Sept. o vwros, plur. 01 pwToi; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 290 ; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 351] ; Passow [L. and S.] s. v.)* [I, on its occasional substitution for cr see 2, HoKea> in use fr. lldt. down ; ef. /><>/(. ad Pliryn. ]). 307), -ti : 1 aor. (^(vob6x'] Plat. Phaedoc. 2 p. 59 b. ; Joseph, b. j. 5, 1, 3) ; a. prop. : Jit. xxv. 3j, 38,43 sq. ; xxvii. 7 ; 3 fin. .'> ; ^evot k- irapfnibrjfxin cn\ Tr)s yT}s, lleb. xi. 13 ; 01 imhr^^ovvrfi ^^voi, Acts x\ii. 21 ; opp. to CTw^TToXiVijs, K])h. ii. 19; (JSejit. for n-ij* a travel- K-r, 2 S. xii. 4 cod. Alex.; fori;. Job xxxi. 32; sev- eral times for ""ipj). [as adj. with] haifioi/ia. Acts xvii. 15. b. trop. o. alien (from .a person or thing) ; without knowledge of, without a share in : with a gen. of the thing, rmv SiaSrjKoin rrjs fVnyyfXiar, Eph. ii. 12[ef. W. § 30, 4, Ij] (toO 'Ki'iyov, Soph. (). T. 219). p. new, un- heard of: SiSaxal, lleb. xiii. 9 ; ^e'vov ti, a strange, won- derful thing, 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Aesehyl. Prom. G8S ; Diod. 3, 15 and 52; al.). 2. one -who receives and enter- tains another hospitably; with whom he sta^js or lodges, a host : o ^eVos /xou, Ro. xvi. 23, wliere xai rrjs (kkXtjitUis SXr/f is added, i. e. either 'who i-eceives hosjjitably all the members of the church Vvho cross his threshold,' or ' who kindly permits the church to worship in his house' (Fritzschey Jt'o-nis, -ou, o, (a corruption of the Lat.sextarius); 1. a sexiaritis, i. e. a vessel for measuring licpiiils, holding about a pint (.Josej)h. antt. 8, 2, 9 — see jStiros ; E])iet. diss. 1, 9, 33; .2, IC, 22; [Dioscor.], Galen and med. writ.). 2. a wooden pitcher or en-er (Vulg. vrreiis [A. y.potj) from wliich water or wine is poured, whether holding a sextarius or not : Mk. vii. 4, 8 [here T WII ora. Tr br. the cl.]." ^paLvia : 1 aor. i^rjpava (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. ^rjpai- vofxai; pf. 3 pers. sinj;. e^rjpavrai (Mk. xi. 21),l)tep. i^r)- pofifievos; 1 aor. f^r)pdv6r)v ; cf. 15. 41 (3G) ; (fr. ^pos, q. v.) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chielly for 'a2' and C'^in ; to make dry, dry up, icither : act., tok pjoproi', Jas. i. 1 1 : pass. to become dry, to be dry, he leilhered [ef. B. 52 (45)] (.Sejjt. for \aT) : of plants, Mt. xiii. 6 ; xxi. 1 9 sq. ; Mk. iv. G ; xi. 20 sq. ; Lk. viii. 6 ; Jn. xv. 6 ; [1 Pet. i. 24] ; of the ripening of crops, Kev. xiv. 15 ; of fluids: ^ n-ijy^, Mk. T. 29 ; TO vhap. Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. viii. 7 ; Is. xix. 5) ; of members of the body, to iraste away, pine away: Mk. ix. 1 8 ; (^rjpafipivrj xdp, a withered hand, Mk. iii. 1 , and R G in 3.' ^pds, -a. -ov, fr. Ildt. down, dry : to Jd'Xoi/, i.k. xxiii. 81 (in a proverb, saying, ' if a good man is treated so, what will be done to the wicked ? ' cf. Ps. i. 3 ; Kzek. xx. 4 7. Is. Ivi. 3 ; Ezek. xvii. 24) ; of members of the body de|)ri»ed of their natural juices, shrunk, irastcd, withered : as xf '>, '^It- -"^ii- 10 ; Wk. iii. 3 L T Tr WII ; Lk. vi. G, 8 ; nu'U are spoken of as ^rjpoi, withered, Jn. v. 3. of the land in distinction from water, ij $r]pd sc. yfi (Sept. for nu/3". Gen. i. 9 sq. ; Jon. i. 9 ; ii. 1 1, and often [W. 18: 592(550)]): Mt. .xxiii. 15 ; Ilcb. xi. 29 where L TTr WII addy^s.* ^vXivos, -ivT], -ivov, {^(Aov), fr. Pind. and lldt. down, wooden, made of wood : aKfvj], 2 Tim. ii. 20; neut. plur. f'boAa, Rev. ix. 20 (Beol, Bar. vi. 30 [Ep. Jer. 29]).* ^uXov, -01;, to', (fr. ^iiu) to scrape, jjlane), fr. Iloni. down ; Sejjt. for y;' ; 1. wood: univ. 1 Co. iii. 12; ^. Biivov, Ui'v. xviii. 12 ; that which is made oficoQii, as a beam from which any one is suspended, a gibbet, a cross, [A. V. tree, q. V. in B.D. Am. cd.], Acts v. 30 ; x. 39 ; xiii. 29 ; Gal. iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 24, (]•;•, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 23; Josh. .\. 2C ; Esth. v. 14), — a use not found in the classics [cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 4]. A log or timber with holes in which the feet, hands, neck, of prisoners were inserted and fastened with thongs (Gr. «aXov, ^vXaniSr], noboKi'iKr), TTobaa-TpdfiTi, Lat. nervus, by which the Lat. renders the 1 Icbr. ~\s, a fetter, or shackle for the feet. Job [xiii. 27] ; xxxiii. 11 ; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 458 s(|q. ; [B. D. s. v. Stocks]) : Acts xvi. 24 (lldt. G, 75 ; 9, 37 ; Arstph. cq. 367, 394, 705); a cudgel, slick, staff: plur., Mt. xxvi. 47, 55 ; Mk. xiv. 43, 48 ; Lk. xxii. 52, (Hdt. 2, G3 ; 4, ISO ; Dem. p. 645, 15 ; Polyb. 6, 37, 3 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 9, 4 ; Ildian. 7, 7, 4). 2. a tree : Lk. xxiii. 31 (Gen. i. 29 ; ii. 9 ; iii. 1 ; Is. xiv. 8, etc.) ; $. rrjs fw^fi see ^Qirj, 2 b. p. 274\ [|uv, older form of o-i'v, retained occasionally in cmu- poiinds, as ^vfifiaiva, 1 Pet. iv. 1 2 ed. Bezae ; see Meister- hans §49,11; L. and S. 8. v. ) ; Sept. for Vili ; '0 shear, shave : pass. 1 Co. .xi. 5 ; mid. to get one's self shaved, il)id. vs. 6 ; 1 Co. -xi. 6 ; with an ace. specifying the obj. more precisely [cf. B. § 134, 7 ; W. § 32, 5] : t!jv Ke<^a\r)v, Acts xxi. 24 (Sept. Jfum. vi. 9, 19; Lev. .xxi. 5; riit d(j>pvat, Hdt. 2, 66 ; to crwfia, 2, 37).* 433 o 0, t), t6, originally tos, ttj, to, (as is evident from the forms Toi, Tai for o'l, ai in Horn, and tlie Ionic writ.), cor- responds to our definite article the (Germ, ilcr, die, das), which is properly a demonstrative pronoun, which we see in its full force in Homer, and of which we find cer- tain indubitable traces also in all kinds of Greek prose, and hence also in the N. T. 1. As a Demonstrative Pronoun ; Lat. hie, haec, Jtoc ; Germ, der, die, das, emphatic ; cf. W. §17,1; B. 101(89)sq.; 1. in the words of the poet Aratu.s, toC yap Koi yc'i/oj (o-fiev, quoted by Paul in Acts xvii. 28. 2. in prose, whtA-e it makes a partition or distributes into parts : o /lei» . . . 6 8e, that . . . this, the one . . . the other : Mt. .\iii. 23 R G Tr [here the division is threefold] ; Gal. iv. 23 [here L WH Tr mrg. br. fiev] ; ol /ieV . . . ot Se, Acts xxviii. 24 ; Phil. i. 16 sq. ; oi jiev ... 6 8c', Heb. vii. 5 sq. 20 (21), 23 sq. ; tovs fiev . . . toi/j Se, Mk. xii. RG; Eph. iv. 11; 01 jiiv . . . oKKoi be (Lchm. ol 8c) . . . crcpot ■ie, Mt. xvi. 14 cf. Jn. vii. 12; nvis foil, by oi 8c', Acts xvii. 18 ; OS (see os I.) /xc'v foil, by d 8c', Ro. xiv. 2 : ol 6c' stands as though oi fiev had preceded, ^Ix. xxvi. 6 7 ; xxviii. 1 7. 3. in narration, when either two persons or two parties are alternately placed in opposition to each other and the discourse turns from one to the other; 6 be, but he, and he, (Germ, er aber) : Mt. il. 14 ; iv. 4 ; xxi. 29 sq. ; Mk. i. 45 ; xii. 15 ; Lk. viii. 21, 30, 48 ; xxii. 10, 34 ; Jn. ix. 38, and very often ; plur., Mt. ii. 5, 9 ; iv. 20 ; Mk. xii. 14 [RGLmrg.], 16 [Lbr. o! be']; Lk. vii. 4; XX. 5, 12 ; xxii. 9, 38, 71 ; Acts iv. 21 ; xii. 15, and often ; Ol fiev ovv, in the Acts alone: i. 6; v. 41 ; xv. 3, 30 ; 6 fiev ovv, xxiii. 18; xxviii. .5. H. As the Definite or Prepositive Article (to be distinguished from the postpositive article, — as it is called when it has the force of a relative pro- noun, like the (ierm. der, die, das, exx. of which use are not found in the N'. T.), whose use in the N. T. is ex- plained at length by W. §§ 18-20; B. 85 (74) sqq. ; [Green p. 5 sqq.]. As in all languages the article serves to distinguish things, persons, notions, more exactly, it is prefi.xed 1. to substantives that have no mod- ifier; and a. those that designate a person or a thing that is the only one of its kind ; the art. thus dis- tinguishes the same from all other persons or things, as rjXtos, o ovpavos, j] yrj, rj BaXaaa-a, o 5c6f, o Xoyof (.In. i. 1 sq.), o 8ia3oXor, to (pas, fj aKorla, i) fuij. o Bavaros, etc. b. appellative names of persons and things defi- nite enough in themselves, or made so by the context, or sufficiently well-known from history ; thus, to the names of virtues and vices, as 17 biKmoavvri. fj a-otpia, 13 ivvap.is, 17 aXrideia, etc. 6 ipxofievot, the well-known per- 28 sonage who is to come, i. e. the Messiah, Mt. xi. 3 ; Lk. vii. 19; 6 TrporpTiTT]'!, the (promised and expected) prophet, Jn. i. 21 ; \i\. 40 ; i) o-un/pi'a, the salvation which all good men hope for, i. e. the Messianic salvation ; ij ypatpr), etc. ; r/ vecfyeXr/, the cloud (well known from the O. T.), 1 Co. ,K. 1 sq. ; roOt dyyc'Xour, Jas. ii. 25 ; ra eKTpap.an, 1 Co. xv. 8. to designations of eminent per- sonages : o vlos Tov 6fov, 6 vlos Toi avdpanrov, (see uio'j) ; o Si8do'KaXor tov 'icrparjX, Jn. iii. 10 ; cf. Fritzsche on ilk. p. 613. The article is applied to the repeated name of a person or thing already mentioned or indicated, and to which the reader is referred, as tovs payovs, Mt. ii. 7 cf. 1 ; ot tzericoi, Mt. ix. 17; ot baipovcs, Mt. viii. 31 cf. 28 ; Tfjti ovou Koi TOV irtuXov, 3It. xxi. 7 cf. 2, and countless other exx. The article is used with names of things not yet spoken of, in order to show that definite things are referred to, to be distinguished from others of the same kind and easily to be known from the context ; as Ta ^pev bevbpiov, sc. which were there, Mt. ,\xi. 8 ; ti» tcpci, to the j)riest whose duty it will be to examine thee, when thou comest, ilt. viii. 4 ; Mk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14 ; to n-Xotov, the ship which stood ready to carry them over, Mt. viii. 23 [RGT, cf. 18]; ix. 1 [R G] ; xiii. 2 [R G] ; to Spos, the mountain near the place in question (der an Ort u. Stelle hefindliche Berg) [but some commentators still regard to opos as used here generically or Ilebraistically like fj opeivrj, the mountain region or the highlands, in contrast with the lew country, (cf. Sept. Josh. .xvii. 16; xx. 7; Gen. xix. 17, 19, etc.) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ' Fresh Revision ' etc. p. Ill sq. ; Weiss, Matthiiusevangelium, p. 129 note; and in Meyer's Mt. 7te Aufl.], Mt. v. 1 ; Mk. iii. 13 ; Lk. ix. 28 ; Jn. vi. 3, 15, (1 Mace. ix. 38, 40) ; 17 oi/c/a, the house in which (Jesus) was wont to lodge. Jit. Lx. 10, 28 ; xiii. 36 ; .xvii. 25 ; \mo tov pibiov, sc. that is in the house, Mt. V. 15 ; also cjri t^v \v\viav, ibid. ; ev tt] (parvr/, in the manger of the stable of the house where they were lodging, Lk. ii. 7 R G ; o eiraivos, the praise of which he is worthy, 1 Co. iv. 5 ; so everywhere in the doxologies: ^ So^a, to Kparos, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; Rev. v. 13, etc. c. The article prefixed to the Plural often either includes all and every one of those who by the given name are distinguished from other things having a different name, — as 01 aarrepes, Mt. x.xiv. 29 ; Mk. xiii. 25; ai «JXmn-cKfs, Mt. viii. 20: Lk. ix. 58, etc. ; — or de- fines the class alone, and thus indicates that the whole class is represented by the individuals mentioned, how- ever many and whosoever they may be ; as in ot ^api- caioi, ot ypapfioTets, ol TfXavai, oi avdpairoi, people, the 434 multitude, (Germ, die Leute) ; oJ acTol, Mt. xxiv. 28 ; Toir Kvdiv, Mt. vii. 6. d. The article prefixed to the Singular sometime? so defines only the class, that all and every one of those who bear the name are brought to mind ; thus, 6 avSpatnot, Mt. xv. 11 ; o edviKos k. rcXtii/ijr, Mt. xviii. 17; oepyuTrjt, Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v. 18; o luKrirqt, Gal. iii. 20 ; 6 KKrjpovojios, Gal. iv. 1 ; d SUatos, Ro. i. 1 7 ; Ileb. X. 38 ; to aqiifm tov drrotTToXov, the signs required of any one who claims to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12, and other exx. e. The article is prefixed to the nominative often put for the vocative in addresses [cf. W. § 29, 2; B. § 129 a. 5] : x^^pf o fSaatXevt rau 'lou8. (prop, ini 6 fiatr., thou who art the king), .In. xix. ;) ; i/ai, 6 varfip, Mt. .\i. 2G ; ayf vvv o'l jrXoi/(7tot, (cXaua-are, Jas. v. I ; oipave Kal oi ayioi, Kev. xviii. 20; add, Mk. v. 41 ; x. 47; Lk. xii. 32; xviii. 11, 1.3 ; .In. viii. 10; xx. 28 ; Acts xiii. 41; Ro.viii.1.5; Eph. v. 14, 22, 25; vi.l,4s(i.; Rev. xii. 12. f. The fireeks employ the article, where we abstain from its use, before nouns denoting things that pertain to him who is the subject of discourse : ilnt or (prfat lifydXrj TT) (f>a>vrj. Acts .xiv. 10 [R G] ; xxvi. 24, (Prov. xxvi. 25) ; yvvf) TTpoa\^, 1 Co. xi. 5 ; esp. in the expression fx^'" "> when the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else ■which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, il a les e'pntdes lari/es) ; so, ?x(iv rfji/ x"pa ^r)pav, ^It. xii. 10 RG; Mk. iii. 1; to irpoawirov un avOpunrov [(Rcc. uvBpin- TTOf)], Rev. iv. 7; to ala-drjTrjpia yeyvpvacrpeva, Ileb. v. 14 ; atrapa^aTov ttjv UpaxTvvr^Vy Ileb. vii. 24 ; rrji/ KaToUrjinv kt\. Mk. V. ,3 ; Trjv fir iavToi/s dyamjv (Krevrj, 1 Pet. iv. 8. Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron. avTou, vpa>v, is added to the substantive: Mt. iii. 4 ; Alk. viii. 1 7 ; Rev. ii. 1 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2, cf . Eph. i. 1 8 ; cf . W. §18,2; [B. §125, 5]. g. Proper Names some- times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous ; cf. W. § 18, 5 and 6; B. § 124. 3 and 4 ; [Green p. 28 sq.]; o. as respects names of Persons, the person without the article is simply named, but with the article is marked as either well known or as already mentioned; thus we find 'lijo-oOr and d 'lijt., ITaiJXof and d IlaiiX., ete. EtiXaTor has the article everywhere in John's Gospel and also in JIark's, if xv. 43 (in R G L) be excepted (but T Tr WU insert the article there also) ; TiVoj is every- where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons in the oblique cases almost always have the article, unless the case is made evident by a preposition : tw 'lti, Mk. XV. 45 ; tov 'laxai^ icai rbv 'Ho-aO, Ileb. xi. 20, and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1 sqq. ; Lk. iii. 23 ; but where perspicuity does not require the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as twi/ vlmv 'Io)(ri)(^, Heb. xi. 21 ; tc5i/ viaiv 'Ep/iaip, Acts vii. IC ; d 6fus 'la-aiiK, Mt. .xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; Srav o^r^aBe Afipaa/i K. 'la-aciK . . . Ka\ iravras Toiis 7Tpo(j)riras, Lk. xiii. 28. The article is commonly omitted with personal proper names to which is added an apposition indicating the race, country, oflice, rank, surname, or something else, (cf. Matthiae § 274) ; let the foil, suffice as exx. : 'A^paap. 6 TTOT^p fjpav, Jn. viii. 56 ; Ro. iv. 1 ; 'laKw^ov TOV TOV Ze^(8citov Kat ^loiuvvrjv tov dB€\(j>bv avTov, Mt. iv, 21; MapUi tj Mayda\tjvj]y Mt. .x.wii. 50, etc.; ^laidvvrjv d fiairTinos ovtos, Jn. ix. 24 [ovtos 6 av6p. L Tr mrg. WII] ; Acts vi. 13 ; xxii. 26 ; d Xaot ovtos, Mt. xv. 8 ; o vlos trov OVTOS, Lk. XV. 30 ; plur. Lk. xxiv. 1 7, and numljerless other e.xx. ; ovtos 6 avdpamos, Lk. xiv. 30 ; ovtos o "Kaos, Mk. vii. 6 [d X. oiiT. L WII mrg.] ; ovtos 6 vidf jxov, Lk. XV. 24 ; OVTOS o Tfka>vr)s, Lk. xviii. 1 1 [d reX. ovt. L mrg.] ; OVTOS o Xdyor, Jn. vii. 36 [d Xdy. ovt. LTTrWII], and many other Cxx. on (Kflvos, see exeivor, 2 ; on ovtos 6 etc., see avTos (I. 1 b. etc.) ; on 6 airros etc., see avros, m. 3. The neuter article prefixed to adjec- tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. § 34, 2; B. § 128, 1] ; as, to dyaBov, to kcXov (which see each in its place) ; to (Xottov, Heb. vii. 7 ; with a gen. added, to yva>a-Tov tov denv, Ro. i. 1 9 ; to ddvvaTov tov vofiov, Ro. viii. 3 ; to aaSfvis toD deoii, 1 Co. i. 25 ; avTrjs, Ileb. vii. 18; Ta dopaTa t. 6iov, Ro. i. 20; Ta KpvTTTa tt]s ai(T)(vfTjs, 2 Co. iv. 2, etc. 4. The article with cardinal nu- merals; etj one; 6 els the one (of two), see eh, 4 a.; but differently 6 eh in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So also oi dvo (our llie twain), Mt. xix. 5 ; ol Sexa the (those) ten, and ot e'vvea, Lk. xvii. 1 7 ; eKeivoi. ol Sexa (/cat) oktw, Lk. xiii. 4. 5. The article prefixed to partici- ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W. §§ 18, 3 ; 45, 7 ; B. §§ 129, 1 b. ; 144, 9] ; as, 6 neipdCv, Mt. iv. 3 ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; d jianTi^av, Mk. vi. 14 (for which Mt. xiv. 2 d ^a7TTi(TTr)s); 6 a-irelpav, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii. 5; d oXodpevaiv, Ileb. xi. 28; ot /3ao-Tafoi/rcs, Lk. vii. 14; oj ^oa-KovTes, Mt. viii. 33 ; Mk. v. 14 ; ol ea-dlouTes, the eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21 ; to d(f>ei\6fi.evoi/, Mt. xviii. 30, 34 ; to imdpxovra (see {mdpxa>, 2). b. the ptcp. with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin. verb; cf. B. § 144, 9]: Mt. x. 40; Lk. vi. 29 ; xi. 23; Jn. XV. 23 ; 2 Co. i. 21 ; Phil. ii. 13, and very often, nds 6 foil, by a ptcp. [W. Ill (lOG)], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 30 [T WII om. L Tr mrg. br. art.] ; xi. 10 ; Ro. ii. 1 ; 1 Co. xvi. 16 ; Gal. iii. 13, etc. ; p.aKdpios d w. a ptcp., Mt. v. 4 (5), 6, 10, etc. ; oval vp.lv ol w. a ptcp., Lk. vi. 25 ; the neut. t6 with a ptcp. must be resolved into that which [with a fin. verb], to yevvapevov, Lk. i. 35 ; to yeyevvrjpe- vov, Jn. iii. 6. c. the article with ptcp. is placed in apposition : Mk. iii. 22 ; Acts xvii. 24 ; Eph. iii. 20 ; iv. 22, 24; 2 Tim. i. 14; 1 Pet. i. 21, etc. 6. The neut. TO before infinitives a. gives them the force of substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [cf. W. § 44, 2 a. ; 3 c.]); as, TO Ka6liTai, Mt. xx. 23 ; Mk. x. 40 ; rd BiXeiv, Ro. vii. 18; 2 Co. viii. 10; to Trotrjam, to eTriTeXeaai, 2 Co. viii. 11, and other exx. ; toCto KpivaTe ■ to pf/ Tidevai ktX. Ro. xiv. 13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi- tion (dvTi TOV, ev Ta, ets To, etc.), see under each prep, in its place. b. Much more frequent in the N. T. than in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., csp. in the writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John's Gospel and Epistles), is the use of the gen. toO w. an inf. (and in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N". T.), which is treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq. ; W. § 44, 4 ; B. 266 (228) sqq. The examples fall under the foil, classes : Toil with an inf. is put a. after words which natu- rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them; thus after a$iov, 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; eXaxe, Lk. i. 9 (1 S. xiv. 47); e^anopuvpai, 2 Co. i. 8. p. for the simple expletive [i. e. ' complementary '] or (as it is commonly called) epe.xegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom- plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase, (where in Germ, zu is commonly used) ; thus after n-po- dvpla, 2 Co. viii. 11 ; ^paSels, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; eXnls, Acts xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [not Rec] ; e^riTei evKaipiav, Lk. xxii. 6 [not L mrg.] ; d Kmpus (sc. e'o-Ti) too ap^aaBai, to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 (Kmpbv e'xetD w. the simple inf. Ileb. xi. 15) ; di86vm rfjv e^ovaiav, Lk. x. 19 (J^ovtrlav exf" with simple inf., Jn. xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); 6(peiX(Tui, ea-piv (equi^-. to u(fieiXopev), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone. Gal. V. 3) ; eToipov dvai. Acts xxiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58 ; V. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 33); xP^'"" exeiv, Heb. v. 12; eSioKev 6daXpovs tov pr) ^XeTretv Kal S)Ta TOV prj dKoveiv, that they should not see . . . that they should not hear [cf. B. 267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8 (cx"" ^itq elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see ovs, 2); enX'iO-Ori 6 xpovos Toil TeKeiv avTrjv, at which she should be deliv- ered [cf. B. 1. c], Lk. i. 57 ; (nXfjo-d. rjpepm . . . Toii nepi- Tfpeiv avTov, that they should circumcise him [cf. B. 1. c], Lk. ii. 21 ; after dvivheKTov ioTiv, Lk. xvii. 1 [so B. § 140, 15; (AV. 328 (308) otherwise)]; quite unusually after eyiveTo [cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W. 1. c]. Acts x. 25 [Rec. om. art.]. 7. after verbs of deciding, entreat- ing, exhorting, commanding, etc. : after Kpiveiv (see Kplvto, 4) ; eyeveTo yvatprj {^pr}S T Tr WH (see yivopat. 5 e. a.)], Acts xx. 3 ; to irpoaiimov ea-Trjpt^ev, Lk. i.x. 51 ; (TvvTi6ea6ai, Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5); 7rpo(Tevxf 'UpoviraXrifi, 6 toti KotTfios, 6 eaa> avBpatroi, 6 vvv alav, etc., on which see these several words. c. the neut. to is used in the ace. absol., esp. in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, ro miKiv, 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; to vvv or ravvv, and with neuter ad- jectives used adverbially, as to XoiTroK, to irporepov (.In. vi. 62; Gal. iv. 1:5) ; to npaTov (.In. .\. 40 ; xii. IG ; xix. 39) ; TO irKfioTov (1 Co. xiv. 27) ; see these words them- selves. 8. The article before prepositions with their cases is very often so used that &v, ovTes, ovtcl, must be supplied in thought [cf. B. § 12o, 9 ; AV. § IS, 3] ; thus, 01 OTTO 'iToXi'ar, airh QeaadXoviKrjS, ActS xvii. 13; Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. AV. § 66, 6] ; 6 ev nvt. Jit. vi. 9 ; Ro. viii. 1 ; neut. ra -irpos, Mk. ii. 2 ; oi e< tivos, Ro. ii. 8 ; iv. 14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 etc.; oi napd tivos, Jlk. iii. 21 (see napd, I. e.). TO nep't tivos, Lk. xxiv. 19 ; Acts xxiv. 10 ; Phil. i. 27; [add, Ta (TTrWII ri) jrfpi epoi, Lk. xxii. 37], etc. (see nepl, I. b. j3.)'; Ta nepl -iva, Phil. ii. 23 [see trepi, II. b.] ; oi pierd twos, those with one, his compan- ions, Mt. xii. 3 ; oi rrepl Ttva, and many other exx. which are given under the several prepositions, the neut. to in the ace. absol. in adverbial expressions [cf. AV. 230 (216); B. §§ 125, 12; 131, 9] : to Kaff ffpepav, daily, day b,/ day, Lk. xi. 3 ; xix. 47 ; Acts xvii. 1 1 [R G AVII br.] ; TO Ka6o\ov, at all. Acts iv. 18 [L T AVII om. to] ; besides, in TO KOTO a-dpKa, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on the force of the art. here see Ahhot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. for 1883, p. 108]; to kot ipi, as respects what relates to me, my state, my affairs. Col. iv. 7 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; TO e'l vp.a>v, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18; to e'(^' vjiXv, as far as respects j-ou, if I regard you, Ro. xvi. 19 RG; TO irpos (to») 6e6v, acc. absol., as respects the things pertaining to God, i. e. in things pertaining to God, Ro. XV. 1 7 : Heb. ii. 17; v. 1, {lepei Ta irpos roiis 6eovs, (rrpanjya de to irpos Toiis dvOpmrovs, Xen. resp. Laced. 13, 11 ; cf. Frilzsdf, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 262 sq.) ; to fK pepovs sc. ov, that which has been granted us in part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. .xiii. 10. 9. The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni- tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen- eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing [cf. AV. § 30, 3 ; B. § 125, 7] ; a. the masc. and the fcm. article : 'loKm/Sof 6 tov Zf^fSaiov, 6 tov 'AX<^ai'ou, the son, Mt. x. 2 (3), 3; Mapia j/ tov 'loxujSou, the mother, Mk. xvi. 1 [Tom. Trbr. toO] ; Lk. x.\iv. 10 [L TTrAA^II]; 'Eppop tov Svxfp, of Ilamor, the father of Shechem, Acts vii. 16 II G : ^ toC Oiplov, the wife, Mt. i. 6 ; oi XXdijf, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes- tics, or work-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co. i. 11 ; also 01 ' .\pi- TrcDK, Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33 ; in the same sense to too Kvplov, opp. to Ta TOV Koapov, 1 Co. vii. 3 2-:i4 ; to ttjs aapKos, Ta tov irvevpaTos, Ro. viii. 5 ; to vpu>v, your pos- sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14 ; fijT«i> to or to tivos, 1 Co. x. 24 ; xiii. 5 ; Phil. ii. 21 ; Ta rfjs flprjvrjs, t^s oiKo^opijs, which make for, Ro. -xiv. 19; to tjjs dcrdeveias pov, which per- tain to ray weakness, 2 Co. xi. 30 ; to Kaicrapos, ri TOV 6eoi, due to Ciesar, due to God, Mt. xxii. 21 ; Mk. .xii. 1 7 ; Lk. xx. 25 ; Ta tov vrprlov, the things wont to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; to TiKof, the house of one {ra \vKtovos, Thcocr. 2, 76; [els Ta TOV dbeXrpov, Lysias c. Eratosth. § 12 p. 19-5]; cf. iv roir iroTpiKoif, in her father's house. Sir. xiii. 10 ; [Chry- sost. horn. Iii. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. col. 458 ed. Migne ; Gen. xii. 51 ; Esth. vu. 9, (Hebr. n:3) ; Job xviii. 19 (Hebr. IIJ"?)]) ; with the name of a deity, the temple (ra toU Aids, .Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 18, 2; also to Toii Aio'j. Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167, 15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 100). Ta ToO vopov, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii. 14 ; TO T^s napoiplas, the (saying) of (that which is said in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; to twi/ Baipovi^opevwv, what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viii. 33 ; TO rris trvKqs, what has been done to the fig-tree, Mt. xxi. 21. 10. The neuter to is put a. before entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception [B. § 125, 13 ; AV. 109 (103 sq.)] : drrfv avTM to Ei 8vva- aat TTioTf Co-ai, said to him this : ' If thou canst believe ', Mk. ix. 23 [but L T Tr AVH to Ei Sivi, ' U thou canst ! '] ; cf. Bleek ad loc. ; \_Riddell, The Apology etc. Digest of Idioms § 19 y.]. before the sayings and precepts of the O. T. quoted in the New : to Ov (J3oveva-cis, the precept, 'Thou Shalt not kill', Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37 (where Lchm. ot» for to) ; Ro. xiii. 9 ; [1 Co. iv. 6 L T TrAA'H]; Gal. v. 14. before indir. questions : to t/s etc., TO Ti etc., TO iras etc., Lk. i. 62 ; ix. 46 ; xix. 48 ; .xxii. 2, 4, 23 sq.; Acts iv. 21 ; xxii. 30; Ro. viii. 26; 1 Th. iv. 1 ; cf. Matthiae § 280; Kruger § 50, 6, 10: Passow ii. p. 395" ; [L. and S. s. v. B. I. 3 sq.]. b. before single words wliich are explained as parts of some discourse or statement [reff. as above] : To'Ayap, the name'Ayap, Gal. iv. 25 [T L txt. AVH mrg. om. Tr br. "Ayap] ; t& ' dve^q ', this word dw'5i/, Eph. iv. 9, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on oyBoijKovTa 437 oBo^ Gal. L c.] ; to ' ert ana^ ', Heb. xii. 27 ; cf . Matthiae ii. p. 731 sq. 11. We find the unusual expression 7 oiai (apparently because the interjection was to the writer a substitute for the term ij TrXi/yi; or 17 6\L\ffis [W. 179 (169)]), misery, calamity, [A. V. Ihe FFoe], in Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14. m. Since it is the business, not of the lexicographer, but of the grammarian, to exhibit the instances in which the article is omitted in the N. T. where according to the laws of our language it would have been expected, we refer those interested in this matter to the Grammars of Winer (§ 19) and Alex. Buttmann (§ 124, 8) [cf. also ( jreen ch. ii. § iii. ; Middleton, The Doctrine of the Greek Article (ed. Rose) pp. 41 sqq., 94 sq. ; and, particularly with reference to Granville Sharp's doctrine (Remarks on the uses of the Def. Art. in the Grk. Text of the X. T., 3d ed. 1803), a tract by C. Winslanley (A Vindication etc.) republished at Cambr. 1819], and only add the foO. remarks : 1. More or less frequently the art. is wanting before appellatives of persons or things of which only one of the kind exists, so that the art. is not needed to distinguish the individual from others of the same kind, as rf\ios, yTJ,.6€6s, Xptorof, TTvcvfxa ayiov^ ^wtj alaivioSf BavoTos, vcKpoi (of the whole assembly of the dead [see vcKpos, 1 b. p. 423']) ; and also of those persons and things which the connection of discourse clearly shows to be weU-defined, as vo^or (the ^losaic law [see vofios, 2 p. 428*]), Kvpios, narrjp, vlos, avrjp (husband), yvvi) (wife), etc. 2. Prepositions which with their cases designate a state and condition, or a place, or a mode of acting, usually have an anarthrous noun after them ; as, «'s s, Kara crdpKa, eV iXwidtj nap iXiriSaj an dyopas^ air dypov, ev dypco, eis 68ov, ev Tjfiepais 'Hpiiidov, fis ijfifpav aTroXvTpoy- aeojs, and numberless other examples. ©•ySoTiKOVTa, e i'y /((;/: Lk. ii. 37; xvi. 7. [(Thuc, al.)] * o-ySoos, -7j, -oi>, [fr. Hom. down]. Me cifflilh : Lk. i. 59 ; Acts vii. 8; Rev. xvii. 11; xxi. 20; one who has seven other companions, icho with others is Ihe eighth, 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; so SeicaTOf, icilh nine others, 2 JIacc. v. 27 ; cf. JIatthiae § 469, 9 ; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 72 sq. and 720 sq. ; W. § 37, 2; [B. 30 (26)].* oYKos, -ov, 6, (apparently fr. EFKO, c'veyKfip, i. q. (popros, see Buttmann, Lexil. i. 288 sqq. [Fishlake's trans, p. 151 sq.], whatever is prominent, protuberance, hilk, mass, hence), a burden, iceight, encumbrance: Heb. xii. 1. (In many other uses in Grk. writ, of all ages.) * [Stn. ^7/cos,i8apor, «^opT/oj/: 18. refers to ireight, o. to bulk, and either m a y be oppressive (contra Tittmann) ; /3. a load in so far as it is heavy, (popriov a burden in so far as it isborne; hence the 0opT. may be either 'hea\-y' (Mt. xxiii. 4; Sir. xxi. 16), or 'light' (Mt. xi. 30).] oS«, TJS€, ToSe, (fr. the old demonstr. pron. 6, ij, to, and the enclit. 6«), [fr. Hom. down], this one here, Lat. hicce, haecce, hocce ; a. it refers to what precedes : Lk. x. 39 and Rec. in xvi. 25; rdSe navra, 2 Co. xii. 19 Grsb. ; to what follows : neut. plur. rdSf , these (viz. the followin(j) things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken. Acts X V. 23 R G ; robe Xf'yci etc., Acts xxi. 1 1 ; Rev. ii. 1 , 8, 1 2, 18 ; iii. 1, 7, 14. b. €i£ TrjvSe t^w ttoKiu, [where we say into this or that city] (the writer not knowing what par- ticular city the speakers he introduces would name), Jas. iv. 13 (cf. W. 162 (153), who adduces as similar Tiji/Sf TTjV f/pepav, Plut. symp. 1,6, 1 ; [but see Lunemann's ad- dition to Win. and esp. B. § 127, 2]).» dSevo) ; (oSdy) ; to travel, journey : Lk. x. 33. (Hom. II. 11, 569 ; Xen. an. 7, 8, 8 ; Joseph, antt. 19, 4, 2 ; b. j. 3, 6, 3 ; Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.] ; Plut., al. ; Tob. vi. 6.) [COMP. : 8(-, oT: fut. obrjyrjirm; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. 68ijyijcr,i; ; (oSi/ydf, q-v.); Sept. chiefly for nnj, also for I)"")!;!, ^"'7in, etc. ; a. prop, to be a guide, lead on one's way, to guide : nvd, Jit. xv. 14 ; Lk. vi. 39 ; nva iit'i Tt, Rev. vii. 17; (Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Alciphr., Babr., al.). b. trop. to be a guide or teacher; to give guid- ance to: Ttvd, Acts viii. 31 (Plut. mor. 954 b.) ; ets r^n d\^6etav, Jn. xvi. 13 [R G L Tr WII txt. (see below)] (oSriyrjcrov fic fffi ti)v dXrjOfmv aov Ka\ 8l8a^6v pf, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 5 [foil, by eir and irpoT in '• Teaching of the Apostles " ch. 3]) ; foil, by ev w. dat. of the thing in which one gives guidance, instruction or assistance to another, fv TJi aKrjdda, Jn. xvi. 13 T WH mrg. [see above] (dSij- yrjaov pc iv rfi d8(a (rov K. itopevaopai, iv tji dXrjBfia (Tov, Ps. Ixxxv. (Lxxxvi.) 11 ; cf. Ps. c.wiii. (cxix.) 35 ; Sap. Lx. 11 ; X. 17).* 081)765, -oil, 6, (J>8os and r^yiopai ; cf. xopry/oi!), a leader of the iray, a guide; a. prop.: Acts i. 16 (Polyb. 5, 5, 15 ; Pint. Alex. 27 ; 1 Mace. iv. 2 ; 2 Mace. v. 15). b. in fig. and sententious discourse 68. -rvpXmv, i. e. like one who is literally so called, namely a teacher of the ignorant and inexperienced, Ro. ii. 19 ; plur. 6S. TiKpXoi Tv(fiKS>v, i. e. like blind guides in the Uteral sense, in that, while them- selves destitute of a knowledge of the truth, they offer themselves to others as teachers. Jit. .XV. 14; xxiii. 16, 24.* dSotiropc'u, -w ; (o8o[7rdpo5 a wayfarer, traveller) ; to tracel, Journey: Acts x. 9. (Ildt., Soph., Xen., Ael. v. h. 10, 4; Hdian. 7, 9, 1, al.) * dSoiiropia, -as. rj, (oSoiiropos), a journey, journeying : Jn. iv. 6 ; 2 Co. xi. 26. (Sap. xiii'. 18 ; xviii. 3 ; 1 Mace. vi. 41 ; Hdt., Xen., Diod. 5, 29 ; Hdian. al.) * dSo-iroie'ti), -co ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down, to make a road: to level, make passable, smooth, open, a way; and so also in the Sept. : oySonoirjae rpl^ov rfi dpyrj avrov, for lsSi), Ps. Ixxvii. (Lxxviii.) 50 ; for '7'70, to construct a level way by casting up an embankment, Job xxx. 1 2 ; Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 5; for nj3, P.s. Ixxix. (bs;xx.) 10; for IJ-i-l n33, Is. Ixii. 10; — and so, at least apparently, in Mk. ii. 23 L Tr mrg. WH mrg. [see jrotfa, I. 1 a. and c] (with dSoK added, Xen. anab. 4, 8, 8).* o'8ds, -ov, 17, [appar. fr. r. EA to go (Lat. adire, accedere), allied w. Lat. solum; Curtius § 281]; Sept. numberless times for ^"^'l, less frequently for ITIN ; [fr. Hom. down] ; a way; 1. ])rop. a. a travelled way, road: Mt. ii. 12 : vii. 13 scp ; xiii. 4, 19 ; Mk. iv. 4, 15 ; x. 46 ; Lk. viii. 5, 12 ; x. 31 ; xviii. 35 ; xix. 36 ; Acts viii. 26 ; ix. 1 7 ; Jas. ii. 25, etc. ; Kara tjjv CSuv (as ye pass along 6B6(i 438 «?ffl the way [see «cord, II. 1 Svcrtiwv ijXiov, Dent. xi. 30 ; more- over, once with the ace, dSov BaKatraai/ ipvdpdv, Xuni. xiv. 25 ; [Deut. ii. 1] ; cf. lln'crsch, De Alex. I'cntateuelu versione, p. 145 sq. ; [B. § 131, 12]). with a gen. of the subject, the way in which one walkn : iv rais dSoiy avTav, Uo. iii. 16 ; iroijia^fLV rf/v 6861/ rai» ^aaiXetov, Rev. xvi. 12; in metaph. ]ihrases, KaTcvBvveiv ttjv oSov tivos, to re- move the hindi'ances to the journey, 1 Th. iii. 11; cVoi- (idftiK (and cldvvftp, .In. i. 23 ; K(iTn(TK(vu^fi.v, Mt. xi. 10 ; Jlk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27) rrfv obov tuv Kvpiov, see «roi/udfoj. b. a traveller's way, journey, trarelliny : tV rfi dSw, on the journey, on the road, Mt. v. 25 ; xv. 32 ; .\x. 1 7 ; Mk. viii. 27 ; ix. 33 ; x. 32, 52 ; Lk. xii. 58 ; .x.xiv. 32, 35 ; Acts ix. 27 ; f^ obov, from a journey, Lk. xi. 6 ; atpciv or KracrBai Ti elsoSov, Jit. .\. 10; Jlk. vi. 8, and els rfjv oSok, Lk. ix. 3 ; nopevofuu t^v oSov, to make a journey (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 22), w. avTov added [A. Y. to t/o on one's way], to con- tinue the journey undertaken, .Vets viii. 39 ; dSor r/iifpas, a journey requiring a (single) day for its completion, used also, like our a (lay's journey, as a measure 0/ dis- tance, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. XXX. 36; xxxi. 23; Ex. iii. 18; Judith ii. 21 ; 1 JIacc. v. 24 ; vii. 45 ; airix^iiv irainruWuiv il^ifpav 6S6v, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3, cf. Ildt. 4, 101 [W. IS.H (177)]) ; on the phrase 6S01/ noieiv, Jlk. ii. 23 see noUa, I. 1 a. and c. 2. Metaph. a. according to the familiar fig. of speech, esp. freq. in Ilebr. [cf. W. 32] and not unknown to the Greeks, by which an action is spoken of as a proceeilinij (cf. the Germ. Wandel), 6&6s denotes a course oi conduct, ri way (i. e. ra.anner) of think- in y, feeling, deciding: a person is said dSoi' heiKviiai nvl, who shows him how to obtain a thing, what helps he must use, 1 Co. xii. 31 ; with a gen. of the obj., i. e. of the thing to be obtained, cip^tojf, Ro. iii. 1 7 ; fu^s. Acts ii. 28 ; trarrjplas. Acts xvi. 1 7 : with a gen. of the subj., ttjs SiKaiocrvvrji: the way which fj BiKmoa: jioints out and which is wont to characterize !] 6«., so in Jit. xxi. 32 (on which see SiKaiooTJw;, 1 b. p. 149' hot.) ; used of the Christian religion, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; likewise j-^r a\r;deias, ibid. 2; with gen. of the person deciding and acting, Jas. v. 20 ; toO KdiV, .lude 11 ; rod BaXadju, 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; iv naaats rais dSois avToi/, in all his purposes and actions, Jas. i. 8; rds ohovs fiov iv \pi(TT(f, the methods which I as Christ's min- ister and apostle follow in the discharge of my ollice, 1 Co. iv. 17; those are said iroptveadai rais o&ols airav [(o walk in their own ways] who take the course which pleases them, even though it be a perverse one, Acts xiv. 1 6 [on the dat. seCTTopfija), subfin.]; aidSoiroO Sfoii or Kvpiov, thti purposes and ordinances of God, his ways of dealing with men. Acts xiii. 10 ; Ro. .xi. 33; Rev. xv. 3, (Ilos. .xiv. 9 ; Ps. xeiv. (xcv.) 10; cxliv. (c.xlv.) 17; Sir. xxxix. 24; Tob. iii. 2, etc.). ij oSbs toO 6coxj, the course of thought, feel- ing, action, prescribed and a[)proved by God : Jit. xxii. 16; Jlk. xii. 14; Lk. x.x. 21; used of the Christian re- ligion. Acts .xviii. 26 ; also rj 6. tou Kvplov, ibid. 25 ; dSds used generally of a method of knowing and worshipping God, .\cts xxii. 4 ; x.xiv. 14 ; r) dSds simply, of the Chris- tian religion [cf. B. 163 (142)], Acts ix. 2; xix. 9, 23; x.xiv. 22. b. in the saying of Christ, iyii flpi 17 dSdf / am the jcni/ by which one passes, i. e. with whom all who seek approach to (iod must enter into closest fellowship, Jn. .xiv. 6. [On the omission of obos in certain formulas and i)hrases (Lk. v. 19 ; xix. 4), see W. 590 (549) s(j. ; B. §123, 8 ; Bos, Ellipses etc. (ed. Schaefer) p. 331 sq.] dSois, [ace. to Etym. Magn. 615, 21 (Pollux 6, 38) fr. eba>, Lat. cdere, etc., cf. Curtius § 289 ; al. fr. root da to divide, cf. Saiai, SdKvw, (Lat. dens); Tick i. p. 100], -oKTOf, d, fr. Ilom. down; Sept. for [ty; a tooth: Jit. v. ;i.s ; Jlk. ix. l.S ; Acts vii. 54 ; plur. Rev. ix. 8 • o /3puy^os Tmv ohovTwv, see ^pvypos* dSvvdu. -&>: pres. indie, pass. d6ui/(3/jai ; pres. in ; consuming grief; cf. Lat. curae edaces], -ijs, fj, pain, sorrow : Ro. ix. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 0. (From Ilom. down; Sept.)* dSvpfids, -ov, 6, {oSvpopai to wail, lament, [see KKalw, fin.]), a wailing, lamentation, mourning: Jit. ii. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (.x.xxi.) 15 for D'" oBev, (fr. the rel. pron. o and the enclitic 6fv which de- notes motion from a place), [fr. Horn, down], a,dv., frnin which ; whence ; it is used a. of the place from which : Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 24 ; Acts xiv. 2G ; xxviii. 13 ; by at- traction for eKiWevmov etc., Mt. xxv. 24, 26 ; cf. B. § 143. 12; [W. 159 (loO)]. b. of the source from which a tiling is known, /;-o«i which, whereby: 1 Jn. ii. 18. c. of the cause from which, /or which reason, wherefore, on which account, [A. V. whereupon (in the first two in- stances)] : Mt. xiv. 7; Acts xxvi. 19; Heb. ii. 17; iii. 1 ; vii. 25 ; viii. 3 ; ix. 18 ; xi. 19 : often in the last three books of Mace* oOdvr), -ijr, tj, [fr. Hom. down] ; a. linen [i. e. fine white linen for women's clothing : cf. Vanicek, Fremd- ■worter, s. v.]. b. linen cloth (sheet or sail) ; so Acts X. 1 1 ; xi. 5.* oSoviov, -ov, TO, (dimin. of o66vt), q. v.), a piece of linen, sinall linen cloth : plur. strips of linen cloth for swathing the dead, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.] ; Jn. xix. 40 ; xx. 5-7. (In Grk. writ, of ships' sails made of linen, bandages for wounds, and other articles ; Sept. for y\D, Judg. .xiv. 13 ; for nnniJ or r\U>3, Hos. ii. 5 (7), 9 (11)'.) • olSa, see fl'Sm, II. p. 1 74. o[K€iaKos, -ij, -6v, see oIkiokos- olKtios, -a, -ov, (oiKos), fr. Hes. down, belonging to a house or family, domestic, intimate : belonging to one's household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8 ; o«cioi Toil dfov, belonging to God's household, i. e. to the theoc- racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, oi oIkcIoi -ri]! TTiVrews, professors of the (Christian) faith. Gal. vi. 10 [but al. associate this pass, with that fr. Eph. as above ; «ee Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; so oU- (fiiXocrocpias, Strab. 1 p. 13 b. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.] ; yeaypacpias, p. 25 a. [1, 34^d. Sieben.] ; oKiyapxias, Died. 13, 91 ; ropawibos, 19, 70. (Sept. for "iNi^ related by blood ; Ti^, 1 S. x. 14 sqq. ; n">Xu', consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 1 7 ; oik. tov (nrepparos for -IM, Is. Iviii. 7.)* olKCTcia [al. -ela, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq.], -as, r/, (ulKerris, ; (o'kos-) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 2U], a few times for pn ; Lat. habilo, [trans.] to dwell in: ri (Hdt. and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. IC; [intrans. to divell~\, fiera Tivos, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii. 1 2 sq. ; trop. o/ tiw, to be fixed and operative in one's soul : of sin, Ko. vii. 1 7 sq. 20 ; of the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. [9], 11; 1 Co. iii. 16. [CoMP. : iv, kot-. iv-Kar-, Trap-, nepi-, avv-oiKco>.J * ollicT]|j.a, -Tos, TO, fr. [Find, and] Hdt. down, a dwelling- place, hed/itation ; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. celQ, Acts xii. 7, as in Thuc. 4,47 sq. ; Dem., Lcian. Tox. 29 ; Plut. Agis 19; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.* otK7]TTjpiov, -OV, TO, (^oiKt^TTip), « dwelling-plac€, habita- tion : Jude 6 ; of the body as the dwelling-place of the spirit, 2 Co. v. 2 (2 Mace. xi. 2 ; 3 Mace. ii. 15 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 20, 7]; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).* olKia, -as, 17, (oiKos), Sept. for ,T3, [fr. Hdt. down], a house; a. prop, an inhabited edifice, a dwelling : Mt. ii. 11 ; vii. 24-27 ; Mk. i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3 ; Acts iv. 34 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often ; 01 iv Tjj oiKi'a sc. Svres, Mt. V. 15; oi ix t?]s oixi'af with gen. of pers., Phil. iv. 22 ; 17 olxla tov (yrarpos pov) 6(ov, i. e. heaven, Jn. xiv. 2 ; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2 Co. V. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii. 25 ; fj oiKia Tii/of, the household, the family of any one, Jn. iv. 53 ; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [cf. W. § 58, 4 ; B. § 129, 8 a.] ; univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. c. property, wealth, goods, [cf. Lat. res familiaris'] : tivos, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. [cf. Wetst. ad loc] ; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. XX. 47; so orKOff in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 Karidovcn ^laltos oIkov 'OSva-a-fjos, cf. 4, 318), in Hdt. 3, 53 and in Attic; Ilebr. .T3, Gen. xiv. 18 (Sept. to virapxavra) ; Esth. viii. 1 (Sept. oo-a iirfjpxev). I^ot found in Rev. [Syx. see oiKo?. fin.] oUiaKos (in prof. auth. and in some X. T. codd. also oIkciokos [cf. «, t] fr. oucos), -ov, 6, (oiK»a), one belonging to the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x. 36 ; opp. to 6 oiKoSfUTro'TT/s, ib. 25. (Plut. Cic. 20.) * otKo-Sco-iroTt'u, -ci ; (oiKoSeo-TToTTjf) ; to be master (or head) of a house; to rule a household, manage famdy affairs: 1 Tim. V. 14. (A later Grk. word ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373.)* olKo-Seo-ir6TTis, -ov, 6, (oikos, 8f cTTronjf), master of a house, householder: Mt. x. 25 ; xiii. 27; xx. 11; .xxiv. 43 ; Blk. xiv. 14 ; Lk. xii. 39 ; xiii. 25 ; xiv. 21 ; avBpamos oikoS. (see avBpaKos, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 52 ; xx. 1 ; xxi. 33 ; oiKoSfo-Tr- Trjs oiKi'ar, Lk. xxii. 1 1, on this pleonasm cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc. ; W. § 65, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent. B. c. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 11, 3 ; Plut. quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. G. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 shows that the earlier Greeks said o'kou or oiKi'ar SfO-TTOTI/S-) * oIkoSo|i.€k. xiv. 28; dnodljKas, Lk. xii. 18 ; vaov, ilk. xiv. 58 : pass. .In. ii. 20 [on the aor. cf. 2 Esdr. V. 16] ; oocok, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 ([here T eVoiic.], cf. W. 603 (5G1), and add olKovpyuv ra Kara tov oIkov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3) ; [oiKiav, Lk. vi. 48 (cf. W. 1. c.)] ; a-vvayayfjv or oIkov tivi, for the use of or in honor of one, Lk. vii. 5; Acts vii. 47, 49, (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ; o'ikUiv «Vi Tt, Mt. vii. 24, 2G ; Lk. vi. 49 ; irdXii' «V opovs, l>k. iv. 29. p. contextually i. q. to restore bi/ buiidinf/, to rebuild, repair: t/, Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvi. Gl ; xxvii. 40; Mk. XV. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [Lbr. Trmrg.] in 48. b. nietaj)h. a. i. q. to found : «Vi tovtij tjj Tr^rpa olKo8tifj.T]{T{ii fjLov TTjV (KKKricrlav, i. e. by reason of tlie strength of thy faith thou shalt be my principal support in the establish- ment of my church, Mt. xvi. 18. ^. Since both a Chris- tian church and individual Christians are likened to a building or temi)le in which God or the Holy Sjiirit dwells (1 Co. iii. 9, 16 sqq. ; 2 Co. vi. 16 ; Eph. ii. 21), the erection of which temple will not be completely finished till the return of Christ from heaven, those who, by action, instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent life are regarded as taking part in the erection of that building, and hence are said oiv, 1 Mace. xvi. 23; TOV OIKOV toC deov, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the N. T. metaph., edifying, edification, i. e. the act of one who promotes another's growth in Christian wisdom, piety. holiness, happiness, (see oiicoSo^i/a), b. j3. [cf. W. 35 (34)]) : Ro. .\iv. 19; .XV. 2 ; [1 Co. xiv. 26] ; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be- low] ; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29 ; with a gen. of the person whose growth is furthered, vfiSiv, 2 Co. xii. 19, [cf. x. 8]; eavToii [Tdf. airoO]. Eph. iv. 16; tow aapaTos tov XpioroS, ibid. 12: Trjs eKK\r)aias. 1 Co. .\iv. 12; i. q. to olKoSofiovv, what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, etc. XaAcii'. \afieiv, olKoSoprjv, 1 Co. .xiv. 3, 5. 2. i. q. otKoSuiiijtio, a building (i. e. thing built, edifice) : Mk. xiii. 1 sq. : ToD lepov, Mt. x.xiv. 1 ; used of the heavenly body, the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1 ; troj). of a body of Christian.^, a Christian church, (sec olKoSop-ea, b. /3.), Eph. ii. 21 [cf. iras, L 1 c] ; with a gen. of the owner or occupant, deov, 1 Co. iii. 9.* otKoSa|iCa, -as, fj, (oi/coSo/itw), (the act of) building, erection, (Thuc, Plat., Polyb., Plut., Lcian., etc. ; but never in the Sept.) ; metaph. oUoSofiiav 6eov Tf)v iv TTiarei, the increase which (iod desires in faith (see o'lKoSopri). 1 Tim. i. 4 Rec. '"' "'' ; but see olKouo/ila. Not infrivp oIkov. and oiVoS. are confounded in the Mss. ; see Grimm on 4 JIacc. p. 365, cf. Hilgenfeld, Barn, epist. p. 28; [D'Orrille, Chariton 8, 1 p. 599].* o1ko.8o|xos, -ov, 6, (oiKoc, Seiiio to build ; cf. oIkovo/ios), a builiter, an architect : Acts iv. 11 L T Tr WH. (Ildt.,. Xen., Plat., Plut., al. ; Sept.) * oIkovo|i.co>, -a ; (oUovofios) ; to be a steward ; to manage the iiljnirs if a household : ab.sol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to manage, dispense, order, regulate : Soph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al. ; 2 Mace. iii. 14.) * oIkovo)iUi, -as, fj, (olKovofieu), fr. Xen. and Plat, down, the management of a household or of household affairs; specifically, the management, oversight, administration, of others' property ; the office of a manager or overseer, stew- ardship : Lk. .xvi. 2-4 ; hence the word is transferred by Paul in a theocratic sense to the office (duty) in- trusted to him by God (the lord and master) of proclaim- ing to men the blessings of the gospel, 1 Co. Lx. 1 7 ; jj oiKovofiia Toil deoii, the office of administrator (stewardship) intrusted by God, Col. i. 25. univ. administration, dis- pensation, which in a theocratic sense is ascribed to God liimself as providing for man's salvation : atrtves^ . . . fi olKovop.iav 6eov ttjv e'v niaret, which furnish matter for disputes rather than the (knowledge of the) dispen- sation of the things by which God has provided for and prepared salvation, which salvation must be embraced by faitji, 1 Tim. i. 4 L T Tr WH ; fiv irpoeBero . . . KaipSiv, which good-will he purposed to show with a view to (that) dispensation (of his) by which the times (sc. of infancy and immaturity cf. Gal. iv. 1-4) were to be ful- filled, Eph. i. 9 sq. ; ij ol<. t^s xapi.Tos tov 6eov ttjs ho6el- l Sept. 1 K. iv. G ; x\ i. 9, etc.) * oIkos, -ov, 6, [cf. Lat. vicus, Eng. ending -wich; Cur- tius § 95], fr. Hom. down ; Sept. in numberless places for iT3, also for Sd'H a palace, Sns a tent, etc. ; 1. a house; a. strictly, an inliahited house [differing thus fr. 80/109 the building] : Acts ii. 2; xix. 16 ; Ttra'r, Jit. i.\. 6 sq. ; Mk. ii. 11 ; v. 38 ; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56 ; viii. 39, 41, etc. ; epxfo-dai- fis orKov, to come into a house (dornuia venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19) ; els toi' o?koi', into the (i. e. his or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10 ; xv. 6 ; ev ra oixa, in the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20 ; ev oik», at home, 1 Co. xi. 34 ; xiv. 35; 01 ei? tov oTkov (see eU, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61 ; Koer oiKov, opp. to Iv ra icpa, iu a household assembly, in private, [R. V. al home ; see Kara, IL 1 d.], Acts ii. 46 ; V. 42; KOT oUovs, opp. to Sfjfiocria, in private houses, [A. Y. from house to house; see Kara, II. 3 a.]. Acts xx. 20 ; Kara roiis oikovs ctcTTropfud^f tot, entering house after house, Acts viii. 3 ; ij kqt oikov ti,uos fKKXtjcrla, see «cXij- tria, 4 b. aa. b. any building whatever : ifiiropiov, Jn. ii. 16 ; TTpoa-evxns, Jit. xxi. 13 ; Mk. xi. 17 ; Lk. xix. 46 ; TOV ^aaCKiai, toO ap^ifpf a>s, the palace of etc., Jit. xi. 8 ; Lk. xxii. 54 [here T Tr WH oIkIo] ; toO 6(011, the house where God was regarded as present, — of the tabernacle, Mt. xii. 4 ; Jlk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; of the temple at Jerusa- lem, Mt. xxi. 13 ; Mk. xi. 17 ; Lk. xix. 46 ; Jn. ii. 16 sq., (Is. Ivi. 5, 7); cf. Lk. xi. 51 ; Acts vii. 47, 49 ; of the heav- enly sanctuary, Heb. x. 21 (ofKoy ayior 6fov, of heaven, Deut. xxvi. 15; Bar. ii. 16); a body of Christians (a church), as pervaded by the Spirit and power of God, is called oucor TzvevpaTiKos, 1 Pet. ii. 5. c. any dwelling- place : of the human body as the abode of demons that possess it, Jit. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 24 ; (used in Grk. auth. also of tents and huts, and later, of the nests, stalls, lairs, of animals), univ. the place where one has fixed his resi- dence, one's settled abode, domicile : oIkos vpSiy, of the city of Jerusalem, Jit. xxiii. 38 ; Lk. xiii. 35. 2. by me- I ton. the inmates of a house, all the persons forming one family, a household : Lk. .\. 5 ; xi. 1 7 [al. refer this to 1, I and take iirl either locally (see «tti, C. I. 1), or of succes- sion (see eW, C. L 2 c.)] ; xix. 9 ; Acts vii. 10; x. 2; xi. 14 ; xvi. 31 ; xviii. 8; 1 Co. i. 16; 1 Tun. iii. 4 sq.; v. 4 j 2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19; Heb. .xi. 7; plur., 1 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. i. 11, (so also Gen. vii. 1 ; xlvii. 12, and often in Grk. auth.) ; metaph. and in a theocratic sense o o'xos- Toij 6(ov, the family of God, of the Christian church, 1 Tim. iii. 15 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7; of the church of the Old and Xew Testament, Ileb. iii. 2,- 5 sq. (Xum. xii. 7). 3. stock, race, descendants of one, [A. V. house] : 6 oiitor Aaui'S, Lk. i. 27, 69; ii. 4, (1 K. xii. 16); oTk. 'lirpaiiXy Mt. X. 6; XV. 24; Lk. i. 33 ; Acts ii. 36; vii. 42; [(o otic, 'laicti^), 46 L T Tr mrg.] ; Heb. viii. 8, 10, (Jer. xxxviii. (.\xxi.) 31 : Ex. vi. 14; xii. 3 ; xi.x. 3 ; 1 S. ii. 30; [cf. » o-e^aoTos o«os, Philo in Flac. § 4]). The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Sys. oIkos, oiKi'a: in Attic (and esp. legal) usage, oIkos deuotes one's household establishment, one's entire prop- erty, omia, the dicelliny itself; and in prose oIkos is not used in the sense of omia. In the sense oi family oIkos and oikio. are aUke employed ; Schmidt vol. ii. cii. 80. In relation to distinctions (real or supposed) betw. of/cos and oikio the foil, pass, are of interest (cf. Valckenaer on Hdt. 7, 224) : Xen. oecon. 1, 5 o?KOS 5e 5^ Ti SokcZ ^^Zc eXvai; apa oirep oiKia, j) Kal oaa tls t^u TrjS oiKias KeKT-rjTat, vdvra tou oIkou TavTO. effTiv . . . TTavra. tov oIkov ilvai '6povas, oUovpniis xai (piXdvSpovs, Philo dc exsecr. § 4).* otKTcCpu; fut. (as if fr. olKreipca, a form which does not exist) as in the Sept. oiKretprjcrai, for the earlier oiKTftpa, see Loh. ad Pliryn. ]). 741 ; [Veitch s. v.; W. 88 (84) ; B. C4 (56)] ; (fr. o'Krof pity, .and this fr. the interjection o", oh .') ; to pit;/, have compassion on : nvd, Ro. ix. 15 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Horn., Tragg., .\rstph., Xen., Plat., Dem., Lcian., Phit., .\el. ; Sept. for [jn and Dm). [Syn. see Acfo), fin.] * otKTip|)i6s, -oil, 6, (nlKT(ipa), Sept. for D'?nT (the vis- •cera, which were thought to be the seat of conipa.ssion [see o-TrXdyx"""» !>•])' eompassion, pitjj, mercy: airXayxya wKTipiioii (Rec. oiKrcppMv), bowels in which compassion resides, a heart of compassion, Col. iii. 12; in the Script- ures mostly [jlural (conformably to the Hebr. D'"?rTi), emotions, lonr/iiiijs, manifestations of pity, [Eng. compas- sions'] (cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq. ; [W. 17G (IfiG); B. 77 (67)]), toO Oeoii, Ro. xii. 1 ; Heb. x. 28; v." Schmidt iii. p. 580.] * oZp.ai, see oiopai. olvo-irdTijs, -ov, 6, {olvos, and ttott)? a drinker), a wine- bibber, given to loine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. (Prov. x.xiii. 20 ; Polyb. 20, 8, 2 ; Anacr. frag. 98 ; Anthol. 7, 28, 2.) * olvos, -ov, 6', [fr. riom. down], Sept. for ]", also for ITiTJI (must, new wine), ipn, etc. ; trine; a. prop.: jNIt. ix. 17; [xxvii. 34 L txt. T Tr WH] ; Jlk. xv. 23 ; Lk. i. 15; Jn. ii. 3 ; Ro. xiv. 21 ; Eph. v. 18; 1 Tim. v. 23 ; Rev. xvii. 2, etc. ; o'lva npoatxeiv, 1 Tim. iii. 8 ; Sov- \ev€iv. Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph. : olvos toC Sv/jlov (see 6vpx>i, 2), fiery wine, wliich (^lod in his wrath is reprc- senl'bd as mixing and giving to those whom he is about to punish by their own folly and madness. Rev. xiv. 10; xvi. 19 ; xix. 15; with i-^r nopvdas added [cf. W. § 30, 3 N. 1 ; B. 155 (136)], a love-pntion as it were, wine excit- ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices otlu-rs to idolatry. Rev. xiv. 8 ; xviii. 3 [here L om. Tr WII br. o'c], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers himself to be enticed. Rev. xvii. 2. c. by meton. i. (J. a rine: Rev. vi. G. olvo(t>Xu-yCa, -af, ij, {olvo(\>\vyia>, and this fr. o!vo(f>\v^, which is compounded of ori/09 and (fAva, to bubble up, overflow), drunkenness, [.V. V. wine-bihhing'] : 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22 ; Aristot. eth. Nie. 3, 5, 15 ; Polyb. 2, 19, 4 ; Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 22 [for other exx. see Siegfried, Philo etc. p. 102] ; Ael. v. h. 3, 14.) [Cf. Trench § Ixi.] * ol£op.ai, contr. olpai ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to suppose, think: foil, by an ace. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [Tom. vs.]; b)- the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the same, Phil. i. IG (17); by on, .las. i. 7. [Syn. see ijye'o/iai, fin.] * otos, -a, -ov, [fr. Horn, down], relat. pron. (correlative to the demonstr. rolor and rotoiiros), what sort of, what manner of, such as (Lat. {jualis) : oior . . . rotoOror, 1 Co. XV. 48 ; 2 Co. x. 11 ; tov aiirov . . . oTov, Phil. i. 30 ; with the pron. roiovros suppressed, Mt. .\xiv. 21 ; Mk. ix. 3 ; .\iii. 1!) [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. § 143, 8; W. 148 (140) ; see ToiovTos, b.] ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; Rev. xvi. 1 8 ; oia)Sr;7roroDw voarjiian, of what kind of disease soever, Jn. v. 4 Lchm. [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.] ; in indir. quest., Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.]; 1 Th. i. 5. ov)^ oiov 81 on ck- niirruxev, concisely for ov ro'iov iariv oXov on (Kn. but the thini/ (state of the case) /s not such us this, that the word of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God halh by no means come to nought [A. V. 6»; not as though the word of God halh etc.], Ro. ix. 6 ; cf. W. § 64 I. « ; B. § 150, 1 Rem.* olocr8t)iroToCv, -In. V. 4 Lchm.. sec olos. oi'tru, see (ptpto. OKve'ia. -M : 1 aor. a>Kvr](Ta; (okvos [pcrh. allied w. the frequent. (,7jnf-tari (cf. Curtins p. 708)] delay) ; fr. Mora, down; to feel loath, to be .ilow; to delag, hesitate: foil, by an inf. Acts ix. 38. (Num. xxii. 16; Judg. xviii. 9, etc.) * OKVTipos, -d, -ov, (oKvea), sluggish, slothful, backward: Mt. XXV. 26; with a dat. of respect [cf. A\^ § 31, 6 a.; B. § 133, 21], Ro. xii. 11 : ovk oKvrjpov p.oi Ian, foil, by an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Pind., Soph., Thuc, Dem., Theocr., etc.; Sept. for Ssi'.) * oKTariiicpos, -ov, (okto), fjpipa), eight days old; passing the eighth dug : -rrfpiropr, [cf. AV. § 31, 6 a. ; B. § 133, 21 ; but Rec. -/iij] oKTarjpfpos, circumcised on the eighth day, Phil. iii. 5; see rerapralos: ['the word denotes prop, not interval but d u r a t i o n ' (see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. I. c.). Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.].* 443 oXo'i oKTw, eight : Lk. ii. 21 ; Jn. xx. 26 ; Acts ix. 33, etc. [(From Horn, on.)] oXtOptid) (Lchm. in Heb. xi. 28), see o\i>6pfv), -ov, [on its occasional aspiration (oA.) see WH. App. p. 143 ; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 91, 106 ; Scrivener, Introd. p. 565, and reff. s. v. ov init.], Sept. for EO^'.p, [fr. Hom. down], little, small, fern, of number, multitude, quantity, or size: joined to nouns [cf. W. § 20, 1 b. note; B. § 125, 6], Mt. i.x. 37 ; xv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 5 ; viii. 7 ; Lk. X. 2 ; xii. 48 (oXi'yas- sc. TrX^jyar [cf. B. § 134, 6 ; W. § 32, 5, esp. § 64, 4], opp. to n-oXXai, 47) ; Acts xix. 24; 1 Tira. V. 23 ; Heb. xii. 10 ; Jas. iii. 5 R G ; 1 I'et. iii. 20 R G ; Rev. iii. 4 ; of time, short : ^povos. Acts xiv. 28 ; Kaipos, Rev. xii. 12; of degree or intensity, /i(//i?, sKf/Ai : rapaxoi, Acts xii. 18; xix. 23; aratrK, xv. 2; xiipav, xxvii. 2ii. plur. w. a partitive gen. : ywaiKoiv, Acts xvii. 4 ; avhpwv, ib. 12. oKiyoi, absol. : Mt. vii. 14 ; xx. 16 ; [T WH om. Trbr. thecl.]; xxii. 14 ; Lk. xiii. 23 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20 L T TrWH; neut. sing.: Lk. vii. 47; to o\iyov, 2 Co. viii. 15; npos iXiyov a>(pi\ipos. profitable for little (\^aX. parum utilis); [cf. W. 213 (200); some, /or a little (sc. time); see below], 1 Tira. iv. 8 ; eV oKiya, in few words [cf. Shakspere's in a ,/i'!t'], i. e. in brief, briefly (ypdcjxiv), Eph. iii. 3 ; easily, without much effort, Acts xxvi. 28 sq. on other but incorrect interpretations of this phrase cf. Meyer ad loc. [see piyas, 1 a. y.] ; Trpor oklyov, for a little time, Jas. iv. 14 ; simply iXiyov, adverbi:illy : of time, a short time, a {little) while, Mk. vi. 31 ; 1 Pet. i. 6; v. 10; Rev. xvii. 10 ; of space, a little (further), Mk. i. 19 ; Lk. V. 3. plur. oXi'ya, a few things : [Lk. x. 41 WH] ; Rev. ii. 14, 20 [Rec] ; en' oXi'ya ([see init. and] cVi, C. L 2 e.), Mt. XXV. 21, 23 ; 8i oXiyav, briefly, in few words, ypd- (p€tv, 1 Pet. V. 12 [see Sid, A. IIL 3] (prjdfivm, Plat. Phil, p. 31d.; legg. 6 p. 778 c.).* oXi^oijnJxos, -ov, (oXiyof, ^vx^f), f flint-hearted : 1 Th. v. 14. (Prov. xiv. 29 ; xviii. 14 ; Is. Ivii. 15, etc. ; Artem. oneir. 3, 5.) * oXiYupc'u, -5 ; (o\lya>pos, and this fr. oXi'yor and wpa care) ; to care little for, regard lightly, make small account of: Tivos (see Matthiae § 348 ; [W. § 30, 10 d.]), Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris- tot., Philo, Joseph., al.) * oXtYus, (oXi'yos), adv., a little, scarcely, [R: V. just (es- caping)] : 2 Pet. ii. 18 G L T Tr WH [for Rec. owas-]. (Anthol. 12, 205, 1 ; [Is. x. 7 Aq.].) • dXo8pei)Tiis [Rec. o\.], -ov, o, {o\odpeva>, q. v.), a de- stroyer; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.* oXoflpevw and, ace. to a preferable form, 6Xc6peva> (Lchm.; see Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p. 809; cf. Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. as below ; \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 81 ; WH. App. p. 152]); (oXe^pos); an Alex, word [AV. 92 (88)]; to destroy: rivd, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23; Josh. iii. 10; vii. 25; Jer. ii. 30; Hag. ii. 22, etc.; [Philo, alleg. ii. 9].) [Coup. : f f oXo^peum.] * d\oKavT(»p.a, -ros, to, (oXokoutom to burn whole, Xen. Cyr. S. 3. 24; Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1 ; and this fr. oXos and KavTus, for Kavaros, verbal adj. fr. xaiu, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 524 ; [W. 33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat. holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other victims only a part) of which is burned : Mk. xii. 33 ; Heb. X. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for rhy ; also for HE'S, Ex. XXX. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Mace. i. 45; 2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [e.xc. Philo do sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 33] ; Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 1 and 9, 7, 4 says oXo/cauTwo'tf.)* d\oKXT]p£a, -as. r), (okoKXrjpos, q. v.), Lat. integrilas ; used of an imimpaired condition of body, in which all its members are healthy and fit for use; Vulg. Integra sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness']: Acts iii. 16 (joined with vyieia, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f.; with roC p.aTos added, ibid. p. 1047 e. ; cf. Diog. Laert. 7, 107; corporis integritas, i. q. health, in Cic. de fin. 5, 14, 40; Sept. for uh-::i. Is. i. 6).* oXo-kXtipos. -ov. {okos and (cXijpos, prop, all that has fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting or unsound, complete, entire, whole : Xldoi, untouched by a tool. Dent, xxvii. G ; Josh. i.x. 4 (viii. 31) ; 1 JIacc. iv. 47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of a priest or of a victim, Philo de viet. §12; Joseph, antt. 3, 12, 2 [(cf. Havercamp's Jo.seph. ii. p. 321)]. Ethi- cally, /ree/rom sin, faultless, [R. V. entire] : 1 Th. v. 23 ; plur., connected with Te'Xetot and with the addition of ev fLTjSfvl XfOTo/if KOI, Jas. i. 4 ; complete in all respects, con- summate, SiKaiocTvvri, Sap. xv. 3 ; evtri^fia, 4 Mace. xv. 17. (Plat., Polyb., Lcian., Epict., al. ; Sept. for nStV, Deut. xxvii. 6 ; D'pri, Lev. xxiii. 15 ; Ezek. xv. 5.) * [Syx. v\6k\vpos, t€A€ios (cf. Trench § xxii.): 'in the 6K6K\ripos no grace wliich ought to be in a Christian man is deficient ; in the Te'xeios no grace is merely in its weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain ripeness and maturity.'] dXoXxi^iD ; an onomatopoetic verb (cf. the similar oi'/tu- ffti/, ald^etv. dXaXdCetv, ntm^ftv, KOKKV^eiv, Ti(eiv. Com- pare the Germ. term, -zen, as in grunzen, krdchzen, ach- zen). to howl, wail, lament: Jas. v. 1. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down of a loud cry, whether of joy or of grief; Sept. for S'S-n.) [Syn. cf. (tXa/w, fin.] * oXos, ->;, -OK, Sept. for S3, [fr. Pind. (Horn.') down]. d\oTeX>;s 444 Ofivva> whole, (all) : with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times in the N. T., viz. SXov avOfiamov, «In. vii. I'd ; iviavruv o\ovt Acts xi. 26 ; 0X17 'lfpov(ra\rjfij xxi. 31 ; Sicrtaf oXtjv, xxviii. 30; o\ovs oIkovs, Tit. i. 11; [to which add, Si oXijs vvKTos, Lk. V. 5 LTTrWH]. usually placed before a substantive which has the article: oXij r/ FaXiXaia, Mt. iv. 23 ; oXt; ri 2vpta, 24 ; Kad' o\tjv t!ii> TrdXtv, Lk. viii. 39 ; iiXoi' TO cri/xa, ilt. V. 29 sq. ; vi. 22. sq. ; Lk. xi. 34 ; 1 Co. xii. 17; .las. iii. 2, etc.; [0X7 f] «icXijo-ia, Ro. .\vi. 23 L T Tr U'll] ; S\r)v r. ^fxepav, Mt. xx. 6; Ro. viii. 3«; oXos 6 vupos, Mt. xxii. 40; Gal. v. 3 ; Jas. ii. 10; iv oXj Ttj Kapdia aov, Mt. xxii. 37; c"^ oXijs t. KapSias irov, Mk. xii. 30, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub- stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B. § 125, 6] : ri noKis S\r), Mk. i. 33 ; Acts xix. 29 [Rec] ; xxi. 30 — (the di.-:tinction which Kriiger § 50, 11,7 makes, viz. that fi o\i] TTiiXis denotes the whole city as opp. to its parts, but that 0X7; ^ TrdXfs and r) 770X15 r) oXi/ denotes the whole city in opp. to other ideas, as the country, the fields, etc., does not hold good at least for the N. T., where even in 17 n-dXis 0X77 the city is opposed only to its parts) ; add the foil. e.xx. : Mt. xvi. 26 ; xxvi. 59 ; Lk. ix. 25 ; xi. 36«; Jn. iv. 53 ; Ro. xvi. 23 [RG] ; 1 Jn. v. 19; Rev. iii. 10; vi. 12 GLTTr WH; xii. 9 ; xvi. 14. It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the whole person or thing under consideration : Jit. xiii. 33 ; Lk. xi. Se''; xiii. 21 ; Jn. ix. 34 ; xiii. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 28). Neut. TovTo 8e oXoi/, Mt. i. 22 ; xxi. 4 (where GLTTr WIT om. oXoi') ; xxvi. 56; 81' oXou, through- out, Jn. .xix. 23. oXoTcX'f)s, -e's, (oXor, tiXos), perfect, complete in all re- spects: 1 Th. V. 23. (Plut. plac. philos. 5, 21 ; \_Field, Hexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. 1. 21]; eccles. writ.) * *OXu(Mras [perh. contr. fr. '0\vp.Tn6&a>pos, W. 103 (97) ; of. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. (!3 sq. 201], -a, [B. 20 (18)], o, Olijmpns, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15.* oXuv6os, -ov, T), an unripe. Ji(j (Lat. /jrossus}, which grows during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls off in the spring [cf. B. D. s. v. Fig] : Rev. vi. 13. (lies, fr. 14; Ildt. 1, 193; Dioscorid. 1, 185; Theophr. caus. plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) * oXs, (oXoj), adv., wholly, altogether, (Lat. omnino), [with a neg. at all] : Mt. v. 34 (with which compare Xen. mem. 1, 2, 35) ; 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually'] ; vi. 7 [R. V. quite a fault etc.] ; xv. 29. [(Plat., Isocr., al.)] • ofiPpos, -ov, 6, (Lat. imber) a shoiccr, i. e. a violent rain, accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning: Lk. xii. 54. (Deut. xxxii. 2 ; Sap. xvi. 16; in Grk. writ, fr. Ilom. down.) * d)ic(po|uii [or o/i; see below] i. <[. Ipfipopm ; to desire, lonijfor, yearn after, [A. V. to he affectionately desirous] : wo'f, 1 Th. ii. 8 GLTTr WH [but the last read ifi., cf. their App. p. 144 and T.oh. Pathol. Element, i. 72], on the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for Rec. ipetpopevot. The word is unknown to the Grk. writ., but the commentators ad loe. recognize it, as do Hesychius, Phavorinus,and Photius, and interpret it by iniBvpiiv. It is found in Ps. Ixii. 2 Symm., and ace. to some Mss. in Job iii. 21. -Vcc. to the conjecture of Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. p. 792, it is composed of ofioi) and eipeiv, just as Photius [p. 331, 8 ed. Porson] explains it opov ijp/ioVflai [so Thco- phylact (cf. Tdf.'s note)]. But there is this objection, that all the verbs compounded with d/xoO govern the da- tive, not the genitive. Since Xicander, ther. vs. 402, uses pelpopai for ipeipop.ai, some suppose that the orij'inal form is pdpnpai, to which, after the analogy of icf'XXm and di«'XXa>, either i or o is for euphony prefixed iu ipdp. and optip. But as ipeipopai is deri\ed from Iptpot, we must suppose that Xicander dropped the syllable i to suit the metre. Accordingly op.eipfir6ai seems not to differ at all from ipftpfo-dai, and its form must be attributed to a vul- gar pronunciation. Cf. \_WH. App. p. 152]; \V. 101 (95) ; [B. 64 (56) ; EUie. on 1 Th. 1. c. ; (Kuenen and C'ofjet, X. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].* (>)ii\eti>. -o) ; iuqif. u/xiXouK ; 1 aor. ptcp. o/iiXijffaj ; (o/xi- Xoj, q. v.) ; freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to be in company with ; to asssociate with ; lo stay with ; hence to converse tvilh, talk with : rivl, with one (Dan. i. 19), Acts xxiv. 26 ; so. airoU, Acts xx. 1 1 [so A. V. talked], unless one prefer to render it >chen he had stayed in their com- pany ; Tpos Tiva, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3, 2 ; Joseph. antt. 1 1, 6, 11 ; [cf. W. 212 sq. (200) ; B. § 133, 8]) ; iv t^ opiXeiv avTuvs sc. dXX^Xot;, ibid. 15. [CoMP. : .]' d(LiX£a, -as, f], (pptXos), companionship, intercourse, com- muniiin : 1 Co. xv. 33, on which see ^dos. (Tragg., Ar- stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * o|iiXos, -ov, 6, (6p6s, iipoii, and tXi; a crowd, band, [Cur- tius § OHO; Vanicek p. 897; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root mil ' to be associated,' ' to love']), fr. Ilom. down, a multitude of men (jathered together, a crowd, throng : Rev. xviii. 17 Rec* djitxXi^, -7JS, 17, (in Ilom. o/it;^Xr/, fr. 6pi^e (Mt. xxiii. 20 sq. ; xxvi. 74 ; Heb. vi. 16 ; Jas. v. 12 ; [W. 24]) and opvvpi {opvvvai, Jlk. xiv. 71 G L T Tr WH [cf. B. 45 (39)]) form their tenses fr. OMOQ ; hence 1 aor. Sipoaa ; Sept. for );3.VJ1 ; to sicear ; to affirm, prom- ise, threaten, with an oath : absol., foil, by direct discourse, Mt. xxvi. 74 ; Mk. xiv. 71 ; Heb. vii. 21 ; foil, by «', Heb. iii. 1 1 ; iv. 3 ; see cl, I. 5. opv. opxov (often so in ( irk. writ, fr. Ilom. down [W. 226 (212)]) npot riva, to one (Horn. Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk. i. 73 ; o/iwfii/ with dat. of the person to whom one promises or threatens something with an oath : foil, by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23 ; by an inf. [W. 331 (311)], Heb. iii. 18; with Spxa added. Acts ii. 30 [W. 603 (561)]; Tivi Tt, Acts vii. 17 [Rec. i. e. gen. by at> traction ; cf. B. § 143, 8; W. § 24, 1]. that by which one swears is indicated by an ace, rtvd or ri (so in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down [cf. W. §32, 1 b. y. ; B. 147 (128)]), in sivearing to call a person or thing as witness, lo inroke, swear hj, (Is. Ixv. 16 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 2 ; 7, 14, 5) ; rav 6fJ,o0Vfj.aBoi> 445 OfJiOKiXTCi olpavov, T^v yrjv, Jas. V. 1 2 ; with prepositions [cf . B. u. s.] : Kara Tiras (see Kara, I. 2 a.), Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii. 16 ; xxxi. 54 ; 1 S. xxviii. 10 [Comp.] ; Is. xlv. 23 ; Ixii. 8 ; Am. iv. 2; Dem. p. 553, 17; 553, 26 [al. dwo/i.], etc.; Kara itavratv aifivve Biaiv, Long. past. 4, lU) ; in imitation of tlie Hebr. yTJ; foil, by 3, (v nvi is used [W. 389 (364); B.I.C.; seeeV, I. 8 b.]: Mt. v. 34, 36 ; xxiii. 16, 18, 20-22; Rev. X. 6 ; e'U n, with the mind directed unto [W.397(371); B. as above; seeeis,B.II. '.'a.], Mt. v. 35.* d)io6v|ia8ov (fr. ojxoSviJios, and this fr. 6/iof and Bvfios', on advs. in -8di/ [chiefly derived fr. nouns, and designating form or structure] as yviofirjSov, poifijSdv, etc., cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), wilh one mind, of one accord, (Vulg. unanimiter [etc.]) : Ro. xv. 6 ; Acts i. 14 ; ii. 46 ; iv. 24 ; Tii.57; viii. 6 ; .xii. 20 ; xv. 25 ; xviii. 12; xLx. 29, andRG in ii. 1, (Arstph., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian., Sept. Lam. ii. 8 ; Job xvii. IG ; Num. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with arravres [L T WH TTuiTcr] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in class. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [cf. ii. 1 above].* d|ioidJw ; (o^oios, [cf . W. 25]) ; to be like : Mt. xxiii. 27 LTr txt. WII mrg. ; Jlk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz- schep. 658sq.; [on thedat. cf. W. §31, 1 h.]. Notfound elsewhere. [Comp. : 7rap-o/ioidfto.] * d|xoioira9Tis, -Is, (o/ioios, iTaax'>>), suffering the like with another, nflikefeelinys or affections: nvi. Acts .xiv. 15 ; Jas. V. n. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 c. ; Theophr. h. pi. 5, 8 (7, 2) ; Philo, conf. ling. § 3 ; 4 Mace. xii. 13 ; yrj, i. e. trodden alike by all, Sap. vii. 3 ; see exx. fr. eccles. writ. [viz. Ignat. (Interpol.) ad Trail. 10 ; Euseb. h. e. 1, 2, 1, (both of the incarnate Logos)] in Grimm on 4 Alacc. p. 344.)» o|ioios (on the accent cf. [Chandler §§ 384, 385] ; W. 52 (51) ; Bum. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -oi'a, -oioi/, also of two term, (once in the N. T., Rev. iv. 3 R" G L T Tr WH ; cf. W. § 11, 1 ; [B. 26 (23)]), (fr.i/^o't [akin to &yia (q. v.), Lat. similis, Eng. same, etc.]), [fr. Horn, down], like, similar, resembling: a. ///je i. e. resembling : nvi, in form or look, Jn. ix. 9; Rev. i. 13, 15; ii. 18; iv. 6 sq. ; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. WH mrg. ofioi'otr], 19 ; xi. 1 ; xiii. 2, 11 ; xiv. 1 4 [but here T WH w. the a c e u s. (for dat.)] ; xvi. 13 Rec; opdo-ei, in appearance. Rev. iv. 3 ; in nature. Acts xvii. 29 ; Gal. v. 21 ; Rev. xxi. 11,18; in nature and condition, 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; in mode of thinking, feeling, acting, Mt. xi. IC; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii. 31 sq.; xii. 36, and LWHTrtxt. (see below) in Jn. viii. 55 ; i. q. may be compared to a thing, so in parables : Mt. xiii. 31, 33, 44 sq. 47; xx. 1 ; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b. like i. e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as : o/ioiov TovTois TpoTTov, Judc 7 ; equal in strength, Rev. xiii. 4 ; in poweE and attractions. Rev. xviii. 18; in authority, Mt. xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii. 31 [here T WH om. Tr mrg. br. d;x.] ; in mind and character, tiv6s (cf. W. 195 (183), [cf. § 28, 2J; B. § 132, 24), Jn. vui.55 R G T Trmrg. (sec above).» diiOLonis, -TjTQs, fj, (o/xoioff), likeness : KaO^ opiOiOTTjTa, in Uke manner, Heb. iv. 15 [cf. W. 143 (136)] ; Kara rtjv ofLOLOTriTa (MfX^io-efis'ic), after tlie likeness, Heb. vii. 15. (Gen. i. 11; 4 Mace. xv. 4 (3); Plat., Aristot., Isocr., Polyb., Philo, Pint.) * d|ioidco, -b) : f ut. d/iotucra) ; Pass., 1 aor. Q^noLuOrjv, and without augm. ofioiadrjv (once Ro. i.x. 29 L mrg. T edd. 2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161] ; cf. B. 34 (30) ; Sturz, De dial. JLaced. etc. p. 1 24 ; [cf.] Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153) ; 1 fut. ofioicodijo-oiuu; {o/ioios); fr. [Horn, and] Hdt. down; Sept. esp. for nol ; a. lo make like : riva rivi ; pass, to be or to become like to one : Mt. vi. 8 ; Acts xiv. 1 1 ■, Heb. ii. 1 7 ; lifioiaBrj rj jiaa-iX. to>v oip., was made like, took the likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Jlessiah appeared), Alt. xiii. 24 ; xviii. 23 ; .xxii. 2 ; ofioiaBljcrfTM (fut. of the time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1 ; Sii n, to be made like and thus to become as a thing [i. e. a lilending of two thoughts ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31 ; B. § 133, 10 ; W. § 65, 1 a.], Ro. ix. 29 (3 r\Oi; Ezek. xx,xii. 2). b. to liken, compare : tivo. tiki, or ti rtw, Mt. vii. 24 [R G (see below)]; xi. 16; .Alk. iv. 30 R L txt. Tr mrg. ; Lk. vii. 31 ; xiii. 18, 20 ; pass. ilt. vii. [24 L T WH Tr txt.], 26 ; to illustrate by comparison, jra>s oixoiuxjiafuv Tr]V ^aa: ToO deoi, Mk. iv. 30 T WH Tr txt. L mrg. [Comp. : d^- ofiotdoj.^* d(ioiu|ia, -T-09, TO, (d^otdo)), Sept. for n^lOJi^, niO^, D^V, n'J^ri ; prop, that which has been made after the likeness of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness, representation : Ps. cv. (cvi.) 20 ; 1 Mace. iii. 48 ; of the image or shape of things seen in a vision, Rev. ix. 7 [cf. W. 604 (562)] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28, etc. Plato, in Parmen. p. 132 d., calls finite things dfioitofioTa, likenesses as it were, in which to Ttapahdyixara, i. e. al IBeai or ra e'lBrj, are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas- much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity : nuos, Ro. vi. 5 ; viii. 3 (on which see a-ap^, 3 fin. [cf. Weiss, Bibl. Theol. etc. §§ 69 c. note, 78 c. note]) ; Phil. ii. 7 (see ixopfpi]); eiKovos, a likeness expressed by an image, i. e. an image like, Ro. i. 23 ; «Vi tw 6p.otu)paTt rrjs 7rapaj3da€s Kal, Mt. xxii. 26 ; xxvi. 35 ; Mk. xv. 31 [here Rec. op., bk Kai ] ; Lk. V. 33 ; xvii. 28 R G L ; xxii. 36 ; Jn. vi. 11 ; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G ; o/ioioof pivroi Kai, Jude 8 ; opolcos 8i Kai, Mt. xxvii. 41 RG (where T om. L br. Se Kai, Tr br. Se', WH om. Se and br. rat) ; Lk. v. 10 ; x. 32 ; 1 Co. vii. 3 (where Lbr. de), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R T Tr txt. WH ofiolws re Kal ; cf. Fritzsche, Bom. i. p. 77 ; [W. 571 (531) ; B. § 149, 8]; opoias preceded by KaOojs, Lk. vi. 31.* d^ioicotris. -fa)?, T], {opot6a> ); 1. a making like', opp. to aWoiaxxis, Plat. rep. 5, 454 c. 2. likeness. OfioXoyeto 446 bveiBifffiO'; (Plat., Aristot., Tboophr.) : Kaff onoloxriv 6(ov, after the likeness of God, Jas. iii. fr. Gen. i. 2G. [tf. Trench §xv.]' d|jLoXoYe(i>, "t^i 'i"^ii■ i>fio\6yovV, fut. o^ioXoyijo-w ; 1 aor. i>fjio\6yi]i7a ; pres. pass. :i pers. sing. ofioXoyfirui ; (fr. o^o- Xoyos, and this fr. o/ioi/ and Xtytu) ; fr. [Sojih. and] II dt. down; 1. pi'op. to say lite same thinrj as another, i. e. to agree with, assent, both ab. a-apKi c'XijXu^oTa [Tr mrg. AV'II mrg. fkrjXvdevai], 1 .In. iv. 2 and Kec. also in 3 [see below] ; fp^opfvov ct> a-apKi, 2 Jn. 7, [cf. B. u. s. ; AV. 346 (324)]; rtva, to profess one's self the worshipper of one, 1 .In. iv. 3 [here WII mrg. Xuo, cf. Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and G L T Tr WII in ii. 23 ; iv with a dat. of the pers. (see iv, I. 8 c), Mt. x. 32 ; Lk. xii. 8 ; with cognate ace. giving the substance of the profession [cf. B. § 131, 5 ; W. § 32, 2], opoXoyiav, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also foil, by nepl tivos, Philo de miit. nom. § 8) ; to ovopd tivos, to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be the name of a follower of me, Rev. iii. 5 G L T Tr WH. 4. Ace. to a usage unknown to Grk. writ, to praise, celebrate, (see i^opo\oyia>, 2 ; [B. § 133, 7]) : rivl, Heb. xiii. 15. [CoMP. : dvO-i-pai), i^poXoyim.] ' d|ioXo7(a, -as, r), {6p6koyia>, q. V. [cf. W. 35 (34)]), in the X. T. profession [A. V. generally confessionl ; a. subjectively : apxiepia t^s 6po\. rjpSiv, i. e. whom we pro- fess (to be ours), lleb.iii. 1 [but al. refer this to b.]. b. objectively,7)ro/ession [confession] i.e. tchat one professes [confesses] : Heb. iv. 14 ; 1 Tim: vi. 1 2 (see opoKoyia, 3) ; 13 (see papTvpio), a. p. 391*) ; T^t fXrriSor. the substance of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Ileb. x. 23 ; els to fiinyyiXiov toC XpioToC, relative to the gospel, 2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, /or the obedience ye render to what ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. 1] ds tov tov 6eov Xpiarov 6po\oyla, .lustin M. dial. c. Tryph. c. 47, — a con- str. occasioned perhaps b)' fj ds toi» Xpia-nv irioTis, Col. ii. 5; [cf. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hdt., Plat., al.)] • diioXoYOuiit'vMS, (o/ioXoyt. d|i.6puv, -ov, (iipoi, opos, -ov, 6, [i. e. ' profit-bringer '], Onesiphorus, the name of a certain Christian : 2 Tim. i. 16 ; iv. 19.' oviKos, -7), -ov, {ovos), n/ or for an ass : fivXos ovikos i. e. turned by an ass (see fiiXos, 1), Mk. i.x. 42 L T Tr WH ; Lk. xvii. 2 Rec. ; Mt. x^ iii. 6. Not found elsewhere.* dvCvTi|jii : fr. Horn, down ; to be useful, to pro/it, help, (L:\.t. J 11 ro); ilid., pres. ovivafiai.; 2 aor. wvijiirju (and later i}vdin)v, see LoJi. ad Phrvn. p. 12 sq. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. p. 880; [Veitch s. v.]), optat. ovainrjv; to receive profit or advantage, he helped [or have jui/, (Lat. j'uvor )] : nvos, of one, Pliilem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh. in the Scriptures only in Sir. xx.x. 2.) * o'vo|j.a, -Tor, to, (NOM [others TNO ; see Vanicek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name'\, with prefixed o [but see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for Di^, [fr. Horn, down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis- tinguished from others; 1. univ. : of prop, names, .Mk. iii. 16 ; vi. 14 ; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; tSiv airoaToKaiv to. ovofiaTa, Mt. X. 2 ; Rev, xxi. 14 ; avdpciinos or dvrjp a ovofia, noXis fi ov. , sc. rjv, named, foil, by the name in the nom. [cf. b'. § 129, 20, 3] : Lk. i. 26 sq. ; ii. 25 ; viii. 41 ; xxiv. 13, 18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1) ; ov [L m] to ovofia, 5Ik. xiv. 32 ; koi to of. avTov, avTfjs, etc., Lk. i. 5, 27 ; opofia avra sc. ^v or eVriK [B. u. s.],Jn. i.6; iii. 1 ; xviii. 10; Rev. vi. 8; 6v6ij.an, foil, by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3 ; W. 182 (1 71)], Mt. xxvii. 32 ; Mk. v. 22 ; Lk. i. 5 ; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii. 50; Acts v. 1,34; viii. 9 ; ix. 10-12,33, 36; X. 1; xi. 28; xii. 13; xvi. 1, 14; xvii. 34 ; xviii. 2, 7, 24 ; xix. 24 ; xx. 9 ; xxi. 10 ; xxvii. 1 ; xxviii. 7 ; Rev. ix. 11, (Xen. anab. 1,4, 11) ; tovvoim (i. e. to ovojxa), ace. absol. [B. § 131, 12 ; cf. W. 230 (216)], i.e. by name, Mt. xxvii. 57 ; ovojia fioi sc. eoTiV, my name is, 5Ik. v. 9; Lk. viii. 30, (OvTis ejiolyovajxa, Horn. Od. 9,366); (^eiv Si/ofia, foil, by the name in the nom.. Rev. ix. 1 1 : xaXf ii/ ro Svofid Tivos, foil, by the ace. of the name, see KuXe'w, 2 a. ; KaXe'iv Tiva ovojiari tivi, Lk. i. 61 ; ovofiaTi KoKovjiepoi, Lk. xix. 2; KoXelv Twa em ra ov. Lk. i. 59 (see eVi, B. 2 a. tj. p. 233'') ; KOT ovofia (sec Kara, IL 3 a. y. p. 328") ; to. dvofuiTa iiiiihv eypdcfir] \JvyiyfianTai T WH Tr] iv to'h ovpavoli, your names have been enrolled *by God in the register of the citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20 ; to cvoiii Tivos (iypa^rf) iv /3i/3\« (rw /Si/SXi'w) fm^s, Phil. iv. 3 ; Rev. xiii. 8 ; cVl to ^iffKiov Tiji f. la'v. xvii. 8 ; iKfldWeiv (q. v. 1 h.) TO ovop.d tivos ws Trovrjpov, since the wicked- ness of the man is called to mind by his n a m e, Lk. vi. 22 ; iTriKaXelcrdai to ovofxa tov Kvpiov, see intKoKiw, 5 ; ini- KiKKrjrm to uvopd Tivos iiri Tiva, see eViK. 2 ; ovofiaTa (oVo/ia) (3Xacr(^i;/iiur i. q. pXdutpripa {-pov) [cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; B. § 132, 10], names by which (iod is blasphemed, his maj- esty assailed, Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvii. 3 [RGTr, see yipa^. so used that the name is opp. to the reality: ovopa ?x«s> oTi (rjs, Kal vcKpbs f r, thou art said [A. V. hast a 7mme'] to live, Rev. iii. 1 (oi/o/ia fix^v, ios i-n *A3r}vas i\avv€t, Hdt. 7, 138). i. q. title : nep'i dvopiWav, about titles (as of the Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; KKripovoptiv ovopa, Ileb. i. 4; Xapi^ecrdm tlvi Hvopdn, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title o Kvpior is meant [but crit. txts. read to ovopa etc., which many take either strictly or absolutely ; cf. Meyer and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]) ; spec, a title of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer] ; iv TM ovopaTi 'Irjaov, in devout recognition of the title con- ferred on him by God (i. e. the title 5 xvpioi), Phil. ii. 10 [but the interp. of ovopa here follows that of ovopa in vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Lghtft., and cf. W. 390- (365)]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistic the name is used for everything which the name covers, everything the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for one's rank, authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel- lences, deeds, etc. ; thus, eiV ovopa vpocprjTov, out of regard for [see th, B. H. 2 d.] the name of prophet which he bears, i. q. because he is a prophet, ilt. x. 41 ; ^airrl^eiv Tiva (Is ovopd TIVOS, by baptism to bind any one to recog- nize and publicly aL-knowledge the dignity and authority of one [cf. /3an-Tifw, H. b. (aa.)], Mt. xxviii. 1 9 ; Acts viii. 16; xix. 5; iCo. i. 13, 15. to do a thinr/ iv ovopaTi tivos. i. e. by one's command and authority, actiyiy on his behalf, promoting his cause, [cf. AV. 390 (365) ; B. § 147, 10] ; as, o ipxopevos iv ovopaTi Kds pot, keep them consecrated and united to ofofia 448 oura><; tliv name (character), which thou didst commit to me to declare and manifest (cf. vs. (i), .In. xvii. 1 1 ; [cf. ijrep toC dyiov ovoiuiTos (70v, ov KtiTfiTKTivatTas iv rais KapSlais fiftav, 'Teaching' etc. eh. 10, 2]. After the analogy of the pre- ceding expression, Ihe name of Christ ('lijo-oO, 'irja-oi Xpia- ToO, ToC Kvplov 'li>(T., ToC Kvptov tjpoiv, ctc.) is uscd in tlie X.T. of all those things which, in hearing or recalling tliat name, we are bidden to recognize in Jesus and to profess, accordingly, of his Mcssidiiic dic/nilij, tliriiie milhorily, vtemorabte sufferings, in a word Ihe peculiar serrices and hiessings conferred hij him on men, so far forth as these are believed, confessed, comuicmorated, [cf. Westcott on the Epp. of .In. p. 232] : hence the phrases fiayytXiff- 'trSm TO irep'i toO 6v. 'I. Xp. Acts viii. 12 ; peyaKvvdv to ov. Acts .\ix. 1 7 ; Tca ovop. [Ilec. iv t. ok.] airoO (Kiri^eiv, Mt. xii. 21 [B. 176 (l-i3)] ; itiaTeieiv, 1 Jn. iii. 23; jrtOT. th TO ov., Jn. i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1 Jn. v. 13' [Rec, KJ"]; itioTK Toil uv. Acts iii. IG ; o uvopa^av to ovopa Kvpiov, who- ever nanieth the name of the Lord sc. as his Lord (see uvopu^a, a.), 2 Tim. ii. 11); KpaTeiv, to hold fast i. e. per- severe in professing, l!ev. ii. 13 ; ovk apvt'urOai, Rev. iii. 8 ; TO ov. 'li/troC (v8o^d^(Tai iv vpiv, 2 Th. i. 12 ; /Saordffji' TO ov. ivimiov idvSiv (see ^atTTa^m, 3), Acts ix. 15; to do or to suffer anything f'jri roj CivopaTi \p. see eVi, B. 2 a. /3. p. 232'*. The phrase eVTaJui/ofjan Xp. is used in various senses: a. hg the command and authority of Christ: see exx. just above. b. in the use of the name of Christ i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance, Mk. ix. 38 1^'^ L T Tr Wll (see f. below) ; Lk. x. 1 7 ; Acts iii. G; iv. 10; xvi. 18; Jas. v. 14 ; univ. «Vn-oi'w ovopa- Ti inoijjaaTe tovto; Acts iv. 7. c. through the power of Christ's name, pervading and governing their souls, Mk. xvi. 1 7. d. in acknowledging, embracing, profess- ing, the name of Christ : a-aBr/vat, Acts iv. 12; Siicmadijvai, 1 Co. vi. 1 1 ; fu^i'e;(ftf, .In. .\x. 31 ; in professing and pro- claiming the name of (JhrisI, ■napprjaid^KrSai, Acts i.x. 27, 28 (29). e. relying or resting on the name of Christ, rooted (so to speak) in his name, i. e. mindful of Christ: irotEii/ Ti, Col. iii. 1 7 ; fv)(apt,iTTfiv, Eph. v. 20 ; aiVci»' ti, i. e. (for substance) to ask a thing, as prompted by the mind of Christ and in reliance on the bond which unites us to him, Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; xv. IG ; xvi. 24, [26], and RGLin 23; cf. Ebrard, Gebet im Namen Jesu, in Ilerzog iv. 692 sqq. God is said to do a thing iv ov. Xp. regardful of the name of Christ, i. e. moved by the name of Christ, for Christ's sake, StSc'wai the thing asked, .In. xvi. 23 T Tr Wll ; nep- TTfiv TO nveitpa to tiy. Jn. xiv. 26. f. iv ovopaTi XpicTTOv, [A. y.for the name of ChrUl] (Germ, anf Grand Namens Christi), i. e. because one calls himself or is called by the name of Christ: ovfL&i^fcrdai, 1 Pet. iv. 14 (equiv. to as XpiOTiavos, IG). The simple dat. ra ov. Xp. signifies by the power of Christ's name, pervading and prompting souls, Mt. vii. 22 ; so also tfaiv dpapTiOiv \alieiv, Acts x. 43. Cirep tov ov. nvTov. i.q. for defending, spreading, strengthening, the au- thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. IG ; xv. 26; x.xi. 13 ; Ro. i. 5 ; 3 Jn. 7 ; — [but ace. to the better txts. in Acts V. 41 ; 3 Jn. 7, to ovopa is used absolutely, the Name, sc. Kvpiov, of the Lord .lesus; so cod. V.at. Jas. v. 14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad Eph. 3,1; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (.5.53). So Bp. Lghtft. in Phil. ii. 9 ; (see 1 above)], jrpoy to ovopa 'lija-oO TOV Naf. ivavria Trpa^ai, Acts .\xvi. 9. 3. In imita- tion of the Ilebr. nnu/ (Num. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43 ; xxvi. 53), the plur. ovopara is used i.q. persons reckoned up by name: Acts 1.15; Rev. iii. 4; xi. 13. 4. Like the Lat. nomen, i.q. the cause or reason named : ivTa ova- pan TovTco, in this cause, i. e. on this account, sc. because he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L T Tr WII [al. more simply take ov. here as referring to Xpia-ruivos Jire- ceding] ; iv ivupari, oTi (as in Syriac ? PA^,S) Xpia-ToO f'o-Tf, in this name, i. e. for this reason, because ye are Christ's (disciples), Mk. ix. 41. ovofia^u ; 1 aor. uivopacra ; Pass., pres. ovopa^opai ; 1 aor. aivopda-dijv ; (ovopa) ; fr. Hom. down ; to name [cf . W. 615 (572)]; a. to ovopa, to name i. e. to utter: pass. Eph. i. 21 ; toi; Kvplov [Rec. Xpto-ToO], the name of the Lord (Christ) sc. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (Sept. for ni'n" Dl? 1"3tn, to make mention of Ihe name of .Jeho- vah in praise, said of his worshippers, Is. xxvi. 13 ; Am. vi. 10); TO ovopa 'irjaoii im Tiva, Acts xix. 13, see c'tti, C. I. 1 c. p. 234'' mid. b. tikci, with a proper or an appellative name as pred. ace, to name, i. e. give name to, one : Lk. vi. 13 sq. ; pass, to be named, i. e. bear the name of, 1 Co. v. 1 1 ; ix w. gen. of the one from whom the received name is derived, Eph. iii. 15 (Horn. II. 10, 68 ; Xen. mem. 4, 5, 12); c. nvd or ti, to utter the name of a person or thing : on-ou (iivopdadrj Xpurros, of the lands into which the knowledge of Christ has been carried, Ro. xv. 20 (1 Mace. iii. 9) ; iivopd^fadat of things which are called by their own name because they are I)resent or exist (as opp. to those which are unheard of), 1 Co. V. 1 Rec. ; Eph. v. 3. [Comp. : in-ovopd^a.^ * ovos, -ov, 6, fj, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for llCH and ?irx, an ass : Lk. .xiv. 5 Rec. ; Mt. xxi. 5 ; Jn. .xii. 15; — • 6, Lk. xiii. 15 ; v> Mt. xxi. 2, 7.* 6'vTs (fr. ov; on advs. formed fr. ptcps. cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 115 a. Anm. 3; Kiihner § 335 Anm. 2), adv., truly, in reality, in point of fact, as opp. to what is pre- tended, fictitious, false, conjectural : Mk. xi. 32 [see txa>, I. 1 f.] ; Lk. xxiii. 47 ; xxiv. 34 ; .In. viii. 36 ; 1 Co. xiv. 25; Gal. iii. 21 and Rec. in 2 Pet. ii. 18; 6, rj, to Of09 449 oirov ovras foil, by a noun, that which is truly etc., that which is indeed, (to oito)? ayadit fj KoXd, Plat. Phaedr. p. 260 a. ; rriv oi^ms xal oKriSios ^liKiav, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e. ; al ovras /3a(TiXcif, Joseph, antt. 15, 3, 5) : as ^ ocrmy (Rec. aimxioj) fu^, 1 Tim. vi. 19; rj oi/r\a.ec, from behind, on the hack, behind, after: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; Rev. iv. 6 ; v. 1 (on which see ypd(f>a, 3). As a prepo- sition it is joined with the gen. (like 'dp.Ttpoa-dci', i^wdev, etc. [W. § 54, 6 ; B. § 146, 1]) : Mt. xv. 23 ; Lk. xxiii. 26 ; [Rev. i. 10 WH mrg.]. (From Hom. down ; Sept. for "ins, sometimes for ll'nS.) * dirio-w, ([perh.] fr. rj onis ; and this fr. ena>, eiropat, to follow [but cf. Vanicek p. 530]), adv. of place and time, fr. Horn, down; Sept. for "inS, lins and esp. for "),nx- (at the) back, behind, after ; 1. adverbially of place: iaTavai, Lk. vii. 38; (ma-rp(yjfai 6nia-a>, back, Mt. xxiv. 18 ({moaTpi(peiv ottiVu, Joseph, antt. C, 1, 3); TO on-iffo), the things that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 (14); fts TO. dn-i'tro) airepxfaOai, to go backward, Vulg. abire re- trorsum, Jn. xviii. 6 ; to return home, of those who grow recreant to Christ's teaching and cease to follow him, Jn. vi. 66 ; T6s, adapted to the light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 1 2 [here L mrg. fpya]. 2. an instrument : ottXc dStxlat, for commit- ting unrighteousness, opp. to oTrXa 8i.Kaiocrvpi]s, for prac- tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.* diroios, -ola, -oiov, (ttoios w. the rel. d), [fr. Hom. down], of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13 ; Gal. ii. 6 ; 1 Th. i. 9 ; Jas. i. 24 ; preceded by toiovtos, Isuch as]. Acts xxvi. 29.* diroTe, (n-OTf w. the rel. d), [fr. Ilom. down], when [cf. B. § 139, 34 ; W. § 41 b. 3] : Lk. vi. 3 R G T (where L TrWHSre).* dirou, (from wov and the rel. d), [from Hom. down], where; 1. adv. of place, a. in wliich place, where; a. in relative sentences with the Indica- tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place; as, ETTi T^s y^f, oTTou ctc. Mt. vi. 19 ; add. ib. 20 ; xiii. 5 ; xxviii. 6 ; JMk. vi. 55 ; ix. 44, 46, ["which verses T WH om. Tr br.], 48 ; Lk. xii. 33 ; Jn. i. 28 ; iv. 20, 46 ; vi. 23 ; ovTavo) 450 {Jtto)? vii. 42; x. 40; xi. 30; xii. 1 ; xviii. 1,20; xix. 1 8, 20, 4 1 ; XX. 12; Acts xvii. 1 ; Kev. xi. 8 ; xx. 10. it refers to t«I or tVfio-f to be mentally supplied in what precedes or follows: Mt. xxv. 24, 2(J ; Mk. ii. 4; iv. 1 j ; v. 40; xiii. 14 ; Jn. iii. 8 ; vi. 62 ; vii. 34 ; xi. 32 ; xiv. 3 ; xvii. 24; XX. 19; Ro. xv. 20; Heb. ix. IG ; x. 18; Rev. ii. 13. it refers to «k« expressed in what follows: Jit. vi. 21 ; Lk. xii. 34 ; .\vii. 37; Jn. xii. 2G ; Jas. iii. 16. in imita- tion of the Hebr. Du'-^DX (Ocn. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10, etc.) : on-ou «ft, Rev. xii. l! [G T Tr WH], 14, (see ««i, a.) ; owov . . . itr airoiv, Rev. xvii. 9. onov also refers to men, so that it is ec[uiv. to lailk (among) whom, in whose house : Mt. x.wi. 57 ; [add, Rev. ii. 13; cf. W. § .')4, 7 fin.] ; in which stale (viz. of the renewed man). Col. iii. 11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. whereas"], 2 Pet. ii. 11 (in the same sense in indir. quest., Xen. mem. 3, 5, 1). Snov av, wherever, — with impf. indie, (see av, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [Tdf. cai/] ; with aor. sub- junc. (I.at. fut. pf.), Jlk. ix. 18 (where L T Tr WH 5vov idv) ; Mk. xiv. 9 [here too T WH orr. e'dv] ; also orrov iav (see iav, II.), Mt. .xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14", (in both which last pass. LTr ottou av); with subj. pres. Mt. xxiv. 28. p. in indir. questions [yet cf. W. § ol, 2 fin.], with subjunc. aor.: Mlc. xiv. 14'; Lk. xxii. 11. b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a place instead of oirot, into which place, ichilhcr, (see <«i, b.): foil, by the indie, -In. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33,36; xiv. 4 ; xxi. 1 8 ; [Jas. iii. 4 T Tr AVH (see below)] ; onov nv, icherc{tchither)soerer, w. indie, pres.. Rev. xiv. 4 L Tr WH [ef. below], cf. B. § 139, 30; with subjunc. pres., Lk. ix. 57 R G T WII [al. Stt. tav, see below] ; Jas. iii. 4 [RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RGT (see above); on-ou iav, w. subjunc. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 2. It gets the force of a conditional particle if {in case that, in so far as, [A. V. icherca.i (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 1 1 above)]) : 1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. '43, 1, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. (!rimm on 4 Mace. ii. 14; Meyer on 1 Co. iii. 3; [MiiUer on Barn. ep. 16, 6]).* oTTrdvu (onTQ) : to look al, behold ; mid. pres. ptcp. oTTTavd/xf xoj ; to allow one's self to be seen, to appear : T«»t, Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8 ; Tob. .xii. 19 ; [Graec. Ven. Ex. xxxiv. 24].) " oirroo-ta, -as, ^, (oirrafM) ; 1. the act of exhibitinr/ one's self to view : oTTTaa-iat Kvpiov, 2 Co. xii. 1 [A. V. visions ; ef. Meyer ad loc.] (eV ^iiipais oTTracrlas ij.ov, Add. to Esth. iv. 1. 44 (13) ; [cf. JIal. iii. 2] ; jjXios iv oirraaia, coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a siijht, a vision, an appearance presented to one whether asleep or awake : ovpavios ottt. Acts .\xvi. 19 ; iinpanivai oirraaiav, Lk. i. 22 ; w. gen. of appos. dyyi\oiv, Lk. xxiv. 23. A later form for oi/'tr [cf. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6 ; for nsi?, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23 ; x. 1, 7 sq.* dipris, -ij, -6v, (oTTTao) [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled: Lk. xxiv. 42. (E.x. xii. 8, 9 ; in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down.) * oTTTo», see opda. oiriipa, -at, r/, (derived by some fr. ottis [cf. onia-a]. (itofiai, and wpa ; hence, the time that follows the wpa [Curtius § 522]; by others fr. uiro't [cf. our .•.oyy] juice, and S>pa, i. e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when fruits become ripe), fr. Ilom. down ; 1. the season which succeeds 6ipos,from the rising of Sirius to that of Arclurus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days (the year being divided into seven seasons as follows : eap, 6epos, OTTupa, (l>6tVQna)pov, (nroprjTos, ^(tpoyv, iTov(Tiv), [1 Co. i. 29 Rec."'^], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for in Mk. V. 23, for onas ■ • ■ fijo-erat, L txt. T Tr WH have correctly restored Iva . . . CrjcTn) ; cf. W. 289 (271) ; B. 233 (201) sq.; [214(185)]. 1. It denotes the p u r- pose or end, in order thai; ivith the design or to the end that; that; a. without «i/, — after the present, Mt. vi. 2, 16; Philem. 6; Ileb. ix. 15; after fWf to be supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts ix. 17; Heb. ii. 9; oirati (if), Lk. xvi. 26; after the imper- fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [R G (see above)]; Acts ix. 24; after the aorist, Acts ix. 2, 12; xxv. 26; Ro. ix. 17; Gal. i. 4; ojrmr pi). Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29; after the pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57; after the future, Mt. xxiii. 35; and Rec. in Acts xxiv. 26; after an aor. sub- junc. by which something is asked for, Jlk. v. 23 Rec; after imperatives, Jit. ii. 8; v. 16, 45; vi. 4; Acts xxiii. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 11; onas pfj, Jit. vi. 18; after clauses with iva and the aor. subjunc, Lk. xvi. 28 ; 2 Co. viii. 14 ; 2 Th. i. 12. Noteworthy is the phrase ottoj? T:\rjpai6fi, i. e. that ace. to God's purpose it might be brought to pass or might be proved by the event, of O. T. prophecies and types (see Iva, II. 3 fin.): Mt. ii. 23; viii. 1 7 ; xii. 1 7 (where L T Tr WII tva) ; xiii. 35. b. oTTtt)? av, that, if it he possible, JIt. vi. 5 RG; that, if what I have Just said shall come to pass. Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii. 20 (19) [R. V. that sol; xv. 17; Ro. iii. 4 [B. 234 (201)]; exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. § 42, 6. 2. As in the Grk. writ, also (cf. W. 338 (317) ; [B. § 139, 41]), ovrmy with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray- ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote what one wishes to be done : JIt. viii. 34 [here L ira] ; i.\.38; Lk.vii.3; x.2; xi.37; Acts viii. 15, 24 ; ix.2; xxiii. 20; xxv. 3 ; Jas. v. 16; after a verb of deliber- ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Jlk. iii. 6, (fr. which exx. opafia 451 opaco it is easy to see how the use noted in 11. arises from the original adverbial force of the particle ; for tru/i^ovX. fKaffov, OTTWS airoXea-amv avTov, they took counsel to de- stroy him is equiv. to Itow they might destroy him, and also to to this end that they might destroy him ; cf. Kiihner § 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. 892).* opapia, -TO?, TO, {6pda>), that which is seen, a sight, spec- tacle : Acts vii. 31 ; Mt. xvii. 9 ; a sight divinely granted in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision. Acts x. 17, 19; Bi opa- /taros, Acts xviii. 9; ev opdiian, Acts ix. 10, 12 [RG] ; X. 3 ; opapa /SXen-etK, Acts xii. 9 ; ISeiv, Acts xi. 5 ; xvi. 10. (Xen., Aristot., Plut., Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. eiVtif] ; Sept. several times for HXia, pin, Chald. Xlin etc. ; see onraaia.)* opoo-is, -epovv) ; pf. edipaxa and (T Wll in Col. ii. 1, 18 ; [1 Co. ix. 1] ; Tdf. ed. 7 also in Jn. ix. 3 7 ; xv. 24 ; xx. 25; 1 Jn. iii. 6 ; iv. 20; 3 Jn. 11) iopaxa (on which form d.lWH. App. p. 161 ; Tdf Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The- saur. s. v. 2139 d.] ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325 ; [B. 64 (56); Veitch s. v.]), [2 pers. sing. -Kes (Jn. viii. 57 Tr mrg.) see Koirida>, init.], 3 pers. plur. iapaxacriv (and -Kav in Col. ii. 1 L Tr WH ; Lk. ix. 36 T Tr Wli ; see ylvo- pai, init.) ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. iapaKci (Acts vii. 44) ; fut. o\j/opai (fr. OIITQ), 2 pers. sing, oi/^tt (cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 347 sq. ; Kiihner § 211, 3, i. p. 536), Mt. xxvii. 4 ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; xi. 40 ; but L T Tr WH [G also in Jn. i. 50 (51)] have restored o\jrrj (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq. (37)), 2 pers. plur. o<|^fo-5e, Jn. i. 39 (40) T Tr WH, etc. ; Pass., 1 aor. a>(p6riv ; fut. 6tp6ris opaiv, Heb. xi. 27 ; with a ptcp. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258) ; W. § 45, 4], Mt. xxiv. 30 ; Mk. xiii. 26 ; xiv. 62 ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; Jn. i. 51 (52) ; €(opaK€vat or o^ecr^at to npoaotTrov tivos. Col. ii. 1 ; Acts XX. 25 ; 6 (which divine majesty, i. e. toO Bftov Xdyou) iapdxaiifv to7s 66aKpo'is fjpiov (on this addition cf. W. 607 (564) ; [B. 39S (341)]), 1 Jn. i. 1; o^/^to-^ai' tiko i. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23 ; ctopaKivm Christ, i. e. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36 ; Lx. 37; x v. 24 ; opav and o\jff(Tdai with an ace. of the thing, Lk. .xxiii. 49 ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; iv. 45 ; vi. 2 [L Tr WH eeeapovv] ; xix. 35 ; Acts ii. 1 7 ; vii. 44 ; Rev. xviii. 18 [Rec], etc. ; [epx- «• oyjffaSe (sc. jToC ^eVo)), Jn. i. 40 (39) T TrWH ; cf. B. 290 (250)] ; o^ Tr]v bo^av tov 6tov, the glory of God displaVed in a miracle, Jn. xi. 40. metaph. oij/ea-dai tov Qeov, tov Kvpiov, to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14 ; also TO npoaamov tov deov. Rev. xxii. 4 — (a fig. borrowed from those privileged to .«ee and associate with kings ; see /SXe'irm, 1 b. ^.) ; oIk tiSor 5foC iapaKciTe, trop. i. (p his divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye have not recognized, Jn. v. 3 7 ; cf . Meyer ad loc. 2. to see iciththe mind, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. xv. 21; Tivd foil, by a ptcp. in the ace. [B. § 144, 15 b. ; W. § 45, 4], Acts viii. 23 : ri. Col. ii. 18 ; with a ptcp. added, Heb. ii. 8; foil, by on, Jas. ii. 24 ; to look at or upon, observe, give attention to : f'ls nva, Jn. xix. 37 (.Soph. El. 925 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 20 ; fir ti, Solon in Diog. Laert. 1, 52) ; iajpaKevai Tvapa Ta Trarpi, to have learned from [see irapd, II. b.] the father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who learn what they see their fathers doing'), Jn. viii. 38 (twice in Rec. ; once in L T Tr WH) ; Christ is said to deUver to men d laipaKev, the things which he has seen, i. e. which he learned in liis heavenly state with God be- fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of God, Jn. iii. 11, 32 ; iapaKcvai Bfon. to know God's will, 3 Jn. 11; from the intercourse and influence of Christ to have come to see (know) God's majesty, saving pur- poses, and will [cf. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7, 9 ; in an emphatic sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an- other, Jn. i. 18; vi. 46; oyjfftrdai Btov Kadais iimv, of the knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future kino'dom, 1 Jn. hi. 2 ; ox/^f (7()ai Christ, is used in refer- ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres- ence among them by his influence upon their souls through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is said o^fdBai. the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of them, ibid. 22. ■ 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted with by experience, to experience : (oyfiv, i. q. to become a partaker of, Jn. iii. 36 ; fjpjpav, (cf. Germ, erleben ; see €iSffl, L 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see to, look to ; i. e. a. i. q. to take heed, beware, [see esp. B. § 139, 49; cf. AV. 503 (469)] : opa prj, with aor. sub- junc, see that . . . not, take heed lust. Mt. viii. 4 ; xviii. 10; Mk. i. 44 ; 1 Th. v. 15 ; supply toOto Troi^oTjr in Rev. xix. 10 ; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338)], (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; El. 1003) ; foil, by an impv., Mt. ix. 30 ; xxiv. 6 ; opare rai jrpoo-e'xfTe dn-d, 5It. xvi. 6 ; dpuTe, /SXcTrcTe dm, Mk. viii. 1 5 ; dpoTf , Koi v\a(r(rfa6e and, Lk. .\ii. 15; opa, ti pe\- Xfif TToieir, i. ip weigh well. Acts xxii. 26 Rec. (opa ti jroieis. Soph. Pliiloct. 589). b. i.q. to care for, pay heed to: (TV oii-7 [R G o) 452 opdoTToBea tonin. 5, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. I aor. axpdTjv, I wasse^n, showed myself , appeared [cf. B. 52 (45)] : Lk. i.\. 31 ; with dat. of pers. (cf. B. u. s., [also § 134, 2 ; cf. AV. § 31, 10]) : of angels, Lk. i. 11 ; xxii. 43 [L br. WII reject the pass.] ; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii. 2); of Ood, Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the dead, IMt. xvii. 3; Mk. ix. 4, cf. IJi. ix. 31 ; of Jesus after his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 34 ; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31 ; xxvi. 1() ; 1 Co. XV. 5-8; 1 Tim. iii. IG ; of Jesus hereafter to return, Ilcb. ix. 28 ; of visions during sleep or ecstasy. Acts xvi. 9 ; Rev. xi. 19 ; xii. 1,3; in the sense of com- ing upon unexpectedly, Acts ii. 3 ; vii. 26. fut. pass. i>v orjid'l'roii.al aoi, on account of which I will appear unto thee. Acts xxvi. 16 ; on this pass, see W. § 39, 3 N. 1 ; cf. B. 287 (247). [CoMP. : d(j>-, Kad-, npo-opdai.'] [S'i'N. hpav, $\(irety, both denote tlie physical act: 6p. in general, 0\. the single look; ip. gives prominence to the discerning mind, $\. to the particular mood or point. When the physical side recedes, 6p. denotes perception in general (as resulting principally from vision), the prominence in the word of the mental element heing indicated by the constr. of the ace. w. inf. (in contr.ist with that of the ptcp. required w. flA.tTreii'), and l)y the absol. Spas; $\fw. on the other hand, wlien its pliysical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense, lintk (i. e. open, incline) towards, L.it. spectare, vergerc. Schmidt cli. xi. Cf. 6€wpew, (TKoneoj, et5w, I. fin.] opYTJ, -TJs, "J, (fr. opyda to teem, denoting an internal motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice [C'urtius § 152]; cf. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicui in Plant. Cas. 2, 5, 17; Most. 3, 2, 10; cf. Germ, arg, Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural dis- position, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul, impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna- tion, (on the distinction between it and dvpos, see 6vp.ot, 1) : Eph. iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Jas. i. 19 .sq. ; per opyrjt, in- dignant, [A. V. ivith angerl, Mk. iii. 5 ; x'^P'^ "Py^'i 1 Tim. ii. 8 ; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for the punishment itself (Deni. or. in Jlid. § 43) : of the punishments inflicted by magistrates. Ho. xiii. 4 ; bia T171» opyfjv, i. e. because disobedience is visited with punish- ment, ib. 5. The opyr) attributed to God in the N. T. is that in God which stands opposed to man's disobedience, obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, and mati- ifests itself in punishing the same: Jn. iii. 36; Ho. i. 18; iv. 15; L\.22'; Ilcb. iii. 11 ; iv. 3 ; Rev. xiv. 10; xvi. 19; xix. 15; absol. 17 opyrj, Ro. xii. 19 [cf. W. 594 (553)]; (TKfiri opyris, vessels into which wrath tcill be poured (at the last day), explained by the addition KarrfpTia-ptiia cU diruXetai/, Ro. ix. 22' ; r) peXKovaa opyr}, which at the last day will be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7 ; Lk. iii. 7, [al. understand in these two pass, the (national) judgments immediately impending to be referred to — at least primarily] ; also ^ opyij tj ipxopfvr}. 1 Th. i. 10; r)pipa opyrji, the day on which the wrath of God will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked [cf. W. § 30, 2 a.], Ro. ii. 5 ; and rj rjpepa ij pieyaKr] Trjs opy^t auTov (Rev. vi. 17; see i^pepa, 3 ad fin.) ; tp)((Tai 17 opyr) ToC 6(ov erri Tiva, the wrath of God cometh upon one in the infliction of penalty [cf. W. § 40, 2 a.], Eph. v. C; Col. iii. 6 [T Tr WII om. L br. enl etc.]; c(pda"i, TT:n ;nt1, P|Vp, etc.; but chiefly for t]S.) Cf. Ferd. Weber, Vom Zorne Gottes. Erlang. 1862; Ritschl, Die christl. Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Versbhnnng, ii. p. 1 18 sqq.* dp^t^u: Pass., pres. opyi'fo/iat ; 1 aor. aipyiadrjv; {opy!)); fr. Soph., Eur., and Thuc. down ; to provoke, arouse to anger ; jiass. to be provoked to anger, be angry, be wroth, (Sept. for rrin, ^IVP, also for t]X r\y\ etc.) : absol., ^It. xviii. 34; xxii. 7; Lk. xiv. 21 ; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 2(1 [B. 290 (250); cf. W. §§ 43, 2; 55, 7]; Rev. xi. 18; tiw, Mt. v. 22 ; «Vi Tivt,, Rev. xii. 17 [Lorn. tVt] as in 1 K. xi. 9; [Andoc. 5, 10]; Isocr. p. 230c.; [cf. W.232 (218)]. [COMP. : 7rap-opyifJ^ic. 2, 7, 10]; al.) • dpYuia. -as, ?;, (opf'yo) to stretch out), the distance across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched ; five or six feet, a /aMoni: Acts xxvii. 28. (Horn., Hdt., Xen., al.) • dpt'-yu : (cf. Lat. rego, G«rm. recken, strecken, reichen, [Eng. reo(7i; Curtius § 153]); fr. Horn, down ; to stretch forth, as x^'^P"' Horn. H. 15, 371, etc. ; pres. mid. [cf. W. p. 252 (23 7) note], /0 stretch one's self out in order to touch or to grasp sometliing, to reach after or desire some- thing: with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; Heb. xi. 16; (ptKapyvplat, to give one's self up to the love of money (not quite accurately since (piXapy. is itself the opi^is; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.]), 1 Tim. vi. 10.* dp'iv6i}, a poetic [Anth.] and later form for opdpios (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 ; Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Ale.x. p. 186 ; [W. 25]), earlg : Rev. xxii. 16 Kec. ; Lk. xxiv. 22 L T Tr WII. (Hos. vi. 4 ; Sap. xi. 23 (22).) * opSpios, -a, -ov, (f r. opdpos, q. v. ; cf. oyjfios, npaios) , early ; rising at the Jirst dawn or very early in the morning : Lk. xxiv. 22 R G (Job xxix. 7 ; 3 Mace. v. 10, 23). Cf. the preced. word. [Horn. (h. Merc. 143), Theogn., al.] * opflpos, -ov, 6, (fr. OPn, opvvpi to stir up, rouse ; cf. Lat. orior, ortus), fr. Hes. down ; Sept. for in^y dawn, and several times for Tpa ; daybreak, dairn : opdpov fia- OiOi or ^adeas (see (iadews and ffadvs [on the gen. cf. W. § 30, 11 ; B. § 132, 26]), at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1 ; opdpov, at daybreak, at dawn, early in the morning, Jn. viii. 2 (Hes. opp. 575 ; Sept. Jer. xxv. 4; x.xxiii. (x.xvi.) 5, etc.); vTTu TOV opdpov. Acts v. 21 (Dio Cass. 76, 17).* dp6us, {opdos), adv., rir/htly: i\Ik. vii. 35 ; Lk. vii. 43; X. 28; XX. 21. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.]' dpi'^u; 1 aor. wpitra; Pass., pf. ptcp. a>pia-pivos; 1 aor. ptcp. opiadcis; (fr. Spos a boundary, limit) ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; to define; i. e. 1. to mark out the boundaries or limits (of any place or thing) : Hdt., Xen., Thuc, al. ; Num. xxxiv. 6; Josh. xiii. 27. 2. to de- termine, appoint : with an ace. of the thing, i]p.ipav, Heb. iv. 7 ; Koipovs, Acts xvii. 26, (numerous exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 1 p. 538 sq.); pass, apiapevos, ' determinate,' settled, Acts ii. 23 ; to oipiirp.. that which hath been determined, ace. to appointment, decree, Lk. xxii. 22; with an ace. of pers. Acts xvii. 31 (« by attraction for ov [W. § 24, 1 ; B. § 143, 8]) ; pass, with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly appointed [A.V. declared'] Such among men by this tran- scendent and crowning event) ; 6pt^a>, to ordain, determine, apjioint. Acts x. 42 ; foil, by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr. 1 9 d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. 8 ed. Brunck]). [Comp. : d-, djro-St-, 7rpo-opi^.'] * opKOS, -on, d, (fr. €pya>, (Ipyio ; i. q. epKos an enclosure, confinement ; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for ni'Oiy, an oath : Mt. xiv. 7, 9 ; xxvi. 72 ; Mk. vi. 26 ; Lk. i. 73 [W. 628 (583) ; B. § 144, 13] ; Acts ii. 30 [W. 226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16 sq.; Jas. v. 12; by meton. that tchich has been pledged or promised ivith an oath ; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(cf. Wiinsche ad loc.)].* dpKa>p.oo-la, -as, f/, (opKiopoTea \_opKos and opvvpi] ; cf. aTTiopoa-ia, avTapocrla), affirmation made on oath, the tak- ing of an oath, an oath : Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek. xvii. 18 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92) ; Joseph, antt. 16, 6, 2. Cf. Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. 1. c.) * op\ia.io, -S> : 1 nor. upfiTjo-a; (ir.opprj); 1. trans. /(( set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on ; so fr. Hom. down. 2. intrans. to start forward i?npetuously, to rush, (so fr. Hom. down) : els ti, Mt. viii. 32 ; Mk. v. 13 ; Lk. viii. 33 ; Acts xLx. 29; inl Tiva, Acts vii. 57.* dp|iT), -ijj, 7), [fr. r. sar to go, flow ; Fick i. p. 227 ; Cur- tius § 502], fr. Horn, down, a violent motion, impulse : Jas. iii. 4 ; a hostile movement, onset, assault. Acts xiv. 5 [cf. Trench § Lxxxvii.].* op(«l(«t, -Tos, TO, (Spfida), a rush, impulse : Rev. xviii. 21 [here A. V. violence]. (For ni3;j. outburst of wrath. Am. i. 11 ; Hab. iii. 8, cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. iv. p. 123 ; an enterprise, venture, Hom. II. 2, 356, 590, although in- terpreters differ about its meaning there [cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.] ; that to which one is impelled or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus^, Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. § 12] p. 452c.) * opveov 454 09 opveov, -ov, TO, a hlrd : Rev. xviii. 2 ; xix. 1 7, 21. (Sept. ; Hoiii., Thuc, Xen., Plat., Joseph, antt. 3, 1, 5.)' fipvil [so codd. X U], i. q. opvit (q. v.) : Lk. xiii. 34 Tdf. The nom. is not found in prof, writ., but the trisj-Uabic forms opvtxos, opvixt for opvtSos, etc., are used in Doric ; [Pholiiis (ed. I'orson, p. 348, 2'2) "lojves opvi^ . . . /cai AapuU opvt^. Cf. Curtius p. 495].* opvis. -iBoi, 6, T], (OPQ, upvvfii [see upBposJ) ; 1. a hint; so fr. Horn. down. 2. spec. i, Mt. xxi. 33 ; i. q. to make a pit, iv t!j yrj, Mt. xxv. 18 [here T Tr Wll' op. y^v']. [CoMP. : 8t-, e|-opi;o-(7oj.] * dp(|>av6s, -fi,-6v, (0P*02, Lat. orbus; [Curtius § 404]), fr. Horn. Od. 20, 68 down, Sept. for Din'; bereft (of a father, of parents), .las. i. 27 [A.V.fatherlessI ; of those bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. xiv. 18 (Lam. v.;3).' dpXc'o|UU, -oii/iat : 1 aor. a)p;(i;o-dpT;i' ; (fr. ;(opdr, by trans- position opx"! ; cf. apwo), dpTrdfd), and Lat. rapio, popt^i) and Lat. forma ; [but these supposed transpositions are extremely doubtful, cf. Curtius § 189; Pick iv. 207, 167. Some connect opxiopat with r. argh ' to put in rapid mo- tion'; cf. Vanicek p. 59]); to dance: i\It. xi. 17; .xiv. 6; Mk. vi. 22 ; Lk. vii. 32. (From Ilom. down ; Sept. for np-;, 1 Chr. XV. 29 ; Ecclus. iii. 4 ; 2 S. vi. 21.) • OS, V' °> '^^*^ postpositive article, which has the force of I. a demonstrative pronoun, (7iiS, that, (Lat. hie, haec, hoc ; Germ, emphat. der, die, das) ; in the N. T. only in the foil, instances : or 8f', hut he (Germ, er aber), Jn. v. 1 1 L Tr WH ; [Mk. XV. 23 T Tr txt. WII ; cf . B. § 1 26, 2] : in distributions and distinctions : os piv . . . os 8«, this . . . that, one . . . another, the one . . . the other, Mt. xxi. 35 ; xxii. 5 L T Tr WH ; xxv. 15; Lk. xxiii. 33 ; Acts xxvii. 44 ; Ro. xiv. 5 ; 1 Co. vii. 7 R G ; xi. 21 ; 2 Co. ii. 16 ; Jude 22 ; 6 pkv . . .0 Sf, the one . . . the other, Ro. ix. 21 ; [o pkv . . . o S( . . . o 8c, some . . . some . . . some, Mt. xiii. 23 L T WH] ; o 8« . . . o Sf . . . 6 Sf, some . . . some . . . some, Mt. xiii. 8 ; w (raasc.) piv . . . iiWa (8t) . . . iripa St [but LTTr WHom. thisSejKTX. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; 8 /lei- . . . a\Xo 8« [L t.xt. T Tr WH xaluXXo], Mk. iv. 4 ; with a variation of the construction also in the foil. pass. : o pev . . . koI (Tfpov, Lk. viii. 5 ; out p f7niTTo\r)v, cv «if (because the preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles), 2 Pet. iii. 1. 7. the gender of the relative is conformed not to the gram m a t i c a 1 but to the natural gender of its antecedent [cf. W. §21,2; B. u. s.] : 7rai8dpioi' or, Jn. vi. 9 LTTrWH; dTjplov dt, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev. xiii. 14 L T Tr WH ; K((f>ci\ii ds. of Christ, Col. ii. 1 9 ; [add pva-Trjpiov OS etc. 1 Tim. iii. IG GLT Tr WH; cf. B.u. s. ; W. 588 sq. (547)] ; o-Kdrj (of men) ous. Ro. ix. 24 ; tflw; 0I, .\cts XV. 1 7 ; x.xvi. 1 7 ; TiKva, Texviii 01, .In. i. 1 3 ; Gal. iv. 19; 2 Jn. 1, (Eur. suppl. 12) ; t(kvov os, Philem. 10. o. Inattractions[B. §143, 8; W. §§ 24, 1 ; 66, 4sqq.]; o. the accusative of the rel. pron. depending on a trans, verb is changed by attraction into the oblique case of its antecedent: Kricreais tjs iKTio'ei' 6 6c6s, Mk. .xiii. 19 [RG]; roC prjpaTos ov elirfv, ^Ik. xiv. 72 [Rec] ; add, Jn. iv. 14; vii. .-'.I, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. 5]; xv. 20; .xxi. 10; Actsiii. 21, 25; vii. 17, 45; i.\. 36 ; x. 39; xxii. 10; Ro. XV. 18 ; 1 Co. vi. 19 ; 2 Co. i. 6 ; x. 8, 13 ; Eph. i. 8 ; Tit. o? 455 0v iavTov re TnarTOJVf oU ^Sero Koi hv TjirlaTfi ttoWovs^ for Koi ttoWovs TovTav, oir rjirioTfi, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 39 ; iov eya evTeTV)^rjKa oiSfi'r, for oiJSely roiTiov, ols ivrer. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 a.; Protag. p. 361 e. ; de rep. 7 p. 531 e. ; irap hv ^orj6eis, ov- he^iav XTjyj/ct -j^apiv, for napa Tovrayv, uts kt\. Aeschin. f. leg. p. 43 (117) ; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237 ; [B. § 143, 11 ; W. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. T. ; cf. INIeyer on Eph. i. 8]). The foU. expressions, however, can hardly be brought under this construction : r^r x^P'" Tos T]S cxapiV' rjs f)pifpas for djro ttjs rjptpas, rj. Col. i. 6, 9 ; oi» rponov, as, juxt as, for tovtov tok rpcmov ov or a, Mt. xxiii. 3 7 : Lk. -xiii. 31 ; Acts vii. 28 ; [preceded or] foil, by ovras, Acts i. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8. 8. A noun common to both the principal clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: fV m Kplpart KplV€T€, Kpi6T](T€(T6t* lOT Kpi6. cV TM Kpip.aTl, iv <0 KpLV€T€y Mt. vii. 2 ; xxiv. 44 ; Mk. iv. 24 ; Lk. xii. 40, etc. 3. The Neuter o a. refers to nouns of the masculine and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a t h i n g [cf. B. § 129, 6]: XcTira Suo, o eWi Ko&pdvrris, Mk. xii. 42; dyanrjv, o eoTi ovvBetrpoSj Col. iii. 1 4 L T Tr WH ; tiprovs, S etc. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. T Tr WIL b. is used in the phrases [B. u. s.] — o «Vtii», which (lerjii) signifies: Boa- vepyh o icrnv vioi (ip. Mk. iii. 1 7 ; add, v. 41 ; vii. 11, 34; ileb. vii. 2 ; o eari fieSe ppTjvfv6iJ.fvov, and the hke : Mt. i. 23; Mk..xv. 34; .Jn. i. 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; ix. 7; xx. 16. c. refers to a whole sentence [B. u. s.] :, tovtov dvearrjiTev 6 Beds, ov . . . itrfikv fidprvpes, Acts ii. 32; iii. 15 ; TTtpX ov . . . 6 Xoyoj, Heb. v. 11 ; S koi iiro'irjaav (and the like), Acts xi. 30 ; Gal. ii. 10 ; Col. i. 29 ; o {which thing viz. that I write a new commandment [cf. B. § 143, 3]) iiTTiv aKrjdis, 1 Jn. ii. 8 ; o (sc. to have one's lot as- signed in the lake of lire) iarw 6 Bdvaros 6 Sevrepos, Rev. xxi. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Horn, down, in the second of two coordinate clauses a pro- noun of the third person takes the place of the relative (cf. Passow ii. p. 552" ; [L. and S. s. v. B. TV. 1] ; B. § 143, 6 ; [W. 149 (141)]) : 6s eorai em tov SaifiOTos koi to a-Kevrj aiiTov iv TTJ oiKi'a firj Kara^aTw, Lk. xvii. 31 ; e^ ov to navra Koi fjpe'is (Is avTov, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique ease of the pronoun avTos is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ; as, ^fTo fiwydrpioj/ayT^t. Mk. vii. 25; see airds, II. 5. 6. The relative pron. vei'y often so includes the demonstra- tive OVTOS or eKeivos that for the sake of perspicuity a demons, pron. must be in thought supplied, either in the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which follows it [W. § 23, 2 ; B. § 127, 5]. The foil, examples may suffice : a. a demons, pron. must be added in thought in the preceding clause : ols ^roi/xao-rai, for TovTois 8o6rjcTfTat, ols fjT. !Mt. XX. 23; 8el$ai (sc. TaOra), d SeT yeviadai. Rev. i. 1 ; x.xii. 6 ; o> for cKelvos u, Lk. vii. 43, 47 ; ol for Tovrm ov, Ro. x. 14 ; with the attraction of Siv for ToiiTwv a, Lk. ix. 36 ; Ro. xv. 18 ; iiv for tovtu S>v, Mt. vi. 8 ; with a prep, intervening, e/iaSev d(p' tav (for diro tovtcov d) trraBev, Heb. v. 8. b. a demons, pron. mustbesuppliedinthe subsequent clause : Mt. x. 38 ; Mk. ix. 40 ; Lk. iv. 6 ; ix. 50 ; Jn. xix. 22 ; Ro. ii. 1, and often. 7. Sometimes the purpose and end is ex- pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. ijui for ut is) : dn-oo-T-e'XXm dyyeXoi/, os (for which Lchm. in ]\It. has (cai) KOTacrKevdaft. who shall etc. i. q. that he mai/ etc., Mt, xi. 10 ; Mk. i. 2 ; Lk. vii. 27 ; [1 Co. ii. 16] ; so also in Grk. autli., cf. Passow s. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553 ; [L. and S. s. V. B. rV^ 4] ; Matthiae § 481, d. ; [Kiihner § 563, 3 b. ; Jelf § 836,4; B. §139, 32]; — orthecause: ov napa- Sf'xerai, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb. xii. 6 ; — or the relative stands where Sxrre might be used (cf. Matthiae § 479 a.; Kriiger § 51, 13, 10; [Kiikner § 563, 3 e.] ; Passow s. v. VIIL 2, ii. p. 553"; [L. and S. u. s.]) : Lk. V. 21 ; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. ris, Ti, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372; [cf. B. § 139, 58]) : ovk exa> o napaSrjaai, Lk. xi. 6; by a later Grk. usage, inadirect quest, (cf. W. § 24, 4; B. §139, 59) : e<^' o (or Rec. e(f a) ndpet, Mt. xxvi. 50 (on which [and the more than doubtful use of or in direct quest.] see fVi, B. 2 a. f. p. 233' and C. I. 2 g. y. aa. p. 235"). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)] : dvd' atv, for dvT'i Toirroiv on, — because, Lk. i. 20 ; xix. 44 ; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 10; for tchich reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see dvrl, 2 d.) ; i a. for that, since (see cVi, B. 2 a. S. p. 233'); di^' ov, (from the time that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25; OOruKl^ 456 OlTOs- xxiv. 21, [see arr6, 1. 4 b. p. flS'] ; axpit ov, pec axpt, 1 d. ; c'i oS, whence, Phil. iii. 20 cf. W. § 21, 3 ; [B. § 143, 4 a.] ; «tor ov, unlil (see eur, II. 1 b. a. p. 2G8'') ; also /ifxp'S o^> Jlk. xiii. 30 ; - 8i'a, b. (Tragg., Thuc, Xen., Plat., al. ; in Mom. 08/117 ; Sept. for n"l.) * oo-os, -17, -ov, [fr. Horn, down], a relative adj. corre- sjiunding to the demon. too-oCtos- either expressed or un- derstood, Lat. (/«««(us, -o, -iun; used a. of space [as gredl as~\ : to prjKos airr)! (Rec. adds TO(rovTov ecrnv) Sa-ov Ka'i [GTTrWHom. xai] ro nXdros. Rev. xxi. 16; of time \_as long a.s] : eip' oo-ov ^po''""! ./"'" ^" ^""9 '""® as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 39 ; Gal. iv. 1 ; also without a prep., oo-ok xpo''ov, Mk. ii. 1 9 ; neut. e(f>' Saov, ns long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 25) ; en ptxpov oo-ov o(rov, yet a little hoiv very, how i^ery, (Vulg. modicum [ali]quanlulum), i. e. yet a very little ivhile, Heb. X. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp. 213; cf. Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; W. 247 (231) note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul- titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as: neut. oaov, Jn. vi. 11; plur. oo-oi, as many (men) as, all tvho, Mt. xiv. 36 ; Mk. iii. 10; Acts iv. 6, 34 ; xiii. 48 ; Ro. ii. 12; vi. 3 ; Gal. iii. 10, 27; Phil. iii. 15; 1 Tim. vi.. 1 ; Rev. ii. 24 ; oaat eirayyeXlai, 2 Co. i. 20 ; oaa ifxaria. Acts ix. 39; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often whatsoever^, Mt. xvii. 12 ; j\lk. x. 21 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xii. 3 ; Ro. iii. 19 ; xv. 4; Jude 10; Rev. i. 2. iravres ocroi, [all as many as], Mt. xxii. 10 [here T WII n- oKs]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8;. Acts V. 36 sq. ; neut. iravra Sira [nil things whatsoever, all that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25 ; xxviii. 20 ; Mk. xii. 44 ; Lk. xviii. 22 ; Jn. iv. 29 [T WH Tr mrg. tt. 5], 39 [T WII Tr txt. Tr. u] ; rroXXa oo-a, Jn. xxi. 25 R G, (Ilom. II. 22, 380 ; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 3). oaoi . . . ovmi, Ro. viii. 14; oaa . . . TaiJTa, Phil. iv. 8; o(Ta . ■ ■ e'v tovtois, Jude 10; oo-ot . . . auToi, .In. i. 12 ; Gal. vi. 16. oiroi av or eav, how many soever, as many soever as [cf. W. § 42, 3] ; foil, by an indie, pret. (see Sv, IT. 1 ), Mk. vi. 56 ; by an indie, pres. Rev. iii. 19; by a subjunc. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28; vi. 1 1 ; Lk. ix. 5 [Rec] ; Acts ii. 39 [here Lchm. ovs Sv] ; Rev. xiii. 15; oaa Sv, Mt. xviii. 18; Jn. xi. 22; xvi. 13- ocnrep 457 0(T(f)V-i [R G] ; ndirra ocra av, all things whatsoever : foU. by sub- junc. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjunc. aor., Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3 ; Acts iii. 22. oaa in indirect disc. ; how many things : Lk. ix. 10 ; Acts ix. 16 ; xv. 12 ; 2 Tim. i. 18. c. of importance: oa-a, how great things, i.e. hoto ex- traordinary, in indir. disc, 5Ik. iii. 8 [L mrg. a] ; v. 19 sq. ; Lk. viii. 39 ; Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4, [al. take it of n u m b e r in these last two exx. how many ; cf . b. above] ; how great (i. e. hitter), naKa, Acts ix. 1.3. d. of measure and degree, in comparative sentences, ace. neut. oo-ov . . . ixaXkov vipuKTorepov, the more . . . so much the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 3G ; Kaff oaov with a compar., hy so much as with the compar. Heb. iii. 3 ; Kad' o here ; but respecting it see dpxrj, 1 b. 5. It differs scarcely at all from the simple relative or (cf. Matthiae p. 1073; B. § 127, 18; [Kruger § 51, 8 ; EUicott on Gal. iv. 24 ; cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson's Hdbk. to :Modern Greek, App. § 24] ; but cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 182 sq., who stoutly denies- it): Lk. ii. 4; ix. 30 ; Acts xvii. 10; x.xiii. 14 ; x.xviii. 18; Eph. i. 23. 6. cwr orou, on which see Has, IL 1 b. j3. p. 268"> mid. oiTTpdKivos, -T), -OK, (oo-TpaKov bakcd clay), made of clay, earthen : axdr) onrpuKiva, 2 Tim. ii. 20 ; with the added suggestion of frailty, 2 Co. iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1,11; .xxxix. (.xxxii.) 14 ; Is. .x.\x. 14, etc. ; Hippocr., AnthoL, [al.].) * oo-iis [or -(j)is, so R Tr in Eph. vi. 14 ; G in ISIt. iii. 4 ; cf. Chandler §§ 658, 659 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -ios, 17, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. the hip (loin), as that part of the body where the (wvr] was worn (Sept. for D'JjTD) : ^It. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6 ; hence jrepi^oivwadai ras 6 CTav 458 OTt the (two) loins, where the Hebrews thought the genera- tive power {semen) resided [?] ; hence Kapirbs t^j u(t(J)vos, fruit of tlie loins, offspring, Acts ii. 3U (see Koprros, 1 fin.) ; (^(px«T0M tK r^s ocrcpi/ot Tivot, to come forth out of one's loins i. e. derive one's origin or descent from one, Heb. vii. 5 (see f^ipxofiai, 2 b.) ; crt f'v Tjj d(T(f>vi Ttxot, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor), Heb. vii. 10.' oVav, a particle of time, comp. of ore and av, at the lime thai, whenerei; (Germ, dann tcann; icann iryend); used of things whicli one assumes will really occur, but the time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fix (in prof. auth. often also of things which one assumes «an occur, but whether they really will or not he does not know; hence like our in case that, as in Plato, Prot. p. 3C0 b. ; Phaedr. p. 256 e. ; Phaedo p. 68 d.) ; [cf. W. §42,5; B. §139, 33J; a. with the subjunctive present: Mt. vi. 2, 5; x. 23; Mk. xiii. 11 [here Rec. aor.]; xiv. 7; Lk. xi. 36; xii. 11; xiv. 12 sq. ; xxi. 7; Jn. vii. 27 ; xvi. 21 ; Acts xxiii. 3.5 ; 1 Co. iii. 4 ; 2 Co. xiii. 9 ; 1 Jn. v. 2 ; Rev. x. 7 ; xviii. 9 ; preceded by a specification of time : eur Ttji j/^ifpus «fiVijr, orav etc., Mt. xxvi. 29; :Mk. xiv. 25; foil, by rort, 1 Th. v. 3; 1 Co. XV. 28 ; 1. q. as ojlen as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2 ; Jn. viii. 44 ; Ro. ii. 14 ; at the lime when i. q. as long as, Lk. xi. 34; Jn. ix. 5. b. with the subjunctive aorist: i. q. the Lat. quando accident, ut w. subjunc. pres., Jit. v. 11 ; xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32; Mk. iv. 15 sq. 29 [R G], 31 sq. ; xiii. 28 ; Lk. vi. 22, 26 ; viii. 13; xi. 21 ; xii. 54 sq. ; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 4 ; xvi. 21 ; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Lmrg. fut.] ; Rev. ix. 5. i. q. ■quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Jlk. viii. 38; ix. 9 ; xii. 23 [G Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 25 ; Lk. ix. 26; xvi. 4, 9; xvii. 10; Jn. iv. 25 ; vii. 31; xiii. 19; xiv. 29; XV. 26; xvi. 4, 13, 21; xxi. 18; Acts xxiii. 35 ; xxiv. 22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv. 24 [here LTTr WH pres.], 27 (where the meaning is, ' when he shall have said that the vnoTa^is predicted in the Psalm is now accom- plished'; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; xvi. 2 sq. 5, 12; 2 Co. x. C ; Col. iv. 1 G ; 1 Jn. ii. 28 [L T Tr AVH' Mv^ i 2 Th. i. 10 ; Heb. i. 6 (on which see fio-dya, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4; xvii. 10; XX. 7. foil, by t6t€, Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 15; xxv. 51; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; xxi. 20; Jn. viii. 28; 1 Co. xiii. 10 [G L T Tr WH om. rare] ; xv. 28, 54 ; Col. iii. 4. c. Ace. to the usage of later authors, a usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.) ; B. 222 (192) .sq. ; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq. ; WH. App. p. 171 ; for exx. additional to these given by W. and B. u. s. see Snph. Lex. s. V. ; cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson's Hdbk. to Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; a. future: u-hen, (o\(rfcr6f), Lk. xiii. 28 TTrt.xt. WH inrg. ; [1 Tim. v. 1 1 L mrg.] ; as often as. Rev. iv. 9 (ef. Bleek ad loc). p. present: Mk. xi. 25 LTTr WH ; xiii. 7 Tr txt. ; [Lk. xi. 2 Tr mrg.]. y. very rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as often as, \_tchcn- Aoei-er], orav i6(aipovv, Mk. iii. 11 (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex. xvii. 11 ; 1 S. xvii. 34 ; see av, H. 1). 8. As in Byz- antine auth. i. (). oTf, >rhi:n, with the indie, aorist : orav tjvoi^fp. Rev. viii. 1 LTTr WH; [add urav o^i iyivtro, Mk. xi. 19 TTrt.xt. WH, cf. B. 223 (193) ; but al. take this of customary action, whenever eveninr/ came (i. e. every evening, R. V.)]. orav docs not occur in the Epp. of Peter and Jude. 6't«, a jiarticle of time, [fr. IIoui. down], when ; 1. with the Indicative [W. 296 (278) sq.] ; indie, pres- ent (of something certain and customary, see Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 913 sq.), while : Jn. ix. 4 ; Heb. ix. 17; w. an his- torical pres. Mk. xi. 1. w. the imperfect (of a thing done on occasion or customary) : Jlk. xiv. 12; xv. 41 ; Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. xxi. 18; Acjs xii. I! ; xxii. 20: Ro. vi. 20 ; vii. 5 ; 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; Gal. iv. 3 ; Col. iii. 7 ; 1 Th. iii. 4; 2 Th. iii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. an indie, aorist, Lat. quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5 ; [B. § 137, 6]): Jit. ix. 25; xiii. 26,48; .wii. 25 [R G] ; -xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10; viii. 19; xv. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3LTWH], 13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33 ; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where Tdf. is], etc. ; Acts i. 13 ; viii. 1 2, 3!) : xi. 2 ; xxi. 5, 35 ; xxvii. 39 ; xxviii. 16; Ro. xiii. 11 ("than when we gave in our allegiance to Christ;" Lat. quotn Christo nomen dedisseiHus, [R. V. than when we first believed]) ; Gal. i. 15; ii.ll, 12,14; iv.4; Phil.iv.l5; Heb.vii.lO; Rev. i. 17; vi. 3, 5, 7, 9, 12; viii. 1, etc.; so also Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25 ; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mrg. ore {(Sfv, when it had presented itself to his sight [but best texts on : because he saw etc.]). eyeVfro, ore eriXfatv, a common phrase in Jit., viz. vii. 28 ; .xi. 1 ; xiii. 53 ; xix. 1 ; xxvi. 1. ore . . . ToTf, Mt. xxi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indie, perfect, since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; w. the indie, future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; xvi. 25 ; Ro. ii. 16 [R G T Tr txt. WH mrg.] (where Lchm. ij [al. al.]) ; 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor. Subjunctive: «aj &v ij^tj, ore einrjTe (where orav might have been expected), until the time have come, when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 35 [RG (cf. Trbr.)]; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq. ; Bornemaun, Scholia in Lucae evang. p. 92; W. 298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400 ; cf. B. 231 sq. (199)_]. 0, T«, ij, Tf, TO. Tf, see Ti 2 a. oTi [properly neut. of oimr], a conjunction [fr. Horn, down], (Lat. quod [cf. W. § 53, 8 b. ; B. § 139, 51 ; § 149, 3]), marking 1. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : di/ayy«'XXfti/, Acts xiv. 27 ; SitjyfiaBm, Acts ix. 27 ; dwf'iv, Jit. xvi. 20 ; xxviii. 7, 13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; lCo.i.15; Xe'yeii/, Jit. iii. 9; viii. 11 ; Jlk. iii. 28; Lk. xv. 7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr AVH om. L br. on] ; ix. 2, and very often ; npo- fipijKfVai, 2 Co. vii. .! ; before the on in Acts xiv. 22 sup- ply Xc'yoiTfS, contained in the preceding jrapaKoXovvrfs [cf. B. § 151, 11] ; Sti after ypd(}ifw, 1 Co. ix. 10 ; 1 Jn. ii. 12-14 ; fiaprvpdv, Jit. xxiii. 31 ; Jn. i. 34 ; iii. 28 ; iv. 44 ; ofuAoyeiv, Heb. xi. 13; Sfixvittv, Mt. xvi. 21 ; Sj]\ovv, 1 Co. i. 11 ; StSda-Kcw, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ipc^avi^dv, Heb. xi. 14 ; brjKov (coriV), 1 Co. xv. 27 ; Gal. iii. 11;! Tim. vi. OTt 459 on 7 (where L T Tr WII om. Sr/Kov [and then 0« simply introduces the reason, because (B. 358 (30S) to the con- trary)]) ; (^avfpovjuu (for avepov yivfTai nfpl ifiov^, 2 Co. iii. 3; iJn. ii. 19. It is added — to verbs of s we aring, and to forms of oath and affirmation: oprnfii, Rev. X. (.; fo) e'ya (sec fdo), I. 1 p. 270"), llo. .xiv. 11 ; jiaprupa Tov 6e6v imKoXoupiai, 2 Co. i. 23 ; ttiotos 6 ^eds, 2 Co. i. 18; '4(TTLv aKr]6Gui KptiTTOv (V efioi, 2 Co. .\i. 10 ; Idov evoyiriov Toi 6(ov, Gal. i. 20; cf. Frilzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 242 sq. ; [W. §53, 9; B. 394(338)]; — to verbs of perceiv- ing, knowing, remembering, etc.: aKovciv, Jn. xiv. 2« ; ffKiveiv, 2 Co. vii. 8 ; Heb. iii. 1 9 ; Jas. ii. 22 ; Bfaadm, Jn. vi. 5 ; •yij/iia/ceii', Mt. -\.Ki. 45 ; Lk. .\. 11; Jn. iv. 53; 2 Co. xiii. 6 ; 1 Jn. ii. 5, etc. ; after tovto, Ro. vi. 6 ; fldtvai, Mt. vi. 32; x.xii. 16; Mk. ii. 10; Lk.ii. 49; Jn. iv. 42; i.\. 20, 24 sq. ; Ro. ii. 2 ; vi. 9 ; Phil. iv. 15 sq., and very often ; ^vMcrTdv iariv, Acts xxviii. 28 ; eTriyivaxTKeiu, Mk. ii. 8 ; Lk. i. 22 ; Act.s iv. 13 ; i7rl quod, quia, quom, nam) ; [on the diff. bctw. it anil yap cf. Weslcoll, Epp. of Jn. p. 70] ; a. it is added to a speaker's words to show what ground he gives for his o])inion ; as, naxapios etc. on. Mt. v. 4-12; xiii. 16; Lk. vi. 20 sq. ; xiv. 14 ; after oiai, Mt. xi. 21 ; xxiii. 1'3- 15, 23, 25, 27, 29 ; Lk. vi. 24 sq. ; x. 13 ; xi. 42-44, 4G, 52; Judell; cf. further, Jit. vii. 13; xvii. 15; xxv. 8; Mk. V. 9 ; ix. 38 [G Tr mrg. cm. Trtxt. br. the cl.] ; Lk. vii.47; xxiii. 40; Jn. i. 80 ; v. 27; ix. 16; xvi. g-11,14, IG [TTr WII oni. F^br. cl.]; Acts i. 5, and often; — or is adde vpS)v to ou oC, let your denial be truthful, Jas. V. 12; on 2 Co. i. 17-19, see vai. 2. It is joined to other words, — to a finite verb, simply to deny that what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of the sentence : Mt. i. 25 (ovk cyivaxTKev airrjv) ; Jlk. iii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 43 ; Jn. x. 28 ; Acts vii. 5 ; Ro. i. 16, and times without number. It has the same force when conjoined to participles: if ovk atpa 8epwv, 1 Co. ix. 26 ; OVK uvTos avTa> tIkvov, at the time when he had no child. Acts vii. 5 (pi) oiTor would be, ullhouyh lie had no child) ; add, Ro. viii. 20 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; 2 Co. iv. 8; G;il. iv. 8, 27; Col. ii. 19; Phil iii. 3; Ileb. .\i. 35; iPet. i. 8; 6 • • • OVK i>i> wotprjv, Jn. x. 1 2 (where ace. to class, usage ^ij must have been employed, because such a person is imagined as is not a shei)herd; [cf. B. ."SI (301) and pfj, I. 5 b.]). in relative sentences: eltriv . . . nvis oi ou ma-Tn'ovaiv, Jn. vi. 64 ; add, Mt. x. 38 ; xii. 2 ; Lk. vi. 2 ; Ro. XV. 21 ; Gal. iii. 10, etc. ; ovk eanv os and oiiStv etrriv o foil, by a f ut. : Mt. x. 26 ; Lk. viii. 1 7 ; xii. 2 ; ris eonv, OS ov foil. l)y a pres. indie. : Acts xix. 35 ; Ileb. xii. 7 ; cf. W. 481 (448) ; B. 355 (:!05) ; in statements introduced by OTI after verbs of understanding, pei-ceiving, saying, etc. : Jn. v. 42 ; viii. 55, etc.; on ovk (where ovk is pleo- nastic) after apvflcreai, 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; cf. B. § 148, l-T ; [W. § 65, 2 ^.] ; — to an infin., where pi) might have been ex- pected : Tts tn XP^^^ Kara rrjv tu^lv MfX;^tfr. (Tfpov av- ioraadai Upia Km oi) Kara tiiv tu^iv 'Au/juk XiytoBm, Ileb. vii. 1 1 (whore the dilliculty is hardly removed by saying [e. g. with W. 482 (449)] that ov belongs only to Kara riiv Til^iv 'Aap., not to the infin.). it serves to deny other parts of statements : ovk ev trorjiia \6yov, 1 Co. i. 17 ; oii pfXapi, OVK iv jrXn^i \i6tvats, 2 Co. iii. 3, and many other exx.; — to deny the object, eXtor (RG (\eov) BtXa, ou Ovrriav, Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; ovk ipi Sixfrm, Jlk. ix. 37. It blends wilh the term to which it is prefixed into a single and tluit an aMirmative idea [W. 476 (444); cf. B. 347 (298)]; as, ovk iaa>, to prerent, hinder, Acts xvi. 7; xix. 30, (cf., on this phrase, Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 887 sq.) ; ovk fX«. '" l>e poor, Mt. xiii. 12 ; Mk. iv. 2.'), (see tx^, I. 2 a. p. 266'') ; Ta ovk avrjKOVTa [or h ovk avT]Kev, L T Tr WII], unseemly, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (see prj, I. 5 d. fin. p. 410»; [cf. B. § 148, 7 a. ; W. 486 (452)]) ; often so as to form a litotes; as, oix ayvoiai, to know tcell, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10) ; ovk oXi'yoi, not a few, i. e. very many. Acts xvii. 4, 12; xix. 23 sfp ; xv. 2; xiv. 28; xxvii. 20; ov TToXXai I'lpipai, a few days, Lk. xv. 13 ; Jn. ii. 12 ; Acts i. 5 ; ou TToXu, Acts xxvii. 14; oi perplws, Acts xx. 12 ; ouk "lOTjpos, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean etc.], Acts xxi. 39 ; OVK ex plrpov, Jn. iii. 34. it serves to limit the term to which it is joined : oi navras, not altogether, not eniirely (see rravras, c. 0.) ; ou iras, not any and every one, Mt. vii. 21 ; plur. ou iravT^s, not all, Mt. xix. 11 ; Ro. ix. 6; X. 16; ou Trao-a uup^, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. -w. 39 ; ou navTi. tm Xna>, not to all the ])eople. Acts x. 41 ; on the other hand, when oii is joined to the verb, nai . . . ov must be rendered ho one, no, (as in Hebrew, now S3 . . . xS, now sS . . . ^73 ; cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 513 sq.) : Lk. i.' 37 ; Eph. v. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 21 ; Rev. xxii. 3 ; rraaa trap^ . . . ou w. a verb, no Jlesh, no mortal, Mt. xxiv. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro. iii. 20 ; Gal. ii. 16; cf. W. §26, 1; [B. 121 (106)]. Joined to a noun it denies and annuls the idea of the noun ; as, tov ov XaoV, a people tliat is not a people (Germ, ein Nichlrolk, a nn-]>(i)ple), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; eV ovk tdfei. 461 ivBe (R. V. with that which is no nation'], Ro. x. 19 (so Dj; sS; ^S S^, a no-god, Deut. xxxii. 21 ; ]';? N'S, a not-wood, Is. X. 15; oiiK. apxitpeiis, 2 Mace. iv. 13; fj ov 8«iAu ; oi ovK rjKfr)- (neVoi, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega- tive, a. it strengthens tlie negation : ov Kplva ovSeva, Jn. viii. 15 ; add, Mk. v. 37 ; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8) ; ov oix ^v oiSeVci) ov8(\s Keiptvos, Lk. xxiii. .J3 [see oiSeVu] ; ovk ■ ■ ■ ovStv, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2 ; Jn. vi. 63 ; xi. 49 ; xii. 19 ; XV. 5 ; ov peXei woi nfpl oiiSevos, Mt. xxii. 16 ; ovk • • ■ ovKeTt, Acts viii. 39 ; cf. Matthiae § 609, 3 ; Kuhner ii. § 516 ; W. §55, 9 b.; [B. §148,11]. b. as in Latin, it changes a negation into an afiirmation (cf. Jlattliiae § 609, 2 ; Khlziid Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 stj. ; W. § 55, 9 a.; B. § 148, 12) ; oi napa tovto ovk (ariv ex too awiiaros, not on this account is it not of the hodii, i. e. it belongs to the body, does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15 ; oi bvva- fifda a e'Sopev Koi rjKovcrapev pf/ XaXfiv, we are unable not to apeak [A.V. we cannot but speak']. Acts iv. 20. 4. It is used in disjunctive statements where one tiling is denied that another may be establislied [W. § 5.5, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)] : ovk . . . dWi, Lk. viii. 52; xxiv. 6 [Wli reject tlie cl] ; Jn. i. .'i3 ; vii. 10, 12, 16; viii. 49 ; Acts x. 41 ; Ko. viii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii. 3 ; viii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 16, etc. ; see dWd, II. 1 ; ov^ 'iva . . . aXX* tpa, Jn. iii. 1 7 ; ovj( Iva . . . dXXd, Jn. vi. 38 ; ov fiovov . . . dWa Kai, see oXXd, II. 1 and pdvos, 2 ; ovk . . . el /irj, see el, III. 8 c. p. 171'; ov prj w. subjunc. aor. foil, by «I pfj, Rev. xxi. 27 [see el as above, ^.]. 5. It is joined to other particles : ou pr), not at all, by no means, surely not, in no wise, see pij, IV. ; ov prjxeTi w. aor. sub- junc. Mt. xxi. 19 LTTrmrg. WII. prj ov, where pf) is intcrrog. (Lat. nmn) and ov negative [cf. B. 248 (214), 354(304); W.511(476)]: Ko.x.lSsij.; lCo.ix.4sq.; xi. 22. el ov, see el, HI. 11 p. 172". oi yap (see yap, I. p. 109'), .Vets xvi. 37. 6. As in Ilcbr. x'? w. impf., so in bibl. Grk. oi w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatic prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; cf. W. §43, 5 c. ; also 501 sq. (467) ; [B. § 139, G4] ; Fritzsche on Mt. p. 259 sq. [cf. p. 252 sq.] thinks otiierwise, but not cor- rectlv) : Mt. vi. 5 ; and besides in the moral precepts of tlie O. T., Mt. iv. 7 ; xix. 18 ; Lk. iv. 12 ; Acts xxiii. 5; Ro. vii. 7 ; xiii. 9. 7. oi is used interroga- tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat. nonne; [W. § 57, 3 a.; B. 247 (213)]): Mt. vi. 26, 30; xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21 ; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii. 25 ; Acts ix. 21 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; 1 Co. ix. 1, G sq. 12 ; Jas. ii. 4, and often ; oi»c oiSare kt\. ; and the like, see etSw, II. 1 p. 174«; ciXX' oi, Heb. iii. 16 (see dXXfpei, (jal. ii. 6 ; it follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne- gation (see ov, 3 a.) : Mk. xv. 4 sq. ; xvi. 8 ; Lk. iv. 2 ; ix. 36; XX. 40; Jn. iii. 27; v. 19, 30; L\. 33; xi. 49; .xiv. 30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.] ; 1 Co. viii. 2 [R G] ; ix. 15 [G L T Tr WH] ; oiSfu ov p.r) w. aor. subjunc. Lk. x. 19 [R" (i WH mrg. ; see pi). IV. 2]. ovbev, absioL, nolh- inij irhalcrrr, not at all, in no iciae, [cf. B. § 131, 10] : dSi- Kf'iv (see a&iKeo), 2 b.). Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12 ; ovfieV dtafjx'pfivTivos, (ial. iv. 1 ; varepflv, 2 Co. xii. 11 ; wfjieXdv, Jn. vi. G3 ; 1 Co. xiii. 3. oiidev iartv, it is nothing, of no importance, etc. [cf. B. § 129, 5] : Mt. xxiii. 16, 18 ; Jn. viii. 54 ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; with a gen., none of these thini/.i is true. Acts xxi. 24 ; xxv. 1 1 ; oidev etpt, I iira nothing, of no.iceount : 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; 2 Co. xii. 1 1, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Pas.«ow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2 ; Meyer on 1 Co. 1. c.]); fi's oi&ev XoyKT^iJvni (see Xoyi^npai. 1 a.). Acts xi.x. 27 ; fls ovdev yiveuBai, to come to nought, Acts v. 36 [W. § 29, 3 a. ; iv ovbevi, in no respect, in nothing, Phil, i. 20 (cf. pijbek, g.)]. oiSt'iroTt, adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr. ovbi ;ind irori, prop, not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never' Mt. vii. 23; i.x. 33; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv. 29 (bis)]; Jn. vii. 46; Acts .x. 14; ,\i. 8 ; .xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 8; Ileb. X. 1, 11. interrogatively, did ye never, etc.: JIt. xxi. 16, 42; Mk. ii. 25." ovSe'irii), adv., simply negative, (fr. oiiSi and the enclitic jrm), [fr. Aeschyl. down], not yet, not as yet : Jn. vii. 39 (where L Tr WH oviro)) ; xx. 9. ovbiira oiSels, never any one [A. V. never man yet^, Jn. xLx. 41 ; [ovSeTroj . . . fV nvSevt, as yet ... upon none. Acts viii. 16LTTr WH] ; OVK . . . ovhinai ovbeis (see ov, 3 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L Tr WII OVK . . . OL-Sfis oviTu>\ Tdf. OVK . . . ouSfl? ovfifVo)]; ovhfTTio nvSiv (L T Tr WH simply ovnai) not yet (any- Ihiiir/), 1 Co. viii. 2.' ov6e(s, ovdiv, see oOSfi'f, init. ovKeVt [also written separately by Rec'' (gcncrall}), Tr (nine times in Jn.), Tdf. (in Philem. 16)], {ovk, en), an adv. which denies simply, and thus differs from prjKin (q. v.), no longer, no more, no further : Mt. xix. 6 ; Mk. X. 8 : Lk. XV. 19, 21 ; Jn. iv. 42 ; vi. 66 ; Acts xx. 25, 38 ; Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2 Co. v. 16; Gal. iii. 25; iv. 7; Ei)h. 4B3 otn^ ii. 19; Pliilem. 16 ; Heb. x. 18, 26, etc.; ouKeVi rjxeov, I came not again [R. V. I forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23. witli another neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne- gation : ovii . . • ovKfTi, Mt. x.\ii. 46 ; ouk . . . oukeVi, Acts viii. 39; ovSeis ■ ■ ■ ovkIti, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11 ; ovKiTi . . . ovhiv, Mk. vii. 1 2 ; .w. 5 ; Lk. xx. 40 ; ovkcti . . . ovSeva, ilk. ix. 8 ; ovkcti ov fiij, Mk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 16 [WHom. L Tr br. oOkcVi] ; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr om.]; ouSf . . . ovKin ovSeis, Mk. ^•. 3 L T WH Tr txt. ouxeVt is used logically [cf. W. § 65, 10] ; as, ovkcti iyai for it cannot now be said on iyw etc., Ro. vii. 1 7, 20 ; Gal. ii. 20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Horn., Hes., Hdt,, al.)] ouKoiiv, (fr. ovk and ovv), adv., not therefore ; and since a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion [see Kriiger as below], the particle is used affirmatively, therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing. Hence the saying of Pilate ovkoCd ^acriXcvs ei r)iii; 1 Co. -x. 19; ti ovv; ichat then? i. e. how then does the matter stand ? [cf. W. § 64, 2 a.], Jn- i. 21 [here WH mrg. punct. ti ovv s ovv, when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. G; xviii. 6; -xx. 11 ; xxi. 9 ; is ovv, as therefore, Col. ii. 6. Sxnrep ovv, Mt. xiii. 40. /ifV ovv, foil, by 8e' [cf. B. § 149, 16], Mk. xvi. 1 9 [Tr mrg. br. ovv] ; Jn. xi.\. 25 ; Acts i. 6 ; viii. 4, 25; 1 Co. ix. 25, etc.; without an adversative conjunc. following, see niv, II. 4. vvv ovv, see above under a., and b. y. h. As to position, it is never the first word in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. § 61, 6] ; as, [Tzepi r^f ^puxT^ws ovv etc. 1 Co. viii. 4] ; oi /leV ovv, Acts ii. 41, .and often ; noWa piv ovv, Jn. xx. 30. i. John uses this particle in his Gospel far more frequently [(more than two hundred times in all)] than the other N. T. writers ; iji his Epistles only in the foil, passages : 1 Jn. ii. 24 (where GL T Tr WII have expunged it) ; iv. 19 Lchm. ; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Horn, down.)] ovTTU), (fr. oi5 and the enclitic 7ra>), adv., [fr. Hom. down], (differing fr. prfiro>, as oi! does fr. /xij [q. v. ad init.]), not yet; a. in a negation : Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 7 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; iu. 24 ; vi. 1 7 L txt. T Tr WH ; vii. 6, 8" R L WH t.\.t., 8", 30, 39 ; viii. 20, 57 ; xi. 30 ; xx. 1 7 ; 1 Co. iii. 2 ; Heb. ii. 8 ; xii. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; Rev. xvii. 10, 12 (where Lchm. ovk) ; ov8f\s ovttio, no one ever yet (see oiSds, 2, and cf. oi, 3 a.), Mk. xi. 2 L T Tr AVII ; Lk. xxiii. 53 L Tr WH ; Acts viii. 16 Rec. b. in ques- tions, nondumne ? do ye not yet etc. : Mt. xv. 17 R G ; xvi. 9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WII; viii. 17, [21 L txt. T Tr WH].- oipd, -at, fj, a tail: Rev. ix. 10, 19 ; xii. 4. (From Hom. down ; Sept. several times for 3Jt.) * ovpdvios, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term. [W. § 11, 1 ; B. 25 (23)], {ovpavos), heavenly, i. e. a. dwelling in heaven : 6 TraTrjp 6 oip., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32 ; .xv. 13; besides LT Tr WII in v. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9; (rrparia ovp. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WH mrg. oipa- voCi). b. coming from heaven : on-raaia ovp. Acts xxvi. 19. (Horn, in Cer. 55; Pind., Tragg., Arstph., al.) • oipa.v66(v, (ovpavos), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17; xxvi. 13. (Horn., lies., Orph., 4 Mace. iv. 10.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.* ovpavis, -ov, 6, [fr. a root meaning ' to cover,' ' encom- pass ' ; cf. Vanicek p. 895 ; Curtius § 509], heaven ; and, in imitation of the Hebr. U'r^U (i. e. prop, the heights above, the upper regions), ovpavoi, -uiv, oi, the heavens [W. §27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (115)), i. e. 1. the vaulted expanse of the sky with all the things visible in it ; a. gener. ally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 12 ; 6 ovp. K. i) yr), [Jteaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the name of the universe. Gen. i. 1 ; xiv. 19 ; Tob. vii. 17 (18) ; 1 Mace. ii. 37, etc.) : Mt. v. 18 ; xi. 25 ; xxiv. 35 ; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. X. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33 ; Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24 ; Rev. x. 6 ; .\iv. 7 ; xx. 11. The ancients conceived of the expanded sky as an arch or vault the outmost edge of which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D. s. V. Firmament, cf. Heaven] ; hence such expressions as arr aKpcuv ovpavav €(i)s uKpaiv avrtav, Mt. xxiv. 31 ; an uKpov yrjt € cf. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.)]) {m' [here L T Tr WH vTTu TOV ovp.] ovpavov €15 Trjv VTT ovpavov, out of the one part under the heaven unto the other part under heaven i. e. from one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24 ; as by this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven stands as the extreme measure of altitude ; hence, koI^- Xao-^ai Sxpi Tou ovpavov. Rev. xviii. 5 [L T Tr WH] (on which see KoX\da>) : vslrad^vai tios tov ovpavov, metaph. of a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and prosperity, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. .\. 15, (kKios ovpavoviKfi, Hom. II. 8, 192 ; Od. 19, 108 ; n-pos ovpavov ^i^d^fiv Tiva, Soph. O. C. 382 (3S1) ; exx. of similar expressions fr. other writ, are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 62) ; koivoX ovpavot (km yij Koivfi) .better heavens which willtake the place of the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1 ; oi vvv ovpavoi, the heavens which now are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; also o TrpwTor ovpavos, Rev. xxi. 1, cf. Heb. xii. 26. But the heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2 ; Is. xl. 22), and to an unrolled scroll : hence, iXiatretv [TTr mrg. aXXdo-o-cd»] Toiis ovp. i>s nepi^oXaiov, Heb. i. 1 2 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci. (cii.) 2G cod. Alex.) ; koX 6 ovp. dTTej^apiiTdrj mr ^i/SXiok (Kia-a-opfvov [or tiXio-tr.], Rev. vi. 14. b. the a erial heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced: o olp. TTvppaCei, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. AVII reject the pass.] ; ovpavo'i 465 ov? v, ib. 3 [see last ref .] ; {jctov eSaxe, Jas. v. 18; add Lk. ix. 54 ; xvii. 29 ; Acts ix. 3 ; xxii. 6 ; Rev. xiii. 13 ; xvi. 21 ; XX. 9 ; (Tijiielov tK or dno tov oip., Mt. xvi. 1 ; ilk. ■viii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 16 ; xxi. 11 ; ripara iv to oip. Acts ii. 1 9 ; kKcUiv tov ovpavav, to keep the rain in the sky, hin- der it from falling on the earth, Lk. iv. 25 ; Rev. xi. 6, {avvexeiv toi' oup. for D'OU/H 1V>'> Deut. xi. 1 7 ; 2 Chr. vi. 2C ; vii. 13 ; aiii\eiv tov oip. Sir. xlviii. 3) ; a'l vetpeXai TOV oip., Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64 ; Jlk. xiv. 62 ; to npocra)- irov Toi oip., ilt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.] ; Lk. xii. 56 ; to ircretva r. oip. (gen. of place), that fly in the air (Gen. i. 26; Ps. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7), Mt. vi. 26 ; viii. 20; xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 32 ; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 58; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12. These heavens are opened by being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth — now the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16 ; Mk. i. 10 ; Lk. iii. 21 sq. ; Jn. i. 32; now angels, Jn. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap- pear to human sight some of the things within the higli- -est heaven. Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16 ; through the aerial heavens sound voices, wliich are uttered in the heavenly abode : Mt. iii. 1 7 ; jMk. i. 1 1 ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. xii. 2S ; 2 Pet. i. 18. c. the sidereal or starry heai-ens: Ta aarpa tov oip. Heb. xi. 12 (Deut. i. 10; x. 22 ; Eur. Plioen. 1) ; oJ aarTepes t. oip., Mk. xiii. 25 ; Rev. vi. 13 ; xii. 4, (Is. xiii. 10 ; xiv. 13) ; al Svvdfiets tSiv oip. the heavenly forces (hosts), i. e. the stars [al. take hvv. in this phrase in a general sense (see bvvapis, I.) of the powers which uphold and regulate the heavens] : Mt. xxiv. 29 ; Lk. xxi. 26 ; al iv toIs oip. ilk. xiii. 25, (Hebr. X3i" n'Oi^n, Deut. xvii. 3 ; Jer. xxxiU. 22; Zeph. i. 5) ; so ^ ■vTpana tov oipavov, Acts vii. 42. 2. the region above the sidereal heavens, the seat of an order of things eternal and consummately perfect, where God dwells and the other heavenly heings : this heaven Paul, in 2 Co. xii. 2, seems to designate by the name of 6 Tplrot oip., but certainly not the third of the seven distinct heavens described by the author of the Test. xii. Patr., Levi § 3, and by the Rabbins [(cf. Wetstein ad loc. ; Hahn, Theol. d. X. T. i. 247 sq.; Drummond, Jewish Messiah, ch. xv.)] ; cf. De Wette ad loc. Several distinct heavens are spoken of also in Eph. iv. 10 {{mipdvuy irdvrmv tui' ovp) ; cf. Heb. vii. 26, if it be not preferable here to understand the nu- merous regions or parts of the one and the same heaven where God dwells as referred to. The highest heaven is the dwelling-place of God : Mt. v. 34 ; xxiii. 22 ; Acts vii. 49 ; Rev. iv. 1 sqq., (Ps. x. (xi.) 4 ; c.xiii. 24 (cxv. 16 rsq.)); hence Beos tov oip.. Rev. xi. 13; xvi. 11, (Gen. xxiv. 3) ; 6 cV (toIs) oip., Mt. v. 16, 45 ; vi. 1, 9; vii. 21 ; X.33; xii. 50 ; xvi. 17; xviii. 1 [here L WH mrg. eV t<» ■oipava in br.], 14, 19 ; ilk. xi. 25 sq., etc. From this heaven the irvevfjia ay. is sent down, 1 Pet. i. 1 2 and the pass, already cited [cf. 1 b. sub fin.] ; and Christ is said to have come, Jn. iii. 13, 31 ; vi. 38, 4l sq. ; 1 Co. xv. 47 ; it is the abode of the angels, Mt. xxiv. 36 ; xxii. 30 ; xviii. 10; xxviii. 2; Mk. xii. 25; xiii. 32; Lk. ii. 15; xxii. 43 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.] ; Gal. i. 8 ; 1 Co. viii. 5 ; Eph. iii. 15 ; Heb. xii. 22 ; Rev. x. 1 ; xii. 7; xviii. 1 ; .\ix. 14, 30 (Gen. xxi. 1 7 ; xxii. 1 1) ; to f v toi? ovpavols Koi to. irti t^s yrjs, the things and beings in the heavens (i. e. angels) and on the earth, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 16, 20; yivfrai to 6e\rjpa tov 6cov iv ovpava, i. e. by the inhabitants of heaven, Mt. vi. 10; ^apa eoroi iv Ta ovp., God and the angels will rejoice, Lk. xv. 7. this heaven is the abode . to which Christ ascended after his resurrection, ilk. xvi. 19; Lk. xxiv. 51 [T cm. WH reject the cl.] ; Acts i. lOsq. ; ii. 34 ; iii. 21 ; Ro. x. 6 ; [Eph. i. 20 Lchm. txt.] ; 1 Pet. iii. 22 ; Heb. i. 4 (iv ivZ/i/Xoif) ; viii. 1 ; ix. 24 ; Rev. iv. 2, and from which he will hereafter return, 1 Th. i. 10; iv. 16; 2 Th. i. 7; into heaven have already been received the souls (nvfvpaTa) both of the O. T. saints and of departed Christians, Heb. xii. 23 (see d7Toypd(pa>, h. fin.), and heaven is appointed as the future abode of those who, raised from the dead and clothed with supe- rior bodies, shall become partakers of the heavenly kin"- dom, 2 Co. V. 1, and enjoy the reward of proved virtue, ilt. V. 12; Lk. vi. 23 ; hence eternal blessings are called 6r)iTavpbs iv ovpava, ilt. vi. 20 ; Lk. xii. 33, and those on whom God has conferred eternal salvation are said ex^iv Brjaavpov iv ovpava (-voir), Mt. xix. 21 ; ilk. X. 21 : Lk. xviii. 22, cf. Heb. x. 34 [RG] ; or the salvation awaiting thera is said to be laid up for them in heaven. Col. i. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 4 ; or their names are said to have been written in heaven, Lk. x. 20 ; moreover, Christ, appointed by God the leader and lord of the citizens of the divine kingdom, is said to have all power in heaven and on earth, ilt. xxviii. 18 ; finally, the seer of the Apocalypse expects a new Jerusalem to come down out of heaven as the metropohs of the perfectly established ilessianic kingdom, Rev. iii. 12 ; xxi. 2, 10. By meton. 6 ovpavos is put for the inhabitants of heaven : tv^palvov ovpavi. Rev. xviii. 20, cf. xii. 12, (Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 11 ; Is. xliv. 23 ; Job XV. 15) ; in particular for God (Dan. iv. 23, and often by the Rabbins, influenced by an over-scrupulous reverence for the names of God himself ; cf. SchUrer in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol., 1876, p. 178 sq. ; [Keil, as below]): dp-aprdvciv fls tov ovp., Lk. XV. 18, 21 ; ix tov ovp., i. q. by God, Jn. iii. 27 ; e| ovp., of divine authority, ilt. xxi. 25 ; ilk. xi. 30 ; Lk. xx. 4 ; ivavrlov toC oipavov, 1 ilacc. iii. 18 (where the toO 6fov before tov ovp. seems question- able) ; ix tov ovp. Tj ly (or (I Tts fx") ^" ("■■ "^f' "^ Tlev.) [sometimes (esp. in Mk. and Lk.) witli aKniifiv .added ; cf. B. § 140, 3] aKovho), whoever has the facidty of attending and understanding, let him use it, Mt. xi. 1.'); xiii. 9, 43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vii. 16 [T AVH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; Lk. viii. 8 ; xiv. 35 (34) ; Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29 ; iii. 6, 13, 22 ; xiii. 9 ; toij do-i /3a- pe or u. s.) ; 1 Co. vii. 2!)]; xv. 50; yivwa-Kds tovto foil, by oTt, Ro. vi. 6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 20 ; iii. 3 ; \oyl^c(T6ai tovto oti, Ro. ii. 3 ; after ofxoXoyeXv, Acts xxiv. 14 ; after «iScij, 1 Tim. i. 9 ; iv toiIto) oti, 1 -In. iii. 16, 24 ; iv. 9 sq. ; tovto, Iva, Lk. i. 43; tis Toi>ro, iva. Acts ix. 21 ; Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; iv. 6 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; hia TOVTO, Iva, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. 16 ; Philem. 15 ; tovtwv (on this neut. plur. referring to a single object see W. 162 (153) ; [cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41]), ?ra, 3 Jn. 4 ; iv TOVTCO, iav, 1 Jn. ii. 3 ; otov, 1 Jn. v. 2 ; tovto aiiTo, Iva, on this very account, that (see a. above [but oth- ers take it here as ace. of obj. ; see Sleyer ad loc. (for instances of ovto toOto see B. § 127, 12)]), 2 Co. ii. 3; els avTo tovto, Iva, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; offar, Ro. ix. 17. In the same manner toCto is put before an infin. with TO for the sake of emphasis [W. § 23, 5 ; B. § 140, 7, 9, etc.] : 2 Co. ii. 1 ; before a simple infin. 1 Co. vii. 37 [here R G prefix toC to the inf.] ; before an ace. and inf. Eph. iv. 17; before nouns, as toCto evxofiai, ttjv uijmv KaTupTUTiv, 2 Co. xiii. 9, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; v. 4. o. kcu TOVTO. and this, and that too, and indeed, especially : Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. 6, L T Tr WH also in 8 ; Eph. ii. 8 ; Ka\ TavTa, and that too, 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec. ; Heb. xi. 12 ; (so Koi TavTa also in class. Grk. ; cf. Devar. ed. Klot: i. p. 108 ; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 1 76 sq. ; Mattliiae § 4 70, 6). &. TaiiTa, of this sort, suck, spoken contemptuously of men, 1 Co. vi. 11 (cf. Soph. O. R. 1329 ; Thuc. 6, 77; Liv. 30, 30 ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 281 ; [W. 162 (153)]). e. toCito /lev . ■ . tovto Si, partly . . . partly, Heb. x. 33 (for exx. fr. Grk. auth. see \V. 142 (135); Matthiae ii. §288 Anm. 2; [Kiihner § 527 Anm. 2]). f. tout' cotiv, see eliil, II. 3 p. 1 76'". II. Joined to nouns it is used like an adjective ; a. so that the article stands between the demonstrative and the noun, ovtos 6, avTij fj, tovto to, [cf. W. § 23 fin. ; B. § 127, 29] : Mt. xii. 32 ; xvi. 18 ; xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; xx. 12 ; xxvi. 29 ; Mk. Lx. 29 ; Lk. vii. 44 ; x. 3« ; xiv. 30; xv. 24; Jn. iv. 15; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr br. the cl.] ; viii. 20 ; x. 6 ; xi. 47 ; xii. 5 ; Acts i. 1 1 ; Ro. xi. 24 ; 1 Tim. i. 18 ; Heb. vii. 1 ; viii. 10 ; [1 Jn. iv. 21] ; Rev. xix. 9 ; xx. 14 ; xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6, etc. ; tovto Tonaihlov, such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48 ; cf. Bome- mann ad loc. [who takes toCto thus as representing the class, ' this and the like ; ' but cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. b. so that the noun stands between the arti- cle and the demonstrative [cf. W. 548 (510)] ; as, oi \ldoi OVTOI, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9 ; iv. 3 ; add, :\It. v. 19 ; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. tovVows], 26, 28 ; ix. 26 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. avTijs] ; x. 23, etc. ; Mk. xii. 16 ; xiii. 30; Lk.xi. 31 ; xxiii. 47; Jn. iv. 13, 21; vii. 49; xi. 9; xviii. 29 ; Acts vi. 13 ; xix. 26 ; Ro. .xv. 28 ; 1 Co. i. 20 ; ii. 6 ; xi. 26 ; 2 Co. iv. 1, 7 ; viii. 6 ; .xi. 10 ; xii. 13 ; Eph. iii. 8 ; V. 32 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Rev. ii. 24, and very often — (which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other [see W. u. s.]) ; it is added to a noun which has another adjective, fj XOP"- V "tcoxv avTt], Lk. xxi. 3 ; navTa to. prj/iaTa Tavra, Lk. ii. 19, 51 [(T WH Lmrg. om. Ltxt. Tr mrg. br. TaijTa) ; otto ttjs yeveas Trjs (TKoXias tovttjs, Acts ii. 40]. c. Passages in which the re;uling varies between ovror 6 and 6 . . . ovto? : viz. oOtos 6, ^Ik. xiv. 30 L txt. T Tr WH ; Jn. iv. 20 R L mrg. ; Ja. vi. «ORG; Jn. vii. 36 R G ; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg. ; Jn. x.xi. 23 L T Tr AVH. 6 ... ovtos, ilk. xiv. 30 R G L mrg. ; Jn. iv. 20 G L txt. T Tr WH ; Jn. vi. 60 L T Tr WH ; Jn. vii. 36 L T Tr WH ; Jn. ix. 24 G T Tr txt. ; Jn. xxi. 23 R G ; etc. d. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical specifications [W. § 37, 5 N. 1] : rpiTov tovto, this third time, 2 Co. xiii. 1 ; tovto TpiTov, .Jn. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi. 15; devTf pov tovto, Gen. xxvii. 36; tovto SeKarov, x^um. xiv. 22 ; TfTopToi' tovto, Hdt. 5, 76). [The passages which follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are (with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the predicative use of ovtos ; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B. § 127, 31 ; Rost § 98, 3 A. c. a. sq.] : tovto naXiv SevTtpov OTj/ieioi' inoirjirev, Jn. iv. 54 ; TpiTTji' Tavrrjv fjpfpav ayeh OVTO) 468 this is the third day that Israel is passing [but sec aya, 3], Lk. xxiv. 21 («fl/iai TpiaKO(rrf)v ravrqv rifiipav, this is now tlic thirtieth clay that I lie (uiiburicd), Lcian. dial, mort. 13, 3) ; ou /irra ttuWus Tairas 'jiiepas (see /leTa, II. 2 b. [W. 101 (152) ; B. § 127, 4]), Acts i. .5; ovtos pr)v cKTOt ia-Tiv aviii, this is the sixth iiiontli with her etc. Lie. i. 3G ; avTT) aTToypatprj TrpaxTrj eytUfTo, Lk. ii. 2 L (T) Tr AVII ; TauTTjv (TTolr^afV ''PX'!" ''''^" (rfp-eioiv, s . . . ovTuis, Lk. xi. 30 ; xvii. 26 ; Jn. iii. 14 ; xii. 50 ; xiv. 31 ; .xv. 4 ; 2 Co. i. 5 ; x. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; Heb. V. 3 ; ovTo>5 ■ ■ . Ka6a>s, Lk. xxiv. 24 ; Ro. xi. 26 ; Phil. iii. 17; (OS . . . ovTWi, Acts viii. 32; xxiii. 11 ; Ro. v. 15, 18; 1 Co. vii. I 7 ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; v. 2 ; ovtu>s . . . i)s, Mk. iv. 26 ; Jn. vii. 40 [L WII om. Tr br. the cl.] ; 1 Co. iii. 15 ; iv. 1 ; ix. 26 ; Eph. v. 28 ; Jas. ii. 12 ; ovTcas ois . . . /117 i)S, 2 Co. ix. 5 [G L T Tr WII] ; acnrep . . . ovrtos, Mt. xii. 40 ; xiii. 40 ; xxiv. 27, 37, 39 ; Lk. xvii. 24 ; Jn. v. 21,26; Ro. V. 12, 19,21; vi. 4; xi. 31 ; 1 Co. xi. 12; xv. 22 ; xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 7 R G ; Gal. iv. 29 ; Eph. v. 24 R G; after kqB' ocrov, Ileb. i.x. 27 sq. ; ovras . ■ . ov Tpunov, Acts i. 1 1 ; x.xvii. 25 ; 01» Tponov . . . ovtws, 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Is. Iii. 14) ; Kara rrjv 686v rjv X^yovaiv alpeaiv ovrto ktX. after the Way (i. e. as it requires [cf. 68iir, 2 a. fin.]) so etc. Acts xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foil, special uses deserve notice : a. (e^") «s [better o] fiev ovras 09 [better 0] 8e OVTCOS, one after this manner, another after that, i. e. different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (Trore fiiv ovTuis Kai 7T0T€ oijTtos (^dycTai Tj p.dx^iipa, 2 S. xi. 25). b. OVTWS, in the manner known to all, i. e. ace. to the context, so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 3. c. in that state in which one finds one's self, such as one is, [cf. W. 465 (434)] : ri p( (noir](Tas ovTcor, Ro. i.x. 20 ; ovtios flvm, jxiveiv, of those wlio remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40 ; 6 vikwv ovtws rrtpi/SaXfiTai viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor [al. in the manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii. 5 L T Tr WH. d. • thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [cf. Eng. off-hand, vnthout ceremony, and the colloquial right, just^ : Jn. iv. 6 ; cf. Passow s. v. 4 ; [L. and S. s. v. IV. ; see 1 above ; add Jn. .xiii. 25 T WII Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes ad loc.)] e. in questions (Lat. sicine ?) [Eng. ex- clamatory so then, whal'\ : ]\Ik. vii. 18 (Germ, sonach) [al. take oiItws here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi. 40, however, many give it the sense spoken of ; cf. too 1 Co. vi. 5] ; OVTCOS dnoKplvT] ; i. e. so impudently, Jn. xviii. 22 ; with an adjective, so (very), Gal. iii. 3. [But these ovx 469 6(f)dd\fjioSov'\eia exx., although classed together by Fritzsclic also (Com. on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination. The passage from Gal., for instance, does not seem to differ essentially from examples under 3 above.] f. In class. Grk. oCras often, after a conditional, concessive, or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow s. V. 1 h. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]). 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev. xi. 5 have been referred to this head ; B. 357 (307) ; [cf. W. § 60, 5 (esp. a.)]. But questionably ; for in the first passage ourms may also be taken as equiv. to under these circumstances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better cf. W. u. s.] ; in the second passage ouruj denotes in the manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their mouth. oix> see oi. oixt, i. q. ov, not, but stronger [cf. uvvi ad init.] ; a. in simple negative sentences, by no means, not at all, [A. V. nol^ : Jn. xiii. 10 sq. ; xiv. 22 ; 1 Co. v. 2 ; vi. 1 ; foil, by aXXd, 1 Co. X. 29 ; 2 Co. x. 13 (L T Tr WH oi/c) ; in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not so], Lk. i. 60 ; xii. 51 ; xiii. 3, 5 ; xvi. 30 ; Ro. iii. 27. b. in a question, Lat. nonne ? (asking what no one denies to be true) : Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 29 ; xiii. 27; .x.x. 13; Lk. vi. 39; xvii. 1 7 [L Tr WH oixl \ x.xiv. 26 ; Jn. xi. 9 ; Acts ii. 7 TrWHtxt.; Ro. ii. 26 (LTTrWH ovx); 1 Co. i. 20; Heb. i. 14, etc.; (Sept. for 5£t\ii|ia, -Tor, TO, (6(j}(iKa>), thai which is owed; a. prop, that which is justly or legally due, a debt; so for nXU/:?, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10) ; a(})uvat, 1 Mace. xv. 8 ; airo- Tii/etv, Plat. Icgg. 4 p. 717 b.; dnoSiSovat, Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p. 1165% 3]. Kara u([\r]iia, as of debt, Ro. iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 3in or N3in (which denotes both debt and sin), meta])h. offence, sin, (see 6rf}€i}i€Trjs, b.) ; hence, d<^Uvai nvi ra d^etX. avTov, to remit the penalty of one's sins, to forgive them, (Chald. I'Din p3ty), Mt. vi. 12. [Cf. W. 30, 32, 33.] * dcCA(i>; impf. tiic^eiXov; pres. pass. ptcp. d<^«Xd/uf i/os ; fr. Hom. down ; to owe ; a. prop, to owe money, be in debt for : rivl rt, Mt. xviii. 28 ; Lk. xvi. 5 ; without a dat., Mt. xviii. 28 ; Lk. vii. 41 ; xvi. 7 ; Philem. 18 ; to d^eiXd/ievoi', that which is due, the debt, Mt. xviii. 30 ; avTw (which L Tr WH om.), that due to him, ib. 34. b. metaph. : ri, pass, nji/ fvvoiav 6ei\ofiivr]v, the good-will due [A. (not R.) V. due benevolence], 1 Co. vii. 3 Rec. ; jjLTj&fvi firjSev 6(peiXeTe (here d^fiXeTe, on account of what precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest sense, both literal and tropical), ci /ii] to dXXijXous aya- ■nav, owe no one anything except to love one another, be- cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love can never be paid, Ro. xiii. 8. absol. to be a debtor, be bound : Mt. xxiii. 16,18; foil, by an inf. to be under obli- gation, bound by duty or necessity, to do something; it be- hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or by the nature of the matter under consideration [ace. to Westcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli- gation in its special and personal aspects] : Lk. xvii. 10 Jn. xiii. 14 ; xix. 7 (d(/>eiXet dmodavelv, he ought to die) Acts xvii. 29 ; Ro. XV. 1, 27 ; 1 Co. V. 10 ; [vii. 36 (A. V. need so requireth)] ; ix. 10 ; xi. 7, 10 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; Eph, V. 28; 2 Th. i. 3; ii. 13; Heb. ii. 17; v. 3, 12; 1 Jn. u. 6 ; iii. 16 ; iv. 11 ; 3 Jn. 8; mi^fiXoi' (rvvia-Taadat, I ought to have been commended, i. c. I can demand commenda- tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. c. after the Chaldee (see otpetKi- Tijs, b., 6(l>(l\T]fia, b.), d0eiXca Tivi, to have wronged one and not yet made amends to him [A. V. indebted], Lk. xi. 4. [CoMP. : npo(T-o(f>ei\eXov (for w ; in earlier Grk. with an inf., as w(j>e\ov 6aveiv, I ought to have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. icould that I were dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter- jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes that a thing had happened which has not happened, or that a thing be done which probably will not be done [cf. W. 301 sq. (283) ; B. § 150, 5] : with an optative pres. Rev. iii. 15 Rec; with an indicative impf., Rev. ibid. G L T Tr WH ; 2 Co. -xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15 ; Ignat. ad Smyrn. c. 12); with an indie, aorlst, 1 Co. iv. 8 (Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 5 ; ocfifXau dirfdavofiev, Ex. xvi. 3 ; Num. xiv. 2 ; xx. 3) ; with the future. Gal. v. 12 (Lcian. soloec. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 003"; [L. and S. s. V. d^ei'Xo), IL 3].* oeXos, -CDS, TO, (dt^eXXo) to increase), advantage, prof t: 1 Co. XV. 32; Jas. ii. 14, 16. (From Hom. down; Sept. Job XV. 3.) * d<)>6a\)i.a-SovXECa [T WH -Xt'a ; see I, t], -as, f), (6(f>da\- fi6dov)ios, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i. p. 299"; and this fr. d^^aX/idr and SoCXoj), [A. V. eye- service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master's eye (firj kqt* o(l)da\fio8.. TovTi(m fiq ^jluvov irapovroju rStv dfanoraiv Kal opoiin-oiv. dXXa Kai diroirro}!/, Theophyl. on Eph. vi. 6 ; " for the master's eye usually stimulates to greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren- ders sluggish." H. Stephanus) : Eph. vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22. Not found elsewhere ; [cf. W. 100 (94)].* 60a\fjL6<; 470 0)(\o^ o4>6aX|i6s, -ov, 6, [fr. r. on to see ; allied to nyffts, oi/^o- fiat, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for ry, [fr. Horn, down], the eye : Mt. v. 38 ; vi. 22 ; Mk. ix. 47 ; Lk. xi. 34 ; Jn. ix. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 16 ; Rev. vii. 1 7 ; xxi. 4, and often ; ptjrij oda\iioii, 1 Co. XV. 52 ; oi 6ddkfioi /jlov flSov (see the remark in y\S>tT; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27 ; 6pav toIs ocjyd. (see 6pdo>, I), 1 Jn. i. 1 ; T) firiOvfila tCiv 6(j>6. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. IC. Since the eye is the index of the mind, the foil, phrases have arisen : 6(j)d. o-ou novrjpos i(mv, i. e. thou art envious, Mt. XX. 15; 6cj)d. jTovrjpot, envy, Mk. vii. 22 (^yy y-\j an envious man, Prov. xxiii. G ; xxviii. 22 ; cf. Sir. xxxiv. 1 3 ; =]'nX3 ^yy n;'";, thine eye is evil toward thy brother, i. e. thou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut. .\v. 9; d(f>6. novripbs da\ij.6s, is used of a w i 11 i n g mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 10, 12) ; on the other hand, ofjidaXiios irovripas in Mt. vi. 23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye, a had finger [see irovripos, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. icpo- Tfii/ Tovs 6(f>6. Tov 111) ktK. [A. V. to hoUl the eyes i. e.] to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. IG; vTToKapjiavai Tiva cmo Tuiv o(j)d. twos, by receiving one to withdraw him from another's sight [A. V. received him out of (heir siijhl'\, Acts i. 9. Metaph. of the eyes of the mind, the faculty of knowing : cKpv^rj ottA tS>v o6. o-ou, hid from thine eyes, i.e. concealed from thee [cf. B. 320 (274)], Lk. xix. 42 ; SiSovai Tift 66aXpovs toO pr; ^Xineiv, to cause one to be .«low to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [cf. B. 267 (230)]; rvcjiXoiiii roiis o(}>6. Tii/qs, Jn. .xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 1 1 ; (TKOTi^ovTai ot o(\>d. Ro. xi. 1() ; irf^wTicrpfvoi o6dKp6i\ ; fr. Horn. E. 12, 208 down ; Sept. mostly for E'nj ; a snake, serpent : Mt. vii. 10; Mk. -xvi. 18; Lk. x. 19-'xi. 11 ; Jn. iii. 14; 1 Co. X. 9 ; Rev. i.x. 19 ; with the ancients the serpent was an emblem of cunning .and wisdom, 2 Co. xi. 3,cf. Oen. iii. 1 ; hence, K: Rev. xii. 9, 14 sq. ; xx. 2 ; see [Grimm on Sap. u. s. ; Fr. Leuonnanl, Beginnings of History etc. ch. ii. p. 109 sq., and] SpdKav.' o^pis, -ios, 1], 1. the eyebrow, so fr. Horn. down. 2. any prominence or projection ; as [Eog. the brow] of a moimtain (so the Lat. siipercilium, Verg. georg. 1, 108; Ilirt. Ijell. afr. .58 ; Liv. 27, 18; 34,29): Lk. iv. 29 (llom. II. 20. 151 ; often in Polyb., Plut., al.).* [dx«To's, -oO, 6, 1. a tcater-jiipe, duct. 2. the intestinal canal: Jlk. vii. 19 WH (rejected) mrg. (al. d^fSpcil').'] ox^cu, -w : pres. pass. ptcp. 6)(Koiptvoi ; (o;(Xot) ; prop. to excite a mob against one; [in Uom. (II. 21, 2G1) to dis- lurb,roll away"] ; univ. to trouble, molest, (jivd, Ildt. 5, 41 ; Aeschyl., al.) ; absol. to be in confusion, in an uproar, (3 Mace. V. 41) ; pass, to be vexed, molested, troubled : by demons, Lk. vi. 18 R G L (where T Tr AVH e'raxX., — the like variation of text in Ildian. G, 3, 4) ; Acts v. 16 ; Tob. vi. 8 (7); Acta Thomae § 12. [Comp. : tv, nap- fv-oxKitt).~\ * dxXo-irot€* tiia-K. kt\.), Mt. xxviii. 1 cf. Mk. xvi. 1 (iijfi toiv ^aaiXcas xf""'^"' long after the times of the king, Plut. Xum. 1 ; 6\j/( fiva-TTjpluov, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 4, 18) ; [but an examination of the instances just cited (and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren- dering afer (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape, Schenkl, and other lexicographers) ; d'^e foil, by a "en. seems always to be partitive.denoting late in the peri- od specified by the gen. (and consequently stiU belong- ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kuhner §414, 5 c. /3. Hence in JMt. 1. c. 'late on the sabbath']. Keim iii. p. 552 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vespere sabbati, on the evening of the sabbatli], but without suc- cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. iiber Matth. ad loc.)] * o\|/i(ios, -Of , (oi/'f), late, latter, (Hom. II. 2, 325 ; d\/^«/itp,os [cf. B. D. s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but L T Tr WII om. v(t6v, cod. Sin. and a few other authori- ties substitute Kapnov^ ; Sept. for lyypho, Deut. xi. 14 ; Jer. v. 24 ; Hos. vi. 3 ; Joel ii. 23 ; Zech. x. 1.* o/u fVXdyw, of the attempt to elicit from one some remark wliich can be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15. ([roif Xoyotr, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet. ; of. also Deut. Yii. 25 ; xii. 30 in the same] ; 1 S. xxviii. 9.) • ira-yts, -ISos, ^, (fr. Trijyia/^i to make fast, 2 aor. tirayov ; prop, that which holds fast [cf. Anth. Pal. C, 5]), Sept. for ns, T\'a-\^ "lyplO, etc. ; a snare, trap, noose ; a. prop, of snares in which birds are entangled and caught, Prov. vi. 5 ; vii. 23 ; Ps. xe. (xci.) 3 ; cxxiii. (cxxiv.) 7; n-oyiSof 'nrrdvai, Arstph. av. 527; lience ur irayis, as a snare, i. e. unexpectedly, suddenli/, because birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b. trop. a snare, i. e. whatever brinr/s peril, loss, destruction : of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr. Ps. Lxviii. (Ixix.) 23 ; of the allurements and seductions of sin, (fijTiTTTftv (If ■neipaajibv k. nayida, 1 Tim. vi. 9 {ifinl- nrei els TrayiSa a/iapToKos, Prov. .xii. 1 3, cf. xxix. 6 ; joined with a-Kai/SaXov. Sap. xiv. 11); tov Sia^6\ov, the allure- ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim. ii. 26 ; 1 Tim. iii. 7. (In Grk. writ, also of the snares of love.) * ira&i]|ia, -rot, to, (fr. jiaduv, nd*, nais toD 5foC is used of a devout worshipper of God, one who fulfils God's will, (Ps. Ixviii. (l.\Lx.) 18 ; cxii. (cxiii.) 1 ; Sap. ii. 13, etc.) ; thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xii. 8 ; xlii. 19 ; xliv. 1 sq. 21, etc.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 1 ; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [Aid., Compl.], etc.) ; likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God employs in executing his purposes ; thus in the X. T. ./esus the Messiah : Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1) ; .\cts iii. 13, 26 ; iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6, 1 and Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2] ; in the O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7 sq. ; irai_v Ammouiu.s (s. v. 7€pi«>') :is doliiiing thu.s : traiSiov, t1) Tp«p6)ifvov inrb tiBtj- you* TraiBdptov Sc, t6 ^5t) TrepiiraTyOi/ Ka\ T^y Af|€ws dyre- XcJM"''»'' ToiSfffKOS S", '^7Ku)(\(aii'fioe7;/iaTa!>'8t/TO;ue>'o!ieVoi. I'liil" ( itc muiid. opif. §36) quotes the phy.siciaii IlippucTates as I'liUuws: ii/ i.vdpairov rjyiaft iirri dcnv apm k.t.A. • iraiSiov tifv iariv Sxpis «iTTa ^Tuv, uSdyToif fK$o\ns • Tra7s St &XP' yovn^ enrfiva-eus, eis TO Sis «TTTO- lifipoLKioi' St &xpi fo/tlov Xaxvdatu^, (S Ta rpU iirrd. etc. Aceordiiifr to Sclimiilt, iratSlov denotes exdusive- Iv a little child ; iraiSapioi/ a cldld up to it.s tirst sdiool years ; irais a child of auy at;e : (ttoiSiVkos and) TroiSiff/c?), in which reference to descent ipiitc disa|>]}ears, cover the years of late childhood and early youth. But usa;ie is untrammelled : from a child is expressed either liy 4k ttoiSos ( most frequently), or €K TTOiSiOu, or «V {awh} traiSapiov. irais and TeVi/ov denote a child alike as resjiects descent and a^'C, reference to tlie latter being more prominent in the former word, to descent in Tficvov ; hut the period jrais covers is not sliarply defined ; and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See Schmidt ch. 69; Hiihnu in Lntliardt's Zeitschrift u. s. w. for 188l>, p. 57sqq.] T-otu : 1 aor. tnaKra ; from Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; ^Sept. mostly for T\2T) ; lo strike, smile : with the fists, jNlt. xxvi. 68 [cf. jjamCo), 2] ; Lk. xxii. 64 ; with a sword, ]VIk. xiv. 47 : Jn. xviii. 10; to sting (to strike or wound with a stint;). Rev. ix. 5." noKaTiavV), -^f, }), Parntiana (Phrygia). In the fourth century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia Salutaris and Phrygia Paeatiana [later, Capatiana] ; Lao- ') : olvos TToKaws (opp. to vt'or), Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.] (Hom. Od. 2, .340; Sir. ix. 10); StadfiKr). 2 Co. iii. 14; (VToXrj (opp. to Katvr)), given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7 ; (vfij] {opp. to «OK vp.), 1 Co. V. 7 Sep ; nent. plur. iraXaid (opp. to Kama), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to such articles of food as are fit for use only after having been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc., as referred to ; cf. 6r)(Tavp6i, 1 c] ; dropping the fig., old and new cominanilments; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23 ; Heb. v. 12 sqq.); 6 TraXoiuc rnxiav livdpanos (opp. to 6 ce'os), our old man, i. e. we, as we were before our mode of thought, feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22 ; [Col. iii. 9]. 2. no longer new, wont hi/ use, the, worse for wear, old, (for nSa, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq.) :\ i/iuTtov, aa-Kos, Mt. ix. IG sq. ; Mk. ii. 21 sq. ; Lk. v. 39 s

, -co : pf. rr(7ra\aiaKa ; Pass., pres. ptcp. jraXac- ovfievos ; fut. 7rd\ai(i}dT)t70fiaL ; (naXaios) ', a. to make ancient or old, Sept. for nb3; pass, to hccome old, to be worn out, Sei)t. for nS3, pr\j,^ : of things worn out by time and use, as ^aXdvriov, Lk. xii. 33 ; IfiaTiov, Heb. i. 1 1 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. x.xix. 5 ; Josh. ix. 19 (13) ; Neh. ix. 21 ; Is. 1. 9 ; Ii. 6 ; Sir. xiv. 17). pass, to itaXaiovfit- vov, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp. p. 208 b. ; Tim. p. 59 c). b. to declare a thing to be old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see ■yi;- puaKo, fin.].* iroXi], -ijj, ^, (fr. TrdXXw to vibrate, sh.ake), fr. Hom. down, wrestling (a contest between two in wliich each endeavors to throw the other, and which is decided when the victor is able dXi^eiv Ka\ Karex^iv his prostrate antag- onist, i. e. hold him down with his hand upon his neck ; cf. Plat. legg. 7 p. 796 ; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361', 24 ; Heliod. acthiop. 10, 31 ; [cf. Krause, Gymn. u. Agon, d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq. ; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq.; Diet, of Antiq. s. v. lucta]) ; the term is transferred to the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil : Eph. vi. 12.* iraXi-y-ycvccrla (T AVH TrdKivytv. [cf. Tdf. Prolog, p. 77 bot.]), -as, fj, {ttoXu/ and yiveais), prop, new birth, repro- duction, renewal, re-creation, (see Halm on Cic. pro Sest. § 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio ; hence, moral renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con- secralcil to God, a radical change of mind for the better, (effected in baptism [cf. rcff. s. v. /3d7rTio-;ia, 3]): Tit. iii. 5 [cf. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see p. 1 72 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. §§ 84, 108; cf. Suicer, Thes. s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word denotes the restoration of a thing to its pristine state, its renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after death, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 41 ; de cherub. § 32 ; [de poster. Cain. § 36] ; Long. past. 3, 4 (2) (woXiyy. cV 6ava- Tov) ; Lcian. encom.muscae 7; Schol. ad Soph. Klec. C2 (Uvdayopas Trept na'Ktyyeveaias €TepaT€v€ro) ; Pint. rnor. ]). 998 c. [i. e. de esu earn. ii. 4, 4] (ort xpCivrai koivois al y^/vx"' (Twfiaaiv iv rms iraKiyyevealats [cf. ibid. i. 7, 5 ; also de Is. et Osir. 72 ; de Ei ap. Delph. 9 ; etc.]) ; the renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de vita Moys. ii. § 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4 ; the renewal of the world to take place after its destruction by fire, as the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt, mundi §§ 3, 14, 17]; de mund. §1-5; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Ciataker ad loc.) ; Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 138] ; that signal and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth) ■TTaXlV 476 for the better, that restoration of the primal and perfect condition of things which existed before the fall of our first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi- tive Christians expected in connection with the visible return of Jesus from heaven : Mt. xix. 28 (where the Syriac correctly j'^^r^ (Vl\S^, in the new age or world) ; ef. Bertholdl, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 sq. ; Gfrorer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p. 272 sqq. ; \_Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. §29,9; Weber, Altsynagog. Paliist. Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero's restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile, Cic. ad Att. 6, 6 ; of the restoration of the Jewish nation after the exile, waX. n-aT-piSor, Joseph, antt. 1 1, 3, 9 ; of the recover)' of knowledge by recollection, TTaKiyy. rrjs yva- a-eas eoTiV fj avafivrfdii, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in the Journal des Savans for 1834, p. 488.) [Cf. Trench § xviii. ; Cremer 3te Aull. s. v.] * irdXiv, adv., fr. Hom. down ; 1. anew, again, [but the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among oth- ers) Ellendl, Lex. Soph. s. v. ii. p. 485] ; a. joined to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition of the action : Mt. iv. 8 ; xx. 5 ; xxi. 36 ; xxii. 1, 4 ; BIk. ii. 13; iii. 20; Lk.xxiii. 20; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; viii. 2, 8, 12, 21 ; ix. 15, 1 7 ; X. 19 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; xxvii. 28 ; Ro. xi. 23 ; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; 2 Co. xi. 16 ; Gal. i. 9 ; u. 18 ; iv. 19 ; 2 Pet. ii. 20 ; Phil. ii. 28 ; iv. 4 ; Heb. i. 6 (where noKiv is tacitly opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus' former life on earth) ; Heb. V. 1 2 ; vi. 1 , 6 ; Jas. v. 1 8 ; Rev. x. 8, 1 1 ; TrdXtv nixpov sc. earrat, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19 ; els to naKiv, again (cf. Germ. zum wiederholten Stale; [see els, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning, where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with ayiofiev, Jn. xi. 7; avaxtopelv, Jn. vi. 15 [where Tdi.ffieCyfi and Grsb. om. jTaKiv~\, (if. ib. 3) ; a-nipx^crdai, Jn. iv. 3 ; -x. 40; XX. 10; cla-epxfeiv, Gal. i. 17; ^ f'fifj napovcrla iroKiv npbs vfias, my presence with you again, i. e. my return to you, Phil. i. 26 [cf. B. § 125, 2] ; also with verbs of tak- ing, Jn. X. 17 sq. ; Acts x. 16 Rec. ; xi. 10. b. with other parts of the sentence : naXtv eli (f>6fiov, Ro. viii. 15 ; jraXiK evXiirr), 2 Co. ii. 1. c. naXtv is explained by the addition of more precise specifications of time [cf. W. 604 (562)] : noKiv ix rplrov, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Trmrg. br. (K Tp.^ ; (K 8(vT(pov, Mt. xxvi. 42 ; Acts x. 15 ; ttoXh/ Seiirepov, Jn. iv. 54 ; xxi. 16 ; rraXiv avasBev, again, aneic, [R. V. back again (yet cf. Mey. ad loc.)]. Gal. iv. 9 (Sap. xix. 6 ; nakiv c| apxrji- Arstph. Plut. 866 ; Plat, Eut. p. 11 b. and 15c.; Isoc. areiop. 6 p. 338 [p. 220 ed. Lange]; cf. W. u. s.). 2. again, i. e. further, moreover, (where the subject remains the same and a repetition of the action or condition is indicated) : Mt. v. 33 (jroAii' rjKovcrarf) ; xiii. 44 (where T Tr WH om. L br. n-dXtv), 45, 47 ; xi.x. 24 ; Lk. xiii. 20 ; Jn. x. 7 [not Tdf.] ; esp. where to O. T. passages already quoted others are added : Mt. iv. 7 ; Jn. .xii. 39 ; xLx. 37 ; Ro. xv. 10-12 ; 1 Co. iii. 20 ; Heb. i. 5 ; ii. 13 ; iv. 5 ; x. 30 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 3 sq. and of ten m Philo ; cf . Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 1 08. 3. in turn, on the other hand : Lk. vi. 43 T WH L br. Tr br. ; 1 Co. xii. 21 ; 2 Co. X. 7 ; iJn. ii. 8, (Sap. xiii. 8 ; xvi. 23 ; 2 Mace. XV. 39; see exx. fr. prof. auth. in Pape s. v. 2 ; Passow s. V. 3 ; [EUendt u. s. (ad init.) ; L. and S. s. v. TIT. ; but many (e. g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Mt. iii. 7) refuse to recognize this sense in the X. T.]). John uses TToKw in his Gospel far more freq. than the other N. T. writ., in his Epp. but once; Luke two or three times; the author of the Rev. twice. iroXivyeveo-Ca, see iraXiyyeveirla. •n-aH-irXTieei (T WH iramX. [cf. WH. App. p. 150]), adv., (fr. the adj. -KapTTXrjdijs, which is fr. ttos and wX^flos), with the ichole multitude, all together, one and all : Lk. xxiii. 18 (Dio Cass. 75, 9, 1). [Cf. W. § 16, 4 B. a.] * ■ird|iiroXxjs, nafiKoWri, jrd/iiroXu, {ttos and ttoXu?), very great : Mk. viii. 1 Kec. [where L T Tr WH miXtv ttoXXoO]. (Arstph., Plat., Plut., [al.].) * na|i(t)uXta, -as, fj, Pamphylia, a province of Asia Minor, bounded on the E. by CiUcia, on the W. by Lycia and Phrygia ilinor, on the N. by Galatia and Cappadocia, and ou the S. by the Mediterranean Sea (there caUed the Sea [or Gulf] of Pamphylia [now of Adalia]) : Acts ii. 10 ; xiii. 13 ; xiv. 24 ; xv. 38; xxvii. 5. \_Conybeare and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii. ; Leivin, St. Paul, index s. v. ; Diet, of Geogr. s. v.] * irav-SoKCov, see navBoxfiov. irav8oK€vs, see rravSoxeis- wav-Soxeiov (-So/tioi/, Tdf. [cf. his note on Lk. x. 34, and Hesych. s. v.]), -ov, to. (fr. iravSoxfisi q. v.), an inn, a public house for the reception of strangers (modern caravansary, khan, manzil) : Lk. x. 34. (Polyb. 2, 15, 5 ; Plut. de sanit. tuenda c. 14 ; Epict. enchirid. c. 11 ; but the Attic form jravSoKciov is used by Arstph. ran. 550; Theophr. char. 11 (20), 2; Plut. Crass. 22; Pa- laeph. fab. 46 ; Ael. v.h. 14, 14 ; Polyaen. 4, 2, 3 ; Epict. diss. 2, 23, 36 sqq.; 4, 5, 15: cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307.)* ■n-av-8ox««s, -«'wf, o, (was and Sexofiai [hence lit. 'one who receives all comers ']), for the earlier and more elegant navSoKeis (so Tdf. ; [cf. W. 25 note]), an inn-keeper, host : Lk. x. 35. (Polyb. 2, 15, 6 ; Plut. de sanit. tuenda iravTiYupis. -fwr, fj. (fr. na? and Syvpis fr. dyflpa), fr. Hdt. and Find, down ; a. a festal gathering of the ichole people to celebrate public games or other solemni- ties, b. univ. a public festal assembly ; so in Heb. xii. 22 (23) where the word is to be connected with ayyiXav [so G L Tr (Tdf.) ; yet see the Comm.]. (Sept. for vn, Ezek. xlvi. 11 ; Hos. ii. 11 (13) ; ix. 5 ; rT>S;?., Am. V. 21.) [Cf. Trench § i.] • iravoiKC [so R G L Tr] and navoiKtl (T [ WH : see WH. App. p. 154 and cf. «, »]), on this difference in writing cf. W. 43 sq. ; B. 73 (64), (nas and oikos: a form rejected bj'the Atticists for Trai'otxi'a, navoiK((Tia, TTavouojcrla, [cf. A\ . •rravoTrKia 476 irapa 26 (25) J Lob. ad Phryn. p. 514 sq.]), with all (liis) hoitse, with (bis) whole family: Acts xvi. 34. (Plat. Erv.x. [). 392 c.; Aeschin. dial. 2, 1; Philo do Joseph. §42; dc vita Moys. i. 2; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 42; 5, 1, 2 ; 3 Jlacc. iii. 27 where Fritzschc -Ki'a.)* TTOvoirXta, -as, f/, (fr. Trdi/oTrXor wholly armed, in full armor; and this fr. nas and onXov),full armor, complele armor, (i. e. a shield, sword, lance, helmet, greaves, and breastplate, [cf. Polyb. G, 23, 2s(ifi.]) : Lk. xi. 22; Bfoi, which God suppHc's [W. 18!) (K8)], Eph. vi. 11, l.S, where the spiritual lielps needed for overcoming the temptations of the devil are so called. (Hdt., Plat., Isocr., Polyb., Joseph., Sci)t. ; trop. of the various appli- ances at God's command for punishing. Sap. v. 18.)* iravovpyCa, -as, t), (navoiipyns. (p v.), crafliness, cunning : Lk. XX. 23 ; 2 Co. iv. 2 ; xi. 3 ; Eph. iv. 14 ; contextually i. q. a specious ov falsi; wisdom, 1 Co. iii. 10. (Aeschyl., Soph., Arstj)h., Xen., Plat., Lcian., Ael., al. ; iraa-a re eni- (TTrjfiri x<^pi^oiiivrj SiKatocrivrjs «ai T^r I'lWrjs operas navovp- yia ov trot^ia (paivfTai, Plat. Menex. ]>. 24 7 a. for DOij; in a good sense, prudence, slcill, in undertaking and carry- ing on affairs, Prov. i. 4 ; viii. 5 ; Sir. xxxi, (xxxiv. 11) 10.)' iravovpYos, -ov, (nas and EPrO i. q- f'pyufo/iat ; on the accent, see KoKoOpyos), Sept. for D^;?; skilful, clever, i. e. 1. in a good sense, _^( to undertake and accom- plish ant/thing, dexterous ; wise, sagacious, skilful, (Aris- tot., Polyb., Plut., al. ; Sept. Prov. xiii. 1 ; x.wiii. 2). But far more freip 2. in a bad sense, crafty, cun- ning, knavish, treacherous, deceitful, (Tragg., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 32 (31) [but here in a good sense] ; xxi. 12, etc.) : 2 Co. xii. IG.* iravrrXtiOet, see TraiiirXrjdfi. iravTaxi) or navraxfj ( I> Tr ; see tiKtj), adv., everywhere : Acts xxi. 28 LTTr WII, for navraxov, — a variation often met with also in the Mss. of prof. auth. [From Hdt. down ; cf. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 64.] * iravTaxoBcv, adv., from all sides, from ecery quarter : Mk. i. 45 Rec. [Hdt., Thuc, Plat.', al.] ' wovTaxofi, adv., everywhere : Mk. i. 28 T WH Tr br. ; xvi. 20 ; Lk. ix. 6 ; Acts -xvii. 30 ; xxi. 28 Rec. ; xxiv. 3 ; xxviii. 22 ; 1 Co. iv. 17. [Soph., Thuc, Plat., al.] * irovreX'fjs, -cf, (nas and reKos), all-complete, perfect, (Aeschyl., Soph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace. vii. 1 6) ; fis TO iravTf\es (prop, unto completeness [W. § .il, I c.]) completely, perfectly, utterly: Lk. xiii. 11 ; Heb. vii. 25, (Philo leg. ad Gaium 21 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 5 ; 3, II, 3 and 12, 1 ; 6, 2, 3; 7, 13, 3; Ael. v. b. 7, 2 ; n. a. 17, 27).* ■irdvTi) (R G L Tr WII Travrr], see reff. s. v. cIktj), (was), adv., fr. Horn, down, everywhere ; wholly, in all respects, in every way : Acts xxiv. 3.* irAvToOev, (ttSs), adv., fr. Hom. down, from all sides, from every quarter : Mk. i. 45 L T WPI Tr [but the last named here naiTi'idev ; cf. Chandler § 842] ; Lk. xix. 43; Jn. xviii. 20 Rec.''"»'^; Heb. ix. 4.* iravTOKpdTup, -opos, 5, (ttos and «paTco)), he who holds sway over all things; the ruler of all; almighty: of God, 2 Co. vi. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 35) ; Rev. i. 8; iv. 8 ; xi. 1 7 ; xv. 3 ; xvi. 7, 14 ; xix. 6, 15 ; xxi. 22. (Sept. for niS2V in the phrase ni!<3i' nin; or niN3V 'riSsf; Je- hovah or God of hosts ; also for 'liV ; Saj). vii. 25 ; Sir. xiii. 17: 1. 14 ; often in Judith and 2 and 3 Mace. ; An- thol. Gr. iv. p. 151 ed. Jacobs; Inscrr. ; eccles. writ. [e. g. Teaching etc. 10, 3 ; cf. Harnack's notes on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. init. and the Symb. Rom. (Patr. a])ost. opj). i. 2 p. i:!4)J.)* irdvTOT«, (TTof), adv., (for which the Atticists tell us that tlic l)etter Grk. writ, used e/tun-Torf ; cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 sq. ; [W. 2« (2."))]), at all times, always, ever: Mt. xxvi. 11 ; Mk. xiv. 7 ; Lk. xv. 31 ; xviii. 1 ; Jn. vi. 34 ; vii. G ; viii. 29 ; xi. 42 ; xii. 8 ; xviii. 20' [20' Rec."] ; Ro. i. 10 (9) ; 1 Co. i. 4 ; xv. 58 ; 2 Co. ii. 14 ; iv. 10 ; v. 6 ; [vii. 14 L mrg.] ; ix. 8 ; Gal. iv. 18; Eph. V. 20 ; Phil. i. 4, 20 ; [iv. 4] ; Col. i. 3 ; iv. 6, [12]; 1 Th. i. 2; ii. 16; [iii. 6] ; iv. 1 7 ; [v.15,16]; 2 Th. i. 3, 11 ; ii. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 7; Philem. 4 ; Ileb. vii. 25. (Sap. .xi. 22 (21) ; xix. 1 7 (18) ; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ildian. 3, 9, 13 [(7ed. Bekk.)]; Artem. oneir. 4, 20 ; Athen., Diog. Laert.) * irdvTws, (from nas), adv., altogether (Latin omnino), i. e. a. in any and every ivay, by all means : 1 Co. ix. 22 (so fr. Hdt. down). b. doubtless, surely, cer- tainly : Lk. iv. 23 ; Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.] ; xxi. 22 ; xxviii. 4; 1 Co. ix. 10, (Tob. xiv. 8 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 32; by Plato in answers [ef. our collo(iuial by nil means']). c. with the negative ov, a. where ov is postpositive, in no wise, not at all : 1 Co. xvi. 12 (often so as far back as Ilom.). p. when the negative precedes, the force of the adverb is restricted : ov Trdi/rtof, not entirely, not al- together, 1 Co. V. 10; not in all things, not in all respects, Ro. iii. 9 ; (rarely i. q. navrms ou, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9 ' God ov jTuvrmr es in Hdt. 5, 34. But in Thcogn. 305 ed. Bekk. o{ KaKoX ov Trdirroys kokqi €K yatrrpos yeyovatri ktK. is best translated not ivholly, not entirely. Cf. W. 554 (515) sq.; B. 389 (334) sq. [on whose interpretation of Ro. 1. c, although it is that now generally adopted, see Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.]).* irapd, [it neglects elision before prop, names begin ning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.'s te.xt) before some other words ; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity, with ^■arious modifications corresponding to the various cases with which it is joined ; cf. Vigcr. ed. Ilerm. p. G43s(iq. ; Matthiae § 588 ; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq. ; Kiihncr § 440 ; Kriiger § G8, 34-3G. It is joined I. with the Genitive ; and as in Grk. prose writ, always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or from one's sphere of power, or from one's wealth or store, Lat. a, ab ; Germ, von . . . her, von neben ; French de chez ; [Eng. from beside, froml ; Sept. for '11370, Tp, '7SKn (1 S. xvii. 30) ; ef. W. 3C4 (342) sq. 'a. prop- erly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence, after verbs of coming, departing, setting out. irapa 477 irapa etc. (cf. French i-enir, partir de chez quelqii'un) : Mk. xiv. 43 ; Lk. viii. 49 [here Lchm. 11770] ; Jn. xv. 26 ; xvi. 27 ; xvii. 8 ; \_irap r/s 6(c3f(3X)7Kf i e'n-ra Saijudcia, Mk. xvi. 9 L Tr t.xt. WH] ; fii/at napu 6eov, of Christ, to he sent from God, Jn. ix. 16, 33 ; to be sprung from God (by the nature of the Xo'yos), vi. 46 ; vii. 29 (where for the sake of the con- te.xt KOKftvos fie ane, Mk. xii. 2; Jn. v. 34, 41, 44; X. 18; Acts ii. 33 ; iii. 5 ; .xvii. 9 ; xx. 24 ; xxvi. 10; Jas. 1. 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 22 (L T Tr WH an avzoi) ; 2 Jn.4; Rev. u. 28 (27) ; napaXaii^iva, Gal. i. 12 ; 1 Th. ii. 13; iv. 1; dnoKaii^avai, Lk. vi. 34 R G L Tr mrg. ; Kopt^opai, Eph. vi. 8 ; yiVeTai /ioi xt, Mt. xviii. 19 ; fic;^o- fiai, Acts xxii. 5 ; Phil. iv. 18 ; e)^aj, Acts ix. 14 ; avio/iai, Acts vii. 16; dyopdfoftai. Rev. iii. 18; also after Sprov ipayi'iu (sc. So6evTa), 2 Th. iii. 8 ; dpclv cXcos, 2 Tim. i. 18: eorai x^P'fi - J^"- ^- after verbs of hearing, as- certaining, learning, making inquiry; as, OKoioi Ti, Jn. i. 40 (41) ; vi. 45 sq. ; vii. 51 ; viii. 26, 40 ; xv. 15 ; Acts X. 22 ; xxviii. 22 ; 2 Tim. i. 13 ; ii. 2 ; nvvddvopai, Mt. ii. 4; Jn. iv. 52 ; dxpi^ai, jNIt. ii. 16 ; eViyivajo-xm, Acts xxiv. 8; /iavddva, 2 Tim. iii. 14. d. in phrases in which things are said dvai or i^epx^a^Bai from one : Lk. ii. 1 ; vi. 19 ; Jn. xvii. 7 [see a. above]. e. o, ^, TO TTopd Tivos [see o, II. 8 ; cf. B. § 125, 9 ; W. § 18, 3] ; a. absol. : oi Trap' avroii, those of one's family, i. e. his kinsmen, reiations, Jlk. iii. 21 (Sus. 33 ; one's de- scendants [yet here Vulg. qui cum eo erant], 1 Mace. xiii. 52 ; [Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 5]) ; cf. Fritzsche ad loe. p. 101; [F/eW, OtiumXorv. parsiii. adloc.]; ra Trapd rivoi, what one has beside him, and so at his service, i. e. one's }neans, resources, Mk. v. 26 ; to jrapd rivav, sc. ovra, i. e. ^oBivra, Lk. x. 7; PhU. iv. 18 ; [cf. W. 366 (343) ; Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 6 ; b. j. 2, 8, 4 ; etc.]. p. where it refers to a preceding noun : fj i^ovtrla rj jrapd twos, sc. received. Acts xxvi. 12 [R G] ; cmKovplas rijr Trapi (L T Tr WH diTo) TOV 6€ov, Acts .x.wi. 22 (i; Trapd nnos evvoia, Xen. mem. 2, 2, 12) ; rj nap' ijiov dtadrjicr], of which I am the author, Ro. xi. 27 [cf. W. 193 (182)]. II. with the Dative, napd indicates that something is or is done either in the immediate vicinity of some one, or (metaph.) in his mind, near by, beside, in the power of, in the presence of, wiUt, Sept. for Si'N (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 1 ; Prov. viii. 30), T3 (Gen. xliv. 16 sq. ; Num. xxxi. 49), 'ri'l (see b. below) ; cf. W. §48, d. p. 394 sq. (369) ; [B. 339 (291 sq.)]. a. near, by: elaTrjKeiovs, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 37, 3] ; see other exx. f r. ( Irk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258 ; [W. u. s. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond: napa Katpov ^XiKi'as, Ileb. xi. 11 ; Trap* 6 Sfl (Plut. mor. p. 83 f. [de prefect, in virt. § 13]), Ro. xii. 3 ; i. q. more than : dpapruAo'i napa navras, Lk. xiii. 2 ; t^puri at eXaiov TTopa Tovi /icT. more copiously than [A. V. above'] thy fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) S ; v^oiv riva napa Tiva, Sir. XT. 5) ; Kpivtw ijpepav nap' fnxcpa», to prefer one day to another (see xpiuio, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is joined to comparatives: nXiov napa r. Lk. iii. 13; Star , napo^vi/ai, napopyi^a. [Cf. Vig. ed. lierm. J). 650 sq.] napa-PaCvu ; 2 aor. napc^riv ; prop, to go by the side of (in Honi. twice nap^e^aas of one who stands by anoth- er's side in a war-chariot, II. 11, 522; 13, 708 [but here of men on foot]) ; to go pas/ or to pass over without touch- ing a thing ; trop. lo overstep, neglect, violate, transgress, w. an ace. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes- chyl. down [cf. Ti-apo, IV. I and 2]) : rrjv napadocriu, Mt. XV. 2 ; TTju evToXrju roii Beov, ibid. 3 ; 6 napajialvutv, he that transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to the true doctrine, opp. to peueiv tu tji hihaxfi, 2 Jn. 9 R G [where L TTr WII d npoayav (q. v.)] (so ol napa^alvov- Tfs, transgressors of the law. Sir. xl. 14 [cf. Joseph, c. Ap. 2, IS, 2; 29,4; 30,1]); (Tryv fiin^iyKTjv, Josh. vii. 1 1 , 15; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often; to prjpa Kvpiov, Num. xiv. 41 ; 1 S. XV. 24, etc. ; ras v, Deut. xvii. 20; a;r6 twi» \6yav. Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once so in theN. T. : CK (L T Tr WH dno) ttjs dnoa-ToXrjs. of one who abandons his trust, [R. V. fell ainoj], Acts i. 2."). (In the Sept, also for 13;;, I'Sn to break, r\l^V to deviate, turn aside.) [Syn. : napa^alveiv to overstep, napanopevcadai to proceed by the side of, nap€px(v ^i^ai/ltov, ib. 36; TTjv ^airiKeiav tov 6fov iv napa^okfi TiBtvai (lit. to set forth the kingdom of God i?i a parable), to illustrate (the na- ture and history of) the kingdom of God by the use of a parable, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Trtxt. AVH. 3. a pithy and instructive saying, invoicing some likeness or compar- ison and having preceptive or admonitory force ; an aphorism, a maxim : Lk. v. 36 ; vi. 39; Mt. xv. 15, (Prov. i. 6; Eccl. i. 17; Sir. iii. 29 (27); xiii. 26 (25), etc.). Since sajings of this kind often pass into proverbs, napa^oXr) is 4. a proverb: Lk. iv. 23 (1 S. x. 12; Ezek. xii. 22 sq. ; xviii. 2 sq.). 5. an act by which one exposes himself or his possessions to danger, a ven- ture, risk, (in which sense the plur. seems to be used by Plut. Arat. 22 : 6ta iroXKiov «Xty/iaii' Koi irapa^oKaiv TTcpai- potrret irpbs to Tci^or [cf. Diod. Sic. frag. lib. xxx. 9, 2 ; also var. in Thuc. 1, 131, 2 (and Poppo ad loc.)]) ; eV Ttapa^oXfi, in risking him, i.e. at the very moment when he exposed his son to mortal peril (see Trapa^o\evopjii), Heb. xi. 19 (Hesych. «it TrapajSoX^s* ck napaKivSwevfia- Tos) : others with less probability explain it, in a figure, i. e. as a figure, either of the future general resurrection of all men, or of Christ offered up to God and raised again from the dead ; others otherwise.* irapa-PovXevoiJiai : 1 aor. ptcp. TrapajSovXevadpfvos ; to consult amiss [see Trapa, IV. 2] : w. a dat. of the thing, Phil. ii. 30 Rec. Not found in prof. auth. See Trapa- ^oXcvopai.* irop-aY'yeXCtt. -as, fj, (TrapoyyeXXm), prop, announcement^ a proclaiming or giving a message to ; hence a charge, command : Acts xvi. 24 ; a prohibition, Acts v. 28 ; used of the Christian doctrine relative to right living, 1 Tim. i. 5; of particular directions relative to the same, 18; plur. in 1 Th. iv. 2. (Of a military order in Xen., Polyb. ; of instruction, Aristot. eth. Xic. 2, 2 p. 1104«, 7 ; Diod. exc. p. 512, 19 [i. e. frag. Ub. xxvi. 1, 1].)* irap-aYY^'XXu ; impf. TtaprjyyeWov ; 1 aor. Trapr/yyeiXa ; (irapd and dyycXXm) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. prop, to transmit a message along from one to another [(cf. napd, IV. 1)], to declare, announce. 2. to com- mand, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [cf. Iilk. xvi. AVH (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; foil, by \(ya>u and direct disc. Mt. x. 5 ; foil, by an inf. aor., Mt. XV. 35 L T Tr AVH ; Jlk. viii. 6 ; Lk. viii. 29 ; Acts X. 42; x^a. 18; with pij inserted, Lk. v. 14; viii. 56 ; Acts x.xiii. 22 ; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lchm. inf. pres.] ; foil, by an inf. pres.. Acts xvi. 23 ; xvii. 30 [here T Tr mrg. Wllhave djrayy.] ; 2 Th. iii. 6 ; with p.1] inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [G L T Tr WH] ; Acts i. 4 ; iv. 18 ; v. 28 (vapayyeXia irapay- yiXXfiv, to charge strictlv, W. §54, 3 ; B. 184 (159 sq.)), 40:1 Tim. i. 3 ; vi. 1 7 ; rivl t., 2 Th. ui. 4 [but T Tr WH om. Lbr. the dat.]; tovto foil, by on, 2 Th. iii. 10; rivt foil, by ace. and inf., [Acts xxiii. 30 L T Tr mrg.] ; 2 Th. iii. 6 ; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [here Tdf. om. dat.] ; foil, by an inf. alone. Acts xv. 5; by 'wa (see Iva, II. 2 b.), Mk. vi. 8 ; 2 Th. iii. 1 2 ; with an ace. of the thing alone, 1 Co. xi.. 1 7 ; 1 Tim. iv. 11; v. 7. [Stn. see nfXeita, fin.] * iropo-^tvoiiai ; impf. 3 pers. plur. wapfyivovro (Jn. iii. 23) ; 2 aor. Trapt yfTO/uji' ; fr. Horn, down: Sept. forXia; (prop, to become near, to place one's self by the side of. ■Trap ay CO 480 TrapaBlBcofit hence) to he present, to come near, approach : absol., Mt. iii. 1 [but in ed. 1 Prof. (Jrimm (more appropriately) asso- ciates this with Heb. ix. 1 1 ; Lk. xii. 51 below] ; Lk. [xiv. 21] ; xix. 16 ; Jn. iii. 23 ; Acts v. 21 sq. 25 ; ix. 89 ; .\. 32 [R G Tr mrg. br.], 33 ; .xi. 23 ; xiv. 27 ; xvii. 10 ; xviii. 27 ; xxi. 18 ; xxiii. 16, 35 ; xxiv. 1 7, 21 ; xxv. 7 ; xxviii. 21 ; 1 Co. xvi. 3 ; foil, by otto w. gen. of place and ets w. ace. of place, IMt. ii. 1 ; Acts xiii. 14 ; by and with gen. of place and tirl w. ace. of place and irpos w. ace. of pers. Mt. iii. 13 ; by irapa w. gen. of pers. (i. e. sent by one [ef. W. 365 (842)]), Mk. xiv. 43; by Trpor riva, Lk. vii. 4, 20 ; viii.19; Acts XX. 18 ; npos nva ix w. gen. of place, Lk. xi. 6 ; by els w. ace. of place, .In. viii. 2 ; Acts ix. 2G (here Lchm. cV) ; XV. 4 ; by fVi nva (against, see eVi, C. I. 2 g. y. /3/3.), Lk. .\xii. 52 [Tdf. n-poj]. i. q. to come forth, make oue'n public appearance, of teachers : of the Messiah, absol. Heb. ix. 1 1 ; foil, by an inf. denoting the purpose, Lk. xii. 51 ; [of Jolin tlie Baptist, Mt. iii. 1 (see above)], i. q. to be present with help [R. V. to take one's part^, w. a dat. of the pers. 2 Tim. iv. 16 LTTrWH. [Comp.: hir. rrap^Bfuy- povvTO ; 1. {napd i. q. hi/ the side of [see ■napa, IV. 1]) to examine things placed beside each other, to com- pare, (Xen., Plut., Lcian.). 2. {napa i. q. ovei; be- yond, [Lat. praeter ; see itapa, IV. 2]) to overlook, neglect : Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22 ; Diod., Dion. Plal., al.).* iropo-6T|icT), -i)s, rj, (napaTidrjpn, q. v.), a deposit, a trust or thing consigned to one's faithful keeping, (Vulg. de- posiluin) : used of the correct knowledge and jiure doc- trine of the gospel, to be held (irmly and faithfully, and to be conscientiously delivered unto others: 2 Tim. i. 12 (fioO jjossess. gen. [//le ti-ust committed unto me ; Rec.*^'' '"'^^ reads here TtapaKaraBrjKri. q.v.j) ; (J LTTrWII in 1 Tim. vi. 20 and 2 Tim. i. 14, (Lev. vi. 2, 4 ; 2 Mace. iii. 10, 15 ; Ildt. 9, 45 ; [al.]). In the Grk. writ. napaKaTaSrjKr) (q. v.) is more common; cf. Lob. a,d Phrvn. p. 312; W. 102 (9G).* nrap-atv(«i, -m; impf. 3 pers. sing. napijiJci ; to exhort, admonish : with the addition of Xiyav foil, by direct dis- course. Acts xxvii. 9 ; rtva (in class. Grk. more com- monly nvi [W. 223 (209) ; B. § 133, 9]), foil, by an inf. Acts xxvii. 22 [B. §§ 140, 1 ; 141, 2]. (From Hdt. and Pind. down ; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq. ; 3 Mace. v. 1 7.) * irap-aiTeo)iai, -ov/iai, inipv. pres. TrapaiTov ; [impf. 3 pers. [jlur. 7Tapr]TovvTO, Mk. XV. G T WH Tr mrg., where al. ovTTfp fiTovvTO (q. V.)] ; 1 aor. TraprjTrjcrapriu : pf. pass, ptcp. napjiTTjiicvos with a pass, signif. ; fr. Aeschyl. and Find. down; 1. prop.to ask alongside (irapallV.l^), beg to have near one ; to obtain by entreaty ; to beg from, to ask for, supplicate : [Mk. xv. 6 (see above)]. 2. to avert (napa aside [see jrapa, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek io ai-ert, to deprecate ; a. prop. foil, by /iij and ace. w. inf. [(0 intreat thai . . . not], Heb. xii. 19 (Thuc. 5, 63) ; cf. W. 604 (561) ; [B. § 148, 13]. b. i.q. to re- fuse, decline : to airodaveXv, Acts xxv. 1 1 (Bavfiv oi napat- Toviiai, Joseph, do vita sua 29). o. i. (j. to shun, avoid : ri, 1 Tim. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; riva, 1 Tim. v. 11 ; Tit. iii. 10; i.q. to refuse, reject, lleh. xii. 25. d. to- avert displeasuix by entreaty, i. e. to beg pardon, crave in- dulgence, to excuse : ()(( /le ■irap;)Tr]p(vov (see fj^oj, I. 1 f.), Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept- ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 2).* ■Trapa-Ka6f'5o|ioi : to sit down beside [jrapa, IV. 1], scat one's selj] (Xen., Plat., al.) ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. napaKade- v, afforded by the contents of the Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [SV. 189 (178)] : 6(os ttjs napaxX., God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5 ; 2 Co. i. 3 ; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24 ; 2 Co. vii. 4, 7, 13 [cf. W. 393 (368)]; pliilem. 7; by raeton. that which affords comfort or refreshment; ^hnsoi the Messi- anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes- siah the consoler, the comforter, Kar i^oxijv, DFlip [cf. Wiinsche, Neue Beitrage u. s. w. ad loc. ; Schottgen, Horae Hebr. etc. ii. 18]). 5. univ. persua.tive dis- course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, consol- atory; potverful liortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; \6yos TTapaxXfitTfas [A. V. word of exhortation^, Acts xiii. 15 ; 1)109 nap. [n son of exhortation^, a man gifted in teaching, admonishing, consoling. Acts iv. 36 ; used of the apostles' instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.* irapd-K\t]Tos, -ov, 6, (TrapaicaXe'ta), prop, summoned, called to one's side, esp. called to one's aid ; hence 1. one who pleads another's cause before a judge, a pleader, counsel for defence, legal assistant; an advocate : Dem. p. 341, 11 ; Diog. Laert. 4, 50, cf. DioCass. 46, 20. 2. univ. one ivho pleads another's cause with one, an inter- cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. §59; de Josepho§40; in Flaccum §§3 and4 ; so of Christ, in hisexaltation at God's right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine Logos in Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 14). 3. in the widest sense, a helper, succorer, aider, assistant; so of the Holy Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos- tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials and persecutions on belialf of the divine kingdom : Jn. xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19 sq.; Mk. xiii. 11 ; Lk. xii. 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says that God in creating the world had no need of a Trapa- kXijto?, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The Targums and Talmud borrow the Greek words O'SpiS and sa-':'j"3-'.3 and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate; cf. Buxtorf Lex. f.alm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916)]; so Targ. on Job xxxiii. 23 for ]"^-2 Ijx'?:?, i. e. an angel that pleads man's cause with God ; [cf. nXova-laiv napd- kXtjtoi in ' Teaching ' etc. 5 sub fin. ; Barn. ep. 20, 2 ; Constitt. apost. 7, 18]). Cf. Knapp, Scripta varii Argu- menti, p. 124 sqq. ; Diisterdieck on 1 .Tn. ii. 1, p. 147 sqq. ; [Walkins, Excursus G, in Ellicott's N. T. Com. for Eng. Readers ; Westcott in the " Speaker's Com." Additional Note on .Tn. xiv. 1 G ; Schajf in Lange ibid.].* irap-aKo^, -^s, ^, (Trapa Lat. praeler [see ;rapd, IV. irapaKoXo v6ia> 48-i 7rapa\va> 2]); 1. prop, a hearing amiss (Plat. cpp. 7 p. 341 b.). 2. l^uiiwilli/igtiess to hear i. c] disobedience : Ro. V. 1 9 ; 2 Co. X. G ; Ilcb. ii. •>. [Cf. Trench § Ixvi.] * irap-aKoXovdita, -ia ; f ut. TvapaKo\Qv6T)v A/jLapra- vop.iVii>v. de curios. § 14 Tretpw Ka\ tu>v idiatv (via irapaKovrrat TTOTf K. TTapihfXv], w. an accus., tow \iiyov, Mk. v. 36 T WII Tr t.\t. [al. ' overhearing the word as it was being spoken '; cf. B. 302 (259)] ; to refuse to hear, pay no re- gard to, disobey : twos, what one says, 'Sit. xviii. 1 7 (Tob. iii. 4; to vno Toii ^a(Tt\ca>s Xfyo/icva, Esth. iii. 3).* iropa-KinTu : 1 aor. iTapiKvy\ra ; to stoop to [cf. irapa, IV. 1 ] a thing in order to look at it ; to look at with head bowed forwards ; to look into with the body bent ; to sloop and look into: Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WII reject the vs.] ; .In. xx. 5 ; eU to pvrnieiov, Jn. xx. 1 1 ; mctaph. to look carefully into, inspect curiously, els ti, of one who would become acquainted with something, Jas. i. 25 ; 1 Pet. i. 12. (Arstph., Theocr., Philo, Dio Cass., Plut., al. ; Sept.)* irapa-Xa|iPav ; fut. napa^riij/oiiai, in L T Tr WH -'\Tjpyfro- fiai (.In. xiv. 3 ; see M, ^) ; 2 aor. Trapekaffov, 3 pers. ]ilur. 7rapf'\alioaav (2 Th. iii. 6 G T L mrg. Tr mrg. WII mrg. ; cf. SoXtdm [yet see WH. App. p. UiS]) ; Pass., pres. napa- Xapfiiivopai; 1 fut. TrapaXrj'^drjaoixat, in L T TrWII -Xtj/jl- (j)6ri(Top.ai(seeM,pi; Lk.xvii. 34-36) fr.IIdt.down; Sept. for npS ; 1. to take to [cf. irapa, IV. 1], to take with one's self, to join to one's self: nra, an associate, a com- panion, Mt. xvii. 1 ; xxvi. 37 ; IMk. iv. 36 ; v. 40 ; ix. 2 ; -X. 32 ; Lk. Lx. 10, 28; xi. 26; xviii. 31 ; Acts xv. 39 ; in pass., Mt. xxiv. 40, 41 ; Lk. xvii. 34-36 ; one to bo led off as a prisoner, Jn. xix. 16 ; Acts xxiii. 18 ; to take with one in order to carry away, Mt. ii. 13 sq. 20 sq.; Twa pfff cavTov. Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33; napaXapfidvftv yvvaiKa, to take one's betrothed to his home, Mt. i. 20, 24 ; riva foil, by dsvf. an ace. of place, to take [and bring, cf. W. §66, 2d.] one with one into a ]ila(c, Mt. iv. 5, 8 ; xxvii. 27 ; rtva Kar idiav, Mt. xx. 1 7 ; mid. with npos tpavrov, to my companionshi]), where I myself dwell. .In. xiv. 3. The ptcj). is i)relixed to other act. verbs to describe the action more in detail, Acts xvi. 33 ; xxi. 24, 26, 32 [here L WII mrg. Xafiav]. !Metaph. i. ij. to accept or acknowledge one to be such as he professes lo be ; not to reject, not to witlihold obedi- ence: Tivd, Jn. i. 11. 2. to receive something trans- mitted ; a. prop. : napaX. StaKoviav, an oliice to be dis- charged. Col. iv. 17; jjaa-iXeiav, Ileb. xii. 28, (so for tlie Chald. h2p in Dan. v. 31 ; vii. 18, Tlieodot. ; lldt. 2, 120; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 20, 5 (where see Miiller)] ; t^i/ ap)^r)v, Plat., Polyb., Plut.). b. to receive with the mind ; by oral transmission : tL foil, by ano w. a gen. of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Co. xi. 23 (on which cf. Parel in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii. p. 48 sqq. ; [see reff. in ano, II. 2 d. aa.]); by the narration of others, by the instruction of teachers (used of di.sciplcs) : [rbv \p. 'I. tov Kvpiov, Col. ii. 6] ; tI, 1 Co. xv. 1, 3 ; Gal. i. 9 ; Phil. iv. 9 ; [rt foil, by an infin., Mk. vii. 4] ; ti napa tikos [see reff. s. v. Trapd, 1. c], Gal. i. 12 ; 1 Th. ii. 13 ; 2 Th. iii. 6 ; napa Tivos, Ka6a>s ... to nSis 8ci etc. 1 Th. iv. 1, (irotpiav napa Tivof, Plat. Laeh. p. 1 97 d. ; Euthyd. p. 304 c). [Comp. : avp.-7Tapakapfidvu>.'\ * irapa-Xt'YOfiai ; \nap(\€y6pr)v] ; (napa beside, and Xcyo) to lay); Vulg. in Acts xxvii. 9, lego, i.e. to sail past, coast along: tt)v Kpfjrrjv, Acts xxvii. 8 [here some, referring aiTrjv to SiiX^wOTji', render work past, weather'], 13, (tIiv 'iraXiav, Diod. 13, 3 ; y?]v, 14, 55 ; [Strabo] ; Lat. legere oroin).^ Trap-dXtos, -ov, also of three term. [cf. W. § 11, 1], (napii and aXr), by the sea, maritime : jj napakios, sc. Xd>pa, the sea-coast, Lk. vi. 17 (Polyb. 8, 39, 3 ; Diod. 3, 15, 41; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 12; Sept. Deut. xxxiii. 19; and the fem. form r; napaXla in Deut. i. 7 ; Josh. ix. 1 ; Judith i. 7 ; iii. 6 ; v. 2, 23 ; vii. 8 ; 1 Mace. xi. 8 ; xv. 38 ; Hdt. 7. 1S5 ; often in Polyb.; Joseph, antt. 12, 7, 1).* wap-oXXa-yifi, -^s, i), (napaXKaocru)), variation, change: Jas. i. 17. (Aeschyl., Plat., Polyb., al.)* irapa-Xo7Cto(iai ; (see napa, IV. 2) ; a. to reckon wrong, miscount: Dem. p. 822, 25; 1037, 15. b. to cheat by false reckoning (Aeschin., Aristot.) ; (o deceive by false reasoning (joined to e^anarav, Kjjict. diss. 2, 20, 7) ; hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent : TITO, Col. ii. 4 ; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for no'l).* irapa-XuTiKos, -rj, -6v, (fr. napaXvm, q. v.), jtaralytic, i. e. suffcrin'4 from the relaxing of the nerves of one side; univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the palsy] : ISIt. iv. 24; viii. 6 ; ix. 2, 6 ; Mk. ii. 3-5, 9 ; and L AVII mrg. in Lk. v. 24. [Cf. Richm, HWB. s. v. Krankheiten, 5 ; B. D. Am. ed. p. 1866'.] * irapa-Xiio» : [pf. pass. ptep. napaXeXviicvos] ; prop, to loose on one side or from the side [cf. napa, IV. 1]; ^ loose or part things placed side by side ; to loosen, dissolve, trapafieva» 485 •jrapappeco hence, to weaken, enfeeble : jrapaAfXu/iei/or, suffering from the relaxing of the neraes, unstrung, weak of limb, [palsied'], Lk. V. 18, 24 ([not LWH mrg.] see irapoKvriKoi) ; Acts viii. 7 ; ix. 33 ; TrapaXeX. yovaTa, i. e. tottering, weakened, feeble knees, Heb. xii. 12; Is. xxxv. 3; Sir. xxv. 23; Xfipfr TrapaXeX. Ezek.vii. 27 ; Jer. vi. 24 ; [xxvii. (1.) 15, 43J ; napfXvovTO ai Sf^iai, of combatants, Joseph, b. j. 3, 8, 6 I napeXvdi] k- ovk ^Siivaro eTi XaXfirrm Xoyov, 1 Macc. ix. 55, where cf. Grimm ; caifiaTiKfj Suvd/xei TrapaXeX. Polvb. 32, 23, 1 ; to'is .(rdifuun. koI rals ^vxaU, id. 20, 10, 9.*' irapa-iit'viD : fut. Ttapapevw ; 1 aor. ptcp' napafieivas ; fr. Horn, down; to remain beside, continue alicags near, [cf. irapd, IV. 1] : Heb. vii. 23 ; opp. to dKfXrjXvdevai, Jas. i. 25 (^cind continues to do so, not departing till all stains are washed away, cf. vs. 24) ; with one, npos riva, 1 Co. xvi. 6 ; Tivi (as often in Grk. auth.), to survive, remain alive (Hdt. 1, 30), Phil. i. 25 L T Tr WII [where Bp. Lghtft. : '•Trapap.fva is relative, while fifi/u is absolute." COJIP. : (rvfi-Trapa/ifVo)-] * Trapa-|iu6s'o|iai, -oO/iai ; 1 aor. irapepvdijO'dpTjv ; fr. Horn, down ; to speak to, address one, whether by way of ad- monition and incentive, or to calm and console ; hence i. q. to encourage, console : rtvd, Jn. xi. 31 ; 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) ; V. 14 ; TITO nepl twos, Jn. xi. 1 9.* irapa|i\>6ia, -at, rj, (■napap.xidfopai), in class. Grk. any address, whether made for the purpose of persuading, or (f arousing and stimulating, or of calming and consol- ing ; once in the If . T., like the Lat. allocutio (Sen. ad Marc. 1 ; ad Helv. 1), i. q. consolation, comfort : 1 Co. xiv. 3. (So Plat. Ax. p. 365 a. ; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3 ; Joseph, b. j. 3, 7, 15 ; Ltian. dial. mort. 10, 3 ; Ael. v. h. 12, 1 fin.) ' 7rapa|iiJ8iov, -ou, to, (TrapajivOiofiai), persuasive address: Phil. ii. 1. {consolation, Sap. Lii. 18 and often in Grk. writ. [fr. .Soph., Time, Plat, on].) * iropavo|j.e'o), -5>; tobe a, Trapdvopios, to act contrary to law, to break the law : Acts xxiii. 3. (Sept. ; Thuc, Xen., Plat., sqq.) * irapavojiCa, -as, fj, (jTapapopos [fr. napd ((j. v. IV. 2) and vd/iof]), breach of taw, transgression, wickedness : 2 Pet. ii. IG. (Thuc, Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept.) * irapo-iriKpaivu : 1 aor. irapenlKpava ; (see napd, TV. 3) ; Sept. chiefly for n^O, rrjpn, to be rebellious, contuma- cious, refractory; also for TID, O^i'JTI, etc.; to jirovoke, exasperate ; to rouse to indignation : absol. (yet so that God is thought of as the one provoked), Heb. iii. 16, as in Ps. cv. (cvi.) 7 ; Ixv. (l.xvi.) 7 ; Ixvii. (Lxviii.) 7 ; Ezek. ii. 5-8 ; with tov 6e6v added, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 29 ; h. (xhv.) 3,8; Ps. v. 11; Ezek.xx. 21, and often; in pass., Lam. i. 20 ; joined with opyi^eaBai, Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 38 ; w. TrXrjpoiadai. dpyrjs Sixalas, vita iloys. i. § 55 [al. irdiT/ TTiKp.]; rrapaTTiKpaivfiv K. Trapopyi^eiv, de somn. ii. § 26.' irapa-iriKpao'p.os, -ou, 6, (TrapantKpaiva^ provocation : iv TO) ■napam.KpaapM, when they provoked {angered) me by rebelliousness, Heb. iii. 8, 15, fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8 (where Sept. for n2">'?) ; cf. Num. xvi.* irapa-iriirro) : 2 aor. ptcp. TrapanecToiv ; prop, to fall be- side a pers. or thing ; to slip aside ; hence to deviate from the right path, turn aside, wander : Trjs oSov, Polyb. 3, 54, 5 ; metaph. t^s dXrjdelas, Polyb. 12, 12 (7), 2 [(here ed. Didot dvT£)(7iTai) ; roC KadrjKovros, 8, 13, 8J ; i. q. to err, Polyb. 18, 19, 6; fvTii/i, Xen.IIell. 1, 6,4. lathe Scrip- tures, to fall away (from the true faith) : from the wor- ship of Jehovah, Ezek. xiv. 13 ; xv. 8 (for h^fD) ; from Christianity, Heb. vi. 6.* •n-opa-irXsw : 1 aor. inf. TrapairXeiicrai ; to sail by, sail past, [napd, IV. 1] : w. an ace. of place, Acts xx. 16. (Thuc. 2, 25 ; Xen. anab. 6, 2, 1 ; Hell. 1, 3, 3 ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 259 a.) * ■n-apa-TrXTJo-iov, (neut. of the adj. napa-Xria-ios), adv., near to, almost to : ijedivrjae vapaTrX. Oavdrt^ [cf. A\ . § 54, 6], Phil. ii. 27. (Thuc. 7, 19 ; in like manner, Polyb.) * iraptt-TrXijcrCtDs, adv., (iiapanXritrios, see irapairXrjai.Qv), similarly, in like manner, in the same ivay : Heb. ii. 14 (where it is equiv. to KaTandvra vs. 17, and hence is used of a similarity which amounts to e,quality, as in the phrase dyavi^fcrdat irapairX. to fight with equal advan- tage, aequo Marte, Hdt. 1,77; so too the adj., ab Se av6pa>- TTos 03V napaTrXTjoios Tois aXXois, ttXtji/ ye Btj oti noXvTrpdypojv Kai drdcrBaXos ktX. the words in which an oriental sage endeavors to tame the pride of Alexander the Great, Arr. exp. Alex. 7, 1, 9 (6)).* Trapa-^opEuo|j.ai ; impf. napenopevopriv ; fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down ; Sept. for ID;'^ ; to proceed at the side, go past, pass by: ilt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xi. 20; xv. 29 ; 8id rmv crnopipav, to go along through the grain-fields so that he had the grain on either side of him as he walked [see ffoie'co, I. 1 a. and c], ilk. ii. 23 R G T WH mrg. ; Sta T^s roXiXai'ar, Vulg. y)rae/er(/re'/i Galitaeam, i. e. "obiter profcisci per Galilaeam," i. e. 'they passed right along through, intent on finishing the journey, and not stopping to receive hospitaHty or to instruct the people' (Fritz- sche), ilk. ix. 30 [but L txt. Trtxt. AVH txt. eVopeuon-o] ; dtd Tav opiav, Deut. ii. 4. [Syn. cf. 77apa^aiva>, fin.] * irapd^rr(i)|iO, -ros, to, (irapaTri'irTw, q. v.) ; 1. prop. a fall beside or 7iear something ; but nowhere found in this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth and uprightness ; a sin, misdeed, [R. V. trespass, ' differ- ing from dfidprripa (q- v.) in figure not in force' (Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench § Lxvi.] : Mt. vi. 14, [15» G T om. WH br.], 15" ; xviii. 35 Rec. ; ilk. xi. 25, 26 R G L : Ro. iv. 25; V. 15-18, 20; .xi. llsq.; 2Co. v. 19; Gal. vi. 1 ; Eph. i. 7; ii. 1,5; Col. ii. 13; Jas.'v. 16 (where LTTr WH dpaprlas). (Polyb. 9, 10, 6 ; Sap. iii. 13 ; x. 1 ; Sept. several times for S>^?, Slj?, JJC^3, etc.; of liter- ary faults, Longin. 36, 2.) * irapa-ppc'u ; (jrapd and pea) ; fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat, down ; to flow past (napappfov vdap, Is. xliv. 4), to glide by : prjTTOTe napappvapev (2 aor. pass, subjunc. ; cf. Bltm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 28 7 ; [ Veitch s. v. pea ; WH. App. p. 1 70] ; but L T Tr WH itapapvap-ev ; see P, p), lest ice be carried past, pass by, [R. V. drift away from them] (missing the thing), i. e. lest the salvation which the things heard show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii. 1. In irapaa-rifio<; 486 7rapa<}>povia Grk. auth. nappapn /loi t», a thing escapes me, Soph. Philoct. i;.")3 ; troji. slips from my mind, Plat. legg. 6 p. 7.S1 a. : in tho sense of neglect, fiij irappapvfii, Trjpijaov Si fftiiv ^ovXi'jv, Prov. iii. 21.* irapdo-iiiios, -o", (napa [q. v. IV. 2], and arjfia [a mark]) ; 1. marked falsely, spurious, counterfeit ; as coin. 2. marked beside or on the margin ; so of noteworthy words, wliich the reader of a book marks on the margin ; hence 3. univ. noted, marked, conspicuous, remark- able, (of persons, in a l)ad sense, notorious) ; marked with a sign : iv ji-Xoi'o) Trapaafjpa AiocrKovpois, in a ship marked with the image or figure of the Dioscuri, Acts xxviii. 1 1 [cf. 15. 1). s. V. Castor and PoUux].* irapa-tTKCval^o) ; pf. pass. Trapccrxevacrjxat ; fut. mid. napa- (TKevdaoiiai ; fr. Ildt. down ; to make ready, 2>repare : so. TO SfOTj-w (added in Ildt. 9, 82; Athen. 4, 15 p. 138), Acts X. 10 (o-u/iTToo-joi', Ildt. 9, 15 ; 2 Maec. ii. 27). Mid. to make one's self ready, to prepare one's self, [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.] : «r ■^uXefiov, 1 Co. xiv. 8 (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 42 ; ttr fiaxij", fis vavpaxiav, etc., in Xen.). Pf. pass, in mid. sense, to have prepared one's self, to be prepared or ready, 2 Co. i.\. 2sq. (see Matthiae §4!)3).* irapa-o-KEVT], -rjs, ^, fr. Ildt. down ; 1. a making ready, preparation, equipping. 2. that which is pre- pared, equipment. 3. in the N. T. in a Jewish sense, the day of preparation, i.e. the day on which the Jews m.nle the necessary preparation to celebrate a sabbath or a feast : Mt. xxvii. (J2 ; Mk. xv. 42; Lk. xxiii. 54 ; Jn. xix. 31, (Joseph, antt. IG, G, 2) ; witli a gen. of the obj., ToD waarxa [ace. to W. 189 (l/Tsq.) a possess, gen.], Jn. xix. 14 (cf. Hih'kert, Abcmlmahl, p. 31 S(i.) ; w. a gen. of the sub]., Twi/ 'lovSaliov, ibid. 42. Cf. Bleek, Beitrage zur Evangolienkritik, p. 114 sqq. ; [on later usage cf. ' Teaching ' 8, 1 (and Harnack's note) ; Mart. Polyc. 7, 1 (and Zahn's note) ; Soph. Lex. s. v. 3].* iropa-TcCviu : 1 a.or. itapireiva; fr. Hdt. down ; to extend heside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong : to» Xoyof, his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (\6yovs, Aristot. poet. 1 7, 5 p. 14.J.V', 2 ; p.veov, 9, 4 p. 1451', 38).* irapa-TT]p€a), -o) : impf. 3 pers. ip\\iv.7rap£TT}povv', 1 aor. irapfTTiprjo-a ; Mid., pres. irapaTrjpovpat ; im])f. 3 pers. plur. irapenjpouvTO ; prop, to stand beside and watch [cf. Trapa, IV. 1] ; (0 watch assiduously, observe carefully; a. to watch, attend to, with the eyes : ra tK tov oipavov •yt- yvopeiia, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13 ; riva, one, to see what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4) ; conte.xtu- ally in a bad sense, to icatch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr mrg. djroj^mpjjo-afTff] (joined with ivthpeifiv, Polyb. 17, 3,2); Tivd (Polyb. 11,9, 9; Sept. Ps. xx.wi. (xx.xvii.) 12; Sus. 16) foil, by the interrog. «', Mk. iii. 2 R G T WH Tr txt. ; Lk. vi. 7 Rec. ; mid. to watch for one's self: Mk. iii. 2 L Tr mrg. ; Lk. vi. 7 L T Tr WH, [(in botli pass. foil, by interrog. f J)] ; Lk. xiv. 1 ; active w. an ace. of place (Polyb. 1, 29, 4) : tAs iriXas [foU. by Snat, cf. B. 237 (20.-))], Acts ix. 24 RG, where L f Tr "WH give mid. TTaperripoviiTo. b. to observe i. q. to keep scrupulously ; to neglect nothing requisite to the religious observance of: »S8o^ia8as, Joseph, antt. 3, 5, 5 ; [ttj» tuiv cra^ff. rjpfpav, id. 14, 10, 25] ; mid. (for one's self, i. n. for one's salva- tion), rjfitpas, pfjvas, Kaipois, Gal. iv. 10 (o(7a TrpoordrTOu- ctf ul vopoi, Dio Cass. 53, 10; [to fls ^piiicriv ou vfvop.t- trpLfvu, Jiijeph. e. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).' ■7rapa-T^pT)(ris, -eais, fj, (jrapaTqpia), observation ([Polyb. IG, 22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.) : ptranapa- Ti]pr] ; 1 aor. napfdrjKa ; 2 aor. subjiinc. 3 pers. plur. irapaduxriv, infin. napuBtivai (^Ik. viii. 7 K G) ; Pass., pres. ptcj). Traparidfpfvoi ; 1 aor. infin. TTapinfffrjuai (Mk. viii. 7 Lehm.) ; Mid., jires. Traparldepat; fut. TTupadrjiTupaf, 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. napiBfvro, impv. irapaOov (2 Tim. ii. 2) ; f r. Ilom. down ; Sejit. chiefly for D)::; ; l. to place beside, place near [cf. irapa, IV. 1] or set before : rivi rt, as a. food : Mk. vi. 4 1 ; viii. G Sep ; Lk. ix. 16 ; xi. 6 ; rpaTTf^av a table, i. e. food placed on a table. Acts xvi. 34 (Kp. ad Diogn. 5, 7); tq napa- Ti6(ptva vpiv, [A. V. .««t'/i things as are set before you'], of food, Lk. X. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 30) ; sing. 1 Co. x. 27. b. to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 14 ; Sept. Ex. xix. 7) : Tivl napalioXr}P, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set forth (from one's self), to explain : foil, by ort, Acts xvii. 3. 2. Mid. to place down {from one's self or for one's self) with any one, to deposit; to intrust, commit to one's charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2, 16 ;, Polyb. S3, 12, 3 ; Plut. Num. 9 ; Tob. iv. 1) : tI tivi, a thing to one to be eared for, Lk. xii. 48 ; a thing to be religiously kept and taught to others, 1 Tim. i. 1 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; Ttva. Ttw, to commend one to another for protection, safety, etc.. Acts .xiv. 23 ; xx. 32, (Diod. I 7, 23) ; Tar ■^vxat to God, 1 Pet. iv. 19; to nveiipa pov (Is x^ipas Bfoii, Lk. xxiii. 4G ; Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) G.* iropa-Tvyxavu ; fr. Horn. (II. 11, 74) down ; to chance to be by [cf. itapa, IV. 1], to happen to be present, to meet by chance : Acts xvii. 1 7.* irap-avrUa [cf. B. §14G, 4], adv., for the moment: 2 Co. iv. 17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.)* Trapa-<|>€p(» : [1 aor. inf. irapetiiyKai (Lk. xxii. 42 Tdf., cf. Veilcli p. 609)] ; 2 aor. inf. naptveyxdv (Lk. xxii. 42 H (!), impv. napfveyxe [(ibid. L Tr WH) ; pres. pass. napatptpopat ; see reff. s. v. (jjepal ; 1. to bear to [cf. Trapa, TV. 1], bring to, put before: of food (Ildt., Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [cf. napa, IV. '2] from the right course or path, to carry atvay : Jude 1 2 [R. V. carried along'] (where Rccnt pKJ^fp.) ; frorn the truth, Ilcb. xiii. 9 where Rec. niptcpip., (Plat. Phaedr. p. 2G.j b. ; Plut. Timol. 6 ; Antonin. 4, 43 ; Hdian. 8, 4, 7 [4 ed. Bekk.]). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to cause to pass by, to remove : t\ cmo rtvos, Mk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. xxii. 42.* irapa-4)pov€'o), -Si ; (Trapacjipaiv [fr. Trapa (q. v. IV. 2) and (fiprif, ' beside one's wits ']) ; to be beside one's self, out of one's senses, voiil of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23. (From Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; once in Sept., Zech. vii. 11.)* irapa-ifipovCa, -at, t), (Trapas ; ertaining to the offering of sacrifices and in- cense, [to wait upon], 1 Co. ix. 13 LTTr WH (for Rec. Trp OCT cSp.).* irdp-ctixi ; impf. 3 pers. pi. iraprja-av ; fut. 3 pers. sing. TTapeoTot (Rev. .xvii. 8 LT[not (as G Tr WH Alf., al.) ndpetrraf, seejB«m. Ausf. Spr. §108, Anm. 20 ; Chandler §803]) ; (jrapa near, by, [see napa, IV. 1 fin.] and flpi) ; Sept. chiefly for «13 ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Horn, down a. to be by, be at hand, to have arrived, to be present: of persons, Lk. xiii. 1 ; Jn. xi. 28 ; Acts x. 21 ; Rev. xvii. 8 ; Trapiiv, present (opp. to dnoiv), 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 2, 11 ; xiii. 2,10; cVt tiuos, before one (a judge). Acts xxiv. 1 9 ; «Vi TIKI, for (to do) something, 'Sit. xxvi. 50 Rec. ; cVi ti, ibid. GL TTr Wll (on which see ewi, B. 2 a. f.) ; (va>- nwv 6foii, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Tr mrg.] ; epdaSe, ib. xvii. 6 ; npos riva, with one, Acts xii. 20 ; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: 6 Kaipos ndpeariv, Jn. vii. 6 ; TOTrapof, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v. 17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2 b.; [L. and S.s.v.IL; Soph. Lex. si wh.J). of other things : roO einy- -ytXi'ou Tov napovTos eh vpds, which is come unto (and so is present among) you, Col. i. 6 (foil, by eU w. an ace. of place, 1 Mace. xi. 63, and often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. -down ; see 6is, C. 2). b. to be ready, in store, at com- mand : r) irapoixTa dXrjdda, the truth which ye now hold, so that there is no need of words to call it to your re- membrance, 2 Pet. i. 12; (fifj) irdpca-Tw rivi ti, ibid. 9 [A. V. lacketh'}, and Lchm. in 8 also [where al. indp- Xovra], (Sap. xi. 22 (21), and often in class. Grk. f r. Horn, down ; cf. Passow u. s. ; [L. and S. u. s.]) ; to Trapoma, possessions, property, [A. V. such things as ye hare (cf. •our ' what one has by him ')], Ileb. xiii. 5 (ols ra itapovra apKei, i]Ki(rTa to>v dWoTpiuiv opiyovTat, Xen. symp. 4, 42). [CoMP. : a-vp-ndpfipt.J ' ■irap. ; ^okovitl napeia'ayav tu apprjTa avrSav . , , liv(TTr)pia, Orig. philos. [i. q. Hippol. refut. omn. haeres.] 5,17 fin. ; of JMarcion, vofil^div Katvdv rt TrapenrdyeLv, ibid. 7, 29 init. ; — passages noted by Hilgenfeld, Zeitschr. f. wissenscli. Theol. 1860, p. 125 sq. (oi TrpoSdrai Toit e'po> : 1 aor. irapeiarjvfyKa ; a. to bring in besides {\)em., a{.). b. to contribute besides to sonie- thing: cnrovSrjv, 2 Pet. i. 5 [R. V. adding on your part].* irap-eKTos ( for which the Grk. writ, f r. Horn, down use TrapeV, napt^) ; 1. prep. w. gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6], ex- cept; icith the exception of (a. thing, e.xpressed by the gen.): Mt. v. 32; xix. 9 LWH mrg. ; Acts xxvi. 29, (Deut. i. 36 Aq.; Test. xii. Patr. p. 631 ; ['Teaching ' 6, § 1] ; Geop. 13, 15, 7). 2. adv. besides : ra napeKros sc. yivopeva, the things that occur besides or in addition, 2 Co. xi. 28 [cf. our 'extra matters ' ; al. the things that I omit ; but see Meyer].' ■7rap-e(i-pdXXii) : fut. rtaptp^dKui ; fr. Arstph. and Dem. down; 1. to cast in by the side of or besides IcLnapd, IV. 1], to insert, interpose ; to bring back into line. 2. from Polyb. on, in miUtary usage, to assign to soldiers a place, whether in camp or in line of battle, to draw up in line, to encamp (often in 1 Mace, and in Sept. where for run) : TivX xdpaKa, to cast up a bank about a city, Lk. xix. 43 L mrg. T WH txt.* irop-tii-poX-^, -rjs, ^, (fr. jrapfp^dWa, q. v.) ; 1. iVi- terpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign to the subject in hand, Aeschin.). 2. In the Maced. dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial, ilaced. et Alex. p. 30 ; Lob. irapevox^eo) 488 irapijyopia ad Plinn. p. 377; [W. 22]) an encampment (Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut.) ; a. the camp of the Israel- ites in the desert (an enclosure within which tlieir tents •were pitched), Ex. .\xi.\. 14; xix. 17; xxxii. 17; hence in Heb. xiii. 11 used for the cily of Jerusalem, inasmuch as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encanij>- mcnt had been in the desert ; of the sacre'l con(/re(/alion or assemlili/ of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly in camps in the wilderness, ib. 13. b. the bar- racks of the Roman solilicrs, which at Jerusalem were in the castle Antonia : Acts xxi. 34, 37 ; xxii. 24 ; xxiii. 10, 16, 32. 3. an army in line of battle : Heb. xi. 34; Kev. XX. 9 [here A. V.camp'}, (Ex. xiv. 19, 20 ; Judg. iv. 16; viii. 1 1 ; 1 S. xiv. 1 6 ; very often in Polyb. ; Ael. v. h. 14, 46). Often in Sept. for njriD, which .signifies both camp and armi/ ; freq. in both senses in 1 Mace. ; cf. Grimm on 1 i\Iacc. iii. .'!." ■Kap-iv-o\\iu, -a ; (see evo)(\ia>) ; to cause trouble in n matter (irapa equiv. to napa Tivt n-piiypan), to trouble, annoy: twi. Acts xv. 19. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., Epict., Lcian., al.) * 7ap-€ir(-ST)|iOs, -ov, (see eViSij/ieo)), prop, one who comes from a foreign country into a city or land to reside there by the side of the natives ; hence stranger ; sojourning in a strange place, a foreigner, (Polyb. 32, 22, 4 ; Athen. 5 p. 196 a.) ; in the N. T. metaph. in ref. to heaven as the native country, one who sojourns on earth : so of Chris- tians, 1 Pet. i. 1 ; joined with napo^Kot, 1 Pet. ii. 11, cf. i. 17, (Clu'istians Trarpi'Sas oiKoOcrii/ iSi'aj, aXX* coi ndpoiKot' fi£T€)^ovai nai^tDif a>? TroXIrat, Koi Tzav& {jTropei/ovatv as ^evof naaa ^evr] TTarpis iariv alrayv, Kai iiaaa irarpXi ^(vi), Ep. ad Diogn. c. .5) ; of the patriarchs, ^ivoi k- napfnlSrjpoi «V' Trjt yris, Heb. .xi. 13 (Gen. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. xx.xviii. (x.Kxix.) 13 ; TTapfiTiSripia Ti'r iartv 6 0ios, Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3, where see Fischer).* irap-c'pxo|iai. ; fut. n-apfXfutrojuai : pf. irapfXryXufla ; 2 aor. napijXOov, 3 pers. impv. nape\d<'n(i> (Jit. xxvi. 39 L T Tr WH ; see diripxopai, init.) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. mostly for 13^ ; 1. (napd past [lit napd, IV. \']) to go past, pass by; a. prop. a. of person s moving forward: to pass by, absol. Lk. xviii. 37 ; rivd, to go past one, Jlk. vi. 48 ; w. an ace. of place. Acts xvi. 8 (Hom. II. 8, 239 ; Xen. an. 4, 2, 12; Plat. Ale. 1 p. 123 b.) ; Sid T^r oSoi eKelvrfs, Mt. viii. 28. p. of time : Jit. xiv. 15 ; 6 napf- XijXu^ms xP"""' [•^■.^- '''* time past], 1 Pet. iv. 3, (Soph., Isocr., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.) ; of an act continuing; for a time [viz. the Fast], Acts xxvii. 9. (to wapeXdovra and TCI (TTtovra are distinguished in Ael. v. h. 14, 6.) b. metaph. a. to pass away, perish : as ilvdos, Jas. i. 10; 6 ovpauos, Mt. V. 18 ; xxiv. 35 ; Mk. xiii. 31 ; Lk. xvi. 1 7 ; x.\i. 33; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xxi. 1 Rec; ^ yivta aurij, 5It. xxiv. 34 ; Mk. xiii. 30 sq. ; Lk. xxi. 32 ; ol \6yoi fiov, Jit. xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xxi. 33; to dpxaia ira- pr]\dtv, 2 Co. v. 17, (Ps. x.xxvi. (xxxvii.) 36; Dan. vii. 14 Theodot. ; Sap. ii. 4 ; v. 9 ; Dem. p. 291, 12 ; Thcocr. 27, 8). Here belongs also Mt. v. 18 ('not even the small- est part shall pass away from the law,' i. e. so as no longer to belong to it). p. to pass by {pass over), i. e. to neg- lect, omit, (transgress) : w. an ace. of the thing, Lk. xi. 42 ; XV. 29, (Deut. .xvii. 2 ; Jer. xli. (x.x.\iv.) 18 ; Judith xi. 10 ; 1 Mace. ii. 22 ; Aws v6ov, lies, theog. 613 ; vofiov, Lys. p. 107, 52 ; Dem. p. 977, 14). 7. to be led by, to be carried past, be averted : and rivos, from one i. e. so as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2-) ; nap(\duTpa, Jlk. xiv. 35. 2. (jiapd to [cf. napd, IV. 1]) lo come near, come forward, arrive: Lk. xii. 37; xvii. 7; Acts .xxiv,. 7 Rec. (and in Grk. auth. fr. Aesehyl. and Ildt. down). [Syn. see napa/ialva, fin. COMP. dvTi-TTapfpxofiai.] * irdpco-is, -ewf, rj, {irapirjpi, q. v.), pretermission, passing over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : did T171/ ndpeaiv . . . uvoxri Toil 6(ov, because God had patiently let pass the sins committed previou.sly (to the expiatory death of Christ), i. e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so man's conception of his holiness was in danger of be- coming dim, if not extinct), Ko. iii. 2.'j, where cf. Fritz- sche ; [Trench § xxxiii. (Ilippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].* iraf>-t'xu ; iiiipf. napeixov, 3 pers. plur. napfixav (Acts xxviii. 2 L T Tr WH ; see (x'^y init., and ditipxopM, init.) ; fut. 3 per.s. sing, irapi^ei (Lk. vii. 4 RG; see below); 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. irapfcxov, ptcj). naparrxaiP ', Jlid., [jjres. TTapi'xopai] ; impf . napdxdprjv ; fut. 2 pers. sing, napi^ri (Lk. vii. 4 L T Tr WH) ; fr. Hom. down ; I'lautus's prae- hibio i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the Grk. irapal [but see Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. napd, IV. 1 fin.)]) ; i. e. a. to reach, forth, offer: ri tivi, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show, afford, supply : nvi fjo-vxiav, Acts xxii. 2; (f>i\av6po)nlav. Acts xxviii. 2 ; ndvra, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7. c. to be the author of, or to cause one to have ; to give, bring, cause, one something — either unfavorable : (con-ous, Jit. xxvi. 10; Jlk. xiv. G; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi. 17 (nap. nuvov. Sir. xxix. 4 ; dymva, Is. vii. 1 3 ; wpdypara, very often fr. Hdt. down ; also o;(Xo>', see Passow s. v. Sx^os, 3 ; [L. and .S. s. v. II.]) ; — or favorable : ipyaaiav, Acts xvi. 16^ and Lchm. in xix. 24 ; niimv, [A. V. to give asswance']. Acts .xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexic. N. T. pp. 37-39 ; i. q. to occasion (fr/Tijireis, sec oiKovop.ia), 1 Tim. i. 4. Mid. 1. to offer, shou\ or present one's self: with lavrov added (W. § 38, 6 ; [B. § 135, 6]), w. an ace. of the predicate, ttJ^ok, a pattern. Tit. ii. 7; napd- Beiypa . . . TotovSf eavrdv napeix^ro, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 15, 4] ; in the act., Plut. pucr. educ. c. "20 init. 2. to exhibit or ojfer on one's own part: rtf biKaiov To'is SouXotf, Col. iv. 1 ; to render or aflonl from, one's own resources or by one's oion power: nvi ti, Lk. vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec., napi^ei, it must be taken as the 3d pers. sing, of the fut. act. [in opp. to AV. § 13, 2 a.], the elders being introduced as talking among themselves ; but undoubtedly the reading napi^ji should be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad- dressing Jesus ; cf. Jleyer ad loc. ; [and on the construc- ticm, ef. B. § 139, 32]). On the mid. of tliis verb, cf. Kriiger §52, 8, 2 ; AV. § 38, 5 end ; [EUic. and Lghtft. on Col. u. s.].* iraprj-yopCa, -as. rj. {naprjyopio) [to address]), prop. an. irapdevia 489 irapocKeoy addressing, address ; i. e. a. exhortation (4 Mace. V. 11 ; vi. 1 ; ApoU. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace, relief, alleviation, consolation : Col. iv. 11 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. (Aeschyl. Ag. 95 ; Philo, q. deus immort. § 14; de somn. i. § 18; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 3 ; often in Plut. ; Ilierocl.) * * irapflevCa, -as, 17, (Trapdivoi), virfjinitij : Lk. ii. 36. (Jer. iii. 4 ; Find., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Plut., Ildian., al. [of. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.].) * irapSEVos, -ov, 17, 1. a virgin : Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is. vii. 14); .x.xv. 1, 7, 11; Lk.i.27; Actsxxi.9; 1 Co. vii. 25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for n'jina, several times for niJ?J ; twice for T\Tyiy i. e. either a marriarjeable maiden, or a young {married) woman. Gen. xxiv. 43 ; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word cf., besides Oesenius, Thes. p. 1037, Credner, Beitrage u.s.w. ii. p. 197 sqq. ; napdivos of a young britle, newly married wo- man, Horn. II. 2, 514) ; 17 iiapO- tivos, one's marriageable daughter, 1 Co. vii. 30 sqq. ; napd. dyvt], a pure virgin, 2 Co. -xi. 2. 2. a man ivho has abstained from all uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so has kept his chastity : Rev. xiv. 4, where see De Wette. In eccl. writ, one who has never had commerce with women ; so of Joseph, in Fahricius, Cod. pseudepigr. Vet. Test. ii. pp. 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a. and 2450 b.] ; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus, metaph. ev. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xix. 26), rjvlhe TrapOiuov vla.^ IldpSos, -ov, 6, a Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a district of Asia, bounded on the N. by Hyrcania, on the E. by Ariana, on the .S. by Carmania Deserta, on the W. by Jledia ; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of Parthia. [B. D. s. v. Parthians; Geo. Rawlinson,SAxX\x Great Oriental Monarchy, etc. (Lond. 1873).]* irap-h]ni : 2 aor. inf. Trapdvai (Lk. xi. 42 L T Tr AVH) ; pf. pass. ptcp. napd.pivos ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to let pass ; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ, f r. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit : tI, Lk. xi. 42 [R G a(f>iivai] {apapTrjpara, to pass over, let go un- punished. Sir. xxiii. 2 ; [rt/xcoptai/, Lycurg. 148, 41]). 2. to relax, loosen, lei go, [see napd, TV. 2], (e. g. a bow) ; pf. pass. ptcp. TTapeipivos, relaxed, unstrung, weakened, exhausted, (Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : x^'P^f» ^leb. xii. 12; .Sir. ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31 ; apyoi Kol itapeipevoi €7ri epyov ayadov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 4 cf. 1. Cf. ■TrapaXvio.* irop-io-Tavu, see Trapio-Tripn. ■irap-Co-TT)|ii. and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro. VI. 13, 16) rrapiordi/o) ; fut. 7rupacrT?;(7w ; 1 aor. napeaTTjo-a; 2 aor. napea-Trjii ; pf. irapen-TtjKa, ]itcp. naperrTrjKois and rrapeo-TMs- ; plupf. 3 pers. plur. napficTTr^Kfia-av (Acts i. 10 [WII TraptoT. ; see ta-rrjpi, init.]) ; 1 fut. mid. napaarfi- crofiai] fr. Hom. down. 1. The pres., im]>f., fut. and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for TPl'D)! ^- '" place beside or near [jrapa, IV. 1] ; to set at hand ; to present ; to proffer ; to provide : KTrjinj, Acts xxiii. 24 (crKa(j)rj, 2 Mace. xii. 3) ; rivd or ri rivt, to place a person or thing at one's disposal, Mt. xxvi. 53 ; to present a person for another to see and question. Acts xxiii. 33 ; to present or show, rtvaor tL with an ace. of the quality which the person or thing exhibits : ofs wape(jTr](T£u iavTov ft3i/Ta, Acts L 3 ; add, Ro. vi. 13, 10, 19 ; 2 Co. xi. 2 ; Eph. v. 27 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15, ("te vegetum, ■ nobis in Graecia siste," Cic. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) ; nvd with a pred. ace. foil, by KaTtvainov tivos. Col. i. 22 ; iavTov Sis \Joaei] nvd twi, Ro. vi. 13 ; to bring, lead to, in the sense- of presenting, without a dat. : Acts i.\. 41 ; Col. i. 28. of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God : to crapara vpav Bvaiav ... to fleoj, Ro. xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. : Polyb. 10, 25, 7 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 4 ; Lcian. deor. concU. 13 ; Lat. admoven, Verg. Aen. 12, 171 ; sisto, Stat. Theb, 4, 445) ; TWO. (a first-born) to Kvpia, Lk. ii. 22 ; to bring to, bring near, metaphorical ly, i. e. to bring into one\< fel- lowship or intimacy : nvd tm 6fa, 1 Co. viii. 8 ; sc. to 6ew, 2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present {show) by argument, to- prove: ri. Acts xxiv. 13 (Epict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foil, by jroir, id. 2, 26, 4 ; rivi n, Xen. oec. 13, 1 ; rivi, ort, Jo- seph, antt. 4, 3, 2 ; de vita sua § 0). 2. Jlid. and pf., plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (.Sept. chiefly for ^Di?, also for 3VJ), to stand beside, stand by or near, to be at hand, be present ; a. univ. to stand by : nvi, to stand beside one. Acts i. 10 ; ix. 39 ; xxiii. 2; xxvii. 23; 6 Trapeorr/Kai?, a bystander, Mk. xiv. 47, 09 [here T Tr WH n-upeoToio-»'] ; xv. 35 [here Tdf. nape- arwTwv, WH mrg. ea-TrjKoToiv]. 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg. Tr mrg. TrapetrTOrtDv] ; 6 irapeaTws, Mk. xiv. 70 ; Jn. xi.K, 26 [here anarthrous]. b. to appear : w. a pred. nom. foil, by t i/mn-tov Ttvos, Acts iv. 10 [A. V. stand here"] ; before a judge, Kala-api, Acts xxvii. 24 ; mid. tm l3!)paTu ToO 6eoii [R G XptOToO], Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [A. V, stood upl (fr. Ps. ii. 2) ; to be at hand for service, of ser- vants in attendance on their master (Lat. apj/areo), nvi, Esth. iv. 5 ; ivwmdv twos, 1 K. x. 8 ; evairtov Toii Otov, of a presence-angel [A. V. that stand in the presence of God}, Lk. i. 19, cf. Rev. viii. 2; absol. ol vapea-TWTfSy them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24 ; with avno added (viz. the high-priest). Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to help, to succor, (Germ, beistehen) : nvi, Ro. xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 17, (Horn. II. 10, 290; lies. th. 439 ; Arstph. vesp. 1388 ; Xen. ; Dem. p. 366, 20 ; 11 20, 26, and in other au- thors), e. to be present ; to have come : of time, Mk. iv. 29.* nap|ji6vas [prob. contr. fr. Ilap/iffiSijs ' steadfast ' ; cf . W. 103 (97)], aec. -dv [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Parmenas, one of the seven " deacons " of the primitive church at Jerusar lem : ."Vets vi. 5.* irap-oSos. -ov, f/, (irapd, near by ; 6809), a passing by or passage : iv napoSa, in passing, [A. V. by the way}, 1 Co. xvi. 7. (Thuc. 1,' 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad Att. 5, 20, 2 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) * irop-oiKeM, -a ; 1 aor. Trapw/crjo-a ; 1. prop, to dwell beside (one) or in one's neighborhood [jrapd, IV. 1] ; /0 live near; (Xen., Thuc, Isoer., al.). 2. in the Scrip- tures to be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn, (Sept. for 11j, several times also for 2\y\ and pt^) : folL ■Trapot 490 irapova-ia by (vvf. a dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 R L (Gen. xx. 1 ; xxi. 34 ; xxvi. 3 ; Kx. xii. 40 cod. Alex. ; Lev. xviii. .3 [Aid.], etc.) ; w. an ace. of place, ibid. GTTrWlI (Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi. 4) ; els w. ace. of place (in pregn. <;onstr. ; see «is, C. 2), Heb. xi. 9. (Metaph. and absol. lo dwell on the earth, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lghtft. and Ilarnack ad loc. Syn. see (caToiKf'tt).].)" irap-oiK(a, -as, fj, (irapoiKeo), q. v.), a bibl. and eccl. word, ■a dwelling near or with one ; hence u sojournini/, divellin;/ in a strange land : prop. Acts xiii. 1 7 (2 Esdr. viii. 35 ; Ps. c.\ix. (cxx.) 5 ; Sap. xix. 10 ; Prol. of Sir. 21 ; cf. Fritz- sche on Judith v. 9). JSIetaph. the life of man here on «arth, likened to a sojourning: 1 Pet. i. 17 (Gen. xlvii. 9) ; see irapevihrifios [and reff. under jra/joncc'o)].* irdp-oiKos, -ov, (irapa and oIkos) ; 1. in class. Grk. dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place u-ilhout the right of citizenship ; ['R.V.snJum-nei-']; Sept. for IJ and 3tTin (see TtapoiKtu) 2, and napoiKia, [and cf. Schmidt, Syn. 43, 5 ; L. and S. s. v.]) : foil, by ev w. dat. of place, Acts •vii. 6, 29 ; metaph. without citizenship in God's kingdom : joined with leVoj and opp. to irvimoXiTrjs, Ejjh. ii. 19 {poVOS KVptOS 6 OeuS 7Ts, -ov, (also of three term, [see o/zoior, init.]), like : Uk. vii. 8 [T WII om. Trbr. the cl.], 13. (Hdt., Thuc, Xen., Dem., Polyb., Diod., al.) * •irap-o|vlvw : prop, to make sharp, tosharpeji, [-napa, IV. 3] : T^r pdxuipav, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thuc, Xen., down), a. to stimulate, spur on, urge, {irpus ri, im rt). b. lo irri- tate, provoke, 7'ouse lo anger; Pass., prcs. nupo^vvopai; impf. TTapQi^vvoprjv : Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. 5. Sept. chiefly for ]'SJ to scorn, despise ; besides for D'l'Dn to provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18 ; Ps. cv. (cvi.) 29 ; Is. Ixv. 3 ; for 'I'VPH to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, etc.; pass, for r\y\ to burn with anger, IIos. viii. 5 ; Zcch. x. 3, and for other verbs.* irapo|vtuiTT(/cdi')], Hebr.S^, [fr. Hom. down], all, every ; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns ; a. any, erery one (sc. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to jrar) ; with the Singular : as ■nav SivSpov, Mt. iii. 10; ncura Bvaia, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr t.\t. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v. 11 ; xv. 13 ; Lk. iv. 37; Jn. ii. 10; xv. 2; Acts ii. 43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; naara yjfvxri dvdpanrov, Ro. ii. 9 (Trdaa dvOp. \|'i'X'7> Plat. Phaedr. p. 249 e.) ; TTaa-a (TvvelSrja-is avSpmntav, 2 Co. iv. 2; nds \ey6pcvos 6e6s, 2 Th. ii. 4 ; nas dyios iv Xptarw, Phil. iv. 21 sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class indicated by the noun : as TrdvTcs SvOpanoi, Acts xxii. 15 ; Ro. V. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 19 ; navret dytot, Ro. xvi. 15 ; ^dvres ayyeXoi Beoii, Heb. i. 6; iravra [L T Tr WH to] eBvrj, Rev. xiv. 8 ; on the phrase irdaa a-ap^, see o-dp^, 3. b. any and every, of every kind, [A. V. often all manner of] : ndcra voaos Koi paXaxia, Mt. iv. 23 ; ix. 35 ; x. 1 ; dXoyia, blessings of every kind, Eph. i. 3 ; so esp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo- tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the noun belongs: — thus, ndaa iXnls, Acts xxvii. 20; (To(pia, Acts vii. 22 ; Col. i. 28 ; yvaais, Ro. xv. 14 ; aSiKi'a, do-e'if la, etc., Ro. i. 18, 29 ; 2 Co.x. 6 ; Eph. iv. 19, 31 ; v. 3 ; o-n-ouSiy, 2 Co. viii. 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 5 ; intdvpia, Ro. vii. 8 ; x^P^' ^°- XV. 13; avrapKeia, 2 Co. i,\. 8; iv Travrt Aoyoi) k. yi'Cixrct, 1 Co. i. 5 ; (To^ia K. 6^ai, 1 Pet. ii. 18; nacra i^ovaia, Mt. x.xviii. 18, (ndv «cpdror. Soph. Phil. 142). c. Me whole (all, Lat. lotus) : so before proper names of coun- tries, cities, nations ; as, jrao-n 'itpoiroXvpa, Mt. ii. 3 ; Trat 'laparjX, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as nds oikos 'la-parjX, Acts ii. 36 ; Trdira ktI(inite number, in all [cf. B. § 127, 29] : ^(ravSe ol ■jrduTes avbpes mffei bexabvo (or SuSexa), Acts -xi.x. 7 ; i/p(6a a\ Truirai yjfv)(ol ^laKoo'tat e^bopijKovra e^, Acts xxvii. 37, («V' liubpas Tovs ndvTas dvo, .Judith iv. 7 ; eyivovro oc TrdvTfi ojy Ttrpa- KoVioi, Joseph, s/att. 6, 12, 3 ; roi/r jravrar cis htaxiKiovs, id. 4, 7, 1 ; los flvai rds ndcras S(Ka, Ael. v. h. 12, 35 ; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. jrSj, 5 b. ; [L. and S. s. V. C] I " relinquitur ergo, ut omnia tria genera sint causarum," Cic. de invent. 1, 9) ; ot iravrts, all those I have spoken of, 1 Co. ix. 22; 2 Co. v. 14 (15). navra oaoi, all as many as, Mt. xxii. 10 ; Lk. iv. 40 [here Tr uirg. WII txt. an-.] ; Jn. X. 8 ; Acts v. 36 sq.; jrawfjoi w. aptcp., all (they) that : Mt. iv. 24 ; Mk. i. 32 ; Lk. ii. 18, 38 ; Acts ii. 44 ; iv. 16 ; Ro. i. 7 ; x. 12 ; 1 Co. i. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 1 ; Ej.h. vi. 24; 1 Th. i. 7; 2 Th. i. 10; Heb. iii. IG; 2 Jn. 1 ; Rev. xiii. 8; xviii. 19, 24, and often, jrawes oi sc. ovrfs: iSIt. v. 15 ; Lk. V. 9 ; Jn, v. 28 ; Acts ii. 39 ; v. 1 7 ; xvi. 32 ; Ro. ix. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 15 ; 1 Pet. v. 14, etc. ji-di/rfs with per- sonal and demonst. pronouns [compare W. 548 (510)] : ^^615 TrdvTet, Jn. i. 16; Ro. viii. 32 ; 2 Co. iii. 18 ; Eph. ii. 3 ; TraVrff 17/ieif, Acts ii. 32; x. 33; xxvi. 14; xxviii. 2; Ro. iv. 1 6 ; oi ndvres rjp-f'is, 2 Co. V. 10 ; ip-ds jravrts, Acts .\x. 25 ; ndvres vpeU, Mt. xxiii. 8 ; xxvi. 31 ; Lk. ix. 48; Acts xxii. 3 ; Ro. xv. 33 ; 2 Co. vii. 15 ; [Gal. iii. 28 R C, L WH] ; Phil. i. 4, 7 sq. ; 1 Th. i. 2 ; 2 Tli". iii. 16, 18 ; Tit. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25, etc.; airot jravrf r, 1 Co. xv. 10; jrtii/Tes airoi. Acts iv. 33 ; xix. 17 ; .xx. 36 ; ovtoi navres, Acts i. 14; .xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 13, 39 ; jrajTcs [LTajr.] out-oj. Acts ii. 7 ; oi 8f ndirres, and they all, Mk. xiv. 64. 2. Neuter jraK, everything, (anything) whatsoever; a. in the Sing. : jrav to. foil, by a ptc]). [on the neut. in a con- crete and collective sense cf. B. § 128, 1], 1 Co. x. 25, 27; Ej)h. V. 13 ; 1 Jn. v. 4 ; 7751» to sc. ov, 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; jrSi/ o, Ro. xiv. 23; Jn. vi. 37, 39, [R. V. all that]; Jn. xvii. 2; Tidv 5, ri av or cdv, whatsoever. Col. iii. 1 7, and Rec. in 23. Joined to prepositions it forms adverbial phrases : 81a navTos or BiaTTairros, always, perpetually, see Sid, A. II. 1 a.; fv navTi, either in every condition, or in every matter^ Phil. iv. 6; 1 Th. v. 18; in everything, in every way, on every side, in every particular or relation, 2 Co. iv. 8; vii. iraLaaiv(iv\, 2 Co. viii. 7 ; Iv ttavri kol iv ttcutiv (see fivea, b.), Phil. iv. 12. b. Plural mivTa (without the article [cf.W. 116 (110); Matthiae § 43»]) alltkinys; a. of a certain definite totality or sum of things, the con- text shewing what things are meant : Mk. iv. 34 ; vi. 30 ; Lk. i. 3 ; [v. 28 L T Tr WH] ; Jn. iv. 25 [here T Tr WH &TT.'\ ; Ro. viii. 28 ; 2 Co. vi. 10; Gal. iv. 1 ; Phil. ii. 14 ; 1 Th. V. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10 ; Tit. i. 15 ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; Trdira Ifiiiv, all ye do with one another, 1 Co. xvi. 14 ; navTa yiveadai nada-Ka. antt. 5, 1,4; 14, 2, 1 ; 1 7, 9, 3 ; b. j. 2, 1,3), aninde- clinable noun [W. § 10, 2] ; prop, a pcu^sing over ; 1. ira 494 iraTqp the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered for the people's deliverance of old from Kg.vpt ), or 2. the pasc/ial lamb, i. e. the lamb which the Israelites were accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the montli Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory of that day on which their fathers, preparing to dejiart from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb, and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their dwellings (Ex. xii. sq. ; Num. ix. ; Deut. xvi.) : dvfiv to it. (npan on-a), Mk. xiv. 12 ; Lk. xxii. 7, (E.X. xii. 21); Christ crucified is likened to the slain ])aschal Iamb, 1 Co. V. I ; 0ayf 11/ to tt., Jit. .xxvi. 1 7 ; Mk. ,\iv. 12, 14 ; Lk. x.xii. 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; nD3n SdX, 2 Clir. x.\x. 17 sq. 3. the paschal supper: eVot/iaffiv to tt., Mt. xxvi. 19 ; Mk. xiv. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 8, 13 ; TroteZi/ to jr. to cel- ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pnx- chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan : Mt. xxvi. 2 ; Mk. xiv. 1 ; Lk. ii. 41 ; xxii. 1 ; Jn. ii. i;i, 23 ; vi. 4; xi. 55; xii. 1 ; xiii. 1 ; xviii. 39; xix. 14; Acts xii. 4 ; wenoitjKc TO n- he instituted the Passover (of Jloses), Ileb. xi. 28 [cf. W. 272 (25G); B. 197 (170)] ; ylveTai ri. irlirovBa (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb. ii. 18); fr. Horn, down; to be affected or have been af- fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it is a vox media — used in either a good or a bad sense; as, o(Ta Trenovdaa-i Koi ocra avTois €yivfTo, of perils and de- liverance from them, Esth. ix. 2G (for nx^) ; hence kokHs TTua-xe'v, to suffer sadli/, be in bad plirjhl, of a sick person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WII txt. k. «x"" ("" the other hand, ev iracr^eiv, to be well off, in good case, often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to he afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes. ; also in the other Grk. writ, where it is used absol.) : absol., Lk. xxii. 15 ; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 3; iii. 18; xvii. 3 ; 1 Co. xii. 26 ; Heb. ii. 18 ; ix. 26 ; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23 ; iii. 17; iv. 15, 19 ; Heb. xiii. 12; 6\iyov, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10; jiatrx^iv TL, Mt. xxvii. 1 9 ; Mk. ix. 12 ; Lk. xiii. 2 ; [xxiv. 26] ; Acts xxviii. 5 ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; [Heb. v. 8 cf. W. 166 (156) a. ; B. § 143, 10] ; Rev. ii. 10 ; iradrifiaTa traaxuv, 2 Co. i. 6 ; t\ ano w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21 ; Lk. ix. 22 ; xvii. 25 ; iratrx. vtto w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; ti vno nvos, Mk. v. 26 ; 1 Th. ii. 14; nda-x- imp twos, in behalf of a pers. or thing, Acts Lx. 1 6 ; Phil. i. 29 ; 2 Th. i. 5 ; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect [cf. AV. § 31, 6], aapKt, 1 Pet. iv. 1"; iv o-apKi. Wnd.'- [yet G L T Tr WH om. fV ; cf. W. 412 (384)] ; Tritrx- nipl w. gon. of the thing and wrtp w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18 [U G WII mrg. ; cf. W. 3 73 (349) ; 383 (358) note] ; natrx- Sill SiKaioa-iii/rjii, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of pleasant experiences ; but nowhere so unless either the adv. ev or an ace. of the thing be added (wo/ixi)o-ai, oo-a naBovTfs f'^ avToH (i. e. flfoO) Kai vrjXiKav tvtpyftTidv ptra- XaffovTfs ax^picToi ■jrpoi avTov yivowro, Joseph, antt. 3, 15, 1 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. II. 5; [L. and S. s. V. II. 2]) : Gal. iii. 4, on which see ye, 3 c. [Com I'. : ivpo-, avp-^a-^ ' Xldxapa, -apu)v, ra, [cf. W. 176 (166)], Patara, a mari- time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo: Acts -xxi. 1. [15. 1). s. V. Patara ; Leiriv, St. Paul. ii. 99 .sq.] • Traxdo-o-u ; ftit. Trard^o) ; 1 aor. fKara^a ; Sejjt. times without number for 7^27] (Iliphil of HDJ, unused in Kal), also for f]jj, etc. ; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart ; fr. Arstpli., Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; 1. to strike gently : tI (as a jjart or a member of the body), Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol., ev paxalpa, with the sword, Lk. xxii. 49 ; tii/o, Mt. xxvi. 51 ; Lk. xxii. 50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils, etc. : as with a deadly disease, Ttvi, Acts xii. 23 ; Tivii eV w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 GLTTrWII; xix. 15, (Gen. viii. 21 ; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. .xii. 23, etc.). 3. by a use solely biblical, to smite doivn, cut down, to kill, slai/ : nvd, Mt. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (after Zech. xiii. 7) ; Acts vii. 24.* iraTco), -a; fut. TraTrjo-o); Pass., pres. ptcp. naTovpfvos; 1 .aor. (iraTijdrjv ; fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat, down; Sept. for ^TH, etc. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush with the feet : ttjv 'Kqvov, Rev. xiv. 20 ; xix. 15, (Judg. ix. 27; Neh.xiii. 15; Jer.x.x.xi. (xlviii.) 33; Lam. i. 15). b. to advance l»j setting foot upon, tread upon : iirdva o(^(wv Koi (TKopniaiv Kai fVi iraaav T^i/ hvvapw toO ix^P"^' *'' ^^' counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina- tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. -xc. (xci.) 13). c. to tread under foot, trample on, i. e. treat with insult and contempt : to desecrate the holy city by devas- tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24 ; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan. viii. 13); see itaTaTraTfM. [CoMr. : Kara-, Trtpt-, ep-Trtpi- jrare'o).] * iraTT)p [fr. r. p3 ; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder ; (Curtius § 348)], irarpos, -rpl, -repa, voc. warep [for which the nom. o iraTrjp is five times used, and (anarthrous) nari^p in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25 L T Tr WII ; cf. B. § 129, 5 ; W. § 29, 2 ; WH. App. p. 158], plur. TTOTepff, iraTepav, Trarpam (Heb. i. 1), ■naTi'pas, 6, [fr. Hbiu. down], Sept. for 3X, a father; 1. prop., i. q. gener- ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq. ; viii. 21 ; Lk. i. 17; Jn. iv. 53 ; Acts vii. 14 ; 1 Co. v. 1, etc. ; 01 Traripes t^s aapKos, fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to onaTTip Tav irvevpaTcov) , Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both par- ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof, auth., cf. Delitzsch ad loc.) ; or b. a more remote ancestor, the founder of a race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather : so Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9 ; Lk. i. 73 ; xvi. 24 ; Jn. viii. iraTiip 495 iraTftia- 39, 53 ; Acts vii. 2 ; Ro. iv. 1 Rec, 1 7 sq., etc. ; Isaac, Ro. ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, JMk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32; plur. falhera i. e. ancestors, foi-efathers, ]Mt. xxiii. 30, 32 ; Lk. vi. 23, 26 ; xi. 4 7 sq. ; Jn. iv. 20 ; vi. 3 1 ; Acts iii. 1 3, 25 ; 1 Co. X. 1, etc., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; so too ni3X, 1 K. viii. 21 ; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 etc. ; in tlie stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22 ; Ro. ix. 5 ; xi. 28. c. i. q. one advanced in years, a «enjor: 1 Jn.ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph. ; a. the origi- nator and transmitter of anytliing : irarr^p TTfptTOfirjs, Ro. iv. 12 ; tlie autlior of a family or society of persons ani- mated by tlie same spirit as himself : so n- vavraiv tSiv Tri(TT€v6vTa>v, Ro. iv. 11, cf. 12, 16, (1 Mace. ii. 54); one who has infused his own spirit into others, who actuates and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44; the phrase tK Trarpot Ttvos fivm is used of one who shows himself as like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in- herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who stands in a father's place, and looks after another in a paternal way : 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf. Sophocles, Lex. s. v.], applied to o. teachers, as those to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training they have received : Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K. ii. 12; vi. 21). p. the members of the Sanhedrin, whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the Interests of others : Acts vii. 2 ; xxii. 1 ; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 7*. 3. God is called the Father, a. tSiv ii>Ta)v, [A. V. of lights i. e.] of the stars, the heaven- ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler, Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings, whether angels or 7nen, because he is their creator, pre- server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GLT Tr WH ; rav Ttveviwraiv, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9 ; and, for the same reason, of all men (narrip tou ttuptos audpairav yevovs, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 24) : so in the .Syn- optic Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36 ; Lk. vi. 36; xi. 2; xii. 30, 32; Jn. iv. 21, 23 ; Jas. iii. 9 ; 6 irarfip 6 Iv (rois) ovpavois, the Father in heaven, Mt. v. 16, 45, 48; vi. 1,9; vii. 11, 21; xviii. 14 ; Mk. xi. 25, 26 RGL; Lk. xi. 13[€|oupai'oD; cf. B. § 151, 2 a. ; W. § 66, 6] ; 6 JTOT. o oipdvioi, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32; XV. 13. c. o/ CAns^jans, as those who throuo-h Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti- mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com- mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial brightness in Ro. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6 ; in -lohn's use of the term it seems to include the additional idea of one wlio by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be- gotten them anew to a life of holiness (see yewda, 2 d.) : absol., 2Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1, 14 (13), 16; iii. 1 ; 6e6s k. narfip ndvrav, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6 ; with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. § 34, 3 b.; B. § 132, 10], 6 jraT. twk olxrippav, 2 Co. i. 3 ; rfjc Sd^ijr, Eph. i. 17; on the phrases 6 6f6s k. jrarrjp i)p,a>v, 6f6s Trarfip, etc., see 6e6s, 3 p. 288'. d. the Father of Jesus Christ, as one whom God has united to himself in the closest bond of lo\e and intimacy, made acquainted with his purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching of John) made to share also in his own divine nature ; he is so called, a. by Jesus himself : simply 6 narfip (opp. to o ui'ds), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21 sq. ; .Jn. v. 20- 23, 26, 36 sq. ; x. 15, 30, etc.; 6 jrarijp /lov, Mt. xi. 27; XXV. 34; xxvi. 53 ; Lk.x.22; Jn.v. 17; viii. 19,49; x. 18, 32, and often in John's Gospel ; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; iii. 5, 21 ; with 6 ev roir oipuvois added, Mt. vii. 11, 21 ; x. 32 sq. ; xii. 50 ; xvi. 1 7 ; xviii. 10, 19 ; 6 oipdvios, Mt. xv. 13; 6 cVovpaMor, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. p. by the apostles: Ro. XV. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 3 ; xi. 31 ; Eph. i. 3 ; iii. 14 Rec. ; CoL i. 3 ; Heb. i. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 3 ; Rev. i. 6. See \_Tholuck (Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9 ; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. X. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes als d. Vaters, (Gottingen, 1865) ; Westcott, Epp. of St. .John, pp. 27-34, and] below in uldr and tIkvov. ndT(ios, -ov, f), Palmns, a small and rocky island in the .Sgean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thuc. 3, 33 ; Strab. 10 p. 488 ; Plin. h. n. 4, 23) ; now called Patmo or [chiefly "in the middle ages" (Howson)] Palmosa and having from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants (cf. Schubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425- 443; S/ee/i", Vorless. iib.die Apokalypse, p. 157; Kneucker in Schenkel iv. p. 403 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. v.]). In it John, the author of the Apocalypse, sajs the revelations were made to him of the approaching consummation of God's kingdom: Rev. i. 9. It has been held by the church, ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. c. Tryph. ij 81 p. 308 a. cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon- icity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv. haer. 5, 30, that this John is the Apostle ; see 'ladvvrit, 2 and 6.* iraTpaXto'os (Attic narpoKotas, Arstph., Plat., Dem. p. 732, 14; Aristot., Lcian.), LTTr WII TraT-poXoJas (see /ir;7-paXo)at), -ov, 6, a parricide : 1 Tim. i. 9.* iraTpid, -Sf, ^, (fr. Trarijp) ; 1. lineage running back to some progenitor, ancestry : Hdt. 2, 143 ; 3, 75. 2. a race or tribe, i. e. a group of families, all those trho in a (/iren people lag claim to a common origin : etal avriav (BapvXavlav) iraTpia'i Tpds, Hdt. 1, 200. The IsraeUtes were distributed into (twelve) rilD3, v\al, tribes, de- scended from the twelve sons of Jacob ; these were divided into nin3'iyp, ■narpial, deriving their descent from the several sons of Jacob's sons; and these in turn were divided into ni:]Sn jT2, o«oe, houses (or families) ; cf. Gesenius, Tlies. i.\>'. 193; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWR. s. v. Stiimme; [Keil, Archaeol. §140]; hence f| oikov Koi Trarpias AavtS. i. e. belonging not only to the same 'house' (Trarpid) as David, but to the very 'family' of David, descended from David himself, hk. ii. 4 (avrai ai narpial tgji/ vlwv SupfCDV, Ex. vi. 15 ; d dvrjp avrrjs Mavaacrrjs TTJs cfivXfii avrrjs koi tIjs naTptas avrris, Judith viii. 2 ; rair (jivXwv Kara Trarptds avratu, Num. i. 16 ; oikol TTarpiaiV, Ex. xii. 3 ; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph, antt. 6. 4, 1 ; 7, 14, 7; 11, 3, 10). 3. famili/ in a wider sense, i. q. nation, people : Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28; Ps. x.\i> ■^aTpiapy^rjii 496 (xxii.) 28) ; jratrn Ttarpia fv oipavoit (i. c. every order of an2;els) (caitVi y^s, E])h. iii. !■'>.' iTarpia.p\r\S' -ovy a, (^rraTpid and ap)(w ; see iKarovrapj^ri^), a Ilellunistie word [\^'. :io], n patriarch, Jhunjcr of a tribe, progenitor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of Israel, Acts vii. 8 sq. ; of Abraham, Ileb. vii. 4 ; of the same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25; used for j"li:3Sn D'X'i, 1 Chr. xxiv. 31 [but the text here is uncertain] ; for D"i32ty 1!?, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22 ; for jTiN^n li:', 2 Chr. xxiii. 20.* ■iroTpiKis, -17, -dv, {naTrjp), paternal, ancestral, i.q. handed (li)«R by or recei\ed from one's fathers : Gal. i. 14. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sept.) [Syx. see jrarpwoj, fin.]* irarpts, -i8or, r], QiraTrjp), one's native country; a. us in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, one's father-land, one's (own) country : Jn. iv. 44 [cf. yap, II. 1] ; i. q. a fi.\ed abode {home [R. V. a rmtnlnj of their oivn^, opp. to the land where one napfinSiipet), Heb. xi. 14. b. one's natire (own) place i. e. city : Mt. xiii. 54, 57 ; Mk. vi. 1, 4 : Lk. iv. 23, [24] ; so Thilo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 (etrrt 8« ^io( 'Upoo-oKvpa narpis) ; Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 3 ; 6, 4, 6 ; a -jrarpis f) 'AKvXrjta rjv, Ildian. S, 3, 2 (1 ed. Bekk.).' IlaTpoPas [al. -y3af, as contr. fr. iraTpo^ios; cf. B. D. s.v. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 176 sq. ; Chandler § 32], ace. -av [cf. B. 19 (17)sq. ; W. § 8, 1], Patruhas, a cer- tain Cbrislian: Ko. xvi. 14." iraTpoXwas, see TraT^aXoJa?. iraTpo-n-opd-SoTOS, -oc, (TTarr^p and TrapaSidaipt), handed ■doirn from one's fathers or ancestors : I Pet. i. 1>S [B. 91 (79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17, 4 ; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 48; Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 34 ; Euseb. h. e. 4, 23, 10; 10,4, 16.)* irarpuos (poetic and Ionic narpwios), -a, -ov, (Trar^p), fr. Honi. down, descendiny from father to son or from ancestors to their posterity as it were hy right of inherit- ance ; received from the fathers : vopos, Acts .xxii. 3 (2 Mace. vi. 1 ; Ael. v.h. 6, 10) : deus, Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace. xii. 19; and often in Grk. writ. 6(o\ jrarp., Zfvs irarp. ■etc.) ; TO tdr) TO w. Acts xxviii. 1 7 (Justin dial. c. Tr. ■c. 63; Ttarp. tdos, Ael. v.h. 7,19 var.).* [Syx. irarpifos, irarpiKcir: on the distinction of the grammarians (see Photius, Suidas, Ammouius, etc. s. vv.) ace. to which iroTpiwr h u.«ed of property descending from father to sou, xaTpiKiJj of persons in friendship or feud, etc., see Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. p. 530 sq. ; L. and S. s. v. TTOTpWOy.] IlavXos, -ov, 6, (a Lat. prop, name, Pnuliis), Paul. Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T., viz. 1. Sergius Paulus, a Roman propraetor [pro- consul ; cf. Sfpyioi, and B. D. s. v. Sergius Paulus], con- verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul: Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew name was Snid (see SaoitX, SaCXos). He was born at Tarsus in Cilicia (.Vets ix. 11 ; xxi. 39 : xxii. 3) of Jew- ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee (Acts -xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen ; hence he himself was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28; xvi. 37). He was endowed with r(Mn:irkal)le gifts, both moral and intellectual. lie learned the trade of a trKrjvoTroios (q. v.). Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was thoroughly indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by the Pharisee Gamaliel (Acts xxii. 3; v. 34). At first ho attacked and persecuted the Christians most fiercely ; at length, on liis way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and undaunted preacher of Christ and tlie founder of many Christian churches. And not only by his unwearied Ui- burs did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of the friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which ap[)ears from his immortal E|nstles, that lie caught per- fectly the mind of his heavenly ilaster and taught most unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all men who repose a living faith in Jesus Christ, and that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly inconijiatiblc with the s|>iritual liberty of which Christ is the author. By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon liimself the deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year 5 7 [or 5t) ace. to the more common ojjinion ; yet see the chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts ; Farrar, St. Paul, ii. excurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment; and as a captive he was carried first to Ca;sarea in Pal- estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of those daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi- astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e. 2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7 ; can. ]\Iin-ator. (cf. Westcott, Canon, 5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paid, released from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in Spain and Asia Minor ; and subsequently, imprisoned a second time, to have been at length ])ut to death at Home in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On this point cf. Meyer on Ro., Introil. § 1 ; Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1. c. ; Lghtft. ibid. p. 49s(p; Hollzmann, Via Pastoralbriefe, Einl. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; re£f. in Ileini- chiii's note on Euseb. h. e. as above; !'. Hofmann, Die heilige Schrift Xeuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sqq. ; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. excurs. viii. ; Schaff, Hist, of Apostolic Christ. (1882) p. 331 sq.] Paul is mentioned in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. resjject- ing his life and its debatalde points see the art. Paulus by A\'oldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356- 389.] iroiu: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, vavaarai (1 Pet. iii. 10); ^lid., pres. TTouo^ai ; impf. fVai/d/iij»; iat. ■7ravos [perh. fr. r. meaning ' to cozen ' ; cf. Pape, Ei- gennamen, s. v.], -ou, t), Paphos [now Baffa], a maritime cHy on the island of Cyprus, with a harbor. It was the residence of the Roman proconsul. " Old Paplios " [now Kuklia'], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of Venus [Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S. E. of it v, 1 Jn. iii. 19. c. to persuade unto i. e. move or induce one by persuasion to do something : nva foil, by an inf. [B. § 139, 46], Acts xiii. 43 ; x.xvi. 28, (Xen. an. 1, 3, 19; Polyb. 4, 64, 2; Diod. 11, 15; 12, 39 ; Joseph. antt. 8, 10, 3); nva foil, by "iva [cf. W. 338 (317); B. § 139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. 2. Passive and Middle [cf. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be persuaded, to suffer one's self to be persuaded; to he in- duced to believe: absol., Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii. 4 ; to have faith, Ueh.xi. 13 Rec; Tivi,ina thing. Acts xxviii. 24; to believe, so. on, Heb. xiii. 18 LTTrWH. TreVei- a-p.ai n [on the neut. ace. cf. B. § 131, 10] irept nvos (gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a person, Heb. vi. 9 [A. V. tve are persuaded better things of you, etc.] ; mneKriievos ei>i, to have persuaded one's self, and n-eMo/jat, to believe, [cf. Eng. to be persuaded], foil, by ace. w. inf., Lk. xx. 6 ; Acts xxvi. 2G ; TTtTTeuriuu on, Ro. viii. 38 ; 2 Tim. i. 5, 12 ; with Iv Kvptio added (see iv, I. 6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14 ; irepi titos on, Ro. xv. 14. b. to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with : nvl, one, Acts v. 36 sq. 39 (40) ; xxiii. 21 ; xxvii. 11 ; Ro. ii. 8 ; Gal. iii. 1 Rec; V. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. iii. 3. 3. 2 pf. n-e- ■noida (Sept. mostly for nD3, also for HDn, \};j^i Xiphal of the unused j;!?'), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be confident : foil, by ace. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19 ; by on, Heb. UetXaro? 498 ireipaafiot xiii. 18 Rec. ; by ori with a preparatory airo toCto [W. § 23, 5], Phil. i. G ; tovto ^nroiddis oiSa on, iliiil. 25 ; ne- woida w. a dat. of the pcrs. or the thing in which tlie confi- dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. T. see B. § 133, 5 ; W. 214 (201) ; § 33, d.]) : Phil. i. 14 ; Philem. 21, (2 K. xviii. 20 ; Prov. .\iv. 16 ; xxviii. 26 ; Is. xxviii. 1 7 ; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24 ; Sap. xiv. 29) ; iavra foil, by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7 ; ci/ tjw, to trust in, put confi- dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u. s.], Phil. iii. 3, 4 ; «V Kvpia foil, by on, Phil. ii. 24 ; twi nn, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WH mrg. ; Mk. x. 24 [where T WU cm. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; Lk. xi. 22 ; xviii. 9 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Heb. ii. 13, (and very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52; 2 Chr. xiv. 11 ; Ps. ii. 13; Prov. iii. 5; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); eVt Tii/a, 5It. xxvii. 43 whqrc L txt. AVH mrg. tVi w. dat. (Is. x.xxvi. 5 ; Hab. ii. 18 ; 2 Chr. xvi. 7 sq., etc.) ; tVt nva foU. by on, 2 Co. ii. 3 ; 2 Th. iii. 4 ; fir nva foil, by on. Gal. v. 10. [COMP. : dva-ncWm.] • IltiXdTos, see niXarof [and cf. ei, i]. iriivOM, -m, inf. niivav (Phil. iv. 12) ; fut. TTfivarrat (Lk. vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16): 1 aor. (Trdvaaa, — for the earlier forms TTeivijv, irdvjjcra), (TTfivrfaa ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61 and 204 ; W. § 13, 3 b. ; [B. 37 (32) ; 44 (38)] ; see also biy^aa ; (fr. ■aeiva hunger ; [see wt'i^r]) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 3J71 ; to hunger, be h ungry ; a. prop. : Mt. iv. 2 ; xii.' 1, 3 ; xxi. 18 ; xxv. 35, 37, 42, 44 ; IVIk. ii. 25 ; xi. 12 ; Lk. iv. 2 ; vi. 3, 25 ; i. q. to suffer want, Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34; to he needy, Lk. i. 53; vi. 21 ; Phil. iv. 12 ; in this same sense it is joined with 8i\jrav, 1 Co. iv. 11 ; in figurative disc, ou Trewaii k. ov Siyjrav is used to describe the condition of one who is in need of nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva- tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crave ardently, to seek ivith eager desire : w. ace. of the thing, TTiv hixaiotrivTiv, Mt. v. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a gen., as xprjimToiv, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 39 ; o-ufi/idx'ai', 7, 5, 50 ; enaivov, oec. 13, 9; cf. W. § 30, 10, b. fin.; [B. § 131, 4] ; Kuinoel on Mt. v. 6, and see 8ti/^dta, 2).* TTcipa, -as, i], (jTcipdu), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi- ment, attempt : ne'ipav "Kafi^dveiv nvos, i. q. to attempt a thing, to make trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com- mon in prof. auth. ; cf. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18 ; Cyr. 3, 3, 38 ; see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488 ; Plat. Protag. p. 342 a. ; Gorg. p. 448 a. ; Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 5 ; Ael. v. h. 12, 22 ; often in Polyb., cf. Schweighduser, Lex. Polyb. p. 460; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56; [other exx. in Bleek on Heb. 1. c. ; Field, Otium Xorv. pars iii. p. 146]), OaKaairqs, to try whether the sea can be crossed dry-shod like the land, Heb. xi. 29 ; to have trial of a thing, i. e. to experience, learn to know by experience, /lacrriyaiv, Ileb. xi. 36 (often in Polyb. ; Trjs jrpovoias, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 1).« impd^u (a form found several times in Hom. and ApoU. Rhod. and later prose, for neipaio [which see in Veitch] more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. fVfi'pafov ; 1 aor. oTftpatra; Pass., pres. Tretpdfo/xot ; 1 aor. cVeipdo-flijv ; pf. ptcp. Treireipacriievos (Heb. iv. 15; see TTfipdio, 1); 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, i^eipdaa (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.) ; Sept. for nOJ ; to try, i. e. 1. to try whether a thing can be done ; to attempt, endeavor : with an inf.. Acts ix. 26 L T Tr WH ; xvi. 7; xxiv. 6. 2. to try, make trial of, test : nva, for the purpose of ascertaining his quality, or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a. in a good sense : Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.] ; Jn. vi. 6; [2 Co. xiii. 5] ; Rev. ii. 2. b. in a bad sense: to test one mahciously, craftily to put to the proof his feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1 ; xix. 3 ; xxii. 18, 35 ; Mk. viii. 1 1 ; X. 2 ; xii. 15 ; Lk. xi. 16 ; xx. 23 (where G T WH Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words n fit jretpdffTf) ; Jn. viii. 6. c. to try or test one's faith, virtue, charac- ter, by enticement to sin ; hence ace. to the context i. q. to solicit to sin, to tempt : Jas. i. 13 sq. ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Rev. ii. 10 ; of the temptations of the devil, Mt. iv. 1, 3 ; Jlk. i. 13 ; Lk. iv. 2; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; hence, 6 neipa- fv 6e6v, — by exhibitions of distrust, as though they wished to try whether he is not justly dis- trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God's justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were, to give proof of his perfections : Acts xv. 10 ; Heb. iii. 9 R G, (Ex. xvii. 2, 7 ; Num. xiv. 22 ; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 41, 5G; cv. (cvi.) 14, etc.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on .Sap. p. 49) ; sc. rov Xpiarov [L T Tr txt. WH r. Kvpiov'], 1 Co. X. 9 [but L mrg. T WH mrg. f^enfipaaav] ; to TTvdpa Kvpiov, Acts V. 9 ; absol. neipd^av iv SoKifiaaia (see doKipa- ala), Heb. iii. 9 L T Tr WH. [On TtfLpd^a (as compared with Sowpafm), see Trench § l.\xiv.; cf. Creraer s. v. CoMP. : €/t-7rfipdfco.] ' Tr6ipcur(i6s, -oC, 6, (?r«pdf(o, q. v.), Sept. for TiBTi, an ex- periment , attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tenlatio); a. univ. trial, proving : Sir. xxvii. 5, 7 ; rov ireipatrpov vpa>v iv Tj) a-apKt pov, the trial made of you by my bodily con- dition, since this condition served to test the love of the Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 LTTrWH [cf. b. below, and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. b. spec, the trial of vian's fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc. : 1 Pet. iv. 12 ; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris- ino' from the desires or from outward circumstances, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. .x. 13; vnopfvfiv neipacTp6v,-lai-.\. 12; an internal teraiitation to sin, 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; of the temp- tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the Messiah from his divine errand, Lk. iv. 13 ; of a condi- tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed to sin, or to a lapse from faith and hohness : in the phrases (itr(f>epeiv nva els iretp-, Jit. vi. 13 ; Lk. xi. 4 ; fl(T- epxfcBai els n-, Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 [here T WH epx-'i ; Lk. xxii. 40, 46 ; adversity, affliction, trouble, [cf. our trial'], sent by God and serving to test or prove one's faith, holiness, character : plur., Lk. xxii. 28 ; Acts xx. 19; Jas. i. 2 ; 1 Pet. i. 6 ; rov veip. pov rov ev tji aapKi pov. ireipao) 499 •jrev7}<; my temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv. 14 Rec. [but see a. above] ; apa tou nfipaa/iov, Rev. iii. 10; €K n-. pitadai, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3; Sir. ii. 1 ; vi. 7 ; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1 ; 1 Mace. ii. 52). c. 'temptation' (i. e. trial) of God hy men, i. e. rebellion against God, by which his power and justice are, as it were, put to the proof and challenged to show them- selves : Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi. 16 ; ix. 22 ; Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8). Cf. Fried. B. Koester, Die bibl. Lehre von der Ver- suchung. Gotha, 1859. • (The word has not yet been found in prof. auth. exc. Diosc. praef. 1 : tovs tVi nadap IT. experiments made on diseases.) * ireipdw ; impf. mid. 3 pers. (s^ing. and plur), iTtuparo, fTTCipwvTO ; pf. pass. ptcp. Trenfipapivos (see below) ; com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; to try ; i. e. 1. to rnahe a trial, to attempt, [A. V. to assaij'], foU. by an infin. ; often so fr. Hom. down ; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26 RG; xxvi. 21, (Xen. s\-mp. 4, 7; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, etc.; often in Polyb. ; Ael. v. h. 1 , 34 ; 2 Mace. ii. 23 ; 3 Mace. i. 25 ; 4 Mace. xii. 2, etc.); hence ninfipapivos taught by trial, ex- perienced, Heb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([Rec."], Tdf. formerly) [see below, and cf. 7!€tpa^a>, d. a.]. 2. In post- Hom. usage with the ace. of a pers. to test, maJ:e trial of one, put him to the proof : his mind, sentiments, temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in- duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf. Passow s. V. 3 a. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. IV. 2]. Hence jTcwftpa/ieVos in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained by some [cf. W. § 15 Note ad fin.], tempted to sin; but the Pass, in this sense is not found in Grk. writ. ; see Delitzscb ad loc* iK\,, i. e. the 'beating' waves (cf. our ' plash')], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop, the sea i. e. the high sea, the deep, (where ships sail ; accordingly but a part of the sea, 6aKaa ; int. TTf u6rj(Tu>; 1 aor. imvBrjtra; (nevBoi); f r. Horn, down ; Sept. chietly for SsK ; to mourn ; a. intrans. : Mt. v. 4 (0) ; ix. 15 ; 1 Co. v. 2 ; nevBeiv k. K\aUiv, Mk. xvi. 10 ; Lk. vi. 25 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 15, 1!) ; tn-t Tivi, over one, ReV. xviii. 11 R G L (Is. l.\vi. 10), eVi Ttva, ibid. T Tr WII (2 S. xiii. 37; 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, etc.). b. tra.n!'. to mourn for, lament, one: 2 Co. xii. 21 [ef. W. C35sq. (500); B. § 131,4. Syn. see Spri^ew, fin.] - xt'vBos, -ovs, TO. (mv6o> [('?) ; alk. viii. 22, {tov TTOTapov, Xen. an. 3, 5, 2). [See ,Sojjhocles, Lex. s. v.] • ■n-f'pas, -aros, to, (jrepa beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ex- tremity, bound, end, [see Tc'Xor, 1 a. init.] ; a. of a portion of space (boundary, frontier) : mpara t^s yrjs, [the eiids of the earth"], i. cp the remotest lands, Mt. xii. 42 ; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. II. 8, 478 [Trfipap']; Thuc. 1, 69 ; Xen. Ages. 9, 4 ; Sept. for y^K 'l)3N [W. 30]) ; also t^i oiKou/ieVi/s, Ro. X. 18 (Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a tiling extending through a period of time (termination) : dvTiKoyias, Heb. vi. 16 (riov KaKwv, Aeschyl. Pers. G32; Joseph, b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).» IIcpYap'Os [perh. -pov, to, (the gend. in the N. T. is in- determinate ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq. ; Pape, Eigen- namen, s. vv. )], -ov, 17, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf. Curtius §413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor, the seat of the dynasties of Attains and Eumenes, cele- brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention [(?) cf. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39 sq. ; Birl, Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch- ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the Cctius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623 ; Plin. 5, 30 (33) ; 13, 11 (21) ; Tac. ann. 3, 63). It was the birthplace of the nipyr) 501 Trepi physician Galen, and had a great royal library. Mod- ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there ; Rev. i. 11 ; u. 12.* IlfpYn, -rjs, r], [cf. the preceding word], Perye or Perga, a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. On a hill near the town was the temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis] (Strab. 1*4 p. G67; Mel. 1, 14; Liv. 38, 37) : Acts xiii. 13 sq.; xiv. 25. [BB. DD. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] * irtpi, (akin to ntpa, irepaV, [Curtius §359]), prep., joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. cir- cum, circa; around, about. I. with the Genitive it denotes that around which an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, etc., (Lat. de, quod atlinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) [cf. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. de; in later Lat. also circa) : after verbs of speaking, teaching, writing, etc., see under dfayyf'XXcij, aTray- ■ye'XXci), aTroXoyoO^ai, yoyyv^co, ypatpco, 5r;Xoa), fiia/Se/Satoij- jiat, diayvapi^w, dtaXeyo^at, di8daK(a, Strjyov^ai (Heb. xi. 32), diTjyjjais, eiirov and Trpotiirov, eTrepcoTao} and iptardo), KaTT)-)^eiji, XaXe'co, Xeyco, \6yov alreco, Xoyoi' dnobibwfjit, Xoyoi' dlbcofjLC, fiaprvpeoj, p.veta, fivrjpiovevoj, TrpoKarayye XXo), npo- , vnofjLtp.vT](TKQ}, ^pT]fiaTL^ofj.ai, rjxos, (f>i]^^, etc. ; after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining, inquiring, see under aKova, yivaaKO), fnlo-Tafiai, eiSoi*, f^erd^o), ^r]T€(o, ^K^Tjrea, eVt^T/reo), ^rjTTjfia, nvvduvofiat, etc. ; after verbs of thinking, deciding, supposing, doubting, etc.; see under 3iaXoyi'fo(jai, ev6vp.(op.ai, ni- TTftiTfiai, irtarfvia, SiaTropea, eX€y;^a), etc. b. as re- spects [A. V. often (as) touching'] ; a. with verbs, to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con- cerned ; zvith regard to, in reference to : Acts xxviii. 21 ; Heb. xi. 20 ; ^ ■atpi. rroxi /iveia, 2 Tim. i. 3 ; i^ovcriav ex^ '"> 1 Co. vii. 37; i-nirayriv tx^iv, ibid. 25; see ivjlXKofiai, ivToKri, TrapaKokeoj, TrapafjLvdeo^at, 7rp6(paa-LS, cKbtKos, Xay- xdva> to cast lots. p. with the neut. plur. [and sing.] of the article, ra irepl tivos the things concerning a person or thing, i. e. what relates to, can be said about, etc. : to jTfpi rrfs ^aaiXeias toC dtoC, Acts i. 3; viii. 12 [Rec] ; xix. 8 [here LTrWHom. to]; to nepl ttjs oSoO, Acts xxiv. 22 ; with the gen. of a pers. 'one's affairs, his con- dition or state : Acts xxviii. 15 ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Phil. i. 27 ; ii. 19 sq. ; Col. iv. 8 ; in a forensic sense, one's cause or case. Acts xxiv. 10 ; to n-epi 'Irja-ov (or toO Kvpiov), [^the (rumors) about Jesus (as a worker of miracles), Mk. v. 27 T Trmrg. br. AVH]; thethings (necessary to be known and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25 ; xxiii. 11 ; xxviii. 23 Rec, 31 ; the things that befell Jesus, his death, Lk. xxiv. 19 ; the things in the O. T. relati\ e to him, the prophecies concerning him, ibid. 27; the career, death, appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here T Tr WH to etc.]. 7. TTfpi Ttvos, absol., at the beginning of sen- tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 1 ; xvi. 1, 12 ; but in other places it is more properly taken with the foil, verb, Mt. xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 36 ; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co. vii. 25 ; viii. 1, 4 ; xii. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ; cf. W. 373 (350). c. on account of ; a. of the sub j ect- matter, which at the same time occasions the action expressed by the verb : so after verbs of accusing, see fy/caXe'w, KaTrjyopio), Kpiva Ttva irepl Tivos, etc. ; after verbs expressing emotion, see davpu^ai, dyavaKreai, Kavj(dofjiai, 0"7rXay;^Vi^o/iat, €V)^api(TTC(t), fv^apKnia, alviui, piXet p.ot, jiepifivdai ; also after fii)(op.ai, 3 Jn. 2, see jras-, II. 2 b. 6. p. of the cause for (on account of) which a thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the action or occurrence : Mk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14 ; Jn. x. 33, (irepl T^s pXaa-(t>t]p.ias Xa^fre aiiTov, Ev. Nic. C. 4, p. 546 ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]) ; Acts xv. 2; xix. 23 ; .xxv. 15, 18, 24 ; Col. ii. 1 [RG]. y. on account of, i. e. for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24 R G ; Lk. iv. 38 ; Jn. xvi. 26 ; .wii. 9, 20 ; Heb. V. 3 ; xi. 40 ; iripl and xmip alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf. W. 383 (358) n. also § 50, 3 ; B. § 147, 21. 22 ; Wieseler, Meyer, Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. on Gal. i. 4]. S. nepl is used of the design or purpose for removing something or taking it away : jrepi dpaprlas, to destroy sin, Ro. viii. 3 ; StSovat eavTov nep\ twv afiapnav, to expiate, atone for, sins, Gal. i. 4 (where R ^V'II txt. vnep [see as in y. above, and cf. in-c'p, I. 6]) ; also to offer sacrifices, and simply sacrifices, nep\ dpapTiwv, Heb. v. 3 [R G virep ; see u. s.] ; X. 18, 26 ; Trcpl dpiapriav i'lTadf [^aTredavfvl, 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; Tvep't dpaprias sc. dva-im. sacrifices for sin, expia- tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7 ; cf. Num. viii. 8 ; see dp-aprla, 3 ; ra wfpi Tijs dp.. Lev. vi. 25 ; to Trepi T. d. Lev. xiv. 19) ; iXacrpos Trepl t. ajxapTcCiv, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10. II. with the Accusative (W. 406 (379)) ; a. of Place; about, around: as, about parts of the body, Mt.™. 4 ; [.xviii. 6 L T Tr WH] ; Mk. i. 6 ; ix. 42 ; Lk. xvii. 2 ; Rev. xv. G. about places : Lk. xiii. 8 ; Acts xxii. 6 ; Jude 7 ; ra irepi tov tottop fKcivov, the neighborhood of that place. Acts xxviii. 7 ; 01 Trtpt w. an ace. of place, those dwelling about a plaoe or in its vicinity, Mk. iii. 8 [T Tr AVH om. L br. 01]. 01 nepi Ttva, those about one i. e. with him, his companions, associates, friends, etc., Mk. iv. 10 ; Lk. xxii. 49 ; [add, Mk. xvi. AVH (rejected) " Shorter Conclusion "] ; ace. to Grk. idiom 01 Trfpi tov IlaCXoi', Paul and his companions (Germ, die Paulusge- sellschaft) [cf. AA". 406 (379) ; B. § 125, 8], Acts xiii. 13 ; ace. to a later Grk. usage ai irfp'i UdpBav denotes Martha herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer. AA'eiss, Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at- tendants or domestics ; but L Tr AVH read irpor ttj v (for Tar TTfp'O ndpSav) ; cf. ^Vlatthiae § 583, 2 : Bnhdy. p. 263 ; Kuhner ii. p. 230 sq. ; [AA^ and B. u. s.]. in phrases the underlying notion of which is that of revolving about something: of persons engaged in any occupa- tion, oj TTfpi TO vmavTa ipydrai [A. V. the workmen of like occupation'], .Acts xix. 25 ; TTtpitnTacrdai, rvp^d^ea-dm irepi n, Lk. X. 40, 41 [but here L T Tr AVH txt. eopv3dCn q- v. (and AVH mrg. om. jrcpi TroXXd)], {nepl tt;i' yiiopylav yiVe- irepuiyo} 502 Trepis'xto a6ai, 2 Mace. xii. 1). b. ns to, in reference to, con- cerning : so after aboxiixos, 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; airroxeiv, 1 Tim. vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; vavaydv. 1 i'im. i. 10 ; voadv, 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; TTfpt Travra iavrov 7rape)(fa'3ai tvttov, Tit. ii. 7 ; ra trepi (fii, the state of my affairs, Phil. ii. 23 ; of nepi ra Xotira fTTtOviitai, Mk. iv. 1!) (at nfpi to tru>)jLa (wiBvfiiai, Ar- istot. rliet. 2, 12, 3; ravtpX ''I^X'I" *• •"^M" aya^a, eth- Nic. 1,8); cf. W. § 30, 3 X. .5 ; [B. § liS, !)]. o. of Time; in a somewhat indefinite specification of time, about, near: n-fpi Tplriji' oipav, Mt. xx. 3; add, 5 sq. 9; xxvii. 46 ; Mk. vi. 48 ; Acts .\. [3 L T Tr WH], 9 ; xxii. G. m. in Composition jTfpi in the X.T. signifies 1. in a circuit, round about, all around, as TTfpiaya, nipi- /SoXXu, ircpiaoTpajrTti), wepiKtiiim, jrepioiKeoi, etc., etc. 2. beijond (because that which surrounds a thing does not belong to the thing itself but is beyond it) : ntpiepyos, irtpifpya^ofiai, TTepiXftVo), ntptpevai, trfpiovffios, n€ptcrs, vepia-afiio. 3. throuyh [(?) — inten si ve, rather (cf. TrfpiaTTTd), 2)] ; TVfpiTTfipul. ircpt-dY*" ; imj)f. Trtptriyov ; f r. ITdt. down ; 1. trans. a. to lead around [cf. 7T(pl, III. 1]. b. i. q. to lead about with one's self: rtva (Xeu. Cyr. 2, 2, 28 ; rpe'is naiSas aKo\ovdovs, Dcm. p. 958, IG), 1 Co. ix. 5. 2. intrans. to yo about, walk about, (Ceb. tab. c. 6) : absol. Acts xiii. 1 1 ; with an ace. of place (depend- ing on the prep, in compos., cf. Matthiae § 42G ; [B. 144, (126); W. § 52, 2 c.; 432 (402)]), Mt.iv. 23 [K G; (al. read the dat. with or witliout eV)] ; ix. 35; xxiii. 15; Jlk. vi. C.* irepi-aipe'u, -m : 2 aor. inf. ncpie\fiv, [ptcp. plur. irtpi- eKovTfi ; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. T!f piaipflrai] ; impf. 3 pers. sing. nepirjpfiTo ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. chiefly for Ton ; a. to take away that which surrounds or en- velops a thing [cf. irepl. III. 1]: to Ki'iKvppa, pass., 2 Co. iii. 16 (nop^ipav, 2 Mace. iv. 38 ; tov haKTvKwv, Gen. xli. 42; Joseph, antt. 19, 2, 3) ; ayKvpas, the anchors from both sides of the ship, [Ii. V. casting off'\. Acts xxvii. 40 ; [2 aor. ptcp., absol., in a nautical sense, to cast loose, Actsxxviii. 13WII(al. fffpifX^dn-er)]. b. metaph. to take away altogether or entirely: ras ifjuipTias (with which one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e. to expiate perfectly, Ileb. x. 1 1 ; ti)v eXirlba, pass.. Acts xxvii. 20.* irepi-dirrii) : 1 aor. ptcp. 7rfpidi//ar; [fr. Pind. down]; 1. to bind or tie around, to jmt around, [rrfpt. III. 1]; to hang upon, attach to. 2. to kindle ajire around [or thoroughly ; see TTepiKpinrra, jrepjicaXuTrra), irfpKpaTris, TreptXujros, etc.] (Phalar. ep. 5, p. 28) : Lk. xxii. 55 T Wll Tr txt.* ir€pi-a ; 2 aor. nepielidkov ; pf. pass, ptcp. Kepi^fffKripevos ; 2 aor. mid. 7rfpie,Sa\6pr]v ; 2 fut. mid. Ttfpi^aKovpai. ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chiefly for 7103 to cover, cover up ; also for 1:^5^ to clothe, and no;; to veil ; to throw around, to put round ; a. jroXfi xapoKa, to surround a city with a bank (palisade), Lk. xix. 43 ([Ii G Tr L txt. WHmrg.]; see naptp^aWw, •1). b. of garments, ruia, to clothe one : Mt. xxv. 36, 38, 43 : Ttva rt, to put a thing on one, to clothe one with a thing [B. 149 (130) ; AV. § 32, 4 a.] : Lk. xxiii. U [here T AVII om. L Tr br. ace. of pers.] ; Jn. xix. 2 ; pass., Mk. xlv. 51 ; xvi. 5 ; Rev. vii. 9, 13 ; x. 1 ; xi. 3 ; xii. 1 ; xvii. 4 (where Rec. has dat. of the thing ; [so iv. 4 L WH txt., but al. eV w. dat. of thing]); xviii. IC; xix. 13; !Mid. to put on or clothe one's self: absol. Rev. iii. 18; w. ace. of the thing [cf. B. § 135, 2], .Mt. vi. 31 ; Acts xii. 8; passively, — in 2 aor., Mt. vi. 29; Lk. xii. 27; in 2 aor. w. ace. of tlie thing, Rev. iii. 18 ; xi.\. 8; in 2 fut. witli ei/ Ttvi [R. u. s. ; see «V, I. 5 b. p. 21 0»], Rev. iii. 5.* irtpL-pXt'irw : impf. .mid. 3 pers. sing. irepif^XfireTo ; 1 aor. ptcp. wfpt^Xfi/'dfifi'or; tolookaround. In the N. T. only in the mid. (jo look round about one's self) : absol., Mk. ix. 8 ; x. 23 ; foil, by an inf. of purpose, Mk. v. 32 ; Ttva, to look round on one (i. e. to look for one's self at one near by), Mk. iii. 5, 34; Lk. vi. 10; «r Tivat, Ev. Nic. c. 4 ; irarra, ^Ik. xi. 1 1 . (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept.) • irepi-PoXaiov, -ov, to, (jrfpi^dXXo)), prop, a covering thrown around, a wrapper; in the N. T. 1. a man- tle : Ileb. i. 12 (Ps. ei. (cii.) 27 ; Ezek. xvi. 13 ; xxvii. 7 ; Is. lix. 17; Trept^. /Sao-iXiKox and jrept)3. ik nop. Ttipi-ipyaXfifioi ; (see nfpi, III. 2) ; to bustle about use- lessly, to busy one's self about trifling, needless, useless mat- ters, (Sir. iii. 23 ; Ildt. 3, 46; Plat. apol. p. 19b.; al.) : u^^ed apparently of a person officiously inquisitive about others' affairs [A. V. to be a busybody], 2 Th. iii. 1 1 , as in l)em. p. 150, 24 [cf. p. 805, 4 etc.].* irepUp-yos, -ov, (jsfpi and fpyov; see fffpi. III. 2), busy about Irijles and neglectful of important matters, esp. busy about other folks' affairs, a busybody : 1 Tim. v. 13 (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. mem. 1, 3, 1 ; jrtp. Ka\ noXvnpay- pwv, Epict. diss. 3, 1, 21) ; of things: to irfpUpya, imper- tinent and superfluous, of magic [A. V. curious] arts, Acts xix. 19 (so fffpifpyor practising magic, Aristaen. epj). 2, 18, 2 [cf. Plut. Alex. 2, 5]) ; cf. Kypke, Observv. and Kuinoel, Com. ad loc.* iripi-ipxo^iax ; 2 aor. Trepii^Kdov ; fr. Ildt. down ; to go about: of strollers. Acts xix. 13; of wanderers, Ileb. xi. 37; of navigators (making a circuit), .\cts xxviii. 13 [here WH irepiiKovres, see nfpiaipea, a.] ; Tas olxias, to go about from house to house, 1 Tim. v. 13.* •irepi-€xw ; 2 aor. nipteirxov \ fr. Horn, down ; in the N. T. to surround, encompass ; i. e. a. to contain : of the subject-matter, contents, of a writing (17 /3i3Xor ■nepiix,(t TQj 7rpfi|fif, Diod. 2, 1 ; ^Joseph, c. Ap. (I, 1) ; irepi^covvvui 503 ireptfievm 1, 8, 2 ; 2, 4, 1 ; 2, 38, 1]), eTricTToX^i' nepifxova-av tov rCnrov TovTov, a letter of which this is a sample, or a letter written after this form [cf. tvttos, 3], Acts xxiii. 25 [L T Tr AVH €;^ov<7ai' (cf. Grimm on 1 Maec. as below)] (tov rpo- jTox TOVTOV, 1 JIacc. XV. 2 ; 2 Mace. xi. 16) ; intrans. [B. §129, 17n.; 144 (126) n.]: weptex" «" (^n) 7P'"Pn> i* is contained in (holy) scripture, 1 Pet. ii. G KGTTr WH; absol., neptex" V ypa<^n (our runs), foil, by direct disc, ibid. Lchin. : likewise 6 vd/ior vjii>v Tifpie'^et, Ev. Xicod. c. 4 ; witli adverbs : irepUxftv ovtcds, 2 Mace. ix. 18 ; xi. 22 ; Kadiji Trepifx" 3i,3Xo9 'Ei>a>X' Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 10; i>s r] napa$oc7i.s rripiex^i-j Euseb. h. e. 3, 1 ; see Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 29. b. i. q. to lake possession of, to seize : rtvd, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 10, 1).* •mpi-X^oiwva, or -^cawv^i : Mid., 1 fut. •jT€pt^vv, to fasten one's cloth- ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk. xii. 35. Mid. to gird one's self: absol., Lk. xii. 37 ; xvii. 8 ; Acts .xii. 8 Bee. ; tijh ocr(f>vv iv oKrfBda, with truth as a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one's self with knowl- edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14 ; with an ace. of the thing with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as craK- Kov, Jer. iv. 8 ; vi. 26 ; Lam. ii. 10 : a-ToXijv 8d|;;s, Sir. xlv. 7 : and in trop. expressions, SvmfjLiv, €i(ppocrivr)v, 1 S. ii. 4 : Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 33 ; [B. § 135, 2]) ; npos tois p-a- uToi': ^ttivT}v, Rev. i. 13; ^oivas nepl to. evy(, dvarpcTre ; [cf. further, D'OrvUle's Chariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282] ; this use of the verb is censured by Lcian. soloec. 5) : in the N. T. so with an ace. of the thing [cf. W. 1. c], 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. iii. 9.* irepi-Koflappia, -roy, to, (yifpinaBalpa, to cleanse on all sides [TTcpi, III. 1]), off-scouring, refuse: plur. to Trepiic. Toil Koa-pov [A. V. the filth of the world^, metaph. the most ■ahject and despicable vien, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 3, 22, 78; purgamenta urbis, Curt. 8, 5, 8 ; 10, 2, 7; [see Wetstein on 1 Co. 1. c] ; Sept. once for 133, the price of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the Grks. used to apply the term Ka6app.aTa to victims sacri- ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to crim- inals who were maintained at the public expense, that on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the state.) * irepi-KaO-i^w : 1 aor. ptcp. TrepiKadicras ; 1. in class. Grk. trans, to bid or make to sit around, to invest, besiege, a city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be sealed around: so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lchm. txt.* ■jrcpi-KoXiirru ; 1 aor. ptcp. irepLKaXvij/as ; pf . pass. ptcp. TTfpiKfKaXvppivos ; fr. Hom. down ; to cover all around [n(pi, III. 1], to cover up, cover over: ro TtpocrariTov, ilk. xiv. 65 ; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold^ ; ti xpvcrlco, Heb. ix. 4 (Ex. x,xviii. 20).* ir€p£-K«i(iai ; (jrepi and itflpat) ; f r. Hom. down ; 1. to lie around [cf. irfpi', HI. 1] : irepl [cf. W. § 52, 4, 12] n, [A. y. were hanged, Mk. ix. 42] ; Lk. xvii. 2 ; cxovrey TzepiKclpevov rip.lv vetpos, [A. V. are compassed about tcith a cloud etc.], Heb. xii. 1. 2. passively [cf. B. 50 (44)], to ,be compassed with, have round one, [with ace. ; cf. W. § 32, 5 ; B. § 134, 7] : SKv(tiv, Acts xxviii. 20 (8e- (Tpa, 4 Mace. xii. 3) ; atrdiveiav, infirmity cleaves to me, Heb. V. 2 {^Z^piv, Theocr. 23, 14 ; dpavpoxrtv, vi(f)os, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6).* ir£pi-K£(|)aXaia, -as, f}, (TTfpt and Ke : fut. TrepiKviiKaxra ; to encircle, compass about: of a city (besieged), Lk. xix. 43. (Arstph. av. 346 ; Xen. an. 6, 1 (3), 1 1 ; Aristot. h. a. 4, 8 [p. 533', 11] ; Lcian., al. ; Sept. for 2'2'D.) * ■Trepi-Xd(iir) ; (7!fpi further [cf. irfpi, HI. 2]); to wail for: trept^ 504 Trepfrroirjat^ ri, Actsi. 4. (Gcn. xlix. 18 ; Sap. viii. 12 ; Arstph., Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., al.) • ir«pi| [on the formative or strengthening | cf. Lob. ParaHp. p. 131], adv., fr. Aeschyl. down, round about: ni n-e/ji| TrdXfir, the cities round about, the circumjacent cities, Afts v. IC* ircpi-oiKc'u, -a>; to dwell round about : rtva [cf. W. § 52, 4, 12], to be one's neighbor, Lk. i. 65. (Ildt., Arstph., Xen., Lys., Plut.) * ircpC-otKos, -ov, {irepi and o'kos), dwelling around, a neighbor : Lk. i. 58. (Gen. xL\. 29 ; Deut. i. 7 ; Jer. xxx. (xlix.) 5 ; Hdt., Thuc, Xen., Isocr., al.) • x€piov', (Ex. xix. 5) ; Deut. vii. 6 ; xiv. 2 ; xxvi. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. ' Fresh Revision ' etc. App. ii.]' ircpiox^, -rjs, rj, {-irepiixa, (J. V.) ; 1. an encompass- ing, ciimpass, circuit, (Theophr., Diod., Plut., al.). 2. that which is contained ; spec, the contents of any writing. Acts viii. 32 (Cic. ad Attic. 13, 25; Stob. eclog. ethic, p. 164 [ii. p. 541 ed. Gaisford]) [but A. V. place i. e. pas- sage ; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].* irepi-iraTeu, -i; impf. 2 pers. sing. irepiaraTeis, 3 pers. jrepjf ffUTf t, plur. jrepiewdrovx ; f ut. 7TfpnraTr] 3 b., dfas, 1 Th. iv. 1 ; oGrojr, wf,. 1 Co. vii. 17 ; so that a nom. of (juality must be sought from what follows, ij(dpo\ roC ornupoO toC XptaTov, I'liil. iii. 1«. with a dat. of the thing to which the life is given or consecrated : xuipois, pcdats, etc., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz- sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140 sq. ; w. a dat. of the standard ace. to which one governs his life [cf. Fritzsche u. s. p, 142 ; also B. § 133, 22 b. ; W. 219 (205)] : Acts xxi. 21 ; Gal. V. 16 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; foil, by iv w. a dat. denoting either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or vice to which he is given [cf. iv, 1. 5 e. p. 210'' bot.] : Ro. vi. 4 ; 2 Co. iv. 2 ; Eph. ii. 2, 10 ; iv. 1 7 ; v. 2 ; Col. iii. 7 r iv. 5 ; 2 Jn. 4, 6 ; 3 Jn. 3 sq. ; iv ^papaai, of those who have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, lleb. xiii. 9 ; iv Xpto-Tw [see iv, I. 6 b.], to live a life conformed to the- union entered into with Christ, Col. ii. 6 ; Kara w. an ace. of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living, [Mk. vii. 5] ; 2 Jn. G ; Kara av6pa>iTov, 1 Co. iii. 3 ; Kara- : impf. pass. 3 pars. sing. ireputntaTo ; fr. Xen. down ; to draw around [Trcpi, HI. 1], to draw aieay, distract ; pass, metaph., to be driven about mentally, to be distracted : Trfpi ti, i. e. to he over-occupied, too busy, about a thing, Lk. .\. 40 [A. V. cumbered'\ ; in the same sense with rfi Siavola added, Polyb. 3, 105, 1 ; 4, 10, 3 ; Diod. 1, 74 ; irepKmav tov apyov brjpov Trepl ras e^io tXTparelas, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 43 ; pass, to be distracted with cares, to be troubled, distressed, [cf. W. 23], for nji* Eccl. i. 13; iii. 10.' irepicro-eia, -as, fj, (irfpia-creia, q. V.) ; ' 1. abun- dance : TTis )(apiTos, Ro. v. 1 7 ; t^s ;(ap59, 2 Co. viii. 2 ; ds TV€picTa-eiav, adverbiallj-, superabundantly, superfluously, [A. V. out of measure^, 2 Co. x. 15, (Boeckh, Corp. in- scrr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. writ.). 2. su- periority ; preference, pre-eminence : ini", Eccl. vi. 8 ; for pin;, Eccl. ii. 13; x. 10. 3. gain, profit: for jnn;, Eccl. i. 3; ii. 11 ; iii. 9, etc. 4. residue, re- mains : KOKias, the wickedness remaining over in the Christian from his state prior to conversion, Jas. i. 21, see n-fpiVo-eupa, 2 ; [al. adhere in this pass, to the mean- ing which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz. 'excess', 'superabundance,' (A.V. superfluity)"].* irepCo-(r€u|jia, tos, to, (jrepio-o-nJo)) ; 1. abundance, in which one delights ; opp. to vo-rip^pa, 2 Co. viii. 14 (13), 14 ; trop. of that which fills the heart, Mt. xii. 34 ; Lk. vi. 45, (Eratosth., Plut.). 2. what is left over, residue, remains : plur. Mk. viii. 8.* irepio-o-ewu ; impf. iircpiiriTevov (Acts xvi. 5) ; fut. inf. 7rfpi(T(r€ijnos napa ro KTijvos; Ecch iii. 19). 2. by later Greek usage transitively [cf. W. p. 23; § 38,1], to make to abound, i.e. a. to furnish one richly so that he has abun- dance : pass., Mt. xiii. 12 ; xxv. 29 ; w. gen. of the thing with which one is furnished, pass. Lk. xv. 1 7 WH Trtxt. ; t! fit Tiva, to make a thing to abound unto one, to confer a thing abundantly upon one, 2 Co. ix. 8 ; Eph. i. 8. b. to make abundant or excellent: ti, 2 Co. iv. 15; to cause one to excel : riva, w. a dat. of the thing, 1 Th. iii. 1 2. (tos tkpas, to extend the hours beyond the prescribed time, Athen. 2 p. 42 b.) [CoMP. : ijrfp-jrfpto-o-fum.] * irepwro-is, -rj, -6v, (fr. nepl, q. v. III. 2), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for ini'^ -\iy, etc.; exceeding some number or meas- ure or rank or need ; 1. over and above, more than is necessary, superadded : to tt. Tovrav, what is added to- [A. v. more than ; cf. B. § 132, 21 Rem.] these, Jit. v. 37; « TTfpiaraov, exceedingly, beyond measure, jMk. vi. 51 [Wll om. Tr br. ix n. ] ; xiv. 31 Rec. ; iirtp ix treptaaov (written as one word vTTfpeKwfpiircTov [q. v.]), exceeding abundantly, supremely, Eph. iii. 20 [cf. B. u. s.] ; 1 Th. iii. 10; v. 13 [RGWII txt.] ; nepiuaov pot i(mv, it is superfluous for me, 2 Co. ix. 1 ; nepLaaov fxfiv, to have abundance, Jn. x. 10 (oj pev . . . jrepicraa exovcriv, oi fit oific TO avayKciia hvvavrai Tropi^eaBat, Xen. oec. 20, 1) ; neut. compar. nepta-croTepov ti, something further, more, Lk. xii. 4 (L Tr mrg. nepiaa-ov) ; Trfpiaaor. the more, ibid. 48 ; [TTipia-croTfpov vdvrav etc. much more than all etc. Mk. xii. 33 T Trtxt. WH]; adverbially, somewhat more [R. V. someirhat abundantly], 2 Co. x. 8 ; (Vulg. abun- dantius [A.V. more abundantly]) i. e. more plainly, Heb. vi. 17; paWov TiepitjcroTepov, much more, 5Ik. vii. 36 ; nepccraoTepov ■navrav, more [abundantly] than all, 1 Co. XV. 10 ; with an adj. it forms a periphrasis for the com- -jrepiaaoTepcoi 506 irepi^epa par. irfpiaaoTtpov ftaraSijXoi/, more [abundantly] evident, lleb. vii. Ja [c£. W. §35, 1]. 2. superior, extraor- dinary, surpassing, uncommon : Mt. v. 47 [A. V. more than others] ; to Trrptao-oi', as subst., pre-eminence, supe- riority, ailrantage, Ro. iii. 1 ; eonipar. n-fptcraorfpoj, more eminent, more remarhthle, (oIk fo-ij ■nepiaaorepoi, Gen. xlix. 3 Symm. ; TttpiTToTfpos (f>pim)cTft, Pint. mor. [i. 57 f. (Ion. Trfptrd/ii/o)) ; 2 a.or. TrepuTepov; Pass., pre.s. irfpiTtpvopai ; pf. ptcj). neptTeTpqpevos ; 1 aor. Trept- fTpTj6i]v: [fr. lies, down] ; Sept. chiefly for blO ; to cut wound [cf. n-fpi, III. 1] : Tiva, to circu/ncise, cut off one's prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day after birth, but subsequently also ' proselytes of right- eousness ' were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced into the number of his people ; [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Cir- cumcision ; Oehler's O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 87, 88 ; Midler, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21 ; .In. vii. 22 ; Acts vii. 8 ; xv. 5 ; xvi. 3 ; xxi. 21 ; of the same rite, Diod. 1, 28 ; pass, and mid. to get one's self circum- cised, present one's self to be circumcised, receive circum- cision [cf. W. § 38, 3] : Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec. ; 1 Co. vii. 18 ; Gal. ii. 3 ; v. 2sq. ; vi. 12 sq.; with to alSoia added, Hdt. 2, 36 and 104 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 5 ; c. Ap. 1, 22. Since by the rite of circumcision a man was separated fronx the unclean world and dedicated to God, the verb is transferred to denote the extinguishing of lusts and the removal of sins. Col. ii. 11, cf. Jer. iv. 4 ; Deut. x. 16, and eccl. writ, [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 3].* ■irepi-Ttfli)(ii, 3 pers. plur. ntptriOeaaiv (Mk.xv. 17 ; see rcff. in eTTiTiBripi) ; 1 aor. nfpU6i]Ka ; 2 aor. ptcp. ireptdfis, irepidivTfs ; fr. Horn, down; a. prop, to ])lace around, set about, [cf. irtpi, III. 1] : Tivi ri, as vi, Mt. xxi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; to put a garment on one, ]Mt. xxvii. 28 ; avov, put on (encircle one's head with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31 ; Plat. Alcib. 2 p. 151 a.) ; Ti Tivi, to put or bind one thing around anoth- er, JIt. xxvii. 48 ; Mk. xv. 36 ; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop. Tti/i Ti, to present, besloic, confer, a thing upon one (so in class. Grk. fr. Ildt. down, as (\(v6epiav, Ildt. 3, 142; ho^av, Dem. p. 14 1 7, 3 ; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. II.] ; TO ovopa, Sa]). xiv. 21 ; Thuc. 4, 87) : Tj/nyc, 1 Co. xii. 23 ; Esth. i. 20.* ir«pi-TO|i.'(), -fjs, rj, {nepvripva), circumcision (on which see TTfpiTtpvoi) ; a. prop. a. the act or rite of circuiiii-isi(jn : Jn. vii. 22 sq. ; Acts vii. 8 ; Ro. iv. 11 ; Gal. V. 1 1 ; Phil. iii. 5 ; ol « Tijs itepir. (see «V, II. 7), the cir- cumcised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ro. iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the Jews, Acts xi. 2; Gal. ii. 12 ; Tit. i. 10 ; oi Hvrts (k ntptT. Col. iv. 11. p. the state of circumcision, the being cir- cumcised : Ro. ii. 25-28 ; iii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Gal. v. 6 ; vi. 15 ; Col. iii. 11 ; tv TrcptTopjj Hv, circumcised, Ro. iv. 10. y. by melon. ' the circumcision' ior oi irfpirprf 6fvTft the circumcised, i.e. Jews: Ro. iii. 80; iv. 9, 12; XV. 8 ; Gal. ii. 7—9 ; Eph. ii. 1 1 ; ot tx TrcpiToprjs jrio-roi, Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris- tians, Arts X. 45. b. metaph. a. of Chris- tians : (f]peU eapev) tj nepcTopij, separated from the un- clean multitude and truly consecrated to (iod, Phil. iii. 3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.)]. p. r; irepiTopij dxe^po- TToi'ijTor, the extinction of the passions and the removal of spiritual impurity (see ■ntpi.Tipva, fin.), Col. ii. 11'; ij mpiTopii KapSias in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing ; n-fpiT. Xpio-ToO, of which Christ is the author. Col. ii. 1 1'. (The noun TrepiTopr] occurs three times in the O. T., viz. (ien. xvii. 13 ; Jer. xi. 16 ; for nSlO, Ex. iv. 26 ; besides in Philo, whose tract nfp't TrtpiTopr^s is found in IMangcy's ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter's ed. iv. pp. 282-284] ; Jo- seph, antt. 1, 10,5; [13, 11 fin. ; c. Ap. 2, 13, 1. 6]; plur., antt. 1, 12, 2.)* •ir€pi.Tp€ir(i) ; to turn about [nepl, III. 1], to turn; to transfer or change by turning : ti or riva eh Tt, a pers. or thing into some state ; once so in the N. T. viz. irfptftrrpfi/'f, Joseph, antt. 9, 4. 4 ; TO 6etov (IS 6pyr]i> irepiTpamv, 2, 14, 1. In various other uses in (jrk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat, on].* •irspi-Tpe'xci) : 2 aor. [jrfpifSpa/xox T Tr WII], ptcp. nept- 8pap6vT(9 [RGL]; fr. [Horn.], Theogn., Xen., Plat, down ; to run around, run round about : with an ace. of place, Mk. vi. 55. (Sept. twice for OW, Jer. v. 1 ; Am. viii. 12.)* iripi-^tpa ; pros. pass. nfpt(f)epopai ; fr. Hdt. down ; to carry round : to bear about everywhere with one, ri, 2 Co. iv. 10; to carry hither and thither, Toi>s Kadis «Xon-ar, Mk. vi. 55 (where the Evangelist wishes us to conceive of the sick as brought to Jesus while he is travelling about and visiting difi'crent places) ; pass, to be driven [A. V. carrier/] about : jravri avipto T^r SidaaKa- irepi^poveu) 507 TIerpopovt'cD, -a> ; 1. to consider or examine on all sides [nepi, III- 1], i. e. carefully, thorouijhlij, (Arstph. nub. 741). 2. (fr. Trcpi, beyond, HI. 2), to set one's self in thought beyond {exalt one's self in Ihouyht above) a pers. or thing ; to contemn, despise : twos (cf. KUhner § 419, 1 b. vol. ii. p. 325), Tit. ii. 15 (4 Mace. vi. 9 ; vii. IC ; xiv. 1 ; Pint., al. ; roii fiyi/, Plat. Ax. p. 372 ; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 22).* tt(p'\.-xu>fO%, -ov, (v-fpi and p^mpof), lying round about, neighboring, (Pint., Aelian., Dio Cass.) ; in the Scrip- tures Tj TTf pix<^pos, sc. yri, the region round about [q. v. in B. D.]: Mt. xiv. 3.3; Mk. i. 28 ; vl. 55 [R G L t.xt.] ; Lk. iii. 3 ; iv. 14, 37; vii. 17; viii. 37 ; Acts xiv. 6, (Gen. xix. 17 ; Deut. iii. 13, etc. ; t^s yrjs t^j jrepip^wpou. Gen. xix. 28 cod. Alex.) ; ^ Ti-fpi'x- toC 'lophavov, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii. 10 sq. ; for \^yr\ 133, the region of the Jordan [cf. B. D. u. s.]) ; by meton. for its inhabitants : Mt. iii. 5. (to ■nfp'ixapov and to. Trfpi\iiipa, Deut. iii. 4 ; 1 Chr. v. 16 ; 2 Chr. iv. 17, etc.)* irEpC-i|ni|ia, -rof, to, (fr. Tiepi-^aa> ' to wijje off all round'; and this fr. nepi [q. v. III. 1], and \jrda> ' to wipe,' ' rub '), prop, what is wiped off'; dirt rubbed off; offscouring, scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as Trepi- Kadapfia, q. v. Suidas and other Greek lexicographers s. v. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert pubUc calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an offering to Poseidon ; hence dpyiptov . . . Trepiijfijiia toC naiSiov r}p.a>v yevoiTo, (as if to say) let it become an e.Kpi- atory offering, a ransom, for our child, i. e. in comparison with the saving of our son's life let it be to us a despi- cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz- sche ; [cf. also MUller on Barn. ep. 4, 9]). It is used of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1 ; 18, 1 ; [see Bji. Lghtft.'s note on the former passage].* ir€pirEpcvo|jiai ; (to be mpTTfpoi, i. e. vain-glorious, brag- gart, Polyb. 32, G, 5 ; 40, 6, 2 ; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14) ; to boast one's self [A. V. raunt one's self] : 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An- tonin. 5, 5 ; the compound iimtptrfpeveaQai is used of adulation, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex- toUing another excessively, in Cic. ad Attic. 1, 14. Hesych. nepTrepfifTai • KaTewaipfTai) ; cf. Osiander [or Wetstein] on 1 Co. 1. c. [Gataker on Marc. Antonin. 5, 5 p. 143].* IlcpirCs [lit. 'a Persian woman'], ij, ace. -iSa, Persis, a Christian woman: Ro. xvi. 12.* ire'pvo-i, (fr. nipas), adv., last year; the year just past : OTTO nipvai, for a rjearpast, a year ago, [W. 422 (393)], 2 Co. viii. 10 ; ix. 2. ([Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Pint., Lcian.) * ircTdo)iai. -Upai; a doubtful later Grk. form for the earlier ireVopat (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 5S1 ; Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 271 sq.; cf. W. 88 (84) ; [B. 65 (58) ; Veitch s. V.]) ; iojly : in the N. T. found only in pres. ptcp. jre- Ta>p.(vos, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7 ; viii. 13 ; xiv. 6 ; xi.\. 17, where since Griesbach jrfrd/ievoy has been restored.* TSTctvos, -7), -ov, (Attic for Trf-nji/ds, fr. Tthofuu), flying, winged ; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. TrtTfiva and TO neniva, as suhst., Jlying or winged animals, birds : Mt. xui. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 [G L T Tr WH] ; Lk. xii. 24 ; Ro. i. 23 ; Jas. iii. 7 ; to ttct. tov ovpavoi (Sept. for D'Onn 'Vij.' ■ see ovpavot, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i. e. fl\incr in the heavens (air), Mt. vi. 2« ; viii. 20 ; xiii. 32 ; j\Ik. iv. 4 [Rec], 32 ; Lk. viii. 5 ; L\. 58 ; xiii. 1 9 ; Acts x. 1 2 [here L T Tr WH om. rd] ; xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., ah)]* irETO|iai; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for =]?j;; to fly: Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xii. 14; xiv. G; xLx. 17; see nerdopat.* ireVpo, -as, T), fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for ^•'75 and niy ; a rock, ledge, cliff; a. prop. : Mt. vii. 24 sq. ; xxvii. 51, 60 ; :Mk. xv. 46 ; Lk. vi. 48 ; 1 Co. x. 4 (on which see ■KvevpaTLKos, 3 a.) ; a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.; rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6, 13. b. a rock, large stone : Ro. ix. 33 ; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like a rock, by reason of his frmness and strength of soul : Mt. xvi. 18 [some interpp. regard the distinction (gen- erally observed in classic Greek ; see the Comm. and cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 51, §§ 4-6) between Trerpa, the massive living rock, and ntTpos, a detached but large fragment, as important for the correct understanding of this pas- sage ; others explain the different genders here as due first to the personal then to the material reference. Cf. Meyer, Keil, al. ; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].' Ile'Tpos, -ov, 6, (an appellative prop, name, signifying ' a stone,' ' a rock,' ' a ledge ' or ' chff ' ; used metaph. of a soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock. Soph. O. R, 334 ; Eur. Med. 28; Here. fur. 1397 ; answer- ing to the Chald. Kj]4>as, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter,t]ie surname of the apostle Sijnon. He was a native of Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see 'loidvvTjs, 3, and 'imi/as, 2), and dwelt with his wife at Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14 ; Mk. i. 30 ; Lk. iv. 38, cf. 1 Co. ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol- lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18 ; Mk. i. 16 ; Lk. V. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com- panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17; Lk. v. 10; Jn. i. 40-42 (41-43) ; and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu- ture estabhshment of the kingdom of God, he honored with the name of Peter. Jn. i. 42 (43) ; Mt. xvi. 18 ; Mk. iii. 16. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn, and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and John the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima- cy of his divine JSIaster. After having for some time presided, in connection with John and James the brother of our Lord [fee 'Idnafios, 3], over the affairs of the Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii. 9 ; 1 Co. ix. 5 ; 1 Pet. V. 13 ; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; forPapias states that Peter employed Mark as ' interpreter ' (.fpprj- vfVTris), an aid of which he had no need except beyond the borders of Palestine, especially among those who spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word '7r£TpcoST]<; 508 TTiKpaivui ' interpreter ' here, see Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In- trod. p. xxix. sqq.]). But just as, on the night of the betrayal, Peter proved so far faithless to himself as thrice to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some time afterwards at Antioth he made greater conces- sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than Christian liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul for his weakness and ' dissimulation ' (vTroKpicris), Gal. ii. 11 sqq. Nevertheless, in the jiatristic age Jewish Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence of their narrow views and practices. This is not the place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions concerning Peter's being the founder of the church at Rome and bishop of it fur twenty-five years and more ; the discussion of them may be found in Haae, Protes- tant. Polcmik gegen die rom.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p. 123 sqq. ; [cf. Schaff, Church History, 1882, vol. i. §§ 2b, 26 ; Siefferl in Herzog ed. 2, vol. xi. p. 524 sqq., and (for reff.) p. 5.'i7 sq.]. This one thing seems to be evident from Jn. xxi. 18 sqq., that Peter suffered death by cru- cifixion [cf. Keil ad loc. ; others doubt whether Christ's words contain anything more than a general prediction of martyrdom]. If he was crucified at Rome, it must have been several years after the death of Paul. [Cf. BB. DD. and reff. u. s.] He is called in the N. T., at one time, simply Si'/io»' (once ^vfitav. Acts xv. 14), and (and that, too, most frequently [see B. D. s. v. Peter, sub fin. (p. 24.59 Am. ed.)]), ElfVpor and Ki](f)as (q. v.), then again 2i/imi/ nirpos, Mt. xvi. IG ; Lk. v. 8 ; Jn. [i. 42 (43)] ; vi. [»], GS ; xiii. 6, 9, 24, [36] ; xviii. 10, 15, 25 ; xx. 2, G ; xxi. 2 sq. 7, 11, 15 ; once SvpfiovHiTpos (2 Pet. i. 1 where L WH txt. ^tfiiau) ; '2ip.(i>v 6 Xeyoptifos EleVpo?, ^It. iv. 18 ; X. 2; Si'/xcof 6 €7rtKa\ovp.€vos IlfVpo?, Acts x. 18; xi. 13; 'S.ipav ot fVtKaXciT-nt Hfrpos, Acts .x. 5, 32. -irtTpiiSiis, -€f, (fr. -ntTpa and t'Sor; hence prop. ' rock- like,' "having the appearance of rock '), rock;/, stony: to jTfrpwSfr and to. nrrpaSr}, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii. 5, 20 ; Mk. iv. 5, 16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45 (44), Pint., al.) • irrj'yavov, -ov, to, [thought to be fr. itrjywpi to make solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; cf. Vanicek p. 457], rue : Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist, plant. 1, 3, 4 ; Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52) ; Pint., al.) [B. D. s.v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 478 ; Carruthers in the " Bible Educa- tor," iii. 216 sq.]* ■""lYH» -^f! ^> fr- Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for J'i'?, "J?, lipO ; a fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Rec. in 12; 2 Pet. ii. 17; CSaror SKKopevov, Jn. iv. 14; tuv vSaraiv, Rev. viii. 10 ; xiv. 7; xvi. 4 ; of a well fed by a spring, Jn. iv. G. (corjs Tnjyai vSaroiv, Rev. vii. 17; f/ tt. t. vSaros TTJt fw^f, Rev. xxi. G, (on both pass, see in fu^, p. 274*) ; f) TT. Tov aiparos, a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29.* •ir^-yw(ii : 1 aor. ?m)|a ; fr. Hom. down; to make fast, to fix ; to fasten together, to build by fastening together : a-KrjitTjv, Heb. viii. 2 [A. V. pitched. CoMP. : npotr^r)- yvvpi.^ * irtiSoXiov, -ov, TO, (fr. TnjSov the blade of an oar, an oar), fr. Hom. down, a ship's rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on the plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th ed., p. 183 sqq.; B. D. s. v. Ship (2); cf. Graser, Das Seewesen des Alterthums, in the Philologus for 18G5, p. 26G s*.'3tyri (to satiate) and pass. i'JE? (to be full) {to fill : tl, Lk.' v. 7 ; tl tivos [W. § 30, 8 b.j, a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; [Jn. xix. 29 R G] ; in pass., Mt. xxii. 10; Acts -xi.x. 29 ; [e'lc rijs uafiijs, Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg. ; cf. W. u. s. note ; B. § 132, 12]. what wholly takes possession of the mind is said to fill it : pass. <^d/3ot), Lk. V. 26 ; 6dpl3ovs, Acts iii. 10 ; dvoias, Lk. vi. 1 1 ; ^fjXuv, Acts V. 1 7 ; xiii. 45 ; dvpov, Lk. iv. 28 ; Acts iii. 10; TTiieviiaTos aylov, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67 ; Acts ii. 4 ; iv. 8,31; ix. 17; xiii. 9. prophecies are said TrXijo-^^rat, i. e. to come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. -xxi. 22GLTTrWII (for Rec. 7rXi)pm%ai). time is said nKrja-Brjvai, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. finished, elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304) ; B. 267 (230)]; ii. 6, 21 sq.; so nSoJ, Job xv. 32; and S-7fp to (ful-) fill the time, i. e. to complete, fill up, Gen. xxix. 27 ; Job xxxi.K. 2. [CoMP. : tfi-ffiVXij/ii.] * •iri|xirpdu (for the more common irip.-n-prjpi. [cf. Curtius § 378, Vanicek p. 510 scj.]) : [pres. inf. pass, nipizpaadm ; but R G L Tr WH iripvpaaQai f r. the form nipitprjpi (Tdf . efnvnvpda-eat. q. V.)] ; in (Jrk. writ. fr. Hom. [(yet only the aor. fr. Trpij^m)] down ; to blow, to burn, [on the connection betw. these meanings cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. Trpij^m] ; in the Scriptures four times to cause to swell, to render tumid, [cf. Soph. Lex. S. v.] : yacrrepa, Num. v. 22 ; pass, to swell, become swollen, of parts of the body, Num. v. 21, 27 : Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in ipmirpda). [CoMP. ip,- Tri-jrpiiM.] * irivaKtSiov, -ov, to, (dimin. of mvaKiS, -I'Sor), [Aristot., al.] ; a. a small tablet. b. spec, a writing-tub- let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. mvaxlSa; see the foil, word]; Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74.» [irivaKts. -iSoi, r), i. q. mvcKlSiov (q. v.) : Lk. i. 63 Tr mrg. (Epict., Plut., Artem., al.)'] •irival, -oKos, 6, (com. thought to be fr. mN02 a pine, and so prop, 'a pine-board'; ace. to the conjecture of Butlmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. nvd^ for TrXti^ [i. e. anything broad and fiat (cf. Eng. plank)'] with « in- serted, as in TTivvToi for ttvvtos [ace. to Fick i. 146 fr. Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff]), fr. Hom. down; 1. a board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter : Mt. xiv. 8, 510 1 1 ; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lchiu. br.], '^8 ; Lk. xi. 3!) ; Horn. Od. 1, Ml ; U;, 4»; al.* irCvu; impf. inivov., fut. jrloiiai, [cf. W. 90 sq. (HG)], 2 pers. sing. nUoai (Lk. .wii. 8 [(sec rcff. in KaroKavxao- ftat)}) ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) TreVtoKe It G, but L T WII mrg. plur. -kov, for which L ed. ster. Tr txt. AVII txt. rend TTeirToiKav (see y'lvojxai.) ; 'i aor. fjnoi', impv. me (r>k. xii. 19), inf. ineiv ([Mt. xx. 22; xxvii. 34 (not Tdf.); Mk. .\. 38]; Acts xxiii. 12 [not WII], 21 ; Ro. xiv. 21 [not WH], etc.), and ineoIl()(|iiiaI form nlv (Lclim. in .In. iv. 9 ; Rev. xvi. G), and irelv ( T Tr Wll in Jn. iv. 7, 9 scj. ; T WII in I Co. ix. 4 ; x. 7 ; Rev. xvi. 6 ; T iu Mt. xxvii. 34 (bis); WII in Acts .xxiii. 12, 21 ; Ro. xiv. 21, and often among the var. of the codd.) — on these forms see [esp. WH. App. p. 1 70] ; Fiilzsche, De conformatione N. T. critica etc. p. 27 sq. ; B. GG (58) sq. ; [Cwliux, Das Verbum, ii. 10.')]; Sept. for nntj ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to drink: absol., Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi. 25; figuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re- fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, Jn. vii. 37 ; on the various uses of the phrase iaBieiv k. nlvew see in iaSiat, a. ; rpwyfiv k. rrlvftv, of those living in fancied security, Mt. xxiv. 38 ; mVo) with an ace. of the thing, to drink a thing [cf. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [G Tom. WHbr. thecl.], 31; x.\vi.29; Mk. xiv. 25 ; xvi. 18; Rev. xvi. 6 ; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15 ; xii. 29 ; Ro. xiv. 21 ; 1 Co. x. 4 [cf. W. § 40, 3 b.] : t6 alfxa of Christ, see al/ia, fin. ; to Troriypioi/ i. e. what is in the cup, 1 Co. x. 21 ; xi. 27, etc. (see iroT^piov, a.), ij -y^ is said nivfiv tov verov, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Ileb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 1 1 ; Hdt. 3, 117; 4, 198; Verg. eel. 3, 111 sat prata bibe- runt). Ttivo) (K w. a gen. of the vessel out of which one drinks, « tov Ttorrjpiov, Mt. xxvi. 27 ; Mk. xiv. 23 ; 1 Co. x. 4 [cf. above]; xi. 28, (.\rstph. eqq. 1289) ; c'k w. a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; JMk. xiv. 25 ; ix toO v&aros, Jn. iv. 13 sq. ; cK tov o'vov (or dvfiov), Rev. xiv. 10 ; .xviii. 3 [L om. Tr WII br. tov oivou] ; dno w. a gen. of the drink, Lk. xxii. 18. [Cf. B.§132, 7 ; W. 199 (187). Co.MP. : KOTO-, (TV/i-TTlVa).] irtdTTis, -ijTor, ij, (mmv {a.t),fatne!i.i : Ro. xi. 17. (Aris- tot., Theophr., al. ; Sept. for Wl.) ' inirpdo-Ku : impf. (ntnpaaKov ; j)f. mnpaKa ; Pass., pres. Jitcp. TTiTrpacFKopevos ; pf. ptep. 7rf;rpa(xeVor ; 1 aor. «Vpa- Srjv ; (fr. Ttfpd to cross, to transport to a distant land) ; f r. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for 1 jn ; to sell : W, Mt. xiii. 46 [on the use of the j)f., cf. SopJi. Glossary etc. Introd. § 82, 4] : Acts ii. 45 ; iv. 34 ; v. 4 ; w. gen. of price, Mt. xxvi. 9 ; Mk. xiv. 5 ; Jn. .xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14) ; nvd, one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25 ; hence metaph. ■nenpapi- vos VTTu Tj]v apapTtav, [A. V. sold under .tin] i. e. entirely under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14 {fjrpdarjo-av tov Trotrjaai to TTOvrjpov^ 2 K. .xvii. 17; 1 Mace, i. 15, cf. 1 K. XX. (xxi.) 25 ; w. a dat. of the master to whom one is sold as a slave, Lev. xxv. 39 ; Deut. xv. ! 2 ; xxviii. 68 ; Bar. iv. 6 ; Soph. Trach. 252 ; eavTov tivi, of one bribed to give himself up wholly to another's will, Tu *i\i'7r7r6), Dem. p. 148, 8).* irl-rrra ; [inil)f. 'ninTov (Mk. xiv. 35 T Tr mrg. WII)] ; fut. TTfdoipai; 2 aor. fTreaov and acc. to the Ale.x. form (received everywhere by Lchm. [exc. Lk. xxiii. 80], Tdf. [e.\c. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [e.\c. ibid.], WII; and also used by R G in Rev. i. 17 ; v. 14 ; vi. 13 ; xi. 16 ; xvii. 10) eireo-a (cf. [ 117/. App. p. 1C4 ; Tdf. Proleg. j). 123] ; Loh. ad I'hryn. p. 724 scp ; Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 .s(|., and sec dnfpxop-at init.) ; |)f. jiinTu>Ka, 2 pers. sing, -«r (Rev. ii. 5 T WII; sec (coTrtiiw), 3 pers. plur. -xav (Rev. xviii. 3, L cd. ster. Tr txt. WII txt. ; see ylvopai) ; (fr. nETQ, as tUto) fr. TEKQ [cf. Curlius, Etymol. §214; Ver- bum, ii. p. 398]) ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for Ssj • to fall ; used 1. of descent from a higher place to a lower ; a. prop, to fall (either from or upon, I. q. Lat. incido, deciilo) : int w. acc. of ])lace, Mt. x. 29 ; xiii. 5, [7], 8 ; xxi. 44 [T oni. L WII Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ; Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. G [hero T Tr WII (carajr.], 8 Rec. ; Rev. viii. 10 ; e'ii n (of the thing that is entered ; into), Mt. XV. 14 ; xvii. 15 ; Mk. iv. 7 [!> mrg. fVt] scj. ; Lk. vi. 39 R (; Lmrg. (but L txt. T Tr WII ipnliiT.) ; viii. 8 G L TTrWn, [14; xiv. SLTTrWH]; Jn. xii. 24; ds (upon) rtj» yfiv, Rev. vi. 13 ; ix. 1 ; iv piirm, w. gen. of the thing, Lk. viii. 7 ; -irapd ttiv obdv, Mt. .xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 ; Lk. viii. 5 ; to fall from or doicn : foil, by drro w. gen. of place, Mt. XV. 27 ; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. « ; Lk. xvi. 21] ; Acts XX. 9 ; foil, by « w. gen. of place, [Mk. xiii. 25 L T TrWII]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1 ; i.q. to be Ihriisl down, Lk. X. 18. b. metaph. : ov ttiVtsi inl Tiva 6 rjXios, i. c. the heat of the sun does not strike ujion them or in- commode them. Rev. vii. 16; [d;(XiiE k- o-kotos. Acts xiii. 11 L T Tr WII] ; o KKr/pos mirrf t fVi riua, the lot falls upon one. Acts i. 2G ; o^os irlirTfi eVi Ttua, falls upon or seizes one, [.\cts xi.x. 1 7 L Tr] ; Rev. xi. 1 1 Rec. ; [to nvevpa to dyiov, Acts .X. 44 Lchm.] ; mnTio vno xpiaiv, to fall under judgment, come under condemnation, James v. 12 [where Rec." fi'r vnoKpiaiv]. 2. of descent from an erect to a prostrate position (Lat. labor, ruo; prolabor, procido; collabor, etc."); a. properly; a. lofiitl doirn: eVi Xldof, Lk. x.x. 18; XWos Triirrei inl Tiva, Mt. xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ; Lk. xx. 18 ; tI> opos eVi Tiva, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi. 16. p. to be prostrated, fall prostrate; of those overcome by terror or astonishment or grief : x^f""' '^'^" xviii. 6 ; ds to tSa<^oj, Acts xxii. 7 ; cVt Triv y^. Acts i.x. 4 ; [eVi TrptxraiTrov, i\It. xvii. 6]; or under the attack of an evil spirit : eVi Ti)s yr)9, ^Ik. ix. 20; or falling dead suddenly : irpos rovi nuSas Tivos oii PCKpot, Rev. i. 1 7 ; Tretraji/ (^e'lfrv^f. Acts v. 5; TTiVr. napa (LT TrWII npot) Tovsiro&as tivos, ibid. 10; absol. 1 Co. X. 8 ; a-ropan paxaipas, Lk. xxi. 24 ; absol. of the dismemberment of corpses bydecay, Heb. iii. 1 7 (Xum. xiv. 29, 32). y. to prostrate one's self; used now of suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship to one : cVi t^5 yv^, Mk. xiv. 35 ; ptcp. with TrpoaKvvilv, as finite verb, Mt. ii. 11 ; iv. 9 ; .xviii. 26; nl-rrTfiv k- npoa- Kvvflv, Rev. V. 14 ; xix. 4 ; €7reo"a •npoiTKvvrjdai, Rev. .xxii. 8 ; TTiTTT. els Tovs TToBus {avTov), ^It. x\iii. 29 Rec; eiff [T Ir WIlTrpor] T. TTofiat Ttvus, Jn. xi. 32; npos t. ndSas tivos, Mk. V. 22 ; [napd roiis nodas twos, Lk. viii. 41] ; tpirpocrdcv IIia-iBia 511 ■7TiaTevu> Toiv noSoiv TiTOf, Kev. xix. 10; ivamov rtvor, Rev. iv. 10; V. 8 ; fVi Trpdo-mn-oi', ilt. xxvi. 39 ; Lk. v. 12 ; eVi jrpdo- ujroi' irapa roiis jrdSar Tii/df, Lk. xvii. 16 ; ireauv tm tovs irdSof TrpoaeKVVTjdf, Acts x. 25 ; Tr(a-a>v im TTpoa-anov npoa- Kvi/rjo-ft, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; c'rri to npoa-ayira Koi TrpouKweiv, Rev. vii. 11 [eVi Trpoawnoi' Rec] ; xi. 16. 8. to fall out, fall from : Bpl^ (k t^s Ke0aX^9 n-6(r«rat, i. q. shall perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Rec. «. to fall down, fall in ruin : of buildings, walls, etc., Mt. vii. 25, [27] ; Lk. vi. 49 (where T Tr WH o-W77fo-f) ; Heb. -xi. 30; OiKos in oIkov ■Kinrei, Lk. xi. 1 7 [see em. C. I. 2 c.] ; irvp- ■yos im rtva, Lk. xiii. 4 ; a-Krjvfi tj veirTOKvla, the tabernacle that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay [cf. (Tiofvfi, fin.]. Acts XV. 16. of a city : ejreo-e, i. e. has been overthrown, destroyed, Rev. xi. 13 ; xiv. 8 ; xvi. 19 ; xviii. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (li.) 8). b. metaph. a. to be cast down from a stale of prosperitij : nodev vrcVTMicas, from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain- ment thou hast declined. Rev. ii. 5 G L T Tr WH (see above ad init.). p. to fall from a state of upright- ness, i.e. to siri: opp. to iaravm, 1 Co. x. 12; opp. to arfiKew, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by the sinning [of. W. § 31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4 ; to fall into a state of wickedness. Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt. [see TTtVo)]. Y- to perish, i. e. to come to an end, dis- appear, cease : of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L T Tr WH [R. V. fail']; to lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings, precepts, etc., Lk. xvi. 17 (more ov x^f"' nctrfiTai o ti av eiTTjit, Plat. Euthyphr. § 17; u-rita cadunt promissa, Liv. 2, 31). i. q. ?o be removed from power by death. Rev. xvii. 10; to fail of participating in, jniss a share in, the Mes- sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22] ; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see iv, I. 5 f.). CoMP. : dva-, dvri-, diro-, eV, iv-, im-, Kara-, irapa-, Trfpt-, irpoir-, crvp,- TriTTT-u.] * Ilia-iSia. -as, f), Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; xiv. 24. [B. D. s.v. Pisi- dia.] * IlurCStos, -a, -ov, i. q. UicriSiKur, belonging to Pisidia : 'Ami6)^(ta f] UicnSia, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia (see 'AvTioxeia, 2) : Acts xiii. 14 L T Tr WH.* irwrreiiti) ; impf. eViVreuoi'; fut. iriS>s, Jn. .xii. 36 ; els to Svofia airov, Jn. i. 12 ; ii. 23 ; iii. 18 ; 1 Jn. v. 13 ; tm ovofi. avTov, to com- mit one's self trustfully to the name (see ovopa, 2- p. 448"), 1 Jn. iii. 23 ; iir avrov, im toi/ Kvptov, to have a faith di- rected towards, etc. (see im, C. I. 2 g. a. p. 235'' [cf. W. and B. u. s., also B. § 147, 25]) : Mt. xxvii. 42 T Tr t.xt. WH ; Jn. iii. 1 5 L txt. ; Acts ix. 42 ; xi. 1 7 ; xvi. 31 ; x.xii. 19, [(cf. Sap. xii. 2)] ; e'jr' aira, to build one's faith on, to place one's faith upon, [see im, B. 2 a. y. p. 233* ; B. U.S.]: Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 6; iv avTM, to put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [L mrg. ; cf. TTr WH also (who prob. connect iv avTa with the foil, ^xji ; cf. Westcotf, Com. ad loc, !Meyer, al.)] (cf. Jer. xii. 6 ; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where ttictt. cv tiw means to put confidence in one, to trust one; [cf. Mk. i. 15 above, 8. fin.]) ; iv tovto) mtnevoiitv, on this rests our faith [A. V. by this ice believe']. Jn. xvi. 30 ; with the simple dative, tu Kvpia, to (yield faith to) believe [cf . B. 1 73 (151)]: Mt. xxvii. 42 RGLTrmrg.; Acts v. 14 ; xviii. 8 ; supplv ToijTM before ov in Ro. x. 14 ; to trust in Christ [God], 2 Tim. i. 12 ; fita Tti/or, through one's agency to iriffTevo) 512 "TTWrTt? 1)0 brought to faith, Jn. i. 7 ; 1 Co. iii. 5 ; 8ta 'lijtroC els Sfov, 1 Pet. i. 21 U ( i Tr mrg. ; Sia ttjs p^uptTos, Acts xviii. 27; 8ia rotj \uyov avTbiv fij «/xc, Jn. xvii. 20; did ti, Jn. iv. 31), [4 1 ], 42 ; xiv. 1 1 . jrioTfto) foil, by on with a sen- tence in which either the nature and dignity of Christ or his blessings are set forth: Jn. vi. 69 ; viii. 24; x. 38" K(; ; xi. 27, [42] ; xiii. 19 ; [xiv. 10] ; xvi. 27, 30 ; xvii. 8, 21 ; 1 Jn. v. 1, 5 ; Ro. vi. 8 ; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; /lot on, Jn. xiv. 11 ; Ti, Jn. .\i. 26; jritTTfia cratBrjvm, Acts ,\v. 11; the simple TrtcrTevetv is used emphatically, of those who acknowledge Jcaus as the saviour and devote themselves to him : Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds avry] ; Lk. viii. 1 2 sq. ; xxii. 67; Jn. i. .00 (51) ; iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44 ; vi. 36, 64 ; ix. 38 ; x. 25 sq. ; xii. 39, 47 Rec. ; xvi. 30 ; xx. 31 ; Acts v. 14 ;^xiii. 39] ; xv. 5 ; xviii. 8 ; [xxi. 25] ; Ro. i. 16; iii. 22; iv. 11; .\.4; xv. 13; 2Co.iv. 13; Eph. i. 13, [19] ; 2 Th. i. 10 ; Ileb. iv. 3 ; with e^ SXrit (capSi'ar added. Acts viii. 37 Rec. ; w. a dat. of instr. Kapdia, llo. X. 10 ; ptcp. pros, ol nKmiovrfs, as subst. : Acts ii. 44 ; Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21 ; Gal. iii. 22 ; [Eph. i. 19]; 1 Th. i. 7; ii. 10, 13 ; 2 Th. i. 10 Rec; 1 Pet. ii. 7; i. q. who are on tlip point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 24 sq. ; aor. eViCTTfuo-a (marking entrance into a state ; see ^aaCKtvio, fin.), / became a believer, a Christian, [A. V. believed} : Actsiv. 4; viii. 13; xiii. 12, 48; xiv. 1 ; xv. 7; xvii. 12, 34; Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 2, 11 ; with the addi- tion of tVi Tov Kvpiov (see above). Acts ix. 42 ; ptcp. tti- o-reijo-as, -Vets xi. 21; xix. 2; 6 TTiarf varas, Mk. xvi. 16; plur., ibid. 1 7 ; Acts iv. 32 ; oi TreTtiaTivKores, thci/that have believed (have become believers) : Acts xix. 18; .\xi. 20; £on (John's use of) the tenses of ma-rfva see Westcott on 1 Jn. iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul's conception of to maTfidv ds Xpitrrov, the prominent ele- ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus, particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap- pears esp. in Ro. iii. 2.'j ; iv. 24 ; x. 9 ; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; but in John's conception, it is the metaphysical relation.ship of Christ with (iod and close ethical intimacy with him, as well as the true ' life ' to be derived from Christ as its source; cf. Riickert, Das Abendmabl, p. 251. More- over, nia-Tfidv is used by John of various degrees of faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with- in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, Jn. ii. 23 (cf. 24) ; viii. 31 ; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah, Jn. vii. 31 ; and to signify that one's faith is preserved, strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it ought to reach, xi. 1 .'j ; xiii. 19 ; xiv. 29 ; xix. 35 ; ,xx. 31 ; 1 Jn. V. 13'' Rec; [cf. reff. s. v. jrio-nr. fin.]. incTTevetv is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by that fact God declared him to be his Son and the Mes- siah : Jn. XX. 8, 25, 29 ; ivrrj Kapdia ttktt. on 6 Seos aurov ijyeipev ix vcKpav, RoT .x. 9 [cf. B. § 133, 19]. Since ace. to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the author of salvation, o ma-Teiav repudiates all the various things which aside from Christ are commended as means of salvation (such e. g. as abstinence from flesh anil Wine), and understands that all things are lawful to him which do not lead him away from Christ ; hence n-ioTf u« (ns) (jmydv ndirra, hath faith to eat all things or so that he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2 ; cf. Riickert ad loc ; [W. § 44, 3 b. ; per contra B. 273 sq. (235)]. 8. mareCfiu used in ref. to God has various senses : aa. it de- notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence : on S 6(us (Is tanv, .las. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ap- propriate trust, absol. Jude 5 ; els 6e6v, Jn. xii. 44 ; xiv. 1 ; i. (J. to believe and embrace what (jod has made known either through Christ or concerning Christ: ™ flew, Jn. V. 24 ; Acts xvi. 34 ; Tit. iii. 8 ; 1 Jn. v. 10 ; tjrl Tov 6e6v, Ro. iv. 5 ; Tf}V dydirr^v, rjv e^et 6 6e6s, 1 Jn. iv. 16 ; els rfjv fiapTvpiat^, rjv «rX., 1 Jn. v. 10. pp. to trust: Tw 6eio, (iod promising a thing, Ro. iv. 3, 1 7 (on which see KarimuTi); Gal. iii. 6; [Jas. ii. 23]; absol. Ro. iv. 18 ; foil, by on. Acts xxvii. 25. «. ttio-t. is used in an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men: tj dydnj] iri-crrevet irdvTa, 1 Co. xiii. 7. to TTKTTeveLV is opp. to ISeiv, Jn. x.\. 29 ; to opdv, ibid, and 1 Pet. i. 8, (Theojih. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), cf. 2 Co. v. 7; to StaKpine- (t6m, Ro. iv. 19 sq.; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas. i. 6; to 6po}i.oye'iv, Ro. X. 9. 2. transitively, nw n, to intrust a thing to one, i. e. to his Jitlelity : Lk. xvi. 1 1 ; eavrov tivi, Jn. ii. 24 ; pass. TnaTeiofiai ti, to be intrusted tvith a thing: Ro. iii. 2 ; 1 Co. ix. 17; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 11 ; Tit. i. 3, (Ignat. ad Pliilad. 9 ; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in AV. §39, 1 a.). On the grammat. constr. of the word cf. B. § 133, 4 [and the summaries in EUicott on 1 Tim. i. 16; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer s. v.]. It does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and 3 .In. [Cf. the reff. s. v. nlaris, fin.]* irio-TiKbs, -Tj, -01/, (irtcTTot), pertaining to belief; a. having the power of persuading, skilful in producing be- lief: Plat, Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that . can be relied on : yvvl] ttktt. koi olxovpos Ka\ ireiOopivri tm dvSpt, Artem. oneir. 2, 32 ; often so in Cedrenus [also (of persons) in E])iph.,.Tn. Mosch., Sophron. ; cf. Soj)h. Le.x. s. v.] ; of conuuodities i. q. SuKtpos, genuine, pure, un- adulterated : so vapbos TrtariKrj [but A. V. spike- (L e. spiked) nard, after the 7iardi spicati of the Vulg. (in Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3 ; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul- terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26 ; Diosc. de mater, med. 1, 6 and 7) ; hence metaph. to ttiittikov t^s Kaivrjs dtaSrjKtjs Kpapa, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9, 8 [p. 439 d.]. Cf. the full discussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596 f^Yi- ; LUcke on .In. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq. ; W. 97 (92) sq. ; [esp. Dr. .las. Morison on Mk. 1. c.].* irCoTis, -ecos, ^, (weida [q. v.]),fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind.], Aesch)!., lldt. down; Sept. for njIDX, several times for nns and nj"DS; faith; i. e. 1. conviction of the truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut. ; 6avpdi> vexptiv. Col. ii. 12; Sw TTia-Teois, by the help of faith, Heb. xi. 33, 39 ; Kara nitTTLv, i.q. iruTTixjovTei, Heb. xi. 13; nia-rft, dat. of means ■or of mode In/ faith or by believing, prompted, actuated, bg faith, Heb. xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in reference to Christ, it denotes a strong and welcome <:onviction or belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of God (on this see more at length in ttkttivo), 1 b. y.) : a. univ. : ■w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), 'iriirov Xpia-Toij, Ko. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 22 ; Eph. iii. 12; 'It/o-oC, Rev. xiv. 12; Xpta-Tov, Phil. iii. 9; tov vlov tov 6(ov, Gal. ii. 20 ; roO Kvpiov rjpoiv l7](rov XptaTov, Jas. ii. 1 ; poij (i. e. in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in- terpretation, _/ai/A in God of which Jesus Christ is the author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314 sqq., and H. P. Berlage, Disquisitio de formulae Paulinae itIv^lT)aoiv, Acts xx. 21; els Xpiarov, Acts xxiv. 24; xxvi. 18; Tj CIS XpicrTov irla-Tis vfiojv, Col. ii. 5; [nlaTiv ?;(eii/ fir epi, Mk. ix. 42 Tr nirg.] ; npos tov Kvp. Philem. 5 [L Tr WH ftr] ([see Trpo'r, I. 1 c. ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; unless here we prefer to render t!1(ttiv Jidelitij [see 2, below] ; cf. Meyer ad loc. and W. § 50, 2) ; n. rj ev Xp. 'iTjo-oi, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 15 ; T] w- iipcov fV Xp. 'ir/o". Col. i. 4 ; ^ Kara riva (see kutu, II. 1 e.) TTiVxir ivT(o KvpiKo, Eph. i. 15 ; ev tco alpaTt avrov, Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. ISIeyer]. wio-T-tr [cf. W. 120 (1 14)] and fj TricTTts simply : Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8 ; xiv. 22, -27; XV. 9; xvii. 31 ; Ro. [iii. 27 (on which see vopos, rS)], 31 ; iv. 14 ; v. 2 [L Tr WH br. rij jriWet] ; ix. 32 ; x. •8, 17; xii. 3, 6; 1 Co. [xii. 9 (here of a charism)]; xvi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 13; [viii. 7]; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25 ^q. ; V. 5; vi. 10; Eph. ii. 8 ; iii. 17; iv. 5; vi. 16; 2 Th. i. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 2, 4 (on the latter pass, see oiKovopia), 19 ; ii. 7 (on which see aXrjdeia, I. 2 c.) ; iii. 9 ; iv. 1, 6 ; V. 8; vi. 10,12,21; 2 Tim. i. 5; ii. 18; iii. 8, 10; iv. 7 ; Tit. i. 1, 4, 13 ; ii. 2 ; iii. 15 ; Jas. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 5 ; 2 Pet. i. 1, 5. with a gen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32 ; Ro. i. 8, 12; 1 Co.ii. 5; xv. 14, 17; 2 Co. i. 24; Phil. i. 25; ii. 17 ; 1 Th. iii. 2, 5-7, 10 ; 2 Th. i. 3 ; iii. 2 ; Philem. 6 ; Jas. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 7, 9 [here WII cm. gen.] ; 1 Jn. v. 4 ; 33 Rev. xiii. 10; jrX^pTjr irioTfmr k. irvevpaTos, Acts vi. 5; nvfvpaTos , a.) ttjv nicmv, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially Koolhaas, Diss, philol. I. et II. de vario usu et consti'uc- tione vocum Trlarts, ttiittos et irKTTtifw in N. T. (Traj. ad Rhen. 1733, 4to.) ; Dav. Schulz, Was heisst Glauben, etc. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq. ; lliickert, Com. lib. d. Rom., 2d ed., i. p. 51 sqtp ; Luiz, Ribl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqc). ; Ilulher, Ueber fw^ u. marfieiv im X. T., in the Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for 1872, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghtfi. Com. on Gal. p. 154 sqq.]. On Paul's conception of ttiotls. cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 scjq. ; Wei-i-i, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., § 82 c. d. (cf. the index s. v. Glaube); P/?ei//er(?)', Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [Eng. trans, i. p. 161 sqq. ; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau- lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to the Hebrews see Richni, Lehrbegr. des Hebr.-Br. p. 700 sqq. ; TVci.w, as above § 1 25 b. c. On John's con- ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei- trage zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [cf. his Histoire de la Theol. Chretienne, etc., 3me ed., ii. p. 508 sqq. (Eng. trans, ii. 455 sqq.)]; Webss, as above §149, and the same author's Johann. Lehrbegriff, p. 18 sqq." xwrris, -ij, -ok, (ttiiBui [q. v.]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. mostly for ;0N3 ; 1. trust)/, fnilhful; of persons who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi- ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of official duties : SoCXos, Jit. xxiv. 45 ; xxv. 21,23; oIkovo- fios, Lk. xii. 42; 1 Co. iv. 2; Siaxovos, Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. i. 7 ; iv. 7 ; apxifpfvs, Heb. ii. 17; iii. 2 ; of God, abid- ing by his promises, 1 Co. i. 9 ; x. 13 ; 2 Co. i. 18 ; 1 Th. V. 24; 2 Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 23; xi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 13; 1 Jn. i. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 19 ; add, 1 Co. iv. 17; Col. iv. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; II eb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; ntcrros tv nvi, in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; xix. 17 ; 1 Tim. iii. 11 ; eVi Tt, Mt. XXV. 23; axpi 9avaxov, Rev. ii. 10. one who kept his plighted faith. Rev. ii. 13 ; worthy of trust ; that can be relied on : 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; Christ is called HapTvs 6 TTiaros, Rev. i. 5 ; with koi aKrjBiv6t added, Rev. iii. 14 ; [cf. xi.x. 11]. of things, that can be relied on : 6 Xoyof , 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 1 1 ; Tit. i. 9 ; [iii. 8 ; oJtoi oi Atiyot, Rev. xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6] ; with Traarjs uno- S-iX'jf «i^tot added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; ra ocria AaniS TO TTio-Tii (see oCTioE, fiu.), Acts xiii. 34. 2. casili/ ]>cfsii(ihir. in Col. i. 2 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ; 1 Tim. iv. 10; vi. 2 ; Tit. i. 6; Rev. xvii. 14 ; oi ttio-toi, substantively [see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x. 45; 1 Tim. iv. 3, 12; with iv Xpiaro) 'irjaov added [cf. B. 174 (152)], Eph. i. 1 ; (Is eeov kt\. 1 Pet. i. 21 L T Tr txt. WIl ; ot- cTTov TrotetK Ti, to do something harmonizing with (Chris- tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work'], 3 Jn. 5.» iruTTiw, -£> : 1 aor. pass. €7ri ; fut. TTkavrjtTa ; 1 aor. eirXuvijo-a ; Pass., pres^ nXavuipat; pf. TTfTrXai/ijfiai ; 1 aor. cTrXunJ^iji': (rrXdnj) ; fr^ Aeschyl. and lldt. down; Se]>t. for ni'Pn ; to cause to- stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a. prop. ; in ])ass., Sept. chiefly for T^yB, to go ast7-ay, iran- der.roam about, (first .so in Horn. II. 23, 321): Jit. xviii. 12sq. ; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. liii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 176) ; Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph.to lead away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive : riva, Mt. xxiv. 4, 5, 11, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 5, 6; Jn. vii. 12; 1 Jn. ii. 26 ; iii. 7 ; 2 Tim. iii. 13» ; Rev. ii. 20 G L T Tr WH ; xii. 9 ; xiii. 14 ; xix. 20; xx. 3, 8, 10; «uutok, 1 Jn. i. 8; pass, to be led into error, [R.V. he led astray] : Lk. xxi. 8 ; Jn. vii. 47 : Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; to err, Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xiL 24, 27 ; /lij -nKavaaBf, 1 Co. vi. 9 ; xv. 33 ; Gal. vi. 7 ; Jas. i. 16 ; esp. through ignorance to he led aside from the path of virtue, to go astray, sin : Tit. iii. 3 ; Heb. v. 2 ; tji KapSla, Heb. iii. 10; dno T^r a^rjOelas. Jas. v. 19; to toan- der or fall away from the true failh, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii. 13' ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; lobe led away into error and sin, Rev.. xviii. 23. [COMP. : dwo-irXai/a<».] * irXdvii, -i)f, v, a tcandering, a straying about, whereby one, led astray from the right way, roams hither and thither (Aeschyl., [Ildt.], Em-., Plat., Dem., al.). In the X. T. metaph. mental straying, i. e. error, wrong opinion relative to morals or religion : Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 11 ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11 (on which [cf. W. 189 (177) and] see eKx«V ^- fin.) ; er- ■7r\.dvr)<; 615 irKeiav ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting: Ro. i. 27; n\dvri 68ov Tivos, [R. V. error of one's way i. e.] the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v. 20 (nKdvrj fu^s, Sap. i. 12) ; as sometimes the Lat. error, i. q. that which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. xxvii. 64.' [irXdviis, -r;ro:, n, see TrXai^TTjr.] ir\avT|TT)s, -ov, 6, (jrXawca), a wanderer: dort'pfs n-\av^- Tot, wandering stars (Aristot., Plut., al.), Jude 13 [where WH mrg. dor. n'KdvriTii (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)] ; see darrjp, fin.* irXdvos, -ov, wandering, roving; trans, and trop. 7nis- leading, leading into error : irvevfmTa nXdva, 1 Tim. iv. 1 (TrXdvoL avBpamoi, Joseph, b. j. 2, 13, 4). 6 -nXdvos substantively (Cic. al. /i/an!v, more than all, Mk. xii, 43 ; Lk. xxi. 3 ; nXflova . . , tovtihv, more than these, Jn. vii. 31 [here L T Tr WH om. the gen, (see below)] ; Trkelova rap irparav, more than the first. Rev. ii, 19 ; ttXeioi/ tovtoiv, more than these, Jn. x.xi. 15 ; [TrXetova Tiprjv «^^'^ "^^^ oiKov, Heb. iii. 3** (cf. W. 190 (1 78), 240 (225) )] ; ncptaiTevei.v TrXeioi', 7nore than, foil, by a gen. [ A, V, exceef/], Mt, v, 20, nXcloves (n-Xfiour) 7, Jit. xxvi, 53 R G [L ffXei'o) (br. ^)] ; Jn. iv, 1 [Tr mrg. om. WHbr. rjl 7r\eiov ij, more than, Lk. ix, 13 ; liKiov TrXrjV w, a gen. Acts xv. 28 ; -irKiov irapd [ri or Tiva (see napd, IIL 2 b.)], Lk. iii. 13 ; [Heb. iii. 3*] ; ij is omitted before numerals without change of construction : irOiv rjv TrXtid- vav TedtrapdKovTu 6 avBpaiiTos, Acts iv. 22 ; oi Tikeiovs flcriv poi fipipai SexaSvo, Acts xxiv. 11 (here Rec. inserts ^) ; ripepas ov TrXei'our okto) tj Scko (Rec. nXflovs ^ Se'ita), Acts XXV, 6; add, Acts xxiii, 13, 21 ; as in Grk. writ, after a neuter : irXetco [Lchm, rj in br.] SaSexa \eyeavas, Mt. xxvi. 53[TTrWH(butTXevtw>'(av)].(7rXfri' — Attic for TrXfioK — i^axoaiovs, Arstph, av. 1251 ; errj ycyovtus 7rKflo> cffSopjf Kovra, Flat. apol. Socr. p. 1 7 d. ; see 7, 3 a. ; on the omis- sion of quam in Latin after plus and amplius, cf. Rams- horn, Lat, Gram. p. 491; [/?o?»/, I^-it. Gram. §1273]). the objects ivith which the comparison is made are not added because easily supplied from the context : Jn. iv. 41; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; to TrXfioi/, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk. vii. 43 ; jrXfioi', adverbially, 7nore, i. e. more earnestly, Lk. vii. 42 ; «VI n-Xeioi', more ipidcly, further, SiavepecrBai, Acts iv. 1 7 ; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below)] ; npoKonreiv, 2 Tim. iii, 9 ; em TrXfiov do'f^etac, 2 Tim, ii, 16; ciri irKe^ov, longer (than proper), Acts xx, 9 [not WH mrg, (see ifKiKKO 516 ttXjJactij? above)] ; xxiv. 4 ; plural irKelova, more, i. e. a larger re- ward, Alt. XX. 10 [but LTr Wlln-Xeioc]; without com- ])arison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst. : Aets ii. 40; xiii. 31 ; xviii. 20; xxi. 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14; xxvii. 20 ; xxviii. 23 ; neut. irepl wXfioi'tiji' [A. V. of many thingf:'], Lk. xi. 53 ; with the article oi irKelovfs (irKelovs), the more part, very jnany: Actsxix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1 Co. ix. 19; x. 5; xv. G ; 2 Co. ii. 6; iv. 15; ix. 2; Phil. i. 14. 2. greater in quality, superior, more excellent : foil, by the gen. of eom|)arison, Mt. vi. 25 ; xii. 41, 42 ; Mk. xii. 33 [here T ^VH Trtxt. ntpia-iruTepov']; Lk. xi. 31, 32; xii. 23 ; [jrXWofa dvalav ■ ■ ■ Trapa Kaiv, Heb. xi. 4 (see wapa, U.S.). From llom. down.]* irXeKu : 1 aor. ptcp. nXi^avrfs; [(ef. Curtius § 103 ; VaniCek p. 51!))]; fr. lloin. down; to plait, braid, weave together : nXi^avTa aTea^o>.] * irXeovcKTc'u, -oj ; 1 aor. eVXeovc'icnjcra ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. lAnv. irXeovcKTrjdoi^ev', {irKfoveKTrjs^ ', 1. in- trans. to have more, or a greater part or share : Thuc., Xen., Plut., al. ; to be superior, excel, surpass, have an advantage over, nvos (gen. of pers.) tiw (dat. of thing) : Xen., Plat., Isocr., Dem., al. 2. trans, to gain or take advantage of another, to overreach: [Ildt. 8, 112], Plat., Diod., Dion. Hal., Dio Cass., al. ; and so in the N. T. in 2 Co. vii. 2 ; xii. 1 7, 18 ; 1 Th. iv. 6 (see npayfia, b.) ; pass. [cf. B. § 132, 22] ino rwot, 2 Co. ii. 11 (10).* ■irXeovtKTTis, -ov, 6, (irXiov and :;^7ro-irXe'a).] * •n-XnY^j.-^r, ij, (jrXi)Top. bci/07jd, besides, further); it stands 1. adverbially, at the beginning of a sentence, serving either to restrict, or to unfold and expand what has pre- ceded : moreover, besides, so that, according to the re- quirements of the context, it may also be rendered btit, nevertheless ; [hoicbeit ; cf . B. § 146, 2] : Mt. xi. 22, 24 ; xviii. 7; xxvi. 39, 04; Lk. vi. 24,35; x. 11,14, 20; xi.41; xii. 31 ; xiii. 33 ; xvii. 1 L Tr txt. WH ; xviii. 8 ; xix. 27 ; xxii. 21,22,42; xxiii. 28 ; 1 Co. xi. 11 ; Eph. v. 33 ; Phil.i. 18 [R G (see Ellicott)] ; iii. 16 ; iv. 14 ; Rev. ii. 25 ; ttKtjv on, except that, save that, (exx. fr. class. Grk. are given by Passow s. V. II. 1 e. ; [L. and S. s. v. B. II. 4]) : Acts xx. 23 [( W. 508 (473) ; Phil. i. 18 L T Tr WH (R. V. onbj that)^. 2. as a preposition, with the gen. (first so by Ilom.Od. 8, 207; [cf. W. § 54, 6]), besides, except, but: Mk. xii. 32 ; Jn. viii. 10 ; Acts viii. 1 ; xv. 28 ; xxvii. 22. Cf. Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 724 sq.* •irXTJpiis, -es, (IIAEQ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for air^ ; a. /uU, i. e.Jilled up (as opp. to empty) : of hollow vessels, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 43 [R G L] ; with a gen. of the thing, Mk. viii. 19; of a surface, covered in every part : XeVpar, Lk. v. 12; of the soul, thoroughly permeated tiuth : wi/f u/iaroj dylov, Lk. iv. 1 ; Acts vi. 3 ; vii. 55 ; xi. 24 ; niarTeas, Acts vi. 5 ; X"?'- TOJ, Acts vi. 8 [Rec. TriOTfms] ; ;(dpiTos koi akrjdfias, Jn. i. 14; 86\ov, Acts xiii. 10 (Jer. v. 27); ^u/ioC, Acts xix. 28 ; abounding in, tpyau aya6a>v. Acts ix. 36. b. full i. e. complete ; lacking nothing, perfect, (so the Sept. sometimes for ul'd; 1 ; also nfir'h.Tjporpoprjpevoi, Col. iv. 12 LTTr WH; olanocrTuXoi . . . 7i\Tjpo(poprj6€VTes tut TTjS avaOTaCfOJff TOV KVpiov 'I. Xp. KOL 7Tt(TTOi6€VT€S fV TtO Xdyoj Toil 6eov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 42, 3 ; freq. so in eccl. writ. ; to render inclined or bent on, €nXT)ijo(poprj6i) KopSia . ■ . Toil TTOifiam to TTOvqpov, Eccl. viii. 11, [cl. Test. xii. Patr., test. Gad 2]. The word is treated of fully by Bleek, Brief an d. Ileb. ii. 2 p. 233 sqq. ; Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. Deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 38 sqq.; [Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. iv. 1 2. Cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v.] * irXi]po({>opia, -as, rj, (ffXijpo^op/i», q. v.), fulness, abun- dance : iria-Teas, Heb. X. 22 ; Trji tKirihos, Heb. vi. 11 ; r^r fTvviuiai, Col. ii. 2 ; full assurance, most certain confi- dence, (see TrXrjpofpopea, c. [al. give it the same meaning in one or other of the preceding pass, also ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]), 1 Th. i. 5. (Not found elsewh. exc. in eccl. writ. [cf. W. 25].) * irXi^pdu -i>, (inf. -povv Lk. ix. 31, see WH. App. p. 106) ; impf. 3 pers. sing. cTrXijpgu ; fut. irXi/poxru ; 1 aor. cVXij- patra ; pf. TTeirXrjpioKa ; Pass., jjres. nXrjpovpai ; impf. iirXrjpovpTju; \ii. TTeTrXrjpdjpai] 1 aor. tTT\7)pw6r]v ; 1 fut. ttXi;- padrja-opai; fut. mid. TvXrjpdicropai (once, Uev. vi. 1 1 Rec.) ; (fr. IIAHP02 equiv. to 7rXijpi;s) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for xSp ; 1. to make full, tofll, tofll up : TTjv uifia toC 6eov {fL'.a TrXtjpco^a, 1), Kph. iii. 19 [not WIl nir".] ; Christ, exalted to share in the divine adminis- tration, is said nXripovv ra Ttavra, to fill (pervade) the universe with his jn-esence, i)Ower, activity, Eph. iv. 10 ; also ■n\r)pov TrXijpi, X/y« Kvpios, Jer. xxiii. 24 ; Grimm, Exeget. lldbch. on Sa]). i. 7 p. o.O, cites exx. fr. Pliilo and others ; [(but ii/ vaa-iv here is variously under- stood ; see jrar, II. 2 b. 8. aa. and the Comm.)]). 2. lo render full, i. e. lo complete ; a. prop, lu fill up to the top : nacrav dpayya, Lk. iii. 5 ; so that nothing shall be wanting to full measure, fill to the brim, to fifTfiov (q. V. 1 a.), Mt. xxiii. 32. b. to perfect, con- s'liiimatc ; o. a number: ias TT\r}pt>>duicTL Km o\ iriv- bovKoi, until the number of their comrades also .«hall have been made complete, Rev. vi. 11 L WII txt.,cf. Diister- dieck ad loc. [see y. below], by a Hebraism (see niii.- nXrjiii, fin.) time is said 7rXi;poCcri9ai, nfwXripoipivos, either when a period of time that was to elapse has passed, or when a definite time is at hand : Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. x.xi. 24 ; Jn. vii. 8 ; Acts vii. 23, 30 ; ix. 23 ; xxiv. 27, (Gen. xxv. 24 ; xxix. 21 ; Lev. viii. 33 ; xii. 4 ; xxv. 30 ; Num. vi. 5 ; Joseph, antt. 4,4, G ; 6, 4, 1 ; irXripoiiv tov re'Xcov iviavTov, Plat. Tim. p. 39 d. ; rovt XP""""^' '''SS- ^ P- ^'''' ^O- P- to miihe complete in ecerij particulor; to render perfect : ■nacrav (vboKiav kt\. 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; Triv x^pav, Phil. ii. 2 ; pass., Jn. iii. 29; xv. 11 ; xvi. 24; xvii. 13 ; 1 Jn. i. 4 ; 2 Jn. 12; Ta (py, pass. Rev. iii. 2 ; t^v inaKoriv, to cause all to obey, pass. 2 Co. X. 6 ; TO micrxa, Lk. xxii. 16 (Jesus speaks liere allegorically : until perfect deliverance and blessed- ness be celebrated in the heavenly state). 7. to carry llii-our/h lo tlie end, lo accomplish, carry out, (some undertaking) : iravTa to prjpaTa, Lk. vii. 1 ; t!]v SiaKovlav, Acts xii. 25; Col. iv. 17; to epyov. Acts xiv. 26; roi/ dpopov, Acts .xiii. 2.5; sc. tov Spopov, Rev. vi. 11 ace. to the reading irXrjpaxraa-t (G T Tr WII mrg.) or TrXr/pw- (Tovrai (Kec.) [see a. above] ; i>s eVXijpu^i; Taiira, when these things were ended. Acts xix. 21. Here belongs also nXrjpovv to fvayyeKiov, to cause to be everywhere known, acknowledged, embraced, [A. V. / have fully preached^, Ro. xv. 19 ; in the same sense tov Xoyov toC dfoii, Col. i. 25. O. to carry into effect, hrinrj to reali- zation, realize ; a. of matters of duty, to perform, execute : toi/ v6p.ov, Ro. xiii. 8 ; Gal. v. 14 ; to StKalapa TOV vopov, pass., ev rjplv, among us, Ro. viii. 4 ; naaav SiKaioa-vvrjv, Mt. iii. 15 (eia-e^eiav, 4 Mace. xii. 15); tijk ?|o8oi' (as something appointed and prescribed by God), Lk. ix. 31. p. of sayings,' promises, prophecies, to hring to pass, ratify, accomplish ; so in the phrases iva or 0770)5 T!-\i]pad[i f] ypac^fj, to prjdiv, etc. (cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. p. 533 sq.) : Mt. i. 22 ; ii. 15, 17, 23 ; iv. 14 ; viii. 1 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ; xxvi. 54. 56 ; xxvii. 9, 35 Rec; Mk. xiv. 49; .xv. 28 (which vs. GTWHom. Trbr."); Lk. i. 20 ; iv. 21 ; xxi. 22 Rec. ; xxiv. 44 ; Jn. xii. 38 ; xiii. 18; XV. 25; xvii. 12; xviii. 9, 32 ; .xi.x. 24, 36 ; Acts i. 16 ; iii. 18; xiii. 27; Jas. ii. 23, (1 K. ii. 27; 2 Chr. xx.xvi. 22). 7. universally and absolutely, to fulfl, i.e. to cause God's will (as made known in the law) to he obeyed as it should be, and God's ])romiscs (given through the proi)hcts) to receive fulflment : Mt. v. 1 7 ; cf. Weiss, Das Matthiiusevang. u.s.w. p. 14G sq. [Comp. : ava-, avT-ava-, irpocr-ava-, ck-, cu/i-TrXj^poco.] * ■irXif|pu)|ia, -Tof, to', {irXijpua), Sept. for N^D ; 1. elymologically it has a jiassive sense, that tvhich is (or lias liein) filed; very rarely so in class. Grk. : a ship, in- asmuch as it is filled (i. e. manned) with sailors, rowers, and soldiers ; utto dvo TrXijpwpi'iToiv tpaxovTo, Lcian. ver. hist. 2, 37 ; rnvre clxov TrXrjpuipaTa, ibid. 38. In the N. T. the body of believers, as that which is filled with the presence, ])0wer, agency, riches of God and of Christ : TOV Xpipa tov 6eov, that ye may become a body wholly lillril and Hooded by God, Eph. iii. 19 [but WII mrg. reads nXrjpadjj nav to jrX.]. 2. that ichich flls or with which a thiny is filed: so very frecpienlly in class. Grk. fr. Ildt. down; esp. of those things with which ships are filled, freight and merchandise, sailors, oarsmen, soldiers, [cf. our 'complement' (yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 258 sq.)], (of the animals filling Noah's ark, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. §12) ; nXripwpa TroXfwt, the inhabitants or population fill- ing a city, riat. de rep. 2 p. 371 e. ; Aristot. polit. 3, 13 p. 1284", 5 : 4,4 p. 129r, 17; al. So in the N. T. ij y!} rai TO nXrjpwpa avTrji, whatever fills the earth or is contained in it, 1 Co. X. 26, 28 Rec. (Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1 ; xlix. (1.) 12; Jer. viii. 16; Ezek. xii. 19, etc.; TOTrXrjpapaTrjsSaXda-- o-ijs, Ps. xcv. (.xcvi.) 11 ; 1 Chr. xvi. 32) ; Koipivav TT\r;pu>- fiaTa, those things with which the baskets were filled, [bashetfuls}, Mk. vi. 43 T Tr WII [on this pass. cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 260] ; also cnrvplhav nXripwpaTa, Mk. viii. 20; the filing (Lat. comjilementum) by which a gap is filled up, I\It. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 ; that by which a loss is repaired, spoken of the reception of all the Jews into the kingdom of God (see yTTJipa, 1), Ro. xi. 12. Of time (sce7rX7;pdl 519 ■rrXvva) <;ommonwealtli : Acts vii. 27; and Kec. in Ileb. viii. 11 ; ace. to the teaching of Christ, any other man irrespec- tive of race or religion with whom we live or whom we chance to meet (which idea is clearly brought out in the parable Lk. x. 25-37): Mt. xix. 19; xxii. 39; Jlk. xii. -31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9, 10; [xv. 2]; Gal. v. 14; Eph. iv. 25 ; Jas. ii. 8 and L T Tr WH in iv. 12 ; tTkrfcriou -fival Tivos, to be near one [one's neighbor], i. e. in a pass, sense, worthy to be regarded as a friend and companion, Lk. X. 29 ; actively, to perform the offices of a friend and companion, ibid. 36 ; [on the om. of the art. in the last two exx. see B. § 129, 11 ; W. § 19 fin.].* irXT]i, (Vulg. aaluri/cif:) : irpbs Tr\T]tTfiov!jv aapKos, for the satisfying of the flesh, to satiate the desires of the ■flesh (see aap$, 4), Col. ii. 23, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [others (including 11. V.) render the phrase ar/ainst (i. e. for the remedy of) the indulgence of the flesh ; see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc, and jrpof, L 1 c.]. (Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plato, Plut., al. ; Sept.)* irX^o-o-o» [cf. jrXr/yij, (weXayos), L,a,t. plango, plaga; Cur- tius § 307] : 2 aor. pass. tTikriyrjV, fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for 7\2T\ (see jroTdo-o-M, init.) ; to strike, to smite : pass, (of the heavenly bodies smitten by God that they may be deprived of light and shrouded in darkness). Rev. viii. 12. [CoMP. : cV-, im- TrX^traco.] ' TrXoidpiov, -ou, TO, (diniiu. of TrXoTov ; see yvvaiKapiov, fin.), a small vessel, a boat : Mk. iii. 9 ; iv. 36 Rec. ; Lk. V. 2 L mrg. T Tr mrg. "\VH mrg. ; Jn. vi. [22-], 22'' Rec, 23 [where L Tr mrg. WH n\oia], 24 L T Tr WH ; xxi. 8. [Cf. B. D. s. V. Ship (13).] (Arstph., Xen., Diod., al.) • irXoiov, -on, TO, (n-Xem), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for n'^JX, a ship : Mt. iv. 21, 22 ; Mk. i. 19 ; Lk. v. 2 [R G L txt. Tr txt. WH txt.] ; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx.' 13, and often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; Jas. iii. 4 ; Rev. viii. 3 ; xviii. 19. [BB. DD. s. v. Ship.] irXoos -ovs, gen. -6ov -oii, and in later writ. ttXoos (Acts xxvii. 9 ; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 § 61 ; see voOf [and ■cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (TrXeu), fr. Hom. Od. 3, 169 down; ooi/aye : Acts xxi. 7 ; xxvii. 9, 10, (Sap. xiv. 1).* irXoiiofi seem to have been in the main coincident terms ; but tti/oij became the more poetical. Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology. Even in class. (Jrk. wKfO/xa became as freq. and as wide in its application as ai/t/ios. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench §lxxiii.)] 2. the spirit, i.e. the vital priiiciple by which the body is animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al. ; see below)] : Lk. viii. 55 ; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30 ; Acts vii. 59 ; Rev. xiii. 15 [here R.V. breath'] ; d(f)uvat to nvevfia, to breathe out the spirit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 cf. Sir. xxxviii. 23 ; Sap. xvi. 14 (Grk. writ, said dcpUvai ti-jv xj^vx^jv, as Gen. x.xxv. 18, see a<^lrifii, 1 b. and Ki/jikc, Observv. i. p. 140; but we also find dcpuvai nvfVfia ffavaaifia (T(p(iyfi, Eur. Hec. 571) ; <7QJfJ.a Xiapls TTViVfLUTOS VfKpoV taTlV, JaS. ii. 26 ; TO TTvevfxd i(TTL TO faioTroioOf, ^ 0"«/J^ °'-''^ a)0eXet ovdiv, the spirit is that which animates and gives life, the body is of no profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in turn to the sjjirit ; cf. Chr. Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opuscc. p. 239), Jn. vi. 63. the rational spirit, the power by which a human being feels, thinks, wills, decides; the soul: TV iTVfvfjLa Tov dvSiiuiTTOv TO ev avTa, 1 Co. ii. 11; opp. to o-dp^ ((). V. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 ; 1 Co. V. 5 ; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; Col. ii. 5 ; opp. to to au>pa, Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. vi. 1 7, 20 Ree. ; vii. 34 ; 1 Pet. iv. 6. Although for the most part the words Trvevfia and ■^u^'J '^^^ used indis- criminately and so aSifia and ^/'ux'7 put in contrast (but never by Paul ; see ^vxri, esp. 2), there is also recognized a threefold distinction, to nvfvfia Ka\ r) yj^vxr] koI to aoipa, 1 Th. V. 23, ace. to which to nvtvpa is the rational part of man, the power of perceiving and grasping di\ine and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of God exerts its influence ; {nveitpa, says Luther, " is the high- est and noblest part of man, which quahfies him to lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things ; in short, it is the house where Faith and God's word are at home " [see reff. at end]) : axpi p.fpiv TivivpaToiv (for which Rec. has dy'iuip) Ta>v npo'pr)Ta>v, who incites and directs the souls of the prophets, Rev. x.xii. 6, where cf. Diisterdieck. the dative tw nvtvpaTt is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or suffers something, like our in spirit : emyivaia-Kftv, Mk. ii. 8; di'OCTTd'dffii', JMk. viii. 12; (p^pipdadai. Jn. xi. 33; Tapda-a-(o6ai, Jn. xiii. 21; (ieiv, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 11 ; dya\\ma-6ai, Lk. x. 21 (but L T Tr VVII here add dyiio) ; dat. of respect : 1 Co. v. 3 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; Kparaioiitrdai, Lk. i. 80 ; ii. 40 Rec. ; dyiov etvai, 1 Co. vii. .'i4 ; ^a>OTToirj6fts, 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; (rpi, 1 i'ct. iv. 6 ; tttoi- Xoi, Mt. V. 3 ; dat. of instrument. StSf pirns. Acts xx. 22 ; trvvix^aBai, xviii. 5 Rec. ; 6ea XaTpdeiv, Phil. iii. 3 R G ;. dat. of advantage: livftriu tm nyfvpari pov, 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; (V TW nvevpan, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vL 20 Hec. [it is surely better to take iv r. tt. here local ly, of the 'sphere' (W. 386 (362), cf. vs. 19)] ; also iv irvdpa- Tt, nearly i. (\. TtvivpaTiKws [but see AV. § 51, 1 e. note], Jn. iv. 2.'! : of the seat of an action, iv tw TTvevpaTi pov, Ro. i. 9 ; TiOivM iv tm itv., to propose to one's self, ])ur])ose in- spirit, foil, by the infui. Acts xi.x. 21. irvdipara Trpotftrj- Tuv, acc. to the context the souls (spirits) of the jjrophets moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32 ; in a ])ecu- liar sense irvtvpa is used of a soul thoroughly roused by the Holy Spirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under- standing; thus in the phrases to irwC/id pov Trpoo-ft'j^frat, oi)[). to o vovs pov, 1 Co. xiv. 14 ; irvevpaTt, XaXeii' pvcnl)- pia, ibid. 2 ; Trpua-fvxfo-dai, \|/-dXXf ii/, euXoyt ii/, to) nv., as opp. to TW i/oi, ibid. 15, 16. 3. a spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least all grosser matter, and possessed of the power of knowing, desiring, deciding, and acting ; a. generically : Lk. xxiv. 37 ; Acts xxiii. 8 (on wliich see prfTe, fin.) ; ibid. 9'; irvevpa adpKa Koi oarta ovk fx^'' ^^' -^'^'v. 39 ; Trvevpa ((jioTToioiiv, [n life-giving spirit], spoken of Christ as raised from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 45 ; nvevpa 6 deos (God is sjiirit essentially), Jn. iv. 24; Trarijp tu>v nffvpoToiv, of God, Ileb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of men and of angels. b. a human soul that has left the body [(Babr. 122, 8)] : plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23; I Pet. iii. 19. c. a spirit higher than man but lower than God, i. e. an angel : plur. Heb. i. 14 ; used of demons, or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the bodies of men : [Mk. ix. 20] ; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18 ; plur., Mt. viii. 16; xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; nvtvpa TTvOciivos or TTvBojva, Acts xvi. 16 ; Trvsvpara datpovitav. Rev. xvi. 14 ; nvfvpa datpovlov dKa3dpTov> Lk. iv. 33 (see Saipoviov, 2) ; nvfCpa dcrdfveias, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. II ; wveOpa dxddaprov, Mt. X. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26, 27; iii. 11,30; v. 2,8, 13; vi. 7; vii. 25 ; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36 ; vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 26; Acts v. 16; viii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2; oXaXoi/, Koxjiov (for the Jews held that the same evils with which the men were afflicted affected the demons also that had taken possession of them [cf. Welstein, N. T. i. 279 sqq. : Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- siah, App. xvi. ; see SaipovtCopat etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix. 17, 25 ; novrjpov, Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2 ; Acts xix. 12, 13, 15, 16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23 ; 1 S. xvi. 14 ; xix. 9, etc.)]. d. TTvevfJia 521 •Trveufia. the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an- qels, close to Gud and most intimately united to him (in doctrinal phraseology the divine nature of Christ) : 1 Tim. iii. 16; with the addition of dyLoxjvvTjs (on which see dyunrrivr), 1 [yet cf. 4 a. below]), Ro. i. 4 [but see Meyer ad loc, EUicott on 1 Tim. 1. c] ; it is called TrveO/ia ala>- viov, in tacit contrast with the perishable ^v\at of sacri- ficial animals, in Heb. ix. 14, where cf. Delitzsch [and esp. Kurtz]. 4. The Scriptures also ascribe a 7ri>ev)ia to God, i. e. God's power and agency, — distinguishable in thought (or modalistice, as they say in technical speech) from God's essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts and blessings ; [cf. the resemblances and differences in Philo's use of to deiov rrvevfia, e. g. de gigant. § 12 (cf. § 5 sq.) ; quis rer. div. § 53 ; de raund. opif. § 4C, etc.]. a. This TTveiiia is called in the O. T. D'Ti-'X HO, nirr nn ; in the N. T. irvevfia nytoi/, to aytov nvevfia, to nvevfia to aytov (first so in Sap. i. 5 ; ix. 17 ; for lyip nil, in Ps. 1. (li.) 13, Is. Ixiii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by nvevjia ayuo- (rvvijs),i. e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora- ble, utterly opposed to all impurity) : Mt. i. 18, 20; iii. 11 ; xii. 32 ; x.wiii. 19 ; Mk. i. 8 ; iii. 29 ; xii. 36 ; xiii. 11 ; Lk. i. 15, 35 ; ii. 25, 26 ; iii. IG, 22 ; iv. 1 ; xi. 13 ; xii. 10, 12 ; Jn. i. 33 ; vii. 39 [L T WH cm. Tr br. ay.] ; xiv. 26 ; XX. 22 ; Acts i. 2, 5, 8, 16 ; ii. 33, 38 ; iv. 25 L T Tr WH ; V. 3,32; viii. 18[LTWHom. Trbr.Toay.], 19; ix. 31; x. 38, 44, 45, 47 ; xi. 15, 16, 24 ; xiii. 2, 4, 9, 52 ; xv. 8, 28 ; xvi. 6 ; xix. 6 ; xx. 28 ; Ro. Lx. 1 ; xiv. 17; xv. 13, 16, 19 [L Tr WH in br.] ; 1 Co. vi. 19 ; xii. 3 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; xiii. 13 (14) ; Eph. i. 13 ; 1 Th. i. 5, 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; Tit. iii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 4 ; vi. 4 ; ix. 8 ; 1 Jn. v. 7 Rec; Jude 20 ; oth- er exx. will be given below in the phrases ; (on the use and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 10.3 [in opposition to Harless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al. ; cf. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v. 5; W. 122 (116) ; B. 89 (78)]) ; to ttk. to ayiov rov 6foii, Eph. iv. 30; 1 Th. iv. 8; nvfifia Beov, Ro. viii. 9, 14; to toO 6(ov TTVfVfia, 1 Pet. iv. 14 ; (^to) Ttvexifxa (toO) 6cov, 5It. iii. 16 ; xii. 18, 28 ; 1 Co. ii. 14 ; iii. 16 ; Eph. iii. 16 ; 1 Jn. iv. 2 ; TO 771/. Tov 8eov rjfiav, 1 Co. vi. 11 ; to ttv. tov narpas, Mt. X. 20 ; nv. Sfoii (avros, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; to ttv. toO eyetpav- tos 'It](tovv, Ro. viii. 11; to m>. to ix 6fov (emanating from God and imparted unto men). 1 Co. ii. 12; nvevpa and TO TTV. tov Kvpiov, i. e. of God, Lk. iv. 18 ; Acts v. 9 (cf. vs. 4) ; viii. 39; Kvpiov, i. e. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17, 18 [cf. B. 343 (295)]; to nvdpa 'Itjo-oO, since the same Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi. 7 (where Rec. om.'lrjo-ov); Xpia-roi, Ro. viii. 9; 'li/o-oD XpKTToO, Phil. i. 19; to tv twi (in one's soul [not WH mrg.]) TTvevp-a Xpeorou, 1 Pet. i. 11 : to ttp. tov vlov tov 6fov, Gal. iv. 6 ; simply to wi/fCfia or 7TV(vp,a : Mt. iv. 1 ; xii. 31, 32 ; xxii. 43 ; Mk. i. 10, 12 ; Lk. iv. 1, 14 ; Jn. i. 32, 33 ; iii. 6, 8, 34 ; vii. 39 ; Acts ii. 4 ; viii. 29 ; x. 19 ; xi. 12, 28 ; xxi. 4 ; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27 ; xv. 30 ; 1 Co. ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Rec. adds aylov') ; xii. 4, 7, 8 ; 2 Co. i. 22 ; iii. 6, 8 ; V. 5 ; Gal. iii. 3, .5, 14 ; iv. 29 ; v. 5, 1 7, 22, 25 ; Eph. iv. 8 ; v. 9 Rec. ; vi. 1 7 ; Phil. ii. 1 ; 2 Th. ii. 13 ; 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; Jas. iv. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec. ; 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; V. 6, 8 ; Rev. xxii. 1 7. Among the beneficent and very varied operations and effects ascribed to this Spirit in the N. T., the foil, are prominent : by it the man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Mary (Mt. i. 18, 20 ; Lk. i. 35), and at his baptism by John it is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16 ; Mk. i. 10 ; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually {p.ivou in avTov) filled witli it (Jn. i. 3'2, 33, cf. iii. 34 ; Mt. xii. 28; Acts x. 38) ; hence to its prompting and aid the acts and words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1 ; xii. 28; Mk. i. 12 ; Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ's resurrection it was im- parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22 ; Acts ii. Sub- sequently other followers of Christ are related to have received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instru- mentality of baptism (Acts ii. 38 ; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep- tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag- ical bond. Acts viii. 12, 15; .x. 44 sqq. To its agency are referred all the blessings of the Christian religion, such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8 ; Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and. reff. s. V. j3djrTta-/xa, 3]) ; all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11 ; hence ayiaa-jMus irvdpaTos, 2 Th. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 2); the power of supiiressing evil desires and practising holi- ness (Ro. viii. 2 sqq. ; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22 ; 1 Pet. i. 22 [Rec], etc.) ; fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu- tions, losses, trials, for Christ's sake (Jit. .x. 20 ; Lk. xii. 11, 12; Ro. viii. 26) ; the knowledge of evangelical truth (Jn. xiv. 17, 26 ; xv. 26 ; xvi. 12, 13 ; 1 Co. ii. 6-16 ; Eph. iii. 5), — hence it is called irvevp-a Ttjs oKrjdfias ( Jn. 11. cc. ; 1 Jn. iv. 6), nvtvfxa (jo^ias Koi airoKokv^euis (Eph. i. 17); the sure and joyful hope of a future resurrection, and of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5 ; viii. 11 ; 2 Co. i. 22 ; v> 5; Eph. i. 13 sq.) ; for the Holy Spirit is the seal and pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22;. Eph. i. 13. lie is present to teach, guide, prompt, restrain,, those Christians whose agency God employs in carrying out his counsels : Acts viii. 29, 39 ; x. 19 ; xi. 12; xiii. 2, 4 ; XV. 28 ; xvi. 6, 7 ; xx. 28. He is the author of char- isms or special "gifts" (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see ^dpurp-a), prominent among which is the power of prophesy- ing: Ta ep)(6pfva dvayyeXd, Jn. xvi. 13; hence to Tvevpa Trjs TrpocprjTeias (Rev. xix. 10) ; and his efficiency in the prophets is called to irvev/ia simply (1 Th. v. 19), and their utterances are introduced with these formulas: TiiSf Xe'yfi TO irvfvpa to aytov. Acts xxi. 11 ; to nvtvpa Xf'yfi, 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with toIs f'KK\r]a-iais added. Rev. ii. 7, 11, 1 7, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22. Since the Holy Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O. T. Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21 ; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances are cited in the foil, terms : Xf'yet or paprvpd to Trvcvpa TO ayiov, Heb. iii. 7 ; x. 15 ; to ttv. to ay. e'XiiAijo-e Sia 'Htratov, Acts xxviii. 25, cf. i. 16. From among the- great number of other phrases referring to the Holy Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here : God TTvevfia 522 •}ri>evfj,a is said 8i&6vat rtvi to ttv. to ay., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xv. 8; pass. Ro. V. 5 ; inoro jjieciselv, ck tov irvivjiaTOi airoii, i. e. a portion from his S])irit's fuliu-ss [B. § 132, 7; W. 366 (343)3, 1 Jn. iv. 13 ; or «o. viii. 9, 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 16 ; vi. 19 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; Jas. iv. 5, (other expressions may be found imder jSaTTTifo), II. b. bb. ; yevvaai, 1 fin. and 2 d. ; «p^f'tab. ; ;(pi6r)) ; iv TTvfvfxari, in the power of the Spirit, possessed and moved by the Spirit, Mt. xxii. 43 ; Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10; also iv tw TTvevfian, Lk. ii. 27; iv. 1 ; iv Ta TTV. Tw (5y. Lk. x. 21 Tdf. ; iv Tr/ Swapft toO ttv. Lk. iv. 14 ; iv Tw TTvevfian tm &y. (Ittuv, Jlk. xii. 36; iv TrvfifiaTt (Ay.) npoph. vi. 18; Jude 20; iv ttv. 6eov Xa\f'iv, 1 Co. xii. 3 ; ayaTrr) iv TTvevfiaTi, love which the Spirit begets. Col. i. 8 ; rrepiToji)) iv ttP., effected by the Holy Spirit, opp. to ypiippan, the prescription of the written law, Ro. ii. 29 ; ti/ttos yiVou toiv ma-Toiv iv ttv., in the way in which you are go\erned by the Spirit, 1 Tim. iv. 12 Rec. ; [cV ivl TTveviiari, Eph. ii. 18]; ij ivoTrjs tov Trvfii/inTos, effected by the Spirit, Eph. iv. 3 ; KaivoTrjs tov TTV. Ro. vii. 6. TO TTveiipa is opp. to ij oap^ i. e. human nature left to itself and without the controlling iniluence of God's Spirit, subject to error and sin, Gal. v. 1 7, 1 9, 22; [vi. 8] ; Ro. viii. 6; so in the phrases Trfpin-aTfii/ itaTa TTvcvpa (opp. to Kara aapKa), l\o. viii. 1 Rec, 4 ; of itaTa TTVfiina sc. ovTfs (opp. to 01 Kara (rdpKa ovres), those who bear the nature of the Spirit (i. e. ui Trvevp.aTLKoV), ib. 5 ; iv TTveviiari clvai (opp. to iv trapKi), to be under the power of the Spirit, to be guided by the Spirit, ib. 9 ; iTvfvpttTi (dat. of 'norm'; [cf. B. § 133, 22 b. ; W. 219 (■-05)J) TTfpiTTaTe'tv (opp. to iTTi6vp.iav aapKoi T(\eiv), Gal. V. IG. The Holy Spirit is a bvvapn, and is expressly so called in Lk. xxiv. 49, and tivapn v^Io-tov, Lk. i. 35 ; but we find also wivpa (or ttv. ay.) Kal Svvapts. Acts x. 38 ; 1 Co. ii. 4 ; and j) biivapis toC TTvevpaTos, Lk. iv. 14, where ttvcviio is regarded as the essence, and Svvapis its «fhcacy ; but in 1 Th. i. 5 iv TTvevpan ayia is cpexegetical of iv Svvapfi. In some jjass. the Holy Spirit is rhetori- cally reju-esented as a Person [(cf. rctf. below)] : Mt. xxviii.iy; Jn. xiv. IGscj. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 13-15 (in which pass. fr. Jn. the i)ersonification was suggested by the fact that the Holy Spirit was about to assume with the apos- tles the place of a person, namely of Christ) ; to ttv., KaOiot §ov\(Tai, 1 Co. xii. 1 1 ; what any one through the help of till! Holy Spirit has come to understanil or decide upon is said to liavc been s poken to him by the Holy Sjiirit: fine TO TTVfvpa Tivi, Acts viii. 29 ; x. 19; .\i. 12; xiii. 4 ; to TTV. TO ay. SmpupTvpfTai poi, Acts XX. 23. to ttv. to oy. e^cTo (jTiaKOTTovs, i. e. not only rendered them fit to dis- charge the ollice of bishoj), but also exercised such an in- fluence in their election (xiv. 23) that none except fit per- sons were chosen to the odice, Acts xx. 28 ; tu TTvivpa vTTfp(VTvyxp(da), and cannot state it in fit lan- guage («a^o 6ft) in our prayer but only disclose it by in- articulate groanings, yet God receives these groanings as acceptable prayers inasmuch as they come from a soul full of the Holy Spirit.' Those who strive against the sanctifying impulses of the Holy S|)irit are said avTmi- TTTftU TO) TTV. T6) Ay. ActS \U. 51 ; ivv(3pt^etV to ttv. TTjS X"/^'" Tor, 11(^1). X. 29. TTftpa^ftv to ttv. tov Kvplov is api>lied to those who by falsehood would discoxer whether men full of the Holy Spirit can be deceived. Acts v. 9 ; by anthro- popathism those who disregard decency in their speech are said 'KwTeiv to ttv. to ay., since by that they are taught how they ought to talk, Eph. iv. 30 (Trapo^iveiv to ttv. Is. Ixiii. 10; TTapaTTiKpaiveiv, Ps. cv. (cvi.) 33). Cf. Grimm, Institutio theologiae dogmaticae, §131; [ IFei'.«.<, Bibl. Theol. § 155 (and Index s. v. ' Geist Gottes,' 'S|)irit of God ') ; Kaliiiis, Lehre vom Ileil. Geiste; Frllzxclir; Nova opuscc. acad. p. 278 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Spirit the Holy; Su-cte in Diet, of Christ. Biog. s. v. Holy Ghost]. b. TO «TTTa TTVfvpoTa ToO d(ov, Rcv. [ill. 1 (where Rec." om. f'n-Ta)] ; iv. 5 ; v. G [here L om. WH br. eVTo], which are said to be ivmTTtov toC Bpovov toO 6fov (i. 4) are not seven angels, but one and the same divine Spirit manifesting itself in seven energies or operations (which are rhetori- cally personified, Zech. iii. 9 ; iv. 6, 10) ; cf. Diisterdieck on Rev. i. 4 ; [ Trench, Epp. to the Seven Churches, ed. 3 p. 7 sq.]. c. by melon. TTvevpa is used of a. one in w!iom a .ipi7-it (TTvevpa) i.f manifest or embodied; hence i. q. actuated hi/ n spirit, whellier divine or demoniacal ; one vho either is truIi/ moved by God's Spirit or falseli/ boasts that he is : 2 Th. ii, 2 ; 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3 ; hence SwKpia-fis iTVfvpaTav, 1 Co. xii. 10; fiti ttovtI Trvevpan TriaTficTf, 1 Jn. iv. 1 ; 8oKi/«iffTf TO TTvevpoTa, ei ix tov 6(ov ia-riv, ibid. ; TTVfvpaTa Tr'Kdva joined with diSaoKaXiai daipovtccv, 1 Tim. iv. 1. But in the truest and highest sense it is said 6 Kvpiot TO TTveiipd itTTiv, he in whom the entire fulness of the Spirit dwells, and from whom that fulness is diffused through the body of Christian believers, 2 Co. iii. 1 7. p. the i)lur. TTvivpaTa denotes the vai-ious modes and gifts by which the Holy Spirit shows itself operative in those irvevfia 523 TTVeVfiaTlKWii in whom it awells (such as to nveii/ia r^s irpocpriTelas, Trjs ias, etc.), 1 Co. xiv. 12. 5. univ. the disposition or influence which Jills and gov- erns the soul of any one ; the efficient source of any power, affection, emotion, desire, etc. : to avra itviijxaTi ircpima- rrjaafiev, 2 Co. xii. 18 ; iv TTvevjiarL 'HXi'ou, in the same spirit with whicli Elijah was filled of old, Lk. i. 1 7 ; TO prjiiaTa . . . irveviid eanv, exhale a spirit (and fill be- lievers with it), Jn. vi. 63; olov TrpdfiaTos etrre ifiels, \_what manner of spirit ye are oJ"\ viz. a divine spirit, that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 5 j [Rec. ; (cf. B. § 132, 111.; W. § 80, 5)] ; to nveiiiaTt, a iXdXei, Acts vi. 10, where see Jleyer; jrpau koi rjcT{i\iov irvevfia, 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; ttve D/ia irpaoTqTos, such as belongs to the meek, 1 Co. iv. 21 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; to ttv. ttjs npocpriTelai, such as characterizes prophec)' and by which the prophets are governed, Rev. xix. 10; r^s d\rj6eias, (Torftlas Koi airo- Ka\v\j/((iis, see above p. 521'' mid. (Is. xi. 2 ; Deut. xxxiv. ; Sap. vii. 7) ; t^s TriVrfcuf, 2 Co. iv. 13 ; TJjj viodealai, such as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; Trjs fm^s- (i> Xptara, of the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2 ; Swd/jiems Km clyamjf Koi troxppovia-fioii, 2 Tim. i. 7 ; cr Trvdifia (Ii/at with Christ, i. q. to be filled with the same spirit as Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17; ev cVi TTvevfiaTi, by the re- ception of one Spirit's efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; tis tv irvevfia, so as to be united into one body filled with one Spirit, ibid. RG; tv nvtvpa noTi^ea-dai, [inade to drink of i. e.] imbued with one Spirit, ibid. L T Tr AVH [see TroTi'fo)] ; fv (Tai^a Kal iv nvevjxa, one (social) body filled and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4 ; — in all these pass, although the language is general, yet it is clear from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten of the Holj- Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [(cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4G, 6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad Magn. 7)]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand. To TTvevfxa to ivfpyovv eV Tois viols t^? aTrei^ei'ay (a spirit that comes from the devil), E[)h. ii. 2 ; also to Trvfvjxa tov Kua-fiov, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude, 1 Co. ii. 12 ; SouXei'at, such as characterizes and governs slaves, Ro. viii. 15 ; KaTavv^euis, Ro. xi. 8 ; SfiXiar, 2 Tim. i. 7 ; T^? TiKavrfs, 1 Jn. iv. 6 {ifKavritTitos, Is. xi.\. 14 ; Trop- veias, Hos. iv. 12; v. 4) ; to toO dvrixplpa, iTopa, viTpa, 1 Co. x. 3, 4, [(cf. ' Teaching ' etc. 10, 3)]; TTvevpLOTiKa, thoughts, opinions, precepts, maxims, ascriljable to the Holy Spirit working in the soul, 1 Co. ii. 13 (on which see avyKpiva. 1) ; tq TTvevpaTiKa. spiritual gifts. — of the endowments called xapla-para (.«ee x*"?'" apa), 1 Co. xii. 1 ; xiv. 1 ; univ. the spiritual or heavenly blessings of the gospel, opp. to to trapKiKa, Ro. x\-. 27 ; [1 Co. ix. 11]. b. in reference to persons; one who is filled with and governed by the Spirit of God : 1 Co. ii. 15 (cf. 10-13, 16); [iii. 1]; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 1; oixor TTvcvpaTiKos, of a body of Christians (see o'lcor, 1 b. fin.), 1 Pet. ii. 5. (The word is not found in the O.'T. [cf. W. § 34, 3]. In prof. writ. fr. Aristot. down it means pertaining to the tvind or breath ; windy, exposed to the tcind ; blowing ; [but Soph. Lex. s. v. cites ttv- ovcrla, Cleo- med. 1, 8 p. 46 ; to t;v. to irdvToiV rovrtov aiTtov. Strab. 1. 3, 5 p. 78, lOed. Kramer ; and we find it opp. to aap-ariKov in Plut. mor. p. 129 c. (de sanitate jiraecepta 14) ; cf. An- thol. Pal. 8, 76. 175].)* irveufjiaTiKws, adv., spiritually, (Vulg. spiritaliler) : i. e. by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. [13 "\VH mrg.], 14 ; in a sense apprehended only by the aid of the Divine Spirit, i. e. in a hidden or mystical sense. Rev. xi. 8. Its opposite aapKiKois in the sense of literally is used by Jus- tin Mart. dial. c. Tryph. c. 14 p. 231 d.» •jrveu) 524 7rot€io irviu; 1 aor. fvvfvcra; fr. Horn, down; to hrealltc, to blow : of the wind, 2Mt. vii. 25, 27 ; Lk. xii. 55 ; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 18; Kev. vii. 1 ; rf/ Trviovcrji sc. avpa (ef. A\'. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (72)]), Acts x.wii. 40. [CoJir. ; cV, iv, iiro- wveo).] * irvC-ycii : impf. inviyov ; 1 aor. tirvt^a ; impf. pass. 3 pers. ■p\\xr.(TTviyovro; a. focioAe, s/n/nj^/e : used of tliorns crowdiii»; diiwn the seed sown in a field and hindering its growth, ^It. .\iii. 7 T AVH mrg. ; in the pass, of pcr- isliing by drowning (Xcn. anab. 5, 7, 25 ; cf. Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 5), iSIk. V. 13. b. to tcring one's neck, throllle, [A. "V. to take one hij the throati : Mt. xviii. 28. [CoMf. : drro-, (in-, avji- irvtya-l * irviKTis, -Tj, -uv, (nviyai), suffocated, strangled : to nvi- KTov, \_w!iat is strangled, i. c.] an animal deprived of life without shedding its blood. Acts xv. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25. [(Several times in Athen. and other later writ., chiefly of cookery ; cf. our " smothered " as a culinary terra.)] * TTVo'fi, -ris, Tj, (ttwiu), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for iTDi^J; 1. breat/i, the breath of life : Acts xvii. 25 (Gen. ii. 7 ; Prov. xxiv. 12: Sir. xxx; 29 (21); 2 Mace iii. 31; vii. 9). 2. wind : Acts ii. 2 (Job xxxvii. 9). [Cf. nvfv/ia, 1 b.] * iroS^ipiis, -er, ace. -pijv, Lchm. ed. stcr. Tdf. ed. 7 in Rev. i. 13 ; see apoTjv, (ttouj, and apa> ' to join together,' 'fas- ten'), reaching to the feel (Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plut., al.) : 6 ■nohr\pr)i (sc. x'™''. Ex. xxv. G ; xxviii. 4 ; xxxv. 8 ; Ezek. ix. 3) or ij nodrjprji (sc. eV^iJs), a garment reaching to the ankles, coming down to the feet, Uev.i. 13 (Sir. xx vii. 8 ; xlv. 8 ; p^iTuv iroSrjpr]!, Xen. Cyr. (i, 4, 2 ; Pans. 5, 19, G ; vno&vTtjs iroS. Ex. xxviii. 27 ; (v8vp.a 57oS. Sap. xviii. 24 ; [Joseph, b. j. 5, 5, 7]). [Cf. Trench § 1. sub fin.] * ir69ev, adv., [fr. Horn, down], whence ; a. of jAace, from what place : Mt. xv. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 25, 27; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 5; viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xix. 9; Rev. vii. 13; from what condition, Rev. ii. 5. b. of origin or source, i. q. from what author or giver : Mt. xiii. [27], 54, 56; xxi. 25; Mk. vi. 2; Lk. xx. 7; Jn. ii. 9; Jas. iv. 1 ; from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sij. (cf. vi. 42), see Meyer ad loc. c. of cause, how is it that ? how can it be that ? Mk. viii. 4 ; xii. 37 ; Lk. i. 43 ; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; iv. 11.* iro(a, -ac, i), [cf. Curtius §387], herbage, grass: ace. to some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14 ; but jroi'a there is more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. TroTor (q. v.), of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mai. iii. 2; in (Jrk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * •n-oif o), -w ; impf. 3 pers. sing, inolei. plur. 2 pers. cVoi- «Tf, 3 pers. iiroiovv; fut. Trot^o-co; 1 aor. tVoi'ijcra, 3 pers. plur. optat. noifj(T€iav (Lk. vi. 11 RG; cf. W. §13, 2d.; [B. 42 (37)]) and Troi^o-ntei/ (ibid. L T Tr WII [see TI7/. App. p. 1''7]); pf. jTfTToi'rjKa; plpf. iieTTOifiKeiv without augm. (Mk. xv. 7; see W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid., pres. TTotoO/uit ; impf. (nowv/njv ; fut. Troi^iro/iai ; 1 aor. tV ot- ijo-d/iiji/; pf. pass. ^tc]). TrenotTjufvos (Heb. xii. 27); fr. Hom. down ; Hebr. nli'^;; Lat. yaci'o, i.e. I. to make (Lat. efficio), 1. rl; a. with the names of the things made, to produce, construct, form, fashion, etc. : avdpaKidv, Jn. xviii. 18 ; eiKova, Rev. xiii. 14 ; l/iaTta, Acts ix. 39; vaovs, Acts xix. 24 ; a-K'jvds, Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; lA. ix. 33; twtous, Act.svii. 43; nrikdv, Jn. ix. 11, 14 ; 7rXdo-/iu, Ro. ix. 20; ace. to some inter- preters (also W. 2J6 n.' (240 n.-)) oSov ttok'iv, to make a path, Mk. ii. 23 R(J T Tr txt. AVIl txt. (so that the mean- ing is, thiit the disciples of Christ made a jiath for them- selves through tlie standing grain by plucking the heads; see ohoTTouw, fin. If we adojit this interpretation, we nuist take the ground that i\Iark does not give us the true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted tlie narrative received from others ; [those who do accejit it, however, not only lay stress on tlie almost unvarying lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other interiiretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex. pressed in the participle — an idiom apparently foreign to the N. T. (see W. 353 (331)), and to the additional circumstance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav- ing already expressed the idea of 'going', and ex- pressed it by siibstantially the same word {Trapanopivf- a6ai) which JLatthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) emplciy and regard as of itself suiiicient. On the interpretation of the pass., the alleged 'sad corruption,' etc., see Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 2ded. p. 57 sq. ; on the other side, Weiss, Marcusevangeliura, p. 100]. But see just below, under c). to create, to produce : of God, as the author of all things, tI or nva, Mt. xix. 4 ; Mk. x. 6 ; Lk. xi. 40 ; Ileb. i. 2 ; Acts iv. 24 ; vii. 50 ; xvii. 24 ; Rev. xiv. 7 ; pass. Ileb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13 ; ix. 9 ; 2 JIacc. vii. 28, and often in the O.T. Apoci'ypha ; for T\t'y^ in Gen. i. 7, 16, 25, etc. ; for X1.3 in Gen. i. 21, 27 ; v. 1, etc. ; also in Grk. writ. : yifni avBpanrmv, Hes. op. 109,etc. ; absol. 6 n-oiwi', the crea- tor, riat. Tim. p. 76 c); here belongs also Ileb. iii. 2, on which see Bleek and Liinemann [(cf. below, 2 c. ^.)]. In imitation of the Hebr. nb'i' (cf. Winer ['.>• Simonis (4th ed. 1828)], Lex. Ilebr. et Ch'ald. p. 754 ; Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1074 spomav (Ildian. 7, 4, 7 [3 ed. Bekk.] ; Polyb. 1, 70, 6 ; 6, 13, 4 ; in the second instance Polyb. might more fitly have said jrotfii»), Acts xxiii. 13 L T Tr WH, see 1 c. above ; Xoyov, to compose a narrative, Acts i. 1 ; to make account of, regard, (see Xo>9, IL 2 [and cf. I. 3 a.]). Acts .xx. 24 [TTr WH, Xoyov]: dvafioXrjv (see dra(3oXij), Acts X.XV. 17; «/SoXijv (see eKjioXi), b.). Acts xxvii. IS; KowfTov (i. q. AeoTrToum), Acts viii. 2 [here L TTr WII give the active, cf. B. §135, 5 n.] ; iropfiav (i. q. TTopeiopai), Lk. xiii. 22 (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 31 ; anab. 5, 6, 11 ; Joseph, vit. §§ 11 and 52; Plut. de solert. anim. p. 971 e.; 2Macc. iii. 8; xii. 10) ; Kotvat- viav, to make a contribution among themselves and from their own means, Ro. -xv. 26; o-irouSiji', Jude 3 (Ildt. 1, 4 ; 9, 8 ; Plat. legg. 1 p. 628 e. ; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 and often ; Diod. 1, 75 ; Plut. puer. educ. 7, 13 ; ah); av^jjtnv (i. q. aii^dvopai). to make increase, Eph. iv. 16 ; Serja-iv, Sfijcreis, i. q. Se'opai, to make supplication, Lk. v. 33 ; Phil. i. 4 ; iroieo) 520 TTOteO) 1 Tim. ii. 1 ; jui/fiac (q. v.) ; ^i/ij/iijw (q. v. inb.), 2Pet. i. 15; ■npovoiav (i. q. irpovooviim), to have regard for, care for, make provision for, rivus, Ro. xiii. 14 (Isocr. paneg. §§ 2 anJ 136 [pp. o2 and 93 ed. Lange] ; Dem. p. 1163, 13; 1429, 8; Polyb. 4, 6, 1 1 ; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ; antt. 5, 7, 9 ; c. Ap. 1, 2, 3 ; Ael. v. h. 12, 56 ; al. ; cf. Ki/pkc, Observv. ii. p. 1S7) ; Ka8apiiTji.6v, Ilcb. i. 3 (Job vii. 21) ; fH^mov TToidfrBal n, i. (j. fft^atovv, 2 Pet. i. 10. II. to do (Lat. ago), i. e. to follow some method in expressing by deeds the fechngs and thoughts of the mind; a. univ., with adverbs describing the mode of action: KoXwr, to act rightly, do well, Mt. xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 37, 38 ; Jas. ii. 19 ; Ka\S>s noitiu foil, by a participle [cf. B. § 144, 15a.; W. § 45, 4 a.], Acts x. 33 ; Phil. iv. 14; 2 Pet. i. 19 ; 3 Jn. 6, (exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given by Passow s. v. II. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 977* ; [L. and S. s. v. B. I. 3]) ; Kpelcrrrov, 1 Co. vii. 38 ; (^povlpat^, Lk. .xvi. 8; oZra (ourws). Mt. V. 47 [RG]; xxiv.4ti; Lk.ix.15; xii. 43; Jn. xiv. 31 ; Acts xii. 8 ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 ; Jas. ii. 12; it, Ka^cir, Mt. i. 24 ; xxi. 6 ; xxvi. 19; xxviii. 15; Lk. ix. 54 [T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; 1 Th. v. 11 ; wanep, Jit. vi. 2 ; o/ioiur, Lk. iii. 11 ; x. 37; oxravrtar, Mt. XX. 5. Kara ti, Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Lk. ii. 27 ; irpos ti, to do ac- cording to a thing [see npos, I. 3 f.], Lk. xii. 47. with a ptcp. indicating the mode of acting, ayuoSiv fnolrja-a, I acted [A. V. 'lid il] ignorantly, 1 Tim. i. 13. with the accus. of a thing, and that the accus. of a pronoun : with Ti indef. 1 Co. x. 31 ; with ti interrog., Mt. xii. 3; Jlk. ii. 25; xi. 3 [not Lchni. mrg.]; Lk. iii. 12, 14; vi. 2; X. 25; xvi. 3, 4 ; xviii. 18 ; Jn. vii. 51; xi. 47, etc.; with a ptcp. added, ti jroieiTf 'Kiovrfs ; i. q. Sia ri Xiere ; jMk. xi. 5; Ti TToieiTf K\aiovTfs; Acts xxi. 13; but differently TI notri 6(a, Jn. viii. 29 ; to dpfinov ivdiriov tov dfov, lleb. .xiii. 21 ; 1 Jn. iii. 22 ; ti ttkttov, to perform something worthy of a Christian [see ttkttos, fin.], 3 Jn. 5 ; Ttjv dLKatoavvrjv, Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. (Xerjpoa-vmii/) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10 [not Lchm. ; Rev. xxii. II G L T Tr WH] ; ttji/ aXiideiav (to act uprightly ; see dXfjBfia, I. 2 c), Jn. iii. 21 ; 1 Jn. i. G; ^pr^aTOTT^ra, Ro. iii. 12; eXeor, to show one's self merciful, Jas. ii. 13; with /xfTu tivos adv, Lk. xii. 48 ; ^&iXvypa, Rev. xxi. 27 ; (f)uvov, Mk. .XV. 7 : -^evhos, Rev. .xxi. 27 ; xxii. 15 ; kukop, Mt. .xxvii. 23 ; Mk. XV. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 22 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; to kokov, Ro. xiii. 4 ; plur. KOKa, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; to koko, Ro. iii. 8. b. TToifii/ TI with the case of a person added ; o. w. an accus. of the person: W iroirja-ai 'Irjcrovv ; what shall I do unto Jesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12; cf. W. 222 (208); [B. §131,6; KUhner §411, 5] ; Matthiae § 415, 1 a. j3. ; also with an adverb, (S n-oim Tiva, to do well i. e. show one's self good (kind) to one [see (v, sub fin.], Mk. xiv. 7 R G ; also Kd\as Troia, Mt. v. 44 Rec. p. w. a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unlo one (to his advantage or disad^•antage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [cf. W. and B u. s. ; KUhner u. s. Anra. 6] : Mt. vii. 1 2 ; xviii. .•!5 ; XX. 32; xxi. 40; xxv. 40, 45; Mk. v. 19, 20; x. 51 ; Lk. i. 49 ; vi. 11 ; viii. 39 ; xviii. 41 ; xx. 15 ; Jn. ix. 26; xii. 16; xiii. 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb : Ka6a>s, Mk. XV. 8 ; Lk. vi. 31 ; Jn. xiii. 15 ; opoias, Lk. vi. 31 ; ovras, Lk. i. 25 ; ii. 48 ; acravTas, Mt. xxi. 36; KoKas ■noifivTivi, Lk. vi. 27 ; «u, Alk. xiv. 7 L Tr WH ; /caxd tivi, to do evil to one. Acts ix. 13 ; ti, what (sc. /caxo'v), Heb. xiii. [ace. to punctuation of GLTTr WH] ; Tavra ndvTa, all these evils, .In. xv. 21 R G L mrg. ; noiciv tivi Kara ra av- Tti [LTTrWH(Rec. ToiTa)], in the same manner, Lk. •KOlTj^a 527 TToXe/ie» vi. 23, 26. y. nouXv n with the more remote object added by means of a preposition : '4v rivi ((ierra. an eineiii), lo do to one,Mt. xv'n. 12; Lk.xxiii.31 [here A. V. 'in the green tree,' etc.] ; also A nva, unto one, Jn. xv. 21 L txt. T Tr AVH. c. God is said iroirjcrai n fitra TWOS, when present with and aiding [see fifrd, I. 2 b. /3.], Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4. d. with designations of time [B. § 131, 1], to pass, spend: xp""""! Acts xv. 33 ; xviii. 23 ; fj.rji>as rpEif, Acts XX. 3 ; rnxdrj/J-fpov, 2 Co. xi. 25 ; (viav- ToV or inavTQv era, Jas. iv. 13, (Tob. x. 7 ; Joseph, antt. G, 1, 4 fin. ; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 c, gives e.xx. f r. Grk. writ, [and reft. ; cf. also Sopli. Lex. s. v. 9] ; in the same sense nE/>^ in Eccl. vi. 12 (vii. I) ; and the Lat. facere : Cic. ad Att. 5, 20 Apameae quinquo dies morati, . . . Iconii decem /eci'mus; Seneca, epp. 60 [1. 7, ep. 4, ed. Haase], qnamvis autem paucissimos una, fecerhnus dies) ; some interpreters bring in here also Mt. xx. 12 and Rev. xiii. 5 Rec."">' ='*• L T Tr WII ; but on these pass, see I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. ago i. q. to celebrate, keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast : to nddx'^' ^^'- ^-^^'- 1^ (Josh. v. 10; but in Ileb. xi. 28 the language denotes to make ready, and so at the same time to institute, the celebration of the passover ; Germ, ver- anslalten) ; rfju eoprfjv, Acts xviii. 21 Rec. f. i. q. (Lat. perjicio) to perform : as opposed to Ae'yfti», Mt. xxiii. 3 ; to 6i\(tv, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. ; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24. [COMP. : jrepi-, irpoa- ffoie'co.] [Syn. TroiETv, irpao-o-cii/: roughly speaking, ir. may be said to answer to the Lat. facere or the English do, -rrp. to at/ere or Eng. practise ; tt. to designate performance, irp. in- tended, earnest, habitual, performance ; ir. to denote merely productive action, np. definitely directed action ; ir. to point to ail actual result, np. to the scope and character of the result. " In Attic in certain connections the difference between them is great, in others hardly perceptible" (Sr/imidt) ; see his Syn. ch. 23, esp. § 11 ; cf. Trench, N. T. Syii. § xcvi. ; Green, 'Crit. Note' on Jn. v. 29; (cf. -npaaaa, iuit. and 2). The words are associated in Jn. iii. 20, 21 ; v. 29 ; Acts xxvi. 9, 10 ; Ro. i. 32 ; ii. 3 ; vii. 15 sqc). ; xiii. 4, etc.] n-oCijixa, -TOf, TO, (ttoicw), tiial which has been made ; a work : of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20 ; those KTLcrdivTes by God eVi epyois uyadoU are spoken of as iroi'ijfia ToO 6eov [A. V. his ivork)nanship'], Eph. ii. 10. (Ildt., Plat., al. ; Sept. chiefly for HE/ilO.)* iroCTio-is, -ecof. 17. (ttoicm) ; 1. a making (Hdt. 3, 22 ; Thuc. 3, 2 ; Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. several times for iT'^X'?)- 2. a doing or performing: iv rrj woirjcrei aiiToi [m his doing, i. e.] in the obedience he renders to the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).* ■iroiTiTTJs, -oC, 6, {ttoi((o) ; 1. a maker, producer, au- thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulg. factor) : toC vd^ou, one who obeys or fulfils the law, Ro. ii. 13 ; Jas. iv. 11 ; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see ttoicoi, II. a.) ; epyov, Jas. i. 25 ; \6yov, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet: Acts xvii. 28 ([Hdt. 2, 53, etc.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat., Pint., al.).* itoikCXos, -?;, -ov, fr. Hom. down, i-arious i. e. a. of divers colors, variegated : Sept. b. i.q. of divers sorts : Mt. iv. 24 ; Mk. i. 34 ; Lk. iv. 40 ; 2 Tim. iii. 6 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; Ileb. ii. 4 ; xiii. 9 ; Jas. i. 2 ; 1 Pet. i. 6 ; iv. 10, [(A. V. in the last two exx. manifold')'].* Troi|j.oiv' ((ien. xiv. 2 ; Deut. xx. 12, 20), iroK. TToif'iv lifTa twos, Rev. xi. 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 7 [here L om. AVII Trmrg.br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [cf. ,ifra,I.2d.]. b. a fight, a battle, [more precisely /xaxi ; " in Horn, (where II. 7, 1 74 it is used even of single combat) and lies, the sense of bailie prevails ; in Attic that of war" (L. and S. rs. V.) : cf. Trench §lxxxvi. and (in partial modification) Schmidt ch. 138, 5 and 6] : 1 Co. xiv. 8 ; Heb. xi. 34 ; Rev. ix. 7, 9 ; xii. 7 ; xvi. 14 ; xx. 8. 2. a di^pule, strife, quarrel: TroXf^oi icai /ia;(ai, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219; Plat. Phaedo p. G6 c.).* iriXis, -€M5, tj, (ffe'Xo/iai, to dwell [or rather denoting originally ' fulness,' ' throng ' ; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, gtc. ; cf. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanicek p. 499; (oth- erwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. chiefly for ■>'i', besides for T\\-\r), '\);V (gate), etc., a cilg ; a. •univ. : Jit. ii. 23; Mk. i. 4.5; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi. 54; Acts V. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; •Kara tt/v iroXii', through tlie city [A. V. in ; see Kara, II. 1 a.]. Acts xxiv. 12 ; Kara TriiXij', Kara TriiXftt, sec Kara, IL ^a. a. p. 328*; opp. to km^iui, Mt. ix. 35; x. 11 ; Lk. viii. 1 ; xiii. 22 ; to Kafiai «cai dypol, Mk. vi. 56 ; fj ISia jroXtr, see iSuK, 1 b. p. 297»; iroKis with the gen. of a pers. one's native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn. i. 44 (45) ; or the city in which one lices, Mt. xxii. 7 ; Lk. iv. 29 ; x. 11 ; Acts xvi. 20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerus.alem is called, on account of the temple erected there, jroXts tov fieyoXoi; /Sao-iXe'wr, i. e. in which the great King of Israel, Jehovah, has his abode, Mt. v. 35; Ps. xlvii. (xlviii.) 2, cf. Tob. xiii. 15; also dyla ttiJXis (see uyios, 1 a. p. 7') and !j r]yaTn))iivr], the beloved of God, Rev. xx. 9. with the gen. of a gentile noun: AajiatTKrfvav, 2 Co. xi. 32; 'E(f)fv, the common- wealth whose citizens we arc (.see wdXif, b.), Phil. iii. 20, cf. Meyer and Wiesiuger ad loc. ; of Cliristians it is said fVi yrji SiaTplfiovtTiv. dXX f'v ovpauui noXiTfiovrai, Epist. ad I)io;in. c. 5 ; (rmi^ v \lfv}(a'i) naTplba piv tov olpd- viov ^oypov. iv to TToXiTfvovTat, ^€vov 6c TOV jreplyeLov ev to TvaptoKrjtrav vnpi^nviTat. Philo ilc oonfus. ling. §17; [yvva'iKes . . . ra TJjs dpfTrjs eyyfypappfvai 7ro\iT(vpaTi, de agricult. § 17 fin. Cf. esp. Bj). Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.].' iroXiT««u : Mid. [cf. ^^'. 260 (244)], pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. noXiTfvftrBe ; pf- TTfTroXiVfupat : (7roXin;s) ; 1. to be a citizen (Thuc, Xen.. Lys., Polyb., al). 2. to administer civil affairs, manage the slate, (Thuc., Xen.). 3. to make or create a citizen (Diod. 11, 72) ; Jliddle a. to be a citizen ; so in the jjassages fr. Philo and the Ep. ad Diogn. cited in TroXiTfvpa, 3. b. to behave as a citizen ; to avail one's snlf of or recognize the laws ; so fr. Thuc. down ; in Hellenist, writ, to con- duct one's self as pledged to some law of life : deltas tov flayyfXtov, Phil. i. 27 [R.V. txt. let your manner of life be worthy o/'etc] ; d^. TovXpiarov, Polyc. ad Philip. 5, 2; df. Toil deal', Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 1 ; otri'ms, ibid. 6, 1 ; (tnra to KaBrfKOv TM XpiffrM, ibid. 3, 4 ; pcTa (j>6^ov k. dyd- TTijy, ibid. .")1, 2; cvvopois, Justin, dial. c. Tr. c. 67 ; rjp^dpriv TToXiTevea-dai rr) ^apitraiav aipitrei KaraKoXovdwv, Joseph, vit. 2 ; other phrases are cited by Grimm on 2 JIacc. vi. 1 ; Tu Sea, to live in accordance with the laws of God, Acts xxiii. 1 [A. V. / have lived etc.].* iroXtTTis, -ov, 6, (ttSXk), fr. Horn, down, a citizen; i.e. a. the inhabitant of any city ov country : TroXeur, Acts xxi. 39 ; Trjs ;^Mpar «fi'i^f, Lk. XV. 15. b. the associate of another in citizenship, i. e. a fellmo-citizen, fellow-countryman, (Plat. apol. p. 37 c. ; al.) : with the gen. of a person, Lk. xix. 14 ; Heb. viii. 11 (where Rec. "TTOWUKK 529 TToXu? has T0(/ nKrimov) fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34, where it is used for ;•■>, as in Prov. xi. 9, 12; xxiv. 43 (28). ' iroXXdKis, (fr. ttoXvs, TToXXd), adv., [fr. Horn, down], often, frequently : Mt. xvii. 15 ; Mk. v. 4 ; ix. 22; Jn. xviii. 2; Actsxxvi. 11; Ro. i. 13; xv. 22 L Trmrg.; 2 Co. viii. 22 ; xi. 23, 26 sq. ; Pliil. iii. 18 ; 2 Tim. i. 16 ; Heb. vi. 7 ; i-x. 25 sq. ; x. 11 .* iroWairXao-Cuv, -ov, gen. -okos, (noKvi), manifold, much more : Jit. xix. 29 L f Tr WH ; Lk. xviii. 30. (Polyb., Pint., al.; [cf. B. 30 (27)].)* ■i7o\i>-««irir\aYXVos, -ov, (ttoXu and cvtrtiKayxvos), very tender-hearted, extremely full of pily : so a few minusc. Mss. in Jas. v. 11, where al.woXijcr7rXa-y;(vo9,q. v. (Eceles. and Byzant. writ.) * iroXvXo-yia, -as, ij, (woXuXdyos), much speaking, (Plant., Vulg., multiloquium) : ]Mt. vi. 7. (Prov.x. 19; Xen. CjT. 1, 4, 3; Plat. legg. 1 p. 641 e.; Aristot. polit. 4, 10 [p. 1295*, 2]; Pint. educ. puer. 8, 10.)* iroXu(itpus, (TToXufifpijf), by many portions: joined with TToXu-poTrmf, at many times (Vulg. multifariam [or-ne]), and in many ways, Heb. i. 1. (Joseph, antt. 8, 3, 9 [var. ; Pint. mor. p. 537 d., i. e. de invid. et od. 5] ; oihiv Set tijs jso\vii(poii Tairrjs Koi TroXurpoTrou /lovarjs tc koi apfiovlas, 3Iax. Tyr. diss. 37 p. 363; [cf. W. 463 (431)].) * iroXv-TTOiKiXos, -ov, {ttoXvs and TrotxtXoy) ; 1. much- -variegated ; marked with a great variety of colors : of cloth or a painting; ^dpca, Eur. Iph. T. 1149 ; a-rf'cpavov noXv- utoiklKov avBiaiv, Eubul. ap Athen. 15 p. 679 d. 2. much varied, manifold: crorpia tov dcoH, manifesting itself in a great variety of forms, Eph. iii. 10 ; Theophil. ad Autol. 1,6; opyi7, Orac. Sibyll. 8, 120 ; Xd-yor, Orpb. hymn. 61,4, and by other writ, witb other nouns.* iroXvs, ffoXXij (fr. an older form woXXdr, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), ttoXu; [(of. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for JT ; much ; used a. of multitude, number, etc., -many, numerous, great : aptd/tos. Acts xi. 21 ; Xadf, Acts xviii. 10; oxXot, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34 ; [viii. 1 L T Tr WH] ; Lk. vii. 1 1 ; viii. 4 ; Jn. vi. 2, 5 ; Rev. vii. 9 ; xix. 6, etc. ; ■jrXij^ot, Mk. iii. 7 sq. ; Lk. v. 6 ; Acts xiv. 1, etc. ; i. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much^, Kapnos, Jn. xii. 24 ; XV. 5, 8; depiapLot, (the harvest to be gathered), Jit. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; yij, Mt. xiii. 5; Jlk. iv. 5; )(6pTos, Jn. vi. 10; ohos, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. ttoXXoi rcXaJrat, Mt. ix. 10 ; Mk. ii. 15 ; ttoXXoi 7rpov /lad/jrav aiiTov, Jn. vi. 60; add, vii. 31, 40 ; x. 20; xi. 19, 45; Acts xvii. 12 ; TToXXoi €K TTjs TtoKeas, Jn. iv. 39. with the article prefixed, oi jroXXoi, the many [cf. W. 110 (105)] : those contrasted with d cir (i. e. both with Adam and with Christ), ace. to the context equiv. to the rest of man- kind, Ro. v. 15,19, cf. 12, 18; we the (i.e. who are) many, Ro. xii. 5 ; 1 Co. -x. 17 ; the many whom ye know, 2 Co. ii. 17 ; the many i. e. the most part, the majority, Jit. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. -x. 33. b. with nouns denoting an action, an emotion, a state, which can be said to have as it were measure, weight, force, intensity, size, continuance, or repetition, much i. q. great, strong, intense, large : dyaTn;, Eph. ii. 4 ; dSi;i^, 1 Tim. vi. 10 ; Oprjvos, KXaydfios, odvpnos, Jit. ii. 18 ; x°P'^ [Rec." x^P'r]' Pbilem. 7 ; findvfila, 1 Th. ii. 1 7 ; pLaKpodv/iia, Ro. ix. 22 ; eXfos, 1 Pet. i. 3 ; yoyyvo-p.6s, Jn. vii. 12 ; rpopos, 1 Co. ii. 3 ; ttovos [Rec. fijXoj], Col. iv. 13 ; ayav, 1 Th. ii. 2 ; SSXrjms, Heb. x. 32 ; dXlyjfis. 2 Co. ii. 4 ; 1 Th. i. 6 ; KavxioiS: 2 Co. vii. 4 ; nmoidrjais, 2 Co. viii. 22; irKTjpocpopta, I Th. i. 5 ; irapprja-la, 2 Co. iii. 12 ; yii. 4 ; 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; PhUem. 8 ; TropditXijo-tr, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; a-u^rjTriais [T WH Tr t.xt. fiyn/o-ir]. Acts xv. 7 ; xxviii. 29 [Rec.]; (TTacris, Acts x.xiii. 10; atrtria. Acts x.xvii. 21; j3io, Acts .xxiv. 7 [Rec] ; SiaKovla, Lk. x. 40 ; criyTj, deep silence. Acts xxi. 40 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 25) : (pavraata. Acts XXV. 23; Svvaptt kqi Sd|a, Jit. xxiv. 30 ; Lk. xxi. 27; ^i- (xdos, Jit. V. 12 ; Lk. vi. 23, 35 ; «ipijw;, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ; TTcpi o5 TToXiy r)p.'iv 6 Xdyor, about which [but see Xdyoj, I. 3 a.] we have much (in readiness) to say, Heb. v. 11 (ttoXuv \6yov TToieiaBai ■Kepi Tu/oi, Plat. Phaedo p. 1 15 d. ; cf. Asl, Lex. Plat. iii. p. 148). o. of time, much, long : -noKiiv Xpovov, Jn. V. 6; /iera xpovov no\vv, Jit. xxv. 19; wpa TToXXij, much time (i. e. a large part of the day) is spent [see oipa, 2], Jlk. vi. 35 ; apas TToXX^r yevofiivrji [Tdf. ytvo/t.], of a late hour of the day, ibid, (so ttoXX^s ilpar, Polyb. 5, 8, 3 ; eVl iruWrjv tapav, Joseph, antt. 8,4,4; « pd- ;^oi'To . . . axp<- TToWrjS copas, Dion. Hal. 2, 54) "; TToXXoiy Xpovois, for a long time, Lk. viii. 29 (-ov TroXXdi XP"'"?) Hdian. 1, 6, 24 [8 ed. Bekk.] ; xP°^°^^ TroXXoir vcrrepov, Plut. Thes. 6 ; [see xP"'""?' sub fin.]) ; ett trq ttoXXq, Lk. xii. 19 ; (ex or) otto ttoXXux eriuv. Acts xxiv. 10; Ro. .xv. 23 [here WH Tr txt. aTTo iKavitv fV.] ; c'tti ttoXv, (for) a long time. Acts xxviii. 6 ; /ift' ov ttoKv, not long after [see fifrd, n. 2 b.], Acts xxvii. 14. d. Xeut. sing. TToXi/, much, substantively, i. q. many things : Lk. xii. 48 ; much, adverbially, of the mode and degree of an action: ^ydTTJjo-e, Lk. vii. 47; TtKavaaBf, Jlk. .xii. 27; sc. ax^fXei, Ro. iii. 2. TToXXoO as a gen. of price (fr. Hom. down ; cf. Passow s. V. IV. b. vol. ii. p. 1013* ; [cf. W. 206 (194)]) : ■jrpaOfivai, for much. Jit. xxvi. 9. iv ttoXXw, in (adminis- tering) much (i. e. many things), Lk. xvi. 10 ; with great labor, great effort. Acts xxvi. 29 (where LT TrWH iv jurydXM [see p-iyas, 1 a. y.]). with a compar. [cf. W. 'rroK,v,Tr(7roiiai), drink: 1 Co. x. 4; Heb. i.x. 10.* irovT]p(a, -at, rj, (noi/Tjpos), [fr. Soph, down], Sept. for ^'h and n>'l, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V. almost uniformly)], malice : Mt. xxii. 18 ; Lk. xi. 39: Ro. i. 29 ; 1 Co. v. 8 ; Eph. vi. 1 2 ; plur. al Trovripiai [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. § 123, 2; R. V. wickednesses], evil purposes and desires, IMk. vii. 22 ; wicked ways [A. V. iniquities]. Acts iii. 26. [Syx. see kukIu, fin.] " irovT)p6s (on the accent cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 389 ; Giiltling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq. ; [Chandler §§ 404, 405]; /,/psiHS, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 20), -«i, -ov; corn- par. Trovrjporepos (Mt. .xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26) ; (ttowo), novas} ; fr. He.s., [llom. (cp. 15, 20), Theog.] down ; Sept. often for i'l ; 1. full of labors, annoyances, liardships; a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Ilercides is calleil TrovrjpoTaTos Kat apiUTOS, lies. frag. 43, 5. b. bring- ing lolls, annoyiinces, perils: (xaipos. Sir. Ii. 12); rjfifpa lrovr)pa., of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead- fastness, Eph. V. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. rj/jtipat nov. Barn. ep. 2, 1) ; causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev- ous], fXicof, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. bad, of a bad nature or condition ; a. in a physical sense : o05aX/ios, dis- eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, (irovrjpia o(f>SaKpQiv, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 374 d. ; the Greeks use woi/rjpais- fx^'" or StaKfia-din of the sick ; (k yfvfTiis novTjpovs vyifis ttc- 77oiT;Kf'rai, Justin apol. 1, 22 [(cf. Otto's note) ; al. takejroi/. in Mt. and Lk.u.s. ethically ; cf.b.and Meyer on Mt.]); Kapnos, Mt. vii. 17 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil, wicked, bad, etc. [" this use of the word is due to its as- sociation with the working (largely the servile) class ; not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for such words as epyaTrjs, 8pa(TTrip, and the like, do not take on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no suggestion of results" (cf. Schmidt ch. 85, §1); see /caKi'a, fin.] ; of persons : Mt. vii. 11; xii. 34s(i.; xviii. 32; XXV. 26 ; Lk. vi. 45; xi. 13; xix. 22; Acts xvii. 5; 2 Th. iii. 2; 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; yev€a nov., Mt. xii. 39, 45 ; xvi. 4 ; Lk. xi. 29 ; TTVfVfia Trovr]p6v, an evil spirit (see Trveij/ia, 3 c.), Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq. ; substantively oi Trovrjpoi, the wicked, bad men, opp. to oi SiKatoi, ISIt. xiii. 49; novrjpol Ka'i dyadoi, Jit. v. 45 ; xxii. 10 ; ax'ip"rToi k. novrjpoi, Lk. vi. 35 ; tok i!ovjjp6v, the wicked man, i. e. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13; roj TvovTjpa, the evil man, who injuixs you, Mt. v. 39. 6 novrjpos is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one : Mt. V. 37; vi. 13; xiii. 19, 38; Lk. xi. 4 IlL; Jn. xvii. 15; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. ; iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see Kf'ifiai, 2 c.) ; Eph. vi. 16. of things : alojv, Gal. i. 4 ; ovop.a (q. v. 1 p. 447* bot.), Lk. vi. 22; paSiovpyr]iia, Acts xviii. 14; the heart as a storehouse out of whicli a man brings forth TTovrjpd words is called Brja-avpot irovrjpos, Mt. xii. 35 ; Lk. vi. 45; a-vveiSrjmt Trovrjpa, a soul conscious of wickedness, [conscious wickedness; see (rui'fiSi7(rtr.b. sub fin.], Ileb. x. 22 ; KapSin jrovrjpa amcTTiai, an evil heart such as is re- vealepi(da (Jas. iv. 13 Rec." Grsb.) ; 1 aor. pass, ciropfvdrjv : {nopos a ford, [cf. Eng. pore i. e. passage through : Curtius § 356 ; Vanicek p. 479]) ; Sept. often for frn, ^Snnn, ^S;; prop, to lead one's self across ; i. e. to take one's way, betake one's self, set out, depart ; a. prop. : Tryv oSov /lov, to pursue the journey on which one has entered, continue one's journey, [A. V. go on one's wayl. Acts viii. 3!) ; nop. foil, by ano w. a gen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1 [R G] ; (iTro w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41 ; Lk. iv. 42 ; (KflSev, Mt. xix. 15 ; (vrevdev, Lk. xiii. 31 ; foil, by els w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place : Mt. ii. 20 ; xvii. 27 ; Mk. xvi. 12 ; Lk. i. 39; ii. 41 ; xxii. 39 ; xxiv. 13 ; Jn. vii. 35 ; viii. 1 ; Acts i. 11, 25 ; xx. 1 ; Ro. XV. 24 sq.; Jas. iv. 13, etc.; w. an ace. denoting the state : els elpr]vrjv, Lk. vii. 50 ; viii. 48, (also ev eipfjinj. Acts xvi. 36 ; see elpfjvrj, 3) ; els Bavarov, Lk. xxii. 33 ; foil, by em' w. an ace. of place, Mt. xxii. 9 ; Acts viii. 26 ; ix. 1 1 ; ettl w. the ace. of a pers. Acts x.xv. 1 2 ; etos with a gen. of place. Acts xxiii. 23 ; ttoO [q. v.] for ttoi, Jn. vii. 35 ; ov [see or, II. 1 1 a.] for owot, Lk. xxiv. 28 ; 1 Co. xvi. 6 ; npos w. the ace. of a pers., Mt. xxv. 9 ; xxvi. 14 ; Lk. xi. 5; XV. 18; xvi. 30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. 28; xx. 1 7 ; Acts xxvii. 3 ; xxviii. 26 ; Kara ttjv oSdi», Acts viii. 36 ; Smi w. a gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1 ; [Mk. ix. 30 L txt. Tr txt. WH txt.] ; the purpose of the journey is indi- cated by an infinitive : Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec. ; Lk. ii. 3 ; xiv. 19, 31 ; Jn. xiv. 2 ; by the prep, eni with an ace. [cf. em, C. I. 1 f.], Lk. xv. 4 ; foil, by iVa, Jn. xi. 11 ; by avv w.' a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii. 6 ; Acts x. 20 ; xxvi. 13 ; 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; epTipoaSev nrar, to go before one, Jn. x. 4. absol. i. q. to depart, go one's way : !Mt. ii. 9 ; viii. 9 ; xi. 7 ; xxviii. 1 1 ; Lk. vii. 8 ; xvii. 19 ; Jn. iv. 50 ; viii. 11; xiv. 3; Acts v. 20 ; viii. 27; xxi. 5; xxii. 21, etc.; i. q. to be on one's way, to journey : [Lk. viii. 42 L Trmrg.] ; ix. 57 ; x. 38 ; xiii. 33 ; Acts ix. 3 ; xxii. 6. to enter upon a journey; to go to do something : 1 Co. x. 27; Lk. x. 37. In accordance with the oriental fashion of describing an action circumstantiall}-, the ptcj). nopevopevos or vo- pevBels is placed before a finite verb which designates some other action (cf. avicrrripi, II. 1 c. and ep^opat, I. 1 a. a. p. 250'' bot.) : Mt. ii. 8 ; ix. 13 (on which cf. the rabbin, phrase lb'?! XS [cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein ad loc.]) ; xi. 4; xxvii. 66 ; x.xviii. 7 ; Lk. vii. 22 ; ix. 13, 62 ; xiii. 32; xiv. 10; xv. 15; xvii. 14; xxii. S; 1 Pet. iii. 19. b. By a Hebraism, metaphorically, a. to depart from life : Lk. xxii. 22 ; so l|Sri, Gen. xv. 2 ; Ps. xxxi.x. 14. p. ottIoo) Tivos, to follow one, i.e. become his adherent [cf. B. 184 (160)] : Lk. xxi. 8 (Judg. ii. 12 ; 1 K. xi. 10; Sir. xlvi. 10) ; to seek [cf. Eng. run after] any thing, 2 Pet. ii. 10. 7. to lead or order one's life (see TrepinaTeu), b. a. and ohos, 2 a.) ; foil, by ev with a dat. of the thing to which one's life is given up : ev aireXyeims, 1 Pet. iv. 3 ; ev rais evToKais rov Kvpiov, Lk. i. 6 ; Kara ras emdvplas, 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Jude 16, 18 ; rais oSois fiov, da,t. of place, [to walk in one's own ways], to follow one's moral preferences. Acts xiv. 16 ; 77 68a nvos, to imitate one, to follow his ways, Jude 11; rm ^(7Tor. ■iropvtCo, -as, 17, (nopvevo)'), Sept. for n^JtJ?, nuj, D'JUI, iropveva 532 TTOTaTTO? fornication (Vulg. Jbrnicalio [and (Rev. xix. 2) prostilit- tio^) ; used a. prop, of illicit sexual iutcrcourse in general (Dem. 403, 27; 433, 25) : Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25, (that this meaning must be adopted in these passages will surprise no one who ha.s learned from 1 Co. vi. 12 .TTav fffpi Ton d\i]Oq TTaTipa Ka\ dui tovto ttoWov s avd' €vbs yovet? alviT- To/jfi'or, I'hilo de mig. Abr. § 12; tikvo Ttopvdas, of idol- aters, Hos. i. 2; [but in Jn. 1. c. others understand phy- sical descent to be sj)oken of (cf. Meyer)]) ; of the de- filement of idolatry, as incurred by eating the sacrifices offered to idols, Rev. ii. 21.* TTopveuo) ; 1 aor. ejropvfva-a ; (nopvos, itopvj) q. v.) ; Sept. for n:; ; in Grk. writ. ([Hdt.], Dem., Aeschin., Die Cass., Lcian., al.) 1. to prostitute one's body to the lust of another. In the Scriptures 2. to give one's self to unlawful sexual intercourse; to commit fornication (Vulg. fnrnicor): 1 Co. vi. IS; x. 8; Rev. ii. 14, 20; [Mk. x. 19 WH (rejected) mrg.]. 3. by a Hebraism (see wopKcia, b.) metaph. to be given to iilnlatri/, to icorship idols : 1 Chr. v. 25; Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 27; Jer. iii. 6; Ezek. xxiii. 19; Hos. ix. 1, etc. ; litra nvos, to permit one's self to be drawn aivay by another into idolatry, Rev. xvii. 2 ; xviii. 3, 9. [CoMP. : eK-n-opxfviB.] * iropvT], -i)s, T), (fr. n(paai, irfpirqpi, to sell ; Ciirtius § 358), properly n woman who sells her boily for sexual uses [cf. Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13], Sept. for nw, 1. ])rop. a pros- titute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for the sake of gain, (Arstph., Dem., al.) ; in the N. T. univ. any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse, whether for gain or for lust : Mt. xxi. 31 sq. ; Lk. xv. 30; 1 Co. vi. 15 sq.; Ileb. xi. 31 ; Jas. ii. 25. 2. Ileb- raistically (see nopvda, b. and rropvevoi, 3), metaph. an idolatress; so of ' Babylon ' i. e. Rome, the chief seat of idolatry: Rev. xvii. 1, 5, 15 sq.; xix. 2.* iripvos, -ov, 6, (for the etym. see iropm)), a man who prostitutes his body to another's lust for hire, a male pros- titute, ([.\rstph.], Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Lcian.) ; univ. a man who indulges in unlauful sexual intercourse, a for- nicator, (\\x\%. fornicator, fornicarius, [Rev. xxii. 15 hn- pudicus']) : 1 Co. v. 9-11 ; vi. 9 ; Eph. v. 5 ; 1 Tim. i. 10 ; Heb. xii. IG ; xiii. 4 ; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15. (Sir. xxiii. IGsq.)' ir6ppu, [(allied w. irpo, Curtius § 380)], adv., [fr. Plat., Xen. down],/ar, at a distance, a great way off: Mt. xv. 8; Mk. vii.6; Lk. xiv. 32 [cf. W. §54, 2 a. ; B. §129, 11]; compar. Tropparfpoi, in L Tr A\ II woppwTfpov [(Polyb., al. )],/!«■//«.')•; Lk. xxiv. 28.' iroppuBev, (mippa), adv., [fr. Plat. on],_/ro;rt nfar, afar off: Lk. xvii. 12; Heb. xi. 13 ; Sept. chicily for pinia.* irop4>vpa, -as, r;, Sept. for JJpjlN ; 1. the pur/ile- fsh, a species of shell-fish or mussel : [Aeseh)"!., Soph.], Isocr., Aristot., al. ; add 1 Mace. iv. 23, on which see Grimm; [cf. B. D. s. v. Colors 1]. 2. a fabric col- ored roith the purple dye, a garment made from purple cloth, (so fr. Aeschyl. down) : Mk. xv. 17, 20; Lk. xvi. 19 ; Rev. xvii. 4 Rec.; xviii. 12.* ■7rop(j)up€os, -a, -ox, in Attic and in the N. T. contr. -ois, -a, -oOi', {nopcfivpa), fr. Horn, down, purple, dyed in pur- ple, made of a purple fabric : Jn. xi.x. 2, 5 ; 7rop(jivpoiv sc. ci/Si/^a ([B. 82 (72)]; cf. W. p. 591 (550)), Rev. xvii. 4 [GLTTrWII]; .xviii. 16.* irop<|>vp6ir(i>\is, -t8or, ^, (nopipa and TruXtia), a female seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur- puraria) : Acts xvi. 14. (Phot., Suid., al.) * TTOo-dKis, (ttoo-os), adv., how often : Mt. .xviii. 21 ; xxiii. ^7; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat, cp., Aristot., al.)]* iroo-is, -ftos, rj, (ttiVo)), f r. Horn, down, a drinking, drink : Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. Ki, (see fipwais).' ' ir<5opilTOS, -ov. 6, (■jrorapos and c^optw ; like av€- HOipoprjTos [cf. W. lOO (94)]), carried away by a .stream (i. e. whelmed, drowned in the waters) : Rev. xii. 15. I Besides only in Ilesych. s. v. ajroepo-e.* I iroToirds ([in Dion. Hal., Joseph., Philo, al.] for the older woSairos [cf . Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq. ; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 129; W. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.] ; ace. to the (jlrk. grammarians i. q. (k iroiov SaniSov, from tvhat region ; ace. to the conjecture of others i. q. jroO aTro KButtmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ, wovon)], the 8 being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the Lat. prodire, prodesse ; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 554 sq. [still others regard -Sairos merely as an ending ; cf. 533 IIov8j]<} ApoUon. Dysk., ed. Buttmann, index s. v.]), -ij, -6v ; 1. from what counlnj, race, or tribe ? so fr. Aescbyl. down. 2. from Demosth. down also i. q. noios, of what sort or qualitij ? {_what manner o/?] : absol. of persons, Mt. viii. 27 ; 2 Pet. iii. 11 ; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39 ; w. names of things, Mk. xiii. 1 ; Lk. i. 2!) ; 1 Jn. iii. 1.* iroTs, [Curtius §631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Horn, down, when ? at what time ? Mt. xxv. 37-39, 44 ; Lk. xxi. 7 ; Jn. vi. 25 ; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic writ.) for the relative oTrdre in indirect questions (W. 510(475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33, 35 ; Lk.xii.3G; xvii. 20. ems vroTf, how lonrj 1 in direct questions [cf. W. § 54, 6 fin. ; B. § 146, 4] : Mt. xvii. 1 7 ; Mk. Lx. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41 ; Jn. X. 24 ; Rev. vi. 10.* iroT€, an enclitic particle, fr. Horn, down; 1. once, i. e. at some time or other, formerly, aforetime; a. of the Past : Jn. ix. 13 ; Ro. vii. 9 ; xi. 30 ; Gal. i. 13, 23 [cf. W. § 45, 7] ; Eph. ii. 2 sq. 11, 13 ; v. 8 ; Col. i. 21 ; iii. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 5 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; Philem. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10 ; iii. 5, 20; rjiz] TTore, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the Future: Lk. xxii. 32; ^87 Trore, now at length, Ro. i. 10. 2. ever: after a negative, oiSfi's ttotc, Eph. v. 29 [B. 202 (1 75)] ; ou . . . nore, 2 Pet. i. 21 ; /iij n-orf (see /iJjTTOTf) ; after oi fiij with tlfe aor. subjunc. 2 Pet. i. 10 ; in a question, ti's irore, 1 Co. ix. 7 ; Heb. i. 5, 13 ; oTToiol TToTe, tchatsocver, Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render TTore hare formerly, once ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* iroTepos, -a, -oi>, [fr. Horn, down], which of tivo ; ttotc- pov ■ ■ ■ ij, utrum . . . an, whether . . . or, [W. § 57, 1 b. ; B. 250 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.* iroTTJpiov, -ov, TO, (dimin. of jroTrjp), a cup, a drinking vessel; a. prop.: Mt. .\xiii. 25 sq. ; x.xvi. 27; Mk. vii. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; xiv. 23 ; Lk. xi. 39 ; xxii. 17, 20 ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; Rev. xvii. 4 ; iriveiv « roij noTjjpiov, 1 Co. xi. 28 ; to TTorjjptov Trjs evXoylas (sec eu- Xoyia, 4), 1 Co. X. 16 ; with a gen. of the thing with which the cup is filled : \//-uxpoO, Mt. x. 42 ; vSaros, Jlk. ix. 41 ; by meton. of the container for the contained, the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, Lk. xxii. 20" [(WH reject the pass.) cf. Win. 635 (589) sq.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. ; to TroTijptoi/ tivos, gen. of the pers. giving the entertainment (cf. Riickcrt, Abendmahl, p. 217 sq.) : nlveiv, 1 Co. x. 21 [cf. W. 189 (178)] ; .xi. 27 [cf. W. 441 (410)]. b. By a figure common to Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, and not unknown to Latin writers, one's lot or experience, whether joyous or adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable or unfavorable, are Ukened to a cup which God presents one to drink [cf. W. 32] : so of prosperity, Ps. xv. (xvi.) 5 ; x.xii. (xxiii.) 5 ; cxv. (cxvi.) 13 ; of adversity, Ps. x. (xi.) 6 ; Ixxiv. (Ixxv.) 9 ; Is. U. 17, 22. In the N. T. of the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ : Jit. xxvi. 39, 42 Rec. ; Mk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. xxii. 42 ; Jn. .xviii. 11 ; irlvetv TO TTOT. fiov or o eym jriVu, to undergo the same calamities which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plant. Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as I was) ; used of the divine penalties : Rev. xiv. 10 ; xvi. 19 ; xviii. 6. ([Alcaeus, Sappho], Ildt., Ctes., Arstph., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for D13.) ' iroTi'Jm ; impf . cVoTifoi» ; 1 aor. liroTiaa ; pf . ■ncaoTiKa (Rev. xiv. 8) ; 1 aor. pass. tTtoTia6r]v ; (jroToj) ; fr. [Hip- pocr.], Xen., Plat, down ; Sept. for npi?ri ; to give to drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 13 and Rev. xiv. 8 polo [but in Rev. 1. c. Tdf. gives potiono ; A. V. to make to drinky): nvd, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42 ; xxvii. 48 ; ilk. XV. 36; Lk. xiii. 15 ; Ro. xii. 20 ; nva Tt, to offer one anything to drink (W. § 32, 4 a. ; [B. § 131, 6]) : Mt. x. 42 ; Mk. ix. 41, and often in the Sept. ; in fig. discourse TT. Ttva yaXa, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended, 1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma ov ^pSifxa is added ; [cf. W. § 66, 2 e. ; B. § 151, 30 ; A. V. / have fed you with milk, etc.]) ; nva e'k toO oii/ou. Rev. xiv. 8 (see o'vos, b. and 6vji6s, 2) ; i. q. to tcaler, irrigate, (plants, fields, etc.) : 1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25 ; Lcian., Athen., Geop., [Sti-ab., Philo] ; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7); metaph. to imbue, saturate, nvd, one's mind, w. the addi- tion of an accus. of the thing, ?v nvivfia, in pass., 1 Cx). xii. 13 L T Tr WH [W. § 32, 5 ; B. § 134, 5] ; ei'r (virveipia, that we might be united into one body which is imbued with one spirit, ibid. R G, (nva irvevfiaTi Karavv^ea!, Is. xxix. 10 [cf. Sir. .xv. 3]).* IIoTtoXoi, -a>v, ol, Puteoli, a city of Campania in Italy, situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli : Acts xxviii. 13. [Cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218 sqq. ; Smith, Diet, of Geog. s. v.] * TTOTos, -ou, o, (nOQ [cf. wiVm]), u drinking, carousing : 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Pint., Ael., al. ; Sept. for nri'iyp.) * iroS, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Horn, down, Sept. for n-N, njK, 'X, where 1 in what place ? a. in direct questions : Mt. ii. 2 ; xxvi. 17 ; Mk. xiv. 12, 14 ; Lk. xvii. 17, 37; xxii. 9, 11 ; Jn. i. 38 (39) ; vii. 11 ; viii. 10, 19 ; ix. 12 ; xi. 34 ; ttoC eorii/ [(«'or. sometimes unex- pressed)], in questions indicating that a person or thing is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to it is nowhere, does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 20; xii. 1 7, 19 ; XV. 55 ; Gal. iv. 15 L T Tr WH ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; nov (pave'iTQi, [A. V. where shall . . . appear} i. q. there will be no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques- tions, for the relative ottou [cf. W. §57, 2 fin.] : foil, by the indie, Mt. ii. 4 ; Mk. xv. 47 ; Jn. i. 39 (40) ; xi. 57; XX. 2, 13, 15 ; Rev. ii. 13 [cf. W. 612 (569)] ; foU. by the subjunc, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58 ; xii. 1 7. o. joined to verbs of going or coming, for jroi in direct quest, [cf. our coUoq. ichere for whither; see W. § 54, 7; B. 71 (62)] : Jn. vii. 35 [cf. W. 300 (281) ; B. 358 (307)] ; xiii. 36 ; xvi. 5 ; in indir. question, foil, by the indie. : Jn. iii. 8 ; viii. 14 : xii. 35 ; .xiv. 5 ; Heb. xi. 8 ; 1 Jn. ii. 11.* TTOv, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down ; 1. somewhere : Heb. ii. 6 ; iv. 4. 2. it has a hmiting force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about, (Hdt. 1,119; 7,22; Paus.8, 11, 2; Hdian. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Ael. v. h. 13, 4 ; al.) : Ro. iv. 19.* IIov8t|S, [B. 1 7 (15)], Piidetis, proper name of a Chris- tian mentioned in 2 Tim. iv. 21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo- TTOV^ 534 irpao<; gie d. rdmisch. Bischofe (ISKO) p. 14G; [B. D. s. v., also (Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia ; Bib. Sacr. for 187o, p. 1 74 sijci. ; Plumplre in the ' Bible Educator ' iii. 245 and in Elli- cott's 'New Test. Com.' ii. p. 186 sq.].' irois (not novs, see Loh. ad Phryn. p. 765; Gbtlling, Accentl. p. 244 ; [Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 566]; W. § G, 1 d. ; Lipsitis, Gram. Untersucli. p. 48), noSdt, 6, [allied w. nihov, Tr/fa, Lat. ]^es, etc. ; Curtius § 291 ; Van- icek p. 473], dat. plur. ■nouiv, fr. Horn, down, Hebr. hy> ; a fool, both of men and of beasts : Mt. iv. 6 ; vii. 6 ; x.xii. 13; Mk. ix. 45; Lk. i. 70; Ju. xi. 44; Acts vii. 5 ; 1 Co. xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental i)rac- tico of placing the foot upon the vanquished (Josh. x. 24), come the foil, expressions : \nro rovt noSas avvrpiffciv ((J. v.) Tivd, Ho. xvi. 20; inoTdtrafiv riva, 1 Co. .\v. 27; Eph. i. 22 ; Ileb. ii. 8 ; riBfuai, 1 Co. xv. 25 ; TiBtmi rivd VTroKaTio T(ov TToSciv, Mt. .\xii. 44 L T Tr WII ; ijroTro'Sioi' Twv TToSCiv, Mt. xxii. 44 11 G; Mk. xii. 36 [here WII iino- (cdrioT. TT.]; Lk. x.K. 43; Actsii. 35; Ileb. i. 13; \. 13 ; dis- ciples listening to their teacher's instruction arc said napd (or 5rpo«) Toiis TroSat Tjvor KaSrjrrdai or napaKadlaai. Lk. x. 3f) : Acts xxii. 3, cf. Lk. viii. 35 ; to lay a thing Trapd (or npos) Tovs TToSasTtvos is used of those who consign it to his power and care, Mt. xv. 30; Actsiv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58. In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, etc., persons are said wpos roiis iroSas tivos niriTeiv or TTpo(T7tlTtT(iv : BIk. V. 22; vii. 25; Lk. viii. 41 ; xvii. 16 Trapa]; Rev. i. 17; (U TOVS TT. Tivoi, Mt. xviii. 29 [Rec] ; Jn. xi. 32 [here T Tr WII 7r/)dr] ; ninTdv ipTvpoaBev t. rroSajv twos, Rev. xix. 10; wpoaKweiv (p-npotrdiv (or evioTTiov) Ttov iiobutv Tivos, Rev. iii. 9 ; xxii. 8 ; otiVt. I'm roi's n- Acts x. 25. By a poetic usage that member of the body which is the chief organ or instrument in any given action is put for the man himself (see yXixraa, 1 ) ; thus oi jroSej tivos is used for the man in motion : Lk. i. 79 (Ps.cxviii. (cxix.) 101) ; Acts V. 9; Ro. iii. 15; x. 15 ; Ileb. xii. 13. irpo-y|io, -Tor, to, (■n-pa^ and "J>;. [Cf. Schmidt ch. 98, 2 ; Trench § xlii. ; Clem. Alex, strora. 4, 6, 30.] * TTpcfOTiis (Rec. and Grsb. [exc. inJas. i. 21; iii. 13; 1 Pet. iii. 15] ; see the preceding word), n-pao'njf (so Lchm.), and ace. to a later form Trpairi)! (so R and G, but with i subser. under the a, in Jas. i. 21 ; iii. 13 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ; Lchm. everywhere exc. in Gal. vi. 1 ; Eph. iv. 2 ; Treg. everywhere [exc. in 2 Co. x. 1 ; Gal. v. 23 (22) ; vi. 1 ; Eph. iv. 2], TWH everywhere; cf.B. 26 (23) sq.), -];Tof,ij,ifen- ileness, mildness, iiieehiess : 1 Co. iv. 21 • 2 Co. x. 1 ; Gal. V. 23(22); vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 12; Eph. iv. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. UR; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; Tit. iii. 2 ; Jas. i. 21 ; iii. 13 ; 1 Pet. iii. 16 <15). (Xen., Plato, Isocr., Aristot., Diod., Joseph., al. ; for nUiS Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [Syn. see (nuUfta, fin. ; Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) § xlii. ; Bp. Lghtf t. on Col. iii. 13.]* irpoo-ia, -as, i/, a plot of ground, a yarden-hed, Horn. Od. 7, 127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist, plant. 4, 4, 3; Nicand., Diosc, al. ; Sir. xxiv. 31 ; dviire^rov Trpacrial irpaarial (a Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate plots, Mk. vi. 40 ; cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 669 ; [Hebr. Gram. § 106, 4 ; B. 30 (27) ; W. 464 (432) also] § 37, 3 ; (where add fr. the O. T. awriyayov airoi/s Brjiiavlas 6rjfiai- vlas, Ex. viii. 14).* irpdo-o-u and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RG) irpaTTco ; fut. Trpd^d) ; 1 aor. inpa^a; pf. irinpa^^a; pf. pass. ptcp. nfnpay- pevos; fr. Horn, down; Sept. several times for nni' and ^i'D ; to do, practise, effect, Lat. agere, (but iroietv to make, Lat. _/ace;'e ; [see TToifiB, fin.]) ; i.e. 1. to exercise, practise, he busy with, carry on : ra neptepya, Acts xix. 19 ; TO iSia, to mind one's own affair.?, 1 Th. iv. 1 1 (i-a iavrov, [Soph. Electr. 678] ; Xen. mem. 2, 9, 1 ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 247 a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al.) ; used of performing the duties of an office, 1 Co. ix. 1 7. to undertake to do, pjjSiv n-poTrere's, Actsxix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform : TTfTTpaypivov ictTiv, has been accomplished, has taken place, Acts xxvi. 26; tiVf ayaBov, e'irc KaKov, 2 Co. v. 10; ayadov fj (pavXov (kokov), Ro. ix. 11 (SiKaia 7^ aSiKO, Plat. a])ol. p. 28 b.) ; a|ui ttjs peravolas epya. Acts xxvi. 20 ; add, Ro. vii. 15, 19 ; Phil. iv. 9 ; mpov, to do i. e. keep the law, Ro. ii. 25 ; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpelrate, (less freq. so in Grk. writ., as iroWa kA avoma, Xen. symp. 8, 22 ; with them Troiciv [(see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23, 11, 3; L. and S. s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to bad conduct ; hence rouj imaTapivovs ptp a 6fi irpaTTeiv, ■notovvTas df rdvavTla, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 4), Acts xxvi. 9; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; to i'pyov tovto, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co. V. 2 T WHTrmrg. ; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts iii. 17; v. 35 ; Ro. vii. 19 ; to rotavra, such nameless iniipiities, Ro. i. 32 (where noK'tv and npaaaeiv are used indiscriminately [but cf. Meyer]) ; ii. 1-3 ; Gal. v. 21 ; ^aOXa, Jn. iii. 20 ; v. 29; t\ n^iov BavuTov, Lk. xxiii. 15 ; Acts xxv. 11, 25; xxvi. 31 ; TO KaKov, Ro. vii. 1 9 ; xiii. 4 ; aronov, Lk. xxiii. 41 ; Tt Tii/t KaKov, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 3. to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen., Dem., Pint.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue, debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extorf]; to dpyipiov, Lk. xix. 23, (so agere in Lat., cf. the commentators on Suet. Vesp. 1 ; [cf. W. § 42, 1 a.]). 4. intrans. to act (see (V p. 256") : dirivavrl rivot, contrary to a thing. Acts xvii. 7. 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me habere : tL vpaa-cro), how I do, the state of my affairs, Eph. vi. 21 ; ev wpa^iTs (see fv). Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300 (258)]. _ •irpauTrd9eia (-dla TWH; see I, i), -as, i], {Trpauizadifs [(7rd(T;(Q))]), mildness of disposition, gentleness of spirit, meekness, (i. q. npaijTTjs) : 1 Tim. vi. 1 1 L T Tr WH. (Pliilo de Abrah. § 37 ; Ignat. ad TraU. 8, 1.) • irpafis, see npaos. •rrpaijTTis, see Trpaori;?. irpe'irci) ; impf. 3 pers. sing, cvpfne ; 1. to stand out, to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. II. 12, 104 down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, fit, (fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down) : TrpeVci tivI with a subject nom. Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xx.xii. (xxxiii.) 1); o or n jrpe'wei, which becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1 ; impers. xa- Bois jrp/irfi Tii/i, Eph. v. 3 ; Ttpinov eVriV foil, by the inf., !Mt. iii. 15 ; Heb. ii. 10; foil, by an ace. with the inf. 1 Co. xi. 13. On its constr. cf. Bttm. § 142, 2.* irpEo-peCa, -as, fj, (jrpf(r0€vvos, Jude 25 L T Tr WH ; iraiv SeKOTftro-. [fourteen years ago^, 2 Co. xii. 2 ; add, 2' Tim. i. 9 ; iv. 21 ; Tit. i. 2 ; toU dpiarov, Lk. .\i. 38 ; Kara- KXvapov, Mt. xxiv. 38 ; Trpn rrjt pcTadeaeas, Heb. xi. 5 ;. Trpo KaTaffo\rjs Kna-pov, Jn. xvii. 24 ; Eph. i. 4 ; 1 Pet. i. 20 ; irpu irauTQiv, prior to all created things. Col. i. 1 7 ; [irpo roiiTav Travrav (Rec. aTrai^), Lk. xxi. 12]; by a Hebraism, Trpo Trpoa-oirrov with the gen. of a thing is used of time for the simple Trpo (W. §65, 4 b. ; [B.319 (274)]),. Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)'], irpo with the gen. of a pers. : Jn. v. 7 ; x. 8 [not Tdf.] ;: nrpoayas 537 irpo^aTov Ko. xvi. 7 ; ot trpo tivos, those that existed before one, Mt. V. 12 ; with a pied. nom. added, Gal. i. 1 7. jrpo with the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quwn (before, before that) foil, by a fin. verb [B. § 140, 11 ; W. 329 (309)] : Mt. \i. 8 ; Lk. ii. 21 ; x.xii. 15 ; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; xiii. 19 ; .xvii. 5 ; Acts xxiii. 15 ; Gal. ii. 12 ; iii. 23. c. of superiority or pro-eminence [W. 372 (349)] : npo TrdvTwv, above all lliinr/s, Jas. v. 1 2 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8. d. In Composition, np6 marks a. place: Trpoai- Xioi/ ; motion forward (Lat. porro), ivpo^aiva, TrpoySdXXto, etc. ; before another who follows, in advance, vpoaya, irpo- Spofios, TrpoTTciinm, 7rporpc'x|/ii4>i5<« [T WII avv- (cf. avv, II. fin.)] : 1 aor. pass. avyKnTeyj/r)cl>iadr]v ; 1. by depositing (xara) a ballot in the urn (i. e. by voting for) to assign one a place among {avv), to vote one a place among: Tiva pfTa nviov, Acts i. 26. 2. mid. to vote against with others, i. e. to condemn with others : Plut. Them. 21. Not found elsewhere.* '-)>:X€id^€i'09, Gal. iii. 23 L T Tr WH ; but R G ibid, pf . ptcp. -xexXf itrficVos ; f r. Ildt. down; Sept. chiefly for "\JD and lUOH, to shut up, (Lat. concludo), i. e. a. to shut up together, enclose, [so s. V. (TVV, II. 2 ; but others (e. g. Fritzsche as below ; Jleyer on Gal. iii. 22) would make the avv- always intensive, as in b.] : a shoal of fishes in a net, Lk. v. 6. b. to shut up on all sides, shut up completely; Tiva el's Tiva or n, so to deliver one up to the power of a person or thing that he is completely shut in, as it were, without means of escape : rwa eis a-KfiOiiav, Ro. xi. 32 (et'ff aywva, Polyb. 3, 63, 3 ; eiV Toiavrrju dfirj^aviav <7uyKXet(7^€tff ^AvTiyovos ^erefieXcTo, Diod. 19, 19; oii crvve- KXfto"ar fi€ fif ^elpas exdpav, Ps. x.xx. (x.xxi.) 9 ; ra Krrjvjj fis BdvaTov, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50 ; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Kom. ii. p. 545 sq.) ; also Tivd vtto ti, under the power of anything, i. e. so that he is held completely subject to it : ino AfiapTtav, Gal. iii. 22 (the Scripture has shut up or subjected, i. e. declared them to be subject) ; sc. {iTTo v6p.ov, with the addition of ei? ttjv fieWovfrai/ wiariv dmoKdKv(^drivai, ib. 23 (see above ad init.) ; on these words see els, B. II. 3 c. y. p. 185* bot.* otj'y-kXtipo-voVos [T WH (TVV- (cf. (TVV, n. fin.)], -ou, o, fi, aj'cllofr-heir, ajoutt-hcir, (dve^tos Ka\ o-uyKXT/poi^o/ios, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 10), (see K\r)pov6ixos 1 b.) : Ro. viii. 17; Eph. iii. 6 ; one who obtains something assigned to him- self with others, a joint participant (see KKrjpovoiios, 2) : with the gen. of the thing, Heb. .xi. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 7. Not found elsewhere.* (nrY-KoivuvEcii [T AYII o-ui»- (cf. (tvv, II. fin.)], -m; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. (TuyKoifioi/ijcnjT-f, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. (TvyKoivQivfi(TavTfs ; to become a partaker together with oth- ers, or to hare fellowship tvith a tiling : with a dat. of the thing, Eph. v. 11 ; Phil. iv. 14 ; Rev. xviii. 4. (with a gen. of the thing, Dem. p. 1299, 20; nvl tivos, Dio Cass. 37, 41 ; 77, 16.)* ) etc. ; al. a c t., after the analogy of verbs in -/ii] ; to rejoice with, take part in another's Joy, (Aeschyl., Arstph., Xen., al.) : with a dat. of the pers. with whom one rejoices, Lk. i. 58 (cf. 14) ; .xv. 6, 9 ; with a dat. of the thing, 1 Co. xiii. 6 ; to rejoice together, of many, 1 Co. xii. 26 ; to con- gratulate (Aeschin., Polyb., [Plut. ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil, as below; 3 Mace. i. 8; Barn. ep. 1, 3 (and iliiller ad loc.)]) : with the dat. of the pers. Phil. ii. 1 7 sq.* (rvy-\ia, (Tvyxvvai, and (ruy-;(uw(o, [T WH (rvv- (cf. (TVV, II. fin.)] (see «x'<^' 'nit-) : impf., 3 pers. sing, crvve- Xvv( (.\cts ix. 22 RG L Tr, -^vvvev T WH), 3 pers. plur. (Tvvex^ov (Acts xxi. 27 R G T Tr WH [but some would make this a 2 aor., see reff. s. v. e'/c;(e'a), init.]) ; 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. (Tvvixeav (Acts xxi. 27 L [see «^fW) init.]); Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. (7uy(T AVH T Tr WH avv- (cf. (riv, II. fin.)], -a; impf. 3 pers. sing. (ru«fijTei; a. to seek or examine together (Plat.). b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute, [lyues- tion (A. v. often)] : absoL, [Mk. xii. 28] ; Lk. xxiv. 15; Ttvi, with one, Mk. viii. 11 ; ix. 14 [R G L] ; Acts vi. :i ; in the same sense npos nva, Mk. ix. [14 TTr WII], IG (wjiere read Trpor aiTovs, not with Rec.*"^ "^' G irpos av- rois [see airoC, p. 87]) ; Acts ix. 29 ; jrpos iavrovs [L Tr WH mrg. or np- avrovs R"*" ''^ G] equiv. to npos dXXij- Xout, Mk. i. 27 [where T WII txt. simply avrovs as subj.] ; jrpof iavrovs with the addition of an indirect quest, to ris etc. with the optat. [cf. B. § 139, «0; W. § 41 b. 4 c.], Lk. xxii. 23; ri, with the indie., Mk. ix. 10.* )T('ifl), a disputer, i. e. a learned disputant, sophist : 1 Co. i. 20. (Ignat. ad Eph. 18 [quotation].)* «ri-Jvyos [L T Tr WH avv- (cf. avv, II. fin.)], -ov, (av^ev- ywiu), yoked together ; used by Grk. writ. [fr. Aesch3'l. down] of those united by the bond of marriage, rela- tionship, office, labor, study, business, or the like ; hence, a yoke-fellow, consort, comrade, colleague, partner. Ac- cordingly, in Phil. iv. 3 most interpreters hold that by the words yvrjaie av^vye Paul addresses some particular associate in labor for the gospel. But as the word is found in the midst of (three) proper names, other expositors more correctly take it also as a proper name ([WH mrg. Suffuyf]; see Laurent, Ueber Synzygos in the Zeitschr. f. d. Luther. Theol. u. Kirche for 18G5, p. 1 sqq. [reprinted in his Neutest. Studien, p. 134 sq.]) ; and Paul, alluding (as in Philem. 11) to the meaning of the word as an appellative, speaks of him as ' a genuine Synzygus ', i. e. a colleague in fact as well as in name. Cf. Meyer and Wicsinger ad loc. ; [IlackctI in B. D. Am. ed. s. V. Yoke-fellow ].* : 1 aor. avvf (mmolrjaa ; to make one alii-r tiigi lli< r irilti another (Vulg. ciinririfico') : Chris- tians, TwXpKTTiiJ [l>br. adds f I/, so WH mrg.], with Christ, Eph. ii. 5; aiiv ra \p. Col. ii. 13; in both these pass- new moral life is referred to.* iruKd|uvos, -ov, T), Ilebr. nnpE? (of which only the plin-. D'OPiy is found in the O. T., 1 K. x. 27 ; Is. ix. 10 ; Am. vii. 14 ; once ni'Opn), a sycamine, a tree having the form and foliage of the mulberry, but fruit resembling the fig (i. q. o-uKOfiop/a, (p v. [but Tristram, Xat. Hist, of the Bible, 2d ed. p. 396 sq. ; BB.DD., etc., regard the syca- mine as the black-mulberry tree, and the sycomore as the fig-mulberry]) : Lk. xvii. C. (Often in Theophr. \ Strab. 17, p. 823; Diod. 1, 34; Dioscorid. 1, 22.) [Cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter, p. 64 ; esp. Low, Aram. Pflan- zennamon, § 332, cf. § 338 ; BB.DD. u. s. ; ' Bible Edu- cator ' iv. 343; Pickering, Chron. Hist, of Plants, ])p. 106, 258.]" oTiKT), -^f, ij, (contr. fr. avKfa), fr. Horn, down, Ilebr. njxn, a jig-tree: Mt. xxi. 19-21 ; xxiv. 32; Jlk. xi. 13, 20 sq.; xiii. 28 ; Lk. xiii. 6 .sq. ; x.\i. 29 ; Jn. 1.48(49), 50 (51); Jas. iii. 12; Rev.vi. 13. [Cf. io«i, Aram. Pflan- zennamen, § 3.'i5.] * (rvKO-|JiapE'a (l.ehm. avKOfiaipea, [Rec. '""" -papa'ia, cf.. Tdf.'s note on Lk. as below; WH. App. pp. 152 and 151]), -as, fj, (fr. avKov and popea the mulberry tree), i. q. avKapwos [but see the word, and reff.], a sycomore- trte : Lk. xix. 4. ((Jeop. 10, 3, 7.) • o-€kov, -ov, to, fr. Horn, down, Ilebr. njsn, a fig, the- ripe fruit of ^ eruK^ [q. v.] : Mt. vii. 1(1 ; Mk. xi. 13; Lk. vi. 44 ; Jas. iii. 12.* avT£«, -w ; 1 aor. eVvKoc^di'rTja'a ; {U'. avKo^avriqs, and this fr. aiiKov ' fig', and (fiaivo) ' to show '. At -Athens those were called avmrjidvrai whose business it was to- inform against any one whom they might detect export- ing figs out of Attica; and as sometimes they seem to. have extorted money from those loath to be exposed, the name avKocpdvrris from the time of Aristophanes down- was a general term of opprobrium to designate a malig- nant informer, a calumniator; a malignant and base ac- cuser from lore of gain, [but cf. L. and S. s. v.]; hence the verb avKo(f)avTS> signifies) 1. to accuse wrong- fully, to calumniate, to attack by malicious devices, (Ar- stph., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to exact money wrong- fully; to extort from, defraud: Lk. iii. 14 [here R. V. marg. accuse wrongfully'] ; with a gen. of the jiers. and ace. of the thing, Lk. xix. 8 (rptaKovra tivas rtapn rivos, Lys. p. 177, 32. Sept. for pU'i', to opj)rcss, defraud, Job XXXV. 9; Eccl. iv. 1; Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 122; nivrjra, Prov. xiv. 31 ; x.xii. Ifi ; nroixovs, Prov. xxviii. 3)." o-uXaYUYcu, -^ ; (o-i/Xi; booty, .spoil, [cf. ) ; to carry off booty : riva, to carry one off as a captive (and slave), Svyarcpa, Heliod. 10, 35; rrapdf'mv, Nicet. hist. 5 p. 96 ; to lead away from the truth and subject to one's sway [R. V. make spoil of}. Col. ii. 8 (Tatian. or. ad Gr. c. 22, p. 98 ed. Otto).* avXdo) 595 : 1 aor. i ; impf. 3 pers. plur. awtkoKovv, 1 aor. avve- XaXi;(ra ; to talk tvith : rivi, with one, Mk. ix. 4 ; Lk. ix. 30 ; xxii. 4, (Ex. xxxiv. 35 ; Is. vii. 6 ; Polvb. 4, 22, 8) ; fiiTa Tivos, Mt. xvii. 3 ; Acts xxv. 1 2 ; trpos oXX^Xour [R. V. spake together one with anotherl, Lk. iv. 36. [Cf. W. § 52, 4, 15.]* o-v\-X.a|iPavci) [sometimes a-vv- (see below)] : fut. 2 pers. sing. a-v\\fi\jfri (L TTr WH eruXXr/^ii/^^ [see M, /»]), Lk. i. 31 ; pf. [3d pers. sing. [|un- Rec."»^ in ] Pet. iv. 1 2 ; see 2, a, s fin.] ; impf. avvi^Mvov ; 2 aor. aiivc^riv, ptcp. avfx^ds ; pf. ovyL- 0e^r]Ka ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. to walk with the Jhet near together. 2. to come together, meet vrhh one ; hence 3. of things which fall out at the same time, to happen, turn out, come to pass, (so occasionally in the Sept. for rt^p and X^P) ; as very often in Grk. writ. (Sept. Gen. xiii. 4; xliv. 29), (rvfi^alvei ti tivi, something befalls, happens to, one : Mk. x. 32 ; Acts xx. 19 ; 1 Co. X. 11 ; [1 Pet. iv. 12] ; 2 Pet. u. 22; tA av/i- ^ejirjKos Tivi, Acts iii. 10 (Sus. 26) ; absol. ra av/j-^e^rj- KOTa, the things that had happened, Lk. xxiv. 14 (1 ilacc. iv. 26; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 17]) ; awi^ij foil, by an ace. with inf. it happened [A. V. so it was'] that, etc. : Acts xxi. 35 [cf. W. 323 (303)], exx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2.* oT)|ji-PaXXw [(nil/- WH (so Tdf. exc. Lk. xiv. 31); cf. avv, n. fin.] ; impf. avvejiaWov, 2 aor. a-uvefia\ov; 2 aor. mid. avviffaXofiTiv ; fr. Horn, down ; to throw together, to bring together; a. Xoyour (Lat. sermones conferre), to con- verse, Eur. Iphig. Aul. 830; with Xdyous omitted [cf. Eng. confer'], Plut. mor. p. 222 c. (W. 593 (552); [B. 145 (127)]): Tivl, to dispute with one. Acts xvii. 18 [where A. V. encountered (cf. c. below)] ; irpbs oKKrjKovs, to confer with one another, deliberate among them- selves, Acts iv. 15. b. to bring together in one's mind, confer icith one's self [cf. avv, II. 4], to consider, ponder : iv rfj Kapbla, to revolve in the mind, Lk. li. 19 (ffv/i/SaXoji/Tw Xoyto"^ai to ovap, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 3), c. intrans. (W. § 38, 1 ; [B. § 130, 4]), to come together, meet : Tivl, to meet one (on a journey). Acts xx. 14 (Hom. Od. 21, 15 ; Joseph, antt. 2, 7, 5) ; to encounter in a hostile sense : rivi. to fght with one (1 Mace. iv. 34 ; 2 Mace, viii. 23 ; xiv. 17 ; Polyb. 1, 9, 7; 3, 111, 1, and often), with els TToXf/ioi' added, Lk. xiv. 31 (ei's ptdxriv, Polyb. 3, 56, 6 ; Joseph, antt. 12, 8, 4; npos p-dxriv. Polyb. 10, 37, 4). Mid. to bring together of one's property, to contribute, aid, help : noKv tivi, one, Acts xviii. 27 ; often so in Grk. auth. also, esp. Polyb. ; cf. Schweighduser, Le.\. Polyb. p. 5 76 ; Passow s. v. 1 b. a. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2] ; Grimm, Exeget. Ildbeh. on Sap. v. 8.* en)(i-Pas, [Aristot. rhet. AIe.\. 4 p. 1426', 87; etc.]; Jambl. vit. Pyth. c. 13 §60; foil, by the ace. with inf., Ocell. Lucan. 3, 8) ; by a usage purely Biblical, w. the ace. of a pers., to teach, instruct, one: 1 Co. ii. 16; for p3n, Is. .\1. 14; for i'""lin, E.\. xviii. 16; Dcut. iv. 9; Is. .\1. 13 Ale.\., Aid., etc. ; for rriin, Ex. iv. 12, 15 ; Lev. .\. 11 ; nr3 h'2ar\, Theodot. Dan. i.x. 22. (The reading (rvvefH^aaav in Acts xix. 33, given by codd. K A B etc. [and adopted by L T Tr WH] yields no sense ; [but it may be translated (with R. V. mrg.) 'some of the multitude instructed Alexander', etc.; R. V. txt. translates it theg brought Alexander out of the multitude, etc.].) * (rv|i-Pov\(iiu ; 1 aor. a-vve^ovXfva-a ; 1 aor. mid. avv- f^ovXevadiJiTjv; fr. [Theogn., Soph.], Ildt. down ; Sept. for yi"' and 'j'i^U ; 1. to girc counsel : nvt, Jn. xviii. 14 ; foil, by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to take counsel with others, take counsel together, to consult, deliberate : foil, by 7va (see iva, II. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4 ; Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrg.]; foil, by a telic inf.. Acts ix. 23.* «rvuPovXiov, -oi', TO, ("'» Si/xfcii/], 34. 4. Si/meon [so R. v.] surnamed Niger, one of the teachers of the church at Antioch : Acts xiii. 1 . 5. Peter the apos- tle : Acts XV. 14 [R. V. Symeon"] ; 2 Pet. i. 1 [here L WH t.xt. Si'/xmi', and A. V. (R. V.) Sim^n"] ; respecting him see 2i/jaii/, 1 and rifVpos, fin.* Tjjs, (rvfinorrj^. The Latin also observes the same distinction and says commilito meus, but not concivis, but civis meus; see Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 471 ; [cf, p. 172; AVin. 25].)* C^u [Tdf. avv- (cf. avv, II. fin,)] : pres. pass. ptcp, avfjLpop(j)i(6lJi(vos ; (avfi/iopcpos) ; to bring to the same form ivilh some other pers. or thing, to render like, (Vulg, configuro) : rivl [R,V, becoming conformed untol, Phil, iii, lb L T Tr AVH. Not found elsewhere.* os, ov, (avv and fjiop(f>rj), having the same form as another [cf, avv, II, 1], (Vulg, conformis, configuratus); similar, conformed to, [Lcian. amor, 39] : riv6s (cf. Matthiae §379 p, 864; [W, 195 (184); B. § 132, 23]), Ro, viii. 29 (see fiVav, a,) ; nvl (Nicand. th, 321), Phil, iii, 21 [(here Tdf, aHvpi.) ; cf, W, 624 (5S0)],* 6u, -01 : ])res, pass, ptcp. avp-^iopcjiovfjicvos ; i, «p avppopcpi^co, q, v.: Phil, iii, 10 Rec, Nowhere else,* crv|i.-ira9€'M [T WII avv- (cf, avv, II. fin.)], -a : 1 aor. avve7Tddi]aa; (avpiiTaBris) ; a. to be affected with the same feeling as another, to sympathize with, (Aristot., Plut.). b. in reference to the wretched, /0 /ee/ /or, have compassion on, (Vulg. compatior) : nvi, Ileb. iv. 15 [A. V. to be touched ivith the feeling o/] ; x. 34, (Isocr. p. 64 b. ; Dion. Hal, Plut.).* |Ji-irepi-Xa(ipdvii) [ T WH (tvp- (cf. avv, II. fin.)] : 2 aor. ptcp. aviMTvepiKa^av ; fr. Plat, and Dem. down ; 1. to comprehcuil at once. 2. to embrace completely : Tivd, Acts .XX. 10.* oT)|i-irivci) : 2 aor. (rvvemou : fr. [Ildt., Arstph.], Xen. and Plat, down ; to drink tvith : rivl, one. Acts .x. 41.* cru|t^CirTv, spoken of Gentiles as received into the communion of the saints i. e. of the people consecrated to God, opp. to ^ivoi k. ndpoiKoi, Eph. ii. 19. (Eur. Heracl. 826; Joseph, antt. 19, 2, 2; Ael. v. h. 3, 44.)* e'pu ; 1 aor. ptcp. o-weviyKavres (Acts xix. 19); fr. [Ilom. (in mid.)], Aeschyl., Hdt. down ; to bear or bring together (Lat. confero), i. e. 1. with a refer- ence to the object, to bring together : tI, Acts xix. 19. 2. with a reference to the subject, to hear to- gether or at the same time ; to carry with others ; to collect or contribute in order to help, hence to help, be profitable, be expedient; (ivii.<\i(pu, it is expedient, profitable, and in the same sense with a ncut. plur. : with the subject vdvra, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 23 ; tl rivi, 2 Co. viii. 10; with an inf. of the object (as in Grk. writ.), ilt. xix. 10 ; 2 Co. xii. 1 (where L T Tr WH have (Tvp.(j>epov) ; with the ace. and inf. Jn. ,\viii. 14 ; crvp.(j)epet tlvL foil, by Iva (see Im, n. 2c. [B. §139,45; W. 337 (316)]), Mt. 'v. 29 sq.; xviii. 6 ; Jn. .xi. 50 ; xvi. 7. to crufiipepov, that which is profitable (Soph., Eur., Xen., Dem., al.) : 1 Co. xii. 7 ; plur. (Plat, de rep. 1 p. 341 e.), Acts xx. 20; advan- tage, profit, Heb. xii. 10; to a-viJ.. rtvos (often in Grk. writ.) the advantage of one, one's profit, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; X. 33, (in both which pass. L T Tr WII read aviKpopov, q. v.).* ri|ii [T WH (TVV- (cf. avv, II. Cn.)] ; to consent, confess: Tivi foil, by on, Ro. vii. 16. (Tragg., Xen., Plat.) * (rv|x-opos, -ov, ((Tvp(j)(pio, q. y-),fit, suitable, useful ; fr. [lies., Theogn.], Ildt. down; 4 Mace. v. 10 ; subst. to (Tvpcpopov, adnantage, profit : with a gen. of the pers. profited, LTTr WH in 1 Co. vii. 35 ; x. 33, [cf. B. § 127, 19 n.], (plur. TO (Tvpcpopa, often in prof. auth. [fr. Soph, down]).* va>), planted together (Vulg. com- plantatus) ; born together with, of Joint origin, i. e. 1. connate, congenital, innate, implanted by birth or nature, (3ilacc. iii. 22; Pind., Plat., Aeschyl., Aeschin., Aristot., crvfKpveo 598 avv I'bilo de Abrah. § 31 init. ; Joseph, [as, c. Ap. 1, 8, 5]). 2. grown together, uuiteil with, (Theoj)hr. Ue cans, plant. 5, 5, 2); kindred (Phit. I'haedr. p. 2 JO a.): ft (Tvn(j)vToi ytyova^tv rw ofiotoifxaTL Tov OavaTOv avTov, ciXXor Koi (sf. TtiaTi as a dat. of respect; for yet another constr. of the second cUluse cf. B. § 132, 23]) r^t dvaa-Tatreas iaojifda, if we. heive become united loith the likeness of his dciilh (which likeness consists in the fact that in the deatli of C'lirist our former corruption and wickedness has been slain and been buried in Christ's tomb), i. c. if it is part and parcel of the very nature of a genuine Cln'istian to be utterly dead to sin, we shall be willed ulso with the likeness of his resurrection i. e. our intimate fel- lowship with his return to life will show itself in a new life consecrated to God, Ro. vi. 5.* [ia) (T AVH (7UV- cf. crvv, II. fin.) : 2 aor. pass. ])tcj). nom. plur. fem. crviJ.'pvf'iam ; 1. trans, to cause to grow together (Plat., Aristot.). 2. pass, intrans. to grow together, grow icith : Lk. viii. 7." ] o-v[i-<|)wv£ti), -cS ; fut. avne(pa>vr](Ta; 1 aor. pass, a-vvfcjiavrjdrju; fr. Plat, and Aristot. down ; prop. /o sound together, be in accord; of sounds and of musical instruments. In the N. T. trop. to be in accord, to har- monize, i. c. a. to agree together: Trepi (as respects) Tii/os, Mt. -wiii. 19 (Dion. Hal. 2, 47) ; tcvI, with a thing. Acts XV. 15 (often in Grk. auth.) ; to agree i. e. corre- spnnil, of things congruous in nature, Lk. v. 36 ; pass. av!]6r] iy-'iv, foil, by an inf., // was agreed between you to etc. Acts V. 9. b. to agree with one in making a bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polyb., Diod.) : fjifTa Tims (K Srjvapiov (see ex, II. 4), Mt. XX. 2; w. a dat. of the pers. and gen. of the price, ibid. 13, (avvecpavrjcrev fxer avTOv Tpidv \iTpwv (iaripov apyvpiov, Act. Thom. § -^)-' (rii|j.-4>uvT]wvta, -0 9, 17, ((Tiip,(j)a>vos), [fr. Plat, down], music: Lk. XV. 25. (Polyb. 2G, 10, 5 ; [plur. of 'the music of the spheres,' Aristot. de caelo 2, 9 p. 290\ 22 ; al.]) * o-v)i4>«>vas, -ov, ((Tuv and (pwvrj), fr. [Horn. h. Merc. 51 ; Soph.], Plat., Aristot. down, harmonious, accordant, agree- ing ; TO (rinvov, by mutual consent, by agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 [cf. AV. 303 (285) ; B. § 139, 20] * £J(i) : 1 aov. avii(\jrrj(j)i(Ta: to compute, count tip : Tiij Ti/idf, Acts xi.x. 19. (Mid. twI, to rote with one, Ar- Ptph. Lys. 142.)* , 1 Pet. iv. 1 2 Rec''.'=» ; see L. and S. s. V. init. ; cf. 2, cr, s)], a preposition; it is never used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four times (texts vary)], INIark [some five times, or John (three times)], (who prefer /xerd), more frequently by Luke [(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39 times ; on tlie comparative frequency of these prepp. in the classics, sec L. and S. s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Da- tive after it, and denotes accompaniment and fellowship, whether of action, or of belief, or of condition and e.\- perience ; (ace. to the grammarians [cf. Donaldson, New Crat.§181; Kruger § 68, 13, 1 ; Kuhner ii. p. 438] ; W. 391 (36G), a fellowship far closer and more intimate than that expressed by y-era, although in the N. T. this distinction is much of tener neglected than observed). Latin cum, Eng. witli. I. 1. Passages in which the subject of an active verb is said to be or to do something aiv rivi; a. ])hrases in which aiiv is used of a c c o m ]> a n i m e n t : dpX avv Tivi i. e. — to be with one, to accompany one, Lk. vii. 1 2 ; viii. 38 (Mk. v. 18 fur avrov) ; xxii. 50 (Mt. xxvi. 69 and Mk. xiv. 67 pieTa) ; Acts xxvii. 2; to associate with one, Lk. xxiv. 44; Acts iv. 13; xiii. 7 ; Phil. i. 23 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. i. 18 ; 01 avv Tici uvres, the attendants of one on a journey, Mk. ii. 20 (Mt. xii. 4 and Lk. vi. 4 rols pifT avToi); Acts xxii. 9 ; oi trvv nvt sc. ovres, — either the comjian- iV(»,s- of one, Lk. V. 9 ; ix. 32; xxiv. 24, 33 ; with the noun added, oi avv t'^oi Trdvrec d6eX, iTvy, a-vWiyoi, crvyKopi^a), etc. 3. completely: {TvyKvTTToi, (TvyKokinTTQ}, ctc. 4. toltk otie^s self, i. e. in one's mind : crvWvrreopm [but see the word], crwi/oiSa, ■a-vveiSrja-is, (TvvTrjpiia ; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 642 sq. Once or twice in the N.T. after verbs compounded with uiv the preposition is repeated before the object [W. § 52, 4, 15]: Mt. xxvii. 44 L T Tr WH ; Col. ii. 13. As to its Form, iruv in composition before ^, p,w, (j), tir, passes into crv/x-, before X into otjX-, before y, k, x '"to avy-; before f [and a- foil, by a consonant] it is elided, hence (Tv^rjv, a-v^rjria, avaravpoa, crvcrTeWai. But in the older manuscripts assimilation and elision are often ne- glected (cf. iv, III. fin.). Following their authority, LT Tr WH write (rvv^dco, (rvv^ijrio), (rvv^rjrrjTrjs, (Tvv^vyoi, xrvv, crvvKokiw, avvKapTTrw, avvKaralSalvo), (TvvKaTddeais, , (Tvvyjrvxos ; L Tr mrg. avv^i'lTtja-is ; T avv^aaiXfvai, i^a), (Tvvo-rjpov; Tr (rvfcrrartKO? ; AVH avv^aKXco, tjvv^t^d^w, avvpfpi^tj), (rvv- o-xipari^ai, avvxpdopai. But L T Tr AVII retain avyyi- Vfia, ovyyevjfs, (Tvyyevis, trvyKaXmra, avyKvpta, avyxv^is, cruXXe-y&j, rrvp^alvut, (Tvp^ovK(V(x>, fjvp^ovXtov, (Tvp(iovXos, tTvppvp, vr;a-is, tTvpcfjavia, (Tvprpaivos {atrvpcpavos), axj(TTpi(j>Q), av(TTpo(pT] ', L T Tr (rvppepl(a>\ L T WII (rvorariKof ; hTrVili (rvppup(f)i(a>, a-vppoptpos, criicrcTrjpov ; L Tr avyyvapr), avyKddijpat, avy- Kadi^w, avyKaKonaSio), (njyKaKovx^<*>, crvyKaXiat, (rvyKdpirTto, avyKaraliaiva, (TvyKarddeais, avyKaTaridripi, o-vyKaTa^jft)- , (Tvyxvvvm, iTvyxpdopat, avXXaXecii, (ruXXvTreco, avpl^dXXw, trvpl^atn- Xcvit), oupjiilSd^Q}, avppa6rjTi]S, ffuppapTvpiia, crvpp€Toxos, (TvppipriTiji, avpiradiu), (Tvpirapayivopat, avpjrapaKaXea), avpnapaXap^dva, (Tvpndpfipi, iTvpwda-x<^, crvpTkfpi,Xap^dva>, avpTrXrjpou)^ avpiTvlycij, trvp-JToXiTt]^, avpiropivopai, (Tvpirpe- (T^VTepoi, (Tvpejiripi, (Tvp, avpxj^vxos, crvaTtvu^oi, avoToi,- xio) ; L (TvXXapl3dva>, (TvaxtpaT'i^ui. Tdf . is not uniform in avXXapj3dvai, (rvp(BdXXu>, avpjStlSd^w, o-vppop(pos, frvp- TiXr^pi'iuy, avax^paTi^oi ; nor Tr in avXXaplSdvo), avux^- paTi^co; norA\ llin avWapjSdvw^crvpliaatXfixo, frvpirXrjpoa). These examples show that assimilation takes place chiefly in those words in which the preposition has lost, more or less, its original force and blends with the word to which it is prefixed into a single new idea; as crvp^ovXiov, trvp- <}>ipet, crvp(popos. Cf. [Alex. Buttmann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 18(52, p. 180] ; Philip Buttmann (the son) ibid, p. 811 sq. [But see Dr. Gregory's exposition of the facts in the Proleg. to Tdf. p. 73 sq. ; Dr. Hort in WH. App. p. 149 ; MeisterJians, Gram. d. Att. Inschr. § 24.] crvv-d-yu ; f ut. (nivd^ai ; 2 aor. trvvjfyayov ; Pass., pres. arvvdyopai ; pf. ptcp. awjjypivoi ; 1 aor. avvr)x6r)v ; 1 fut. avvax6r)tTopm; fr. Ilom. down; Sept. chiefly for r|5X, "j'^P and "Op ; a. lo gather together, to gather: witli an ace. of the thing, Lk. xv. 13 ; Jn. vi. 12 sq. ; xv. C ; har- vests, o6fv, Jit. XXV. 24, 26 ; with ds rt added, Mt. iii. 12 ; vi. 26 ; xiii. 30 ; Lk. iii. I 7 ; vroO, Lk. xii. 1 7 ; ««, Lk. xii. 18; mivdyeiv icapnov (Is ^oiijv alatvwv (see Kapnios, 2 d.), Jn. iv. 36 ; avvdya /xera tivos, Mt. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23 ; to draw together, collect : fishes, — of a net in which they are caught, Jit. xiii. 47. b. to hring together, assem- ble, collect: aij^fiaXojo-iaK (i. c. ai;(fiaXa)Toiis-), Rev. xiii. 10 R G ; 6ir alxpaXiocrlav, i. e. nvds, o'l ixriv alxpaKaiToi., Rev. xiii. 10 Led. min. ; to join together, join in one (those previously separated) : to rcKva tov 6eov ra Sifo-Kopnt- apiva els iv, Jn. xi. 52, (avvd^fiv els iv ra t6vr] Kai TTotr^tTdV (pCXlav, Dion. Hal. 2, 45 ; ma>s els (l)iklav avvd^ovtri to. tdvr), ibid.) ; to gather together by conroking : nvds, Mt. ii. 4 ; xxii. 10 ; irvviSpiov, Jn. xi. 47 ; ttjv iKKXrjalav, Acts xiv. 27 ; TO TrX^^of, Acts xv. 30 ; rivas els with an ace. of place. Rev. xvi. 16; els tov noXepov, in order to cn- "■age in war, Rev. xvi. 14 ; xx. 8 ; iiri Tiva, unto one, Mt. avvaya»"/!) 600 avva)CKa(T(TU)' xxvii. 2 7. Pass, to he gatliereil i. e. come together, gather, meet, [cf. B. 52 (45)] : absol., Mt. xxii. 41 ; xxvii. 1 7 ; Mk. ii. 2 ; Lk. xxii. 6(i ; Acts xiii. 44 ; xv. G ; xx. 7 ; 1 Co. v. 4; Rev. xix. 19; witli tlie addition of (h and an ace. of place, Mt. xxvi. 3 ; Acts iv. 5 ; eis be'mvov. Rev. xix. 1 7 ; (finpoaBev tivos, Mt. xxv. 32 ; cVt Ttpa, unto one, Mk. v. 21 : eVi TO avTo [see avTos, III. 1], Mt. xxii. 34; Acts iv. 2() ; «rri nua, against one, Acts iv. 27 ; jrpds rtva, unto one, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1 ; vi. 30; vii. 1 ; ev with dat. of tlie place, Acts iv. 31 ; ev ttj eVitXi)(Tia, Acts xi. 26 ; fuTa tivos, Mt. x.wiii. 12 ; with adverbs of place : ov, Mt. xviii. 20; Acts xx. 8; Snov, Mt. xxvi. 57; Jn. x.\. 19 RG; (Kft, Jn. xviii. 2; Mt. .\xiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 37 R G L. o. to lead with one's self sc. unto one's home, i. e. to receive hospilabli/, to entertain, [ A.V. to lake in"] : levof, Mt. xxv. 35, 38, 43, (with the addition of fir Tijv oUlav, fir Tov oIkov, Deut. xxii. 2 ; Josh. ii. 18 ; Judg. xix. 18, etc.). [CoMP. : eVi-oxiraya).] * truv-ayayf], -^f, ij, (avmyco), Sept. for ShP and very often for niy. In Grk. writ, a bringing together, galhrr. ing (as of fruits), a contractitig ; an assembling together of men. In the N. T. 1. an assembly of men : tov 'S.arava, whom Satan governs. Rev. ii. 9 ; iii. 9. 2. a synagogue, i. e. a. an assembly of Jews formally gathered together to offer prayer and listen to the reading and exposition of the Holy Scriptures; assemblies of the sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards also on the second and fifth days of every week [see reff. below] : Lk. xii. 11 ; Acts ix. 2 ; xiii. 43 ; xxvi. 11 ; the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2 (Epiph. haer. 30, 18 says of the Jewish Christians a-vvayoiyrjv ovTot KaXovai rijv fourwi/ (KKkr^uiav Koi ov\i tKKKi^alav [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 192]); [cf. Trench, Syn. § 1, and esp. Harnack's elaborate note on Ilerm. mand. 11, 9 (less fully and accurately in Ililgenfeld's Zeitschr. f. wiss. Theol. for 187C, p. 102 sqq.) respecting the use of the word by the churcli Fathers of the 2d, 3d, and 4th centuries; cf. Ililgenfeld's comments on the same in his 'Ilermae Pastor', ed. alt. p. 183 .sq.]. b. the build- ing where those solemn Jewish assemblies are held (Ilebr. npJ3n n'3, i. e. 'the house of assembly'). Synagogues seem to date their origin from the Babylonian exile. In the time of Jesus and the apostles every town, not only in Palestine but also among the (ientiles if it contained a considerable number of Jewish inhabitants, had at least one synagogue, the larger towns several or even many. That the Jews held trials and even inflicted punishments in them, is evident from such pass, as Mt. x. 17; xxiii. 34 ; Mk. xiii. 9; f^k. xii. 11; xxi. 12; Acts ix. 2; xxii. 19; xxvi. 11. They are further mentioned in Mt. iv. 23; vi. 2,5; ix. 35; xii. 9; xiii. 54; xxiii. 6; Mk. i. 21, 23,29,39; iii. 1; vi. 2; xii. 39; Lk. iv. 15 sq. 20, 28,33,38,44; vi. 6; vii. 5; viii. 41 ; [xi.43]; xiii. 10; xx. 46; Jn. vi. 69; xviii. 20 Qiere the anarthrous (so G L T Tr WH) sing, has an indef. or generic force (R. V. txt. in synagogues)']; Acts vi. 9 ; ix. 20 ; xiii. 5, 14, 42 Rec. ; xiv. 1 ; xv. 21 ; xvii. 1, 10, 17 ; xviii. 4, 7, 19, 2« ; .xix. 8 ; xxiv. 12 ; xxvi. 11 ; (Joseph, antt. 19, 6, 3 ; b. j. 2, 14, 4. [5 ; 7. 3, 3; Philo, (piod onin. jirob. lib. § 12]). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syn- agogcn ; J.eyrer in Ilcrzog ed. 1, xv. p. 299 sqq. ; Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 27 (esp. ii.) ; Kneucker in Schenkel V. p. 443 sq. ; \_IIamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. p. 1142 sqq.; Ginsburg in Alex.'s Kitto, s. v. Synagogue; EdersJieim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. x.].* o-vv-aYuvt^o^at : 1 aor. mid. inf. (rvvaymvliraaBai ; fr. Thuc. and Xni. down; to strive togellicr irilh one, to help one in striving: tiw (v rais Trpo(Tfv)(als, in prayers, i. e. to- offer intense prayers with one, Ro. xv. 30; in what sense intense prayer may be likened to a struggle, see Philippi ad loc. [(cf . ayavi^. in Col. iv. 1 2 and Bp. Lghtft.'s note)].* OMV-aSXia, -m ; 1 aor. a «1/175X70-0 ; to strive at the same time ivith another: with a dat. commodi [cf. \V. § 31, 4], for something, Phil. i. 27 ; rivi fv nvi, together with one in something, Phil. iv. 3. (univ. to help, assist, Diod. 3, 4.) * , -aj; \m\il. iTiivr]Ko\ov6ovv ; 1 aor. o'vvrjKo- Xovdqcra ; fr. Arstph., Thuc, Isocr. down ; to follow to- gether ivilh others, to accompany; nvl, one, Mk. v. 37 [where Lehm. oKoXovd.] ; xiv. 51 L T Tr WII ; Lk. xxiii. 49.' f r. dXijs, crowded, in a mass ; [cf. tiXva-is, init.]); to gather together, assemble; pass, pres. ptcp. a-vvaXt^opevot ; In be assemhleil, meet with: rivtr with one, Acts i. 4, where avTois is to be supplied. (Ildt., Xen., [Plut. de placit. phil. 902], Joseph., Lcian., Jambl.)> [But Meyer defends the rendering given by some of the ancient versions (cf. Tdf.'s note ad loc.) eating tvith (de- riving the word from truraXos), so A. V. and R. V. mrg. ; such passages as Manetho 5, 339; Clem. hom. 13, 4 (al- though Dressel after cod. Ottob. reads here a-vvavX. — yet the recogn. 7, 29 renders cibum sumlmus) ; Chrysost. iii. 88 c. (od. Migne iii. i. 104 mid.); 89 a. (ibid, bottom) ; 91 d. (ibid. 107 mid.), seem to give warr.ant for this in- terpretation; cf. Valckenaer, Opuscc. sq. But see at length Woolsey in the Bib. Sacr. for Oct. 1882,. pp. 605-618.]* oTJv-aXXoo-o-u : (see (tnTaXXdo-o-w) ; to reconcile (Time, Xen., Plat., Dio Cass.; m diff. senses by diff. prof, auth.) : (ruj'i)XXao-a-f>' avTovs fis elprjvrjv, (Vulg. reconciliabal. i. e. sought to reconcile), conative impf. [cf. B. 205 (178);. R. V. would have set them at one again], Acts vii. 26 L X TrWII [see o-ui/fXaui/u].* cfvvava^aivu) 601 viiict oTiv-ava-Pa£vw : 2 aor. (rvvavejiriu ; to ascend at the same time, cvine up together with to a higher place: rtvl, with one, foU. by els with the ace. of the phace, Mk. xv. 41 ; Actsxiii. 31. (Ildt, Xen., Dion. Ilal., Strabo, al. ; Sept. several times for nSl*.) * t^j elprivrjSr i. e. TTj dpr]vr) uf (Tvvhiapw, Eph. iv. 3 (crivSea-pos evvoias K. (j)i\ias, Plut. Num. 6) ; ^tk ia-Ti avvb. t^s TfXfidnjrot,. that in which all the virtues are so bound together that perfection is the result, and not one of them is wanting^ to that perfection. Col. iii. 14 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. fis avvbfnpov dSudas opu) (T€ oirra, I see that you have fallen into (cf. tlpl, V. 2 a. p. 179', and see below) the- bond of iniquity, i. e. forged by iniriuity to fetter souls. Acts viii. 23 (the phrase crvvS. ddiKias occurs in another sense in Is. Iviii. 6). 2. that which is bound to- gether, a bundle: prop. avvS. iniaToKtiiv, lldian. 4, 12,. 11 [6 ed. Bekk.]; hence some interpreters think that by o-wS. dbiKias, in Acts viii. 23 above, Simon is described as ■' a bundle of iniquity ", compacted as it were of iniq- uity, (just as Cic. in Pison. 9, 21 calls a certain man "ani- mal ex omnium scelerum importunitate . . . concretum"); but besides the circumstance that this interpretation is- extremely bold, no examples can be adduced of this tropical use of the noun.* irvv-Se';» : in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down ; 1. to tie together, to bind together. 2. lo bind or fasten on alt sides. 3. to binil just as (i. c. jointly with) another: pf. pass. ptcp. 0)5 cTvvdfSepevot. as fellow-prisoners [A.V. as bounil with them], Heb. xiii. 3 (o-ui/SeSf/ieVos tm ot- voxd(f, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 3).' trvvSo^d^co 602 cvveiBrjai^ aw-ho^aXfi) : 1 aor. pass. avveSo^aa-dijV, 1. to n/)- prove loffcther, Join in ajiproiint/ : pdfioi (TwSfSo^aff/ievoi iiro ■navrav, Aristot. pol. 5, 7 (9), 20 p. 1310', 15. 2. to gtori/i/ together (Vulg. conglorijico) : sc. aiv X/jiorw, to be e.xalted to the same glory to which Christ has been raised, l?o. viii. 17.* (rvv-8ov\os, -ov, 6, (trvv and 8oCXos), a fellow-servant ; one who serves the same master with another ; tlius used of a. the associate of a servant (or slave) in the proper sense: !Mt. xxiv. 49. b. one who with others serves (ministers to) a Ling : Mt. xviii. 2S, 29, 31 , 33. c. the colleague of one who is Christ's servant in publishing the gospel : Col. i. 7 ; iv. 7 [(where cf . Bp. Lghtf t.)]. d. one who with others acknowledges the same Lord, Jesus, and obeys his commands : Rev. vi. 11. e. one who with others is subject to the same divine authority in the Messianic economy : so of angels as the fellow-servants of Christians, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. (Mocris says, p. 273, o/xodovXo; drrtKo)?, ), a running together, con- course, esp. hostile or riotous : Acts xxi. 30. (Aristot. rhetor. 3, 10 p. 1411% 29; Polyb., Died., al. ; 3 Mace. iii. 8.) ' oT)v-«Ye(pu) : 1 aor. irvvriyetpa ; 1 aor. pass. (n>vr)y(p6i)v ; to raise together, to cause torise together; Xul'^.conresuscito [also conresurgo, resurgo~\ ; (to. mnroKuTa, 4 Jlacc. ii. 14 ; ])ass. to rise together from their seals, Is. xiv. 9 ; trop. Xuffof KOI 6privovt, Plut. mor. p. 117 c.); in the N. T. trop. to raise tip together from moral death (see 6dva- Toj, 2) to a new and blessed life devoted to God : ij/iSs TM XptcTTw (risen from the dead, because the ground of the new Christian life lies in Christ's resurrection), Eph. ii. 6 ; Col. iii. 1 ; «VXpio-ru, Col. ii. 12.* Kov, a conscience impressed and controlled by an idea of the idol (i. e. by a notion of the idol's existence and ])Ower), 1 Co. viii. 7 Rec. ; rcXf imirai Ttva Kara tijk crvvfiSrjiTiv (sc. avTov), so to perfect one that his own conscience is sat- isfied, i.e. that he can regard himself as free from guilt, Ileb. ix. 9 ; eXtyxfaOai vtto Trjs , (Clem. Hum. 1 Cor. 45, 7, cf. dyvtj aw. ibid. 1,3; Kadapos rij nvv- «iSijcTft, Ignat. ad Trail. 7, 2) ; anpoaKonos, Acts xxiv. IC ; novTfpa, a mind conscious of wrong-doing, Heb. x. 22 {\Jv tTvv(ibi}crei novrjpa, ' Teaching ' etc. 4, 14] ; airpf- nrii, Lcian. amor. 49). ^ trviifi&rjcns Kadapi^erai diro xrX. Ileb. ix. 14; liokvveTai, 1 Co. viii. 7; fiiaiverai, Tit. i. 1.5, (/xr;6ev eKovcitus yjr€vd€(r9ai fiJ]^^ p-Lalvnv tjjv avTov v nopl^io tI tivi,, so that ace. to the reading ndvra avv- epyel 6 deds the meaning is, 'for them that love God, God coworking provides all things for good or so that it is well with them' (Fritzsche), [R. Y. mrg. God work- eth all things tcith them for gooil], Ro. viii. 28 Lchm. [WH in br. ; cf. B. 193 (167)], (iavTols rd avfifpepovra, Xen. mem. 3, 5, IG). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. vol. ii. p. 193 Sep* crwep-yos, -oV, (avv and EPrQ), [fr. Find.], Eurip., Thuc. down, a companion in icork, J'ellow-workcr, (Vulg. adjutor [Phil. ii. 25 ; 3 Jn. 8 coSperator']) : in the N. T. with a gen. of the pers., one who labors with another in furthering the cause of Christ, Ro. xvi. 3, 9, 21 ; Phil. ii. 25; iv. 3; [1 Th. iii. 2 Rec.]; Philem. 1, 24; 6(oi, one whom God employs as an assistant, as it wore (a fellow- worker with God), 1 Th. iii. 2 (G L txt. WH mrg. but with Tov 6(ov in br. ; Rec. et al. biaKovov, q. v. 1). plur. : 1 Co. iii. 9 ; with gen. of the thing (a joint-promoter [A. V. helpcr~\), avv. faptev t^s x^P"'' "'*-' l^bor with you to the end that we may rejoice in your Christian state, 2 Co. i. 24. els vfids, (my) fellow-worker to yoii-ward, in refer- ence to you, 2 Co. viii. 23 ; els ttjv ^aa. t. 6eov, for the advancement of the kingdom of God, Col. iv. 11 ; rp dXij- deia, for (the benefit of) the truth, [al. render (so R. V.) avvep-xpfi-o-i- 004 avvrideia. 'with the truth'; see AVestcott ad loc.], 3 Jn. 8. (2 Mace. viii. 7 ; xiv. 5.) * - iior. avvrj\6ov. once (Acts X. 4 J T Tr WII) 3 purs. phir. avvrjKBav (see dn-ep- Xonai. init.) ; pf. ptcp. a-vv(\rj\vd(at; plupf. 3 pers. plur. (rvvf\T{Ki6(iJn. xviii. 20; [foil, by an iiifin. of purpose, Lk. v. 15] ; foil, by els, — indicating either the end, as els to (payelv, 1 Co. xi. 33 ; or the result, 1 Co. xi. 17, 34 ; «v e/cKXt/o-i'a, in sacred assembly [R. V. mrg. hi congregation'], 1 Co. xi. 18 (W. § 50, 4 a.). b. Like the Lat. convenio i. q. cneo: of conjugal cohabitation, Mt. i. 18 [but cf. Weiss ad loc. (and the opinions in Meyer)] (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 4 ; Diod. 3, 58 ; Philo de caritat. § 14 ; de fortitud. § 7; de special!, legg. § 4 ; Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 1 and 7, !), 5 ; Apollod. bibl. 1, 3, 3) ; with eVi to oxjto added, 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. 2. to fjo {depart) or come with one, to ac- company one (see tpxaiiai, II. p. 252") : Ttvl, with one, Lk. xxiii. 55 [Trtxt. br. the dat.]; Acts i. 21 [liere A. V. companij with]; ix. 39; x. 23,45; xi. 12; with els. to epyov added. Acts xv. 38; aiv nvi, Acts xxi. 16.' cruv-tayoi' ; to eat with, take food together with [cf. wi/v, II. 1] : Ttvi, with one, Lk. xv. 2 ; Acts x. 41 ; xi. 3 ; 1 Co. v. 11, (2 S. xii. 17); nerd tivos, Gal. ii. 12; Gen. xliii. 31 ; Ex. xviii. 12, [cf. W. § 52, 4, 15]. (Plat., Plut., Lcian.)* OTlv£"T?, Sdi?, etc. ; also for ^'31^^, a poem.) [Syn. see o-rx^i'a, fin. ; cf. Bp. Lghlft. on Col. i. 9 ; Schmidt ch. 147, .S.] " o-uveT6s, -{], -OK, [(rvviiffu), fr. Pind. down, Sept. for DDn, J133, etc., intelligent, having understanding, wise, learned: Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21 ; Acts xiii. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. xxix. 14). [Stx. see (To ; (see eiSoKea, init.) ; a. to be pleased together with, to ajiproee together (with others) : absol. (yet so that tlie thing giving pleasure is evident from the context). Acts xxii. 20 G L T Tr WH ; with a dat. of the thing, Lk. xi. 48 ; Acts viii. 1 ; xxii. 20 Rec. ([Polyb. 24, 4, 13] ; 1 Mace. i. 57 ; 2 Mace. xi. 24). b. to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to. ([Polyb. 32, 22, 9] ; 2 Mace. xi. 35) ; foil, by an inf. 1 Co. vii. 12 sq. [R.V. here be content']; w. a dat. of a pers. to applaud [R. V. consent with], Ro. i. 32. (Diod. ; eccles. writ.)* , -M '• pres. pass. ptcp. ot/vcvcop^ov/irKoc ; (eito- Xe<->, to feed abundantly, to entertain ; fr. ev and c^") > to entertain together; pass, to feast sumptuously with : Jude 12; tivI, with one, 2 Pet. ii. 13. ([Aristot. etli. Eud. 7, 12, 14 p. 1245', 5], Joseph., Lcian., al.)* -t/T)6rfs, and this fr. (rvv and 5^os), fr. Isocr., Xen., Plat, down, Lat. consuctudo, i. e. 1. in- tercourse (with one), intimacy : 4 JIacc. -xiii. 21. 2. custom: Jn. xviii. 39 [cf. B.§139,4o]; 1 Co. xi. IC. 3. a being used to : with a gen. of the oiiject to which one is accustomed, 1 Co. viii. 7 L T Tr WH.* : 1 fut. pass. avv9Xacr6i](Toiiai ; to break to pieces, shatter, (Vulg. confnngu, conquasso) : Mt. xxi. 44 [but T om. L Tr mrg. WH br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18. (Sept. ; [Manetho, Alex. ap. Athen., Eratosth., Aristot. (v. 1.)], Diod., Plut., al.) • p6s) : Ro. iii. 1 1 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2). [Syn. see ytvuia-Km, fin.] * (Twio-TavM and (rvvKrrda), see the foil. word. o-uv-£o-ni|ii (Ro. iii. 5 ; v. 8 ; xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. x. 18 ; Gal. ii. 18 Rec. ; ptcp. crvvKTravres, 2 Co. iv. 2 LT Tr ; vi. 4 L T Tr), or crw.o-n.Va) (2 Co. v. 12 ; Gal. ii. 18 G L T Tr WH ; inf. avviarTaveiv, 2 Co. iii. 1 R G T WH ; ptcp. , -a ; (avvofiopos, having joint boundaries, bordering on, fr. avv and o/jopos, and this fr. 6/idr joint, and opos a boundary) ; to border on, be contiguous to, [A. X.jnin hard'] : rivi, to a thing, Acts xviii. 7. (By- zant. writ.)* appaKov, Ael. V. h. 9, 13 ; [Plut. an sen. ait gerend. resp. 4, 8]) : Tiw, Mt. xxi. 6 LTrWII; xxvi. 19; xxvii. 10; Sept. ofti-n for niV.* vos or toC cuwvos, Mt. xiii. 39, 40 L T Tr WII, 49 ; xxiv. 3 ; x.xviii. 20 ; roO alavos toutou, Mt. xiii. 40 RG; tSjv aiaviov, Ileb. Lx. 20 (see atwi/, 3 p. 19' bot. [cf. Herm. vis. 9, 12, 3 and Ililgenfeld ad loc.]); Kaipov and Kaipav, Dan. ix. 27; xii. 4 ; roii/ rjpepwv, ibid. 13; avBpinrov. of Ids death, Sir. xi. 27 (25) ; cf. xxi. 9.* o-uv-reXcu, -w ; fnt. avvTiXiaai ; 1 aor. avvfrtKeaa ; Pass., l)rcs. inf. avvTiXe'iadai ; 1 aor. crvv(T(\ia6r}v ( Jn. ii. 3 T WII 'rejected' mrg.), ptcp. cni^fXecrBeis ; fr. Thuc. and Xen. down ; Sept. often for n'73 ; also sometimes for □pri, Hi^lJ, etc.; 1. to end together or at the same time. 2. to end completely; bring to an end, finish, complete : roiis \6yov:, Mt. vii. 28 R G ; tov netpatrpLOv, Lk. iv. 13 ; i)p.ipai, pass., Lk. iv. 2 ; Acts xxi. 27, (Job i. 5; Tob. X. 7). 3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment; pass, to come to pass, !Mk. xiii. 4 ; Xoyoi», a word, i. e. a prophecy, Ro. ix. 28 (prjpa, Lara. ii. 1 7). 4. to effect, make, [cf. our conclude'] : hiaOrfKrjv, Heb. viii. 8 (Jer. xii. (xxxiv.) 8, 15). 5. toJinish,[.e. in a use foreign to Grk. writ., to make an end of: o-vveTtKeaBri 6 o'Kot ToC yapLOv, \jt:as at an end 'with], Jn. ii. 3 Tdf. after cod. Sin. (Ezek. vii. 15 for S5K ; to bring to an end, de- stroy, for nSa, Jer. xiv. 12 ; xvi. 4).* oTiv^e'li*""! pf- p!iss. ptcp. avvT(Tp.ripivo!i ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; 1. to cut to jiiii-(s, [cf. avv, II. SJ. 2. to cut short; metaph. to dts/Hilch briejhj, ex- ecute or Jinish Quickly ; to hasten, (avvT(p.v(iv sc.t^v ohov, to take a short cut, go the shortest way, Ildt. 7, 1 23 ; sc. 7011 \uyov, to speak briefly, Eur. Tro. 441 ; rat airoKpiatis, to abridge, sum up, Plat. Prot. p. 334 d. ; iv ^pax^i iroXKovs \6yovs, Arstph. Thesm. 1 78) : Xoyoi» [q. v. I. 2 b. a.], to bring a prophecy or decree speedily to accomplishment, Ro. ix. 28 ; XoyoE avvmpripivos, a short word, i. e. an ex- pedited proplieey or decree, ibid. [R G Tr mrg. in br.] (both instances fr. Sept. of Is. x. 23) ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. vol. ii. p. 350.* oTiv-rnpt'u, -a> : iui])f. 3 |)ers. sing. ovveTrjpei ; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. avvTrjpovvTai; [fr. Aristot. de i)lant. 1, 1 p. 816*, 8 down] ; a. to preserve (a tiling from perish- ing or being lost) : W, pass. (opp. toanuXKvaBai), Mt. ix. 17; Lk. V. 38 [T WII om. Tr br. the cl] ; riva, to guard one, keep him safe, fr. a plot, Mk. vi. 20 (eai/i-ov avapdp- ■njTov, 2 Mace. xii. 42 [cf. Tob. i. 1 1 ; Sir. xiii. 1 2]). b. to keep within one's self, keep in mind (a thing, lest it be forgotten [cf. avv, II. 4]) : navra ra pjjpara, Lk. ii. 1 9 (to pr]pa iv TTJ Kap^la pov, Dan. vii. 28 Theod. ; rrjv yvoiprjv nap' eavTw. Pulyl). 31, 6, 5 ; [absol. Sir. xxxix. 2]).* o-vv-Ti9ii|ii : Mid., 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. avvidevro; plpf. 3 pers. plur. avueTidavro; fr. Horn, down ; to jiut with or together, to place together ; to join together ; Mid. a. to place in one's mind, i. e. to resolve, determine ; to make an agreement, to engage, (often so in prof. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; cf. Passow s. v. 2 b. ; [L. and S. s. v. B. II.]) : avvfTidfivTo, tliey had agreed together [W. § 38, 3], foil, by iTO, Jn. ix. 22 [W. § 44, 8 b.] ; avvidevro, they agreed together, foil, by tov with an inf. [B. 27(» (232)], Acts xxiii. 20; they covenanted, foil, by an inf. [B. u. s.], Lk. .xxii. 5. b. to assent to, to agree to : Acts xxiv. 9 Rec. [see avveTTtridripi] (tiw, Lys. in Ilarpocr. [s. v. Kap- (tiVof] p. 106, 9 Bekk.).* os, -ov, 6, {a-vvTpi(j)a)), [fr. Hdt. down], noiir- ished with one (Vulg. collactaneus [Eng. _/bs(cr-6ro ; (vnovpyeco to serve, fr. vTvovpyos, and this fr. vTTo and EPrfi) ; to help together : nut, by any thing, 2 Co. i. 11. (Leian. bis accusal, c. 17 avvayaivt- (opem]i TTJs rjSovi]!. ijTrep avrfi ra TToXXa ^UfUTTOupyfi.) * -, see (rvp)iov, al, Syracuse, a large maritime city of Sicily, having an excellent harbor and surrounded by a wall 180 stadia in length [so Strabo 6 p. 270: "but this statement exceeds the truth, the actual circuit being about 14 Eng. miles or 122 stadia" (Leake p. 279) ; see Diet, of Geogr. s. v. p. 10G7'']; now Siragosa: Acts x.wiii. 12.* 2«pCo, -as, v> Syria ; in the N. T. a region of Asia, bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges, on the E. by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by Palestine, and on the W. by Phoenicia and the ^Mediter- ranean, [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Syria ; Hyssel in Ilerzog ed. 2, s. V. Syrien ; cf. also 'Avnoxiia, 1 and Aa/iao-xoV] : Mt. iv. 24; Lk. ii. 2; Acts xv. 23, 41 ; xviii. 18; xx. 3 ; xxi. 3; Gal. i. 21. [On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.] • Siipos, -ov, o, a Syrian, i. e. a native or an inhabitant of Syria: Lk. iv. 27; fem. 'S.vpa, a Syrian woman, Mk. vii. 26 Treg. [(Hdt., al.)] • 2vpo(tio£vioiVio-tra), 2vpo(f>owlKia-a-a (so LT WH; hardly a pure form, and one which must be derived fr. .^ * o-v-iTirapdo-o-u : 1 aor. avveanapa^a ; /o convulse com- j)leteli/ (see pijyuvni, c.) : Tti/d, Mk. ix. 20 L T Tr inrg. WH; Lk. ix. 42. (Max. Tyr. diss. 13, 5.) * Tepov, Aristot. in Diog. Laert. 5, 18, and in Stob. flor. U5, 11, ii. 435 ed. Gaisf.) * OTwrroupoui [L T Tr WII a-vv- (cf. avi>, II. fin.)], -£: Pass., pf. avvf auTw LT Tr WH) ; Mk. xv. 32 (criv aira L T WII) ; Jn. .\ix. 32 ; metaph. : 6 TraXaios tjiiinv ■av6panros avveaTavpadr) sc. Ta Xptcrra, i. e. (dropping the figure) the death of Christ upon the cross has wrought the extinction of our former corruption, Ro. vi. G ; Xpia-ra ^rvvfOTaiipQifiai, by the death of Christ upon the cross I luive become utterly estranged from (dead to) my for- mer habit of feeling and action, Gal. ii. 19 (20).* oTj-OTiXXu» : 1 aor. trui/fOTftXa ; pf. pass. ptcp. avvcardK- fieva; prop, to place together; a. to draw together, contract, (to iori'a, Arstph. ran. 999 ; Trjv xiipa. Sir. iv. 1 ; fir oKlyov (tuotcXXq), Theophr. de cans, plant. 1 , 15, 1); (o diminish (rijv blairav, Isocr. p. 280 d. ; Dio Cass. 39, 37) ; to shorten, abridge, pass. 6 Kaipbs avpftrraXfifvos fOTiv, the time has been drawn together into a brief compass, is shortened, 1 Co. vii. 29. b. to roll to- gether, wrap up, wrap round with bandages, etc., to en- shroud (riiia jTfVXoir, Eur. Troad. 378): Tjvd, i. e. his corpse (for burial), Acts v. (5.* OT)-6p.fvos : [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; 1. to twist together, roll together (into a bundle) : (ppvydvav nXrjdos, Acts .xxviii. 3. 2. to collect, combine, unite : rivds, pass, [rcfiexively (?)] of men, to [gather themselves tiigithTi. -^r, rj, (av(TTpea>} ; a. a twisting up together, a binding together. b. a secret combination, a coalition, conspiracy: Acts xxiii. 12 (Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 3 ; [2 K. XV. 15 ; Am. vii. 10]) ; a concourse of disorderly persons, a riot (Polyb. 4, 34, C), Acts xix. 40.* oTi-crxniiaTC^tt) [WH avv- (so T in Ro., Tr in 1 Pet. ; cf- (Tui', II. fin.)] ; pres. pass. o"i'(r;^7;)Lia7tfo/Aat ; {a)(r]paTi^(o, to form) ; a later Grk. word ; to conform [(Aristot. top. 6, 14 p. 151', 8; Plut. de profect. in virt. 12 p. 83 b.)] ; pass, retle.xively, nvi, to conform one's self (i.e. one's mind and character) to another's pattern, l_ fashion one's self according to, (cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 130 sq.)] : Ro. xii. 2 ; 1 Pet. i. 14 [cf. AV. 352 (330 sq.)]. (n-pof Ti, Plut. Num. 20 com. text.) * Suxo-P (ReC*' 2i;(dp), rj, Sychar, a town of Samaria, near to the well of the patriarch Jacob, and not far from Elavia Neapolis (2vxap irpo Trjt Ne'as TrciXeur, Euseb. in his Onomast. [p. 34G, 5 ed. Larsow and Parthey]) tow- ards the E., the representative of which is to be found apparently in the modern hamlet al Asiior (or 'AsL'er) : Jn. iv. 5, where cf. Baumlein, Ewald, Briickner [in De Wette (4th and foil, edd.)], Godet ; add, Ewald, Jahrbb. f. bibl. Wissensch. viii. p. 255 sq. ; Badeker, Palestine, l)p. 328, 337; [Lieut. Conder in the Palest. Explor. Fund for July 1877, p. 149 sq. and in Survey of West. Pal.: 'Special Papers', p. 231 ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, A])penili.x xv.]. The name does not seem to differ from "^OID, a place mentioned by the Talmudists in 1310 j'i' ' the fountain Sucar " and 1D1D J'i' r»>'p3 ' the valley of the fountain Sucar' ; cf. Delilzsch in the Zeit- schr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1856, p. 240 sqq. Most in- terpreters, however, think that 'S.vxdp is the same as 2u;(«/x (q. v. 2), and explain the form as due to a soften- ing of the harsh vulgar pronunciation (cf. Crerfjier, Einl. in d. N. T. vol. i. p. 2G4 s(i.), or conjecture that it was fabricated by way of reproach by those who wished to suggest the noun ipu/, 'falsehood', and thereby brand the city as given up to idolatry [cf. Ilab. ii. 18], or the word 13!?, 'drunken' (on account of Is. xxviii. 1), and thus call it the abode of iiapol, see Sir. 1. 26, where the Shechemites are called Xaor p.ap6s; cf. Test. xii. Patr. (test. Levi § 7) p. 5G4 Stxr}^, \eyop.evr) iroKii davverav. To these latter opinions there is this objection, among Svxe/M 609 '"%' ■hov others, that the place mentioned by the Evangelist was very near Jacob's well, from which Shechem, or Flavia Keapolis, was distant about a mile and a half. [Cf. B.D. s. V. Sychar ; also Poiier in Alex.'s Kitto, ibid.] * SvxeV, Hebr. DDiy [i.e. 'shoulder,' 'ridge'], Shechem [A. V. Si/chem (see below)], prop, name of 1. a man of Canaan, son of Hamor (see 'Efi.ij.6p), prince in the city of Shechem (Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sqq.) : Acts vii. 16 RG. 2. a city of Samaria (in Sept. sometimes 2uxff») indecl., sometimes SiVt/xa, gen. -av, as in Joseph, and Euseb. ; once r^v '2'i.Ki)xa ttjv iv opet 'Ea-yT|, -^r, ij, {a-(pd^a>), slaughter : Acts viii. 32 (after Is. liii. 7) ; Trpoffara (T(j)ayijs, sheep destined _/br slaurjhter {Zech. xi. 4 ; Ps. xhii. (xliv.) 23), Ro. viii. 36 ; ^/ze'pa ., Attic (Tcf>drTo> : fut. a-(pa^o>, Rev. vi. 4 L T Tr WH ; 1 aor. ea-cf>a^a ; Pass., pf. ptcp. lacpaypevoi; 2 aor. f(T(j>dyr)v ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. very often for 12r\U, to slai/, slaughter, butcher: prop., apvlov, Rev. v. 6, 12; xiii. 8 ; nvd, to put to death by violence (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12 ; Rev. v. 9 ; vi. 4, 9 ; xviii. 24. KicpaXi) i(T<^aypfvrf els Bdvarov, mortally wounded [R.V. smi'HeH unto dealh~\, Rev. xiii. 3. [Comp. : Ka7-a-CT0a^a).] * o8p6s, vehement, vio- lent), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, exceedingly, greatly : placed after adjectives, Mt.ii. 10; Mk. xvi. 4 ; Lk.xviii. 23 ; Rev. xvi. 21 ; with verbs, Mt. xvii. 6, 23 ; xviii. 31 ; xix. 25; xxvi. 22; xxvii. 54; Acts vi. 7.* cr<|)o8pws, adv., f r. Hom. Od. 1 2, 1 24 down, exceedingly : Act?: xxvii. 18.* o-payia-a ; 1 aor. mid. ptcp. o-(^payicrd/jei/os ; Pass., pf. ptcp. ipayuTfievos ; 1 aor. iacppayladrjv ; [in 2 Co. xi. 10 Rec." gives the form cr(ppayL means trop. to hide (Deut. xxxii. 34), keep in silence, keep secret: ri, Rev. x. 4; xxii. 10, (rar dpaprlas, Dan. IX. 24 Theodot. ; ras dvoplas, .Job xiv. 1 7 ; roxis \6yovs a-iyrj, Stob. llor. 34, 9 p. 215 ; daipjiTa iroKKa (To^f) apa-y£s, -tSor, ij, (akin, apparently, to the verb pd(nra> or (jypdywpi), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for Dill'n, a seal; i.e. a. the seal placed upon books [cf. B.D. s.v. AYriting, sub fin.; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 2 7] : Rev. v. 1 ; Xiia-cu, Tas (r0p., ib. 2, 5 [Rec.]; dvol^at, ib. [oGLTTr WH], 9 ; vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12; viii. 1. b. a signet-ring: Rev. vii. 2. c. the inscription or impression made by a seal : Rev. ix. 4 (the name of God and Christ stamped upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. ii. 19. d. that by ichich any- thing is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a token or proof) : Ro. i\: 11 ; 1 Co. Lx. 2. [Cf. BB.DD. s. V. Seal.] * a-<{>vSp6v, -ov, TO, i. q. a-cpvpov, q. v. : Acts iii. 7 T WH. (Hesych. (T(l>v^pd' rj ':7€ptup£s, i. q. cnrupit, q. v., (cf. Lob. ad Phrj-n. p. 113 ; Curtius p. 503 ; [Steph. Thesaur. s. w.]), Lchm. in Mt. xvi. 10 and Jlk. viii. 8 ; WH imiformly (see their App. p. 148).* a-(t>vpdv, -oO, TO, fr. Hom. down, the ankle [A.V. ankle- bone'\ : Acts iii. 7 [T WH (r(j)v8p6v, q. v.].* crx«86v, (e;^irp(voi 6ia T^r m(TT«os, Eph. ii. 5 [cf. B. § 144, 25], 8; — as a thing still future, Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 13; [Mk. xiii. 13]; Ro.v. 10; 1 Co. iii. 15; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Jas. iv. 12; ttju ij/vxriv, Mk. viii. 35 ; Lk. ix. 24 ; ij/vxds, Lk. Lx. 56 Rec. ; to nvevpa, pass. 1 Co. V. 5 ; by a pregnant construction (see «is, C. 1 p. IBS'» bot.), TtKa fit Tr]V ^atriKfiau tov Kvplov alaviov, to save and transport into etc. 2 Tim. iv. IS (ij elo-f^eia Tj (TwCovaa fls Triv (arjv alaviov, 4 Alacc. XV. 2 ; many exx. awfia 611 cra)fj,a'^i,KOi<; of this constr. are given in Passow vol. ii. p. 1802"; [cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 2]). luiiv. : [Jlk. xvi. 16] ; Acts ii. 21 ; iv. 12; xi. 14 ; xiv. 9 ; xv. 1, [11] ; xvi. 30 sq. ; Ro. ix. 27; X. 9, 13; xi. 26; iTim. ii.4; iv. 16; Heb. vii. 25; Jas. ii. 14; diiaproiKois, 1 Tim. i. 15; ras i/fux"*' J'^^- '• 21 ; ot (Ta^ofifpot, Rev. xxi. 24 Rec. ; Lk. xiii. 23 ; Acts ii. 47 ; opp. to ot anoWviJievoi, 1 Co. i. 18 ; 2 Co. ii. 15, (see dn-dXXu/ii, 1 a. /3.). [CoMP. : 8ta-, eV o-aJfe».]* o-uiia, -Toj, TO, (appar. fr. eras ' enth-e ', [but cf. Curtius § 570 ; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ' to cover ', cf. Vanicek p. 1055 ; Curtius p. 696]), Sept for -ik;3, HMJ, etc.; nSaj (a corpse), also for Chald. Dty.i j a body; and 1. the body both of men and of animals (on the distinction be- tween it and crdp| see adp^, esp. 2 init. ; [cf. Dickson, St. Paul's use of ' Flesh ' and ' Spirit ', p. 247 sqq.]) ; a. as everyTvh. in Horn, (who calls the living body Se'/iar) and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or corpse: imiv. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG; [Mk. XV. 45 R G] ; Acts ix. 40 ; plur. Jn. xix. 31 ; ro o-. TWOS, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq. ; Mk. xv. 43 ; Lk. xxiii. 52, 55 ; Jn. xix. 38, 40; xx. 12 ; Jude 9 ; of the body of an animal offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14 ; Xum. xix. 3). b. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living body : — of animals, Jas. iii. 3 ; — of man : to crania, ah- sol., Lk. xi. 34; xii. 23; 1 Co. vi. 13, etc.; iv (rdfuiTi fhm, of earthly life with its troubles, Heb. xiii. 3 ; dis- tinguished fr. TO alfia, 1 Co. xi. 27 ; to o-m/ja and to. /xe'Xij of it, 1 Co. .xii. 12, 14-20; Jas. iii. 6 ; to fj.a the tem- ple of TO ayiov TTvevfia, 1 Co. vi. 19 ; the instrument of the soul, TO. dia Tov aafji. sc. irpaxBivra, 2 Co. v. 10 ; it is distinguished — fr. to TrwC/ia, in Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. v. 3 ; vi. 20 Rec; vii. 34; Jas. ii. 26, (4 Mace. xi. 11); — fr. 17 ip^uXij, in Mt. vi. 25 ; x. 28; Lk. xii. 22, (Sap. i. 4 ; viii. 19 sq. ; 2 Mace. vii. 37 ; xiv. 38; 4 Mace. i. 28, etc.) ; — fr. ij i/'vxT and to nvevjua together, in 1 Th. v. 23 (cf. Song of the Three, 63) ; aa>fia ^vxi'<6v and cr. nvevfiaTiKov are dis- tinguished, 1 Co. XV. 44 (see irveviiaTiKos, 1 and yjnixiKos, a.) ; TO (7. Tivos, Mt. V. 29 sq. ; Lk. xi. 34 ; Ro. iv. 19 ; viii. 23 [cf. W. 187 (176)], etc.; d raos toO o-ti/z. airov, the temple which was his body, Jn. ii. 21 ; plur., Ro. i. 24; 1 Co. vi. 15 ; Eph. v. 28 ; the gen. of the possessor is omitted where it is easily learned from the context, as 1 Co. V. 3 ; 2 Co. iv. 10 ; v. 8 ; Heb. x. 22 (23), etc. ; to (rafta rijr TaTretvtljaf cos fj/iav, the body of our humiliation (subjective gen.), i. e. which we wear in this servile and lowly human life, opp. to to a. TJjs So^rjs avrov (i. e. tov XpicTToO), the body which Christ has in his glorified state with God in heaven, Phil. iii. 21 ; Sid toC o- trojpaTi vpoiv, 1 Co. vi. 20 ; ^eyaXvvsiv tov XpidTov iv tco o-co/witi, f I'rc Sea fco^f. f cVe 8ia BavaTOv, Phil. i. 20 ; TrapaaTrja-at tcl o-aipaTa Bvaiav ^acrav . . . t<5 6(a (i. e. by bodily purity [cf . Mey. ad loc.]), Ro. xii. 1. c. Since ace. to ancient law in the case of slaves the body was the chief thing taken into account, it is a usage of later Grk. to call slaves simply (rapaTa ; once so in the N. T. : Rev. xviii. 13, where the Vulg. correctly translates by mancipia [A. ^ . spaces], (crco/iaTa tov oi/cov. Gen. xxxvi. 6 ; (rapaTa Koi KTr]VT], Tob. X. 10; 'louSaica crci/xaTo, 2 Macc. viii. 11 ; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given by Lob. ad Phryn. p. 378 sq. [add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.), Polyb. 1, 29, 7; 4, 38, 4, also 3, 17, 10 bis] ; the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ, said aaipaTa 8ovXa, o'lKenKa, etc.). 2. The name is transferred to the bodies of plants, 1 Co. xv. 37 sq., and of stars [cf. our 'heavenly bodies '2, hence Paul distinguishes between aiaixara iirovpavia, bodies celestial, i. e. the bodies of the heavenly luminaries .and of angels (see inovpdvios, 1), and a. iixiyeia, bodies terrestrial (i. e. bodies of men, animals, and plants), 1 Co. xv. 40 {airav awpa TTjs Tdv oXcot' (fivaeoys . . . to awp^a tov Koapov. Diod. 1, 11). 3. trop. a-apa is used of a (large or small) number of men closely united into one society, or family as it icere ; a social, ethical, mystical body ; so in the N. T. of the church : Ro. xii.5; iCo. x.l7;xii. 13; Eph. ii. 1 6 ; iv. 16 ; V.23; Col.i.l8; ii.l9; iii. 15; with toC XpiCTToO added, 1 Co. x. 16 ; xii. 27 ; Eph. i. 23 ; iv. 12; v. 30 ; Col. i. 24 ; of which spiritual body Christ is the head, Eph. iv. 15 sq. ; v. 23 ; Col. i. 18 ; ii. 19, who by the influence of his Spirit works in the church as the soul does in the body. iv a-apa k. ivirvevpa, Eph. iv. 4. 4. fj aKid and TO cTco^a are distinguished as the shadow and the thing itself wMch. casts the shadow: Col. ii. 17; crKiav aiTTjaopevos ^a(n\eias, rjs ^pjraaev iavTaTo aw/ia, Joseph, b. j. 2, 2, 5 ; [(Philo de confus. ling. § 37 ; Lcian. Her- mot. 79)]. v uapKixav kcu (rmpaTiKav iiriBvprnv, 'Teaching' etc. 1, 4]).* pOV€Q} Siiirarpos, -ov, 6, [cf. W. 103 (9")], Sopaler, a Chris- tian, one of Paul's companions: Acts XX. 4. [See 2v, the author of our salvation through Jesus Christ (on the Christian conception of 'to save', see crmfco, b. [and on the use of o-wttjp cf. Wostcott on 1 Jn. iv. 14]), 1 Tim. i. 1 ; ii. 3 ; Tit. i. 3 ; ii. 10 ; iii. 4 ; with 8(a 'irja-ov Xptcrrov added, Jude 25 [Rec. om. bia 'I. X.]; o-wTijp vavrav, 1 Tim. iv. 10 (cf. Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 5; xxvi. (xxvii.) 1; Is. xii. 2 ; xvii. 10; xlv. 15, 21 ; Mic. vii. 7, etc.) ; — to the Messiah, and Jesus as the Messiah, through whom God gives salvation : Lk. ii. 11 ; Acts v. 31 ; xiii. 23; o " '^■* inserts fipav)']. 11; ii. 20 ; lu. 18; 6 Kvpios koX crioTfjp, 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; craTTjp tov a-u>paros, univ. (' the savior ' i. e.) preserver of the body, i. e. of the church, Eph. v. 23 ((T(dttjp ovras dnavTav eoti (cai yeviruip, of God the preserver of the world, Aristot. de mundo, c. 6 p. 397", 20) ; o-wnjp is used of Christ as the giver of future salv.ation, on his return from heaven, Phil. iii. 20. [" The title is confined (with the exception of the writings of St Luke) to the later writ- ings of the X. T." (Westcott u. s.)] • Ti]pias Taim/s. in- struction concerning that salvation which John the Bap- tist foretold [cf. W. 237 (223)], Acts xiii. 2o ; to eiayye- \iov Trjs tTwrriptat ipav, Eph. i. 13; oSoj (TaTTjpias, Acts xvi. 1 7 ; Kepas o-aTTjpias (see Kfpas, b.), Lk. i. 69 ; fjpipa (TuTTjplas, the time in which the offer of salvation is made, 2 Co. vi. 2 (fr. Is. xlix. 8); Karfpyd^eaSai ttju iavrov (TtoTT^plav, I*hil. ii. 12; kXtjpovo^Iv auiTrjplau, Heb. i. 14; [6 dpx'jyos 'r^s tr«TT;pi'as. Heb. ii. 10] ; els Tr)piav, unto (the attainment of) salvation, Ro. [i. 16]; x. [1], 10; 1 I'et. ii. 2 [Rec. om.]. b. salvation as the present possession of all true Christians (see o-mfm, b.) : 2 Co. i. G ; vii. 1 ; Phil. i. 19; (TaTTjpla ev df^iaei apapTitov, Lk. i. 77; aaTrjpias Tvxiiv pira Su^rjs alaiviov, 2 Tim. ii. 10. c. future salvation, tho sum of benefits and blessings which Christians, redeemed from all earthly ills, will enjoy after the visible return of Christ from heaven in the consummated and eternal king- dom of God: Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Th. v. 9; Heb. ix. 28; 1 Pet. i. 5, 10; Rev. xii. 10; fKms (rarrfplas, 1 Th. v. 8; Kopl^eadai cr(0Tt]piav \|/^v;(a)i', 1 Pet. i. 9 ; ^ crcoTripla ra dtm Tipav (dat. of the possessor, sc. tariv [cf. B. § 129, 22]; cf. r\}?W]iJ nin-S, Ps. iii. 9), the salvation which is bestowed on us belongs to God, Rev. vii. 10;^ (rio-njpla . . . TOV 6(ov (gen. of the possessor [cf. B. § 132, 1 1, i. a.], for Rec. tm 6(io) ijpwv sc. iarlv, Rev. xix. 1. (Tragg., [licit.], Th'uc, "Xen., Plat., al. Sept. for ;•;;;•, r\};w; n;'riyj;i, na'Sa escape.) ' o-ioTt)pios, -OV, (o-aTTjp), fr. Aeschyl., Eur., Thuc. -(j>povEO}, -o) ; 1 aor. impv. (Tto(f>povf]aaT€ ; ((rM(f>p(ov, q. V.) ; fr. Tragg., Xen., Plat, down ; to be of sound ffcocppovi^o) 613 Tokafrroopia mind, L e. a. tu he in one's right mind : of one who has ceased Sat/ioi/ifeo-flm, Mk. v. 15; Lk. viii. 35; opp. to eKarijvm, 2 Co. v. 13, (the aa(ppovi>v and fiaveis are contrasted in Plat, de rep. i. p. 331 c. ; a-axfipovova-ai and jiaveiaai, Phaedr. p. 244 b. ; 6 iiffirjviiis . . . ea-acppo- VTi(\>poviapoi rives fi iierdvomi rdv vetov, Plut. mor. p. 712 c. i. e. quaest. conviv. 8, 3) : rrveiifia (Ta>(f>pomcrpoi, 2 Tim. i. 7, where see Huther; [but Huther, at least in his later edd., takes the word transitively, i. q. correction (R. V. disci- pline) ; see also Holtzmann ad loo.].* a-u(|>pdvus, (a-d>pa>v), adv., fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, with sound mind, soberly, temperately, discreetly : Tit. ii. 12 (.Sap. ix. 11).* (rupo(ruvi), -Tjs, fj, (ai)(^pa>v), fr. Horn, (where aaopii>v, -ov, (fr. trios, contr. aa>s [cf. pa>v, Taneiv6(i>pa>v, p.(ya}i.6(ppav), [fr. Horn, down] ; a. of sound mind, sane, in one's senses, (see a-atppovia, a. and aa)(\>po(rimj, a.). b. curbing one's desires and impulses, self-con- trolled, temperate, [R.V. soberminded'], {{i-nidvpei 6 o-v hv Set Koi as 8ei Ka\ ore, Aristot. eth. Xic. 3, 15 fin.], sec craxppocrvvrj, b.) : 1 Tim. iii. 2 ; Tit. i. 8 ; ii. 2, 5.* [T, T : on the receding of tt in the vocabulary of the N. T. before trar, see under 2, pa,c.']. 4. the post, rank, or position which one holds in civil or other affairs ; and since this position generally depends on one's talents, experience, resources, rd^is becomes equiv. to character, fashion, fjnality, style, (2 Mace. ix. 18; i. 19; ov yap lOTopias, dWd KOvpfaKTJs XaXiaj f/xoi 8oKov(ri rd^iv fx^'"' Polyb. 3, 20, 5) : koto ttjv rd^tv (for which in vii. 15 we have Kara t^i/ o/joiottjto) MfXp^io-fStK, after the manner of the priesthood [A. V. orderl of Mclchizcdek (ace. to the Sei)t. of Ps. cix. (ex.) 5 "n^an-^i"), Ileb. v. 6, 10; vi. 20; vii. 11, 17, 21 (where' T Tr WH om. the phrase).* Toircivcis, -ly -(if. fr. [I'ind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down, Sept. for 'W;, IJi;, ''SiV, etc., lou; i. e. a. prop, not rising far from the ground : Ezek. xvil. 24. b. nietaph. a. as to condition, loivly, of low degree : with a subst. Jas. i. I) ; substantively oi Taneivol, opj). to Swdarai, Lk. i. 52; i. q. brought low with grief depressed, (Sir. xxv. 23), 2 Co. vii. 6. Neut. ra Tairewd, Ro. xii. 16 (on which see crvvaTrdyai, fin.). p. lowly in spirit, hum- ble: opp. to vnepTipoo-vvT], -^y, rj, {ranfiuutppav ; opp. to /xcyoAo- (ppoavvrj, v\j/ri\o({)potTvvTj, [cf. AV. 99 (94)]), the having a limnble opinion of one's self; a deep sense of one's (jnoral) littleness; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind; (Vulg. humilitas, Luth. Demuth) : Acts xx. 19 ; Eph. iv. 2 ; Phil. ii. 3 ; Col. iii. 12; 1 Pet. v. 5; used of an affected and ostentatious Inmiility in Col. ii. 18, 23. (The word occurs neither in the O. T., nor in prof. auth. — [but in .Joseph. b. j. 4, 9, 2 in the sense of pusillanimity ; also Epictet. diss. 3, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See Trench, N. T. Syn. § xiii. ; Bp. Lghlft. on Phil. 1. c. ; Zezschicilz, Profangra- citlit, U.S.W., pp. 20, 62 ; W. 26].) * TOTr£ivpov€s. (Prov. xxix. 23 ; in a bad sense, pusillanimous, mean-spirited, piKpovs 17 rixi Ka\ nfpiSeds troifi Kai Tanftvofjipovas, Plut. de Alex. fort. 2, 4 ; [de tramiuill. animi 17. See W. §34, 3 and reflf. s. v. rairei- VOfppO(TVtrtj, fin.].) * Tairtivou, -S) ; fut. TajreiKaxra) ; 1 aor. iTairflvwaa ; Pass., pres. ramivoZpai ; 1 aor. sTaTreivojOrjv ; 1 fut. TaTretvcaBrj- a^opai; (ranftvos); to make lou; bring low, (Vulg. hu- milio) ; a. prop. : opos, ^ovvov, i. e. to level, reduce to a plain, pass. Lk. iii. 5 fr. Is. xl. 4. b. metaph. to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circum- stances ; i. e. a. to assign a lower rank or place to ; to abase ; nvd, pass., to be ranked belojo others tvho are hon- ored or rewarded [R. V. to hiimbUf\ : INIt. xxiii. 12 ; Lk. xiv. 11; xviii. 14. p. TaTTdvoi ipavTov, to humble or abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; in pass, of one who submits to want, Phil. iv. 12; eavrov, of one who stoops to the condition of a servant, Phil. ii. 8. c. to lower, depress, [Eng. humblel : nvd, one's soul, bring down one's pride ; ipavrov, to have a modest opinion of one's self, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid of all haughtiness, ]Mt. xviii. 4; xxiii. 12; Lk. xiv. 11; xviii. 14 ; pass, raneivovpai ivdnriov Kvpiov (see ivoi-awv, 2 b. fin.) in a mid. sense [B. 52 (46)], to confess and de- plore one's sjiiritual littleness and unworthiness, .las. iv. 10 (in the same sense raneivovv ttjv ■^vxh" avTov, Sir. ii. TaTr€ivcoai<; 615 ravTa 17; vii. 17; Sept. for m32 T]iy, he afflicted his soul, of persons fasting, Lev. xvi. 29, 31 ; xxiii. 27, 32; Is. Iviii. 3, 5, 10 ; TTju ylrvxT]v Ttvos, to disturb, distress, the soul of one, Protev. Jac. c. 2. 13. 15 [rather, to humiliate; see the passages]) ; vno rr^v x"P" ''■ 6eov, to submit one's self in a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Pet. V. 6 (cf. Gen. xvi. 9) ; i. q. to put to the blush, 2 Co. xii. 21. ([Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., Diod., Plut. ; Sept. for n:i|, hSf-d and Viinn, XIil, iy:pn, etc.) [See reff. s.v. Taireivwcris, -fwf, ^, {raiTetvoai), lowness, low estate, [/iu- miliationl : Lk. i. 48 ; Acts viii. 33 (fr. Is. liii. 8) ; Phil, iii. 21 (on which see aafia, 1 b.) ; metaph. spiritual abase- ment, leading one to perceive and lament his (moral) littleness and guilt, Jas. i. 10, see Kern ad loc. (In va- rious senses, by Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut. ; Sept. for 'j;;.) [See reff. s. v. ra-n-ftvocppoa-vpri.'] * Tapdo-o-u; impf . eVapao-aov ; 1 aor. eVdpa^a; Pass., pres. jmpv. 3 pers. sing. Tapaa-a-ia6a> ; impf. irapatTcroiirfv ; pf. TiTapayp.at. ; 1 aor. iTapax6r)v ; fr. Hom. down ; to agitate, trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and fro) ; a. prop. : to uSmp, Jn. v. 4 [R L], 7, (Ezek. xxxii. 2 ; toc ttovtov, Hom. Od. 5, 291 ; to jrcXayos, Eur. Tro. 88; tov TroTa/iov, Aesop, fab. 87 (25)). b. trop. to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of mind, disturb his equanimity ; to disquiet, make restless, {Sept. for '7713, etc. ; pass. Tapaa-a-o^iai for TJ1, to be stirred up, irritated) ; o. to stir up : tok li^ov. Acts xvii. 8 ; [Tois oxXour, Acts xvii. 13 L T Tr WH]. p. lo trouble : nvd, to strike one's spirit with fear or dread, pass., Mt. ii. 3 ; xiv. 2G ; Mk. vi. 50 ; Lk. i. 12 ; [xxiv. 38]; 1 Pet. iii. 14; rapatTcerai r) xapbla, Jn. xiv. 1, 27; to affect with great pain or sorrow : iavTov (cf. our to trouble one's self), Jn. xi. 33 [A. V. icas troubled (some understand the word here of bodily agitation)] (treavTov fii) Tapaacrc, Antonin. 4, 26) ; TerapaKTm q ^vx^l, Jn. xii. 27 (Ps. vi. 4) ; cTapd^dq tw nvevpaTi, Jn. xiii. 21. y. to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of one by suggesting scruples or doubts, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 1 7) : Gal i. 7 ; v. 10 ; riva \6yois. Acts xv. 24. [CoMP. : Sta-. €K- rapd.~\ *^ rapaxi], -ijs, q, {Tapdatra), fr. [Find.], Ildt. down, dis- turbance, commotion : prop. toC vSaror, Jn. v. 4 [R L] ; metaph. a tumult, sedition : in plur. Mk. xiii. 8 R G.* rdpaxos, -ov, 6, (Tapdcrcra), commotion, stir (of mind) : Acts xii. 18 ; tumult [A. V. stir']. Acts xix. 23. (Sept. ; Xen., Plut., Lcian.) * Tapo-eis, -COS, 6, (Tapo-dr, q. v.), belonging to Tarsus, j)f Tarsus : Acts ix. 11 ; xxi. 39.* Tttpo-ds, -ov, q, [on its accent cf. Chaniljer §§317, Six], in prof, autli. also Tapaol, -oiv, at, Tarsus, a mari- tiine city, the capital of Cilicia during the Roman period (Joseph, antt. 1, 6, 1), situated on the river Cydnus, -which divided it into two parts (hence the plural Tapcrol). It was not only large and populous, but also renowned for its Greek learning and its numerous schools of phil- osophers (Strab. 14 p. 673 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 303 sq.]). Moreover it was a free city (Plin. 5, 22), and exempt alike from the jurisdiction of a Roman governor, and the maintenance of a Roman garrison; although it was not a Roman ' colony '. It had received its free- dom from Antony (App. b. civ. 5, 7) on the condition that it might retain its own magistrates and laws, but should acknowledge the Roman sovereignty and furnish auxiliaries in time of war. It is now called Tarso or Tersus, a mean city of some 6000 inhabitants [others set the number very much higher]. It was the birth- place of the apostle Paul : Acts ix. 30 ; xi. 25 ; xxii. 3. [BB.DD. s. V. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq. cf. 2.] * TapTap6u, -o) : 1 aor. ptcp. Taprapaxra! ; (rdprapos, the name of a subterranean region, doleful and dark, re- garded by the ancient Greeks as the abode of the wicked dead, where they suffer punishment for their evil deeds ; it answers to the Gehenna of the Jews, see ye- evva); to thrust down to Tartarus (sometimes in the Scho- liasts) [cf. W. 25 (24) n.] ; to hold captive in Tartarus : TWO. a-(ipais [q. v.] (6ij 616 re ra^r\, -^9, 17, (ffaTrru)), fr. IlJt. down ; Sept. several tiiiu's for iTJOp ami l^p, burial: Mt. xxvii. 7.' Td<}>os, -ov, 6, {Bonrra) ; 1. burial (so from Horn, down). 2. a i/race, sepulchre, (so fr. lies, down) : Mt. .\xiii. 27, 29 ; xxvii. 61, 64, 66 ; xxviii. 1 ; in a com- parison : rdipos avcayfihos o 'Xapvy^ airav, their speech threatens destruction to others, it is death to some one whenever they open their mouth, Ro. iii. 13. Sept. for 15p, and sometimes for n^Op.* rdxa, (raxis), adv. ; 1. haslili/, quickbj, sonn, (so fr. Horn. down). 2. as often in Grk. writ. fr. [lies., Aesehyl.], lldt. down, perhaps, peradventure : Ro. v. 7; Philem. 15.* [rdxtiov, WII for Tax^ov, q. v. ; and cf. s. v. ei, t.] Tax6«s, (Taxis), adv., [fr. Iloni. down], quickly, shortly. Lk. xiv. -21; .\vi. <;; Jn. xi. 31 ; iCo. iv. 19; Gal. i. 6 ; Pliil. ii. 1 9, 24 ; 2 Tim. iv. 9 ; with the added suggestion of inconsiderateness [haslili/'] : 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Tim. v. 22.* Taxiv6s, -17, -6v, fr. Theocr. down, swift, quick : of events soon to come or just impending, 2 Pet. i. 14 ; ii. 1, (Is. lix. 7 ; Sap. xiii. 2 ; Sir. xviii. 26).* rdxiov [WII Taxeiov ; see their App. p. 154 and cf. ft, «], (neut. of the eompar. Taxiakri re Ka'i fi((iaiav, Heb. vi. 19; add, Acts i. 1 ; ii. 9 sq. ; ix. 29 ; xiv. 1,5; XV. 9 ; xviii. 4 ; xix. 10, 17; xx. 21 ; xxi. 12; xxvi. 22; Ro. i. 12, 14, 16; iii. 9; x. 12; iCo. i. 2[RG], 24, 30; Heb. iv. 12" Rec., 12"; v. 1 [here Lom. TrWH br. Te'], 7, 14; viii. 3; ix. 9, 19; x. 33; xi. 32; Jas. iii. 7; Te' is annexed to the article, which is — either repeated after the «at before the following noun, Lk. ii. 16 ; xxiii. 12; Jn. ii. 15; Acts v. 24 ; viii. 38; .xvii. 10; xviii. 5 ; xxi. 25 [R G] ; xxvi. 30 ; — or (less commonly) omitted, Acts i. 13 : xiii. 1 ; [xxi. 25 L T Tr WH] ; Ro. i. 20. Te' is annexed to a preposition, which after the following Kai is — either repeated. Acts i. 8 where L om. Tr br. the repeated iv ; Phil. i. 7 [R om. L br. the second eV] ; — Te(.%09 617 reKvov or omitted, Acts x. 39 [Trtxt.WH]; xxv. 23; xxviii. 23. ri is annexed to a relative pronoun, although it does not belong so much to the pronoun as to the sub- stantive connected with it. Acts xxvi. 22. it is anne.\ed to an adverb, tn te koI, [cind morcovej-J, Acts xxi. 28. When more than two members are joined together, the first two are joined by re xai or re . . . Kal, the rest by Kal: Lk. xii. 4.5; Acts i. 13; v. 24[RG]; x.xi. 25 ; 1 Co. i. 30 ; Heb. ii. 4. b. re . . . Kal connect whole sen- tences (each of which has its own finite verb, or its own subject) : Acts ii. 3 sq. 11 G ; xvi. 20 R G ; re . . . Kal . . . Kal, Acts xxi. 30. 3. re . . . fie are so combined that T6 adds a sentence to what has been previously said, and hi introduces something ojjposed to this added sentence [W. 439 (409)] : Acts xix. 2 L T Tr WII ; 3 R G L Tr txt. WH txt. ; xxii. 2vS R G. 4. re . . . re pre- sents as parallel (or coordinate) the ideas or sen- tences which it connects, as ...so (cf. Kiihner § 520 ; [Jelf § 754, 3 ; W. § 53,4] ; on the Lat. que . . . que cf. Plerzog on Sallust, Cat. 9, 3): Acts ii. 40 ; xvi. 11 sq. R G ; xvii. 4 ; xxvi. 1 L T Tr WH txt., 1 6 ; Heb. vi. 2 [Tr br. WH txt. om. second re], (Sap. vii. 13 ; xv. 7) ; re Kal . . . re, Acts ix. 15 [L T Tr WH] ; re koI . . . re . . . Kal, Acts xxvi. 20 [L T Tr WH]. clVe . . . ehe, see el, HI. 15 ; iav re . . . iav re, see iav, I. 3 e. fi'Ji'e • • • fill's • • • Te, neither . . . nor . . . and. Acts xxvii. 20 (Xen. an. 4, 4, 6). 5. re yap (which began to be frequent fr. Aristot. down), Lat. namque, etenbn, for also, for indeed, [W. 448 (417)], are so used that the former particle connects, the latter gives the reason : Ro. i. 20 (so that in 27 we must read 6/ioi'mr St Kal [with LTrmrg.], sec in 6 below) ; vii. 7 (4 Mace. v. 22) ; re yap . . . Kal, Heb. ii. 11 ; iav re yap . . . iav re, for whether . . . or (whether), Ro. xiv. 8 ; edv re yap Kal, for although (Lat. namque eliamsi), 2 Co. x. 8 [R(i]. 6. The reading often varies in codd. and edd. between ri and he; as, Mt. xxiii. 6; Actsiii. 10; iv. 14; viii. 1, 6 ; i.\. 24; xiii. 46; Judc 6, etc. [see in 1 b. above]. In Ro. i. 27, following Lchm. [Trmrg.], we ought certainly to read opolas he Kal; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 77; [B. 361 (30;i) n.]. 7. As respects Position (cf. Kiihner § 520 Anm. 5; W. 559 sq. (520)), re is properly annexed to that word or idea which is placed in parallelism with another (as 'lovSawl re KOI "EXXijvff) ; but writers also take considerable lib- erty in placing it, and readily subjoin it to an article or a preposition; for examples see in 2 a. above. T€txos, -ovs, TO, [cf. diyydva; allied with it are Eng. 'dike' and 'ditch'], fr. Horn, down, Sept. very freq. for niDin ' wall ' ; the wall round a citij, town-wall : Acts ix. 25 ; 2 Co. xi. 33 ; Heb. xi. 30 ; Rev. xxi. 12, 14 sq., 1 7-19.» TEKiiTJpiov, -ov, TO, (fr. reKp,alpa) to show or prove by sure signs ; fr. rcK/iap a sign), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, that from which something is surely and plainly known ; an induhitable evidence, a proof, (Hesych. reKixrjptov (TTjfieiov aKr)dis) : Acts i. 3 (Sap. v. 11 ; 3 Mace. iii. 24).* T€:las, the votaries of wisdom, those whose souls have, as it were, been nurtured and moulded by wisdom : Jit. xi. 19 (where T Trt.xt. WII have hastily adopted epyav for T(Kva>v; cf. Keim ii. p. 3i!9 [Eng. trans, iv. p. 43 sq. ; per contra, see Tdf.'s note and ]VII. App. ad loc.]) ; Lk. vii. 35 ; TfKva irroKo^s, those actuated by a desire to obey, obedient, 1 Pet. i. 14 ; tov (jtaros, both illumined by the light and loving the light, Eph. v. 8. y. Karapas TiKva, exposed to cursing, 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; T^ropy^y, doomed to God's wrath or penalty, Eph. ii. 3 ; cf. Steiger on 1 Pet. i. 14; W. 238 (223) ;'[B. IGl (141)]. In the same •way (Kyovos is used sometimes in Grk. writ. ; as, exy. adiKias. 8(iXias, Plat. legg. 3 p. 691 c. ; 10 p. 901 e. [SvN. TfKvov, vi6s: T. ami vl. while concurring iu poiut- ing to ])ar™tage, differ in that t. gives ])roniinence to the physical and outward aspects, vi. to tlie inward, etliical, legal. Cf. b. y. above; vihs tov 0iov, tin.; 7ro7s, fin. aud reff. (esp. that to Hiihne).] T£Kvo-Tpo(|>e'u, -5 : 1 aor. eVfKVOTpo^r/tra ; (TeKvoTpu(pns, and this frcjni tUvov and Tpe(f>a>) ; to bring up children : 1 Tim. V. 10. {(\)ipei vba>p, Urav T€KvoTpocj)fj, sc. the bee, Aristot. h. a. 9, 40 [27], 14 [p. 625^ 20].)'* TtKTMV, -OK09, o, (rficetv, TiKTo) ; akiu to rixyriy '"fvpfo), hence prop. ' begetter' [Curtius § 235]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for C/^n ; a worker in wood, a carpenter : Jit. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3 [see WII. App. on the latter pass.].* Tt'Xtios, -a, -ov, (tcXos), in classic (irk. sometimes also -09, -ov, (cf. W. § 11, 1), fr. Horn, down, Sept. several times for dSe', DTDJ?, etc.; prop, brought to its end, finished; wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect : tpyov, Jas. i. 4 ; ^ dydirr}, 1 Jn. iv. 1 8 ; 6 vopos, Jas. i. 25 ; l^Sayprjpa, Jas. i. 1 7] ; reXeioTepa ctkijz/ij, a more perfect (excellent) tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11 ; to reXetov, substantively, that which is perfect: consummate human integrity and vir- tue, Ro. xii. 2 [al. take it here as an adj. belonging to SeXripa] ; the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10 ; of men, full-grown, adult ; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl. Ag. 1504 ; Plat. legg. 11 p. 929c.) : Heb. v. 14 ; tA. avi)p (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4sq.; 8, 7, 6 ; Philo de cherub. §32; opp. to -nraibiov vriniov, I'olyb. 5, 29, 2 ; for other exx. fr. other auth. see BleeL; Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 133 sq.), nc'x/" . . . €if 'wSpa TfXtwv, until we rise to the same level of knowledge which we ascribe to a full-grown man, until we can l)e likened to a full-grown man, Eph. iv. 13 (opp. to vijniot, 14); TtXctot rais (ppfcrl (o])p. to TratSt'a and vrjma^nvres Tali (j)p(cri), 1 Co. xiv. 20 [here A. V. jhch] ; absol. o'l Tc'Xftot, the perfect, i. e. the more intelligent, ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Co. ii. G [R.V. mrg. full-grown^ (opP- to v^n-iot (v Xpicrrw, iii. 1 ; in sinij)le opp. to vfjmos, Philo de legg. allcg. i. § 30 ; for ["30, opp. to pav6up(i)v, 1 Chr. xxv. 8; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 28; Phil. iii. 15]); of mind and character, one who has reached the projjer height of virtue aud integrity : Jit. V. 48 ; xix. 21 ; Phil. iii. 15 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. u. s.] ; Jas. i. 4; in an absol. sense, of God: Mt. v. 48 ; reXetos avTjp, Jas. iii. 2 (t€X. SUaios, Sir. xliv. 17) ; as respects understanding and goodness. Col. iv. 12; t/X. SvBpanros iv Xpicrra, Col. i. 28 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. u. s. Sy.\. see oXoVXrjpof, and Trench § xxii.].* TtXeioTqs, -TjTos, 7], (rf Xfior, (j. v.), perfection ; a. i. o. the state (f the more inlelUgent : Ilel). vi. 1 [here R.V. mrg. full growth']. h. perfection : {rtji aydnrjs, C\em. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 1 [where see Ilarnack]) ; absol. moral and spiritual perfection, Col. iii. 14 [A.V. perfectness'], on which pass, see o-wSto-fios, 1. (Prov. xi. 3 Alex. ; Judg. ix. 16, 19 ; Sap. vi. 16 ; xii. 1 7 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 5 ; Plat. deff. p. 412 b. d. ; [Aristot. phys. 3, 6 p. 207*, 21 ; 8, 7 p. 2G1*, 36]; Antonin. 5, 15.) [Cf. reff. s. v. TiXciot, and B. Ilartung, Der Begriff der TfXeioTtjs im N. T. (4to. Leipz. 1881).]* Te\ei6iD (in prof. auth. also TfXfdw, which Ildt. uses everywhere [and which is " the ])revailing form in Attic prose" (L. and S.)] ; other writ, use both forms indif- ferently), -w: 1 aor. eVeXei'ucra ; pf. TereXfiWa ; Pass, (or Mid.), pres. reXcioO/xat; pf. TfTfX€ia)/iat ; 1 aor. crcXf ta>^j^i/ ; (rcXf lof ) ; fr. Hdt., Soph., Thuc, and Plat, down ; equiv. to Tf'Xeioi/ jToti, to make perfect or complete ; 1. to carry through completely ; to accomplish, finish, bring to an end : tov bp6p.ov. Acts .xx. 24 ; tSi (pyov, Jn. iv. 34 ; v. 36 ; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi. 16 ; tov oIkov, 2 Chr. viii. 16) ; ras r]p(pat, Lk. ii. 43 ; raid. [pres. cf. B. 38 (33)] T(\(iovpat, 1 finish, complete, what teas given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32 [some (so A. V.) take it here as pass., / am perfected (understanding it of his death; cf. Ellicott, Life of our Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n.i ; Keim ii. 615 n.')]. 2. to complete (perfect), i. e. add what is yet wanting in order to render a thing full: r^v ayanrjv, pass., 1 Jn. ii. 5; iv. 1 2, 1 7 ; Tj Svvapls fiov iv daBevda TfXetoiJTat, my ]>ower shows itself most ellicacious in them that are weak, 2 Co. xii. 9 R (x ; ex tHiv 'ipyav rj Tricrrts eT(\eii>6r), by works faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, Jas. ii. 22 ; Tf TcXf I'ojTai tis iv ti; dydit}), one has been made perfect iu love, his love lacks nothing, 1 Jn. iv. 18 (oi TtKeiat- 6evT(s iv dydirr), Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 3 ; [reXdixTat ttjv iKKXrjcriav aov iv tt] dydirrj aov, 'Teaching' etc. 10, 5]); Iva Sia-i TfTeXfiu/icVoi eit iv, that they may be perfected into one, i. e. perfectly united, Jn. xvii. 23. rivd, to bring one's character to perfection : fjSr) TfTcXci'w/iat, I am already made perfect, Phil. iii. 12 (Sap. iv. 13 ; a> ^vxh ■ ■ ■ o'""" TfXf icoSflf KOI ^palieiiMiv Kal <7Te(pdvav d^iad^s, Philo de legg. TeXeiw? 619 re'Xos alleg. 3, 23 ; ^vx'l ■ ■ • TeXeiadelrra iv dperwv aBKois Koi iirl TOP opou i(j)iKoiJ,(vr] tov koXov, id. tie somn. 1, 21 ; i. q. to be found perfect, Sir. .xxxiv. (xx.xi.) 10). 3. to bring to the end (goal) proposed: oiidev, Heb. vii. 19; Tivd, [^0 pierfecl or consummate'] i.e. to raise to the state hejitting him : so of God exalting Jesus to the state of heavenly majesty, Heb. ii. 10; in pass., Heb. v. 9; vii. 28 ; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, pass., Heb. xi. 40 ; xii. 23, ([Act. Petr. et Paul. § 88, ed. Tdf. p. 39; Act. Barnab. § 9, id. p. 68 ; cf. 'Teaching' etc. 1(), 2]; with fxaprvpla added, of the death of the apost. Paul, Euseb. li. e. 2, 22, 2 [cf. Heinichen's note on 7, 15, 5]) ; to make one meet for future entrance on this state and give him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Heb. X. 1, 14 ; Tiva Kara crvvelSricriv, Heb. ix. 9 ; cf. Bleek; Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 297 sqq. ; C. R. Kostlin, Lehrbegriff des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843) p. 421 sqq. ; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Ilebr.-Br., § 42, p. 340 sqq. ; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. p. 72 sqq. J. 4. to accomplish, i. e. bring to a close or ftil- Jilment by event : tjjk ypa(firiv, the prophecies of Scripture, pass., Jn. xix. 28 [cf. W. 459 (428) ; B. § 151, 20].* reXeCus, (reXctos), adv., perfectly, completely : 1 Pet. i. 13. [Plat., Isocr., Aristot., etc. ; cf. Vf. 463 (431).] * TcXeCuo-is, -€0)5, r), (reKtioai), a coinpleting, perfecting ; a. fulfilment, accomplishment ; the event which verifies a promise (see TfAeioco, 4) : Lk. i. 45 [Judith x. 9 ; Philo de vit. Moys. iii. § 39]. b. consummation, perfection, (see TeXfido), 3) : Heb. vii. 11. (In various senses in Ai'istot., Theophr., Diod.) [Cf. reff. s. v. rcXeio'io, 3.] * Te\6iii)TT|s, -oO, 6, (rfXeioo)), (Vulg. consummator), a per- ficter : i-^r nlcrTeais, one who has in his own person raised faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs no- where else.* T€X€(r4>opeii), -a> ; (rfXfa^opos, fr. Tc'Xor and (pepai) ; to bring to (perfection or) maturity (sc. Kapnovi) : Lk. viii. 14. (Used alike of fruits, and of pregnant women and animals bringing their young to maturity ; 4 JIacc. xiii. 19; Theophr., Geop., Philo, Diod., Joseph., al. ; [Ps. Ixiv. (Ixv.) 10 Symm.].) * TeXeuTao), -m ; 1 aor. eTfXfun/o-a ; pf. ptcp. TerfXfUTJ/icmt (Jn. xi. 39 L T Tr AVH) ; (reXeur^) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. trans, to finish ; to bring to an end or close : rbv ^iov, to finish life, to die, often fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down. 2. intrans. [cf. B. §130, 4] to have an end or close, come to an end ; hence to die, very often so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down (Sept. for niD), and always in the N. T. : Mt. ii. 19 ; ix. 18 ; xxii. 25 ; Mk. ix. 44, 46 [(these two vss. T AVHom.Trbr.)], 48; Lk.vii. 2; Jn. xi.39 L TTrWH; Acts ii. 29 ; vii. 15; Heb. xi. 22; Bavdrco TeXevrdro) (in imitation of the Hebr. nrDV m'O, Ex. xxi. 12, 15-17, etc.), [A. V. let him die the death i. e.] let him surely die [W. 339 (319) ; B. § 133, 22], Mt. xv. 4; Mk. vii. 10.* r(K(VT-f\, -fjs, T), (rfXem), end [see rt Xor, 1 a. init.] ; t?ie end of life, decease, death : ]\It. ii. 15 (and often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Thuc. down ; Sept. for ni'D ; with /3ioToio added, Hom. E. 7, 104; roC/3i'ou, Hdt. 1, 30, and often in Attic writ.).* TtXe'w, -c5; 1 aor. eVeXeaa [cf. W. § 13, 3 c.] ; pf. TeriXcKa (2 Tim. iv. 7) ; Pass., pros. 3 pers. sing. TcXeirut (2 Co. xii. 9 L TTrWH); pf. TcTeXctr/xat ; 1 aor. eVfXeVfli/i' ; 1 f ut. TfXfo-^ijo-o/uai ; (re'Xos); fr. Hom. down; 1. to bring to a close, tojinish, to end : (ttj, i>a.ss.,passed, finished. Rev. XX. 3, 5, 7, ([so fr. Hom. and Hes. down ; Aristot. h. a. 7, 1 init. p. 580", 14 eV toIs frecri toIs Sis irrrd rere- Xeir/iecott] ; rpimi/ rekovfiivoiu fj/iepav, Lcian. Alex. 38) ; Toi/ Spo/xoi/ (Horn. II. 23, 373, 7C8; Soph. Electr. 726), 2 Tim. iv. 7 ; tovs X6yovs, jNIt. vii. 28 L T Tr WH ; xLx. 1 ; xxvi. 1 ; rar irapa/SoXdr, Mt. xiii. 53 ; [axpi TeXeadacriv ai irXrjyai, Rev. xv. 8] ; a rare use is TeXeiv ras noXeis, i. e. your llight or journey through the cities [R. V. ye shall not have gone through the cities, etc.], Mt. x. 23 (similar are dvieiv tovs toitovs, Polyb. 5, 8, 1 ; to cXtj, 3,79,5; con- summare Italiam, Flor. 1, (13) 18, 1 ; explere urbes, Ti- buU. 1, 4, 69 ; conficere aequor immensum, Verg. Georg. 2, 541 ; also xii. signorum orbem, Cic. nat. deor. 2, 20, 52) ; with the ptcp. of a verb (like iipxpp.ai, navo/jim, cf. W. §45, 4 a.; B. § 144, 14), Mt. xi. 1. 2. lo per- form, execute, complete, fulfil, (so that the thing done corresponds to what has been said, the order, command, etc.), i. e. o. with special reference to the sub- ject-matter, to carry out the contents of a command : TOV v6p.ov, Ro. ii. 27 [cf. W. 134 (127)]; Jas. ii. 8 ; riji/ imBvfiiav (i. e. to ijndvfioiiMevou), Gal. V. 16. p. with reference also to the for ra, to do Just as commanded, and generally involving a notion of time, to perform the last act which completes a process, to accomplish, fulfil: awavra {iravTa) to Kara vofiov, Lk. ii. 39 ; t^i/ fiaprvplav, the duty of testifying, Rev. xi. 7 ; to fiva-TTjpcov, pass. Rev. X. 7 [cf. W. 277 (260)] ; to /3affTt(7/ia, pass. Lk. xii. 50 ; ndina, pass. Jn. xix. 28 [the distinction betw. TtXiat and TiXfioa may be seen in this vs.] ; Tois Xoyovs (to prjpaTa) to£) 6(0v, pass. Rev. xvii. 1 7 ; atravTa (ndvra) ra yeypap-piva, Acts xiii. 29 ; pass., Lk. xviii. 31 [see ypdcjjio, 2 c.]; with eV fp.oi (in me) added, in my experience, Lk. xxii. 37 ; ev nX-qyais, in the infliction of calamities. Rev. XV. 1 ; TETeXeo-Tat, [A. V. // is finished] everything has been accomplished which by the appointment of the Father as revealed in the Scriptures I must do and bear, Jn. xix. 30. i. q. «Xf idu, 2, q. v. (made perfect) : 2 Co. xii. 9 L T Tr WH. 3. to pay : Ta hibpaxp-a, Mt. xvii. 24 ; (popovs, Ro. xiii. 6, (rov (popov, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 123 a.; to TeXrj, often in Attic writ.). [Comp. : djro-, 8ia-, «-, eVi-, a-vv- TeXeu.] * Tt'Xos, -ovi, TO, [cf. Curtius § 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept. mostly for ]'p; 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ. always of the end of some act or state, but not of the end of a period of t i m o, which they call TtXf uTij ; in the Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is everywhere called iripas) : t^s ^a(TtXeias, Lk. i. 33 ; ^arjs, Heb. vii. 3 ; tov Karapyovpevov, 2 Co. iii. 13 ; to TeXr) twv alaivav, 1 Co. x. 11 (Tf'Xor tmv fipfpHv, Neh. xiii. G; tqiv eVra eViv, 2 K. viii. 3 ; dpxrj Ko"' Tt'Xos Kal petrori}! jfpdfcoi', T^09 620 reacapaKovTaTecrcrape'} Sap. vii. 18) ; i. q. he who puts an end to: rfKos vofiov XpioTof, Christ has bi'0U5;ht the hiw to an end (naalv toTtv dpdpoiTTOis T(\os ToiJ ^iuv BdvaTos, Dem. 1306, 25), Ivo. X. 4 ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc., vol. ii. p. 377 sq. navrcov TO Te'Xof, the end of all things (i. e. of the present order of things), 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; also in the phrases eas t/Xous, 1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co. i. 13 ; /xe'xp' reXovs, Ileb. iii. 6 [Tr mrg. WU br. the cl.], 14; S^pi reXout, Ilcb. vi. 14; Rev. ii. 26. what ' end ' is intended the reader must deter- mine by the context ; thus, to tcXos denotes the end of the Jlessianic pangs (dolores Mcssiae ; see oiSlv) in JNIt. xxiv. 6, 14, (opp. to dpxri oiSlvaiv) •■, Mk. xiii. 7 (cf. 9); Lk. .\xi. 9 ; TO Tf'Xoy in 1 Co. xv. 24 denotes either the end of the eschatological events, or the end of the res- urrection i. e. the last or third act of the resurrection (to include those who had not belonged to the number of oi Tov XpiOToO €v TT] 7rapov(TLa avTov), 1 Co. XV. 24 cf. 23 ; see De Wette ad loc. ; Wcizel in the Thcol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1836, p. 978; Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wis- sensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 388 sqq. ; [yet cf. Heinrici ia Meyer (6te Au(l.) ad loc.]. eh reXos, — to the very etui appointed for these evils, Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 13; Mk. xiii. 13 ; also at the end, at last, finally, Lk. xviii. 5 (Vulg. in nuvissimo) [i. e. lest at last hi/ her coming she wear me out ; but al. take it i. q. Hebr. nsjS (cf. Job xiv. 20 etc. see Trommius) and connect it with the ptcp., lest hi/ her coming to the last i.e. continuallij; see vnamd^ai, sub fin.] ; .In. xiii. 1 [al. to the uttermost, completely (cf. our to the very last) ; see Westcott, and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aufl.) ad loc. ; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 29], cf. dyanda>, sub fin., (Xen. oec. 17, 10; Hes. opp. 292; Hdt. 3,40; 9,37; Soph. Phil. 409 ; Eur. Ion 1615 ; Ael. v. h. 10, 16) ; to the (procurement of their) end, i. e. to destruction [A. V. to the uttermost (cf. reff. u. s.)], 1 Th. ii. 16 (for rhJl, 2 Chr. xii. 12) ; tcXos ex^ii', to have an end, be finished, (often in Grk. writ.), Lk. .xxii. 37 [al. give Tc'Xor here the sense oi fulfilment (cf. TfX«'vr)s, ui\fwvi)s, SfKaTavrjs), fr. Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., Polyb. down ; 1. a renter or farmer of taxes {hsX. publicanus) ; among the Romans usually a man of eciuestrian rank. 2. a tax-gatherer, collector of taxes or tolls, (Vulg. publicanus incorrectly; [so A. V. publican^), one employed by a publican or far- mer-general in collecting the taxes. The tax-collectors were, as a class, detested not only by the Jews but by other nations also, both on account of their empli)ymont and of the harshness, greed, and deception, with which thev prosecuted it; (hence they are classed by Arteni. oneir. 1, 23 ; 4, 57, with »ca7r?)Xoir Koi To'ts perd dvaideias (wai Kal Xi/oraif (cai ^vyoKpovarats Kal vapaXoyicTTals dv6paiiT0ts ; Lcian. necyom. c. 11 puts together ^oi;^oi', Tropiio[SoaKol Kai TcXwvai Ka\ KoXoKes Ka\ a'vKO(j>dvTat [The(>j)lir. cliaract. 6 (fffpi dnovoias) vavSof^fva'ai, Kal nopvofioaKrjaai, Kai TfXavrjCTai]) : Mt. V. 46, 4 7 Rec. ; x. 3 ; Lk.iii.l2; v. 27, 29; vii. 29; xviii. 10, 11, 13; the plur. is joined with apapTwXol, Mt. ix. 10 sq. ; [xi. 19]; Mk. xi. 15 sq. ; Lk. V. 30 ; vii. 34 ; xv. 1 ; with nopvai, Mt. .xxi. 31 sq. ; o idvi- KosK.o TeXavris, Mt. xviii. 1 7. Cf . Win. RWB. s. v. ZoU, Zollner; [1513. DD. s.v. Publican; Wetstein on Mt. v. 46 ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 515 sqq.].* TeXiuviov, -ov, TO, (TfXavrjs, cf. dfKaTwviov) ; [1. cus- toms, toll : Strabo 16, 1, 27. 2.] toll-house, place of toll, tax-office : the place in which the tax-collector sat to collect the taxes [Wiclif, tulboihe'] : Jit. ix. 9 ; Mk. ii. 14; Lk. v. 27.* T€'pas, gen. Ttparos, pi. TepaTa (see Ktpas, init.), (apjjar- entl)- akin to the verb Trjpea ; accordingly something so strange as to cause it to be 'watched' or 'observed'; [others connect it with darrip, daTpairri, etc., hence ' a sign in the heavens'; Vanicek p. 1146 ; Curtius § 205] ; see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 270), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nSl'O, a /jrodigy, piortent ; miracle [A.V. iconder'] /per- formed by any one; iu the X. T. it is found only in the plur. and joined with arip.(ia ; for the passages see crr)p.tiov, p. .J74". Tt'pTios, -ov, o, Terlius, an amanuensis of the apostle Paul : Ro. xvi. 22. [B. D. s. v.] • Te'pniXXos, -ov, 0, Tertullus, a Roman orator : Acts xxiv. 1 sq. [See prjTap.^ * Tto-erapdKovra R G, but several times [i. e. betw. 8 and 14] in Lrliin. and everywhere in T WH (and Tr, e.\c. Rev. x.vi. 1 7) Tfo-a-fpuKovra (a form originally Ionic [yet cf. B. as below]; see Kiihner § 187, 5; B. 28 (25) sq. ; cf. \y. 43 ; [Tdf Proleg. p. 80 ; WH. App. p. 150]), ot, al, TO, indecl. numeral, yb/V?/ : Mt. iv. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk. iv. 2 ; Jn. ii. 20 ; etc. [Tto-o-apaKovra-Sio, forty-two : Rev. xi. 2 Rec.''*^ ; xiii. 5 Rec.''" '''.'] Teo-o-apaKovTotTy)s (T Tr TVH Toraep-, see TeauapoKov- Tu ; L r accent -frrji, see (KaTovTaeTrjs), -fs, (reuaapaKov- Ta, and ctos), of forty years, forty years old: Acts vii. 23 ; xiii. 18. (Hes. opp. 441.) * [rco-o-apoKOVTa-^eVo-apts, -av, forty-four: Rev. x.xi. 17 Tecr crape? 621 TTjXlKOVTO'; T£'(r(rap€9, -(av, ol, at, Teaaapa, rd, gen. reatrdpajv-, dat. TfCTcrapcnv, ([Lcbm. reads Tiatrepes 7 times to 33, Tdf. 6 to So, Tr G to 33, WH 6 to 34; Lchm. sometimes has Tfo-o- f/) a, TTrWH always : L Tr sometimes have reo-- vos [i. e. ■ymi/i'a]), quadrangular, square ; [A. V. four-square] (Vulg. in quadro positus) : Rev. xxi. 16. (Sept.; Hdt., Plat., Ar- istot., Polyb., Plut., al.) * TtTpdSiov, -OV, TO, (jfTpas, the number four), a quater- nion (to e/c retrtrapo)!/ (TvvfCTTo^, Suid.) : rutv aTparioiTOiv, a guard consisting of four soldiers (for among the Ro- mans this was the usual number of the guard to which the custody of captives and prisons was intrusted ; two soldiers were confined with the prisoner and two kept guard outside), Acts xii. 4, where the four quaternions mentioned were on guard one at a time during each of the four watches. (Philo in Place. § 13 i. e. ed. Mang. vol. ii. p. 533, 25.)* TCTpaKur-x'Xioi, -m, -a, (rfTpaKis and xiXiot), four thou- sand : Mt. XV. 38; xvi. 10; Mk. viii. 9, 20 ; Acts xxi. 38. [(Hdt., Arstph., Thuc, al.)] * TCTpaKoo-ioi., -al -a, (fr. rerpaKis, and the term, -dfftof indicating one hundred; [cf. G. Meyer, Gr. Gram. § 16 f.]), four hundred : Acts v. 36 ; vii. 6 ; xiii. 20 ; Gal. iii. 1 7. [(Hdt., Thuc, Xen., al.)] * TeTpd|jiiivos, -ov, (fr. rhpa, q. v., and /xijk ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 549), of four months, lasting four months: tc Tpdprjvos ea-Tiv sc. )(p6voi, Jn. iv. 35, where Rec. Tcrpd- firjvov ea-Tiv, as in Judg. xix. 2 Alex.; xx. 47. (Thuc, Aristot., Polyl}., Plut., al.) * TtTpairXoos, (-oils), -orj (-rj), -6ov (-ovv), (fr. rirpa, and 7rXo'o5, to which corresponds the Lat. -plus in duplus, triplus, fr. IIAEQ [but cf. Vanicek p. 501]), quadruple, fourfold : Lk. xix. 8. (Sept. ; Xen., Joseph., Plut., al.) * Texpd-irous, -ovv, gen. -oSof, (fr. rirpa, q. v., and Trovr a foot), fr. Hdt. and Thuc. diovfxi, four-footed \ neut. plur. sc. beasts. Acts X. 12; xi.6; Ro.i. 23. (Sept. for norta.) * T€Tpapx€'c» [T WH Tfrpaapx- (see WH. App. p. 145)], -u ; (Terpdp;(i)f, q. v.), to be governor of a tetrarchy, be tetrarch : with a gen. of the region, Lk. iii. 1. [(Joseph, b.j. 3,10, 7.)]* ^ T€Tpdpxi]S [T WH Terpaapxis', see the j^receding word, and cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117], -ov, 6, (fr. rerpa, q. v., and cipxa>), a tetrarch; i.e. 1. a governor of the fourth part of any region. Thus Strabo, 12 p. 567, states that Galatia was formerly divided into three parts, each one of which was distributed into four smaller subdivisions each of which was governed by ' a tetrarch ' ; again, in lib. 9 p. 430, he relates that Thessaly, before the time of Philip of Macedon, had been divided into four 'tet- rarchies ' each of which had its own ' tetrarch '. 2. the word lost its strict etymological force, and came to denote the governor of a third part or half of a country, or even the ruler of an entire country or district provided it were of comparatively narrow limits ; a petty jirince [cf. e. g. Plut. Anton. 56, 3, i. p. 942 a.]. Thus Antony made Herod (afterwards king) and Phasael, sons of Antipater, tetrarchs of Palestine, Joseph, antt. 14, 13, 1. After the death of Herod the Great, his sons, Archelaus styled an ethnarch but Antipas and Philip with the title of 'te;;-a7'c/(s', divided and governed the kingdom left by their father; Joseph, antt. 17, 11, 4. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis etc. p. 428 ; Win. RWB. s. v. Tetrarch, and esp. Keim in Schenkel v. p. 487 sqq. The tetrarch Herod Antipas is mentioned in Mt. xiv. 1 ; Lk. iii. 19 ; ix. 7 ; Acts xiii. 1." revx», see Tvyxdva. Te(|>pdii>, -0) : 1 aor. ptcp. Te(ppa>cTas ; (T((f>pa ashes) ; to reduce to ashes : 2 Pet. ii. 6. (Aristot. [?], Theophr., Dio Cass., Philo, Antonin., al.) * Te'xvT), -r]s, Ti, (fr. tikuv, see tckto»'), fr. Hom. down, art : univ. Rev. xviii. 22 [here A. V. craft] ; of the plas- tic art, Acts xvii. 29 ; of a trade (as often in Grk. writ.), Acts xviii. 3.* t«xv£tt)s, -ov, d, (Texvi)), fr. Soph. [(?), Plato], Xen. down, Sept. several times for I^in, an artificer, crafts- man : Acts xix. 24, 38 ; Rev. xviii. 22 ; of God the framer of the higher and eternal course of things, Heb. xi. 10 (of God the architect of the world, Sap. xiii. 1, where cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. p. 234 [cf. also Trench, Syn. § cv.; Piper, Monumentale Theol. § 26]).* i-^KO) : fr. Hom. down; to make liquid; pass, to become liquid, to melt ; to perish or be destroyed by melting : 2 Pet. iii. 12, where for the pres. 3 pers. sing. rfjKerai Lchm. gives the fut. ToK^a-fTat [see AVH on the pass, and in their App. p. 171], cf. Is. xxxi%'. 4 TaKrjaovrat jracrm ai Svvdfieis Tmj/ ovpavmv. [Cf. ^ eitch s. v.] * TT]\auYiiis, adv., (fr. the adj. TrjXavyrjs, far-shining, fr. TTjXc afar, and avyfi radiance), at a distance and clear- ly : JMk. viii. 25 [where T WH mrg. hrjKavyas, q. v.]. (adj., Job xxxvii. 20 ; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 9 ; and esp. in the Grk. poets fr. Pind. down; TrjKavyktrrepov opav, Diod. 1, 50.)* tt|\ik-oBtos, -avTTj, -ovTo, (fr. ttjXikos and oJtos [but theu (it is urged) it should have been TrjXtxovTos; hence rrjpeo) 'lOrjfjii better connected with airot: a/. a5. Cf. Bttm. Aiisf. Sjjr. § 79 A. 4 ; Kiiliner § 1 73, G : Vanieek p. 2C8 ; L. and S. s.v. oJror, iuit.] ), in Attic writ. fr. Aeschvl. down ; 1. of such an age; used of any age, of so great an age, so old; also so young. 2. of so great a size, in bulk: ir\ota, Jas. iii. 4. 3. intensively, such and so great (Lat. tantus talisque) : 2 Co. i. 10; Ileb. ii. 8; Rev. xvi. IS." TTipt'u, -a>: impf. (Trjpovu; fut. rijpijcraj; 1 aor. «Vi)pi;(ra; pf. Tfi-TjpijKa, 3 ])L'rs. plur. TCTTjpi'iKacnv (Jn. xvii. (i K G) and TfTrjprjKai' (ibid. LTTrAVII, [see yivopai, init.]) ; Pass., pres. Tqpavfiai : inipf. (Tripovfiijv ; pf. Terr)prjfiai ; 1 aor. fTT]pi]drjv ; (TTjpdt, foiinil only once, Aeschyl. sui)])!. 248, where it is doubtful whether it means ' guarding ' or 'watching'), fr. I'ind., Soph., Thuc. down; Sept. several times for 10!!', 1SJ, etc. ; to attend to carefully, take care of; i. e. a. prop, to guard : riva, a prisoner, Mt. xxvii. 36, 54 ; Acts xvi. 23 ; pass.. Acts .\ii. u ; [xxiv. 23] ; xxv. 4, 21 [''] ; rl, xii. G ; ot Trjpoiivrii, [(R.V.) tlie watchers'] the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant. iii. 3). b. nieta|)h. to keep : Tted, one in that state in which he is, Tijv tavToii napdivov, his own virgin daughter, sc. as a virgin i. e. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37 ; iavrov, himself such as he is, i. e. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but here T Tr WH aiiTdv] ; with a pred. accus. added : dyvov, 1 Tim. V. 22; aoTTiXoi' ano tov K6(rp,ov, Jas. i. 27; a^aprj rtvt, 2 Co. xi. 9, ((iTrXoCv, Antoniu. (!, 30; nva apffiTTTov ra Bra, Sap. X. .5) ; ti with a pred. accus. 1 Tim. vi. 14 [but see in c. below] ; pass, rrfpoviuu, with an adv., d^e'^TTTtof, 1 Th. v. 23 ; with a dat. of the pers., X/jio-t-w, devoted to Christ, [W. 421 (392)], Jude 1 ; rripuv nm fv Tivi, to keep in i. e. cause one to persevere or stand firm in a thing: eV ra ovofiaTi deov (see p. 447' bot.), Jn. xvii. 11 sq. ; iv ayaTrrj dfov, Jude 21 ; nva « tipos, by guarding to cause one to escape in safety out of etc. : « ToO TTon/poC, out of the power and assaults of Satan, Jn. .wii. 1.5 [cf. B. 327 (281); W. 410 (383)]; (k Tijs apac TOV neipaaixoii. Rev. iii. 10. to keep : i. e. not to leave, Tiji» apxr)v, Jude 6 ; not to throw away, to I'/udrta, Rev. .\vi. lo. to hold firmly, ttjv evoTrjra tov Trvevparos, Eph. iv. 3 ; anything as a mental deposit, ttjv mariv, 2 Tim. iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 12 [cf. W. 53G (499) ; B. 78 (68)]. to show one's self to be actually holding a thing fast, i. e. c. to ohsen-e : sc. ttws kt\. Rev. iii. 3 ; rl, Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Acts xxi. 25 [Rec] ; tiji- TrapdSotriv, 'Mk. vii. 9 [^VH (rejected) mrg. crrrjo-riTf] (to « napaSoa-eas tosv irarepav, Joseph, antt. 13, 10, 6); tuv v6p.ov, Acts xv. 5 and Rec. in 24; Jas. ii. 10; to aa^^arov, the command respecting sabbath-keeping, Jn. ix. 16; ras 4vTo\ds (of either God or Christ), Mt. xix. 17; Jn. xiv. 15, 21 ; xv. 10; iJn. ii. 3sq.; iii. 22, 24; v. 2 (where LTTrWH ■noiapfv) ; V. 3 ; Rev. xii. 1 7 ; xiv. 12 [see above, b. fin.] ; Tijv evTo\T)v, 1 Tim. vi. 14 [see in b. above ; ndvra ocra ciXTftXdprjv, Mt. xxviii. 20] ; tov Xdyoi/, either of Christ or of God, Jn. viii. 51 sq. 55 ; xiv. 23 ; xv. 20 ; xvii. 6 : 1 Jn. ii. 5 ; Rev. iii. 8 ; roiic Xdyous, of Christ, Jn. xiv. 24 : TOV Xoyov TTJs VTTOftnvijs pov (i. c. 'ir^o-oC), Rev. iii. 10 ; TO cpya pLov, the works that I command. Rev. ii. 26 ; roir Xdyour TTJs TTpotpriTflas, Rev. xxii. 7 : toC ^t^Xiov tovtov. Rev. .\xii. 9; Tu fv Tt'i ■!Tpo(pi]Tfia yeypappiva, Ivev. i. 3; cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 194 sq. d. to reserve : Tivd fis n, to undergo something, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [cf. \Y, 342 (321) ; els tijk tov 2fffao-Tov Sidyvaatv, Acts XXV. 21']; Jude 6; rtva els Tip.epav xploeois, 2 Pet. ii. 9; Tovs oipavovs TTvpl (to be burned with fire) els ripepav Kpiaems, 2 Pet. iii. 7 : t\ els Tiva, a thing for one's advan- tage, 1 Pet. i. 4 ; ti els t/pepav rtvd. to be used some d.ay fur some purpose, Jn. xii. 7; ti cs. rj, {rqpiui) ; a. a watching : of pris- oners (Thuc. 7,86); the place where prisoners are kept, a prison, [R. V. ward] : Acts iv. 3 ; v. 18. b. a keeping, i. e. complying with, obeying : rtoi/ cWoXaJw, 1 Co. vii. 19; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 23; vopav, Sap. vi. 19.* TiPtpids, -dSos, fi, (fr. Tt^eptos), a city of Galilee, near theLake of Geunesaret, which Herod Antipas, tetrarch of Galilee, greatly enlarged [but see BB.DD. s. v. and es]). Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 234 note] and beau- tified, and named Tiberias in honor of Tiberius Caesar (Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 3). It is now called Tuiarli/cli, a jjoor and wretched town of about 3000 inhabitants, swarming with fleas for which the place is notorious throughout Syria : Jn. vi. 1, 23; xxi. 1. Cf. Robinson ii. 380-394; Win. RWB. s. v.; Ruetschi in Herzoged. 1 xvi. 161 ; Weizsiicker in Schenkcl v. 526 sq. ; [^Muhlau, in liiehm p. 1661 sq.] ; Biideker pp. 367-369.* TiPe'pios, -ov, 6. Tiberius, the Roman emperor (fr. [Aug. 19] A. i>. 14 to [March 16] a. D. 37) in whose reign Christ was crucified : Lk. iii. 1.* TiBe'u, i. q. Ttdripi,

, [impv. 2 pers. plur. Sere, Lk. xxi. 14 L T Tr WII (for R (r 2 aor. mid. impv. Bia-de)], inf. delvai, ptcp. 6els ; pf. TedeiKa ; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. TlBerai (Mk. XV. 47 RG) ; pf. 3 pers. sing. TeSeirai (Mk. xv. 47 LT Tr WII) ; 1 aor. eTeSriv ; 2 aor. mid. e'6epr]v (2 pers. sing. e6ov. Acts V. 4) ; (see emTiBripi) ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. mostly for Dity and D't^H, [03, r\W and n't!/n, D'^n» etc. ; 1. to set, put, place, i. e. causative of Keladat ; hence a. to place or lay : rl, as BepeXtov, [Lk. vi. 4.S] ; xiv. 29 ; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (eepelKLa, Horn. II. 12, 29) ; \i6ov, Ro. ix. 33 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6 ; tI, opp. to atpeiv, Lk. xi.x. 21 sq. (cf. Xcn. oec. 8, 2) ; tiki npoa-Koppa [or (ace. to WH mrg.) (rv\aKriv, to order one to be put in prison. Acts xii. 4 ; iv (tjj) (j)v\a<;i, ilt. xiv. 3 [here L T Tr WH djro- TiU]; Acts v. 25, (Gen. xii. 10; xUi. 17, 30; [B. 329 (283); W. 414 (386)]); eis n^pijo-tw. Acts iv. 3 ; ivrqpij- i\ov to make one a friend, see Passow p. 1893' ; [L. and S. s. v. B. L]). TiOivai tivo. CIS Ti, to appoint one to (destine one to be) anything, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 8 ; w. ds ti instead of the pred. ace. (Hebrais- ticaUy [cf. W. 228 (214); B. § 131, 7]), Acts xui. 47 fr. Is. xlix. 6 (Jer. i. 5). Mid. to appoint for one's use : nva €19 biaKoviav, to appoint one to one's service, 1 Tim. i. 12 [W. § 45, 4 fin.] ; to appoint with one's self or in. one's mind : Tiva els 6pyr)v, to decree one to be subject to wrath, 1 Th. v. 9 ; [to this use many refer Acts i. 7, see i^ovtrla 1, and iv, I. 5 d. /3. ; cf. 1 a. above]. TiBivat Tiva iva. Jn. XV. 16 ; ndevai to /it'pos nvos fierd tivos (see pepos, 1), ilt. xxiv. 51 ; Lk. xii. 46. 3. to set, fx, establish, (Lat. statuo); a. to set forth (Germ, auf- stellen) : inoSetypa, 2 Pet. ii. 6. b. to establish, or- dain, (Germ, feslsetzen, anordnen): vofiov, to enact, GaL iii. 19 Grsb. (very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down, both in the act. and the mid. ; cf. Passow s. v. III. 3 b. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. III. 5]). [Comp. : ava-, npoar-ava-, OTTO-, Sio-, dvTi-dta; €(£-, (TTi-, (Tvv-em-, Kara-, avv-KaTa-, pfTa-, TTapa-. irepi-, irpor, Trpoo-, uvv-, {jtto- Tidrfpt,] ' tCktu ; fut. Tf'lopai ; 2 aor. eTCKov ; 1 aor. pass. fTc'x^» ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for ih]; lobring forth, bear, produce (fruit from the seed) ; prop., of women giving birth : absol., Lk. i. 57 [B. 267 (230)]; ii. 6 ; Jn. xvi. 21 ; Gal. iv. 27 ; Heb. xi. 11 Rec. ; Rev. xii. 2, 4 ; vlov, Mt. :. 21, 23, 25 ; Lk. i. 31 ; ii. 7 ; Rev. xii. 5, 13 ; pass., Mt. ii. 2 ; Lk. ii. 1 1 ; of the earth bringing forth its fruits : fioTavrjv, Heb. vi. 7 (Eur. Cycl. 333 ; ya'iav. ^ to iravra TiKTCTai, Aesehyl. Cho. 127; y^s ttjs Travra TiKToiatjs, Philo opif. m. § 45, who draws out at length the comparison of the earth to a mother). metaph. to bear, bring forth : dpapTiav, in the simile where r) iniBvula is likened to a female, Jas. i. 15 (dpmji'. Plat. conv. p. 212 a.).* t(XXci> ; impf. «tiXXov ; fr. Hom. down ; to pluck, pluck off: crrdxvas, Mt. xii. 1 ; Mk. ii. 23 [on this cf. p. 524'> top] ; Lk. vi. 1.* Tifialo'i 624 rk Ti)iatos ('XOP fi-. Cliald. XpD, Ilebr. xpD, to be un- clean), -ov, 6, TiiiiaiiM, the name of a man : ilk. x. 46.* Tifidu, -co ; fut. Tifii']ve'ia6ai Ttiirjs apyvpiov, to buy for a price reckoned in silver, i. e. for silver. Acts vii. 16 ; thing prized [A. V. honor]. Rev. xxi. 24 [Rec], 26. 2. honor which belongs or is shown to one : the honor of one who outranks others, pre-eminence, ho^a k. n/iri, Heb. ii. 7, 9 ; 2 Pet. i. I 7 ; in the doxologies : ra dew (sc. <(TT(o [cf. B. § 129, 22 Rem.]) Tifirj or ^ np-T), 1 Tim. i. 17; vi. 16 ; Rev. v. 13 ; vii. 12 ; xix. 1 Rec. ; the honor which one has by reason of the rank and state of the office which he holds, Heb. v. 4 (and often in Grk. writ. ; cf. Bleek on Heb. 1. c.) ; veneration : SiSovac, \aj3eiv. TifiTjv, Rev. iv. 9, 11 ; V. 12; deference, reverence, Ro. xii. 10; xiii. 7; 1 Tim. V. 17; vi. 1 ; honor appearing in the rewards of the future life, Ro. ii. 7, 10 ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; praise of which ■one is judged worthy, 1 Pet. ii. 7 [here R.V. txt. precious- •ness (ef. 1 above)] ; mark of honor, noWals niiaU nfiav Tiva, Acts x.wiii. 10; univ. in phrases: iv nfirj, honor- ably, 1 Th. iv. 4 (on this pass, see KTaopai) ; oIk iv tiuji Tivi, not in any honor, i. e. worthy of no honor. Col. ii. 23 [al. value ; see n-Xrjcr/xovij] ; fU TiyLf]v, Ro. ix. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20 sq., (on these pas.s. sec (TiccCof, 1); ncpiriOivm nv\ Tifitjv, 1 Co. xii. 23 (see nepirWr^pi, b.) ; Tipr^v airovipfiv TIKI, to show honor to one, 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; SiSovat Tiprjv, 1 Co. xii. 24 ; t^"" ">*'}'') to have honor, be honored, Jn. iv. 44 ; Heb. iii. 3.* tC|j.ios, -a, -oi/, {tiuti), fr. Horn, down ; a. prop, held '^ of great price, \. e. precious : XMor, Rev. xvii. 4 ; .xviii. 12, 16 ; xxi. 19 ; plur. 1 Co. iii. 12 [R. V. costly stones] ; compar. Tipaarfpos, 1 Pet. i. 7 Rec. ; superl. TiiiiaTaros, Rev. xviii. 12; xxi. 11. b. metaph. held in honor, esteemed, especially dear : Heb. xiii. 4 ; rtw, to one, Acts V. 34 ; XX. 24 [here with a gen. also, ace. to the text of T Tr A\ II (oidevut \uyiw etc. nut worth a word ; cf. ileyer ad loc.)]; Kupnus riji yrjs, Jas. v. 7; alfia, 1 Pet. i. 19; inayyiXfiara, 2 Pet. i. 4." Ti|jit6TT]s, -tjTos, i], {ripioi) ; a. prop, preciousness, costliness ; an abundajice of costly things : Rev. xviii. 1 9. b. metaph. worth, excellence : Aristot. de jiartt. an. 1, 5 [p. 644^ 32]; eth. Nic. 10, 7 Hn. [p. 1178«, 1]; Siacfiipnvin TtfiiurrjTi al \|/u;(ai Koi CLTijiia aWi)\a>v, do gon. anim. 2, 3 [p. 736^ 31].* TtjioSeos, -ov, 6, voc. TifioSte (1 Tim. vi. 20 ; cf. Kriiger §16 Anm.2; [\V.§8,2c.; B.12]), 7Vmo//(y, a resident of Lystra, ajiparently, whose father was a Greek and moth- er a Jewess, Acts xvi. 1 sqq. He was Paul's com|)anion in travel, and fellow-laborer : Acts xvii. 14 sq. ; xviii. 5 ; xix. 22; XX. 4; Ro. xvi. 21 ; 1 Co. iv. 17; xvi. 10; 2 Co. i. 1, 19 ; Phil. i. 1 ; ii. 19 ; Col. i. 1 ; 1 Th. i. 1 ; iii. 2, 6 ; 2 Th. i. 1; 1 Tim. i. 2, 18; vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 2; Philem. 1 ; Heb. xiii. 23.* Tt(ivoi, d, Timon, one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem : Acts vi. 5.* Ti)xwpc'p6t) ; fr. Soph, and Hdt. down; prop, to be a guardian or avenger of honor; hence 1. to succor, come to the help of: rivi, one, Soph., Hdt., Thuo., al. 2. lo avenge : rm, one, Hdt., Xen., al. 3. in the N. T. Tip.o>po) nva, to take vengeance on one, to punish: Acts xxii. 5; .\xvi. 11, (Soph. O. R. 107 ; in Grk. writ, the mid. is more com. in this sense).* rt|jui>pCa, -as, tj, (ri/xupos, see Tip-apio}^ ; X. a ren* dering help; assistance, [(Hdt., Thuc, al.)]. 2. vengeance, penalty, punishment : Heb. x. 29 (Prov. xix. 29; .x.xiv. 22; in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down). [Syn. see «dXao-ir, fin.] * tCvid : fut. TiVu ; fr. Hom. down ; to pay, lo recompense : 8Ut]v, to pay penalty, suffer punishment, 2 Th. i. 9 (Plat. Phaedo j). 8 1 d. ; Theaet. p. 1 7 7 a. ; Ael. v. h. 13,2; SiVas, id. 1, 24 ; ^ojiji/, Hom. Od. 2, 193; notvas, Pind. Ol. 2, 106; Crjpiav, Sept. Prov. xxvii. 12). [Comp. : dTro-riVm.] * t£s, neut. ri, gen. rlvos, interrogative pronoun, [fr. Hom. down] ; 1. who, tvhich, what ? Sept. tis for "3, T( for no ; a. used Adjectively, in a direct question : ris /Sao-iXciJr, Lk. xiv. 31 ; tIs yvvri, Lk. xv. 8 ; Ti TTfpiarrov, Mt. v. 47; tI fn)p.('i.ov, Jn. ii. IS, and many other passages, in an indirect question, 1 Th. iv. 2, etc. ; TiVa Tj TTo'iov Kaipov, .' Pet. i. 1 1 ; used instead of a pred. in a vyf'iv ; ilt. iii. 7 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; Rev. xviii. 18, etc.; TiVoj, Mt. xxii. 20, 28; Mk xu. 16; Ww, Lk. xiii. 18 ; nVa, Jn. xviii. 4, 7 ; W diXere /xoi SoCi/ai ; Mt. x.xvi. 15 ; Ti in an indirect quest., foil, by the indicative, Mt. vi. 3 ; Jn. xiii. 12 ; 1 Co. xiv. 16 ; Kev. ii. 7, 11, 17, and very often; foil, by the aor. subjunc, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 11, etc.; foil, by the optative w. av, Lk. i. f 2 ; vi. 11, «tc. Emphatic words get prominence by being placed before the pronoun [B. § 151, 16] : ifie'is 6f riva fie Xe'yere (where one woiUd e.xpect ov). Acts xiii. 25 ; huQrjufTai vplv, tI XdkrjcreTe [-OTjrc T Tr WH ; L br. thecl.], ilt. X. 1 9 ; fTOipaaov, ti deiTrvrjo'co, Lk. x^"ii. 8 ; [otfia Tivas e^eXe^dprjv, Jn. xiii. 18 T Trtxt. WH] ; esp. after exfif (as in the Grk. writ.) : ovk l^oyot, ti (j)dya- tU 626 Tt? TTor. Jit. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; Acts Lx. 33; plur. Jude4; Tcnror, Lk. xi. 1 ; Acts xxvii. S; Koi/irj. Lk. x. 38; xvii. 12, and in many other pass. ; with proper names (as tij ilnav), Mk. .XV. 21 ; Lk. xxiii. 26 ; Acts ix. 43 ; xxi. 16 ; x.w. 19. 8io Ttvis with a partit. gen., Lk. vii. 18 (19); Acts xxiii. 23 ; erfpos. Acts viii. 34 ; plur. Acts x.xvii. 1 ; it indicates that tlie thing with which it is connected belongs to a certain class and resembles it : dirapxfjv nva, a kind of firstfruits, Jas. i. 18, cf. W. § 25, 2 a; joined to adjectives of quality and ciuantity, it requires us to conceive of their degree as the greatest possible ; as, (j)o^fpd Tts (kSox'i, a certain fearful expectation, Ileb. X. 27, where see Delitzsch [or Alford] (Bfivrj tis dvvafiis, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; other exx. fr. the Grk. writ, are given in W. § 2.5, 2 c. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. IL 8] ; Mat- tliiae § 487, 4 ; [Bnhdy. p. 442] ; ineredibilis quidam amor, Cic. pro Lig. c. 2, 5) ; jiiyas tis, Acts viii. 9. b. it stands alone, or substantively : univ. tis one, a certain one, Mt. xii. 47 [but WII in mrg. only]; Lk. ix. 49, 57; xiii. 6, 23; Jn. xi. 1; Acts v. 25; xviii. 7; plur. rtwr, cc;- tain, some : Lk. xiii. 1 ; Acts xv. 1 ; Ro. iii. 8 ; 1 Co. iv. 18; XV.34; 2 Co. iii. 1 ; Gal.ii.l2; 2Th.iii.ll; 1 Tim. i. 3, 19 ; iv. 1 ; v. 15 ; vi. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 ; rivks iv vfuv, some among you, 1 Co. .xv. 12; a participle may be added, — either with the article, river oi etc., Lk. xviii. 9 ; 2 Co. X. 2 ; Gal. i. 7 ; or without it, 1 Tim. vi. 21 ; Tir and river with a partit. gen. : Lk. xi. 1; xiv. 15; 2 Co. X. 12. 2. a. joined to nouns and signifying some : xpovov rivd, some lime, a while, 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; fjpipai Tives, some (or certain) days. Acts ix. 19; x. 48; xv. 36; xvi. 12; xxiv. 24; xxv. 13; fiiposri, Lk. xi. 36 [here WH mrg. br. t»] ; Acts v. 2 ; 1 Co. xi. 18; ti ^paKri/iov, Lk. xxiv. 41 ; add, Mk. xvi. 18; Jn. v. 14 ; Acts xvii. 21 ; xxiii. 20; xxviii. 21 ; Heb. xi. 40; /Spaxu t«. Acts v. 34 (where LT Tr WII om. ti) ; Ileb. ii. 7 ; rrfpicnrorfpov n, 2 Co. x. 8 : fuKpov Ti, 2 Co. xi. 16 ; it serves modestly to qualify or limit the measure of things, even though that is thought to be ample or large [cf. 1 a. sub fin.] : Koivmvla th, ft cer- tain contribution, Ko. xv. 26 ; KapTTos. Ro. i. 13 ; )^api. Toi^opovv, (fr. the enclitic toi or tm, yap, and ovv. Germ. doch denn nun ; cf. Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 1 ; [EUicott on 1 Th. iv. 8]), a particle introducing a conclusion with some special emphasis or formality, and generally occu- pying the first place in the sentence, wherefore then, for which reasmi, therefore, consequently : 1 Th. iv. 8 ; Heb. xii. 1, (for ]2-hi'_. Job xxii. 10 ; xxiv. 22 ; 4 Mace. i. 34 ; vi. 28 var. ; xiii. 15 ; Soph., Xen., Plato, sqq.) ; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 738.* roCy( in Kairoiye, see ye, 3 f. Totvuv, (fr. the enclitic toI and vvv), fr. Find, [and Hdt.] down, therefore, then, accordingly ; contrary to the use of the more elegant Grk. writ., found at the begin- ning of the sentence (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342 sq. ; [W. 559 (519 sq.) ; B. § 150, 19]) : Heb. xiii. 13 (Is. iii. 10 ; V. 13) ; as in the better writ., after the first word : Lk. XX. 25 [yet T Tr WH put it first here also] ; 1 Co. ix. 26 and Rec. in Jas. ii. 24, (Sap. i. 1 1 ; viii. 9 ; 4 Mace. i. 13, 15 scjq.).* ToidcrSe, ToiaSe, Toio'fSf, (Toior and 8e), fr. Hom. down, such, generally with an implied suggestion of something excellent or admirable : 2 Pet. i. 1 7.* ToiovTos, ToiavTTj, ToiovTo aud TOLoijTov (oulv this sec- ond form of the neut. occurs in the N. T., and twice [but in Mt. xviii. 5 T WH have -to]), (fr. toios and oItos [al. say lengthened fr. toIos or connected with airos ; cf. njKtKoiiTos]), [fr. Hom. down], such as this, of this kind or sort; a. joined to nouns: Mt. ix. 8; xviii. 5; IMk. iv. 33 ; vi. 2; vii. 8 [here T WH om. Trbr. the cl.], 13 ; ix. 37 [here Tdf. Tovrav]; Jn. ix. 16; Acts xvi. 24; 1 Co. T. 1; xi. 16; 2 Co. iii. 4, 12; xii. 3; Heb. vii. 26; viii. 1 ; xii. 3; xiii. 16 ; Jas. iv. 16. b. olos . . . ToiouToy: Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co. xv. 48; 2 Co. x. 11 ; toiov- Tor . . . oTToioj, Acts ,\xvi. 29 ; tocovtos &>v iis etc. Philem. 9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. c. used substantive- ly, a. without an article : Jn. iv. 23 ; neut. /xijSew toioC- Tov, Acts xxi. 25 Rec. ; plur., Lk. ix. 9 ; xiii. 2 [here T Tr txt. WH ToCra]. p. with the article, 6 toioCtoj one who is of such a character, such a one, [B. § 1 24, 5 ; W. Ill (lOG) ; Kriiger § 50, 4, 6 ; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Ellicott on Gal. v. 21]: Acts xxii. 22; 1 Co. v. 5, 11 ; 2 Co. ii. 6 sq. ; x. 11 ; xii. 2, 5 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Tit. iii. 11 ; plur., Mt. xix. 14 ; Mk. x. 14 ; Lk. xviii. 16 ; Jn. viii. 5 ; Ro. [ii. 14 Lmrg.] ; xvi. 18 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; xvi. 16, 18; 2 Co. xi. 13; Phil. ii. 29; 2 Th. iii. 12; 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec. ; 3 Jn. 8 ; neut. plur., Acts xix. 25 ; Ro. i. 32 ; ii. 2 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 15 ; Gal. v. 21, 23 ; Eph. v. 27; Heb. xi. 14.* Toixos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for Tp, a wall [esp. of a house ; cf. reixos] : Acts xxUi. 3.* t6kos, -ov, 6, (fr. TiKTu, pf. TfTOKa) ; 1. hirtJi ; a. the act of bringing forth. b. that tchich has been brought forth, offspring; (in both senses from Homer down). 2. interest of money, usury, (because it multiphes money, and as it were 'breeds' [cf. e. g. Mer- chant of Venice i. 3]) : Mt. xxv. 27; Lk. .xLx. 23, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Arstph. down ; Sept. for ^i^J).* ToX)i.d(D, -S> ; impf . 3 pers. sing. cToXfia, plur. iroXfiav ; fut. To^firjcoi ; 1 aor. eVoX/tijaa ; (roXfia or roXfit] [' dar- ing'; Curtius §236]); fr. Hom. down; to dare; a. not to dread or shun through fear: foil, by an inf., Mt. .xxii. 46 ; IMk. xii. 34 ; Lk. xx. 40 ; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. § 65, 7 b.]; Actsv. 13; vii. 32; Ro. .xv. 18; 2Co. x. 12; Phil, i. 14 ; Jude 9 ; ToXfirjcras etcrijXdfv, took courage and went in, 3\Ik. XV. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22 ; Plut. vit. Cam. 22, 6]. b. to bear, endure ; to bring one's self to; [cf. W. u. s.] : foil, by an inf., Ro. v. 7 ; 1 Co. vi. 1. c. absol. to be bold ; bear one's self boldly, deal boldly : 2 Co. xi. 21 : ejrt Ttva, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [CoMP. : diro- ToX/iUO).] ' ToXfii) poTepov 628 [SvN. ToX^oi», Bappia: fl. denotes confidence in one's own strength or capacity, t. boldness or daring in under- taking ; 9. lias reference more to the character, r. to its manifestation. Cf. Schmidt ch. 24, 4; ch. 141. The words ai'u found together in 2 Co. x. 2.J To\(i.iip; of the place or spot occupied by things placed in it, Jn. XX. 7. the particular ])lace referred to is defined by the words appended: —by a genitive, tott. Tijj ^acrivov, Lk. xvi. 28 ; t^j KOTaTraiaeais, Acts vii. 49 ; Kpavtov, Mt. xxvii. 33 ; Mk. xv. 22 ; Jn. xix. 1 7 ; [tov t6ttov tSiv fjXiov, Jn. XX. 25" L T Tr mrg.] ; — by the addition of oj, Sttov, TOaOVTO^ i(f or iv a, foil, by finite verbs, Mt. xxviii. 6 ; Mk. xvi. 6 ; Jn. iv. 20 ; vi. 23 ; x. 40 ; xi. 6, 30 ; xix. 41 ; Acts vii. 33 ; Ro. ix. 26 ; — liy the addition of a proper name : ToTros \fy6pfVos, or KoXovpfvos, ^Mt. xxvii. 33 ; Jlk. xv. 22: Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 13; Rev. xvi. 16; 6 tottos nvos, the place which a person or thing occupies or has a right to : Rev. ii. 5 ; vi. 14 ; xii. 8 ; where a thing is hidden, Trjs fiaxalpas i. e. its sheatli, Mt. xxvi. 52. the abode assigned liy God to one after death wherein to re- ceive his merited portion of bliss or of misery : (6 iSior ToTtos (TiTOf), univ. Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 1 [cf. o alavios tottos. Tob. iii. 6]) ; applied to (iehenna, Acts i. 25 (see rSiot, 1 c.) ; 6 o(j)(i\6p(vos TOTTOS, of heaven, Polyc. ad Philip. 9, 2; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 4 ; also 6 ayios tottos, ibid. 5, 7 ; [6 apiapivos t. Barn. ep. 19, 1 ; Act. Paul et Thecl. 28; see esp. Ilarnack's note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5,4]. b. a place (passage) in a book: Lk. iv. 17 (ftai iv a\\a Toiro) (^i)(7iV, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 20 [(but this is doubtful; cf. L. and S. s. v. 1.4; yet cf. Kiihner ad loc.) ; Philo dc Joseph. § 26 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 4] ; in the same sense x^P" ^^ Joseph, antt. 1, 8, 3). 2. ractaph. a. the condition or station held l»j one in any company or assembly : avaTT\r)povv toi/ tottov tov Ihiat- Tov, \\\.\ . filleth the place of the unlearned}, 1 Co. xiv. 16 ; T^s SioKovlas touttjs xal aTToo'ToXrjs, [R.V. the place iTi this ministry, etc.], Acts i. 25 L T Tr WII. b. op- portunity, power, occasion for acting : tottov \ap.pdv€iv tijs aTToXoyias, opportunity to make his defence. Acts xxv. 16 (f)(tiv T. (OToXoyi'as, floseph. antt. 16, 8, 5) ; tottov SiSd- vm t;i opyji (sc. tov 6(ov), Ro. .\ii. 19; tw Sia/SoXoi, Eph. iv. 27. (tm laTpta, to his curative efforts in one's case, .Sir. xxxviii. 12 ; vopa v^fftarov, ibid. xix. 1 7 ; tottov &iS6- vai Ttvi, foil, by an inf., iljid. iv. 5) ; tott. ficTavoias fvpi- a-Kdv, Ileb. xii. 17, on this pass, see evpia-Ka>, 3 (SiSdvat, Sap. xii. 10 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 5 ; Lat. locum relin- quere paenitentiae, Liv. 44, 10 ; 24, 26 ; [Plin. ep. ad Trai. 96(97), 10 cf. 2]; €;(«>' tottov ptTovo'ias, Tat. or. ad Graec. 15 fin. ; 6m to pij KaraXeiTT^adai acpttri tottov iXiovs prjSf avyyvaprjs, Polyb. 1, Ss, 2) ; runov tx^i-v sc. tov day- yeXl^fo-dat, Ro. xv. 23 ; t. fijTcIi/, with a gen. of the thing for which influence is sought among men : 8ia6r]Kr)s, pass. Heb. viii. 7 [(cf. pep(popai)2. portion of space viewed in reference to its occupancy, or as a])i)ro))riated to a thing; X'^P" region, country, extensive; space, yet bounded; x""?'"" /""''"'^' of ground (Jn. iv. 5), cir- ctunscribed ; a definite portion of s]jace viewed as enclosed or complete in itself ; T(iiroj and x'-'p^o" (phir., K. V. lands) occur together in Acts xxviii. 7. Cf. Schmidt ch. 41.] too-oCtos, -airr], -ovto (Heb. vii. 22 L T Tr WH) and -ovTov, (fr. Toaos and ovtos; [al. say lengthened fr. too-os; cf. TrjXiKovTos, init.]), so great; with nouns : of quantity, Torr. ttXoijtos, Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount, ttiVtis, Mt. viii. 10 ; Lk. vii. 9 ; [oua iSo^aofv eavTqv, to- crovTov SoTf jjaa-avio-pov, Rev. xviii. 7] ; of size. viKpos. Ileb. xii. 1 ; plur. so many : IxOves, Jn. xxi. 1 1 ; cnjtifia, Jn. xii. 37 ; •yew; (j)ava>v, 1 Co. xiv. 10 ; en], Lk. xv. 29 [(here A. V. these many)}, (in prof, writ., esp. the Attic, we often findToo-oCTof Ka'iToiovTos and the reverse; see Hein- T0T6 629 rpaxv'^i^a» dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923"; [L. and S. s. vv.]) ; foil, by axn-e, so many as to be able, etc. [B. 244 (210)], Mt. .\v. 33 ; of time : so long, xpovoi, [Jn. xiv. 9] ; Ileb. iv. 7 ; of length of space, to firJKOi toctoutov ecmv Sa-ov etc. Rev. xxi. 16 Ret-.; absol., plur. so mani/, Jn. vi. 9 ; neut. plur. l_so many things^, Gal. iii. 4 ; to'i'3-) * TpauiiarCJu : 1 aor. ptcp. rpavfiaTiaas ; pf. pass. ptcp. TfTpavfiaTttrpevos ; (rpavpa) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, to wound : Lk. xx. 12 ; Acts xix. 16.* TpaxT|\Cti<) : (rpdxn^os) ; 1. to seize and twist the neck or throat; used of combatants who handle thus their antagonists (Philo, Plut., Diog. Laert., al). 2. to bend back the neck of the victim to be slain, to lay bare or expose by bending back ; hence trop. to lay bare, Tpdxv^o^ 630 Tpofj,o<; uncover, expose : ))f. pass. ptcp. T(Tptt\r)\i(Tn(voc rm, laid bare, laid open, made manifest to one, Ileb. iv. 13.* Tpixi^os, -01), 6, [allied w. Tpix<^'^ named from its mov- ableness; el'. Vanieek p. 304], fr. Eiir. am] Arstpli. down, Sept. chiefly for "\XJi', also for '\'(j,', etc., llie neck: Jit. xviii. 6 ; Mlc. ix. 42 ;' Lk. xv. 20; xvii. 2; Acts xv. 10; XX. 37 ; Tov tavTou Tpd>^i]\ov viroTiOevai (sc. vno rov ai^Tj- pov), [A.V. lo tatj duu-n one's <»i-n neck i. e.] to be ready to incur the most imminent peril to life, Ro. xvi. 4.* Tpoxws, -fia, -V, fr. Horn, down, rour/li : oSoi, Lk. iii. b ; roi7oi, rocky places (in the sea). Acts xxvii. 29.* TpaxwviTis, -tSot, 17, Tmchonilh, a rough [(Grk. rpa- Xi's)] region, tenanted by robbers, situated between An- tilibanus [on the W.] and the mountains of Batanaea [on the E.], and bounded on the N. by the territory of Da- mascus : Lk. iii. 1 (Jo.seph. antt. 16, 9, 3 and often). [Sec Porter \n BB.Dl).]* Tpels, 01. ai, Tp(o, ra, tltree: Mt. xii. 40; Mk. viii. 2; Lk. i. 56 ; Jn. ii. 19, and often. [From Horn, down.] Tpets TaPt'pvai, see ra^ipvm. Tpe'iio) ; used only in the pres. and impf. ; fr. Tlom. down ; lo tremble : Mk. v. 33 ; Lk. viii. 47 ; Acts ix. 6 Kcc. ; with a ptep. (cf. "\V. § 43, 4 a.; [B. § 144, 15 a.]), to fear, he afraiil, 2 Pet. ii. 10. [Syx. see (fio^ea, fin.]* Tpe'4)u ; 1 aor. edpe-^a ; Pass., pres. rpicfiopai ; pf. ptcp. TfBpappivoi \ fr. llom.down; to noiirisli, support ; to feed: Tim, Mt. vi. 26 ; x.w. 37 ; Lk. xii. 24 ; Acts xii. 20 ; Rev. xii. 6, 14; to give suck, Lk. x.xiii. 29 LTTrWII; lo fatten, .las. v. 5 [here A. V. nourishl. to bring v;>, nurture, Lk. iv. IG [here T AVII mrg. ai'urpc<^Q)] (1 l\Iacc. iii. 33; xi, 39, and often in prof. auth.). [Co.mp. : da-, fK-, ei>- Tpfffxa.^ * Tpt'xu ; impf. (Tpfxov ; 2 aor. eSpapov ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for "n ; to run: a. proj). : of persons in haste, Mk. V. G; Jn. xx. 2, 4; with a tclio inf. Mt. xxviii. 8; Bpapwv with a finite verb, INIt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. XV. 20 ; Tpexvti, Ileb. xii. 1 (see aymv, 2) ; the same expression occurs in Grk. •writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires the exertion of all one's efforts to overcome, Hdt. 8, 102; Eur. Or. 878; Ale. 489; Electr. 883; Iph. Aul. 1456 ; Dion. Hal. 7, 48, etc. ; miserahile curruni certa- men, Stat. Theb. 3, 1 16. [CoMP. : fio-, Kara-, irepi-, itpo-, irpoa--, truv-, fin- o-vv-, vtto- Tpe';((a.] * Tpii|ia, -oTOf, TO, (rtTpaui, TiTpt^pi, TPAQ, to bore through, pierce), a perforation, hole : fie\6>njs, Lk. xviii. 25 L T Tr WII ; [pact>i8os, Ut. xix. 24 Wll txt.]. (Arstph., Plat., Aristot., Pint., al.) * TpidKOVTO, oi, ai, to, (rpcif), thirty : Mt. xiii. 8 ; Mk. iv. 8 ; Lk. iii. 23, etc. [From Hom. down.] TpiaKdcrioi, -at, -a, three hundred : Jlk. xiv. 5; Jn. xii. 5. [From llom. down.]* rpCPoXos, -ov, 6, (rpfif and /SiiXXw, [(cf. ^f'Xor), three- pointed]), a thistle, a, ])rickly wild ])lant, hurtful to other plants: Mt. vii. 16; Ileb. vi. 8. (Arstph., :d.; Sept. for llil, Gen. iii. 18; Ilos. x. 8; for D'rjV thorns, Prov. xxii. 5.) [Cf. B. D. s. v. Thorns and Thistles, 4 ; Low, Aram. Pllanzennamen, § 302.] * rpCPos, -ov, 17, (jpijia to rub), a worn way, a path: Mt. iii. 3 ; Mk. i. 3 ; Lk. iii. 4, fr. Is. xl. 3. (Horn. hymn. Merc. 448 ; Hdt., Eur., Xen., al. ; Sept. for np'HJ, ITiK, nSpo, ■:|-in, etc.)* Tpurta, -ar, i], (Tpeis and (Tos), a space of three years : Acts XX. 31. (Theo])lir., Pint., Artcm. oneir. 4, 1 ; al.)* rpltfa; to squeak, make a shrill cry, (lloni., Hdt., Aris- tot., Pint., Lcian., al.) : trans, tovs obovras. to grind or gnash the teeth, Mk. ix. 18; Kara Ttvos, Ev. Xicod. c. 5.* TpCunvos, -ov, (rpfis and prjv), of three months (Soph., Aristot., Theophr., al.) ; neut. used as subst. a space of three months (Polyb., Pint., 2 K. xxiv. 8) : Ileb. xi. 23.* Tpts, (jpeis), adv., thrice : Mt. xxvi. 34, 75 ; Mk. xiv. 30, 72 ; Lk. xxii. 34, 61 ; Jn. xiii. 38 ; 2 Co. xi. 25 ; xii. 8; fVi Tpi's [see tVi, C. I. 2 d. p. 235" hot.]. Acts x. 16,- xi. 10. [From llom.down.]* Tpto-Tfyos, -ov, (rpfiE and (TTiyr)), having three roofs or stories : Dion. Hal. 3, 68 ; [Joseph, b. j. 5, 5, 5] ; to rpi- (TTfyov, the third story. Acts xx. 9 (Gen. vi. IG Symm.) ; T) Tpiariyr], Artem. oneir. 4, 46.* rp\.a--\l\iO[., -at, -a, (rpis and x'^'o')' ''"''"c thousand: Acts ii. 41. [From Ilom. down.] * Tplros, -I), -ov, the third : with substantives, Mk. .xv. 25 ; Lk. xxiv. 21 ; Acts ii. 15 ; 2 Co. xii. 2 ; Rev. iv. 7; vi. 5 ; viii. 10 ; xi. 14, etc. ; t!j Tpir;; rjpkpa, Mt. xvi. 21 ; xvii. 23 ; XX. 19; Mk.ix. 31[Rec.]; .x. 34 Rec; Lk. x.xiv. 46; Acts X. 40 ; 1 Co. XV. 4 ; tji fjpipa Tjj rplrrj, Lk. xviii. 33 ; Jn. ii. 1 [Lmrg. Tr \VH mrg. Tfl TpiT?; T/pfpuJ: ?i|xos [on its accent cf. W. § 6, 1 1.], -ov, 6, Trophi- mus, an Ephesian Christian, a friend of the apostle Paul : Acts XX. 4 ; xxi. 29 ; 2 Tim. iv. 20.* TpO(t>6s, -ov, rj, (Tpe(pa> ; see Tpo(f)fj), a nurse : 1 Th. ii. 7. (From Horn, down ; for nPJ'O, Gen. xxxv. 8 ; 2 K. xi. 2 ; L<. xlix. 23.) * Tpo(j>o-<^ope'u>, -to : 1 aor. erpo), fr. Horn, down, a ichcel: Jas. iii. '6 (on this pass, see y/wo-is 3; [cf. W. 54 (53)]).* TpipXiov [so T (cf. Proleg. p. 102) WH ; -/SXi'oi/ R G L Tr] (on the accent see Passow s. v. ; [Chandler § 350 ; Gottling p. 408]), -ov, to, a dish, a deep dish [cf. B. D. s. V. Dish] : Jit. xxvi. 23 ; Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Plut., Lcian., Ael. v. h. 9, 37; Sept. for iT^^^P, for which also in Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 10; Sir. x.xxiv. (xxxi.) 14.)* Tpvydu, -ai ; 1 aor. erpvyTja-a : (fr. Tpvyr; [lit. ' dryness '] fruit gathered ripe in autumn, harvest) ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. several times for "1S3, ri^K, IVD ; to f/ather in ripe fruits ; to gather the hat-vest or vintage : ^ as in the Grk. writ., with ace. of the fruit gathered, Lk. vi. 44 ; Rev. xiv. 18; or of the plant from which it is gathered. Rev. xiv. 19.» Tpvyiiv, -ovos, t), (fr. Tpv^a to murmur, sigh, coo, of doves; cL yoyyv^a), a turtk-ilore: Lk. ii. 24. (Arstph., Theocr., al. ; Ael. v. h. 1, 15 ; Sept. for ih-) ' TpvjxaXid, -us, Tj, (i. q. Tpvpa, or Tpiiprj. f r. Tpvoi to wear away, perforate), a hole, [_eye of a needle] : Mk. x. 25, and R G in Lk. -xviii. 25. (Judg. xv. 11 ; Jer. xiii. 4 ; xvi. 16 ; Sotad. in Plut. mor. p. 11 a. [i. e. de educ. puer. §14]; Geop.)* Tpiilin](ia, -Tos, TO, (rpuTrdo) to bore), a hole, {eye of a needle] : Mt. xix. 24 [here WII txt. Tprjpa, ([. v.]. (Ar- stph., Plut., Geop., al.) * Tpiiaiva, -rjs. 17, (Tpvcpda, q. v.), Tryphana, a Chris- tian woman : l\o. .xvi. 12. [B. D. s. v. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 1 75 sq.] * Tpvc^du, -a> : 1 aor. irpvcprjaa ; {rpvtprj, q. v.) ; to live delicately, live luxuriously, be given to a soft and luxuri- ous life: Jas. v. 5. (Neh. ix. 25; Is. Ixvi. 11 ; Isocr., Eur., Xen., Plat., sqq.) [CoJIP. : ev-rpvipda. Syn. cf. Trench § liv.]* Tpv<|>T), -ijs, Tf, (fr. BpvTTTU) to break down, enervate; pass, and mid. to live softly and delicatelx-), softness, effeminacy, luxurious living: Lk. vii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 13. (Eur., Arst])h., Xen., Plato, sqq.; Sept.)* TpvtjxSo-a, -i)f, r], {rpvcpda, q. v.), Tnjphosa, a Chris- tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [See reff. under Tpi^aiva.] * Tpuds, and (so L T WH [see I, i and re£E. in Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]) Tpads, -dSos, ij, [on the art. with it see W. § 5, b.], Troas, a city near the Hellesiiont, for- merly called 'AvTiydveia Tp., but by Lysimachus 'AX^idv Spfta 17 Tp. in honor of Alexander the Great ; it llourished under the Romans [and with its environs was raised by Augustus to a colonia juris ilalici, ' the Troad ' ; cf. Strab. 1 3, 1 , 26 ; Plin. 5,33]: Acts xvi. 8, 1 1 ; xx. 5 sq. ; 2 Co. ii. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 13. [B. D. s.v.]' Tpu-yvWiov (so Ptolem. 5, 2, 8), or TpayiXiov [(better -yvXtov: see IVH. App. p. 159)] (so Strab. 14, p. G36), -ov, TO, Trogyllium, the name of a town and promontory of Ionia, not far from the island Samos, at the foot of Mt. Mycale, between Ephesus and the mouth of the river Maeander : Acts xx. 15 R G. [Cf. B.D. s. v.] * Tpi&'yui ; /() gnaw, craunch, chew raw vegetables or fruits (as nuts, almonds, etc.) : Syptoariv, of mules, Hom. Od. 6, 90, and often in other writers of animals feeding; also of men fr. Hdt. down (as oi, we mess together, Polyb. 32, 9, 9) joined with TTiVftc, Mt. xxiv. ;iS (so also Dcmii. p. 40-.', 21 ; I'hit. symp. 1, 1, 2; Ev. Xicoil. c. 15, p. 640 ed. Tliilo [p. 2")1 ed. Tdf.]) ; Toi/ i"pTov,Jn. xiii. 18 (see apros 2 and (a-Bia b.); figuratively, Jn. vi. 58 ; t^x aapKa, the ' tlesh ' of Christ (see vap^, 1), Jn. vi. 54, 5G sq.* Tvyxdvo); 2 aor. I'ti;;(oi' ; pf. (Heb. viii. (i) rtTfvxa [so cod. B], and (so L T Tr nirg. AVII cod. S) rirvxa a later and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67 (59) ; Kiihner § .S43 s. v. ; [Veitch s. v. : Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 595 ; ]\'H. App. p. 1 "1]), in some texts also rervxiKa (a form com. in the earlier writ. \_Uutherford, New I'hryn. p. 483 sq., and reff. as above]) ; a verb in freq. use fr. Ilom. down ; " est Lat. attingere et contingere ; Germ. trejfen, c. accus. i. q. elwas erlangen, neut. es trifft sich." A.il, Lex. Platon. s. v. ; hence 1. trans. a. prop, to Jilt the mark (opp. to ap.apTaveiv to miss the mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Hom., Xen., Leian.). b. trop. to reach, attain, obtain, get, become master of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200 (188)), Lk. XX. 35 [W. 609 (5GG)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3); xxvi. 22; xxvii. 3; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. viii. 6; xi. 85. 2. intrans. to happen, chance, fall out : el tv^oi (if it so fallout), it may be, perhaps, (freq. in prof, auth.), I Co. xiv. 10, where see Meyer; or, considered in ref. to the topic in hand, it may be i. q. to specify, to take a case, as, for example, 1 Co. xv. 37, (^'ulg. in each pass. ut puta ; [cf. Meyer u. s.]) ; tvx<>v, adverbially, perhaps, it may be, 1 Co. .xvi. 6 (ct. B. §145, ,s ; [W. § 45, 8 N. 1]; see exx. fr. Grk. writ, in Passow s. v. II. 2 b. ; [L. and S. s. v. B. III. 2 ; Soph. Lex. s. v.]). to meet one ; hence 6 Tvxa>v, he who meets one or presents hi7nself unsought, any chance, ordinary, common person, (see Passow s. v. II. 2 ; [L. and S. s. v. A. II. 1 b. ; Soph. Lex. s. v.]) : ol rvx^v, not common, i. e. eminent, exceptional, [A. V. special'\. Acts xix. 11 ; xxviii. 2, (3 Mace. iii. 7); to chance to be: t]pt6avri Tvyxamvra, half dead as he happened to be, just as he was, Lk. x. 30 RG. [Comp. ; fv, intp-ev-, em-, ■napa-, trvv- rvyxava.^ * Tuinravt^u ; (Tvpiravov) ; 1. to beat the drum or timbrel. 2. to torture u-ith the tympanum, an in- strument of punishment : eTVinranicrdqaav ( Vulg. distenti sunt), Heb. xi. 35 [R. V. were tortured (with marg. Or, beaten to death)'] (Pint. mor. p. 60 a. ; joined with avacrKo- Xoffiffo-^ai, Lcian. Jup. trag. 19) ; the tympanum seems to have been a wheel-shaped instrument of torture, over which criminals were stretched as though they were skins, and then horribly beaten with clubs or thongs [cf. our 'to break upon the wheel'; see Eng. Diets, s. v. Wheel] ; cf. [Bleek on Heb. u. s.] ; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 19 sq.* •nnriKJSs, (fr. the adj. tvitikos. and this fr. tvttos), adv., hy tvay of example (prefguratirely) : TaCra ruTriKwr avve- 0aivov exeivois, tliese things happened unto them as a warning to posterity [R. V. hy v:ay of example'], 1 Co. x. II L T Tr WH. (Eceles. writ.) * Tiiros, -ov, 6, (rvTTT-d)), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down; 1. the mark of a stroke or blow, print : rSiv ip^av, .In. xx. 25*, 25'' [where LTTrmrg. tottou], (Athen. 13 p. 585 c. Tovs TVTTovs Tuv 7r\rjy(av L8ov(Ta). 2. a Jigure formed by a bloic or im/)ression ; hence univ. a Jigure, image : of the images of the gods, Acts vii. 43 (Amos v. 26 ; Jo- seph, antt. 1, 19, 11 ; 15, 9, 5). [Cf. Kvptoi rxmos Beovr Barn. ep. 19, 7 ; ' Teaching ' 4, 1 1 .] 3. form : SiSa- Xrjs, i. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and sub- stance of religion and rei)resents it to the mind, Ko. vi. 17; i. q. manner of icriting, the contents and form of a letter. Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Mace. iii. 30). 4. an ex- ample ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in- conformity to which a thing must be made: Acts vii. 44;. Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. x.\v. 40). p. in an ethical sense,. a dissuasive example, pattern of teaming : plur. of ruin- ous events which serve as admonitions or warnings to- others, 1 Co. X. 6, 1 1 R G ; an example to be imitated : of men worthy of imitation, Phil. iii. 1 7 ; witli a gen. of the- pers. to whom the example is offered. 1 Tim. iv. 12; 1 Pet. V. 3 • Ti'TTOv eavTuv hibovai Ttvl, 2 Th. iii. 9 ; yeveaQai TVTTov [tvjtous R L uirg. Wll mrg. ; cf. W. § 27, 1 note] TLvl, 1 Th. i. 7 ; nap€xe(yBai eavTov tvttov KaXwv epytav, to- show one's self an example of good works. Tit. ii. 7. ^.^ in a doctrinal sense, a type i. e. a person or thing prefigur- ing a future (Messianic) person or thing: in this sense Adam is called tvtvos tov peWovros sc. 'ASd/i, i. e. of Jesus Christ, each of the two having exercised a pre-emi- nent influence upon the human race (the former destruc- tive, the latter saving), Ro. v. 14." TuiTTw ; impf. ervKTOv ; pres. pass. inf. rvTrrecrBai ; fr. Horn, down ; Se])t. for n3n ; to strike, smile, beat (with a staff, a whip, the fist, the hand, etc.) : rivd, Mt. xxiv. 49 ; Lk. xii. 45 ; Acts .wiii. 1 7 ; xxi. 32 ; xxiii. 3 : to orofia Tivos, Acts xxiii. 2 ; to Trpoa-anov Tiyor, Lk. xxii. 64 [liere L br. T Tr WH om. the cl.] ; nva em [Tdf. eh] tt/v a-ia- yova, Lk, vi. 29 ; els t. KccjiaXjjv tlvos, Mt. xxvii. 30 ; [^ttjp' Kepeva Tvyj/e ^af^eiav, Horn, n. 19, 125 ; Kap^vaea eTvyjre rj d'KrjBrjtrj twv 'Xuyuiv, Hdt. 3, 64).' Tupavvos, -ov, 6, Tyrannus, an Ephesian in whose school Paul taught the gospel, but of wliom we have no- further knowledge [cf. B. D. s. v.] : Acts xix. 9.* TvpPaJci) : pres. pass. Tvp0d^opai ; (jvp^rj, Lat. turba,. confusion; [cf. Curtius § 250]) ; [fr. Soph, down]; to- disturb, trouble: prop, tov mjKov, Arstph. vesp. 257; trop.. in pass, to be troubled in mind, disquieted : nepl ttoXXo,. Lk. X. 41 R G (with the same constr. in Arstph. pax 1007; pfi ayav Tup/3dfou, Xilus cpist. 2, 258).* Tvpios, -on, 6, ij, a Tyrian, inhabitant of TyTe: Acts; xii. 20. [(Hdt., al.)]* Tvpoo>, to raise a smoke; hence prop. ' darkened by smoke '), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for iy, blind; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 27 sq.; xi. 5; Mk. viii. 22 sq. ; X. 46 ; Lk. vii. 21 sq. ; xiv. 13, 21 ; Jn. ix. 1 sq. 13 ; X. 21, etc. b. as often in prof. auth. fr. Find, down, mentally WiW: Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 17,19, 24, 26; Jn. ix. 39-tl ; Ro. ii. 19 ; 2 Pet. i. 9 ; Rev. iii. 17. Tin(>\i5u, -a : 1 aor. iri^Xaxra ; pf. TeriifjAaKa ; fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down ; to blind, make blind ; in the N. T. metaph. to blunt the mental discernment, darken the mind : Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 11; ra i/oij/iaTo, 2 Co. iv. i, (tt/v •^vxfjv Tv, -a : Pass., pf. T€Tv(pQ>iJ.ai ; 1 aor. ptcp. TVci> : (rC(^or, smoke) ; fr. Hdt. down ; to cause or emit smoke (Plant. y«;Hi^co), raise a smoke; pass. (pres. ptcp. Tvcfiofievos) to smoke (Vulg. fumigo) : Mt. xii. 20.* ■n)(j)wviKos, -ij, -6v, (rvipav [cf. Chandler ed. 1 § 659], a whirlwind, hurricane, typhoon), like a whirlwind, tempcstunus : Svefios, Acts xxvii. 14.* TvxiKos [so AVH; W. § 6, 1 1.] but RGL T Tr Tvxi- (cos (Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30 ; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Chandler § 266]), -ov, 6, Tychicus, an Asiatic Christian, friend and companion of the ajjostle Paul : Acts xx. 4 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 12 ; Tit. iii. 12. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. ; B. D. s. v.] * TVXov, see Tvy\ava, 2. [T, v. on the use and the omission of the mark of diaeresis with, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 108 ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 136 sqq. ; cf. Scrivener, Collation of Cod. Sin. etc. 2d ed. p. xxxviii.] vOKtveivos. -J/, -Of, (vaKivBos), of hyacinth, of the color of hyacinth, i. e. of a red color bordering on black (Hesych. vaKivBivov viroiieXavi^ov) : Rev. Lx. 17 (Hom., Theocr., Lcian., al. ; Sept.).* viiKiveos, -ov, 6, hyacinth, the name of a flower (Hom. and other poets ; Theophr.), also of a precious stone of the same color, i. e. dark-blue verging towards black [A. Y. jacinth (so R. V. with mrg. sapphire) ; cf. B. D. s. V. Jacinth ; Riehm s. v. Edeisteine 9] (Philo, Joseph.. Galen, Heliod., al. ; Plin. h. n. 37, 9, 41) : Rev. xxi. 20.* voXivos. -r], -ov, (vaXos, q. v.). in a fragment of Corinna and occasionally in the Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down, of glass or transparent like glass, glassy: Rev. iv. 6 ; xv. 2.* voXos, -ov, 6, [prob. allied w. vet, iSeroj (q-v.) ; hence 'rain-drop', Curtius §604; Vanicek p. 1046; but al. make it of Egypt, origin (cf. L. and S. s. v.)], fr. Hdt. ([3, 24] who writes ueXof ; [cf. W. 22]) down ; 1. any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass : Rev. xxi. 18, 21.» vPplla ; 1 aor. v^piaa ; Pass., 1 aor. ptcp. v^pur6(ls ; 1 fut. v^pta-dria-ofiat ; (v^pts) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. intrans. to be insolent ; to behave insolently, wantonly, outrageously. 2. trans, to act insolently and shame- fully towards one (so even Hom.), to treat shamefully, [ct. W. § 32, 1 b. ^.] : Mt. xxii. 6 ; Lk. xviii. 32 ; Acts xiv. 5 ; [1 Th. ii. 2] ; of one who injures another by speaking evil of him, Lk. xi. 45. [Comp. : fVujSpi'fu.] * v'Ppis, -eats, r), (fr. inip [(see Curtius p. 540) ; cf. Lat. superbus, Eng. 'uppishness ']), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ri'KJ, mXJ, jn!, etc.; a. insolence; impudence, pride, haughtiness. b. a tcrong springing from insolence, an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental in- jury and the wantonness of its infliction being prom- inent ; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26 ; 2, 2, 5 ; see iS/SpioTTjs] : prop., plur. 2 Co. xii. 10 (Hc.«ych. v^pfis- Tpaifuara. oceiSij) ; trop. injury inflicted by the violence of a tempest : Acts xxvii. 10, 21, (t^v diro tSuv S/i^pav v^piv, Joseph, antt. 3,6,4; SftVao-a ^aXaTn;? v^piv, Anthol. 7, 291, 3 ; [cf. Pind. Pyth. 1, 140]).* vppKTT^s. -oC, 6, (v^pl(co), fr. Hom. down, an insolent man, ' one who, uplifted with pride, cither heaps insulting language upon others or does them some shameful act of i>yian>a) 634 VlO^ tcrong ' (Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 8G ; [cf. Trench, S_vn. •§ xxix. ; Co/ie on Aristot. rliet. 2, 2, 5 (see v^pis)]) : ko. i. 30; 1 Tim. i. 13.' vYiaCvu; (wyi^r) ; fr. Ililt. down; lo he sound, to be well, to be in t/ood lie(d/!i : [jroj)., Lk. v. 31 ; vii. 10 ; xv. 27 ; [3 Jn. 2] ; metapli. tlie phrase vyiaiveiv iv tji martt [B. § 133, 19] is used of one whose Christian opinions ai-e free from any admixture of error, Tit. i. 13 ; rfj nlaret, •rfi dydirr], rij vTtonovfi, [cf. B. u. s.], of one who keei)S these graces sound and strong, Tit. ii. 2 ; ij vyialvovtra biba- ■ to moisten ; [but al. fr. a different r. meaning ' to moisten ', fr. which also Lat. umor, umidus ; cf. Vanicek p. 867; Curtius § 158]), fr. Horn, down, damp, moist, wet ; opp. to |ripor (q. v.), full of sap, green : |v\ov, Lk. xxiii. 31 (for 3b"i sajipv, in Job viii. vSpCa, -Of, ly, (v8v, see fd«). II. a. and foii}, 2 b. p. 274". ueris, -oC, 6, (t/ctf to rain), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for DU/jl and "^tpo, rain : Acts xiv. 17 ; xxviii. 2 ; Ileb. vi. 7 ; Jas. v. 7 (where L T Tr WII om. vetov; on this ])ass. see o\//'i/ior and n-pcii'/ior) ; ibid. 18; Rev. xi. 6.* vloSccrla, -as, r;, (fr. vios and Beats, cf. opodfo-ta, vojio- Bea-ia; in jjrof. auth. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down we find 6fT()s Kio's or ^erof irais, an adopted son), adoption, adop- tion as sons (Vidg. S>vos (see vviKpav), Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. V. 34, (t^s oKpas, the garrison of the citadel, 1 Mace. iv. 2 ; in Ossian ' a son of the hill ' i. e. ' a hunter ', ' a son of the sea ' i. e. 'a sailor'; cf. Jen. Lit. Zeit. for 183G No. 58 p. 462 sq.) ; tov alauos tovtov, those whose character belongs to this age [is 'worldly'], Lk. xvi. 8; x.x. 34; T^s- aweideias, i. e. dnfidds, Eph. ii. 2 ; v. 6 ; Col. iii. 6 [here T Tr WH oni. L br. the cl.], (duofiiai, Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxi.x.) 23; ttjs ineprirpavlas, 1 Mace. ii. 47); Qpovrrji, who resemble thunder, thundering, (see Boawp-yes), Mk. iii. 1 7 ; tov (jjaTos, instructed in evangelical truth and devotedly obedient to it, Lk. xvi. 8 ; Jn. xii. 36 ; with Kat Trjs Tfpipas added, 1 Th. v. 5; t^c dvacrTacrfais, sharers in the resurrection, Lk. xx. 36 ; TrapaK\J]a-ewi, Acts iv. 36 ; one to whom anything belongs : as viol tS>v npocjyrj- Tav K. TTjs SiaSqKr^s, those to whom the prophetic and covenant promises belong, Acts iii. 25 ; for whom a thing is destined, as viol t^s ffacnXelas, Jit. viii. 12; xiii. 38; rrjs dirioKeias, Jn. xvii. 12 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; one who is worthy of a thing, as ycivvris, Mt. xxiii. 15; flpfjvrjs, Lk. x. 6, (Bavdrov, 1 S. XX. 31 ; 2 S. xii. 5; ni3ri [3, Sept. a^ios TT^Tjycjv. Deut. XXV. 2). [Syx. see teVtoi/.] vlos Toil dvdpmnov, Sept. for D"1>! ]3, Chald. njX 13, son of man ; it is 1. prop, a periphrasis for 'man', €sp. com. in the poet. bks. of the O. T., and usually car- rying with it a suggestion of weakness and mortality: Num. xxiii. 19 ; Job xvi. 21 ; xxv. 6 ; Ps. viii. 5; Is. Ii. 12 ; Sir. xvii. 30 (25), etc. ; often in Ezekiel, where God addresses the prophet by this name, as ii. 1, 3; iii. 1 (ii. 10), etc. ; plur. DISH "J3 (because D"JS wants the plur.), viol tS)v dv6p<07Tav, Gen. xi. 5 ; 1 S. xxvi. 1 9 ; Ps. x. (.xi.) 4 ; Prov. viii. 31, etc. So in the N. T. : Mk. iii. 28 ; Eph. iii. 5, (Sap. ix. 6); .sing, o/ioios vladvSp. \llke unto a son of mcui], of Christ in the apocalyptic vision, Rev. i. 13 [here vlov T WH txt.] ; xiv. 14 [ylov T WH], (after Dan. vii. 13). 2. In Dan. vii. 13 sq., cf. 18, 22, 27, the appellation son of tnan (U/JX 13) symbolically denotes the fifth kingdom, universal and Messianic; and by this term its humanity is indicated in contrast with the barbarity and ferocity of the four preceding kingdoms (the Babylonian, the Median, the Persian, the Macedo- nian) typified under the form of beasts (vs. 2 sqq.). But in the book of Enoch (written towards the close of the 2d cent, before Christ [but cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) ; Lipf:ius in Diet, of Chris. Biog. s. v.; Dillmann in Her- zog (ed. 2, vol. xii. p. 350 sq.) ; Schodde, Book of Enoch, p. 20 sqq.]) the name ^son of man' is emploj'cd to desig- nate the person of the Messiah: 46, 2sq.; 48, 2; 62, 7. 9.14; 63,11; 69, 26 sq.; 70,1; 71,17. (The chapters in which the name occurs are the work, if not of the first author of the book (as Ewald and Dillmann think [but see B. D. Am. ed. p. 740'' ; and Herzog as above p. 351]), at least of a Jewish writer (cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 32 V. 2 p. 626), certainly not (as Hilgen- feld, Volkmar, Keim, and others imagine) of a Chris- tian interjiolator.) In the language of the Jews in Jn. xii. 34 the titles Xpiordr and vlos tov dvOpioirov are used as synonyms. 3. The title 6 vlos tov dvdpanov, the Son of Man, is used by Jesus of himself (speaking in the third person) in Mt. viii. 20; ix. 6 ; x. 23 ; xi. 19; xii. 8, 32, 40 ; xiii. 37, 41 ; xvi. 13, 27 sq. ; xvii. 9, 12, 22 ; xviii. 11 Rec. ; xix. 28 ; xx. 18, 28 ; xxiv. 27, 30, 37, 39, 44; xxiv. 30 (twice) ; xxv. 13 Rec, 31 ; xxvi. 2, 24, 45, 64 ; Mk. ii. 10, 28 ; viii. 31, 38 ; ix. 9, 12, 31 ; x. 33, 45; xiii. 26; xiv. 21, 41, 02; Lk. v. 24 ; vi. 5, 22; vii. 34; i.x. 22, 26, 44, 56 Rec, 58 ; xi. 30; xii. 8, 10, 40 ; .xvii. 22, 24, 26, 30; xviii. 8, 31 ; xix. 10; xxi. 27, 36; xxii. 22, 48,69; xxiv. 7; Jn.i. 51(52); iii. 13sq.; vi. 27, 53, 62 ; viii. 28 ; xii. 23, 34 ; xiii. 31, (once without the article, Jn. V. 27), doubtless in order that (by recalling Dan. vii. 13 sq. — not, as some suppose, Ps. viii. 5) he might thus intimate his Messiahship (as is plain from such pass, as oy^fcrOe T. vl. T. dv3p. . . . ip)(_6p.evov iivl tcov V((f>€- \q>v Toil ovpa vo 0, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62, cf. Dan. vii. 13; TOV vi. t. dvdp. fp^dfievov iv ttj fiaci\eia avToii, Mt. xvi. 28 ; oTav KaBiarj 6 vL r. dv6p. ctti Opovov So^rjs avTov, Mt. xix. 28) ; and also (as appears to be the case at least fr. IMk. ii. 28, where d vlos tov dv6pai7rov stands in emphatic antithesis to the repeated d avdpwrros preceding), that he might designate himself as the head of the human race, the man Kar e^oxqv, the one who both furnished the pattern of the perfect man and acted on behalf of all mankind. Christ seems to have pre- ferred this to the other Messianic titles, because by its lowliness it was least suited to foster the expectation of an earthly Messiah in royal splendor. There are no traces of the application of the name to Jesus in the apostolic age except in the speech of Stephen, Acts vii. 56, and tliat of James, the brother of Jesus, in a frag- ment from Hegesippus given in Eus. h. e. 2, 23 (25), 13, UW9 636 Tfiei'aioi eac-li being a reminiscence of the words of Jesus in ilt. .\xvi.6t,(to which maybe adiled, fr. the apostolic fathers, I'^iiat. ad Ephes. 20, 2 (v 'irjrrov Xpioroi tm Kara (rdpKa iril of God. Ro. viii. 14 {ouot 77vfvp.aTL 6(ov tiyovrat. ovTot viot fiVi Toil 6eov), repose the same calm and joyful trust in (iod which children do in their jiarents, Ro. viii. 14 sqq.; Gal. iii. 26; iv. 6 s(j., and hereafter in the bles.scd- ness and glory of the life eternal will openly wear this dig- nity of sons of God, Ro. viii. 19 {dnoKaXv^is twv viSiv toO 6(ov), cf. 1 Jn. iii. 2, (see t^kvov, b. y. [and reff.]). pre- eminently of Jesus, as enjoying the supreme love of God, united to him in affectionate intimacy, privy to his saving counsels, obedient to the Father's will in all his acts : Mt. xi. 27 ; Lk. x. 22 ; Jn. iii. 35 sq. ; v. 19 sq. In many passages of the writings of John and of Paul, this ethi- cal sense so blends with the metaphysical and the theo- cratic, that it is often very difhcult to decide which of these elements is predominant in a particular case : Jn. i. 34 ; iii. 1 7 ; v. 21-28, 25 sq. ; vi. 40 ; viii. 35 sq. ; xi. 4 ; xiv. 13 ; xvii. 1 ; 1 Jn. i. 3, 7 ; ii. 22-24 ; iii. 8, 23 ; iv. 10, 14 sq. ; V. 5, 9-13, 20 ; 2 Jn. 3, 9 ; Ro. i. 3, 9 ; v. 10 ; viii. 3, 29, 32 ; 1 Co. i. 9 ; .xv. 28 ; 2 Co. i. 1 9 ; Gal. i. 1 G ; ii. 20; Eph. iv. 13; 1 Th. i. 10; 6 uios T^r dyuTn/s avToi) (i. e. God's), Col. i. 13; 6 Xpiaros 6 vi- t. 6. .In. xx. ;il ; <> pomyfVTjs vi; Jn. i. 18 [here TrWII povoy. 6(6s. L mrg. o p. 6. (see povoy. and reff.)] ; iii. 18; o vi.T. 6. !> povoy., iii. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 9, (see povoy(vr]s). It can hardly be doubted that a reverent regard for the transcendent difference which separates Christ from all those who by his grace are exalted to the dignity of sons of God led •Tohn alwa>-s to call Christians tckto tov Btov, not as Paul does viol and tUvu toO Beoii indiscriminately ; the like reverence moved Luther to translate the plur. vio'i T. 6. everj-where by Kinder Goltes ; [cf., however, Tfuvov, b. y. and reff.]. This appellation is not found in 2 Th., Phil., Pbilcm., the Pastoral Epp., nor in 1 Pet. or in the Ep. of James.* vXi^, -Tjs, fj, a forest, a wood; felled wood, fuel: Jas. iii. 5. (From Hom. down ; Sept.) * \HuZs, sec (TV. 'Y(«'vaios [on its accent cf. W. § 6, 1 1. ; Chandler v/ieTepolia\ij.. and SfjLv. are specific, tlie former designating a song which took its general character from the O. T. ' Psalms ' (al- though not restricted to them, see 1 Co. xiv. 15, 2G), the latter a song of praise. " While the leading idea of ^aK/i. is a musical acconqjaniment, and that of S^v. praise to God, tiS-q is the general word for a song, whether accompanied or unaccompanied, whether of praise or on any other subject. Thus it was quite possible for the same song to be at once <(/o\;uo's, vfivos ami ^jStj" (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 16). The words occur together in Col. iii. 16 and Eph. v. 19. vSee Trench, Syu. § Ixxviii.] ■iv-ayu) ; impf. vittfyov ; 1. trans, to lead under, bring under, (l^TiX. suhducere) ; so in various applications in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; once in the Scriptures, inir)yaye Kvpios Tr]v BaXaauav, for ^"'^iri, he caused to re- cede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one's self, to go away, depart, [cf. Sya, 4; and see B. 204 (177)] : absoL, Mk. vi. 33 ; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Tr mrg. nopfieadai) ; xvii. 14 ; Jn. viii. 21 ; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5) ; oi epxo- lievoi KOL ol v7TayovT€s, coming and going, INIk. vi. 31 ; indyei k. niaXu, Mt. xiii.44 ; vnfjyov k. (rrta-revov, Jn. xii. 11 ; [Jva vTrayrjTC k. Kapnov (piprjre, Jn. xv. 16]; a<^lr)p.l Tiva vTTayfiv, to permit one to depart freely wherever he wishes, Jn. xi. 44 ; xviii. 8 ; vwayt is -used by one in dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 RTTr WH]; viii. 13; XX. 14 ; Mk. [ii. 9 Tdf.] ; vii. 29 ; x. 52 ; with eU flprjvrjv added, Mk. v. 34 ; vTrdyere iv elpfivrj, Jas. ii. 16 ; or in sending one somewhere to do something. Lk. x. 3 ; plur. Mt. viii. 32 ; with oriental circumstantiality (see dvi- arqpi, II. 1 c.) vnaye is prefixed to the imperatives of other verbs : Mt. v. 24 ; vui. 4 ; [xviii. lo G L T Tr WH] ; xix. 21; .xxi. 28; xxvii. 65; xxviii. 10; Mk. i. 44; .\. 21; xvi. 7 ; Jn. iv. 16 ; i.x. 7 ; Rev. x. 8 ; with Kai inserted, Mt. xviii. 15 Rec. ; Mk. vi. 38 [T Tr WH om. Tr br. koQ ; Rev. xvi. 1. Particularly, iirayw is used to denote the final departure of one who ceases to be another's com- panion or attendant, Jn. vi. 67; euphemistically, of one who departs from life, Mt. xxvi. 24; Jlk. xiv. 21. with designations of place : irov (for irol [W. § 54, 7 ; B. 71 (62)]), Jn. xii. 35 ; xiv. 5 ; xvi. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 11 ; opp. to epX((r6m, to come, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14 ; ottou (for o;rot [W. and B. u. s.]), Jn. viii. 21 sq. ; xiii. 33, 36 : xiv. 4 ; Rev. xiv. 4 ; cKei, Jn. xi. 8 ; Tvpos tov irip^avra. pc, Trpos tov naTepa, npus toi/ deov, to depart (from earth) to the father (in heaven) is used by Jesus of himself, Jn. vii. 33 ; xiii. 3 ; xvi. 5, 10, 16 [T Tr WH om. L br. the cL], 1 7 ; foil, by els with an ace. of the place, 3It. ix. 6 ; xx. 4, 7 ; Mk. ii" 11 ; xi. 2; .xiv. 13 ; Lk. xi.x. 30 ; Jn. vi. 21 [cf. B. 283 (243)] ; vii. 3 ; ix. 11 ; xi. 31 ; els alxpaXaialav, Rev. xiii. 10; els diTaiXetav, Rev. xvii. S, 11 ; foil, by els w. an acc. of the place and n-po's nva, Mt. xxvi. 18; Mk..v. 19; indyo em Tiva, Lk. xii. 58 ; virdyo) with an inf. denoting the purpose, Jn. xxi. 3 ; lierd nvos with an ace. of the way, Mt. V. 41. On the phrase vnaye dnltrto pov [Mt. iv. lOGLbr. ; .xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33 ; Lk. iv. 8 R L in br.], see oTriVo), 2 a. fin.* ijir-aKOTJ, -rjs, r], (fr. vwaKoia), q. v.), obedience, compli- ance, submission, (opp. to napaxorj) : absol. els iTraKoljV, unto obedience i. e. to obey, Ro. vi. 16 [cf. W. 612 (569); B. § 151, 28 d.] ; obedience rendered to any one's coun- sels: with a subject, gen., 2 Co. vii. 15; x. 6; Philem. 21 ; with a gen. of the object, — of the thing to which one submits himself, ttjs nioTeas (see niaris, 1 b. a. p. 513"), Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; t^i aXij^fi'as, 1 Pet. i. 22; of the person, toO XpiaTov, 2 Co. x. 5 ; the obedience of one who conforms his conduct to God's commands, absol. 1 Pet. i. 2 ; opp. to dpaprla, Ro. vi. 16 ; reKva vnaKO^s, i. e. imfjKoot, 1 Pet. i. 14 ; with a subjective gen. Ro. .xv. 18 ; an obedience shown in observing the requirements of Christianity, vtt- vpav, i. e. contextually, the report con- cerning your obedience, Ro. xvi. 19 ; the obedience with which Christ followed out the saving purpose of God, esp. by his sufferings and death : absol. Heb. v. 8 ; with a gen. of the subject, Ro. v. 19. (The word is not found in prof. auth. ; nor in the Sept., except in 2 S. xxii. 36 with the sense of favorable hearing; in 2 S. xxiii. 23 Aq. we find 6 iiri vnaKorjv nvos, Vulg. qui alicui est a secretis, where it bears its primary and proper signification of listening; see v7TaKoia>.) * VTraKovto 638 irrrep vir-aKovw ; iinpf. vnfjKovov ; 1 aor. irrrTjKovtra ; fr. Horn, down ; lo lislen, hearken ; 1. prop. : of one who on a knock at the door comes to listen who it is, (the duty of the porter), Acts xii. 13 [where A. V. hearken, R. V. angirer^ (Xen. syrap. 1,11; Plat. Crito p. 43 a. ; Phaedo p. 59 e. ; Dem., Lcian., Plut., al.). 2. to hearken to a command, i. c. to oheij, he obedient unto, suhmil to, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Ililt. down) : absol. Phil. ii. 12 [cf. W. 5'M (552)] ; inrjKovtrei' e^fXBflf, [11. V. obeyed lo go out i. e.] went out obediently, Ileb. xi. .S; with a dat. of the pers. (in (Irk. writ, also w. a gen.), Mt. viii. 27; Mk. i. 27; iv. 41 ; Lk. viii. 25; .wii. G ; Ko. vi. 10; Epli. vi. 1, 5; Col. iii. 20, 22 ; Ileb. v. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; with a dat. of the thing, -nj irlarci (see irians, 1 b. a. p. SIS' near top). Acts vi. 7 ; virr^Kovtrare €ts ov 7raped6$T)Te rvnov Bi8a^TJs, by attraction for tm tiJttm r^r 8i8a)(rjs ds ov ktX. [\V. § 24, 2 b. ; cf. TV1T0S, 3], Ro. vi. 1 7 ; tw fiayyfAiw. Ro. X. IG ; 2 Th. i. 8 ; tm Xoyw, 2 Th. iii. 14 ; tj dfiupTia (llec), rais (TriBvfiiats (L T Tr \VII), i. e. to allow one's self to be ca]ilivatiMl by, governed by, etc., Ro. vi. 12.* i'lTQvSpos, -ov, (yno and dvfjp), under i. e. subject to a man : ywij, married, Ro. vii. 2. (Num. v. [20], 29 ; Sir. ix. 9 ; [Prov. vi. 24] ; xli. 21 ; Polyb. 10, 26, 3 ; [Diod. 32, 10, 4 vol. V. 50, 17 ed. Dind.] ; Plut., Artem., Heliod.)* vir-ovTau), -w : 1 aor. im^vrriaa ; to go to meet, to meet : Tivi, Mt. viii. 28 ; Lk. viii. 27 ; Jn. xi. 20, 30; xii. 18 ; also LTTr Wll in Mk. v. 2; Jn. iv. 51 ; and T Tr WH in Mt. xxviii. 9; Acts xvi. 10; [and T in Lk. xvii. 12 (so WII mrg. but without the dat.)] ; in a military reference, of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 LTTrWH. (Find., Soph., Eur., Xen., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., al.) * «ir-ovnieris, -fur, 17, (vnairraio), a going to meet : Jn. xii. 13, and LT Tr WH in Mt. viii. 34 [B. § 146, 3] and xxv. 1 [cf. B. 1. c.]. (Judg. -xi. 34; Joseph, antt. 11, 8, 4; App. b. c. 4, 6.) • ii7rap|is, -fas, ^, (v7rapxa>, <]. v.), [fr. Aristot. down], possession!:, goods, wcallli, property, (i. q. ra vndpxovra) : Acts ii. 45; Ileb. x. 34, (for i:;0"), 2 C'hr. xxxv. 7; Dan. xi. 24 Theodot. ; for njp"?, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 48 ; Jer. ix. 10; for pTl, Pi'ov, xviii, 11; xix, 14; Polyb,, Dion. Hal., Diod., Plut., Artem.).' vn^apx»; impf. i!7r5p;(oi'; 1. prop, to begin below, to make a beginning ; univ. to begin; (Horn., Aesehyl., Ildt., sqq.). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be readg, be at hand, (Aesehyl., lidt., Pind., sqq.) : univ. and simply. Acts xix. 40 [of. B. § 151, 29 note] ; xxvii. 12, 21 ; (V Ttvi, to be found in one. Acts xxviii. 18 ; with a dat. of the pers. imdpxft fiol n, something is mine, I have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 8 (where Lchm. Trapovra; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17; Job ii. 4, etc.) ; ra vndpxovrd nvi, one's substance, one's property, Lk. viii. 3 ; xii. 15 L txt. T Tr WH; Acts iv. 32, (Gen. xxxi. 18 ; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40) ; also ra VTT. Tivos, Mt. xix. 21 ; xxiv. 47 ; xxv. 14 ; Lk. xi. 21 ; xii. 15 R G L mrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the dat.] ; xiv. 33 ; .xvi. 1 ; xix. 8 ; 1 Co. .xiii. 3 ; Heb. x. 34, (often in Sept. for n:po, tyo^, D'DD: ; Sir. .xli. 1 ; Tob. i. 20, etc, ; to Mm vTrap^ovra, Polyb, 4, 3, 1), 3. to be. with a predicate nom, (as often in Attic) [cf. B. § 144, 14, 15 a., 18; W . 350 (328)] : as Spxav rijt (rvi/ayayijs inrjpxfi', Lk. viii. 41; add, Lk. ix. 48; Acts vii. 55; viii. 10 ; xvi. 3 ; xix. 36 ; xxi. 20; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; xii. 22; Jas. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 11; the ptcp. with a predicate nom., being i. e. tcho is etc., since or although he etc. is : Lk. -wi. 14; xxiii. 50; Acts ii. 30; iii. 2; xiv. 8 Rec; xvii. 24 ; [xxii. 3] ; Ro. iv. 1 9 ; 1 Co. xi. 7 ; 2 Co. viii. 1 7 ; xii. 16 ; (ial. i. 14 ; ii. 14 ; plur., Lk. xi. 13 ; .\cts xvi. 20, 37 ; xvii. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 19. vndpxfiv foil, by «1/ w. a dat. of the thing, lo be contained in, Acts .\. 12 ; to be in a place, Phil. iii. 20; in some state, Lk. .xvi. 23 ; iv TJj e'^ouo-ia Tivdt, to be left in one's power or disposal. Acts v. 4 ; ev IfiaTUTna f'vdu^ia leai Tpvjj, to be gprgeously ap- parelled and to live delicately, Lk. vii. 25 ; eV /xop05 Beov vndpx^^"' 'o ^e in the form of (iod (see /xop<^^), Phil, ii. [here R. V. mrg. Gr. being originalli/ (? ; yet cf. 1 Co. xi. 7)] ; foil, by t'l/ with a dat. plur. of the pers., among, Acts iv. 34 R ( j ; 1 Co. xi. IH. vir. fiaKpav and Ttrar, Acts .xvii. 27; npus -rrji a-a-njpias, to be conducive to safety, Acts xxvii. 34. [CoMP. : jrpo- vndpxa-} ' vt-cCku ; fr. Horn, down ; to resist no longer, but to give wag, yield, (prop, of combatants) ; metaph. to yield to authority anil admonition, to submit : Ileb. xiii. 17.* vir-tvavrCos, -a, -OK ; a. opposite lo; set over against : tiTTToi. V7T(V. dWrjKots, meeting one another, Hes. scut. 347. b. trop. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.), opposed lo, ciinlrary to: nvi, Col. ii. 14 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; 6 imev. as subst. (Xen., Polyb., Plut.), an adversary, Heb. X. 27, cf. Sept. Is. xxvi. 11, (Sept. for 3"1N, ii') ; often in the O. T. Apocr.* vrtif, [cf. Eng. up, over, etc.], Lat. super, over, a prep- osition, which stands before either the gen. or the ace. according as it is used to express the idea of state and rest or of motion over and beyond a ]ilace. I. with the Genitive; cf. W. 382 (358) sq. 1. prop, of place, i. e. of position, situation, extension : over, above, beyond, across. In tlus sense it does not occur in the N. T. ; but there it always, though joined to other classes of words, has a tropical signification de- rived from its original meaning. 2. i. q. Lat. pro, for, i.e. for one's safety, for one's advantage or benefl, (one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as standing or bending 'over' the one whom he would shield or defend [cf. W. u. s.]) : irpoa-fvxopai vntp t. ^It. v. 44 ; Lk. vi. 28 [TTrmrg. WII n^pi (see 6 below)]; Col. i. 3 L Tr \\'II mrg. (see 6 below) ; [Jas. v. 1 6 L Tr mrg. WII txt.], 9 ; eijxopai, Jas. v. 10 [R G T Tr txt. WH mrg.] ; after Seop.ai, Acts viii. 24 ; and nouns denoting prayer, as SfTjms, Ro. X. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 11 ; ix. 14 ; Phil. i. 4 ; EjA. vi. 19; npoiTevxri, Acts xii. 5 (here LTTrWH irepl [see 6 below]) ; Ro. xv. 30 ; 1 Tim. ii. 1,2; dvai v-nip t. (opp. to KixTti Tij/or), to be for one i. e. to be on one's side, to favor and further one's cause, Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, cf. 2 Co. xiii. 8; to iirip t. that which is for one's advantage, Phil. iv. 10 [but see dvaddWai and pov£U), fin.] ; (vTvyxdva and i7rfpcv7vyxdv<>i, Ro. viii. 26 liG, 27, 34 ; Ileb. vii. 25, cf. Lx. 24 ; Xe'yo), Acts -xxvi. 1 virep 639 virep R WH txt. [see 6 below] ; fieptuva, 1 Co. xii. 25 ; dypvnvii, lleb. xiii. 17; dytavi^ofiat. iv rais Trpoirfv^aity Col. iv. 12, cf. Ro. XV. 30; jrpco-/3fi;, init.), 1 Co. v. 7 ; jrade'ii', 1 Pet.ii.21 ; iii. 18[RG Wllmrg.; iv. 1 RG]; dytdftii/ eavTov, Jn. xvii. 19. Since what is done for one's ad- vantage frequently cannot be done without acting in his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead), we easily understand how incp, like the Lat. pro and ourybr, comes to signify 3. in the place of, mstead of, (which is more precisely expressed by avri; hence the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv. haer. 5, 1, tw IBtco aipan XyTptatrapivov rjfias tov Kvpiov Koi SovTot TTjV ylfvxfjv inrip rav rip-eripav \jfvxo"> Ka\ rfjv aapKa ttjv eavTov dvTi tq)V ripcripuv fjapKwv) '. Zva vrrep , Horn. E. 9, 501 ; Plat. rep. 2 p. 366 a. ; spec, of «ne who defrauds another in business, overreaches, (Luth. zu weit greifen), with /cm nXeovticrclv added, 1 Th. iv. 6 [but see irpdypa, b.].* virepPaXXdvTws, (fr. the ptcp. of the verb vff€p/3aXX(o, as Srrms fr. wv), above measure : 2 Co. xi. 23. (Job xv. 11; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al.) • virep-pdWu ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. trans, to surpass in thruirinij; lo throw over or beyond any thing. 2. iulrans. to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel ; ])tcp. iirtp- fioKKav, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. [in Eph. i. 19 ; iii. 19] supereminens \ (Aeschyl., Ildt., Eur., Isocr., Xen., Plat., al.) : 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 14; Eph. i. 19; ii. 7; with a gen. of the object surpassed (Aeschyl. Prom. 923 ; Plat. (iorg. p. 475 b. ; cf. Matthiae § 358, 2), ij imp^d\- Xovtra Trjs yi/uxTfwi dydm) XpioroC, the love of Christ which passcth knowledge, Ejih. iii. 19 [cf. ^V. 346 (324) note].* vir«p-Po\T|, -tjs, ij, {iTTfpfidXXa, (J. v.), fr. lldt. [8, 1 1 2, 4] and 'I'huc. down ; 1. prop, a throzving beyond. 2. metaph. superiority, excellence, pre-eminence, [R. V. ex- ceeding greatness'] : with a gen. of the thing, 2 Co. iv. 7 ; xii. 7 ; Kaff inep^o\r)v, beyond measure, exceedingly, pre- eminently : Ro. vii. 13 ; 1 Co. xii. 31 [cf. W. § 54, 2 b.; B. §125, 11 fin.]; 2 Co. i. 8; Gal. i. 13, (4 Mace. iii. 18; So])h. (). R. 1 1 96 ; Isocr. p. 84 d. [i. e. nput *tX. 5] ; Polyb. 3, 92, 10; Diod. 2, IG; 17, 47); Kaff ii!. fit infp^oXrjv, beyond all measure, [R. X. more anil more exceedingly'], 2 Co. iv. 17.* iiir«p-e7ii [Lchm.], i. ([■ vnip iyio (see inip, II. 2 c.) : 2 Co. xi. 23. Cf. W. 46 (45).« virtp-etSov ; (sec cif8u>) ; fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down ; to overlook, take no notice of, not attend to : ri, Acts xvii. 30.* iJirep-fKtiva, (i. (j. vnip ixdva, like imKtiva, i. (j. «V cKeica [W. § G, 1 1.]), beyond : rd in. twos, the regions lying be- yond the country of one's residence, 2 Co. x. IG [cf. W. § 51, G]. (B3zant. and eccles. writ.; iTTtKftva prjTopfs \tyovtTt . . . vTTfpiKftva hk povov ol cvpcjiaKfs, Thorn. ^lag. p. 33G [W. 463 (431)].)* virep-eK-ir«pi(rav[a, -as, r/, (JmfpT}avos, q. \.), p)nde, haughti- ness, arrogance, the characteristic of one who, with a swollen estimate of his own powers or merits, looks down on others and even treats them with insolence and contempt : Mk. vii. 22. (From Xen. and Plat, down ; Sejjt. for niW and |1SJ ; often in the O. T. Apocr.) * v'7repT|<|>avos, -ov, (fr. iirip and (paivofxai, with the con- nective [or Epic extension (cf. Ciirtius § 392)] i;; cf. v7T€pr]6iy- yetrBai, vncpoyKa, [A.V. great swelling words] expressive of arrogance, Jude 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 18 ; with em tov 6e6u added, Dan. xi. 36 Theodot., cf. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26. {^Xen., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ael., Arr.) * iSir«poxT|, -TjS, T), (fr. iiTipoxpi, and this fr. V77€p()(a>, q. v.), prop, elevation, pre-eminence, superiority, (prop, in Polyb., Plut., al.) ; metaph. excellence (Plat.. Aristot., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.) : 01 eV vnep. sc. ovrei, [R. V. those that lire in high place], of magistrates, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (cV vnip. Kiladat, to have great honor and authority, 2 Mace. iii. 11) ; Ka8' vTrepoxfjv Xoyov )j ias, [A.V. with excellency of speech or of wisdom i. e.] with distinguished elo- quence or wisdom, 1 Co. ii. 1.* virep-irepurirevoi : 1 aor. vrrfpfnfplcr.irXeovd5 : 1 aor. virfpii^aaa ; (Arabros. super- exallo) ; metaph. a. to exalt to the highest rank and power, raise to supreme majesty : rwd, Phil. ii. 9 ; pass. Ps. xcvi. (xcvii.) 9. b. to extol most highly : Song of the Three etc. 28 sqq. ; Dan. iii. (iv.) 34 Theodot. c. pass, to be lifted up ivith piride, exalted beyond measure; to carry one's self loftily : Ps. xxxvi. (x.xxvii.) 35. (Eccl. and Byzant. writ.) * >iir€p-pov€'u, -i) ; (inepfpptav) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to think more highly of one's self than is proper: Ro. .xii. 3.* virtpwov, -ov, TO, (fr. virfpaos or i-nepwios, ' upper,' and this fr. vmp; like TroTpciVof, irarp^os, fr. waTrjp; [cf. W. 96 (91)]), in the Grk. writ, (often in Horn.) the highest part of the house, the upper rooms or story where the wo- men resided; in bibl. Grk. (Sept. for iT'Sj?), a room in the upper part of a house, sometimes built upon the flat roof of the house (2 K. xxiii. 12), whither Orientals were wont to retire in order to sup, meditate, pray, etc.; [R. V. !//)/"^r c/;n;«ie)-; cf. B. D. s. v. House; McC. and S. s. v.] : Acts i. 13 ; ix. 37, 39 ; xx. 8, (Joseph, vit. 30).* vv-(\u> ; prop, to hold under, to put under, place under- neath; as TTjv xelpa, Horn. II. 7, 188; Dem., Plat., al. ; raetajih. to sustain, undergo: SIkt/u, to suffer punishment, Jude 7 (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Soph, down ; also fiiKos, Kplaiv, Tifuaplav, etc.; (ruitav, Eurip. Ion 1308; 2 Mace. iv. 48).* ijirTiKoos, -ov, (aKOTj ; see imaKovai, 2), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, giving ear, obedient : Phil. ii. 8 ; with dat. of the pers. Acts vii. 39 ; els irdina, 2 Co. ii. 9.* i5irt]peT6, -S> ; 1 aor. virripiTTjira ; fr. Hdt. down ; to be inrrjpeTris (q. v.), prop. a. to act as rower, to row, (Diod., Ael.). b. to minister, render service : rivt, Acts xiii. 3fc'; xx. 34; xxiv. 23.* vinip6TT)s, -ov, 6, (fr. vrro. and (peTt]s fr. epe/ the wild beasts, Rev. vi. 8 [cf. ix. 18 Rec], (so oiXeo-f 6vp.6p vcj)' "EKTopos, Hom. E. 17,616; cf. Matthiae ii. ]). 1393: [B. 341 (293)]). II. with the Accusative CVV. § 49, k.) ; 1. of motion, in answer to the question 'whither?' : to come inro Tr]v crreyriv, Mt. viii. 8 ; Lk. vii. 6 ; iniavvaydv, Jit. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; with verbs of putting or ]> lac- ing: Mt.v.15; Mk.iv.21; Lk.xi.33; lCo.xv.25; of placing under or subjecting, Lk. vii. 8 ; Ro. vii. 14; xvi. 20; iCo. xv. 27; Gab iii. 22; iv. 3; Eph. i. 22; 1 Pet. V. 6 ; ep^co Ttva iir' ijiavrov, Jit. viii. 9 ; Lk. vii. 8 ; yivta6m, born under i. e. subject to, (ial. iv. 4 ; of f all- i n g, trop. Jas. v. 1 2 [where R" cit vnuKpiaiv]. 2. of situation, position, tarrying: after KUTaaKr)- voCj/, Mk. iv. 32; udSij/iai, Jas. ii. 3 ; with the verb (ivm {to and under) in a local or prop, sense, Jn. i. 48 ( 19) ; Acts iv. 12; Ro. iii. 13 ; 1 Co. x. 1 ; tj ino (tw) ovpavuv sc. xwpa, Lk. x^'ii. 24 ; Tarrr} KTiad rfj vtto tov ovp. sc. ovit;i, Col. i. 23 ; to vtio tov ovpavuv sc. ovTa, Acts ii. 5, (t(i lit!) (TfXrjvrjv, Pliilo de vit. Jloys. ii. § 12) ; elvai viro Tiva or Tt, /(( be iiHv, Jit. viii. 9 (where L WII br. read xmo «|. raam')- fievos [set under authority], so also cod. Sin.) ; oi i'tto vo/iov sc. oj/Tf9, 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. iv. 5, (vtto ckkXij^w elvai, Protev. Jac. 18). rr/peiK rtva, Jude G ; (jipovpuaBai, Gal. iii. 23. 3. of time, like the Lat. sab (cf. sub resjic- 1-uni), i. q. about (see exx. fr. the (!rk. writ, in Passow p. 2111"; [L. and S. s. v. C. HI.]): into tov op6pov, aboul day- hreal-. Acts v. 21. This prep, occurs with the accus. nowhere else in the N. T. The apostle John uses it only twice with the gen. (xiv. 21 ; 3 Jn. 12 — three times, if X. 14 R G is counted [cf. viii. 9]), and once with the accus. (i. 48 (49)). m. in Composition vtto denotes 1. locality, under : vnoKaTtD, vTTonodiov, vnoinLu^o), vnobeto ; of the goal of motion, i. e. iino ti, as v-nobixopiai (under one's roof) ; vno'Kap^dvu) (to receive by standing muler) ; in-o- (iaXKo), vTToTidr^lii ; trop. in expressions of subjection, compliance, etc., as vitukovco, xmaKoi), vtttjkoos, VTrdSiKos, viravSpoi, vTrdya, VTroXfiTrio, vno)(a>pia>. 2. small in degree, sHr/ktly, as vnonvea. iIiro-PaXXiD : 2 aor. ijre'/SaXoi/; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. to thrmo ov put under. 2. to suygesHoxhc mmA. 3. to instruct priratcly, instiyate, suborn : Ttvd, Acts vi. 1 1 (v7reff\r]6r](Tav KaTijyopot, App. bell. civ. 1, 74; Miji/uTijr Tis VTTojiXrjTos, Joseph, b. j. 5, 10, 4).* «iro7pa|i|i6s, -ov, 6, (viroypd(j)ui), prop. 1. a writ- iny-copy, including all the letters of the alphabet, given to beginners as an aid in learning to draw them : Clem. Alex. Strom. 5, 8, 50. Hence 2. an example set before one: 1 Pet. ii. 21 (2 Mace. ii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 16, 1 7 ; 33, 8 ; [Philo, fragm. vol. ii. 667 Mang. (vi. 2'1'J Richter)], and often in eecl. writ. ; 6 IlaCXof vno- povTJs yevopfvos piytaros vnoypappos, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]).' vird-Seiy^ia, ^os, to, (viroSeLKvvpi, q. v.), a word rejected by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writ, used TTapdSeiypa ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 2 ; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 62]. It is used by Xen. r. eq. 2, 2, and among subsequent writ, by Polyb., Philo, Joseph., App., Plut., Hdian., al. ; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 554 ; a. a slyn suyyestice of anything, delineation of a thing, repre- sentation, fgure, copy: joined with aKiA, Heb. viii. 5; with a gen. of the thing represented, Heb. ix. 23. b. an example: for imitation, StSo'rai Ttvi, Jn. xiii. 15; Kara- \(\om£vai, 2 Mace. vi. 28 ; with a gen. of the thing to VTToSeiKVVfll 643 inroKriviov be imitated, Jas. v. 10 (Sir. xliv. 16 ; 2 Mace. vi. 31) ; for ■warning : with a gen. of the thing to be shunned, t^s djrct- Bdai, Heb. iv. 11 ; with a gen. of the pers. to be warned, 2 Pet. ii. 6 {tovs 'Pofialovs . • • els vnoSfiyfia t5>v SXKiov iBvaiv Kara(pX(^eiv ttjv Upav jroXti/, Joseph, b. j. 2, 16, 4).* viro-StCKVupii : fut. vTroSei'^co; 1 aoT. vvedei^a; fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down; Sept. several times forTJH ; 1. prop, to sfiow by placing under (i. e. before) the eyes : vTTeSfL^ev avTois Tov tiXovtov avTov, Esth. v. 1 1 ; add, .Sir. xlix. 8 ; [al. give ino in this compound the force of 'privily'; but cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 126]. 2. to show by words and arguments, i. e. to teach (for rrjin, 2 Chr. XV. 3) [A.V. freq. to warn'] : rivi, foil, by an inf. of the thing, ilt. iii. 7 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; to teach by the use of a figure, Tivl, foil, by indir. disc, Lk. vi. 47 ; xii. 5 ; to show or teach by one's example, foil, by ori, Acts xx. 35 ; to show i. e. ynake known (future things), foil, by indir. disc. Acts Lx. 16.* viro-8£'xo(iai (see xmo, ill. 1): 1 aor. vTTcSe^dfirjv ■. pf. {moSeSeyfim; fr. Horn, down; to receive as a guest : rivd, Lk. xi.x. 6 ; Acts xvii. 7 ; Jas. ii. 25 ; els tov oIkov, Lk. x. 38. [Cf. de^^oiiai, fin.] * viro-S«' : 1 aor. vne&T)8a\iois, Lcian. quom. hist, sit conscrib. 22 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 18). [Cf. B. § 135, 2.] * vir6Sii|i,a, -tos, to, (vjroSc'a)), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for byj, what is bound under, a sandal, a sole fastened to the foot with thongs : Mt. iii. 11 ; x. 10 ; Mk. i. 7 ; Lk. iii. IG; X. 4; xv. 22; xxii. 35 ; Jn. i. 27; -with t£>v noSau added, Acts vii. 33 ; xiii. 25, (n-oSoy, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 128 a.). [See a-avSaXiov-l * viroSiKos, -ov, i. q. vko S/ktji» wv, under judgment, one icho has lost his suit ; with a dat. of the pers. debtor to one, owing satisfaction to : rm 6ea, i. e. liable to punishment from God, Ko. iii. 19 [see Morison, Critical Exposition of Romans Third, p. 147 sq.]. (Aeschyl., Plat., Andoc, Lys., Isae., Dem., al.) * «iro-Jvyios, -a, -ov, i. q. {mo fyyoi; mv, under the yoke ; neut. TO vTT. as subst. a beast of burden (so fr. Theogn. and Hdt. down) ; in bibl. Grk. (since the ass was the common animal used by the Orientals on journeys and for carrpng burdens [cf. B. D. s. v Ass, 1]) spec, an ass : Mt. xxi. 5 (Zech. L\. 9) ; 2 Pet. ii. 16 ; Sept. for inn, an ass.* viro-^uwv|u ; fr. Hdt. down ; to under-gird : to liKoiov, to bind a ship together laterally with vno^wjiara (Plat, de rep. 10 p. 616 c), i. e. with girths or cables, to enable it to survive the force of waves and tempest, Acts xxvii. 1 7 (where see Overbeck [or Ilackett ; esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck, etc., pp. 107 sq. 204 sqq. (cf. /So^^eia)]). (Polyb. 27, 3, 3.)* ■uiro-KttTii», under, underneath : tivos [W. § 54, 6 ; B. § 14G, 1], Mt. xxii. 44 LT Tr WII; ilk. vi. 11 ; vii. 28; [.xii. 3G WH] ; Lk. viii. IC ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; Heb. ii. 8; Rev. V. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; vi. 9 ; xii. 1. (Sept. ; Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) [Cf. W. § 50, 7N.1; B. §146,4.]* viro-KpCvo)iai. ; 1. to take up another's statements in reference to what one has decided for one's self (mid. Kplvojiai), i.e. to reply, answer, (Horn., Hdt., al.). 2. to make answer (speak) on the stage, i. e. ^o/)ersonafe any one, play a part, (often so fr. Dem. down). Hence 3. to simulate, feign, pretend, (fr. Dem. and Polyb. down) : foil, by an ace. with the inf. Lk. xx. 20. (2 Mace. vi. 21, 24 ; 4 Mace. vi. 15 ; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 15 ; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2.) [CoMP. : cvv-xmoKplvojiai..'] * ■uiro-Kpuris, -ems, rf, (JmoKplvoiiai, q. v.) ; 1. an answering ; an answer (Hdt.). 2. the acting of a stage-player (Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Lcian., Artem., al.). 3. dissimulation,hypocrisy:'Mt.x.:^iu. 28; Mk. xii. 15; Lk. xii. 1 ; Gal. ii. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 2; [Jas. V. 12 Ree."] ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 [ef. B. § 123, 2], (2 Mace, vi. 25 ; Polyb. 35, 2, 13 ; Lcian. am. 3 ; Aesop, fab. 106 (284); [PhUo, quis rer. div. haeres § 8; de Josepho §lf])-* viro-KptWis, -ov, 6, (vTioKpivoiiai, q. v.) ; 1. one who answers, an interpreter, (Plat., Lcian.). 2. an actor, stage-player, (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Ael., Hdian.). 3. in bibl. Grk. a dissembler, pretender, hypocrite : Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16 ; vii. 5 ; xv. 7 ; xvi. 3 Rec. ; xxii. 18 ; xxiii. 13 Ree., 14 (13 Tdf.), 15, 23, 25, 27, 29 ; xxiv. 51 ; ilk. vii. 6 ; Lk. vi. 42 ; xi. 44 R L in br. ; xii. 56 ; xiii. 15. (Job xxxiv. 30; xxxvi. 13, for t]jn profane, impious.) [ilention is made of Heintsoeth, De voce {moKpi-nis comment. (Bonnae, 1874, 4to.).]* viro-\a(ipavci> ; 2 aor. {nreXa^ov; 1. to take up (lit. under [cf. vwo, HI. 1]) in order to raise, to hear on high, (Hdt. 1, 24) ; to take up and carry away {aKnrep v^a avefioi. vTTo\a^6vTes, Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 1 7) : two. Acts i. 9 (see o(^^aA/jdr, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, wel- come : Tivi, 3 Jn. 8 L T Tr WH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 3. to take up i. e. follow in speech, in order either to reply to or controvert or supplement what another has said (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down) : {moXa^av elirev, Lk. x. 30 (for nj>;, Job ii. 4 ; iv. 1 ; vi. 1 ; L\. 1 ; xi. 1 ; xii. 1, etc.). 4. to take up in the mind, i. e. to assume, suppose : Acts ii. 15 ; foil, by ori (sc. nXelov dya-rriaei), Lk. vii. 43, (Job xxv. 3 ; Tob. vi. 18 ; Sap. xvii. 2 ; 3 ilacc. iii. 8 ; 4 Maee. v. 17 (18) etc., and often in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat, down).* vTro-\€i|x|ia [-\iiifia WH (see their App. p. 154 ; cf. I, 0], -Tor, to, a remnant (see KardKeifipia.) : Ro. ix. 27 LT TrWH. (Sept.; Aristot., Theophr., Plut., Galen.) • i-no-Xd-rrio : 1 aor. pass. {nTe\ei6r)v ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for TXiVn and Tnin ; to leave behind [see wro, HI. 1] ; pass, to he left behind, left remaining, Sept. for ixt:': and "irilj : used of a survivor, Ro. xi. 3.* vn-oXTiviov, -ov, to, (i. e. to viro t^v \t)v6v, cf. to vtto- ^vyiov), a vessel placed under a press {and in the Orient V-TToXlflTTaVQ) 644 inrotTTatTi^ usualli/ stmk in the earlh) to receive the expressed Juice of the grapes, a pit : {lopv^ev vnoXrjvwv, R. V. he digged a pit for the winepress^, Mk. xii. 1 ; see Xtjkos [and B. D. s. V. Winepress]. (Oeuiiopr. ap. Toll. 10 (29), 130; Geop.; Sept. for 3p:., Is. xvi. 10; Joel iii. 13 (iv. 18); llagg. ii. II!: Zech. .xiv. 10 Alex.)' viro-Xi(nrdvw ; (Xi^Trdvoj, less common form of the verb XfiTTO)) ; to leave, leave behind : 1 Pet. ii. 21 . (Themist. ; cccl. and Byzant. writ. ; to fail, Dion. Ilal. 1, 23.)* viro-(ie'vu : iin])f. xmsfitvov : fiit. 2 pcrs. plur. vrronfvfWe ; 1 aor. ijrj^f tra ; [if. ptcp. vTToiiey.evr)K6ii ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for rup, n3n, bn* ; 1. to remain i. e. tarry behind : foil, by iv with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43 ; c'lcfi. Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain i. e. abide, not re- cede or flee ; trop. a. to persevere : absol. and em- phat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one's faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure'\, Mt. x. 22 ; xxiv. 13 ; Mk. xiii. 13 ; 2 Tim. ii. 12 [cf. vs. 10 in b.] ; Jas. V. 11 ; with rij ffKiyj/fi added, when trial assails [A. V. in tribulation (i. e. dat. of circumstances or condi- tion)], (cf. Kiiliner § 42G, 3 [.lelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12 (quite diiferent is vnontvew ra Kup/u, n1n"7 7'riin, Lam. iii. 21, 24 ; Mic. vii. 7 ; 2 K. vi. 83 ; '"'? rfST}, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 20, to cleave faithfully to [A. V. wait for"] the Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to Grk. usage [cf. AV. § 52, IG]). b. to endure, bear bravely and calmly: absol,, ill-treatment, 1 Pet. ii. 20; «if TraiSfiaf, i. e. €if to naiheveaBai, [for or unto chasten- ing^. Ileb. xii. 7 ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH which is defended at Icnglli by Delitzsch ad loc. [and adopted by Riehm (LehrbegrilT u. s. w. p. 758 note), Alford, iloul- ton, al.], but successfully overthrown [?] by Fritzsche (De conformatione N. Ti. critica quam Lchm. edidit, p. 24 sqq.) [and rejected by the majority of commenta- tors (Bleek, Lunemann, Kurtz, al.)]. with an ace. of the thing, 1 Co. xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. x. 32; xii. 2sq. 7 RG: .las. i. 12.- Tjiro-jiijiVTitrKW : fut. vTro^vrjaot ', 1 aor. inf. VTrofivrjaai ', 1 aor. pass, in-t/ji'^cr^ijv; fr. Ilom. down; [cf. our 'sug- gest ', see avdfivrja-ts^ ; 1. actively, to cause one to remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind : ti (to another), 2 Tim. ii. 14; rivd Tt, Jn. xiv. 26 (Thue. 7, 64 ; Xen. Hier. 1,3; Plat., Isocr., Dem.) ; with implied censure, 3 Jn. 10; rtva irepi rtvos, to put one in remem- brance, admonish, of something: 2 Pet. i. 12 (Plat. Phaedr. p. 275 d.) ; Ttvd, foil, by on, Jude 5 (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 8; Plat, de rc]). 5 p. 452 c. ; Ael. v. h. 4, 17); rcva, foil, by an inf. (indicating what must be done). Tit. iii. 1 (Xen. hipparch. 8, 10). 2. passively, to be reminded, to rememhir: rivos, Lk. xxii. 61." wir6-|ivTi(ns, -etos, 17, (in-o/u/ivi/o-Kia), fr. Eur., Thuc, Plat, down ; a. transitively, (Vulg. commonitio), a reminding (2 Mace. vi. 17): ev vTrofivr/a-ei., bj' putting you in remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1 [W. § 61, 3 b.]. b. intrans. remembrance : with a gen. of the obj. 2 Tim. i. 5 [(R. V. having been reminded q/" etc.) ; al. adhere to the trans, sense (see EUicott, Huther, Holtzmann ad loc). St>'. see dvd/xw/crif, fin.] * viro-|M)Wi, -^f, f), (vTroftivai) ; 1. steadfastness, con- stancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in Jas. V. 1 1 sujferentia) ; in the N. T. the characteristic of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate pur- pose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; x.\i. 19; Ro. v. 3 sq. ; xv. 4 sq. ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xii. 12 ; Col. i. 11 ; 2Th. i.4; iTim. vi. 11; 2Tim. iii. 10; Tit. ii. 2 ; Ileb. X. 3G ; Jas. i. 3 S([. ; v. 1 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 6 ; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 1 9 ; xiii. 10; .\iv. 12, (cf. 4 Mace. i. 11 ; i.\. 8, 30 ; xv. 30 (27) ; xvii. 4, 12, 23) ; with a gen. of the thing persevered in [W. § 'M>, I fin.] : xoC tpyov dyadoi, Ro. ii. 7 ; t^s eXnl- 80s, 1 Til. i. 3 [cf. B. 155 (136)] ; 8t Cttoiiov^s, [with pa- tience (cf. W. § 51, 1 b.) i. e.] patiently and steadfastly, Ro. viii. 25; Ileb. xii. 1. 2. a patient, steadfast wailing for; [al. question this sense in the Xew Test., and render the gen. by 'characterizing', 'in respect to', etc.]: XpiaToij (gen. of the obj.), the return of Christ from heaven, 2 Th. iii. 5 ; Rev. i. 9 (where L T Tr AVH ev'lTjcroiJ [which is in Jesus^) ; iii. 10, (cf. Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 8 ; for nip"?, expectation, hope, 2 Esdr. x. 2 ; Jer. xiv. 8; xvii. 13; for Hlpn, hope, Ps. [ix. 19]; Ixi. (l.\ii.)6; Ixx. (lxxi.)5; [Job -xiv. 1 9] ; for n'^ni'n, Prov. X. 28 SjTnm.; xmoiiivdv rtvd, Xen. an. 4, 1, 21 ; App. b. civ. 5, 81). 3. a patient enduring, sustaining: rav nadrjfiuTav, 2 Co. i. 6 (Xvmjf, Plat, defin. p. 412 c. ; 6avd- Tov, Plut. Pelop. 1). [Syx. see ixaxpodviita, fin.] * viro-voc'u, -S> ; impf. virevoovv ; fr. Ildt. down ; to sup- pose, surmise: .Vets xxv. 18; foil, by an ace. with the inf.. Acts xiii. 25 [(cf. tU, 4)] ; .xxvii. 27.' virivoia, -as, ij, {hTrovoeio), fr. Thuc. down, a surmising : 1 Tim. vi. 4.* i5iro-irioj«i), a later form of ijroTrUfo), to keep down, keep in subjection : 1 Co. ix. 27 Tdf. ed. 7 after the faulty reading of some Mss. for vnarnid^a, q. v. Cf. Lob. ad Pliryn. j). 461 ; \_Soph. Lex. s. v.; W. § 5, 1 d. 5 ; see viro-irXt'u : 1 aor. vTrfVXeutra ; (Vulg. subnavigo) ; to sail under, i. e. to sail close by, pass to the leeward of : with the ace. of the place, Acts xxvii. 4, 7. (Dio Cass., Dio Chr., al.) * viro-irv«ci> : 1 aor. vireTrvtvaa ; a. to blow under- neath (Aristot.). b. Inblow soJllylsee{nr6,lIl.2']: Acts xxvii. 13.* viroirdSiov, -ou, to, {vno and Trovr), a footstool (Lat. suppedaneum) : Mt. v. 35 ; Acts vii. 49 (fr. Is. Ixvi. 1) ; Jas. ii. 3 ; TiBevai Tiva vrroTT. Tatv iro8av tivos, to make one the footstool of one's feet, i. e. to subject, reduce un- der one's power, (a metaph. taken from the practice of conquerors who placed their feet on the necks of tlieir conquered enemies) : Mt. xxii. 44 R G ; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH vvoKdra toiv jr.]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Ileb. i. 13; x. 13, after Ps. cix. (ex.) 2. (Lcian., Athen., al. ; Sept. for Din ; [cf. W. 26].) * «ird-oTOo-ts, -fur, ^, (u^iVnj/ii), a word very com. in Grk. aiitli., esp. fr. Aristot. on, in widely different senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve 1. a setting or placing iiTroffTeWa) 645 vTro(f)epb> under; thing put under, substructure, foundation: Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 3 ; rod oikov, Ezek. xliii. 11; toO Td(pov, Diod. 1, 66. 2. that which has foundation, isfrm; hence, a. that which has actual existence ; a sub- ' stance, real being : rav iv a€pt ^avraanaToiv tu fiiv iv rati ivavriwv, id. 6, 55, 2 ; add, Diod. 16,32 sq.; Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 6) ; confidence, firm trust, assurance: 2 Co. ix. 4; xi. 17; Heb. iii. 14; xi. 1, (for nipn, Ruth i. 12; Ezek. xix. 5; for nSniP, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 8). Cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. ii. 1 pp. 60 sqq. 4o2 sqq.* liiro-oTeXXw : impf . viricrrfWov ; 1 aor. mid. vrrfcmiKd- firjv ; 1. Act. to draw down, let down, lower : lori'oi/, Pind. Isthm. 2, 59 ; to withdi-aw, [draw bade] : e/iavrov, of a timid person, Gal. ii. 12 ([cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; often so in Polyb.). 2. ilid. to withdraw one's self, i. e. to be timid, to cower, shrink : of those who from timid- ity hesitate to avow what they believe, Heb. x. 38 (fr. Habak. ii.4 [cf.W.523 (487)]); to be unwiUing to utter from fear, to shrink from declaring, to conceal, dissemble : foil, by Toi with the inf. [W. 325 (305); B. 270 (232)], Acts XX. 27; ovbiv, ibid. 20, (often so in Dem. ; cf. Reiske, Index graecit. Dem. p. 774 sq. ; Joseph, vit. § 54 ; b.j. 1, 2'M).* viro-OToXTJ, -rji. tj, {vnocTTeWa, q. v.), prop, a tcithdraw- ing (Vulg. suUractio), [in a good sense, Plut. anim. an Corp. aff. suit pej. § 3 sub fin.] ; the timidity of one stealthi- ly retreating : ovk i ; impf. v7TeaTptov ; f ut. viroa-Tp(\jfa) ; 1 aor. v-niarpe^a ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 2\v ; 1. trans, to turn back, to turn about: as ijnrour, Horn. L. 5, 581. 2. intrans. to turn back i. e. to return : absol., Mk. xiv. 40 [here L WH ttoAii/ ("XSav Tr A^ai-] ; Lk. ii. 20 (here Rec. «Vkttpcc^.), 43 ; viii. 37, 40 ; ix. 10 ; x. 17 ; xvii. 15; xix. 12; xxiii. 48, 56; Acts viii. l's ; foil, by an inf. of purpose, Lk. xvii. 18; foil, by Std with a gen. of place, Acts xx. 3 ; eh with an ace. of place, Lk. i. 56 ; ii. 39 [here T Tr mrg. AVII eTrtorpe't^.], 45 ; iv. 14 ; vii. 10 ; viii. 39; xi. 24; xxiv. 33, 52; Acts i. 12; viii. 25; xiii. 13; xiv. 21 ; xxi. 6; xxii. 17 ; x.xiii. 32; Gal. i. 17; els Siarj)6opdv, Acts xiii. 34 ; diri with a gen. of place, Lk. iv. 1 ; xxiv. 9 [WII br. otto etc.] ; dno with a gen. of the business, Heb. vii. 1 ; ck with r> gen. of place. Acts xii. 25 ; ejc t^s uytas «WoX^y, of those who after embrac- ing Christianity apostatize, 2 Pet. ii. 21 TTrWH, but Lchm. (against the authorities) eir ra cnriao) dno Trjs etc.* i5iro- : 2 aor. vrreSpapov; fr. Hom. down; prop. to run under ; in N. T. once, viz. of navigators, to run past a place on the shore, and therefore in a higher posi- tion (see vT7): v^aiov. Acts xxvii. 16 [R.V. run- ning under the lee of; cf. Hackett ad loc.]. * vrro-rvirojo-is, -fu>s, rj, {vnmvTsoa, to delineate, outline) ; a. an outline, sketch, brief and summary exposition, (Sext. Empir., Diog. Laert.,al.). b. an example, pattern: ■jrpos vnoT. Ti)V peX\6vTaiv Trurrfieiv ktX. for an example of those who should hereafter believe, i. e. to show by the example of my conversion that the same grace which I had obtained would not be wanting also to those who should hereafter beUeve, 1 Tim. i. 16; the pattern placed before one to be held fast and copied, model : vyiatvovrav Xoyo»', 2 Tim. i. 13. v-iro-4)€pu : 1 .lOr. vTnjveyKa ; 2 aor. inf. vireveyKe'tv ; fr. Hom. down ; to bear by being under, bear up (a thing placed on one's shoulders) : trop. to bear patiently, to en- dure, (often so fr. Xen. and Plat, down) : Tt, 1 Co. x. VTTO'xcopea) 646 vyjrr]\opoi>eQ> 13; 2Tim. iii. 11; iPet. ii. 10. (Prov.vi.33; Ps.Lxviii. (l.xix.) .s; Mic. vii. 9; Job ii. 10.)' viro-xup<'u, -i) ; 1 aor. i)jr€;(a)p7(7a ; fr. Horn, down; Id go back [see vno, III. 1 fin.]; to witltdraic : eis Tonov tprj- nov, Lk. ix. 10; with tV and a dat. of the place (see ; 1 aor. v(rriprjaa ; Jif. iareprjKa ; Pass., pres. io-rf poC/ioi ; 1 aor. ptcp. v(TT€pr]6els ; {v) ; a. dejicienci), that ivhich is lacking: plur. with a gen. of the thing whose deficiency is to be filled up. Col. i. 24 (on which see uvTuvaTrXrjpoa, and BXiyjfis sub fin.) ; 1 Th. iii. 10; to vot. with a gen. [or its equiv.] of the pers., the absence of one, 1 Co. xvi. 17 [vp. being taken olijectivcly (W. §22, 7 ; B. § 132, 3) ; al. take vp. subjectively and render that ichich was lacking on your part']; to vpi>v v(tt. rfji irpos p€ XetTovpylas, your absence, owing to which something was lacking in the service conferred on me (by you), Phil. ii. 30. b. in reference to property and re- sources, 2>overty, want, destitution : Lk. xxi. 4 ; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); ix. 12; xi. 9, (Ps. xx.xiii. (.\.\.\iv.) 10; Judg. xviii. 10, etc. ; eccl. w-rit.).* iiirT€'pT|o-is, -fojs, fj, (vuTfpea), want, ])overty: Mk. xii. 44 ; KuB' ialvu ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for Jis ; to weave : Lk. xii. 27 T WH (rejected) mrg.' v4>avTds, -i], -ov, {yipaiva, q. v.), fr. Hom. down ; woven : Jn. xix. 23. (For if», Ex. xxxvi. 30 (xxxi.x. 22); x.xxvi. 35 (xxxLx. 27) ; for 3tyn, Ex. x.xvi. 31, etc.) * v<|niXds, -i], -ov, (vijn on high, ii\j/os), [fr. Hom. down], high ; lnjly ; a. prop, of place : opor, Jit. iv. 8 ; -xvii. 1 ; Mk. ix. 2 ; Lk. iv. 5 R G L br. ; Rev. xxi. 1 ; TeI;^of , Rev. xxi. 12; neut. to vyj/rj'Xd (the heights of heaven; Sept. for Diin, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 4 ; cxii. (cxiii.) 5 ; Is. .xxxiii. 5 ; Ivii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high; cf. B. § 124, 8 d.], Heb. i. 3 ; exalted on high : v\j/tj\6Tepos Tav ovpavav, [made higher than the heavens'], of Christ raised to the right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv. 10) ; pera ^paxiovos v\j/ri\ov, with a high (ujilifted) arm, i. e. with signal |)Ower, Acts xiii. 1 7 (Sept. often ev ^paxlovi i'^^rjkii for rr\a} ill">T3, as in Ex. vi. 6; Deut. v. 15). b. metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk. xvi. 15 ; t)i//i;Xa (ppovelv, to set the mind on, to seek, high thinqs (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii. 16; "also Ro. xi. 20 L mrg. T Tr WH ; 1 Tim. vi. 17 T WH mrg. ; (Lcian. Icaromen. 11, Ilermot. 5).* i5»|ni\o-<)>pov€'v, and this fr. v^|/T|\6s and <})p!iv) ; lo be high-minded, proud : Ro. xi. 20 [R G L txt.]; 1 Tim. vi. 17 [R G L Tr WH t.xt.], (Schol. ad Pind. Pvtli. 2, 91). In Grk.writ. peyaXorppoveiV is more common.' vyjriaTO'i 647 ^atVft) 4'4(t(rTos, -rj, -ov, (superl. ; fr. v\j/i on high), in Grk. writ. mostly poetic, hirjhest, most lu(jh ; a. of place : neut. Ta v^ta-ra (Sept. for D'OilO), the highest regions, i. e. heaven (see v\lnj\6s, a.), Mt. xxi. 9 ; Jlk. xi. 10; Lk. ii. 14 ; xix. 38, (Job xvi. 19 ; Is. Ivii. 15). b. of rank : of God, 6 0eos 6 v\j/i<7Tos, the most liigh God, Mk. v. 7 ; Lk. viii. 28 ; Acts xvi. 17; Heb. vii. 1 ; [Gen. xiv. 18; Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 23] ; and simply 6 vif/iaros, the Most Hi;;li, Acts vii. 48; and without the article (cf. B. § 124, 8 b. note; [WH. Intr. §416]), Lk. i. 32, 35, 76; vi. 35, and very often in Sir. ; (Hebr. [f'?;?, p''"?;? Sk, ]yh^ D'rhH, ji'S;?. njn' ; Zeis v\j/i ; fut. i\jfa pocr., al.] ; Sept. very often for D11, also for n3J, SiJ'J, SlJ, etc. ; to lift uj) on high, to exalt, (Vulg. exalto) : nvd or tI, prop, of place, Jn. iii. 14"; used of the elevation of Jesus on the cross, Jn. iii. 14"' ; viii. 28 ; xii. 34 ; with c'k T^r yrjs added, to remove from (lit. out of) the earth by crucifixion (v^ffoiv nva foil, by c'k, Ps. ix. 14), Jn. xii. 32 (the Evangelist Iiimself interprets the word of the lift- ing up upon the cross, but a careful comparison of viii. 28 and xii. 32 renders it probable that Jesus spoke of the heavenly exaltation which he was to attain by the cru- cifixion (cf. xii. 23 sqq., xiii. 31 sqq., Lk. xxiv. 26), and employed the Aramaic word Dll, the ambiguity of wliich allowed it to be understood of the crucifixion ; cf. Bleek, Beitriige zur EvangeUenkritik, p. 231 sq. ; [the 'lifting \\\i' includes death and the victory over death; the pas- sion itself is regarded as a glorification ; cf. AVestcott ad loc.]) ; nva tos toC oipavov (opp. to Karafii^dietv [or KaTa^aivdv^ eat aSov), metaph. to raise to the very sum- mit of opulence and prosperity, pass., Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15, [al. understand exaltation in privilege as referred to in these pass, (see vs. 21 in Mt.)] ; simply nva, to exalt, to raise to dignity, honor, and happiness : Lk. i. 52 (where opp. to Taneiva) ; Acts xiii. 1 7 ; to that state of mind which ought to characterize a Christian, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; to raise the spirits by the blessings of salvation, Jas. iv. 10 ; 1 Pet. v. 6 ; iiiavTov, to exalt one's self (with haughti- ness and empty pride), (opp. to rairetvi), Mt. .xxiii. 12 ; Lk. xiv. 11 ; xviii. 14; — in these same pass. ij\lfa6Tj(TfTai. occurs, he shall be raised to honor. By a union of the literal and the tropical senses God is said iilfoia-ai Christ rfi Sf$ia airov. Acts v. 31 ; pass. Acts ii. 33 ; the dative in this phrase, judged according to Greek usage, hardly bears any other meaning than with (by means of) his right hand (his power) [R. V. txt.] ; but the context forbids it to denote anything except al (to) the right hand of God [so R. V. mrg.] ; hence the opinion of those has great probabihty who regard Peter's phrase as formed on the model of the Aramaean pp'^S ; cf. Bleek, Einl. in das N. T. ed. 1, p. 346 [but see W. 214 (201), 215 (202) ; Meyer ad loc. CoMP. : vnep-v\j/6a>.'\ * v^a\ia, -Toy, to, (in|^o'w), thing elevated, height : prop, of space, opp. to ^aQos, Ro. viii. 39 (toS dipos, Philo de praem. et poen. § 1 ; orav v\jroifji.a Xd/Si; fieyiarov 6 fp^tos, Plut. mor. p. 782 d.) ; spec, elevated structure i. e. bar- rier, rampart, bulwark : 2 Co. x. 5. [Sept. (in Jud. x. 8 ; xiii. 4, actively) ; cod. Ven. for 'heave-offering' in Lev. vii. 14, 32 ; Num. xviii. 24 sqq.] * $ (fxiYos, -ov, 6, ((pdya), a voracious man, a glutton, (it is a subst., and differs fr. atXo'vT)s (so Rec"»' steph) q]. (^fXovT/s (with most Mss. including cod. Sin., Rec.'>"'='^ G L T Tr [WH (cf. their Intr. § 404 and x\.pp. p. 151"; W. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. s. V. aiv6\ris, col. 583)]), by metath. for the more com. (paivoKris (found in [Epict. 4, 8, 24] ; Artem. oneir. 2,3; 5, 29; Pollux 7,(13) 61; Athen. 3 p. 97), -ou, 6, Lat. paenula, a travelling-cloak, used for protection against stormy weather: 2 Tim. iv. 13, where others errone- ously understand it to mean a case or receptacle for books as even the S}Tiac renders it \£)hjD A^A.* <)>a(v(i) ; [1 aor. act. subjunc. 3 pers. sing, ^dvr), L T WH in Rev. viii. 12: xviii. 23, (see below and dva^aiva; W. §15 s. v.; B. 41 (35))]; Pass., pres. (f)alvofiat; 2 aor. irpdirqv; 2 fut. (pavriao/iai and (in 1 Pet. iv. IS) (pavoifiai (cf. Kiihner § 343 s. v. ; [Veitch s. v.]) ; () ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; to bring forth into the light, cause to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransi- tively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly ^aXeK 648 ^avepc (cf. L. and S. s. v. A. TT.)] express by the passive), Sept. for l"!av;j apapria (e(iuiv. to ApapraXoi), Ro. vii. 13 ; with the dat. of the pers. added, Jit. vi. 5 (sc. npo(T(vx6pevoi praying) ; to be seen, appear: 6 apapTwXos TTov (jiaveirat ; i. e. he will nowhere be seen, will perish, 1 Pet. iv. 18. d. to appear to the mind, seem to one's judgment or opinion : tI vp'iv (paiverat, [.V.V. what think ye}, Mk. xiv. 64 (1 Esdr. ii. 18 (21)) ; etjjdvri- aav ivimiov airwv oxrci \rjpoi, Lk. xxiv. 11 [W. § 33 f. ; B. § 133, 3. Syx. see Soicia, fin.]* iaXiK [L txt. Tr WII d\eK (but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 104); Lmrg. *dXfy], 6, Peleg, (jSi) 'division'), son of Eber (Gen. x. 25) : Lk. iii. 35.* 4>avcpo's, -d, -6v, (({>atvopai), fr. [Pind.], Ildt. down, ap- pnniil, manifest, evident, known, (opp. to KpviTTos and drroKpvcj^oi) : Gal. v. 19 ; e'v ndcnv, among all, 1 Tim. iv. 15 Rec. ; iv airois, in their minds, Ro. i. 19 ; rivi, dat. of the pers., manifest to one, of a pers. or thing that has become known. Acts iv. 16; vii. 13 ; [1 Tim. iv. 15 G L TTrAVH]; (pavepov ylveaOai: Jlk. vi. 14; [Lk. viii. 17]; 1 Co. iii. 13; xiv. 25 ; iv vp'iv, among you, 1 Co. xi. 19; iv with a dat. of the place, Phil. i. 13 [see jrpaiTaptov, 3] ; (pavfpov iroieiv Ttva, [A. V. to make one known, i.e.] disclose who and what he is, Mt. xii. 16; Mk. iii. 1 2 ; tU (pavepou iXdelv, to come to light, come to open view, Mk. iv. 22 ; Lk. viii. 17; iv tco (pavepa, in pubUc, openly (opp. to iv ra Kptmra), Mt. vi. 4 Ree., 6 RG, [18 Rec.] ; Ro. ii. 28 [here A.V. outward, outward- ly'], manifest i. e. to be plainly recognized or known : foil, by iv with a dat. of the thing in (by) which, 1 Jn. iii. 10. [Syn. see S^Xor, fin.] * 4>avcpo'a>, -u ; ial. (pavcpuxrui; 1 aor. itpavipaxra: Pass., pres. (pavepoiipm: pf. Trt(pavf papal ; 1 aor. icpavepadriv; 1 fut. (j>avepw6rjtropm ; (cpavcpos) ; to make manifest or visi- ble or known what has been hidden or unknown, to manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or ill any other way; a. with an ace. of the thing: pass., Jlk. iv. 22 ; Eph. V. 13 ; Rev. iii. 18; to epya Ttvor, pass. Jn. iii. 21 ; with ev tivi added, Jn. ix. 3 ; Trjv ho^itv alrov, of Christ, Jn. ii. 1 1 ; sc. Trjv yvaaiv, 2 Co. xi. 6 L T Tr WH ; rds /3ouXdf Toiv Kaphta>v,oi God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; t))V oapi)V TrjS yi/utrf w9 uvrnv bi ijpdv iv navri t6itu>, 2 Co. ii. 14 ; Tr]v anovBijv vpwv ivantov riw 6foif, pass. 2 Co. vii. 1 2 ; T/yw fQ)i)i/ Tov Irja-ov iv tm owpmi, iv TJj Bvrjrfi aapKi, pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 SC). ; x"P^' foO deov (pavfpaSelaa dia ttjs imipaveias tou Xpicrxoi/, 2 Tim. i. 10 ; pass, used of some- thing hitherto non-existent but now viade actual and visible, realized, 1 Jn. iii. 2 (Germ, vericirklicht werden, in die Erscheinung trelen) ; obos, Ileb. ix. 8 (cf. iter per Alpes pa'teficri volebat, Caes. bell. gall. 3, 1) ; to- bring to light or make manifest, by the advent, life, death, resurrection, of ,Iesus Christ : to pvarijptov, pass. Ro^ xvi. 26 ; with tois dyi'oir added, Col. i. 26 ; to make known by teaching : to ovopa tov Oeov toIs dvdpwTrots, Jn. xvii. 6 ; ro pv(TT7}pLov roO XpiaTov, Col. iv. 4 ; tov \6yov airoO, of God giving instruction through the i)reaehers of the gospel. Tit. i. 3 ; tA yvaariv toO 6f oO airoU, of God teaching the Gentiles concerning himself by the works of nature, Ro. i. 19; pass. biKaioa-vvij Ocov (made known in the gospel [cf. btKatoaivrj, 1 c. p. 149'' bot.]), Ro. iii. 21 ; pass, to becoine manifest, be made known : iv Tovra sc. oTi etc. herein that, etc. [see oJtos, I. 2 b.], 1 Jn. iv. 9 ; 7-n biKaiwpara toO 6(ov, Rev. xv. 4. b. with ai» ace. of the person, to e.rpose to view, make manifest, .ihonr one : iavrbv ra Koapia, of Christ coming forth from his retirement in Galilee and showing himself publicly at Jerusalem, Jn. vii. 4 ; Toif paSrjrals, of the risen Christ, Jn. xxi. 1 ; pass, to he made manifest, to show one's self,, appear : (pnpocrdfv tov [irjpaTos tov Xptarov, 2 Co. v. 1 f of Christ risen from the dead, toU paBrirait airov, Jn. xxi. 14; Mk. .xvi. 14; with iv (Tepa pnp;i added, Mk. xvi. 12 (absol. (pavepuddi. Barn. ep. 15, 9); of Christ previously hidden from \iew in heaven but after his incar- nation made visible on earth as a man among men, Heb. ix. 26 (opp. to bevTepov d(j)Brj(Tecr6ai, of his future return from heaven, ibid. 28) ; 1 Pet. i. 20 ; 1 Jn. iii. 5, 8 ; with iv a-apKi added, 1 Tim. iii. 16, (Barn. ep. 5, 6 ; 6, 7. 9. 14 etc.); ij fwij (the life embodied in Christ; the centre and source of life) ifpavepwdrj, 1 Jn. i. 2 ; of Christ now hidden from sight in heaven but hereafter to return visibly. Col. iii. 4 (cf. 3) ; 1 Pet. v. 4 ; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; [cL Westcott on the Epp. of St. John p. 79 sq.]. of Chris- tians, who after the Saviour's return will be manifested iv b6$rj [see 8o|a, III. 4 b.]. Col. iii. 4. Pass, lo be- come known, to be plainly recognized, thoroughly under- stood : who and what one is, rivi, Jn. i. 31 ; what sort of person one is, tm Beio, 2 Co. v. 11 ; iv toIs irvvdbriacaiv ipav, ibid. : (pavtpovfiai foil, by on, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; 1 Jn. li. 19; iv TxavTi (pavepwdivTes kv TTatTiv (is vpds, in every way made manifest (such as we are) among all men to you- ward, 2 Co. xi. 6 [but L T Tr WH give the act. (pavepa- aavres, we have made it manifest]. (Ildt., Dion. Hal.,. Dio Cass., Joseph.) [Syn. see dTTOKoKimTm, fin.]* ^avepeo<; 649 ^apfiaK€vavcpus, (see (jiavepoi), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], adv., manifestly ; i. e. a. plainly, clearly : Ideiv riva, Acts X. 3. b. openly : Mk. i. 45 ; opp. to tV KpvTTra, Jn. vii. 10.* <|>av£'p"avo's, -oO, o, (cj)atvcD), a torch [A. V. lantern; Hesych. 'AttikoI 8e XvxvoiJKov eKaXovv b fjfieU vvv ; cf . Phryn. p. .59 and Lob.'s note; Rutherford, Kew Phryn. p. 131; Athen. 15 p. 699 d. sqq. and Casaubon's notes ch. xviii. see Xa/i7rdf and reff.] : Jn. xviii. 3. (Arstph., Xen., Dion. Hal., Pint., al.) * 4'avovT]'\, (Ssua i. e. TTpocrai-Kov Beoi), indecl., Phanuel, the father of Anna the prophetess: Lk. ii. 36.* (|>avTd^(i> ; (4ialvii>) ; pres. pass. ptcp. (jiavTa^opevos ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; to cause to appear, make visi- ble, expose to view, show : to (j)avTa(6pevov, the appearance, sight, Heb. xii. 21.* avTao-ia, -as, ^, show, showy appearance, display, pomp: Acts xxv. 23. (Polyb. 15,25, 5, etc!; [Diod. 12, 83]; al.)* 4>dvTa(r|ia, -tos, to, {(pairrd^a), an appearance; spec. an apparition, spectre : Mt. xiv. 20 ; Mk. vi. 49. (Aes- chyl., Eur., Plat., Dion. Hal., Pint., al. ; Sap. xvii. 14 (15).)* (jiopa-yl, -ayyos, t), a valley shut in by cliffs and preci- pices ; a ravine : Lk. iii. 5. (Alcm., Eur., Thuc, Dem., Polyb., al. ; Sept.) * 4>apau, (rii'^iJ ; in Joseph, antt. 2, 13 and 14 ^apawBrjs [also ^apaav, -avoi, S, 6, 2, etc.]), o, [indecl. B. 15 (14)], Pharaoh, the common title of the ancient kings of Egypt (6 (papaaiv kot Axyvwrlovs ^aaCKia ar]fiaivfi, Joseph, antt. 8, G, 2 [ace. to Ebers (in Kiehm s. v. Pharao) the name is only the Hebr. form of the Egyptian per-aa denoting (as even Horapollo 1, 62 testifies) great house, a current title of kings akin to the Turkish " sublime porte " ; al. al.; seeBB. DD.s.v.]): Acts vii. 13, 21; Ro.ix.l7; Heb. xi. 24 ; ^apaa> with PaaiXevs AiyvTTTov added in apposi- tion (as if ^apaa were a proper name, as sometimes in the O. T. : D'.i.VP ^'?? nxn?, 1 K. iii. 1 ; ix. 16 ; 2 K. xvii. 7; Is. xxxvi. 6, etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 23), Acts vii. 10. Cf. Vaihinger in Herzog xi. p. 490 sqq.; [_Ebers in Kiehm u. s.].* 4>op6s [on its accent see Tdf. Proleg. p. 104], 6, (V13 a breach, Gen. xxxviii. 29), Perez [A. V. Pharesl, a son of Judah by Tamar his daughter-in-law : lit. i. 3 ; Lk. iu. 33.* ^apuraios, -ov, 6, a Pharisee, a member of the sect or party of the Pharisees (S^t. ).A^i^. rabbinic "t^/ns, fr. IS13 'to separate', because deviating in their life from the general usage ; Suidas s. v. quotes Cedrenus as fol- lows, iaptcraioi, ol fppr)V€v6iXfVoi a(pcopia-ii€voi • irapa to fifpi- ^€iv K. d<^opi^eiv ^avTovi Twu nXXtoi/ anavrdiv ei? t€ t6 KaOa- ptOTaTOV Tov (Biov Koi aKptl^eaTUToi', Koi et? Tci tov vupov ivTokfiaTa). The first and feeble beginnings of this sect seem to be traceable to the a'ge immediately succeeding the return from exile. In addition to the books of the O. T. the Pharisees recognized in oral tradition (see wapaSoo-if, 2) a standard of behef and life (.Joseph, antt. 13, 10, 6 ; Mt. XV. 1 ; Mk. vii. 3). They sought for dis- tinction and praise by the observance of external rites and by the outward forms of piety, such as ablutions, fastings, prayers, and alms-giving; and, comparatively neo'Hgent of genuine piety, they prided themselves on their fancied good works. They held strenuously to a behef in the existence of good and evil angels, and to the expectation of a Messiah ; and they cherished the hope that the dead, after a preliminary experience either of reward or of penalty in Hades, would be re- called to life by him and be requited each according to his individual deeds. In opposition to the usurped do- minion of the Herods and the rule of the Romans, they stoutly upheld the theocracy and their country's cause, and possessed great influence with the common people. According to Josephus (antt. 1 7, 2, 4) they numbered more than 6000. They were bitter enemies of Jesus and his cause; and were in turn severely rebuked by him for their avarice, ambition, hollow reliance on out- ward works, and affectation of piety in order to gain notoriety: jNIt. iii. 7; v. 20 ; vii. 29 Lchm. ; ix. 11, 14, 34; xii. 2, 14, 24, 38 Lchm. om.; .xv. 1, 12; xvi. 1,6, llsq.; xix. 3 ; xxi. 45 ; [xxii. 15, 34, 41]; xxiii. 2, 13-15, 23, 25- 27, 29 ; xxvii. 62 ; Mk. ii. 16, 18, 24 ; iii. 6 ; vii. 1, 3, 5 r viii. 11, 15; [i,\. 1 1 L in br. T] ; x. 2; xii. 13 ; Lk. v. 17,^ 21, 30, 33 ; vi. 2, 7 ; vii. 30, 36 sq. 39 ; xi. 37-39, 42-44 [but in 44 G T Tr Vfll om. Lbr. the cl.], 53 ; xii. 1 ;. xiii. 31 ; xiv. 1, 3 ; xv. 2 ; xvi. 14 ; xvii. 20 ; xviii. 10 sq. ; xix. 39 ; Jn. i. 24 ; iii. 1 ; iv. 1 ; vii. 32, 45, 47 sq. ; viii. 3, 13; ix. [13], 15sq. 40; xi. 46 sq. 57; xii. 19,42; xviii. 3 ; Acts V. 34 ; xv. 5 ; xxiii. 6-9 ; xxvi. 5 ; Phil. iii. 5. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Pharisiier ; Reuss in Herzog xi.. p. 496, and the works referred to above s. v. SaSSou/caio?,. fin. [esp. Sieffert's dissertation in Herzog ed. 2 (vol. xiii. p. 210 sqq.) and the copious reff. at its close]. An ad- mirable idea of the opinions and practices of the Phari- sees may be gathered also from Paret, Ueber d. Phari- Siiismus des Josephus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for- 185G, No. 4, p. 809 sqq.* ap(iaK6vs, -t'coy, o, ((pdpptaKov), one who prepares or iises magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Rec. (Soph., Plat., Joseph., Lcian., Plut., al.) * <}>dpfiaKov 650 ipAp(ioKov, -on. TO. fr. Horn, down, a drug; an enchant- ment : Tr mrg. WII txt. in Uev. ix. 21 (R.V. sorceries), for (papiiiiKfla. q. v. (in b.).*] <)>ap|jiaK6s, -^, -01», {(papiiia-a-a [to use a (papfiaKov}), [fr. Arstpli. down] ; 1. pertaining to jnagical arts. 2. 6 (pappaK6s, siibst., i. e. (pap/xaKeis, q. v. : Rev. xxi. 8 GL T Ti- WII ; xxii. 15. (Sept. several times for fjiyDD.) * 4)00-15, -€s, ij, (fr. (f)aiva>) ; 1. in the Attic ora- tors, the exposure of (informing against) those who have ■emhezzled the propertg of the state, or violated the laws respecting the importation or exportation of merchandise, or defrauded their wards. 2. univ. a disclosure of secret crime (koivUs S( (paatis eKoKovvro iraaai at nijvvireis Tcov \av6riv6vTwv dSi.Kr}paTa)v, Pollux 8, 6, 47) : Susan. 55 Theod. ; of information hg report [A. V. tidings']. Acts x.\i. 31.* 4>d(rK(i>; im\ii.eavXos, -ij, -ov, (akin to Germ, faul and flau), easy, sliijhl, ordinary, mean, worthless, of no account ; ethically, bad, wicked, base (Theogn. [?], Eur., Xen., Plat., Pint.) : Jas. iii. 16 ; aii\ov (opp. to dyad6i>) Trpdaaeiv, Ro. ix. 1 1 L T Tr WII ; 2 Co. v. 10 T Tr txt. WII. [See Trench, Syn. § Ixxxiv.] • <|)e-yyos, -our, to, (akin to ^aivciu), fr. Aeschyl. and Find, down, light : of the moon, Mt. xxiv. 29 ; Mk. xiii. 24 ; of a candle or lamp, Lk. xi. 33 R G T Trmrg. [cf. .dmpanfi, ib. vs. 36]. (Joel ii. 10; iii. (iv.) 15 (20) ; Ezek. i. 4, 13, 27; IIos. vii. G.)* [Stn.: avyfi, (p4yyos, ipus: (pus light — the general term, (of the light of a fire in Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xxii. 56) ; ipe77os aniore concrete and emphatic term {cf. Lk. xi. 33), the bright sunsliiue, the beam of light, etc. ; aiiyli a still stronger term, suggesting the fiery nature of the light ; used of shoot- ing, heating, rays. A Greek .spoke of i)\lou ipCis, fiSov — sc. St8da-K€iv — fi fX"f SiSdo-Kfif, Xen. Cyr. 1, G, 35; with the inf. added, ^iyav koku. Eur. Or. 393 ; ipdtrai ti twv TvpavviKav, Plat, dc rep. 9 p. 574 b.).* (|>ciSo|i.cv(i>s, (fr. the ptcp. (peMpevos), adv., sparingly : ■2 Co. ix. 6 {mildly, Plut. Alex. 25).» <|)€XovT)s. see €'p prjpan Trjs 8vvdpea>s avToS, of God [the Son] the pre- server of the universe, Ileb. i. 3 (so in the Targums and Rabbinical writ. Sap is often used, e. g. loSli' S31D, of God ; ov bvvfjcropai tyo) povos (fxptiv tov Xaov tovtov. Xum. xi. 14, cf. 11 ; add, Deut. i. 9, for Kb": ; 6 to pi) [pin] ovra (j)tpo)V Km Tu wavra yevvOiv, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 7 ; fr. native Grk. writ, wc have (pepftv ttju ttoKlv, Plut. LucuU. 6 ; cf. Bleelc, Brief a. d. Ilebr. ii. 1 p. 70 sq.). 2. to bear i. e. endure (exx. without number in Grk. writ, fr. Hom. down ; cf. Passow s. v. B. I. 3 ; [L. and S. s. v. A. Ill]) : toc oveidia-pov, Heb. xiii. 13 ; ti, to endure the rigor of a thing, Heb. .\ii. 20 ; nvd, to bear patiently one's conduct, or to spare one (abstain from jiunishing or destroying), Ro. ix. 22. 3. to bring, bring to, brim/ forward; a. prop.: Tivd, Acts v. 1 6 ; ti, Jlk. [vi.27RGTTrWH]; xi. 2TTrWII; xii. 16; Lk. xv. 23 ; Acts iv. 34, 37 ; v. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13 ; riva Trpds nva, Mk. i. 32 ; ii. 3 [T Tr mrg. WH] ; ix. 1 7 [W. 278 (262)], 1 9 sq. ; [rtva cni Tiva, Lk. xii. 1 1 Tr mrg.] ; two nvi, l\Ik. vii. 32; viii. 22; [ripa eVi tivos, Lk. v. 18]; tItivi, Jlk. xii. 15; Jn. ii. 8 ; with SSf added, Mt. xiv. 18 [here Tr mrg. br. i>h(] ; xvii. 17; ti npos nva, ^Ik. xi. 7 [T Tr WH]; ti eif with an ace. of the pl.ice. Rev. xxi. 24, 26; t\ cVi nivaKi, Mt. xiv. 11 ; IMk. vi. [27 Lchm.], 28 ; dno Tivos (a part of [see aTro. I. 2]), Jn. xxi. 10; (j>(p(,> tivI (jiayflv, Jn. iv. 33. b. to move to, apply : toi/ daKru- \ov, TTjv x^'-P"-' ^®^' *'f ^'''^ ^^ ^cc. of the place, [A. V. reach], Jn. xx. 27. fig., (peperai vpXv ti, a thing is offered (lit. ' is being brought ') to you : rj x^P"> 1 Bet. i. 13. c. to bring by announcing : SiSaxrjv, 2 Jn. 10 (nvi dyyfXiT/i/, pidov, Xoyof, evya> 651 $^0-T09 see h, I. 5 f.] ; Jn. xii. 24 ; xv. 2, 4 sq. 8, 16 ; (Horn. Od. 4, 229; Hes. opp. 117; Xen. mem. 2, 1,28; al.). p. to hring foricard in speech : vpcxprjTfia, 2 Pet. i. 21 [A. Y. camel ! «pta-iv Kara rivos, 2 Pet. ii. 11 ; l_KaT-qyoplav Kara nvos, Jn. xviii. 29 R G L Tr (but here T WH om. Kara)'] ; aiViti/iara Kara Tiuos, Acts xxv. 7 R G [but G om. Kara, t.] ; airiav, ibid. 18 L T Tr WH ; (wcio-ar aiVi'aj, reasons, Dem. p. 1328, 22; a7roXoy«7/xouf, Polyb. 1, 32, 4). e. to lead, conduct, [A. Y. Iji-iny, carry, etc. (Germ./i/Aren)]: eVi with an ace. of the place, Mk. xv. 22 ; Acts xiv. 1 3 ; (fxei) oTTov, Jn. xxi. 18; metaph. a gate is said c^ipeiv (Lat. ferre [Eng. lead~\) els ttjv ttoKiv, Acts xii. 10 (6S6r cv'Yu ; fut. (pev^opai, ; 2 aor. e(j)vyov ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for DU and ni3 ; to flee, i.e. a. to flee away, seek safety by fl'xjht: absol., Mt. viii. 33; xxvi. 56; Ilk. V. 14 ; xiv. 50 ; Lk. viii. 34 ; Jn. x. 12, [13 (here G T Trtxt.WHom.LTrmrg.br. the cl.)]; Actsvii.29; foil, by els with an ace. of the place, Mt. ii. 13 ; x. 23 ; [.xxiv. 16, here R G T WH mrg. em] ; Mk. xiii. 14 ; Lk. xxi. 21 ; [Jn. vi. 15 Tdf.] ; Rev. xii. 6 ; foil, by inl with an ace. of the place, Mt. xxiv. 16 [here L Tr AYH txt. els] ; en ToC ttXoIov, Acts xxvii. 30 ; foil, by ano with a gen. of the place, in a purely local sense, to leave by fleeing, as in Grk. writ. (cf. W. 223 (210) ; [B. § 131, 1]), Mk. xvi. S ; by ano with a gen. of the pers. inspiring fear or threat- ening danger (after the Hebr.), Jn. x. 5 ; Jas. iv. 7 ; poetically, cfjei^erat dw' airaiv 6 davaros, death shall flee from them, opp. to (r/rria-ovai ddvarov. Rev. ix. 6. b. metaph. to flee {to shun or avoid by flii/hf) something ab- horrent, esp. vices : with an ace. of the thing, 1 Co. vi. 18 (Sap. i. 5 ; 4 Mace. viii. 18) ; opp. to Siaiceiv, 1 Tim. vi. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; Hebraistically foil, by dno with a gen. of the thing, 1 Co. x. 14 (dno d/iaprias. Sir. xxi. 2). c. to be saved by flight, to escape safe out of danger: absol. Heb. xii. 25 R G ; with an ace. of the thing, Heb. xi. 34 ; Hebraistically foil, by dwo with a gen. — of the thing, Mt. iii. 7 ; xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; of the pers. INIk. xiv. 52 [T Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. air' ain-wv]. d. poeti- cally, to flee away i. q. vanish : ■ndaa prjcros ecpvye xai opij nux evpeBrja-av, Rev. xvi. 20 ; with the Hebraistic addi- tion dno Tvpoa-amov TtKor (as in Deut. xxviii. 7; Josli. vii. 4; viii. 5 ; 2 Chr. x. 2, etc.; see n-pdo-coTroi', 1 b. p. 551' mid.), Rev. xx. 11. [CoMP. and Syx. : dnocj). (empha- sizes the inner endeavor or aversion), Stacp. (suggests the space which the flight must traverse), f(c0. (looks rather to the physical possibility), Kara(f>. (points to the place or the person where refuge is sought) ; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 109.]* 4>ii\i| (Lchm. ^rjXi^, [so Tr in Acts xxiv. 22 (by mis- take?)]; ci. Lip>T)(iij. -Tjs, r), ((lir)p.l),fame, report : Jit. ix. 26 ; Lk. iv. 14. [(From Horn, down.)] * (j)T)(ii; impf. ecpriv; (fr. (^du, to bring forth into the light [cf. Curtius §407]); hence [fr. Hom. down] prop. to make known one's thoughts, to declare ; to say : eri, he said (once on a time), Mt. xxvi. 61 ; historical writers, in quoting the words of any one, prefix (prjo-lv. e(f>r], (Lat. ait, inquit) : Lk. xxii. 58; Acts viii. 36, and often; (prjcriv and ecfjr] are used of a person replying, Mt. xiii. 29 ; Lk. vii. 40 ; Jn. i. 23 ; ix. 38 ; Acts vii. 2, etc. ; of one who asks a question, Mt. xxvii. 23; Acts xvi. 30; .xxi. 37; e(j)ri peyaKr] rfj ripi.] Ti(j.CJu : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. i0dv(a 65l 4>0opd esp. Schiirer p. 308 sq.]) : Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. I, 4, 9, 12-14, 22-24; xxvi. 24 sq. 32. (Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 9 ami 9, 1 ; b. j. 2, 14, 1.) ' <|>9avu: 1 aor. e(p6aa-a [W. § 15 s. v.]; pf. t6aKa (1 Tb. ii. 1 6 L txt. WH mrg.) ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to come he/ore, precede, aniicipate : rifieU ou /ifj (pBdcroifiev (see /ifj, IV. 2) Tovs KoijxrfOiirras, we shall not gt't the start of those wlio have fallen asleej), i. e. we shall not attain to the fellowship uf Christ sooner than the dead, nor have pre- cedence in blessedness, 1 Th. iv. Ij; (cftdatrev eV avrovs il opyij, (God's penal) wrath came upon them unexpect- edly. 1 Th. ii. lij ; fCJjBaaev e tls tov oipavov, Dan. 4, 19 Theod. [cf. 1 7, 25 ; ef>0. eur tSjv ovpavSiv, 2 Chr. xxviii. 9 ; f8apTo's, -r], -6v, (deipa>), corruptible, perishable, (Vidg. corrupt ibilis) : 1 Co. ix. 25 ; 1 Pet. i. 23 ; SvdptaiTos, i. e. mortal, opj). to 6 a(f>dapTos 6e6s, Ro. i. 23 ; oi (pdaprols apyvplu) 5 XP^'^'V' ""'■ "'tl' corruptible things, with silver or gold, 1 Pet. i. 18 [W. § 59, 5 fin.] (xpvcror k. apyvpos, ovaiai v iv v\aii cjiOapTots, de congr. eru- dit. grat. § 20) ; neut. to (ftSaprov, that which is hable to corruption, [to (pdaprov tovto this corruptible (A.V.)], 1 Co. XV. 53 sq. (Diod. 1,6; Philo de legg. alleg. 2, 1 ; de cherub. § 2 ; [Aristot.], Plut., Sext. Emj)., al. ; 2 Mace, vii. 16; Sap. L\. 15; xiv. 8.)* <|>6E'YY0|iai ; 1 aor. ptcp. (j)d(y^dp£vos ; ((jtiyyos [but cf. Vanicek p. 1176], *AQ) ; depon. mid.; fr. Horn, down; 1. to give out a sound, noise, or cry; used by the Grks. of any sort of sound or voice, whether of man or animal or inanimate object — as of thunder, mu- sical instruments, etc.; [(pdeyy. denotes sound in its re- lation to the hearer rather than to its cause; the fiiya XaXui/ is a braggart, the [leya <\>6eyy6p(vos is a lofty orator; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 §53]. 2. to proclaim; to speak, utter: Acts iv. 18 ; vnipoyKo, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (abiKa, Sap. i. 8) ; imo^vyiov a(j>aivov iv dvdpamvr) (ftavij (j)dey^d- fifvov, 2 Pet. ii. 16. [Comp. : diro^eiyyoiiai.'] * ^dilpa ; fut. (j)6epa) ; 1 aor. e(j)dfipa ; Pass., pres. ^Beipo- pai ; 2 aor. i(j)0dpr]v : 2 fut. (^Baprjaopxii ; (akin to Germ. verderben) ; Sept. for nniy : [fr. Horn, down] ; to cor- rupt, to destroy : prop, tov vaov tov 6(oii (in the opinion of the Jews the temple was corrupted, or • destroyed ', when any one defiled or in the slightest degree damaned anything in it, or if its guardians neglected their T Tr WII. in an ethical sense, to corrupt, deprave: 6(lp(i>.^ ' 4>6iv-oirupivo's, -ij, -6v, (^(})6w67Tapov, late autumn ; fr. (j>dii>a> to wane, waste away, and dnapa autumn), au- tumnal (Polyb. 4, 37, 2; Aristot. h. a. 5, 11 ; [Strab.], Plut.) : SevSpa (pdtvoTT. autumn trees, i. e. trees such as they arc at the close of autumn, dry, leafless and with- out fruit, hence oKapjra is added; used of unfrnitful, worthless men, Jude 12 [cf. Bj). Lyhlft. A Fresh Re- vision etc. p. 134 sq.].* (^Bo'yyoS) -ov, 6, (^(^Biyyopai, q. v.), a musical soU7id, whether vocal or instrumental (Sap. xix. 17): 1 Co. xiv. 7 ; Ro. x. 18, in this latter jjass. Paul transfers what is said in Ps. xviii. (xix.) 5 to the voices of the preachers of the gospel. (Hom., Tragg., Xen., Plat., al.)* <]>6ovio>, -a> : ((jidovoi) ; fr. Hom. down ; to envy : rivi, one, Gal. v. 26 [here Ltxt.Tr mrg. WII mrg. read the accus.; see 1!. § 132, 15 Rem.; W. §31, 1 b.].» 4)9ovos, -on, 6, fr. [Pind. and] Ildt. down, envy : Ro. i. 29 ; Gal. v. 21 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 ; Sia (ftdovov, for envy, i. e. prompted by envy- [see 8id, B. II. 2 b.], Mt. xxvii. 18 ; Mk. xv. 10; Phil. i. 15, (Dio Cass. 44, 36) ; npos 6op), fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. down, 1. corruption, destruction, perishing, (opp. to -ye'cfo-if , ori- gin, often in Plat., Aristot., Plut. ; opp. to aarrjpta, Plat. Phileb. p. 35 e. ; for r\m, Ps. cii. (ciii.) 4 ; Jon. ii. 7) : Ro. viii. 21 (on which see SovXfia) ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 2' [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) take (j)d. here actively : els i\ea salvation, eternal 7niseri/ (wliicli elsewhere is called oTrti- \eia), Col. ii. 22 (see diroxprjirts) ; opp. to fwi; ataimos, Gal. vi. 8, cf. Schott ad loc. 2. in the N. T. in an ethical sense, corruption i. e. moral decay : 2 Pet. i. 4 ; ii. 12'' [some take the word here actively (R.V. txt. in their destroying), al. refer it to 1 above], 19 ; with r^r fm^s added. Sap. xiv. 12.* <|>LaXT|, -ijs, ij, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for P"!""?, a broad, shallow howl, deep saucer [Diet, of Antiq. s. v. Patera ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Vial] : Rev. v. 8 ; .\v. 7 ; xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; xvii. 1; xxi. 9.* i\-dYa9os, -ov, (fr. t\os and ayados), loving goodness : Tit. i. 8. (Sap. vii. 22; Pint, pracc. conjug. c. 17 ; also «omp. Thes. c. Rom. c. 2 ; [i.XaSEX<|>Ca, .iKaSe\ias; [cf. Babrius 47, 15]) ; in the N. T. the love which Chris- tians cherish for each other as ' brethren ' (see aSeXcpos, 4) ; [love of the brethren'] (Vulg. caritas or amor fra- ternitatis) : Ro. xii. 10; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; Heb. xiii. 1 ; 1 Pet. i. 22; 2 Pet. i. 7, cf. 1 Jn. v. 1.* <)>iX-(iSEX(t>os, -ov, (^(j)i\os and dSeXi^of), loving brother or sister (Soph., Plut., Anthol.) ; in a broader sense, loving one like a brother, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 17; loving one's fellow- countrymen, of an Israelite, 2 Mace. xv. Ii; of a Chris- tian loving Christians, 1 Pet. iii. 8 [R.V. loving as breth- ren']* <(>tXov8pos, -ov, (i\os and dvfjp), [fr. Aeschyl. down (in other senses)], loving her husband: Tit. ii. 4 ((plXav- Spoi Koi o'dxppoves yvval<€s, Plut. praec. conj. c. 28).* (|>i.Xav6p(i>'ir(a, -as, ^, {<^CKav6pamos), fr. Xen. and Plat, down, love of mankind, benevolence, (Vulg. humanitas), [R.V. kindness] : Acts xxviii. 2 ;' Tit. iii. 4. [Cf. Field, Otium Xorv. Pars iii. ad 11. cc] * iX-{X-auT0Si -ov, ((piKos and avros), loving one's self; too I intent on one's own interests, selfish : 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Aris- I tot. [(cf. (piKdyados) ; rhet. 1, 11, 26 (where cf. Cope) ' dvaynr) ■ndvras <^CKavTovs flvai fj paXKov fj rfrrov] ; Philo, legg. alleg. 1, 15; Plut., [Epict.], Lcian., Sext. Emp. ; bia TO i. 7Tev (?)], ov8' av (fnXol, Plat. Lys. p. 215 b.; ((ptKrjtraTf avrbv (Julius Caesar) a>s ■naripa /cai 7fyaTrj](TaT€ o)t eiepyerrjv, Dio Cass. 44, 48 ; ut scires, eum a me non dillgi solum, verum etiam amari, Cic. ad fam. 13, 47; L. Clodius valde me d digit vel, ut efifpariKoiTepov dicam, valde me amat, id. ad Brut. 1. Hence men are said dyarrdv God, not (jjtKc^v ; and God is said dyaTrrjaai TOV Koap-Qv (Jn. iii. 16), and i.\f7v the disciples of Christ (Jn. xvi. 27) ; Christ bids us dyairdv (not (Xi], 7, see i\os, 2. <|>iXt|'Sovos, -01', {(f)i\os and rj&ovrj), loving jileasure : 2 Tim. iii. 4. (Polyb. 40, 6, 10; Plut., Lcian., al.)* i)>(XT))ia, -ros, TO, fr. Aeschvl. down, a kiss (see iX(a, -as, 17, ((f>i\os), friendship : with a gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 4. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)] ' 4>iXnnni(rtos, -ov, o, a Philippian : Phil. iv. 15.* ^tXtinroi, -MV, 01, [on the plur. ef.AV. § 27, 3], Philippi, a citv of Macedonia Prima [see B. D s. v. Macedonia], situated on [near] the northern coast of the iEgean Sea, between the rivers Strymon and Nestus, and the cities Neapolis and Amphipolis. It took its name from PhiUp I. of Macedon, who built it up from a village called KpijviSf f , and adorned and fortified it : Acts xvi. 1 2 (on this pass, see xoKaivia) ; xx. 6 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Th. ii. 2. [See Bp. Lyhlft. Com. on Philip., Intr. iii.] * 4>CXnni-os, -ou, 6, Philip ; 1. a son of Herod the Great by his fifth wife, Cleopatra of Jerusalem (Joseph, antt. 17, 1, 3), and by far the best of his sons. He was tetrarch of Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, Batansea, and (ace. to the disputed statement of Lk. iii. 1) of Itu- roea also [cf. Schiirer as below ; but see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Itursea] ; and the founder of the cities of Caesarea Philippi (in the Decapolis) and Julias. After having lived long in celibacy, he married Salome, the daughter of Herod [Philip, the disinherited ; see below] his half- brother (Joseph, antt. 18. 5, 4). He ruled mildly, justly and wisely thirty-seven years, and in A. D. 34 died with- out issue, leaving a grateful memory of his reign in the minds of his subjects (Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 1 and 4, 6; b. j. 2, 9, 1) : Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27; Lk. iii. 1; cf. Keim in Schenkel iii. p. 40 sqq. ; Sckurer, Xeutest. Zeit- gesch. § 1 7, a. ; [BB. DD.]. In IMt. xiv. 3 ; ilk. vi. 1 7, and Lk. iii. 19 Rec. it is said that his wife was Herodias (see 'HpmSidr) ; thus Herod, the son of Herod the Great by JIariamne the daughter of the high-priest Simon (Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 1 ; b. j. 1, 28, 4), who lived as a pri- vate citizen in comparative obscurity and was the first husband of Herodias (Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 4), seems to have been confounded with Philip, who as a ruler was better known (cf. Viill:ni(ir, Uelier ein. histor. Trrthuni in den Evangg., in Zeller's Theol. Jahrbb. for 1816, p. 363 sqq,). Many interpreters (see esp. Krebs, Observv. etc. p. 37 sq.; [^Deylinr/, Observv. sacr. vol. ii. (ed. 2) p. 342 sqq.]), in vindication of the Evangelists, make the some- what improbable conjecture that the first husband of Herodias had two names, one a family name Herod, the other a proper name Philip; [yet so ]\'inri; RWB. s. v. I'hiliiipus, 5 ; BB. DD. ; Geiiach in the Zeitschr. f. Luth. Theol. for 18G9, p. 32 sq.; ]Meyer on Mt. I. c. ; AVeiss on Mk. 1. c.]. 2. Philip of Bethsaida [in Galilee], one of the apostles : Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18 ; Lk, vi. 14 ; Jn, i. 43-48 (44-49) ; vi. 5, 7; xii. 21 sq.; xiv. 8 sq. ; Acts i. 13. 3. Philip, one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem, and also an ' evangelist ' (tvayyeKi- (TTT)i, q. v.) : Acts vi. 5 ; viii. 5—40 ; xxi. 8.* <|>i\o'-6eof . -ov. ((piXos and 6f6s), lovimj [A.V. lovers 0/] Goil : 2 Tim. iii. 4. ([Aristot. rhet. 2, 1 7, 0], Philo, Lcian., al.) " 'i>iXdXo-yos, -ou, d, [lit, 'fond of talk'], Phitologus, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15. [Cf. Bj). Lghlft. Com. on Philip., note on " Csesar's Household " § 10.] • <|>iXovciKCa, -ar, t), ((piKovetKos, q.v.), love of strife, eager- ness ti> conlerid, (Plat., Plut,, Lcian., al, ; 4 Mace, i, 26) ; contention : Lk, xxii, 24, (2 Mace, iv. 4 ; Thuc, 8, 76 ; Joseph, antt, 7, 8, 4 ; Antonin, 3, 4 ; in a good sense, emnhiiinn, Xen., Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) * ((uXo'-veiKos, -or, (<^iXos, and vcIkos »triSe), fond of strife, contcnlinus: 1 Co. xi. 16. (Pind., Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al. ; in a good sense, emulous, Xen., Plat., Plut., al.) - <)>iXo-|cvCa, -as, 17, ((ftiKo^fvos, q. v.), love to strangers, hospitality: Ro. xii. 13; Heb. xiii. 2. (Plat., Polyb., al.) * <|>iXd-^evos, -ov, (<^iXos and ^ivos), fr. Horn, down, hos- pitable, f/i:nerous to guests, [given to hospitalitij~\ : 1 Tim. iii. 2 ; Tit. i. 8 ; 1 Pet. iv. 9.» 4».Xo-TrpuT60o) ; {(piKowpaiTos, fond of being first, striv- ing after the first place ; fr. (f>i\os and npioTos : Artem. oneir. 2, 32; Plut. [Alcib. 2, 2]; mor. p. 471 e. [i.e. de tranquil, an. 12; p. 793 e. i. e. an seni sit etc. 18, 8]); to aspire after pre-eminence, to desire to hcfrst : 3 Jn. 9. (Several times in eccles. writ.) * 4>CXos, -x), -ov. fr, Hom, down, friendly [cf. L. and S, s. V. I. and II.] : ^CKov etvai Ttvt, to lie friendly to one, wi.'ih him well. Acts xix. 31 ; 1, d «^iXof, Sept. for ;'."1, 3ns, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6 ; xi. 5 : xv. 6 ; xvi. 9; xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii. 3 ; 3 Jn. 15 (14); joined with 0^€l eay gladness '), one of tlie bridegi-oom's friends who on his behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him various services in closing the marriage and celebrating the nuptials [B. D. s. v. Marriage, III. ; Edersheim, Jew- ish Social Life, p. 152], Jn. iii. 29 ; ^iXos toO Kaicrapos, on Caesar's side, loyal to his interests, Jn. .\ix. 12 ; 6eov, esp. dear to God, pecuharly favored with his intimacy, Jas. ii. 23 ([cf. Harnack and Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 10, 1 ; Ronsch in the Zeitschr. f. wissenschaftl. Tkeol. for 18 73, p. 583 sq.]; also in prof. auth. cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. vii. 27 p. 164) ; with a gen. of the thing, one who finds his pleasure in a thing, (j)i\os tov koct/xou, Jas. iv. 4. 2. Fem. <^iXij, 17, a (JhiuUe) friend : Lk. XV. 9.* 4>iXo-Ca, -as, ij, (fr. <^(Xdo-o<^of), prop, love (and pur- suit) of wisdom ; used in the Grk. writ, of either zeal for or skill in any art or science, any branch of knowledge, see Passow s. v. [cf. L. and S. s. v.]. Once in the N. T. of the theology, or rather theosophy, of certain Jewish- Christian ascetics, which busied itself with refined and speculative inquiries into the nature and classes of angels, into the ritual of the Mosaic law and the regu- lations of Jewish tradition respecting practical life: Col. ii. 8 ; see Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 1 p. 298 sq. ; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c, and Prof. Westcott in B. D. s. v. Philoso- (|)i\os, -ov, 6, (0i'Xos and cro(p6s}, a philosopher, one given to the pursuit of ivisdom or learning [Xen., Plat., al.] ; in a narrower sense, one who investigates and dis- cusses the causes of things and the highest good: Acts xvii. 18. [See reff. under the preceding word.] * <|>i\o'(rTop-yos, -ov, (0t'Xof, and trropyfi tlie mutual love of parents and children ; also of husbands and wives), lov- ing affection, prone to love, loving tenderbj ; used chiefly of the reciprocal tenderness of parents and children : Tg (f)iKa8e\<{)ia (dat. of respect) els dXXijXour, [R. V. in love of the brethren tenderly affectioned one to another'], Ro. xii. 10. (Xen., Plut., Lcian., Ael., al.) Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. iii. p. 69.* <|>iXo't£kvos, -ov, (e^i'Xos and tckvov), loving one's off- spring or children : joined with iXoTin€'o(i.ai, -oUpai; (^tXoTi^o9, and this fr. cf>[\os and Ti/iTj) ; depon. pass, (with fut. mid.) ; freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Andoc, Lysias, Xen., Plat, down ; a. to be fond of honor; to be actuated by love of honor; from a love of honor to strive to bring something to pass. b. foil, by an inf., to be ambitious to etc., 1 Th. iv. 11 ; Ro. XV. 20 ; to strive earnestly, make it one's aim, 2 Co. v. 9.* <)>iXo4>povu9, {iXo'({>pi(i6w, -a, [inf. (fn/ioiv, 1 Pet. ii. 15 VTH (see their App. p. 166 and Intr. § 410; B. 44 (38); see dTroSffcaro'a] ; fut. (pipoxra ; 1 aor. fi^/fttocra : Pass., pf. impv. 2 pers. sing. TTf i^i^o)<7o ; 1 aor. ((pipadrjv; (0i/io'j a muzzle) ; to close the mouth with a muzzle, to muzzle : prop, ^ovv, the ox, 1 Co. ix. 9 R G L WH txt. (see «j^idu); 1 Tim. v. 18, fr. Deut. XXV. 4 where for DOn ; (univ. to fasten, com- press, Tw ^vka TOV avx^va Ticdr, Arstph. nub. 592) ; metaph. to slop tlie mouth, make speechless, reduce to si- lence : Tivd, Mt. xxii. 34 ; 1 Pet. ii. 15 ; pass, to become speechless, hold one's peace, Mt. xxii. 12; Mk. i. 25; iv. 39 ; Lk. iv. 35, (Joseph, b. j. prooem. § 5 ; Ub. 1, 22, 3 ; Lcian. de morte peregr. 15 ; univ. to be kept in check, 4 Mace. i. 35).* Xe-y(i>v [i. e. ' burning'], -oi/TOf, 6, Phlegon, a Christian at Rome : Ro. xvi. 14.* (j)Xo-Yi5iij ; (X6^, gen. (j>Xoy6s, r/, ((pXeya [to burn ; cf. Lat. ' fiagro ', etc.]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for nr}h and non'i, a flame : Lk. xvi. 24 ; on the phrases Xvape(ij, -S; ((piXvapos, q. v.); to utter nonsense, talk idly, prate, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.) ; to bring forward idle accusations, make empty charges, Xen. Hell. C, 3, 12; joined with ^Xaa-cprjpeiv, Isocr. 5, 33: rivaXoyois novrjpois, to accuse one falsely with maUcious words, 3 Jn. 10 [A. V. prating against etc.].* 4>Xtiapos, -ov, ((piXvo), ' to boil up,' ' throw up bubbles ', of water ; and since bubbles are hoUow and useless things, ' to indulge in empty and foolish talk ') ; of per- sons, uttering or doing silly things, garrulous, babbling^ [A. Y. tattlers] : 1 Tim. v. 13 [Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. 26, vol. v. 215, 3; al.] ; of things, /oo//s7i, trifling, vain : (jitXocrooP(a>, -<»: Pass., pres. (po(3oiipai ; inipf. d(vrit., o0etv to fear, the general term; often used of a protracted state. Cf. Schmidt ch. 139.] o'PTiTpov [or -dpov (so L Tr WH ; see WH. App. p. 149)], -on, TO, (o^(a), that which strikes terror, a te>Tor,{ca.\iseoi) fright: Lk.xxi. 11. (Plat. Ax. p. 367a.; Hippocr., Lcian., al., ["but always in plur." (L. and S.)] ; for x:n, Is. xix. 17.)" oPos, -ov, 6, ((jif^ofiai ; like (j)6pos, rpofios, novos, fr. ipu>, Tpipa, ntvo/xm), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nX"i' "iniJ np-X (terror), fl'JPin (id.); 1. fear, dread, terror; in a subjective sense (oiSiv iari (po^os el p.^ npo- Sotria tCiv airb \oyiapov fiorjBrjpdrav. Sap. .wii. 1 1 ; irpo(r- SoKlav Xtyo) KUKov toiito, f'ire (jiu^ov, fiTf 8ios KoXeiTt, Plat. I'rulag. p. 358 d.) : uuiv., 1 Jn. iv. 18; (jioffos tV» Tiva n-iTTTfi, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr] ; Rev. xi. 11 Ree. ; e'jrt- jn'TTTf., Lk. i. 12 ; Acts xLx. 17 [R G T WH ; Rev. xi. 11 LTTrWII]; «ycwTo, Lk. i. 65 ; Actsv. 5, 11; 'Kap^dvd Ttvd, Lk. vii. 1 G (Horn. II. 1 1, 402) ; yiveTai rivi, Ads ii. 43 ; irKrjardijvai o£pT|, -ijs, ij, [lit. 'bright', 'radiant'], Phcebe or Phebe, a deaconess of the church at Cenchreas, near Corinth : Ro. xvi. 1 [(see bi.dKovos, 2 fin.)].* ^oivCicii, -ijs, i), PItoenice or Phoenicia, in the apostolic age a tract of the province of Syria, situated on the coast of the Mediterranean between the river Eleu- therus and the promontory of Carmel, some thirty niUes long and two or three broad, [but see BB. DD. s. v.] : .Vets xi. 19; XV. 3 ; xxi. 2.* ^oivtKwro-a, see ^vpo(polvia(Ta. 4>o(vi| (or, as some prefer to write it, (poivi^ ; cf . AV. § 6, 1 c. : [and reff. s. v. K7;pu|]), -ikos, d ; I. as an ap- l)ellative, a palm-lree (fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for l"3r\) : Ta fiata t£>v pevairaTda> 4>ovcvs, -fios, 6, (iroKT6vos {q. v.) has in the X. T. a special emphasis. Trench § Ixxxiii.] ovcvu; inX. (povevcrto ; 1 aor. i6vev(Ta; (^oveut) ; fr. [Find., Aescliyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. mostly for nv^, also for Jin n3n, etc.; to kill, slay, murder; absol. to commit murder [A. V. kill] : Mt. v. 21 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; oi (q. v. 6) 6vos, -ov, 6, (*ENQ ; cf. ^o/3of, init.), fr. Horn, down, murder, slaur/hter: Mk. xv. 7 ; I>k. xxiii. 19, 25 ; Acts Lx. 1 ; Ro. i. 29 ; iv op«'u, -S> ; fut. 6pr]a-a, ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 315; Kiihner [and esp. Veitchjs. V. ; W. § 13, 3 c. ; [B. 37 (32)]) ; (frequent, of fpw, and differing from it by denoting not the simple and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or ba- bitual bearing ; cf. Lob. ad Pbi-yn. p. 585 sq. ; Hermann on Soph. Electr. 715 ; [Trench § Iviii. ; Schmidt, cb. 105, 6] ; accordingly, ayyeXlrjn (pepeiv means ' to carry a (sin- gle) message', Hdt. 3, 53 and 122 ; dyytXirji' (popeetv, ' to serve as (fill the office of) a messenger ', Hdt. 3, 34 ; hence we are said (pope'iv those things which we carry about with us or wear, as e. g. our clothing) ; fr. Hom. -down ; to bear conslantbj, wear : of clothing, garments, armor, etc., Mt. xi. 8 ; Jn. xix. 5 ; Ro. xiii. 4 (on this pass, see pdxaipa, 2) ; 1 Co. xv. 49 [see above, and WH. Intr. § 404]; Jas. ii. 3, (Sir. xi. 5; xl. 4).* (|>6pov, -ov, TO, Lat. forum ; see 'Amrios. <|>apos, -ov, 6, (fr. (jtepai, hence prop. 6 (pcperai ; cf. opTl^u ; pf . pass. ptcp. nftfiopna-iifvos ; ((popros, q. v.) ; (0 place a burden upon, to load : (poprt^eiv rim (ftoprlov (on the double ace. see B. 149 (130)), to load one with a burden (of rites and unwarranted precepts), Lk. xi. 4<; ; nf(popTia-p(vot ' heavy laden ' (with the burdensome requirements of the Mosaic law and of tradition, and with the consciousness of sin), Mt. xi. 28. (Ezek. xvi. 33 ; lies. opp. 692 ; Lcian. navig. 45 ; Anthol. 10, 5, 5 ; €celes. writ.) [Comp. : d7ro-<^opTi'fo/iai.] * <|>optCov, -ov, to, (dimin. of (f)6pTos, but dimin. only in form not in signif. ; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 440 ; [W. § 2, 1 d. fin.]), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for Xiyo, a burden, 42 load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Grk. writ. fr. lies. opp. 645, 695 down), Acts xxvii. 10 GL T Tr WH. Metaph. : of burdensome rites, plur., [Mt. x.xiii. 4] ; Lk. xi. 46 : of the obhgations Christ la^s upon his followers, and styles a ' burden ' by way of contrast to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which was most oppressive, Mt. xi. 30 (airor povos bivarai /3a- a-Toaai. Zfjvavos (poprlov, Diog. Laert. 7, 5, 4 (171) ; see fuydr, 1 b.) ; of faults, the consciousness of which op- presses the soul. Gal. vi. 5 [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. Syn. see oyKos, fin.]* +6pTos, -ov, 6, (fr. ipipoy), fr. Hom. down, a load, bur- den : Acts xxvii. 10 Rec. [of a ship's lading].* ^opTouvdros (or ^ovpr. R G), -ov, 6, [a Lat. name, 'happy'], Fortunalus, a Christian of Corinth [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59 (65)] : 1 Co. xvi. 17.« <})ptt-ye'XXiov, -ov, to, (Lat. Jlagellum; B. 18 (16)), a scourge : Jn. ii. 15.* 4>paYEXX6(i>, -w : 1 aor. ptcp. (^payfXXaxras ; [Lat._/?a- (jello'] ; to scourge : rivd, Mt. xxvii. 26 ; Mk. xv. 15. (Eeclcs. writ.) * to fence round), a hedge, a fonce: Mt. xxi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. xiv. 23 ; trop. that which separates, prevents two from coming together, Eph. ii. 14 [A. \ . partition^, see p.ec6Toixov. (Sept. Sir. xxxvi. 30 (27) ; Hdt., Soph., Thuc, Plut., al.) * <|>pdJo) : 1 aor. impv. (ppda-ov, fr. Hom. down; to indi- cate jilainly, make knoicn, declare, whether by gesture ((pavfja-ai piv ovK e'x*, t^ 8e X^'P' ^'Ppa^fv, Hdt. 4, 113), or by writing or speaking, or in other ways ; to e.xplain : Tivi t!}v TTapajioXrjv, the thought shadowed forth in the parable, :Mt. xiu. 36 [R G T Tr txt.] ; xv. 15. (Twice in Sept. for |"Dn, Job vi. 24 ; TTJin, xii. 8.) * 4>poi(r, init.] ; trop. to put to silence, [A. V . stop] : to arupa, Ro. iii. 1 9.* p€'ap, -aTos, TO, fr. the Hom. hymn Cer. 99 and Hdt. 6, 1 1 9 down ; Sept. for 1X3 and (in 1 S. xix. 22 ; 2 S. iii. 26 ; Jer. xlviii. (xii.) 7, 9) 113 (a pit, cistern), a well : Lk. xiv. 5 ; Jn. iv. 1 1 sq. ; 4>p. T^f d^laaov, the pit of the abyss (because the nether world is thought to increase in size the further it extends from the surface of the earth and so to resemble a cistern, the orifice of which is narrow), Rev. ix. 1 sq.* (j>p€V-airaT(im, -a : ((^pevarrdrjjs, q. v.) : Tivd, to deceive ani/ one's mind. Gal. vi. 3 [" more is implied by this word than by dnarav, for it brings out the idea of subjec- tive fancies" (Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; cf. Green, Crit. Xotes ad loc.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* psva7rdTi)^ 658 ^pp(a-o-(a ; very often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to he rough, Lat. horreo, horresco, \. e. 1. to bristle, stiffen, stand up: (Cppi^dv fiov rpixft, Job iv. 15 Sept.; with opdat added, lies. opp. 510; opdds ■ ■ ■ (ppia-ati Tpixas (cogn. ace. of the part affected), lies. scut. 3'Jl ; with cold, 8ia TO ^vxos, Plut. quaest. nat. 13, 2 p. 915 b. 2. to shuilder, to be struck tcilh extreme fear, to be horrijied : absol., Jas. ii. 19; 4 Mace. xiv. 9: like the Lat. horreo, horre.ico, constr. with an ace. of the object exciting the fear, Horn. II. 11, 383, and often.* <|>pove(i>, -S> ; impf., 1 pers. sing, ecppovovv, 2 pers. plur. e(f>pov€'iT€ ; fut. 2 pers. plur. cppovijaeTe ; pres. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, (ppoveiaday, Phil. ii. 5 U G (see 3 below) ; ((ppf)!/); fr. Horn, down; 1. to have understanding, be wise, (Horn., al.). 2. to feel, to think: absol. as vifinos i(f)p6mvv, 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; to hate an opinion of one's self, think of one's self: p!] viTep(f)pov€'iv nap' 6 Sfi (ppovdv, Ko. xii. 3 {pe^^Qv t^poviiv ?) /car' av^pa, Soph. Ant. 7G8) ; povf7v (19 TO aa)(f)pou€'it', [R. V. so to think as to think soberly'], to be modest, not to let one's opinion (though just) of himself exceed the bounds of modesty, ibid. ; V7r€p o yiypaTTTm, in one's opinion of one's self to go be- yond the standard prescribed in Scripture, 1 Co. iv. 6 R G [cf. B. 394 sq. (33S) ; W. § G4, 4]. with an ace. of the thing, to think, Judge : a ^povus, what your opinion is, Acts xxviii. 22; oiScv aAXo, Gal. v. 10; rt eVcpQ)?, Phil. iii. 15; several persons are said cppovetv to avTo, to be of the same mind, i. c. to agree together, cherish the same views, be harmonious : 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; Phil. ii. 2; iii. 16 Rec.; iv. 2; with cV dXXijXois added, Ro. xv. 5; also TO €f (ppovovvTfs, having that one mind, Phil. ii. 2 (the |)hrasc to ck having reference to to aiTo; see Meyer [but cf. Bp. Lglitft.] ad loc.) ; ri imep Tivot, to hold some opinion, judge, think, concex-ning one, Phil. i. 7 ; to avTo eh dXX^Xouf, to be of the same mind towards one anoth- er, Ro. xii. 16. 3. to direct one's mind to a thing, to seek or strive for; ra nvos, to seek one's interests or ad- vantage ; to be of one's party, side with him, (in public affairs, Add. to Esth. viii. 5 ; 1 Mace. x. 20 ; Die Cass. 51, 4 ; Hdian. 8, 6, 14 (6) ; for other exx. fr. Xen. [or Hdt. 1, 162 fin ] down see Passow s. v. II. ; [L. and S. II. 2 c] ; hence) Ta tov Beoii and ra rav av6p., to be in- tent on promoting what God wills (spec, his saving pur- poses), and what pleases men, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; Ta Tt)s aapKos and to toC vvfiipaTOi ((rap^ [q. v. 4] and TTVivpa [q. V. p. 522'] being personified), to pursue those things which gratify the flesh, . . . the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 5, cf. 6. TO iirtyfia, Phil. iii. 19 ; to ava and to in\ T^r y^r. Col. iii. 2, (avBpas'nwa, dvrfrd, Aristot. eth. Nic. 10, 7 p. 1177'', 32) ; toCto (jipovene (pres. impv.) «V vpi». [R. V. hare this mind in you"], be intent wiiliiu yuurselvea on this, Phil. ii. 5 L T Tr ^^'H ; pass. t^povtiTai ti tv twi,. some habit of thought (expressed by deeds) exists in one, Phil. ii. 5 R G [A. V. let this mind be in you] ; v^jftjXa (see i>i/n-/Xdj, b.). (ftpovfiv rjptpav, to regard a day, observe it as sacred, Ro. xiv. 6; (f>p. lirip twos, to take tliought, have a care, for one, Phil. iv. 10 [see dra^dXXcij, fin. Co.Ml". ; (coTa-, napa-, ntpi-, virep- <}>poveo>.] ' 4>po'vT||xa, -rot, to, (^povia, q. v.), what one has in mind^ the thoughts and pur/ioses, [A. V. mini/] : Ro. viii. 6 sq. 27. (Ilesych. (j)puvripa- fiovXr^pa, diXrjpa. In \arious other senses al.-io fr. Aeschyl. down.) * (t>po'vii(ris, -fuj. 17, ((ppovia), understanding : joined with «To^i'a (as 1 K. iv. 25 (29) ; Dan. i. 17 Theod. ; jj la dvdpl TLKTd ({)p6vr]inv, Prov. x. 23), Epli. i. 8 [A. V. pru- dence; see pdvi)ios, -ov, {(jipoviui) ; a. intelligent, wise [so A. V. uniformly] : 1 Co. x. 15 ; opp. to papos. 1 Co. iv. 10; opp. to as, adv., prudently, jvisely : Lk. xvi. 8. [From Arst[)h. down.] * povpc'u, -S> : impf. icppoipovv ; fut. (fipovprjtra ; Pass.,, pres. ptcp. fppovpovpfvos ; impf. c(j)povpovpr)v ; (pv(ur(ru: 1 aor. 3 jiers. plur. ecppia^av: (everywhere in prof. auth. and also in Mace, as a depon. mid. (f>pvdpv'Yavov. 'ov, TO, (fr. fppvyio or (fjpvatTco, vve\Xos and (LTTrWH [see WH. App. p. 159]) ^uYtXos, -ov, 6, Pliygellus [better Phyg'-elus~\, a Christian, who was with Paul at Rome and deserted him [see B.D. s. V. and the Comm.] : 2 Tim. i. 15.* <|)irYTi'. -Tjs. r). ((j)eiiya>), fr. Hom. dovrn,J!ight: Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. xiii. 18 Rec* 4)vXoKi), -jjs, ij, {(pv\acT(r(j>), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ni'pc'p, I'pii'?, rrjaa (a prison), vh2 (enclosure, con- finement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense, a watching, Jceeping watch : (pv\d(T(Teiv (jivKaxat, to keep icatch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6, 10, etc. ; Plat. legg. 6 p. 758 d. down ; [cf. (j)v\aKas i'x^tv, etc. fr. Hom. (E. 9, 1 etc.) on] ; often also in .Sept. for niT3LV"3 'TDn). b. like the Lat. custodia and more freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Har- pers' Lat. Diet.] s. v.), i. q. persons keeping watch, a guard, sentinels : Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. jmrrf] (and very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10; XXV. 36, [39], 43 sq. ; Mk. vi. 1 7, 27 (28) ; Lk. iii. 20 ; xxi. 12; xxii. 33; Actsv. 19, 22; viii. 3 ; xii. 5 sq. 17; xvi. 27,40; xxii. 4 ; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in Heb. xi. 36, A. V. (';n/7n'sonmen(]; 2Co. xi. 23; 1 Pet. iii. 19; Eev. xviii. 2 [twice; rendered in A. V. hold and cage (R.V. /loW)]; xx. 7, (Hdt. 3, 152; Thuc. 3, 34; Plut., al. ; Sept. for niun, nhs n'3, and X/3n iT3, "1'Di^'p) ; jSiiXXfti' or TiBivai nva elt (t.) (j)v\aKfjv or ev (rij) (pvKaKrj : Mt. v. 25 ; xiv. 3 [R G, al. aniBfTo] ; xviii. 30; Lk. xii. 53 ; xxiii. 19, 25; Jn. iii. 24 ; Actsv. 25; viii. 3 [here iiapahihovai eU 0.]; xii. 4; xvi. 23 sq. 37; Rev. ii. 10. d. of the time (of night) during which guard was kept, a watch i.e. the period of time during which a part of the guard were on duty, and at the end of which others relieved them. As the earlier Greeks divided the night commonly into three parts [see L. and S. s. V. I. 4], so, previously to the exile, the IsraeUtes also had three watches in a night ; subsequently, how- ever, after they became subject to Rome, they adopted the Roman custom of dividing the night into four watches : Mt. xxiv. 43 ; iv tjj dfvrepa, Tpi-nj. Lk. xii. 38 ; TerdpTrj, Mt. xiv. 25 ; Jlk. vi. 48. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Xachtwache ; [McC. and .S. s. v. Night-watch; B.D. s. V. Watches of Xight].' (tiuXaKiJu; ((pv'KaKfi [or (pvKa^]') ; to cast into prison, imprison: Acts xxii. 19. (Sap. xviii. 4; eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * uXaKTiipiov, -on, TO, (neut. of the adj. (pvXaKrljpios, -a, -ov, iv. (pvKaKTTjp ['poetic for vKa^ ']) ; 1. a forti- fied jilace provided icith a garrison, a station for a guard or garrison. 2. a preservative or safeguard, an am- ulet; Dem. p. 71, 24; Diosc. 5, 158 (159) sq., often in Plut. The Jews gave the name of ^vXaxrijpia (in the Talm. '^'h3r\ prayer-fiilets, Germ. Oebetsrieinen; [cf. O. T. ' frontlets ']) to small strips of parchment on which were written the foil. pass, from the law of Moses, E,\. xiii. 1-10, 11-16; Deut. vi. 4-9; xi. 13-21, and which, en- closed in little cases, they were accustomed when en- gaged in prayer to wear fastened by a leather strap to the forehead and to the left arm over against the heart, in order that they might thus be solemnly reminded of the duty of keeping the commands of God in the head and in the heart, ace. to the directions given in Ex. xiii. 16 ; Deut. vi. 8; xi. 18; (cf. Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 13). These scrolls were thought to have power, like amulets, to avert various evils and to drive away demons (Targ. on Cant. viii. 3) ; hence their Greek name. [But see Gins- burg in Alex.'s Kitto s. vv. Phylacteries (sub fin.) and Mezuza.] The Pharisees were accustomed to (pvKa- KTrjpia avrav TrKarvveiv. to ividen, make broad, their phylac- teries, that they might render them more conspicuous and show themselves to be more eager than the majority to be reminded of God's law: Mt. xxiii. 5. Cf. Wiri. RWB. s. V. Phylakterien ; Leyrer in Herzog xi. 639 sqq. ; Kneucker in Schenkel i. 601 sq.; Delitzscli in Riehm 270 sq. ; [Edersheim, Jewish Social Life etc., p. 220 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Frontlets ; esp. Hamburger, Real-Encycl. s. V. Tephillin, vol. ii. p. 1203 sq. ; Ginsburg in Alex.'s Kitto u. s.].* vXaJ, -aKOi, 6, (<^uXd(7o-£D), a guard, keeper: Acts v. 23 ; xii. 6, 19. (From Hom. down ; Sept. for T?i?.) * uXda-o-u ; fut. (pvXd^a ; 1 aor. e(j)vXa^a ; ilid., pres. (pv\do-(TOfiat; 1 aor. e(^uXa|dfii)c ; pres. pass. (^uXaVv\a^ei (opp. to dnoKftrti) t. i/fX'/" ^'' C'^'l" aia>v. i. e. will keep it wiih lie result that he will have life eternal, Jn. xii. 25 ; iavrov dno t. to guard one's self from a thing, 1 Jn. v. 21 [where cf. AVestcott]. d. lo guard, i. e. lo care for, take care not to violate ; to ob- serve : Tov vonov, Acts vii. 53 ; xxi. 24 ; Gal. vi. 13, (Lev. xix. 37, etc.; Soph. Trach. G16; al. ; vojiovi, Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 30 ; Plat, do rep. (! p. 4S4 b. ; poUt. p. 292 a.) ; sin- gle precepts of the Mosaic law, Mt. xix. 20 L T Tr Wll ; Mk. X. 20 Lchm.; Lk. xviii. 21 LTTr txt. WH ; [ra 8iKaia>iiaTa tov vofiov, Ro. ii. 26] ; t6v \6yov tov 6eov, Lk. xi. 2S: Ta pijuara of Jesus, Jn. xii. 47 LTTrWII; apostolic directions, Acts xvi. 4 ; 1 Tim. v. 21. 2. Jlid. a. to observe for one's self something to es- cape, i. e. to avoid, shun, flee from : by a use com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, with an ace. of the obj., ri, Acts x.xi. 25 [A. V. keep themselves from"] ; riva, 2 Tim. iv. 15 [A.V. be thou ware of]; djrd nvot, lo keep one's self from a thing, Lk. xii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 9 ; [Hell. 7, 2, 10]); tm n^, 2 Pet. iu. 17 (Sttqis fir,, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 37; other exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2360°; [L. and S. s. V. C. II.]). b. by a usage foreign to Grk. writ, but very fr6q. in the Sept. (cf. W. 253 (238)), to guard for one's self (i. e. for one's safety's sake) so as not to violate, i. e. to keep, observe : Tairra navra (the pre- cepts of the Mosaic law), Mt. xix. 20 R G ; Mk. x. 20 R GTTr WH; Lk. xviii. 21 RG Tr mrg., (Ex. xii. 17; Lev. xviii. 4 ; xx. 8, 22; xxvi. 3, and manv r" .ip pass.). [CoMP. : Sta-. Syn. see Trjpiut, , ^vKi\, -Tji, Tj, (fr. (pva), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; 1. a tribe; in the N. T. all the persons descended from one of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for np"3 and D^p; also for nnS'iVO, see narpid, 2) : Ileb. vii. 13 sq. ; with the addition of the genitives 'Acrrip, Bfvtapiv, etc., Lk. ii. 36; .\cts xiii. 21 ; Ro. xi. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5 ; Rev. V. 5 ; vii. 5-8 ; badexa (j>. tov 'icrparlX, ^It. xix. 28 ; Lk. xxii. 30; Jas. i. 1 ; Rev. xxi. 12; [Trao-a (t)v\fi vi&v'lo-parjX, Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people : Jit. xxiv. 30; Rev. [i. 7] ; v. 9 ; vii. 9 ; [xi. 9] ; xiii. 7; xiv. 6.* 4>vXXov, -on, TO, (va)), a leaf: Mt. xxi. 19; xxiv. 32; Mk. xi. 13; xiii. 28; Rev. xxii. 2. [From Horn, down.] * vpa)ia, -Tos, TO, ((pvpdo) to mix), any substance mixed with water and kneaded ; a mass, lump : of dough (Num. XV. 20s(i.; [plur., Ex. viii.3; xii. 34]; Aristot. probl. 21, 1^ p. 929«, 25; Pint, quaest. conv. 6, 7, 2. 15 p. 693 e.), 1 Co. v. 6 sq. ; Gal. v. 9, (on the meaning of which pass, see fu/i)j) ; Ro. xi. 16 ; of clay (Plut. praec. ger. reip. 15, 4 p. 811c.), Ro. ix. 21 [cf. B. § 140, 3 Rem.].' 4ivvtns), natural ; i. e. a. pro- duced b>/ 7iature, inborn, (very often so fr. Xen. [mem. 3, 9, 1] down). b. agreeable to nature, (Dion. Hal., Plut., ah) :- opp. to TTopa (j>v(Tiv, Ro. i. 26. [27]. c. governed by (jhe instincts of) nature : ^aa yfycwrffiiva (fn/atxd, 2 Pet. ii. 12 [R. V. born mere animals].' 4>u(rtKcij$, adv., in a natural manner, bij nature, under the guidance of nature: by the aid of the bodily senses, Jude 10. [(Aristot., Philo, al.)] * ^v, -w ; Pass., pres. (pv(Tiovfiai; J)f. ptcp. irct/jixTtu/w- vos ; 1 aor. ((pvtriojdrjv ; 1. (fr. iivv(jKv Tri ' A^po^Wrj ^pujpfvoi, Athen. 13 p. 605 ; o 7ra*5f- paarrjs . . . ttjv rrapa (l)V(Tip ijdovfjv SiuiKft, Philo de spec. legg. i. § 7) ; as oi)i)Osed to what has been jiroduced by the art of man : oi koto (pia-iv xXdSoi, the natural brandies, i.e. branches by the operation of nature, Ro. xi. 21, 24 [W. 193 (182)], contrasted with oi iyKevrpitrBlvrfs napa (pi(Ttv, contrary to the plan of nature, cf. 24 ; r, Kara (f>va-iv dypie\aios, ibid. ; as opposed to what is imagi- nary or fictitious: oJ fifi (pia-ei ovres Sfoi, who are gods not by nature, but ace. to tlic mistaken ojiinion of the Gentiles (k(y6p(voi Beol, 1 Co. viii. 5), Gal. iv. 8 ; nature, i. e. natural sense, native conviction or knowledge, as opj). to what is learned by instruction and accom- plished by training or prescribed by law : ij v, naturU magistra, guided by their natural sense Tfpos, So])h. O. C. 1295; ru p(V (fivati Trarpis, tov 6e vopt^ noXiTqv enCTiotrjuTO. Isocr. Evagr. 21 ; (j)v(Tfi ^dpfiapoi ovTfS, vopa 8e''EX\r)ves, Plat. Menex. p. 24.5 d. ; cf. Grimm on Saj). .xiii. 1) ; r, ck (pva-eat dxpo- ^vaTia, who by birth is uncircumcised or a (Jeutile (opp. to one who, although circumcised, has made himself a Gentile by his iniquity and spiritual perversity), Ro. ii. 27. c. a mode of feeling and arting irhich by long habit lias become nature : rjp^fv (f>vaei TiKva opyrjs, by (our depraved) nature we were exposed to the wrath of God, Eph. ii. 3 (this meaning is evident from the preceding context, and stands in contrast with the change of heart and life wrought through Christ by the blessing of di^'ine grace; ^ucret npos tos KoXda-m (irifiKcJs €;^oucni' oi ^apKTatoi, .Toseph. antt. 13, 10, 6. [Others (see Meyer) would lay more stress here upon the constitution in which this 'habitual course of evil ' has its origin, wheth- er that constitution be regarded (with some) as already developed at birth, or (better) as undeveloped ; cf. Aristot. pol. 1, 2 p. 1252', 32 sq. oiov €Kav(Tis jj dvOparnvri (the ability, art, skill, of men, the t qualities which are proper to their nature and necessa- rily emanate from it), Jas. iii. 7 [cf. Vt'. § 31, 10]; 6fias Koii/avol 4>va-e(i>s, (the holiness distinctive of the divine nature is specially referred to), 2 Pet. i. 4 ('A^fvm^ei ... deias doKOvvTL perea^rjKei/ai ^vv(rCv(n6cii, q. v.), (Vulg. inflalio), a pufjing up of soul, loftiness, pride : plur. [A.V. swellings] 2 Co. xii. 20. (Eccles. writ.) * 4>vrE(a. -as. ij, ((jyvrevai, q. V.) ; 1. a planting (Xen., Tlieophr., Pint., Ael., al.). 2. thing planted, a plant, (i. q. (fivrevp^) ■ Mt. xv. 13, [Athen. 5 p. 207 d.; Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. No. 4521 vol. iii. p. 240].* (jnn-evu ; impf. i(f)vT£vov; 1 aor. icj)vTeuvu ; 2 aor. pass, {kr^irjv) ptcp. ipviv (for which the Attic writ, more com. use the 2 aor. act. i(^vv with the ptcp. (^vs, (jiiv, in a pass, or intrans. sense ; cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 321 ; Kriiger § 40 s. v. ; Kuhner § 343 s. V. ; [Veitch s. v.] ; \V. § 15 s. v. ; [B. 08 (60)]) ; [cf. La,t.fui,fore, etc. ; Curtius § 41 7] ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to beget, bring forth, produce ; pass, to be born, to spring up, to grow. Lk. viii. 6, 8 ; 2. intrans. to shoot forth, spring up: Heb. xii. 15 [W. 252 (237). CoMP. : cV, avp-u\e6s, -o€, 6, a lurking-hole, burrow ; a lair : of ani- mals, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58. (Aristot., Ael., Plut.. Geop., al.) * (fiuvecD, -S>; impf. 3 pers. sing, (ipavci; fut. (jtavrjo-a ; 1 aor. ei^v^ pey. €itt(V, Lk. xxiii. 46 : e'c^ui/. Kpavyfj [L T Tr WH cpav^] pey. Xtyav, Rev. xiv. 18; \i^a>vrjiTavT(S imvBavovro (^^ H txt. eirvdovTo), Acts x. 18]. 2. as fr. [Horn. Od. 24, 535] Soph, down, trans. a. to call, call to one's self: rivi, — either by one's own voice, Mt. xx. 32; xxvii. 47; ilk. ix. 35 X. 49 [cf. B. § 141, 5 fin.] ; xv. 35; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 9 iv. 16 ; X. 3 L T Tr WH ; xi. 28*; xviii. 33 ; Acts ix. 41 X. 7; — or through another; to send for, summon : Mk, iii. 31 R G ; Lk. xvi. 2 ; Jn. ix. 18, 24 ; xi. 28» ; E?,re "VTi, -fji, fj, ((^do) to shine, make clear, [cf. Curtius § 407 ; L. and S. s. v. ^do»]), fr. Horn, down, Hebr. '71p ; 1. a sound, tone : of inanimate things, as of musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. <^., WH give it only in mrg.; cf. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq. ; Rev. xiv. 2; xvui. 22, (Is. xviii. 3 ; .xxiv. 8 ; Sir. 1. 16 ; 1 Mace, v. 31 ; opydvtov. Plat, de rep. 3 p. 397 a. ; avpiyyav, Eur. Tro. 127 ; y^akTrjpiov (cat av\ov, Plut. mor. p. 713 c.) ; of wind, Jn. iii. 8 ; Acts ii. 6 ; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1 ; xiv. 2 ; xix. 6, cf. iv. 5 ; viii. 5 ; xi. 19 ; xvi. 18 ; noise, of a millstone, Rev. xviii. 22 ; of a thronging multitude. Rev. xix. 1, 6; of chariots. Rev. ix. 9; of wings, ichir (Ezek. i. 24), ibid. ; of waters (Ezek. i. 24 ; 4 Esdr. vi. 1 7), Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2; xLx. 6 ; also with the gen. of a thing im- plying speech, the sound [A. V. voice] : toO daTtaa-pov, Lk. i. 44 ; pTjpaToiv, Heb. xii. 19 ; the cry (of men), (pwinf p€yd\j]. a loud cry, ilk. xv. 37 ; the clamor of men mak- ing a noisy demand, Lk. xxiii. 23, cf. Acts xix. 34 ; absol. a cry i. e. wailing, lamentation, Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15). 2. a voice, i. e. the sound of uttered words : XaKeiv (f)a>vds, Rev. x. 3 ; those who begin to cry out or call to any one are said ttjv (pavijv alpeiv, Lk. xvii. 13 ; jrpds nva. Acts iv. 24 ; (^a)(/^j/ inalpfiv, Lk. xi. 27 ; Acts ii. 14 ; xiv. 11 ; x.xii. 22; [<^. Kpa^av (or e'lc- (cpaffiv). Acts x.xiv. 21 (cf. B. § 143, 11)] ; ^wv. pfy-}. Rev. v. 2 [Rec. om. iv]: Kpavyd- (civ, .Jn. xi. 43 : dvaxpa^dv, Lk. iv. 33 ; Kpd^ctv. ilt. xxvii. 50; ilk.i. 26 [II GL]; v. 7; Actsvii. 57, 6": Rev. vi. 10; vii. 2, 10; X. 3; [xviii. 2 Rec.]; ,xLx. 17; /cpdf. iv(f>av. pty. Rev. xiv. 15; iv l(rxypa ipwvjj, Rev. xviii. 2 [GL T Tr WH] ; pcra cfxovijs pey. So^d^dv tok 6. Lk. xvii. 1 5 : of declarations from heaven, heard though no speaker is seen : IBov (juavfj Xiyovaa, ilt. iii. 1 7 ; xvii. 5 ; (pj^erai a>vr]. ilk. Lx. 7 [R G L Tr txt.] ; Jn. xii. 28 ; i^ipxrrai. Rev. xvi. 1 7 ; xLx. 5 : ylvfrm (^tocij, ilk. i. 1 1 [T om. WH br. iyiv. ; ix. 7 T Tr mrg. WH] ; Lk. iii. 22 : ix. 35 sq. ; Jn. xii. 30 : [Acts vii. 31 (where Rec. adds Trpor airov)] ; jrpo's Tiva, Acts x. 13, 15; [(jxov^s ive)(6cioT)i avra, 2 Pet. w 662 «^w? i. 17]; iylvovTo ipavai n€yd\ai, Rev. xi. 15; [dn'ffcpi^ <^o)i'i), Acts xi. 9]; d'<^ii)i'7)i' [cf. B. §§ 132, 17; 144, 16 a.], Acts ix. 4 ; xxii. 9, [14]; xxvi. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 18 ; Rev. i. 10; iv. 1 [B. § 129, 8 b.] ; vi. G [here L T TrWH insert is], 7 [here G om. Tr br. (pav.} ; i.x. 13 [B. U.S.] ; X. 4, 8 ; xi. 1 2 [R G L WII mrg.j ; xii. 10 ; xiv. 2 ; xviii. 4 ; xix. G ; oKoidv ^uk^s [B. § 132, 17 ; W. § 30, 7 d.]. Acts ix. 7 ; xi. 7 ; x.\ii. 7 ; Rev. [xi. 12 T Tr WII txt.] ; xiv. 13 ; xvi. 1 ; xxi. 3 ; /SXcVfiv Trjv v. i. c. the one who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12. vr) with a gen. of the subject : /SoifTor, Mt. iii. 3 ; Mk. i. 3 ; Lie. iii. 4 ; Jn. i. 23, all fr. Is. xi. 3 ; [ayyfKav orav fie'XA.'; (raXTri'ffiv, Rev. X. 7] ; tj (j). Tivos, the natural (familiar) sound of one's voice. Acts xii. 14 ; Rev. iii. 20, (Cant. v. 2) ; the man- ner of speaking, as a shepherd's (cry or call to his sheep), Jn. x. 3-5 ; to such ' voices ' Jesus likens his precepts approved ('heard') by all the good, Jn. x. IG, 27, cf. xviii. 37; ivdfiawov, human utterance, 2 Pet. ii. 16 ; <^. Ttvof, tlie voice of a clamorous person, Mt. xii. 19 (Is. xlii. 2); of one exidting, jubilant, Jn. iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23 ; ayyeKaiv noXKcov, singing the praises of Christ, Rev. v. 11 s(j. ; tlie sound of the words of Christ as he shall recall the dead to life (the Resurrection-cry), Jn. v. 2.7, 28 ; apxaY/CKov^ the awakening shout of the arch- angel, the leader of the angelic liost, 1 Th. iv. 16 ; toO 6(oii, of God, — teaching, admonishing, whether in the O. T. Scriptures or in the gospel, Jn. v. 37 ; Ileb. iii. 7, 15 ; iv. 7 ; shaking the earth, Ileb. .xii. 26 ; the speech, discourse, 6eou ovk av6p. Acts xii. 22 ; {ras (jxavas twv TTpo(pr]Toiv, the ])redictions (' read every sabbath'). Acts xiii. 27] ; aWd^ai Ttjv (f>. (see dXKaaaa), Gal. iv. 20. 3. speech, i. e. a language, tongue : I Co. xiv. 10 sq. (Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 1 ; [1, 9, 2; 1, 14, l.etc] ; Ceb. tab. 33 ; Ael. V. h. 12, 48; Diog. Laert. 8, 3; for other exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow s. v. p. 2377''; [L. and S. s. v. II. 3]; Gen. xi. 1 ; Deut. xxviii. 49 ; rfi e^patSi cjioivfi, 4 jSIacc. xii. 7; TJj TTarplco ipovjj. 2 Mace. vii. 8, 21, 27). [Syx. cf. Schmidt ch. 1 § 27 ; Trench § Ixxxix. ; and see XaXe'to, ad init.] * <|>us, (fxiiTos. TO, (contr. fr. (j)aos, fr. (piiai to shine), fr. Ilom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form (pdos) down, Hebr. liX, tight (opp. to to o-kotos, tj a-Kona) ; 1. prop. a. univ. : 6 6fbi 6 fiTraiv ck crKorovi (pas Xd/i\|'at, 2 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3) ; Xeuxa ms to (pois, Mt. xvii. 2 ; veS>s here in an outward or physical sense, and regard the state- ment as a general truth confirmatory of the assertion made respecting spiritual ' <^(bt-os ' just before (cf. ■above)]. c. By a fig. borrowed from daylight (Pws is used of that wliich is exposed to (he view of all: iv tw ffxon (opp. to ev Trj (TKOTia), openly, puhlichj, (eV <^aH, Find. Xem. 4, 63), Mt. x. 27 ; Lk. xii. 3. d. reason, mind; the power of understanding esp. moral and spir- itual truth : TO i^ms to iv aoi, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 35. [Stx. see (peyyos, fin.] • uo--4>opos, -ov, {S)s and ipfpa), light-bringing, giving light, (Arstph.. Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) : as subst. 6 . (Lat. Lucifer), the planet Venus, the morning-star, da>/-star, (Plat. Tim. Locr. p. 96 e. ; Plut., al.) : 2 Pet. i. 19, on the meaning of this pass, see \vxvos.* ({kdtcivos [WH (f)o>Tiv6s, see I, t], -ij, -6v, ((pas), light, i. e. composed of light, of a bright character : vf ; f ut. (poyTitra (Rev. xxii. 5 L WH ; 1 Co. iv. 5), Attic (poiTiai (Rev. xxii. 5 G T Tr) ; 1 aor. erpmTicra ; pf. pass. ptcp. 77e<^taTi(T/x«Vos; 1 aor. pass. E0TLuTur)i6s, -ov, 6. ( Jn. xiv. 28 ; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16 ; 2 Jn. 4 ; ev tovtio oti, Lk. X. 20 ; with a dat. of the cause : rfj e'ATriSt x'"P°'"'f f' 'c'' the hope of future blessedness give you joy, Ko. xii. 12 [yet cf. W. §31, 1 k., 7 d.]. b. in a broader sense, to be well, to thrive ; in salutations, the impv. x''^'^P^'' '""' ■' Lat. salcc, (so fr. Horn, down) : Mt. xxvi. 49 : xxvii. 29 ; Mk. XV. 18 ; Lk. i. 28 ; Jn. xix. 3 ; plur. xaipert, [A. V. all liail], Mt. xxviii. 9 ; at the beginning of letters the inf. x'^ipfiv (sc. Xt'yft or KiKeixi) : Acts xv. 23 ; xxiii. 26 ; Jas. i. 1, (often in the bks. of Mace; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. X. 18 ; Otto in the Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678 sqq. ; cf. Ililgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 99 sqq. ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 27 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 25) ; fully, p^aipeiK Xe'yti), to r/U'e one greeting, salute, 2 Jn. 10, [11]. [Co.MP. : (Tvi/-xaLpo).~\ * XoXo^o, -ijf, ij, (xa\da>, ([■ v. [so Etym. Magn. 805, 1 ; but Curtius (§ 181) says "certainly has nothing to do with it "]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for Ti2, hail : Rev. viii. 7; xi. 19; xvi. 21.* XaXdd), -S> ; fut. xaKaira ; 1 aor. ('xaXacra ; 1 aor. pass. (Xa^iiadrjii; fr. Aeschyl. and Piud. down; a. to luoaen, slacken, relax. b. to let down from a higher place to a lower : ti or ziva, Mk. ii. 4 ; Lk. v. 4 sq. ; Acts xxvii. 17, 30, [in these two pass, in a nautical sense. In lower'] ; Tivii iv airvpiSi, Acts ix. 25 ; pass. 2 Co. xi. 33.' XaXSaios, -ov, 6, a Chalrlcean ; yjj \a\8alav the land of the Chaidteans, Chaldaea: Acts vii. 4, where a reference to Gen. xi. 28, 31 and xv. 7 seems to show that southern Armenia is referred to. The different opinions of oth- er interpreters are reviewed by Dillmann on Genesis (3te Aufl.) p. 223 sq. ; [cf. Schroder in Riehm s. v. ; Saijce in Encycl. Brit. s. v. Babylonia].* Xa\€irds, -ij, -ox, (fr. ;^nXe'7rT&) to oppress, annoy, [(?)]), fr. Horn, down, hard (Lat. dijficilis) ; a. hard to do, to take, to approach. b. hard to bear, troublesome, dangerous : Kaipoi ;(aXf7roi', [R.V. grievous'], 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; harsh, fierce, savage: of men, Mt. viii. 28 (Is. xviii. 2 and often in prof. auth. fr. Horn, down).* \a\iva'Y'Yeu, -a> ; 1 aor. inf. ;^aXii'0'yMy^crai ; (p^aXtwoi and ityw) ; to lead hi/ a bridle, to guide, (tjnroc, Wah, Rhett. Grace, i. p. 425, 19) ; trop. to In-idle, hold in check, restrain : tt)v yKaxTirau, Jas. i. 26 ; to iraipa, Jas. iii. 2 ; Tar Tu>v fiBoviov ope^eis. Lcian. tyrann. 4. [(Poll. I § 215.)] * XoXivos, -oO, 6, (^aXnco), a bridle : Jas. iii. 3 ; Rev. xiv. 20. (From Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) * XoXkcos, -('a, -(OV, contr. -ovs, -rj, -ovv, (;(aXKdf), fr. Horn, down, brazen, [A. V. of brass] : Rev. ix. 20.* XoXkcvs, -iuit, o, (xoXkos), fr. Horn, down, a worker in copper or iron, a smith: 2 Tim. iv. 14 [A. V. copper- smith].* XoXktiSuv, -ovos, 6, chalcedony, a precious stone de- scribed by Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (18), 72 [see B. I), (esp. Am. ed.) s. V.]: Rev. xxi. 111.* XoXkIov, -ov. to, (xoXkus), a (copper or) brazen vessel: Mk. vii. I. ([Arstph.], Xen. oec. 8, 19; [al.].) • XoXko Xipavov (so .Suidas [but seeed. Gaisf. s. v.]), -ov, TO, more correctly ;(aXKoXi/3a>'ot, -ov, tj, (ace. to the read- ing as it ought to he restored [(but see the edd.)] ia Rev. i. 15 i>s (V KafiivioirfTrvpwpivrj; cf. Diisterdieck's crit. note [see B. so (69) note]), a word of doubtful meaning,, found oidy in Rev. i. 15, and ii. 18, chalcolibanus, Vulg> aurlchalcnm or orichalcuni (so cod. Amiat., [al. acric.]; Luther Messing, [R. V. burnished brass]) ; ace. to the- testimony of an ancient (ireek [Ansonius] in Salmasitis (Exercitt. ad Solin. p. 810 ,a. : 6 Xifiavot fx(i rpia ciSrf SivUpt^v, Ka'i 6 piv itpprjv ovopa^frai ;(aXKoXi'/3ai'ot, i}Xiof i8ijs Km TTvppos rjyovv ^av66s), a certain kind of (yellow) frankincense; but both the sense of the passages in Rev. and a comparison of Dan. x. 6 and Ezek. i. 7, which seem to have been in the writer's thought, compel us to understand some metal, like gold if not more precious (cf. Ilebr. ^?^!^!!, a metal composed of gold and silver, Sept. ffKiKTpov, Vulg. electrum, Ezek. i. 4, 27 ; viii. 2) : this in- terpretation is confirmed by the gloss of Suidas : ddos Ti)ieKTpov riixiusTepov xpvo'ov, (crri 6e to rfKcKTpov dXKoTvnov Xpwriov pepiyptvov ie'Xm k- \idfia. The word is com- ]iounded, no doubt, of p^aXxor and Xiliavos, not of ;^aXK09 and pS ' white.' Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Jletalle ; Wetzel in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1869, p. 92 sqq. ; cf. Ewald, Johann. Sehriften, ii. p. 117 sq.; [_Lee in the 'Sjie.aker's Com.' ad loc.].* X(iXk(Ss, -ov, 6, fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for T\'dx^i, brass: 1 Co. xiii. 1 ; Rev. xviii. 12; (like the Lat. aes) what is made of brass, monei/, coins of brass (also of siher and of gold), Mt.x. 9; Mk.vi. 8; xii. 41. [B.D. s. v. Brass; Diet, of Antiq. s. v. aes.] * Xa|jia(, adv. ; a. on the ground, on the earth. b. to the ground; in both senses fr. Hom. down; in the latter sense Jn. ix. 6 [where, however, Eng. idiom re- tains oh]; .xviii. 6.* Xavadv, 17, Hcbr. U'33 [lit. 'lowland'], Canaan, the land, if Canaan, indeel. prop, name : in the narrower sense, of that part of Palestine h'ing west of the Jordan, Acts vii. 11 ; in a wider sense, of all Palestine, Acts xiii. 19.* Xavavoios, -a, -ok, Ilebr. 'Ji'J3, Canaanite ; the name of the ancient inhabitants of Palestine before its con- ([uest by the Israelites ; in Christ's time i. q. Phanician [R.V. Canaarnlish]: Mt. xv. 22.' Xapd, -as. 17. (xaipo)), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph, down, .Sept. for ntl'Db' and jltytj'. 70//, gladness ; a: Lk. i. 14; XV. 7, 16: Jn. XV. 11; xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 13; Acts viii. 8 ; 2 Co. vii. 13 ; viii. 2 ; Gal. v. 22 ; Col. i. 1 1 ; Phil. ii.. Xapa'yiia 665 X«P'? 2 ; 1 .In. i. 4 ; 2 Jn. 1 2 ; opp. to KaTt)(i>eia, .Tas. iv. 9 : opp. to \vTTr), Jn. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. ii. 3 ; Ileb. xii. 11 ; v^aii», i. e. the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the 'sor- row ' which Paul on returning to Corintli would both experience and give, ii. 1-3) ; xapa t^j Trla-Tfas, spring- ing from faith, Phil. i. 25 ; x^'P"" x^P"" f^^V- ^^'' "• ^*' [W. §32, 2; B. 131, 5]; ayaXXmir^ai X"P^' 1 l^^t. i. 8; Xapav [Rec." xap""] ffoA^v" «x^'" ""■' ^^''''' * dat. of the thing, Pliilem. 7 ; li^ripovv riva x''P"'' R°- -^'*'- 1*^ ' '"^V poiaBat xaptifi Acts xiii. J2 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 : Troteti' rivi x'^P'"' fjieyaXr]!/. Acts XV. 3 ; ano t^s X''P"'' '^°'' J°.'' ' ^^'" '''''■ ^*^ ' Lk. xxiv. 41 ; Acts xii. 14 ; iv x^P? (tpx^"'^'")» ^^- -^^• 32 ; /lera x^pos, with joy. Jit. xiii. 20 ; xxviii. 8 ; Mk. iv. 16; Lk.viii. 13; x. 17; .x.\iv. 52; Acts xx. 24 Rec. ; Phil. i. 4; ii. 29; Heb. x. 34 ; xiu. 17, (Polyb. 11, 33, 7 ; 22, 17, 12 ; Xen. Hiero 1, 25) ; with nveiiiaros dyiov added, joy wrought by the Holy Spirit, 1 Th. i. G ; x°P" ^" m/iCfiari ayitf, joyousness caused by [cf. cV, I. 6 (p. 211'" bot.) andB. §133, 23] the Holy Spirit, Ro. xiv. 17; xapa tVi Twi, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; x"'!'^^" X^P? ^"^ ^*'' ''^"" '''• ^^ L^^' Xaipo), a..] ; also 8ia rivr (a relative pron. intervening), 1 Th. iii. 9 ; ^ xapa u". J"- x^'- -1 ! Xapa ^"a (see lua, II. 2 d.), 3 Jn. 4. b. by meton. the cause or occasion of joy : Lk. ii. 10 ; Jas. i. 2 ; [so 2 Co. i. 15 WH txt. Tr mrg. (al. x^P"- 'I- ^'- '^ b.)] ; of persons who are one's ' joy ' : 1 Th. ii. 19 sq. ; Phil. iv. 1 ; of a joyful condition or state : ami . . . xapas, to attain to blessedness at the right hand of God in heaven, Heb. xii. 2 ; the same idea is expressed in the parable by the words, ij x°P" Toil Kvpiov, the blessedness which the Lord enjoys, Mt. XXV. 21, 23.' ^dpa-yixa. -tos, to, (xapd(r(Ta> to engrave) ; a. a stamp, an imprinted mark : of the mark stamped on the forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq. ; xiv. 9, 11; xv. 2 Rec; xvi. 2 ; xix. 20 ; xx. 4, (nvpos, the mark branded upon horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thiny carved, sculp- ture, graven work : of idolatrous images. Acts xvii. 29. (In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, down.) * XapaKTTJp, -rjpoi, 6, (xapapayiSi 6eov, rjs 6 xapaKTrjp eariv 6 d!8ios \6yos, Philo dc plant. Xoe § 5 ; X- dfias Svvdiieais, of the human mind, Philo, fpiod det. potiori ins. § 23 ; God t6v avdponrov enXatrcv ttjs eavrov cIkovos xapaKTTJpa, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 33, 4 ; ot Trioroi iv dyaTTTj xapaKTrfpa Bfov Trarpos 8ui ^Irjaov 'KpiCTTov (exova-iv), Ignat. ad ifagnes. 5, 2. the peculiarity, by which things are recognized and distinguished from each other, [cf. Eng. characteristic'] : 2 Mace. iv. 10.* Xiipol, -aKos, 6, (xapaa-aw) ; 1. a pale or stake, a palisade, [(Arstph., Dcm., al.)]. 2. a palisade or rampart (i. e. pales between which earth, stones, trees and timbers are heaped and packed together) : Lk. xix. 43 (Is. xxxvii. 33 ; Ezek. iv. 2 ; xxvi. 8 ; Polyb. ; Joseph, vit. 43 ; Arr. exp. Alex. 2, 19, 9 ; Plut., al.).* Xo.pi5o|i.ai ; depon. mid.; fut. xap''<''op<" (Ro. viii. 32; Lcian. d. mar. 9, 1, for which Grk. writ. com. use the Attic xapi-oip-ai- [cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq.; B. 37 (32); AV. § 15 s. V.]) ; pf. (cf;(apto-/iai ; 1 aor. e';^apt(7a/iT;i/ ; 1 aor. I)ass. exapicrdqv (Acts iii. 14; 1 Co. ii. 12 ; Phil. i. 29, [cf. B. 52 (46)]) ; fut. pass, xapta-dfia-opai with a pass, signif. (Philem. 22) ; (xap's) I often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to do a favor to, gratify ; a. univ. to show one's self gra- cioits, kind, benevolent: nvi. Gal. iii. 18 [al. (supply t. KKrjpovoplav a,nd) refer this to c. below]. b. to grant forgiveness, to pardon : 2 Co. ii. 7 ; with a dat. of the pers., Eph. iv. 32 ; Col. iii. 13 ; with an ace. of the thing, 2 Co. ii. 10-[cf. W. § 39, 1 b. and 3 X. 3] ; nv\ ti)i/ dStfciW, 2 Co. xii. 13; Ta TrapoTTTw/iaTa, Col. ii. 13. c. to give graciously, give freely, bestow : rivi ti, Lk. vii. 21 ; Ro. viii. 32 ; Phil. ii. 9 ; pass., 1 Co. ii. 1 2 ; Phil. i. 29 ; where a debt is referred to, to forgive [cf. b. above], Lk. vii. 42 sq. ; rivi riva, graciously to restore one to another who desires his safety (e. g. a captive [R.V. granti), pass.. Acts iii. 14; Philem. 22 ; or to preserve for one a person in peril. Acts xxvii. 24 ; Tiva rivi, to give up to another one whom he may punish or put to death. Acts xxv. 11 [(cf. R. V. mrg.-)]i with the addition of eiV djraiXdav, ib. 16.* Xapiv, ace. of the subst. x^P'f "^cd absol. ; prop, in favor of, for the pleasure if: ;^npii/ "EKTopor, Horn. II. 15, 744, al. ; 1 Mace. ix. 10; Judith viii. 19; like the Lat. abl. gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposi- tion, and is joined to the gen., /or, on account of, for the sake of: Gal. iii. 19 (on which see Trapa^aats) ; 1 Tim. V. 14 ; Tit. i. 11 ; Jude 16 ; tovtov xapi-", on this account^ for this cause, Eph. iii. 1 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54) ; tovtov x- Iva, Eph. iii. 14 [cf. W. 566 (.■)26)] ; Tit. i. 5 ; oJ x«P"''- for which cause, Lk. vii. 47 ; xdpi" '"'"or >" /"'" "'''"' '■""•"'^ ^ wherefore ? 1 Jn. iii. 12. Except in 1 Jn. iii. 12, xdpiv is everywhere in the N. T. placed a f t e r the gen., as it gen- erally is in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. I. 3 a. p. 2416''; Herm. ad Tig. p. 701) ; in the O. T. Apocr. it is placed sometimes before, sometimes after; cf. WaJit, Clavis Apocr. s. V. 6 b. ; Grimm on 1 INIacc. iii. 29.* xdpis, -iTos, ace. xap^"' ^^'■^ twice in L T Tr ^ H the rarer form xdpiTa (Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4) which is also poetic (cf. Btt77i. Ausf. Spr. i. §44 Anm. 1 ; \_WH. App. 157"; B. 13 (12)]), ace. plur. xdp^^as (Acts xxiv. 27 RG), ij, (xai'pw), fr. Iloni. down, Hebr. ;n, grace; i.e. 1. prop, that which affords joy, pleasure, de- light, sweetness, charm, loveliness : grace of speech (Eccl. X. 12; Sir. xxi. 16 ; xxxvii. 21 ; Horn. Od. 8, 175 ; tSw \6yav, Dem. 51, 9; 1419, 16; ;(dpi7-fr /laypav, verbal pleasantries which the foolish affect in order to ingra- tiate themselves. Sir. xx. 13), \6yoi. x^P'^r (g^"- of (juality), Lk. iv. 22 ; x^P'" SiSoVaf rois aKoiioio-ii-, Eph. iv. y^apKi 666 Xapt<; 29 ; «V xap""'' '"■''^' grace [the subst. oXar being added ; fee Bp. Lglitft.], Col. iv. G. 2. tjnod-n-itl, loviiii/- khidne.i.i, faror : in a broad sense, \apit napd tiw, Lk. ii. 52 ; fxti" X"!"" "'pof '"""•■ to liavo fa\'or witli one, Acts ii. 47; x^P" (vavriov tivus. Acts vii. 10; \j(apiv Kara TWOS aiTfiaSai cHro>s (q. v. II. 2), Acts xxv. 3 (but al. refer this to 3 b. below)] : ;^cipis (of God) «Vtiv tVi riva, attends and assists one, Lk. ii. 40 ; Acts iv. 33 ; x^P'" (xapiTa} ;(uptTaf KaTaTiBfaOai Tivi (see (caTaTi'^ij/tt), Acts xxiv. 27 : XXV. 'J ; favor (i. e. act of fai-ori»/; [cf. \V. § 60 fin.]), 2 Co. viii. 4. x^P'^ ''' n»fL\rjpa are contrasted in Ro. iv. 4, 16; ;(dpiTi and e| epyav in Ro. xi. 6; kot (KXoyrjv xapM^oSj ib. 5 ; but the N. T. writers use x^P'-^ pre-eminently of that kindness by which God bestows favors even upon the ill-deserving, and grants to sinners the pardon of their offences, and bids them ac- cept of eternal salvation through Christ: Ro. iii. 24; V. 17,20sq.; [vi. 1]; iCo.xv. 10; Gal. i. 15; ii. 21 ; Eph. i. 6, [7]; ii. 5, 7sq.; Phil. i. 7 ; CoL i. 6 ; 2Th. ii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 9 ; Heb. ii. 9 [here Treg. mrg. Xwpi's] ; X. 29 ; xii. 1 5 ; xiii. 9 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 ; Jude 4 ; tvpi- the aggregate of the extremely diverse powers and gifts granted to Christians, 1 Pet. iv. 10 ; used of the power to undertake and administer the apostolic office : \al3e1v X«/Jt»' Ka\ dnooToXriv, i. e. x^P^^ ^^^ dTrooToXjjs, Ro. i. 5 ; ^ X- v Soddad pui (Paul), Ro. xii. 3. 6 ; xv. l.j ; 1 Co. iii. 10 ; Gal. ii. 9 ; Eph. iii. 2, 7 ; Sod. Ipiv, of the gifts of knowl- edge and utterance conferred upon Christians, 1 Co. i. 4 ; i866rj poi r) x- avTT], foil, by an inf., Eph. iii. 8 ; of the desire to give alms roused by the grace of God, 2 Co. viii. 1. 4. thanks (for benefits, services, favors); prop. : X"P'"! with thanksgiving, 1 Co. x. 30; x<'P"' '^X*'" Tivi (Lat. r/raliam habere alicui), to be thankful to one, Lk. xvii. 9 ; 1 Tim. i. 12 ; 2 Tim. i. 3 ; Heb. xii. 28, (2 JIacc. iii. 33, and countless times in prof. auth. ; cf. Pas- sow s. v. p. 241 6* sub fin. ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2] ; Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 539 sq. ; Bleek, Brief a. d. Ilebr. ii. 2, p. 975) ; foil, by eVi with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7 T edd. 2 and 7, Ree." ""• (cf. p. 233" mid.) ; x°P^' '''V ^^V ^*^' ^"^"'t Ro. vii. 25 L T Tr WH txt. ; foil, by oti, Ro". vi. 1 7 (^. toU deoU, oTi etc. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 72 ; 8, 7, 3 ; an. 3, 3, 14 ; occ. 8. 16) ; with a ptcp. added to the dat. (by apposition), 1 Co. XV. 57 ; 2 Co. ii. 14 ; viii. 16 ; foil, by iiri with a dat. of the thing [cf. ini, B. 2 a. S.], 2 Co. ix. 15. i. q. recompense, reward, Lk. vi. 32-34 (for which Mt. v. 46 uses iiut66s).* Xapia-fJ.a 667 X^<-P Xapio-fia, -Tos, to, (^xapi^o/iat), a gift of grace ; a fwnr which nne receives icithout antj merit of his own ; in the N. T. [where (exc. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the gift of d i vine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24 fin. diiipea Kal evepyeaia Kai ^dpiafia deov Ta Travra oaa eV Koa-fKo Ka'i avTot 6 Kocr/ios iariv) ; used of the natural gift of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co. vii. 7 ; deliverance from great peril to life, to els fjiuis x- bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11 ; the gift of faith, knowl- edge, holiness, virtue, Ro. i. 11; the economy of divine grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23 ; plur. of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 29 ; in the technical Pauline sense xapia-piaTa [A. V. gifts'] denote extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ, the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit [cf. Cremer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. v. 10 sqq. s. v. Geistesgaben] : Ro. xii. 6 ; 1 Co. i. 7 ; xii. 4, .31 ; 1 Pet. iv. 10 ; x^P^o-p-aTa lapdrav, 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; spec, the sum of those powers requisite for the discharge of the office of an evangelist : 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; 2 Tim. 1. 6. ([Of temporal blessings, ' Teaching ' 1, 5 (cf. hapripa in Herm. mand. 2, 4)] ; eccl. writ.) * XapiToo), S) : 1 aor. cxapiTaxra ; pf. pass. ptcp. Ke)(api- rapivos \ (xapis) ; 1. to make graceful i. e. charm- ing, lovely, agreeable : pass. Sir. xviii. 1 7 ; Tois htaXo^ois i. q. XA£2. xaiVo)), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nsty, a lip; a. in the X. T. of the speaking mouth [cf. W. 32] : INIt. xv. 8 ; Mk. vii. 6 ; Ro. iii. 13 ; 1 Co. xiv. 21 ; Heb. xiii. 15 (on which see xafmos. 2 c.): 1 Pet. iii. 10. b. metaph. : ;(etXor tijs 6a\aa- arfs, the sea-shore, Heb. xi. 12 (Gen. .\xii. 17; Ex. vii. 15 : xiv. 30, etc. : of the shore of a lake, Joseph, b. j. 3, 10, 7 ; of the banks of rivers, Hdt. 2, [70]. 94 ; [Ar- istot. de mirab. aud. 4G ; 150 ; cf. hist. an. 6, 16 p. 570», 22] ; Polyb. 3, 14, G ; [cf. W. pp. 18, 30]).* XciH-^l" : pres. pass. ptcp. ;(€ifiafo'/ifvor ; {x'^lpa stormy- weather, winter [cf. x"/i<<»']) ; to ajflict with a tempest, to toss about upon the waves : pass. Acts xxvii. 18 [R. V. labored with the storm]. (Aeschyl., Thuc, Plat., Diod., Plut., Lcian., al.) [Comp. : Trapa-xapdCa.] * Xcili'H'pos, (for the more coni.;(fi/iappoor [sc. troTapos], Att. contr. x^^pappovs [q. v. in L. and S. tin.], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 234), -ov, 6, (xf'/*a winter, and pc'o), poos), fr. Hom. down, Sept. very often for Snj, ht. flowing in winter, a torrent : Jn. xviii. 1 [where A. V. brook].* X,afMv, -ams, 6, (x"t"'j and this fr. x^<^ on account of the ' pouring ' rains ; [al. connect it with p^t-mi', snow, frost (cf. Lat. hiems, etc.) ; see Curtius § 194 ; L. and S. s. v. p^iajv, fin.]), winter ; a. stormy or rainy weather, a tempest (so fr. Hom. down) : Mt. xvi. 3 [Tdf. br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts xxvii. 20. b. winter, the winter season, (so fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down): Jn. x. 22 ; 2 Tim. iv. 21 ; x^^H^^vos, in winter (-time), in the winter -(Plat, de rep. 3 p. 415 e. ; Xen. mem. 3, 8, 9 ; al. [cf. W. § 30, 11 ; B. § 132, 26]), Mt. xxiv.'20 ; Mk. xiii. 18.* Xtlp, gen. x«pofi ace. xfipav (1 Pet. v. 6 Tdf. ; see apcniv, fin.), ^. [fr. r. meaning ' to lay hold of ' : cf. Lat. heres, etc.; Curtius §189; Vanicek p. 249 sq.], fr. Hom. down, Hebr. T, the hand: Jit. iii. 12 ; Mk. iii. 1 ; Lk. vi. 6 ; 1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often ; the gen. with the verbs an-ropai. iirikap^dvopat, Kpareo), jriafo), etc., which see in their places ; the dat. with epya^upai, iadia, etc. ; 6 aa-jraa'pus Tji tpjj X"P'> 1 Co. xvi. 21 ; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th. iii. 1 7 ; the ace. with the verbs a'pa, Sea. iKizeTavvvpi, eKTelvo), ep^diTTui, iimi&ripi, KaBapi^a), KaTaaeliD, viTrrto, etc. Tj entdeais tUv x^i-pi^" [see eVWeo-ir and reff.], 1 Tim. iv. 1 4 ; 2 Tim. i. 6 ; Heb. vi. 2 : ev x"P' tivos, in imitation of the Hebr. "2 T3 [cf. B. §133, 20 cf. 319 sq. (274) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency, of any one, by means of any one. Acts vii. 35 Rec. ; Gal. iii. 19; avv x"p"' dyytKov, with the aid or service of the angel [cf. B. u. s.]. Acts vii. 35 L T Tr WH ; those things in the performance of which the hands take the princi- pal part (as e. g. in working miracles), are said to be done 8ia ^f 'pos or xeipwv or twv [cf. B. § 1 24, 8 d.] ^«p^v Tii/of, Mk. vi. 2 ; Acts v. 12; xiv. 3 : xix. 11; univ., Acts ii. 23 ; vii. 25 ; xi. 30 ; xv. 23 ; dn'i xf 'pwx, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11 ; e'n-i rr/v x-i Rev. xiv. 9; xx. 1 [here Treg. mrg. cv t^ X-]' '^ > f**' Acts xxviii. 4 ; Rev. viii. 4 ; els t^v x- (on his hand), Lk. xv. 22; ^ x^'P» ^s an acting subject (see yXao-a-a, 1), Lk. xxii. 21 : plur., Acts xvii. 25 ; xx. 34 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; to epya tuiv x- Acts vii. 41 ; Rev. L\. 20; eKdiKelv TO atpd tivos €K Ttvos (see ex^iKeco, h. and eK 1. 7), Rev. xix. 2. By meton. ^ x^'P i* P"t for power, activity, (for exx. fr. prof. auth. fr. Hom. down see Passow s. v. p. 2431'' ; [L. and S. s. v. p. 1 720*]) : n-apaSiSoVai two els Xe'ipas Tivtav, into the hostile hands (Deut. i. 27 ; Job xvi. ■^eipayeoyeeo 668 XiXiapxof 11), Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi.45; Mk. ix. 31 ; Lk. ix. 44 ; xxiv. 7; Acts xxi. 11 ; xxviii. 17; SiHuvai rt iv t^ X^'P' ""Of» to comiiiit to one's protecting and upholding power, eJn. iii. ;i5 ; also th t. xf'ipcis riraj, Jn. xiii. 3 ; nva ix tSjv X^'p- or f* X"P"' '""'Of (ff- the hostile jiowor of any one) dndyeiv. Acts xxiv. 7 Hec. ; i^eXiaBm, Acts xii. 11 (Gen. xxxii. 11 ; Ex. xviii. 8 sq.) ; f^epxeaSm, Jn. x. 39; pv- tr6fivai, Lk. i. 74; (ranjpia, ib. 71 ; fK(j)({iy€iv ras pffipas Ttfos, 2 Co. xi. 33. By a fig. use of language x^'P or x^'pff ''^■■'^ attributed to God, symbolizing his might, (icliril//, power; conspicuous o. in creating the universe : cpya rav xf^P'^" airov, Ileb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 2G). p. in upholding and preserving: Lk. xxiii. 4G ; Jn. x. 29 (cf. 28) ; p^eip xvpiov fVrl fifrd tivos, God is present, protecting and aiding one, Lk. i. (j6 ; Acts xi. 21. -y. in punishing: ;(cip «upiou eVl o-t. Acts xiii. 11 (IS. xii. 15) ; enTriTrretv els x- ^^°^ Coivrot, Heb. X. 31. 8. in dctormining and controlling the destinies of men: Acts iv. 28 ; TaiifivovaOm vno Ti]U KpaTmav x^'P" "^^^ 6(ov, 1 Pet. v. G. XEipa-yu'ycu, -ta ; jires. ]iass. ptcp. ;^f £paycoyov/xf co? ; (Xfipaywyof, <1' v.; cf. ;(aXii'ay), a handwriting; what one has written with his own hand (Polyb. 30, 8, 4 ; Uion. Hal. 5, 8 ; al.) ; spec, a note of hand, or writing in which one acknowledges that money has either been deposited with him or lent to him Ijy another, to be re- turned at an appointed time (Tob. v. 3 ; ix. 5 ; Plut. mor. p. 829 a. de vitand. acre al. 4, 3 ; Artem. oneir. 3, 40) ; metaph. applied in Col. ii. 14 [(where R.V. ionrf)] to the Mosaic law, which shows men to be chargeable with offences for which they must pay the penalty.* X€ipo-iro£TiTos, -Of. (xf'P !i'"l TTOica), wade bi/ the hand i. e. the skill of man (see dxcpOTioirjTOs) : of temples, BIk. xiv. 58 ; Acts vii. 48 ; .xvii. 24 ; Ileb. ix. 11, 24 ; of cir- cumcision, Eph. ii. 1 1 . (In Sept. of idols ; of other things, occasionally in Ildt., Thuc, Xcn., Polyb., Diod.) * X€tpo-TOV€(i), -a) : 1 aor. ptcp. ;(f tporoi'^o'at ; 1 aor. pass, ptcp. xf^poTOvr]6eis; (fr. p^eiporoi/of extending the hand, and tliis fr. ^f I'p iind rfiVm) ; fr. [Arstph.], Xen., Plat., Isocr. down ; a. prop, to vote by stretching out the hand (cf. Xen. an. 3, 2, 33 ora bonii ravra, dvaTeivdra Txjv x"?"-' dviTdvai/anavTes). b. to create ov ajijiolnl hij vote : Tivd, one to have charge of some office or duty, pass. 2 Co. viii. 19, and in the spurious subscriptions in 2 Tim. iv. 23 ; Tit. iii. 1.5. c. with the loss of the notion of extending the hand, to elect, appoint, create : Tuid, Acts xiv. 23 (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ, in Passow s. V. p. 2440° ; ^ftpoTovticrSai vno 6eov ^aaiKea, Philo de praera. et poen. § 9 ; [/Sao-Ae'mr vnapxos e'xeipovoyeiTO, de Joseph. §41]; Joseph, antt. 6, 4, 2 ; [7, 11,1; of the choice of Jon. as high-priest, 13, 2, 2 ; cf. Hatch in Diet, of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Ordination, p. 1501''; Harnack on 'Teacliing' etc. 15, 1]). [Comp. : Trpo-xe'porofe'o).] * Xctpuv, -ov. (compar. of KOKds ; derived fr. the obsol. X'pf' whicli has l)een preserved in the dat. x^Plh iicc. X'PI"' P'"'"- X'V"?f f' X^PI" ! ^'f- ^>'"'"- Ausf. Spr. i. p. 268 [cf. Iiljeling, Lex. Horn. s. v. x^PI^Dj [fr- Hom. down], worse: Jit. ix. 16; xxvii. 64; Mk. ii. 21; yiverai to. (o-xara xf'pova Tav npaTav, IMt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet. ii. 20; els to ;(fipoi' cpxea-dai, [/o grow worsel, of one whose illness increases, Jlk. v. 26 ; Iva fifj ;(cipdi/ o-oi ti yivijTm, lest some worse thing befall thee, .In. v. 14; TToiro) p^fipcoi/ Tipiopla, [A.V. h(jw much sorer punishtnent^, Heb. .\. 29; eVi to xfipov irpoKOTtTiiv ([A. V. tcax worse and worse] ; .«ec npoKimTo), 2), 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; of the moral character, dTria-Tov x^'P'^v, 1 Tim. v. 8.* Xepouptii (KG) and XtpovPetv (L TTr WII ; in Mss. also Xepou/iiV, Xfpou^ei/i ; [ci. Td/. Prolog, p. 84 ; IT//. App. p. 155* ; and s. v. «, i]), rd (neut. gend. also in most places in the Sept. ; rarely, as Ex. xxv. 18, 19, oi Xfp. ; Xepov fi(ts in Ex. xxv. 18 [but this is a mistake ; the form in -tis seems not to occur in the O. T.] ; in Philo Ta Xepovfilpi, m Joseph, oi Xepov^fU, antt. 3, 6, 5 ; al Xepovfie'ii, ibid. 8, 3, 3 ; the use of the nent. gender seeuu'd most suitable, because they were fwa ; Xfpou/Sf ir ^wd jf]), /Ac conimander of a thuusaiid soldlerii, a chiliarch; the commander of a Roman cohort (a military tribune): Jn. xviii. 12 ; Acts xxi. 31-33, 37; xxii. 24, 26-29; xxiii. 10, 15, 17-19, 22; xxiv. 7 Rec, 22; xxv. 23, (Sept. for D'ijSx 1?' and D'sSx tysi). any military commander \Ji.X . hifjh or chief captain, captain^: Mk. vi. 21 ; Rev. vi. 15; xix. 18. [(Aeschyl., Xen., al.)] * XiXtas, -aSor, tj, (xiXioi), a thousand, the number one thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv. 4 ; 1 Co. x. 8; Rev. V. 11 ; vii. 4-8 ; xi. 13; xiv. 1-3 ; xxi. 16 ; Sept. for ^'^S, D-aSx. [Hdt. on.] * X^^i-oi, -ai, -a, a thousand: 2 Pet. iii. 8 ; Rev. xi. 3, etc. XJos, -ov, fj, Chios, an island in tlie ^Egean Sea, be- tween Samos and Lesbos, not far from the shore of Lydia: Acts xx. 15.* XiTiiv, -S)voi, 6, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for j"ljn3 and njh3, a tunic, an undergarment, usually worn next the skin : Mt. x. 10 ; Mk. vi. 9 ; Lk. iii. 11 ; ix. 3 ; Jiide 23 ; it is distinguished from to I'/iarioi/ (q. v. 2) or ra iiMuria in Mt. V. 40 ; Lk. vi. 29 ; Jn. xix. 23 ; Acts ix. 39 ; univ. a garment, vestment (Aeschyl. suppl. 903), plur. (Plut. Tib. Gracch. 19), ]Mk. xiv. 63. [Cf. JiicJi, Diet, of Anticj. s. v. Tunica ; and reff. s. v. i/idnov, u. s.] * \\.iiv, -ovos, ij, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for jSh, snow : Mt. xxviii. 3 ; Mk. ix. 3 (where it is omitted by G T Tr WH) ; Rev. i. 14.* xXajivs, -t'Sof, rj, (acc. to the testimony of Pollux 10, 38, 104, first used by Sappho), a chlanujs, an outer gar- ment usually worn over the x'-'^""' ['!■ ■*'■] i sjiec. the Lat. paludamenlum [q. v. in Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v. sub fin.], a kind of short cloak worn by soldiers, military officers, magistrates, kings, emperors, etc. (2 Mace. xii. 35 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 10; Hdian., Ael., al. ; often in Plut.) : ^It. xxvii. 28, 31, [A.V. robe ; see Meyer ad loc; Trench, Syn. §1.; Rich (as above) s. v. Chlamys; and other reff. s. v. ifiaTiov]." yiXtvoXfii ; impf . i)(Xfva^ov ; (xKevrj, jesting, mockery) ; to deride, mock, jeer: Acts ii. 13 Rec. ; xvii. 32. (2 Mace, vii. 27 ; Sap. xi. 15; Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Lcian., al.) [CoMP. : Sm-xXevdfm.] * xXiapo's, -a, -ov, (x^i», to become warm, liquefy, melt), tepid, lukewarm: metaph. of the condition of a soul wretchedly fluctuating between a torpor and a fervor of love. Rev. iii. 16. (Hdt., Pind., Diod., Plut., Athen., Geop.) • XXo'n [(i. e. 'tender verdure'; an appellation of De- meter, ' the Verdant ')], -rjs, fj, Chloe, a Christian woman of Corinth : 1 Co. i. 11. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] * xXcupo's, -a, -ov, (contr. fr. )(\ofp6t, fr. x^"'"?» tender green grass or corn) ; 1. c/recn : xopTo^t ^fk- vi. 39 (Gen. i. 30); Rev. viii. 7; n-Sx x^'^P""' ^^- •*• 2. yellowish, pale : imros. Rev. vi. 8. (In both senses fr. Horn, down.) * XiS'', six hundred and sixty-six (x'^'iOO; |'^C0; 5" = Ci), a mystical number the meaning of which is clear when it is written in Hebr. letters, iDp jnj. i. e. Nepoiw Kaiaap, ' Xero Caesar', (sometimes the Jews write "iDp for the more common "iD'p, the Syriac always jjftj, cf. Ewald, Die Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 263 note ; [SchUrer, N. T. Zeitgesch. ed. 1, § 25 III. p. 449 note]; j = 50, 1=200, 1=6, : = 50, p=100, 0=60, 1 = 200): Rev. xiii. 18 RGTTr. [For a digest of opin- ions respecting this much debated number see Lee in the ' Speaker's Com.' ad loc] * XoiKos, -7] -Of, (xoOs, q- v.), made of earth, earthy : 1 Co. XV. 47—49. (yu/ii^ot tovtovs tov ;^0(KoO /3dpous, Anon, in Walz, Rhett. i. p. 613, 4 ; [Ilippol. haer. 10, 9 p. 314, 95].)* Xotvi|, -iKos, t], fr. Ilom. Od. 19, 28 down, a choenix, a dry measure, containing four cotylae or two sextarii [i. e. less than our ' quart ' ; cf. L. and S. s. v.] (or as much as would support a man of moderate appetite for a day ; hence called in Athen. 3 § 20 p. 98 e. ^/iepoTpocpis [cf. !] x»'"'! fjpeprja-Los rpocpi), Diog. Laert. 8, 18]) : Rev. vi. 6 [where A.V. measure (see Am. appendix ad loc.)].* Xoipos, -ov, 6, fr. Horn, down, a swine : plur., Mt. vii. 6; viii. 30, [31], 32; Mk. v. 11-13, 14 Rec, [16] ; Lk. viii. 32 sq. ; xv. 15 sq. (Xot found in the O. T.) * XoXdu, -m ; (xo^V> q- '*'•) > 1- '" ^^ atrabilious ; to be mad (Arstph. nub. 833). 2. to be angry, en- raged, (for xoXoC/iai, more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down) : tlvI, Jn. vii. 23 (3 ilacc iii. 1 ; Artem., Nicand., ]\Iosch., Diog. Laiirt., al.).* XoXifj, -Tji, fj, (i. q. x^^o^' ^•'- X"" ^o ])our out [now thought to be connected with x^""?' X^'"P°^. ^'-'^- ' }'ellow- ish green'; cf. Curtius §200; Vanicek p. 24 7]), first found in Archilochus (8th cent. B. c), afterwards in Aeschyl. et sqq. 1. bile, gall : Mt. xxvii. 34 (cf. Sept. Ps. Ixviii. (Lxix.) 22) [cf. B. D. s. v. Gall] ; Acts viii. 23 (on which see niKpla) ; for rTl^p, Job xvi. 13. 2. in the O. T. it is also used of other bitter things ; for n:;'S, wormwood, Prov. v. 4 ; Lam. iii. 15 ; hence some understand the word in ^It. xxvii. 34 to mean myrrh, on account of Mk. .xv. 23 ; but see a-fivpfi^a. 2 ; [B. D. u. s.].* Xoos, see x^^^' Xopa^Cv ([soGL,alsoMt.xi.2lRec.; Lk.x.lSRec.""»]; XopafciV T Tr WH ; [XmpafiV, Lk. x. 13 Rec."»»"; see €t, t; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 ; WH. App. p. 155*]), 17, indecL Chorazin, a town of Galilee, which is mentioned neither in the O. T. nor by Josephus ; acc. to Jerome (in his Onomast. [cf. Euseb. onomast. ed. Larsow and Parthey p. 374]) two miles distant from Capernaum; perhaps the same place which in the talmud, Jlenach. f. 85, 1 is called !""(D [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 139], the re- mains of which Robinson (Biblical Researches, iii. 347, 359 sq.) thinks must be sought for in the ruins of the modern Tell Hum ; but AVilson (Recovery of Jerusalem Am. ed. pp. 270, 292 sqq. ; Our Work in Palestine, p. 188), with whom [Thomson (Land and Book, ii. 8)], Socin (in Baedeker's Palestine and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 374), Wolff (in Riehm p. 235), [the Conders (Ildbk. to the Bible, p. 324), and the majority of recent scholars] asree, holds to the more probable ojiinion wliich identi- fies it with Kerazeh, a heap of ruins lying an hour's ■)(oprjye.ai 670 journey to the N. E. of Tell Hum : Mt. xi. 21 ; Lk. x. 13. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim i. p. 60j [Eng. trans. ii. 367] and ii. 118 [Eng. trans, iii. 143].* Xopii^etD, -i; fut. 3 pers. sing. )^oprjyi^aei (2 Co. ix. 10 GLTTrWII); 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing, p^opij-yijo-ai (ib. Rec.) : (xopriyos, the leader of a chorus ; f r. )^op6s and Sya [riyeoiiai]) ; fr. [Sinion.], Xen., Plat, down ; 1. to be a chorus-leader, lead a chorus. 2. to furnish the chorus at one's own expense ; to procure and supply all things necessary to Jit out the chorus (so very often in the Attic writ.). 3. in later writ. ([Aristot.], Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael., al. ; 1 K. iv. 7 ; 1 Mace, xiv. 10 ; 2 Mace. iii. 3, etc.), to .lupphj, furnish ahundant- hj: Ti, 2 Co. ix. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 11. [CoMP. : im-xoprf ■yeu.] • Xopo's, -ov, 6, (by metath. f r. opxos, opxiofuii, [(?) ; prob. related to x"P^°^ (Lat. hortus), xpouos, etc., denoting primarily ' an enclosure for dancing ' ; cf . Curtius § 189]), fr. Horn, down, a band (fif dancers and singers), a cir- cular dance, a dance, dancing : Lk. xv. 25 (for nSlTTD, Ex. XV. 20 ; Judg. xi. 34, etc. ; for Sim, Lam. v. 15 ; Ps. cl. 4).» Xoprdjw : 1 aor. exopraaa ; 1 aor. pass. ixopTanBrjv : fut. pass. xopTaaOriaofjxu. ; (xoproi, q. v.) ; first in Hesioil (opp. 450) ; a. to feed with herbs, grass, hay, to fll or satisfy with food, to fatten; animals (so uniformly in the earlier Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 12; W. 23]) : opv€a ex rav (TapKav, pass. Rev. .xix. 21 [here A.V. were filled']. b. in later (cf. Sturz, Dial. Maced. and Alex. p. 200 sqq.) and Biblical Greek, to fill or satisfy men (Sept. for i'ibr and ;''3tyn ; with some degree of contempt in Plat, de rep. 9 p. 586 a. K(KV(f>oTfs els yrjv Ka\ els rpane^as fioa-KovTai ;^opTafo/xei'oi (cai oxeiovres). a. prop. : rivd, Mt. xv. 33 ; pass., Mt. xiv. 20; xv.37; Mk. vi.42; vii. 27; viii. 8 ; Lk.ix. 17: .In. vi. 26 ; Jas. ii. 16 ; opp. to Tretvav, Phil. iv. 12; Ttvd TWOS (like irtfiTTXrifit [cf. AV. § 30, 8 b.]) : Sprav, with bread, Mk. viii. 4 (Ps. cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 15) ; nva dwo with a gen. of the thing [cf. B. § 132, 12], pass. Lk. xvi. 21 (Ps.ciii. (civ.) 13); [rtra c'k w. gen. of the thing (B. u.s.), pass. Lk. XV. lGTrmrg.wri]. p. metaph.: rivd, to fulfil or satisfy the desire of any one, Mt. v. 6 ; Lk. vi. 21, (Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 9).* XopTao-jia, -Tos, to, (xoprd^a), feed, fodder, for animals (Sept. ; Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; food, (vegetable) sus- tenance, whether for men or flocks : plur. Acts vii. 11.* XopTos, -ov, 6 ; 1. the place where grass grows and animals graze: Horn. E. 11, 774; 24, 640. 2. fr. Hes. down, grass, herbage, Jiay, provender : of green grass, Mt. vi. 30; xiv. 19; Lk. xii. 28 ; Jn. vi. 10; Jas. i. 10 sq. ; 1 Pet. i. 24 (fr. Is. .xl. G sqq.) ; Rev. ix. 4 ; xopr. X^apos, Mk. vi. 39 : Rev. viii. 7; xopros of growing crops, Mt. xiii. 2G; Mk. iv. 28; of hay, 1 Co. iii. 12. (Sept. for I'vn grass, and 3bi'.) * Xoujds, -a [Tdf. Proleg. p. 104 ; B. 20 (18)], 6, Chuzas [A.V. (less correctly) Chusa], the steward of Herod Antipas : Lk. viii. 3.» Xo5s, -o6s, ace. -oiv, 6, (contr. for xoos, fr. xif^i to pour), fr. Hdt. down ; 1. prop, earth dug out, an earth-heap (Germ. .Schull) : 6 xovs 6 i^opvxdeis. Ildt. 2, 150. 2. [thought to be allied by metath. with ;^«p (cf. Curtius §189)], 'to grant a loan', ' to lend ' [but cf. L. and S. s. v. ; they regard the radical sense as ' to furnish what is needful '] ; hence) 1. prop, to receive a loan ; to borrow. 2. to take for one's u.s-c; to use: nvl [W. § 31, 1 i.], to make use of a thing, .Vets xxvii. 17; 1 Co. Lx. 12, 15; 1 Tim. i. 8 ; v. 23 ; TM K.6ap.tf, the good things of this world, 1 Co. vii. 31 RG (see below); pSKXov xph'rai. sc. the opportunity of becoming free, ib. 21 (where others, less fitly, supply Tu KKrjBrivai SoCXoi/ [see re£F. s. v. el. III. 6 a.]). contrary to the regular usage of class. Grk. with an ace. : toz/ ko- (rp.ov, 1 Co. vii. 31 LTTrWH; see ^Meyer ad loc. ; B. §133, 18; W. u. s. ; (also in Sap. vii. 14 ace. to some codd. ; [L. and S. give (Pseudo-)Aristot. oecon. 2, 22 p. 1350*, 7]). with the dat. of a virtue or vice describing the mode of thinking or acting : t!j eXat/jpia, [It. V. 'shew fickleness'], 2 Co. i. 17; iroWf/ napprja-ia, ib. iii. 12, (for numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, see Passow ii. p. 2497''; [L. and S. s. v. II. a.]), with adverbs (see Passow ii. p. 2497»; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]) : dn-oro/iajf, to deal sharply, use sharpness, 2 Co. xiii. 10. of the use of persons: nvl, to bear one's self towards, to deal with, treat, one (often so in Grk. writ. ; see Passow ii. p. 2496'; [L. and S. s. v. III. 1 and 2]), Acts xxvii. 3.' Xpau, see kIxpwi- Xp<(a, -as. f), {xph)' f'"- Aeschyl. and Soph, down ; 1. necessity, need : to Trpos Tr)V xp^lav [L T Tr WH irp. ras Xpflas (cf. below)], such things as suited the exigency, such things as we needed for sustenance and the jour- ney, Acts x.wiii. 10 ; els ras dpayKoias xP^^"^' L^- ^'- ./"'' necessary uses] i. e. to sujjjjly what is absolutely neces- sary for life [(cf. Babr. fab. 13G, 9) : al. understand the 'wants ' here as comprising those of charity or of wor- ship], Tit. iii. 14 ; npos olKo8op.rjv Trjs j^peiar, for the edi- fication of souls, of which there is now special need, Eph. iv. 29 [ef. R. V. and mrg.] ; eori XP^'"' '''"■« '« need, foil, by an ace. with inf. Heb. vii. 1 1 ; eari XP' '" TWOS, there is need of something, Rev. xxii. 5 Grsb. ; Lk. X. 42 [(but not WH mrg.)] ; ?x" XP^""' """^i '" ^""^ need of (be in want of) some thing (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, cf. Passow s. v. 1 ; [L. and S. s. V. IL 1]), Mt.'vi. 8 ; xxi. 3 ; Mk. xi. 3 : Lk. [ix. 1 1 ; xv. 7] : xix. 31, 34 ; xxii. 71 ; .In. .xiii. 29 ; 1 Co. xii. 21, 24; 1 Th. iv. 12 : Heb. x. 36 ; Rev. iii. 1 7 R G (see below) ; xxi. 23 ; xxii. 5 (not Grsb.) ; toU with an inf. Heb. v. 12 [W. § 44, 4 a. ; cf. tW, 2 b. p. 626* hot.] ; the gen. of the thing is evident fr. the context, .Vets ii. 45; iv. 85; with the gen. of a pers. whose aid, testimon)', etc., is needed, jSIt. ix. 12 ; xxvi. 65 ; Mk. ii. 17 ; xiv. 63 ; Lk. V. 3 1 ; ex€iXe'n]s (L T Tr WIT xp(o(f>. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 691 ; W. § 5, 1 d. 13 ; \_WH. App. p. 152'' ; Tdf. Pro- leg, p. 89; T (?; see u. s.) WH -^iXc'tt/s, cf. WH. App. p. 154'' (see I, t)]), -ou, 6, (xP^'os or XP^'^^' ^ loan, a debt, and ocfxiKfTrjs, ([■ v.), a debtor : Lk. vii. 41 ; xvi. 5. (Prov. xxix. 13; Job xxxi. 37 ; Aesop, fab. 289 [ed. Coray, 11 ed. Halm] ; several times in Pint. ; [also in Diod., Dion. Hal. ; see Soph. Le.x. s. v.].) * Xf"! ; (fr. XP""»' XP"" contr. xpn) ! impers. verb, it is necessary ; it behooves: foil, by an inf. Jas. iii. 10 [(B. §§131, 3 ; 132, 12). From Horn. on. Syn. see 8«, fin.]* XPti?'»; (xpv) ; fr. Hom. down ; to have need of, to be in want of: with a gen. of the obj. [W. § 30, 8 a.], Mt. vi. 32; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 30; Ro. xvi. 2 [here w. gen. of a pers.] ; 2 Co. iii. 1.* XpiiH.") ->'°s, TO, (xpdofiac), in Grk. writ, whatever is for use, whatever one uses, a thing, matter, affair, event, business; spec, money (rareh' so in the sing, in prof, auth., as Hdt. 3, 38; Diod. 13, 106 [cf. L. and S.s.v. I. snb fin.]) : Acts iv. 37 ; plur. riches (often in Grk. writ, fr. Hom. Od. 2, 78; IG, 315 etc. down), Mk. x. 24 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; oi ra xpvpara fx°'^f'' '''«^ that have riches, j\Ik. x. 23 ; Lk. xviii. 24 ; money, Acts viii. IS, 20; xxiv. 26, (for ^03, silver, Job x.xvii. 17; for D'DO:, riches, Josh. xxii. S ; 2 Chr. i. 11 sq.).* XPiiiaTt^w ; fut. xP'Qf^ariau) (Ro. vii. 3 [cf. B. 37 (33)] ; in Grk. writ, everywh. the Attic -im, so too Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 30) ; xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2); 1 aor. ixPiiun-uTa; pf. pass. KexPVfoTia-fiai ; 1 aor. pass, ixpriparia-drjv ; (xpiJlJui business) ; in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down : 1. to transact business, esp. to manage public affairs ; to advise or consult with one about public affairs ; to make answer to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests, etc. ; used of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence in some later Grk. writ. 2. to give a response to those consulting an oracle (Diod. 3, 6; 15, 10; Plut. mor. p. 435 c. [i. e. de defect, oracc. 46]; several times in Lcian.) ; hence used of God in Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 14; 10, 1, 3; 11, 8, 4 ; univ. (dropping all ref. to a previous consultation), to give a divine command or admonition, to teach from heaven, [(Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 30))]: with a dat. of the pers. Job xl. 3 ; pass. foil, by an inf. [A. V. revealed etc.], Lk. ii. 26 (xprip-ariCfiv Xo-your npos nva, Jer. xxxvii. (xxx.) 2) ; pass, to be divinely commanded, admonished, instructed, [R.V. warned of God], Mt. ii. 12, 22; Acts X. 22; Heb. viii. 5 ; xi. 7, (this pass, use is hardly found elsewh. exc. in Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 8 ; [11, 8, 4] ; cf. B. § 134, 4 ; [W. § 39, 1 a.]) ; to he the mouth- piece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands of God, (tw, Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2; xxxvi. (.xxix.) 23): of Jloses, Heb. xii. 25 [R. V. warned}. 3. to assume or take to one's self a name from one's public business (Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; univ. to receive a name or title, be called : Acts xi. 26 ; Ro. vii. 3, (Joseph, antt. [8, 6, 2]; 13, 11,3; b. j. 2, 18, 7; [c. Apion. 2, 3, 1 ; Philo, quod deus immut. § 25 fin. ; leg. ad Gaium § 43] ; 'Ai/ri'o- Xou Tov 'Emrpavrj xPlpci'riCovTa, Diod. in Miiller's fragm. vol. ii. p. xvii. no. xxi. 4 ; 'laKco^ov rov XPVP^"^'^^^^^^ ah(K<^bv Tov Kvplov, Acta PhiHiipi init. p. 75 ed. Tdf. ; laKcojSou . . . ov Koi a5eA(^6v toO XpiOTov xp^P^arlaai ol 6(wi Xo'yoi TTfpif'x'""''"'' Eus. h. e. 7, 19; [cf. Soph. Lex. ^■v. 2]).- XPHH.o^Ti.o-p.ds, -ov, 6, (xp'jfidTi'f'^, q. v.), a divine response, an oracle : Ro. xi. 4. (2 Mace. ii. 4 ; cf. Diod. 1,1; 14, 7 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 5 ; [cf. Artem. oneir. 1, 2 p. 8 ; Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. (vol. ii. col. 1532)] ; in various other senses in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat, down.)* XpTjVilioSi ■>?> "O"! (xP^OM"')» ^'■st in Theogn. i06, fit for use, useful: 2 Tim. ii. 14.* XP'jo'i.s, -fojf, T), (xpdo/iiai), use : of the sexual use of a woman, Ro. i. 26 sq. (n-aiSiKij, Lcian. amor. 25 ; ope'^etr napa ras XP']"^'-^-' Pli't- placit. philos. 5, 5 ; [cf. Isocr. p. 386 0. ; Plat. legg. 8 p. 841 a. ; Aristot., al.]).» XP^oTtioiiai ; (xpi/ords, q. v.) ; to show one's self mild, to be kind, use kindness : 1 Co. xiii. 4. (Eccles. writ., as Euscb h. e. 5, 1, 46 ; nvt, towards one, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 2; 14,3.)« XP1 ; cf. Jul. Capitol, in the life of Pertinax c. 13 " Omnes, qui libere fabulas eonferebant, male Pertinaci loquebantur, xpioToXo'yoi' eum appel- lantes, qui bene loqucretur et male faceret " ), fair speak- ing, the s7nooth and plausible address ichich simulates goodness : Ro. xvi. 18. (Eustath. p. 1437, 27 [on II. 23, 598] ; eccles. writ.) * XpijoTos, -^, -Of, (xP''°l^''0' f""- II [liere of God; in both pass. A. V. A/ni/J.* XPT)ot6tt)s, -r/Tot, t), (xpTjOTos) ; 1. moral good- ness, inlc.i/rili/ : Ko. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) [A. V. 'doeth r/oof/']. 2. benignili/, Lindness: Ko.ii.4; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; Gal. v. 22 ; Col. iii. 1 2 ; Tit. iii. 4 ; ^ XP- '■'""^ tniriva, Ro. xi. 22 (opp. to dnoTo/jila [q. v.]) ; Eph. ii. 7. (Sept.; Eur., Isae., Died., Joseph., Ael., Hdiau. ; often in Pint.) [See Trench, Syn. § Ixiii.] • Xp£ ""ylhiiig smeared on, unguent, oiiilment, usually prepared by the Hebrews from oil and aromatic herbs. Anointing was the inaugural ceremony for priests (Ex. xxviii. 37; xl. 13 (15) ; Lev. vi. 22; Num. XXXV. 25), kings (1 S. ix. 16; x. 1 : xv. 1; xvi. 3, 13), and sometimes also prophets (1 K. xix. 16 cf. Is. Lxi. 1), and by it they were regarded as endued with the Holy Spirit and divine gifts (1 S. xvi. 13; Is. l.\i. 1; Jo- seph, antt. 6, 8, 2 irpos rhv AavtSrjv — when anointed by Samuel — pcra^atvn to Oe'iov KaToKmov "Saovkov kcu o fjLtv npofjiTjTfveiv t'lp^aro, tou Oeiov nueufiaros fis avTov fieToiKtiajifvov) ; [.«ee BB. DD. s. vv. Ointment, Anoint- ing]. Hence in 1 Jn. ii. 20 (where otto toC dyt'ou is so used as to inijily that this XP'<^M'» renders theni iyiovs [cf. Westcott ad loc.]) and 27, to xP'V^a is used of the gij) of the Holy Spirit, as the efficient aid in getting a knowledge of the truth; see ^pia. (Xen., Theophr., Diod., Pliilo, al.; for nriOT, Ex. xxix. 7; xxx. 25; XXXV. 14; xl. 7 (9).)* Xpio-riavo's [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 16 note], -ov, o, (XpioTor), a Christian, a follower of Christ : Acts xi. 26; xxvi. 28; 1 Pet. iv. 16. The name was first given to the worshippers of Jesus by the (jentiles, but from the «econd century (Justin Mart. [e. g. apol. 1, 4 ji. 55 a.; •dial. c. Tryph. § 35 ; cf. ' Teaching ' etc. 12, 4]) onward accepted by them as a title of honor. Cf. Lipsius, Ueber Ursprung u. iiltesten Gebraueh des Christen- namens. 4to jip. 20, Jen. 1873. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 2 ; Furrar in Alex.'s Kitto s. v.; on the 'Titles of Believers in the N. T.' see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 125 sq. ; cf. Diet, of Chris. Antiqq. s. v. ' Faithful '.] * Xpwrro's, -i], -6v, (xpta), Sept. for n't^^, anointed : 6 ifpfvs 6 xpidTos, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; ol xP'"'''"'' 'fp"fi 2 Mace. i. 10 ; the prophets are called, substantively, oj Xpttrrol 6eoi), Ps. civ. (cv.) 15; the sing. 6 xP"^™? to'' Kvptov (nirr D'OT) in the O. T. often of the king of Israel (see xpia'tia)^ as 1 S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11 ; xxvi. 9, 11, 23]; 2S. i. 14; Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (.wiii.) 51 ; Ilab. iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus, as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1 ; of the coming king whom the Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the author of their highest felicity: the name 6 xP^"^"^ (r\'m, Chald. xn-c;-p) is not found in the O. T. but is first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [cf. Schodde's note] ; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which some have attempted to prove that the section contain- ing these passages is of Christian origin are not convincing [cf. uios rov dv6p7rov, 2 and ref?.]), after Ps. ii. 2 referred to the Messiah; [cf. Psalter of .Sul. 17, 36 ; 18, C. 8 etc.]. Cf. Keini ii. fiid [Eng trans, iv. 263 sq. ; Westcott ' Additional Note ' on 1 Jn. v. 1. On the gen- eral subject sec Schiirer, Kcutcst. Zeitgesch. § 29.] In the X. T. it is used 1. of the Messiah, viewed in his generic aspects [the word, that is to say, being used as an ajijiellative rather than a proper name], 6 xp^frTus : Mt. ii. 4 ; xvi. 16 ; xxiii. 10 ; xxiv. 5, 23 ; xxvi. 63 ; Mk. viii. 29 ; xii. 35 ; xiii. 21 ; xiv. 61 ; Lk. iii. 15 ; iv. 41 ; xx. 41 ; x.\ii. 67 (66) ; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 26, 46 ; Jn. i. 20, 25, [41 (42)Rec.]; iii. 28 ; iv. 29 ; vi. 69Rec. ; vii. 26, 31, 41; xi. 27; xii. 34; xx. 31 ; Acts ii. 30 Rec.,31 ; iii. 18; viii. 5 ; ix. 22 ; xvii. 3" ; xviii. 5, 28 : xxvi. 23 ; 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; V. 1 ; 6 xp'otoj Kvpiov or toC 6eov, Lk. ii. 26 ; ix. 20; Acts iv. 26; without the article, Lk. ii. 11 : xxiii. 2 ; Jn. i. 41 (42) L TTr WII ; ix. 22; Acts ii. 36 ; 6 xpf oToy, 6 /Sao-iXfif tou 'laparjX, Mk. xv. 32 ; 6 xp'o^of ^o used as to refer to Jesus, Rev. xx. 4, 6 ; with toD 6(oii added. Rev. xi. 15; xii. 10. 2. It is added, as an appellative (' Messiah', 'anointed'), to the iirojier name 'l-quovs • a. 'I^aovs 6 xP'CTtJs, Jesus the Christ (' Mes- siah ') : Acts v. 42 R G ; ix. 34 [R G] ; 1 Co. iii. 1 1 Rec. ; 1 Jn. V. 6 [RG L] ; 'irja-ovs 6 'Keyo/ievos XP^"^'''"'' "'^^^ ^^^'^Y say is the Messiah [(cf. b. below)], Mt. xxvii. 22 ; with- out the art. 'Irjaovs xP""'°'' >^t'-'"S "^ Christ or Messiah, Jn. xvii. 3 ; 1 Jn. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7, [but in all three exx. it sceui.« better to take xP- «is a prop, name (see b. below)]; xP^'T'Tos 'lijo-oCf, the Christ (^Messiah) who is Jesus, [Mt. i. 18 WII mrg. (see b. below)] ; Acts v. 42 L T Tr WH [R. V. Jesus as the Christ^ ; xix. 4 Rec. b. o X/,i- o-Tos is a jiroper name (cf. W. § 18, 9 N. 1 ; [as respects the use of a large or a small initial letter the critical edd. vary : Tdf. seems to use the capital initial in all cases; Treg. is inconsistent (using a small letter, for in- stance, in all the exx. under 1 above, exc. Lk. xxii. 67 and Jn. iv. 29; in Mt. i. 1 a capital, in Mk. i. 1 a small letter, etc.); WH have adojited the ))rincipleof using a capital when the art. is absent and avoiding it when the art. is present (1 Pet. being intentionally ex- cepted ; the small letter being retained also in such exx. as Lk. ii. 1 1 ; .xxiii. 2 ; Acts ii. 36, etc.) ; see WII. Intr. § 415]) : Sit. i. 1 7 ; xi. 2 ; Ro. i. 16 Rec. ; vii. 4 ; ix. 5 ; xiv. IS [here L om. Tr br. the art.] ; xv. 19 ; 1 Co. i. 6, etc. without the article, Mk. ix. 41 ; Ro. vi. 4 ; viii. 9, 17; 1 Co.i. 12; Gal. ii. 16 sq. 19(20), 21; iU. 27; PhU. i. 10, 13, 19-21, 23 ; ii. 16; Col. ii. 5, 8 ; Heb. iii. 6, and often. 'li/o-oCr XptcrTor, Jit. i. 1, 18 [here Tr om. 'I., WII txt. br. Xp. ; al. o 'I. Xp. which is unique ; see WII. App. ad loc.]; Mk. i. 1 ; Jn. i. 17; Acts ii. 38; iii. 6 ; iv. 10; viii. 1 2 ; [ix. 34 L T Tr WH] ; x. 36 ; xi. 1 7 ; .w. 26 ; xvi. 18, 31 [RG]; XX. 21 [here LWH txt. om. Trbr.Xp.]; xxviii. 31 [Tdf. om. Xp.] : Ro. i. 1 [R G WII txt. (see be- low)], 6, 8 ; ii. 16 [R G Trtxt. WH mrg. (see below)] ; 1 Co. i. 7-9 ; iii. 11 [G T Tr WH (Rec. 'I. 6 Xp.)] ; xv. 57, and very often in the Epp. of Paul and Peter ; Heb. x/» 673 XP^ xiii.8,21; lJn.i.3,7[RG]; ii. 1 ; [v.cGTTrWH]; 2 Jn. 7 [(see a. above)] ; Jude 4,17,21; Rev. i. 1 sq. 5 ; xxii. 21 [RG(\VHbr. al. om. Xp.)]. Xpta-Tos 'lijo-oCt, Ro. [i. 1 T Tr WH mrg. (see above) ; ii. IC T Tr mrg. "WH txt. (see above)] ; vi. 3 [WH br. 'I.] ; 1 Co. i. 2, 30 ; [iii. 11 Lchin. (see above)]; Gal. iii. 14 [here Tr txt. WH txt. 'I. X.] ; iv. 14 ; v. 6 [ WH br. '!.] ; vi. 15 ; Phil. ii. 5 ; iii. 3, 14 ; Col. ii. 6 ; 1 Tim. i. 2 ; ii. 5. 'Irjcrois 6 Xcyo- /isvoE XpioTof, surnamed ' Christ' [(cf. a. above)], Jit. i. 16. on the phrases eV Xpitrra, iv Xp^na 'lijo-oC, see cV, I. 6 b. p. 21 1' [cf. W. § 20, 2 a.]. Xptaros and 'Itjitovs Xp. fv Tiaii/, preached among, 2 Co. i. 19 ; Col. i. 27 [al. (so R. Y.) would take (v here internally (as in the foU. exx.), within ; cf. fv, I. 2] ; Xpioror ev natv is used of the per- son of Christ, who by his holy power and Spirit Uves in the souls of his followers, and so moulds their characters that they bear his likeness, Ro. viii. 10 (cf. 9); 2 Co. xiii. 5 ; Gal. ii. 20 ; Eph. iii. 1 7 ; a mind conformed to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 19. XpCii) : 1 aor. txpi-cra ; (akin to x^'-P [(')' ^^^ Curtius § 201], xpaivto ; prop. ' to touch with the hand ', ' to be- smear ') ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for ni^p ; to anoint (on the persons who received anointing among the Hebrews, see xplapa) ; in the X. T. only trop. of God a. con- secrating Jesus to the Messianic office, and furnisliing him with powers necessary for its administration (see XpiVfia) : Lk. iv. 18 (after Is. Ixi. 1) ; contrary to com- mon usage with an ace. of the thing, eXaiov (like verbs of clothing, putting on, etc. [cf. W. § 32, 4 a. ; B. § 131, 6J), Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8 ; in Theoph. ad .Vutol. 1, 12 we find xp'i^aBai tkaiov 6fov and )(P- «^'■J''' ko! jitcv- liari almost in the same sentence) ; Trvevp-aTt ayia, fin.] * Xpovtiw: fut. xpovitra (Heb.x. 37 TTrtxt. WH), Attic Xpoi/iM (ibid. R G L Trmrg.) ; (xpovoi) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for inx ; to linger, delay, tarry : Mt. x.xv. 5; Heb. x. 37 ; foil, by cV with a dat. of the place, Lk. i. 21 ; foil, by an inf., Mt. xxiv. 48 [LT Tr WH om. inf.] ; Lk. xii. 45." Xpo'vos, -01/, 6, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for Dl", n>', etc. time : Heb. xi. 32 ; Rev. x. G ; 6 xp' tov (jiatvop-ivov atrrepos, the time since the star began to shine [cf. (paivio, 2 a.], Mt.ii. 7 ; [6 xp- TovT£K(tv airrijv (Gen. xxv. 24), Lk. i. 57 (B. 267 (230) ; cf. W. § 44, 4 a.)] ; i^t eVayycXmr, Acts vii. 17 ; T^y napoLKias, 1 Pet. i. 1 7 ; xpovoi diroKaTao'Tdafas-, Acts iii. 21 ; ot xP- ''^f dyvolas, Acts xvii. 30 ; xpofov 8iay€i/opei/ov, Acts xxvii. 9 ; noaos xpo^'o? itJTiv, o)? tovto yfyoviv, Mk. ix. 21 ; 6 irapfKriKvOuis XP- ^ Pet. iv. 3 (where Kec. adds toC ^lov) ; Tftra-apaKovrnfTris, Acts vii. 23 ; xiii. 18; oTiypri xp^vov, Lk. iv. 5; TrXrjputpa tov xpovov. Gal. iv. 4 ; TTouiv ([q. v. IL d.] to xpenrl) xpomv. Acts xv. 33 ; xviii. 23; ^iwaai tov iiriXomov xpovov. 1 Pet. iv. 2 ; bihovai Xpovov Ttvi (i. e. a space of time, respite), o/a etc. Rev. ii. 21 [(Joseph, b. j. 4, 3, 10)] ; plur. joined with xaipol. Acts i. 7; 1 Th. v. 1, (see Katpos, 2 e. p. 319*) ; tV etrxdrav 43 (LTTrWH irrxarov) rav xp- (see etrxaros, 1 fin.), 1 Pet. i. 20; [add, eV iaxdrov tov ( Tr WH om. tov) xpovov, Jude 18 LTTrWH]. with prepositions : a^pi. Acts iii. 21 ; 8ia tok xP-i on account of the length of time, Heb. V. 12 (Polyb. 2, 21, 2; Alciphr. 1, 26, 9) ; « xpovwv iKavajv, for a long time, Lk. viii. 27 [R G L Tr mrg. (see below)] ; ev XP°''V' -"^cts i. 6, 21 ; ev eaxdro) xpovai, Jude 18 Rec. ; (Vi xpovov, [A. Y./or a whiW], Lk. xviii. 4 : irn irXdova xp- [A. V. a longer time'], Acts xviii. 20 ; e'^' ocrov XP- for so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 39 ; Gal. iv. 1 ; koto tov xpovov, according to (the rela- tions of) the time, Mt. ii. 16 ; pti-a ttoXvv xpovov, Mt. xxv. 19 ; p^Tct to(tovtov xp- Heb. iv. 7 ; 77-^6 xpovtwi/ alaivi'. see Kmpos, fin. ; cf. aiMv, fin.] * XpovoTpiPc'u, -o> : 1 aor. inf. xP'>'">^P^^^<^'^ i (xpo""^ and Tpi'/So)) ; to wear away time, spend time : Acts xx. 16. (Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 3 [p. 1406', 37]; Plut., Heliod., Eustath., Byz. writ.) * Xpiirtos, -e'a, -eop, contr. -oCr, -ij, -ovv, [but ace. sing, fern, -aav, Rev. i. 13 L T Tr WH ; gen. plur. -a-eaiv. Rev. ii. 4 L Tr ; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (23) ; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 207 ; L. and S. s. v. init.)], (j^pvaos), fr. Horn, down, golden ; made of gold ; also overlaid or covered with gold : 2 Tim. ii. 20 ; Heb. ix. 4 ; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20 ; ii. 1 ; iv. 4 ; v. 8 ; viii. 3 ; ix. 7 Grsb., 13, 20 ; xiv. 14 ; xv. 6sq. ; xvii. 4; xxi. 15.* XptKrCov, -ov, TO, (dimin. of xputror, cf. (popriov), fr. Ildt. down. Sept. for in;, gold, both that which lies imbedded in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e.; Sept. Gen. ii. 1 1 ; hence peTaWev6iv, Lcian. de sacr. 11): XP- irfTTvpaipevov ix TTvpos, [R. V. refined by fire]. Rev. iii. 18 ; and that which has been smelted and wrought, Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii. 1 2 T Tr WH] ; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. xxi. IS, 21 ; i. q.gold coin, 'gold': Acts iii. 6 ; xx. 33 ; 1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt. ; 1 Pet. iii. 3 ; Rev. xvii. 4 G L WH txt. ; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. xpv and 19] : Rev. .\xi. 20. (Diod. 2, 52 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 7, 5 ; Sept. for U"d'\p, Ex. .x.wiii. 20 ; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix. 13); [Ezek. i. 10 A.).].)' Xpucro'-irpoo-os [-ov Lclim.], -ov, 6, (fr. xpvros, andjrpoo-oi' a leek), c/iri/snpi-a.ic, a precious stone in color lilic a leek, of a translucent golden-green [cf. BB. DD. s. v. ; Riebni, inVB. s. V. Edelsteine 6] : Rev. xxi. 20.» Xpu : pf. pass. ptcp. Kexpv(ru>ix(vos\ to adorn with gold, to gild : K(Xpva^<^iJ'(vT] xpvcroi, [A. V. decked with golil^, Rev. xvii. 4 ; and t'l/ [G L Tr cm. WII br. tV] xp^"''?' xviii. 16, of a woman ornamented with gold so profusely that she seems to be gilded ; Sept. for 3n; ri3i""p in Ex. xxvi. 32. (Ildt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Plut.', al.) • Xpus, gen. xP<^t6s, 6, (cf. xP<"^^ ''^^ .«kin [cf. Curtius § 201]), fr. Ilom. down, (who [generally] uses the gen. ;^poor etc. [cf. Elieliiig, Le.x. Horn., or L. and S. .s. v.]), the surface of the body, the sl-in: Acts xix. 12; Sept. for iba, twice for lli', Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. Alex.* X^Xo's, -17, -OK, fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for nDi), lame : Acts iii. 2, 1 1 Rec. ; xiv. 8 ; plur., Mt. xi. .5 ; xv. 30 sq. ; xxi. 14: Lk. vii. 22; xiv. 13, 21 ; Jn. v. 3; Acts viii. 7; t6 x"^""» Heb. xii. 13 (on which see exTpfwa, 1). de- prived of a fool, maimed, [A. V. hall} ■ iMt. .wiii. 8 ; Mk. ix. 45.* X<&pa, -as, fj, (XAQ [cf. Curtius §179], to lie open, be ready to receive), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for y')Vi, nyip ' a province ' ; 1. prop, the space lying between two places or limits. 2. a region or country; i. e. a tract of land : fj x- iyyvs rrjt ipfmov, Jn. xi. .54 ; [in .in ellipti- cal phrase, !j aaTpmrrj (^) daTpaTrrovaa ex T^r vno rov ovpavitv fls TTjv iiTT ovpafov Xd/itTrfi, W.part . . . part, Lk. xvii. 24 (cf. AV. § 64, .5) ; on the ellipsis of x^P" ''* other phrases (e| fvavrlas, if Se^ia, etc.), see W. 1. c. ; B. 82 (72)]; land as opp. to the sea. Acts xxvii. 27; land as inhabited, a province or country, j\lk. v. 10; [vi. 55 L mrg. T Tr WII] ; Lk. xv. 1.3-15; xix. 12 ; Acts xiil. 49 ; with a gen. of the name of the region added : Tpax<^vi- TiSos, Lk. iii. 1 ; t^j 'lovSaias, Acts xxvi. 20 ; [(or an e([uiv. adj.)] TaXaTiitTj, Acts xvi. 6; xviii. 23; twv 'Iou- daicov. Acts X. 39 ; plur. rrjs ^lov^aias Km ^npapflas, [A. V. regions']. Acts viii. 1 ; cV x<^P? "■ o^"'? Bavdrov, in a re- gion of densest darkness (see axid, a), Mt. iv. 16; Tivns, the coiinlry of one, >It. ii. 12; x- f'"" ''=> inhabitants,. Mk. i. 5 ; Acts xii. 20 ; the (rural) region environing a city or village, the country, Lk. ii. 8 ; Vfpy((TrivSiv, Tipa- aqvav, TaSaprjvav, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. v. I; I,k. viii. 26; the region with towns and villages which surrounds the metrojiolis, Jn. xi. 55. 3. land which is ploughed or cultivated, ground: Lk. xii. 16; ))lur., Lk. xxi. 21 {ILWcounlryy, Jn. iv. 35 [A.V./eWs]; Jas. v. 4 [A. V. fields']. [.Syn. see roTrof, (in.] * [XupaJCv, see XopnfiV.] Xwpt'o), -to; fut. inf. x^pijo-e»' (Jn. xxi. 25 Tr WII) ; 1 aor. c'xojpria-a ; (xa>pos, a place, space, and this f r. XAQ, cf. x'^'P") i ^- pro|). to leave a space (which may be occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place, »/ieW, (Ilom. II. 12, 406; 16, 592;al.); to retire, pass i of a thing, tis ti, Mt. xv. 17. metaph. to betake one's self turn one's self: fls fifTavotai/, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [A. V. come ; cf. p.eTamia, \i. 406"]. 2. to go forward, ad- vance, proceed, (proj). vi^, Aeschjl. Pers. 3.S4) ; lo make progress, gain ground, succeed, (Plat. Ei-yx. ]). 398 b. ; legg. 3 p. 684 e. ; [x<*>p<' to kokov, Arstph. nub. 907, vcsp. 1483; al.]; Polyb. 10, 35, 4; 28, 15, 12; al.) : o \6yos 6- c'/Liot OV X'^P" *'" vp.'tv, gaineth no ground among you or within you [R. V. halh not free course (with mrg. hath no place) in you], Jn. viii. 3 7 [cf. Field, Otiuni Xorv. par» iii. ad !oc.]. 3. lo have space or room for ren-iving or holding something (Germ, fassen) ; prop.: t/, a thing to fill the vacant space, Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.] ; of a space large enough to hold a certain number of people, Mk. ii. 2 (Gen. xiii. 6 [cf. Plut. praec. ger. reipub. S, 5 p. 804 b.]) ; of measures, which hold a certain quantity, Jn. ii. 6 ; 1 K. vii. 24 (38) ; 2 Chr. iv. 5, and in Grk. writ, fr. lldt. down. metaph. lo receive witJt the mind or understanding, to und) rsland, (to 'K.tWaivos t^poirrffxa, Plut. Cat. niin. 64 ; oo'oi' av™ i; ^vxr/ X'^P"' '^*^'' ^ • ''• ■'' ^) ' '" be ready to receive, keep in mind, and practise : rov "Koyov TovTov, this saying, Mt. xix. 11 sq. [(cf. Plut. Lycurg. 13, 5)]; riva, to receive one into one's heart, make room for one in one's heart, 2 Co. vii. 2. [CoMP. : dva-, dno-, ix-, V7T0- xwpf M. Syx. cf . (pxoiiai.] " \uplX,a; fut. xpio-d>)i/ ; (xapit, q.v.); fr. Ildt. down; In separate^ divide, jiarl, ]mt asunder : ti, opp. to ov^fvyvviii, Mt. xix. 6 ; Mk. X. 9 ; Ttva duo tivos, Ko. viii. 35, 39, (Sap. i. 3) ; pf. pass. ptcp. Hcb. vii. 26. Mid. and 1 aor. pass, with a reflex, signif. to separate one's self from, to de- part; a. to leave a husband OT wife: of divorce, 1 Co. vii. 11, 15 ; diro dvipos, ib. 10 (a woman Kixapicfiivrf dn-A Tov dv8p6s, Polyb. 32, 12, 6 [al.]). b. to depart, go away: [absol. Philem. 15 (euphemism for e(f>vye), R. V. was parted from thee] ; foil, by dTrd with a gen. of the ]ilace. Acts i. 4 ; ck with a gen. of the jilace. Acts xviii. 1 sq. ([W. § 36, 6 a.] : fit with an ace. of the place, 2 Mace. V. 21; xii. 12; Polyb., Diod., al.). [Comp. : aTTo-, 8m- x'^P'f'*''] * Xtoptov, -ov, TO, (dimin. of x'^pos oi" X^P")' ^*"' H'''-' down ; 1. a space, a place ; a region, district. 2. XO)piart from, aloof from, etc.) : 1 Co. [iv. 8] ; xi. 11 ; Phil. ii. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 8 ; v. 21 ; Heb. [ii. 9 Treg. mrg.] ; xi. 40 ; Trapa^oXijs, without making use of a parable, Mt. xiii. 34; Mk. iv. 34; dpra/ioo-mr, Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21; X- al/iaTOs, Heb. ix. 7, 18; aiiiaTiKxytrlas, Heb. ix. 22; without i. e. being absent or wanting : Ro. vii. 8 sq. [R. V. apart from] ; Heb. xi. 6 ; xii. 8, 14; Jas. ii. 18 (Rec. e'«), 20, 26, [in these three exx. R. V. apart from] ; without connection and fellowship with one, Jn. xv. 5 [R.V. apart from] ; destitute of the fellowship and blessings of one : x"P's XpiCT-roC [cf. W. § 54, 2 a.; R. V. separate from Christ], Eph. ii. 12 ; without the intervention (par- ticipation or co-operation) of one, Jn. i. 3 ; Ro. iii. 21, [28 ; iv. 6 ; x. 14] ; x- OciJ-f^lov, without laying a foun- dation, Lk. vi. 49 ; x- t^s o-ris yv(i>ij.r)s, without consulting you, [cf. yvaiiTj, fin. (Polyb. 3, 21, 1. 2. 7)], Philem. 14; ' without leaving room for ' : x- dvn\oylas, Heb. vii. 7 ; oiKTipfiav, X. 28. X- 'Tov croi/jaTor, freed from the body, 2 Co. xii. 3 L T Tr WH (Rec. cktos, q. v. b. a.) ; x<»P's d/iapTi'as, without association with sin, i. e. without yield- ing to sin, without becoming stained with it, Heb. iv. 15; not to expiate sin, Heb. ix. 28. b. besides: Mt. xiv. 21 ; XV. 38 ; 2 Co. xi. 28. [Syn. cf. a^u.] * Xwpos, -ou, 6, the north-west wind (Lat. C'orus or Caurus) : for the quarter of the heavens from which this wind blows, Acts xxvii. 12 (on which see Xl\jr, 2).* * <|/d\Xu ; fut. \j/aKS> ; (fr. ^dm, to rub, wipe ; to handle, touch, [but cf. Curtius p. 730]) ; a. to pluck off, pull out : edeipav, the hair, Aeschyl. Pers. 1062. b. to cause to vibrate by touching, to twang: ro^aiv vevpas X^'pi' Eur. Bacch. 784 ; spec. xdpSrjv, to touch or strike the chord, to tivang the strings of a musical instrument so that they gently vibrate (Aristot. probl. 19, 23 [p. 919\ 2]) ; and absol. to play on a stringed instrument, to play the harp, etc. : Aristot., Plut., Arat., (in Plat. Lys. p. 209 b. with KOL KpoveLv T(o 7rXr]KTp(d added [but not as explan- atory of it; the Schol. ad loc. says r/'^Xai, to iivev irXrjKTpov TM SaKTvXai rds p^opSar eVa^acr^at] ; it is distin- guished from Ki.Sapi(eiv in Hdt. 1, 155) ; Sept. for tJJ and much oftener for TSt ; to sing to tlie music of the harp ; in theN. T. to sing a hymn, to celebrate the praises of God. in song, Jas. v. 13 [R.V. sing praise] ; t<» Kvpla, ra ofo'/iaTi aiiTov, (often so in Sept.), in honor of God, Eph. v. 19 [here A. V. making mehihi] ; Ro. xv. 9 ; y^oKOi ra irvd- p-aTL, \j/a\ia fie kol ro> vol, ' I will sing God*s praises indeed with my whole soul stirred and borne away by the Holy Spirit, but I will also follow reason as my guide, so that what I sing may be understood alike by myself and by the hsteners', 1 Co. xiv. 15.* i|/a\)i.ds, -oO, o, (\//aXX(B), a striking, trvanging, [(Eur., al.)] ; spec, a striking the chords of a musical instru- ment [(Find., Aeschyl., al.)] ; hence a pious song, a psalm, (Sept. chiefly for ll'DT::), Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16; the phrase ex^'" ''l^aXpov is used of one who has it in his heart to sing or recite a song of the sort, 1 Co. .xiv. 26 [cf. Heinrici ad loc., and Bp. Lghtft. on Col. u. s.] ; one of the songs of the book of the O. T. which is entitled \jm\fiot. Acts xiii. 3.3; plur. the (book of) Psalms, Lk. xxiv. 44 ; /3i'/3Xof x/^aXpmi/, Lk. xx. 42 ; Acts i. 20. [Syn. see vfivos, fin.] * +evS-dS€X4)os, -on, o, (il/evSris and dSeX^ds), a false brother, i. e. one who ostentatiously professes to be a Christian, but is destitute of Christian knowledge and piety : 2 Co. xi. 26 ; Gal. ii. 4.* i|<6uS-axo'(rToXos, -on, 6, (\|^€i)S^s and aTro'oroXos), a false apostle, one who falsely claims to be an ambassador of Christ: 2 Co. xi. 13.* ij»€«8t)s, -€s, (i/ffvSo/iat), fr. Hom. E. 4, 235 down, lying, deceitful, false: Rev. ii. 2; fidprvpes, Acts vi. 13; sub- stantively 01 -^jfevSus, [A. V. liars], Rev. xxi. 8 [here Lchm. -^evarfft, q. v.].* >J/«ii8o-StSao-KaXos, -01), 6, (\j/ev8fjs and SiSao-KaXos), a false teacher: 2 Pet. ii. 1.* >|/£u6o-Xo''yos, -ov, {^fvBrjs and Xtyoj), speaking (Jeach- ing) falsely, speaking lies: 1 Tim. iv. 2. (Arstph. ran. 1521 ; Polyb., Leian., Aesop, al.) * <|/t«8o(iai ; 1 aor. eyjrfva-dfjiriv ; (depon. mid. of ijrdSa [allied w. x^i^upi'fo» etc. (Vanicek p. 1195)] ' to deceive', ' cheat ' : hence prop, to show one's self deceitful, to play false) : fr. Hom. down ; to lie, to speak deliberate false- hoods : Heb. vi. 18 ; 1 Jn. i. 6 ; Rev. iii. 9 ; ov \jfev8opai, Ro. IK. 1 ; 2 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 20 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; rivd, to deceive one by a lie, to lie to, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plut., al.) : Actsv. 3 ; like verbs of saying, with a dat. of the pers. Ccf. W. § 31, 5 ; B. § 133, 1 ; Green p. 100 sq.). Acts V. 4 (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 45 ; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 36 ; Ixxxvui. (Lxxxix.) 36 ; Josh. xxiv. 27 ; [Jer. v. 12], etc.) ; e'sTiva, Col. iii. 9; Kara tivos, against one, Mt. v. 11 [LGom. tyevBofidprvp 07(3 ylnOvpi.aT7]|ievSo)jLdpTVS, see ^evSopaprup. >|<€u8o-irpo(()TJriis, -on, o, (yjfevSrit and irpocjifiTris), one who, acting the part of a divinely inspired prophet, titters false- hoods under the name of divine prophecies, a false prophet: Mt. vii. 15 ; xxiv. 11, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Lk. vi. 26 ; Acts xiii. G ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; 1 Jn. iv. 1 ; Rev. xvi. 13 ; xix. 20 ; XX. 10. (Jer. vi. 13; .xxxiii. (xxvi.) 8, 11, 16; x.xxiv. (x.xvii.) 7; xxxvi. (xxix.) 1, 8; Zech. xiii. 2; Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 1 ; 10, 7, 3 ; b. j. 6, 5, 2; [tov tolovtou fv6v- /3oXo> nvopaTL yjffvSonpotpfiTtjv npocrayopevei, Ki^SrjXfioiira Tj)v oKriBri ■npo^r)Teiav k. ra yvfjdia vodoK eiiprjpacn cVi- a-Kid^ovTa ktX. Pliilo de spec. legg. iii. § 8] ; eccles. writ. ['Teaching' 11, 5 etc. (where see Harnack)] ; Grk. writ, use yjfevSopavns.) * ij/cCSos, -our, TO, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for ipn, 2J2 ^ri2, a lie; conscious and intentional falsehood: univ. Rev. xiv. 5 (where Rec. 6o'Xoi) ; opp. to 17 aXij^fia, Jn. viii. 44 ; Eph. iv. 25 ; ovk eo-i-i yp-evSos, opp. to aXrjdes iariv, is no lie, 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; ripara ^evSovs, [A. V. lying wonders'] exhibited for the treacherous purpose of de- ceiving men, 2 Th. ii. 9 ; in a broad sense, ichatcver is not what it professes to be : so of perverse, impious, deceit- ful precepts, 2 Th. ii. 11 ; 1 Jn. ii. 21 ; of idolatry, Ro. 1. 25 ; noKiv \lfev8os, to act in accordance with the pre- cepts and i)rinciples of idolatry. Rev. xxi. 27 ; xxii. 15, [cf. xxi. .^, and p. 526'' mid.]. * \|/€»)So'-xp«rTos, -ov, 6, (yj^fvSrjs and xP^o-tos), a false Christ (or Messiah), (one who falsely lays claim to the name and ofece of the Messiah) : Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22.* <|/€v8i4n)(ios, -oc, (\frci8os [ij/cvSris, rather] and Suopa), falsely named [A. V. falsely so called'] : 1 Tim. vi. 20. (Aeschyl., Philo, Plut., Se.xt. Emp.) • t|/cv(rp.a, -TOf, TO, (\|/f i/8au, -w : 1 aor. c'i|'»;Xd(/»;cra, optat. 3 pers. ])lur. \j^7^\a(j)r], to touch); to handle, touch, feel: tI or rivd, Lk. xxiv. 39; Ileb. xii. 18[.seeR.V. t.xt. and mrg., cf. B. § 134, 8; W. 343 (322)] ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; meta|)h. menially to seek after tokens of a person or thing : deov. Acts xvii. 27 [A.V. feel after]. (Horn., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Philo, Plut. ; often for isn, 'Ci'Dy]^ ^^O.) [Syn. see Stttw, 2 c] • \|n)(t>(|(i> ; 1 aor. e\jfTi(j>i.(ra; (\//'^0or, (j. v.) ; to count with pebbles, to comjjule, C(dcutos, -01;, 1], (fr. ■^du), see i/^aXXw), a small, worn, smooth stone ; pebble, [fr. Pind., Ildt., down ; (in Ilom. i/'^^/f)] ; 1. since in the ancient courts of justice the accused were condemned by black pebbles and ac- quitted by white (cf. Passow s. v. ■^rj(j>os, 2 c, vol. ii. p. 2571"; [L.and .S. s. v. 4 d.]; Ovid. met. 1.5, 41; [Plut. Alcib. 22, 2]), and a man on his acquittal was spoken of as vtKTjaas (Theophr. char. 17 (19), 3) and the i\rr)os, but crip^oXov. 2. a vote (on account of the use of pebbles in voting) : Karacpepto (q. v.), Acts xxvi. 10.* ij/i9upi|;i.6upwrT>js, -oO, o, (see the preced. word), a whisperer. ■ ^ '^vx'] roil iraiSapiov, 1 K. xvii. 21) ; so also in those pass, where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold division of human nature by the Greeks, t) ^x'I '^ '^'^' tinguished from to -nveviiu (see jrvfC/iu, 2 p. .520* [and reff. s. V. TTV. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23 ; Heb. iv. 12. b. life : fLcpip-vav Tij ^v^jj. Jit. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; ttjv t^u;^^^ ayarrai/. Rev. xii. 11; [fiiCTftK, Lk. .\iv. 26] ; ridivat, Jn. X. 11, 15, 17; xiii. 37 sq. ; .xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; wapa- fitSoi/ai, Acts XV. 2C ; SiSovai (Xirpov, q. v.), Mt. xx. 28 ; Jlk. X. 45; ^TjTcIv TTjv yjfvxTjv Tivos (see ^T/Teoj, 1 a.), Mt. ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3 ; add, Mt. vi. 25 ; Mk. iii. 4 ; Lk. vi. 9 ; xii. 20, 23 ; Acts xx. 24 ; xxvii. 10, 22 ; Ro. xvi. 4 ; 2 Co. i. 23 ; Phil. ii. 30 ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; in the pointed aphorisms of Christ, intended to fix themselves in the minds of his hearers, the phrases evplafeiv, (ra^fiv, airoWivai ttjv ^vxrfv avTov, etc., designate as i/fx'/ '" o"" "^ ^^^ anti- thetic members the life which is lined on earth, in the other, t?te (blessed) life in the eternal kingdom of God : Mt. X. 39; xvi. 25 sq. ; Mk. viii. 35-37; Lk. Lx. 24, 56 Rec. ; xvii. 33 ; Jn. xii. 25 ; the life destined to enjoy the Jlessianic salvation is meant also in the foil, phrases [(where R. V. soul)^ : jreptn-oir/o-is ^vxrjs, Heb. -x. 39 ; K7ao6ai Tas yj/vxas, Lk. xxi. 19 ; vnep rav ^vx^v, [here A.V. (not \\.\.)f)r you ; cf. c. below], 2 Co. xii. 1 5. c. that in which there is life ; a lining being : ^vx^i f'Sci) a living soul, 1 Co. xv. 45 ; [Rev. xvi. 3 R Tr mrg.], (Gen. ii. 7 ; plur. i. 20) ; Tiaaa ■^vx'i C'^rjs, Rev. xvi. 3 [G L T Trtxt. WH] (Lev. xi. 10) ; ^^(Ta ^vxn, ecery soul, i. e. every one, Acts ii. 43; iii. 23; Ro. xiii. 1, (so WSi'hB, Lev. vii. 17 (27); xvii. 12); with dvBpaTTov added, every soul of man (DIX 'd32, Num. xxxi. 40, 46, [cf. 1 Mace, ii. 38]), Ro. ii. 9. yjrvxt^it souls (like the Lat. capita) i. e. persons (in enumerations ; cf. Germ. Seelenznhl) : Acts ii. 41 ; vii. 14; xxvii. 37; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xlvi. 15, 18, 22, 26, 27 ; Ex. i. 5 ; xii. 4 ; Lev. ii. 1 ; 'Snm. xix. 11, 13, 18 ; [Deut. .x. 22] ; the exx. fr. Grk. authors (cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2590'') are of a different sort [yet cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 2]) ; y^vxa\ avBpumav of slaves [A. V. souls of men (R.V. with mrg. ' Or lives ')], Rev. xviii. 13 (so [Xuni. xxxi. 35] ; Ezek. xxvii. 13 ; see awpa, 1 c. [cf. W. § 22, 7 N. 3]). 2. the soul (Lat. ani- mus), a. the seat of the feelings, desires, affections, aversions, (our soul, heart, etc. [R. V. almost uniformly soul'\ ; for ex.x. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2589* ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 3] ; Hebr. E*3:, cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 901 in 3) : Lk. i. 46 ; ii. 35 ; Jn. x. 24 [cf. alpiD, 1 b.] ; Acts xiv. 2, 22; xv. 24 ; Heb. vi. 19 ; 2 Pet. ii. 8, 14 ; fj imBvp-ta Tjj^yjr. Rev. xviii. 14; dvdiravtrtv rais yj^vxals ivpL(jK€iv, Mt. xi. 29 ; ^vx^, • • • dvanavov, (pdye. Trie [WH br. these three impvs.], dcppaivov (personifica- tion and direct address), Lk. xii. 19, cf. 18 (^ i|'^X'7 '■'"'" TravfTfTai, Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 28 ; evcfipalvfiv ttjv "^vxi^v. Ael. V. h. 1, 32) ; evboKfi rj ^vx^l pov (anthropopathicall)', of God), Mt. xii. 18; Heb. x. 38; TrepiXvnos ia-riv ij 'i'^xh pov, Mt. xxvi. 38 ; Mk. xiv. 34 ; r/ yjfvxil pov TerapaKTai, Jn. xii. 27 ; rais^vxais vpwv (KKvopevot, {fainting in your souls (cf. ckKvui, 2 b.)], Heb. xii. 3 ; ev oXi; TJj x/'ux.^ co"» with all thy sotd, Mt. xxii. 37; [Lk. x. 27 Ltxt. TTr WH] ; €^ oXi/f T^s ijfvxris ia, a. p. bSV' bet.), Jas. iii. 15. (In various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down.)* 'l'*'X°s (R(i Tr WII), more correctly \//'{);(oy (LT; cf. [ Ttl/. Proleg. p. 102]; Lipsius, Grainmat. Untersuch. p. 44 sq.), -our, TO, (V'uxo), q. v), fr. Horn, down, cold : ,Jn. xviii. 18; Acts xxviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 27; for "Ip, (Sen. viii. 22; for r\'^0, Ps. cxlvii. 6 (17), Job xxxvii. 8.* i)ruxp<>s, -a, -uf, (-f^vxto, ({■ v.), fr. Horn, down, cold, cool : neut. of cold water, Trorljpiov ^vxpov, Alt. x. 42 {[yjrvxpif XovvT-ai, lldt. 2, 37] ; ylrvxpov Trivfiv, Epict. ench. 29, 2; n\vveadat \jrvxp^, diss. 4, 11, 19; cf. W. 591 (550)) ; metaph. like the Lat. frigidtts, cold i. e. sluggish, inert, in mind (i/^. rtjv opyrjv, Lcian. Tim. 2) : of one destitute of warm Christian faith and the desire for hohness, Kev. iii. 15 scp* i\iv\ia : 2 fut. ])ass. y\niyrfaop.ai [cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 31« ; Moeris ed. Piers, p. 421 s. v.] ; fr. Ilom. down ; to breathe, blow, cool by blowing ; pass, to be made or to grow cool or cold: trop. of waning love, IMt. x.\iv. 12.* 4iu(ji(Jo) ; 1 aor. (■^iopiaa ; (i//'o)/jos, a bit, a morsel ; see ■^wfilov); a. to feed hij putting a bit or crumb (of food) into the mouth (of infants, the young of animals, etc.) : Tivd Tivi (Arslph., Aristot., Plut., Geop., Artein. oneir. 5, (J2 ; Pori)hyr., .Iambi.). b. univ. to feed, nourish, (Sept. for TJXn) [W. § 2, 1 b.] : nvd, Ro. .\ii. 20; Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 55, 2; with the ace. of the thing, to give a thing lofeed some one, feed out to, (Vulg. distribuo in cibos pauperum [A. V. bestow . . . to feed the poor}) : 1 Co. xiii. 3 ; in the O. T. nvd n, Sir. xv. 3 ; Sap. xvi. 20; Num. xi. 4; Deut. xxxii. 13 ; Ps. Ixxi.x. (Ixxx.) 6 ; Is. Iviii. 14, etc. ; ef. W. § 32, 4 a. note.* <|iu|iCov, -ov, TO, (dirain. of >|ri»/io's), a fragment, bit, morsel, [A. V. so})'] : Jn. xiii. 2H .stp 30. (Ruth ii. 14 ; Job xxxi. 1 7, [but in both y^anos] ; Antonin. 7, 3 ; Diog. Laert. 6, 37.)* \|>uxu; (fr. obsol. ■v/^a)Ci> for\//'riQ)) ; to ruh, rub to pieces: TOf o-Toxuaf raif x^P"'^"^ ^'^- ■*''• ^- [(m'J- '" Nicand.)]* a il, a: omcgn, the last (24th) letter of the Ork. alpha- bet ; c'yo) dpi TO Q [WII 'a, L ^, Tw], i. q. to Tc'Xor, i. e. the last (see A, u, «\<^a [and P. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. and art. ' Alpha', also art. A and Q by Piper in llerzog (ef. Schaff-IIerzog), and by Tyrwhitt in Diet, of Chris. Antiq.]), Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec. ; xxi. 6; x.xii. 13. [On the interchange of a and o in Mss. see Scrivener, Plain In- troduction etc. p. 627 ; ' Six Lectures ' etc. p. 1 76 ; WH. Intr. § 404 ; cf. esp. Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. Inschr. p. 10.] • ee6(j)i\e, Acts i. 1 ; add. Acts xviii. 14; xxvii. 21 [here Tdf. <» (ex errore) ; on the pass, which follow cf. B. u. s.] ; Ro. ii. 1, 3 ; ix. 20 ; 1 Tim. vi. 20; and, at the same time, reproof, Jas. ii. 20. b. in exclamation : and that of admiration, Mt. XV. 28 ; Ro. xi. 33 [here Rec." Lchm. & ; cf. Chand- ler §§ 902, (esp.) 904] ; of reproof, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; Acts xiii. 10 ; Gal. iii. 1 ; with the nom. ("W. § 29, 2), Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix.41. [(From Horn, down.)]* 'npriS (RG: see 'ImjSijS), o, (Hebr. -151;' [i. e. 'ser- vant ' sc. of Jehovah]), Obed, the grandfather of king David: Alt. i. 5; Lk. iii. 32, (Ruth iv. Hsq. ; 1 Chr. ii. 12).- i28€, adv., (fr. oSi); 1. so, in this manner, (very often in Horn.). 2. adv. of place; a. hither, to this place (Ilom. II. IS, 392; Od. 1, 182 ; 17, 545 ; ef. B. 71 (G2 s(p) [cf; W. § 54, 7 ; but its use in Horn, of J) lace is now generally denied; see libeling, Lex. Horn. s. V. p. 484"'; L. and S. s. v.U.]) : Mt. viii. 29; .xiv. IS [Tr mrg. br. &8e] ; xvii. 1 7 ; xxii. 12 ; Mk. xi. 3 ; Lk. ix. 41 ; xiv. 21 ; xix. 27 ; Jn. vi. 25 ; xx. 27 ; Acts ix. 21 ; Rev. iv. 1 ; xi. 12, (Sept. for bvn, Ex. iii. 5 ; Judg. xviii. 3; Ruth ii. 14); «"wj SiSt, \_even unto this place\ Lk. xxiii. 5. b. Iiere, in this place: Mt. xii. 6, 41 sq. ; xiv. 17 ; Mk. ix. 1,5; xvi. 6 ; Lk. ix. 33 ; xxii. 38 ; xxiv. 1; [WH reject the cl.] ; .In. vi. 9 ; xi. 21, 32, and often, (Sept. for riD) ; rd SiSi, the things that arc done here. Col. iv. 9; &Se, in this city, Acts ix. 14 ; in this world, II eb. xiii. 14 ; opp. to «el (here, i. e. according to the Levitical law still in force ; there, i. e. in the passage in Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Ileb. vii. 8 ; hSe with some addition, Mt. xiv. 8 ; Mk. vi. 3 ; viii. 4 ; Lk. iv. 23 ; S>8e 6 Xpiaros, ^ 2)Sf, here is Christ, or there, [so A. v., but K. \. here is the Christ, or. Here (ef. SSe kol &Sf, hither and thither, Ex. ii. 12 etc.)], Mt. xxiv. 23; &Sf ij . . . fVfi, Mk. xiii. 21 [TWII om. f, ; Tr mrg. reads «oil : Lk. xvii. 21, 23 [here T Tr AVH mrg. «« . . . SSe ( WH txt. fKf 1 r; . . . &Sf )] ; Jas. ii. 3 [here Rec. «ei 5 • • • xp^r) 679 copa &8e; G L T Tr WH oiu. aSc (WH txt. and marg. vary- ing tlie place of exei)]. Jletapb. in this thing, llev. xiii. 10, 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9, [the phrase SSc eanv in at least two of these pass. (viz. xiii. 18 ; xiv. 12) seems to be equiv. to 'here there is opportunity for', 'need of etc. (so in Epict. diss. 3, 22, 105)] ; in this state of things, under these circumstances, 1 Co. iv. 2 L [who, however, connects it with vs. 1] TTr WH ; cf. Meyer ad loc. ipSij, -^s, fj, (i. q. aotSfj, fr. delda> i- e. aSo), to sing), fr. Soph, and Eur. down, Sept. for TE? and nyiy, a song, /at/, ode ; in the Scriptures a song in praise of God or Christ : Rev. v. 9 ; xiv. 3 ; Mmiicr/tar k. tov apviov, the .song which Moses and Christ taught them to sing, Rev. XV. 3 ; plur. with the epithet TtvevfiariKal, Eph. v. 19 [here L br. nv.'\ ; Col. iii. 16. [Syn. see u/ivos, fin.] * coSiv (1 Th. V. 3 ; Is. xxxvii. 3) for wSir (the earlier form ; cf. W. § 9, 2 e. N. 1), -ti/os, ij, fr. Horn. II. 11, 271 down, the pain of childbirth, travail-pain, birth-pang: 1 Th. V. 3; plur. wSlfts (\^pangs, thi-ocs, R. V. trai-ailj; Germ. Wehen), i. q. intolerable anguish, in reference to the dire calamities which the Jews supposed would pre- cede the advent of the iMessiah, and which were called n'U/'jri 'h2V\ [see the Comm. (esp. Keil) on Mt. 1. c], Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) ; wSlves Bavarov [Tr mrg. aSou], the pangs of death. Acts ii. 24, after the Sejit. who translated the words j11"D "S^n by aihlves 6., deriv- ing the word ''^^n not, as they ought, from S^n, i. e. a)(oiviov ' cord ', but from ^5n, ci8is, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5 ; cxiv. (cxvi.) 3 ; 2 S. xxii. 6.* liSCvu; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for Sin, thrice for San ; to feel the pains of childbirth, to travail: Gal. iv. 27; Rev. xii. 2 ; in fig. disc. Paul uses the phrase our waXii/ wbiva, i. e. whose souls I am striving with intense effort and anguish to conform to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 19. [COMP. : o-uiz-wSiVo).] * unos, -ov, 0, (OIQ i. q. (pepa [('?) ; allied w. Lat. umenis, cf. Vanicek p. 38; Curtius §487]), fr. Hom. down, the shoulder: Mt. xxiii. 4 ; Lk. xv. 5.* uveojiai, -oC/uat : 1 aor. u>vr)(Taixr)v (which form, as well as ioivrjtTdiirjv, belongs to later Grk., for which the earlier writ, used (Trpidixrjv; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 137 sqq. ; [^Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 210 sqq. ; Veitch s. v.] ; AV. §12, 2; §16 S.V.); fr. Ildt. down; to hug: with a gen. of the price, Acts vii. IG.* udv [so R G Tr, but L T WII moV ; see (Etym. Magn. 822, 40) I, t], -oi, TO, fr. Hdt. down, an egg : Lk. xi. 12, (for nX'5, found only in the plur. D'V'3, Deut. xxii. 6 sq. ; Is. x. 14, etc.).* upo, -as, 17, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for n^J and in Dan. for rii'U'; 1. a certain definite time or season fixed by natural law and returning with the revolving year ; of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, winter, as Sipa toO dfpovs. Trpwifios k. o\l/ipos, ;^fifiepi(i, etc. ; often in the Grk. writ. [cf. L. and .S. s. v. A. I. 1 c, and on the inherent force of the word esp. .Schmidt eh. 44 § G sq.]. 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising and the setting of the sun), a day: Sipa naprjKBfv, ]Mt. xiv. 15 ; i)hr) lopas ttoXX^j ytvojxivrjs (or ■yira/xcVi;?), \_X. V. wlien the day was noio far spent"], Mk. vi. 3.5 (see jroXv?. c. [but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited jroXX^f wpas means early']) ; u'^las [p-^i TTr mrg. WH txt.] TJhrj ova-rjs Trjs Upas [WH mrg. br. ttjs wpat], Mk. xi. 11 (ov/'c Trjs aipas, Polyb. 3, 83, 7; T^y wpas eyiyvfTo o^f, Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. a twelfth part of the day-time, an hour, (the twelve hours of the daj- are reckoned from the i-ising to the setting of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 [cf. BB. DD. s. V. Hour; Riehm's HWB. s. v. Uhr]) : Mt. xxiv. 36 ; XXV. 13 ; Mk. xiii. 32 ; xv. 25, 33 ; Lk. xxii. 59 ; xxiii. 44 ; Jn. i. 39 (40) ; iv. 6 ; xix. 14 ; with rijf rjpiepas added, Acts ii. 15; of the hours of the night, Lk. xii. 39; xxii. 59 ; with t^s vvktos added. Acts xvi. 33 ; xxiii. 23 ; dat. &pa, in stating the time when [W. §31, 9; B. § 133, 26] : Mt. xxiv. 44; Mk. xv. 34 ; Lk. xii. 39 sq.; preceded by tV, Mt. xxiv. 50; Jn. iv. 52 ; Acts xvi. 33; accus. to specify when [W. § 32, 6; B. § 131, 11] : Jn. iv. 52; Acts X. 3; 1 Co. .\v. 30; Rev. iii. 3 ; also to express duration [W. and B. 11. cc] : Mt. xx. 12 [cf. ttoi/qj, I. 1 a. fin.]; xxvi. 40; Mk. xiv. 37; preceded by preposi- tions : diro, Mt. xxvii. 45 ; Acts xxiii. 23 ; ?as, Jit. xxvii. 45 ; liexpt, Acts x. 30 ; irepl with the accus. Acts x. 9. improp. used for a very short time : /iia wpa, Rev. xviii. 10 [Rec. iv, WII mrg. ace], 17 (16), 19; npos Sipav, [A. V. for a season], Jn. v. 35 ; 2 Co. vii. 8 ; Gal. ii. 5 [here A. Y. for an hour] ; Philem. 15 ; npbs Kmp'ov apas, \_for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17. 4. any definite time, point of time, moment : Mt. xxvi. 45 ; more precisely defined — by a gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 10 ; xiv. 1 7 ; Rev. iii. 10 ; xiv. 7, 15 ; by a gen. of the pers. the fit or oppor- tune time for one, Lk. xxii. 53 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; by a pronoun or an adj. : ^ «pn apa, [A. V. this jjresent hour], 1 Co. iv. 11; itrxarr] aipa, the last hour i. e. the end of this age and very near the return of Christ from heaven (see i'lTxaTos, 1 p. 253"), 1 Jn. ii. 18 [cf. Westcott ad loc.]; avTTi rfi &pa, that very hour, Lk. ii. 38 [here A.Y. (not R.V.) that instant]; xxiv. 3S ; Acts xvi. 18; xxii. 13; e'l/ avTJj TTj Sipa, in that very hour, Lk. vii. 21 [R GLtxt.] ; xii. 12; XX. 19; iv t!j S>pa iKelvrj, Mt. viii. 13; iv eKeivrj rfi &pa, Mt. X. 19 [Lchm. br. the cl.] ; Mk. xiii. 11 ; [Lk. vii. 21 L mrg. TTr WII]; Rev. xi. 13; dir iKeivtjs t^s wpar, Jn. .\ix. 27; dno ttjs Cipas exeifijf, Mt. ix. 22 ; xv. 28; xvii. 18; by a conjunction : wpa ore, Jn. iv. 21, 23 ; v. 25: xvi. 25 ; Iva (see ira, II. 2 d.). Jn. xii. 23 ; xiii. 1 ; xvi. 2, 32 ; by Kai and a finite verb, Mt. xxvi. 45 ; by a relative pron. S>pa iv ^, Jn. v. 28; by the addition of an ace. with an inf. Ro. xiii. 11 (oi/7ra) a>pa crvvaxO^vai TO KTf]vi), Gen. xxix. 7 ; see exx. in the Grk. writ., fr. Aeschyl. down, in Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2620* ; [L. and S. s. V. B. I. 3]; so the Lat. tempus est, Cic. Tusc. 1, 41, 99 ; ad Att. 10, 8). Owing to the context Sipa some- times denotes the fatal hour, the hour of death : Mt. xxvi. 45 ; Mk. xiv. 35, 41 ; Jn. .xii. 27 ; xvi. 4 [here L Tr WH read r) Sipa airav i.e. the time when these predictions are fulfilled]; xvii. 1; rj wpa Tifdr, 'one's hour', i.e. the time when one must undergo the destiny appointed him by God : so of Christ, Jn. vii. 30 ; viii. 20, cf. xvi. 21. [On the omission of the word see i^avrrjs, {dpa, ' tlic bloom and vigor of life ', 'beauty' in the (Irk. writ., who sometimes join tlie word in this sense with x^p'r [which suggests grace of move- ment] or KciXXof [which denotes, ratlier, symmetry of form]), fr. lies, down, ripe, mature, (of fruits, of human age, etc.) ; hence blooming, beautiful, (of the human body, Xen., Plat., al. ; witli rfi o\jfei added, (jen. x.wi. 7; .\.\ix. 17; xxxix. ; IK. i. G): jroSf 9, Ro. x. 1 .J ; of a certain gate of the temple, Acts iii. 2, 10; [ruc^jot kcko- viayxvoi, Mt. xxiii. 27]; aicevoi, 2 Chr. xxxvi. 19. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § cvi.] * upvoftai ; depon. mid. ; Sept. for JNiy ; to roar, to howl, (of a lion, wolf, dog, and other beasts) : 1 Pet. v. 8 (.ludg. xiv. 5 ; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 14 ; Jer. ii. 15 ; Sap. xvii. IS ; Theocr., Pint., al.) ; of men, to raise a loud and in- articulate cry. either of grief, Ildt. 3, 117: or of joy, id. 4, 75 ; to sing with a loud voice, Pind. 01. 9, 1G3.* •Is [Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 as; cf. W. 4G2 (431) ; Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebdinfj, Lex. Horn. s. V. p. 494'' bot.], an adverbial form of the rela- tive pron. OS, 7, o which is used in comparison, as, like as, even as, according as, in the same manner as, etc. (Germ, wie) ; but it also assumes the nature of a con- junction, of t i m e, of p u r p o s e, and of consequence. On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, ch. XXXV. p. 756 sqq. ; [L. and S. s. v.]. I. o)s as an adverb of comparison; 1. It answers to some demonstrative word (oCTtur, or the like), either in the same clause or in another member of the same sentence [cf. W. § 53, 5] : oZtws . ■ . i>s, Jn. vii. 46 [L AVII om. Tr br. as etc.] ; 1 Co. iii. 15 ; iv. 1 ; ix. 26 ; Eph. v. 28, 33 ; Jas. ii. 12 ; outuj . . . as iav [T Tr WH om. iav (cf. Eng. as should a man cast etc.)] . . . /SaX?;, so etc. . . . as if etc. Mk. iv. 26 ; as . . . ovras, Acts viii. 32; .xxiii. 11; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. xi. 3 [RG]; 1 Th. v. 2; o)r Sv (iav) foil, by subj. [(cf. av, II. 2 a. fin.)] . . . ovras. 1 Th. ii. 7 sq. ; as . ■ . oijra Ktii, Ro. V. 15 [hero MTI br. K«i], 18 ; 2 Co. i. 7 L T Tr WII ; vii. 14 ; i>s [T Tr AV II Ko^uf] . . . Kara to aird [L G raird, Rec. raCra], Lk. xvii. 28-30 ; lo-or ... my /cat, Acts xi. 1 7 ; .sometimes in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative word (ovras, or the like) is omitted and must be sup- plied by tlie mind, as Mt. viii. 13 ; Col. ii. 6 ; as . . . Kai (where ovra kui might have been expected [W. u. s. ; B.§ 149, 8c.]), Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 [here GTTr WII om. L br. the cl.] ; Acts vii. 51 [Lchm. Kadas] ; Gal. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 20, (see Kat, II. 1 a.) ; to this construction must be referred also 2 Co. xiii. 2 as napav to bevrepov, (cat airav vvv, as when I was present the second time, so now being absent [(cf. p. 317* top); al. render (cf. R. V. mrg.) as if I were present the second time, even though I am now absent^. 2. as with the word or words forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preced- ing verb that otjras must be mentally inserted before the same. When tluis used mr refers a. to the manner ('form ') of the action expressed by the finite verb, and is equiv. to in the same manner us, after the fashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (nom.) of the verb : :Mt. vi. 29 ; vii. 29 ; xiii. 43 ; 1 Th. ii. 1 1 ; 2 Put. ii. 12; Jude 10, etc. ; to an ace. governed by the verb : as dyanav tov irXrjcrlov aov is ufuvTov, Jit. xi.\. 1 9 ; xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii. 31, 33 ; Lk. x. 27 ; Ro. xiii. 9 ; Gal. v. 14 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; add, Philem. 17 ; Gal. iv. 14 ; [here many (cf. R. V. mrg.) would bring in also Acts iii. 22 ; vii. 37 (cf. c. below)] ; or to another oblique case: as Phil. ii. 22 ; to a subst. with a prep. : as ms iv KpvTrra, Jn. vii. 10 [Tdf. om. ws] ; ws «V rjfiipa (Tfpayjjs, Jas. v. 5 [RG; al. om.ojf] ; as 6iv, Mt. vii. 29 ; Mk. Jn. i. 14 ; add, [(L T Tr WH in Jit. v. 48 ; vi. 5, 16)] ; Acts xvii. 22; Ro. vi. 13 [here L TTr WII uo-ei] ; xv. 15 ; 1 Co. iii. 1 ; vii. 25 ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xi. 16 ; Eph. v. 1, 8, 15; Col. iii. 12 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. v. 1 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 3 ; Tit. i. 7 ; Philem. 9, 16 [where of. Bp. Lghtft.] ; Ileb. iii. 5 sq. ; vi. 19; xi. 9; xiii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 14, 19; ii. 2,5, 11; iii. 7; iv. 10, 15 sq. 19 [RG]; 2 Pet. i. 19; 2 Jn. 5; Jas. ii. 12 ; Rev. i. 17; v. 6; xvi. 21 ; xvii. 12, etc.; Q)s ovK dSri'Kios sc. Tpsx'^v, as one who is not running etc. 1 Co. ix. 2G ; concisely, ws i^ eiKiKpweias and eV 6eov sc. XaXoOiTfr, borrowed from the neighboring XaXoO/xfj/, 2 Co. ii. 17; riva ws nva or « after verbs of esteeming, knowing, declaring, etc. [W. §§ 32, 4 b. ; 59, 6] : as, after \oyl^eiv, Xoyl^eaSm, Ro. viii. 36 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 (where ouras precedes) ; 2 Co. x. 2 ; fiye'iirdai, 2 Th. iii. 15 ; e^""' ^^'■- -^^^- ^ > ^^^- -*'> 46 [l)ut here L T Tr WII read ds (cf. ?x<». I- 1 Ql (rwas 0)! deoiis, Ev. Nicod. c. 5) ; dnoSfiKmvai, 1 Co. iv. 9 ; napa^aWetv [or ofioiovv (cj. v.)], Mk. iv. 31 ; Sia/SaXXftj/, pass. Lk. xvi. 1 ; eXeyxftv, pass. Jas. ii. 9 ; evpta-Kfiv, pass. Phil. ii. 7 (8). p. to a quality which is supposed, pretended, feigned, assumed: ms d/xapi-aXoj Kpi- vofiai, Ro. iii. 7 ; wy TTOviipov, Lk. vi. 22 ; add, 1 Co. iv. 7 ; vUi. 7 ; 2 Co. vi. 8-10 ; xi. 15 sq. ; xiii. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12 ; frequently it can be rendered as if, as though. Acts iii. 12; xxiii. 15, 20; xxvii. 30 ; iCo. v. 3; 2Co. x. 14;xi. 17; Col. ii. 20; Ileb. .xi. 27; xiii. 3; e'ntcrToXijj ws 8l i)pav, sc. yeypafjifievrji, 2 Th. ii. 2. 3. mj with the gen. absol. presents the matter spoken of — either as the belief of the writer, 2 Co. v. 20 ; 2 Pet. i. 3 ; or as some one's erroneous opinion : 1 Co. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12; cf. W. § 65, 9 ; [B. § 145, 7 ; esp. § 144, 22]. In gen- eral, by the use of mj the matter spoken of is presented — either as a mere matter of opinion : as in if e| epyatv sc. o ^\(jparjk v6p.ov diKaioavtrrjs ibim^ev, Ro. ix. 32 (where it marks the imaginary character of the help the Israelites rehed on, they thought to attain righteous- ness in that way [A. V. as it were bi/ works'^) ; — or as a purpose: Tropeiecrdai as eVl BaKaarcrav, tliat, as they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts xvii. 14, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; W. 617 (573 sq.), [butLTTrWH read eas, as far as to etc.] ; — or as merely the thought of the writer : Gal. iii. 16 ; before Sri, 2 Co. xi. 21 ; — -or as the thought and pretence of others : also before on, 2 Th. ii. 2 : cf. W. u. s. ; [B. § 149, 3 ; on is on in 2 Co. V. 19 (A. V. to wit) see W. and B. II. cc. (cf. Esth. iv. 14 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1,11,1 and Jliillcr's note ; L. and S. s. V. G. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 7)]; as av, as if, as thouqh, 2 Co. X. 9 [cf. W. 310 (291) ; but cf. Soph. Lex. s. v." 1, and see av, TV.']. 4. if has its own verb, with which it forms a complete sentence ; a. is with a finite verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be trans- lated as, just as, (Lat. sicut, eo modo quo) : Eph. vi. 20; Col. iii. 18 ; iv. 4 ; 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; 1 Jn. i. 7 ; Rev. ii. 28 (27) [this ex. is referred by some (cf. R. V. rarg.) to 2 a. above] ; vi. 13 ; ix. 3 ; xviii. 6 [here if Kal; the ex. seems to belong under 2 b. above], in phrases in which there is an appeal — either to the O. T. (ir yeypanrai), Mk. i. 2 [here T Tr WH Kodasl ; vii. 6 ; Lk. iii. 4 ; Acts xiii. 33 ; or in general to the testimony of others. Acts xvii. 28; xxii. 5; .xxv. 10; Ro. ix. 25; 1 Co. X. 7 R G (cf. airnep, b.). in phrases like ■noulv if npo(riTa^€v or frvvfra^fv, etc.: Mt. i. 24; xxvi. 19; xxviii. 15; Lk. xiv. 22 [here TTrtxt. WH 5]; Tit. i. 5; Ukewise, Mt. viii. 13; xv. 28; Rev. x. 7; sc. yei/rjO!]- T<»/;toi, Mt. xxvi. 39. in short parenthetic or inserted sentences : if eld>3ei, Mk. x. 1 ; ir ivopl^ero, Lk. iii. 23 ; if Xoyifofiai, 1 Pet. v. 12; is vTroXaiifidveTe, Acts ii. 15; if XiyovtTiv, Rev. ii. 24; is av rjyecrBe, [R. V. howsoever ye miyht be led'] utcunque agebamini [cf. B. § 139, 13; 383 sq. (329) ; W. §42, 3 a.], 1 Co. xii. 2. is serves to add an explanatory extension [and is rendered in A. v. how {that)] : Acts x. 38 ; rijv . . . vnaKOTjv, is etc. 2 Co, vii. 15 ; rov \6yov tov Kvplov, iff flir^v avra, Lk. xxii. 61 ; TOV pijpaTos. if 'iXeyev, Acts xi. IG. (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 14; an. 1, 9, 11); cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc. p. 141. b. is is used to present, in the form of a comparison, a motive wliich is urged upon one, — as a(^cs ripXv TO. d(j)€i\r]para f)pav, is Ka\ rjfieis dtpfjKafiev (R (r dfpiffifv) ktX. (for which Lk. xi. 4 gives Kai yap airo't ai^io/icc), Mt. vi. 12, — or which actuates one, as ^dpiv e^a TM dea ... is dStciXftTrroi» c;^6) rtjv Trept aov pifctav, 2 Tim. i. 3 (for the dear remembrance of Tiinothv moves Paul's gratitude to God) ; [cf. Jn. xix. 33 (cf. II. a. be- low)]; in these examples is has almost the force of a causal particle ; cf. Kiotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 76G ; [L. and S. s. V. B. IV.; W. 448 (417)]. c. is adds in a rather loose way something which serves to illustrate what precedes, and is equiv. to the case is as though [R. V. it is as zckeri] : Mk. xiii. 34, where cf. Fritzsche p. 587 ; unless one prefer, with Meyer et al., to make it an instance of anantapodoton [cf. A. V. ' For the Son of Man is as a man ' etc.] ; see aairip, a. fin. 5. ac- cordinrj as: Ro. xii. 3 ; 1 Co. iii. 5; Rev. xxii. 12. 6. if, like the Germ, ivie, after verbs of reading, nar- rating, testifying, and the like, introduces that which is read, narrated, etc. ; hence it is commonly said to be equivalent to on (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 765) ; but there is this difference between the two, that ore ex- presses the thing itself, if the mode or rjuality of the thing [hence usually rendered /(o«'], (cf. W. § 53, 9 ; [Meyer on Ro. i. 9 ; cf. L. and S. s. v. B. I.]) : thus after dvayi.va(TKfiv. ^Ik. xii. 26 (where T Tr WII n-if) ; Lk. ii. 4 [here Tr WII br. if ; L txt. reads Trif] ; fivrjaSri- vai, Lk. x.xiv. 6 [Lmrg. Sera]; Bfdcrdai, Lk. xxiii. 55 ; v-rrop.vrja-ai, Jude 5 [here on (not if) is the particle], 7 [al. regard is here as introducing a confirmatory illus- tration of what precedes (A.V. even as etc.) ; cf. Iluther, or Briickner's De Wette, ad loc] ; etScVm, Acts x. 38; Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Th. ii. 11 ; eirla-Tacrdai, Acts x. 28 [here many (cf. R. V. mrg.) connect is with the adj. immediately following (see S below)] ; xx. IS, 20 ; dTrayyeWetv, Lk. viii. 47 ; i^r)yeia6ai, Lk. x.xiv. 35 ; fidprus, Ro. i. 9 [here «i>9 682 ocnrep al. connect a: with the word wliich follows it (cf. 8 below)]; Phil. i. 8. 7. ws before numerals denotes nearly, about : as, is Sio-^iXioi. iMk. v. 13 ; add, Mk. viii. 9; Lk. ii. 3 7 (here LTTr Wll eojfj; viii. 42; Jn. i. 3!) (40); [iv. 6 LTTrWll]; vi. 19 (here Lchm. ioati); xi.l8; [.\ix. 39GLTTr\VIIJ; xxi. 8 ; Acts i. 15 [Tdf. ^0-«']; V. 7, [SGLTTrWH]; xiii. [18 (yet not WH t.\t.) ; cf. (tai, I. 2 f.], 20 ; xix. 34 [WH aaii] ; Rev. viii. I, (3, 1 S. xi. 1; xiv. 2, etc.) ; for exx. fr. Grk. writ, sec Passow s. v. vol. ii. \i. '.'031''; [L. and S. s. v. E; Snph. Lex. s. v. 3]. 8. ms is prefixed to adjectives and adverbs, and corresponds to the Lat. quam, hon; Germ, rcie, (so fr. Horn, down) : ur i>paloi., llo. .\. 15 ; add, llo. xi. 33 ; us ocri'cot, 1 Th. ii. 10, (i's. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 1) ; with a superlative, us much as can be : ois Td;(i(rra, as quickly as possible (very often in prof, auth.). Acts xvii. 15; cf. Viger. ed. Hermann, pp. 5G2, 850; Passow ii. 2 p. 2631'' bot. ; [L. and S. s. v. Ab. III.]. II. 0)9 as a particle of time; a. as, when, since ; Lat. ut, cum, [W. § 41 b. 3, 1 ; § 53, 8] : with the indie.. oW 8c enopdovTo, Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) ; Mk. ix. 21 [Tr nirg. €$ ov] ; Lk. i. 23, 41, 44 ; ii. 15, 39 ; iv. 25 ; v. 4 ; vii. 12; xi. 1 ; xv. 25; xix. 5, 29; xxii. 6G ; xxiii. 26 ; xxiv. 32 ; Jn. ii. 9, 23 ; iv. 1, 40, [45 Tdf.] ; vi. 12, 10 ; vii. 10; viii. 7; xi. 6, 20, 29, 32 sq. ; xviii. 6 ; [cf. xix. 53 (see I. 4 b. above)]; xx. 11 ; xxi. 9; Acts i. 10 ; v. 24 ; vii. 23 ; viii. 36 ; ix. 23 ; x. 7, 1 7, 25 ; xiii. [1 8 WH txt. (see L 7 above)], 25, 29 ; xiv. 5 ; xvi. 4, 10, 15 ; xvii. 13 ; xviii. 5 ; xix. 9, 21 ; xx. 14, 18 ; xxi. 1, 12, 27 ; xxii. II, 25; .XXV. 14; xxvii. 1, 27; xxviii. 4, (Horn. II. 1, 600 ; 2, 321 ; 3, 21 ; Hdt. 1, 65, 80 ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 4. 8. 20; often in tlie O. T. Apocr. esp. 1 JIacc. ; cf. Wahl, Clavisapocr. V. T., s. V. IV. e. p. 507 s(i.). b. tvhile, tcken, (ha.t. dum, ipxando") : Lk. xx. 37; as longas,tcJdle, Jn. [i.x. 4 Tr mrg. AVH mrg. (cf. &S, I. 2)] ; xii. 35, [36], LTTrWH [(cf. ? s, I- 4 c.]). b. it stands in close relation to what pre- cedes : Mt. V. 48 (LTTrWHir); vi. 2, 5 (LTTr WH wi), 7, 16 (L TTr WH iis) ; xx. 28 ; xxv. 32 ; Acts iii. 17; xi. 15; iCo. viii. 5; iTh. v. 3; Heb. iv. 10; vii. 27 ; ix. 25 ; Rev. x. 3 ; Sxjnep yiypaiTTaL, 1 Co. x. 7 L T Tr WH ; elpX wcrnep m, to be of one's sort or class (not quite identical in meaning with Zs or mo-ei Tiy, to be like one [cf. Bengel ad loc.]), Lk. xviii. 11 [but L Tr WH mrg. di\ ; ylvopai, Acts ii. 2 (the gen. is apparently not to be explained by the omission of ^x°^' ^^^ rather as gen. absol. : Just as when a mightij wind blows, i. e. just as a sound is made when a mighty wind blows [R.Y. as of the rushing of a mighty windy) ; eara aoi Sxrnep 6 fdviKoi ktK. let him be regarded by thee as belonging to the number of etc. Mt. xviii. 17.* Tdpiov)'\ ; Lk. xxii. 51 ; Jn. .xviii. 10 [R G L (cf. ardpiov)'], 26. (Sept. for ;i><, Deut. xv. 17 ; 1 S. Lx. 1.3 ; XX. 2, 13 ; 2 S. xxii. 45 ; Is. 1. 4 ; Am. iii. 12.) * «({.tXeia [WH -Xm (cf. I, t)], -as, f), (^a(j)e\i)s), fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down, usefulness, advantage, proft : Ro. iii. 1 ; T^s a4>e\elas xap'" (Polyb. 3, 82, 8 [yet in the sense of 'booty']), Jude 16. (Job xxu. 3; Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 10,)* ueXt'u, -a: fut. u(f>e\rj(ra>; 1 aor. &e\oi- pai, to be helped or profited : Heb. xiii. 9 : with ace. pijSiv, Mk. V. 26 ; ovSev, 1 Co. xiii. 3 ; with ace. of the interrog. tI, Mt. xvi. 26 ; Lk. Lx. 25 [here AVH mrg. gives the act.] ; Ti « Tivos (gen. of pers.), to be profited by one in some particular [cf. Mey. on Mt. as below ; «k, II. 5], Mt. XV. 5; Jlk. vii. 11.» (i, Kpi'vm, 7rpo(f)r]Tevu>, and others, in what would be confessed on all hands to be characteristic or technical New Testament senses. In general, however, the list is a restricted rather than an inclusive one. An appended mark of interrogation indicates uncertainty owing to diversity of text. In the lists of words peculiar to individual New Testament writers — a. When the use of a word by an author (or book) is unquestioned in any single passage such word is credited to him ivithout an interrogation-mark, even though its use be disputed by some edition of the text in every other passage of that author. h. When a word is found in one author (or book) according to all editions, but though occurring in others is questioned there by some form of the text in every instance, it is credited to the first, and the name of the others is appended in parenthosis with a question-mark. 689 c. Wlien a word is found in two authors (or books), but in one of them stands in a quotation from the Septuagiut, it is credited to the one using it at fii'st hand, aud its use by the other is noted with " Sept." or " fr. Sept." appended. d. A word which is found in but a single author (or book) is credited to the same with a question-mark, even though its use be disputed by one or another form of the text in every instance of its occurrence. e. A word which is fouud in two or more authors (or books) yet is disputed by one or another form of the text in every instance, is excluded from the lists altogether. The monumental misjudgmeuts committed by some who have made questions of authorship turn on vocabulary alone will deter students, it is to be hoped, from misusing the lists exhibiting the peculiarities of the several books. Explanations which apply only to jjarticular lists are given at the beginning of those lists. Proper names of persons, countries, rivers, places, have been omitted. In drawing up the lists free use has been made of the collections to be found in Winer's Grammar, the various Introductions and Encyclopaedias, the articles by Professor Potwin ia the Bibliotheca Sacra for 1875, 1876, 1880, such works as those of Holtzmann on the Sj-noptical Gospels and the Pastoral Epistles, and especially the copious catalogues given by Zeller in his Theologische Jahrbiicher for 1843, pp. 445-525. In conclusion, a public expression of my thanks is due to W. W. Fenn, A. B., a student in the Theological department of the University, for very efficient and painstaking assistance. J. H. T. C O N T E N T S. rACi; I. Later, i. e. post-Akistotelian, Greek Words in the New Testament .... (;;»1 II. Borrowed Words 692 1. Words borrowed from the Hebrew 692 2. Words borrowed from the Latin 693 3. Words borrowed from other Foreign Tongues 693 III. Biblical, i.e. New Testament, Greek 693 1. Biblical Words 693 2. Biblical Significations 696 IV. Words peculiar to Individual New Testament Writers 698 1. To Matthew 698 2. To Mark 699 3. To Luke (;9'.) 4. To all three Synoptists 7U3 5. To John 703 6. To Paul 704 «. To the Longer Epistles and Philemon 704 b. To the Pastoral Epistles 706 c. To both the Pastoral and the other Pauline Epistles 707 7. To the Epistle to the Hebrews 708 8. To James 708 9. To Peter 709 10. To Jude 709 11. To the Apocalypse 709 12. To the Apocalypse and the Fourth Gospel 710 V. Forms of Verbs 711 Additions and Corrections 725 APl^ENDIX. I. LATEE, le. POST-AEISTOTELIAN, GREEK WOEDS EST THE NEW TESTAIHENT. N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks. ^dya6onoi6s Plut. dyuorjfxa dSrjXoTTjs dBiaXcinTiDS dderrja-Ls Cicero aO\rju-Ls Polyb., Inscr. aKaipeofiat dKaToXvTOS dKaTd7rav(TTos aKpaala *dKpoaTT}piov Plut. dKvpoco d\d^a(TTpou (-TOU Hdt.) aK€KTopo(pQ}via Aesop AXe^avBpiuo^ (or -bplvos) d\f]Ss avanoXoyr^TOS 'dvarda-aopaL Plut. (Sept.?) dud)(^viTis *dv€7rai(rxvvTos Joseph. *dv6v7raT€va} Plut. dvOvnaros Inscr., Polyb. dwihtaTlO-qpi, Philo *dvTLKQihopi(jd Plut. ^airrXrjfj.a Plut. dvTO(pda\p€(a dvVTTOTaKTOS dnapd^aTos dnapTLO-pAs dnavyacrpa Philo *d7r€ipaaToe Joseph. *d7r€K^vofxaL Joseph. ? d7r(or d- )€Xni^Qi aTreptaTrdoTQJS *a7ro'6«ros Plut. dnoBrjaa vp i ^cd ajTOKapadoKLa dnoKptfia Polyb., Inscr. aTTorofita aTToXvrpcoais aTroaTaaia Archim., Sept. d7ro(PopTi^oiJ.ai Pliilo *a7i'd^p7^(jts Plut. dTrpoaiTo^ ''Apa^p■ Strab. dpOTptdd} ^apnaypos Plut. dpTep.(OV Vitruv. *ap;^ic/3ar£Kdff Joseph., Inscr. ^AaidpxTjs Strab., Inscr. daadpLov Anth., Dion. Hal., Inscr. aaTo;^e(t) d(f>6ap(rla Philo *aylrtv6os Aret. (-Btou Xen. on). *^a7mcrp.6s Joseph. *^aTTTi(TTr)£ Joseph. ^lacrrqs Philo (/^mray Pind.) 'ydyypmva Plut. ya(a Theophr., Inscr. yowneTeay ypaui^Tjs Strab. *yvfj.in]T€va> Plut. Seta-idaipiouia Polyb., Inscr. ''b€(Tpo(f)v\a^ Joseph. ^Srjfdpiou Plut. diayvcopi^KO Philo didraypa Sap., Inscr. dia biSoKTiKos Philo dieppijuevo SieTta Philo, Inscr. BtOdXaao'os Siyj/'vxos Philo bvaevTtpiov{-T€pia Hippocr.) hvaeppTiviVTOi €yKaK€(o or eKKaKeo) eyKOTTT] or eKKonr] iSudpx^s Philo iKba7Tavd Sir. €Kin}(fi(o Anthol. €K7ra\at, Philo €K7r\r}p(t)(ns €KT€V€ia *i\a(j}pLa Aret. €XeT]popcva> Plut. €7nTay7) €7Ttxopriye<£i €T€p6y\o}(r(TOS €V0v8pOp,€(O evKaipeo) eVKOTTOS *evifov\l(w Joseph. *ev7roua Joseijh., Inscr. *€V7rp6(T8fKTOS Plut. *€vyjruxf(^ Joseph., Anthol., Inscr. T}pi$ain}s Anthol. 7)ptOiptOV TJpfpO^ *'}r{pcji3Biavoi Joseph. BcLorqs Pliilo *6e67rv€V(TTos Plut., Orac. Sibyl. *6€6Tr}s Plut. 6r)piopaxe(0 OprjaKfia {-kItj Hdt.) Bpiap^€V(ii 6 vivos 6vpopax€(o Upovpy€Q3 Philo, Inscr. IpaTKTpos **IouSaTKds Joseph. * *lov8a'iK0}s Joseph. la-oTipos Philo *^Ka6€^TJ9 Plut., Inscr. Ka6T]p€piv6i KaKOvxito KOTa^apea KaraQapvud) KaTayciiifi^oftOi KaraKptpa KaravTaoi ^KardpTia-ts Plut. KQTdffTTJpa Latek Greek. G92 Borrowed Words. Karavyiiia ? Apoll. Rhod., Anthol. *KaTfv\oy(U) ? Plut. KaTonT pliojiai Philo KfVoSo^os KfVTVpioiV Kf/JftaTKTTIJt KoKoiVia {-via, etc.) Inscr. 'Kopliav {-jiaviii) .Josej)!!. KpafioTTos or Kpd/3/3aTor KTriToip Diod., Inscr., Anth. KTicrp-a K(i>p67ro\tS 'fia07}T€va> Plut. liaOriTpia 'paKfWov Plut. fiapyapiTTjs *" paTaLoXoyia Plut. pe6eppTjif(v(o *pe(rovp(wr]pa Plut. fj.fTa^up(p6o} fx^TpioTiaBiia Philo 'piaapui Plut. pLiXiuv liopcj)6a> Anth. p6p(poi(rts vdpbos -Vnth. 'i/eKpoa Plut., Anth., Inscr. 'veKpcutris Aret. vearepiKos vrjtrlov *|e'oTi)j? Joseph., Anthol. ^vpdo) (lupf'm Ildt.) oiVtVem ? Strab., Inscr. 'oiKianos Plut. "oiKo&faTTOTea Plut. oiKTippav Theocr., Sept., .ViiUiol. ovupiov TTaXtyycvftria Philo jra>'6o;^fioj'? (-kc'iop Arstph.) 7rav8ox(is'i (-K(it Plato) TTaparrjprjais Epigr. napu^dputTta TrapetVaKroff napfiafpxopai napcKTos TrarpoirapadoTos Diod., Inscr. nepLXapno) nfpw)(fi 7r€pLiTeip(o Trepncpfvupai M. Antonin. TroXXun-Xao-iof *7To\vp€pais Joseph. TToKvTpOTTWS Pbilo jTopiapas noTUTTos (TTudaiTos Aeschyl.) *npmTwpiov -Joseph., Inscr. npavTTadeia {-6ia) 'I Philo 'npoyvuicns Plut., Anthol. TTpoeXTri^o) 7rpoivayye\i^npai Philo *7vpoKaTuyyiWia .Joseph. npOKOTTtJ *7rpoualTt)S Plut. TTpaaavi^oi i TrpoCKaipos TTpoa-KXrjpoui Philo Trp6(TKXl(TlS 1 TTpoaKOTTtJ '^npoapfjyi'vpi Joseph. 77putTdTals 7rpo(pj^TLKus Philo padiovpyr^pa pr]Ta>9 poi^T)bov pop (TvtrTaTiKus (-KoiTtpop Arls- tot.) *(TvaTa/xariKa)j I^lut. abXppnvKTpos Philo, Acsop 'Ta7r(ipo(j>puy Plut. (f>t\a8(\(pta (Alex. ?) Philo (jiiXrjSopos Anth. (f>pvd(Tara> Callim., Sept.] Anth. )((^piop Polyb., Inscr. Xopratrpji Phylarch., Sept. ^wx<^ oiriop .Sept., Anth. Total 318 (75*, 16 ?) II. BORROWED WORDS. 1. Words borrowed from the Hebrew. - N. B. Hebraisms in signifi- cation and construction (wiietlier 'proper ' or ' improper ') are excluded; so, too, are words of Semitic origin wlucli had pre- viously found their way into Greek U8.ige. 'A/3a88a6d flfuViol/ ^Xi or ^Xt or ^Xfi (cf. e'Xwi) 'louSai^o) Sept. 'louSalicdj Apocr. and -k£>s 'lovBa'icrpds Apocr. Kavapmos ? KapaPLTTjs'^ KaTTjyap '! Koppdp or Kopfiapas Kupos Sept. Kovpi or Kovp or Kovp \apd or \appd or Xf/jd OF Xjjpd, etc. papo3pas pdppa Sept. Borrowed Words. 693 Biblical Words. fiapav add (fiapavadd) Meaaias Mo\6}( Sept. (fimpe ?) Trda^a Sept. 7rpoua'/3/3oToi' ? Sept. Apocr. pajijil. -/3fi palSjSovly -[Sovvl^ -vel paKa or paKa or pa)(^d aa(3a^davi, -vel a-a^aad Sept. (ralSfSaTtcrpos (TafSfiaTov Sept. (Tarav or (raravas Sept. caTov Sejjt. tTLKepa Sept. v7rot Sept. ^apKToios Xfpovfiip, -fidv, Sept. aaavi^d \ Total 57. i I 2. Words borrowed from the Latin, N. B. Proper names are ex- cluded, together with Latiliisms wbicli Lad already been adopted by profane authors. drjvdpiov SiSap.1 ipyaalav i. q. operam do exa i. q. aestirno KoSpdvrrjS KoXwvia etc. KovaToidla Xapjidva (q. v. I. 3 e,) i. q. capto TO iKavbv Xa/x/Sdfcti' i. q. satis accipere (rvpl3ov\tov XapjSdveiv i. q. consilium capere Xf-yeciw (through Aram. ?) XePTtov XllSeprlvos paKfWov pfplSpdva fid^tos ^e'oTj/f TTpaLTWpiOV piSa or -Stj ? (cf. 3 below.) (TiKapios tniUKivSwv (TovSdpiov (cf. m. 1) aneKovXaTtop Ta^fpvat (ai) titXos (paivdXrjs paenula (cf. ^ai- Xovqi in III. 1) <^6pov (ppayeWiov (ppaycWoio Xaipos (?) Total 30. 3, Words borrowed from other Foreign Tongues. fiatov (Egyptian) p4Sa or -6r/ (Gallic ? cf. 2) m. BIBLICAL, i. e. NEW TESTAMENT, GEEEK. N. B. For explanations see tlie Prefatory Remarks. 1, Biblical Words. 'A/3aSSwv Sept. *A/3/3a o(3vcrcros, rj, Sept. (as adj. Aeschyl. et sqq.) dya0oepy€(t3 (-^oupye'o) ?) dyaOoTTouio Sept. dyaSoTTOua *dyaSo7Toi6s Plut. dyaOuxTVvq Sept. dynWUidLS Sept. ayaXXiao) Sept. dydnr) Sept. dy€V€aK6yT)ros dytafci) Sept., Anthol. ayiac/ios" Sept. aytdrr;? Apocr. liyioifjvvTj Sept. ayua(j)os dyvicTfios Sept., Inscr. dyuoTTjs Inscr. dSeX{/)orT7f Apocr. d8ia(fiBof>ia ? dS^rio} Sept., Polyb., Inscr. aifj,aT€K)(vata a'ti'€(TLs Sept. aixf^ciK(D(Tia Sept., Polyb. al)(fia\cL>Tevo) Sept. ai\/iaXa)rifcij Sept., Inscr. dKaOiipT-qs'^ uKaTdyvaxTTos Epigr., Inscr., Apocr. dKaraKdXvTTTos Sept., Polyb. OKaTaKpLTOS dKaTdnacrTos ? dKaTaaraa-in Sept., Polyb. dKardax^Tos Sept. *AK6X6a/xa *dKpoaTT}pLou Plut. aKpo^varla Sept. aKpoymVLoios Sept. dXa ? d\aXr}Tos Anthol. d\i€vtio Sept. a\i(ryT]na oXX?;Xouia Sept. dWoy€VT)s Sept. dXXorpt(o)e7rtO'K07roff dXdr] Sei>t. ? [Apocr. dudpavTo? Orac. Sib., Inscr., dpidva-TQs Sept., Anthol. dfXTjv Sept. dp.(pid(o> Sept., Anthol. *dvay€pvda> Joseph. dva^dui Inscr. di/a^wvtfvfXL Sept. dva6ep.aTL^a> Sept., Inscr. dvaKaivoay di^aKaivaiCTLS di/aTTftpos? Apocr. (-nrjpos, Plato sqq.) dvaaTaToo) Sept. ? "duuTda-croixat Plut. (Sept. ?) dv€Kdu)yT]Tos dv€K\d\r}TOS di^eXeos'^ di^f/xi^o) dWrSf/cros due^iKaKos dv€^i\vLaaTos Sept. *dv€7TaL(r)(vvT0i Joseph, dr^frdfo) Sept.? dvevBcTos di^Bpo)7rdpe(TKOs Sept. *di^6v7raTCV(i> Plut. dviXcoys ? difTOTTodopa Sept. dvTa7roKpLUop.aL Sept., Aesop ^di'TtXotSo/jc'oj Plut. dvTiXvTpov Sept., Orph. duTtp.€Tp€U} ? duTtp.i(rOia dtfTt7rap€pxofiai Anthol. Apocr. avTtxptCTTOi *avTXr}p.a PKit. duvTroKptTOS Apocr» aTraa-TTd^Ofiai ? *d7r€Lpa(TTos Joseph. dneKdexofJ-ai *d7r€K8vofxai Joseph. ? aTreKdva-ts dTTfXfypLos d7reX7riXUt]S ap^^iTpUXivQS aaaiv(a'i (f|. V.) (VmXof Anthol. dcrTarfo) Anthol. darrj^LKTOS Anthol. diTcf)a\iCa> Sept., Polyb. aidfVT€(ti avroKaraKpiTOS d(f)eSpuiv d(j}€\QT7}S dfpdopia ? dcpikdyaOos d(j)i}\.dpyviOS d Sept., Anthol. d(j)v(TT(p(oi Sept., Polyb. d^flpOTTOLTjTOS dxpeioa .Sept., Polyb. 'a\lnvdoi Aret. (-^lov from Xen. on) BadX Sept. fiaBpos Sept. ^atov .Sept. ? Apocr. fidrrrto-pa 'ffaiTTia-pos Joseph. 'jiaTTTia-Tiji Joseph. Blip /Sao-iXifTKor ? .Sept., Polyb., Aesop, Inscr. /3aTot Apocr. /SaTToXoye'tu /SSeXuy/ia Sept. ^SeXuKTo? Sept. 0flBr]\6a> .Sept. h(e\Ceiioi\ (-/Sou/S) BfX/ap (-Xi'aX) (irjpvWos Apocr., Anthol. /Si'wo-is Apocr. ^XlJTc'oS Boavf (or-Tj-) pyes (SoXifia /SoXt'y Sept., Anthol. ^paSifTrXoett) livp(Tfvs Inscr. 'ydyypaiva Plut. •yafo^uXdiftov Sept. yapi^a yifvva (Sept. Josh, xviii. 16) yfwpyiov Sept. ■yvcoo-Tijs Sept. yoyyv^tti Sept. yoyyva-pos Sept. yoyyvtTTi'is ro\yo6d *yvpvr)Te{m Plut. yvpvoTir)^ 8aipovLo>8rjs dfiypari^ai SciXiuco Sept. 8fv\a^ .Joseph. fifurepoTrpcoTos ? *br)vdpLov Plut. biayoyyv^a Sept. h^aypr^yopeio ^LaKciOapi^Qi 8uiKaT6\€y)(opat 8ui\ip7Tdva> Apocr. Siavevm .Sept., Polyb. hiairapaTpijir] ? hiafTKopnl^w Sept., Polyb. Siaanopd Apocr. Slarayri Sept., Inscr. Si^paj^pov Sept. Stdcopi ^pyaaiav ^uv6vptopai. ? buppr^viia'i ^LeppTJVfVTTJ^f SiKaioKpicria .Sept.? otXuyos StoSfva .Sept., Polyb., Inscr., Anthol. Scapvplas ? dtWKTTJS Soypari^a Sept., Anthol. doKiprj SoKtptov (-peMv, Pl.ato) SoXtdo) Sept. 86tj]s .Sept. dvfapuco .Sept. SvvaTcoi 8vai^d(TTaKTos .Sept. StaScKacpv^ov Orac. Sib. btt)po(^opla^i effSoprjKOVTdKis Sept. €^8oprjKovTan€VT€ Sept. 'E/3patKos 'E^palos Sept. 'E/3p(u9 Apocr. 'E^paia-Ti Apocr. fyKaivia Se|)t. fyKawl^ui .Sept. f'yKavxdopm V Sept., Aesop iyKop^t'topai (upaiojpa (de\o(lptj(TKfta fiStoXfiov .Vpocr. elSio'hodvTos .Vpocr. fiSmXoXar/jfi'a (idwXoXuTprji (iprjvoTriniai Sept. eKyapi(oi ? iKyapitTKU) ? fKSiK(o> ."^ept., Inscr. (K8lKr)(Tis .^ejit., Polyb., In- scr. eK^rjreo) Sept. cKdapjiiai Sept. ? Apocr., Orph. iKpvKTT)p[^a> Sept. (KTrcipd^oi Sept. fK7rcpl(T(TWS V (KTTapvevai .Sept. expifdo) Sept., Orac. Sib., Jiiscr. cKTpopos ? tXatoji/ Sept. *eXa(ppia Aret. cXa;^tCTrdr€pof €\fyp6s1 Sept. tXey^is Sept. fXeos, TO, Sept., Polyb. eXXoyddi (-ytw) tXut .St'pt. (cf. fjXi) *€ppaLi'opat .Joseph. KppavuvTjX ."^ept. eppicco V ip-ninypovrj ? fpniuypos Sept. CpTTaiKTTJS 'Sept. ('p7repimiT(u> Se[)t. ffayKoXl^opai .Sept., Anthol. ivavrtl .Sept. €v8i8v(TK(ii Sept. '(vdnpriiTis .Joseph. cV(5o^(ifm .Sept. ?i'8vpn .Sept. ev^vvapdoi .Sept. iVihpnv'i .Se])t. eVfuXoye'o)? Sept. €lfViVT)KOVTafVV€a 'f'l'npKifm? .Joseph., Inscr. '^vraXpa Sept. (VTafjiidCa Sept., Anthol. fvraiptaijpos fvTpopoi Sept., Anthol. €VuiTt^opai .Sept. e$ayopd(a) .Sejit., Polyb. c'^aKoXuvdiu) .Sept., Polyb. f^drriva .Sej)t. i^anopiai Sejjt., Polyb. '(^upri^u) Joseph., Inscr. i^anTpdnrai Sept. (^ipapa i^rj^foi Sept., Polyb. i^oXo6p(Vu> .Sept. e^apoXnyea Se])t. ^e^npKKTTTJS JoSCpll. €^nvd€veu> (-1^601) Sept. (^ov6fVi(a {-vdtti) Sept. c^vnvi^di .Sept. i^vTTvn^ .Joseph. i^iOT€po<; Sept. ^iiraymin^opai Plut., InsCr. *fTra6poi(o> I'lut. fnavaTravw .Sept. fTTapj^fios Inscr. enavpiov .Se])t. "iiTevbviti Joseph. {^hvv(A Utit.) (TTLyapl^pfvo) Sept. eTTLyvoifTis iSejit., Pqjyb. CTTidiaTda-aopat inihiopBom Inscr. (mKardpaTos .Sept., Inscr. 'EiTiKovpeios Anthol. 67riXft;^Q) V (mXTjo-povfj Apocr. eirtova-ios eiriTroOTjTQs ennroSia (TTiTTopevopai. Sept., Polyb. €TnppdiTTu> imaKonr] Sept. emcrvvdya .Sept., Polyb., Aesop iTnavvayiayi) .Vpocr. eT:L(TVVTpi-)( Inscr. imxopTjyla fpi]pacTis Sept. €pi 77 ea> €vpaKvX(ov 1 o €Vpo{^OV 'V-)k\v8//'uxc Sept., Inscr. tKavoQ) Sept. IXapoTTj^ Sept. ^Xatr/xo? Sept. lXatTTr}pios Sept. ^louSai^o) Sept. **Iou6aiKoj Apocr. *'louSat<6iff Joseph. ^lovbniapos Apocr. iadyytXos KaBapi^o) Sept, (Hippocr.?) KaQapicrpoi Sept. *KaB€^T)^ Plut., Inscr. jcaXoSiSacr/caXos KakoTvoie Sept. ? KautXos? Kavai^ato? ? «apSioyfojOTT^? ifarnyyeAeu? KaradepiaTi^a» ? KaraKau;^ao^at bept. KaTaKXrjpoboTeai^ Sept.? KaTaK\r)popop.eo}'^ Sept. KaraKnXovdeKO Sept., Polyb. KaTaKpiai^ KaTokaXin JcardXaXos KaTd\€ifj.fj.a^ Sept. KaraXiOd^di KardXvpa Sept., Polyb. Karaudde^ ? KaravaOep-ari^ai ? Karavrdui Sejjt., Polyb. Kardw^t^ Sept. KaTavv(TicrT7)pi Karr^yuip ? KOTtoQ) Ajtocr. KaroiKTjTTjpiov Sept. KaToiKia Sept., Polyb. Kava6v Sept. Kav-)(r)Tr]s KOKKtuos Sept. KoXacftL^o} KoXauia etc. *Kop(3du or Kop^avas Joseph. Kopos Sept, KoapoKpdrcop Orph., Inscr. Kovpi etc. KOV(JT(obia KpaTaiocD Sept, *c/)uo"raXXifiD KvXia-fia'f or KuXttr/xd?? KvpLGKos Inscr. KVpLOTTJS \apd etc. Xa^cvTOS Sept. \aTope(o Sept. XeyiQju etc. (cf. list IL 2) XeiTovpyiKOS Sept. XeVTLOV XifSepT'iiros Inscr. Xt^o/:ioXe'w Sept. Xoyta (17) \oyopa)(€(o \oyop.a)(ia XvTpioTT^s Sept. (Philo) Xv;(i/ia Sept., Inscr. ' paOijTCvoi Phlt. '/xd/ceXXoi/ l^Iut. paKpoSeu Sept., Polyb. paKpoBvp.fs papwi'ds pdvva Sept. papdv dOd (p,apavadd^ 'pciTaioXoyia Plut. paTatoTTjs Sept., Inscr. HaraLoo) Sej)t. peyaKctoTT)^ Sept., Inscr. p€ya\u)(Tvirr} Sept. peyKTrdv Sept. peBodcia ;xeXtVo-tos? (-atoy, Nicand.) pepf^pdua p€pip€ ?) ^P€Kp6(o Pint., Anthol., In- scr. *V€Kp(i>(rLs Aret. veocpvTos Sept. (lit. ; so Ar- stph. in Pollux 1, 231) VLKoi Sept., Anthol.. Orph. VlTTTTJp vopoStSaaKoXos I'oo'trtaV Sej)t.(i/cocrcrtd Ildt., al.) uvpipdiv Apocr. vvx0r]p€pou Orac. Sibyl. ^ei'o5o;^€a)(iraec.Ven. (-kco), II.lt.) *^€(ttt;?? Joseph,, Anthol. ^oiKiaKos Plut. *oiKo6e(r7roT€a) Plut. oiKodopr) Sept. (Aristot.?) oiKovpyos ? oKTarjpfpos (Grace. Ven.) 6Xiyo7ri(TTta i oXiyoTTicrTO^ oXiyorjrvxos Sept. oXiyws Anthol. 6Xo6p€VT7]S dXoCor -€-)6p€va Sept., An- thol. oXoKQVTcopa Sept. oXoKXjjpia bept. opeipopat ? Sept. ? opoid^oi ? ovftdiapos Sept. OVLKOi onrdva) Sept. orrraala Sept., Anthol. vpBoTrodcKo 6pdoTop€(t} Sept. dpdpi^o) Sept. opOpiuos ? Sept., Anthol. 6pK(opoa-ia Sept. opoOeaia ova oval Sept. 6(p€lXTJ 6(l>6aXpo8ovXcia OX^OTTOUO) o\j/dpiov Traytdivo) Sept. TraiSioBev « napTrXTjdei naj/ToKpdrojp Sept., Anthol,, Inscr. Trapa^id^opai Sept., Polyb. Trapa^oXeCopai ? napa^ovXi vopai ? TTapadiaTpi^r} ? TTapaSeiypaTt^o) Sept., Polyb. 7Tapa^i]\6cij Sejjt. TrapaXvTiKos TrapaTTtKpaivo) Sept. TrapinriKpaapos Sept. 7rapd7rT(Dp,a Sept., Polyb. 7rapa(f)povia napcTTL^Tjpos Sept., Polyb. TrapoLKia Sept. Trapopoid^Qi ? TTapopytapos Sept, 7rdiT;^a Sept. 7TaTpidpxT}S Sept. 7T€l06s 7r€ipa(Tp.6s Sept. 7T€l(TpOI/r} TTfXfKifaj Sept., Polyb. TrevTfKaid^KaTOi Sept. TTfTTdWrjais Sept. TrepiaaTpaTTTa} A]iOCr. 7rfpiO((Tis nepiKadappa Sept. 7T€piKfvpoTvo>\is TroTafio(f)opr]TOS *npaiTuiptov Joseph., Inscr. TTpfo-fivTfpiov Inscr. TrpoaiTidopai npoapaprdvci) TrpOfHXcVciJ Se])t. Vpoyi/oxTi? l*lut., Anthol. 7rpo€V(ipxopaL 7rpo(7rayy€W(o "n-poAcaTayytXXft) Joseph. irpQKpipa TTpOKVpOCO TTpOfiapTvpopxil TTpopfpifivaoi Trpoopt^ta Trpoo-u^/^aTov ? Sept.?, Apo- crypha TTpocrairrjs Plut. (irpoa-axcio ?) TrpoaSanavdu) Inscr. npoafdto TTpoo-f-yyifo)? Sept., Polyb., Anthol. TTpoaevx^ Sept., Inscr. TTpocTjXvTus Sept. 7rpo(TKupT€ prjcrts irpdaKOfipa Sept. 7rpo(TKvvrjTqs Inscr. TTpoo-oxBiCoa Sept., Orac. Sibyl. 7rpo(nratTroXT){p)7mj9 7rpo(T(07ro\T}{p.)-^ia 7rpo()ir)T€ta Sept., Inscr. TTpco'ivos Sept. TrpcoTo/ca^fSpm 7rp Sept., Polyb. apapdy^ituos apvpt/i^oi aovBdpiov {(rci>8dpt.ov Her- mippus) cnreKovkdrcdp airXayxviCopai. Sept. ? 0TJ7K&) Sept. (TTpaToirkhnpxos ? avyKoivoivos (Tufr/rr^r 17? cufo) OTTO tea) (TVKopopea (TvXaycoyeco [Inscr. (TuXXaXeo) Sept., Polyb., i (rvppop(f>o(o ? vK€Tr]s Sept. (TVI'€kK€KTOS awdpl'TTTOi *(TVV0^€V03 Plut. (TVl'OpOp€0> (Tvoo-jjpov (Menander in Phryn.), Sept. (Tvcrcraipoi '(Tva-Ta(Tia(TTi)s Joseph. (TVdTavpooi (T(f}vdp6v ? '(TwpaTtKOJS Plut. TQiiipvaL (at) ToKiBa Tan^ivcKfypcop'^ Sept. *Tancii'0(j)porTvvrj Joseph. rapTapoo) TCKVLov Anthol. T€Kvoyov€(ti Anthol. TcXflOJTJJff TcauapaKovrahvoi TiO-aapaKOvTariacrapei i *rtTpapx^<*i Joseph. TiVXo? Inscr. To-nd^iov Sept. TpoTTo<^opi(i> . Sept. Tpo(l)o(pupe(t>. Sept. : Tpvpaiid Sept. (Sotad.) TVTTlKQiS- *TVs i v7rfp€KT€LP(») Anthol. f V7T€p€KXVP0> Sept. i VT7(p€vrvyxdv(£i V7r€puiKd V7r€ pTrepKTaats v7T€pvyj/ooi Sept. VTToXr^viov Sept. V7ro7Tid^U>. liTTOTrXe'w Anthol. *v7ro{TTo\T] Joseph. vTroo-rpo>vwpt Sept. vaacoTTos Sept. vareprjpa Sept. VT€Vtt) paycWo(a (f>p€i/a7raTd (PpfpaTraTTjs pos i^fvSaSfXt^off i^euSdTrotrToXof i^cvBobibda KdXog •sl^€v8u7rpo(l)TiTr)s Sept. yl/tBvpi(Tp6s Sept. yj/LX^op yp-wpiov Sept. waaupd Total 767, (7G* 89 ?) 2. Biblical Significations. N. B. '* Sept." or " Apocr." is added to a word in case it occur in the same sense in the Septua- gint version or (if not there) in the Apocryphal books of the O.T. Moreover, characteristic N. T. etgnifications which also occur in Philo and Josejiliushut in no other secular author.s have been included in the list, with the proper designations appended. See the Prefatory Kemarks, p. 17 dlSvaaos (Sept.) dydnrj ~ tiyy^Xos 2 (Sept., Philo) afifX^i? 2 dSeX^os- 2 (Sept., Philo), 4> ^ 5 (Sept.) aduiKpLTOS 2 a^porqi dSmareo) b. (Sept.) mpccris 5 aipfTtKos 2 Biblical Significations. 697 Biblical Signification's. ala>v 2 (Apocr.), 3 akrjdeLa I. 1 C. ahrjOevoi b. afiapria 3, 4 afirjTCiJp 5 (Philo) dvddefia 2 a., b. (duao-ravpoo)^ dua II. aTTOivaXuTrraj 2 c. (Sept.) dnoKaXyylns 2 a. dnoKpivo) 2 (Sept.) dTToWvfXL 1 a. /3. aTroXuTpcoffif 2 aTTOfTTaa-fOi/ 1 (Sept.), 2 aTrooToX;; 4 aTTOOToXof 2, 3 aTroo-To/iaTt^o) aTrOTUfTCTO) 1 QTrtoXcta 2 b. «peo-Kem (Philo) dpx^ 5 do-ui^fros fin. (Apoe.) avyd^co 2 (Sept.) at^rds IL 2 (Sept.) d(j)v7rv6(ti b. d(t)v(TTep€(o 2 (Sept.) ^anTi^io II. ^a7TTi(rp.6s (Joseph.) j3a crtXe tu 3 ^XcTTco 2 c. mid. yap€(o 2 ■yei'eo'ts 3 yewao) 2 b. (Philo), c, d. ■yXcjfraa 2 init. ypdpfia 2 c. (Philo, Joseph.) ypap-fiarevs 2 (Sept.) ^aipwv 2 (Joseph.) 5ea> 2 c. 6 Std/SoXof Sept. Sta^;5K7 2 (i. q. n^^3) SiaKoula 3, 4 StaKoi/o? 2 SiaKplvop.at 3 fitarotyo) 2 StaTToi'oO^ai c. (Apocr.) dtaTidefiai dtadr)Kr}v etc. ^ (Sept.) di^iOfLt IV. 5 SiKmoaivr) 1 c. SiKatoM 2, 3, (Sept.) diKaloitTLs diXoyos 2 dtoiKo) 3 8o|a III. (Sept.) So^afo) 4 (Sept.) dvvafits b. fiai^a 3 (Sept.) Sapea h. (Sept.) iyyvs 1 b. eydpia '2, 4 eyep<7if fin. idviKos 3 c'^i/oy 4 (Sept.), 5 « I. (Sept.), III. 9 (Sept.) «Su II. 3 (Sept.) eiSfflXov 2 (Sept.) f(/ii II. 5 (Sept.) emov 5 (Sept.) flpfivrj 3 (Sept.), 4,5,6 (Sept.) fK I. 7 (Sept.) fK^acns 2 (Ajiocr.) €kSo;(I7 4 iKKXrjtria 2 (Sept.), 4 (KKiyopai. (Sept.) eVXexToj (Sept.) eVXoyjj ^KaraaLs 3 (Sept.) cAfoff 2, 3 'EXXT^vt's 2 (fifiaTci/co 2 (Apocr., Philo) ifi^pip.aop.ai fin. eV I. 6 b., 8 b. (Sept.), 8 c. ivavTiov 2 fin. (Sept.) eVfpye'o) 3 e^avaUTaULS fin. f^oSof fin. (Pliilo) e^np.oKoyia> 2 (Sept.) c^ovtrla 4 c. /3/3., d. cTrepcorao) 2 (Sept.) ^7repo3Tt]pa 3 ^niyajx^pevu) 2 (Sept.) (TriKokea} 2 (Sept.) iirHTKilTTnpal, b. (Sept.) emcTKOTTti b. (.Sept.),e. (Sept.) eniaKOTTos fin. eTTiarpocpt] Apocr. iTTtTipia Ajiocr. (pfiyupai 3 (Sept.) fuay-yeXi^o) III. evayylXiov 2 a., b. eiSnK€ 2 (Sept.) (vXnye'ai 2, 3, 4, (Sept.) ei'Xoyia 3 Sept., 4, 5 (Sept.) fvcnT\ay)(iios (Apocr.) ?^(t> I. 1 f. fao) I. 2 (aii'l 2 a., b. (woyoveco 3 (Sept.) ^(aoTTOie'tk) 2 ij/i/pa 1 b., 3 (Sept.) ^(riJ;(df(o c. (Sept.) ddvaros 2 (Sept., Philo) df'Xa 4 (Sept.) 5fdf 4 (Sept.) dfapeco 2 c. sub fin. dpmp^eva 2 5po£m fin. (Sept.) dvyiirrjp h. (Sept.) dvpiarripiov 2 (Pliilo, Jo- seph.) tStor 1 d. (Apocr.) Upfvs b. i\aap6s 2 (Sept.) iXuCTTTJpioK, TO, I (Sept.), 2 i(Txya> 2 a. (Sept.) Kadapi^a 1 b. (Apocr.), 2 (Sept.) KaddSco 2 b. (Sept.) KaKia 3 (Sept.) KaKo'to 2 (Sept.) /caKoXoyeoi 2 (Sept.) /caXe'co 1 b. /3. Kappvoi (Sept.) Kup-TTTo) b. (Sept.) KOfWl' 1 KapTTOs 2 c. (Sept.) Kdrnwrj^dco) 2 fin. (Sept.) KaTanavais 2 (Sept.) KOTatTToXij 2 (Sept.) KOTaTO/X^ Ke'pas b. (Sept.) Ke(f>a\at6o3 2 Krjpvypa (Sept.) KTjpv^ 1 fin. KTjpvaaco b. K\j]povnp€iji 2 nn. Kkrjpovupia 2 a., b. KKripovupoi 1 b., 2 (Sept.) /cXi;pdw 4 (Apocr.) kXt^O"!? 2 /cXf;ro'ff a., b. KoCKia 5 (Sept.) /coifdf 2 (Apoor.) Kotvnoi 2 (Apocr.) /cu(l^a)l/ia 3 Kowr; 2 (Sept.) KOTTKio) 2 (Sept.) KoapiKO^ 2, 3 KoVpos 5 (Apocr.), 6, 7, 8 (Sept.) Kpli/a> 5 a. ff., 6 (Sept.) (cpi(rir3b..4(Sept.), 5(Sept.) KpLTlJpiOV 3 KpiTTji 2 (Sept.) KTiVts 2 (Apocr.), 3 KTta-pa KO}\oP Xapfiavai I. 3 e. (cf. list II. 2) \dcrK(i> 2 XfiTovpyeco 2 c. ( Apocr.) \€t.TOV[ryla 3 b. XijBai/oiTos 2 XtKpda 3 (Sept.) Xd-yo? III. XiiTpaxTis fin. (Sept.) pa6qT(voi 2 paKpoBvpeco 2 (Sept.) pa(i\rjpa h. oclteiXu) c. 6(f>6dKp6s in phrases (Sept.) 6xvpa>pa 2 (Sept.) 17 di//i'a dl^wi/tol/ 2 mn^eia 2 b. (Sept.), C. (Sept.) n-aiSedoj 2 b. (Sept.), c. (Sept.) Trait 2 fin. (Sept. ; i. q. "^?]^) 7rapdK\r]Tos 3 (Philo) TrapafSoXrj 3, 4, (Sept.) TTapdSfttrot 3, 4 TTupaKOIj 2 7rnpa(TKevr] 3 (Joseph.) napdet/os 2 TrdpotKoff 2 (Sept.) napptjcrla 3 (Philo) TTarda-aco2 (Sejit.), 3 (Sept.) TTfipdfM 2 d. (Sept.) TTClpairpos b., C, (Sept.) TrefTr/KooTJ] (Aj)OCr.) TTfptTrarg'ti) b. ^fpmoLTjfTis 2, 3 TTfptfTO'eLa 4 n€pia) 1 b. irioTts 1 b. •jTvevpa 3 c, d., 4 TTrfu/xariKOf 3 TTOpem Biblical Significations. 698 Individual Writebs. iroptva b. (Sept.) ■nopveia b. (Sept.) iropveio) 3 (Sept.) jTopvr) 2 7roTr]inov b. TTPfCTiivTepos 2 a., b., c. •npot'iyto 'i b. 7Tpoaaif(x b. irpotTTWrjpi 2 sub fill. (Sept.) Tr/jotrwTToi» 1 b., C, 2, (Sept.) npo(j)riTci (Sept.) ^I'fa 2 (Sept.) (raliliarov 2 . o-iipl 2 b. (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4 (Tff'ia^opai 2 o-KofSoXifM (Apocr.) (rK(ivSa\i>v h. (Sept.) {TKrjvnnijyla 2 (Sept.) (TKUTOS b. (Toffiia b. ornupos 2 b. avos b. a. b. o-T-o/iO 2 (Sept.) cTTpand 3 (Sept.) (rv^r]T€(0 b. CTi;/j/3<|3df&) 3 fin. trt/rayo) C. (Sept.) (rui/ayuyij 2 (Joseph., Philo) avvaipbi 2 crvfdo^a^oj 2 avvfydpoi nn. fTvvehptov 2 b. awreXeio 5 (Sept.) (Tvinpippa 2 (Sejjt.) (r\i(rp.a b. o-tifo) b. (Sept.) aajpa 3 a-ciTTip (Sept.) (TMTT/pm a. (Sept.), b., c. COJTTjplOl', TO (Sept.) TfKvov c. (Sept.) Ti'f 1 e. y. (Sept.) Tpax']^iC<-> - Tvnos 4 -y. vloBtcrca a., b. ui'tJs 2 (Sei)t.) ui'of ToC (iK^puTrou 3 (Sept.) ui'os Tov 6eov 2, 3, (Sept.) vnoKpiTtjs 3 (Sept.) vTTcmvia b. VTTUTVTTUXTLi b. (jivXaKTrjptou 2 ^vXd7 1 C, 2 b. yjrwiil^o) b. IV. WOEDS PECULIAR TO INDIVIDUAL NEW TESTAMENT WRITERS. N. B. A word wliich occurs only in a quotation l>y tlie N. T. writer from the Septuagint is bo marked. In tlie Apocalypse, which contains no express quotations, a word is so designated only when the context plainly indicates a {conscious or unconscious) reminiscence on the part of the writer. For other explanations see the Prefatory Remarks, p. 688 sq. 1. To Matthew 8e(TfiT) €pi^lO flfTdipO} diUKaOapi^cj (Lk. ?) €pl(ptOP ? pCTOlKOTia ^lyy€lnv 6ta»c6)Xva) cToipos p'lXutu ciyyos '! diaXKd(T(r(o f uSi'a ? ptfrddo) uyKlOTpOV Stotrn^eo) €VVO€(i) /LivXo)!/? Ad(iot dldpaxpop evuovxi^a vofjuapa alpa dSaov fiie^oSos" €vpvx ^aaiXfia t6)v ovpavwv di'aiTios 6 fOvLKos (3 Ju. ?) (IBia, see dBia) TTaytSfuo) tivrjdoV €v6vp.fopai (Acts ?) IbiTa 7rapaBaXdcr(riOi andyxoi 6i5ea {Ibea) Ka6d TrapaKOvoi (iMk. ?) dffoi/iirrw clpJJVOTTOlOS Kadtjyijrfjs irapaTiOivai 7Tapa^6\r}v 0dpV eKKapTTOi KaTaBefxaTi^d)'^ 7Tapopoid^(i> ? ffapvTtfXos ? ^KfjLpauovfjX fr. Sept. KarafiapOdvoy irapoy^li ^an-avioTTji efXTTopia KaravadepaTi^Oi ? TTff o? ? (^ao-tXc/a T Kpv ? Individual Writers. 699 Individual Writers. paK(or -x-)o. (or paKo.) eXa}t parri^io evayKoKi^Ofiai aayrjiTf eVetXeo) creXrjvtd^opai ffi/f;^©? aiTLaros e^aTTira (TTaTT]p f|ou5{or-^-)ei/oa) ? GvfxfiovKiov \ap(3dif€LV eVt,3aXXa) (intr.) uvvalpa (Xdyoi/) €7nK€(paXaiov ? (Turai/TT/crts ? «TTtppaTTTW 7)plC<^ ? KaTaKOTTTO) <^pa foj «arevX oy e'ci) ? <^vy,(Mk.?) KaT0LKrja-L9 (f)v\aKTr)pLQV K€VTVpl03U ? OO-TTfp? ap J Trepirpe'^a) «(^pt^u 7rpao"id ^oai/e(or-7;-)pyeff TTpoauXtoi' 'yi'a<^fi;ff Trpofieptpvday 5;;Xauya)s ? (cf. Ti/Xauyo)? ) TTpoo-d^jSaTov ? StapTrdfo) (Mt.?) TTpotTfyyif" ? Sto-xiXiot 7rp o-K f 0n X a toi' Suo-iff? TTpOtTOpp/fo) S^fT/CoXoff TTpOfTTTOpeVOfJiat eyytoTO ? TTvypr)'} T (TKoiXrji fr. Sept. €K0ap^€O} (TpVpUt^<0 ^KOavpd^o) ? arrsKovXaToyp eWfptcra-ai?? (Trao-moTT;?? «(^oiSop (Heb. fr. Sept.) (XTi^ds ((rT0i/3dff) ? ot/X/3oiiftKLa(Ta [■ ? '2vpo(j)OLUicra'a J cruoTafftaoT^s- ? ToXt^a TT^Xai/yo»?? (cf. 67;Xavycus) Tpt'fo) TpupaXid (Lk.?) V7T€pi}(pavla V7TfpTT€pta(T6i)S VTToXrjVlOV XoXkIou Total 102 (1 fr. Sept., 32?) 3. To Lnke. K B. Words found only in tbe Gospel are followed by a G. ; those found only in the Acts, by an A. ; those undesignated are common to both. dyaSovpyca A.? dyKaX?; ti. dyj/tapos A. tiyuoxTTOS A. dyopaioff A. tiypa G. dypdpfjLaTOS A. nypauXew G. dytovla G. ? dr)Bla G, ? A^TjraToff A. ddpoi^o) G. ? aluosG. (Mt.fr. Sept.) ala-Odvopai G. aiTLoviTo) olTtoypa (-apa) A. olxpdXoiTos G. fr. Sept. uKardKptTOi a. oKpllBeta A. aKpi^rjs A. dKpoarijptov A. Qi^wXurco? A. 'AXf^arSpevff A. 'AXe^aj'(5pii/of (or -voff) A. aX(0"yT;fxa a- aXXoyei/;;9 G, dW6(f)vXos A. dpdpTvpos A. dpTTfXoupyds G. d/iui'ci) A. dp0td(or-e'-)^a) G. ? duniSadpds A. di'a/:fdXXciJ A. >■ dvd^Xeyfrts G. fr, Sept. di/a/3oX)7 A. dvayucop'i^oi A.? fr. Sept. di^aSeifCfu/it dvddei^ts G. dt/adida>jue A. dvafi^Tfa) dvaOefian dvadefiaTi^ctP A. dvddrjpa G- ? di/atSem G. duaipeats A. dvaKaOi^fo A. (g. ?) draKptcrts' A. di'dX7;(p)\/^i9 G. dvavrlppT)Tos A. dvavTippTjTOis A. dva7Tet6 A. di/aCTTrdo) di^ardcro-o^at G. dvarpecfxa A. (g.?) dva^aiVo) dua G. dncptTpijTos A. fr. Sept. dTToypa^Jj dTrofieKflTeuQ) G.? aTTO^exopat. dnoBXi^co G. aTTOKaTdoTaatff A- G. Individual AVriteus. 700 Individual WiuTEits. dTTO/cXeto) G. dno\flxft> G. ? dTTofxaaaco G. (l7T07rt7TTyL'/jo/c()7ros" A, " \pa^ A. "Apetof Trdyoff A. ApeoTraytrrjs A. {dpT)v) dpvos G. apoTpov G. dpTffXOil/ A. dp;^(fpaTtKdff A. d/)_;^irfXa)i';;S" G. tiarjpos A. Ao'iai'off A. A(ridp)(r)s A. duiri'a A. /jO"f70ff A. atTKeo) A. da-piudjs A. (i(Taou A.? doT/jaTrro) G. d(rvp(f>aiU09 A. atrajrtoj (;. /tTfKrOS G. «re/) (;. ai'-y»/ A. Au-youoTOS- G. aiKTTrjpas G. flLTuTrri^ff G. OtTO^J^ftp A. iiCJiavTOS G. d A. d(f)p6s G. d(f)v7rv6fMi G. d;(Xus A. ^adeoiS 6. ? ^aBvv G. SwyyeXXo) (Ro. fr. Sept.) Stayti'wo'Ka) A* ^iiayvoipt^o) G. ? Stdyi/ajfTtf A. Stayoyyufo) G. ?)iaypr)yopi G. ? 6iainy^ar€uo/xai G. fitdTTpt'o) A. 5tno"<(a) G. dta(T7r€ipo> A, dififTTrj^ia A. SmTa/5ti(TO"co G. fr. Sept. StrtreXco) A. 6taT7;|)e'a) Sta^eyyo} A. Bia(l)dopd A. fitfK/)uX(iao-a) G. fr. Sept. bi(iX€ipi(a} A. 5tn;^Xeudfa> A. ? fiin;(Q)p(f£o (J. dL€fSvp(opai A. ? bi€^ep)(np(it A. V Stepcorao) A. btfTia A. du'}yrj(Tii' Vj. 8idiiXao(ros A. 6tto-TT;/x( 6tK((fa> I..? SfKfiaT;}? A. (g. ?) 6io7rfTr;y A. btopOoipa A. ? Aioo"KODpot A. 5o;^7} (;^. hpaxpi) G. Svo-^dora/CTOf G. (Mt. ?) dvtrcuTepia (-reptov) A. BcodeKa(f)v\ov A. ?o i;. (Mk.?) €f:ib()pi]KouTa (fS^nptjKouTae^ A-? €f:idopt]KovTa7TivT€ A. ? iyK(i6€T09 G. fyKKrjpa \. ry(or eV-)Kuop G. i^aKJiL^iO ti. fr. Sept. eSa^oy A. (6i(oi G. €L(TKa)<€Opai A- €i(r7rr)bd(i> A. €iaTp€)((0 A. lKaTOVTdp)(T)S A- G.? (Mt.?) CKJ^oXr] A. eKy(ipi(TK(i> G. ? €KbiT)y£Opai A. CK^nTO^ A. €Kf'l(T€ \ . €K$apl3os A. «K^fTOff A. fKKoKvp^dca A. eKKopt^u) (.. €KKp€papiu{()r iKKpepiOpai) G. cKXaXeti) A. cKXeiTTCi) (i. ? ( Hob. fr. Sept.) fKpVKTr]pl((0 G. eWf/XTTO) A. €W7;5da) A.? (Kn\c(o A. €K77\T]p()03 A. (Kn\t)p(0(Ti9 A. (Kaoi>^to A. ? €KTapd(T(T(ii A. «KTcXeo) G. fKT€U€ia A. €KT€V€(TTfpOV G. ? iKTiQrjpi A. iKXOip€ G. fK-^\>\(t> A. fXatw:/ A. (g. ?) 'EXo;:i(6)tT77$' A. fAfuo-i? A. «Xkoo) (i. 'EXX/^fftrrr;? A. €/n/3aXXa) G. ipfii^n^ca A. ippaivopai A. fpniTTpdoi A.? eju(()r €u-)nu€0} A. €p(popeo> G. Karajiiva) A. C7rav\is A. fr. Sept. fitppoarvfri A. Karavevo) G. €7T€y€ipCi> A. c(^dXXofiat A. Karavv(T A. eTTeLdqnep G. (('(fxlSoi', cf. fVelSoc) KaTaTriTTTOj A. (g.?) «7r(or e(^-)f tSoi/ 'E(f>eiTios A. KaTOTrXeto G. «TTfi/ii (eiVt) A. €(f)TJp€pla G. KarnpiBpeo) A. €Vei(rep;(Ofiai G.? ^eu-yo? G. KnTacTfloi A. €7!f Keiva A. fr. Sept. (fVKTTjpla A. KaTaa-ocpl^onai A. fr. Sept. TO cViiSa'XXoc G. ^.iri/fia A. KaTao"TeXXo> A. e7n;3i/3af A. ? T)y€fJLOV€VO} G. Karaacpd^at G. emlBovKri A. tjyepovla G. Kardcr;^ca"tff A. (TTiyifopat A. rjpi6avr}S G. KaraTp^^cD A. ent^qpeoi A. ^Xos (to) G. Karacpepu) A. «TTIKf XX(0 A. ? TOWG.? KaTa(ppovr)TTji A. fr. Sept. E7rtKOl'p(6)tOS A. 5a/i/3oj KaTa'^v^to G. iniKovpla A. Sapcros A. *CaT€l(^6)Xof A. iniKplvo) G. 5ea A. Kare(f>i(TTr)pi A. fTTiXf i';((i> G. ? 6€opa\ia> A. ? KOTOtKia A. eVt/ieXfta A. 3€opa)(os A. KaTopOiop-a A. ? cTTtp-eXoiS G. ^f'^lfir; A. Kepapos G. iTTLvevio A. Beapia G. Kf/J(ZTtOW G. tTTWOia A. Bripevu) G. Krjplov G.? emwopevo/iai G. [Sept.) Bopvjid^a) G.? (cf. TvpiSdfa) «'XPVf" <=• emppLTTToj G. (1 Pet. fr. 5pauu G. fr. Sept. xXricrir ('maiTia-pos G. 6pupl3os G. ? xXirapioi' A.? i-mcTKeva^ai A. ? 6vp.idii> G. xXiVf t 17 fifiepa G. (TnfTTaTrjs G. BvpLOjiaxiU) A. K'KLVldlOV G. einaTTjpt^oi A. (atriff KXtcr/a G. (TTtaTpotprj A. iSpmy G. ? KOITO)!/ A. €iri(T(f)a\Tjs A. UpaTfvo) G. KoXvp^ato A. €7Tl.O-\VOi G. ifpoffuXor A. KoXoiuia (-veia etc.) A. «VlTOavTO A.? IK^df G. K07r6T<$ff A. f-jTLTponevat G. ? (TTTreuff A. KOTTpla G. entTpoTTT) \. itrayyeXoff G. Konpiov G. ? (7n Ka6dnra> A. KOV(\>L^ A. ? Ka^oXou A. KTr]T(Mip A. (p(tdu3 A. Ka^07rXi^a> G. XaKTi'fca A. eprjixot (ai) G. Kn^oTt Xa/ITTpoTT;? A. ('a0Tj(ns 1 KdxfJ^f .- A. G. ? (Mk. ?) Xapnptos G. (cnrfpa Ka/coxTtJ A. fr. Sept. Xa^euTos G. ea-iTfptv6i G. ? itap8ioyi/a)(TTr/E A. Xd(r*c&) A- fjye G.? Kapnorfiopos A. Xciot G. fr. Sept. {ifpyeT€s A. fxavla A. fiavTevofiai A. ftaoTi'fo) A. fiaaros G. (Rev.?) /xeyaXetos" A. (g. ?) ^eXiucrioff G. ? fiepKTTTjS G. fxeaij^^pla A. /i,€ffToa) A. ficTa^dWp'i^(o G. HeToiKi^ay A. fJl,€TpL03S A. fX7)^afio}s A. fj.r}nov A.? fila-dios G. ^La6(ap.a A- /xya G. /xoytff G.? fiocx^onoieay A- vavKXrjpos A. i/ai)? A. yeai't'or A. i/f otro-os (voffO-ds) G. fr. Sept. vctDKopos A. vr}(riou A. j/oCTcria G. ? voo-ad?, see veoo-cdf dySoTjKOvra G. oSffO) G. oSoiTTopeoi A. dSui'da) o^oV?; A. OlKT^p-a A. oiKofid^off A. ? OLKOP0fX€(ii G. OKl^EO) A. 6\oK\Tjpta A. Ofl^pOS G. 6/xiXf6> oi'eifiot G. OTTore G. f OTTTai^O) A. OTrTOff G. dpyuia A. dp(€)ii'ds G. opBpi^ta G. Individual Writers. 702 Individual Wuiteus. Op$f)tOS G.? SpVt$ G.? opoBeata \, ovpavoBfV A. ova-la G. 6(f)pvs G. O^XfO) A. (G.?) ox^oTTOuay A. nnBrjTos A. Trals-. T/. (;. 7rap7T\T)d€l G. 7ravdo)(€lov (or-KiOv) G. n'ai'So;^?!;? (or -k6us) G. TTaVOlKl {OT-Kfi) A. TTai^n;^^ or 7ravTa\fj A.? Trdunj (or -tt;) a. 7rn/)a/3oAXa) A. (Mk. ?) 7rapa^td^op.ai napdSo^os G. irapaOicopfoi A. napaiveo) A. irapaKaOe^opai G. ? ■napaKaOi^oi G. ? TrapoKaXuTTTO) G. 7TapaKiyop.ai A. TrnpciXioj G. 7TapaU0fJL€(ii A. TTa^aTrXeoj A. napdarjixos A. Traparelvu) A. Traparrjprjo-is G. 7ra/)nTvy;^ui/o> A. Tra^ja^^fipaaia A. TTO^f /Ll/3aXXQ) G. ? 7rnpei'o;^X€a) A. TTapOfvla (i. 7rapot)^opaL A. TTapoTpwoi A. Trar^wof A. Trefiivdff G. Tre^ewo) A. iTftpati) A. (Heb. ?) 7r€Vt)(p6s G. TTfi/reKatSeKarof G. TTfpaiTepai A. ? TrfptaTTTO) G. ? TrfpiuoTpaTrra» A. 7reptKaSi((o G.? •jrepiKpaTTjs A. 7T€ plKpVTTTO} G. TTfplKVKKoQ) G. TTf^JiXa/iTTW ncptficvto A. TTfpt^ A. 7rfplOlK€(0 G. TTfplOtKOS G. 7r€piO)(r) A. 7rfptp(p)^yn;^l A. TrcpttTTratD u. 7rtpiTp€7ra> A. Trrjyavov G. iru^ui G. TTt/iTTpaO) A.? TTLVaKlbtOV G. ? TTivaKts (i. .^ TrXeo) (Rev. ?) 7r\T}p{p.)vpa (or -vpa) G. TrXo'of A. TrWKTOff A. TTI'Or^ A. noXiTTjs (Ileb.?) TroXXaTrXaCTta)!/ G. (Mt. ?) 7roXiTap_:^r;s a. riorriKos A. [Sept.) TToppo) G. (Mt. and Mk. fr. 7Top(Pvp6no>\is A. TTpayparfvonat G. TTpaKTCDp G. 7rp€a^€La G. 7rpy]vr]S A. 7rpo/3aXXa) TTpoKarayyeXXo) A. (2 Co.?) npoKrjpv(T(rQ> A. TTpo/ieXcTaoj G. npoopaco A. TTpOTTOpfUO) 7rpoaava^aiva> G. TrpofTai/aXiVKCi) G. ? 7Tpocravf)(vuvfj.i A. CToXop G. cravtff A. (Tf jSaOTOf A. CTlKOpiOff A. aiKfpa G. OipiKLvdtOV A. (Tii'tafa) G. (TtrfUTOS G. (TlTtOV A . ? aLTOp.€TptOV G» ffKaTTTO) G. OKOX^T) A, fTKevrj A. (TKTJVOTTOIOS A. (T/cipraa) G. (rKX7jpoTpd;(7jXoff A. uia G. avp.yj/T)({}i^a> A. (TUfa^poifo) A. (g. ?) o-umKoXou^eo) G. (Mk.?) (Tui'aXt'fci) A. (TUfaXXfifrfro) A. / (TVvhpOpi] A. (Tvufipi {(Ip-i) A. (g.?) (TVV€ipi (ft/Xt) G. (Tvi'fXaui/a) A. ? T) A- (T(pdyiov A. fr. Sept. CT0oSpco? A. (T(f)vdp6v A. ? (TtpVpOl^ A. ? cr p^oXr; A. TaKTOff \. rni/Oi^ (rd i/w) A. Tdpn;^os A. Tfi;^iOTa A. TeKfXJJpLOV A. TfXfU^opea) G. TC(T(TapaKOVTaeTr}S A. TffrfrapfC/faiSe/caToff A. TfTpdSf Ol' A. Tfrp«7rX(J0f G. T€Tpapx€o) G. [_Kapoia TiBcaSai ft? rd 2>Ta or cV Tt/iwpeo) A. TOtj^O? A- Tpavp.a G. TpavpaTi^tO Tpa^vs TpL€Tia A. TpliTTeyos A. Individual Writebs. 703 Individual "\Vkitek&. TpitT)(l\l,Ol A. '"PT*''^'"UA.fr. Sept. Tpo(po(pope(o ■ 1 rpvytav G. fr. Sept. Tvp^a^co G. ? (cf. Bopvl^a^io) Tvpios A. rvcficoviKos A. vypns G. vdpwTTlKOS G. vnepei^ou \. VTT€p€K)(yVOi G. vnepwou \. V7njp€T€0} A. v7ro/3(iAXaj A. V7TO^O}VVVpL A. (iTTOKptVOfiaL G. vTToXap^avd) (3 Jn. ?) VTriivoeti} A. vTronXeco a. VTrOTTl/etD A . VTrO(TTp6)UUVpl G. V7rOTp€)((ii A. i'7ro;^a)pea) G. vaivapay^ G. fr. Sept. ddTVTf G. (f>iKavBpQ}ncis A. 0iXi7 ()7) G. l\opovip(i}9 G. v\a^ A. XaXSaioff A. X«Va^ G. ;^dcr^o G. XftMofo) A. )(€Lpay(oyeo3 A. ;)lfft/jaya)yoff A. pfXeufl^o) A. Xopdff G. XOpTafffia A. Xp€(i>(p€ iXiTrjs {or xp^o(jiiK) G. XpouoTpt^eta A. ;(ppOS A. ^//■a>;^co G. u)p€opai A. 0)01' G. Gospel 312 (11 fr. Sept., 52?) Acts 47S (15 fr. Sept., 49?) Both 61. Total 851 (26 fr. Sept., 101?) 4. To all three Synoptists. dyai^aKreo) nyeX?; aAa? dXd/3a(rrpoi' dXtfi;? d/i?)!' Xe'yoj t'/Liit' di^a/3oda> ? ai'aKX(i'a) di/fKiroff aTra/po) a7ro6r;/i€a) d7ro/Cf(^aX('f(U dTTOKuX to) ot (tpToi Tj^s 7rpo6ea€QiS dal^earos do-Ko? BeeX^e/3ouX (-/3ou/3) yaXr^i/;; yapL(TKUi ? Sta/SXcTTO) ? 5mXoy/^o/2at (Jn.?) SufT^foXo)? eKaTouTanXaaiQiv ? e/Li7rai^Q> €7ri^Xt)pa i7riypaj^) XeVpa XfTT/JOf flOKpOS ? UVp.(pd3V otKodecnrorrjs opxeofxat napaXvTLKos*^ 7r€ vSepd 7r€pi\vTro£ 'rrripa [Sept.) {iroppio IMt. and Mk. fr. TTpO^aiUCi} npiOTOKadeSpia 7rp(OTOKKi(ria TTVpyos pa (TVUTIjpeO) T€Xd)vr)s TeXa}VLov nXXo) Tpi^os fr. Sept. ijioff AaviS I'TTOKptri^t (^e'yyoff ? ;^oipoff \l/ev8opapTvp€(o (Ro. ?) Total 78 (Ifr. Sept., 10?) 5. To John. N. B. Words peculiar to the Gospel, or to one or .inotlier of the Epistles, are so marked. dyyeXi'a 1 Ep. dyyeXXo) G. ? dXtevQi G. dXXaxodeu G. dXoT; G- dpapriav ^x^tv G., 1 Ep. aprju nprju G. t'lv (edv) G.? 1 Ep.? duapdpTTjTos G. (viii. 7) ■> / I C<^r]s ] avacrraats \ / }■ G. I Kpiaetos I dvOpaKid G. dvdpiOTTOKTOVOS G., 1 EP. avTixpto'Tos 1 Ep., 2 Ep. dtrXett) G. airrXrjfjLa G. dTTCKptOtj Ka\ €nT€ G. djTepxopai els rd ottiVo) G. a7ro(Tvvdy(oyos G. (ip{p)a({)os G. dp;(trpiVX(i'o$' G. o apxvTov Koo-fxov (tovtov) G. avT6 eivai , „ , [ e/c Tojv Kara) G. eKveio eXiypa G.? epnopLOV G. epfpvo-dco G. e^epxeuOat eV (aTTO, napdy TOV Oeov G. e^v7Tui^ G. * o^(0 G. df^driOf G. (Lk. ?) 0/xoO G. (Lk.?) Individual 'NVriters. 70-4 Individual Writers. ovapiov G. ovxofi' G. oyfrdptov (".. TTaiSdpiov Ci. (Mt.?) TTCvBfpUS U. jT(ptS(a u. [3 Ep. TtepmaTeiv iv aKt)6eia 2 Er., Ttepi7!aTfiv Iv t^ ffKon'a (or tv TW (TKorft) (i., 1 Ep. TrepiTTaTfiV eV tw (fxoTt 1 Ep. TToieiK nji/ dX^^etai» (;., 1 Ei'. norepos o. •JTpOlSaTlKJ] (>. irpo^aTLOv G. ? TrpoiraiTiQi G. (l^lk. ? Lk. ?) 1TpO(TKVV1]TTjS G. TrpotTipdywv G. TTTfpva a. TTTVtTpa G. 'Paj/iai'iTTt G. (TKe'Kos G. aKr^voTrqyia G. 0"i'y;^pao/ia( G.? avppadtjTtji G. G. XP'O'pa 1 Ep. ■yjri'X'i" TiBivai, see rtdivai yjf. ^(xipiov G. Gospel 114 (12 ?) Epp. 11 Gospel and Epp. 8 (1 ?) Total 133 (13 ?) 6. To Paul. a. To THE Longer Epistles AND Philemon. N. B. Words peculiar to any single Epistle are so designated by the appended abbreviation. dfiapris 2 Co. ayaOttxrvvT] ayapos 1 Co. dyavdKTrjais 2 Co. dyfVTjs 1 Co. dyta}(rvvjj dyvoTtjs 2 Co. (iyi'a)? I*liil. dyptiXaios Ro» aypvTtvia 2 Co. dSajravot 1 Co. aS^Xoj; 1 Co. aSiaXfiTTTwff aSpoTijf 2 Co. dOd cf. papav dda dSeoi P^ph. a^i'/ico) Col. ui'i'iy/xa 1 Co. aia-Drjo-ts Phil. aicTXpoXoyia Col. alaxpQTTjs Eph. aiTtdopai Ko. ai;(/iaXiarei) Ro. dnoTopia Ro. dTToutr/a Phil. uTrd^Y/^T^CTtf Col. apa ovv dpd Ro. dppafSwv dp€(TK€La Col. appo^Q) 2 Co. dpnaypos Phil. appTjTos 2 Co. dpXlT€KTv 1 Co. draKTco) 2 Th. araKTos 1 Th. drnVraJS- 2 Til, aTopos 1 Co. aiydfo) 2 Co. ? al6aip€Tos 2 Co. auXdy 1 Co. avrdpKTjs Phil. da7rTdff Ro. yu/ii/jjTfi^o) 1 Co. BiiKVu) (Jal. Aapa(TKT}v6s 2 Co. Sfty/xaWfci) Col. (jNIt.?) ?iiaip€cns 1 Co. ^taoToXij fitSaKTOff 1 Co. (Jn. fr. Sept.) di€ppr}if€ta 1 Co. ? BieppTjvfvTTjs I Co.? BiKaLoKpiata Ro. dtKCiiuat? Ro. dlOTTfp 1 Co. dt-^os 1 Co. Soy^ar/fu) Col. fidXeoy 2 Co. fioXtdo) Ro. fr. Sept. SoXdo) 2 Co. 6drr;s" 2 Co. bovXnyoiytoi 1 Co. hpaaaopai \ Co. Sui/a^do) Col. (Eph. ? Heb.?) Syi/arco) 2 Co. (Ro.?) 8vaTjpla 2 Co. 8o}po(}iopia Ro. ? €yypd(f)ii) 2 Co. (Lk, ?) iyyvT€pov Ro. €yKav)(dopai 2 Th. ? iyKfvTpi^ui Ro. iyKOTTi] { or f/cK-, or cVit-) 1 Co. €yKpaT€vopai 1 Co. eyKpivo) 2 Co. ideXoOprjaKCia Col. eBvdpx^i 2 Co. iOvLKtiis Gal. fifiwXftoi' 1 Co. Wk^, -k^^ (^It. ?) «ticoj Gal. elXtKplveta (or -vta) elpTjvorroUa} Col. elade^^opat 2 Co. eKaTovraerrjs Ro. «VfiaTrai/do) 2 Co. €K8r}p€(o 2 Co. ^Kdli^iKOi 1 Th. (Lk.?) iKKatta Ro. €KKXdo> Ro. 1 €KK\eiai Individual Writers. 705 Individual Writers. €KK07nj Cf. iyKOTTTJ tKVT} 2 Co. €KQiU /KaTTovio) 2 Co. fr. Sept. €\a(Ppia 2 Co. e'Xa^YtOTorepo? Eph. €^Xoyaa) or -yea> €fii3aT€V(o Col. €fi7T€pi7raT€(o 2 Co. fr. Sept. evdetyna 2 Th. Judrjueto 2 Co. €u8n^d^(i) 2 Th. evipyqyji 1 Co. «Vkottt; cf. eyKOTrrj iVOpKl^Oi 1 Th. ? €1/077;? Eph. evrpoTTT} 1 Co. fVruTTOoj 2 Co. e^a-yopa^o) €^aipo) 1 Co. ? and fr, Sept. €^avn(TTa(rLS Phil. e^airarato { 1 Tim. ?) ^^mropiiD 2 Co. c^eyetpo) ^^r])(€(0 1 Th. e^taxvo) Eph. eopra^o} 1 Co. €7raKou&) 2 Co. fr. Sept. €7Tavap.tp.vr)(TK(c Ro. €7T€iT7€p Ro. ? cVe^cretVo) Phil. «VcfSi^'w 2 Co. eTTidiaTaaaopai Gal. «Vtfii'w Eph. fTTidavarivs 1 Co. €77i0vnr)TJ]s 1 Co. fniKaXviTTco Ro. fr. Sept. fTTiKarapaT'iS Gal. fr. Sept. _ (.In.?) (TTiTrndrjais 2 Co. fTri7r6&r)Tos Phil. €7Tt7roOia Ro. €niaK7)v6(D 2 Co. 67rt Eph. fTTtpfopT/yia €7rouop.a^ Ro. €77raKi(T;^iXtot Ro. €p6l9/fa> 2 Co. (Col?) 45 ipfirjveta 1 Co. ipfj.T]V€VTT]S 1 Co.? Tl €pOVp€V Ro. cVepoyXwCTao? 1 Co. €T€po^vy€(o 2 Co. ereptos Phil. iroipaula Ejth. evfota Eph. (1 Co.?) ctnapedpos I , p el'Trpoaedpos j €V7Tp0(T(O7r£(O Gal. evoTjiMos 1 Co. eutr;^?;^ 01^0)9 €va^rjp.o(TVpr) 1 Co. €VTpa7T€\ia Eph, €V(f)-qpia 2 Co. ev(pT]pos Phil. fL';^apio"ro$' Col. fvyl/v\€(o Phil. €(p€vpeTT)i Ro. €Cf)iKV€Ofj.ai 2 Co. 6 T}yant]fi€vos (of Christ) Eph. ^ dyvoetre Ro. fj8i(TTa 2 Co. ^^os 1 Co. fr. Menander TjuiKa 2 Co. jjrot Ro. TjTTqfia TjTTcou or TJcrtTcov T}x^<*> 1 Co. (Lk. ?) ^«tdrr;? Ro. ^e\w fV Col. ^eoStSoKTOff 1 Th. 6€0(TTVyT)S Ro. ^eoTT;? Col. ^;}pa Ro. OT}piopa)(€(a 1 Co. ^pta/Lt/3fi;a) ^I'peoff Eph. ui^a 1 Co. iepo^uros" 1 Co. ? ifpoCTuXf'o) Ro. Ifpovpyeco Ro. iKavoTT7s 2 Co. tfcayoct} (Xapoff 2 Co. tXaponjs' Ro. ip.(ipofiai ( ? cf. 6fi€ipop.ai) Iva ('where *) ? *Iou5atf(«) Gal. louSatVo)? Gal. Ioi'6nVo"/id? Gal. KTOTqS la6\l/v)(^os Pllil. tOTopew Gal. Ka6aip€(TLS 2 Co. Ko^d (1 Pet.?) Kadopdcd Ro. Kati/drr;? Ro. KaKoTjBeta Ro. KoKapLT) 1 Co. KaXXie'Aato? Ro. KaXoTTOtco) 2 Th. KaXvp.pa 2 Co. Kd^TTTW Kara» I/ KaTTTjKeiKo 2 Co. KaTQ^apetD 2 Co. KaTaj3pa^€vai CoL AcaraSoi/Xdo) KaTaKaXuTTTCi) 1 Co. KaraKpifia Ro. Kara* Gal. p.Q}pdop.ai 2 Co. ppia 1 Co. p(opo\oyla Eph. i/e/cpcotrt? i^;} 1 Co. fT^TTtdfo) 1 Co. voT/pa vopodetTta Ro. vovpr)via Col. vvxOrjpepov 2 Co. i/wTo? Ro. fr, Sept. oiKTeipo) Ro. fr. Sept. oKTarjpepos Phil. dXf'^pfos 2 Th.? dXtydi|Ai;;^os' 1 Th, dXo^peurijj 1 Co. oXoreXiJ? 1 Th. opfipopai 1 Th.? (cf. ip^lp.) 6pi\ia 1 Co. fr. JVIenander 6vivT]pt Philem. oparos Col. ope^iS Ro. dp^OTToSeo) Gal. otryf Ro. OCTiO)? 1 Th. oaiPprjais 1 Co. d0^aXpo6ouXcia 6)(vp(opa 2 Co. Trd^op 7raiSaya>ydff Tra/fw 1 Co. fr, Sept. TraXaioTrjs Ro. TrdX;; Ejih. Trai^ovpyos' 2 Co. TTapa^oXevopai ? \ pi m 7rapa^ov\€vopL rrapdicf t/iai Ro. Inbividual Writers. 706 Individual Writers. napafivOia 1 Co. napa^vBiov I*lnl. 7rapaTTXt) (of. jrpotrefi/).) 1 Co.? 'TrapfiaoKTos (Jal. 7rap€L 1 Co.?) TTfio-fiovT] Gal. TTfw/ff 2 Co. fr. Sept. TTfVTaKl^ 2 Co. 7r€ ptfpyd^opat 2 Th. 7r€piK(iOappa 1 Co. TrcptK^cjiaXaia 1 Th. (Eph. fr. Sept.) wepiKeino) 1 Th. Trepi^p-qpa 1 Co. TTfpTTCpevopai 1 Co. TTfpvat 2 Co. Trt^ai'oXoyi'a Col. TTtOTT;? TlO. 7rXa£r/ia Ko. TO TrAetoToi/ (adv.) 1 Co. TrXeofe^cTfG) 7r\r)(Tp,ovrj Col. iroXtTevpa Phil. TToXDTTOt'KtXof Eph. TT/) 6 (T/^C I/O) 7rpoatp€(o 2 Co. wpoatTidopaL Ro. TTpoaKOVOi Col. irpoapaprava 2 Co. TTpoytvopai Ro. Trpodibcopi Ro. TTpoeXTr/^o) Eph. Trpo€vdp)(^opai 2 Co. TTpoeTrayyeXXo) Ro. (2 Co. ?) TrpofTot^a^u) TrpoevayyfXi^ofiai Gal. 7rpO€x<^ Ro- TTpoT/yeo/xat Ro. TrpoSffTpio^ Gal. 7rpoKaX€£d Gal. TrpOKarapTi^to 2 Co. TrpoKvpoo) Gal. TTpoXcyto 7rpo7ra(r;^ci> 1 Th. TTpoTTarcop Ro. ? 7r/;o(7aya)y)j Trpoo-ai^aTrXf^pdo) 2 Co. 7TpouavaT'i6r)pi (Jal. TTpoffcS/jfu'co (cf. irapfbp.) 1 Co.? TrpofTT/Xdw Col. 7rpoKapT€prj(Tis Eph. TTpOO-KOTTT} 2 Co. TTpdfrXT^C^)!/^!? Ro. tTpo(To(fi(i\o) I'hilora. Trpoordrij Ro. 77po(T(j)i\TJs Phil. TrpnriOrjpt TTpiorevo} Col. TTTT^yd (to) 1 Co. TTTi'pw Phil. 7rrto;^eijco 2 Co. TTuKTfwco 1 Co. ptfdu ^'^^,;liCo. pOTTIJ i^ I purt's Eph. (raiueaOat 1 Th. ? frapydvt] 2 Co. o-aroi/ (not -yoff) 2 Co. ? aefSd^opai Ro. (TTjpeLt'xo 2 rh. (TKtjuos - Co. aKhrjpiWqs Ro. (TKoXoil/- 2 Co. O-KOTTOff Phil. o-/cu;3aXoi/ l*hil. Sku^t/s Col. o-TTouSmos 2 Co. (2T.?) (TTfyO) oreXXo) crT€i'0)^ Eph. (Lk.?) CTuyKd/LtTTTo) Ro. fr. Sept. (TDyKard^efft? 2 Co. o"uy»cpiVa) (TV^rjTTJTTJS 1 Co. (Tijfuyoff Phil. trufajOTTOttQ) (TuXaywyetu Col. CTuXdo) 2 Co. (Tvp^ovXos Ro. fr. Sept. (TvppapTvpitD Ro. (Rev. ?) os 2 Co. (TuppTToXiVi;? Ej)h. (Tvp(l)rjpi Ro. a'vp(l)opoi', TO, 1 Co. ? (rvp(^ivX€Tf)s 1 Th, aivos 1 C O. tri'p^i'X"^ Phil. (Tvuayoii'i^opaL Ko. trvrd^Xeo) Phil. O"Di'(ii;^/i(:iXa)T0p avvavapiyvvpi Eph. avuTfppco Ro. fr. Sept. (TvvTptppa Ro. fr. Sept. avuvTTOKpivopai Gal. (Tuz'tJTroi'pye'co 2 Co. (TDI/tofitVo) Ro. (rvfTpos Eph. (TvaTaTiKoi 2 Co. o-uoTfj/dfco Ro. (TVCTTOL^fQ) Gal. (rurrrpaTtwTTjs- (ToipaTiKUJS Col. rdyfiu 1 Co. Td)(a TtVO} 2 Th. ToXprjpoTfpov or -Tfpo)? Ro. Tpd^TjXoi/ vTiOTiBivaL Ro. rpofpoi 1 Th. TUTriKw? 1 Co. ? ft TlJj^Ot, T^;^©!/, 1 Co. up 1*0 f v7ra"dpos Ro. VTTfpa/pO) vrrepaKpos 1 Co. inrepav^dvco 2 Th. V7r€pj3aLV(D 1 Th. {'TTfp/SaXXdi^rtos' 2 Co. VTrfp3"XXa> t'TTep.^iioXi) UTTcpeyo) 2 Co. ? V7T€p€K€Lvn 2 Co. I'TrepeKTTfpitTO'oi) V7T€p€K7T€pLCr(T^S 1 Th. ? V7r€p€KT€lU(C 2 Co. i'7repei/Tuy;^di'Ci) Ro. UTTfpXiai' 2 Co. uTTfpi'iKaa) Ro. uTTfpTrfpto-trfutD VTrfpvxj/ou) Phil. vneftcfjpoi/t'o) Ro. VTrdSiKos Ko. . VTToXfippa Ro. ? I'TToXftVo) Ro. vnoTiid^o) I Co.? ^fifiopeVwt 2 Co. 0^dyyo? 1 Co. (Ro. fr. Sept.) (j)BoV€(t) (ial. ^iXtTTTrT^a-ios- Phil. sl T. (Heb.?) aiperiKOS Tit. aia)(poK€pbr}s aixfxa\(x>T(V(j> 2 T. ? (Eph. fr. Sept.) aKalpcos 2 T. dKaTayvoJCTTOs Tit, aK/3nr)7? 2 T. aXXojs 1 T. dpoL^i] 1 T. ni'ofoJTrupeo) 2 T. dva.\v(Tis 2 T. duavf}(f)(o 2 T. dvaylrv)(ai 2 T. ai'SpuTroSi(Tr)7? 1 T. dv8p6 1 T. dnoTp€7ro> 2 T. dTTpoCTirof I T. apTios 2 T. acTTOvSoff 2 T, (Ro. ?) d(TTo;^fa) avdevrem 1 T. avTOKaraKpLTOS Tit. d^^opiaTit.? (cf. d5ta(^^o- pi'a) d^tXdya^o? 2 T. dip-evdr'}s Tit. iSa^pos: 1 T. jSao'tXeus' Toil' aZfUfo)!' 1 T. 05eXuKrds Tit. ^eXrioiv 2 T, ^\a^€p6s 1 T. ^dyypaifa 2 X. - 'yei'eaXoyta yoT;! 2 T. (rii) (fpu ypapifiara 2 T, ypa6)dr]S 1 T. yvpLvatTia 1 T. 'yufaudptoy 2 T. fiftXi'a 2 T. dta;3oXoff (as adj.) Stayo) hianapaTpifir) 1 T. ? (cf. irapa- BiaTpijB^) dLaTpoe€lpa> 2 T. (2 Pet.?) KQTrjyopia (Lk. and Jn. ?) Kau(Trr;p(dfa) ? 1 i «x» KavTqpia^iO ? J Ke 1/0(^0) i/i a Kvr]dcD 2 T. KOtt'COWKO? 1 T. Koapios 1 T. KO(rp.iajS 1 T. ? \oyop.ax^o> 2 T. Xoyop«;^ta 1 T. Xoyoff vyirjs Tit. ^araioXoyi'a 1 T. /laratoXoyoff Tit. []\Ik. ?) /nfXf rdo) 1 T. (Acts fr. Sept., p,ep^pdva 2 T. pfTa\r)(p)\l/'is 1 T. pr]Be7>0T€ 2 T, p.T]TpaXcoas'- I -] «p prjTpoXwas'i j fir^TpoTToXis 1 T. povooi 1 T. ve6(f)VT0S 1 T. VCCOTfplKOS 2 T, i/t; (^dXeoff vopipas V0(T€(O 1 T. ^fi/o6o;^c'co 1 T. OLKobcaTTOTeco 1 T. OLKobopia 1 T.? oiKovpyos^ I n Tit. OtKOUpOS" )7 «aXi7 6/ioXoyta 1 T. 6p,oXoyovpiv(iiS 1 T. opyt'Xoj Tit. opOoTopeo) 2 T, TvapahuiTpifirj 1 T. ? (cf . 6ta- TTaparpL^Tj) 7iapa6T}KT) 2 T. (1 T. ?) 7rapaKaTa6r}Kr] 2 T. (1 T. ?) TTUpOtl/OS TTfirpaXcoas'? 1 -i n^ TrarpoXftias-? ) 7T€pU(rTaaBaL (" to avoid ") TT^piOVfTLOS Tit. 7r€pin€Lp(i> 1 T. TrepicPpove'co Tit. TTto-Tos 6 Xoyoy (cf . Rev. xxi. 5 etc.) TTtOTOQ) 2 T. Tzkiypa 1 T. 7rX7}>cr7/f 7ropt(rp.off 1 T. Trpayparcia 2 T. TTpaiiTTu^eta (-6la) 1 T. ? TTpeajBi/Tis Tit. Trpoyoi/off TTpoKpipa 1 T. 7rp6(rK\Tj(Tis ? 1 1 «p Trpoo-KXicrts" ? j 7rpo(f)T]TT]i (of a poet) Tit. pT}T(OS 1 T. 0"f/XI^0T7/y tTK€7Ta(7pa 1 T. ijT€(j)ai'6o> 2 T. (Heb. fr. Sept.) (Tr6pa)(OS 1 T. (TrparoXoyfQ) 2 T. OTyyT^ro? Tit. cruyKaKOTra^eo) 2 T. cra>fa) ft? rr)i/ j3a(TtXfiav ktX. 2T. (TOtK€0> €^a7rard(o ? Individual Writeks. 708 Individual Writers. (mrayfi dvTiKaBlfmqpi dfpanav TTpoo-oxBt^oj fr. Scj)t. emopda) KaravaXL (TVV€7ripapTVp€0i otKeloi ^oX.'f ? fr. Sept. KdTaa-KOTTOS TfXfLOiTTJS OiKCO) (ioTavrj Kararo^svio'i fr. Sept. Ttpuipia o\f$pos •yfi/eaXoyeo) Kava-Ls TOpWTCpOS 6(TTpaKLV0S yftopyea) K€aKii fr. Sept. Tpayoi TrXafffTo) yvo(pos KQTii) fr. Sept. Tpa)(T]Xl^O> TTpuia-rrjiJii hdpoKls KplTlKOS Tpiprjvos irpoKonri hfKarq KoiXov fr, Sept. Tpoxid fr. Sept. Trpovofca biKaToat XftTOVpyCKOS rvp7ravi^opaiTcpos p€TpL07ra6€CO Xfpov^ip, -ISeiP V^pUTTTfi fillJfCKlJS prj^CTTOJ Total 1G8 (11 fr. Sept., 10 ?) VTTfpOxfl SuKVf'opm p,r)\QiTT} VTTOTayr) hiopdaxTis piaOa-nohotria ijroTlSrjpi hoKipairla ? pLcrBaTroBoTijs 8. To James. i\j/i]\otf)pove(i) 1 hvn'(ppj]V€VT07 pvfXos aye Xpiarirr,, invnep V€ 6Xo$p€V0), dXfBp€V(0 dulXfws ? iyii'yrris (2 Co.?) €KTpopos '• 6pOlOT1]9 dTTClpaCTTQS dyvoijpa eXfy;fO? (2 Tim. ?) 6 orftSttr/iOff TOV XpKTTOV dirXiot adeTTjcns fpirmypos 6pK(opo(Tia dnoKvea iWXrja-is im^pl^a) TTamiyvpis d7TO{TKia(rpa a'iyfws 9' irapad€iypaTL^9 Trapirjpi (Lk. ?) SaipnvLajbrjs OKpoSiVlOV fvOvTTjs fr. Sept. TrapotKeo) (Lk. ?) Slyj/vxos dXvaiTfXrj^ euXa/Seta 7r€7 pa EIKfl dp^TaOiTOS euXa/3eo/xat (ActS?) TTTjyvvpi €p(f}VTOS aprjTojp €V7r€pi(TTaT0S TToXvpep^s eudXios avaKmv'i^a) €V7roua TToXvTporrcos e^eXKcd dvaKnyi^ofiai rj fMrjvl (of. elfi^v) TTpiCoy (npiui) €oiKa (see EIKQ) dvapiBprjTos OeaTpi^o) TTpo/^XeTTO) €7r iXTjcrpovrj avaaravpoto OeXrja-is TTpoBpopOi fTTlCTTripCdU dirrayavl^opai 6€fi€Xiov Kara^dXXofiai npQ(Tayop€V(o (TriTqbcios Individual Writers. 6 €v6vU(0V evTrpeTTfia er)ij.€pos 6avaTJ](j}6pot 6prjTro\r]( p ) ttteo) 7r/3a>(or-o-)i'/xoff plTTl^CO pvnapia pVTTapos (Rev. ?) ar']7T(o (TrjTo^pcaTos Ta\ai7Ta)p€(i> raXaiTTOipia (Ro. fr. Sept.) ra)(vs TpOTTT] rpO)(6s Tpv(PaS 1 aKaraTratrrof ? t dKaraTTavaTOs'^ [ dXXoTpt(o)f7Tt£rK07rof 1 aXcocTif 2 dpaBi]S 2 dpapdvTLVQi 1 dpdpavros 1 dpa>pT]Tos 2 (Phil.?) ai'nyei'i'ao) 1 dvayKaaTtits 1 ava^vais 1 di/6KXaXT^ros" 1 diTtXoiSopeeo 1 anoyivopai 1 ano6i(Tis dnovepo) 1 a7ro(pevyQi 2 d7rpo(rQ)7roX7}(/z)7rro)ff 1 dpyeto 2 dpTiy€ui/r)TOS 1 dp^iTToiprjv 1 a(TTT)pLKTOS 2 av)(prip6s 2 jStoco I ^Xeppa 2 ^opfdopos 2 jSpa^vTTjS 2 yvvaiK€7os 1 Stauynfo) 2 fiuo"vo'7/roff 2 eyKarotKeco 2 iyKop^oopai 1 €Kd(rTOT€ 2 eKTToXai, 2 €KT€U^S 1 (Lk. ?) €KT€V(OS 1 (Lk. ?) eXey^t? 2 epTTaiypovrj 2 iprrXoKr) 1 €v8v(Tis 1 €VTpV(PaQ3 2 e^ayyeXXo) 1 (Mk.??) €^aKoXovd€(i) 2 e^epapa 2 e^epavvdoi ? 1 - €^€p€Vm(i>'f \ cVdyyf X/xa 2 enepwTTjpa 1 e7riK(i\vppa 1 fViXofTTO? 1 eTTiXuatf 2 €TrtpapTvp€a> 1 €7r07TT€V(0 1 eTTOTTTTJS 2 Updrfvpa 1 laoTLpos 2 KtlKOTTOlO? 1 (Jn. ?) Kara/cXv^o} 2 Kaucroo) 2 «Xeoff 1 KpaTGLOS 1 KTl(rT7JS 1 Kv\i(rpa ' \ n KuXiCT/io'? ? J X^i^t; 2 p€ya\o7rp€nT}S 2 plaupa 2 piaa-pos 2 pu^pyj 2 ynucoTrdfoj 2 /icoXciji//- 1 fr. Sept. paypos 2 oluofpXvyla 1 oXiywff ? 2 6p6(Pp(oi/ 1 oTrXt^o) 1 Tzapavopta 2 7Tapa(Ppovia 2 Trapetfrayco 2 7rap€i(T 2 (TvpnadT)^ 1 avp7rp€(r(3vT€pos 1 (JUfCKXfKTOS" 1 (TWOlKiu) 1 Ta7T€ll^6(f)p(OV 1 ? rapTapOiti 2 rap^ti^o? 2 reXet'o)? 1 r€piov 1 ? ^0) cr<^ opoff 2 Individual Writers. T/'fuSoSiSdtrKaXof 2 (opvopai 1 lEpislIe63 (Ifr. Sept., 2?) 2 Epistle 57 (5?) Common to Both 1 Total 121. 10. To Jude, ft? 7r«vra? roiif at&i/as' TTpo TravTos tov alavos anodiopi^Q} anraKXTOs yoyyuoTjjs 5eiy/ia fKTTopi/eva) eWTTftdfw (Lk. fr. Sept.) €^€\ey)((D V CTraycoi/t^o^ai €7Tn(jjpl^txi pepyjripoipos OTTlffO) CTapKOS TrapftcrSijQj TrXai'^^TT^ff 7rp6(T(D7Ta davpd^co (TTTiXd? t'7r€;^vcnKOis Total 20 (1 ?) 11. To the Apocalypse. TO A #cai TO Q 'A/3a6Sa)i' al\pa\6}ddff ((i>'(>')d/i<»/ioi' (coXXoupiOV (xoXXuploI') KplBt'j KpvaTaWi^co KpiiiTTaXKos KVKKevco ? KUxXd^fv ij KvpiOKt) rjpipa \€VKO^V1 {Treraopai) niropai jiXijaaw TrXi^rcij (Lk. V) TToSrjpt]! TTUtlOS (Col. V) TTOTapOCJu'lpTJTOS npioivos etc. 6 TTpilTOS K. 6 l(T\aTOi nvpivos ITVppOS peSi ipiSa) pvnaivu) ? pvnapeiiopai'i pvnuo) ? o"aX77tO"r7;ff (rdTTCp^ipos crdp8ivos ? (rdpfitoi/ ? aapbtdvv^ ? ^ (TapSdi'u^ V (TfpifiaXit arjpiKos (o-ipiKor) (Ti'fi^pof (TKordw (Eph. ?) (Tpiipdydiuos apdpay^QS Spvpvdios '■ trrptjvido) (TTprjvos tTb>paTa staves ToXavTiaios TeaaapaKoirraHio ? Tea-crapaKOiTaTiaaapes 1 Terpdyavos TtpiOrT)S TO^OV TOTrd^iov Tpi\ivns vaappaK€vs 1 . dYVL(70tiTi, 1 aor. pass. imi)v. of dyfifw. ato-euvToi, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. of aladavofuu. alTcCTo), pres. impv. 3 pers. sing, of alreu^. dKr|Koa, 2 pf. act. of aicovai. dXAa-yTJcroiiai, 2 fut. pass, of aWatrato. dVXdtai, 1 aor. act. inf. of dXXdo-crco. dWd^et, fut. act. 3 pars. sing, of aWaaaa. djinpTrioT), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of d/iaprdi/o). d}ir|o-dvTO)v, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. plur. of ayAai. dvdpa .111(1 dvdpT|8i, 2 aor. act. impv. of ava^aivat. dva(3£'PT]Ka, pf. act. of avafialvai. dvaYa-yeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of avdyai. dva'yvovs, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of avaytvatrKO). dva-yviivai, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvayivaxTKio. dvaYVojo-fltf. 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of di/aytvai. dveixo|iilv, impf. mid. of dvi)^a>. dvfXci, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of dvaipea. dveXttv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvaipea. dve'Xmo-i, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvaipkui. dvtvf-yKai, -Kas, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of dvafp£pa>. dve'vTts, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of dvlrjiu. dvc'^onai, fut. mid. of dvexai. dve'ir€(rov (-i|, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of dvarpi^m. dvevpov (-av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of avevp'urKd. aviuya, 2 pf. act. of avoiya. dvcuyijicvas, pf. pass. ptcp. of dvolya. dvcu-yora, 2 pf. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of dvoiya. dvfu|a, 1 aor. act. of dvolyu). dv6u\6T)vai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dvoiyai. dvii-yaYov, 2 aor. act. of dvdya. dvT]7Y£LXa, 1 aor. act. of di'ayyeXXto. dvTjY'Y'^T', 2 aor. pass, of di'ayye'XXiu. dvtive-yK«v, 1 or 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of dva(^ipa. dvt)pe'8T)V, 1 aor. pass, of dvaipia>. dvTJ4>9T). 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ava-Tsra. dvT|x6T)v, 1 aor. pass, of dvdya>. dvBe'^eTai, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing, of dvrf\u>. a.vii(rrr\K(. \>l. ind. act. 3 pers. sing, of dv6iarq)u. dvSto-ravrai. pres. mid. 3 pers. plur. of avdianjiii. dvSwrraTo, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing, of dvdi, 1 aor. mij. impv. 3 pers. sing, of aTrapveo/uu. diropvTJoTi, fut. 2 pers. sing, of dirapvtoixai. diraTaTu, pres. act. impv. 3 pers. sing, of dirardio. diraTt)8€i(ra, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. sing. fem. of dtrarda). dTre'(3t]. direXriXuflticrav, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of dnfpxofiai. direX9wv, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of dnepxofiat. atrtviyKtlv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dnocfyepai. aTr(vtx&r[vai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dnocpepa. direirvCYii, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of aTroTTvlya. dire'irvi|av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dnoirvtya. dirto-TaXiiv, 2 aor. pass, of aTrocrTfXXu. direVraXKa, pf. act. of aTTocTTcXXw. dire. direo-TciXa, 1 aor. act. of dTroirrc'XXa). an-eo-TT) (-7i. diniX-YTiKOTes, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of mraXyea. d-trt)X9ov (-9av, Alex. 3 jiers. ]ilur.), 2 aor. act. of ciKip)(0(uu. din]XXdx9ai, pf. pass. inf. of dTraWda-a-ai. oinipvT)crd)iT)v, 1 aor. of dnapveop.ai. din)(rira(rd|iiiv, 1 aor. of dTTaaTrd^ofxai. diroPdvTcs, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of dnofiaiva. oiroPTicreTai, fut. 3 pers. sing, of dTTo^alva. oiroSeSei-yiievov, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of diroSeUmfit. diroSeiKvuvTa (-Sei-yviovra), pres. act. ptcp. acc. sing. masc. of dnodfUmpi. diToScilai, 1 aur. act. inf. of d7rode!Kmp.i. dTToStSovai, -86to>, pres. act. inf. and impv. (3 pers. sing.) ot dnodlBapi. diroSiSovv, pres. act. ptcp. neut. of dTTO&iSafn. d^oSo9Tivai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of diroSiSajpi. diroSoE, -8u>, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of dnobi&oipi. dir. dTroKa9io-T(j, -rdvei, pres. act. 3 pers. sing, of d-noKadl(rrr]p.i. diroKaTtiXXd-yTiTe, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of dnoKaroK- XtJfrtro). dwoKpiOels, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of dnoKpiua. diroKTafvu, -KTiLvu, -KTt'vvii), -KT4V1K, prcs. ; see dwoKTeii/6ea>. dpai, 1 aor. act. inf. of alpco. dpas. 1 aor. act. ptcp. of aipo). dpt'o-ti, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of dpecrKu>. dpe'o-T), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 jiers. sing, of dptuKco. dpT|, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of alpa. dp9fi (-9wo-iv), 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of aipbi. dp9T)(reTai, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing, of aipa. dp9r|Ti, 1 aor. pass. impv. of aipco. dpKe'o-ri, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of dpxea. cipov, I aor. act. impv. of atpo). dpira-yevTa, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. acc. sing, masc of ipTrd^a. dfw (-oio-iv), fut. act. 1 pers. sing. (3 pers. plur.) of atpa. ai|'ii9f|, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ai^dva. 6^i9t\v, 1 aor. pass, of dcplrjpi. daipf(ij. d<{>etvai, 2 aor. act. inf. of d€is, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing, of (a(j)€o>) dcpltj/u. Forms of Verbs. 713 FoBMS OF Verbs. a<{>£(s, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of aKpirjin. a^ikil, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of ampf(o. 0(j)e\eiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of d. a4>«s, 2 aor. act. impv. of d(j)lr]nt. w^tavTai, pf. pass. 3 per.s. plur. of d(f>i7]jii. d4)fi, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of dcplrjfu. d(t>TiKa, 1 aor. act. of dfplrjiii. a^U]iiV, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of a^i'ijfii. a4>fcvToi, -ovrai, pres. pass. 3 pers. j)lur. of dcpirjiit. ■u^Ckcto, 2 aor. 3 pers. sing, of d(f)iiai€Ofiat. d4>io|i.cv, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of (d(j)ia>) dtplrjfii. a^iova-iv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of {d) d£o-Tao-o, pres. mid. impv. of dc^iVi-r/^i. d4)urTaTo, impf. mid. 3 jiers. sing, of dfptcrTTjfii. di|>opiEi, -o5o-iv, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing, and plur. of drpo- pi'fcu. ai|>w|uv, 2 aor. act. subj. I pers. plur. of du|ioiu|xevas, pf. pass. ptcp. of d(popoi6oi. dxOtivai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ayco. dx0T|o-e. a^as, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of avrTo). o<|ti, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of airrco. PaXu, fut. act. of /3dX\M. pdkoi, -\r\, (Ae), 2 aor. act. subj. (impv.) of ffdXKio. PapewrSu, pres. impv. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ^apea. Pai|ril, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of /Sotttu. PePa|i|ie'vov, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of /3ajrT. ■yo|ni(rdTW(rav, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. plur. of yajiia). 'Ye'Yt'vTiiiat, pf. pass, of yivofxai. ^e^e'vvTiiiai., pf. pass, of yewda). ■ye^ovav (-viis), 2 pf. act. 3 pers. plur. (ptcp.) of ytvopai. ■Ye-ydvei, plpf- act. 3 pers. sing, (without augm.) of yij/o/iai. •yevoiievos, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. (Tdf. ed. 7) of ylvopat. ■yevtVeu, 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, of yl.vop.ai.. ■y€VTi9iiTw, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of ylvopai. •ye'vTio-fle, 2 aor. mid. sul)j. 2 pers. plur. of yivopai. ■ye'vuvTai, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of y'lvofiai. ^-fifias, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of yapea>. Y^UXls, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing, of ya/xe&>. 7V01, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of yivaia-Ka. 7Voiis, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of yivaa-Ka. ■yvu, 7VU, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 3 pers. sing, of ywaa-Ka. •yvcuBi, 2 aor. act. impv. of yivaaKw. ■yvupioiJo-iv, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of yvaipl^a. Yvo)o-6i}, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of yivaa-Kui. yvworflTiVeTai, 1 fut. ])ass. 3 pers. sing, of yiva>|»ai, 1 aor. act. inf. of 8ta''""°> impf- pass. 3 pers. sing, of Siapprjympi. 8w'p(p)n?€v, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of Siappitympi. 8i€p(p)T|iicrav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of StaiTa(f>e9dptiv, 2 aor- pass, of Sia6elpa. 8i6((>9op|ievos, pf. pass. ptcp. of Sia. Siuldru, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing, of ii&Ka. Forms of Verbs. 714 Forms of Veujis. 8ni|TiT€, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. i)lur. of SmKa. 8iu)x9T|T0VTai, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ficwKu. SoBeio-av, 1 aor. ])ass. ptcp. ace. sing. fern, of SiSw/ii. 8o9t}, 1 aor. jiass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of diSafu. SoBiivai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of 6i'8' «■•yepet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of eyelpa. iyipids, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of iye'ipa. «'•yepetjo-eToi, 1 fut. ])ass. 3 pers. sing, of iyeipa. «7£'p8iiTi, 1 aor. pass. impv. of tytlpa. t-yTJ-yepiiai, pf. pass, of iydpa. iyr\^a,, 1 aor. act. of yafxiw. «■yKpivai, 1 aor. act. inf. of iyKplva, «•yvuKav (i. q. iyvuiKaaiv), pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of yivixTKU). c-yvuKtvai, pf. act. inf. of yivaxrKoi. «"yvojv, 2 aor. act. of yiv^fTKOi. lyvutrrai, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of yivaaKa. tYXpio-ai, 1 aor. mid. impv. of eyj^pia. «•yxpwrai, 1 aor. act. inf. of iyjfpia. (yXpi-TOV, 1 aor. act. impv. of iy^pla. c8a4>io£. «8iu|a, 1 aor. act. of hiiiKai. tSoXtoCo-ov, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of SoXioo». i'Spajiov. 2 aor. act. of Tpix""- 4'8u, e8«o-6v, 2 and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of hiva. «5t)v. «JiiTe, ejwv, impf. act. of fdo). «jTia, 1 aor. act. of Tp((f>w. «BvpSt], 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of diia. «£a, imi)f. act. 3 pers. sing, of ida. tl'aas), pf. act. 2 pers. sing, of Xa/x^dva). «IXkov, impf. act. of eXxa. clXKup.('vo$, pf. pass. ptcp. of eXicdm. €ll|a(i«v. 1 aor. act. 1 ])ers. ])lur. of eiKco. Elcr&pap.oOcra, 2 aor. act. ptcp. fem. of flcrTp€)(bi. elo-cXT]X\i0av (-Xi9a. €Ka0e(or a)p£. cKEpcura, 1 aor. act. of Kepdvwpi. 4KE'p8T]o'a, 1 aor. act. of KepBalvoi. «KKaOapaTe, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of iK. «KKaBcipt), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (KKaQalpo). tKx.i\v^ivo%, pf. pass. ptcj). of eK)(fa>. €KKoin]'o-r|, 2 fut. pass. 2 pers. sing, of eKKOjm). eKKovJ/ov, 1 aor. act. impv. of cKKonro). «KXacra, 1 aor. act. of xXdo). tKXavtra, 1 aor. act. of kXqio). «KXeXTjo-Oe, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of iiiKavBdva. tKXiietiv, 1 aor. pass, of KoKkm. iKO^axrit, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. plur. of kotvtoi. tKirXevo-ai, 1 aor. act. inf. of (Kw\eo>. 6'Kpa|a, 1 aor. act. of Kpd^ai. (Kpi^T], ■> aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of KpiTrro). €Ko-(j(rai, 1 aor. act. inf. of €K(ra)fo3. «KTtvtis. fut. act. 2 pers. sing, of (ktiIvw. «KTT](rafiT]v, 1 aor. of icrdopai. «KTio-rai, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of KTi^a. cKTpain]. 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of enrpcTrio. eKxpaiTTJo-ovrai, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ixTplira. eK4)iiT|, pres. subj. or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of eKi^va). €K4>mi, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of €K(pv. (Xd^arc (-P«T€), 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of XartSdvffl. cXaKT)o-£, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of Xdonco). 4'Xax«, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of Xayxdvo). eXcTio-ov, 1 aor. act. impv. of eXftm. eXtuo-Ofiai. fut. of ep^opai. 4XT]XaK6Tes. ]'f- act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of iKaivo). tX-fjXvBa, pf. of ipxopai. Forms of Verbs. 715 Forms of Verbs. IXifldo-OTio-ov, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of \i6a(oi. e\Kvo-ai or eXKvcrat, 1 aor. act. inf. of eXkoj. fWo-ydro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of eXXoyea. t\6|j.cvos, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. of aipfco- IXiriovo-iv, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of e'Xirifw- ()iaOov. "2 aor. act. of y.av6avu>. «(lao-cruvTo, l|ia(riovTo, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ;«xo-((r). «ve'imjov. -o-av, impf. and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ifiirrvia. «veo-njKOTa. pf. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of ivl(m)y.i. «vto-rwra, -u(rav, -uTos, pf. act. ptcp. acc. masc. and fern. and gen. sing, of imcrTTjiu. €V6T€iXd|iT]v, 1 aor. mid. of eircXXo). €V£<|>avi(rav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ifi(j)av'i,^a>. €V€<()vcrri9Tivai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of i^a\el(pa. i^avaa~rf](rr\, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing of e^avi(m)pi «Joveo-TTurav, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of c^avia-Tijijii. t|dpaT£, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of i^alpio. c^apEiTC, fut. act. 2 pers. plur. of i^alpa. «|ap9ii, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of i^aipa. t|t'8eT0 or e|e'SoTo, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of eKSiSwpi. «leiXaro or «IciXero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of e^aipeoi. €j£KaiiflT|o-av, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of exKala. (ItKXivav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of fKKXlva. «'^eKOirqs, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing, of eK/cdnro). t^eXe, 2 aor. act. impv. of i^mpeo). ii,tKii,ut, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, of «Xfya. «le'XiiTai, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing, of i^aipiui. t|«v«'-yKavT6s, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of eK(pfpa) €|€V£'YKCLV, 2 aor. act. inf. of iK. I|tv£v. e|r)€0-av, impf. 3 pers. plur. of (^etfii. i^pa)i)i.e'vos, ])f. pass. ptcp. of ^ijpaivto. t^ifipava and -pavOnv, 1 aor. act. and pass, of ^rjpaiva). €|TJpavTai, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ^tjpaiva. e|T|pe«rT|iro, 1 aor. act. of f^epewdoi. i^pTur^iivos, pf. pass. ptcp. of e^apri^o). i^-l]Xi\rai., pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of eiijxea. t^Uvai, pres. inf. of e^eipi. elio-rdvuv, e|i.(rruv, see i^itT-njpt. i^ouroviTi, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of eKrpcpai. «^ajo-ai, 1 aor. act. inf. of i^a>dia>. 4'^. £Trafl£V, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of Tsa. £ii-avaTraiicro(iai, fut. mid. of fwavaTravoi (see navai). £7ra|as, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of eVaym. eiropas, 1 aor. act. Jitcp. of ciraipa. eireipdo-u, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, of n-eipdfto. £ir£ipdTO (-puvTo), impf. mid. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of wetpda. £V£«ra, 1 aor. act. of nelBio. £ir£ur6Tnrav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of nclda. £i7£tx£v, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of enex'^- £ir£'K€iXav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of tViKeXXu. £Tr£K£'KXiiTO, plpf. pass. 3 pcrs. sing, of «VtitaXew. £Tr£Xde£TO (-flovTo), 2 aor. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of iiriXav Qdvopai. eitiXtiffiV, impf. act. of cmXiixa' tTr€iroi9£i, 2 plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of neida- £ir£. £ir£'xpi(rEV, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of iinxpia). £iniKpouvTO, impf. 3 pers. plur. of fwaKpodopai. EiTT]'v£i(rTrjfu. «irCoTTaTOt, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing, of eiriiTTafuu. eV£o"n]6i., 2 aor. act. impv. of it\>tarr)ixi. TJTevov (-. iTmia-f, 1 a(jr. act. 3 pers. sing, of jmJo). eiTwKtiXov, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cVokcXXcd. «p(p)avTi. lp(p)i(i|j.e'voi,, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. niasc. of plTrrai. €p(p)nrToi., pf. ])ass. 3 pers. sing, of pliTTco. «p(p)n|;av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ptWm. €p(p)«. ilur. of arpavvvu). ta-Twa-av, impv. 3 pers. i)Iur. of dpi. eV(J)a7(jitvos, pf. jtass. ptcp. of a(j>d^ai. ti), 2 aor. i)ass. 3 [jers. sing, of Odirra. tTe'Buv, 1 aor. ]iass. of ridrjpi. m6vi\Ka, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of dvrjaKO). cTtKcv, 2 aor. act. 3 ])ers. sing of tUtio. «Te'xST], 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of tIktu>. «Ti9ei, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of ridr^pi. i eTv6-i), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of 6vui. iir\f>ia-n\Kivix<. (euapeo-niKc'vai), pf. act. inf. of evapfaria. ii%a:p.T\v (eii^a£p.T)v), 1 aor. (opt.) of eij\opai. «i'pa|i€v. evpav, (.\le.\.) 2 aor. act. of fvplaKa. tvpoinevos and evp6(«vos, 2 aor. mid. ptc]). of eipiaKta. £up«9a)o-i.v, 1 aor. jias.*. subj. 3 pers. plur. of eip'iaKO. €ijpT]K€vai, pf. act. inf. of fvpltrKto. eiaXXo'|j.evoSi £<|)aXo'nevos, 2 aor. ptcp. of e(jidX\opai. i^6,vi\v, 2 aor. pass, of (paiva. eao-K€V, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of (jidaKO). cct>turaTo, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, of (jxiSopai. c4>€9ttpTiv, 2 aor. pass, of tpSdpa. €4>i8€ (€iri8«), im])v. of fVfiSov. ii^iXti. im])f. act. 3 pers. sing, of (piXea. f4)io-TaTai, pres. mid. 3 pers. sing, of e(jiipa^av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. ])lur. of (f>pd(r(Ta>. i^pia^av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of (f>pvd. ^PtwiiTf, pres. act. imjiv. 2 pers. jilur. (Tdf.) of a-pevwfu. IV, tiv or li\v, J^s, la, see fdm. Juo-ai, 1 aor. mid. impv. of (avvvpi. liia-a, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of (amviu. iiPouXt)9>)v, etc., see ^ovXopai. Ti'-ya-yov, 2 aor. act. of oycu. TJYa-ira, impf. act. 3 |)ers. sing, of ayanda. ■tj-ya-miKoo-i, pf. act. ptcp. dat. plur. cif dya7rda>. TJY-yei.Xov, 1 aor. act. 3 jiers. plur. of dyyeXXca. TJY'yiKa, -iv, 1 aor. pass, of eXeco). TJXeTintvos, pf. pass. ptcp. of fXec'u. ij\t'i]ira, 1 aor. act. of e'Xee'to. TJXen|/o, 1 aor. act. of aXfi'0oi). i]\KiDiit'vos, pf- pass. ptcp. of i\<6a. TJXXaJav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of aXXdcrcra. TJXXcTO, impf. 3 pers. sing, of aXXo/xat TJXiriKa, -era, pf. and 1 aor. act. of e'Xiri'fa. •i]|idpTT]Ka, pf. act. of AfiapTtivo). •ijiiapTOV, 2 aor. act. of a/iapTavco. TJ|jte6a, T](i.6v, im))f. 1 pers. ])lur. of elpi. TJucXXov and 4'|ieXXov, impf. of peWa. i\\i.r\v, impf. of flpi. -ij|ji<])ieo-n€'vos. pf. ])ass. ptcp. oi dptjjiivvviu. TJvc-YKi> 1 aor. act. of (pepco. r\V(i\6i).r\v, impf. mid. of dvt')(0). T\vi. iiv6a)"y(i.€vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of avotyio. ■ijve'u)|a (iive'w^a Tr?), 1 aor. act. of dvoiya. •^veu)x9T)V, 1 aor. pass, of dvoiyta. T\voiyT]v, 2 aor. pass, of dvoiya. TJvoi'yiit'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of ui/oiyo). TJvoila, 1 aor. act. of dvoiyw. TJvoCx^lv, 1 aor. pass, of dvo'iyai TJ|ei, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of lyKoo. T||ri, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of iyxo). ■q^Cou, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of d^Loa. TJIiuTai, pf . pass. 3 pers. sing, of d^toa, ijiraTTiOT), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of aTraTao). ilireiBiicrav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of diveiQkai. ijirciBouv, impf. act. of dnetde'ai. ijireiXci, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of dneiXea. ijiriaTovv, im])f. act. of an-toreia. lyropd, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of d-iropiw. T|'irrovTo, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of SnTto. Vjpa, I aor. act. of a'lpm. r\f>-(ilp-)ya'(fip.r\v. -o-d|ii]v. ini]if. and 1 aor. of ipya^ofiai, i^pe'6icra, 1 aor. act. of tpfdl^a. Tipco-a, 1 aor. act. of dpeV/cci). TJpeo-Kov, im])f. act. of dpeaxa. ^pi)|jiu8i], 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of fpjjfioa. •^pT)(iw|ievT)v, pf. pass. ptcp. ace. sing. fern, of epij/id». TipGiiv, 1 aor. pass, of a'tpco. TJpKtv, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of alpa. TJppie'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of al'piM. lipvttTo, impf. 3 pers. sing, of apveo/uu. TJpvTiixai, pf. pass, of dpveopai. lipVTiiie'vos, pf- pass. ptcp. of dpveopai. r[pvr\a-d,)ir\v, 1 aor. of dpveopai. T]pvi]'o-w, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing, of dpviopai. iip|d(iLTiv, 1 aor. mid. of apxai. ijpirdYt), 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ip-rrd^o). ■ripirao-£, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of dprrd^a. ilpTToo-flii, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of dpwd^a. TJpTvjieVos* pf- pass. ptcp. of dprvoj. TJPXovTo, impf. 3 pers- plur. of epxopai. TJpuiTouv, •ppuTuv, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of fpwrda. ifs, rJo-Ba, impf. 2 pers. sing, of dpi. TJcrOiov, impf. act. of ifrBia- •i]ie, impf. 3 pers. sing, of dlur. of tile 2 i)f. olSa (see el8a>, 11.). I'o-fli, impv. 2 pers. sing, of et/xi. ioTavojuv and io~rii(«v, yires. ind. 1 pers. plur. of la-rrjut. Il<7-T«, 2 pors. pliir. ind. or impv. of offia (see fl'Saj, II.). lcrTT|Keiv, plpf. act. of ictttj^i. (u|Mvos, prus. ptcp. of idoitat- KaBapKi, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing, of KaSaplCa. Ka6apCo-ai, 1 aor. act. inf. of KaOapl^a. KaeapCo-ji, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of Kadapi^a. Ka6ap£ KaTairtT), 2 aor. act. subj, 3 pers, sing, of KaTanivw. KaTa-iroBri, 1 aor. pass, subj. 3 pers, sing, of Karawivo). KaToprCo-ai., 1 aor, act, inf. or opt, (3 pers. sing ) of «a- TapTt^ay. KareurKTivoiv (-voOv), pres, act, inf. of KaTaa-Krjma. KaTdo-x«>(«v, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of Karex'-'- Karea-yuo-iv, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur, of KaTdyvvp.1. KaT€a|av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of KaTdyi/vjxt. KaTea|ei, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of Kardymp-i. Kart'Pi^ (-t](rav), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of KaTapaiva. KaTe7VU(r|i€V0S, pf, pass, ptcp. of KaTnywaaKa . KaTei,\iip,(«'vos, ]if. pass, ptcp, of KaTaKap.^dvto. KttTtiXT)4)t'vai, pf. act. inf. of KaToKajx^dvco. KaTCKaT), 2 aor, pass. 3 pers. sing, of KaraKaio). KarcKXao-c, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of KaTOKKao). KorriKKaira, 1 aor, act. of KaraKKeia. KarevexSeCs, 1 aor. pass, ptcp, of Kara^e'pu. KaTtvv-yno-av, 2 aor. pass, 3 pers. plur, of KaraviKra-a. KaT€ir€'o-TT)(rav, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of KaTf. KOTTixivTai, pf. pass. 3 pers, \>\ay. of KaTr]x(o>- KartixTJo'ii), 1 aor. act. subj, of Konix^oD KaxCuToi, ]if, pass. 3 pers, sing, of kotiuo). KarioKio-ev, 1 aor, act, 3 pers, sing, of Kai-ujicifo». Kav9i^Vu)i.ai, KauxiViap.ai, see Kaiio. Kauxdcat, pres, iud. 2 pers sing, of Kavxdopai. K£Ka9a(or t)pi(r(ie'vos, pf. pass, ptcp, of Kadapt^ai. KeKa9ap[«'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of Ka6aipa>. KEKaXv|j.)i.€'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of KaXuTTrm. K«Kav(i€vos, pf. pass, ptcp, of Kaia. K6Kepa. KCKpV|l|JLEVOS, pf, pass, ])tC25. of KpVTTTlO. KepdcraTc. 1 aor, act, impv. 2 pers, jilur. of Kepdvvvpi. KcpSavu, KepSrjirco, fut, act. of Kepdaivio. KtpSdvii), 1 aor. act. subj. of Kepdaiva. K(\dp\.a-\i.ai, pi. of ;(apifo/iai, KcxapiTuiJie'vn, ))f. pass, ptcp. nom. sing. fem. of j^apn-di» Ke'xpTifiai, pf. of ;^pdo/xat. KtX'upi-o'p.e'vos, Jif. pass. ptcp. of ;fmp('fM, KTipi|ai. (al. KT]pO|ai), 1 aor. act. inf. of Krjpvcrcra. KXdo-ai, 1 aor, act, inf, of KXda. KXaveraTt. 1 aor, act, impv. 2 pers. plur, of xXato), KXaiitru, KXavo-Ofiai, fut. of KXai'o). KX€i(r9u(riv, 1 aor. pass subj. 3 pers. plur. of KKfia. KXTi9Tis. KXn9(i|iev, KXt]9fjvoi, KXt)9e'v, 1 aor. pass, of Kokia. KXil|i€v, pres, ind, act. 1 pers, plur, of kXcm, kXw[1£vov, pres. pass, ptcp, neut. of /cXdm, KX(ivT«5, pres, act, ptcp, nom, plur, masc. of xXdo). Koi)iu)|i«vos, pres. pass, ptcp, of Koipda. KoXXTi9T|Ti, 1 aor, jjass, impv, of KoXXdm, KO|i,t«iTat, (.Vttic) fut, mid 3 pers, sing of Kopt^a KO|ji(. Xa6etv, 2 aor. act. inf. of \av6ava>. \axoiio-i, 2 aor. act. ptcp. dat. l)lur. of 'kayxava. Xax«|i«v, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of \ayxava> Xe\o«((r)|«'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of \ova>. Xs'Xuo-ai, pf. pass. 2 pers. sing, of \ia. XT)(|i)<|)9fj, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of \ap^dva>. Xtj(p.}4^op,ai, fut. of \ap,^dv(a. XCirg, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of XeiVo). (iiificTc, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of pavdava. |Mi6iiT€, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of pav6av. (leBiiTTavai., pres. act. inf. of pfOltrTq^u. |jie9uo-9. p.givat, 1 aor. inf. of pkvuy. lieCvavTEs, 1 aor. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of pivai. ji€£vaT€, |i€ivov, 1 aor. impv. of peva* |xeCvt|, -•c\ri, -uo-iv, 1 aor. subj. of pevoa. ficXtTa, jires. act. impv. of fieXerao). )ie|ia9T]Kus. pf. act. ptcp. of ixavdavco. (i.e|i€vriK€i.o-av, plpf- act. 3 pers. plur. of pivco. p,£|i<.a|jL|x£'vos or -.i\t.vr\(T9i, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of pipvr]tTKu>. ' |ji€p,vT||jiai, pf . pass, of pveio. (levetTc, fut. ind. 2 pers. plur. of peva. l«'veTe, pres ind. or imj)v. 2 pers. plur. of fievt». (lEToPa, |WTo^r^9i, 2 aor. act. impv. of peTaffalvco. |i£Tao~ra9w, 1 aor. pass. subj. of pedlarqpi. |j.«Tao-Tpa<|)i)Tu, 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of pera- . (ivT]. vooiiip.€va, pres. pass. ptcp. neut. plur. of vaia. dSuvoo-ai, pres. ind. mid. 2 pers. sing, of otvvaa. oicrto, fut. act. of <^€p(a. o|jivvvai, op.vv€iv, pres. act. inf. of opvvat. o|io'a-ai, -as, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of opvico. oiJLo'crt], 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of 6pvva>. ovaC|j.T|v, 2 aor. mid. opt. of ovlm^pi. dpiio-ai, pres. act. ptcp. nom. pliu\ fem. of 6paa>. d9€£s, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of 6paa>. a^/a. d>|rr), fut. 2 pers. sing, of opaa. d4<€iv. 2 aor. act. ptcp. of iTap€x<>>- ■irapa.Ti9£o-9a)o-av, pres. impv. 3 pers. jilur. of n-aparWij^xi. iraptSiSoo-av. impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of ■srapahibiapi. ■iTap4'9EVTO, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of wapariOripi. iropsi. pres. ind. 2 pers. sing, of irdpftpi. ■irapei(i«'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of ■naplr]pi. irapflvai. 2 aor. act. inf. of Tvapirjpi and pres. inf. of ndpiiiu. irap£ia-a|ou. •irapf'Ku>|/ev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of ■napaKvnTui. irapeXdpoo-av, 2 aor. act. (Alex.) 3 jiers. I)lur. of -rrapn- Xnpjiuva. ■naptXda-ovToi, fut. 3 i)crs. plur. of irapfpxonai,. ■KaptKy\\vUva\. (-9iis), pf. act. inf. (ptcp.) of vaptpxapat. irapcXeaTM (-fltTw), 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing, of Ttapipxopai- -iraptve-yKeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of napa(jiepu>. irape'|ci, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of ■napix'^- •irapc'lxi. fut. mid. 2 pers. sing, of napex<^- irapeirtKpavav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of napaniKpaiva. -irap£crK€i5a. irap6crTt)Ko'T€s and ■n-opeo-TwTcs, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of irapiiTTrjpi. irapto-rq'o-OTe, 1 aor. act 2 pers. plur. of naplarrjiu. -irapeTtive, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of napaTelva. -irapeTijpouv, impf. act. 3 jjcrs. plur. of napaTr^peoi irapT]-yyci\av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of TrapayyeWa. -irapTiKoXoiieiiKas (-«ras), pf. (1 aor.) act. 2 pers, sing, of TTapaKoXovOeoi . irapT)V£i, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of Trapaivico. irapriTTine'vos, Jjf. ]iass. ptcp. of TrnpaiTeopai. •n-apijTTJo-avTo, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of napaiTfopai irapuKiio-fV, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of irapoiKew. •7rapio|iJveTO, impf. pass. 3 pers, sing, of nupo^ivai. irapiuTpiivav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers, plur, of irapoTpvvco irapuxt)[it'vos, Jif. ptCJ5. of napoixopai. irttuo-aTu, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing, of iraia. ireiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of tti'vu irtto-as, 1 aor. act. pto]). of jreWw. TTCIO-U, fut. act. of TTflda. ire'iraxiTai, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing of navo). •7r€iT-eipa|i€'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of neipao). •ir€ireipao-|j.e'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of iTfipd^O). -n-e'-n-eio-iiai, -pie'vos, ]if. |)ass. ind. and ptcp. of rreida. ■irfTruor(i€'vos. pf. ])ass. 2)tcp. of Trunin. ireirio-TeiJKeicrav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of TVKTTeva. ireii-io-TtuKo'cri, pf. act. ptcp. dat. plur. of TrioTfuo). ■ire-n-\avT|cr6€, pf. pass. 2 pers. plur. of nKavaai. ■n-EirXd-rvvTai, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of irXarivo). ir€i7\7)pa)K6vat, pf. act. inf. of irKrjpoa). ire'iroiBa, 2 pf . of 7Tfl6o>. Tre-TTOvSa, 2 pf. of 7rd(TX(o. irewoTiKtv, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of itor'i^ai. Tre'irpaKC, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of mTrpaa-Kco. ireirpafie'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of m7rpa(TK0>. ireVpaxa, pf . act. of 7rpd(rpo'(U. ■rrepid\|/as, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of ntptaTTTa. •ir«pi.8pa|i. TTSpC^wfai, 1 aor. mid imi>v. of Ttepi^wvvva. irepiT]p£iTO, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of Trepiaipiai. •ir«pi8e'vT€s. 2 aor. act. ])tcp. nom. plur. of nfptrWrjpt. Trepito-Tatro, pres. nii irepipfp^Tl^avTes, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. of ?reptppiyyn);u. irepicro-cOo-ai 1 aor. act. inf., and ircpKro-ttro-ai 1 aor. act. o]]t. 3 jiers. sing., of nepiiraeio). irepiT€T|iT)|itvos, pf. pass. ]itc]i of nepiTepvo}. irepiTiBeao-iv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of ntpiriOijiu. i7epiT|i-q9fjvai, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ireptTipva. ireo-eiv. 2 aor, act. inf. of ttIttto). ireo-etTai (-ovvrai), fut. 3 jjcrs. sing, (pl'ir.) of jrijirffli mo-ere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. jilur. of nlnTm. ■n-tTTjrai, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing, of niropat. ■ir€Tii[i,evos, pres. ])tc]). of neTaopm. ■7V€<|>av€'pwTai (-v€pM(r9ai), pf. pass, (inf.) of (j>aV€p6. irXiipuo-ai 1 aor. inf., and irXupwo-oi 1 aor. opt. 3 jjers. sing,, of 7rX?jpdw irXTJo-as, 1 aor. act. jitcp. of nipTrkripi. irXiio-BtCs, 1 aor. pass, ptcp, of TrlpTrXrjpn. iTX-ticr9^s, 1 aor. j)ass. subj 2 pers. sing, of jri/ijrXij/u. •n-ve'r), pres. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of nveai. ■Tron]'TiTeuov, impf. act. of npo(prjTevQ>. Trpoe'<}>6aa-«v, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of npo(\>6ava>. irpoempaKOTes, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of npoopdio. irpofj-ytv, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of ■npodya. irpoTiXTTiKoVas, pf. act. ptcp. acc. plur. masc. of 7rpofX7rif<». irpoTi|iapTT^Kus, pf. act. ptcp. of TrpoafiapTavo). irpoT)Ti.ao-afi£9a, 1 aor. 1 pers. [jlur. of TrpoaiTidopai. •irpoTiTo{|iacra, 1 aor. act. of npocTOLpd^io. irpoKeKT)piry(j.evos, \ii. pass. ptcp. of TrpoKrjpvcriTa. irpoK€X£ipicr|it'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of Tzpox^ipl^a. irpoKex"poTOVT|H€'vos, pf . pass. ptcj). of Trpo^eiporovico. irpoopuiiT^v autl Trpowpwp.-qv, impf. mid. of irpoopdw. irpoo-avt'BEVTo, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. ]ilur. oi TrpoaavarWripi irpoo-etp-ydtraTo, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of irpoatpyd- Copai. irpoo-EKXtflr], 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of woocrKKlvo). •irpo(r£KoXXTi9ii, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of irpoaKoWaa. ■7rpo(r€Kvvouv, impf. act. of TrpotTKvvea). ■irpoo-€VT]vo\£V, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of npo(r(f>€pa>. •7rpo(r€ire(r€, -. TrpO(r€(|)mvei, imi)f. act. 3 pers. sing, of Ttpo(T(pavia). ■rrpoo-eaivTos, pres. act. ptcp. gen. sing, of Ttpoa-eda. irpooTi've-yKa (-Kov), 1 aor. (2 aor.) act. of npocrcpepQi. TTpooTive'xSri, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ■irpo(T(pfpQ}. •jrpocnip^aTaTO, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, of npodfpyd^op.ai. irpoo-TivlaTo, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, of npoaeixop.m. ■n-pooTnixeTO, impf. 3 pers. sing, of npocrev)(opxu. irpoVOts, 2 aor. act. impv. of npoa-Tldrjpt •7rpo •irpoTpt\l;a|i6vos, 1 aor. mid. ptcp. of irporpi-na. irpovirfipxov, impf. act. of ■irpovndpx. irroTiBe'vTes, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. jilur. masc. of 7rroe. o-iraptfe, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. of arrelpa. oTTtCo-ov, 1 aor. act. impv. of oTrevSa. f|T€, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 l)ers. plur. of a). trrpuHTOV, 1 aor. act. impv. of arpaiwvai. o-vYKOTaT£9€i(i€'vos, ])f. mid. ptcp. of (TVyKaTaTldlJpl. o-u7KttTaTi9eii. oT)(iiTapovT«s, pres. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of a-vpTrdpeipt. crv|i({>ueurai, 2 aor. pass. ])tcp. nom. plur. fem. of trv^^iim. trwaydytn, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of avvdyw. Forms of Veiibs. 722 Forms of Verbs. (TvvovtKeivTo, imjjf. 3 pcrs. 2)lur. of trvvavaKfifxai. cruvairax6£'vT6s, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. pliir. masc. of ovva7Tay. o-waTTrjxfll. 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of crvvaTrayai. (Tvva-n-uXeTO, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of avvawoWviu. orvvopai, 1 aor. act. inf. of avvalpo). o-uvax9TJo-0|jioi, 1 fut. pass, of crvvdyai- (TwScSefitvoi, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of ovvSea. a-uviltv^iv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of a-u(ivyvviii (Twe'BevTO, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of avvridq/it. via. J if. act. ptcp. fem. of (TvXKafi^di/a. tcrTrjiu. (Tuve'-n-Lov. 2 aor. act. of (rvimivu). (Tvveo-irdpa^ev, 1 aor. act. 3 pcrs. sing, of f. Jiass. ptcp. of (ruoTf'XXm. o-uvtoTMo-a (-TMTa), 2 pf. ptcj). nom. sing. fem. (neut. plur.) of a-vvicrrrnu. tniveTola, 1 aor. act. of ovvrcKTao). oT)V£Td<)>T^|itv, 2 aor. jiass. 1 pers. plur. of (rvvBaitTui. o-viv€T6, 2 aor. act. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of trvvcrjfit- >. o-iiv£\|/TJ(|>i. OTJVTJKav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of irvvirjpi. (ruvi\\air(v, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of avvc\avua. crw'riXXa oTjviipiraK£i, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of o-vvapird^a). oTjvTipiroo-Qv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of (rwaptrdCco. o-vvf|(rav, imj)f. 3 pers. plur. of 9ai or -Tpi4)9f . act. of ridrnti. T£9£|i£Xi«T0, plpf, pass, 3 pers, sing, of 6(p(\i6. T£9pap.p.£'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of Tpttjia. T£9pauo-|i€'vos, ))f. pass. ptc]i. of ffpaia. T£9ii|x£'va, i^f. pass. ptcp. neut. of Bia. T£9iI)o-iv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of Ttdrjfu. t£'kt], 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of tUtui. T£X£. T£TI(1T)|JL£'V0S. pf . paSS, ptC)), of TLpdiO. T£TpaxtiXio-(i£'vos. pf, pass, ptcj), of Tpaxi^iCio. T£Tu4)UTai, pf, pass, 3 pers. sing, of Tv(p6a. T(Tu\a., T£TvxTlKo, pf. act. of Tvyxdfii). T£x9£ts, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of tiktu. Ti9£a(riv, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. plur. of Tidrjpi. Turouo-iv, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of riva. vmSeila, 1 aor. act. of xmohe'iKvvpi, imir\KO., 1 aor. act. of vnoTi^rnii. vireXoPfv, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of VTroKa/ipdvay. vireX£i<)>9iiv, 1 aor. pass, of uTroXeiVo). vir£')i,£tva, 1 aor. of vKopevaj. ijir£'p.£vov, impf. of vtTopivo). ij-irc|ji,vTio-9Tiv. 1 aor. pass, of xmop.ipvi). liirEVfyKtiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of vTrocfiepio. vTKvdovv^ impf. act. of viroifoeo}. vTr£irX£u. iSwiiYov, imjif. act. of vTiaym. vin]Kouov, impf. act. of inaKovw. vTnjve'YKa, 1 aor. act. of vvo<^ipa>. \Sirf)pxov, impf. act. of map)(a>. vTroSE'SeKToi, pf. 3 pers. sing, of vnohixopai. viroScStiiie'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of vn-oSeoj. I'lro'Siio-at, 1 aor. mid. impv. of imoSea. ■tii-oSpa(io'vT€s, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of vrro- iJiTOiJietvas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of imopeva. v-irop.6fj.€VHKo'Ta, pf. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of iiropiva. v-iro(ivT)(rai, 1 aor. act. inf. of viTopipvr)(TKa>. ijiTop.VTJ(ra>. fut. act. of {mop^pmjaKci). ijiroirvevo-avTOs, 1 aor. act. ptcp. gen. sing, of xmoTrvea. iSirooTciXnTai, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing, of vTrooTe'XAo). vTTOTaY-n, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of vnoTwjcra). iSiroTa-yTiVoiiai, 2 fut. pass, of vTroTaatrto. viroTaYlTc, 2 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of vjroTaaaai. TjiTOTo^ai, 1 aor. act. inf. of vTrordaao}. vTTOTao-o-eVBuerav, pres. mid. impv. 3 pers. plur. of ino- rdacro). liiroTETaKTai, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of xmoracrcTa. JcrrepTiKevoi, pf. act. inf. of vcmpea. v<\iaia, 1 aor. pass. subj. of v^oa. (|>d'YE(rav, fut. 2 pers. sing, of iaO'ua. avT|, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (patva. avg, -vijs. -vwo-iv, 2 aor. pass. subj. of (j)alva>. 4>avT]'(ro|xai. and avov|iai, 2 fut. pass, of (paiva. ct>€uro|iai, fut. of (^eiSo/uu. 4>Ev|op.at., fut. of (pevyco. 4)8ap^, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (pdeipa. 0apT((ro|ioi., 2 fut. pass, of (pdelpa. t}>6a(ru(t€v, 1 aor. subj. 1 pers. plur. of 6ava. ()>95pei, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of (pdelpa. t(iotv, -[loOv, pres. act. inf. of (ptpSo). pa-yfj, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (ppaa-aa. pove£(r6a», pres. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of cppovia. (i>Tiei, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing, of (paiTt^a. yoXwriv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of ;(aXaa>. Xapiivai, 2 aor. pass. inf. of j^aipoi. Xapt)'o-O(ioi, fut. mid. of )^aipa. XapTiTe, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ^atpa. XaptjTe, 2 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. of xotpa. XapoSp^- \lrr|\a4>Ti6t)v, 1 aor. pass, of 6paa>. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. p. 1», s.v.'A(33a; respecting its accent see Trf/.Proleg. I p. 102; Kaulz.icli, Grammatik d. Biblisch-Aramaischen u.s.w. (Leipzig, 1884) p. 8. p. 4", s.v. dyiTHi, line 13, " Pliilo " — yet see Quod deus immut. § 14. p. 4', line 1, add "See Weslcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 48 sq." p. 11, s. V. dSiiinpiTos; on the passage in Ignat. ad Eph. see Bp. Lghlft. Apost. Fathers, Ft. II. vol. u. sect. i. p. 39. p. 13^ s.v. adeos; on the apphcation of the term to Christians by the heathen see Bp. Lghtft.'s note on Ign. ad Trail. 3, vol. ii. p. 160. p. 19», s. v. alwv, 1 b. fin., add "oi an' alwvos 'Putfimot, Dion Cass. G3, 20, 2 cf. 5." p. 71», s. V. 'Ap/xayf Sciv, fin., add " But see WH u. s." p. 78% s. V. dpxi-epevs 3, for the application of the term to Christ by the early writers see Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36 p. 118 sq., and on Ign. ad Philad. 9 vol. ii. p. 274. p. 79», apxav, end, add " See Hort in Diet, of Chi-is. Biography, s. v. Archon." p. 98*, s. V. /Sao-iXem, fin. — to the re£E. add "Edersheim, Jesus the ^lessiah, i. 264 sqq." p. 100% s. V. BfeXff/3oi!\, last Une but one, add " But see Baudissin in Ik-rzog ed. 2, vol. ii. p. 209 sq. ; Kaulzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9." p. 120", s. V. roXyo^d (or -6a). add a reference to Kautzsch, Grammatik des BibUsch-Aramaischen (Leip- zig, 1884), p. 10. p. 164°, s. V. 'Expats, add to the reff. "■ Neubauer in Studia Biblica (O.siford, 1885), pp. 39-74." p. 181', s. V. eliTov, 3 d. (on the ace. w. inf. after it) add "See GUdersleeve's note on Just. JIart. apol. 1, 12, p. 127 sq." p. 192'', s.v. iKaTovTapxoi; on the Attic preference for the termination -apxoi-, rather than -dpxijs, see Meisterhans, Gram. d. Attisch. Inschriften, p. 53 sq. p. 194", s. V. «SiK7j, s. V. 6p6vos, fin., add " Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 3." p. 295", s. V. I, I. On the interchange of i and ei cf. Meisterhans, Gram. d. Attisch. Inschriften, p. 23 sqq. p. 335'', s. V. KaTamraa-iia, see Survey of "Western Pal- estine, vol. " Jerusalem," p. 340 sq. p. 358", s. V. itov/it ; add " See Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 631 note." p. 365\ Une 18, add to the ref. "Bp. Lghtft.'s note on Ign. mart. Polyc. 8 p. 959." p. 376", s. V. \(irpa. add to the reff. "Clark in the Speaker's Com. on Lev. pp. 559 sqq. 570 sqq." p. 382', s. V. Xoyof HI. A translation of Liicke's dis- cussion may be found in the Christian Examiner for 1849. pp. 165 sqq. 412 sqq. To the reff. given may be added "Mansel in Alex.'s Kitto, s.v. Philosophy." p. 388'', paixavdt ; cf. Kautzsch. Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 173. p. 402*. s. V. pea-OS 2, on iv peaa and ova jilaov cf. R. F. Wet/mouth in Journ. of Philol. for 1869, ii. pp. 318-322. p. 421", s.v. N, k; on 1» i^eXicvtrrtKov see Meisterhans, Gram. d. Attisch. Inschriften. § 2"). p. 433*, insert in its place O, o : — on its interchange with omega see Q, a>. 7-26 p. 445'', s. V. 6nola>iM, fin. ; add to the reff. " Dickson, St. Paul's Use of the Terms 'Flesh' and 'Spirit' (Glas- gow, 1883), p. 322 sqq." p. 474', s. V. Ttals, Syn, sub fin., on the elasticity of the term as respects age see Bp. Lghtft. Apostolic Father.s, Pt. II. vol. i. p. 432. p. 514* ; to the reff. s. v. tticttis add "A. Schlatter, Der Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1SS5)." p. 529'', s. V. ■KoKvs, 0. On the example from Polyb. (5, 8, 3) ci.&pa, 2, p. 679^ line 2. p. 572", s.v. (rarav, fin.; add to the reflf. ^^ Dorner, System d. Christ. Glaubenslehre, § 85, vol. ii. 1 p. 188 sqq.; Woldemar Schmidt in Ilerzog ed. 2, xv. 358 sq." p. 581*, s. V. Sfivpva ; on the form Zfivfiva see Bp. Lyhlft. Apostohc Fathers, Pt. If. vol. ii. p. 331 note. p. GCg', line 3, add to the ref. " cf. Expositor for Nov. 1885, p. 381 S(iq." p. 672% s. V. X^ienriavos ; to the reff. at the close add " Bp. Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. i. p. 400 sqq." Many interesting facts relative to noteworthy New Testament forms will be found in that admirable little compend ^leisterhans's Grammatik der Attischen In- schriften (Berlin, 1885). See, for example, on the in- trusion into the 2 aor. of the a of the 1 aor. (fjveyKav, eirras, (vpifievos, etc.) pp. 81 sq., 85, 88; on the aorists in -Ka and -tra, p. 81 sq. ; on yi{y)vofim, yi(y)vu>, Oapcros, Kprjs, KTrjpa, ptjKiTi, pi]ri.s (priri), viiTTta, xi'^'o» ; that the following are as old as Pindar, Herodotus, or the Tragedians : ayviaaia, alpoppoiO). tKboxij, eVotKcoj, e^aKoaiot, c^w^fv, iTTOLivoi. 'Ef^tVtoj, Spoeu>, Koiroo), KoKa^cj, Kpaambov, Ma*cf- 8wv, pdraios^ peiTOL, ^erep^o). prj8€7TOT€, prj^eno), M^Soff, pwpaivcoj VTjy oiiKoiiv, *'^'X''-' <^X^^°^' '^^pd(Tr]pos. ndpotKOS, TTopa, npocTTdris, ardSiov, (rraTrjp, oToa, avvoiKeo), XaX- talos ; that the following may be found in Thucydides, Aristoj)hancs, Plato, or Xenophon : dypapparos, aSd- Travos, d\r}do3, *A;(ata, eyytcrra, (yyvTcpov, enidctrts, cTTt- Kadi^o), £77i(rKfuafa). (caraXaXeo). paraioXiyoi, pfiTiye, pvd, poVO'LKOS^ VVVL^ 060VLOV, TTUpOLVOS, pa(j)ii^ (TTTOvdaidlS, CTTU- pvos, avvayayr), trvvaipo), (r(j)vpis, (pdais, (f>i\o(Tocj)Ui ; that the following are in use from Aristotle on : infKrilva, ilTi(TTr)pi^u>, fiBvTTjs, ^X"^' Kepdriov, kotttj, papyap'iTrjS (Theophr.), vdpSos (Theophr.), TrptiTwr; that the fol- lowing may be found in the 3d century before Christ : ^aSiws, (irdv (inscr. B.C. 265), — SfKae^ and SeKaoicra> in the Sept. ; that the following appear in Polybius : 'AXe^at>8piv6s, 'AvTioxfis, npocravcxo) ; while Diod. Sic, Dion. Hal., or Strabo vouch for "Apayjf, 'Aindpxit, 'EwiKOvpfios, rdxioi/. Other words without vouchers either first make their appearance in the New Testament writings, or are so treated in the Le-xieon as to furnish a student with the means of tracing their history. CORRIGENDA IN THAYER'S GRIMM'S NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. COHEIGENDA IN THAYEE'S CtEIIM'S NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. XV" , xvi '', p. XVI " p. XVI p XVlll " V- p. xiv », insert as line 2, Sapientia (Salomonis), see Wis- dom of Solomon. I. 9, for schen read sche let the first four entries succeed one another (ilphalielicalli/, viz. Gottling, etc., Goodwin, etc., etc. II. 3, 4, for with Supplement . . . appeared. read with Supplement, vol. i. (1885), vol. ii. with Addenda (1887). s. V. Schaff-Herzog : — add at end " Revised edition, 1887." paragraph '), line 3, for 5420 read 5-594 line 4, for 52G0 read 5300 2«, heading, read 'A|3(Xiji/v s. V. a^vtraos, last line but three, read Diog. Laert. 4, (5,) 27 T', s. V. ityKvpa, line 3 sqq., read with two teeth- like extremities often but by no means always without flukes ; see Roschach in Daremberg and Saglio's Diet, des Antiq. (187.3) p. 2G7; Guhl and Koner p. 258] : v. a&Kla, line 2 sq. read '^contend in public games (e. g- Olympian," etc. line 4, read " poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit," etc. s. v. m/io, 1 d., last line but one, /or (Joel iii 4) read (Joel ii 31 (iii. 4)) p. IG», last line but two, for 1, 13, 18 sq. read 1, (13.) 18 sq. p. 19% last line, /or 7. 34 read 7, 34 p. 19\ line 9; for X2n read K3n p. 22'', s. v. dicoXou&'o), last line but two, /or "j'73 read 'iba (i. e. remove the daghesh). p. 25, page-numeral has ' wrong font ' 5 p. 27«. s. v. ikr)6iv6s, last line but one, after " Rev." insert [xix. 9] ; p. 28*, s. V. aWrfKoiui, note the fact that WH accent 'AXXi/Xoukj 14«, s. 15», 33'', s. V. 'Aficif, line 2, before Lk. insert [Mt. i. 10 LTTrWH]; 43'', line 4, dele the , after 28 44% s. V. civfiioi, last line but one, insert a comma after fii5ao"KaXiap " last line, dele the comma after Lk. xvii. 1 51'', s. V. dm^pio-Tor, add an * at end. 52'', last line but four, dele the comma after i. 3 64", s. V. anoKTfivo), line 3, for p. 76 read p 73 69«, line 9, place the period inside the last ) 69'', s. V. d7ro, line l,/o/" dTnjveyKclv read dnfVfyKfiv 73", s. V. d/jtnj, 2 b. for excellencies read excellences 75", s. V. aparjv, last line but one, for (and Inscrr. as there referred to) read ; Midler's note on Barn. ep. 6, 2 p. 158 75'', Syn. opTi, ^Si;, viiv, line 9 sq . for vvv and ^8ij are associated in 1 Jn iv. 3 read ^Sr/ and tiprt are associated in 2 Th. ii. 7 ; vvv and ^l^rj in 1 Jn. iv. 3. 82", s. V. 'AcrvyKpiTos, line 1, after 'haivKp. add (cf. aiv, II. fin.) 87'', first paragraph, last line, for Rev. viii. G, etc.). read Rev. viii. 6 ; xviii. 7 ; cf. Scrivener's Greek Testament (1887) p. v note). Tr reads avToiv in Rev. vii 11. 88, page-numeral, the first 8, is ' wrong font ' 88", s. V. d<^eiSoi', last line, add Curtius p. 687 sq. ■89", heading, turn the <^ 94", s, V. ^anri^w. line 4, after " frequentative " in- sert [?] 97«, linel5,"tsn HO^O — probably the ar/ic/e should be stricken out; cf. Prof. Geo. F. Moore in the " Andover Review " for July 1 887, p. 1 05. 98'', s. V. ^affrdfo), line 1, after 1 aor. f^aaracra; add. Pass, pres. inf. /Saordffff^at ; impf. 3 pers. sing. e^ao-rdfeTO ; 107", line I. for -66. WII read -da Tr WH 107^ s. v. rdfa, line 7,/or 16, 30 read IG, 2, 30 108'>, s. V. raXtXata, last line but four, /or 16, 34 read 16, 2, 34 lll'>, s. V. yitma, line 3, in the word ;3 remove the point under : line 15, insert a comma after the square brackets, line -29, for 2 K. i. read 2 K. i. 10-12 113'', s. V. r(wrj(rap(T, line 5, first Hebrew word, /or •iD-j)J read tQ'3J 118^ line 1, before •' Eph. v. 5" insert 1 Co. ii. 11 : 135', s. V. 3(a/3dXXp.a tov KVfH->v, 1 Co. xi. 29 [RG] read to criofia (toO Kvplov). 1 Co. xi. 29. p. 142», line 2 sq. rearf " sojourners far away from home, in Pontus" s. V. diaaTpe<}>-j}, line 7, dele the comma after Lk. xxiii. 2 p. lis*", s. V. 8ia(ji6(ipo>, line 1, strike out [impf. SU(j)6ei- pov]; 160", line 8, /or only read chiefly 163^, for tpSo(iT]KovT(«'| read i^ho\i.r\KovTa-i^ for €p8oni]KovToirc'vTe read «p8oiii|KOVTa-irc'vT€ ISC', s. V. eiirov, line 4, dele " optat. eliroipi.," 181", last line but four, dele the comma after "indi- cated " p. ISl"", line 5, /or "with the use" etc. read "by the use " etc. 184'', line 28, for els v/jas read els u^af 192'', s. V. eK^dWo), line S,for "greater" read "more" 197", at end of first paragraph put an asterisk. 199'', s. V. cKTeivoi, line 1, dele [impf. e^ereivov]; 200% s. V. (KTivdaaai, last line but one, read " Acts xviii. 6 ; [cf. B. D. u. s. ; Neh. v. 13]." 203'', 1. 18 from bot.,/or Gen. xix. 18 read Gen. xix. 1 9 21 2% middle, /jr contemporaneousness read concomi- tance p. 213% fine print paragraph, last line,/or W. 48 read esp. Meisterhans p. 46 s. V. evvea, put an asterisk at the end. s. V. einiTTiita^co, last line but two, for sensuous read sensual line 15, for ino read inn line 17, for inpS read IH'?'?, and/or ]OnS read s. V. epyov. line 3, for nOsSo read npsSn s. V. evv are wanting in good Mss. p. 357'', line 23 from hot., /or vii. 31 read vii. 31' p. 376", s. v. XfiTovpyof, last line but 8, after "decrees" put a colon, p. 381% line 3, for ii. 4 read ii. 1 p. 389", s. V. pdvva. lines 3 and 4, the initial letter of the Arabic word should be Mim. p. 392'', s. v. paaadopai, line 6,ybr the semicolon read a colon, p. 394'', s. V. peyas- line 4, for compar. pel^av read com- ])ar. pei^Qjv, -ov, p. 396'', s. V. pfX\r (exc. T) read (exc. T WH) p. 405'', s. V. peTavoew, line I, for iperavorjaa read pere- voTfo-a p. 409% Une 9 from bottom, /or cf. Gildersleeve as above p. 55 sq. read see C. J. Vaughan's Com. on Ro. ii. 14 p. 418'', s. v. pop6(J(i>iios; T WII (rvv^acriXtCa), avv- yvupij> etc. p. 599^" line \, dele avv-KXTjpoai in line 3, read a-mj^nipai, (Tvi')(pdoiJ.at, crvv)(ioi. avv- •^v)(Oi, etc. in line 4, dcte a-vv^a in line 6, dele trvvxpdopai in line 7, dele avyyevis in line 9, dele (Tvpfi,op in line 12, after L T WII insert (rvyyevls in line 17, Jbr avyxvifvo) read avyxeta in line 27, dele avp^aatKtva GOl», s. V. avvavaplyvvpi. line 4, after 2 Th. iii. 14 add [here K 1" -aBe, h Tr WH -aOat] CO?*", s. V. 2vpos, line 3, for vii. 2ii Treg. read vii. 26 Tr WII nirg. GOS*", s. V. (TveTpaTtuTrjt, line 1,/or T Tr WII o-di»- (so Lchiii. in Phileni. ; read L T Tr WII avv- ( CI 4», s. V. TaKavTov, line 8, /or 210 read 20O line 9, /or 1167 read 1000 620'', s. V. TcXiXa8e'X(|)fia hne 3, "The White City" (.Sayce), add a\. ''the ])ied or stri])cd citv" (cf. Bp. Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. \ ul. ii. sect. i. p. 245) 609'', line 7, add to ref. Schqf, Hist. i. 841 sqq. 672", s. V. xp'o-Tos, line 3, /or projihcts read ]>atriarchs 672'', line 5. r/t/e the "etc." 673'', s. V. xpva-fos. line 3, for ii. 4 read ii. 1 678'', s. V. ^jrvx"THos, LL.D. Royal Svo, Sheep, SI 25. Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. ENGLISH - LATIN DICTIONAKY. A Copious and Ciiik-al Englisli-Latin Dictionary. By William Smith, LL.D., and Tiikophilus D. Hall, AI.A. With a Dic- tionary of Proper Names. 8vo, Sheep, ^-t 00. SHELDON'S HISTORY OF CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE. History of Christian Doctrine. By H. C. Sheldo.v, Professor of Church History in Boston University. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $3 50 per set. SCHAFF'S CREEDS OF CHRISTENDOM. Bibliotheca Syfiibotica Ecc/esite Universalis, Tlie Creeds of Christ- endom, with a History and Critical Notes. By the Rev. Philip Schafp, D.D., LL.D. Three volumes. 8vo, Cloth, .$15 00. ABBO'rrS LIFE OF CHRIST. Jesus of Naz.ireth : his Life and Teachings ; founded on the Four Gospels, and Illustrated by Reference to the Manners, Customs, Religious Beliefs, and Political Institutions of his Times. By Lyman Abbott, D.D. With Designs by Dore, De- laroche, Fenn, and others. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $1 75. BISHOP SI.MPSON'S SERMONS. Sermons of the Rev. Matthew Simpson, D.D., LL.D., late Bishop of the Methodist Episcopal Church. Edited by the Rev. George E. Ceooks, D.D. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. TAYLOR'S (THE REV. DR. W. M.) WORKS. 12mo, Cloth, §1 50 per vol. David, King of Israel. — Elijah the Prophet. — Peter the Apostle. — Daniel the Beloved. — Moses the Law -giver. — Paul the Missionary. — Joseph the Prime-minister. ROBERTSONS (THE REV. F. W.) LIFE AND WORKS. Life, Letters, Lectures on Corinthians, and Ad- dresses of the late Frederick W. Robertson, M.A., In- cumbent of Trinity Chapel, Brighton, 1817-1853. With Portrait on Steel. " Large 12mo, Cloth, $2 00 ; Half Calf, $3 75. Seemons Preached at Brighton. With Portrait on Steel. Large 12nio, Cloth, $2 00 ; Half Calf, $3 75. "The Human Race," and other Sermons, Preached at Cheltenham, 0.\ford, and Brighton. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50; Half Calf, $3 25. COLERIDGE'S COMPLETE WORKS. The Com- plete Works of Samuel Taylor Coleridge. With an Introductory Essay upon his Philosophical and Theo- logical Opinions. Library Edition. Edited by Profess- or W. G. T. Sbedd. With an Index prepared by Ar- thur Oilman. In Seven Volumes. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00 per volume, or $12 00 per set. LEE'S EVENTFUL NIGHTS IN BIBLE HISTORY. Eventful Nights in Bible History. By the Rt. Rev. Al- fred Lee, D.D., Bishop of the Protestant Episcopal Church in Delaware. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. HAYDN'S DICTIONARY OF DATES. A Dictionary of Dates and Universal Information relating to all Ages and Nations. Seventeenth Edition, containing the His- tory of the World to the Autumn of 1881. By Benja- min Vincent, Librarian of the Royal Institution of Great Britain. Revised for American Readers. Large 8vo, Cloth, $5 00 ; Sheep, $5 50 ; Half Calf, $7 25. FROUDE'S LIFE OF THOMAS CARLYLE. Part. I. A History of the First Forty Years of Car- lyle's Life (1 "it!)- 1835). By James Anthony Fkoude, M.A. With Portraits and Illustrations. 2 volumes in one, 12mo. Cloili, $1 00. Part. II. A History of Carlyle's Life in London (1834-1881). By James Anthony Froude, M.A. Il- lustrated. 2 volumes in one. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00. STANLEY'S THROUGH THE DARK CONTINENT. Through the Dark Continent ; or. The Sources of the Nile, Around the Great Lakes of Equatorial Africa, and Down the Livingstone River to the Atlantic Ocean. 149 Illustrations and 10 Maps. By H. M. Stanley. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $10 00; Half Morocco, $15 00. STANLEY'S CONGO. The Congo, and the Founding of its Free State : A Story of Work and Exploration. By II. M. Stanley. With over One Hundred Illustra- tions and Two Large Maps in Pockets and Smaller Maps. 2 vols., 8vo, Ornamental Cloth, $10 00. ABBOTT'S (C. C.) UPLAND AND MEADOW. Up- land and Meadow. A Poaetquissings Chronicle. By Charles C. Abbott, M.D. 12mo, Ornamental Cloth, $1 50. DWIGHT'S THEOLOGY. Theology Explained and Defended, in a Series of Sermons. By Timothy DwiGHT, S.T.D., LL.D. With a Memoir of the Life of the Author. Portrait. 4 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $8 00; Sheep, $10 00. DRAPER'S INTELLECTUAL DEVELOPMENT OF EUROPE. A History of the Intellectual Development of Europe. By John W. Draper, M.D., LL.D. New Edition. 2 vol's., 12mo, Cloth, $3 00 ; Half Calf, $6 50. TYERJIAN'S LIFE OF JOHN WESLEY. The Life and Times of the Rev. John Wesley, M.A. By Rev. Luke Tyeeman. Three Steel Portraits. 3 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $7 50; Half Calf, $14 25. TYERMAN'S OXFORD METHODISTS. The Oxford Methodists: Memoirs of the Rev, Messrs. Clayton, Ing- ham, Gambold, Hervey, and Bioughton, with Biograph- ical Notices of others. By Rev. LcKE Tyerman. With Portraits. 8vo, Cloth, $2' 50. INDEX TO HARPER'S MAGAZINE. Alphabetical, Analytical, and Classified. Vols. I. to LXX., inclusive. Compiled bv C. A. Dukfee. 8vo, Cloth, S4 00 ; Half Calf, S6 25.' PEARSS FALL OF CONSTANTINOPLE. The Fall of Constantinople. Being the Story of the Fourth Cru- sade. By Edwin Pear.s. LL.B. '8vo. Cloth, $2 50. LAYARD'S DISCOVERIES AT NINEVEH. Discov- eries among the Ruins of Nineveh and Babylon ; with Travels in Armenia, Kurdistan, and the Desert: being the Result of a Second Expedition, undertaken for the Trustees of the British Museum. By Austen Henry Latard, M.P. With Maps, Plans, and Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, $6 25. TRISTRAM'S LAND OF MOAB. The Land of Moab : Travels and Discoveries on the East Side of the Dead Sea and the Jordan. By H. B. Tristram, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Honorary Canon of Durham. With a Cliapter on the Persian Palace of Mashita, by James Ferguson, F.R.S. ■ Illustrated. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 .'(O. Valuable and Interestinrj Works for Public and Private Libraries. HARPER'S NEW CLASSICAL LIBRARY OF LITER- • AL TRANSLATIONS. Literal Translations of the principal Greek and Latin Authors read in American Schools and Colleges. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00 per vol. C^.SAR. — Virgil. — Sallust. — Horace. — Cicero's Orations.— Cicero on Oratory and Orators. — Cice- ro's TcscuLAN Disputations, &c. — Cicero's Offices, &c. — Tacitus. 2 vols. — Terence. — Juvenal. — Sexo- PHON. — Homer's Iliad. — Homer's Odtsset. — Livr. Books I.-XXX. 2 vols. — Herodotus. — Demosthenes. 2 vols. — Thuctdides. — jEsciiylus. — Sophocles.- — Eu- ripides. 2 vols. — Plato. [Select Dialogues.] HARPER'S GREEK AND LATIN TEXTS. 18mo, Paper, per vol., 32 cents ; Flexible Cloth, per vol., 50 cents. C^SAR. — Virgil. — Sallust. — Horace. — Ciceko de Natura Deokum, de Divinatione, de Fato. — ClCE- KONis Oratioses Select^.^ — Cicero de Senectute, de Amicitia, and de Officus. — Ciceronis Tuscdlanje Disputationes. — Cicero de Finibus. • — Ciceronis EpiSTULiE Select-e. — LuCRETirs. — Xenophon. — Xen- OPHONTIS LiBRI SOCRATICI. — JEsCHYLUS. — EcRIPIDES. 3 vols. — Herodotus. 2 vols. — Thucydides. 2 vols. — Sophocles. — Plato. [Six Dialogues.] HARPERS CLASSICAL SERIES. Edited by Professor H. Drisler, of Columbia College. With Introductions and Notes. Gildersleeve's (B. L.) Olympic and Pythian Odes OF Pindar. 12mo, Cloth, §1 50. Lamberion's (W. A.) Thucydides. Books VI. and VII. I2mo, Cloth, SI 50. Merriam's (A. C.) Herodotus. Books VI. and VII. 12mo, Cloth, SI 50. Sihler's (E. G.) Protagoras of Plato. 12mo, Cloth, 75 cents. Stickney's (A.) Cicero's Offices. ]2mo, Cloth, $1 60. Tyler's (W. S. ) Homer's Iliad. Books XVI. to XXIV. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. Other volumes in preparation. MOSHEIM'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY. Ancient and Modern Ecclesiastical History, in which the Rise, Progress, and Variation of Church Power are Consid- ered in their Connection with the State of Learning and Philosophy, and the Political History of Europe during that Period. Translated, with Notes, &c., by A. Maclaine, D.D. Continued to 1826, by C. Coote, LL.D. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $4 00 ; Sheep, $5 00. YONGE'S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON. An English- Greek Lexicon. By Charles Duke Yonge. With Many New Articles, an Appendix of Proper Names, and Pillon's Greek Synonymes. To which is prefixed an Essay on the Order of AVords in Attic-Greek Prose, by Charles Short, LL.D. Edited by Henry Drisler, LL.D. 8vo, Sheep, extra, $4 50. HUMES ENGLAND. History of England, from the In- vasion of Julius Ca;sar to the Abdication of James II., 1688. By David Husie. New and Elegant Library Edition, from new Electrotype Plates. 6 vols, in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Piiper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $12 00. Sold only in Sets. Popular Edition, 6 vols, in a Box, 12mo, Cloth, $3 00 ; Sheep, $6 00. MACAULAY'S ENGLAND. The History of England from the Accession of James II. By Thomas Babing- TON Macaulay. New Edition, from new Electrotype Plates. 5 vols, in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, §10 00. Sold only in Sets. Cheap Edition, 5 vols, in a Box, 12mo, Cloth, $2 50 ; Sheep, $5 00. MACAULAY'S MISCELLANEOUS WORKS. The Miscellaneous Works of Lord Macaulay. From New Electrotype Plates. 5 vols, in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $10 00. Sold only in Sets. GIBBON'S ROME. The History of the Decline and FaU of the Roman Empire. By Edward Gibbon. With Notes by Dean JIilsian, M. Guizot. and Dr. William Smith. New Edition, from new Electrotype Plates. 6 vols., 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $12 00. Sold only in Sets. Popular Edition, 6 vols, in a Box, 12mo, Cloth, $3 00 ; Sheep, $6 00. HILDRETH'S UNITED STATES. History of the United States. First Series : From the Discovery of the Continent to the Organization of the Government under the Federal Constitution. Second Series : From the Adoption of the Federal Constitution to the End of the Sixteenth Congress. By Rich.vrd Hildreth. Popular Edition, 6 vols, in a Box, 8vo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $12 00. Sold only in Sets. MOTLEY'S DUTCH REPUBLIC. The Rise of the Dutch Republic. A History. By John Lothrop Mot- ley, LL.D., D.C.L. With a Portrait of William of Orange. Cheap Edition, 3 vols, in a Box, Svo, Cloth, with Paper L.abels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Top.s, $6 00. Sold only in Sets. Original Librarv Edition, 3 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $10 50 ; Sheep, $12 00 ; "Half Calf, $17 25. MOTLEY'S UNITED NETHERLANDS. History of the United Netherlands: from the Death of William the Silent to the Twelve Years' Truce— 1584-1609. With a full View of the English-Dutch Struggle .igainst Spain, and of the Origin and Destruction of the Spanish Ar- mada. By John Lothrop Motley, LL.D., D.C.L. Portraits. Cheap Edition, 4 vols, in a Box, Svo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $8 00. Sold only in Sets. Origin.i! Librarv Edition, 4 vols., Svo, Cloth, $14 00 ; Slieep. $16 00 ; 'iLdf Calf, $23 00. MOTLEYS JOHN OF BARNEVELD. The Life and Death of John of Barneveld, Advocate of Holland : with a View of the Primary Causes and Movements of the "Thirty Y'ears' War." By John Lothrop Motley, LL.D., D.C.L. Illustrated. Cheap Edition, 2 vols, in a Box, Svo, Cloth, with Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $4 00. Sold only in Sets. Original Library Edition, 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $7 00 ; Sheep, $8 00 ; Half Calf, $11 50. TREVELY'AN'S LIFE OF JIACAULAY. The Life and Letters of Lord Macaulay. By his Nephew, George Otto Trevelyan, M.P. With Portrait on Steel. 2 vols., Svo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $5 00 ; Sheep, $6 00 ; Half Calf, $9 50. Popular Edition, 2 vols, in one, 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. TRE-VELYiVN'S LIFE OF FOX. The Early History of Charles James Fox. By George Otto Trevelyan. 8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $2 50. Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. GOLDSMITH'S WORKS. The Works of Oliver Gold- smith. Kditecl by Peter Cunningham, F.S.A. From new Electrotyiie Plates, i vols.. 8vo, Cloth, Paper Labels, Uncut Edges, and Gilt Tops, $8 00. SYMONDS'S SKETCHES AND STUDIES IN SOUTH- ERN EUKOFE. Sketches and Studies in Southern Europe. By John Addixctos SnioNDs. 2 vols., Post Svo, Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, 87 .50. SY.MONDS'S GREEK POETS. Studies of the Greek Poets. By John Addinoton Symonds. 2 vols., Square 16nio, Clo'th, S3 50 ; Half Calf, $7 00. MAHAFFY'S GREEK LITERATURE. A History of Classical Greek Literature. Bv J. P. Mahaffy. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $4 00; Half Calf, $7 50. SIMCOXS LATIN LITERATURE. A History of Latin Literature, from Ennius to Boethius. By George Au- gustus SiMCox, M.A. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $4 00. DU CHAILLU'S LAND OF THE MIDNIGHT SUN. The Land of the Midnight Sun. Summer and Winter Journeys in Sweden, Norway, and Lapland, and North- ern Finland. By Paul B. Dt; Chaillu. Illustrated. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $7 50; Half Calf, $12 00. COLLINS'S BOLINGBROKE AND VOLTAIRE. Bol- ingbroke: a Historical Study ; and Voltaire in England. By John Churton Collins. 12mo, Cloth, SI 00. GEORGE ELIOT'S LIFE. George Eliot's Life, as Re- lated in her Letters and Journals. Arranged and Edit- ed by her Husband, J. W. Cross. Portraits and Illus- trations. In Three Volumes. Library Edition. 12mo, Cloth, .$3 73. Popul.ar Edition, 12mo, Cloth, $2 25. DU CHAILLU'S ASIIANGO LAND. A Journey to Ashango Land, and Further Penetration into Equatorial Africa. Bv P. B. Dn Ciiaillu. Illustrated. 8vo, Cloth, 85 00 ; Half Calf, $7 25. DEXTERS CONGREGATIONALISM. The Congrega- tionalism of the Last Three Hundred Tears, as Seen in its Literature : with Special Reference to certain Recon- dite, Neglected, or Disputed Passages. With a Biblio- graphical Appendix. By H. M. Dexter. Large 8vo, Cloth, 8G 00. BARTLETT'S FROM EGYPT TO PALESTINE. From Egypt to Palestine. Through Sinai, the Wilder- ness, and the South Country. Observations of a Jour- ney made with Special Reference to the History of the Israelites. By S. C. Bartlett, D.D., LL.D. With Maps and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, 83 50. FORSTER'S DEAN SWIFT. The Early Life of Jon- athan Swift (1GG7-1711). By John Foester. With Portrait. 8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $2 50. GREEN'S ENGLISH PEOPLE. History of the English People. By John Richard Green, M.A. With Maps. 4 vols., 8vo, Cloth, 82 50 per volume. GREENS MAKING OF ENGLAND. The Making of England. Bv J. R. Green. With Maps. 8vo, Cloth, 82 50. GREENS CONQUEST OF ENGLAND. The Conquest of England. By J. R. Green. With Maps. 8vo, Cloth, 82 50. ADAMS'S MANUAL OF HISTORICAL LITERA- TURE. A Manu.al of Historical Literature. Comjiris- ing Brief Descriptions of the Most Important Histories in English, French, and German. By C. K. Adams, LL.D., President of Cornell University. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. REHER'S HISTORY OF ANCIENT ART. History of Ancient Art. By Dr. Franz von Reber. Revised by the Author. Translated and Augmented by Joseph Thaeher Clarke. With 310 Illustrations and a Glos- sary of Technical Terms. 8vo, Cloth, $3, 50. REBERS III.STORY OF MEDLEVAL ART. Histoiy of Mediiuval Art. By Dr. Franz voN Reber. Trans- lated bv Joseph Thaeher Clarke. Illustrated. 8vo, Cloth. '(Tn Press.) KINGLAKE'S CRIMEAN WAR. The Invasion of the Crimea: its Origin, and an Account of its Progress down to the Death of Lord Raglan. By Alexander William Kinglake. With Maps and Plans. Four Volumes now ready. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00 per vol. REID'S LIFE OF SYDNEY SMITH. A Sketch of the Life and Times of the Rev. Sydney Smith. Based on Family Documents and the Recollections of Personal Friends. By Stuart J. Reid. AVith Steel-Plate Por- traits, Numerous Illustrations, and Autograph Letter. 8vo, Cloth, 83 00. HALLAM'S MIDDLE AGES. View of the State of Europe during the Middle Ages. By Henry Halla3I. 8vo, Cloth, 82 00 ; Sheep, 82 50. HALLAM'S CON.STITUTIONAL HLSTORY OF ENG- LAND. The Constitutional History of England, from the Accession of Henry A^II. to the Death of George II. By Hexky Hallam. 8vo, Cloth, 82 00; Sheep, $2 50. ENGLISH MEN OF LETTERS. Edited by John Mor- ley. 12mo, Cloth, 75 cents per volume. The following volumes are now ready. Others will follow : Johnson. By L. Stephen. — Gibbon. By J. C. Mor- ison. — Scott. By R. H. Hutton. — Shelley. By J. A. Symonds. — Goldsmith. By W. Black.— Hume. By Professor Huxley. — Defoe. By W. Minto. — Burns. By Principal Shairp. — Spenser. By R. W. Church. — Thackeray-. By A. TroUope. — Burke. By J. Mor- ley. — Milton. By M. Pattison. — .Southev. By E. Dowden. — Chaucer. ByA. W.Ward. — Blnyan. By J. A.Froude. — Cowper. By G. Smith. — Pope. By L. Stephen. — Byron. By J. Nichol. — Locke. By T. Fowler. — Words-worth. By F. W. H. Myers. — Haw- thorne. By Henrj- James, Jr. — Drydex, By G. Saiiitsbury. — Landor. By S. Colvin. — De Quincey. By D. Masson. — Lamb. By A. Ainger. — Bextlet. By R. C. Jebb.— Dickens. By A. W. Ward.— Gkat. By E. W. Gosse. — Swift. By L. Stephen. — Sterne. By H. D. Traill. — Macaulay. By J. C. Morison.— Fielding. By Austin Dobson. — Sheridan. By Mrs. Olljihant. — Addison. By W. J. Courthope. — Bacon. By R. W. Church.— Coleridge. By H.D.Traill. TENNYSON'S COMPLETE WORKS. The Poetical Works of Alfred Tennyson. With an Introductory Sketch by Anne Thackeray Ritchie. With Portraits and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, 82 00; Gilt Edges, 82 50. Valuable and Interesting Works for Public and Private Libraries. CESNOLA'S CYPRUS. Cyprus: its Ancient Cities, Tombs, and Temples. A Narrative of Researches and E.xcavations during Ten Years' Residence in that Island. By L. P. Di Cesnola. With Portrait, Maps, and 400 Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, Extra, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, §7 50. NEWCOMB'S ASTRONOMY. Popular Astronomy. By Simon Newcomb, LL.D. With 112 Engravings, and five Maps of the Stars. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50 : School Edi- tion, 12mo, Cloth, $1 30. NEWCOMB'S POLITICAL ECONOMY. The Princi- ples of Political Economy. By Sjmon Newcomb, LL.D. 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. VAN-LENNEP'S bible LANDS. Bible Lands : their Modern Customs and Manners Illustrative of Scripture. By Henry J. Vak-Lennep, D.D. 350 Engravings and 2 Colored Maps. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00 ; Sheep, $6 00 ; Half Morocco, $8 00. BAKER'S ISMAILIA. Ismailia : a Narrative of the Ex- pedition to Central Africa for the Suppression of the Slave-trade, organized by Ismail, Khedive of Egypt. By Sir Samuel W. Baker. With Maps, Portraits, and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00 ; Half Calf, $7 25. HIGGINSON'S LARGER HISTORY OF THE UNIT- ED STATES. A Larger History of the United States of America to (he Close of President Jackson's Admin- istration. By Thomas Wentworth Higginson. Il- lustrated by Maps. Plans, Portraits, and other Engrav- ings. 8vo, Cloth, $3 50. FORBES'S NATURALIST'S WANDERINGS. A Nat- uralist's Wanderings in the Eastern Arcliipelago. A Narrative of Travel and Exploration from 1878 to 1883. By Henry O. Forbes, F.R.G.S., &c. With many Il- lustrations and Maps. 8to, Ornamental Cloth, $5 00. EANKE'S UNIVERSAL HISTORY. Universal His- tory. "Vol. I The Oldest Historical Group of Nations and the Greeks. By Leopold von Raxke. Edited by G. W. Proihero. Svo, Cloth, $2 50. LIVINGSTONE'S ZAMBESI. Narrative of an Expe- dition to the Zambesi and its Tributaries, and of the Discovery of the Lakes Shirwa and Nyassa, 1858-1864. By David and Charles Livingstone. Illustrated. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00 ; Sheep, $5 50. LIVINGSTONE'S LAST JOURNALS. The Last Jour- nals of David Livingstone, in Central Africa, from 1865 to his Death. Continued by a Narrative of Ids Last Moments, obtained from his Faithful Servants Chuma and Susi. By Horace Waller, F.R.G.S. With Por- trait, Maps, and Illustrations. Svo, Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, $6 00. Cheap Popular Edition, 8vo, Cloth, with Map and Illustrations, $3 50. BLAIKIE'S LIFE OF DAVID LIVINGSTONE. The Personal Life of David Livingstone, LL.D., D.C.L. Chiefly from his Unjiublished Journals and Correspond- ence. By W. G. Blaikie, D.D. With Portrait and Map. 8vo, Cloth, $2 25. GROTE'S HISTORY OF GREECE. 12 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $18 00; Sheep, $22 80; Half Calf, $39 00. DUNN'S MASSACRES OF THE MOUNTAINS. Mas- sacres of the Mountains. A History of the Indian Wars of the Far West. By J. P. Dunn, Jr., M.S., LL.B. With Map and Illustrations. 8vo, Illuminated Cloth, $3 75. CURTISS LIFE OF BUCHANAN. Life of James Buchanan, Fifteenth President of the United States. By George Ticknor Curtis. With Two Steel-Plate Por- traits. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, Uncut Edges and Gilt Tops, $6 00. TILDENS WRITINGS AND SPEECHES. Writings and Speeches of Samuel J. Tilden. Edited by John BiGELOw. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, Gilt Tops and Uncut Edges, $6 00 per set. DIX'S MEMOIRS. Memoirs of John Adams Dix. Com- piled by his Son, Morgan Dix. With Five Steel-plate Portraits. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, Gilt Tops and Uncut Edges, $5 00. HUDSON'S RAILWAYS AND THE REPUBLIC. The Railwavs and the Republic. Bv J. F. Hudson. 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. NORDHOFF'S COMMUNISTIC SOCIETIES OF THE. UNITED STATES. The Communistic Societies of the United States, from Personal Visit and Observation ; including Detailed Accounts of the Economists, Zoar- ites. Shakers, the Amana, Oneida, Bethel, Aurora, Ica- rian, and other existing Societies. By Charles Nokd- HOFF. Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. SMILES'S HISTORY OF THE HUGUENOTS. The Huguenots: tlieir Settlements, Churches, and Industries in England and Ireland. By Samuel Smiles. With an Appendix relating to the Huguenots in America. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. SMILES'S HUGUENOTS AFTER THE REVOCA- TION. The Huguenots in France after the Revoca- tion of the Edict of Nantes; with a Visit to the Coun- try of the Vaudois. By Samuel Smiles. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. SMILES'S LIFE OF THE STEPHENSONS. The Life of George Stephenson, and of his Sou, Robert Ste- phenson ; comprising, .also, a History of the Invention and Introduction of the Railway Locomotive. By Sam- uel Smiles. Illustrated. 8vo, Cloth, $3 00. SCHLIEMANN'S ILIOS. Ilios, the City and Country of the Trojans. A Narrative of the Most Recent Dis- coveries and Researches made on the Plain of Troy. By Dr. Henry Schliem^vnn. Maps. Plans, and Illus- trations. Imperial 8vo, Illuminated Cloth, $12 00; Half Morocco, $15 00. SCIILIE.M ANN'S TROJA. Troja. Results of the Lat- est Researches and Discoveries on the Site of Homer's Troy, and in the Heroic Tumuli and other Sites, made in the Year 1882, and a Narrative of a Journey in the Troad in ISSl. By Dr. Henry Schliemann. Preface by Professor A. H. Sayce. With Wood-cuts, Maps, and Plans. 8vo, Cloth, $7 50. Valuable and Interesting Works /or Public and Private Libraries. GIESELER'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY. A Text- Book ot'Cliurch Histon-. By Dr. John C. L. Gieseler. Translated from the Fourlli Revised Gcrnian Edition. Revised and Edited bv Rev. Hesky B. Smith, D.I). Vols. L, II., lU., and IV., 8vo, Cloth, $2 25; Vol. V., 8vo, Cloth, S3 00. Complete Sets, 5 vols., Sheep, $14 50; Half Calf, $23 25. GRIFFIS'S JAPAN. The Mikado's Empire: Book I. History of Japan, from GCO B.C. to 1872 A.D. Book II. Personal Experiences, Ohscrvations, and Studies in Jap.in, from 1870 to 187-t. By \V. E. Griffis. Copi- ously Illustrated. 8vo, Cloth,"$4 00 ; Half Calf, $6 25. SCnWEINFURTH'S HEART OF AFRICA. Three Years' Travels and Adventures in the Unexplored Re- gions of the Centre of Africa — from 18G8 to 1871. By Dr. Georg SCHWEiXFiTRTii. Translated by Ellen E. Frewek. Illustrated. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $8 00. NORTON'S STUDIES OF CHURCH - BUILDING. Historical Studies of Church -Building in the Middle Ages. Venice, Siena, Florence. By Cham.es Eliot Norton. 8vo, Cloth, fS 00. THE VOYAGE OF THE "CHALLENGER." The Atlantic : an Account of the General Results of the Voy- age during 1873, and the Early Part of 187G. By Sir Wyville Thomson, K.C.b'., F.R.S. Illustrated. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $12 00. BLUNT'S BEDOUIN TRIBES OF THE EUPHRA- TES. Bedouin Tribes of the Euphrates. By Lady Anne Blunt. Edited, with a Preface and some Ac- count of the Arabs and their Horses, by W. S. B. Map and Sketches by tlie Author. 8vo, doth, $2 50. THE STUDENT'S SERIES. Maps and Illustrations. 12mo, Cloth. France. — Gibbon. — Greece. — Rome (by Lid- dell). — Old Testament History. — New Testa- ment History. — Strickland's Queens of Eng- land. — Ancient History of the East. — Hallam's Mlddle Ages.— Halla,m's Constitutional History OF England. — Lyell's Elements of Geology. — Meritale's General History of Rome. — Cox's Generjvl Hlstory of Greece. — Classical Diction- ary. — Skeat's Etymological Dictionary. — Raw- linson's Ancient History. $1 25 per volume. Lodge's Modern Europe. — Lewis's History or Germany. — Ecclesiastical History. 2 volumes. — Hume's England. $1 50 per volume. ■Westcott & Hort's Greek New Testament. %l 00. — Seeman's Mythology. CO cents. BOURNE'S LOCKE. The Life of John Locke. By H. li. Fox BouRN-E. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, S5 00. CAMERON'S ACROSS AFRICA. Across Africa. By Verney Lovett Cameron. Map and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, S5 00. DYER'S FOLK-LORE OF SHAKESPEARE. Folk- Lore of Shakespeare. By the Rev. T. F. Thiselton Dyer, M.A., Oxon. Svo^ Cloth, $2 50. THOMSON'S LAND AND THE BOOK. The Land and the Book; or. Biblical Illustrations drawn from the Manners and Customs, the Scenes and Scenery, of the Holy Land. By W. M. Thom.son, D.D. In 3 volumes, 8vo. Price per vol.. Cloth, $6 00; Sheep, $7 00; Half Morocco, $8 50; Full Morocco, $10 00. ( Volumes sold separately.) Vol. I. Southern Palestine and Jerusalem. 140 Illustrations and Maps. Vol. II. Central Palestine and Pikenicia. 130 Illustrations and Maps. Vol. III. Lebanon, Damascus, and Beyond Jor- dan. 147 Illustrations and Maps. Popular Edition (sold only in sels), $9 00. HARPER'S CYCLOPAEDIA OF BRITISH AND AMER- ICAN POETRY. Edited by Epes Sargent. Royal 8vo, Illuminated Cloth, Colored Edges, §4 .50. carlyle's works. Frederick the Great. Portraits, Maps, Plans, &c. C vols., 12mo, Cloth, $7 50. The French Revolution. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $2 50. Oliver Cromwell. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, §2 50. Past and Present, Chartism, and Sartor Resak- tus. 12mo, Cloth, $1 25. Early Kings of Norway, and the Portraits of John Knox. 12mo, Cloth, $1 25. Reminiscences of my Irish Journey in 1849. With Portrait. 12mo, Cloth, $1 00. PERRY'S (T. S.) ENGLISH LITERATURE. English Literature in the Eighteenth Century. By Thomas Sergeant Perrt. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00. TROLLOPE'S CICERO. Life of Cicero. By Anthony Trollope. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, 83 00. PERRY'S (G. G.) HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND. A History of the English Church, from the Accession of Henry VIII. to the Silencing of Convoca- tion. By G. G. Perry, M.A. With a Sketch of the History of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the Unit- ed States, by J. A. Spencer, S.T.D. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. M'CARTHY'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. A History of Our Own Times, from the Accession of Queen Vic- toria to the General Election of 1880. By Justin M'Carthy. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $2 50. M'CARTHY'S FOUU GEORGES. A History of the Four Georges. By Justin M'Carthy. Vol. I. 12nio, Cloth, $1 25. WATSON'S MARCUS AURELIUS ANTONINUS. Marcus Aurelius Antoninus. By Paul Barron Wat- son. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. THOMSON'S (W. H.) THE GREAT ARGUMENT. The Great Argument ; or, Jesus Christ in the Old Tes- tament. By W.H.Thomson, M.A.,M.D. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. University 01 California. Los Angeles l|!||||l|| 007 625 272 5 ff,SOUTHEmREGIONAl, iiRqapv f-;'- D„- -•'"'"'"' iiiiiiiiiiiffli II 000 907 537 5 / ,^ ,' '